Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}583|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $3,099 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
  • Traditional enterprise architecture management (EAM) caters to only 10% – the IT people, and not to the remaining 90% of the organization.
  • EAM practices do not scale well with the agile way of working and are often perceived as "bottlenecks” or “restrictors of design freedom.”
  • The organization scale does not justify a full-fledged EAM with many committees, complex processes, and detailed EA artifacts.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Architecture is a competency, not a function. Project teams, including even business managers outside of IT, can assimilate “architectural thinking.”

Impact and Result

Increase business value through the dissemination of architectural thinking throughout the organization. Maturing your EAM practices beyond a certain point does not help.

Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Start here

Improve benefits from your enterprise architecture efforts through the dissemination of architecture thinking throughout your organization.

  • Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Storyboard
[infographic]

The MVP Major Incident Manager

The time has come to hire a new major incident manager. How do you go about that? How do you choose the right candidate? Major incident managers must have several typically conflicting traits, so how do you pick the right person? Let's dive into that.

Register to read more …

Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}562|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Many organizations are jumping the gun on service selection and missing valuable opportunities to tap into conversations their consumers are having about them.
  • Companies are struggling to harness real benefits from social media because they dive into content and engagement strategy without spending the appropriate amount of time on social media service selection.
  • After organizations have selected the appropriate social media services, clients fail to understand best practices for participating in conversations and therefore are unable to optimize their success on each service.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Conventional wisdom dictates that you should pick the social network where you have the greatest subscriber base to reach, but this is irrelevant. Organizations need to consider all the social media services available when selecting services, to ensure they are optimizing their social media strategy and interacting with the right people.
  • In today’s social media landscape there is a wide variety of social media services to choose from. Services range from hot micro-blogging services, like Twitter, to more niche social multimedia services, like Flickr or Vimeo.
  • Each department should manage its set of relevant services regardless of platform. For example a marketing manager should manage all social media services in marketing, rather than have one person manage all Twitter feeds, one person manage all Facebook pages, etc.
  • The services your organization selects shouldn’t operate as islands. Consider not only how the services will fit with each other, but also how they will fit with existing channels. Use a market coverage model to ensure the services you select are complementing each other.
  • The landscape for social media services changes rapidly. It is essential to conduct an audit of services to maintain an optimal mix of services. Conduct the audit semi-annually for best effect.

Impact and Result

  • Learn about the importance of choosing the correct services to ensure you are reaching your consumers and not wasting time playing with the wrong people.
  • Understand the business use cases for each service and best practices for using them.
  • Leverage different social media services to create a market coverage model that balances social media services with your products/services and business objectives.
  • Identify the risks associated with specific platforms and ensure IT works to mitigate them.
  • Create a plan for conducting a Social Media Service Audit to stay on top of changing trends.

Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Create the right social media service mix

Understand the different social media services, their unique value propositions for customer interaction, and the content and timing best practices for each.

  • Storyboard: Optimize Social Media Strategy by Service
  • Social Media Service Selection Tool

2. Execute a plan for social service selection and management

Leverage different social media services to create a market coverage model and assign responsibilities.

3. Perform a semi-annual social media service audit

Conduct an audit to stay on top of changing trends.

  • Social Media Services Audit Template
[infographic]

Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}433|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $124,419 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • Companies are approving more projects than they can deliver. Most organizations say they have too many projects on the go and an unmanageable and ever-growing backlog of things to get to.
  • While organizations want to achieve a high throughput of approved projects, many are unable or unwilling to allocate an appropriate level of IT resourcing to adequately match the number of approved initiatives.
  • Portfolio management practices must find a way to accommodate stakeholder needs without sacrificing the portfolio to low-value initiatives that do not align with business goals.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Approve only the right projects that you have capacity to deliver. Failure to align projects with strategic goals and resource capacity are the most common causes of portfolio waste across organizations.
  • More time spent with stakeholders during the ideation phase to help set realistic expectations for stakeholders and enhance visibility into IT’s capacity and processes is key to both project and organizational success.
  • Too much intake red tape will lead to an underground economy of projects that escape portfolio oversight, while too little intake formality will lead to a wild west of approvals that could overwhelm the PMO. Finding the right balance of intake formality for your organization is the key to establishing a PMO that has the ability to focus on the right things.

Impact and Result

  • Establish an effective scorecard to create transparency into IT’s capacity and processes. This will help set realistic expectations for stakeholders, eliminate “squeaky wheel” prioritization, and give primacy to the highest value requests.
  • Build a centralized process that funnels requests into a single intake channel to eliminate confusion and doubt for stakeholders and staff while also reducing off-the-grid initiatives.
  • Clearly define a series of project approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
  • Develop practices that incorporate the constraint of resource capacity to cap the amount of project approvals to that which is realistic to help improve the throughput of projects through the portfolio.

Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize project intake, approval, and prioritization process, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Set realistic goals for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process

Get value early by piloting a scorecard for objectively determining project value, and then examine your current state of project intake to set realistic goals for optimizing the process.

  • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 1: Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Process
  • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
  • Project Intake Workflow Template - Visio
  • Project Intake Workflow Template - PDF
  • Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

2. Build an optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process

Take a deeper dive into each of the three processes – intake, approval, and prioritization – to ensure that the portfolio of projects is best aligned to stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity.

  • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 2: Build New Optimized Processes
  • Light Project Request Form
  • Detailed Project Request Form
  • Project Intake Classification Matrix
  • Benefits Commitment Form Template
  • Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool
  • Fast Track Business Case Template
  • Comprehensive Business Case Template
  • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

3. Integrate the new optimized processes into practice

Plan a course of action to pilot, refine, and communicate the new optimized process using Info-Tech’s expertise in organizational change management.

  • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 3: Integrate the New Processes into Practice
  • Intake Process Pilot Plan Template
  • Project Backlog Manager
  • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool
[infographic]

Workshop: Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Refocus on Project Value to Set Realistic Goals

The Purpose

Set the course of action for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization by examining the current state of the process, the team, the stakeholders, and the organization as a whole.

Key Benefits Achieved

The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

Activities

1.1 Define the criteria with which to determine project value.

1.2 Envision your target state for your optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

Outputs

Draft project valuation criteria

Examination of current process, definition of process success criteria

2 Examine, Optimize, and Document the New Process

The Purpose

Drill down into, and optimize, each of the project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity, to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

Activities

2.1 Conduct retrospectives of each process against Info-Tech’s best practice methodology for project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

2.2 Pilot and customize a toolbox of deliverables that effectively captures the right amount of data developed for informing the appropriate decision makers for approval.

Outputs

Documentation of new project intake, approval, and prioritization process

Tools and templates to aid the process

3 Pilot, Plan, and Communicate the New Process

The Purpose

Reduce the risks of prematurely implementing an untested process.

Methodically manage the risks associated with organizational change and maximize the likelihood of adoption for the new process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

Activities

3.1 Create a plan to pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout.

3.2 Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in.

Outputs

Process pilot plan

Organizational change communication plan

Further reading

Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

Capacity-constrained intake is the only sustainable path forward.

"For years, the goal of project intake was to select the best projects. It makes sense and most people take it on faith without argument. But if you end up with too many projects, it’s a bad strategy. Don’t be afraid to say NO or NOT YET if you don’t have the capacity to deliver. People might give you a hard time in the near term, but you’re not helping by saying YES to things you can’t deliver."

Barry Cousins,

Senior Director, PMO Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Our understanding of the problem

This Research Is Designed For:

  • PMO Directors who have trouble with project throughput
  • CIOs who want to improve IT’s responsive-ness to changing needs of the business
  • CIOs who want to maximize the overall business value of IT’s project portfolio

This Research Will Help You:

  • Align project intake and prioritization with resource capacity and strategic objectives
  • Balance proactive and reactive demand
  • Reduce portfolio waste on low-value projects
  • Manage project delivery expectations and satisfaction of business stakeholders
  • Get optimized project intake processes off the ground with low-cost, high-impact tools and templates

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • C-suite executives and steering committee members who want to ensure IT’s successful delivery of projects with high business impact
  • Project sponsors and product owners who seek visibility and transparency toward proposed projects

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Ensure that high-impact projects are approved and delivered in a timely manner
  • Gain clarity and visibility in IT’s project approval process
  • Improve your understanding of IT’s capacity to set more realistic expectations on what gets done

Executive summary

Situation

  • As a portfolio manager, you do not have the authority to decline or defer new projects – but you also lack the capacity to realistically say yes to more project work.
  • Stakeholders have unrealistic expectations of what IT can deliver. Too many projects are approved, and it may be unclear why their project is delayed or in a state of suspended animation.

Complication

  • The cycle of competition is making it increasingly difficult to follow a longer-term strategy during project intake, making it unproductive to approve projects for any horizon longer than one to two years.
  • As project portfolios become more aligned to “transformative” projects, resourcing for smaller, department-level projects becomes increasingly opaque.

Resolution

  • Establish an effective scorecard to create transparency into IT’s capacity and processes. This will help set realistic expectations for stakeholders, eliminate “squeaky wheel” prioritization, and give primacy to the highest value requests.
  • Build a centralized process that funnels requests into a single intake channel to eliminate confusion and doubt for stakeholders and staff while also reducing off-the-grid initiatives.
  • Clearly define a series of project approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
  • Developing practices that incorporate the constraint of resource capacity to cap the amount of project approvals to that which is realistic will help improve the throughput of projects through the portfolio.

Info-Tech Insight

  1. Approve only the right projects… Counterbalance stakeholder needs with strategic objectives of the business and that of IT, in order to maintain the value of your project portfolio at a high level.
  2. …that you have capacity to deliver. Resource capacity-informed project approval process enables you to avoid biting off more than you can chew and, over time, build a track record of fulfilling promises to deliver on projects.

Most organizations are good at approving projects, but bad at starting them – and even worse at finishing them

Establishing project intake discipline should be a top priority from a long-term strategy and near-term tactical perspective.

Most organizations approve more projects than they can finish. In fact, many approve more than they can even start, leading to an ever-growing backlog where project ideas – often good ones – are never heard from again.

The appetite to approve more runs directly counter to the shortage of resources that plagues most IT departments. This tension of wanting more from less suggests that IT departments need to be more disciplined in choosing what to take on.

Info-Tech’s data shows that most IT organizations struggle with their project backlog (Source: N=397 organizations, Info-Tech Research Group PPM Current State Scorecard, 2017).

“There is a minimal list of pending projects”

A bar graph is depicted. It has 5 bars to show that when it comes to minimal lists of pending projects, 34% strongly disagree, 35% disagree, and 21% are ambivalent. Only 7% agree and 3% strongly agree.

“Last year we delivered the number of projects we anticipated at the start of the year”

A bar graph is depicted. It has 5 bars to show that when it comes to the number of projects anticipated at the start of the year, they were delivered. Surveyors strongly disagreed at 24%, disagreed at 31%, and were ambivalent at 30%. Only 13% agreed and 2% strongly agreed.

The concept of fiduciary duty demonstrates the need for better discipline in choosing what projects to take on

Unless someone is accountable for making the right investment of resource capacity for the right projects, project intake discipline cannot be established effectively.

What is fiduciary duty?

Officers and directors owe their corporation the duty of acting in the corporation’s best interests over their own. They may delegate the responsibility of implementing the actions, but accountability can't be delegated; that is, they have the authority to make choices and are ultimately answerable for them.

No question is more important to the organization’s bottom line. Projects directly impact the bottom line because they require investment of resource time and money for the purposes of realizing benefits. The scarcity of resources requires that choices be made by those who have the right authority.

Who approves your projects?

Historically, the answer would have been the executive layer of the organization. However, in the 1990s management largely abdicated its obligation to control resources and expenditures via “employee empowerment.”

Controls on approvals became less rigid, and accountability for choosing what to do (and not do) shifted onto the shoulders of the individual worker. This creates a current paradigm where no one is accountable for the malinvestment…

…of resources that comes from approving too many projects. Instead, it’s up to individual workers to sink or swim as they attempt to reconcile, day after day, seemingly infinite organizational demand with their finite supply of working hours.

Ad hoc project selection schemes do not work

Without active management, reconciling the imbalance between demand with available work hours is a struggle that results largely in one of these two scenarios:

“Squeaky wheel”: Projects with the most vocal stakeholders behind them are worked on first.

  • IT is seen to favor certain lines of business, leading to disenfranchisement of other stakeholders.
  • Everything becomes the highest priority, which reinforces IT’s image as a firefighter, rather than a business value contributor
  • High-value projects without vocal support never get resourced; opportunities are missed.

“First in, first out”: Projects are approved and executed in the order they are requested.

  • Urgent or important projects for the business languish in the project backlog; opportunities are missed.
  • Low-value projects dominate the project portfolio.
  • Stakeholders leave IT out of the loop and resort to “underground economy” for getting their needs addressed.

80% of organizations feel that their portfolios are dominated by low-value initiatives that do not deliver value to the business (Source: Cooper).

Approve the right projects that you have capacity to deliver by actively managing the intake of projects

Project intake, approval, and prioritization (collectively “project intake”) reconciles the appetite for new projects with available resource capacity and strategic goals.

Project intake is a key process of project portfolio management (PPM). The Project Management Institute (PMI) describes PPM as:

"Interrelated organizational processes by which an organization evaluates, selects, prioritizes, and allocates its limited internal resources to best accomplish organizational strategies consistent with its vision, mission, and values."

(PMI, Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.)

Triple Constraint Model of the Project Portfolio

Project Intake:

  • Stakeholder Need
  • Strategic Objectives
  • Resource Capacity

All three components are required for the Project Portfolio

Organizations practicing PPM recognize available resource capacity as a constraint and aim to select projects – and commit the said capacity – to projects that:

  1. Best satisfy the stakeholder needs that constantly change with the market
  2. Best align to the strategic objectives and contribute the most to business
  3. Have sufficient resource capacity available to best ensure consistent project throughput

92% vs. 74%: 92% of high-performing organizations in PPM report that projects are well aligned to strategic initiatives vs. 74% of low performers (PMI, 2015).

82% vs. 55%: 82% of high-performing organizations in PPM report that resources are effectively reallocated across projects vs. 55% of low performers (PMI, 2015)

Info-Tech’s data demonstrates that optimizing project intake can also improve business leaders’ satisfaction of IT

CEOs today perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals:

43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT (Source: Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124)).

60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals (Source: Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124)).

Business leaders today are generally dissatisfied with IT:

30% of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367)).

The key to improving business satisfaction with IT is to deliver on projects that help the business achieve its strategic goals:

A chart is depicted to show a list of reported important projects, and then reordering the projects based on actual importance.
Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367)

Optimized project intake not only improves the project portfolio’s alignment to business goals, but provides the most effective way to improve relationships with IT’s key stakeholders.

Benchmark your own current state with overall & industry-specific data using Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program.

However, establishing organizational discipline for project intake, approval, and prioritization is difficult

Capacity awareness

Many IT departments struggle to realistically estimate available project capacity in a credible way. Stakeholders question the validity of your endeavor to install capacity-constrained intake process, and mistake it for unwillingness to cooperate instead.

Many moving parts

Project intake, approval, and prioritization involve the coordination of various departments. Therefore, they require a great deal of buy-in and compliance from multiple stakeholders and senior executives.

Lack of authority

Many PMOs and IT departments simply lack the ability to decline or defer new projects.

Unclear definition of value

Defining the project value is difficult because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right. However, without it, it's impossible to fairly compare among projects to select what's "best."

Establishing intake discipline requires a great degree of cooperation and conformity among stakeholders that can be cultivated through strong processes.

Info-Tech’s intake, approval, and prioritization methodology systemically fits the project portfolio to its triple constraint

Info-Tech’s Methodology

Info-Tech’s Methodology
Project Intake Project Approval Project Prioritization
Project requests are submitted, received, triaged, and scoped in preparation for approval and prioritization. Business cases are developed, evaluated, and selected (or declined) for investment, based on estimated value and feasibility. Work is scheduled to begin, based on relative value, urgency, and availability of resources.
Stakeholder Needs Strategic Objectives Resource Capacity
Project Portfolio Triple Constraint

Info-Tech’s methodology for optimizing project intake delivers extraordinary value, fast

In the first step of the blueprint, you will prototype a set of scorecard criteria for determining project value.

Our methodology is designed to tackle your hardest challenge first to deliver the highest-value part of the deliverable. Since the overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects, one must define how “the best projects” are determined.

In nearly all instances…a key challenge for the PPM team is reaching agreement over how projects should rank.

– Merkhofer

A Project Value Scorecard will help you:

  • Evolve the discussions on project and portfolio value beyond a theoretical concept
  • Enable apples-to-apples comparisons amongst many different kinds of projects

The Project Value Scorecard Development Tool is designed to help you develop the project valuation scheme iteratively. Download the pre-filled tool with content that represents a common case, and then, customize it with your data.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

This blueprint provides a clear path to maximizing your chance of success in optimizing project intake

Info-Tech’s practical, tactical research is accompanied by a suite of tools and templates to accelerate your process optimization efforts.

Organizational change and stakeholder management are critical elements of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization processes because they require a great degree of cooperation and conformity among stakeholders, and the list of key stakeholders are long and far-reaching.

This blueprint will provide a clear path to not only optimize the processes themselves, but also for the optimization effort itself. This research is organized into three phases, each requiring a few weeks of work at your team’s own pace – or all in one week, through a workshop facilitated by Info-Tech analysts.

Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

Tools and Templates:

  • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool (.xlsx)
  • PPM Assessment Report (Info-Tech Diagnostics)
  • Standard Operating Procedure Template (.docx)

Build Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Processes

Tools and Templates:

  • Project Request Forms (.docx)
  • Project Classification Matrix (.xlsx)
  • Benefits Commitment Form (.xlsx)
  • Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool (.xlsx)
  • Business Case Templates (.docx)
  • Intake and Prioritization Tool (.xlsx)

Integrate the Newly Optimized Processes into Practice

Tools and Templates:

  • Process Pilot Plan Template (.docx)
  • Impact Assessment and Communication Planning Tool (.xlsx)

Info-Tech’s approach to PPM is informed by industry best practices and rooted in practical insider research

Info-Tech uses PMI and ISACA frameworks for areas of this research.

The logo for PMI is in the picture.

PMI’s Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed. is the leading industry framework, proving project portfolio management best practices and process guidelines.

The logo for COBIT 5 is in the picture.

COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

Info-Tech's logo is shown.

33,000+

Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

1,000+

Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

Deliver measurable project intake success for your organization with this blueprint

Measure the value of your effort to track your success quantitatively and demonstrate the proposed benefits, as you aim to do so with other projects through improved PPM.

Optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization processes lead to a high PPM maturity, which will improve the successful delivery and throughput of your projects, resource utilization, business alignment, and stakeholder satisfaction ((Source: BCG/PMI).

A double bar graph is depicted to show high PPM maturity yields measurable benefits. It covers 4 categories: Management for individual projects, financial performance, strategy implementation, and organizational agility.

Measure your success through the following metrics:

  • Reduced turnaround time between project requests and initial scoping
  • Number of project proposals with articulated benefits
  • Reduction in “off-the-grid” projects
  • Team satisfaction and workplace engagement
  • PPM stakeholder satisfaction score from business stakeholders: see Info-Tech’s PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostics

$44,700: In the past 12 months, Info-Tech clients have reported an average measured value of $44,700 from undertaking a guided implementation of this research.

Add your own organization-specific goals, success criteria, and metrics by following the steps in the blueprint.

Case Study: Financial Services PMO prepares annual planning process with Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

CASE STUDY

Industry: Financial Services

Source: Info-Tech Client

Challenge

PMO plays a diverse set of roles, including project management for enterprise projects (i.e. PMI’s “Directive” PMO), standards management for department-level projects (i.e. PMI’s “Supportive” PMO), process governance of strategic projects (i.e. PMI’s “Controlling” PMO), and facilitation / planning / reporting for the corporate business strategy efforts (i.e. Enterprise PMO).

To facilitate the annual planning process, the PMO needed to develop a more data-driven and objective project intake process that implicitly aligned with the corporate strategy.

Solution

Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard tool was incorporated into the strategic planning process.

Results

The scorecard provided a simple way to list the competing strategic initiatives, objectively score them, and re-sort the results on demand as the leadership chooses to switch between ranking by overall score, project value, ability to execute, strategic alignment, operational alignment, and feasibility.

The Project Value Scorecard provided early value with multiple options for prioritized rankings.

A screenshot of the Project Value Scorecard is shown in the image.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – project overview

1. Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Process 2. Build New Optimized Processes 3. Integrate the New Processes into Practice
Best-Practice Toolkit

1.1 Define the criteria with which to determine project value.


2.1 Streamline intake to manage stakeholder expectations.

2.2 Set up steps of project approval to maximize strategic alignment while right-sizing the required effort.

2.3 Prioritize projects to maximize the value of the project portfolio within the constraint of resource capacity.

3.1 Pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout.

3.2 Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in.

Guided Implementations
  • Introduce Project Value Scorecard Development Tool and pilot Info-Tech’s example scorecard on your own backlog.
  • Map current project intake, approval, and prioritization process and key stakeholders.
  • Set realistic goals for process optimization.
  • Improve the management of stakeholder expectations with an optimized intake process.
  • Improve the alignment of the project portfolio to strategic objectives with an optimized approval process.
  • Enable resource capacity-constrained greenlighting of projects with an optimized prioritization process.
  • Create a process pilot strategy with supportive stakeholders.
  • Conduct a change impact analysis for your PPM stakeholders to create an effective communication strategy.
  • Roll out the new process and measure success.
Onsite Workshop

Module 1:

Refocus on Project Value to Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

Module 2:

Examine, Optimize, and Document the New Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

Module 3:

Pilot, Plan, and Communicate the New Process and Its Required Organizational Changes

Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Draft project valuation criteria
  • Examination of current process
  • Definition of process success criteria
Phase 2 Outcome:
  • Documentation of new project intake, approval, and prioritization process
  • Tools and templates to aid the process
Phase 3 Outcome:
  • Process pilot plan
  • Organizational change communication plan

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
Activities

Benefits of optimizing project intake and project value definition

1.1 Complete and review PPM Current State Scorecard Assessment

1.2 Define project value for the organization

1.3 Engage key PPM stakeholders to iterate on the scorecard prototype

Set realistic goals for process optimization

2.1 Map current intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

2.2 Enumerate and prioritize process stakeholders

2.3 Determine the current and target capability levels

2.4 Define the process success criteria and KPIs

Optimize project intake and approval processes

3.1 Conduct focused retrospectives for project intake and approval

3.2 Define project levels

3.3 Optimize project intake processes

3.4 Optimize project approval processes

3.5 Compose SOP for intake and approval

3.6 Document the new intake and approval workflow

Optimize project prioritization process plan for a process pilot

4.1 Conduct focused retrospective for project prioritization

4.2 Estimate available resource capacity

4.3 Pilot Project Intake and Prioritization Tool with your project backlog

4.4 Compose SOP for prioritization

4.5 Document the new prioritization workflow

4.6 Discuss process pilot

Analyze stakeholder impact and create communication strategy

5.1 Analyze stakeholder impact and responses to impending organization change

5.2 Create message canvas for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders

5.3 Set course of action for communicating change

Deliverables
  1. PPM Current State Scorecard
  2. Project Value Scorecard prototype
  1. Current intake, approval, and prioritization workflow
  2. Stakeholder register
  3. Intake process success criteria
  1. Project request form
  2. Project level classification matrix
  3. Proposed project deliverables toolkit
  4. Customized intake and approval SOP
  5. Flowchart for the new intake and approval workflow
  1. Estimated resource capacity for projects
  2. Customized Project Intake and Prioritization Tool
  3. Customized prioritization SOP
  4. Flowchart for the new prioritization workflow
  5. Process pilot plan
  1. Completed Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool
  2. Communication strategy and plan

Phase 1

Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

Phase 1 outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 1: Set Realistic Goals for Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

Step 1.1: Define the project valuation criteria

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss how a project value is currently determined
  • Introduce Info-Tech’s scorecard-driven project valuation approach

Then complete these activities…

  • Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects
  • Review and iterate on the scorecard criteria

With these tools & templates:

Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

Step 1.2: Envision your process target state

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Introduce Info-Tech’s project intake process maturity model
  • Discuss the use of Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program for an initial assessment of your current PPM processes

Then complete these activities…

  • Map your current process workflow
  • Enumerate and prioritize your key stakeholders
  • Define process success criteria

With these tools & templates:

Project Intake Workflow Template

Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template

Phase 1 Results & Insights:
  • The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

Get to value early with Step 1.1 of this blueprint

Define how to determine a project’s value and set the stage for maximizing the value of your project portfolio using Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

Where traditional models of consulting can take considerable amounts of time before delivering value to clients, Info-Tech’s methodology for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process gets you to value fast.

The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

In the first step of this blueprint, you will pilot a multiple-criteria scorecard for determining project value that will help answer that question. Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool is pre-populated with a ready-to-use, real-life example that you can leverage as a starting point for tailoring it to your organization – or adopt as is.

Introduce objectivity and clarity to your discussion of maximizing the value of your project portfolio with Info-Tech’s practical IT research that drives measurable results.

Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

Step 1.1: Define the criteria with which to determine project value

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

1.1

Define project valuation criteria

1.2

Envision process target state

2.1

Streamline intake

2.2

Right-size approval steps

2.3

Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

3.1

Pilot your optimized process

3.2

Communicate organizational change

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Learn how to use the Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
  • Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects

This step involves the following participants:

  • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
  • Project Managers
  • Business Analysts
  • CIO (optional)

Outcomes of this step

  • Understand the importance of devising a consensus criteria for project valuation.
  • Try a project value scorecard-driven prioritization process with your currently proposed.
  • Set the stage for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization processes.

Intake, Approval, and Prioritization is a core process in Info-Tech’s project portfolio management (PPM) framework

PPM is an infrastructure around projects that aims to ensure that the best projects are worked on at the right time with the right people.

PPM’s goal is to maximize the throughput of projects that provide strategic and operational value to the organization. To do this, a PPM strategy must help to:

Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Process Model
3. Status & Progress Reporting
1. Intake, Approval & Prioritization 2. Resource Management 3. Project Management 4. Project Closure 5. Benefits Tracking
Intake Execution Closure
  1. Select the best projects
  2. Pick the right time and people to execute the projects
  3. Make sure the projects are okay
  4. Make sure the projects get done
  5. Make sure they were worth doing

If you don’t yet have a PPM strategy in place, or would like to revisit your existing PPM strategy before optimizing your project intake, approval, and prioritization practices, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's blueprint Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy is shown.

“Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

A profound imbalance between demand (i.e. approved project work and service delivery commitments) and supply (i.e. people’s time) is the top challenge IT departments face today.

In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrip IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT’s reputation within the organization.

An image is depicted that has several projects laid out near a scale filling one side of it and off of it. On the other part of the scale which is higher, has an image of people in it to help show the relationship between resource supply and project demand.

Info-Tech Insight

Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

Don’t weigh your portfolio down by starting more than you can finish

Focus on what will deliver value to the organization and what you can realistically deliver.

Most of the problems that arise during the lifecycle of a project can be traced back to issues that could have been mitigated during the initiation phase.

More than simply a means of early problem detection at the project level, optimizing your initiation processes is also the best way to ensure the success of your portfolio. With optimized intake processes you can better guarantee:

  • The projects you are working on are of high value
  • Your project list aligns with available resource capacity
  • Stakeholder needs are addressed, but stakeholders do not determine the direction of the portfolio

80% of organizations feel their portfolios are dominated by low-value initiatives that do not deliver value to the business (Source: Cooper).

"(S)uccessful organizations select projects on the basis of desirability and their capability to deliver them, not just desirability" (Source: John Ward, Delivering Value from Information Systems and Technology Investments).

Establishing project value is the first – and difficult – step for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization

What is the best way to “deliver value to the organization”?

Every organization needs to explicitly define how to determine project value that will fairly represent all projects and provide a basis of comparison among them during approval and prioritization. Without it, any discussions on reducing “low-value initiatives” from the previous slide cannot yield any actionable plan.

However, defining the project value is difficult, because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right and worth considering. For example:

  • Strategic growth vs. operational stability
  • Important work vs. urgent work
  • Return on investment vs. cost containment
  • Needs of a specific line of business vs. business-wide needs
  • Financial vs. intangible benefits

This challenge is further complicated by the difficulty of identifying the right criteria for determining project value:

Managers fail to identify around 50% of the important criteria when making decisions (Source: Transparent Choice).

Info-Tech Insight

Sometimes it can be challenging to show the value of IT-centric, operational-type projects that maintain critical infrastructure since they don’t yield net-new benefits. Remember that benefits are only half the equation; you must also consider the costs of not undertaking the said project.

Find the right mix of criteria for project valuation with Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

Scorecard-driven approach is an easy-to-understand, time-tested solution to a multiple-criteria decision-making problem, such as project valuation.

This approach is effective for capturing benefits and costs that are not directly quantifiable in financial terms. Projects are evaluated on multiple specific questions, or criteria, that each yield a score on a point scale. The overall score is calculated as a weighted sum of the scores.

Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard is pre-populated with a best-practice example of eight criteria, two for each category (see box at bottom right). This example helps your effort to develop your own project scorecard by providing a solid starting point:

60%: On their own, decision makers could only identify around 6 of their 10 most important criteria for making decisions (Source: Transparent Choice).

Finally, in addition, the overall scores of approved projects can be used as a metric on which success of the process can be measured over time.

Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

Categories of project valuation criteria

  • Strategic alignment: projects must be aligned with the strategic goals of the business and IT.
  • Operational alignment: projects must be aligned with the operational goals of the business and IT.
  • Feasibility: practical considerations for projects must be taken into account in selecting projects.
  • Financial: projects must realize monetary benefits, in increased revenue or decreased costs, while posing as little risk of cost overrun as possible.

Review the example criteria and score description in the Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

1.1.1 Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 2: Evaluation Criteria

This tab lists eight criteria that cover strategic alignment, operational alignment, feasibility, and financial benefits/risks. Each criteria is accompanied by a qualitative score description to standardize the analysis across all projects and analysts. While this tool supports up to 15 different criteria, it’s better to minimize the number of criteria and introduce additional ones as the organization grows in PPM maturity.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 2: Evaluation Criteria

Type: It is useful to break down projects with similar overall scores by their proposed values versus ease of execution.

Scale: Five-point scale is not required for this tool. Use more or less granularity of description as appropriate for each criteria.

Blank Criteria: Rows with blank criteria are greyed out. Enter a new criteria to turn on the row.

Score projects and search for the right mix of criteria weighting using the scorecard tab

1.1.1 Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard

In this tab, you can see how projects are prioritized when they are scored according to the criteria from the previous tab. You can enter the scores of up to 30 projects in the scorecard table (see screenshot to the right).

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

Value (V) or Execution (E) & Relative Weight: Change the relative weights of each criteria and review any changes to the prioritized list of projects change, whose rankings are updated automatically. This helps you iterate on the weights to find the right mix.

Feasibility: Custom criteria category labels will be automatically updated.

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

Overall: Choose the groupings of criteria by which you want to see the prioritized list. Available groupings are:

  • Overall score
  • By value or by execution
  • By category

Ranks and weighted scores for each project is shown.

For example, click on the drop-down and choose “Execution.”

A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

Project ranks are based only on execution criteria.

Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects

1.1.1 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

Follow the steps below to test Info-Tech’s example Project Value Scorecard and examine the prioritized list of projects.

  1. Using your list of proposed, ongoing, and completed projects, identify a representative sample of projects in your project portfolio, varying in size, scope, and perceived value – about 10-20 of them.
  2. Arrange these projects in the order of priority using any processes or prioritization paradigm currently in place in your organization.
  • In the absence of formal process, use your intuition, as well as knowledge of organizational priorities, and your stakeholders.
  • Use the example criteria and score description in Tab 2 of Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool to score the same list of projects:
    • Avoid spending too much time at this step. Prioritization criteria will be refined in the subsequent parts of the blueprint.
    • If multiple scorers are involved, allow some overlap to benchmark for consistency.
  • Enter the scores in Tab 3 of the tool to obtain the first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized project list. Compare it with your list from Step 2.
  • INPUT

    • Knowledge of proposed, ongoing, and completed projects in your project portfolio

    OUTPUT

    • Prioritized project lists

    Materials

    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Iterate on the scorecard to set the stage for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.1.2 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Conduct a retrospective of the previous activity by asking these questions:

    • How smooth was the overall scoring experience (Step 3 of Activity 1.1.1)?
    • Did you experience challenges in interpreting and applying the example project valuation criteria? Why? (e.g. lack of information, absence of formalized business strategic goals, too much room for interpretation in scoring description)
    • Did the prioritized project list agree with your intuition?

    Iterate on the project valuation criteria:

    • Manipulate the relatives weights of valuation criteria to fine-tune them.
    • Revise the scoring descriptions to provide clarity or customize them to better fit your organization’s needs, then update the project scores accordingly.
    • For projects that did not score well, will this cause concern from any stakeholders? Are the concerns legitimate? If so, this may indicate the need for inclusion of new criteria.
    • For projects that score too well, this may indicate a bias toward a specific type of project or group of stakeholders. Try adjusting the relative weights of existing criteria.

    INPUT

    • Activity 1.1.1

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective on project valuation
    • Review of project valuation criteria

    Materials

    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Next steps: engage key PPM stakeholders to reach a consensus when establishing how to determine project value

    Engage these key players to create the evaluation criteria that all stakeholders will support:

    • Business units: Projects are undertaken to provide value to the business. Senior management from business units must help define how project will be valued.
    • IT: IT must ensure that technical/practical considerations are taken into account when determining project value.
    • Finance: The CFO or designated representative will ensure that estimated project costs and benefits can be used to manage the budget.
    • PMO: PMO is the administrator of the project portfolio. PMO must provide coordination and support to ensure the process operates smoothly and its goals are realized.
    • Business analysts: BAs carry out the evaluation of project value. Therefore, their understanding of the evaluation criteria and the process as a whole are critical to the success of the process.
    • Project sponsors: Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of benefits for which projects are undertaken.

    Optimize the process with the new project value definition to focus your discussion with stakeholders

    This blueprint will help you not only optimize the process, but also help you work with your stakeholders to realize the benefits of the optimized process.

    In this step, you’ve begun improving the definition of project value. Getting it right will require several more iterations and will require a series of discussions with your key stakeholders.

    The optimized intake process built around the new definition of project value will help evolve a conceptual discussion about project value into a more practical one. The new process will paint a picture of what the future state will look like for your stakeholders’ requested projects getting approved and prioritized for execution, so that they can provide feedback that’s concrete and actionable. To help you with that process, you will be taken through a series of activities to analyze the impact of change on your stakeholders and create a communication plan in the last phase of the blueprint.

    For now, in the next step of this blueprint, you will undergo a series of activities to assess your current state to identify the specific areas for process optimization.

    "To find the right intersection of someone’s personal interest with the company’s interest on projects isn’t always easy. I always try to look for the basic premise that you can get everybody to agree on it and build from there… But it’s sometimes hard to make sure that things stick. You may have to go back three or four times to the core agreement."

    -Eric Newcomer

    Step 1.2: Envision your target state for your optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Map your current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow, and document it in a flowchart
    • Enumerate and prioritize your key process stakeholders
    • Determine your process capability level within Info-Tech’s Framework
    • Establish your current and target states for project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current project intake, approval, and prioritization process is mapped out and documented in a flowchart
    • Key process stakeholders are enumerated and prioritized to inform future discussion on optimizing processes
    • Current and target organizational process capability levels are determined
    • Success criteria and key performance indicators for process optimization are defined

    Use Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program for an initial assessment of your current PPM processes

    This step is highly recommended but not required. Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the PPM Diagnostics.

    Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessmentprovides you with a data-driven view of the current state of your portfolio, including your intake processes. Our PPM Assessment measures and communicates success in terms of Info-Tech’s best practices for PPM.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessment blueprint is shown.

    Use the diagnostic program to:

    • Assess resource utilization across the portfolio.
    • Determine project portfolio reporting completeness.
    • Solicit feedback from your customers on the clarity of your portfolio’s business goals.
    • Rate the overall quality of your project management practices and benchmark your rating over time.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessment blueprint is shown.

    Scope your process optimization efforts with Info-Tech’s high-level intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

    Info-Tech recommends the following workflow at a high level for a capacity-constrained intake process that aligns to strategic goals and stakeholder need.

    • Intake (Step 2.1)*
      • Receive project requests
      • Triage project requests and assign a liaison
      • High-level scoping & set stakeholder expectations
    • Approval (Step 2.2)*
      • Concept approval by project sponsor
      • High-level technical solution approval by IT
      • Business case approval by business
      • Resource allocation & greenlight projects
    • Prioritization (Step 2.3)*
      • Update project priority scores & available project capacity
      • Identify high-scoring and “on-the-bubble” projects
      • Recommend projects to greenlight or deliberate

    * Steps denote the place in the blueprint where the steps are discussed in more detail.

    Use this workflow as a baseline to examine your current state of the process in the next slide.

    Map your current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

    1.2.1 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the processes currently in place for project intake, approval, and prioritization.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards / large sticky notes to write out unique steps of a process. Use the high-level process workflow from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Arrange the steps into chronological order. Benchmark the arrangement through a group discussion.
    3. Use green cards to identify artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    4. Use yellow cards to identify who does the work (i.e. responsible parties), and who makes the decisions (i.e. accountable party). Keep in mind that while multiple parties may be responsible, accountability cannot be shared and only a single party can be accountable for a process.
    5. Use red cards to identify issues, problems, or risks. These are opportunities for optimization.

    INPUT

    • Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures)
    • Info-Tech’s high-level intake workflow

    OUTPUT

    • Current process, mapped out

    Materials

    • 4x6” recipe cards
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Document the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow in a flowchart

    1.2.2 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Document the results of the previous table-top exercise (Activity 1.1.1) into a flow chart. Flowcharts provide a bird’s-eye view of process steps that highlight the decision points and deliverables. In addition, swim lanes can be used to indicate process stages, task ownership, or responsibilities (example below).

    An example is shown for activity 1.2.2

    Review and customize section 1.2, “Overall Process Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    "Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management."

    – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

    Browser-based flowchart tool examples

    INPUT

    • Mapped-out project intake process (Activity 1.2.1)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of current project intake workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Example of a project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart – without swim lanes

    An example project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart without swim lanes is shown.

    Example of a project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart – with swim lanes

    An example project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart with swim lanes is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake Workflow Template (Visio and PDF)

    Enumerate your key stakeholders for optimizing intake, approval, and prioritization process

    1.2.3 30-45 minutes

    In the previous activity, accountable and responsible stakeholders for each of the steps in the current intake, approval, and prioritization process were identified.

    1. Based on your knowledge and insight of your organization, ensure that all key stakeholders with accountable and responsible stakeholders are accounted for in the mapped-out process. Note any omissions: it may indicate a missing step, or that the stakeholder ought to be, but are not currently, involved.
    2. For each step, identify any stakeholders that are currently consulted or informed. Then, examine the whole map and identify any other stakeholders that ought to be consulted or informed.
    3. Compile a list of stakeholders from steps 1-2, and write each of their names in two sticky notes.
    4. Put both sets of sticky notes on a wall. Use the wisdom-of-the-crowd approach to arrange one set in a descending order of influence. Record their ranked influence from 1 (least) to 10 (most).
    5. Rearrange the other set in a descending order of interest in seeing the project intake process optimized. Record their ranked interest from 1 (least) to 10 (most).

    INPUT

    • Mapped-out project intake process (Activity 1.2.1)
    • Insight on organizational culture

    OUTPUT

    • List of stakeholders in project intake
    • Ranked list in their influence and interest

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Walls

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Prioritize your stakeholders for project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    There are three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support.

    1. Map your stakeholders in a 2D stakeholder power map (top right) according to their relative influence and interest.
    2. Rate their level of support by asking the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would welcome an improved process for project intake?

    These parameters will inform how to prioritize your stakeholders according to the stakeholder priority heatmap (bottom right). This priority should inform how to focus your attention during the subsequent optimization efforts.

    A flowchart is shown to show the relationship between influence and interest.

    Level of Support
    Stakeholder Category Supporter Evangelist Neutral Blocker
    Engage Critical High High Critical
    High Medium Low Low Medium
    Low High Medium Medium High
    Passive Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low

    Info-Tech Insight

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to achieve complete satisfaction. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter the most.

    Most organizations have low to medium capabilities around intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.2.4 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s Intake Capability Framework to help define your current and target states for intake, approval, and prioritization.

    Capability Level Capability Level Description
    Capability Level 5: Optimized Our department has effective intake processes with right-sized administrative overhead. Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned Our department has very strong intake processes. Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Capability Level 3: Engaged Our department has processes in place to track project requests and follow up on them. Priorities are periodically re-evaluated, based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.
    Capability Level 2: Defined Our department has some processes in place but no capacity to say no to new projects. There is a formal backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our department has no formal intake processes in place. Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize proactive project work.

    Refer to the subsequent slides for more detail on these capability levels.

    Level 1: Unmanaged

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Projects are requested through personal conversations and emails, with minimal documentation and oversight.
    Approval Projects are approved by default and rarely (if ever) declined. There is no definitive list of projects in the pipeline or backlog.
    Prioritization Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize proactive project work.

    Symptoms

    • Poorly defined – or a complete absence of – PPM processes.
    • No formal approval committee.
    • No processes in place to balance proactive and reactive demands.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should work to have all requests funneled through a proper request form within six months. Decision rights for approval should be defined, and a scorecard should be in place within the year.

    Quick Win

    To get a handle on your backlog, start tracking all project requests using the “Project Data” tab in Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    Level 2: Defined

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Requests are formally documented in a request form before they’re assigned, elaborated, and executed as projects.
    Approval Projects are approved by default and rarely (if ever) declined. There is a formal backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Prioritization There is a list of priorities but no process for updating it more than annually or quarterly.

    Symptoms

    • Organization does not have clear concept of project capacity.
    • There is a lack of discipline enforced on stakeholders.
    • Immature PPM processes in general.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should strive for greater visibility into the portfolio to help make the case for declining (or at least deferring) requests. Within the year, have a formal PPM strategy up and running.

    Quick Win

    Something PMOs at this level can accomplish quickly without any formal approval is to spend more time with stakeholders during the ideation phase to better define scope and requirements.

    Level 3: Engaged

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Processes and skills are in place to follow up on requests to clarify project scope before going forward with approval and prioritization.
    Approval Projects are occasionally declined based on exceptionally low feasibility or value.
    Prioritization Priorities are periodically re-evaluated based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.

    Challenges

    • Senior executives’ “best judgement” is frequently fallible or influenced. Pet projects still enter the portfolio and deplete resources.
    • While approval processes “occasionally” filter out some low-value projects, many still get approved.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should advocate for a more formal cadence for prioritization and, within the year, establish a formal steering committee that will be responsible for prioritizing and re-prioritizing quarterly or monthly.

    Quick Win

    At the PMO level, employ Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool to start re-evaluating projects in the backlog. Make this data available to senior executives when prioritization occurs.

    Level 4: Aligned

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Occurs through a centralized process. Processes and skills are in place for follow-up.
    Approval Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Prioritization Project prioritization is visibly aligned with business goals.

    Challenges

    • The process of developing business cases can be too cumbersome, distracting resources from actual project work.
    • “Future” resource capacity predictions are unreliable. Reactive support work and other factors frequently change actual resource availability.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level can strive for more accurate and frequent resource forecasting, establishing a more accurate picture of project vs. non-project work within the year.

    Quick Win

    PMOs at this level can start using Info-Tech’s Business Case Template (Comprehensive or Fast Track) to help simplify the business case process.

    Level 5: Optimizing

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Occurs through a centralized portal. Processes and skills are in place for thorough follow-up.
    Approval Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Prioritization Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.

    Challenges

    • Establishing a reliable forecast for resource capacity remains a concern at this level as well.
    • Organizations at this level may experience an increasing clash between Agile practices and traditional Waterfall methodologies.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio Blueprint

    PMOs at this level should look at Info-Tech’s Manage an Agile Portfolio for comprehensive tools and guidance on maintaining greater visibility at the portfolio level into work in progress and committed work.

    Establish your current and target states for process intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.2.5 Estimated Time: 20 minutes

    • Having reviewed the intake capability framework, you should be able to quickly identify where you currently reside in the model. Document this in the “Current State” box below.
    • Next, spend some time as a group discussing your target state. Make sure to set a realistic target as well as a realistic timeframe for meeting this target. Level 1s will not be able to become Level 5s overnight and certainly not without passing through the other levels on the way.
      • A realistic goal for a Level 1 to become a Level 2 is within six to eight months.
    Current State:
    Target State:
    Timeline for meeting target

    INPUT

    • Intake, approval, and prioritization capability framework (Activity 1.2.4)

    OUTPUT

    • Current and target state, with stated time goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Align your intake success with the strategic expectations of overall project portfolio management

    A successful project intake, approval, and prioritization process puts your leadership in a position to best steer the portfolio, like a conductor of an orchestra.

    To frame the discussion on deciding what intake success will look like, review Info-Tech’s PPM strategic expectations:

    • Project Throughput: Maximize throughput of the best projects.
    • Portfolio Visibility: Ensure visibility of current and pending projects.
    • Portfolio Responsiveness: Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Resource Utilization: Minimize resource waste and optimize the alignment of skills to assignments.
    • Benefits Realization: Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment for each project, and facilitate the process of tracking/reporting those benefits.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint.

    For a more detailed discussion and insight on PPM strategic expectations see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy.

    Decide what successful project intake, approval, prioritization process will look like

    1.2.6 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    While assessing your current state, it is important to discuss and determine as a team how success will be defined.

    • During this process, it is important to consider tentative timelines for success milestones and to ask the question: what will success look like and when should it occur by?
    • Use the below table to help document success factors and timeliness. Follow the lead of our example in row 1.
    Optimization Benefit Objective Timeline Success Factor
    Facilitate project intake, prioritization, and communication with stakeholders to maximize time spent on the most valuable or critical projects. Look at pipeline as part of project intake approach and adjust priorities as required. July 1st Consistently updated portfolio data. Dashboards to show back capacity to customers. SharePoint development resources.

    Review and customize section 1.5, “Process Success Criteria” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Establish realistic short-term goals. Even with optimized intake procedures, you may not be able to eliminate underground project economies immediately. Make your initial goals realistic, leaving room for those walk-up requests that may still appear via informal channels.

    Prepare to optimize project intake and capture the results in the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

    Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is the reference document to get all PPM stakeholders on the same page with the new optimized process.

    The current state explored and documented in this step will serve as a starting point for each step of the next phase of the blueprint. The next phase will take a deeper dive into each of the three components of Info-Tech’s project intake methodology, so that they can achieve the success criteria you’ve defined in the previous activity.

    Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template is intended to capture the outcome of your process optimization efforts. This blueprint guides you through numerous activities designed for your core project portfolio management team to customize each section.

    To maximize the chances of success, it is important that the team makes a concerted effort to participate. Schedule a series of working sessions over the course of several weeks for your team to work through it – or get through it in one week, with onsite Info-Tech analyst-facilitated workshops.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP.

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Case study: PMO develops mature intake and prioritization processes by slowly evolving its capability level

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Not-for-Profit

    Source: Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    • A PMO for a large not-for-profit benefits provider had relatively high project management maturity, but the enterprise had low PPM maturity.
    • There were strong intake processes in place for following up on requests. For small projects, project managers would assist as liaisons to help control scope. For corporate initiates, PMs were assigned to work with a sponsor to define scope and write a charter.

    Solution

    Prioritization was a challenge. Initially, the organization had ad hoc prioritization practices, but they had developed a scoring criteria to give more formality and direction to the portfolio. However, the activity of formally prioritizing proved to be too time consuming.

    Off-the-grid projects were a common problem, with initiatives consuming resources with no portfolio oversight.

    Results

    After trying “heavy” prioritization, the PMO loosened up the process. PMO staff now go through and quickly rank projects, with two senior managers making the final decisions. They re-prioritize quarterly to have discussions around resource availability and to make sure stakeholders are in tune to what IT is doing on a daily basis. IT has a monthly meeting to go over projects consuming resources and to catch anything that has fallen between the cracks.

    "Everything isn't a number one, which is what we were dealing with initially. We went through a formal prioritization period, where we painstakingly scored everything. Now we have evolved: a couple of senior managers have stepped up to make decisions, which was a natural evolution from us being able to assign a formal ranking. Now we are able to prioritize more easily and effectively without having to painstakingly score everything."

    – PMO Director, Benefits Provider

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1-2

    A screenshot of activities 1.1.1 and 1.1.2 are shown.

    Pilot Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard-driven prioritization method

    Use Info-Tech’s example to prioritize your current project backlog to pilot a project value-driven prioritization, which will be used to guide the entire optimization process.

    1.2.1-3

    A screenshot of activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.3 are shown.

    Map out and document current project intake, approval, and prioritization process, and the involved key stakeholders

    A table-top planning exercise helps you visualize the current process in place and identify opportunities for optimization.

    Phase 2

    Build an Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Build an Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process Proposed Time to Completion: 3-6 weeks

    Step 2.1: Streamline Intake

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Challenges of project intake
    • Opportunities for improving the management of stakeholder expectations by optimizing intake

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Optimize your process to receive, triage, and follow up on project requests

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Request Form.
    • Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Step 2.2: Right-Size Approval

    Start with an analyst call:

    • Challenges of project approval
    • Opportunities for improving strategic alignment of the project portfolio by optimizing project approval

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Clarify accountability at each step
    • Decide on deliverables to support decision makers at each step

    With these tools & templates:

    • Benefits Commitment Form
    • Technology Assessment Tool
    • Business Case Templates

    Step 3.3: Prioritize Realistically

    Start with an analyst call:

    • Challenges in project prioritization
  • Opportunities for installing a resource capacity-constrained intake by optimizing prioritization
  • Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Pilot the Intake and Prioritization Tool for prioritization within estimated resource capacity

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity, to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

    Step 2.1: Streamline intake to manage stakeholder expectations

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project intake process
    • Optimize your process to receive project requests
    • Revisit the definition of a project for triaging requests
    • Optimize your process to triage project requests
    • Optimize your process to follow up on project requests

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this Step

    • Retrospective of the current project intake process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • A streamlined, single-funnel intake channel with the right procedural friction to receive project requests
    • A refined definition of what constitutes a project, and project levels that will determine the necessary standard of rigor with which project requests should be scoped and developed into a proposal throughout the process
    • An optimized process for triaging and following up on project requests to prepare them for the steps of project approval
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    Understand the risks of poor intake practices

    Too much red tape could result in your portfolio falling victim to underground economies. Too little intake formality could lead to the Wild West.

    Off-the-grid projects, i.e. projects that circumvent formal intake processes, lead to underground economies that can deplete resource capacity and hijack your portfolio.

    These underground economies are typically the result of too much intake red tape. When the request process is made too complex or cumbersome, project sponsors may unsurprisingly seek alternative means to get their projects done.

    While the most obvious line of defence against the appearance of underground economies is an easy-to-use and access request form, one must be cautious. Too little intake formality could lead to a Wild West of project intake where everyone gets their initiatives approved regardless of their business merit and feasibility.

    Benefits of optimized intake Risks of poor intake
    Alignment of portfolio with business goals Portfolio overrun by off-the-grid projects
    Resources assigned to high-value projects Resources assigned to low-value projects
    Better throughput of projects in the portfolio Ever-growing project backlog
    Strong stakeholder relations Stakeholders lose faith in value of PMO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Intake is intimately bound to stakeholder management. Finding the right balance of friction for your team is the key to successfully walking the line between asking for too much and not asking for enough. If your intake process is strong, stakeholders will no longer have any reason to circumvent formal process.

    An excess number of intake channels is the telltale sign of a low capability level for intake

    Excess intake channels are also a symptom of a portfolio in turmoil.

    If you relate to the graphic below in any way, your first priority needs to be limiting the means by which projects get requested. A single, centralized channel with review and approval done in batches is the goal. Otherwise, with IT’s limited capacity, most requests will simply get added to the backlog.

    A graphic is shown to demonstrate how one may receive project requests. The following icons are in a circle: Phone, Intranet Request Form, In person, anywhere, anytime, SharePoint Request Form, Weekly Scrum, Document, and Email.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The PMO needs to have the authority – and needs to exercise the authority – to enforce discipline on stakeholders. Organizations that solicit in verbal requests (by phone, in person, or during scrum) lack the orderliness required for PPM success. In these cases, it needs to be the mission of the PMO to demand proper documentation and accountability from stakeholders before proceeding with requests.

    "The golden rule for the project documentation is that if anything during the project life cycle is not documented, it is the same as if it does not exist or never happened…since management or clients will never remember their undocumented requests or their consent to do something."

    – Dan Epstein, “Project Initiation Process: Part Two”

    Develop an intake workflow

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing intake.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request.

    Project Request Form Templates

    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.

    1. Divert non-project request
    2. Quickly assess value and urgency
    3. Assign specialist to follow up on request
    4. Inform the requestor

    Project Intake Classification Matrix

    3. BA or PM prepares to develop requests into a project proposal.

    1. Follow up with requestor and SMEs to refine project scope, benefits, and risks
    2. Estimate size of project and determine the required level of detail for proposal
    3. Prepare for concept approval

    Benefits Commitment Form Template

    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.1.1 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Optimizing project intake may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1. On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3. As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2. Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4. Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Explicitly manage follow-up expectations with project requestor
    • Receiving informal project requests
    • Take too long in proposal development
    • Quarterly approval meetings
    • Approve resources for proposal development

    INPUT

    • Current project intake workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project intake success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current intake process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Streamline project requests into a single funnel

    It is important to identify all of the ways through which projects currently get requested and initiated, especially if you have various streams of intake competing with each other for resources and a place in the portfolio. Directing multiple channels into a single, centralized funnel is step number one in optimizing intake.

    To help you identify project sources within your organization, we’ve broken project requests into three archetypes: the good, the bad, and the ugly.

    1. The Good – Proper Requests: written formal requests that come in through one appropriate channel.

    The Bad – Walk-Ups: requests that do not follow the appropriate intake channel(s), but nevertheless make an effort to get into the proper queue. The most common instance of this is a portfolio manager or CIO filling out the proper project request form on behalf of, and under direction from, a senior executive.

    The Ugly – Guerilla Tactics: initiatives that make their way into the portfolio through informal methods or that consume portfolio resources without formal approval, authority, or oversight. This typically involves a key resource getting ambushed to work on a stakeholder’s “side project” without any formal approval from, or knowledge of, the PMO.

    Funnel requests through a single portal to streamline intake

    Decide how you would funnel project requests on a single portal for submitting project requests. Determining the right portal for your organization will depend on your current infrastructure options, as well as your current and target state capability levels.

    Below are examples of a platform for your project request portal.

    Platform Template document, saved in a repository or shared drive Email-based form (Outlook forms) Intranet form (SharePoint, internal CMS) Dedicated intake solution (PPM tool, idea/innovation tool)
    Pros Can be deployed very easily Consolidates requests into a single receiver Users have one place to go from any device All-in-one solution that includes scoring and prioritization
    Cons Manual submission and intake process consumes extra effort Can pose problems in managing requests across multiple people and platforms Requires existing intranet infrastructure and some development effort Solution is costly; requires adoption across all lines of business

    Increasing intake capability and infrastructure availability

    Introduce the right amount of friction into your intake process

    The key to an effective intake process is determining the right amount of friction to include for your organization. In this context, friction comes from the level of granularity within your project request form and the demands or level of accountability your intake processes place on requestors. You will want to have more or less friction on your intake form, depending on your current intake pain points.

    If you are inundated with a high volume of requests:

    • Make your intake form more detailed to deter “half-baked” requests.
    • Have more managerial oversight into the process. Require approval for each request.

    If you want to encourage the use of a formal channel:

    • Make your intake form more concise and lightweight.
    • Have less managerial oversight into the process. Inform managers of each request rather than requiring approval.

    Download Info-Tech’s Detailed Project Request Form.

    Download Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Request Form is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing a process should not automatically mean reducing friction. Blindly reducing friction could generate a tidal wave of poorly thought-out requests, which only drives up unrealistic expectations. Mitigate the risk of unrealistic stakeholder expectations by carefully managing the message: optimize friction.

    Document your process to receive project requests

    2.1.2 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.2, “Receive project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to consolidate multiple intake channels into a single funnel with the right amount of friction to improve visibility and manageability of incoming project requests.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What data will be collected, and from whom? For example, Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form Template will be used to collect project requests from everyone.
    2. How will requests be collected, and from where? For example, the template will be available as a fillable form on a SharePoint site.
    3. Who will be informed of the requests? For example, the PMO Director and the BA team will be notified with a hyperlink to the completed request form.
    4. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Retrospective of current process (Activity 2.1.1)

    OUTPUT

    • Customized Project Request Form
    • Method of implementation

    Materials

    • Project Request Form Templates

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Whatever method of request collection you choose, ensure there is no doubt about how requesters can access the intake form.

    Establish a triage process to improve portfolio success

    Once a request has been submitted, it will need to be triaged. Triage begins as soon as the request is received. The end goal of the triage process is to set appropriate expectations for stakeholders and to ensure that all requests going forward for approval are valid requests.

    PPM Triage Process

    1. Divert non-project requests by validating that what is described on the request form qualifies as a “project.” Make sure requests are in the appropriate queue – for example, service desk request queue, change and release management queue, etc.
    2. Quickly assess value and urgency to determine whether the request requires fast-tracking or any other special consideration.
    3. Assign a specialist to follow up on the request. Match the request to the most suitable BA, PM, or equivalent. This person will become the Request Liaison (“RL”) for the request and will work with the requestor to define preliminary requirements.
    4. Inform the requestor that the request has been received and provide clear direction on what will happen with the request next, such as who will follow up on it and when. See the next slide for some examples of this follow-up.

    The PMO Triage Team

    • Portfolio Manager, or equivalent
    • Request Liaisons (business analysts, project managers, or equivalent)

    “Request Liaison” Role

    The BAs and PMs who follow up on requests play an especially important role in the triage process. They serve as the main point of contact to the requestor as the request evolves into a business case. In this capacity they perform a valuable stakeholder management function, helping to increase confidence and enhance trust in IT.

    To properly triage project requests, define exactly what a project is

    Bring color to the grey area that can exist in IT between those initiatives that fall somewhere in between “clearly a service ticket” and “clearly a project.”

    What constitutes a project?

    Another way of asking this question that gets more to the point for this blueprint – for what types of initiatives is project intake, approval, and prioritization rigor required?

    This is especially true in IT where, for some smaller initiatives, there can be uncertainty in many organizations during the intake and initiation phase about what should be included on the formal project list and what should go to help desk’s queue.

    As the definitions in the table below show, formal project management frameworks each have similar definitions of “a project.”

    Source Definition
    PMI A temporary endeavor undertaken to create a unique product, service, or result.” (553)
    COBIT A structured set of activities concerned with delivering a defined capability (that is necessary but not sufficient to achieve a required business outcome) to the enterprise based on an agreed‐on schedule and budget.” (74)
    PRINCE2 A temporary organization that is created for the purpose of delivering one or more business products according to an agreed business case.

    For each, a project is a temporary endeavor planned around producing a specific organizational/business outcome. The challenge of those small initiatives in IT is knowing when those endeavors require a business case, formal resource tracking, and project management rigor, and when they don’t.

    Separating small projects from non-projects requires a consideration of approval rights

    While conventional wisdom says to base your project definition on an estimation of cost, risk, etc., you also need to ask, “does this initiative require formal approval?”

    In the next step, we will define a suggested minimum threshold for a small “level 1” project. While these level thresholds are good and necessary for a number of reasons – including triaging your project requests – you may still often need to exercise some critical judgment in separating the tickets from the projects. In addition to the level criteria that we will develop in this step, use the checklist below to help with your differentiating.

    Service Desk Ticket Small Project
    • Approval seems implicit given the scope of the task.
    • No expectations of needing to report on status.
    • No indications that management will require visibility during execution.
    • The scope of the task suggests formal approval may be required.
    • You may have to report on status.
    • Possibility that management may require visibility during execution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Guard the value of the portfolio. Because tickets carry with them an implicit approval, you need to be wary at the portfolio level of those that might possess a larger scope than their status of ticket implies. Sponsors that, for whatever reason, resist the formal intake process may use the ticketing process to sneak projects in through the backdoor. When assessing tickets and small projects at the portfolio level, you need to ask: is it possible that someone at an executive level might want to get updates on this because of its duration, scope, risk, cost, etc.? Could someone at the management level get upset that the initiative came in as a ticket and is burning up time and driving costs without any visibility?

    Sample Project/Non-Project Separation Criteria

    Non-Project Small Project
    e.g. Time required e.g. < 40 hours e.g. 40 > hours
    e.g. Complexity e.g. Very low e.g. Moderate – Low Difficulty: Does not require highly developed or specialized skill sets
    e.g. Collaboration e.g. None required e.g. Limited coordination and collaboration between resources and departments
    e.g. Repeatability of work e.g. Fully repeatable e.g. Less predictable
    e.g. Frequency of request type e.g. Hourly to daily e.g. Weekly to monthly

    "If you worked for the help desk, over time you would begin to master your job since there is a certain rhythm and pattern to the work…On the other hand, projects are unique. This characteristic makes them hard to estimate and hard to manage. Even if the project is similar to one you have done before, new events and circumstances will occur. Each project typically holds its own challenges and opportunities"

    – Jeffrey and Thomas Mochal

    Define the minimum-threshold criteria for small projects

    2.1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Follow the steps below to define the specifics of a “level 1” project for your organization.

    1. Using your project list and/or ticketing system, identify a handful of small projects, large service desk tickets, and especially those items that fall somewhere in the grey area in between (anywhere between 10 to 20 of each). Then, determine the organizationally appropriate considerations for defining your project levels. Options include:
    • Duration
    • Budget/Cost
    • Technology requirements
    • Customer involvement
    • Integration
    • Organizational impact
    • Complexity
    • Number of cross-functional workgroups and teams involved
  • Using the list of projects established in the previous step, determine the organizationally appropriate considerations for defining your project levels –anywhere from four to six considerations is a good number.
  • Using these criteria and your list of small projects, define the minimum threshold for your level one projects across each of these categories. Record these thresholds in the table on the next slide.
  • INPUT

    • Data concerning small projects and service desk tickets, including size, duration, etc.

    OUTPUT

    • Clarity around how to define your level 1 projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Remove room for stakeholder doubt and confusion by informing requests forward in a timely manner

    During triaging, requestors should be notified as quickly as possible (a) that their request has been received and (b) what to expect next for the request. Make this forum as productive and informative as possible, providing clear direction and structure for the future of the request. Be sure to include the following:

    • A request ID or ticket number.
    • Some direction on who will be following up on the request –provide an individual’s name when possible.
    • An estimated timeframe of when they can expect to hear from the individual following up.

    The logistic of this follow-up will depend on a number of different factors.

    • The number of requests you receive.
    • Your ability to automate the responses.
    • The amount of detail you would like to, or need to, provide stakeholders with.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Assign an official request number or project ID to all requests during this initial response. An official request number anchors the request to a specific and traceable dataset that will accompany the project throughout its lifecycle.

    Sample “request received” emails

    If you receive a high volume of requests or need a quick win for improving stakeholder relations:

    Sample #1: Less detailed, automatic response

    Hello Emma,

    Thank you. Your project request has been received. Requests are reviewed and assigned every Monday. A business analyst will follow up with you in the next 5-10 business days. Should you have any questions in the meantime, please reply to this email.

    Best regards,

    Information Technology Services

    If stakeholder management is a priority, and you want to emphasize the customer-facing focus:

    Sample #2: More detailed, tailored response

    Hi Darren,

    Your project request has been received and reviewed. Your project ID number is #556. Business analyst Alpertti Attar has been assigned to follow up on your request. You can expect to hear from him in the next 5-10 business days to set up a meeting for preliminary requirements gathering.

    If you have any questions in the meantime, please contact Alpertti at aattar@projectco.com. Please include the Project ID provided in this email in all future correspondences regarding this request.

    Thank you for your request. We look forward to helping you bring this initiative to fruition.

    Sincerely,

    Jim Fraser

    PMO Director, Information Technology Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    A simple request response will go a long way in terms of stakeholder management. It will not only help assure stakeholders that their requests are in progress but the request confirmation will also help to set expectations and take some of the mystery out of IT’s processes.

    Document your process to triage project requests

    2.1.4 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.3, “Triage project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to divert non-project requests and set an appropriate initial set of stakeholder expectations for next steps. The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What defines a project? Record the outcomes of Activities 2.1.3 into the SOP.
    2. Who triages the requests and assign request liaisons? Who are they? For example, a lead BA can assign a set roster of BAs to project requests.
    3. What are the steps to follow for sending the initial response? See the previous slides on automated responses vs. detailed, tailored responses.
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? For example, impose a maximum of four hours per week per analyst, and track the hours worked for each request to establish a pattern for capacity consumption.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Results of activity 2.1.3

    OUTPUT

    • SOP for triaging project requests

    Materials

    • SOP Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Whatever method of request collection you choose, ensure there is no doubt about how requesters can access the intake form.

    Follow up on requests to define project scope and set realistic expectations

    The purpose of this follow-up is to foster communication among the requestor, IT, and the sponsor to scope the project at a high level. The follow-up should:

    • Clarify the goals and value of the request.
    • Begin to manage expectations based on initial assessment of feasibility.
    • Ensure the right information is available for evaluating project proposals downstream. Every project should have the below key pieces of scope defined before any further commitments are made.

    Focus on Defining Key Pieces of Scope

    • Budget (funding, source)
    • Business outcome
    • Completion criteria
    • Timeframes (start date and duration)
    • Milestones/deliverables

    Structure the Follow-Up Process to Enhance Alignment Between IT and the Business

    Once a Request Liaison (RL) has been assigned to a request, it is their responsibility to schedule time (if necessary) with the requestor to perform a scoping exercise that will help define preliminary requirements. Ideally, this follow-up should occur no later than a week of the initial request.

    Structure the follow-up for each request based on your preliminary estimates of project size (next slide). Use the “Key Pieces of Scope” to the left as a guide.

    It may also be helpful for RLs and stakeholders to work together to produce a rough diagram or mock-up of the final deliverable. This will ensure that the stakeholder’s idea has been properly communicated, and it could also help refine or broaden this idea based on IT’s capabilities.

    After the scoping exercise, it is the RL’s responsibility to inform the requestor of next steps.

    Info-Tech Insight

    More time spent with stakeholders defining high-level requirements during the ideation phase is key to project success. It will not only improve the throughput of projects, but it will enhance the transparency of IT’s capacity and enable IT to more effectively support business processes.

    Perform a preliminary estimation of project size

    Project estimation is a common pain point felt by many organizations. At this stage, a range-of-magnitude (ROM) estimate is sufficient for the purposes of sizing the effort required for developing project proposals with appropriate detail.

    A way to structure ROM estimates is to define a set of standard project levels. It will help you estimate 80% of projects with sufficient accuracy over time with little effort. The remaining 20% of projects that don’t meet their standard target dates can be managed as exceptions.

    The increased consistency of most projects will enable you to focus more on managing the exceptions.

    Example of standard project sizes:

    Level Primary unit of estimation Target completion date*
    1 Weeks 3 weeks – 3 months
    2 Months 3 months – 6 months
    3 Quarters 2 – 4 quarters
    3+ Years 1 year or more

    * Target completion date is simply that – a target, not a service level agreement (SLA). Some exceptions will far exceed the target date, e.g. projects that depend heavily on external or uncontrollable factors.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Project levelling is useful for right-sizing many downstream processes; it sets appropriate levels of detail and scrutiny expected for project approval and prioritization steps, as well as the appropriate extent of requirements gathering, project management, and reporting requirements afterwards.

    Set your thresholds for level 2 and level 3 projects

    2.1.5 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Now that the minimum threshold for your smallest projects has been identified, it’s time to identify the maximum threshold in order to better apply project intake, approval, and prioritization rigor where it’s needed.

    1. Looking at your project list (e.g. Activity 1.1.1, or your current project backlog), isolate the medium and large projects. Examine the two categories in turn.
    2. Start with the medium projects. Using the criteria identified in Activity 2.1.3, identify where your level one category ends.
    • What are the commonly recurring thresholds that distinguish medium-sized projects from smaller initiatives?
    • Are there any criteria that would need to take on a greater importance when making the distinction? For instance, will cost or duration take on a greater weighting when determining level thresholds?
    • Once you have reached consensus, record these in the table on the next slide.
  • Now examine your largest projects. Once again relying on the criteria from Activity 2.1.3, determine where your medium-sized projects end and your large projects begin.
    • What are the commonly recurring thresholds that distinguish large and extra-large projects from medium-sized initiatives?
    • Once you have reached consensus, records these in the table on the next slide.

    INPUT

    • Leveling criteria from Activity 2.1.3
    • Project backlog, or list of projects from Activity 1.1.1

    OUTPUT

    • Clarity around how to define your level two and three projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • The project level table on the next slide

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Sample Project Levels Table

    Project Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
    Work Effort 40-100 hours 100-500 hours 500+ hours
    Budget $100,000 and under $100,000 to $500,000 $500,000 and over
    Technology In-house expertise Familiar New or requires system-wide change/training
    Complexity Well-defined solution; no problems expected Solution is known; some problems expected Solution is unknown or not clearly defined
    Cross-Functional Workgroups/Teams 1-2 3-5 > 6

    Apply a computation decision-making method for project levelling

    2.1.5 Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Capture the project levels in Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool to benchmark your levelling criteria and to determine project levels for proposed projects.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool, tab 2 is shown.
    1. Pick a category to define project levels.
    2. Enter the descriptions for each project level.
    3. Assign a relative weight for each category.
    4. A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool, tab 3 is shown.
    5. Enter a project name.
    6. Choose the description that best fits the project. If unknown, leave it blank.
    7. Suggested project levels are displayed.

    Get tentative buy-in and support from an executive sponsor for project requests

    In most organizations a project requires sponsorship from the executive layer, especially for strategic initiatives. The executive sponsor provides several vital factors for projects:

    • Funding and resources
    • Direct support and oversight of the project leadership
    • Accountability, acting as the ultimate decision maker for the project
    • Ownership of, and commitment to, project benefits

    Sometimes a project request may be made directly by a sponsor; in other times, the Request Liaison may need to connect the project request to a project sponsor.

    In either case, project request has a tentative buy-in and support of an executive sponsor before a project request is developed into a proposal and examined for approval – the subject of this blueprint’s next step.

    PMs and Sponsors: The Disconnect

    A study in project sponsorship revealed a large gap between the perception of the project managers and the perception of sponsors relative to the sponsor capability. The widest gaps appear in the areas of:

    • Motivation: 34% of PMs say sponsors frequently motivate the team, compared to 82% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Active listening: 42% of PMs say that sponsors frequently listen actively, compared to 88% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Effective communication: 47% of PMs say sponsors communicate effectively and frequently, compared to 92% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Managing change: 37% of PMs say sponsors manage change, compared to 82% of executive sponsors who say they do so.

    Source: Boston Consulting Group/PMI, 2014

    Actively engaged executive sponsors continue to be the top driver of whether projects meet their original goals and business intent.

    – PMI Pulse of the Profession, 2017

    76% of respondents [organizations] agree that the role of the executive sponsor has grown in importance over the past five years.

    – Boston Consulting Group/PMI, 2014

    Document your process to follow up on project requests

    2.1.6 45 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.4, “Follow up on project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to initiate communication among the requestor, IT, and the sponsor to scope the project requests at a high level. The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. How will you perform a scoping exercise with the requestor? Leverage existing organizational processes (e.g. high-level requirements gathering). Look to the previous slides for suggested outcomes of the exercise.
    2. How will you determine project levels? Record the outcomes of activities 2.1.5 into the SOP.
    3. How will the RL follow up on the scoped project request with a project sponsor? For example, project requests scoped at a high level will be presented to senior leadership whose lines of business are affected by the proposed project to gauge their initial interest.
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? For example, impose a maximum of 8 hours per week per analyst, and track the hours worked for each request to establish a pattern for capacity consumption.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Activity 2.1.5
    • Existing processes for scoping exercises

    OUTPUT

    • SOP for following up on project requests

    Materials

    • SOP Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Examine the new project intake workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.1.7 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.1, “Project Intake Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request.
    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.
    3. BA or PM prepares to develop requests into a project proposal.
    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth handoff between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project intake (Activities 2.1.2-6)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project intake workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Case study: Portfolio manager achieves intake and project success through detailed request follow-up

    Case Study

    Industry: Municipal Government

    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Challenge

    • There is an IT department with a relatively high level of project management maturity.
    • They have approximately 30 projects on the go, ranging from small to large.
    • To help with intake, IT assembled a project initiation team. It was made up of managers from throughout the county. This group “owned the talent” and met once a month to assess requests. As a group, they were able to assemble project teams quickly.

    Solution

    • Project initiation processes kept failing. A lot of time was spent within IT getting estimations precise, only to have sponsors reject business cases because they did not align with what those sponsors had in mind.
    • Off-the-grid projects were a challenge. Directors did not follow intake process and IT talent was torn in multiple directions. There was nothing in place for protecting the talent and enforcing processes on stakeholders.

    Results

    • IT dedicated a group of PMs and BAs to follow up on requests.
    • Working with stakeholders, this group collects specific pieces of information that allows IT to get to work on requests faster. Through this process, requests reach the charter stage more quickly and with greater success.
    • An intake ticketing system was established to protect IT talent. Workers are now better equipped to redirect stakeholders through to the proper channels.

    Step 2.2: Set up steps of project approval to maximize strategic alignment while right-sizing the required effort

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project approval process
    • Define the approval steps, their accountabilities, and the corresponding terminologies for approval
    • Right-size effort and documentation required for each project level through the approval steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this step

    • Retrospective of the current project intake process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • A series of approval steps are defined, in which their accountabilities, responsibilities, and the nomenclature for what is approved at each steps are clarified and documented
    • A toolbox of deliverables for proposed projects that captures key information developed to inform project approval decisions at each step of the approval process, and the organizational standard for what to use for which project level
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    Set up an incremental series of approval stage-gates to tackle common challenges in project approval

    This section will help you address key challenges IT leaders face around project approval.

    Challenges Info-Tech’s Advice
    Project sponsors receive funding from their business unit or other source (possibly external, such as a grant), and assume this means their project is “approved” without any regard to IT costs or resource constraints. Clearly define a series of approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
    Business case documentation is rarely updated to reflect unforeseen costs, emerging opportunities, and changing priorities. As a result, time and money is spent finishing diminished priority projects while the value of more recent projects erodes in the backlog. Approve projects in smaller pieces, with early test/pilot phases focused on demonstrating the value of later phases.
    Project business cases often focus on implementation and overlook ongoing operating costs imposed on IT after the project is finished. These costs further diminish IT’s capacity for new projects, unless investment in more capacity (such as hiring) is included in business cases. Make ongoing support and maintenance costs a key element in business case templates and evaluations.
    Organizations approve new projects without regard to the availability of resource capacity (or lack thereof). Project lead times grow and stakeholders become more dissatisfied because IT is unable to show how the business is competing with itself for IT’s time. Increase visibility into what IT is already working on and committed to, and for whom.

    Develop a project approval workflow

    Clearly define a series of approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them. “Approval” can be a dangerous word in project and portfolio management, so it is important to clarify what is required to pass each step, and how long the process will take.

    1 2 3 4
    Approval step Concept Approval Feasibility Approval Business Case Approval Resource Allocation (Prioritization)
    Alignment Focus Business need / Project sponsorship Technology Organization-wide business need Resource capacity
    Possible dispositions at each gate
    • Approve developing project proposal
    • Reject concept
    • Proceed to business case approval
    • Approve a test/pilot project for feasibility
    • Reject proposal
    • Approve project and funding in full
    • Approve a test/pilot project for viability
    • Reject proposal
    • Begin or continue project work
    • Hold project
    • Outsource project
    • Reject project
    Accountability e.g. Project Sponsor e.g. CIO e.g. Steering Committee e.g. CIO
    Deliverable Benefits Commitment Form Template Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool Business Case (Fast Track, Comprehensive) Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Identify the decision-making paradigm at each step

    In general, there are three different, mutually exclusive decision-making paradigms for approving projects:

    Paradigm Description Benefits Challenges Recommendation
    Unilateral authority One individual makes decisions. Decisions tend to be made efficiently and unambiguously. Consistency of agenda is easier to preserve. Decisions are subject to one person’s biases and unseen areas. Decision maker should solicit and consider input from others and seek objective rigor.
    Ad hoc deliberation Stakeholders informally negotiate and communicate decisions between themselves. Deliberation helps ensure different perspectives are considered to counterbalance individual biases and unseen areas. Ad hoc decisions tend to lack documentation and objective rationale, which can perpetuate disagreement. Use where unilateral decisions are unfeasible (due to complexity, speed of change, culture, etc.), and stakeholders are very well aligned or highly skilled negotiators and communicators.
    Formal steering committee A select group that represent various parts of the organization is formally empowered to make decisions for the organization. Formal committees can ensure oversight into decisions, with levers available to help resolve uncertainty or disagreement. Formal committees introduce administrative overhead and effort that might not be warranted by the risks involved. Formal steering committees are best where formality is warranted by the risks and costs involved, and the organizational culture has an appetite for administrative oversight.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The individual or party who has the authority to make choices, and who is ultimately answerable for those decisions, is said to be accountable. Understanding the needs of the accountable party is critical to the success of the project approval process optimization efforts.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.2.1 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Optimizing project approval may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1.On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3.As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2.Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4.;Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    StartStopContinue
    • Inject technical feasibility approval step as an input to final approval
    • Simplify business cases
    • Approve low-value projects
    • Take too long in proposal development
    • Quarterly approval meetings
    • Approve resources for proposal development

    INPUT

    • Current project approval workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project approval success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current approval process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Customize the approval steps and describe them at a high level

    2.2.2 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.2, “Project Approval Steps” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to customize the definition of the approval steps for your organization, so that it makes sense for the existing organizational governance structure, culture, and need. Use the results of the start-stop-continue to inform what to customize. Consider the following factors:

    1. Order of steps: given the current decision-making paradigm, does it make sense to reorder the steps?
    2. Dispositions at each step: what are the possible dispositions, and who is accountable for making the dispositions?
    3. Project levels: do all projects require three-step approval before they’re up for prioritization? For example, IT steering committee may wish to be involved only for Level 3 projects and Level 2 projects with significant business impact, and not for Level 1 projects and IT-centric Level 2 projects.
    4. Accountability at each step: who makes the decisions?
    5. Who will handle exceptions? Aim to prevent the new process from being circumvented by vocal stakeholders, but also allow for very urgent requests. A quick win to strike this balance is to clarify who will exercise this discretion.

    INPUT

    • Retrospective of current process (Activity 2.2.1)
    • Project level definition
    • Approval steps in the previous slide

    OUTPUT

    • Customized project approval steps for each project level

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Specify what “approval” really means to manage expectations for what project work can be done and when

    2.2.3 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.2, “Project Approval Steps” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In the old reality, projects were approved and never heard back from again, which effectively gave your stakeholders a blanket default expectation of “declined.” With the new approval process, manage your stakeholder expectations more explicitly by refining your vocabulary around approval.

    Within this, decision makers should view their role in approval as approving that which can and should be done. When a project is approved and slated to backlog, the intention should be to allocate resources to it within the current intake cycle.

    Customize the table to the right with organizationally appropriate definitions, and update your SOP.

    “No” Declined.
    “Not Now” “It’s a good idea, but the time isn’t right. Try resubmitting next intake cycle.”
    “Concept Approval” Approval to add the item to the backlog with the intention of starting it this intake cycle.
    “Preliminary Approval” Approval for consumption of PMO resources to develop a business case.
    “Full Approval” Project is greenlighted and project resources are being allocated to it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Refine the nomenclature. Add context to “approved” and “declined.” Speak in terms of “not now” or “you can have it when these conditions are met.” With clear expectations of the resources required to support each request, you can place accountability for keeping the request alive back on the sponsors.

    Continuously work out a balance between disciplined decision making and “analysis paralysis"

    A graph is depicted to show the relationship between disciplined decision making and analysis paralysis. The sweet spot for disciplined decisions changes between situations and types of decisions.

    A double bar graph is depicted to show the relative effort spent on management practice. The first bar shows that 20% has a high success of portfolio management. 35% has a low success of portfolio management. A caption on the graph: Spending additional time assessing business cases doesn’t necessarily improve success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Estimates that form the basis of business cases are often based on flawed assumptions. Use early project phases or sprints to build working prototypes to test the assumptions on which business cases are built, rather than investing time improving precision of estimates without improving accuracy.

    Right-size project approval process with Info-Tech’s toolbox of deliverables

    Don’t paint every project with the same brush. Choose the right set of information needed for each project level to maximize the throughput of project approval process.

    The next several slides will take you through a series of tools and templates that help guide the production of deliverables. Each deliverable wireframes the required analysis of the proposed project for one step of the approval process, and captures that information in a document. This breaks down the overall work for proposal development into digestible chunks.

    As previously discussed, aim to right-size the approval process rigor for project levels. Not all project levels may call for all steps of approval, or the extent of required analysis within an approval step may differ. This section will conclude by customizing the requirement for deliverables for each project level.

    Tools and Templates for the Project Approval Toolbox

    • Benefits Commitment Form Template (.xlsx) Document the project sponsor’s buy-in and commitment to proposed benefits in a lightweight fashion.
    • Proposed Technology Assessment Tool (.xlsx) Determine the proposed project’s readiness for adoption from a technological perspective.
    • Business Case Templates (.docx) Guide the analysis process for the overall project proposal development in varying levels of detail.

    Use Info-Tech’s lightweight Benefits Commitment Form Template to document the sponsor buy-in and support

    2.2.4 Benefits Commitment Form Template

    Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of project benefits. Therefore, for a project to be approved by a project sponsor, they must buy-in and commit to the proposed benefits.

    Defining project benefits and obtaining project sponsor commitment has been demonstrated to improve the project outcome by providing the focal point of the project up-front. This will help reduce wasted efforts to develop parts of the proposals that are not ultimately needed.

    A double bar graph titled: Benefits realization improves project outcome is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Benefits Commitment Form Template.

    Contents of a Benefits Commitment Form

    • One-sentence highlight of benefits and risks
    • Primary benefit, hard (quantitative) and soft (qualitative)
    • Proposed measurements for metrics
    • Responsible and accountable parties for benefits
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint is shown.

    For further discussion on benefits realization, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Establish the Benefits Realization Process.

    Use Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool to analyze a technology’s readiness for adoption

    2.2.4 Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool

    In some projects, there needs to be an initial idea of what the project might look like. Develop a high-level solution for projects that:

    • Are very different from previous projects.
    • Are fairly complex, or not business as usual.
    • Require adoption of new technology or skill set.

    IT should advise and provide subject matter expertise on the technology requirements to those that ultimately approve the proposed projects, so that they can take into account additional costs or risks that may be borne from it.

    Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool has a series of questions to address eight categories of considerations to determine the project’s technological readiness for adoption. Use this tool to ensure that you cover all the bases, and help you devise alternate solutions if necessary – which will factor into the overall business case development.

    Download Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool is shown.

    Enable project valuation beyond financial metrics with Info-Tech’s Business Case Templates

    2.2.4 Business Case Template (Comprehensive and Fast Track)

    Traditionally, a business case is centered around financial metrics. While monetary benefits and costs are matters of bottom line and important, financial metrics are only part of a project’s value. As the project approval decisions must be based on the holistic comparison of project value, the business case document must capture all the necessary – and only those that are necessary – information to enable it.

    However, completeness of information does not always require comprehensiveness. Allow for flexibility to speed up the process of developing business plan by making a “fast-track” business case template available. This enables the application of the project valuation criteria with all other projects, with right-sized effort.

    Alarming business case statistics

    • Only one-third of companies always prepare a business case for new projects.
    • Nearly 45% of project managers admit they are unclear on the business objectives of their IT projects.

    (Source: Wrike)

    Download Info-Tech’s Comprehensive Business Case Template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Comprehensive Business Case Template is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Fast Track Business Case Template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Fast Track Business Case Template is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Pass on that which is known. Valuable information about projects is lost due to a disconnect between project intake and project initiation, as project managers are typically not brought on board until project is actually approved. This will be discussed more in Phase 3 of this blueprint.

    Document the right-sized effort and documentation required for each project level

    2.2.4 Estimated Time:60-90 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.3, “Project Proposal Deliverables” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to customize the requirements for project proposal deliverables, so that it properly informs each of the approval steps discussed in the previous activity. The deliverables will also shape the work effort required for projects of various levels. Consider the following factors:

    1. Project levels: what deliverables should be required, recommended, or suggested for each of the project levels? How will exceptions be handled, and who will be accountable?
    2. Existing project proposal documents: what existing proposal documents, tools and templates can we leverage for the newly optimized approval steps?
    3. Skills availability: do these tools and templates represent a significant departure from the current state? If so, is there capacity (time and skill) to achieve the desired target state?
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? Do a rough order of estimate for the resource capacity consumed the new deliverable standard.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Process steps (Activity 2.2.2)
    • Current approval workflow(Activity 1.2.1)
    • Artifacts introduced in the previous slides

    OUTPUT

    • Requirement for artifacts and effort for each approval step

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Examine the new project approval workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.2.5 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.1, “Project Approval Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1 2 3 4
    Approval Step Concept Approval Feasibility Approval Business Case Approval Resource Allocation (Prioritization)
    Alignment Focus Business need/ Project Sponsorship Technology

    Organization-wide

    Business need

    Resource capacity

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth hand-off between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project approval (Activities 2.2.2-4)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project approval workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Step 2.3: Prioritize projects to maximize the value of the project portfolio within the constraint of resource capacity

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project prioritization process
    • Optimize your process to maintain resource capacity supply and project demand data
    • Optimize your process to formally make disposition recommendations to appropriate decision makers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this step

    • Retrospective of the current project prioritization process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • Realistic estimate of available resource capacity, in the absence of a resource management practice
    • Optimized process for presenting the decision makers with recommendations and facilitating capacity-constrained steering of the project portfolio
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool for facilitating the prioritization process
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    The availability of staff time is rarely factored into IT project and service delivery commitments

    A lot gets promised and worked on, and staff are always busy, but very little actually gets done – at least not within given timelines or to expected levels of quality.

    Organizations tend to bite off more than they can chew when it comes to project and service delivery commitments involving IT resources.

    While the need for businesses to make an excess of IT commitments is understandable, the impacts of systemically over-allocating IT are clearly negative:

    • Stakeholder relations suffer. Promises are made to the business that can’t be met by IT.
    • IT delivery suffers. Project timelines and quality frequently suffer, and service support regularly lags.
    • Employee engagement suffers. Anxiety and stress levels are consistently high among IT staff, while morale and engagement levels are low.

    76%: 76% of organizations say they have too many projects on the go and an unmanageable and ever-growing backlog of things to get to.

    – Cooper, 2014

    70%: Almost 70% of workers feel as though they have too much work on their plates and not enough time to do it.

    – Reynolds, 2016

    Unconstrained, unmanaged demand leads to prioritization of work based on consequences rather than value

    Problems caused by the organizational tendency to make unrealistic delivery commitments is further complicated by the reality of the matrix environment.

    Today, many IT departments use matrix organization. In this system, demands on a resource’s time come from many directions. While resources are expected to prioritize their work, they lack the authority to formally reject any demand. As a result, unconstrained, unmanaged demand frequently outstrips the supply of work-hours the resource can deliver.

    When this happens, the resource has three options:

    1. Work more hours, typically without compensation.
    2. Choose tasks not to do in a way that minimizes personal consequences.
    3. Diminish work quality to meet quantity demands.

    The result is an unsustainable system for all those involved:

    1. Individual workers cannot meet expectations, leading to frustration and disengagement.
    2. Managers cannot deliver on the projects or services they manage and struggle to retain skilled resources who are looking elsewhere for “greener pastures.”
    3. Executives cannot execute strategic plans as they lose decision-making power over their resources.

    Prioritize project demand by project value to get the most out of constrained project capacity – but practicing it is difficult

    The theory may be simple and intuitive, but the practice is extremely challenging. There are three practical challenges to making project prioritization effective.

    Project Prioritization

    Capacity awareness

    Many IT departments struggle to realistically estimate available project capacity in a credible way. Stakeholders question the validity of your endeavor to install capacity-constrained intake process, and mistake it for unwillingness to cooperate instead.

    Lack of authority

    Many PMOs and IT departments simply lack the ability to decline or defer new projects.

    Many moving parts

    Project intake, approval, and prioritization involve the coordination of various departments. Therefore, they require a great deal of buy-in and compliance from multiple stakeholders and senior executives.

    Project Approval

    Unclear definition of value

    Defining the project value is difficult, because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right. However, without it, it's impossible to fairly compare among projects to select what's "best."

    Unclear definition of value

    In Step 1.1 of the blueprint, we took the first step toward resolving this challenge by prototyping a project valuation scorecard.

    A screenshot of Step 1.1 of this blueprint is shown.

    "Prioritization is a huge issue for us. We face the simultaneous challenges of not having enough resources but also not having a good way to say no. "

    – CIO, governmental health agency

    Address the challenges of capacity awareness and authority with a project prioritization workflow

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing project prioritization.

    1. Collect and update supply and demand data
      1. Re-evaluate project value for all proposed, on-hold and ongoing projects
      2. Estimate available resource capacity for projects
    2. Prioritize project demand by value
      1. Identify highest-value, “slam-dunk” projects
      2. Identify medium-value, “on-the-bubble” projects
      3. Identify lower-value projects that lie beyond the available capacity
    3. Approve projects for initiation or continuation
      1. Submit recommendations for review
      2. Adjust prioritized list with business judgment
      3. Steering committee approves projects to work on
    4. Manage a realistically defined project portfolio
    • Stakeholder Need
    • Strategic Objectives
    • Resource Capacity

    Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.3.1 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Optimizing project prioritization may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1. On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3. As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2. Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4. Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Periodically review the project value scorecard with business stakeholders
    • “Loud Voices First” prioritization
    • Post-prioritization score changes
    • Updating project value scores for current projects

    INPUT

    • Current project prioritization workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project prioritization success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current prioritization process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Use Info-Tech’s lightweight Intake and Prioritization Tool to get started on capacity-constrained project prioritization

    Use Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool to facilitate the scorecard-driven prioritization and ensure effective flow of data.

    This tool builds on the Project Valuation Scorecard Tool to address the challenges in project prioritization:

    1. Lack of capacity awareness: quickly estimate a realistic supply of available work hours for projects for a given prioritization period, in the absence of a reliable and well-maintained resource utilization and capacity data.
    2. Using standard project sizing, quickly estimate the size of the demand for proposed and ongoing projects and produce a report that recommends the list of projects to greenlight – and highlight the projects within that list that are at risk of being short-charged of resources – that will aim to help you tackle:

    3. Lack of authority to say “no” or “not yet” to projects: save time and effort in presenting the results of project prioritization analysis that will enable the decision makers to make well-informed, high-quality portfolio decisions.
    4. The next several slides will walk you through the tool and present activities to facilitate its use for your organization.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Prioritization Tool is shown.

    Create a high-level estimate of available project capacity to inform how many projects can be greenlighted

    2.3.2 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 2: Project Capacity

    Estimate how many work-hours are at your disposal for projects using Info-Tech’s resource calculator.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 2: Project Capacity

    1. Compile a list of each role within your department, the number of staff, and the hours in a typical work week.

    2. Enter the foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.). Typically, this value is 12-16% depending on the region.

    3. Enter how much working time is spent on non-projects for each role: administrative duties and “keep the lights on” work.

    4. Select a period of time for breaking down available resource capacity in hours.

    Project Work (%): Percentage of your working time that goes toward project work is calculated as what’s left after your non-project working time allocations have been subtracted.

    Project (h) Total Percentage: Take a note of this percentage as your project capacity. This number will put the estimated project demand in context for the rest of the tool.

    Example for a five-day work week:

    • 2 weeks (10 days) of statutory holidays
    • 3 weeks of vacation
    • 1.4 weeks (7 days) of sick days on average
    • 1 week (5 days) for company holidays

    Result: 7.4/52 weeks’ absence = 14%

    Estimate your available project capacity for the next quarter, half-year, or year

    2.3.2 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Discover how many work-hours are at your disposal for project work.

    1. Use the wisdom-of-the-crowd approach or resource utilization data to fill out Tab 2 of the tool. This is intended to be somewhat of a rough estimate; avoid the pitfall of being too granular in role or in time split.
    2. Choose a time period that corresponds to your project prioritization period: monthly, quarterly, 4 months, semi-annually (6 months), or annually.
    3. Examine the pie graph representation of your overall capacity breakdown, like the one shown below.

    Screenshot from Tab 2 of Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    INPUT

    • Knowledge of organization’s personnel and their distribution of time

    OUTPUT

    • Estimate of available project capacity

    Materials

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    On average, only about half of the available project capacity results in productive project work

    Place realistic expectations on your resources’ productivity.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic

    Use the wisdom of the crowd to estimate resource waste in:

    • Cancelled projects
    • Inefficiency
    • Suboptimal assignment of resources
    • Unassigned resources
    • Analyzing, fixing, and redeploying

    50% of PPM resource is wasted on average, effectively halving your available project capacity.

    Source: Info-Tech PPM Current State Scorecard

    Define project capacity and project t-shirt sizes

    2.3.3 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 3: Settings

    The resource capacity calculator in the previous tab yields a likely optimistic estimate for how much project capacity is available. Based on this estimate as a guide, enter your optimistic (maximum) and pessimistic (minimum) estimates of project capacity as a percentage of total capacity:

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Info-Tech’s data shows that only about 50% of time spent on project work is wasted: cancelled projects, inefficiency, rework, etc. As a general rule, enter half of your maximum estimate of your project capacity.

    Capacity in work hours is shown here from the previous tab, to put the percentages in context. This example shows a quarterly breakdown (Step 4 from the previous slide; cell N5 in Tab 2.).

    Next, estimate the percentage of your maximum estimated project capacity that a single project would typically consume in the given period for prioritization.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    These project sizes might not line up with the standard project levels from Step 2.1 of the blueprint: for example, an urgent mid-sized project that requires all hands on deck may need to consume almost 100% of maximum available project capacity.

    Estimate available project capacity and standard project demand sizes for prioritizing project demand

    2.3.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Refine your estimates of project capacity supply and demand as it applies to a prioritization period.

    1. The estimated project capacity from Activity 2.3.2 represents a theoretical limit. It is most likely an overestimation (see box below). As a group, discuss and decide on a more realistic available project capacity:
      1. Optimistic estimate, assuming sustained peak productivity from everyone in your organization;
      2. Pessimistic estimate, taking into account the necessary human downtime and the PPM resource waste (see previous slide).
    2. Refine the choices of standard project effort sizes, expressed as percentages of maximum project capacity. As a reminder, this sizing is for the chosen prioritization period, and is independent from the project levels set previously in Activity 2.1.4 and 2.1.5.

    Dedicated work needs dedicated break time

    In a study conducted by the Draugiem Group, the ideal work-to-break ratio for maximizing focus and productivity was 52 minutes of work, followed by 17 minutes of rest (Evans). This translates to 75% of resource capacity yielding productive work, which could inform your optimistic estimate of project capacity.

    INPUT

    • Project capacity (Activity 2.3.2)
    • PPM Current State Scorecard (optional)

    OUTPUT

    • Capacity and demand estimate data for tool use

    Materials

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Finish setting up the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    2.3.4 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 3: Settings

    Enter the scoring criteria, which was worked out from Step 1.1 of the blueprint. This workbook supports up to ten scoring criteria; use of more than ten may make the prioritization step unwieldy.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Leave unused criteria rows blank.

    Choose “value” or “execution” from a drop-down.

    Score does not need to add up to 100.

    Finally, set up the rest of the drop-downs used in the next tab, Project Data. These can be customized to fit your unique project portfolio needs.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Enter project data into the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    2.3.4 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 4: Project Data

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 4

    Ensure that each project has a unique name.

    Completed (or cancelled) projects will not be included in prioritization.

    Choose the standard project size defined in the previous tab.

    Change the heading when you customize the workbook.

    Days in Backlog is calculated from the Date Added column.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 4

    Overall weighted project prioritization score is calculated as a sum of value and execution scores.

    Weighted value and execution scores are calculated according to the scoring criteria table in the 2. Settings tab.

    Enter the raw scores. Weights will be taken into calculation behind the scenes.

    Spaces for unused intake scores will be greyed out. You can enter data, but they will not affect the calculated scores.

    Document your process to maintain resource capacity supply and project demand data

    2.3.4 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.2, “Maintain Supply and Demand Data” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to document the process with which the supply and demand information will be updated for projects. Consider the following factors:

    1. Estimates of resource supply: how often will the resource supply be updated? How are you estimating the range (maximum vs. minimum, optimistic vs. pessimistic)? Leverage your existing organizational process assets for resource management.
    2. Updating project data for proposed projects: when and how often will the project valuation scores be updated? Do you have sufficient inputs? Examine the overall project approval process from Step 2.2 of the blueprint, and ensure that sufficient information is available for project valuation (Activity 2.2.3).
    3. Updating project data for ongoing projects: will you prioritize ongoing projects along with proposed projects? When and how often will the project valuation scores be updated? Do you have sufficient inputs?
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? Do a rough order of estimate for the resource capacity consumed in this process.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Organizational process assets for resource management, strategic planning, etc.
    • Activity 2.3.3
    • Activity 2.2.3

    OUTPUT

    • Process steps for refreshing supply and demand data

    Materials

    • SOP Template
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Prioritized list of projects shows what fits under available project capacity for realizing maximum value

    2.3.5 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 5: Results

    The output of the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool is a prioritized list of projects with indicators to show that their demand on project capacity will fit within the estimated available project capacity for the prioritization period.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Status indicates whether the project is proposed or ongoing; completed projects are excluded.

    Disposition indicates the course of recommended action based on prioritization.

    Proposed projects display how long they have been sitting in the backlog.

    Projects highlighted yellow are marked as “deliberate” for their dispositions. These projects pose risks of not getting properly resourced. One must proceed with caution if they are to be initiated or continued.

    Provide better support to decision makers with the prioritized list, and be prepared for their steering

    It is the portfolio manager’s responsibility to provide the project portfolio owners with reliable data and enable them to make well-informed decisions for the portfolio.

    The prioritized list of proposed and ongoing projects, and an approximate indication for how they fill out the estimated available resource capacity, provide a meaningful starting ground for discussion on which projects to continue or initiate, to hold, or to proceed with caution.

    However, it is important to recognize the limitation of the prioritization methodology. There may be legitimate reasons why some projects should be prioritized over another that the project valuation method does not successfully capture. At the end of the day, it’s the prerogative of the portfolio owners who carry on the accountabilities to steer the portfolio.

    The portfolio manager has a responsibility to be prepared for reconciling the said steering with the unchanged available resource capacity for project work. What comes off the list of projects to continue or initiate? Or, will we outsource capacity if we must meet irreconcilable demand? The next slide will show how Info-Tech’s tool helps you with this process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Strive to become the best co-pilot. Constantly iterate on the scoring criteria to better adapt to the portfolio owners’ preference in steering the project portfolio.

    Manipulate the prioritized list with the Force Disposition list

    2.3.5 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 5: Results

    The Force Disposition list enables you to inject subjective judgment in project prioritization. Force include and outsource override project prioritization scores and include the projects for approval:

    • Force include counts the project demand against capacity.
    • Outsource, on the other hand, does not count the project demand.
    • Force exclude removes a project from prioritized list altogether, without deleting the row and losing its data.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Choose a project name and a disposition using a drop-down.

    Use this list to test out various scenarios, useful for what-if analysis.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Document your process to formally make disposition recommendations to appropriate decision-making party

    2.3.5 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.3, “Approve projects for initiation or continuation” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to formalize the process of presenting the prioritized list of projects for review, modify the list based on steering decisions, and obtain the portfolio owners’ approval for projects to initiate or continue, hold, or terminate. Consider the following factors:

    1. Existing final approval process: what are the new injections to the current decision-making process for final approval?
    2. Meeting prep, agenda, and follow-up: what are the activities that must be carried out by PMO / portfolio manager to support the portfolio decision makers and obtain final approval?
    3. “Deliberate” projects: what additional information should portfolio owners be presented with, in order to deliberate on the projects at risk of being not properly resourced? For example, consider a value-execution plot (right).

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    INPUT

    • Approval process steps (Activity 2.2.2)
    • Steering Committee process documentation

    OUTPUT

    • Activities for supporting the decision-making body

    Materials

    • SOP Template
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Once a project is approved, pass that which is known on to those responsible for downstream processes

    Aim to be responsible stewards of important and costly information developed throughout project intake, approval, and prioritization processes.

    Once the proposed project is given a green light, the project enters an initiation phase.

    No matter what project management methodology is employed, it is absolutely vital to pass on the knowledge gained and insights developed through the intake, approval, and prioritization processes. This ensures that the project managers and team are informed of the project’s purpose, business benefits, rationale for the project approval, etc. and be able to focus their efforts in realizing the project’s business goals.

    Recognize that this does not aim to create any new artifacts. It is simply a procedural safeguard against the loss of important and costly information assets for your organization.

    A flowchart is shown as an example of business documents leading to the development of a project charter.

    Information from the intake process directly feeds into, for example, developing a project charter.

    Source: PMBOK, 6th edition

    "If the project manager can connect strategy to the project they are leading (and therefore the value that the organization desires by sanctioning the project), they can ensure that the project is appropriately planned and managed to realize those benefits."

    – Randall T. Black, P.Eng., PMP; source: PMI Today

    Examine the new project intake workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.3.6 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.1, “Project Prioritization Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1. Collect and update supply and demand data
    2. Prioritize project demand by value
    3. Approve projects for initiation or continuation
    4. Manage a realistically defined project portfolio

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth handoff between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project prioritization (Activities 2.3.x-y)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project prioritization workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Leverage Info-Tech’s other blueprints to complement your project prioritization processes

    The project capacity estimates overlook a critical piece of the resourcing puzzle for the sake of simplicity: skills. You need the right skills at the right time for the right project.

    Use Info-Tech’s Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint to enhance the quality of information on your project supply.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint.

    There is more to organizing your project portfolio than a strict prioritization by project value. For example, as with a financial investment portfolio, project portfolio must achieve the right investment mix to balance your risks and leverage opportunities.

    Use Info-Tech’s Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint to refine the makeup of your project portfolio.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint.

    Continuous prioritization of projects allow organizations to achieve portfolio responsiveness.

    Use Info-Tech’s Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint to take prioritization of your project portfolio to the next level.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint

    46% of organizations use a homegrown PPM solution. Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint debuts a spreadsheet-based Portfolio Manager tool that provides key functionalities that integrates those of the Intake and Prioritization Tool with resource management, allocation and portfolio reporting capabilities.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A picture of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.2-6

    A screenshot of activities 2.1.2-6 is shown.

    Optimize your process to receive, triage, and follow up on project requests

    Discussion on decision points and topics of consideration will be facilitated to leverage the diverse viewpoints amongst the workshop participants.

    2.3.2-5

    A screenshot of activities 2.3.2-5 is shown.

    Set up a capacity-informed project prioritization process using Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    A table-top planning exercise helps you visualize the current process in place and identify opportunities for optimization.

    Phase 3

    Integrate the New Optimized Processes into Practice

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Integrate the New Optimized Processes into Practice

    Proposed Time to Completion: 6-12 weeks

    Step 3.1: Pilot your process to refine it prior to rollout

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the proposed intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select receptive stakeholders to work with
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Document lessons learned and create an action plan for any changes

    With these tools & templates:

    • Process Pilot Plan
    • Project Backlog Manager Job Description

    Step 3.2: Analyze the impact of organizational change

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Results of the process pilot and the finalized intake SOP
    • Key PPM stakeholders
    • Current organizational climate

    Then complete these activities…

    • Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change
    • Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders to create an effective communication plan

    With these tools & templates:

    • Intake Process Implementation Impact Analysis Tool

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    • Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Step 3.1: Pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select receptive managers to work with during your pilot
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Plan to obtain feedback, document lessons learned, and create an action plan for any changes
    • Finalize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A pilot team
    • A process pilot plan that defines the scope, logistics, and process for retrospection
    • Project Backlog Manager job description
    • Finalized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP for rollout

    Pilot your new processes to test feasibility and address issues before a full deployment

    Adopting the right set of practices requires a significant degree of change that necessitates buy-in from varied stakeholders throughout IT and the business.

    Rome wasn’t built in a day. Similarly, benefits of optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process will not be realized overnight.

    Resist the urge to deploy a big-bang roll out of your new intake practices. The approach is ill advised for two main reasons:

    • It will put more of a strain on the implementation team in the near term, with a larger pool of end users to train and collect data from.
    • Putting untested practices in a department-wide spotlight could lead to mass confusion in the near-term and color the new processes in a negative light, leading to a loss of stakeholder trust and engagement right out-of-the-gate.

    Start with a pilot phase. Identify receptive lines of business and IT resources to work with, and leverage their insights to help iron out the kinks in your process before unveiling your practices to IT and all business users at large.

    This step will help you to:

    • Plan and execute a pilot of the processes we developed in Phase 2.
    • Incorporate the lessons learned from that pilot to strengthen your SOP and ease the communication process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Plan your pilot like you would any project to ensure it’s well defined and its goals are clearly articulated

    Use Info-Tech’s Intake Process Pilot Plan Template to help define the scope of your pilot and set appropriate goals for the test-run of your new processes.

    A process pilot is a limited scope of an implementation (constrained by time and resources involved) in order to test the viability and effectiveness of the process as it has been designed.

    • Investing time and energy into a pilot phase can help to lower implementation risk, enhance the details and steps within a process, and improve stakeholder relations prior to a full scale rollout.
    • More than a dry run, however, a pilot should be approached strategically, and planned out to limit the scope of it and achieve specific outcomes.
    • Leverage a planning document to ensure your process pilot is grounded in a common set of definitions, that the pilot is delivering value and insight, and that ultimately the pilot can serve as a starting point for a full-scale process implementation.

    Download Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Process Pilot Plan Template is shown.

    "The advantages to a pilot are several. First, risk is constrained. Pilots are closely monitored so if a problem does occur, it can be fixed immediately. Second, the people working in the pilot can become trainers as you roll the process out to the rest of the organization. Third, the pilot is another opportunity for skeptics to visit the pilot process and learn from those working in it. There’s nothing like seeing a new process working for people to change their minds."

    Daniel Madison

    Select receptive stakeholders to work with during your pilot

    3.1.1 Estimated Time: 20-60 minutes

    Info-Tech recommends selecting PPM stakeholders who are aware of your role and some of the challenges in project intake, approval, and prioritization to assist in the implementation process.

    1. If receptive PPM stakeholders are known, schedule a 15-minute meeting with them to inquire if they would be willing to be part of the pilot process.
    2. If receptive project managers are not known, use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to conduct a formal selection process.
      1. Enter a list of potential participants for pilot in tab 3.
      2. Rate project managers in terms of influence, pilot interest, and potential deployment contribution within tab 4.
      3. Review tab 5 in the workbook. Receptive PPM stakeholders will appear in the top quadrants. Ideal PPM stakeholders for the pilot are located in the top right quadrant of the graph.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Stakeholder Engagement Workbook Tab 5 is shown.

    INPUT

    • Project portfolio management stakeholders (Activity 1.2.3)

    OUTPUT

    • Pilot project team

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • CIO (optional)

    Document the PPM stakeholders involved in your pilot in Section 3 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics

    3.1.2 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template to design the details of your pilot.

    Investing time into planning your pilot phase strategically will ensure a clear scope, better communications for those piloting the processes, and – overall – better, more actionable results for the pilot phase. The Pilot Plan Template is broken into five sections to assist in these goals:

    • Pilot Overview and Scope
    • Success and Risk Factors
    • Stakeholders Involved and Communications Plan
    • Pilot Retrospective and Feedback Protocol

    The duration of your pilot should go at least one prioritization period, e.g. one to two quarters.

    Estimates of time commitments should be captured for each stakeholder. During the retrospective at the end of the pilot you should capture actuals to help determine the time-cost of the process itself and measure its sustainability.

    Once the Plan Template is completed, schedule time to share and communicate it with the pilot team and executive sponsors of the process.

    While you should invest time in this planning document, continue to lean on the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP throughout the pilot phase.

    INPUT

    • Sections 1 through 4 of the Process Pilot Plan Template

    OUTPUT

    • A process pilot plan

    Materials

    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Execute your pilot and prepare to make process revisions before the full rollout

    Hit play! Begin the process pilot and get familiar with the work routine and resource management solution.

    Some things to keep in mind during the pilot include:

    • Depending on the solution you are using, you will likely need to spend one day or less to populate the tool. During the pilot, measure the time and effort required to manage the data within the tool. Determine whether time and effort required is viable on an ongoing basis (i.e. can you do it every month or quarter) and has value.
    • Meet with the pilot team and other stakeholders regularly during the pilot, at least biweekly. Allow the team (and yourself) to speak honestly and openly about what isn’t working. The pilot is your chance to make things better.
    • Keep notes about what will need to change in the SOP. For major changes, you may have to tweak the process during the pilot itself. Update the process documents as needed and communicate the changes and why they’re being made. If required, update the scope of the pilot in the Pilot Plan Template.
    An example is shown on how to begin the process pilot and getting familiar with the work routine and resource management solution.

    Obtain feedback from the pilot group to improve your processes before a wider rollout

    3.1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Pilot projects allow you to validate your assumptions and leverage lessons learned. During the planning of the pilot, you should have scheduled a retrospective meeting with the pilot team to formally assess strengths and weaknesses in the process you have drafted.

    • Schedule the retrospective shortly after the pilot is completed. Info-Tech recommends performing a Stop/Start/Continue meeting with pilot participants to obtain and capture feedback.
    • Have members of the meeting record any processes/activities on sticky notes that should:
      • Stop: because they are ineffective or not useful
      • Start: because they would be useful for the tool and have not been incorporated into current processes
      • Continue: because they are useful and positively contribute to intended process outcomes.

    An example of how to structure a Stop/Start/Continue activity on a whiteboard using sticky notes.

    An example of stop, start, and continue is activity is shown.

    INPUT

    • What’s working and what isn’t in the process

    OUTPUT

    • Ideas to improve process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • Process owner (PMO director or portfolio owner)
    • Pilot team

    See the following slide for additional instructions.

    Document lessons learned and create an action plan for any changes to the processes

    3.1.4 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    An example of stop, start, and continue is activity is shown.

    As a group, discuss everyone’s responses and organize according to top priority (mark with a 1) and lower priority/next steps (mark with a 2). At this point, you can also remove any sticky notes that are repetitive or no longer relevant.

    Once you have organized based on priority, be sure to come to a consensus with the group regarding which actions to take. For example, if the group agrees that they should “stop holding meetings weekly,” come to a consensus regarding how often meetings will be held, i.e. monthly.

    Priority Action Required Who is Responsible Implementation Date
    Stop: Holding meetings weekly Hold meetings monthly Jane Doe, PMO Next Meeting: August 1, 2017
    Start: Discussing backlog during meetings Ensure that backlog data is up to date for discussion on date of next meeting. John Doe, Portfolio Manager August 1, 2017

    Create an action plan for the top priority items that require changes (the Stops and Starts). Record in this slide, or your preferred medium. Be sure to include who is responsible for the action and the date that it will be implemented.

    Document the outcomes of the start/stop/continue and your action plan in Section 6 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Backlog Manager Job Description Template to help fill any staffing needs around data maintenance

    3.1 Project Backlog Manager Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Backlog Manager job description template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your intake, approval, and prioritization strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Backlog Manager job description template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Backlog Manager template is shown.

    Finalize the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP and prepare to communicate your processes

    Once you’ve completed the pilot process and made the necessary tweaks, you should finalize your Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP and prepare to communicate it.

    Update section 1.2, “Overall Process Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template with the new process flow.

    Revisit your SOP from Phase 2 and ensure it has been updated to reflect the process changes that were identified in activity 3.1.4.

    • If during the pilot process the data was too difficult or time consuming to maintain, revisit the dimensions you have chosen and choose dimensions that are easier to accurately maintain. Tweak your process steps in the SOP accordingly.
    • In the long term, if you are not observing any progress toward achieving your success criteria, revisit the impact analysis that we’ll prepare in step 3.2 and address some of these inhibitors to organizational change.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP template.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make your SOP high impact. SOPs are often at risk of being left unmaintained and languishing in disuse. Improve the SOP’s succinctness and usability by making it visual; consult Info-Tech’s blueprint, Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind.

    Step 3.2: Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change
    • Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders
    • Set the course of action for communicating changes to your stakeholders

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A thorough organizational change impact analysis, based on Info-Tech’s expertise in organizational change management
    • Message canvases and communication plan for your stakeholders
    • Go-live for the new intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Manage key PPM stakeholders and communicate changes

    • Business units: Projects are undertaken to provide value to the business. Senior management from business units must help define how project will be valued.
    • IT: IT must ensure that technical/practical considerations are taken into account when determining project value.
    • Finance: The CFO or designated representative will ensure that estimated project costs and benefits can be used to manage the budget.
    • PMO: PMO is the administrator of the project portfolio. PMO must provide coordination and support to ensure the process operates smoothly and its goals are realized.
    • Business analysts: BAs carry out the evaluation of project value. Therefore, their understanding of the evaluation criteria and the process as a whole are critical to the success of the process.
    • Project sponsors: Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of benefits for which projects are undertaken.

    Impacts will be felt differently by different stakeholders and stakeholder groups

    As you assess change impacts, keep in mind that no impact will be felt the same across the organization. Depth of impact can vary depending on the frequency (will the impact be felt daily, weekly, monthly?), the actions necessitated by it (e.g. will it change the way the job is done or is it simply a minor process tweak?), and the anticipated response of the stakeholder (support, resistance, indifference?).

    Use the Organizational Change Depth Scale below to help visualize various depths of impact. The deeper the impact, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Procedural change involves changes to explicit procedures, rules, policies, processes, etc. Behavioral change is similar to procedural change, but goes deeper to involve the changing tacit or unconscious habits. Interpersonal change goes beyond behavioral change to involve changing relationships, teams, locations, reporting structures, and other social interactions. Vocational change requires acquiring new knowledge and skills, and accepting the loss or decline in the value or relevance of previously acquired knowledge and skills. Cultural change goes beyond interpersonal and vocational change to involve changing personal values, social norms, and assumptions about the meaning of good vs. bad or right vs. wrong.
    Example: providing sales reps with mobile access to the CRM application to let them update records from the field. Example: requiring sales reps to use tablets equipped with a custom mobile application for placing orders from the field. Example: migrating sales reps to work 100% remotely. Example: migrating technical support staff to field service and sales support roles. Example: changing the operating model to a more service-based value proposition or focus.

    Perform a change impact analysis to maximize the chances of adoption for the new intake process

    Invest time and effort to analyze the impact of change to create an actionable stakeholder communication plan that yields the desirable result: adoption.

    Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint offers the OCM Impact Analysis Tool to helps document the change impact across multiple dimensions, enabling the project team to review the analysis with others to ensure that the most important impacts are captured.

    This tool has been customized for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process to deliver the same result in a more streamlined way. The next several slides will take you through the activities to ultimately create an OCM message canvas and a communication plan for your key stakeholders.

    Download Info-Tech’s Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool is shown.

    "As a general principle, project teams should always treat every stakeholder initially as a recipient of change. Every stakeholder management plan should have, as an end goal, to change recipients’ habits or behaviors."

    -PMI, 2015

    Set up the Intake Process and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    3.2.1 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 2-3

    In Tab 2, enter your stakeholders’ names. Represent stakeholders as a group if you expect the impact of change on them to be reasonably uniform, as well as their anticipated responses. Otherwise, consider adding them as individuals or subgroups.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 2 is shown.

    In Tab 3, enter whether you agree or disagree with each statement that represents an element of organizational change that be introduced as the newly optimized intake process is implemented.

    As a result of the change initiative in question:

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 3 is shown.

    Analyze the impact and the anticipated stakeholder responses of each change

    3.2.1 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 4: Impact Analysis Inputs

    Each change statement that you agreed with in Tab 3 are listed here in Tab 4 of the Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool. For each stakeholder, estimate and enter the following data:

    1. Frequency of the Impact: how often will the impact of the change be felt?
    2. Effort Associated with Impact: what is the demand on a stakeholder’s effort to implement the change?
    3. Anticipated Response: rate from enthusiastic response to active subversion. Honest and realistic estimates of anticipated responses are critical to the rest of the impact analysis.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 4 is shown.

    Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change as a group

    3.2.1 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Divide and conquer. Leverage the group to get through the seemingly daunting amount of work involved with impact analysis.

    1. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign a section of the impact analysis. It may be helpful to do one section together as a group to make sure everyone is roughly on the same page for assessing impact.
    2. Suggested ways to divide up the impact analysis include:

    • By change impact. This would be suitable when the process owners (or would-be process owners) are available and participating.
    • By stakeholders. This would be suitable for large organizations where the activity participants know some stakeholders better than others.

    Tip: use a spreadsheet tool that supports multi-user editing (e.g. Google Sheets, Excel Online).

  • Aggregate the completed work and benchmark one another’s analysis by reviewing them with the entire group.
  • INPUT

    • Organizational and stakeholder knowledge
    • Optimized intake process

    OUTPUT

    • Estimates of stakeholder-specific impact and response

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Insight

    Beware of bias. Groups are just as susceptible to producing overly optimistic or pessimistic analysis as individuals, just in different ways. Unrealistic change impact analysis will compromise your chances of arriving at a reasonable, tactful stakeholder communication plan.

    Examine your impact analysis report

    3.2.2 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5: Impact Analysis Outputs

    These outputs are based on the impacts you analyzed in Tab 4 of the tool (Activity 3.2.1). They are organized in seven sections:

    1. Top Five Highest Risk Impacts, based on the frequency and effort inputs across all impacts.
    2. Overall Process Adoption Rating (top right), showing the overall difficulty of this change given likelihood/risk that the stakeholders involved will absorb the anticipated change impacts.
    3. Top Five Most Impacted Stakeholders, based on the frequency and effort inputs across all impacts.
    4. Top Five Process Supporters and;
    5. Top Five Process Resistors, based on the anticipated response inputs across all impacts.
    6. Impact Register (bottom right): this list breaks down each change’s likelihood of adoption.
    7. Potential Impacts to Watch Out For: this list compiles all of the "Don't Know" responses from Tab 3.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5 is shown. It shows Section 2. Overall process adoption rating. A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5 is shown. It shows Section 6. Impact Register.

    Tailor messages for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders with Info-Tech’s Message Canvas

    3.2.2 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 6: Message Canvas

    Use Info-Tech’s Message Canvas on this tab to help rationalize and elaborate the change vision for each group.

    Elements of a Message Canvas

    • Why is there a need for this process change?
    • What will be new for this audience?
    • What will go away for this audience?
    • What will be meaningfully unchanged for this audience?
    • How will this change benefit this audience?
    • When and how will the benefits be realized for this audience?
    • What does this audience have to do for this change to succeed?
    • What does this audience have to stop doing for this change to succeed?
    • What should this audience continue doing?
    • What support will this audience receive to help manage the transition?
    • What should this audience expect to do/happen next?

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 6 is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change thy language, change thyself.

    Jargon, acronyms, and technical terms represent deeply entrenched cultural habits and assumptions.

    Continuing to use jargon or acronyms after a transition tends to drag people back to old ways of thinking and working.

    You don’t need to invent a new batch of buzzwords for every change (nor should you), but every change is an opportunity to listen for words and phrases that have lost their meaning through overuse and abuse.

    Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders as a group

    3.2.2 Estimated Time: 90-120 minutes

    1. Decide on the number of message canvases to complete. This will be based on the number of at-risk change impacts and stakeholders.
    2. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign a section of the message canvas. It may be helpful to do one section together as a group to make sure everyone is roughly on the same page for assessing impact.
    3. Aggregate the completed work and benchmark the message canvases amongst subgroups.

    Remember these guidelines to help your messages resonate:

    • People are busy and easily distracted. Tell people what they really need to know first, before you lose their attention.
    • Repetition is good. Remember the Aristotelian triptych: “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    • Don’t use technical terms, jargon, or acronyms. Different groups in organizations tend to develop specialized vocabularies. Everybody grows so accustomed to using acronyms and jargon every day that it becomes difficult to notice how strange it sounds to outsiders. This is especially important when IT communicates with non-technical audiences. Don’t alienate your audience by talking at them in a strange language.
    • Test your message. Run focus groups or deliver communications to a test audience (which could be as simple as asking 2–3 people to read a draft) before delivering messages more broadly.

    – Info-Tech Blueprint, Drive Organizational Change from the PMO

    INPUT

    • Impact Analysis Outputs
    • Organizational and stakeholder knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Estimates of stakeholder-specific impact and response

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Distill the message canvases into a comprehensive communication plan

    3.2.3 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication Plan

    The communication plan creates an action plan around the message canvases to coordinate the responsibilities of delivering them, so the risks of “dropping the ball” on your stakeholders are minimized.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication is shown.

    1. Choose a change impact from a drop-down menu.

    2. Choose an intended audience...

    … and the message canvas to reference.

    3. Choose the method of delivery. It will influence how to craft the message for the stakeholder.

    4. Indicate who is responsible for creating and communicating the message.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication is shown.

    5. Briefly indicate goal of the communication and the likelihood of success.

    6. Record the dates to plan and track the communications that take place.

    Set the course of action for communicating changes to your stakeholders

    3.2.2 Estimated Time: 90-120 minutes

    1. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign communication topics to each group. There should be one communication topic for each change impact. Based on the message canvas, create a communication plan draft.
    2. Aggregate the completed work and benchmark the communication topic amongst subgroups.
    3. Share the finished communication plan with the rest of the working group. Do not share this file widely, but keep it private within the group.

    Identify critical points in the change curve:

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: There is usually tentative support and even enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): As change approaches or begins, people realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or the speed at which benefits will be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Eventually, sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: People become more optimistic and supportive when they begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    Based on Don Kelley and Daryl Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.

    INPUT

    • Change impact analysis results
    • Message canvases
    • List of stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • Communication Plan

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Roll out the optimized intake, approval, and prioritization process, and continually monitor adoption and success

    As you implement your new project intake process, familiarize yourself with common barriers and challenges.

    There will be challenges to watch for in evaluating the effectiveness of your intake processes. These may include circumvention of process by key stakeholders, re-emergence of off-the-grid projects and low-value initiatives.

    As a quick and easy way to periodically assess your processes, consider the following questions:

    • Are you confident that all work in progress is being tracked via the project list?
    • Are your resources all currently working on high-value initiatives?
    • Since optimizing, have you been able to deliver (or are you on target to deliver) all that has been approved, with no initiatives in states of suspended animation for long periods of time?
    • Thanks to sufficient portfolio visibility and transparency into your capacity, have you been able to successfully decline requests that did not add value or that did not align with resourcing?

    If you answer “no” to any of these questions after a sufficient post-implementation period (approximately six to nine months, depending on the scope of your optimizing), you may need to tweak certain aspects of your processes or seek to align your optimization with a lower capability level in the short term.

    Small IT department struggles to optimize intake and to communicate new processes to stakeholders

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Government

    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Challenge

    There is an IT department for a large municipal government. Possessing a relatively low level of PPM maturity, IT is in the process of establishing more formal intake practices in order to better track, and respond to, project requests. New processes include a minimalist request form (sent via email) coupled with more thorough follow-up from BAs and PMs to determine business value, ROI, and timeframes.

    Solution

    Even with new user-friendly processes in place, IT struggles to get stakeholders to adopt, especially with smaller initiatives. These smaller requests frequently continue to come in outside of the formal process and, because of this, are often executed outside of portfolio oversight. Without good, reliable data around where staff time is spent, IT lacks the authority to decline new requests.

    Results

    IT is seeking further optimization through better communication. They are enforcing discipline on stakeholders and reiterating that all initiatives, regardless of size, need to be directed through the process. IT is also training its staff to be more critical. “Don’t just start working on an initiative because a stakeholder asks.” With staff being more critical and directing requests through the proper queues, IT is getting better at tracking and prioritizing requests.

    "The biggest challenge when implementing the intake process was change management. We needed to shift our focus from responding to requests to strategically thinking about how requests should be managed. The intake process allows the IT Department to be transparent to customers and enables decision makers."

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A picture of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1

    A screenshot of activity 3.1.1 is shown

    Select receptive stakeholders to work with during your pilot

    Identify the right team of supportive PPM stakeholders to carry out the process pilot. Strategies to recruit the right people outside the workshop will be discussed if appropriate.

    3.2.1

    A screenshot of activity 3.2.1 is shown.

    Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change

    Carry out a thorough analysis of change impact in order to maximize the effectiveness of the communication strategy in support of the implementation of the optimized process.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

    Insight 2

    • Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

    Insight 3

    • Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Triple constraint model of project portfolio: stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity
    • Benefits of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization for managing a well-behaved project portfolio
    • Challenges of installing well-run project intake
    • Importance of piloting the process and communicating impacts to stakeholders

    Processes Optimized

    • Project valuation process: scorecard, weights
    • Project intake process: reception, triaging, follow-up
    • Project approval process: steps, accountabilities, deliverables
    • Project prioritization process: estimation of resource capacity for projects, project demand
    • Communication for organizational change

    Deliverables Completed

    • Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the form of a Standard Operating Procedure
    • Project valuation criteria, developed with Project Value Scorecard Development Tool and implemented through the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool
    • Standardized project request form with right-sized procedural friction
    • Standard for project level classification, implemented through the Project Intake Classification Matrix
    • Toolbox of deliverables for capturing information developed to inform decision makers for approval: Benefits Commitment Form, Technology Assessment Tool, Business Case Templates
    • Process pilot plan
    • Communication plan for organizational change, driven by a thorough analysis of change impacts on key stakeholders using the Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Picture of Kiron D. Bondale

    Kiron D. Bondale, PMP, PMI - RMP

    Senior Project Portfolio & Change Management Professional

    A placeholder photo is shown here.

    Scot Ganshert, Portfolio Group Manager

    Larimer County, CO

    Picture of Garrett McDaniel

    Garrett McDaniel, Business Analyst II – Information Technology

    City of Boulder, CO

    A placeholder photo is shown here.

    Joanne Pandya, IT Project Manager

    New York Property Insurance Underwriters

    Picture of Jim Tom.

    Jim Tom, CIO

    Public Health Ontario

    Related Info-Tech research

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint"

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint is shown.

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint is shown.

    Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint is shown.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage a Minimum Viable PMO blueprint is shown.

    Manage a Minimum Viable PMO

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint is shown.

    Establish the Benefits Realization Process

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint is shown.

    Manage an Agile Portfolio

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint is shown.

    Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program blueprint is shown.

    Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program

    The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Bibliography

    Boston Consulting Group. “Executive Sponsor Engagement: Top Driver of Project and Program Success.” PMI, 2014. Web.

    Boston Consulting Group. “Winning Through Project Portfolio Management: the Practitioners’ Perspective.” PMI, 2015. Web.

    Bradberry, Travis. “Why The 8-Hour workday Doesn’t Work.” Forbes, 7 Jun 2016. Web.

    Cook, Scott. Playbook: Best Practices. Business Week

    Cooper, Robert, G. “Effective Gating: Make product innovation more productive by using gates with teeth.” Stage-Gate International and Product Development Institute. March/April 2009. Web.

    Epstein, Dan. “Project Initiation Process: Part Two.” PM World Journal. Vol. IV, Issue III. March 2015. Web.

    Evans, Lisa. “The Exact Amount of Time You Should Work Every Day.” Fast Company, 15 Sep. 2014. Web.

    Madison, Daniel. “The Five Implementation Options to Manage the Risk in a New Process.” BPMInstitute.org. n.d. Web.

    Merkhofer, Lee. “Improve the Prioritization Process.” Priority Systems, n.d. Web.

    Miller, David, and Mike Oliver. “Engaging Stakeholder for Project Success.” PMI, 2015. Web.

    Mind Tools. “Kelley and Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.” Mind Tools, n.d. Web.

    Mochal, Jeffrey and Thomas Mochal. Lessons in Project Management. Appress: September 2011. Page 6.

    Newcomer, Eric. “Getting Decisions to Stick.” Standish Group PM2go, 20 Oct 2017. Web.

    “PMI Today.” Newtown Square, PA: PMI, Oct 2017. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.” Newtown Square, PA: PMI, 2013.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2017: Success Rates Rise.” PMI, 2017. Web.

    Transparent Choice. “Criteria for Project Prioritization.” n.p., n.d. Web.

    University of New Hampshire (UNH) Project Management Office. “University of New Hampshire IT Intake and Selection Process Map.” UNH, n.d. Web.

    Ward, John. “Delivering Value from Information Systems and Technology Investments: Learning from Success.” Information Systems Research Centre. August 2006. Web.

    Your Company is an Economy: Why This is Your Secret Weapon for Resilience

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    IT specialists often instinctively focus on technical issues, such as server failures or network problems, because they are trained to address the broken parts. However, it's important to consider the context in which these occur. But what if the real problem isn't just the part but the entire system it operates in?

    I want you to take a step back and to stop thinking about your company as a collection of departments and IT systems. Start seeing it for what it truly is: a complex, living, breathing economic system. This isn't some academic analogy. It’s a powerful model that will change how you approach resilience.

    An economic system involves production, resource allocation, and distribution of goods and services, which parallels how a company operates internally. It includes the combination of various departments, the people doing things, the business units, and even the decision-making steps that make up the economic structure of your company. Once you see this, you can never unsee it.

    What is an economic system?

    Let’s quickly demystify this. Forget textbooks and complex theories for a moment. Think about a national economy. It does three basic things:

    1. Production: It makes things. Factories build cars, farms grow food, and programmers write software. This is the creation of value.

    2. Resource Allocation: This process decides who gets what to make those things. Who gets the steel for the cars? The land for the farms? The funding for the software developers? These are all decisions about how to use scarce resources. 

    3. Distribution: This process gets the finished products to the people who need them. Cars go to importers, then dealerships then the customers, food goes to grocery stores, and software gets deployed to servers and then used by clients (in the general sense).

    That's it. Production, allocation, distribution. Every economy, from a simple bartering tribe to the global financial market, operates on these principles. And so does your company.

    So, how is your company an economy?

    Your company doesn't just “do work.” It produces, allocates, and distributes services in its own internal market (and eventually sells outside, otherwise… trouble).

    The production is everywhere. The human resources department produces a “payroll service.” The sales department produces “revenue contracts.” And the IT department? It produces a vast array of services: “compute cycles,” “data storage,” “network connectivity,” and “application uptime.” These are the goods and services that every other part of the company consumes to do their jobs.

    Resource allocation is the lifeblood of your corporate economy. It's the annual budgeting process, the project prioritization meetings, and the daily decisions managers make about where to assign their people. In IT, you are equally part of the allocation process. Most people get to decide at least what they will give priority to that day. Perhaps via the daily scrum or stand-up meetings. Perhaps during the review process. As a manager, when you approve a request for a new high-powered virtual machine for one team, you are making an economic choice. You are allocating a scarce resource that another team can no longer use. As a developer, when you decide that task X is now a higher priority than task Y, you make an economic decision to allocate yourself to task X. It's important to understand that there is an opportunity cost to every decision, whether you label it that way or not. 

    And distribution? That's how these services get to their “consumers.” It’s the internal platforms, the APIs that connect applications, the service desk that fulfills requests, the operations teams that update data via forms into databases, and even the reporting dashboards that deliver information. These are the supply chains and logistics networks of your company’s economy. The consumers are your clients, of course, but also every department that uses a service provided by another department.

    The IT department plays a central role in the company's economy, akin to a central bank and infrastructure provider, by managing essential digital resources like compute, storage, and bandwidth. You control its supply and, through your decisions, influence its value. You also build and maintain the “roads” and “power grid”—the networks and platforms—that the entire corporate economy depends on to function.

    Why This Perspective Is Important for Resilience

    This is where I feel it gets fascinating. When you start seeing your company as an economic system, your understanding of resilience deepens dramatically. You move beyond simply fixing broken things and start thinking about stabilizing a complex, interconnected market.

    It helps you understand true systemic risk.

    When a core database goes down, an engineer sees a technical failure. An economist sees a supply chain collapse. That database isn't just a box with blinking lights; it's a critical supplier of a raw material, namely data. Every single business process, application, and team that creates, updates or consumes that data is now starved of a resource they need to produce their own services. The failure cascades not just through technical dependencies but through economic dependencies. Seeing it this way forces you to ask better questions: Who are the biggest “consumers” of this data supplier? What is the total economic impact of this outage, not just the technical impact? This changes the incident's priority and your response strategy.

    You move beyond simple redundancy.

    The traditional engineering approach to resilience is redundancy. If one server is important, have two. This is like a town having two power plants. It's a good start, but it's not true economic resilience. An economist would ask different questions. Can we diversify our suppliers? Can we re-route via another path? If our primary database provider fails, can we switch to a secondary one, even if it's slower or pricier for a short time? This is the principle of substitution. Can a business process continue to function in a degraded mode, producing a lower-quality “good” for a while instead of stopping completely? This is about economic adaptability, not just technical duplication.

    You could take this even further and move into the realm of business continuity. Can your process work when your primary resource (the database) is not available? How would you redesign your process to work with an alternative solution? This thinking is at the heart of modern operational resilience regulations worldwide. Authorities are no longer just asking if your backups work; they're asking if your firm can fulfill its economic function in the face of severe adversity. They demand a clear grasp of your entire supply chain and a testable exit plan for critical suppliers, including cloud providers.

    You see that this goes way beyond a failing-part view. It goes to the heart of the economic function of your company.

    Incident response becomes economic intervention.

    During a major incident, the incident commander is now no longer just a technical coordinator. You are the head of the “central bank” during a "market crash". Your job is to prevent a localized failure from causing a full-blown corporate recession. Think about your actions:

    • You allocate scarce capital (your top engineers' time) to the most critical problem. The economic cost is the non-delivery of any other product by those people.

    • You implement fiscal policy by prioritizing certain fixes over others to stimulate the quickest “economic” recovery.

    • You manage market confidence through clear, calm, and regular communication to stakeholders, preventing panic from spreading.

    Each decision is an economic intervention designed to restore stability to the system. (If that is not the job description of a central banker, then I eat my hat.)

    Side Note: I often see teams who are obsessed with their own service's uptime, their own local metrics. They proudly report “five nines” of availability, but they do not report on how their service is actually consumed or how critical it is to the company's overall economic output. They've optimized their own factory but don't disclose their output's need level to the company or that their occasional one-hour outage brings the entire company's main assembly line to a halt. Resilience is not about local optimization; it is about the stability of the entire economic system. A dashboard that lists teams in order of availability or whatever other metric is fine, but these numbers must be mapped against their economic relevance. Without the economic relevance weighting, you may be misallocating resources in areas that are not critical or sufficiently important.

    How to Start Thinking Like an Economist in Your Resilience Practice

    This isn't just a theoretical exercise. You can apply this model today to make your organization stronger and yourself more effective to any employer or client.

    First, map your economic flows. Go beyond standard architecture diagrams. Create maps that show how value and services are produced, distributed, and consumed across departments. Identify your most important “supply chains.” Ask business units what IT services are essential for their “production lines” and what the financial impact is when those services are unavailable. This gives you a heat map of economic risk.

    Second, identify your single points of economic failure. In every economy, there are institutions that are “too big to fail.” What are yours? Is it a single authentication service? A legacy mainframe? A specific team of two people who know how a critical system works? These are the areas where a failure will cause a systemic crisis. They require more than just technical redundancy; they need deep, thoughtful resilience planning, including succession plans for people and substitution options for technology.

    Finally, reframe your post-incident reviews. Stop just asking, “What broke and why?” Start asking, “Which economic activity was disrupted?” and “How did the disruption flow through the system?” This shifts the conversation from blaming a component or a team to understanding systemic weaknesses in your company's economy. The goal is not to find a guilty party but to identify where your internal market is fragile and how you can strengthen it with better “monetary policy” (resource allocation) or “infrastructure” (more robust platforms).

    The vicious cycle of a failing economy

    In another article, I mentioned that resilience is a mindset.
     Resilience mindset graphic 

    So what happens when this economic system becomes unstable?

    These issues are typically considered failures and they manifest as irritations, perceived slowness and bugs, all the way to (regular) failures of a process or whole system.

    If this broken economic system is allowed to remain unstable, people will adopt negative behaviors.

    When “the government” (IT) fails to deliver, business teams take matters into their hands and start shadow IT. They may even purchase their own subscriptions.

    In a stable economy, participants trust that resources will be available when needed, but in a broken system, that trust is gone and leads to the hoarding of assets. This may be visible in the requested need for time or even budget allocation. And that leads into protectionism where teams build walls around their data and systems.

    When failures are common, the focus shifts from resolving the systemic problems to assigning blame for the specific symptom. This is akin to the breakdown of trade relations. The applications team blames the infrastructure team for slow servers. The infrastructure team blames the network team for latency. The network team blames the applications team for inefficient code. And around we go.

    Taking it just that little step further: If people live in a failing state long enough, they lose hope. This is learned helplessness. Your most valuable “citizens”—your engineers and business users—become disengaged. They stop reporting bugs because they assume they will never be fixed. They stop suggesting process improvements because they believe their voice doesn't matter.

    And lastly: In a functional system, there are clear processes for requesting services. In your broken economy, these official channels are considered worthless. The only way to get anything done is to generate a crisis. Escalation becomes the primary currency. People learn to bypass the ticketing system and send direct messages to senior leaders because they perceive that's the only way to get a response.

    How to Break the Cycle: Start Small

    To break this cycle, you need to start small and use mechanisms that turn the negative effects of problems into positive effects, like seeing opportunities.

    • Opportunities to correct irritations
    • Opportunities to enhance processes
    • Opportunities to perhaps redesign a service

    Proposing a grand vision will get you polite nods and zero action. I recommend you pick one irritation and fix it. Repeat multiple times until staff starts to perceive a change. Don't try to move the mountain. Remove the first obstacle and make your way up from there. This can be solving an issue, reducing an uncertainty, or actually spotting a way forward. 

    It will go easier as you continue this. Accept that on day one, your credibility is zero. It doesn’t matter whether you're a new manager or a seasoned expert. Trust is earned on the factory floor. Fix one small, nagging irritation for one person. Then another. This is how you build the political and social capital needed to tackle the mountain. It takes time.

    But what will happen next is crucial. There will be a reduction of the negative behaviors. And when you work it efficiently with enough time, you will eliminate those behaviors. And yes, there will be many ifs and buts, and each of the broken elements of a larger chain may require their own solutions. But it is this act of seeing the bigger picture through the constituent parts that will allow you to assign priorities and move closer to the solution in a structural way.
    Seeing step by step results feeds positivism and higher stability. Which in turn again feeds more positivism. 

     

    When you view your company through the lens of an economic system, it elevates the practice of resilience from a purely technical discipline to a value function. It gives you a language to communicate impact and risk to leadership in terms they understand: production, supply, and cost.

    It forces you to see the interconnectedness of everything you do and to appreciate that the failure of a single, seemingly minor component can have large, cascading effects across the entire organization. By thinking like an economist, you stop being just a firefighter, putting out isolated blazes. You become the architect of a more stable, more robust, and ultimately more resilient economy.

    You become the architect of a more stable, more robust, and ultimately more resilient economy. Now, go manage it.

    Always ready for a chat.

    Manage End-User Devices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}307|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $45,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Devices
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-devices
    • Desktop and mobile device management teams use separate tools and different processes.
    • People at all levels of IT are involved in device management.
    • Vendors are pushing unified endpoint management (UEM) products, and teams struggling with device management are hoping that UEM is their savior.
    • The number and variety of devices will only increase with the continued advance of mobility and emergence of the Internet of Things (IoT).

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Many problems can be solved by fixing roles, responsibilities, and process. Standardize so you can optimize.
    • UEM is not a silver bullet. Your current solution can image computers in less than 4 hours if you use lean images.
    • Done with, not done to. Getting input from the business will improve adoption, avoid frustration, and save everyone time.

    Impact and Result

    • Define the benefits that you want to achieve and optimize based on those benefits.
    • Take an evolutionary, rather than revolutionary, approach to merging end-user support teams. Process and tool unity comes first.
    • Define the roles and responsibilities involved in end-user device management, and create a training plan to ensure everyone can execute their responsibilities.
    • Stop using device management practices from the era of Windows XP. Create a plan for lean images and app packages.

    Manage End-User Devices Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize end-user device management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the business and IT benefits of optimizing endpoint management

    Get your desktop and mobile device support teams out of firefighting mode by identifying the real problem.

    • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 1: Identify the Business and IT Benefits
    • End-User Device Management Standard Operating Procedure
    • End-User Device Management Executive Presentation

    2. Improve supporting teams and processes

    Improve the day-to-day operations of your desktop and mobile device support teams through role definition, training, and process standardization.

    • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 2: Improve Supporting Teams and Processes
    • End-User Device Management Workflow Library (Visio)
    • End-User Device Management Workflow Library (PDF)

    3. Improve supporting technologies

    Stop using management tools and techniques from the Windows XP era. Save yourself, and your technicians, from needless pain.

    • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 3: Improve Supporting Technologies
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Manage End-User Devices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Business and IT Benefits of Optimizing End-User Device Management

    The Purpose

    Identify how unified endpoint management (UEM) can improve the lives of the end user and of IT.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Cutting through the vendor hype and aligning with business needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify benefits you can provide to stakeholders.

    1.2 Identify business and IT goals in order to prioritize benefits.

    1.3 Identify how to achieve benefits.

    1.4 Define goals based on desired benefits.

    Outputs

    Executive presentation

    2 Improve the Teams and Processes That Support End-User Device Management

    The Purpose

    Ensure that your teams have a consistent approach to end-user device management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Developed a standard approach to roles and responsibilities, to training, and to device management processes.

    Activities

    2.1 Align roles to your environment.

    2.2 Assign architect-, engineer-, and administrator-level responsibilities.

    2.3 Rationalize your responsibility matrix.

    2.4 Ensure you have the necessary skills.

    2.5 Define Tier 2 processes, including patch deployment, emergency patch deployment, device deployment, app deployment, and app packaging.

    Outputs

    List of roles involved in end-user device management

    Responsibility matrix for end-user device management

    End-user device management training plan

    End-user device management standard operating procedure

    Workflows and checklists of end-user device management processes

    3 Improve the Technologies That Support End-User Device Management

    The Purpose

    Modernize the toolset used by IT to manage end-user devices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Saving time and resources for many standard device management processes.

    Activities

    3.1 Define the core image for each device/OS.

    3.2 Define app packages.

    3.3 Gather action items for improving the support technologies.

    3.4 Create a roadmap for improving end-user device management.

    3.5 Create a communication plan for improving end-user device management.

    Outputs

    Core image outline

    Application package outline

    End-user device management roadmap

    End-user device management communication plan

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build an implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles & responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes & Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and alerts

    4 Build an Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}491|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Impact and Result

    • Tracking goal- and action-based metrics allows you to make meaningful, data-driven decisions for your service desk. You can establish internal benchmarks to set your own baselines.
    • Predefining the audience and cadence of each metric allows you to construct targeted dashboards to aid your metrics analysis.

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard – A deck that shows you how to look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Deciding which service desk metrics to track and how to analyze them can be daunting. Use this deck to narrow down your goal-oriented metrics as a starting point and set your own benchmarks.

    • Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard

    2. Service Desk Metrics Workbook – A tool to organize your service desk metrics.

    For each metric, consider adding the relevant overall goal, audience, cadence, and action. Use the audience and cadence of the metric to split your tracked metrics into various dashboards. Your final list of metrics and reports can be added to your service desk SOP.

    • Service Desk Metrics Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    Look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t get paralyzed by benchmarks when establishing metrics

    When establishing a suite of metrics to track, it’s tempting to start with the metrics measured by other organizations. Naturally, benchmarking will enter the conversation. While benchmarking is useful, measuring you organization against others with a lack of context will only highlight your failures. Furthermore, benchmarks will highlight the norm or common practice. It does not necessarily highlight best practice.

    Keeping the limitations of benchmarking in mind, establish your own metrics suite with action-based metrics. Define the audience, cadence, and actions for each metric you track and pair them with business goals. Measure only what you need to.

    Slowly improve your metrics process over time and analyze your environment using your own data as your benchmark.

    Benedict Chang

    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Measure the business value provided by the service desk.
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard or effective dashboards.

    Common Obstacles

    • Becoming too focused on benchmarks or unidimensional metrics (e.g. cost, first-contact resolution, time to resolve) can lead to misinterpretation of the data and poorly informed actions.
    • Sifting through the many sources of data post hoc can lead to stalling in data analysis or slow reaction times to poor metrics.
    • Dashboards can quickly become cluttered with uninformative metrics, thus reducing the signal-to-noise ratio of meaningful data.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.
    • Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.
    • Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.
    • Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Improve your metrics to align IT with strategic business goals

    The right metrics can tell the business how hard IT works and how well they perform.

    • Only 19% of CXOs feel that their organization is effective at measuring the success of IT projects with their current metrics.
    • Implementing the proper metrics can facilitate communication between the business division and IT practice.
    • The proper metrics can help IT know what issues the business has and how the CEO and CIO should tackle them.
    • If the goals above resonate with your organization, our blueprint Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics will take you through the right steps.

    Current Metrics Suite

    19% Effective

    36% Some Improvement Necessary

    45% Significant Improvement Necessary

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    CXOs stress that value is the most critical area for IT to improve in reporting

    • You most likely have to improve your metrics suite by addressing business value.
    • Over 80% of organizations say they need improvement to their business value metrics, with 32% of organizations reporting that significant improvement is needed.
    • Of course, measuring metrics for service desk operations is important, but don’t forget business-oriented metrics such as measuring knowledgebase articles written for shift-left enablement, cost (time and money) of service desk tickets, and overall end-user satisfaction.

    The image shows a bar graph with percentages on the Y-Acis, and the following categories on the X-Axis: Business value metrics; Stakeholder satisfaction reporting; Risk metrics; Technology performance & operating metrics; Cost & Salary metrics; and Ad hoc feedback from executives and staff. Each bar is split into two sections, with the blue section marked a Significant Improvement Necessary, and the purple section labelled Some Improvement necessary. Two sections are highlighted with red circles: Business Value metrics--32% blue; 52% purple; and Technology performance & operating metrics--23% blue and 51% purple.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    Benchmarking used in isolation will not tell the whole story

    Benchmarks can be used as a step in the metrics process

    They can be the first step to reach an end goal, but if benchmarks are observed in isolation, it will only highlight your failures.

    Benchmarking relies on standardized models

    This does not account for all the unique variables that make up an IT organization.

    For example, benchmarks that include cost and revenue may include organizations that prioritize first-call resolution (FCR), but the variables that make up this benchmark model will be quite different within your own organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Benchmarks reflect the norm and common practice, not best practice.

    Benchmarks are open to interpretation

    Taking the time to establish proper metrics is often more valuable time spent than going down the benchmark rabbit hole.

    Being above or below the norm is neither a good nor a bad thing.

    Determining what the results mean for you depends on what’s being measured and the unique factors, characteristics, and priorities in your organization.

    If benchmark data is a priority within your IT organization, you may look up organizations like MetricNet, but keep the following in mind:

    Review the collected benchmark data

    See where IT organizations in your industry typically stand in relation to the overall benchmark.

    Assess the gaps

    Large gaps between yourself and the overall benchmark could indicate areas for improvement or celebration. Use the data to focus your analysis, develop deeper self-awareness, and prioritize areas for potential concern.

    Benchmarks are only guidelines

    The benchmark source data may not come from true peers in every sense. Each organization is different, so always explore your unique context when interpreting any findings.

    Rely on internal metrics to measure and improve performance

    Measure internal metrics over time to define goals and drive real improvement

    • Internally measured metrics are more reliable because they provide information about your actual performance over time. This allows for targeted improvements and objective measurements of your milestones.
    • Whether a given metric is the right one for your service desk will depend on several different factors, including:
      • The maturity and capability of your service desk processes
      • The volume of service requests and incidents
      • The complexity of your environment when resolving tickets
      • The degree to which your end users are comfortable with self-service

    Take Info-Tech’s approach to metrics management

    Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.

    Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.

    Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.

    Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Define action-based metrics to cut down on analysis paralysis

    Every metric needs to be backed with the following criteria:

    • Defining audience, cadence, goal, and action for each metric allows you to keep your tracked metrics to a minimum while maximizing the value.
    • The audience and cadence of each metric may allow you to define targeted dashboards.

    Audience - Who is this metric tracked for?

    Goal - Why are you tracking this metric? This can be defined along with the CSFs and KPIs.

    Cadence - How often are you going to view, analyze, and action this metric?

    Action - What will you do if this metric spikes, dips, trends up, or trends down?

    Activity 1. Define your critical success factors and key performance indicators

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are high-level goals that help you define the direction of your service desk. Key performance indicators (KPIs) can be treated as the trend of metrics that will indicate that you are moving in the direction of your CSFs. These will help narrow the data you have to track and action (metrics).

    CSFs, or your overall goals, typically revolve around three aspects of the service desk: time spent on tickets, resources spent on tickets, and the quality of service provided.

    1. As a group, brainstorm the CSFs and the KPIs that will help narrow your metrics. Use the Service Desk Metrics Workbook to record the results.
    2. Look at the example to the right as a starting point.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys
    High end-user satisfaction score
    Proper resolution of tickets
    Low time to resolve
    Low Cost per Ticket Decreasing cost per ticket (due to efficient resolution, FCR, automation, self-service, etc.)
    Improve Access to Self-Service (tangential to improve customer service) High utilization of knowledgebase
    High utilization of portal

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 2. Define action-based metrics that align with your KPIs and CSFs

    1. Now that you have defined your goals, continue to fill the workbook by choosing metrics that align with those goals.
    2. Use the chart below as a guide. For every metric, define the cadence of measurement, audience of the metric, and action associated with the metric. There may be multiple metrics for each KPI.
    3. If you find you are unable to define the cadence, audience, or action associated with a metric, you may not need to track the metric in the first place. Alternatively, if you find that you may action a metric in the future, you can decide to start gathering data now.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator Metric Cadence Audience Action
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Monthly Management Action low scores immediately, view long-term trends
    High end-user satisfaction score Average end-user satisfaction score from annual survey Annually IT Leadership View IT satisfaction trends to align IT with business direction
    Proper resolution of tickets Number of tickets reopened Weekly Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    SLA breach rate Daily Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    Low time to resolve Average TTR (incidents) Weekly Management Look for trends to monitor resources
    Average TTR by priority Weekly Management Look for TTR solve rates to align with SLA
    Average TTR by tier Weekly Management Look for improperly escalated tickets or shift-left opportunities

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 3. Define the data ownership, metric viability, and dashboards

    1. For each metric, define where the data is housed. Ideally, the data is directly in the ticketing tool or ITSM tool. This will make it easy to pull and analyze.
    2. Determine how difficult the metric will be to pull or track. If the effort is high, decide if the value of tracking the metric is worth the hassle of gathering it.
    3. Lastly, for each metric, use the cadence and audience to place the metric in a reporting dashboard. This will help divide your metrics and make them easier to report and action.
    4. You may use the output of this exercise to add your tracked metrics to your service desk SOP.
    5. A full suite of metrics can be found in our Infrastructure & Operations Metrics Library in the Take Control of Infrastructure Metrics Storyboard. The metrics have been categorized by low, medium, and advanced capabilities for you.

    Example metrics:

    Metric Who Owns the Data? Efforts to Track? Dashboards
    Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Service Desk Low Monthly Management Meeting
    Average end-user satisfaction score Service Desk Low Leadership Meeting
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    SLA breach rate Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup
    Average TTR (incidents) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by priority Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by tier Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR (SRs) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Keep the following considerations in mind when defining which metrics matter

    Keep the customer in mind

    Metrics are typically focused on transactional efficiency and process effectiveness and not what was achieved against the customers’ need and satisfaction.

    Understand the relationships between performance and metrics management to provide the end-to-end service delivery picture you are aiming to achieve.

    Don’t settle for tool defaults

    ITSM solutions offer an abundance of metrics to choose from. The most common ones are typically built into the reporting modules of the tool suite.

    Do not start tracking everything. Choose metrics that are specifically aligned to your organization’s desired business outcomes.

    Establish tension metrics to achieve balance

    Don’t ignore the correlation and context between the suites of metrics chosen and how one interacts and affects the other.

    Measuring metrics in isolation may lead to an incomplete picture or undesired technician behavior. Tension metrics help complete the picture and lead to proper actions.

    Adjust those targets

    An arbitrary target on a metric that is consistently met month over month is useless. Each metric should inform the overall performance by combining capable service level management and customer experience programs to prove the value IT is providing to the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes, including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management, to create a sustainable service desk.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics

    Make faster decisions and improve service delivery by using the right metrics for the job.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Take a data-driven approach to service desk optimization.

    IT Diagnostics: Build a Data-Driven IT Strategy

    Our data-driven programs ask business and IT stakeholders the right questions to ensure you have the inputs necessary to build an effective IT strategy.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}506|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Storage & Backup Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /storage-and-backup-optimization
    • You don’t understand the difference between a backup and an archive or when to use one or the other.
    • Data is not constant. It is ever-changing and growing. How do you protect it?
    • You just replaced an application that was in use since day one, and even though you have a fully functional replacement, you would like to archive that original application just in case.
    • You want to save money, so you use your backup solution to archive data, but you know that is not ideal. What is the correct solution?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Keep in mind that backups are for recovery while archives are for discovery. Backups and archives are often confused but understanding the differences can result in significant savings of time and money. Backing up and archiving may be considered IT tasks, but recovery and discovery are capabilities the business wants and is willing to pay for.

    Impact and Result

    Archives and backups are not the same, and there is a use case for each. Sometimes minor adjustments may be required to make the use case work. Understanding the basics of backups and archives can lead to significant savings at a monetary and effort level.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    What is the difference between a backup and a data archive? When should I use one over the other? They are not the same and confusing the two concepts could be expensive.

    • Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    They are not the same, and confusing the two concepts could be expensive

    Analyst Perspective

    Backups and archives are not interchangeable, but they can complement each other.

    Photo of P.J. Ryan, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Backups and archives are two very different operations that are quite often confused or misplaced. IT and business leaders are tasked with protecting corporate data from a variety of threats. They also must conform to industry, geographical, and legal compliance regulations. Backup solutions keep the data safe from destruction. If you have a backup, why do you also need an archive? Archive solutions hold data for a long period of time and can be searched. If you have an archive, why do you also need a backup solution? Backups and archives used to be the same. Remember when you would keep the DAT tape in the same room as the argon gas fire suppression system for seven years? Now that's just not feasible. Some situations require a creative approach or a combination of backups and archives.

    Understand the difference between archives and backups and you will understand why the two solutions are necessary and beneficial to the business.

    P.J. Ryan
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • You don’t understand the difference between a backup and an archive or when to use one over the other.
    • Data is not constant. It is ever-changing and growing. How do you protect it?
    • You just replaced an application that had been in use since day one, and even though you have a fully functional replacement, you would like to archive that original application just in case.
    • You want to save money, so you use your backup solution to archive data, but you know that is not ideal. What is the correct solution?
    Common Obstacles
    • Storage costs can be expensive, as can some backup and archiving solutions.
    • Unclear requirements definition to decide between backups or archives.
    • Historically, people referred to archiving as tossing something into a box and storing it away indefinitely. Data archiving has a different meaning.
    • Executives want retired applications preserved but do not provide reasons or requirements.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Spend wisely. Why spend money on an archive solution when a backup will suffice? Don’t leave money on the table.
    • Be creative and assess each backup or archive situation carefully. A custom solution may be required.
    • Backup your production data for the purpose of restoring it and adhere to the 3-2-1 rule of backups (Naviko.com).
    • Archive your older data to an alternate storge platform to save space, allow for searchability, and provide retention parameters.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep in mind that backups are for recovery while archives are for discovery. Backups and archives are often confused but understanding the differences can result in significant savings of time and money. Backing up and archiving may be considered IT tasks but recovery and discovery are capabilities the business wants and is willing to pay for.

    Archive

    What it IS

    A data archive is an alternate location for your older, infrequently accessed production data. It is indexed and searchable based on keywords. Archives are deleted after a specified period based on your retention policy or compliance directives.

    What it IS NOT

    Archives are not an emergency copy of your production data. They are not any type of copy of your production data. Archives will not help you if you lose your data or accidentally delete a file. Archives are not multiple copies of production data from various recovery points.

    Why use it

    Archives move older data to an alternate location. This frees up storage space for your current data. Archives are indexed and can be searched for historical purposes, compliance reasons, or in the event of a legal matter where specific data must be provided to a legal team.

    Tips & Tricks – Archiving

    • Archiving will move older data to an alternate location. This will free up storage space in the production environment.
    • Archiving solutions index the data to allow for easier searchability. This will aid in common business searches as well as assist with any potential legal searches.
    • Archiving allows companies to hold onto data for historical purposes as well as for specific retention periods in compliance with industry and regional regulations such as SOX, GDPR, FISMA, as well as others (msp360.com).

    Backup

    What it IS

    A backup is a copy of your data from a specific day and time. It is primarily used for recovery or restoration if something happens to the production copy of data. The restore will return the file or folder to the state it was in at the time of the backup.

    Backups occur frequently to ensure the most recent version of data is copied to a safe location.

    A typical backup plan makes a copy of the data every day, once a week, and once a month. The data is stored on tapes, disk, or using cloud storage.

    What it IS NOT

    Backups are not designed for searching or discovery. If you backup your email and must go to that backup in search of all email pertaining to a specific topic, you must restore the full backup and then search for that specific topic or sender. If you kept all the monthly backups for seven years, that will mean repeating that process 84 times to have a conclusive search, assuming you have adequate storage space to restore the email database 84 times.

    Backups do not free up space.

    Why use it

    Backups protect your data in the event of disaster, deletion, or accidental damage. A good backup strategy will include multiple backups on different media and offsite storage of at least one copy.

    Tips & Tricks – Backups

    • Production data should be backed up on a regular basis, ideally once a day or more frequently if possible.
    • Backups are intended to restore data when it gets deleted, over-written, or otherwise compromised. Most restore requests are from the last 24 to 48 hours, so it may be advantageous to keep a backup readily available on disk for a quick restore when needed.
    • Some vendors and industry subject matter experts advocate the use of a 3-2-1 rule when it comes to backups:
      • Keep three copies of your production data
      • In at least two separate locations (some advocate two different formats), and
      • One copy should be offsite (nakivo.com)

    Cold Storage

    • Cold storage refers to a storage option offered by some cloud vendors. In the context of the discussion between backups and archives, it can be an option for a dedicated backup solution for a specific period. Cost is low and the data is protected from destruction.
    • If an app has been replaced and all data transferred to the replacement solution but for some reason the company wishes to hold onto the data, you want a backup, not an archive. Extract the data, convert it into MongoDB or a similar solution, and drop it into cheap cloud storage (cold storage) for less than $5 per TB/month.

    Case Study

    Understanding the difference between archives and backups could save you a lot of time and money

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing | SOURCE: Info-Tech Research

    Understanding the difference between an archive and a backup was the first step in solving their challenge.

    A leading manufacturing company found themselves in a position where they had to decide between archiving or doing nothing.

    The company had completed several acquisitions and ended up with multiple legacy applications that had been merged or migrated into replacement solutions. These legacy applications were very important to the original companies and although the data they held had been migrated to a replacement solution, executives felt they should hold onto these applications for a period of time, just in case.

    Some of the larger applications were archived using a modern archiving solution, but when it came to the smaller applications, the cost to add them to the archiving solution greatly exceeded the cost to just keep them running and maintain the associated infrastructure.

    A research advisor from Info-Tech Research Group joined a call with the manufacturing company and discussed their situation. The difference between archives and backups was explained and through the course of the conversation it was discovered that the solution was a modified backup. The application data had already been preserved through the migration, so data could be accessed in the production environment. The requirement to keep the legacy application up and running was not necessary but in compliance with the request to keep the information, the data could be exported from the legacy application into a non-sequential database, compressed, and stored in cloud-based cold storage for less than five dollars per terabyte per month. The manufacturing company’s staff realized that they could apply this same approach to several of their legacy applications and save tens of thousands of dollars in the process.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    Backups

    Backups are for recovery. A backup is a snapshot copy of production data at a specific point in time. If the production data is lost, destroyed, or somehow compromised, the data can be restored from the backup.

    Archives

    Archives are for discovery. It is production data that is moved to an alternate location to free up storage space, allow the data to be searchable, and still hold onto the data for historical or compliance purposes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Archives and backups are not the same, and there is a use case for each. Sometimes minor adjustments may be required to make the use case work. Understanding the basics of backups and archives can lead to significant savings at a monetary and effort level.

    Additional Guidance

    Production data should be backed up.

    The specific backup solution is up to the business.

    Production data that is not frequently accessed should be archived.

    The specific solution to perform and manage the archiving of the data is up to the business

    • Archived data should also be backed up at least once.
    If the app has been replaced and all data transferred, you want a backup not an archive if you want to keep the data.
    • Short term – fence it off.
    • Long term – extract into Mongo then drop it into cheap cloud storage.

    Case Study

    Using tape backups as an archive solution could result in an expensive discovery and retrieval exercise.

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare | SOURCE: Zasio Enterprises Inc.

    “Do not commingle archive data with backup or disaster recovery tapes.”

    A court case in the United States District Court for the District of Nevada involving Guardiola and Renown Health in 2015 is a good example of why using a backup solution to solve an archiving challenge is a bad idea.

    Renown Health used a retention policy that declared any email older than six months of age as inactive and moved that email to a backup tape. Renown Health was ordered by the court to produce emails from a period of time in the past. Renown estimated that it would cost at least $248,000 to produce those emails, based on the effort involved to restore data from each tape and search for the email in question. Renown Health argued that this long and expensive process would result in undue costs.

    The court reviewed the situation and ruled against Renown Health and ordered them to comply with the request (Zasio.com).

    A proper archiving solution would have provided a quick and low-cost method to retrieve the emails in question.

    Backups and archives are complementary to each other

    • Archives are still production data, but the data does not change. A backup is recommended for the archived data, but the frequency of the backups can be lowered.
    • Backups protect you if a disaster strikes by providing a copy of the production data that was compromised or damaged. Archives allow you to access older data that may have just been forgotten, not destroyed or compromised. Archives could also protect you in a legal court case by providing data that is older but may prove your argument in court.

    Archives and backups are not the same.

    Backups copy your data. Archives move your data. Backups facilitate recovery. Archives facilitate discovery.

    Archive Backup
    Definition Move rarely accessed (but still production) data to separate media. Store a copy of frequently used data on a separate media to ensure timely operational recovery.
    Use Case Legal discovery, primary storage reduction, compliance requirements, and audits. Accidental deletion and/or corruption of data, hardware/software failures.
    Method Disk, cloud storage, appliance. Disk, backup appliance, snapshots, cloud.
    Data Older, rarely accessed production data. Current production data.

    Is it a backup or archive?

    • You want to preserve older data for legal and compliance reasons, so you put extra effort into keeping your tape backups safe and secure for seven years. That’s a big mistake that may cost you time and money. You want an archive solution.
    • You replace your older application and migrate all data to the new system, but you want to hold onto the old data, just in case. That’s a backup, not an archive.
    • A long serving senior executive recently left the company. You want to preserve the contents of the executive's laptop in case it is needed in the future. That’s a backup.

    Considerations When Choosing Between Solutions

    1

    Backup or archive?

    2

    What are you protecting?

    3

    Why are you protecting data?

    4

    Solution

    Backup

    Backup and/or archive.
    Additional information required.
    Column 3 may help

    Archive

    Device

    Data

    Application

    Operational Environment

    Operational recovery

    Disaster recovery

    Just in case

    Production storage space reduction

    Retention and preservation

    Governance, risk & compliance

    Backup

    Archive

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of light grids and flares. Establish an Effective Data Protection Plan

    Give data the attention it deserves by building a strategy that goes beyond backup.

    Stock image of old fuse box switches. Modernize Enterprise Storage

    Current and emerging storage technologies are disrupting the status quo – prepare your infrastructure for the exponential rise in data and its storage requirements.

    Logo for 'Software Reviews' and their information on 'Compare and Evaluate: Data Archiving.'
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Data Archiving Policy'. Data Archiving Policy

    Bibliography

    “Backup vs. archiving: Know the difference.” Open-E. Accessed 05 Mar 2022.Web.

    G, Denis. “How to build retention policy.” MSP360, Jan 3, 2020. Accessed 10 Mar 2022.

    Ipsen, Adam. “Archive vs Backup: What’s the Difference? A Definition Guide.” BackupAssist, 28 Mar 2017. Accessed 04 Mar 2022.

    Kang, Soo. “Mitigating the expense of E-discovery; Recognizing the difference between back-ups and archived data.” Zasio Enterprises, 08 Oct 2015. Accessed 3 Mar 2022.

    Mayer, Alex. “The 3-2-1 Backup Rule – An Efficient Data Protection Strategy.” Naviko. Accessed 12 Mar 2022.

    “What is Data-Archiving?” Proofpoint. Accessed 07 Mar 2022.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}406|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $44,874 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
    • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
    • The business demands high service and IT needs to respond. Rapid customer response through efficient release and deployment is critical to maintain high business satisfaction.
    • The lack of process ownership leads to chaotic and uncoordinated releases, resulting in costly rework and poor hand-offs.
    • IT emphasizes tools but release tools and technologies alone will not fix the problem. Tools are integrated into the processes they support – if the process challenges aren’t addressed first, then the tool won’t help.
    • Releases are traditionally executed in silos with limited communication across the entire release pipeline. Culturally, there is little motivation for cross-functional collaboration and holistic process optimization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Release management is not solely driven by tools. It is about delivering high quality releases on time through accountability and governance aided by the support of tools.
    • Release management is independent of your software development lifecycle (SDLC). Release management practices sit as an agnostic umbrella over your chosen development methodology.
    • Ownership of the entire process is vital. Release managers ensure standards are upheld and the pipeline operates efficiently.

    Impact and Result

    • Acquire release management ownership. Ensure there is appropriate accountability for speed and quality of the releases passing through the entire pipeline. A release manager has oversight over the entire release process and facilitates the necessary communication between business stakeholders and various IT roles.
    • Instill holistic thinking. Release management includes all steps required to push release and change requests to production along with the hand-off to Operations and Support. Increase the transparency and visibility of the entire pipeline to ensure local optimizations do not generate bottlenecks in other areas.
    • Standardize and lay a strong release management foundation. Optimize the key areas where you are experiencing the most pain and continually improve.

    Optimize Applications Release Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize release management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review your release management objectives

    Assess the current state and define the drivers behind your release management optimizations.

    • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 1: Review Your Release Management Objectives
    • Release Management Process Standard Template
    • Release Management Maturity Assessment

    2. Standardize release management

    Design your release processes, program framework, and release change management standards, and define your release management team.

    • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 2: Standardize Release Management
    • Release Manager

    3. Roll out release management enhancements

    Create an optimization roadmap that fits your context.

    • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 3: Roll Out Release Management Enhancements
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize Applications Release Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review Your Release Management Objectives

    The Purpose

    Reveal the motivators behind the optimization of release management.

    Identify the root causes of current release issues and challenges.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure business alignment of optimization efforts.

    Firm grasp of why teams are facing release issues and the impacts they have on the organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify the objectives for application release.

    1.2 Conduct a current state assessment of release practices.

    Outputs

    Release management business objectives and technical drivers

    Current state assessment of release processes, communication flows, and tools and technologies

    2 Standardize Release Management

    The Purpose

    Alleviate current release issues and challenges with best practices.

    Standardize a core set of processes, tools, and roles & responsibilities to achieve consistency, cadence, and transparency.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Repeatable execution of the same set of processes to increase the predictability of release delivery.

    Defined ownership of release management.

    Adaptable and flexible release management practices to changing business and technical environments.

    Activities

    2.1 Strengthen your release process.

    2.2 Coordinate releases with a program framework.

    2.3 Manage release issues with change management practices.

    2.4 Define your release management team.

    Outputs

    Processes accommodating each release type and approach the team is required to complete

    Release calendars and program framework

    Release change management process

    Defined responsibilities and accountabilities of release manager and release management team

    3 Roll Out Release Management Enhancements

    The Purpose

    Define metrics to validate release management improvements.

    Identify the degree of oversight and involvement of the release management team.

    Prioritize optimization roadmap against business needs and effort.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Easy-to-gather metrics to measure success that can be communicated to stakeholders.

    Understanding of how involved release management teams are in enforcing release management standards.

    Practical and achievable optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Define your release management metrics.

    3.2 Ensure adherence to standards.

    3.3 Create your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    List of metrics to gauge success

    Oversight and reporting structure of release management team

    Release management optimization roadmap

    Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}354|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Leveraging the cloud introduces IT professionals to a new world that they are tasked with securing. Consumers do not know what security services they need and when to implement them.
    • With many cloud vendors proposing to share the security responsibility, it can be a challenge for organizations to develop a clear understanding of how they can best secure their data off premises.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your cloud security architecture needs to be strategic, realistic, and based on risk. The NIST approach to cloud security is to include everything security into your cloud architecture to be deemed secure. However, you can still have a robust and secure cloud architecture by using a risk-based approach to identify the necessary controls and mitigating services for your environment.
    • The cloud is not the right choice for everyone. You’re not as unique as you think. Start with a reference model that is based on your risks and business attributes and optimize it from there.
    • Your responsibility doesn’t end at the vendor. Even if you outsource your security services to your vendors, you will still have security responsibilities to address.
    • Don’t boil the ocean; do what is realistic for your enterprise. Your cloud security architecture should be based on securing your most critical assets. Use our reference model to determine a launch point.
    • A successful strategy is holistic. Controlling for cloud risks comes from knowing what the risks are. Consider the full spectrum of security, including both processes and technologies.

    Impact and Result

    • The business is adopting a cloud environment and it must be secured, which includes:
      • Ensuring business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
      • Maintaining the privacy of data and other information.
      • Securing the network connection points.
      • Knowing the risks associated with the cloud and mitigating those risks with the appropriate services.
    • This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors. It allows them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are strongly recommended to mitigate those risks.

    Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture Research & Tools

    Start Here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a cloud security architecture with security at the forefront, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Cloud security alignment analysis

    Explore how the cloud changes and whether your enterprise is ready for the shift to the cloud.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 1: Cloud Security Alignment Analysis
    • Cloud Security Architecture Workbook

    2. Business-critical workload analysis

    Analyze the workloads that will migrated to the cloud. Consider the various domains of security in the cloud, considering the cloud’s unique risks and challenges as they pertain to your workloads.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 2: Business-Critical Workload Analysis

    3. Cloud security architecture mapping

    Map your risks to services in a reference model from which to build a robust launch point for your architecture.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 3: Cloud Security Architecture Mapping
    • Cloud Security Architecture Archive Document
    • Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model (Visio)
    • Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model (PDF)

    4. Cloud security strategy planning

    Map your risks to services in a reference architecture to build a robust roadmap from.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 4: Cloud Security Strategy Planning
    • Cloud Security Architecture Communication Deck

    Infographic

    Workshop: Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Cloud Security Alignment Analysis

    The Purpose

    Understand your suitability and associated risks with your workloads as they are deployed into the cloud.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the organization’s readiness and optimal service level for cloud security.

    Activities

    1.1 Workload Deployment Plan

    1.2 Cloud Suitability Questionnaire

    1.3 Cloud Risk Assessment

    1.4 Cloud Suitability Analysis

    Outputs

    Workload deployment plan

    Determined the suitability of the cloud for your workloads

    Risk assessment of the associated workloads

    Overview of cloud suitability

    2 Business-Critical Workload Analysis

    The Purpose

    Explore your business-critical workloads and the associated controls and mitigating services to secure them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Address NIST 800-53 security controls and the appropriate security services that can mitigate the risks appropriately.

    Activities

    2.1 “A” Environment Analysis

    2.2 “B” Environment Analysis

    2.3 “C” Environment Analysis

    2.4 Prioritized Security Controls

    2.5 Effort and Risk Dashboard Overview

    Outputs

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    Prioritized security controls based on risk and environmental makeup

    Mitigating security services for controls

    Effort and Risk Dashboard

    3 Cloud Security Architecture Mapping

    The Purpose

    Identify security services to mitigate challenges posed by the cloud in various areas of security.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Comprehensive list of security services, and their applicability to your network environment. Documentation of your “current” state of cloud security.

    Activities

    3.1 Cloud Security Control Mapping

    3.2 Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model Mapping

    Outputs

    1. Cloud Security Architecture Archive Document to codify and document each of the associated controls and their risk levels to security services

    2. Mapping of the codified controls onto Info-Tech’s Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model for clear security prioritization

    4 Cloud Security Strategy Planning

    The Purpose

    Prepare a communication deck for executive stakeholders to socialize them to the state of your cloud security initiatives and where you still have to go.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A roadmap for improving security in the cloud.

    Activities

    4.1 Cloud Security Strategy Considerations

    4.2 Cloud Security Architecture Communication Deck

    Outputs

    Consider the additional security considerations of the cloud for preparation in the communication deck.

    Codify all your results into an easily communicable communication deck with a clear pathway for progression and implementation of security services to mitigate cloud risks.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}596|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Many organizations have introduced mentoring programs without clearly defining and communicating the purpose and goals around having a program; they simply jumped on the mentoring bandwagon.
    • As a result, these programs have little impact. They don’t add value for mentors, mentees, or the organization.
    • It can be difficult to design a program that is well-suited to your organization, will be adopted by employees, and will drive the results you are looking for.
    • In particular, it is difficult to successfully match mentors and mentees so both derive maximum value from the endeavor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • As workforce composition shifts, there is a need for mentoring programs to move beyond the traditional senior–junior format option; organizational culture and goals will dictate the best approach.
    • An organization’s mentoring program doesn’t need to be restricted to one format; individual preferences and goals should also factor in. Be open to choosing format on a case-by-case basis.
    • Be sure to gain upper management buy-in and support early to ensure mentoring becomes a valued part of your organization.
    • Ensure that goal setting, communication, ongoing support for participants, and evaluation all play a role in your mentoring program.

    Impact and Result

    • Mentoring can have a significant positive impact on mentor, mentee, and organization.
    • Mentees gain guidance and advice on their career path and skill development. Mentors often experience re-engagement with their job and the satisfaction of helping another person.
    • Mentoring participants benefit from obtaining different perspectives of both the business and work-related problems. Participation in a mentoring program has been linked to greater access to promotions, pay raises, and increased job satisfaction.
    • Mentoring can have a number of positive outcomes for the organization, including breaking down silos, transferring institutional knowledge, accelerating leadership skills, fostering open communication and dialogue, and resolving conflict.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align the mentoring program with the organizational culture and goals

    Build a best-fit program that creates a learning culture.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High Performing Learning Organization

    2. Assess the organizational culture and current mentoring program

    Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    • Mentoring Program Diagnostic

    3. Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    Track project progress and have all program details defined in a central location.

    • Mentoring Project Plan Template
    • Peer Mentoring Guidelines
    • Mentoring Program Guidelines

    4. Gather feedback from the mentoring program participants

    Evaluate the success of the program.

    • Mentoring Project Feedback Surveys Template

    5. Get mentoring agreements in place

    Improve your mentoring capabilities.

    • Mentee Preparation Checklist
    • Mentoring Agreement Template
    [infographic]

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}447|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • As an IT leader, you’re responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in and responsible stewardship of assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
    • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes across business units. You’re aware of a tool space called Strategic Portfolio Management, and it looks like it could help, but you’re unsure of how it’s different from some of the existing tools you already pay for and don’t use to their full functionality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. In the same way that it took many years for project portfolio management to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. Unpacking what’s truly new and valuable in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what’s just repackaged as SPM is an important first step, but it's not an easy undertaking.

    Impact and Result

    In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is, and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities. We’ll help to situate you in the space and assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering.

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard – A guide to help you drive strategic outcomes.

    In this concise publication we introduce you to strategic portfolio management and consider the extent to which your organization can leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

    • Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard

    2. Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment Tool – Use this tool to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach.

    Use this Excel workbook to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach or whether you need something more like a traditional project portfolio management tool.

    • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

    Separate what's new and valuable from bloated claims on the hype cycle.

    Analyst Perspective

    Do you need strategic portfolio management, or do you need to do portfolio management more strategically?

    Travis Duncan, Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy

    Travis Duncan
    Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    While the market is eager to get users into what they're calling "strategic portfolio management," there's a lot of uncertainty out there about what this market is and how it's different from other, more established portfolio disciplines – most significantly, project portfolio management.

    Indeed, if you look at how the space is covered within the industry, you'll encounter a dog's breakfast of players, a comparison of apples and oranges: Jira in the same quadrants as Planisware, Smartsheets in the same profiles as Planview and ServiceNow. While each of the individual players is impressive, their areas of focus are unique and the extent to which they should be compared together under the category of strategic portfolio management is questionable.

    It speaks to some of the grey area within the SPM space more generally, which is at a bit of a crossroads: Will it formally shed the guardrails of its antecedents to become its own space, or will it devolve into a bait and switch through which capabilities that struggled to gain much traction beyond IT settings seek to infiltrate the business and grow their market share under a different name?

    Part of it is up to the rest of us as users and potential customers. Clarifying what we need before we jump into something simply because our prior attempts failed will help determine whether we need a unique space for strategic portfolio management or whether we simply need to do portfolio management more strategically.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    • As an IT leader, you're responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in/ and responsible stewardship of: assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
    • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes and communications across business units. You're aware of a tool space called strategic portfolio management, and it looks like it could help, but you're unsure of how it's different from some of the existing tools you already license.
    • As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. Unpacking what's truly new in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what's just repackaged as SPM is no small undertaking.
    • Because SPM can span different business units, ways of working, and roles, getting buy-in, alignment, and adoption can be even more precarious than it is when implementing other types of solutions.
    • In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities.
    • Assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering or the extent to which you may need to look at other software categories.
    • With a better understanding of the space, we hope to help facilitate better internal discussions around the value of SPM for your business needs.

    Info-Tech Insight
    In the same way that it took many years for PPM to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. In a space that can be all things to all users, clarify your actual needs before jumping onto a bandwagon and ending up with something that you don't need, and that the organization can't adopt.

    Strategic portfolio management is enterprise portfolio management

    Evolved from various other capabilities and vendor solutions, strategic portfolio management (SPM) seeks to connect strategy to execution.

    While the concept of 'strategic portfolio management' has been written about within project portfolio management circles for nearly 20 years, SPM, as a distinct organizational competence and software category, is a relatively new and largely vendor-driven capability.

    First emerging in the discourse during the mid-to-late 2010s, SPM has evolved from its roots in traditional enterprise project portfolio management. Though, as we will discuss, it has other antecedents not limited to PPM.

    In this publication, we'll unpack what SPM is, how it is distinct (and, in turn, how it is not distinct) from PPM and other capabilities, and we will consider the extent to which your organization can and should leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

    –The increasing need to deliver value from digital initiatives is giving rise to strategic portfolio management, a digital investment management discipline that enables strategy realization in complex dynamic environments."
    – OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?"

    Only 2% of business leaders are confident that they will achieve 80% to 100% of their strategic objectives.
    Source: Smith, 2022

    Put strategic portfolio management in context

    SPM is a new stage in the history of project portfolio management more generally. While it's emerging as a distinct capability, and it borrows from capabilities beyond PPM, unpacking its distinctiveness is best done by first understanding its source.

    Understand the recent triggers for strategic portfolio management

    Triggers for the emergence of strategic portfolio management in the discourse include the pace of technology-introduced change, the waning of enterprise project management, and challenges around enterprise PPM tool adoption.

    Spot the difference?

    Scope, focus, and audience are just a few of the factors distinguishing what the market calls "SPM" from traditional PPM.

    Project Portfolio Management Differentiator Strategic Portfolio Management
    Work-Level (Tactical) Primary Orientation High-Level (Strategic)
    CIO Accountable for Outcomes CxO
    Project Manager Responsible for Outcomes Product Management Organization
    Project Managers, PMO Staff Targeted Users Business Leaders, ePMO Staff
    Project Portfolio(s) Essential Scope Multi-Portfolio (Project, Application, Product, Program, etc.)
    IT Project Delivery and Business Results Delivery Core Focus Business Strategy and Change Delivery
    Project Scope Change Impact Sensitivity Enterprise Scope
    IT and/or Business Benefit Language of Value Value Stream
    Project Timelines Main View Strategy Roadmaps
    Resource Capacity Primary Currency Money
    Work-Assignment Details Modalities of Planning Value Milestones & OKRs
    Work Management Modalities of Execution Governance (Project, Product, Strategy, Program, etc.)
    Project Completion Definitions of "Done" Business Capability Realization

    Info-Tech Insight
    The distinction between the two capabilities is not necessarily as black and white as the table above would have it (some "PPM" tools offer what we're identifying above as "SPM" capabilities), but it can be helpful to think in these binaries when trying to distinguish the two capabilities. At the very least, SPM broadens its scope to target more executive and business users, and functions best when it's speaking at a higher level, to a business audience.

    Strategic portfolio management offers a more holistic view of the enterprise

    At its best, strategic portfolio management can accommodate various paradigms of work management and incorporate different types of portfolio management.

    Perhaps the biggest evolution from traditional PPM that strategic portfolio management promises is that it casts a wider net in terms of the types of work it tracks (and how it tracks that work) and the types of portfolios it accommodates.

    Not bound to the concepts of "projects" and a "project portfolio" specifically, SPM broadens its scope to encompass capabilities like product and product portfolio management, enterprise architecture management, security and risk management, and more.

    • Where a PPM solution only shows one piece of the puzzle, SPM looks at the entire investment ecosystem, tracking strategic goals, the ideas generated to help achieve those goals, and all the various kinds of investments made in the service of those goals.
    • what's more, where traditional PPM tools required users to adhere to a certain way of working and managing tasks, SPM is more flexible, relying on integrations across various ways of working to provide higher-level insight on the progress of work and the achievement of goals.

    Deliver business strategy and change effectively

    Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Framework

    "An SPM tool will capture business strategy, business capabilities, operating models, the enterprise architecture and the project portfolio with unmatched visibility into how they all relate. This will give...a robust understanding of the impact of a proposed IT change " and enable IT and business to act like cocreators driving innovation."
    – Paula Ziehr

    You might need a strategic portfolio management tool if–

    If you find yourself facing any of these situations, it might be time to step away from your PPM tool and into an SPM approach:

    • Your organization is facing a large implementation that will cross multiple departmental units and requires alignment across senior leadership (e.g. a digital transformation initiative).
    • You currently have disparate systems tracking different portfolios (project, product, applications, etc.) and types of investments, but lack insight into the whole in terms of how work efforts and investments tie back to strategy realization.
    • You are an ePMO or a strategy realization office that doesn't manage work necessarily, but that rather ensures that the work, assets, and capabilities that are funded connect to strategy and drive the realization of strategy.

    Sixty one percent of leaders acknowledge their companies struggle to bridge the gap between creating a strategy and executing on that strategy.
    Source: StrategyBlocks, 2020

    Get to know your strategic portfolio management stakeholders

    In terms of users, SPM's focus is further up the org chart than most applications, relying on high-level but usable outputs to help drive decision making.

    ePMO or Strategy Realization Office Senior Leadership and Executive Stakeholders Business Leads and IT Directors and Managers
    SPM tools are best facilitated through enterprise PMOs or strategy realization offices. After all, in enterprises, these are the entities charged with the planning, execution, and tracking of strategy.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Helping to facilitate processes and collect data.
    • Data quality and curation.
    • Report distribution and consumption.
    As those with the accountability and authority to drive the organization's strategy, you could argue that these stakeholders are the primary stakeholders for an SPM tool.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
    • Using reports to steward strategy realization.
    SPM targets more business users as well as senior IT managers and directors.

    Their roles within the tool typically entail:

    • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
    • Providing updates to ePMOs on progress.

    What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (1 of 2)

    Standard features for SPM include:

    Name Description
    Analytics and Reporting SPM should provide access to real-time dashboards and data interpretation, which can be exported as reports in a range of formats.
    Strategy Mapping and Road Mapping SPM should provide access to up-to-date timeline views of strategies and initiatives, including the ability to map such things as dependencies, market needs, funding, priorities, governance, and accountabilities.
    Value Tracking and Measurement SPM should include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments. This includes accommodations for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
    Ideation and Innovation Management SPM should include the ability to facilitate innovation management processes across the organization, including the ability to support stage gates from ideation through to approval; to articulate, socialize, and test ideas; perform impact assessments; create value canvas and OKR maps; and prioritize.
    Multi-Portfolio Management SPM should include the ability to perform various modalities of portfolio management and portfolio optimization, including project portfolio management, applications portfolio management, asset portfolio management, etc.
    Interoperability/APIs An SPM tool should enable seamless integration with other applications for data interoperability.

    What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (2 of 2)

    Advanced features for SPM can include:

    Name Description
    Product Management SPM can include product-management-specific functionality, including the ability to connect product families, roadmaps, and backlogs to enterprise goals and priorities, and track team-level activities at the sprint, release, and campaign levels.
    Enterprise Architecture Management SPM can include the ability to define and map the structure and operation of an organization in order to effectively coordinate various domains of architecture and governance (e.g. business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, security architecture, etc.) in order to effectively plan and introduce change.
    Security and Risk Management SPM can include the ability to identify and track enterprise risks and ensure compliance controls are met.
    Lean Portfolio Management SPM can include the ability to plan and report on portfolio performance independent from task level details of product, program, or project delivery.
    Investment and Financial Management SPM can include the ability to forecast, track, and report on financials at various levels (strategy, product, program, project, etc.).
    Multi-Methodology Delivery SPM can include the ability to plan and execute work in a way that accommodates various planning and delivery paradigms (predictive, iterative, Kanban, lean, etc.).

    What's promising within the space?

    As this space continues to stabilize, the following are some promising associations for business and IT enablement.

    1. SPM accommodates various ways of working.
    • Where traditional PPM and work management tools required that users change their processes and tasking paradigms to fit within the tool's rigid task management and data structures, the best SPM tools are those that are adaptable to various ways of working and can accommodate many tasking and work management models.
    • Sometimes this is done through extensive integrations and APIs that pull data from existing work management applications into a single view within the SPM tool, and other times, this is done by abstracting the task-level details into a higher-level reporting structure (it can depend on the solution). In any event, the best SPMs are bound to one work management model.
    2. SPM puts the focus on value and change.
    • With its focus on the planning and execution of strategy, SPM can't avoid putting a spotlight on value and value realization. The best SPM tools include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments, and they accommodate for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
    • Of course, you can't realize value without successfully fostering change. And while SPM tools don't necessarily offer functionality explicitly identifiable as organizational change management, they can act as agents of change in putting the spotlight on the execution of change at the executive level.
    3. SPM fosters a coherent approach to demand management.
    • With its goal of ensuring that strategy informs the organization of portfolios and guides the selection of projects and delivery of products, SPM can potentially bring some order to what is often a chaotic demand-management landscape, ensuring that planned and in-progress work is well justified from an ROI perspective.

    What's of concern within the space?

    As a progeny from other capabilities, SPM has some risks and connotations potential users should be wary of.

    1. The space is rife with IT buzzwords and, as a concept, is sometimes used as a repackaging of failing concepts.
    • You don't need to spend too much time engaging with the literature around SPM before you notice the marketing appeals heavily to concepts like "digitalization," "digital transformation," "continual innovation," "agility/Agile," and the like. While these are all important concepts, and the pursuit of them is worthwhile in many cases, there's no denying they're used as consultant and vendor buzzwords, deployed to excite our imaginations, without necessarily providing much meat around what they mean or how they're deployed and successfully sustained.
    • Indeed, many concepts and capabilities that appear in relation to SPM are on the downward swing of industry hype cycles, suggesting that SPM may be being used by vendors and consultants as another attempt to repackage and capitalize on these concepts even as practitioners grow weary and suspicious of the marketing claims built up around them.
    2. Some solutions that identify as SPM are not.
    • Because it's on the upward swing of its place in the hype cycle, many established PPM and service management vendors are applying the 'strategic portfolio management" label to their products without necessarily doing anything different from a functionality perspective to fit within the space. As a result, SPM vendor landscapes can compare work management, project management, demand management tools, and more. Users who want SPM functionality need to stay frosty to ensure they get what they pay for.
    3. SPM tools may have a capacity blind spot.
    • The biggest barrier to getting things done and done well in modern enterprises is approving more work than you have the capacity to deliver. While SPM offerings can help with better demand management, not many of them cover the capacity side with the same level of improvement.

    Does your organization need a strategic portfolio management tool?

    Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to gauge your readiness for SPM.

    • As noted in previous places in this deck, there is often a grey area in the market between project portfolio management tools and strategic portfolio management tools.
    • Some PPM tools offer SPM functionality, while some SPM tools avoid traditional PPM outcomes and stay at a higher, strategic level.
    • Depending on the scope of your PMO or portfolio optimization needs, you may need a tool that has just one, or both, of these capabilities.
    • Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to help you assess whether you require a high-level strategy management tool, a more low-level project portfolio management tool, or a mix of both.

    Download Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment

    1.1 Assess your needs

    10 to 20 minutes

    1. The Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment is a 41-question survey broken up into three parts: (1) PMO Type, (2) Features and Functionality, (3) Roles.
    2. Go through each section using the provided dropdowns to help identify the orientation of your PMO, the feature and functionality needs of your office, as well as the roles whose needs will need to be serviced through the potential tool implementation.

    This screenshot shows a sample output from the assessment. Based upon your inputs, you'll be grouped within three ranges:

    1. Green: Based upon your inputs, you will benefit from an SPM tool.
    2. Yellow: You may benefit from an SPM tool, but you may also require something more traditional. Clarify your requirements before proceeding.
    3. Red: you're unlikely to leverage many of the benefits of an SPM tool at this time. Look for a more tactical solution.

    Sample Output from the assessment tool

    Input Output
    • Understanding of existing project management, project portfolio management, and work management applications.
    • Recommendation on PPM/SPM tool type
    Materials Participants
    • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment tool
    • Portfolio managers and/or ePMO directors
    • Project managers and product managers
    • Business stakeholders

    Explore the SPM vendor landscape

    Use Info-Tech's application selection resources to help find the right solution for your organization.

    If the analysis in the previous slides suggested you can benefit from an SPM tool, you can quick-start your vendor evaluation process with SoftwareReviews.

    SoftwareReviews has extensive coverage of not just the SPM space, but of the project portfolio management (pictured to the top right) and project management spaces as well. So, from the tactical to the strategic, SoftwareReviews can help you find the right tools.

    Further, as you settle in on a shortlist, you can begin your vendor analysis using our rapid application selection methodology (see framework on bottom right). For more information see our The Rapid Application Selection Framework blueprint.

    Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework

    Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for your PMO
    Turn planning into action with a realistic PMO timeline.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio
    Align portfolio management practices with COBIT (APO05: Manage Portfolio)

    Bibliography

    Angliss, Katy, and Pete Harpum. Strategic Portfolio Management: In the Multi-Project and Program Organization. Book. Routledge. 30 Dec. 2022.

    Anthony, James. "95 Essential Project Management Statistics: 2022 Market Share & Data Analysis." Finance Online. 2022. Web. Accessed 21 March 2022

    Banham, Craig. "Integrating strategic planning with portfolio management." Sopheon. Webinar. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Garfein, Stephen J. "Executive Guide to Strategic Portfolio Management: roadmap for closing the gap between strategy and results." PMI. Conference Paper. Oct. 2007. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Garfein, Stephen J. "Strategic Portfolio Management: A smart, realistic and relatively fast way to gain sustainable competitive advantage." PMI. Conference Paper. 2 March 2005. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Hontar, Yulia. "Strategic Portfolio Management." PPM Express. Blog 16 June 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Milsom, James. "6 Strategic Portfolio Management Trends for 2023." i-nexus. Blog. 25 Jan. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Milsom, James. "Strategic Portfolio Management 101." i-nexus. 8 Dec. 2021. Blog . Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?" YouTube. 17 Nov. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    OnePlan. "Strategic Portfolio Management for Enterprise Agile." YouTube. 27 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Piechota, Frank. "Strategic Portfolio Management: Enabling Successful Business Outcomes." Shibumi. Blog . 31 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    ServiceNow. "Strategic Portfolio Management—The Thing You've Been Missing." ServiceNow. Whitepaper. 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Smith, Shepherd, "50+ Eye-Opening Strategic Planning Statistics" ClearPoint Strategy. Blog. 13 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    SoftwareAG. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management (SPM)?" SoftwareAG. Blog. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Stickel, Robert. "What It Means to be Adaptive." OnePlan. Blog. 24 May 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    UMT360. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management?" YouTube. Webinar. 22 Oct. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Wall, Caroline. "Elevating Strategy Planning through Strategic Portfolio Management." StrategyBlocks. Blog. 26 Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Westmoreland, Heather. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management." Planview. Blog. 19 Oct 2002. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Wiltshire, Andrew. "Shibumi Included in Gartner Magic Quadrant for Strategic Portfolio Management for the 2nd Straight Year." Shibumi. Blog. 20 Apr. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Ziehr, Paula. "Keep your eye on the prize: Align your IT investments with business strategy." SoftwareAG. Blog. 5 Jul. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

    Industry-Specific Digital Transformation

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Infographic

    Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK®

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}252|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • To effectively protect your business interests, you need to be able to address what the most pressing vulnerabilities in your network are. Which attack vectors should you model first? How do you adequately understand your threat vectors when attacks continually change and adapt?
    • Security can often be asked the world but given a minimal budget with which to accomplish it.
    • Security decisions are always under pressure from varying demands that pull even the most well-balanced security team in every direction.
    • Adequately modeling any and every possible scenario is ineffective and haphazard at best. Hoping that you have chosen the most pressing attack vectors to model will not work in the modern day of threat tactics.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Precision is critical to being able to successfully defend against threats.
      • Traditional threat modeling such as STRIDE or PASTA is based on a spray-and-pray approach to identifying your next potential threat vector. Instead, take a structured risk-based approach to understanding both an attacker’s tactics and how they may be used against your enterprise. Threat preparedness requires precision, not guesswork.
    • Knowing is half the battle.
      • You may be doing better than you think. Undoubtedly, there is a large surface area to cover with threat modeling. By preparing beforehand, you can separate what’s important from what’s not and identify which attack vectors are the most pressing for your business.
    • Be realistic and measured.
      • Do not try to remediate everything. Some attack vectors and approaches are nearly impossible to account for. Take control of the areas that have reasonable mitigation methods and act on those.
    • Identify blind spots.
      • Understand what is out there and how other enterprises are being attacked and breached. See how you stack up to the myriad of attack tactics that have been used in real-life breaches and how prepared you are. Know what you’re ready for and what you’re not ready for.
    • Analyze the most pressing vectors.
      • Prioritize the attack vectors that are relevant to you. If an attack vector is an area of concern for your business, start there. Do not cover the entire tactics list if certain areas are not relevant.
    • Detection and mitigation lead to better remediation.
      • For each relevant tactic and techniques, there are actionable detection and mitigation methods to add to your list of remediation efforts.

    Impact and Result

    Using the MITRE ATT&CK® framework, Info-Tech’s approach helps you understand your preparedness and effective detection and mitigation actions.

    • Learn about potential attack vectors and the techniques that hostile actors will use to breach and maintain a presence on your network.
    • Analyze your current protocols versus the impact of an attack technique on your network.
    • Discover detection and mitigation actions.
    • Create a prioritized series of security considerations, with basic actionable remediation items. Plan your next threat model by knowing what you’re vulnerable to.
    • Ensure business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
    • Maintain privacy of data and other information.
    • Secure the network connection points.
    • Mitigate risks with the appropriate services.

    This blueprint and associated tool are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors, allowing them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are recommended to mitigate those risks.

    Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why threat preparedness is a crucial first step in defending your network against any attack type. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Attack tactics and techniques

    Review a breakdown of each of the various attack vectors and their techniques for additional context and insight into the most prevalent attack tactics.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 1: Attack Tactics and Techniques

    2. Threat Preparedness Workbook mapping

    Map your current security protocols against the impacts of various techniques on your network to determine your risk preparedness.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 2: Threat Preparedness Workbook Mapping
    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    3. Execute remediation and detective measures

    Use your prioritized attack vectors to plan your next threat modeling session with confidence that the most pressing security concerns are being addressed with substantive remediation actions.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 3: Execute Remediation and Detective Measures
    [infographic]

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}300|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    There are many challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt
    • Skills and talent in the IT team
    • A culture that resists change
    • Fear of job loss

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    By using the framework of culture, competencies, collaboration and capabilities, organizations can create dimensions in their I&O structure in order to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence though the effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Impact and Result

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation – Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers for success.

  • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
  • Understanding business needs and pain points is key to delivering solutions.
  • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at this as a journey.
    • Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Storyboard
    • I&O Digital Transformation Maturity Assessment Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers to success.

    Analyst Perspective

    It’s not just about the technology!

    Many businesses fail in their endeavors to complete a digital transformation, but the reasons are complex, and there are many ways to fail, whether it is people, process, or technology. In fact, according to many surveys, 70% of digital transformations fail, and it’s mainly down to strategy – or the lack thereof.

    A lot of organizations think of digital transformation as just an investment in technology, with no vision of what they are trying to achieve or transform. So, out of the gate, many organizations fail to undergo a meaningful transformation, change their business model, or bring about a culture of digital transformation needed to be seriously competitive in their given market.

    When it comes to I&O leaders who have been given a mandate to drive digital transformation projects, they still must align to the vision and mission of the organization; they must still train and hire staff that will be experts in their field; they must still drive process improvements and align the right technology to meet the needs of a digital transformation.

    John Donovan

    John Donovan

    Principal Research Director, I&O
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Digital transformation requires I&O teams to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence through effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Insight 1

    Collaboration is a key component of I&O – Promote strong collaboration between I&O and other business functions. When doing a digital transformation, it is clear that this is a cross-functional effort. Business leaders and IT teams need to align their objectives, prioritize initiatives, and ensure that you are seamlessly integrating technologies with the new business functions.

    Insight 2

    Embrace agility and adaptability as core principles – As the digital landscape continues to evolve, it is paramount that I&O leaders are agile and adaptable to changing business needs, adopting new technology and implementing new innovative solutions. The culture of continuous improvement and openness to experimentation and learning will assist the I&O leaders in their journey.

    Insight 3

    Future-proof your infrastructure and operations – By anticipating emerging technologies and trends, you can proactively plan and organize your team for future needs. By investing in scalable, flexible infrastructure such as cloud services, automation, AI technologies, and continuously upskilling the IT staff, you can stay relevant and forward-looking in the digital space.

    Tactical insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployment of services.

    Tactical insight

    Having a clear strategy, with leadership commitment along with hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are a lot of challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt.
    • Skills and talent in the IT team.
    • A culture that resists change.
    • Fear of job loss.

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many obstacles to digital transformation begin with non-I&O activities, including:

    • Lack of a clear vision and strategy.
    • Siloed organizational structure.
    • Lack of governance and data management.
    • Limited budget and resources.

    By addressing these obstacles, I&O will have a better chance of a successful transformation and delivering the full potential of digital technologies.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Building a culture of innovation by developing clear goals and creating a vision will be key.

    • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
    • Understand the business needs and pain points in order to effectively deliver solutions.
    • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at it as a journey.

    By completing the Info-Tech digital readiness questionnaire, you will see where you are in terms of maturity and areas you need to concentrate on.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    The cost of digital transformation

    The challenges that stand in the way of your success, and what is needed to reverse the risk

    What CIOs are saying about their challenges

    26% of those CIOs surveyed cite resistance to change, with entrenched viewpoints demonstrating a real need for a cultural shift to enhance the digital transformation journey.

    Source: Prophet, 2019.

    70% of digital transformation projects fall short of their objectives – even when their leadership is aligned, often with serious consequences.

    Source: BCG, 2020.

    Having a clear strategy and commitment from leadership, hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cultural change, business alignment, skills training, and setting a clear strategy with KPIs to demonstrate success are all key to being successful in your digital journey.

    Small and medium-sized enterprises

    What business owners and CEOs are saying about their digital transformation

    57% of small business owners feel they must improve their IT infrastructure to optimize their operations.

    Source: SMB Story, 2023.

    64% of CEOs believe driving digital transformation at a rapid pace is critical to attracting and retaining talent and customers.

    Source: KPMG, 2022.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployments.

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}293|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,459 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • Communication and collaboration portfolios are overburdened with redundant and overlapping services. Between Office 365, Slack, Jabber, and WebEx, IT is supporting a collection of redundant apps. This redundancy takes a toll on IT, and on the user.
    • Shadow IT is easier than ever, and cheap sharing tools are viral. Users are literally carrying around computers in their pockets (in the form of smartphones). IT often has no visibility into how these devices – and the applications on them – are used for work.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don’t know what you don’t know. Unstructured conversations with users will uncover insights.
    • Security is meaningless without usability. If security controls make a tool unusable, then users will rush to adopt something that’s free and easy.
    • Training users on a new tool once isn’t effective. Engage with users throughout the collaboration tool’s lifecycle.

    Impact and Result

    • Few supported apps and fewer unsupported apps. This will occur by ensuring that your collaboration tools will be useful to and used by users. Give users a say through surveys, focus groups, and job shadowing.
    • Lower total cost of ownership and greater productivity. Having fewer apps in the workplace, and better utilizing the functionality of those apps, will mean that IT can be much more efficient at managing your ECS.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction. Tools will be better suited to users’ needs, and users will feel heard by IT.

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a new approach to communication and collaboration apps, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a shared vision on the future of communication and collaboration

    Identify and validate goals and collaboration tools that are used by your users, and the collaboration capabilities that must be supported by your desired ECS.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 1: Create a Shared Vision on the Future of Communication and Collaboration
    • Enterprise Collaboration Strategy Template
    • Building Company Communication and Collaboration Technology Improvement Plan Executive Presentation
    • Communications Infrastructure Stakeholder Focus Group Guide
    • Enterprise Communication and Collaboration System Business Requirements Document

    2. Map a path forward

    Map a path forward by creating a collaboration capability map and documenting your ECS requirements.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 2: Map a Path Forward
    • Collaboration Capability Map

    3. Build an IT and end-user engagement plan

    Effectively engage everyone to ensure the adoption of your new ECS. Engagement is crucial to the overall success of your project.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 3: Proselytize the Change
    • Collaboration Business Analyst
    • Building Company Exemplar Collaboration Marketing One-Pager Materials
    • Communication and Collaboration Strategy Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify What Needs to Change

    The Purpose

    Create a vision for the future of your ECS.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Validate and bolster your strategy by involving your end users.

    Activities

    1.1 Prioritize Components of Your ECS Strategy to Improve

    1.2 Create a Plan to Gather Requirements From End Users

    1.3 Brainstorm the Collaboration Services That Are Used by Your Users

    1.4 Focus Group

    Outputs

    Defined vision and mission statements

    Principles for your ECS

    ECS goals

    End-user engagement plan

    Focus group results

    ECS executive presentation

    ECS strategy

    2 Map Out the Change

    The Purpose

    Streamline your collaboration service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented the business requirements for your collaboration services.

    Reduced the number of supported tools.

    Increased the effectiveness of training and enhancements.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a Current-State Collaboration Capability Map

    2.2 Build a Roadmap for Desired Changes

    2.3 Create a Future-State Capability Map

    2.4 Identify Business Requirements

    2.5 Identify Use Requirements and User Processes

    2.6 Document Non-Functional Requirements

    2.7 Document Functional Requirements

    2.8 Build a Risk Register

    Outputs

    Current-state collaboration capability map

    ECS roadmap

    Future-state collaboration capability map

    ECS business requirements document

    3 Proselytize the Change

    The Purpose

    Ensure the system is supported effectively by IT and adopted widely by end users.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Unlock the potential of your ECS.

    Stay on top of security and industry good practices.

    Greater end-user awareness and adoption.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop an IT Training Plan

    3.2 Develop a Communications Plan

    3.3 Create Initial Marketing Material

    Outputs

    IT training plan

    Communications plan

    App marketing one-pagers

    Mitigate Machine Bias

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}343|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,549 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • AI is the new electricity. It is fundamentally and radically changing the fabric of our world, from the way we conduct business, to how we work and live, make decisions, and engage with each other, to how we organize our society, and ultimately, to who we are. Organizations are starting to adopt AI to increase efficiency, better engage customers, and make faster, more accurate decisions.
    • Like with any new technology, there is a flip side, a dark side, to AI – machine biases. If unchecked, machine biases replicate, amplify, and systematize societal biases. Biased AI systems may treat some of your customers (or employees) differently, based on their race, gender, identity, age, etc. This is discrimination, and it is against the law. It is also bad for business, including missed opportunities, lost consumer confidence, reputational risk, regulatory sanctions, and lawsuits.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Machine biases are not intentional. They reflect the cognitive biases, preconceptions, and judgement of the creators of AI systems and the societal structures encoded in the data sets used for machine learning.
    • Machine biases cannot be prevented or fully eliminated. Early identification and diversity in and by design are key. Like with privacy and security breaches, early identification and intervention – ideally at the ideation phase – is the best strategy. Forewarned is forearmed. Prevention starts with a culture of diversity, inclusivity, openness, and collaboration.
    • Machine bias is enterprise risk. Machine bias is not a technical issue. It is a social, political, and business problem. Integrate it into your enterprise risk management (ERM).

    Impact and Result

    • Just because machine biases are induced by human behavior, which is also captured in data silos, they are not inevitable. By asking the right questions upfront during application design, you can prevent many of them.
    • Biases can be introduced into an AI system at any stage of the development process, from the data you collect, to the way you collect it, to which algorithms are used, to which assumptions are made, etc. Ask your data science team a lot of questions; leave no stone unturned.
    • Don’t wait until “Datasheets for Datasets” and “Model Cards for Model Reporting” (or similar frameworks) become standards. Start creating these documents now to identify and analyze biases in your apps. If using open-source data sets or libraries, you may need to create them yourself for now. If working with partners or using AI/ ML services, demand that they provide such information as part of the engagement. You, not your partners, are ultimately responsible for the AI-powered product or service you deliver to your customers or employees.
    • Build a culture of diversity, transparency, inclusivity, and collaboration – the best mechanism to prevent and address machine biases.
    • Treat machine bias as enterprise risk. Use your ERM to guide all decisions around machine biases and their mitigation.

    Mitigate Machine Bias Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the dark side of AI: algorithmic (machine) biases, how they emerge, why they are dangerous, and how to mitigate them. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand AI biases

    Learn about machine biases, how and where they arise in AI systems, and how they relate to human cognitive and societal biases.

    • Mitigate Machine Bias – Phase 1: Understand AI Biases

    2. Identify data biases

    Learn about data biases and how to mitigate them.

    • Mitigate Machine Bias – Phase 2: Identify Data Biases
    • Datasheets for Data Sets Template
    • Datasheets for Datasets

    3. Identify model biases

    Learn about model biases and how to mitigate them.

    • Mitigate Machine Bias – Phase 3: Identify Model Biases
    • Model Cards for Model Reporting Template
    • Model Cards For Model Reporting

    4. Mitigate machine biases and risk

    Learn about approaches for proactive and effective bias prevention and mitigation.

    • Mitigate Machine Bias – Phase 4: Mitigate Machine Biases and Risk
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mitigate Machine Bias

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare

    The Purpose

    Understand your organization’s maturity with respect to data and analytics in order to maximize workshop value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Workshop content aligned to your organization’s level of maturity and business objectives.

    Activities

    1.1 Execute Data Culture Diagnostic.

    1.2 Review current analytics strategy.

    1.3 Review organization's business and IT strategy.

    1.4 Review other supporting documentation.

    1.5 Confirm participant list for workshop.

    Outputs

    Data Culture Diagnostic report.

    2 Understand Machine Biases

    The Purpose

    Develop a good understanding of machine biases and how they emerge from human cognitive and societal biases. Learn about the machine learning process and how it relates to machine bias.

    Select an ML/AI project and complete a bias risk assessment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A solid understanding of algorithmic biases and the need to mitigate them.

    Increased insight into how new technologies such as ML and AI impact organizational risk.

    Customized bias risk assessment template.

    Completed bias risk assessment for selected project.

    Activities

    2.1 Review primer on AI and machine learning (ML).

    2.2 Review primer on human and machine biases.

    2.3 Understand business context and objective for AI in your organization.

    2.4 Discuss selected AI/ML/data science project or use case.

    2.5 Review and modify bias risk assessment.

    2.6 Complete bias risk assessment for selected project.

    Outputs

    Bias risk assessment template customized for your organization.

    Completed bias risk assessment for selected project.

    3 Identify Data Biases

    The Purpose

    Learn about data biases: what they are and where they originate.

    Learn how to address or mitigate data biases.

    Identify data biases in selected project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A solid understanding of data biases and how to mitigate them.

    Customized Datasheets for Data Sets Template.

    Completed datasheet for data sets for selected project.

    Activities

    3.1 Review machine learning process.

    3.2 Review examples of data biases and why and how they happen.

    3.3 Identify possible data biases in selected project.

    3.4 Discuss “Datasheets for Datasets” framework.

    3.5 Modify Datasheets for Data Sets Template for your organization.

    3.6 Complete datasheet for data sets for selected project.

    Outputs

    Datasheets for Data Sets Template customized for your organization.

    Completed datasheet for data sets for selected project.

    4 Identify Model Biases

    The Purpose

    Learn about model biases: what they are and where they originate.

    Learn how to address or mitigate model biases.

    Identify model biases in selected project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A solid understanding of model biases and how to mitigate them.

    Customized Model Cards for Model Reporting Template.

    Completed model card for selected project.

    Activities

    4.1 Review machine learning process.

    4.2 Review examples of model biases and why and how they happen.

    4.3 Identify potential model biases in selected project.

    4.4 Discuss Model Cards For Model Reporting framework.

    4.5 Modify Model Cards for Model Reporting Template for your organization.

    4.6 Complete model card for selected project.

    Outputs

    Model Cards for Model Reporting Template customized for your organization.

    Completed model card for selected project.

    5 Create Mitigation Plan

    The Purpose

    Review mitigation approach and best practices to control machine bias.

    Create mitigation plan to address machine biases in selected project. Align with enterprise risk management (ERM).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A solid understanding of the cultural dimension of algorithmic bias prevention and mitigation and best practices.

    Drafted plan to mitigate machine biases in selected project.

    Activities

    5.1 Review and discuss lessons learned.

    5.2 Create mitigation plan to address machine biases in selected project.

    5.3 Review mitigation approach and best practices to control machine bias.

    5.4 Identify gaps and discuss remediation.

    Outputs

    Summary of challenges and recommendations to systematically identify and mitigate machine biases.

    Plan to mitigate machine biases in selected project.

    10 Secrets for Successful Disaster Recovery in the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}419|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,096 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • The pay-per-use pricing structure of cloud services make it a cheaper DR option, but there are gotchas you need to avoid, ranging from unexpected licensing costs to potential security vulnerabilities.
    • You likely started on the path to cloud DR with consideration of cloud storage for offsite retention of backups. Systems recovery in the cloud can be a real value-add to using cloud as a backup target.
    • Your cloud-based DR environment has to be secure and compliant, but performance also has to be “good enough” to operate the business.
    • Location still matters, and selecting the DR site that optimizes latency tolerance and geo-redundancy can be difficult.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Keep your systems dormant until disaster strikes. Prepare as much of your environment as possible without tapping into compute resources. Enjoy the low at-rest costs, and leverage the reliability of the cloud in your failover.
    • Avoid failure on the failback! Bringing up your systems in the cloud is a great temporary solution, but an expensive long-term strategy. Make sure you have a plan to get back on premises.
    • Leverage cloud DR as a start for cloud migration. Cloud DR provides a gateway for broader infrastructure lift and shift to cloud IaaS, but this should only be the first phase of a longer-term roadmap that ends in multi-service hybrid cloud.

    Impact and Result

    • Calculate the cost of your DR solution with a cloud vendor. Test your systems often to build out more accurate budgets and to define failover and failback action plans to increase confidence in your capabilities.
    • Define “good enough” performance by consulting with the business and setting correct expectations for the recovery state.
    • Dig deeper into the various flavors of cloud-based DR beyond backup and restore, including pilot light, warm standby, and multi-site recovery. Each of these has unique benefits and challenges when done in the cloud.

    10 Secrets for Successful Disaster Recovery in the Cloud Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out the 10 secrets for success in cloud-based DR deployment, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    [infographic]

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}132|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 115 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by looking at their data – empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to achieve becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip employees with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Use a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skills gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding, development plan).

    Impact and Result

    Data literacy is critical to the success of digital transformation and AI analytics. Info-Tech’s approach to creating a sustainable and effective data literacy program is recognizing it is:

    • More than just technical training. A data literacy program isn’t just about data; it encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    • More than a one-off exercise. To keep the literacy skills alive the program must be regular, sustainable, and tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    • More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles to ensure an effective delivery.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help organizations build an effective and sustainable data literacy program that benefits all employees who work with data.

    Data literacy as part of the data governance strategic program should be launched to all levels of employees that will help your organization bridge the data knowledge gap at all levels of the organization. This research recommends approaches to different learning styles to address data skill needs and helps members create a practical and sustainable data literacy program.

    • Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard

    2. Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template – A document that provides an example of a fundamental data literacy program.

    Kick off a data awareness program that explains the fundamental understanding of data and its lifecycle. Explore ways to create or mature the data literacy program with smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis.

    • Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture, bridging the data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Data literacy is the missing link to becoming a data-driven organization.

    “Digital transformation” and “data driven” are two terms that are inseparable. With organizations accelerating in their digital transformation roadmap implementation, organizations need to invest in developing data skills with their people. Talent is scarce and the demand for data skills is huge, with 70% of employees expected to work heavily with data by 2025. There is no time like the present to launch an organization-wide data literacy program to bridge the data knowledge gap and foster a data-driven culture.

    Data literacy training is as important as your cybersecurity training. It impacts all levels of the organization. Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Annabel Lui

    Principal Advisory Director, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning (ML) and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip people with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Common Obstacles

    Challenges the data leadership is likely to face as digital transformation initiatives drive intensified competition:

    • Resistance to change
    • Technological distractions
    • “Shadow data”
    • Difficulty securing resources and skilled data professionals
    • Inability to appreciate the value of data and its meaning for users – even fear of it

    Info-Tech's Approach

    We interviewed data leaders and instructors to gather insights about investing in data:

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Implement a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skill gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding,development plan).

    Info-Tech Insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program for the audience's own experience, maturity level, and learning style, organizations build the data-driven and engaged culture that helps them to unlock their data's full potential and outperform other organizations.

    Your Challenge

    Data literacy is the missing link to drive business outcomes from data.

    • Having a data-driven culture as an organization’s mission statement without implementing a data literacy program is like making an empty promise and leaving the value unrealized and unattainable.
    • A study conducted by the Data Literacy Project clearly indicates that organizations with aggressive data literacy programs will outperform those who do not have such programs. By 2030, data literacy will be one of the most sought-after skill sets. All employees require data literacy skills.
    • Everyone has a role in data. From employees who are actively involved in data collection to operational teams who create reports with analytics tools and finally to executives who use data to make business decisions – they all require continuous data literacy training in a data-driven organization. Because of differences in maturity, data literacy strategies cannot be one-size-fits-all.

    “Data literacy is the ability to read, work with, analyze, and communicate with data. It's a skill that empowers all levels of workers to ask the right questions of data and machines, build knowledge, make decisions, and communicate meaning to others.” – Qlik, n.d.

    75% of organizational employees have access to data tools – only 21% demonstrated confidence in their data skills.

    Source: Accenture, 2020.

    89% of C-level executives expect team members to explain how data has informed their decisions, but only 11% employees are fully confident in their ability to read, analyze, work with, and communicate with data

    Source: Qlik, 2022.

    Data debt or data asset?

    Manage your data as strategic assets.

    “[Data debt is] when you have undocumented, unused, incomplete, and inconsistent data,” according to Secoda (2023). “When … data debt is not solved, data teams could risk wasting time managing reports no one uses and producing data that no one understands.”

    Signs of data debt when considering investing in data literacy:

    • Lack of definition and understanding of data terms, therefore they don’t speak the same language. Without data literacy, an organization will not succeed in becoming a data-driven organization.
    • Putting data literacy as a low priority. Organization sees this as “another” training to put on the list and keeps it on the back burner.
    • Data literacy is not seen as the number one skill set needed in the organization. However, anyone who works with data requires data skills.
    • End users are not trained on self-serve features and tools.
    • Focusing on a minority group of people rather than everyone in the organization or seeing it as a one-off exercise.
    • Delays or failure to deliver digital transformation projects due to lack of data skills and data access issues.

    66%

    of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    40%

    of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    30%

    of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

    Source: Experian, 2020

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Diagram showing components of Data literacy: 1 - Data: understand your data, 2 - Business: define the purpose, 3 - IT: Introduce new ways of working

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. More than just technical training. Data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    2. More than a one-off exercise. To keep literacy skills alive, the program must be routine and sustainable, tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    3. More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles.

    Data needs to be processed

    Data – facts – are organized, processed, and given meaning to become insights.

    Data, information, knowledge, insight, wisdom

    Image source: Welocalize, 2020.

    Data represents a discrete fact or event without relation to other things (e.g. it is raining). Data is unorganized and not useful on its own.

    Information organizes and structures data so that it is meaningful and valuable for a specific purpose (i.e. it answers questions). Information is a refined form of data.

    When information is combined with experience and intuition, it results in knowledge. It is our personal map/model of the world.

    Knowledge set with context generates insight. We become knowledgeable as a result of reading, researching, and memorizing (i.e. accumulating information).

    Wisdom means the ability to make sound judgments. Wisdom synthesizes knowledge and experiences into insights.

    Investment in data literacy is a game changer.

    Data literacy is the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner.

    A data-driven culture is “an operating environment that seeks to leverage data whenever and wherever possible to enhance business efficiency and effectiveness” (Forbes).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data-driven culture refers to a workplace where decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for building a data literacy program

    Phase Steps

    1. Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Understand organization’s needs

    1.2 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    2. Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Create persona and identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    3. Socialize Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Establish a roadmap

    3.2 Set key performance metrics and milestones

    Phase Outcomes

    Identify key objectives to establish and grow the data literacy program by articulating the problem and solutions proposed.

    Assess each audience’s learning style and adapt the program to their unique needs.

    Show a roadmap with key performance indicators to track each milestone and tell a data story.

    Insight Summary

    “In a world of more data, the companies with more data-literate people are the ones that are going to win.”

    – Miro Kazakoff, senior lecturer, MIT Sloan, in MIT Sloan School of Management, 2021

    Overarching insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program personalized to each audience's maturity level, learning style, and experience, organizations can develop and grow a data-driven culture that unlocks the data's full potential for competitive differentiation.

    Module 1 insight

    We can learn a lot from each other. Literacy works both ways – business data stewards learn to “speak data” while IT data custodians understand the business context and value. Everyone should strive to exchange knowledge.

    Module 2 insight

    Avoid traditional classroom teaching – create a data literacy program that is learner-centric to allow participants to learn and experiment with data.

    Aligning program design to those learning styles will make participants more likely to be receptive to learning a new skill.

    Module 3 insight

    A data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data. With executive support and partnership with business, running a data literacy program means that it won’t end up being just another technical training. The program needs to address why, what, how questions.

    Tactical insight

    A lot of programs don’t include the fundamentals. To get data concepts to stick, focus on socializing the data/information/knowledge/wisdom foundation.

    Tactical insight

    Many programs speak in abstract terms. We present case studies and tangible use cases to personalize training to the audience’s world and showcase opportunities enabled through data.

    Key performance indicators (KPIs) for your data literacy program

    How do you know if your data literacy program is successful? Here are some useful KPIs:

    Program Adoption Metrics

    • Percentage of employees attending data literacy training
    • Percentage of participants who report gains in data management knowledge after training sessions
    • Maturity assessment result
    • Survey and diagnostic feedback before and after training
    • Trend analysis of overall data literacy program

    Operational Metrics

    • Number of requests for analytics/reporting services
    • Number of reports created by users
    • Speed and quality of business decisions
    • User satisfaction with reports and analytics services
    • Improved business performance (customer satisfaction)
    • Improved valuation of organization data

    A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the quality of data across sources, and raises the skills and understanding among the frontlines by encouraging everyone to leverage data for critical thinking and innovation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of the project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Review Data Culture Diagnostic results

    1.2 Identify business context: business goals, initiatives

    1.3 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    Build a Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Identify program initiatives and topics

    3.2 Determine delivery methods

    3.3 Build the data literacy roadmap

    Operational Strategy to implement Data Literacy

    4.1 Identify key performance metrics

    4.2 Identify owners and document RACI matrix

    4.3 Discuss next steps and wrap up.

    Deliverables

    1. Diagnostics reports (data culture survey)
    2. Vision and value statement
    1. Assessment of audience covering all levels of organization
    1. List of key program initiatives and topics
    2. Allocation of delivery methods
    3. Roadmap
    1. Data literacy metrics
    2. List of owners and roles and responsibilities
    3. Next step and implementation schedule

    Phase 1

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    Phase 1: step 1 - Understand organization's needs, step 2 - Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the organization’s needs.
    • Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    1.1 Gauge your organization’s current data culture

    Conduct data culture survey or diagnostic.

    1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
    2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
    3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
    4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

    Input

    • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

    Output

    • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
    • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic service

    Participants

    • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
    • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
    • Core data users and consumers

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

    1.2 Define data literacy objectives

    1. Understand the organization’s needs by identifying opportunities and challenges relating to data. Document the described real-life examples.
    2. Categorize the list and identify areas where data literacy can address the business problem.
    3. Create a vision statement for the data literacy program, ensuring that it covers all levels of the organization.
    4. Articulate the intended targets and goals in planning for a data literacy program.

    Input

    • List of opportunities and challenges relating to data
    • Relevant business real-life examples

    Output

    • Categorized list of data literacy needs
    • Vision for literacy program
    • Targets and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Quick wins for improving data literacy

    Data collected through Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic suggests three ways to improve data literacy:

    87%

    think more can be done to define and document commonly used terms with methods such as a business data glossary.

    68%

    think they can have a better understanding of the meaning of all data elements that are being captured or managed.

    86%

    feel that they can have more training in terms of tools as well as on what data is available at the organization.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group's Data Culture Diagnostic, 2022; N=2,652

    Quick Wins

    • Create a business data glossary to document and define common terms.
    • Provide easy access to the business data glossary and procedures on how data is captured and managed.
    • Launch an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Delivering value is a means and the goal

    Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.

    Identify business problem:

    • Business decisions without facts are just guesses.
    • Management spends a lot of time finding and fixing data.
    • Unknown challenges on data assets and risk.
    • Incomplete view of customer/client and industry.
    • Not ready for modern data opportunities (e.g. artificial intelligence).

    Create an objective

    Treat data as a strategic asset to gain insight into our customers for all levels of organization.

    The solution: Data-driven culture powered by people who speak data.

    • Data dictionary
    • Data literacy
    • Trusted single source
    • Access to analytics tools
    • Decision making

    "According to Forrester, 91% of organizations find it challenging to improve the use of data insights for decision-making – even though 90% see it as a priority. Why the disconnect? A lack of data literacy."

    – Alation, 2020

    Fundamental data literacy

    Data literacy is more than just a technical training or a one-off exercise.

    Info-Tech provides various topics suited for a data literacy program that can accommodate different data skill requirements and encompasses relevant aspects of business, IT, and data.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Literacy Program

    Use discovery and diagnostics to understand users’ comfort level and maturity with data.

    Data lunch 'n' learn

    • The power and value of data
    • Everyone is a data steward
    • Becoming data literate
    • Data 101
    • The future is data
    1 hour
    For: General audience, senior leadership, data leads, change management

    Speak data

    • What is data
    • Meet the data team
    • Day in the life of a steward
    • How data impacts you
    • Tools of the trade
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, data owners, pre-data strategy workshop

    Your data story

    • Ask the right questions
    • Find the top five data elements
    • Understand your data
    • Present your data story
    • Lessons from COVID-19
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, business data owners, pre-BI/analytics workshop

    Phase 2

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    Phase 2: step 1 - Identify audience, step 2 - Access learning style and align to program design, step 3 - Determine the right delivery method.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your audience.
    • Assess learning styles and align them to the data program design.
    • Determine the right delivery method.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    Avoid common pitfalls

    75%

    feel that training was too long to remember or to apply in their day-to-day work.

    21%

    find training had insufficient follow-up to help them apply on the job.

    Source: Grovo, 2018.

    1. Information Overload

      Trying to cover too much useful information results in overwhelm and does not deliver on key training objectives.
    2. Limited Implementation

      Learning is only the beginning. The real results are obtained when learning is followed by practice, which turns new knowledge into reliable habits.
    3. Lack of Organizational Alignment

      Implementing training without a clear link to organizational objectives leaves you unable to clearly communicate its value, undermines your ability to secure buy-in from attendees and executives, and leaves you unable to verify that the training is actually improving effectiveness.

    2.1 Understand learning style

    1. Create persona and identify the audiences and their roles in data across all levels of the organization.
    2. Identify the data program initiatives and assign the best delivery method to each initiative.
    3. Assign participants to each program initiative based on their skill gap and learning style.

    Input

    • List of audiences, their roles, and tenures
    • Data skill gap assessment
    • List of literacy program initiatives/topics

    Output

    • Target audience grouping
    • List of program initiatives with assigned groups

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    You and data

    Is data an integral part of your work?

    Do you feel comfortable finding and using data in your organization?

    • Many people feel intimidated by data and therefore miss out on what data can do for them.
    • Often the obstacle is language. If you don’t understand the semantics around data, you will not feel confident to contribute to discussions around data.
    • You use data every day but need additional vocabulary to understand how to handle it properly.
    • Data literacy is the ability to “speak data” and to understand what data means (i.e. how to read charts and graphs, draw valid conclusions, and recognize when data is misinterpreted or used inappropriately to be misleading).
    • The business often doesn’t understand its role in data governance and how it informs and assists IT in responsible data management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT and data professionals need to understand the business as much as business needs to talk about data. Bidirectional learning and feedback improves the synergy between business and IT.

    Create personas

    Persona creation is a way to brainstorm ideas for the data literacy program.

    Choose a data role (e.g. data steward, data owner, data scientist).

    Describe the persona based on goals, priorities, tenures, preferred learning style, type of work with data.

    Identify data skill and level of skills required.

    Persona 1: Denise - Manager, People and Culture. Goals, priorities, tenure, data role, learning style, skill level

    Consider these other ways to brainstorm:

    • Review current in-flight projects.
    • Analyze types of data requests.
    • Understand needs by department.
    • Share learnings in a community of practice.

    Program design

    Categorize into six data skill areas

    Not everyone needs the same level of skill sets

    Bullseye board with skill levels (Innermost going outward): Expert, advanced, intermediate and Basic. The six data skill areas: 1. Understanding Data, 2. Find and Obtain Data, 3. Read, Interpret and Evaluate Data, 4. Manage Data, 5. Create and Use Data, 6. Tell a Story and Share Data are placed equally around in sections.

    Map the personas to the program

    Bridging the data knowledge gap.

    • Each component will promote the value of data to all levels of employees when demonstrating the right way for data to be understood, managed, and consumed in the organization.
    • Categorizing the data literacy program into six areas and levels of skill sets will provide clarity into which areas to focus on.
    • The program is intended to be implemented in stages, allowing the audience to learn and adopt the new skills. Leveraging in-flight projects for rolling out training will have a higher success because the need is already built into the project.
    Personas are placed at different points in the data skill area and skill level.

    Align program design to learning styles

    The four methods (Discussion, Information, Coaching, and Self-Discovery) are based on learner-centered model design rather than the traditional teacher-centered model.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to different levels of users.

    When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to spread knowledge throughout your organization. It should target everyone from executive leadership to management to subject matter experts across all functions of the business.

    Discussion method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor empowers and motivates learner through dialogues and exercises

    The imaginative learner

    The imaginative learner group likes to engage in feelings and spend time on reflection. This type of learner desires personal meaning and involvement. They focus on personal values for themselves and others and make connections quickly.

    For this group of learners, their question is: why should I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek meaning
    • Need to be personally involved
    • Learn by listening and sharing ideas
    • Function through social interaction

    Information method

    Delivery Method

    • Instructor does most of the talking in the training
    • Instructor is teaching the content, delivering the training content, and demonstrating

    Analytical learner

    The analytical learner group likes to listen, to think about information, and to come up with ideas. They are interested in acquiring facts and delving into concepts and processes. They can learn effectively and enjoy doing independent research.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek and examine the facts
    • Need to know what experts think
    • Interested in ideas and concepts
    • Critique information and collect data
    • Function by adapting to experts

    Coaching method

    Delivery Method

    • Learning has on-the-job training or learning through role-play exercises
    • Instructor is coaching and facilitating learner

    Common sense learner

    The common sense learner group likes thinking and doing. They are satisfied when they can carry out experiments, build and design, and create usability. They like tinkering and applying useful ideas.

    For this group of learners, their question is: how should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek usability
    • Need to know how things work
    • Learn by testing theories using practical methods
    • Use factual data to build concepts
    • Enjoy hands-on experience

    Self-discovery method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor provides evaluation and remedial instruction

    Common sense learner

    The dynamic learner group learns through doing and experiencing. They are continually looking for hidden possibilities and researching ideas to make original adjustments. They learn through trial and error and self-discovery.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what if I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek hidden possibilities
    • Need to know what can be done with things
    • Learn by trial and error
    • Enjoy variety and excel in being flexible

    Delivery method considerations

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    Phase 3

    Map Out Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    Phase 3: step 1 - Roadmap exercise, step 2 - Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete a roadmap exercise.
    • Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    3.1 Build the data literacy roadmap and milestones

    1-3 hours
    1. Gather the data literacy objectives and list of program initiatives with their assigned groups.
    2. Discuss each program initiative with the data literacy creation team, assigning content owners and estimating effort required to build the content.

    For the Gantt chart:

    • Input the roadmap start year.
    • List each data literacy topic and delivery method.
    • Populate the planned start and end dates for the prepopulated list of program initiatives.

    Input

    • List of data literacy topics with assigned groups
    • Vision statement of data literacy program
    • Data literacy objectives

    Output

    • Roadmap Gantt chart
    • List of program initiatives with start and end date
    • Content owner assignment

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • MS Projects/Excel

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Data literacy journey mapping

    Making it sustainable

    • Deliver the literacy program in stages to make it easier for the audience to consume the content.
    • Allow opportunities to apply the learnings at work.
    • Map out the data literacy trainings as they get delivered and identify gaps, if any. Continue to refine and adjust the program and delivery method for better outcome.
    • Set clear goals and KPIs measurement up front.
    • Conduct Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Culture Diagnostics to set the baseline and repeat the assessment in 12 to 18 months.
    • Assign champions to lead change and influence end users to adopt better processes.
    Data Literacy journey mapping. Different departments need different skills in data literacy.

    Research contributors

    Name

    Position

    Andrea Malick Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Andy Neill AVP, Data and Analytics, Chief Enterprise Architect, Info-Tech Research Group
    Crystal Singh Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Imad Jawadi Senior Manager, Consulting Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group
    Irina Sedenko Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Sherwick Min Technical Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group
    Wayne Cain Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech’s Data Literacy Program

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Understand the WHY and Value of Data

    1.1 Business context, business objectives, and goals

    1.2 You and data

    1.3 Data journey from data to insights

    1.4 Speak data – common terminology

    Learn about the WHAT Through Data Flow

    2.1 Data creation

    2.2 Data ingestion

    2.3 Data accumulation

    2.4 Data augmentation

    2.5 Data delivery

    2.6 Data consumption

    Explore the HOW Through Data Visualization Training

    3.1 Ask the right questions

    3.2 Find the top five data elements

    3.3 Understand your data

    3.4 Present your data story

    3.5 Sharing of lessons learned

    Put Them All Together Through Data Governance Awareness

    4.1 Data governance framework

    4.2 Data roles and responsibilities

    4.3 Data domain and owners

    Deliverables

    1. Learning material for understanding the data fundamental and its terminology
    1. Learning material for data flow elements
    1. Learning material for data visualization
    1. Learning material for data governance awareness program

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Establish Data Governance

    Deliver measurable business value.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    Bibliography

    About Learning. “4MAT overview.” About Learning., 16 Aug. 2001. Web.

    Accenture. “The Human Impact of Data Literacy,” Accenture, 2020. Web.

    Anand, Shivani. “IDC Reveals India Data and Content Technologies Predictions for 2022 and onwards; Focus on Data Literacy for an Elevated data Culture.” IDC, 14 Mar. 2022. Web.

    Belissent, Jennifer, and Aaron Kalb. “Data Literacy: The Key to Data-Driven Decision Making.” Alation, April 2020. Web.

    Brown, Sara. “How to build data literacy in your company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 9 Feb 2021. Web.

    ---. “How to build a data-driven company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Domo. “Data Never Sleeps 9.0.” Domo, 2021. Web.

    Dykes, Brent. “Creating A Data-Driven Culture: Why Leading By Example Is Essential.” Forbes, 26 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021. Web.

    Experian. “2019 Global Data Management Research.” Experian, 2019. Web.

    Knight, Michelle. “Data Literacy Trends in 2023: Formalizing Programs.” Dataversity, 3 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Ghosh, Paramita. “Data Literacy Skills Every Organization Should Build.” Dataversity, 2 Nov. 2022. Web.

    Johnson, A., et al., “How to Build a Strategy in a Digital World,” Compact, 2018, vol. 2. Web.

    LifeTrain. “Learning Style Quiz.” EMTrain, Web.

    Lambers, E., et al. “How to become data literate and support a data-drive culture.” Compact, 2018, vol. 4. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “Why is data literacy important for any business?” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “8 simple ways to enhance your data literacy skills.” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web/

    Mendoza, N.F. “Data literacy: Time to cure data phobia” Tech Republic, 27 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Mizrahi, Etai. “How to stay ahead of data debt and downtime?” Secoda, 17 April 2023. Web.

    Needham, Mass., “IDC FutureScape: Top 10 Predictions for the Future of Intelligence.” IDC, 5 Dec. 2022. Web.

    Paton, J., and M.A.P. op het Veld. “Trusted Analytics.” Compact, 2017, vol. 2. Web.

    Qlik. “Data Literacy to be Most In-Demand Skill by 2030 as AI Transforms Global Workplaces.” Qlik., 16 Mar 2022. Web.

    Qlik. “What is data literacy?” Qlik, n.d. Web.

    Reed, David. Becoming Data Literate. Harriman House Publishing, 1 Sept. 2021. Print.

    Salomonsen, Summer. “Grovo’s First-Time Manager Microlearning® Program Will Help Your New Managers Thrive in 2018.” Grovos Blog, 5 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Webb, Ryan. “More Than Just Reporting: Uncovering Actionable Insights From Data.” Welocalize, 1 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}378|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,756 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • The demand for qualified cybersecurity professionals far exceeds supply. As a result, organizations are struggling to protect their data against the evolving threat landscape.
    • It is a constant challenge to know what skills will be needed in the future, and when and how to acquire them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Plan for the inevitable. All industries are expected to be affected by the talent gap in the coming years. Plan ahead to address your organization’s future needs.
    • Base skills acquisition decisions on the five key factors to define skill needs. Create an impact scale for the five key factors (data criticality, durability, availability, urgency, and frequency) that reflects your organizational strategy, initiatives, and pressures.
    • A skills gap will always exist to some degree. The threat landscape is constantly changing, and your workforce’s skill sets must evolve as well.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations must align their security initiatives to talent requirements such that business objectives are achieved and the business is cyber ready.
    • Identify if there are skill gaps in your current workforce.
    • Decide how you’ll acquire needed skills based on characteristics of need for each skill.

    Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a technical skills acquisition strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify skill needs for target state

    Identify what skills will be needed in your future state.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 1: Identity Skill Needs for Target State
    • Security Initiative Skills Guide
    • Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    2. Identify technical skill gaps

    Align role requirements with future initiative skill needs.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 2: Identify Technical Skill Gaps
    • Current Workforce Skills Assessment
    • Technical Skills Workbook
    • Information Security Compliance Manager
    • IT Security Analyst
    • Chief Information Security Officer
    • Security Administrator
    • Security Architect

    3. Develop a sourcing plan for future work roles

    Acquire skills based on the impact of the five key factors.

    • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Skills Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles – Phase 3: Develop a Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Skill Needs for Target State

    The Purpose

    Determine the skills needed in your workforce and align them to your organization’s security roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Insight on what skills your organization will need in the future.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the importance of aligning security initiatives skill needs with workforce requirements.

    1.2 Identify needed skills for future initiatives.

    1.3 Prioritize the initiative skill gaps.

    Outputs

    Security Initiative Skills Guide

    Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    2 Define Technical Skill Requirements

    The Purpose

    Identify and create technical skill requirements for key work roles that are needed to successfully execute future initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased understanding of the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

    Standardization of technical skill requirements of current and future work roles.

    Activities

    2.1 Assign work roles to the needs of your future environment.

    2.2 Discuss the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

    2.3 Develop technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    Outputs

    Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    3 Acquire Technical Skills

    The Purpose

    Assess your current workforce against their role’s skill requirements.

    Discuss five key factors that aid acquiring skills.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A method to acquire skills in future roles.

    Activities

    3.1 Continue developing technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    3.2 Conduct Current Workforce Skills Assessment.

    3.3 Discuss methods of acquiring skills.

    3.4 Develop a plan to acquire skills.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Current Workforce Skills Assessment

    4 Plan to Execute Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Assist with communicating the state of the skill gap in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategy on how to acquire skills needs of the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Review skills acquisition plan.

    4.2 Discuss training and certification opportunities for staff.

    4.3 Discuss next steps for closing the skills gap.

    4.4 Debrief.

    Outputs

    Technical Skills Workbook

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    • IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace.
    • In most organizations, technology has evolved faster than the business’ understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
    • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied to IT expenditure don’t align well to modern IT realities.
    • IT is often directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what’s really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long term.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Meaningful conversations about IT spend don’t happen nearly as frequently as they should. When they do happen, they are often inhibited by a lack of IT financial management (ITFM) maturity combined with the absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
    • Supporting data about actual technology spend taking place that would inform decision making is often scattered and incomplete.
    • Creating transparency in your IT financial data is essential to powering collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
    • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
    • Map your organization’s total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
    • Gain vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

    Members may also be interested in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Deck – A detailed, do-it-yourself framework and process for clearly mapping your organization’s total technology spend.

    This deck mirrors Info-Tech’s own internal methods for delivering its IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service in a do-it-yourself format. Based on Info-Tech’s proven ITFM Cost Model, it includes an IT spend mapping readiness assessment, expert advice for sourcing and organizing your financial data, a methodology for mapping IT staff and vendor spend according to four key stakeholder views (CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO), and guidance on how to analyze and share your results.

    • Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Storyboard

    2. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook – A structured Excel tool that allows you to allocate your IT spend across four key stakeholder views and generate high-impact visualizations.

    This workbook offers a step-by-step approach for mapping and visualizing your organization’s true IT spend.

    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    3. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template – A PowerPoint template that helps you summarize and showcase key results from your IT spend transparency exercise.

    This presentation template offers a recommended structure for introducing key executive stakeholders to your organization’s true IT spending behavior and IT financial management as a whole.

    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations with the business.

    Analyst Perspective

    Take the first step in your IT spend journey.

    Talking about money is hard. Talking to the CEO, CFO, and other business leaders about money is even harder, especially if IT is seen as just a cost center, is not understood by stakeholders, or is simply taken for granted. In times of economic hardship, already lean IT operations are tasked with becoming even leaner.

    When there's little fat to trim, making IT spend decisions without understanding the spend's origin, location, extent, and purpose can lead to mistakes that weaken, not strengthen, the organization.

    The first step in optimizing IT spend decisions is setting a baseline. This means having a comprehensive and transparent view of all technology spend, organization-wide. This baseline is the only way to have meaningful, data-driven conversations with stakeholders and approvers around what IT delivers to the business and the implications of making changes to IT funding.

    Before stepping forward in your IT financial management journey, know exactly where you're standing today.

    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace:
    • Technology has evolved faster than the business' understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
    • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied doesn't align well to modern IT realities.
    • IT is directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what's really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long-term.
    Meaningful conversations about IT spend don't happen nearly as much as they should. This is often due to:
    • A lack of maturity in how ITFM (IT financial management) is executed within IT and across the organization as a whole.
    • The absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
    • Scattered and incomplete data about the actual technology spend taking place in the organization.
    Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations and informed decision-making around IT spend.
    • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
    • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
    • Map your organization's total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
    • Gain both vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Create transparency in your IT financial data to power both collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

    IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

    IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

    Growth creates change ... and challenges

    IT has become more integral to business operations and achievement of strategic goals, driving complexity in how IT funds are allocated and managed.

    How IT funds are spent has changed
    Value demonstration is two-pronged. The first is return on performance investment, focused on formal and objective goals, metrics, and KPIs. The second is stakeholder satisfaction, a more subjective measure driven by IT-business alignment and relationship. IT leaders must do both well to prove and promote IT's value.
    Funding decision cadence has sped up
    Many organizations have moved from three- to five-year strategic planning cycles to one-year planning horizons or less, most noticeably since the 2008/2009 recession. Not only has the pace of technological change accelerated, but so too has volatility in the broader business and economic environments, forcing rapid response.
    Justification rigor around IT spend has increased
    The need for formal business cases, proposals, and participation in formal governance processes has increased, as has demand for financial transparency. With many IT departments still reporting into the CFO, there's no getting around it - today's IT leaders need to possess financial management savvy.
    Clearly showing business value has become priority
    IT spend has moved from the purchase of discrete hardware and software tools traditionally associated with IT to the need to address larger-scale issues around interoperability, integration, and virtualized cloud solutions. Today's focus is more on big-picture architecture than on day-to-day operations.

    ITFM capabilities haven't grown with IT spend

    IT still needs to prove itself.

    Increased integration with the core business has made it a priority for the head of IT to be well-versed in business language and practice, specifically in the areas of measurement and financial management.

    However, IT staff across all industries aren't very confident in how well IT is doing in managing its finances via three core processes:

    • Accounting of costs and budgets.
    • Optimizing costs to gain the best return on investment.
    • Demonstrating IT's value to the business.

    Recent data from 4,137 respondents to Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Diagnostic shows that while most IT staff feel that these three financial management processes are important, notably fewer feel that IT management is effective at executing them.

    IT leadership's capabilities around fundamental cost data capture appear to be lagging, not to mention the essential value-added capabilities around optimizing costs and showing how IT contributes to business value.

    Graph of Cost and Budget Management

    Graph of Cost Optimization

    Questions for support transition

    Source: IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022.

    Take the perspective of key IT stakeholders as a first step in ITFM capability improvement

    Other business unit leaders need to deliver on their own specific and unique accountabilities. Create true IT spend transparency by accounting for these multiple perspectives.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?
    Many IT costs, like back-end infrastructure and apps maintenance, can be invisible to the business.

    Why doesn't my department get more support from IT?
    Some business needs won't align with spend priorities, while others seem to take more than their fair share.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?
    IT will get little done or fall short of meeting service level requirements without appropriate funding.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?
    Questions about value arise as IT investment and spend increase. How to answer these questions is critical.

    At the end of the day, telling IT's spend story to the business is a significant challenge if you don't understand your audience, have a shared vocabulary, or use a repeatable framework.

    Mapping your IT spend against a reusable framework helps generate transparency

    A framework makes transparency possible by simplifying methods, creating common language, and reducing noise.

    However, the best methodological framework won't work if the materials and information plugged into it are weak. With IT spend, the materials and information are your staff and your vendor financial data. To achieve true transparency, inputs must have the following three characteristics:

    Availability Reliability Usability
    The data and information are up-to-date and accessible when needed. The data and information are accurate, complete, and verifiable. The data and information are clearly defined, consistently and predictably organized, consumable, and meaningful for decision-making.

    A framework is an organizing principle. When it comes to better understanding your IT spend, the things being organized by a framework are your method and your data.

    If your IT spend information is transparent, you have an excellent foundation for having the right conversations with the right people in order to make strategically impactful decisions.

    Info-Tech's approach enables meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

    View of meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

    Investing time in preparing and mapping your IT spend data enables better IT governance

    While other IT spend transparency methods exist, Info-Tech's is designed to be straightforward and tactical.

    Info-Tech method for IT spend transparency

    Put your data to work instead of being put to work by your data.

    Introducing Info-Tech's methodology for creating transparency on technology spend

    1. Know your objectives 2. Gather required data 3. Map your IT staff spend 4. Map your IT vendor spend 5. Identify implications for IT
    Phase Steps
    1. Review your business context
    2. Set IT staff and vendor spend transparency objectives
    3. Assess effort and readiness
    1. Collect IT staff spend data
    2. Collect IT vendor spend data
    3. Define industry-specific CXO Business View categories
    1. Categorize IT staff spend in each of the four views
    2. Validate
    1. Categorize IT vendor spend in each of the four views
    2. Validate
    1. Analyze your findings
    2. Craft your key messages
    3. Create an executive presentation
    Phase Outcomes Goals and scope for your IT spend and staffing transparency effort. Information and data required to perform the IT staff and vendor spend transparency initiative. A mapping of the allocation of IT staff spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. A mapping of the allocation of IT vendor spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. An analysis of your results and a presentation to aid your communication of findings with stakeholders.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight
    Take the perspective of key stakeholders and lay out your organization's complete IT spend footprint in terms they understand to enable meaningful conversations and start evolving your IT financial management capability.

    Phase 1 insight
    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outcomes of those efforts. Be clear about where you want your IT transparency journey to take you.

    Phase 2 insight
    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs. Take the time to properly source, clean, and organize your data.

    Phase 3 insight
    Map your IT staff spend data first. It involves work but is relatively straightforward. Practice your mapping approach here and carry forward your lessons learned.

    Phase 4 insight
    The importance of good, usable data will become apparent when mapping your IT vendor spend. Apply consistent and meaningful vendor labels to enable true aggregation and insight.

    Phase 5 insight
    Communicating your final IT spend transparency mapping with executive stakeholders is your opportunity to debut IT financial management as not just an IT issue but an organization-wide concern.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Use this tool in Phases 1-4

    IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    Input your IT staff and vendor spend data to generate visual outputs for analysis and presentation in your communications.

    Key deliverable:

    IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation

    Create a showcase for your newly-transparent IT staff and vendor spend data and present it to key business stakeholders.

    Use this tool in Phase 5

    IT and business blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits Business Benefits
    • Gain insight into exactly where you're spending IT funds on hardware, software, service providers, and the workforce.
    • Understand how much it's costing IT to deliver specific IT services.
    • Illustrate differences in business consumption of IT spend.
    • Learn the ratio of spend allocated to innovation vs. growth vs. keeping the lights on (KTLO).
    • Develop a series of core IT spend metrics including IT spend as a percent of revenue, IT spend per organization employee, and IT spend per IT staff member.
    • Create a complete IT spend baseline to serve as a foundation for future benchmarking, cost optimization, and other forms of IT financial analysis.
    • Understand the relative allocation of IT spend across capital vs. operational expenditure.
    • See the degree to which IT differentially supports and enables organizational goals, strategies, and functions.
    • Have better data for informing the organization's IT spend allocation and prioritization decisions.
    • Gain better visibility into real-life IT spending behaviors, cadences, and patterns.
    • Identify potential areas of spend waste as well as underinvestment.
    • Understand the true value that IT brings to the business.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    You will know that your IT spend and staffing transparency effort is succeeding when:

    • Your understanding of where technology funds are really being allocated is comprehensive.
    • You're having active and meaningful dialogue with key stakeholders about IT spend issues.
    • IT spend transparency is a permanent part of your IT financial management toolkit.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify initiatives where you can leverage the outcomes of your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

    In phases 2, 3, and 4, we will guide you through the process of mapping your IT staff and vendor spend data so you can generate your own IT spend metrics based on reliable sources and verifiable facts.

    Win #1: Knowing how to reliably source the financial data you need to make decisions.

    Win #2: Getting your IT spend data in an organized format that you can actually analyze.

    Win #3: Having a framework that puts IT spend in a language stakeholders understand.

    Win #4: Gaining a practical starting point to mature ITFM practices like cost optimization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    Info-Tech recommends the following calls in your Guided Implementation.

    Phase 1: Know your objectives Phase 2: Gather required data Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend Phase 5: Identify implications for IT
    Call #1: Discuss your IT spend and staffing transparency objectives and readiness. Call #2: Review spend and staffing data sources and identify data organization and cleanup needs. Call #3: Review your mapped IT staff spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #4: Review your mapped IT vendor spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #5: Analyze your mapping outputs for opportunities and devise next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between four to six calls over the course of two to three months.

    Want even more help with your IT spend transparency effort?

    Let us fast-track your IT spend journey.

    The path to IT financial management maturity starts with knowing exactly where your money is going. To streamline this effort, Info-Tech offers an IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service that provides full transparency into where your money is going without any heavy lifting on your part.

    This unique service features:

    • A client-proven approach to meet your IT spend transparency goals.
    • Vendor and staff spend mapping that reveals business consumption of IT.
    • Industry benchmarking to compare your spending and staffing to that of your peers.
    • Results in a fraction of the time with much less effort than going it alone.
    • Expert review of results and ongoing discussions with Info-Tech analysts.

    If you'd like Info-Tech to pave the way to IT spend transparency, contact your account manager for more information - we're happy to talk anytime.

    Phase 1

    Know Your Objectives

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish IT spend and staffing transparency uses and objectives
    • Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend and staffing transparency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 1: Know your objectives

    Envision what transparency can do.

    You're at the very beginning of your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
    • Assess your readiness to tackle the exercise and gauge how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

    "I've heard this a lot lately from clients: 'I've got my hands on this data, but it's not structured in a way that will allow me to make any decisions about it. I have these journal entries and they have some accounting codes, GL descriptors, cost objects, and some vendors, but it's not enough detail to make any decisions about my services, my applications, my asset spend.'"
    - Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Transparency positively enables both business outcomes and the practice of business ethics

    However, transparency's real superpower is in how it provides fact-based context.

    • More accurate and relevant data for decision-making.
    • Better managed and more impactful financial outcomes.
    • Increased inclusion of people in the decisions that affect them.
    • Clearer accountabilities for organizational efficiency and effectiveness goals.
    • Concrete proof that business priorities and decisions are being acted on and implemented.
    • Greater trust and respect between IT and the business.
    • Demonstration of integrity in how funds are being used.

    IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outputs

    Identify in advance how you plan to leverage IT spend transparency outcomes.

    CFO expense view

    • Demonstrate actual IT costs at the right level of granularity.
    • Update/change the categories finance uses to track IT spend.
    • Adjust the expected CapEx/OpEx ratio.

    CXO business view

    • Calculate consumption of IT resources by department.
    • Implement a showback/chargeback mechanism.
    • Change the funding conversation about proposed IT projects.

    CIO service view

    • Calculate the total cost to deliver a specific IT service.
    • Adjust the IT service spend-to-value ratio as per business priorities.
    • Rightsize IT service levels to reflect true value to the business.

    CEO innovation view

    • Formalize the organization's position on use of cloud/outsourcing.
    • Reduce the portion of spend dedicated to "keeping the lights on."
    • Develop a plan for boosting commitment to innovation investment.

    When determining your end objectives, think about the real questions IT is being asked by the business and how IT spend transparency will help you answer them.

    CFO: Financial accounting perspective

    IT spend used to be looked at from a strictly financial accounting perspective - this is the view of the CFO and the finance department. Their question, "exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them," is really about how money is distributed across different asset classes. This question breaks down into other questions that IT leaders needs to ask themselves in order to provide answers:

    • How should I classify my IT costs? What are the standard categories you need to have that are meaningful to folks crunching the corporate numbers? If you're too detailed, it won't make sense to them. If you pick outmoded categories, you'll have to adjust in the future as IT evolves, which makes tracking year-over-year spend patterns harder.
    • What information should I include in my plans and reports? This is about two things. One is about communicating with the finance department in language that reduces back-and-forth and eliminates misinterpretation. The other is about aligning with the categories the finance department uses to track financial data in the general ledger.
    • How do I justify current spend? This is about clarity and transparency. Specifically itemizing spend into categories that are meaningful for your audience does a lot of justification work for you since you don't have to re-explain what everything means.
    • How do I justify a budget increase? In a declining economy, this question may not be appropriate. However, establishing a baseline puts you in a better position to discuss spend requirements based on past performance and to focus the conversation.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

    Example
    Asset Class % IT Spend
    Workforce 42.72%
    Software - Cloud 9.26%
    Software - On Prem 13.61%
    Hardware - Cloud 0.59%
    Hardware - On Prem 15.68%
    Contract Services 18.14%
    Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CIO: IT operations management perspective

    As the CIO role was adopted, IT spend was viewed from the IT operations management perspective. Optimizing the IT delivery model is a critical step to reducing time to provision services. For the IT leader, the questions they need to ask themselves are:

    • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery? Leveraging a SaaS solution can reduce time to deployment as well as increase your ability to scale; however, integration with other functionality will still be a challenge that will incur costs.
    • Where can I improve spend efficiency? This is about optimizing spend in your IT delivery model. What service levels does the business require and what's the most cost-effective way to meet those levels without incurring significant technical debt?
    • Is my support model optimized? By reviewing where support staff are focused and which services are using most of your resources, you can investigate underlying drivers of your staffing requirements. If staff costs in support of a business function are high, perhaps the portfolio of applications needs to be reviewed.
    • How does our spend compare to others? Benchmarking against peers is a useful input, but reflects common practice, not best practice. For example, if you need to invest in IT security, your entire industry is lagging on this front, and you happen to be doing slightly better than most, then bringing forth this benchmark won't help you make the case. Starting with year-over-year internal benchmarking is essential - establish your categories, establish your baseline, and track it consistently.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

    Example
    Service Area % IT Spend
    App Development 9.06%
    App Maintenance 30.36%
    Hosting/Network 25.39%
    End User 18.59%
    Data & BI 3.58%
    Security & Risk 5.21%
    IT Management 7.82%
    Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CXO: Business unit perspective

    As business requests have increased, so too has the importance of the business unit perspective. Each business function has a unique mandate to fulfill in the organization and also competes with other business functions for IT resources. By understanding business consumption of IT, organizations can bring transparency and drive a different dialog with their business partners. Every IT leader should find out the answers to these questions:

    • Which business units consume the most IT resources? By understanding consumption of IT by business function, IT organizations can clearly articulate which business units are getting the highest share of IT resources. This will bring much needed clarity when it comes to IT spend prioritization and investment.
    • Which business units are underserved by IT? By providing full transparency into where all IT spend is consumed, organizations can determine if certain business functions may need increased attention in an upcoming budget cycle. Knowing which levers to pull is critical in aligning IT activities with delivering business value.
    • How do I best communicate spend data internally? Different audiences need information presented to them differently. This is not just about the language - it's also about the frequency, format, and channel you use. Ask your audiences directly what methods of communication stand the best chance of you being seen and heard.
    • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects? If a lot of IT spend is going toward one or two business units, the leaders of those units need to be active sponsors of IT projects and associated spend that will benefit all users.

    Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

    Example
    Business Function % IT Spend
    HR Department 6.16%
    Finance Department 15.15%
    IT Department 10.69%
    Business Function 1 23.80%
    Business Function 2 10.20%
    Business Function 3 6.80%
    Business Function 4 27.20%
    Source: Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CEO: Strategic vs. operations perspective

    With a business view now available, evaluating IT spend from a strategic standpoint is critical. Simply put, how much is being spent keeping the lights on (KTLO) in the organization versus supporting business or organizational growth versus net-new business innovations? This view is not about what IT costs but rather how it is being prioritized to drive revenue, operating margin, or market share. Here are the questions IT leaders should be asking themselves along with the organization's executive leadership and the CEO:

    • Why is KTLO spend so high? This question is a good gauge of where the line is drawn between operations and strategy. Many IT departments want to reduce time spent on maintenance and redeploy resource investment toward strategic projects. This reallocation must include retiring or eliminating technologies to free up funds.
    • What should our operational spend priorities be? Maintenance and basic operations aren't going anywhere. The issue is what is necessary and what could be done more wisely. Are you throwing good money after bad on a high-maintenance legacy system?
    • Which projects and investments should we prioritize? The answer to this question should tightly align with business strategic goals and account for the lion's share of growth and innovation spend.
    • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives? This is the ultimate dialogue between business partners, the CEO, and IT that needs to take place, yet often doesn't.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

    Example
    Focus Area % IT Spend
    KTLO 89.16%
    Grow 7.18%
    Innovate 3.66%
    Info-Tech IT Spend Studies, 2022.

    Be clear about where you want your IT spend transparency journey to take you in real life

    Transparent IT spend data will allow you to have conversations you couldn't have before. Consider this example of how telling an IT spend story could evolve.

    I want to ...
    Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure to update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio now and into the future.

    To address the problem of ...

    • Many of our key software vendors have eliminated on-premises products and only offer software as an OpEx service.
    • Assumptions that modern IT solutions are largely on-premises and can be treated as capitalizable assets are out-of-date and don't reflect IT financial realities.

    And will use transparency to ...

    • Provide the CFO with specific, accurate, and annotated OpEx by product/service and vendor for all cloud-based and on-premises solutions.
    • Facilitate a realistic calculation of CapEx/OpEx distribution based on actuals, as well as let us develop defendable projections of OpEx into the future based on typical annual service fee increases and anticipated growth in the number of users/licenses.

    1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

    Duration: One hour

    1. Consider the problems or issues commonly voiced by the business about IT, as well as your own ongoing challenges in communicating with stakeholders. Document these problems/issues as questions or statements as spoken by a person. To help structure your brainstorming, consider these general process domains and examples:
      1. Spend tracking and reporting. E.g. Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx.
      2. Service levels and business continuity. E.g. Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role.
      3. Project and operations resourcing. E.g. Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive.
      4. Strategy and innovation. E.g. Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us.
    2. For each problem/issue noted, identify:
      1. The source(s) of the question/concern (e.g. CEO, CFO, CXO, CIO).
      2. The financial process involved (e.g. accurate costing, verification of costs, building a business case to invest).
    3. For each problem/issue, identify a broader project-style initiative where having transparent IT spend data is a valuable input. One initiative may apply to multiple problems/issues. For each initiative:
      1. Give it a working title.
      2. State the goal for the initiative with reference to ITFM aspirations.
      3. Identify key stakeholders (these will likely overlap with the problem/issue source).
      4. Set general time frames for resolution.

    Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the instruction slides for this exercise. Examples are included.

    1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

    Input Output
    • Organizational knowledge
    • List of the potential uses and objectives of transparent IT spend and staffing data
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    ITFM initiatives that leverage transparency

    Problem/Issue Statement Source/ Stakeholder Associated ITFM Process Potential Initiative Initiative Goal Time Frame
    "Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx." CFO IT spend categorization and reporting. Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure. To update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio. <12 months
    "Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role." CFO, VP of HR Business case for hiring IT staff. Document ongoing IT support requirements for proposed ERP platform migration project. To ensure sufficient resources for an anticipated increase in service desk tickets due to implementation of a new ERP system. 1-3 months
    "Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive." CEO, all CXOs/VPs Total cost of technology ownership. Develop a mechanism to review the lifecycle impact on IT of proposed technology purchases. To determine if functionality of new tool already exists in the org. and the total cost of ownership of a new app. <6 months
    "Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us." CEO, CFO, VP of Production IT service costing. Develop an organizational business intelligence strategy. To create a comprehensive plan for evolving BI capability in the organization and transferring report development to users. Select a department for pilot. <12 months

    Your organization's governance culture will affect how you approach transparency

    Know your governance culture Lower Governance
    • Few regulations.
    • Financial reporting is largely internal.
    • Change is frequent and rapid.
    • Informal or nonexistent mechanisms and structures.
    • Data sharing behavior driven by competitive concerns.
    Higher Governance
    • Many regulations.
    • Stringent and regular external reporting requirements.
    • Change is limited and/or slow.
    • Defined and established mechanisms and structures.
    • Data sharing behavior driven by regulatory concerns.
    Determine impact on opportunities How does your governance culture impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
    Resistance to formality and bureaucracy Resistance to change and uncertainty
    Set expectations and approach You have plenty of room to implement transparency rigor within the confines of IT, but getting others to give you the time and attention you want will be a challenge. One-on-one, informal relationship building to create goodwill and dialogue is needed before putting forth recommendations or numbers. Many existing procedures must be accommodated and respected. While you can benefit by working with preexisting mechanisms and touchpoints, expect any changes you want to make to things like IT cost categories or CapEx/OpEx ratios to require a lot of time, meetings, and case-making.

    IT's current maturity around ITFM practice will also affect your approach to transparency

    Know your ITFM maturity level Lower ITFM Maturity
    • No/few formal policies, standards, or procedures exist.
    • There is little/no formal education or experience within IT around budget, costing, charging, or accounting practices.
    • Financial reporting is sporadic and inconsistent in its contents.
    • Business cases are rarely used in decision-making.
    • Financial data is neither reliable nor readily available.
    Higher ITFM Maturity
    • Formal policies, standards, and procedures are enforced organization-wide for all financial management activities.
    • Formally-trained accountants are embedded within IT.
    • Financial reporting is regular, scheduled, and defined.
    • Business cases are leveraged in most decision-making activities.
    • Financial data is governed, centralized, and current.
    Determine stakeholders' financial literacy How does your degree of ITFM maturity impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
    Improve your own financial literacy first Determine stakeholders' financial literacy
    Set expectations and approach Brush up on core financial management and accounting concepts before taking the discussion beyond IT's walls. Do start mapping your costs, but just know how to communicate what the data is saying before sharing it. Not everyone will be at your level, familiar with ITFM language and concepts, or focused on the same things you are. Gauge where your audience is at so you can prepare for meaningful dialogue.

    1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

    Duration: One hour

    Note: This assessment is general in nature. It's intended to help you identify and prepare for potential challenges in your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

    1. Rate your agreement with the "Data & Information" and "Experience, Expertise, & Support" statements listed on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise. For each statement, indicate the extent to which you agree or disagree, where:
      1. 1 = Strongly disagree
      2. 2 = Disagree
      3. 3 = Neither agree nor disagree
      4. 4 = Agree
      5. 5 = Strongly agree
    2. Add up your numerical scores for all statements, where the highest possible score is 65.
    3. Assess your general readiness against the following guidelines:
      1. 50-65: Ready. The transparency exercise will involve work, but should be straightforward since you have the data, skills, tools, processes, and support to do it.
      2. 40-49: Ready, with caveats. The transparency exercise is doable but will require some preparatory legwork and investigation on your part around data sourcing, organization, and interpretation.
      3. 30-39: Challenged. The transparency exercise will present some obstacles. Expect to encounter data gaps, inconsistencies, errors, roadblocks, and frustrations that will need to be resolved.
      4. Less than 30: Not ready. You don't have the data, skills, tools, processes, and/or support to do the data transparency exercise. Take time to develop a stronger foundation of financial literacy and governance before tackling it.

    Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise.

    1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

    InputOutput
    • Organizational knowledge
    • Estimation of IT spend and staffing transparency effort
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    IT spend transparency readiness assessment

    Data & Information
    Statement Rating
    We know how to access all IT department spend records.
    We know how to access all non-IT-department technology spend records.
    We know how to access all IT vendor/contractor agreements.
    We know how to access data about our IT staff costs and allocation, such as organizational charts and salaries/benefits.
    Our financial and staffing data is up-to-date.
    Our financial and staffing data are labeled, described, and organized so that we know what they're referring to.
    Our financial and staffing data are in a format that we can easily manipulate (e.g. export, copy and paste, perform calculations).
    Experience, Expertise, & Support
    Statement Rating
    We have sufficient expertise within the IT department to navigate and accurately interpret financial records.
    We have reasonable access to expertise/resources in our finance department to support us in an IT spend transparency exercise.
    We can allocate sufficient time (about 40 hours) and resources in the near term to do an IT spend transparency exercise.
    We have current accountabilities to track and internally report financial information to others on at least a monthly basis.
    There are existing financial policies, procedures, and standards in the organization with which we must closely adhere and comply.
    We have had the experience of participating in, or responding to the results of, an internal or external audit.

    Rating scale:
    1 = Strongly Disagree; 2 = Disagree; 3 = Neither agree nor disagree; 4 = Agree; 5 = Strongly agree
    Assessment scale:
    Less than 30 = Not ready; 30-39 = Challenged; 40-49 = Ready with caveats; 50-65 = Ready

    Take a closer look at the statements you rated 1, 2, or 3. These will be areas of challenge no matter what your total score on the assessment scale.

    Phase 1: Know your objectives

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed the first two steps on your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
    • Assessed your readiness to tackle the exercise and know how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

    "Mapping to a transparency model is labor intensive. You can do it once and never revisit it again, but we would never advise that. What it does is play well into an IT financial management maturity roadmap."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 2

    Gather Required Data

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gather, clean, and organize your data
    • Build your industry-specific business views

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 2: Gather required data

    Finish your preparation.

    You're now ready to do the final preparation for your IT spend and staffing transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Gather your IT spend and staffing data and information.
    • Clean and organize your data to streamline mapping.
    • Identify your baseline data points.

    "Some feel like they don't have all the data, so they give up. Don't. Every data point counts."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs

    Aim for a comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information.

    Diagram of comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information

    Start by understanding what's included in technology spend

    Info-Tech's ITFM Technology Inventory

    In scope:

    • All network, telecom, and data center equipment.
    • All end-user productivity software and devices (e.g. laptops, peripheral devices, cell phones).
    • Information security.
    • All acquisition, development, maintenance, and management of business and operations software.
    • All systems used for the storage and management of business assets, data, records, and information.
    • All managed IT services.
    • Third-party consulting services.
    • All identifiable spend from the business for the above.

    Expand your thinking: Total tech spend goes beyond what's under IT's operational umbrella

    "Technology" means all technology in the organization regardless of where it lives, who bought it, who owns it, who runs it, or who uses it.

    IT may have low or no visibility into technologies that exist in the broader business environment beyond IT. Accept that you won't gain 100% visibility right now. However, do get started and be persistent.

    Where to look for non-IT technology ...

    • Highly specialized business functions - niche tools that are probably used by only a few people.
    • Power users and the "underserved" - cloud-based workflow, communication, and productivity tools they got on their own.
    • Operational technology - network-connected industrial, building, or physical security sensors and control systems.
    • Recently acquired/merged entities - inherited software.

    Who might get you what you need ...

    • Business unit and team leaders - identification of what they use and copies of their spend records and/or contracts.
    • Finance - a report of the "software" expenditure category to spot unrecognized technologies and their owners.
    • Vendors - copies of contracts if not forthcoming internally.
    • Your service desk - informal knowledge gained about unknown technologies at play in the course of doing their job.

    The IT spend and staffing transparency exercise is an opportunity to kick-start a technology discovery process that will give you and the business a true picture of your technology profile, use, and spend.

    Seek out data at the right level of granularity with the right supporting information

    Key data and information to seek out:

    • Credits applied to appropriate debits that show net expense, or detailed descriptions of credits with no matching debit.
    • Cash-based accounting (not accrual accounting). If accrual, will need to determine how to simplify the data for your uses.
    • Vendor names, asset classes, descriptors, and departments.
    • A total spend amount (CapEx + OpEx) that:
      • Aligns with the spend period.
      • Passes your gut check for total IT spend.
      • Includes annual amounts for multi-year contracts (e.g. one year of a three-year Microsoft enterprise agreement).
      • Includes technology spend from the business (e.g. OT that IT supports).
    • Insights on large projects.
    • Consolidated recurring payments, salaries and benefits, and other small expenses.

    Look for these data descriptors in your files:

    • Cost center/accounting unit
    • Cost center/department description
    • GL ACCT
    • CL account description
    • Activity description
    • Status
    • Program/business function/project description
    • Accounting period
    • Transaction amount
    • Vendor/vendor name
    • Product/product name

    Avoid data that's hard to use or problematic as it will slow you down and bring limited benefits

    Spend data that's out of scope:

    • Depreciation/amortization.
    • Gain or loss of asset write-off.
    • Physical security (e.g. key cards, cameras, motion sensors, floodlights).
    • Printer consumables costs.
    • Heating and cooling costs (for data centers).

    Challenging data formats:

    • Large raw data files with limited or no descriptors.
    • Major accounts (hardware and software) combined in the same line item.
    • Line items (especially software) with no vendor reference information.
    • PDF files or screenshots that you can't extract data from readily. Use Excel or CSV files whenever possible.

    Getting at the data you need can be easy or hard – it all depends

    This is where your governance culture and ITFM maturity start to come into play.

    Data source Potential data and information What to expect
    IT Current/past budget, vendor agreements, IT project records, discretionary spend, number of IT employees. The rigor of your ITFM practice and centralization of data and documents will affect how straightforward this is.
    Finance General ledger, cash and income statements, contractor payments and other accounts payable, general revenue. Secure their expertise early. Let them know what you're trying to do and what you need. They may be willing to prepare data for you in the format you need and help you decipher records.
    Purchasing List of vendors/suppliers, vendor agreements, purchase invoices. Purchasing often has more descriptive information about vendors than finance. They can also point you to tech spend in other departments that you didn't know about.
    Human Resources Organizational chart, staff salaries and benefits, number of employees overall and by department. Data about benefits costs is something you're not likely to have, and there's only one place you can reliably get it.
    Other Business Units Non-IT technology spend vendor agreements and purchase invoices, number of department employees. Other departments may be tracking spend in an entirely different way than you. Be prepared to dig and reconcile.

    There may be some data or information you can't get without a Herculean effort. Don't worry about it too much - these items are usually relatively minor and won't significantly affect the overall picture.

    Commit to finding out what you don't know

    Many IT leaders don't have visibility into other departments' technology spend. In some cases, the fact that spend is even happening may be a complete surprise.

    Near-term visibility fix ...

    • Ask your finance department for a report on all technology-related spend categories. "Software" is a broad category that finance departments tend to track. Scan the report for items that don't look familiar and confirm the originating department or approver.
    • Check in with the procurement office. See what technology-related contracts they have on record and which departments "own" them. Get copies of those contracts if possible.
    • Contact individual department heads or technology spend approvers. Devise your contact shortlist based on what you already know or learned from finance and procurement. Position your outreach as a discovery process that supports your transparency effort. Avoid coming across as though you're judging their spend or planning to take over their technologies.

    Long-term visibility fix ...

    • Develop your relationships with other business unit leaders. This will help open the lines of communication permanently.
    • Establish a cross-functional central technology office or group. The main task of this unit is to set and manage technology standards organization-wide, including standards for tracking and documenting technology costs and asset lifecycle factors.
    • Ensure IT is formally involved in all technology spend proposals and plans. This gives IT the opportunity to assess them for security compliance, IT network/system interoperability, manageability, and IT support requirements prior to purchase.
    • Ensure IT is notified of all technology financial transactions. This includes contracts, invoices, and payments for all one-time purchases, subscription fees, and maintenance costs.

    Finally, note any potential anomalies in the IT spend period you're looking at

    No two years have the exact same spend patterns. One-time spend for a big capital project, for example, can dramatically alter your overall spend landscape.

    Look for the following anomalies:

    • New or ongoing capital implementations or projects that span more than one fiscal year.
    • Completed projects that have recently transitioned, or are transitioning, from CapEx (decreasing) to OpEx (increasing).
    • A major internal reorganization or merger, acquisition, or divestiture event.
    • Crises, disasters, or other rare emergencies.
    • Changes in IT funding sources (e.g. new or expiring grants).

    These anomalies often explain why IT spend is unusually high in certain areas. There's often a good business reason.

    In many cases, doing a separate spend transparency exercise for these anomalous projects or events can isolate their costs from other spend so their true nature and impact can be better understood.

    2.1 Gather your input data and information

    Duration: Variable

    1. Develop a complete list of the spending and staffing data and information you need to complete the transparency mapping exercise. For each required item, note the following:
      1. Description of data needed (i.e. type, timeframe, and format).
      2. Ideal timeframe or deadline for receipt.
      3. Probable source(s) and contact(s).
      4. Additional facilitation/support required.
      5. Person on your transparency team responsible for obtaining it.
    2. Set up a data and information repository to store all files as soon as they're received. Ideally, you'll want all data/information files to be in an electronic format so that everything can be stored in one place. Avoid paper documents if possible.
    3. Conduct your outreach to obtain the input data and information on your list. This could include delegating it to a subordinate, sending emails, making phone calls, booking meetings, and so on.
    4. Review the data and information received to confirm that it's the right type of data, at the correct level of granularity, for the right timeframe, in a usable format, and is generally accurate.
    5. Enter documentation about your data and information sources in tab "1. Data & Information Sources" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to reflect what you needed and where you got it in order to make the discovery process easier in the future.
    6. In the same tab in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook, document any significant events that occurred that directly or indirectly impacted the selected year's spend values. These could include mergers/acquisitions/divestitures, major reorganizations or changes in leadership, significant shifts in product offerings or strategic direction, large capital projects, legal/regulatory changes, natural disasters, or changes in the economy.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.1 Gather your input data and information

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of potential data and information sources
    • List of data and information required to complete the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Tidy up your data before beginning any spend mapping

    Most organizations aren't immaculate in their tech spend documentation and tracking practices. This creates data rife with gaps that lives in hard-to-use formats.

    The more preparation you do to approach the "good data" intersection point in the diagram below, the easier your mapping effort will be and the more useful and insightful your final findings.

    Venn diagram of good data

    Make your data "un-unique" to reduce the number of line items and make it manageable

    There's a good chance that the IT spend data you've received is in the form of tens of thousands of unique line items. Use the checklist below to help you roll it up.

    Warning: Never overwrite your original data. Insert new columns/rows and put your alternate information in these instead.

    Step 1: Standardize vendor names

    • Start with known large vendors.
    • Select a standard name for the vendor.
    • Brainstorm possible variations on the vendor name, including abbreviations and shortforms.
    • Search for the vendor in your data and document the new standardized vendor name in the appropriate row.
    • Repeat the above for all vendors.
    • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Look for instances where names remain unique or are missing entirely. Reconcile if needed and fill in missing data.

    Step 2: Consolidate vendor spend

    • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Start with vendors that have the most line items.
    • Add together related spend items from a given vendor. Create a new row for the consolidated spend item and flag it as consolidated. Keep the following item types in separate rows:
      • Hardware vs. software spend for the same vendor.
      • Cloud vs. on-premises spend for the same vendor.
    • Repeat the above for all vendors.
    • Consider breaking out separate rows for overly consolidated line items that contain too many different types of IT spend.

    2.2 Clean and organize your data

    Duration: Variable

    1. Check to ensure that you have all data and information required to conduct the IT spend transparency exercise.
    2. Conduct an initial scan to assess the data's current state of hygiene and overall usability. Flag anything of concern and follow up with the data/information provider to fix or reconcile any issues.
    3. Normalize your data to make it easier to work with. This includes selecting data format standards and changing anything that doesn't conform to those standards. This includes items such as date conventions, currencies, and so on.
    4. Standardize product and vendor naming/references throughout to enable searching, sorting, and grouping. For example, Microsoft Office may be variably referred to as "Microsoft", "Office", "Office 365", and "Office365" throughout your data. Pick one descriptor for the product/vendor and replace all related references with that descriptor.
    5. Consolidate and aggregate your data. Ideally, the data you received from your sources has already been simplified; however, you may need to further organize it to reduce the number of individual line items to a more manageable number. The transparency exercise uses relatively high-level categories, so combine data sets and aggregate where feasible without losing appropriate granularity.
    6. Archive any original copies of files that have been modified or replaced with consolidated/aggregated versions for future reference if needed.

    2.2 Clean and organize your data

    InputOutput
    • Data and information files
    • A normalized set of data and information for completing the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Select IT spend "buckets" for the CXO Business View as your final preparatory step

    Every organization has both industry-agnostic and industry-specific lines of business that are the direct beneficiaries of IT spend.

    Common shared business functions:

    • Human resources.
    • Finance and accounting.
    • Sales/customer service.
    • Marketing and advertising.
    • Legal services and regulatory compliance.
    • Information technology.

    It may seem odd to see IT on the business functions list since the purpose of this exercise is to map IT spend. For business view purposes, IT spend refers to what IT spends on itself to support its own internal operations.

    Examples of industry-specific functions:

    • Manufacturing: Product research and development; production operations; supply chain management.
    • Retail banking: Core banking services; loan, mortgage and credit services; investment and wealth management services.
    • Hospitals: Patient intake and admissions; patient diagnosis; patient treatment; patient recovery and ongoing care.
    • Insurance: Actuarial analysis; policy creation; underwriting; claims processing.

    See the Appendix of this blueprint for definitions of shared business functions plus sample industry-specific business view categories.

    Define your CXO Business View categories to set yourself up well for future ITFM analyses

    The CXO Business View buckets you set up today are tools you can and should reuse in your overall approach to ITFM governance. Spend some time to get them right.

    Stay high-level

    Getting too granular invites administrative headaches and overhead. Keep things high-level and general:

    • Limit the number of direct stakeholders represented: This will reduce communication overhead and ensure you're dealing only with people who have real decision-making authority.
    • Look to your org. chart: Note the departments or business units listed across the top of the chart that have one executive or top-ranking senior manager accountable for them. These business units often translate as-is into a tidy CXO Business View category.

    Limit your number of buckets

    Tracking IT spend across more than 8-10 shared and industry-specific business categories is impractical.

    • Simplify your options: Too many buckets gets confusing and invites time-wasting doubt.
    • Reduce future rework: Business structures will change, which means recategorizing spend data. Using a forklift is a lot easier than using tweezers.
    • Stick to major business units: Create separate "Business Other" and "Industry Other" catch-all categories to track IT spend for smaller functions that fall outside of major business unit structures.

    Stay high-level with the CXO Business View

    Be clear on what's in and what's out of your categories to keep everyone on the same page

    Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories reduce confusion, doubt, and wheel-reinvention when deciding where to allocate IT spend.

    Ensure clear boundaries

    Mutual exclusivity is key when defining categories in any taxonomical structure.

    • Avoid overlaps: Each high-level business function category should have few or no core function or process overlaps with another business function category. Aim for clear vertical separation.
    • Be encompassing: When defining a category, list all the business capabilities and sub-functions included in that category. For example, if defining the finance and accounting function, remember to specify its less obvious accountabilities, like enterprise asset management if appropriate.

    Identify exclusions

    Listing what's out can be just as informative and clarifying as listing what's in.

    • Beware odd bedfellows: Minor business groups are often tucked under a bigger organizational entity even though the two use different processes and technologies. Separate them if appropriate and state this exclusion in the bigger entity's definition.
    • Draw a line: If a process crosses business function categories, state which sub-steps are out of scope.
    • Document your decisions: This helps ensure you allocate IT spend the same way every time.

    Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories

    2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

    Duration: Two hours

    1. Confirm your list of high-level shared business services (human resources, finance and accounting, etc.) as provided in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Rename them if needed to match the nomenclature used in your organization.
    2. Set and define your additional list of high-level, industry-specific business categories that are unique to or define your industry. See the slides immediately following this exercise for tips on developing these categories, as well as the appendix of this blueprint for some examples of industry-specific categories and definitions.
    3. Create "Business Other" and "Industry Other" categories to capture minor groups and activities supported by IT that fall beyond the major shared and industry-specific business functions you've shortlisted. Briefly note the business groups/activities that fall under these categories.
    4. Edit/enter your shared and industry-specific business function categories and their definitions on tab "2. Business View Definitions" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge about your organization's structure and business functions/units
    • A list of major shared business functions and industry-specific business functions/capabilities that are defining of your industry
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Lock in key pieces of baseline data

    Calculating core IT spend metrics relies on a few key numbers. Settle these first based on known data before diving into detailed mapping.

    These baseline data will allow you to calculate high-level metrics like IT spend as a percent of revenue and year-over-year percent change in IT spend, as well as more granular metrics like IT staff spend per employee for a specific IT service.

    Baseline data checklist

    • IT spend analysis period (date range).
    • Currency used.
    • Organizational revenue.
    • Organizational OpEx.
    • Total current year IT spend.
    • Total current year IT CapEx and IT OpEx.
    • Total previous-year IT spend.
    • Total projected next-year IT spend.
    • Number of organizational employees.
    • Number of IT employees.

    You may have discovered some things you didn't know about during the mapping process. Revisit your baseline data when your mapping is complete and make adjustments where needed.

    2.4 Enter your baseline data

    Duration: One hour

    1. Navigate to tab "3. Baseline Data" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Using the data you've gathered, enter the following information to set your baseline data for future calculations:
      1. Your IT spend analysis date range. This can be concrete dates, a fiscal year abbreviation, etc.
      2. The currency you will be using throughout the workbook. It's important that all monetary values entered are in the same currency.
      3. Your organization's total revenue and total operating expenditure (OpEx) for the spend analysis data range you've specified. Revenue includes all sources of funding/income.
      4. Your total IT OpEx and total IT capital expenditure (CapEx). The workbook will add your OpEx and CapEx values for you to arrive at a total IT spend value.
      5. Total IT spend for the year prior to the current IT spend analysis date range, as well as anticipated total IT spend for the year following.
      6. Total IT staff spend (salaries, benefits, training, travel, and fees for employees and contractors in a staff augmentation role) for the spend analysis date range.
      7. The total number of organizational employees and total number of IT employees. These are typically full-time equivalent (FTE) values and include contractors in a staff augmentation role.
    2. Make note of any issues that have influenced the values you entered.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.4 Enter your baseline data

    InputOutput
    • Cleaned and organized spend and staffing data and information
    • Finalized baseline data for deriving spend metrics
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Phase 2: Gather required data

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed all preparation steps for your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Gathered your IT spend and staffing data and information.
    • Cleaned and organized your data to streamline mapping.
    • Identified your baseline data points.

    "As an IT person, you're not speaking the same language at all as the accounting department. There's almost always a session of education that's required first."
    - Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 3

    Map Your IT Staff Spend

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Mapping your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Validating your mapping

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

    Allocate your workforce costs across the four views.

    Now it's time to tackle the first part of your hands-on spend mapping effort, namely IT staff spend. In this phase you will:

    • Allocate your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validate your mapping to ensure that it's accurate and complete.

    "We're working towards the truth. We know the answer, but it's how to get it. Take Data & BI. For some organizations, four FTEs is too many. Are these people really doing Data & BI? Look at the big picture and see if something's missing."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Staffing costs comprise a significant percent of OpEx

    Staffing is the first thing that comes to mind when it comes to spend. Intentionally bring it out of the shadows to promote constructive conversations.

    • Total staffing costs stand out from other IT spend line items. This is because they're comparatively large, often comprising 30-50% of total IT costs.
    • Standing out comes at a price. Staff costs are where business leadership looks first if they want cuts. If IT leadership doesn't bring forward ways to cut staffing costs as part of a broader cost-cutting mandate, it will be seen as ignorant of business priorities at best and outright insubordinate at worst.
    • Staffing costs as a percentage of total costs vary between IT functions. On the business side, there's a lack of understanding about what functions IT staff serve and support and the real-world costs of obtaining (and keeping) needed IT skills. For example, IT security staffing costs as a percentage of that service's total OpEx will likely be higher than service desk staff given the scarcity and higher market value of the former. Trimming 20% of IT staffing costs from the IT security function has much different implications than cutting 20% of service desk staffing costs.

    Staffing spend transparency can do a lot to change the conversation from one where the business thinks that IT management is just being self-protecting to one where they know that IT management is actually protecting the business.

    Demonstrating the legitimate reasons behind IT staff spend is critical in both rationalizing past and current spend decisions as well as informing future decisions.

    Info-Tech recommends that you map your IT staffing costs before all other IT costs

    Mapping your IT staffing spend first is a good idea because:

    • Staffing costs are usually documented more clearly, simply, and accurately than other IT costs.
    • Gathering all your IT staffing data is usually a one-stop shop (i.e. the HR department).
    • The comparative straightforwardness of mapping staff costs compared to other IT costs gives you the opportunity to:
      • Get familiar with the ITFM Cost Model views and categories.
      • Get the hang of the hands-on mapping process.
      • Determine the kinds of speed bumps and questions you'll encounter down the road when you tackle the more complicated mappings.

    "Some companies will say software developer. Others say application development specialist or engineer. What are these things? You have to have conversations ..."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Understand the CFO Expense View: "Workforce" categories defined

    For the staffing spend mapping exercise, we're defining the Workforce category here and will offer Vendor category definitions in the vendor spend mapping exercise later.

    Workforce: The total costs of employing labor in the IT organization. This includes all salary/wages, benefits, travel/training, dues and memberships, and contractor pay. Managed services expenses associated with an external service provider should be excluded from Workforce and included in Contract Services.

    Employee: A person employed by the IT organization on a permanent full-time or part-time basis. Costs include salary, benefits, training, travel and expenses, and professional dues and memberships. These relationships are managed under human resources and the bulk of spend transactions via payroll processes.

    Contractor: A person serving in a non-permanent staff augmentation role. These relationships are typically managed under procurement or finance and spend transactions handled via invoicing and accounts payable processes. Labor costs associated with an external service provider are excluded.

    CFO Expense View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CFO Expense View is relatively cut-and-dried

    The CFO Expense View is the most straightforward in terms of mapping IT staffing costs as it's made up of only two main categories: Workforce and Vendor.

    In the CFO Expense View, all IT spend on staffing is allocated to the Workforce bucket under either Employee or Contractor.

    What constitutes a Contractor can be confusing given increased use of long-term labor augmentation strategies, so being absolutely clear about this is imperative. For spend mapping purposes:

    • Any staff members under independent contract where individuals are paid directly by your organization as opposed to indirectly via a service provider (e.g. staffing firm) are considered Workforce > Contractor.
    • Any circumstances where you pay a third-party organization for labor is slotted under Vendor > Contract Services.

    CFO Expense View

    Understand the CIO Service View: Categories defined

    We've provided definitions for the major categories that require clarification.

    Applications Development: Purchase/development, testing, and deployment of application projects. Includes internally developed or packaged solutions.

    Applications Maintenance: Software maintenance fees or maintaining current application functionality along with minor enhancements.

    Hosting & Networks: Compute, storage, and network functionality for running/hosting applications and providing communications/connectivity for the organization.

    End User: Procurement, provision, management, and maintenance (break/fix) of end-user devices (desktop, laptops, tablets, peripherals, and phones) as well as purchase/support and use of productivity software on these devices. The IT service desk is included here as well.

    PPM & Projects: People, processes, and technologies dedicated to the management of IT projects and the IT project portfolio as a whole.

    Data & BI: Strategy and oversight of the technology used to support data warehousing, business intelligence, and analytics.

    IT Management: Senior IT leadership, IT finance, IT strategy and governance, enterprise architecture, process management, vendor management, talent management, and program and portfolio management oversight.

    Security: Information security strategy and oversight, practices, procedures, compliance, and risk mitigation to protect and prevent unauthorized access to organizational data and technology assets.

    CIO Service View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CIO Service View is a slightly harder exercise

    The complexity of mapping staff across this view depends on how your IT department is organized and the degree of role specialization vs. generalization.

    The CIO Service View mirrors how many IT departments are organized into teams or work groups. However, some partial percentage-based allocations are probably required, especially for smaller IT units with more generalized, cross-functional roles. For example:

    • A systems administrator's costs may need to be allocated 80% to Hosting & Networks and 20% to Security.
    • An app development team lead may spend about 40% of their time doing hands-on Development work and the other 60% on project management (i.e. PPM & Projects).

    Info-Tech has found that allocating staffing costs for Data & BI raises the most doubts as it can be very entangled with Applications and other spend. Do the best you can.

    Understand the CXO Expense View: Categories defined

    Expand shared services and industry function categories as suits your organization.

    Industry Functions: As listed and defined by you for your specific industry.

    Human Resources: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of organizational human resource management.

    Finance & Accounting: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of corporate finance and accounting.

    Shared Services Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other shared enterprise functions.

    Information Technology: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of IT performing its own internal IT operations functions.

    Industry Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other industry-specific functions.

    CXO Expense View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CXO Business View warrants the most time

    This view is probably the most difficult as many IT department roles are set up according to lines of IT service, not lines of business. Prepare to do a little math.

    The CXO Expense View also requires percentage-based splitting of role spend, but to a greater extent.

    • Start by mapping staff cost allocations for those roles that are at, or close to, 100% dedicated to a specific business function (if any).
    • For IT roles that support organization-wide or multi-department functions, knowing the percent of employees that work in each relevant business unit and parceling IT staff spend by those same percentages may be easiest. For example, a general systems administrator's costs could be allocated as 4% to HR, 2% to finance, 25% to sales, 20% to production operations, and so on based on the percentage of employees in each of the supported business units.

    Take a minute to figure out how you plan to map IT's indirect CXO Business View costs

    Direct IT costs are those that are dedicated to a specific business unit or user group, such a marketing campaign management app, specialized devices used by a specific subset of workers in the field, or a business analyst embedded full-time in a sales organization.

    VS

    Indirect IT costs are pretty much everything else that's shared broadly across the organization and can't be tied to just one stakeholder or user group, such as network infrastructure, the service desk, and office productivity apps. These costs must be fairly and evenly distributed.

    No indirect mapping method is perfect, but here's a suggestion:

    • Take the respective headcount of all business functions sharing the IT resource/service in question.
    • Calculate each business function's staff as a percentage of all organizational staff.
    • Use this same percent of staff to calculate and allocate a business function's indirect staff and indirect vendor costs.

    "There is always a conversation about indirect allocations. There's never been an organization I've heard of or worked for which has been able to allocate every technology cost directly to a business consumption or business unit."
    Monica Braun, ITFM Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Example:

    • A company of 560 employees has six HR staff (about 1.1% of total staff).
    • Network admin staffing costs $143,000, so $1,573 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.
    • Internet services cost $40,000, so $440 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.

    Some indirect costs are shared by multiple business functions, but not all. In these cases, exclude non-participating business functions from the total number of organizational employees and re-calculate a new percent of staff for each participating business function.

    Know where you're most likely to encounter direct vs. indirect IT staffing costs

    Info-Tech has found that direct vs. indirect staffing spend is more commonly found in some areas than others. Use this insight to focus your work.

    Direct IT staffing spend

    Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is formally dedicated to the support of one business unit/function.

    • Data & BI (direct to one non-IT unit)
    • IT Management (direct to IT)
      • Service planning & Architecture
      • Strategy & Governance
      • Financial Management
      • People & Resources

    Hybrid IT staffing spend

    Definition: Teams with a percent of time or entire FTEs formally dedicated to one business unit/function while the remainder of the time or team is generalized.

    • Applications
      • Applications Development
      • Applications Maintenance
    • IT Management
      • PPM & Projects

    Indirect IT staffing spend

    Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is generalized to the support of multiple or all business units or functions.

    • Infrastructure
      • Hosting & Networks
      • End Users
    • Security

    Indirect staff spend only comes into play in the CXO Business View. Thoroughly map the CIO Service View first and leverage its outcomes to inform your allocations to individual business and industry functions.

    Understand the CEO Innovation View: Categories defined

    Be particularly clear on your understanding of the difference between business growth and business innovation.

    Business Innovation: IT spend/ activities focused on the development of new business capability, new products and services, and/or introduction of existing products/ services into new markets. It does not include expansion or update of existing capabilities.

    Business Growth: IT spend/activities focused on the expansion, scaling, or modernization of an existing business capability, product/service, or market. This is specifically related to growth within a current market.

    Keep the Lights On: IT spend/activities focused on keeping the organization running on a day-to-day basis. This includes all activities used to ensure the smooth operation of business functions and overall business continuity.

    CEO Innovation View

    Important Note

    Info-Tech analysts often skip mapping staff for the CEO Innovation View when delivering the IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

    This is because, for many organizations, either most IT staff spend is allocated to Keep the Lights On or any IT staff allocation to Business Growth and Business Innovation activities is untracked, undocumented, and difficult to parse out.

    Mapping your IT staff across the CEO Innovation View is largely straightforward

    Clear divisions between CapEx and OpEx can be your friend when it comes to mapping this view. Focus your efforts on parsing growth vs. innovation.

    • The majority of IT staff costs are OpEx: And the majority of OpEx will land in the Keep the Lights On category. This is a comparatively simple mapping exercise. Know in advance that this will be the largest of the three buckets in the CEO Innovation View by a very wide margin, so don't be surprised if over 90% of IT staffing costs end up here.
    • Most of the remaining IT staff costs will be tied to capital projects and investments: This means that they will land in either Business Growth or Business Innovation, with the majority typically sitting under Business Growth. Again, don't be surprised if the Business Innovation category holds less than 3% of total IT staffing spend.

    Take your IT staff spend mapping to the next level with detailed time and headcount data

    Overlay a broader assessment of your IT staff

    Info-Tech's IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic can expand your view of what's really happening on the staffing front.

    • Learn your true distribution of IT staff across the same IT services listed in the ITFM Cost Model's CIO Service View.
    • Get other metrics such as degrees of seniority, manager span of control, and IT staff perception of their effectiveness.

    Take action

    1. Set it up: Contact your Info-Tech Account Manager and sign your team up to take the diagnostic.
    2. Assess the findings: Review the output report, specifically how your staff says they spend their time versus what your organization chart's been telling you.
    3. Apply the percentages: Use the FTE allocation percentages in the output report to guide how you distribute your staff spend across the CIO Service View.
    4. Expand your analysis: Use your staff's feedback around perceived aids and obstacles to effectiveness in order to inform and defend your recommendations and decisions on how IT funds should be spent.

    Consider these final tips for mapping your IT staffing costs before diving in

    Mapping your IT staffing costs definitely requires some work. However, knowing the common stumbling blocks and being systematic will yield the best results.

    Approach: Be efficient to be effective

    Start with what you know best: Map the CFO Expense View first to plug in information you already have. Next, map the CIO Service View since it's most aligned to your organization chart.

    Keep a list of questions: You'll need to seek clarifications. Note your questions, but don't reach out until you've done a first pass at the mapping - don't annoy people with a barrage of questions.

    Delegate: Your managers and leads have a more accurate view of exactly what their staff do. Consider delegating the CIO Service View and CXO Business View to them or turn the mapping exercise into a series of collaborative leadership team activities.

    Biggest challenge: Role/title ambiguity

    • The Business Analyst role is often vague. These staffers are often jacks-of-all-trades in IT. You probably can't rely on a generic job description to figure out exactly which services and business functions BAs are spending their time on. Plan to ask a lot of questions.
    • Other role titles may be completely inaccurate. Is the word "system" referring to apps, infrastructure, or both? Is the user experience specialist actually a programmer? Is a manager really managing anything? Know your organization's tendencies around meaningful job titling and set your workload expectations accordingly.

    Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. Someone's doing that work - take the time to figure out who.

    3.1 Map your IT staffing costs

    Duration: Variable

    1. Navigate to tab "4. Staff Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter the name of an individual or group to be mapped, their role/title (if an individual), and their total known cost as per your collected data.
    2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-G), enter the number of FTEs represented by the individual or group named and their status (i.e. Employee or Contractor).
    3. Under the CIO Service View (columns L-AF), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AI-BA), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BD-BH), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other IT staff (as individuals or groups).
    7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
    8. Validate your mapping by:
      1. Identifying spend categories that have zero staff spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain roles are probably required.
      2. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.
      3. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT staff spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    3.1 Map your staffing costs

    Input Output
    • Cleaned and organized IT staffing data and information
    • Finalized mapping of IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    Materials Participants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed your IT staff spend mapping. You have:

    • Allocated your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "Some want to allocate everybody to IT, but that's not how we do it. [In one CXO Business View mapping], a client allocated all their sand network people to the IT department. At the end of the process, the IT department itself accounted for 20% of total IT spend. We went back and reallocated those indirect staff costs across the business."
    - Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 4

    Map Your IT Vendor Spend

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Mapping your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Validating your mapping

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

    Allocate your vendor costs across the four views.

    Now you're ready to take on the second part of your spend mapping, namely IT vendor spend. In this phase you will:

    • Allocate your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validate your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "[One CIO] said that all technology spend runs through their IT group. But they didn't have hardware in their financial data file - no cellphones or laptops, no network or server expenses. They thought they had everything, but they didn't know what they didn't have. Assume it's out there somewhere."
    - Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Tackle the non-staff side of IT spend

    Info-Tech analysts find that mapping the IT vendor spend data is harder because the source data is often scattered and not meaningfully labeled.

    • Be patient and systematic. As with mapping your IT staff spend data, the more organized you are from the outset and the more thoroughly you've prepared your data, the more straightforward the exercise will be.
      • Did you "un-unique" your data? If not, do that now before attempting mapping.
    • Get comfortable with making some assumptions. You need to get through the exercise, so sometimes making a best guess and entering a value is better than diving down a rabbit hole. Your gut is probably right anyway. But only make assumptions around smaller line items that don't have a massive impact on your final numbers. Never assume anything when it comes to big-ticket items.
    • Curb your urge to fix. Some of your buckets will start to get big, while others will barely budge. This is normal ... and interesting! Resist the urge to "balance" staffing spend in a bucket by loading it with apps and hardware for fear that the staffing spend looks too high and will be questioned. This exercise is about how things are, not how they look.

    "A common financial data problem is no vendor names. I've noticed that, even if the vendor name is there, there are no descriptors. You cannot actually tell what type of service it is. Data security? Infrastructure? Networking? Ask yourself 'What did we purchase and what does it do?'"
    - Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Understand the CFO Expense View: Vendor categories defined

    These are the final definitions for this view. See the previous section for CFO Expense View > Workforce definitions used in the IT staffing cost mapping exercise.

    Vendor: Provider of a good or service in exchange for payment.

    Hardware: Costs of procuring, maintaining, and managing all IT hardware, including end-user devices, data center and networking equipment, cabling, and hybrid appliances for both on-premises and cloud-based providers.

    Software: Costs for all software (applications, database, middleware, utilities, tools) used across the organization. This includes purchase, maintenance, and licensing costs.

    Contract Services: Costs for all third-party services including managed service providers, consultants, and advisory services.

    Cloud: Offsite hosting and delivery of an on-demand software or hardware computing function by a third-party provider, often on a subscription-type basis.

    On-Prem: On-site hosting and delivery of a software or hardware computing function, often requiring upfront purchase cost and subsequent maintenance costs.

    Managed Services: Costs for outsourcing the provision and maintenance of a technical process or function.

    Consulting & Advisory: Costs for the third-party provision of professional or technical advice and expertise.

    CFO Expense View

    Know if a technology is cloud-based or on-premises before mapping

    A technology may be one, the other, or both if multiple versions are in play. Financial records rarely indicate which, but on-premises vs. cloud matters in your planning.

    On-Premises

    • Check your CapEx. Any net-new purchases of software or hardware for the IT spend analysis year in question should appear on the CapEx side of the equation. After the first year of implementation/rollout, all ongoing maintenance and management costs should be found under OpEx.
    • Focus on real in-year costs.
      • Don't try to map depreciation or amortization associated with CapEX. Instead, map any upfront purchase costs that occurred in the relevant IT spend analysis year.
      • Map any OpEX costs incurred from maintenance and management. For multi-year maintenance contracts, apply the percentage of fees paid for the relevant year.

    Cloud

    • Check your OpEx. Cloud services are typically fee-based, which means the costs often come in the form of regularly timed bills akin to a subscription.
    • Differentiate new services from older ones. If the cloud service was initiated during the IT spend analysis year in question, there may be some one-time service setup and initiation fees that were legitimately slotted under CapEx. If the cloud service isn't new, then all costs should be OpEx.

    Vendors are increasingly "retiring" on-premises software products. This means an older version may be on-prem, a newer one cloud, and you may have both in play.

    Mapping built-in data, analytics, and security functions can raise doubts

    With so many apps focused on capturing, manipulating, and protecting data, built-in analytics, reporting, and security functions blur CIO Service View bucket boundaries.

    Applications vs. Data & BI

    • In recent years, much more powerful analysis and report-generation features have been added to core enterprise applications. If analytics and reporting functionality is an extended feature of a database-driven application, such as ERP or CRM, then map it to one of the Applications buckets.
    • If the sole purpose of the application is to store, manipulate, query, analyze, and/or visualize data, then log its costs under Data & BI. These would include technologies such as data warehouses, marts, cubes, and lakes; desktop data visualization tools; enterprise business intelligence platforms; and specialized reporting tools.

    Applications vs. Security

    • A similar conundrum exists for Security. So many tools today have built-in security functionality that cannot be unintegrated from the app they support. Don't even try to isolate native security functionality for spend mapping purposes - map it to Applications.
    • If the tool is a special-purpose, standalone security tool or security platform, then map it to Security. These tools usually sit within, and are used/managed by, IT. They include firewalls; antivirus/anti-malware; intrusion prevention, detection and response; access control and authentication; encryption; and penetration testing and vulnerability assessment.

    Putting spend in the right bucket does matter. However, if uncertainty persists, err on the side of consistency. For most organizations Applications Maintenance does end up being the biggest bucket.

    When mapping the CXO Business View, do the biggest vendors first

    Below is a suggested order of operations to clear through the majority of vendor spend as early as possible in the process.

    1 Sort high to low Sort your list of vendor spend from highest to lowest. Your top 20 vendors should constitute most of the spend.
    2 Map multi-department enterprise apps Flag your top apps vendors that have presence in most or all of your business units. Map these first. These tend to be enterprise-level business apps "owned" by core business functions but used broadly across the organization such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), and people management systems.
    3 Map end-user spend Identify top vendors of general end-user technologies like office productivity apps, desktop hardware, and IT service desk tools. Allocate percentages according to your selected indirect spend mapping method.
    4 Map core infrastructure spend Map the behind-the-scenes network, telecom, and data center technologies that underpin IT, plus any infrastructure managed services. Again, apply your selected indirect spend mapping method.
    5 Map business-unit specific technologies This is the spend that's often incurred by just one department. This may also be technology spend that's out in the business, not in IT proper. Map it to the right business function or put it in Business Other or Industry Other if the business function doesn't have its own bucket.
    6 Map the miscellaneous Only smaller spend items likely remain at this point. When in doubt, map them to either Business Other or Industry Other.

    After mapping the CXO Business View, your Other buckets might be getting a bit big

    It's common for the Business Other and Industry Other categories to be quite large, and even the largest. This is okay, but plan to dig deeper and understand why.

    Remember "when in doubt, map to either the Business Other or Industry Other category"? Know what large Other buckets might really be telling you. After your first pass at mapping the CXO Business View, review Business Other and Industry Other if either is more than about 10% of your total spend.
    Diversification: Your organization has a wide array of business functions and/or associated staff that exist outside the core business and industry-specific categories selected. Are there minor business functions that can reasonably be included with the core categories identified? If not, don't force it. Better to keep your core buckets clean and uncomplicated.
    Non-core monolith: There's a significant technology installation outside the core that's associated with a comparatively minor business function. Is there a business function incurring substantial technology spend that should probably be broken out on its own and added to the core? If so, do it. Spend is unlikely to get smaller as the organization grows, so best to shine a light on it now.
    Shadow IT: There's significant technology spend in several areas of the organization that is unowned, unmanaged, or serving an unknown purpose as far as IT is concerned. Is a lot of the spend non-IT technology in the business? If yes, flag it and plan to learn more. It's likely that technologies living elsewhere in the organization will become IT concerns eventually. Better to be ready than to be surprised.

    As with staffing, CapEx vs. OpEx helps map the CEO Innovation View

    Mapping to this view was optional for IT staffing. For hard technology vendor spend, mapping this view is key. Use the guidance below to determine what goes where.

    Keep the Lights On
    Spend usually triggered by a service deck ticket or work order, not a formal project. Includes:

    • Daily maintenance and management.
    • Repair or upgrade of existing technology to preserve business function/continuity.
    • Purchase of "commodity" technology, such as standard-issue laptops and licenses for office productivity software.

    Business Growth
    Spend usually in the context of a formal project under a CapEx umbrella. Includes:

    • Technology spend that directly supports business expansion of an existing product or service and/or market.
    • Modernizing existing technology.
    • Extension of, or investment in, existing infrastructure to ensure reliability and availability in response to growth-driven scaling of headcount and utilization.

    Business Innovation
    Spend is always in the context of a formal project and should be 100% CapEx in the first year after purchase. Includes:

    • Technology spend that directly supports development and rollout of new products or service and/or entry into new markets.
    • Use of existing technology or investment in net-new technology in direct support of a new business initiative, direction, or requirement.

    In many organizations, most technology spend will be allocated to Keep the Lights On. This is normal but should generate conversations with the business about redirecting funds to growth and innovation.

    Remember these top tips when mapping your technology vendor spend

    The benefits of having tidy and organized data can't be overstated, as your source data will be in a more varied state for this phase of the mapping than with IT staffing data.

    Approach: Move from macro to micro

    • Start with the big enterprise apps: These will probably be in the top five of your vendor spend list and will likely have good info about how and by whom they're used. Get them out of the way.
    • Clear out shared technologies. This will feature infrastructure and operations plus office productivity and communications spend. Portioning spend by department headcount for the CXO Business View is the hardest part. Get this forklift task out of the way too.
    • Don't sweat the small stuff. Wasting hours chasing the details of a $500 line item isn't worth it when you have five-, six-, or even seven-figure line items to map.

    Biggest challenge: Poor vendor labeling

    • Vendor labels are often an inconsistent mess or missing entirely. Standardize and apply consistent vendor labels throughout your data so that you can aggregate your data into a workable form.
    • Spend transactions with the same vendor can be scattered all over the place in your general ledger. Take the time to "un-unique" your data to save yourself tremendous grief later on.
    • Start new go-forward labeling habits. Talk to finance about your new list of vendor naming standards and tagging spend as on-prem or cloud. Getting their cooperation with these are major wins.

    Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. There's probably a technology out there in the business doing that work.

    4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

    Duration: Variable

    1. Navigate to tab "5. Vendor Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter a spend line item (vendor, product, etc.), a brief description, and the known amount of spend.
    2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-P), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all asset-class categories. If the allocation for a line item is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    3. Under the CIO Service View (columns S-AM), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AP-BH), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BK-BO), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    6. Repeat steps 2-5 for all spend line items.
    7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
    8. Validate your mapping by:
      1. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT vendor spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
      2. Identifying spend categories that have zero spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain line items are probably required.
      3. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

    InputOutput
    • Cleaned and organized IT vendor spend data and information
    • Finalized mapping of IT vendor spend across the four views of the IT Cost Model
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed your IT vendor spend mapping. You have:

    • Allocated your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "A lot of organizations log their spending by vendor name with no description of the goods or services they actually purchased from the vendor. It could be hardware, software, consulting services ... anything. Having a clear understanding of what's really in there is an essential aspect of the spend conversation."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 5

    Identify Implications for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing the results of your IT staff and vendor spend mapping across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Preparing an executive presentation of your transparent IT spend

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

    Analyze and communicate.

    You're now nearing the end of the first leg in your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping process.
    • Revisit your transparency objectives.
    • Prepare an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

    "Don't plug in numbers just to make yourself look good or please someone else. The only way to improve is to look at real life."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    You've mapped your IT spend data. Now what?

    With mapped data in hand, now you can start to tell IT's spend story with stakeholders in the business.

    Mapping your IT spend is a lot of work, but what you've achieved is impressive (applause!) as well as essential for growing your ITFM maturity. Now put your hard work to work.

    • Consider benchmarking. While not covered in-depth here, benchmarking against yourself in a year-over-year approach as well as against external industry peers are very useful exercises in your technology spend analysis.
    • Review your numbers and graphs. Your IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook contains a series of data visualizations that will help you see the big picture as well as relationships between spend categories.
    • Note the very big numbers, the very small numbers, and the things that just look odd. You'll want to investigate and understand these further.
    • Prepare to communicate. Facilitating conversations with stakeholders in the business is the immediate objective of the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise. Decide where and with whom you want to start dialogue.

    The slides that follow show sample data summaries and visualizations generated in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. We'll take a look at the metrics, tables, and graphs you now have available to you post-mapping and how you can potentially use them in conversations with different IT stakeholders.

    Evaluate how you might use benchmarks before diving into your analysis

    Benchmarking can be a useful input for contextualizing and interpreting your IT spend data. It's not essential at this point but should be part of your ITFM toolkit.

    There are two basic types of benchmarking ...

    Internal: Capturing a current-state set of data about an in-house operation to serve as a baseline. Over time, snapshots of the same data are taken and compared to the baseline to track and assess changes. Common uses for internal benchmarking include:

    • Assessing the impact of a project or initiative.
    • Measuring year-over-year performance.

    External: Seeking out aggregated, current-state data about a peer-group operation to assess your own relative status or performance on the same operation. Common uses for external benchmarking include:

    • Understanding common practices in the industry.
    • Strategic and operational visioning, planning, and goal-setting.
    • Putting together a business case for change or investment.

    Both types of benchmarking benefit from some formality and rigor. Info-Tech can help you stand up an ITFM benchmarking approach as well as connect you with actual IT spend peer benchmarks via our IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service.

    5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

    Duration: Variable

    1. Review the guidance slides that follow the two instruction slides for this exercise to provide yourself with a grounding on how to interpret and analyze your mapped IT staff and vendor spend data.
    2. Systematically review the data tables and graphs on the "Outputs" tabs 6 through 10 in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. There are several approaches you can take - use the one that works best for you. For example:
      1. Review each view in its entirety, one at a time.
      2. Review all workforce spend collectively across all four views, followed by all vendor spend across all four views (or vice versa).
    3. Make note of any spend values that are comparatively high or low or strike you as odd or worth further investigation.
    4. Craft a series of spend-related questions you want to answer for yourself and your stakeholders using the data.
      1. For example, you need to cut costs and apps maintenance is high. Your question could be, "Can we cut costs on applications maintenance staffing?"
      2. Alternatively, you can develop a series of statements (research hypotheses) that you seek to prove true or false with the data. This approach is useful for testing assumptions you've been making. For example, "We can cut spending on applications maintenance staff. True or false?"
    5. Use the template provided on tab "11. Data Analysis" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to document your findings and conclusions, along with the data that supports them.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

    InputOutput
    • Tabular and graphical data outputs
    • Conclusions and potential actions about IT staff and vendor spend
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    High-level findings: Use these IT spend metrics to review and set big picture goals

    Think of these metrics as key anchors in your long-term strategic planning efforts.

    Use IT spend metrics to review and set big goals

    It's common for the business to want a sacrifice in IT OpEx in favor of CapEx

    CapEx and OpEx approval mechanisms are often entirely separate. Different tax treatment for CapEx means that it's usually preferred by the business over OpEx.

    OpEx is often seen as a sunk cost (i.e. an IT problem).

    • Barring a major decision or event, OpEx on an individual item will generally trend upward over time, often by a few percent every year, in lockstep with inflation and growth in organizational headcount.
    • A good portion of OpEx, however, is necessary for basic business continuity.

    CapEx is usually seen as investment (i.e. a business growth opportunity).

    • CapEx behaves quite differently than OpEx. On-the-books capitalized spend on an individual asset tends to trend downward over time due to depreciation or amortization.
    • CapEx only tends to go up when a net-new capital project is initiated, and organizations often have more control over if, when, and how this spend happens.

    Break down the OpEx/CapEx wall. Reference OpEx whenever you talk about CapEx. The best way to do this is via Total Cost of Ownership (TCO).

    • Present data on long-term OpEx projections whenever a new capital project is proposed and ensure ongoing maintenance funds are secured.
    • Educate your CFO about the impact of the cloud on OpEx. See if internal OpEx/CapEx ratio expectations can be adjusted to reflect this reality.

    Spend by asset class offers the CFO a visual illustration of where the money's really gone

    The major spend categories should look very familiar to your CFO. It's the minor sub-categories that sit underneath where you ultimately want to drive the conversation.

    Traditional categories don't reflect IT reality anymore.

    • Most finance departments have "software" accounts that contain apples and oranges, plus other dissimilar fruit.
    • Software isn't just software anymore. Now it's on-premises (CapEx) or cloud (OpEx). The same distinction applies to traditional hardware due to the advent of managed services.
    • The basic categories traditionally used to tag IT spend are out of date. This makes it hard for IT to have meaningful conversations with the CFO since they're not working from the same glossary.

    "Software (on-premises)" and "hardware (cloud)" are more meaningful descriptors than "software" and "hardware." Shift the dialogue.

    Start the migration from major categories to minor categories.

    • Still give the CFO the traditional major categories they're looking for but start including minor category breakdowns into your communications. Most importantly, have a meeting to explain what these minor categories are and why they're important to managing IT effectively.
    • Next, see if the CFO can formally split on-premises vs. cloud software on the books as a first step in making IT spend tracking more meaningful.

    Employees vs. contractors warrants a specific conversation, plus a change in mindset

    IT leaders often find it easier to get approval for contracted labor than to hire a permanent employee. However, the true value proposition for contractors does vary.

    The decision to go with permanent employees or contractors depends on your ultimate goals.

    • Contractors tend to be less expensive and provide more flexibility when adjusting to changing business needs. However, contractors may be less dedicated and take their skills and knowledge with them when they leave.
    • Permanent employees bring additional costs like benefits and training. Plus, letting them go is a lot more complicated. However, they can also bring real value in a way a contractor can't when it comes to sustaining long-term strategic growth. They're assets in themselves.

    Far too often, labor-sourcing decisions are driven by controlling near-term costs instead of generating and sustaining long-term value.

    Introduce the cost-to-value ratio to your workforce spend conversations.

    • Your mapped data will allow you to talk about comparative headcount and spend. This is a financial conversation devoid of context.
    • Go beyond. Show how workforce spend has allowed stated goals to be achieved while controlling for costs. This is the true definition of value.

    CFO Expense View: Shift the ITFM conversation

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CFO Expense View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • How should I classify my IT costs?
    • What information should I include in my plans and reports?
    • How do I justify current spend?
    • How do I justify a budget increase?

    You now have:

    • A starting point for educating the CFO about IT spend realities.
    • A foundation for creating a shared glossary of terms that works for both IT and the finance department and facilitates more meaningful conversations.
    • Proof that there are major areas of IT spend, such as cloud software, that are distinctive and probably warrant their own financial category in the general ledger.
    • A transparent record of IT spend that shows that you understand and care about financial issues, fostering the goodwill and trust that facilitates investment in IT.
    • A starting point to change the ITFM conversation with the CFO from one focused on cost to one focused on value.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

    Exactly like this ...

    Chart of the CFO Expense View

    The CIO Service View aligns with how IT organizes and manages itself – this is your view

    The data mapped here is a critical input for IT's service planning and management program and should be integrated into your IT performance measurement activities.

    Major service categories: These values give a high-level snapshot of your general IT service spend priorities. In most organizations, Applications dominates, making it a focus for cost optimization.

    Minor service categories: The level of granularity for these values prove more practical when measuring performance and making service management decisions - not too big, not too small. While not reflected in this example, application maintenance is usually the largest relative consumer of IT spend in most organizations.

    Data & BI and security: Isolating the exact spend for these services is challenging given that they're often entangled in applications and infrastructure spend respectively, and separate spend tracking for both is a comparatively recent practice.

    Table of CIO Service View

    Check the alignment of individual service spend against known business objectives

    Some IT services are taken for granted by the business, while others are virtually invisible. This lack of visibility often translates into funding misalignments.

    Is the amount of spend on a given service in parallel with the service's overall importance?

    • Though often unstated, ensuring continuity of basic business operations is always the top priority. This means business apps, core infrastructure, end users, and security need to be appropriately funded - these should collectively comprise the majority of IT service spend.
    • Strategy-supporting IT services, like data & BI, see high investment variability between organizations. If its strategic role/importance doesn't align with spend, flag it as an issue you'll need to reconcile with the business by increasing funding (important) or reducing service levels (unimportant).
    • The strategic importance of IT as a whole is often reflected in the spend on IT management services. If spend is low, IT's probably seen as a support function, not a strategic one.

    Identify the hot spots and pick your battles.

    • Spend levels are just approximate gauges of where and how the business is willing to spend its money. Start with this simple gut check.
    • Noting the areas of importance vs. spend misalignment will help you identify where negotiations with the business should probably happen.

    A mature IT cost optimization practice is often approached from the service perspective

    When optimizing IT costs, you have two OpEx levers to pull - vendor spend and staff spend. Isolating these two sources of IT service spend will help shortlist your options.

    It's all about how much room you have to move.

    • Any decision made about how a service is provisioned will push vendor and staff spend in clear, predictable, and often opposite directions (e.g. in-house and people-intensive services tend to see higher staff spend, while outsourced and tech-intensive services higher vendor spend).
    • Service levels required by the business should be the driving factor behind service design and spend decisions. High service spend may reflect priority but may also indicate it's over-built and is ripe for a cost-optimization treatment.
    • Service spend is a useful barometer for tracking the financial impact of any changes made to IT. Add simple unit-cost metrics like "service spend per organizational employee" and "service spend per FTE assigned to the service" to see if and how the dial has moved over time.

    Grow your IT service management practice.

    • The real power of the CIO Service View is laying the groundwork for next-level IT service management initiatives like developing a service catalog, negotiating service-level agreements, rolling out chargeback and showback mechanisms, and calculating IT's value to the business.
    • Use service spend as a common denominator for both your IT service management and IT performance management programs. Better yet, integrate the two programs to ensure a single version of the truth.

    CIO Service View: Optimize your cost-to-value ratio

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CIO Service View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery?
    • Where can I improve spend efficiency?
    • Is my support model optimized?
    • How does our spend compare to others?

    You now have:

    • Data that shows the financial impact of change decisions on service costs.
    • Insight into the relationship between vendor spend and staff spend within a given IT service.
    • The information you need to start developing service unit costing mechanisms.
    • A tool for setting and right-sizing service-level agreements with the business.
    • A more focused starting point for investigating IT cost-optimization opportunities.
    • A baseline for benchmarking common IT services against your peers.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

    We have some good opportunities for optimization ...

    Chart of CIO Service View

    The CXO Business View will spur conversations that may have never happened before

    This view is a potential game changer as previously unknown technology spend is often revealed, triggering change in IT's relationship with business unit leaders.

    Table of CXO Business View

    The big beneficiaries of IT spend will leap out

    The CXO Business View mapping does have a "shock and awe" quality to it given large spend disparities. They may be totally legitimate, but they're still eye-catching.

    Share information, don't push recommendations.

    • Have a series of one-on-one meetings with business unit leaders to present these numbers.
      • Approach initial meetings as information-sharing sessions only. The data is probably new to them, and they'll need time to reflect and ask questions.
      • Bring a list of the big-ticket spend items for that business unit to focus the conversation.
    • Present these numbers at a broader leadership meeting.
      • It's critical for everyone to hear the same truth and learn about each other's technology needs and uses.
      • This is where recommendations for better aligning IT spend with business goals and cost-optimization strategies should surface. A group approach will bring technology haves and have-nots into the open, as well as provide a forum for collaborative solutioning.

    If possible, slice the numbers by business unit headcount.

    • IT spend per business unit employee is an attention-getting metric that can help gain entry to important conversations.
    • Comparing per-employee spend across different business functions is not necessarily an apples-to-apples comparison, as units like HR may have few employees but serve the entire organization. Bring up these kinds of differences to provide context and avoid misinterpretations.

    Questions will arise in how you calculated and allocated indirect IT spend

    IT spend for things like core infrastructure and end-user services must be distributed fairly across multiple or all business units. Be prepared to explain your methods.

    Be transparent in your transparency.

    • Distributing indirect spend is imprecise by nature. You can't account for every unique circumstance. However, you can devise a logic-driven, general approach that's defensible, fair, and works for most people most of the time.
    • Lay out your assumptions from the start. This is an important part of communicating transparently and can prevent unwanted descent into weedy rabbit holes.
      • List what you classified as indirect spend. Use the CFO Expense View and/or CIO Service View categories to aid your presentation of this information.
      • Point out known circumstances that didn't fit your general allocation method and how you handled them. Opting to ignore minor anomalies is reasonable but be sure to tell business unit leaders you did this and why.

    Use questions about indirect IT staff spend distribution to engage stakeholders.

    • As a percentage, the indirect IT staff spend allocation to a specific business unit may be higher than that for IT vendor spend since IT staff tend to operate more generally than the technologies they support.
    • Leverage any pushback about indirect spend as an opportunity to engage the broader business leadership group. Let them arrive at a consensus of how they want it done and confirm buy-in.

    CXO Business View: Bring the truth to light

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CXO Business View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • Which business units consume the most IT resources?
    • Which business units are underserved by IT?
    • How do I best communicate spend data internally?
    • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects?

    You now have:

    • A reason-based accounting of direct and indirect amounts spent on IT vendors and staff in support of each major business unit.
    • Insight into the technology haves and have-nots in your organization and where opportunities to optimize costs may exist.
    • Attention-getting numbers that will help you engage business-unit leaders in meaningful conversations about their use of IT resources and the value they receive.
    • A mechanism to assess if a business unit's consumption of IT is appropriate and aligned with its purpose and mandate in the organization.
    • A list of previously unknown business-side technologies that IT will investigate further.

    Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

    Let's look at how you compare to the other departments ...

    Chart of the CXO Business View

    From the CEO's high-level perspective, IT spend is a collection of distinct financial islands

    From IT's perspective, these islands are intimately connected, with events on one affecting what happens (or doesn't) on another. Focus on the bridges.

    Table of CEO High-level Perspective

    Focus more on unifying the view of technology spend than on the numbers

    When talking to the CEO, seek to build mutual understanding and encourage a holistic approach to the organization's technology spend.

    Use the numbers to get to the real issues.

    • Clarify with the CEO what business innovation, business growth, and KTLO means to them and the role each plays in the organization's strategic and operational plans.
    • Find out the role they think IT, and technology as a whole, has in realizing business plans. Only then can you look at the relative allocation of IT spend with them to see if the aspiration aligns with reality.
    • Eventually, you'll need to discuss expectations around who pays the bills for operationally supporting capital technology investments over the long-term (i.e. IT or the business units that actually want and use it). You'll have concrete examples of business projects that consumed IT operations resources without a corresponding increase in IT's OpEx budget.

    Focus your KTLO spend conversation on risk and trade-off.

    • Every strategic conversation needs to look at the impact on ongoing operations. Every discussion about CapEx needs to investigate the long-term repercussions for OpEx. Look at the whole tech spend picture.
    • Use risk to get KTLO/OpEx into the conversation. Be straightforward (i.e. "If we do/don't do this, then we can/can't do that"). Simply put, mitigating the risks that get in the way of having it all usually requires spending.

    CEO Innovation View: Learn what's really expected of IT

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CEO Innovation View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • Why is KTLO spend so high?
    • What should our operational spend priorities be?
    • Which projects and investments should we prioritize?
    • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives?

    You now have:

    • A holistic, organization-wide view of total technology spend in support of different investment types, namely business innovation, business growth, and keeping things up and running.
    • Data-driven examples that prove the impact of near-term capital spend on long-term operational expenses and the intimate relationship between the two types of spend.
    • A way to measure the degree of alignment between the innovation and growth goals the organization has and how money is actually being spent to realize those goals.
    • A platform to discuss how technology investment decision-making and governance can work better to realize organizational mandates and goals.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

    Here's how tech spend directly supports business objectives ...

    Chart of CEO Innovation View

    Revisit your IT spend transparency objectives before crafting your executive presentation

    Go back to exercise 1.1 to remind yourself why you undertook this effort in the first place, clear your head of all that data, and refocus on the big picture.

    Review the real problems and issues you need to address and the key stakeholders.
    This will guide what data you focus on or showcase with other business leaders. For example, if IT OpEx is perceived as high, be prepared to examine the CapEx/OpEx ratio as well as cloud-related spend's impact on OpEx.

    Flag ITFM processes you'll develop as part of your ITFM maturity improvement plan.
    You won't become a TCO math expert overnight, but being able to communicate your awareness of and commitment to developing and applying ITFM capabilities helps build confidence in you and the information you're presenting.

    Use your first big presentation to debut ITFM.
    ITFM as a formal practice and the changes you hope to make may be a novel concept for your business peers. Use your newfound IT spend and staffing transparency to gently wade into the topic instead of going for the deep dive.

    Now it's time to present your transparent IT spend and staffing data to your executive

    Pull out of analysis mode. You're starting to tell the IT spend story, and this is just the first chapter. Introduce your cast of characters and pique your audience's interest.

    The goal of this first presentation is to showcase IT spend in general and make sure that everyone's getting the same information as everyone else.

    Go broad, not deep
    Defer any in-depth examinations until after you're sure you have everyone's attention. Only dive deep when you're ready to talk about specific plans via follow-up sessions.

    Focus on the CXO
    Given your audience, the CXO Business View may be the most interesting for them and will trigger the most questions and discussion. Plan to spend the largest chunk of your time here.

    Avoid judgment
    Let the numbers speak for themselves. Do point out what's high and what's low, but don't offer your opinion about whether it's good or bad. Let your audience draw their own conclusions.

    Ask for impressions
    Education and awareness are primary objectives. What comes up will give a good indication of what's known, what's news, who's interested, and where there's work to do.

    Pick a starting point
    Ask what they see as high-priority areas for both optimizing IT costs as well as improving the organization's approach to making IT spend decisions in general.

    What to include in your presentation ...

    • Purpose: Why you did the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise.
    • Method: The models and processes you used to map the data.
    • Data: Charts from the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
    • Feedback: Space for your audience to voice their thoughts.
    • Next steps: Discussion and summary of actions to come.

    5.2 Develop an executive presentation

    Duration: Two hours

    1. Download the IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template.
    2. Copy and paste the IT spend output tables and graphs into the template. (Note: Pasting as an image will preserve formatting.)
    3. Incorporate observations and insights about your analysis of your IT spend metrics.
    4. Conduct an internal review of the final presentation to ensure it includes all the elements you need and is error free.
    5. Book time to make your presentation to the executive team. Plan time after the presentation to field questions, engage in follow-up information sessions, and act on feedback.

    Note: Refer to your organization's standards and norms for executive-level presentations and either adapt the Info-Tech template accordingly or use your own.

    Input Output
    • Tabular and graphical data outputs in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Executive presentation summarizing your organization's actual IT spend
    Materials Participants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template
    • CIO/IT directors
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation TemplateTemplate

    Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

    Achievement summary

    You've done the hard part in starting your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Analyzed the results of your IT spend mapping process.
    • Revisited your transparency objectives.
    • Prepared an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

    "Having internal conversations, especially if there is doubt, allows for accuracy and confidence in your model. I was showing someone the cost of a service he managed. He didn't believe the service was so expensive. We went through it: here are the people we allocated, the assets we allocated, and the software we allocated. It was right - that was the total cost. He was like, 'No way. Wow.' The costs were high, and the transparency is what allowed for a conversation on cost optimization."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Next Steps

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    This final section will provide you with:

    • An overall summary of accomplishment
    • Recommended next steps
    • A list of contributors to this research
    • Some related Info-Tech resources to help you grow your ITFM practice

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Congratulations! You now have a fully transparent view of your IT spend.

    You've now mapped the entirety of technology spend in your organization. You've:

    1. Learned the key sources of spend data and information in your organization.
    2. Set some standards for data organization and labeling.
    3. Have a methodology for continuing to track and document spend in a transparent way.
    4. Crafted an executive presentation that's a first step in having more meaningful and constructive conversations about IT spend with your key stakeholders.

    What's next?

    With a reliable baseline, you can look forward to more informed and defensible IT budgeting and cost optimization. Use your newly-transparent IT spend as a foundation for improving your financial data hygiene in the near term and evolving your overall ITFM governance maturity in the long-term.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech full-service engagement or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Monica Braun
    Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Dave Kish, Practice Lead, ITFM Practice

    Dave Kish
    Practice Lead, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice

    Kennedy Confurius
    Research Analyst, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

    Aman Kumari
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

    Rex Ding
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Angie Reynolds
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    • Cost optimization often doesn't go beyond the cutting part, but cutting costs isn't strategic - it's reactive and can easily result in mistakes.
    • True cost optimization is much more than this. Re-focus your efforts on optimizing your cost-to-value ratio and implementing a sustainable cost-optimization practice.

    Build an IT Budget

    • Budgetary approval is difficult because finance executives have a limited understanding of IT and use a different vocabulary.
    • Detailed budgets must be constructed in a way that is transparent but at a level of appropriate detail in order to limit complexity and confusion.

    Manage an IT Budget

    • No one likes to be over budget, but being under budget isn't necessarily good either.
    • Implement a budget management process that documents your planned budget and actual expenditures, tracks variances, and responds to those variances to stay on track.
    • Control for under- or overspending using Info Tech's budget management tool and tactics.

    APPENDIX

    Sample shared business services

    Sample industry-specific business services

    Sample shared business functions

    Business function Definition
    Human Resources The management of the recruitment, training, development, appraisal, compensation/reward, retention, and departure of employees in an organization. Does not include management of subcontractor or outsourced relationships.
    Finance and Accounting The management and analysis of an organization's revenue, funds, spend, investments, financial transactions, accounts, and financial statements. Often includes enterprise asset management.
    Procurement and Supplier Management Acquiring materials, goods, and services from an external party, including identifying potential suppliers/providers, managing tendering or bidding processes, negotiating terms and agreements, and managing the relationship with the vendor/provider.
    Information Technology The development, management, and optimization of information technology resources and systems over their lifecycle in support of an organization's work priorities and goals. Includes computer-based information and communication systems, but typically excludes industrial operational technologies.
    Legal Expertise in interpretation, implication, and application of legislation and regulation that affects the enterprise, including guidance and support in the areas of risk, contracting, compliance, ownership, and litigation.
    Regulatory Affairs and Compliance Management Identification, operationalization, monitoring, reporting, and enforcement of the standards, rules, codes, and laws that apply to an organization's operating environment and the products and services it offers.
    Sales Transactional provision of a product or service to a buyer at an agreed-upon price. Includes identifying and developing prospective buyers, presenting and explaining the product/service, overcoming prospect objections and concerns to purchase, negotiating terms, developing contracts, and billing or invoicing.
    Customer Service and Support A range of activities designed to optimize the customer experience with an organization and its products and services throughout the customer lifecycle with the goals of retaining the customer; encouraging additional spend or consumption; the customer positively influencing other potential customers; and minimizing financial and reputational business risks.
    Marketing and Advertising Understanding customer/prospect needs, developing strategies to meet those needs, and promotion of the organization's products/services to a target market via a range of channels to maximize revenue, membership, donations, and/or develop the organization's brand or reputation. Includes market research and analysis and promotion, campaign, and brand management.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Supply chain and capital-intensive industries.

    Industry function Definition
    Product Innovation Research, design, development, and launch of new products, including the engineering of their underlying production processes.
    Product and Service Portfolio Management The management of an organization's collection of products and services, including management of the product/service roadmap; product/service portfolio and catalog; product/service quality and performance; and product/service pricing, bundling and markdown.
    Logistics and Supply Chain Management Sourcing raw materials or component parts needed and shipping of a finished product. Includes demand planning; procurement/supplier management; inventory management; yard management; allocation management; fulfillment and replenishment; and product distribution and delivery.
    Production Operations Manufacture, storage, and tracking of a product and ensuring product and production process quality. Includes operations management, materials management, quality/safety control, packaging management, and management of the tools, equipment, and technologies that support it.
    Architecture & Engineering The design and planning of structures or critical infrastructure systems according to scientific, functional, and aesthetic principles.
    Construction New construction, assembly, or alteration of buildings and critical infrastructure (e.g. transportation systems; telecommunications systems; utilities generation/transmission/distribution facilities and systems). Includes management of all construction project plans and the people, materials, and equipment required to execute.
    Real Estate Management Management of any residential, commercial, or industrial real estate holdings (land and buildings), including any financial dealings such as its purchase, sale, transfer, and rental as well as ongoing maintenance and repair of associated infrastructure and capital assets.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Financial services and insurance industries.

    Industry function Definition
    Core Banking Services Includes ATM management; account management (opening, deposit/withdrawal, interest calculation, overdraft management, closing); payments processing; funds transfers; foreign currency exchange; cash management.
    Loan, Mortgage, and Credit Services Includes application, adjudication, and approval; facility; disbursement/card issuance; authorization management; merchant services; interest calculation; billing/payment; debt/collections management.
    Investment and Wealth Management Processes for the investment of premiums/monies received from policy holders/customers to generate wealth. Often two-pronged: internal investment to fund claim payout in the case of insurance, and customer-facing investment as a financial service (e.g. retirement planning/annuities). Includes product development and management, investment management, safety deposit box services, trust management services.
    Actuarial Analysis & Policy Creation Development of new policy products based on analysis of past losses and patterns, forecasts of financial risks, and assessment of potential profitability (i.e. actuarial science). These processes also include development of rate schedules (pricing) and the reserves that the insurer needs to have available for potential claim payouts.
    Underwriting & Policy Administration Processes for assessing risk of a potential policy holder; determining whether to insure them or not; setting the premiums the policy holder must pay; and administering the policy over the course of its lifecycle (including updates and billing).
    Claims Processing & Claims Management Processes for receiving, investigating, evaluating, approving/denying, and disbursing a claim payout. This process is unique to the insurance industry. In health insurance, ongoing case management processes need to be considered here whereby the insurer monitors and approves patient treatments over a long-term basis to ensure that the treatments are both necessary and beneficial.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Healthcare industry

    Industry function Definition
    Patient Intake & Admissions Processes whereby key pieces of information about a patient are registered, updated, or confirmed with the healthcare provider in order to access healthcare services. Includes patient triage, intake management, and admissions management. These processes are generally administrative in nature.
    Patient Diagnosis A range of methods for determining the medical condition a patient has in order to provide appropriate care or treatment. Includes examination, consultation, testing, and diagnostic imaging.
    Patient Treatment The range of medical procedures, methods, and interventions to mitigate, relieve, or cure a patient's symptom, injury, disease, or other medical condition. Includes consultation and referral; treatment and care planning; medical procedure management; nursing and personal support; medicine management; trauma management; diet and nutrition management; and patient transportation.
    Patient Recovery & Ongoing Care Processes and methods for tracking the progress of a patient post-treatment; improving their health outcomes; restoring, maintaining, or improving their quality of life; and discharging or transferring them to other providers. Includes remote monitoring of vital parameters, physical therapy, post-trauma care, and a range of restorative and lifestyle modification programs.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Gaming and hospitality industries

    Industry function Definition
    Accommodation Short-term lodging in hotel facilities. Includes management and maintenance of guest rooms and common spaces, amenities (e.g. swimming pool), and other related services (e.g. valet parking).
    Gaming Includes table wagering games and gambling activities such as slot machines or any other activity that includes on premises mobile casino gaming.
    Food & Beverage Services Food and beverages prepared, served, or available for sale by the hotel on the hotel premises via restaurants and bars and room service. Excludes catering (see Events Management) and management or operation of independent leased food and beverage establishments located on the hotel premises.
    Entertainment & Events Planning, coordination, and on-premises hosting of events including conferences, conventions, trade shows, parties, ceremonies and live entertainment, and other forms of recreation on the hotel premises. Includes all aspects of entertainment operations, facility management and catering for the event.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}597|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Despite the importance of performance measures, most organizations struggle with choosing appropriate metrics and standards of performance for their employees.
    • Performance measures are often misaligned with the larger strategy, gamed by employees, or too narrow to provide an accurate picture of employee achievements.
    • Additionally, many organizations track too many metrics, resulting in a bureaucratic nightmare with little payoff.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what matters by aligning your departmental goals with the enterprise's mission and business goals. Break down departmental goals into specific goals for each employee group.
    • Employee engagement, which results in better performance, is directly correlated with employees’ understanding what is expected of them on the job and with their performance reviews reflecting their actual contributions.
    • Shed unnecessary metrics in favor of a lean, holistic approach to performance measurement. Include quantitative, qualitative, and behavioral dimensions in each goal and set appropriate measures for each dimension to meet simple targets. This encourages well-rounded behaviors and discourages rogue behavior.
    • Get rid of the stick-and-carrot approach to management. Use performance measurement to inspire and engage employees, not punish them.

    Impact and Result

    • Learn about and leverage the McLean & Company framework and process to effective employee performance measurement setting.
    • Plan effective communications and successfully manage departmental employee performance measurement by accurately recording goals, measures, and requirements.
    • Find your way through the maze of employee performance management with confidence.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures Storyboard – This deck provides a comprehensive framework for setting, communicating, and reviewing employee performance measures that will drive business results

    This research will help you choose an appropriate measurement framework, set effective measures. and communicate and review your performance measures. Use Info-Tech's process to set meaningful measures that will inspire employees and drive performance.

    • Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures Storyboard

    2. Employee Performance Measures Goals Cascade – A tool to assist you in turning your organizational goals into meaningful individual employee performance measures.

    This tool will help you set departmental goals based on organizational mission and business goals and choose appropriate measures and weightings for each goal. Use this template to plan a comprehensive employee measurement system.

    • Employee Performance Measures Goals Cascade

    3. Employee Performance Measures Template – A template for planning and tracking your departmental goals, employee performance measures, and reporting requirements.

    This tool will help you set departmental goals based on your organizational mission and business goals, choose appropriate measures and weightings for each goal, and visualize you progress toward set goals. Use this template to plan and implement a comprehensive employee measurement system from setting goals to communicating results.

    • Employee Performance Measures Template

    4. Feedback and Coaching Guide for Managers – A tool to guide you on how to coach your team members.

    Feedback and coaching will improve performance, increase employee engagement, and build stronger employee manager relationships. Giving feedback is an essential part of a manger's job and if done timely can help employees to correct their behavior before it becomes a bigger problem.

    • Feedback and Coaching Guide for Managers

    Infographic

    Workshop: Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Source and Set Goals

    The Purpose

    Ensure that individual goals are informed by business ones.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Individuals understand how their goals contribute to organizational ones.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand how your department contributes to larger organizational goals.

    1.2 Determine the timelines you need to measure employees against.

    1.3 Set Business aligned department, team, and individual goals.

    Outputs

    Business-aligned department and team goals

    Business-aligned individual goals

    2 Design Measures

    The Purpose

    Create holistic performance measures.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Holistic performance measures are created.

    Activities

    2.1 Choose your employee measurement framework: generic or individual.

    2.2 Define appropriate employee measures for preestablished goals.

    2.3 Determine employee measurement weightings to drive essential behaviors.

    Outputs

    Determined measurement framework

    Define employee measures.

    Determined weightings

    3 Communicate to Implement and Review

    The Purpose

    Learn how to communicate measures to stakeholders and review measures.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how to communicate to stakeholders and coach employees through blockers.

    Activities

    3.1 Learn how to communicate selected performance measures to stakeholders.

    3.2 How to coach employees though blockers.

    3.3 Reviewing and updating measures.

    Outputs

    Effective communication with stakeholders

    Coaching and feedback

    When to update

    4 Manager Training

    The Purpose

    Train managers in relevant areas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Training delivered to managers.

    Activities

    4.1 Deliver Build a Better Manager training to managers.

    4.2

    Outputs

    Manager training delivered

    Further reading

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Set employees up for success by implementing performance measures that inspire great performance, not irrelevant reporting.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In today’s competitive environment, managers must assess and inspire employee performance in order to assess the achievement of business goals.

    Despite the importance of performance measures, many leaders struggle with choosing appropriate metrics.

    Performance measures are often misaligned with the larger strategy, gamed by employees, or are too narrow to provide an accurate picture of employee achievements.

    Common Obstacles

    Managers who invest time in creating more effective performance measures will be rewarded with increased employee engagement and better employee performance.

    Too little time setting holistic employee measures often results in unintended behaviors and gaming of the system.

    Conversely, too much time setting employee measures will result in overreporting and underperforming employees.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech helps managers translate organizational goals to employee measures. Communicating these to employees and other stakeholders will help managers keep better track of workforce productivity, maintain alignment with the organization’s business strategy, and improve overall results.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Performance measures are not about punishing bad performance, but inspiring higher performance to achieve business goals.

    Meaningful performance measures drive employee engagement...

    Clearly defined performance measures linked to specific goals bolster engagement by showing employees the importance of their contributions.

    Significant components of employee engagement are tied to employee performance measures.

    A diagram of employee engagement survey and their implications.

    Which, in turn, drives business success.

    Improved employee engagement is proven to improve employee performance. Setting meaningful measures can impact your bottom line.

    Impact of Engagement on Performance

    A diagram that shows Percent of Positive Responses Among Engaged vs. Disengaged
    Source: McLean & Company Employee Engagement Survey Jan 2020-Jan 2023; N=5,185 IT Employees; were either Engaged or Disengaged (Almost Engaged and Indifferent were not included)

    Engaged employees don’t just work harder, they deliver higher quality service and products.

    Engaged employees are significantly more likely to agree that they regularly accomplish more than what’s expected of them, choose to work extra hours to improve results, and take pride in the work they do.

    Without this sense of pride and ownership over the quality-of-service IT provides, IT departments are at serious risk of not being able to deliver quality service, on-time and on-budget.

    Create meaningful performance measures to drive employee engagement by helping employees understand how they contribute to the organization.

    Unfortunately, many employee measures are meaningless and fail to drive high-quality performance.

    Too many ineffective performance measures create more work for the manager rather than inspire employee performance. Determine if your measures are worth tracking – or if they are lacking.

    Meaningful performance measures are:

    Ineffective performance measures are:

    Clearly linked to organizational mission, values, and objectives.

    Based on a holistic understanding of employee performance.

    Relevant to organizational decision-making.

    Accepted by employees and managers.

    Easily understood by employees and managers.

    Valid: relevant to the role and goals and within an employee’s control.

    Reliable: consistently applied to assess different employees doing the same job.

    Difficult to track, update, and communicate.

    Easily gamed by managers or employees.

    Narrowly focused on targets rather than the quality of work.

    The cause of unintended outcomes or incentive for the wrong behaviors.

    Overly complex or elaborate.

    Easily manipulated due to reliance on simple calculations.

    Negotiable without taking into account business needs, leading to lower performance standards.

    Adopt a holistic approach to create meaningful performance measurement

    A diagram that shows a holistic approach to create meaningful performance measurement, including inputs, organizational costs, department goals, team goals, individual goals, and output.

    Info-Tech’s methodology to set the stage for more effective employee measures

    1. Source and Set Goals

    Phase Steps
    1.1 Create business-aligned department and team goals
    1.2 Create business-aligned individual goals

    Phase Outcomes
    Understand how your department contributes to larger organizational goals.
    Determine the timelines you need to measure employees against.
    Set business-aligned department, team, and individual goals.

    2. Design Measures

    Phase Steps
    1.1 Choose measurement framework
    1.2 Define employee measures
    1.3 Determine weightings

    Phase Outcomes
    Choose your employee measurement framework: generic or individual.
    Define appropriate employee measures for preestablished goals.
    Determine employee measurement weightings to drive essential behaviors.
    Ensure employee measures are communicated to the right stakeholders.

    3. Communicate to Implement and Review

    Phase Steps
    1.1 Communicate to stakeholders
    1.2 Coaching and feedback
    1.3 When to update

    Phase Outcomes
    Communicate selected performance measure to stakeholders.
    Learn how to coach employees though blockers.
    Understand how to review and when to update measures.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is four to six calls over the course of two to four months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A diagram that shows Guided Implementation in 3 phases.

    Configuration management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}4|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}4|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}4|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Harness the power of Configuration Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Configuration management is all about being able to manage your assets within the support processes. That means to record what you need. Not less than that, and not more either.

    Asset Management, Configuration Management, Lifecycle Management

    IT Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}22|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}22|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}22|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $124,127
    • member rating average days saved: 37
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you may want to redesign your IT governance, Review our methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this process.

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}604|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Business architecture, including value stream and business capability models, is the tool you need to reposition your organization for post-COVID-19 success.
    • Your business architecture model represents your strategic business components. It guides the development of all other architectures to enable new and improved business function.
    • Evaluating your current business architecture, or indeed rebuilding it, creates a foundation for facilitated discussions and target state alignment between IT and the senior C-suite.
    • New projects and initiatives during COVID-19 must evolve business architecture so that your front-line workers and your customers are supported through the resolution of the pandemic. Specifically, your projects and initiatives must be directly traced to evolving your architecture.
    • Business architecture anchors downstream architectural iterations and initiatives. Measure business capability enablement results directly from projects and initiatives using a business architecture model.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on your most disruptive, game-changing innovations that have been on the backburner for some time. Here you will find the ingredients for post-pandemic success.

    Impact and Result

    • Craft your business architecture model, aligned to the current climate, to refocus on your highest priority goals and increase your chances of post-COVID-19 excellence.

    Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create minimum viable business architecture

    Create your minimum viable business architecture.

    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture Storyboard
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Healthcare
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Higher Education
    • Excel Through COVID-19 With a Focused Business Architecture – Manufacturing
    • Business Capability Modeling

    2. Identify COVID-19 critical capabilities for your industry

    If there are a handful of capabilities that your business needs to focus on right now, what are they?

    3. Brainstorm COVID-19 business opportunities

    Identify business opportunities.

    4. Enrich capability model with COVID-19 opportunities

    Enrich your capability model.

    [infographic]

    Innovation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}21|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}21|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Digital Ethics = Data Equity
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • sidebar graphic: Visit Link
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Innovation is the at heart of every organization, especially in these fast moving times. It does not matter if you are in a supporting or "traditional" sector.  The company performing the service in a faster, better and more efficient way, wins.

    innovation

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}58|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time.

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards – a document that walks you through Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards.

    This blueprint guides you through reviewing Info-Tech’s IT dashboards for your audience and organization, then walks you through practical exercises to customize the dashboards to your audience and organization. The blueprint also gives practical guidance for delivering your dashboards and actioning your metrics.

    • Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards Storyboard

    2. Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide – Ready-made IT dashboards for the CIO to communicate to the CXO.

    IT dashboards with visuals and metrics that are aligned and organized by CIO priority and that allow you to customize with your own data, eliminating 80% of the dashboard design work.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide

    3. IT Dashboard Workbook – A step-by-step tool to identify audience needs, translate needs into metrics, design your dashboard, and track/action your metrics.

    The IT Dashboard Workbook accompanies the Establish High Value IT Metrics and Dashboards blueprint and guides you through customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to your audience, crafting your messages, delivering your dashboards to your audience, actioning metrics results, and addressing audience feedback.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards Workbook

    4. IT Metrics Library

    Reference the IT Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • IT Metrics Library

    5. HR Metrics Library

    Reference the HR Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • HR Metrics Library

    Infographic

    Workshop: Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    The Purpose

    Introduce the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to give the participants an idea of how they can be used in their organization.

    Understand the importance of starting with the audience and understanding audience needs before thinking about data and metrics.

    Explain how audience needs translate into metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of where to begin when it comes to considering dashboards and metrics (the audience).

    Identified audience and needs and derived metrics from those identified needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.

    1.2 Identify your audience and their attributes.

    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.

    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.

    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.

    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Outputs

    Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.

    Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    2 Inventory Your Data and Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    The Purpose

    Provide guidance on how to derive metrics and assess data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the importance of considering how you will measure each metric and get the data.

    Understand that measuring data can be costly and that sometimes you just can’t afford to get the measure or you can’t get the data period because the data isn’t there.

    Understand how to assess data quality and readiness.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, the owner, and the security/compliance requirements.

    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.

    2.3 Assess data readiness and the frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Outputs

    Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    3 Design and Build Your Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with the data identified in previous steps.

    This step may vary as some participants may not need to alter the Info-Tech IT Dashboards other than to add their own data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of how to customize the dashboards to the participants’ organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change in them.

    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Outputs

    Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.

    Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Finalized dashboards.

    4 Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in learning how to create a story around the dashboards.

    Guide participants in planning to action metrics and where to record results.

    Guide participants in how to address results of metrics and feedback from audience about dashboards.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants understand how to speak to their dashboards.

    Participants understand how to action metrics results and feedback about dashboards.

    Activities

    4.1 Craft your story.

    4.2 Practice delivering your story.

    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.

    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Outputs

    Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up

    The Purpose

    Finalize work outstanding from previous steps and answer any questions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants have thought about and documented how to customize the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to use in their organization, and they have everything they need to customize the dashboards with their own metrics and visuals (if necessary).

    Activities

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Outputs

    Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.

    Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    Further reading

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

    Analyst Perspective

    A dashboard is a communication tool that helps executives make data-driven decisions

    CIOs naturally gravitate toward data and data analysis. This is their strength. They lean into this strength, using data to drive decisions, track performance, and set targets because they know good data drives good decisions.

    However, when it comes to interpreting and communicating this complex information to executives who may be less familiar with data, CIOs struggle, often falling back on showing IT activity level data instead of what the executives care about. This results in missed opportunities to tell IT’s unique story, secure funding, reveal important trends, or highlight key opportunities for the organization.

    Break through these traditional barriers by using Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards. Spend less time agonizing over visuals and layout and more time concentrating on delivering IT information that moves the organization forward.

    Photo of Diana MacPherson
    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Common Obstacles

    CIOs often experience these challenges because they:

    • Have a natural bias toward data and see it as the whole story instead of a supporting character in a larger narrative.
    • Assume that the IT activity metrics that are easy to get and useful to them are equally interesting to all their stakeholders.
    • Do not have experience communicating visually to an audience unfamiliar with IT operations or lingo.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time

    Info-Tech Insight

    The purpose of a dashboard is to drive decision making. A well designed dashboard presents relevant, clear, concise insights that help executives make data-driven decisions.

    Your challenge

    CIOs struggle to select the right metrics and dashboards to communicate IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress to their executives. CIOs:

    • Fail to tailor metrics to their audience, often presenting graphs that are familiar and useful to them, but not their executives. This results in dashboards full of IT activities that executives neither understand nor find valuable.
    • Do not consider the timeliness of their metrics, which has the same effect as not tailoring their metrics: the executives do not care about the metrics they are shown.
    • Present too many metrics, which not only clutters the board but also dilutes the message the CIO needs to communicate.
    • Do not act on the results of their metrics and show progress, which makes metrics meaningless. Why measure something if you won’t act on the results?

    The bottom line: CIOs often communicate to the wrong audience, about the wrong things, in the wrong amount, using the wrong metrics, at the wrong time.

    In a survey of 500 executives, organizations that struggled with dashboards identified the reasons as:
    61% Inadequate context
    54% Information overload

    — Source: Exasol

    CXOs and CIOs agree that IT performance metrics need improvement

    When asked which performance indicators should be implemented in your business, CXOs and CIOs both agree that IT needs to improve its metrics across several activity areas: technology performance, cost and salary, and risk.

    A diagram that shows performance indicators and metrics from cxo and cio.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards center key metrics around these activities ensuring you align your metrics to the needs of your CXO audience.

    Info-Tech CEO/CIO Alignment Survey Benchmark Report n=666

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the top CIO priorities

    The top six areas that a CIO needs to prioritize and measure outcomes, no matter your organization or industry, are:

    • Managing to a budget: Reducing operational costs and increasing strategic IT spend
    • Customer/constituent satisfaction: Directly and indirectly impacting customer experience.
    • Risk management: Actively knowing and mitigating threats to the organization.
    • Delivering on business objectives: Aligning IT initiatives to the vision of the organization.
    • Employee engagement: Creating an IT workforce of engaged and purpose-driven people.
    • Business leadership relations: Establishing a network of influential business leaders.

    Deliver High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows Delivering High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Deliver High-Value Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows High-Value Dashboard Process.

    Executives recognize the benefits of dashboards:
    87% of respondents to an Exasol study agreed that their organization’s leadership team would make more data-driven decisions if insights were presented in a simpler and more understandable way
    (Source: Exasol)

    The Info-Tech difference:

    We created dashboards for you so you don’t have to!

    1. Eliminate 80% of the dashboard design work by selecting from our ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Use our IT Dashboard Workbook to adjust the dashboards to your audience and organization.
    3. Follow our blueprint and IT Dashboard Workbook tool to craft, and deliver your dashboard to your CXO team, then action feedback from your audience to continuously improve.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing high-value dashboards

    1. Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Steps

    1. Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    2. Completed Tabs 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    2. Translate Audience Needs into Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Review Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Derive Metrics from Audience Needs
    3. Associate metrics to Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 3 of IT Dashboard Workbook

    3. Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess Data Inventory
    2. Assess Data Quality
    3. Assess Data Readiness
    4. Assess Data Frequency

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    3. Finalized dashboards

    4. Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Design Your Dashboard
    2. Update Your Dashboards
    3. Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 5 and 6 of IT Dashboard Workbook and finalized dashboards

    5. Plan, Record, and Action Your Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Plan How to Record Metrics
    2. Record and Action Metrics

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    How to Use This Blueprint

    Choose the path that works for you

    A diagram that shows path of using this blueprint.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards address several needs:

    1. New to dashboards and metrics and not sure where to begin? Let the phases in the blueprint guide you in using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards to create your own dashboards.
    2. Already know who your audience is and what you want to show? Augment the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards framework with your own data and visuals.
    3. Already have a tool you would like to use? Use the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards as a design document to customize your tool.

    Insight Summary

    The need for easy-to-consume data is on the rise making dashboards a vital data communication tool.

    70%: Of employees will be expected to use data heavily by 2025, an increase from 40% in 2018.
    — Source: Tableau

    Overarching insight

    A dashboard’s primary purpose is to drive action. It may also serve secondary purposes to update, educate, and communicate, but if a dashboard does not drive action, it is not serving its purpose.

    Insight 1

    Start with the audience. Resist the urge to start with the data. Think about who your audience is, what internal and external environmental factors influence them, what problems they need to solve, what goals they need to achieve, then tailor the metrics and dashboards to suit.

    Insight 2

    Avoid showing IT activity-level metrics. Instead use CIO priority-based metrics to report on what matters to the organization. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the CIO priorities: risks, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives.

    Insight 3

    Dashboards show the what not the why. Do not assume your audience will draw the same conclusions from your graphs and charts as you do. Provide the why by interpreting the results, adding insights and calls to action, and marking key areas for discussion.

    Insight 4

    A dashboard is a communication tool and should reflect the characteristics of good communication. Be clear, concise, consistent, and relevant.

    Insight 5

    Action your data. Act and report progress on your metrics. Gathering metrics has a cost, so if you do not plan to action a metric, do not measure it.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Photo of Dashboards

    Key deliverable: Dashboards

    Ready-made risk, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives dashboards that organize your data in a visually appealing way so you can concentrate on the metrics and communication.

    Photo of IT Dashboard Workbook

    IT Dashboard Workbook

    The IT Dashboard Workbook keeps all your metrics, data, and dashboard work in one handy file!

    Photo of IT Dashboard Guide

    IT Dashboard Guide

    The IT Dashboard Guide provides the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and information about how to use them.

    Blueprint benefits

    CIO Benefits

    • Reduces the burden of figuring out what metrics to show executives and how to categorize and arrange the visuals.
    • Increases audience engagement through tools and methods that guide CIOs through tailoring metrics and dashboards to audience needs.
    • Simplifies CIO messages so executives better understand IT needs and value.
    • Provides CIOs with the tools to demonstrate transparency and competency to executive leaders.
    • Provides tools and techniques for regular review and action planning of metrics results, which leads to improved performance, efficiency, and effectiveness.

    Business Benefits

    • Provides a richer understanding of the IT landscape and a clearer connection of how IT needs and issues impact the organization.
    • Increases understanding of the IT team’s contribution to achieving business outcomes.
    • Provides visibility into IT and business trends.
    • Speeds up decision making by providing insights and interpretations to complex situations.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Realize measurable benefits after using Info-Tech’s approach:

    Determining what you should measure, what visuals you should use, and how you should organize your visuals, is time consuming. Calculate the time it has taken you to research what metrics you should show, create the visuals, figure out how to categorize the visuals, and layout your visuals. Typically, this takes about 480 hours of time. Use the ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook to quickly put together a set of dashboards to present your CXO. Using these tools will save approximately 480 hours.

    A study at the University of Minnesota shows that visual presentations are 43% more effective at persuading their audiences (Bonsignore). Estimate how persuasive you are now by averaging how often you have convinced your audience to take a specific course of action. After using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and visual story telling techniques described in this blueprint, average again. You should be 43% more persuasive.

    Further value comes from making decisions faster. Baseline how long it takes, on average, for your executive team to make a decision before using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards then time how long decisions take when you use your Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. Your audience should reach decisions 21% faster according to studies at Stanford University and the Wharton School if business (Bonsignore).

    Case Study

    Visuals don’t have to be fancy to communicate clear messages.

    • Industry: Construction
    • Source: Anonymous interview participant

    Challenge

    Year after year, the CIO of a construction company attended business planning with the Board to secure funding for the year. One year, the CEO interrupted and said, “You're asking me for £17 million. You asked me for £14 million last year and you asked me for £12 million the year before that. I don't quite understand what we get for our money.”

    The CEO could not understand how fixing laptops would cost £17 million and for years no one had been able to justify the IT spend.

    Solutions

    The CIO worked with his team to produce a simple one-page bubble diagram representing each IT department. Each bubble included the total costs to deliver the service, along with the number of employees. The larger the bubble, the higher the cost. The CIO brought each bubble to life as he explained to the Board what each department did.

    The Board saw, for example, that IT had architects who thought about the design of a service, where it was going, the life cycle of that service, and the new products that were coming out. They understood what those services cost and knew how many architects IT had to provide for those services.

    Recommendations

    The CEO remarked that he finally understood why the CIO needed £17 million. He even saw that the costs for some IT departments were low for the amount of people and offered to pay IT staff more (something the CIO had requested for years).

    Each year the CIO used the same slide to justify IT costs and when the CIO needed further investment for things like security or new products, an upgrade, or end of life support, the sign-offs came very quickly because the Board understood what IT was doing and that IT wasn't a bottomless pit.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A diagram that shows Guided Implementation in 5 phases.

    Workshop overview

    Day 1: Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    Activities
    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.
    1.2 Identify your audience’s attributes.
    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.
    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.
    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.
    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Deliverables
    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 2: Inventory Your Data; Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    Activities
    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, and the owner and security/compliance requirements.
    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.
    2.3 Assess data readiness and frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 3: Design and Build Your Dashboards

    Activities
    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change on the dashboards.
    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Deliverables
    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Finalized dashboards.

    Day 4: Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    Activities
    4.1 Craft your story.
    4.2 Practice delivering your story.
    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.
    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 5: Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities
    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    What is an IT dashboard?

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility
    A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    An IT dashboard is…
    a visual representation of data, and its main purpose is to drive actions. Well-designed dashboards use an easy to consume presentation style free of clutter. They present their audience with a curated set of visuals that present meaningful metrics to their audience.

    Dashboards can be both automatically or manually updated and can show information that is dynamic or a snapshot in time.

    Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    We created dashboards so you don’t have to.

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    Use the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and consider the following:

    1. What are your initial reactions to the dashboards?
    2. Are the visuals appealing? If so, what makes them appealing?
    3. Can you use these dashboards in your organization? What makes them usable?
    4. How would you use these dashboards to speak your own IT information to your audience?

    Download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Why Use Dashboards When We Have Data?

    How graphics affect us

    Cognitively

    • Engage our imagination
    • Stimulate the brain
    • Heighten creative thinking
    • Enhance or affect emotions

    Emotionally

    • Enhance comprehension
    • Increase recollection
    • Elevate communication
    • Improve retention

    Visual clues

    • Help decode text
    • Attract attention
    • Increase memory

    Persuasion

    • 43% more effective than text alone

    — Source: (Vogel et al.)

    Phase 1

    Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Documenting impressions for using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your audience and their needs and metrics for your IT dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Info-Tech IT Dashboard organization and audience

    We created a compelling way to organize IT dashboards so you don’t have to. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO Priorities, and these are consistent irrespective of industry or organization. This is a constant that you can organize your metrics around.

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Dashboard Customization

    The categories represent a constant around which you can change the order; for example, if your CXO is more focused on Financials, you can switch the Financials dashboard to appear first.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are aimed at a CXO audience so if your audience is the CXO, then you may decide to change very little, but you can customize any visual to appeal to your audience.

    Phase 1 will get you started with your audience.

    Always start with the audience

    …and not the data!

    Reliable, accurate data plays a critical role in dashboards, but data is only worthwhile if it is relevant to the audience who consumes it, and dashboards are only as meaningful as the data and metrics they represent.

    Instead of starting with the data, start with the audience. The more IT understands about the audience, the more relevant the metrics will be to their audience and the more aligned leadership will be with IT.

    Don’t forget yourself and who you are. Your audience will have certain preconceived notions about who you are and what you do. Consider these when you think about what you want your audience to know.

    46% executives identify lack of customization to individual user needs as a reason they struggle with dashboards.
    — Source: (Exasol)

    Resist the Data-First Temptation

    If you find yourself thinking about data and you haven’t thought about your audience, pull yourself back to the audience.

    Ask first Ask later
    Who is this dashboard for? What data should I show?
    How will the audience use the dashboard to make decisions? Where do I get the data?
    How can I show what matters to the audience? How much effort is required to get the data?

    Meaningful measures rely on understanding your audience and their needs

    It is crucial to think about who your audience is so that you can translate their needs into metrics and create meaningful visuals for your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 1-3 of understanding your audience in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 1.1

    Review and Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience

    Activities:
    1.1.1 Examine Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Info-Tech dashboards reviewed for your organization’s audience.

    1.1.1 Examine the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Complete a quick review of the dashboards and consider how your audience would receive them.
    3. Document your thoughts, with special emphasis on your audience in the Info-Tech Dashboard Impressions slide.

    A diagram that shows Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Reviewing visuals can help you think about how your audience will respond to them

    Jot down your thoughts below. You can refer to this later as you consider your audience.

    Consider:

    • Who is your dashboard audience?
    • Are their needs different from the Info-Tech IT Dashboard audience’s? If so, how?
    • Will the visuals work for your audience on each dashboard?
    • Will the order of the dashboards work for your audience?
    • What is missing?

    Step 1.2

    Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Activities:
    1.2.1 Document your audience’s needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Audience details documented in IT Dashboard Workbook

    Identify Your Audience and dig deeper to understand their needs

    Connect with your audience

    • Who is your audience?
    • What does your audience care about? What matters to them?
    • How is their individual success measured? What are their key performance indicators (KPIs)?
    • Connect the challenges and pain points of your audience to how IT can help alleviate those pain points:
      • For example, poor financial performance could be due to a lack of digitization. Identify areas where IT can help alleviate this issue.
      • Try to uncover the root cause behind the need. Root causes are often tied to broad organizational objectives, so think about how IT can impact those objectives.

    Validate the needs you’ve uncovered with the audience to ensure you have not misinterpreted them and clarify the desired timeline and deadline for the dashboard.

    Document audiences and needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    Typical Audience Needs
    Senior Leadership
    • Inform strategic planning and track progress toward objectives.
    • Understand critical challenges.
    • Ensure risks are managed.
    • Ensure budgets are managed.
    Board of Directors
    • Understand organizational risks.
    • Ensure organization is fiscally healthy.
    Business Partners
    • Support strategic workforce planning.
    • Surface upcoming risks to workforce.
    CFO
    • IT Spend
    • Budget Health and Risks

    Prioritize and select audience needs that your dashboard will address

    Prioritize needs by asking:

    • Which needs represent the largest value to the entire organization (i.e. needs that impact more of the organization than just the audience)?
    • Which needs will have the largest impact on the audience’s success?
    • Which needs are likely to drive action (e.g. if supporting a decision, is the audience likely to be amenable to changing the way they make that decision based on the data)?

    Select three to five of the highest priority needs for each audience to include on a dashboard.

    Prioritize needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    A diagram that shows 3 tiers of high priority, medium priority, and low priority.

    1.2.1 Document Your Audience Needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 2. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove after you have completed your updates.

    A table of documenting audience, including key attributes, desired timeline, deadline, needs, and priority.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 2

    Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Revisiting the Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your prioritized audience’s needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Linking audience needs to metrics has positive outcomes

    When you present metrics that your audience cares about, you:

    • Deliver real value and demonstrate IT’s value as a trusted partner.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Enlighten the business about what IT does and how it is connected to the organization.

    29% of respondents to The Economist Intelligence Unit survey cited inadequate collaboration between IT and the business as one of the top barriers to the organization’s digital objectives.
    — Source: Watson, Morag W., et al.

    Dashboard Customization

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards use measures for each dashboard that correspond with what the audience (CXO) cares about. You can find these measures in the IT Dashboard Workbook. If your audience is the CXO, you may have to change a little but you should still validate the needs and metrics in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 2 covers the process of translating needs into metrics.

    Once you know what your audience needs, you know what to measure

    A diagram that highlights step 4-5 of knowing your audience needs in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 2.1

    Document Desired Outcomes for Each Prioritized Audience Need

    Activities:
    2.1.1 Compare the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your audience’s needs.
    2.1.2 Document prioritized audience needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of how well Info-Tech IT Dashboards address audience needs.
    • Documented desired outcomes for each audience need.

    2.1.1 Revisit Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards and Review for Your Audience

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Click the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Recall your first impressions of the dashboards that you recorded on earlier in Phase 1 and open up the audience and needs information you documented in Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    4. Compare the dashboards with your audience’s needs that you documented on Tab 2.
    5. Record any updates to your thoughts or impressions on the next slide. Think about any changes to the dashboards that you would make so that you can reference it when you build the dashboards.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards contain a set of monthly metrics tailored toward a CXO audience.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Knowing what your audience needs, do the metrics the visuals reflect address them?

    Any changes to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards?

    Consider:

    • Are your audience’s needs already reflected in the visuals in each of the dashboards? If so, validate this in the next activity by reviewing the prioritized needs, desired outcomes, and associated metrics already documented in the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    • Are there any visuals your audience would need that you don’t see reflected in the dashboards? Write them here to use in the next exercise.

    Desired outcomes make identifying metrics easier

    When it’s not immediately apparent what the link between needs and metrics is, brainstorm desired outcomes.

    A diagram that shows an example of desired outcomes

    2.1.2 Document your audience’s desired outcome per prioritized need

    Now that you’ve examined the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and considered the needs of your audience, it is time to understand the outcomes and goals of each need so that you can translate your audience’s needs into metrics.

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows desired outcome per prioritized need

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Deriving Meaningful Metrics

    Once you know the desired outcomes, you can identify meaningful metrics

    A diagram of an example of meaningful metrics.

    Common Metrics Mistakes

    Avoid the following oversights when selecting your metrics.

    A diagram that shows 7 metrics mistakes

    Step 2.2

    Derive Metrics From Audience Needs

    Activities:
    2.2.1 Derive metrics using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented metrics for audience needs.

    2.2.1 Derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Now that you have completed the desired outcomes, you can determine if you are meeting those desired outcomes. If you struggle with the metrics, revisit the desired outcomes. It could be that they are not measurable or are not specific enough.

    2 hours

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Download IT Metrics Library

    Download HR Metrics Library

    Step 2.3

    Associate Metrics to Dashboards

    Activities:
    2.3.1 Review the metrics and identify which dashboard they should appear on.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Metrics associated to each dashboard.

    2.3.1 Associate metrics to dashboards

    30 minutes

    Once you have identified all your metrics from Step 2.2, identify which dashboard they should appear on. As with all activities, if the Info-Tech IT Dashboard meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information.

    A diagram that shows associate metrics to dashboards

    Phase 3

    Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Inventorying your data
    • Assessing your data quality
    • Determining data readiness
    • Determining data measurement frequency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Can you measure your metrics?

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine how easily you can get your metric.

    A diagram that highlights step 5 of measuring your metrics in the high-value dashboard process.

    Make sure you select data that your audience trusts

    40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.
    — Source: Experian, 2020

    Phase 3 covers the process of identifying data for each metric, creating a data inventory, assessing the readiness of your data, and documenting the frequency of measuring your data. Once complete, you will have a guide to help you add data to your dashboards.

    Step 3.1

    Assess Data Inventory

    Activities:
    3.1.1 Download the IT Dashboard Workbook and complete the data inventory section on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data inventory for each metric.

    3.1.1 Data Inventory

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 4. The pre-populated text is arranged into the tables according to the dashboard they appear on; you may need to scroll down to see all the dashboard tables.

    Create a data inventory by placing each metric identified on Tab 3 into the corresponding dashboard table. Complete each column as described below.

    A diagram that shows 9 columns of data inventory.

    Metrics Libraries: Use the IT Metrics Library and HR Metrics Library for ideas for metrics to use and how to measure them.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.2

    Assess Data Quality

    Activities:
    3.2.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to complete an assessment of data quality on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data quality assessment for each metric.

    3.2.1 Assess Data Quality

    1 hour

    Document the data quality on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook by filling in the data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns as described below.

    A diagram that shows data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns.

    Data quality is a struggle for many organizations. Consider how much uncertainty you can tolerate and what would be required to improve your data quality to an acceptable level. Consider cost, technological resources, people resources, and time required.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.3

    Assess Data Readiness

    Activities:
    3.3.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data readiness for each metric

    3.3.1 Determine Data Readiness

    1 hour

    Once the data quality has been documented and examined, complete the Data Readiness section of Tab 4 in the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook. Select a readiness classification using the definitions below. Use the readiness of your data to determine the level of effort required to obtain the data and consider the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    A diagram that shows data readiness section

    Remember: Although in most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach, both because effort is lower and data that is not manipulated is more trustworthy, do not abandon data because it is not perfect but instead plan to make it easier to obtain.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.4

    Assess Data Frequency

    Activities:
    3.4.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data and how frequently you will measure your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to assess data inventory, quality, and readiness.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented frequency of measurement for each metric.

    3.4.1 Document Planned Frequency of measurement

    10 minutes

    Document the planned frequency of measurement for all your metrics on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    For each metric, determine how often you will need to refresh it on the dashboard and select a frequency from the drop down. The Info-tech IT Dashboards assume a monthly refresh.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 4

    Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Designing your dashboards
    • Updating your dashboards
    • Crafting your story
    • Delivering your dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Using your dashboard to tell your story with visuals

    Now that you have linked metrics to the needs of your audience and you understand how to get your data, it is time to start building your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 6 of creating meaningful visuals in the high-value dashboard process.

    Using visual language

    • Shortens meetings by 24%
    • Increases the ability to reach consensus by 21%
    • Strengthens persuasiveness by 43%

    — Source: American Management Association

    Phase 4 guides you through using the Info-Tech IT Dashboard visuals for your audience’s needs and your story.

    Step 4.1

    Design Your Dashboard

    Activities:
    4.1.1 Plan and validate dashboard metrics, data, level of effort and visuals.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Identified and validated metrics, data, and visuals for your IT dashboards.

    Use clear visuals that avoid distracting the audience

    Which visual is better to present?

    Sample A:
    A photo of Sample A visuals

    Sample B:
    A diagram Sample B visuals

    Select the appropriate visuals

    Identify the purpose of the visualization. Determine which of the four categories below aligns with the story and choose the appropriate visual to display the data.

    Relationship

    A photo of Scatterplots
    Scatterplots

    • Used to show relationships between two variables.
    • Can be difficult to interpret for audiences that are not familiar with them.

    Distribution

    A photo of Histogram
    Histogram

    • Use a histogram to show spread of a given numeric variable.
    • Can be used to organize groups of data points.
    • Requires continuous data.
    • Can make comparisons difficult.

    A photo of Scatterplot
    Scatterplot

    • Can show correlation between variables.
    • Show each data plot, making it easier to compare.

    Composition

    A photo of Pie chart
    Pie chart

    • Use pie charts to show different categories.
    • Avoid pie charts with numerous slices.
    • Provide numbers alongside slices, as it can be difficult to compare slices based on size alone.

    A photo of Table
    Table

    • Use tables when there are a large number of categories.
    • Presents information in a simple way.

    Comparison

    A photo of Bar graph
    Bar graph

    • Use to compare categories.
    • Easy to understand, familiar format.

    A photo of Line chart
    Line chart

    • Use to show trends or changes over time.
    • Clear and easy to analyze.

    (Calzon)

    Examples of data visualization

    To compare categories, use a bar chart:
    2 examples of bar chart
    Conclusion: Visualizing the spend in various areas helps prioritize.


    To show trends, use a line graph:
    An example of line graph.
    Conclusion: Overlaying a trend line on revenue per employee helps justify headcount costs.


    To show simple results, text is sometimes more clear:
    A diagram that shows examples of text and graphics.
    Conclusion: Text with meaningful graphics conveys messages quickly.


    To display relative percentages of values, use a pie chart:
    An example of pie chart.
    Conclusion: Displaying proportions in a pie chart gives an at-a-glance understanding of the amount any area uses.

    Choose effective colors and design

    Select colors that will enhance the story

    • Use color strategically to help draw the audience’s attention and highlight key information.
    • Choose two to three colors to use consistently throughout the dashboard, as too many colors will be distracting to the audience.
    • Use colors that connect with the audience (e.g., organization or department colors).
    • Don’t use colors that are too similar in shade or brightness level, as those with colorblindness might have difficulty discerning them.

    Keep the design simple and clear

    • Leave white space to separate sections and keep the dashboard simple.
    • Don’t measure everything; show just enough to address the audience’s needs.
    • Use blank space between data points to provide natural contrast (e.g., leaving space between each bar on a bar graph). Don’t rely on contrast between colors to separate data (Miller).
    • Label each data point directly instead of using a separate key, so anyone who has difficulty discerning color can still interpret the data (Miller).

    Example

    A example that shows colours and design of a chart.

    Checklist to build compelling visuals in your presentation

    Leverage this checklist to ensure you are creating the perfect visuals and graphs for your presentation.

    Checklist:

    • Do the visuals grab the audience’s attention?
    • Will the visuals mislead the audience/confuse them?
    • Do the visuals facilitate data comparison or highlight trends and differences in a more effective manner than words?
    • Do the visuals present information simply, cleanly, and accurately?
    • Do the visuals illustrate messages and themes from the accompanying text?

    4.1.1 Plan and validate your dashboard visuals

    1 hour

    Click the links below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook. Open the IT Dashboard Workbook and select Tab 5. For each dashboard, represented by its own table, open the corresponding Info-Tech IT Dashboard as reference.

    A diagram of dashboard and its considerations when selecting visuals.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 4.2

    Update Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.2.1 Update the visuals on the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with data and visuals identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Dashboards updated with your visuals, metrics, and data identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    4.2.1 Update visuals with your own data

    2 hours

    1. Get the data that you identified in Tab 4 and Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Click the link below to go to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and follow the instructions to update the visuals.

    Do not worry about the Key Insights or Calls to Action; you will create this in the next step when you plan your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Step 4.3

    Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.3.1 Craft Your Story
    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards
    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented situations, key insights, and calls to action for each dashboard/visual.
    • A story to tell for each dashboard.
    • Understanding of how to practice delivering the dashboards using stories.

    Stories are more easily understood and more likely to drive decisions

    IT dashboards are valuable tools to provide insights that drive decision making.

    • Monitor: Track and report on strategic areas IT supports.
    • Provide insights: sPresent important data and information to audiences in a clear and efficient way.

    “Data storytelling is a universal language that everyone can understand – from people in STEM to arts and psychology.” — Peter Jackson, Chief Data and Analytics Officer at Exasol

    Storytelling provides context, helping the audience understand and connect with data and metrics.

    • 93% of respondents (business leaders and data professionals) agreed that decisions made as a result of successful data storytelling have the potential to help increase revenue.
    • 92% of respondents agreed that data storytelling was critical to communicate insights effectively.
    • 87% percent of respondents agreed that leadership teams would make more data-driven decisions if insights gathered from data were presented more simply.

    — Exasol

    For more visual guidance, download the IT Dashboard Guide

    Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

    A diagram of an effective message, including consistent, clearn, relevant, and concise.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-adding communication to your audience.

    Enable good communication with these components

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.

    Be Clear

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Avoid jargon.

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the audience.
    • Tailor the details of the message to the audience’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but wider audiences focus mostly on results; talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “What’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
    • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

    Draft the core messages to communicate

    1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Start with a story or metaphor and then support with the data on your dashboard. Avoid rushing in with data first.
    2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem, you can help. There is value in engaging and working with you further.
    3. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you read it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
    4. Interpret visuals for your audience: Do not assume they will reach the same conclusions as you. For example, walk them through what a chart shows even if the axes are labeled, tell them what a trend line indicates or what the comparison between two data points means.
    5. Identify a couple of key insights: Think about one or two key takeaways you want your audience to leave with.
    6. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication. Dashboards exist to drive decisions, so if you have no call to action, you should ask if you need to include the visual.

    4.3.1 Craft Your Story

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 6. The workbook contains grey text that reflects a sample story about the Info-Tech IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the sample text as reference, then remove after you have entered your information.

    A diagram of dashboard to craft your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. Take the Key Insights and Calls to Action that you documented in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook and place them in their corresponding dashboard.
    2. Add any text to your dashboard as necessary but only if the visual requires more information. You can add explanations more effectively during the presentation.

    A diagram that shows strategic initiatives: deliver value to customers.

    Tip: Aim to be brief and concise with any text. Dashboards simplify information and too much text can clutter the visuals and obscure the message.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    1 hour

    Ideally you can present your dashboard to your audience so that you are available to clarify questions and add a layer of interpretation that would crowd out boards if added as text.

    1. To prepare to tell your story, consult the Situation, Key Insights, and Call to Action sections that you documented for each dashboard in Tab 6 of the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Practice your messages as you walk through your dashboards. The next two slides provide delivery guidance.
    3. Once you deliver your dashboards, update Tab 6 with audience feedback. Often dashboards are iterative and when your audience sees them, they are usually inspired to think about what else they would like to see. This is good and shows your audience is engaged!

    Don’t overwhelm your audience with information and data. You spent time to craft your dashboards so that they are clear and concise, so spend time practicing delivering a message that matches your clear, concise dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your dashboard confidently. While this should be obvious, it needs to be stated explicitly. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation or if you are presenting remotely, look into the camera. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading the text from your dashboard, and instead paraphrase it while maintaining eye/camera contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    Communication Delivery Checklist

    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
    • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
    • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
    • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
    • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
    • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
    • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
    • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g., toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures)
    • Do you have room for feedback on the dashboards? Solicit feedback with your audience after the meeting and record it in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 5

    Plan, record, and action your metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Planning to track your metrics
    • Recording your metrics
    • Actioning your metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Actioning your metrics to drive results

    To deliver real value from your dashboards, you need to do something with the results.

    Don’t fail on execution! The whole reason you labor to create inviting visuals and meaningful metrics is to action those metrics. The metrics results inform your entire story! It’s important to plan and do, but everything is lost if you fail to check and act.

    70%: of survey respondents say that managers do not get insights from performance metrics to improve strategic decision making.
    60%: of survey respondents say that operational teams do not get insights to improve operation decision making.

    (Bernard Marr)

    “Metrics aren’t a passive measure of progress but an active part of an organization’s everyday management….Applying the “plan–do–check–act” feedback loop…helps teams learn from their mistakes and identify good ideas that can be applied elsewhere”

    (McKinsey)

    Step 5.1

    Plan How to Record Metrics

    Activities:
    5.1.1 For each dashboard, add a baseline and target to existing metrics and KPIs.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Baselines and targets identified and recorded for each metric.

    5.1.1 Identify Baselines and Targets

    1 hour

    To action your metrics, you must first establish what your baselines and targets are so that you can determine if you are on track.

    To establish baselines:
    If you do not have a baseline. Run your metric to establish one.

    To establish targets:

    • Use historical data and trends of performance.
    • If you do not have historical data, establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    • You can also run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.
    • The target may not always be a number – it could be a trend. The initial target may be changed after review with stakeholders.

    Actions for Success:
    How will you ensure you can get this metric? For example, if you would like to measure delivered value, to make sure the metric is measurable, you will need to ensure that measures of success are documented for an imitative and then measured once complete.

    • If you need help with Action plans, the IT Metrics Library includes action plans for all of its metrics that may help

    A diagram of identify metrics and to identify baselines and targets.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 5.2

    Record and Action Metrics

    Activities:
    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of what and where to record metrics once run.

    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    1 hour

    After analyzing your results, use this information to update your dashboards. Revisit Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook to update your story. Remember to record any audience feedback about the dashboards in the Audience Feedback section.

    Action your measures as well as your metrics

    What should be measured can change over time as your organization matures and the business environment changes. Understanding what creates business value for your organization is critical. If metrics need to be changed, record metrics actions under Identified Actions on Tab 7. A metric will need to be addressed in one of the following ways:

    • Added: A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    • Changed: A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.
    • Removed: The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.
    • Maintained: The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    A diagram of record results and identify how to address results.

    Don’t be discouraged if you need to update your metrics a few times before you get it right. It can take some trial and error to find the measures that best indicate the health of what you are measuring.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Tips for actioning results

    Sometimes actioning your metrics results requires more analysis

    If a metric deviates from your target, you may need to analyze how to correct the issue then run the metric again to see if the results have improved.

    Identify Root Cause
    Root Cause Analysis can include problem exploration techniques like The 5 Whys, fishbone diagrams, or affinity mapping.

    Select a Solution
    Once you have identified a possible root cause, use the same technique to brainstorm and select a solution then re-run your metrics.

    Consider Tension Metrics
    Consider tension metrics when selecting a solution. Will improving one area affect another? A car can go faster but it will consume more fuel – a project can be delivered faster but it may affect the quality.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    1. Using this blueprint and the IT Dashboard Workbook, you validated and customized the dashboards for your audience and organization, which reduced or eliminated time spent searching for and organizing your own visuals.
    2. You documented your dashboards’ story so you are ready to present them to your audience.
    3. You assessed the data for your dashboards and you built a metrics action-tracking plan to maintain your dashboards’ metrics.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Determine how you can use the Info-Tech IT Dashboards in your organization and the anticipated level of customization.

    A photo of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    Plan your dashboards
    Complete the IT Dashboard Workbook to help plan your dashboards using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of John Corrado
    John Corrado
    Head of IT
    X4 Pharmaceuticals

    As head of IT, John is charged with the creation of strategic IT initiatives that align with X4s vision, mission, culture, and long-term goals and is responsible for the organization’s systems, security, and infrastructure. He works closely developing partnerships with X4tizens across the organization to deliver value through innovative programs and services.

    Photo of Grant Frost
    Grant Frost
    Chief Information & Security Officer
    Niagara Catholic School Board

    Grant Frost is an experienced executive, information technologist and security strategist with extensive experience in both the public and private sector. Grant is known for, and has extensive experience in, IT transformation and the ability to increase capability while decreasing cost in IT services.

    Photo of Nick Scozzaro
    Nick Scozzaro
    CEO and Co-Founder of MobiStream and ShadowHQ
    ShadowHQ

    Nick got his start in software development and mobility working at BlackBerry where he developed a deep understanding of the technology landscape and of what is involved in both modernizing legacy systems and integrating new ones. Working with experts across multiple industries, he innovated, learned, strategized, and ultimately helped push the boundaries of what was possible.

    Photo of Joseph Sanders
    Joseph Sanders
    Managing Director of Technology/Cyber Security Services
    Kentucky Housing Corporation

    In his current role Joe oversees all IT Operations/Applications Services that are used to provide services and support to the citizens of Kentucky. Joe has 30+ years of leadership experience and has held several executive roles in the public and private sector. He has been a keynote speaker for various companies including HP, IBM, and Oracle.

    Photo of Jochen Sievert
    Jochen Sievert
    Director Performance Excellence & IT
    Zeon Chemicals

    Jochen moved to the USA from Duesseldorf, Germany in 2010 to join Zeon Chemicals as their IT Manager. Prior to Zeon, Jochen has held various technical positions at Novell, Microsoft, IBM, and Metro Management Systems.

    Info-Tech Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst
    Donna Bales, Principal Research Director
    Shashi Bellamkonda, Principal Research Director
    John Burwash, Executive Counselor
    Tony Denford, Research Lead
    Jody Gunderman, Senior Executive Advisor
    Tom Hawley, Managing Partner
    Mike Higginbotham, Executive Counselor
    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director
    Gary Rietz, Executive Counselor
    Steve Schmidt, Senior Managing Partner
    Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy
    Ian Tyler-Clarke, Executive Counselor

    Plus, an additional four contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Use this blueprint as a baseline to build a customized IT risk taxonomy suitable for your organization.

    Photo of Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    This blueprint will help you identify the KPIs that matter to your organization.

    Photo of Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    This blueprint will help you Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    Photo of IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    Use this benchmarking service to capture, analyze, and communicate your IT spending and staffing.

    Photo of Key Metrics for Every CIO

    Key Metrics for Every CIO

    This short research piece highlights the top metrics for every CIO, how those align to your CIO priorities, and action steps against those metrics.

    Photo of Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    This blueprint helps you identify communication drivers and goals and collect data to support your presentation. It provides checklists for building and delivering a captivating security presentation.

    Bibliography

    “10 Signs You Are Sitting on a Pile of Data Debt.” Experian, n.d. Web.

    “From the What to the Why: How Data Storytelling Is Key to Success.” Exasol, 2021. Web.

    Bonsignore, Marian. “Using Visual Language to Create the Case for Change.” Amarican Management Association. Accessed 19 Apr. 2023.

    Calzon, Bernardita. “Top 25 Dashboard Design Principles, Best Practices & How To’s.” Datapine, 5 Apr. 2023.

    “Data Literacy.” Tableau, n.d. Accessed 3 May 2023.

    “KPIs Don’t Improve Decision-Making In Most Organizations.” LinkedIn, n.d. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Miller, Amanda. “A Comprehensive Guide to Accessible Data Visualization.” Betterment, 2020. Accessed May 2022.

    “Performance Management: Why Keeping Score Is so Important, and so Hard.” McKinsey. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Vogel, Douglas, et al. Persuasion and the Role of Visual Presentation Support: The UM/3M Study. Management Information Systems Research Center School of Management University of Minnesota, 1986.

    Watson, Morag W., et al. ”IT’s Changing Mandate in an Age of Disruption.” The Economist Intelligence Unit Limited, 2021.

    Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}556|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • A company’s web presence is its front face to the world. Ensuring you have the right suite of tools for web content management, experience design, and web analytics is critical to putting your best foot forward: failing to do so will result in customer attrition and lost revenue.
    • Web Experience Management (WEM) suites are a rapidly maturing and dynamic market, with a landscape full of vendors with cutting edge solutions and diverse offerings. As a result, finding a solution that is the best fit for your organization can be a complex process.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • WEM products are not a one-size-fits-all investment: unique evaluations and customization are required in order to deploy a solution that fits your organization.
    • WEM technology often complements core CRM and marketing management products – it does not supplant it, and must augment the rest of your customer experience management portfolio.
    • Phase your WEM implementation: Start with core capabilities such as content management, then add additional capabilities for site analytics and dynamic experience.

    Impact and Result

    • Align marketing needs with identified functional requirements.
    • Implement a best-fit WEM that increases customer acquisition and retention, and provides in-depth capabilities for site analysis.
    • Optimize procurement and operations costs for the WEM platform.

    Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should select and implement a WEM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the WEM project and collect requirements

    Conduct a market overview, structure the project, and gather requirements.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 1: Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements
    • WEM Project Charter Template
    • WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2. Select a WEM solution

    Analyze and shortlist vendors in the space and select a WEM solution.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 2: Select a WEM Solution
    • WEM Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • WEM Vendor Demo Script Template
    • WEM RFP Template

    3. Plan the WEM implementation

    Plan the implementation and evaluate project metrics.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 3: Plan the WEM Implementation
    • WEM Work Breakdown Structure Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch of the WEM Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for the WEM selection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Launch of your WEM selection project.

    Development of your organization’s WEM requirements.

    Activities

    1.1 Facilitation of activities from the Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements phase, including project scoping and resource planning.

    1.2 Conduct overview of the WEM market landscape, trends, and vendors.

    1.3 Conduct process mapping for selected marketing processes.

    1.4 Interview business stakeholders.

    1.5 Prioritize WEM functional requirements.

    Outputs

    WEM Procurement Project Charter

    WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment

    2 Plan the Procurement and Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Plan the procurement and the implementation of the WEM solution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Selection of a WEM solution.

    A plan for implementing the selected WEM solution.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete marketing process mapping with business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff and project team, identify technical requirements for the WEM suite, and document high-level solution requirements.

    2.3 Perform a use-case scenario assessment, review use-case scenario results, identify use-case alignment, and review the WEM Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.

    2.4 Create a custom vendor shortlist and investigate additional vendors for exploration in the marketplace.

    2.5 Meet with project manager to discuss results and action items.

    Outputs

    Vendor Shortlist

    WEM RFP

    Vendor Evaluations

    Selection of a WEM Solution

    WEM projected work break-down

    Implementation plan

    Framework for WEM deployment and CRM/Marketing Management Suite Integration

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}211|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $137,332 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Each year, IT organizations spend more money “outsourcing” tasks, activities, applications, functions, and other items.
    • The increased spend and associated outsourcing leads to less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. There are commonalites among vendor management initiatives, but the key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs, not the other way around.
    • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.
    • Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Build and implement a vendor management initiative tailored to your environment.
    • Create a solid foundation to sustain your vendor management initiative as it evolves and matures.
    • Leverage vendor management-specific tools and templates to manage vendors more proactively and improve communication.
    • Concentrate your vendor management resources on the right vendors.
    • Build a roadmap and project plan for your vendor management journey to ensure you reach your destination.
    • Build collaborative relationships with critical vendors.

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should jump start a vendor management initiative, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Plan

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1: Plan
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    2. Build

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2: Build
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    3. Run

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3: Run

    4. Review

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4: Review

    Infographic

    Workshop: Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan

    The Purpose

    Getting Organized

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Roles and Goals for the VMI

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities – OIC Chart

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Vendor Inventory Tool (Overview)

    Outputs

    Completed Mission Statement and Goals

    List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI

    List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI

    Completed OIC Chart

    Sample Process Map for One Process

    Begun Using Vendor Inventory Tool

    2 Plan/Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Build VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    2.1 Maturity Assessment

    2.2 Structure and Job Descriptions

    2.3 Attributes of a Valuable Vendor

    2.4 Classification Model

    2.5 Risk Assessment Tool

    2.6 Scorecards and Feedback

    2.7 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

    Outputs

    Completed Maturity Assessment.

    Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases.

    List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor.

    Configured Classification Model.

    Configured Risk Assessment Tool.

    Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions.

    Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda.

    3 Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Continue Building VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    3.1 Relationship Alignment Document

    3.2 Vendor Orientation

    3.3 Policies and Procedures

    3.4 3-Year Roadmap

    3.5 90-Day Plan

    3.6 Quick Wins

    3.7 Reports

    3.8 Kickoff Meeting

    Outputs

    Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist

    Vendor Orientation Checklist

    Policies and Procedures Checklist

    Completed 3-Year Roadmap

    Completed 90-Day Plan

    List of Quick Wins

    List of Reports

    4 Review

    The Purpose

    Review the Past 12 Months of VMI Operations and Improve

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Keeping the VMI Aligned With the Organization’s Goals and Ensuring the VMI Is Leveraging Leading Practices

    Activities

    4.1 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships.

    4.2 Assess Compliance.

    4.3 Incorporate Leading Practices.

    4.4 Leverage Lessons Learned.

    4.5 Maintain Internal Alignment.

    4.6 Update Governances.

    Outputs

    Further reading

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    What is vendor management?

    When you read the phrase “vendor management,” what comes to mind? This isn’t a rhetorical question. Take your time … I’ll wait.

    Unfortunately, those words conjure up a lot of different meanings, and much of that depends on whom you ask. Those who work in the vendor management field will provide a variety of answers. To complicate matters, those who are vendor management “outsiders” will have a totally different view of what vendor management is. Why is this important? Because we need a common definition to communicate more effectively, even if the definition is broad.

    Let’s start creating a working definition that is not circular. Vendor management is not simply managing vendors. That expression basically reorders the words and does nothing to advance our cause; it only adds to the existing confusion surrounding the concept.

    Vendor management is best thought of as a spectrum or continuum with many points rather than a specific discipline like accounting or finance. There are many functions and activities that fall under the umbrella term of vendor management: some of them will be part of your vendor management initiative (VMI), some will not, and some will exist in your organization but be outside the VMI. This is the unique part of vendor management – the part that makes it fun, but also the part that leads to the confusion. For example, accounts payable sits within the accounting department almost exclusively, but contract management can sit within or outside the VMI. The beauty of vendor management is its flexibility; your VMI can be created to meet your specific needs and goals while leveraging common vendor management principles.

    Every conversation around vendor management needs to begin with “What do you mean by that?” Only then can we home in on the scope and nature of what people are discussing. “Managing vendors” is too narrow because it often ignores many of the reasons organizations create VMIs in the first place: to reduce costs, to improve performance, to improve processes, to improve relationships, to improve communication, and to manage risk better.

    Vendor management is a strategic initiative that takes the big picture into account … navigating the cradle to grave lifecycle to get the most out of your interactions and relationships with your vendors. It is flexible and customizable; it is not plug and play or overly prescriptive. Tools, principles, templates, and concepts are adapted rather than adopted as is. Ultimately, you define what vendor management is for your organization.

    We look forward to helping you on your vendor management journey no matter what it looks like. But first, let’s have a conversation about how you want to define vendor management in your environment.

    This is a picture of Phil Bode, Principal  Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group.

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

    • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
    • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
    • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

    *Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Common Obstacles

    As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Oftentimes, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

    • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
    • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
    • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    • Review

    The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you quickly establish your VMI and set a solid foundation for its growth and maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vendor management is not a one-size-fits-all initiative. It must be configured:

    • For your environment, culture, and goals.
    • To leverage the strengths of your organization and personnel.
    • To focus your energy and resources on your critical vendors.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape. In 2021, there was increases of:

    38%

    Spend on As-a-Service Providers

    16%

    Spend on Managed Services Providers

    47%

    IT Services Merger & Acquisition Growth (Transactions)

    Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

    A contract’s realized value with and without a vendor management initiative

    Two bars are depicted, showing that vendor collaboration and vendor performance management exceed expected value with a VMI, but without VMI, 75% of a contract's expected value can disappear within 18 months.

    Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help you create a VMI that meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and grow).

    This is an image of Info-Tech's approach to VMI.  It includes the following four steps: 01 - Plan; 02 - Build; 03 - Run; 04 - Review

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Creating and Operating Your VMI

    Phase 1: Plan Phase 2: Build Phase 3: Run Phase 4: Review

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Phase Outcomes

    This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI. This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan. This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI. This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. While there are commonalities and leading practices associated with vendor management, your initiative won’t look exactly like another organization’s. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs.

    Insight 2

    All vendors are not of equal importance to your organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

    Insight 3

    Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    The four phases of creating and running a vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

    VMI Tools and Templates

    This image contains two screenshots of Info-Tech's VMI Tools and Templates

    Build a solid foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

    Key Deliverables:

    1. Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium
    2. Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    3. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    4. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    A suite of tools and templates to help you create and implement your vendor management initiative.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Identify and manage risk proactively.
    • Reduce costs and maximize value.
    • Increase visibility with your critical vendors.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Create a collaborative environment with key vendors.
    • Segment vendors to allocate resources more effectively and more efficiently.

    Business Benefits

    • Improve vendor accountability.
    • Increase collaboration between departments.
    • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
    • Create a feedback loop to address vendor or customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
    • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    Using the Maturity Assessment and 90-Day Plan tools, track how well you are able to achieve your goals and objectives:

    • Did you meet the targeted maturity level for each maturity category as determined by the point system?
    • Did you finish each activity in the 90-Day Plan completely and on time?
    1-Year Maturity Roadmap(by Category) Target Maturity (Total Points) Actual Maturity (Total Points)
    Contracts 12 12
    Risk 8 7
    Vendor Selection 9 9
    Vendor Relationships 21 21
    VMI Operations 24 16
    90-Day Plan (by Activity) Activity Completed
    Finalize mission and goals; gain executive approval Yes
    Finalize OIC chart; gain buy-in from other departments Yes
    Classify top 40 vendors by spend Yes
    Create initial scorecard Yes
    Develop the business alignment meeting agenda Yes
    Conduct two business alignment meetings No
    Update job descriptions Yes
    Map two VMI processes No

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phases 2 & 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Mission statement and goals, scope, and strengths and obstacles.

    Call #5: Classification model.

    Call #9: Policies and procedures and reports.

    Call #12: Assess compliance, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Call #2: Roles and responsibilities and process mapping.

    Call #6: Risk assessment.

    Call #10: 3-year roadmap.

    Call #3: Charter and vendor inventory.

    Call #7: Scorecards and feedback and business alignment meetings.

    Call #11: 90-day plan and quick wins.

    Call #4: Maturity assessment and VMI structure.

    Call #8: Relationship alignment document, vendor orientation, and job descriptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Plan Plan/Build/Run Build/Run Review

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Deliverables

    1. Completed Mission Statement and Goals
    2. List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI
    3. List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI
    4. Completed OIC Chart
    5. Sample Process Map for One Process
    6. Vendor Inventory tab
    1. Completed Maturity Assessment
    2. Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases
    3. List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor
    4. Configured Classification Model
    5. Configured Risk Assessment Tool
    6. Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions
    7. Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    1. Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist
    2. Vendor Orientation Checklist
    3. Policies and Procedures Checklist
    4. Completed 3-Year Roadmap
    5. Completed 90-Day Plan
    6. List of Quick Wins
    7. List of Reports

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get Organized

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get organized.

    Phase 1: Plan focuses on getting organized. Foundational elements (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping) will help you define your VMI. These and the other elements of this Phase will follow you throughout the process of standing up your VMI and running it.

    Spending time up front to ensure that everyone is on the same page will help avoid headaches down the road. The tendency is to skimp (or even skip) on these steps to get to “the good stuff.” To a certain extent, the process provided here is like building a house. You wouldn’t start building your dream home without having a solid blueprint. The same is true with vendor management. Leveraging vendor management tools and techniques without the proper foundation may provide some benefit in the short term, but in the long term it will ultimately be a house of cards waiting to collapse.

    Step 1.1: Mission statement and goals

    Identify why the VMI exists and what it will achieve.

    Whether you are starting your vendor management journey or are already down the path, it is important to know why the vendor management initiative exists and what it hopes to achieve. The easiest way to document this is with a written declaration in the form of a mission statement and goals. Although this is the easiest way to proceed, it is far from easy.

    The mission statement should identify at a high level the nature of the services provided by the VMI, who it will serve, and some of the expected outcomes or achievements. The mission statement should be no longer than one or two sentences.

    The complement to the mission statement is the list of goals for the VMI. Your goals should not be a reassertion of your mission statement in bullet format. At this stage it may not be possible to make them SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based), but consider making them as SMART as possible. Without some of the SMART parameters attached, your goals are more like dreams and wishes. At a minimum, you should be able to determine the level of success achieved for each of the VMI goals.

    Although the VMI’s mission statement will stay static over time (other than for significant changes to the VMI or organization as a whole), the goals should be re-evaluated periodically using a SMART filter and adjusted as needed.

    1.1.1: Mission statement and goals

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the reasons why the VMI will exist.
    2. Review external mission statements for inspiration.
    3. Review internal mission statements from other areas to ensure consistency.
    4. Draft and document your mission statement in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    5. Continue brainstorming and identify the high-level goals for the VMI.
    6. Review the list of goals and make them as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based) as possible.
    7. Document your goals in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    8. Obtain sign-off on the mission statement and goals from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming results
    • Mission statements from other internal and external sources

    Output

    • Completed mission statement and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.2: Scope

    Determine what is in scope and out of scope for the VMI

    Regardless of where your VMI resides or how it operates, it will be working with other areas within your organization. Some of the activities performed by the VMI will be new and not currently handled by other groups or individuals internally; at the same time, some of the activities performed by the VMI may be currently handled by other groups or individuals internally. In addition, executives, stakeholders, and other internal personnel may have expectations or make assumptions about the VMI. As a result, there can be a lot of confusion about what the VMI does and doesn’t do, and the answers cannot always be found in the VMI’s mission statement and goals.

    One component of helping others understand the VMI landscape is formalizing the VMI scope. The scope will define boundaries for the VMI. The intent is not to fence itself off and keep others out but provide guidance on where the VMI’s territory begins and ends. Ultimately, this will help clarify the VMI’s roles and responsibilities, improve workflow, and reduce errant assumptions.

    When drafting your VMI scoping document, make sure you look at both sides of the equation (similar to what you would do when following best practices for a statement of work): Identify what is in scope and what is out of scope. Be specific when describing the individual components of the VMI scope, and make sure executives and stakeholders are on board with the final version.

    1.2.1: Scope

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the activities and functions in scope and out of scope for the VMI.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between in scope and out of scope as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the in-scope items and then turn your attention to the out-of-scope items.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity. An item may be in scope or out of scope but not both.
    3. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope, to document the results.
    4. Obtain sign-off on the scope from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals

    Output

    • Completed list of items in and out of scope for the VMI

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.3: Strengths and obstacles

    Pinpoint the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.

    A SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) is a valuable tool, but it is overkill for your VMI at this point. However, using a modified and simplified form of this tool (strengths and obstacles) will yield significant results and benefit the VMI as it grows and matures.

    Your output will be two lists: the strengths associated with the VMI and the obstacles facing the VMI. For example, strengths could include items such as smart people working within the VMI and executive support. Obstacles could include items such as limited headcount and training required for VMI staff.

    The goals are 1) to harness the strengths to help the VMI be successful and 2) to understand the impact of the obstacles and plan accordingly. The output can also be used to enlighten executives and stakeholders about the challenges associated with their directives or requests (e.g. human bandwidth may not be sufficient to accomplish some of the vendor management activities and there is a moratorium on hiring until the next budget year).

    For each strength identified, determine how you will or can leverage it when things are going well or when the VMI is in a bind. For each obstacle, list the potential impact on the VMI (e.g. scope, growth rate, and number of vendors that can actively be part of the VMI).

    As you do your brainstorming, be as specific as possible and validate your lists with stakeholders and executives as needed.

    1.3.1: Strengths and obstacles

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between strengths and obstacles as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the strengths and then turn your attention to the obstacles.
      3. It is possible for an item to be a strength and an obstacle; when this happens, add details to distinguish the situations.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity.
    3. Determine how you will leverage each strength and how you will manage each obstacle.
    4. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles, to document the results.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the strengths and obstacles from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope

    Output

    • Completed list of items impacting the VMI’s ability to be successful: strengths the VMI can leverage and obstacles the VMI must manage

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    One crucial success factor for VMIs is gaining and maintaining internal alignment. There are many moving parts to an organization, and a VMI must be clear on the various roles and responsibilities related to the relevant processes. Some of this information can be found in the VMI’s scope, referenced in Step 1.2, but additional information is required to avoid stepping on each other’s toes since many of the processes require internal departments to work together. (For example, obtaining requirements for a request for proposal takes more than one person or one department to complete this process.) While it is not necessary to get too granular, it is imperative that you have a clear understanding of how the VMI activities will fit within the larger vendor management lifecycle (which is comprised of many sub processes) and who will be doing what.

    As we have learned through our workshops and guided implementations, a traditional RACI* or RASCI* chart does not work well for this purpose. These charts are not intuitive, and they lack the specificity required to be effective. For vendor management purposes, a higher-level view and a slightly different approach provide much better results.

    This step will lead your through the creation of an OIC* chart to determine vendor management lifecycle roles and responsibilities. Afterward, you’ll be able to say, “Oh, I see clearly who is involved in each part of the process and what their role is.”

    *RACI – Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed
    *RASCI – Responsible, Accountable, Support, Consulted, Informed
    *OIC – Owner, Informed, Contributor

    This is an image of a table which shows an example of which role would be responsible for which step

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities (cont.)

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    To start, define the vendor management lifecycle steps or process applicable to your VMI. Next, determine who participates in the vendor management lifecycle. There is no need to get too granular – think along the lines of departments, subdepartments, divisions, agencies, or however you categorize internal operational units. Avoid naming individuals other than by title; this typically happens when a person oversees a large group (e.g. the CIO [chief information officer] or the CPO [chief procurement officer]). Be thorough, but the chart can get out of hand quickly. For each role and step of the lifecycle, ask whether the entry is necessary – does it add value to the clarity of understanding the responsibilities associated with the vendor management lifecycle? Consider two examples, one for roles and one for lifecycle steps: 1) Is IT sufficient or do you need IT Operations and IT Development? 2) Is “negotiate contract documents” sufficient or do you need “negotiate the contract” and “negotiate the renewal”? The answer will always depend on your culture and environment, but be wary of creating a spreadsheet that requires an 85-inch monitor to view it in its entirety.

    After defining the roles (departments, divisions, agencies) and the vendor management lifecycle steps or process, assign one of three letters to each box in your chart:

    • O – Owner – who owns the process; they may also contribute to it.
    • I – Informed – who is informed about the progress or results of the process.
    • C – Contributor – who contributes or works on the process; it can be tangible or intangible contributions.

    This activity can be started by the VMI or done as a group with representatives from each of the named roles. If the VMI starts the activity, the resulting chart should be validated by the each of the named roles.

    1.4.1: Roles and responsibilities

    1-6 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and configure the OIC Chart in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart.
      1. Review the steps or activities across the top of the chart and modify as needed.
      2. Review the roles listed along the left side of the chart and modify as needed.
    2. For each activity or step across the top of the chart, assign each role a letter – O for owner of that activity or step; I for informed; or C for contributor. Use only one letter per cell.
    3. Work your way across the chart. Every cell should have an entry or be left blank if it is not applicable.
    4. Review the results and validate that every activity or step has an O assigned to it; there must be an owner for every activity or step.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the OIC chart from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • A list of activities or steps to complete a project, starting with requirements gathering and ending with ongoing risk management
    • A list of internal areas (departments, divisions, agencies, etc.) and stakeholders that contribute to completing a project

    Output

    • Completed OCI chart indicating roles and responsibilities for the VMI and other internal areas

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives as needed

    Step 1.5: Process mapping

    Diagram the workflow.

    Although policies and procedures are important, their nature can make it difficult to grasp how things work at a high level (or even at the detail level). To help bridge the gap, map the applicable processes (determined by how deep and wide you want to go) involving the VMI. To start, look at the OIC chart from Step 1.4. You can expand the breadth and depth of your mapping to include the VMI scope, the 3-year roadmap (see Step 2.9), and the processes driven by the day-to-day work within the VMI.

    Various mapping tools can be used. Three common approaches that can be mixed and matched are:

    • Traditional flowcharts.
    • Swimlane diagrams.
    • Work breakdown structures.
    This is an example of a Workflow Process Map

    Step 1.5: Process mapping (cont.)

    Diagram the workflow.

    Your goal is not to create an in-depth diagram for every step of the vendor management lifecycle. However, for steps owned by the VMI, the process map should include sufficient details for the owner and the contributors (see Step 1.4) to understand what is required of them to support that step in the lifecycle.

    For VMI processes that don’t interact with other departments, follow the same pattern as outlined above for steps owned by the VMI.

    Whatever methodology you use to create your process map, make sure it includes enough details so that readers and users can identify the following elements:

    • Input:
      • What are the inputs?
      • Where do the inputs originate or come from?
    • Process:
      • Who is involved/required for this step?
      • What happens to the inputs in this step?
      • What additional materials, tools, or resources are used or required during this step?
    • Output:
      • What are the outputs?
      • Where do the outputs go next?

    1.5.1: Process Mapping

    1-8 hours (or more)

    1. Meet with the participants and determine which processes you want to map.
      1. For processes owned by the VMI, map the entire process.
      2. For processes contributed to by the VMI, map the entire process at a high level and map the VMI portion of the process in greater detail.
    2. Select the right charts/diagrams for your output.
      1. Flowchart
      2. Swimlane diagram
      3. Modified SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer)
      4. WBS (work breakdown structure)
    3. Begin mapping the processes either in a tool or using sticky notes. You want to be able to move the steps and associated information easily; most people don’t map the entire process accurately or with sufficient detail the first time through. An iterative approach works best.
    4. Obtain signoff on the process maps from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping, if desired.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing processes (formal, informal, documented, and undocumented)
    • OIC chart

    Output

    • Process maps for processes contributed to or owned by the VMI

    Materials

    • Sticky Notes
    • Flowchart/process mapping software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.6: Charter

    Document how the VMI will operate.

    As you continue getting organized by working through steps 1.1-1.5, you may want to document your progress in a charter and add some elements. Basically, a charter is a written document laying out how the VMI will operate within the organization. It clearly states the VMI’s mission, goals, scope, roles and responsibilities, and vendor governance model. In addition, it can include a list of team members and sponsors.

    Whether you create a VMI charter will largely depend on:

    • Your organization’s culture.
    • Your organization’s formality.
    • The perceived value of creating a charter.

    If you decide to create a VMI charter, this is a good place in the process to create an initial draft. As you continue working through the blueprint and your VMI matures, update the VMI charter as needed.

    VMI Charter:

    • Purpose
    • Sponsors
    • Roles
    • Responsibilities
    • Governance

    1.6.1: Charter

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the template in Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter.
    2. Determine whether the participants will use this template or add materials to your standard charter template.
    3. Complete as much of the charter as possible, knowing that some information may not be available until later.
    4. Return to the charter as needed until it is completed.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the charter from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Strengths and obstacles
    • OIC chart
    • List of stakeholders and executives and their VMI roles and responsibilities

    Output

    • Completed VMI charter

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter
    • Your organization’s standard charter document

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    As you prepare your VMI for being operational, it’s critical to identify all of your current vendors providing IT products or services to the organization. This can be tricky and may depend on how you view things internally. For example, you may have traditional IT vendors that are managed by IT, and you may have IT vendors that are managed by other internal departments (shadow IT or out-in-the-open IT). If it wasn’t determined with the help of stakeholders and executives before now, make sure you establish the purview of the VMI at this point. What types of vendors are included and excluded from the VMI?

    You may find that a vendor can be included and excluded based on the product or service they provide. A vendor may provide a service that is managed by IT and a service that is managed/controlled by another department. In this instance, a good working relationship and clearly defined roles and responsibilities between the VMI and the other department will be required. But, it all starts with compiling a list of vendors and validating the VMI’s purview (and any limitations) for the vendors with stakeholders and executives.

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory (cont.)

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    At a minimum, the VMI should be able to quickly retrieve key information about each of “its” vendors:

    • Vendor Name
    • Classification (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1)
    • Categories of Service
    • Names of Products and Services Provided
    • Brief Descriptions of Products and Services Provided
    • Annualized Vendor Spend
    • Vendor Contacts
    • Internal Vendor Relationship Owner

    Not all of this information will be available at this point, but you can begin designing or configuring your tool to meet your needs. As your VMI enters Phase 3: Run and continues to mature, you will return to this tool and update the information. For example, the vendor classification category won’t be known until Phase 3, and it can change over time.

    1.7.1: Vendor inventory

    1-10 hours

    Meet with the participants and review the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory. Determine whether the VMI wants to collect and/or monitor additional information and make any necessary modifications to the tool.

    Enter the “Annual IT Vendor Spend” amount in the appropriate cell toward the top of the spreadsheet. This is for IT spend for vendor-related activities within the VMI’s scope; include shadow IT spend and “non-shadow” IT spend if those vendors will be included in the VMI’s scope.

    Populate the data fields for your top 50 vendors by annual spend; you may need multiple entries for the same vendor depending on the nature of the products and services they provide.

    Ignore the “Classification” column for now; you will return to this later when classification information is available.

    Ignore the “Percentage of IT Budget” column as well; it uses a formula to calculate this information.

    Input

    • Data from various internal and external sources such as accounts payable, contracts, and vendor websites

    Output

    • List of vendors with critical information required to manage relationships with key vendors

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Participants

    • VMI team (directly)
    • Other internal and external personnel (indirectly)

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    Knowing where you are and where you want to go are essential elements for any journey in the physical world, and the same holds true for your VMI journey. Start by assessing your current-state VMI maturity. This will provide you with a baseline to measure progress against. Next, using the same criteria, determine the level of VMI maturity you would like to achieve one year in the future. This will be your future-state VMI maturity. Lastly, identify the gaps and plot your course.

    The maturity assessment provides three main benefits:

    1. Focus – you’ll know what is important to you moving forward.
    2. 3-Year Roadmap (discussed more fully in Step 2.9) – you’ll have additional input for your short-term and long-term roadmap (1, 2, and 3 years out).
    3. Quantifiable Improvement – you’ll be able to measure your progress and make midcourse corrections when necessary.

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment (cont.)

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    The Info-Tech VMI Maturity Assessment tool evaluates your maturity across several criteria across multiple categories. Once completed, the assessment will specify:

    • A current-state score by category and overall.
    • A target-state score by category and overall.
    • A quantifiable gap for each criterion.
    • A priority assignment for each criterion.
    • A level of effort required by criterion to get from the current state to the target state.
    • A target due date by criterion for achieving the target state.
    • A rank order for each criterion (note: limit your ranking to your top 7 or 9).

    Many organizations will be tempted to mature too quickly. Resource constraints and other items from Step 1.3 (Strengths and Obstacles) will impact how quickly you can mature. Being aggressive is fine, but it must be tempered with a dose of reality. Otherwise, morale, perception, and results can suffer.

    1.8.1: Maturity assessment

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input, to complete the first part of this activity. Provide the required information indicated below.
      1. Review each statement in column B and enter a value in the “Current” column using the drop-down menus based on how much you disagree or agree (0-4) with the statement. This establishes a baseline maturity.
      2. Repeat this process for the “Future” column using a target date of one year from now to achieve this level. This is your desired maturity.
      3. Enter information regarding priority, level of effort, and target due date in the applicable columns using the drop-down menus. (Priority levels are critical, high, medium, low, and maintain; Levels of Effort are high, medium, and low; Target Due Dates are broken into timelines: 1-3 months, 4-6 months, 7-9 months, and 10-12 months.)
    2. Review the information on Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output; use the Distribution Tables to help you rank your top priorities. Enter a unique number into the Priority (Rank) column. Limit your ranking to the top 7 to 9 activities to provide focus.

    Input

    • Knowledge of current VMI practices and desired future states

    Output

    • VMI maturity baseline
    • Desired VMI target maturity state (in one year)
    • Prioritized areas to improve and due dates
    • Graphs and tables to identify maturity deltas and track progress

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.9: Structure

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    There are two parts to the VMI structure:

    1. Organization Structure. Who owns the VMI – where does it fit on the organization chart?
    2. Reporting Structure. What is the reporting structure within the VMI – what are the job functions, titles, and solid and dotted lines of accountability?

    VMI Organization Structure

    The decision regarding who owns the VMI can follow one of two paths:

    1. The decision has already been made by the board of directors, executives, senior leadership, or stakeholders; OR
    2. The decision has not been made, and options will be reviewed and evaluated before it is implemented.

    Many organizations overlook the importance of this decision. The VMI’s position on the organization chart can aid or hinder its success. Whether the decision has already been made or not, this is the perfect time to evaluate the decision or options based on the following question: Why is the VMI being created and how will it operate? Review the documents you created during Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors to answer this question.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors, select where the VMI will be best located from the following areas/offices or their equivalent:

    • Chief Compliance Officer (CCO)
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Financial Officer (CFO)
    • Chief Procurement Officer (CPO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Other area

    Without the proper support and placement in the organization chart, the VMI can fail. It is important for the VMI to find a suitable home with a direct connection to one of the sponsors identified above and for the VMI lead to have significant stature (aka title) within the organization. For example, if the VMI lead is a “manager” level who is four reporting layers away from the chief officer/sponsor, the VMI will have an image issue within and outside of the sponsor’s organization (as well as within the vendor community). While this is not to say that the VMI lead should be a vice president* or senior director, our experience and research indicate that the VMI and the VMI lead will be taken more seriously when the VMI lead is at least a director level reporting directly to a CXO.

    *For purposes of the example above, the reporting structure hierarchy used is manager, senior manager, director, senior director, vice president, CXO.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    VMI Reporting Structure

    As previously mentioned, the VMI reporting structure describes and identifies the job functions, titles, and lines of accountability. Whether you have a formal vendor management office or you are leveraging the principles of vendor management informally, your VMI reporting structure design will involve some solid lines and some dotted lines. In this instance, the dotted lines represent part-time participation or people/areas that will assist the VMI in some capacity. For example, if the VMI sits within IT, a dotted line to Procurement will show that a good working relationship is required for both parties to succeed; or a dotted line to Christina in Legal will indicate that Christina will be helping the VMI with legal issues.

    There is no one-size-fits-all reporting structure for VMIs, and your approach must leverage the materials from Steps 1.1-1.8, your culture, and your needs. By way of example, your VMI may include some or all of the following functions:

    • Contract Management
    • Relationship Management
    • Financial Management
    • Asset Management
    • Performance Management
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Risk Management

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Once you’ve identified the functional groups, you can assign titles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships. A good diagram goes a long way to helping others understand your organization. Traditional organization charts work well with VMIs, but a target diagram allows for rapid absorption of the dotted-line relationships. Review the two examples below and determine an approach that works best for you.

    An organizational Chart is depicted.  At the top of the chart is: Office of the CIO.  Below that is: VMI: Legal; Accounting & Finance; Corporate Procurement; below that are the following: Vendor Risk Management; Vendor Reporting and Analysis; Asset Management; Performance Management; Contract Management; IT Procurement Three concentric circles are depicted.  In the inner circle is the term: VMI.  In the middle circle are the terms: Reporting & Analysis; Asset Mgmt; Contract Mgmt; Performance Mgmt; It Proc; Vendor Risk.  In the outer circle are the following terms: Compliance; Finance; HR; Accounting; Procurement; Business Units; Legal; IT

    1.9.1: Structure

    15-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review decisions that have been made or options that are available regarding the VMI’s placement in the organization chart.
      1. Common options include the Chief Information Officer (CIO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO), or Chief Procurement Officer (CPO).
      2. Less common but viable options include the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), Chief Operating Officer (COO), or another area.
    2. Brainstorm and determine the job functions and titles
    3. Define the reporting structure within the VMI.
    4. Identify the “dotted line” relationships between the VMI and other internal areas.
    5. Using flowchart, org. chart, or other similar software, reduce your results to a graphic representation that indicates where the VMI resides, its reporting structure, and its dotted-line relationships.
    6. Obtain sign-off on the structure from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure, if desired.

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Maturity assessment results (current and target state)
    • Existing org. charts
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Completed org. chart with job titles and reporting structure

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip chart
    • Sticky notes
    • Flowchart/org. chart software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • VMI sponsor
    • Stakeholders and executives

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and Configure Tools, Templates, and Processes

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Human Resources
    • Legal
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and configure tools, templates, and processes.

    Phase 2: Build focuses on creating and configuring the tools and templates that will help you run your VMI. Vendor management is not a plug-and-play environment, and unless noted otherwise, the tools and templates included with this blueprint require your input and thought. The tools and templates must work in concert with your culture, values, and goals. That will require teamwork, insights, contemplation, and deliberation.

    During this Phase, you’ll leverage the various templates and tools included with this blueprint and adapt them for your specific needs and use. In some instances, you’ll be starting with mostly a blank slate; while in others, only a small modification may be required to make it fit your circumstances. However, it is possible that a document or spreadsheet may need heavy customization to fit your situation. As you create your VMI, use the included materials for inspiration and guidance purposes rather than as absolute dictates.

    Step 2.1: Classification model

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    One of the functions of a VMI is to allocate the appropriate level of vendor management resources to each vendor since not all vendors are of equal importance to your organization. While some people may be able intuitively to sort their vendors into vendor management categories, a more objective, consistent, and reliable model works best. Info-Tech’s COST model helps you assign your vendors to the appropriate vendor management category so that you can focus your vendor management resources where they will do the most good.

    COST is an acronym for Commodity, Operational, Strategic, and Tactical. Your vendors will occupy one of these vendor management categories, and each category helps you determine the nature of the resources allocated to that vendor, the characteristics of the relationship desired by the VMI, and the governance level used.

    The easiest way to think of the COST model is as a 2x2 matrix or graph. The model should be configured for your environment so that the criteria used for determining a vendor’s classification align with what is important to you and your organization. However, at this point in your VMI’s maturation, a simple approach works best. The Classification Model included with this blueprint requires minimal configuration to get you started and that is discussed on the activity slide associated with this Step 2.1.


    Speed
    Operational Strategic
    Commodity Tactical
    →→→
    Criticality and Risk to the Organization

    Step 2.1: Classification model (cont.)

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    Common Characteristics by Vendor Management Category

    Operational Strategic
    • Low to moderate risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Product or service used by more than one area
    • Price is a key negotiation point
    • Product or service is valued by the organization
    • Quality or the perception of quality is a differentiator (i.e. brand awareness)
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Few competitors and differentiated products and services
    • Product or service significantly advances the organization’s vision, mission, and success
    • Well-established in their core industry
    Commodity Tactical
    • Low risk and criticality; low spend and switching costs
    • Product or service is readily available from many sources
    • Market has many competitors and options
    • Relationship is transactional
    • Price is the main differentiator
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; low to moderate spend and switching costs
    • Vendor offerings align with or support one or more strategic objectives
    • Often IT vendors “outside” of IT (i.e. controlled and paid for by other areas)
    • Often niche or new vendors

    Source: Compiled in part from Stephen Guth, “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More)”

    2.1.1: Classification Model

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the spend ranges in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration, for your environment.
    2. Sort the data from Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory tab, you will have to aggregate the spend data for this activity.
    3. Update cells F14-J14 in the Classification Model based on your actual data.
      1. Cell F14 – set the boundary at a point between the spend for your 10th and 11th ranked vendors. For example, if the 10th vendor by spend is $1,009,850 and the 11th vendor by spend is $980,763, the range for F14 would be $1,000,00+.
      2. Cell G14 – set the bottom of the range at a point between the spend for your 30th and 31st ranked vendors; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in F14.
      3. Cell H14 – set the bottom of the range slightly below the spend for your 50th ranked vendor; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in G14.
      4. Cells I14 and J14 – divide the remaining range in half and split it between the two cells; for J14 the range will be $0 to $1 less than the bottom range in I14.
    4. Ignore the other variables at this time.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.2: Risk assessment tool

    Identify risks to measure, monitor, and report on.

    One of the typical drivers of a VMI is risk management. Organizations want to get a better handle on the various risks their vendors pose. Vendor risks originate from many areas: financial, performance, security, legal, and many others. However, security risk is the high-profile risk and the one organizations often focus on almost exclusively, which leaves the organization vulnerable in other areas.

    Risk management is a program, not a project – there is no completion date. A proactive approach works best and requires continual monitoring, identification, and assessment. Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and can have other detrimental effects on the organization. Any risk that adversely affects IT will adversely affect the entire organization.

    While the VMI won’t necessarily be quantifying or calculating the risk directly, it generally is the aggregator of risk information across the risk categories, which it then includes in its reporting function. (See Steps 2.12 and 3.8.)

    At a minimum, your risk management strategy should involve:

    • Identifying the risks you want to measure and monitor.
    • Identifying your risk appetite (the amount of risk you are willing to live with).
    • Measuring, monitoring, and reporting on the applicable risks.
    • Developing and deploying a risk management plan to minimize potential risk impact.

    Vendor risk is a fact of life, but you do have options for how you handle it. Be proactive and thoughtful in your approach, and focus your resources on what is important.

    2.2.1: Risk assessment tool

    30-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the risk indicators in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool, Tab 1. Set Parameters, for your environment.
    2. Review the risk categories and determine which ones you will be measuring and monitoring.
    3. Review the risk indicators under each risk category and determine whether the indicator is acceptable as written, is acceptable with modifications, should be replaced, or should be deleted.
    4. Make the necessary changes to the risk indicators; these changes will cascade to each of the vendor tabs. Limit the number of risk indicators to no more than seven per risk category.
    5. Gain input and approval as needed from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Scope
    • OIC Chart
    • Process Maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    A vendor management scorecard is a great tool for measuring, monitoring, and improving relationship alignment. In addition, it is perfect for improving communication between you and the vendor.

    Conceptually, a scorecard is similar to a report card you received when you were in school. At the end of a learning cycle, you received feedback on how well you did in each of your classes. For vendor management, the scorecard is also used to provide periodic feedback, but there are some different nuances and some additional benefits and objectives when compared to a report card.

    Although scorecards can be used in a variety of ways, the main focus here will be on vendor management scorecards – contract management, project management, and other types of scorecards will not be included in the materials covered in this Step 2.3 or in Step 3.4.

    Category 1 Score
    Vendor Objective A 4
    Objective B 3
    Objective C 5
    Objective D 4 !

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Anatomy

    The Info-Tech Scorecard includes five areas:

    • Measurement Categories. Measurement categories help organize the scorecard. Limit the number of measurement categories to three to five; this allows the parties to stay focused on what’s important. Too many measurement categories make it difficult for the vendor to understand the expectations.
    • Criteria. The criteria describe what is being measured. Create criteria with sufficient detail to allow the reviewers to fully understand what is being measured and to evaluate it. Criteria can be objective or subjective. Use three to five criteria per measurement category.
    • Measurement Category Weights. Not all of your measurement categories may be of equal importance to you; this area allows you to give greater weight to a measurement category when compiling the overall score.
    • Rating. Reviewers will be asked to assign a score to each criteria using a 1 to 5 scale.
    • Comments. A good scorecard will include a place for reviewers to provide additional information regarding the rating or other items that are relevant to the scorecard.

    An overall score is calculated based on the rating for each criteria and the measurement category weights.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Goals and Objectives

    Scorecards can be used for a variety of reasons. Some of the common ones are listed below:

    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Convey expectations to the vendor.
    • Identify and recognize top vendors.
    • Increase alignment between the parties.
    • Improve communication with the vendor.
    • Compare vendors across the same criteria.
    • Measure items not included in contract metrics.
    • Identify vendors for “strategic alliance” consideration.
    • Help the organization achieve specific goals and objectives.
    • Identify and resolve issues before they impact performance or the relationship.

    Identifying your scorecard drivers first will help you craft a suitable scorecard.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Info-Tech recommends starting with simple scorecards to allow you and the vendors to acclimate to the new process and information. As you build your scorecards, keep in mind that internal personnel will be scoring the vendors and the vendors will be reviewing the scorecard. Make your scorecard easy for your personnel to fill out and composed of meaningful content to drive the vendor in the right direction. You can always make the scorecard more complex in the future.

    Our recommendation of five categories is provided below. Choose three to five categories to help you accomplish your scorecard goals and objectives:

    1. Timeliness – responses, resolutions, fixes, submissions, completions, milestones, deliverables, invoices, etc.
    2. Cost – total cost of ownership, value, price stability, price increases/decreases, pricing models, etc.
    3. Quality – accuracy, completeness, mean time to failure, bugs, number of failures, etc.
    4. Personnel – skilled, experienced, knowledgeable, certified, friendly, trustworthy, flexible, accommodating, etc.
    5. Risk – adequate contractual protections, security breaches, lawsuits, finances, audit findings, etc.

    Some criteria may be applicable in more than one category. The categories above should cover at least 80% of the items that are important to your organization. The general criteria listed for each category is not an exhaustive list, but most things break down into time, money, quality, people, and risk issues.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Additional Considerations

    • Even a good rating system can be confusing. Make sure you provide some examples or a way for reviewers to discern the differences between 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Don’t assume your “Rating Key” will be intuitive.
    • When assigning weights, don’t go lower than 10% for any measurement category. If the weight is too low, it won’t be relevant enough to have an impact on the total score. If it doesn’t “move the needle,” don’t include it.
    • Final sign-off on the scorecard template should occur outside of the VMI. The heavy lifting can be done by the VMI to create it, but the scorecard is for the benefit of the organization overall and those impacted by the vendors specifically. You may end up playing arbiter or referee, but the scorecard is not the exclusive property of the VMI. Try to reach consensus on your final template whenever possible.
    • You should notice improved ratings and total scores over time for your vendors. One explanation for this is the Pygmalion Effect: “The Pygmalion [E]ffect describes situations where someone’s high expectations improves our behavior and therefore our performance in a given area. It suggests that we do better when more is expected of us.”* Convey your expectations and let the vendors’ competitive juices take over.
    • While you’re creating your scorecard and materials to explain the process to internal personnel, identify those pieces that will help you explain it to your vendors as part of your vendor orientation (see steps 2.6 and 3.4). Leveraging pre-existing materials is a great shortcut.

    *Source: The Decision Lab, 2020

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Vendor Feedback

    After you’ve built your scorecard, turn your attention to the second half of the equation – feedback from the vendor. A communication loop cannot be successful without the dialogue flowing both ways. While this can happen with just a scorecard, a mechanism specifically geared toward the vendor providing you with feedback improves communication, alignment, and satisfaction.

    You may be tempted to create a formal scorecard for the vendor to use. Our recommendation is to avoid that temptation until later in your maturity or development of the VMI. You’ll be implementing a lot of new processes, deploying new tools and templates, and getting people to work together in new ways. Work on those things first.

    For now, implement an informal process for obtaining information from the vendor. Start by identifying information that you will find useful, information that will allow you to improve overall, to reduce waste or time, to improve processes, to identify gaps in skills. Incorporate these items into your business alignment meetings (see Steps 2.4 and 3.5). Create three to five good questions to ask the vendor and include these in the business alignment meeting agenda. The goal is to get meaningful feedback, and that starts with asking good questions.

    Keep it simple at first. When the time is right, you can build a more formal feedback form or scorecard. Don’t be in a rush though. So long as the informal method works, keep using it.

    2.3.1: Scorecards and feedback

    30-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for your scorecard measurement categories:
      1. What makes a vendor valuable to your organization?
      2. What differentiates a “good” vendor from a “bad” vendor?
      3. What items would you like to measure and provide feedback to the vendor to improve performance, the relationship, risk, and other areas?
    2. Select three, but no more than five, of the following measure categories: timeliness, cost, quality, personnel, and risk.
    3. Within each measurement category, list two or three criteria that you want to measure and track for your vendors; choose items that are as universal as possible rather than being applicable to one vendor or one vendor type.
    4. Assign a weight to each measurement category, ensuring that the total weight is 100% for all measurement categories.
    5. Document your results as you go in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured scorecard template

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    2.3.2: Scorecards and feedback

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for feedback to seek from your vendors during your business alignment meetings. During the brainstorming, identify questions to ask the vendor about your organization that will:
      1. Help you improve the relationship.
      2. Help you improve your processes or performance.
      3. Help you improve ongoing communication.
      4. Help you evaluate your personnel.
    2. Identify the top five questions you want to include in your business alignment meeting agenda. (Note: you may need to refine the actual questions from the brainstorming activity before they are ready to include in your business alignment meeting agenda.)
    3. Document both your brainstorming activity and your final results in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback. The brainstorming questions can be used in the future as your VMI matures and your feedback transforms from informal to formal. The final results will be used in Steps 2.4 and 3.5.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Feedback questions to include with the business alignment meeting agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    A business alignment meeting (BAM) is a great, multi-faceted tool to ensure the customer and the vendor stay focused on what is important to the customer at a high level. BAMs are not traditional “operational” meetings where the parties get into the details of the contracts, deal with installation problems, address project management issues, or discuss specific cost overruns. The main focus of the BAM is the scorecard (see Step 2.3), but other topics are discussed and other purposes are served. For example, you can use the BAM to develop the relationship with the vendor’s leadership team so that if escalation is ever needed, your organization is more than just a name on a spreadsheet or customer list; you can learn about innovations the vendor is working on (without the meeting turning into a sales call); you can address high-level performance trends and request corrective action as needed; you can clarify your expectations; you can educate the vendor about your industry, culture, and organization; and you can learn more about the vendor.

    As you build your BAM agenda, someone in your organization may say, “Oh, that’s just a quarterly business review (QBR) or top-to-top meeting.” However, in most instances, an existing QBR or top-to-top meeting is not the same as a BAM. Using the term QBR or top-to-top meeting instead of BAM can lead to confusion internally. The VMI may say to the business unit, Procurement, or another department, “We’re going to start running some QBRs for our strategic vendors.” The typical response is, “There’s no need to do that. We already run QBRs/top-to-top meetings with our important vendors.” This may be accompanied by an invitation to join their meeting, where you may be an afterthought, have no influence, and get five minutes at the end to talk about your agenda items. Keep your BAM separate so that it meets your needs.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As previously noted, using the term BAM more accurately depicts the nature of the VMI meeting and prevents confusion internally with other meetings already occurring. In addition, hosting the BAM yourself rather than piggybacking onto another meeting ensures that the VMI’s needs are met. The VMI will set and control the BAM agenda and determine the invite list for internal personnel and vendor personnel. As you may have figured out by now, having the right customer and vendor personnel attend will be essential.

    BAMs are conducted at the vendor level … not the contract level. As a result, the frequency of the BAMs will depend on the vendor’s classification category (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1). General frequency guidelines are provided below, but they can be modified to meet your goals:

    • Commodity Vendors – Not applicable
    • Operational Vendors – Biannually or annually
    • Strategic Vendors – Quarterly
    • Tactical Vendors – Quarterly or biannually

    BAMs can help you achieve some additional benefits not previously mentioned:

    • Foster a collaborative relationship with the vendor.
    • Avoid erroneous assumptions by the parties.
    • Capture and provide a record of the relationship (and other items) over time.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As with any meeting, building the proper agenda will be one of the keys to an effective and efficient meeting. A high-level BAM agenda with sample topics is set out below:

    BAM Agenda

    • Opening Remarks
      • Welcome and introductions
      • Review of previous minutes
    • Active Discussion
      • Review of open issues
      • Scorecard and feedback
      • Current status of projects to ensure situational awareness by the vendor
      • Roadmap/strategy/future projects
      • Accomplishments
    • Closing Remarks
      • Reinforce positives (good behavior, results, and performance, value added, and expectations exceeded)
      • Recap
    • Adjourn

    2.4.1: Business alignment meeting agenda

    20-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.
    2. Using the sample agenda as inspiration and brainstorming activities as needed, create a BAM agenda tailored to your needs.
      1. Select the items from the sample agenda applicable to your situation.
      2. Add any items required based on your brainstorming.
      3. Add the feedback questions identified during Activity 2.3.2 and documented in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback.
    3. Gain input and approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required or appropriate.
    4. Document the final BAM agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Output

    • Configured BAM agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.5: Relationship alignment document

    Draft a document to convey important VMI information to your vendors.

    Throughout this blueprint, alignment is mentioned directly (e.g. business alignment meetings [Steps 2.4 and 3.5]) or indirectly implied. Ensuring you and your vendors are on the same page, have clear and transparent communication, and understand each other’s expectations is critical to fostering strong relationships. One component of gaining and maintaining alignment with your vendors is the relationship alignment document (RAD). Depending upon the scope of your VMI and what your organization already has in place, your RAD will fill in the gaps on various topics.

    Early in the VMI’s maturation, the easiest approach is to develop a short document (i.e. 1 page) or a pamphlet (i.e. the classic trifold) describing the rules of engagement when doing business with your organization. The RAD can convey expectations, policies, guidelines, and other items. The scope of the document will depend on 1) what you believe is important for the vendors to understand, and 2) any other similar information already provided to the vendors.

    The first step to drafting a RAD is to identify what information vendors need to know to stay on your good side. For example, you may want vendors to know about your gift policy (e.g. employees may not accept gifts from vendors above a nominal value such as a pen or mousepad). Next, compare your list of what vendors need to know and determine if the content is covered in other vendor-facing documents such as a vendor code of conduct or your website’s vendor portal. Lastly, create your RAD to bridge the gap between what you want and what is already in place. In some instances, you may want to include items from other documents to reemphasize them with the vendor community.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The RAD can be used with all vendors regardless of classification category. It can be sent directly to the vendors or given to them during vendor orientation (see Step 3.3)

    2.5.1: Relationship alignment document

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the RAD sample and checklist in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc.
    2. Determine:
      1. Whether you will create one RAD for all vendors or one RAD for strategic vendors and another RAD for tactical and operational vendors; whether you will create a RAD for commodity vendors.
      2. The concepts you want to include in your RAD(s).
      3. The format for your RAD(s) – traditional, pamphlet, or other.
      4. Whether signoff or acknowledgement will be required by the vendors.
    3. Draft your RAD(s) and work with other internal areas such as Marketing to create a consistent brand for the RADS and Legal to ensure consistent use and preservation of trademarks or other intellectual property rights and other legal issues.
    4. Review other vendor-facing documents (e.g. supplier code of conduct, onsite safety and security protocols) for consistencies between them and the RAD(s).
    5. Obtain signoff on the RAD(s) from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Marketing, and others as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Vendor-facing documents, policies, and procedures

    Output

    • Completed relationship alignment document(s)

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Marketing, as needed
    • Legal, as needed

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation; 02 - Reorientation; 03 - Debrief

    Your organization is unique. It may have many similarities with other organizations, but your culture, risk tolerance, mission, vision, and goals, finances, employees, and “customers” (those that depend on you) make it different. The same is true of your VMI. It may have similar principles, objectives, and processes to other organizations’ VMIs, but yours is still unique. As a result, your vendors may not fully understand your organization and what vendor management means to you.

    Vendor orientation is another means to helping you gain and maintain alignment with your important vendors, educate them on what is important to you, and provide closure when/if the relationship with the vendor ends. Vendor orientation is comprised of three components, each with a different function:

    • Orientation
    • Reorientation
    • Debrief

    Vendor orientation focuses on the vendor management pieces of the puzzle (e.g. the scorecard process) rather than the operational pieces (e.g. setting up a new vendor in the system to ensure invoices are processed smoothly).

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation

    Orientation

    Orientation is conceptually similar to new hire orientation for employees at your organization. Generally conducted as a meeting, orientation provides your vendors with the information they need to be successful when working with your organization. Sadly, this is often overlooked by customers; it can take months or years for vendors to figure it out by themselves. By controlling the narrative and condensing the timeline, vendor relationships and performance improve more rapidly.

    A partial list of topics for orientation is set out below:

    • Your organization’s structure
    • Your organization’s culture
    • Your relationship expectations
    • Your governances (VMI and other)
    • Their vendor classification designation (commodity, operational, strategic, or tactical)
    • The scorecard process
    • Business alignment meetings
    • Relationship alignment documents

    In short, this is the first step toward building (or continuing to build) a robust, collaborative, mutually beneficial relationship with your important vendors.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 02 - Reorientation

    Reorientation

    Reorientation is either identical or similar to orientation, depending upon the circumstances. Reorientation occurs for a number of reasons, and each reason will impact the nature and detail of the reorientation content. Reorientation occurs whenever:

    • There is a significant change in the vendor’s products or services.
    • The vendor has been through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.
    • A significant contract renewal/renegotiation has recently occurred.
    • Sufficient time has passed from orientation; commonly 2 to 3 years.
    • The vendor has been placed in a “performance improvement plan” or “relationship improvement plan” protocol.
    • Significant turnover has occurred within your organization (executives, key stakeholders, and/or VMI personnel).
    • Substantial turnover has occurred at the vendor at the executive or account management level.
    • The vendor has changed vendor classification categories after the most current classification.

    As the name implies, the goal is to refamiliarize the vendor with your current VMI situation, governances, protocols, and expectations. The drivers for reorientation will help you determine its scope, scale, and frequency.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 03 - Debrief

    Debrief

    To continue the analogy from orientation, debrief is similar to an exit interview for an employee when their employment is terminated. In this case, debrief occurs when the vendor is no longer an active vendor with your organization – all contracts have terminated or expired, and no new business with the vendor is anticipated within the next three months.

    Similar to orientation and reorientation, debrief activities will be based on the vendor’s classification category within the COST model. Strategic vendors don’t go away very often; usually, they transition to operational or tactical vendors first. However, if a strategic vendor is no longer providing products or services to you, dig a little deeper into their experiences and allocate extra time for the debrief meeting.

    The debrief should provide you with feedback on the vendor’s experience with your organization and their participation in your VMI. In addition, it can provide closure for both parties since the relationship is ending. Be careful that the debrief does not turn into a finger-pointing meeting or therapy session for the vendor. It should be professional and productive; if it is going off the rails, terminate the meeting before more damage can occur.

    End the debrief on a high note if possible. Thank the vendor, highlight its key contributions, and single out any personnel who went above and beyond. You never know when you will be doing business with this vendor again – don’t burn bridges!

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    • As you create your vendor orientation materials, focus on the message you want to convey.
    • For orientation and reorientation:
      • What is important to you that vendors need to know?
      • What will help the vendors understand more about your organization … your VMI?
      • What and how are you different from other organizations overall … in your “industry”?
      • What will help them understand your expectations?
      • What will help them be more successful?
      • What will help you build the relationship?
    • For debrief:
      • What information or feedback do you want to obtain?
      • What information or feedback to you want to give?
    • The level of detail you provide strategic vendors during orientation and reorientation may be different from the information you provide tactical and operational vendors. Commodity vendors are not typically involved in the vendor orientation process. The orientation meetings can be conducted on a one-to-one basis for strategic vendors and a one-to-many basis for operational and tactical vendors; reorientation and debrief are best conducted on a one-to-one basis. Lastly, face-to-face or video meetings work best for vendor orientation; voice-only meetings, recorded videos, or distributing only written materials seldom hit their mark or achieve the desired results.

    2.6.1: Vendor orientation

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation.
      1. Use the orientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your orientation meetings.
      2. Use the reorientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your reorientation meetings.
    2. The selections can be made by classification category (i.e. different items can apply to strategic, operational, and tactical vendors).
    3. Create the materials and seek input and/or approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as needed.
    4. Use the debrief section of the tool to create an agenda, list the questions you want to ask vendors, and list information you want to provide to vendors. The agenda, questions, and information can be segregated by classification category.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Agendas and materials for orientation, reorientation, and debrief

    Materials

    • Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.7: Job descriptions

    Ensure new and existing job descriptions are up to date.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.9, it’s time to start drafting new or modifying existing job descriptions applicable to the VMI team members. Some of the VMI personnel may be dedicated full-time to the VMI, while others may be supporting the VMI on a part-time basis. At a minimum, create or modify your job descriptions based on the categories set out below. Remember to get the internal experts involved so that you stay true to your environment and culture.

    01 Title

    This should align overall with what the person will be doing and what the person will be responsible for. Your hands may be tied with respect to titles, but try to make them intuitively descriptive if possible.

    02 Duties

    This is the main portion of the job description. List the duties, responsibilities, tasks, activities, and results expected. Again, there may be some limitations imposed by your organization, but be as thorough as possible.

    03 Qualifications

    This tends to be a gray area for many organizations, with the qualifications, certifications, and experience desired expressed in “ranges” so that good candidates are not eliminated from consideration unnecessarily.

    2.7.1: Job descriptions

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the VMI structure from Step 1.9.
      1. List the positions that require new job descriptions.
      2. List the positions that require updated job descriptions.
    2. Review the other Phase 1 work product and list the responsibilities, tasks, and functions that need to be incorporated into the new and updated job descriptions.
    3. Review the sample VMI job descriptions and sample VMI job description language in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions, and identify language and concepts you want to include in the new and revised job descriptions.
    4. Using your template, draft the new job descriptions and modify the existing job descriptions to synchronize with the VMI structure. Work with other internal areas such as Human Resources to ensure cultural fit and compliance.
    5. Obtain input and signoff on the job descriptions from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    6. Document your final job descriptions in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Existing job descriptions
    • Work product from Phase 1

    Output

    • Job descriptions for new positions
    • Updated job descriptions for existing positions

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Policies and procedures are often thought of as boring documents that are 1) tedious to create, 2) seldom read after creation, and 3) only used to punish people when they do something “wrong.” However, when done well, these documents:

    • Communicate expectations.
    • Capture institutional knowledge.
    • Provide guidance for decision making.
    • Help workers avoid errors and minimize risk.
    • Ensure regulatory and organizational compliance.
    • List the steps required to achieve consistent results.

    Definitions of Policies and Procedures

    Policies and procedures are essential, but they are often confused with each other. A policy is a rule, guideline, or framework for making decisions. For example, in the vendor management space, you may want a policy indicating your organization’s view on gifts from vendors. A procedure is a set of instructions for completing a task or activity. For example, staying in the vendor management space, you may want a procedure to outline the process for classifying vendors.

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Start With Your Policy/Procedure Template or Create One for Consistency

    When creating policies and procedures, follow your template. If you don’t have one (or want to see if anything is missing from your template) the following list of potential components for your governance documents is provided.* Not every concept is required. Use your judgment and err on the side of caution when drafting; balance readability and helpfulness against over documenting and over complicating.

    • Descriptive Title
    • Policy Number
    • Brief Overview
    • Purpose
    • Scope
    • The Policy or Procedure
    • Definitions
    • Revision Date
    • History
    • Related Documents
    • Keywords

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Although they are not ever going to be compared to page-turning novels, policies and procedures can be improved by following a few basic principles. By following the guidelines set out below, your VMI policies and procedures will contribute to the effectiveness of your initiative.*

    • Use short sentences.
    • Organize topics logically.
    • Use white space liberally.
    • Use mandatory language.
    • Use gender-neutral terms.
    • Write with an active voice.
    • Avoid jargon when possible.
    • Use a consistent “voice” and tone.
    • Use pictures or diagrams when they will help.
    • Write in the same tense throughout the document.
    • Use icons and colors to designate specific elements.
    • Make sure links to other policies and procedures work.
    • Define all acronyms and jargon (when it must be used).
    • Avoid a numbering scheme with more than three levels.

    *Adapted in part from smartsheet.com

    Info-Tech Insight

    Drafting policies and procedures is an iterative process that requires feedback from the organization’s leadership team.

    2.8.1: Policies and procedures

    Several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample policies and procedures topics in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    2. Determine:
      1. The concepts you want to include in your policies and procedures; brainstorm for any additional concepts you want to include.
      2. The format/template for your policies and procedures.
    3. Draft your policies and procedures based on the sample topics and your brainstorming activity. Work with other internal areas such as Legal and Human Resources to ensure cultural and environmental fit within your organization.
    4. Obtain input and signoff on the policies and procedures from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    5. Document your final policies and procedures in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    6. Publish your policies and procedures and conduct training sessions or awareness sessions as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing policies and procedures (if any)
    • Existing policies and procedures template (if any)
    • Scope
    • OIC chart
    • Process maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • VMI policies and procedures

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Legal and Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.9: 3-year roadmap

    Plot your path at a high level.

    The VMI exists in many planes concurrently: 1) it operates both tactically and strategically, and 2) it focuses on different timelines or horizons (e.g. the past, the present, and the future). Creating a 3-year roadmap facilitates the VMI’s ability to function effectively across these multiple landscapes.

    The VMI roadmap will be influenced by many factors. The work product from Phase 1: Plan, input from executives, stakeholders, and internal clients, and the direction of the organization as a whole are great sources of information as you begin to build your roadmap.

    To start, identify what you would like to accomplish in Year 1. This is arguably the easiest year to complete: budgets are set (or you have a good idea what the budget will look like), personnel decisions have been made, resources have been allocated, and other issues impacting the VMI are known with a higher degree of certainty than any other year. This does not mean things won’t change during the first year of the VMI, but expectations are usually lower and the short event horizon makes things more predictable during the Year-1 ramp-up period.

    Years 2 and 3 are more tenuous, but the process is the same: identify what you would like to accomplish or roll out in each year. Typically, the VMI maintains the Year 1 plan into subsequent years and adds to the scope or maturity. For example, you may start Year 1 with BAMs and scorecards for three of your strategic vendors; during Year 2, you may increase that to five vendors; and during Year 3, you may increase that to nine vendors. Or, you may not conduct any market research during Year 1, waiting to add it to your roadmap in Year 2 or 3 as you mature.

    Breaking things down by year helps you identify what is important and the timing associated with your priorities. A conservative approach is recommended. It is easy to overcommit, but the results can be disastrous and painful.

    2.9.1: 3-year roadmap

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate Year 1 of your 3-year roadmap with your existing fiscal year or reporting year. Year 1 may be shorter or longer than a calendar year.
    2. Review the VMI activities listed in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap. Use brainstorming and your prior work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2 to identify additional items for the roadmap and add them at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
    3. Starting with the first activity, determine when that activity will begin and put an X in the corresponding column; if the activity is not applicable, leave it blank or insert N/A.
    4. Go back to the top of the list and add information as needed.
      1. For any Year-1 or Year-2 activities, add an X in the corresponding columns if the activity will be expanded/continued in subsequent periods (e.g. if a Year 2 activity will continue in Year 3, put an X in Year 3 as well).
      2. Use the comments column to provide clarifying remarks or additional insights related to your plans or “X’s.” For example, “Scorecards begin in Year 1 with three vendors and will roll out to five vendors in Year 2 and nine vendors in Year 3.”
    5. Obtain signoff from stakeholders, sponsors, and executives as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.8 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • High level 3-year roadmap for the VMI

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.10: 90-day plan

    Pave your short-term path with a series of detailed quarterly plans.

    Now that you have prepared a 3-year roadmap, it’s time to take the most significant elements from the first year and create action plans for each three-month period. Your first 90-day plan may be longer or shorter if you want to sync to your fiscal or calendar quarters. Aligning with your fiscal year can make it easier for tracking and reporting purposes; however, the more critical item is to make sure you have a rolling series of four 90-day plans to keep you focused on the important activities and tasks throughout the year.

    The 90-day plan is a simple project plan that will help you measure, monitor, and report your progress. Use the Info-Tech tool to help you track:

    • Activities
    • Tasks comprising each activity
    • Who will be performing the tasks
    • An estimate of the time required per person per task
    • An estimate of the total time to achieve the activity
    • A due date for the activity
    • A priority of the activity

    The first 90-day plan will have the greatest level of detail and should be as thorough as possible; the remaining three 90-day plans will each have less detail for now. As you approach the middle of the first 90-day plan, start adding details to the next 90-day plan; toward the end of the first quarter add a high-level 90-day plan to the end of the chain. Continue repeating this cycle each quarter and consult the 3-year roadmap and the leadership team as necessary.

    90 Days

    2.10.1: 90-day plan

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate the first 90-day plan with your existing fiscal year or reporting cycles. Your first plan may be shorter or longer than 90 days.
    2. Looking at the Year 1 section of the 3-year roadmap, identify the activities that will be started during the next 90 days.
    3. Using the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan, enter the following information into the spreadsheet for each activity to be accomplished during the next 90 days:
      1. Activity description
      2. Tasks required to complete the activity (be specific and descriptive)
      3. The people who will be performing each task
      4. The estimated number of hours required to complete each task
      5. The start date and due date for each task or the activity
    4. Validate the tasks are a complete list for each activity and the people performing the tasks have adequate time to complete the tasks by the due date(s).
    5. Assign a priority to each activity.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.9 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Detailed plan for the VMI for the next quarter or 90 days

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.11: Quick wins

    Identify potential short-term successes to gain momentum and show value immediately.

    As the final step in the timeline trilogy, you are ready to identify some quick wins for the VMI. Using the first 90-day plan and a brainstorming activity, create a list of things you can do in 15 to 30 days that add value to your initiative and build momentum.

    As you evaluate your list of potential candidates, look for things that:

    • Are achievable within the stated timeline.
    • Don’t require a lot of effort.
    • Involve stopping a certain process, activity, or task; this is sometimes known as a “stop doing stupid stuff” approach.
    • Will reduce or eliminate inefficiencies; this is sometimes known as the war on waste.
    • Have a moderate to high impact or bolster the VMI’s reputation.

    As you look for quick wins, you may find that everything you identify does not meet the criteria. That’s ok … don’t force the issue. Return your focus to the 90-day plan and 3-year roadmap, and update those documents if the brainstorming activity associated with this Step 2.11 identified anything new.

    2.11.1: Quick wins

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the 3-year roadmap and 90-day plan. Determine if any item on either document can be completed:
      1. Quickly (30 days or less)
      2. With minimal effort
      3. To provide or show moderate to high levels of value or provide the VMI with momentum
    2. Brainstorm to identify any other items that meet the criteria in step 1 above.
    3. Compile a comprehensive list of these items and select up to five to pursue.
    4. Document the list in the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins.
    5. Manage the quick wins list and share the results with the VMI team and applicable stakeholders and executives.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • 90-day plan
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • A list of activities that require low levels of effort to achieve moderate to high levels of value in a short period

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.12: Reports

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Issuing reports is a critical piece of the VMI since the VMI is a conduit of information for the organization. It may be aggregating risk data from internal areas, conducting vendor research, compiling performance data, reviewing market intelligence, or obtaining relevant statistics, feedback, comments, facts, and figures from other sources. Holding onto this information minimizes the impact a VMI can have on the organization; however, the VMI’s internal clients, stakeholders, and executives can drown in raw data and ignore it completely if it is not transformed into meaningful, easily-digested information.

    Before building a report, think about your intended audience:

    • What information are they looking for … what will help them understand the big picture?
    • What level of detail is appropriate, keeping in mind the audience may not be like-minded?
    • What items are universal to all of the readers and what items are of interest to one or two readers?
    • How easy or hard will it be to collect the data … who will be providing it, how time consuming will it be?
    • How accurate, valid, and timely will the data be?
    • How frequently will each report need to be issued?

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Use the following guidelines to create reports that will resonate with your audience:

    • Value information over data, but sometimes data does have a place in your report.
    • Use pictures, graphics, and other representations more than words, but words are often necessary in small, concise doses.
    • Segregate your report by user; for example, general information up top, CIO information below that on the right, CFO information to the left of CIO information, etc.
    • Send a draft report to the internal audience and seek feedback, keeping in mind you won’t be able to cater to or please everyone.

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    The report’s formatting and content display can make or break your reports.*

    • Make the report look inviting and easy to read. Use:
      • Short paragraphs and bullet points.
      • A simple layout and uncluttered, wide margins.
      • Minimal boldface, underline, or italics to attract the readers’ attention.
      • High contrast between text and background.
    • Charts, graphs, and infographics should be intuitive and tell the story on their own.
    • Make it easy to peruse the report for topics of interest.
      • Maintain consistent design features.
      • Use impactful, meaningful headings and subheadings.
      • Include callouts to draw attention to important high-level information.
    • Demonstrate the impact of the accomplishments or success stories when appropriate.
    • Finish with a simple concise summary when appropriate. Consider adding:
      • Key points for the reader to takeaway.
      • Action items or requests.
      • Plans for next reporting period.

    *Sources: Adapted and compiled in part from: designeclectic.com, ahrq.gov, and 60secondmarketer.com.

    2.12.1: Reports

    15-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the applicable work product from Phases 1 and 2; identify qualitative and quantitative items the VMI measures, monitors, tracks, or aggregates.
    2. Determine which items will be reported and to whom (by category):
      1. Internally to personnel within the VMI
      2. Internally to personnel outside the VMI
      3. Externally to vendors
    3. Within each category above, determine your intended audiences/recipients. For example, you may have a different list of recipients for a risk report than you do a scorecard summary report. This will help you identify the number of reports required.
    4. Create a draft structure for each report based on the audience and the information being conveyed. Determine the frequency of each report and person responsible for creating for each report.
    5. Document your final choices in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.11 work product

    Output

    • A list of reports used by the VMI
    • For each report:
    • The conceptual content
    • A list of who will receive or have access
    • A creation/distribution frequency

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement Your Processes and Leverage Your Tools and Templates

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates.

    All of the hard work invested in Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build begins to pay off in Phase 3: Run. It’s time to stand up your VMI and ensure that the proper level of resources is devoted to your vendors and the VMI itself. There’s more hard work ahead, but the foundational elements are in place. This doesn’t mean there won’t be adjustments and modifications along the way, but you are ready to use the tools and templates in the real world; you are ready to begin reaping the fruits of your labor.

    Phase 3: Run guides you through the process of collecting data, monitoring trends, issuing reports, and conducting effective meetings to:

    • Manage risk better.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Improve vendor relationships.
    • Identify areas where the parties can improve.
    • Improve communication between the parties.
    • Increase the value proposition with your vendors.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors

    Begin classifying your top 25 vendors by spend.

    Step 3.1 sets the table for many of the subsequent steps in Phase 3: Run. The results of your classification process will determine: which vendors go through the scorecarding process (Step 3.4); which vendors participate in BAMs (Step 3.5); the nature and content of the vendor orientation activities (Step 3.3); which vendors will be part of the risk measurement and monitoring process (Step 3.8); which vendors will be included in the reports issued by the VMI (Step 3.9); and which vendors you will devote relationship-building resources to (Step 3.10).

    As you begin classifying your vendors, Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the classification model you configured in Step 2.1.

    1. Using the information from the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7), identify your top 25 vendors by spend.
    2. Run your top 10 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results.
      1. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, go to next page.
      2. If the results are not what you expected or contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (Tab 1) and adjust the weights or the spend categories slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprising based on bias. If you modify the weighting, review the new results and repeat your evaluation. If you modify the spend categories, review the answers on the vendor tabs to ensure that the answers are still accurate; review the new results and repeat your evaluation.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Review your results and adjust the classification tool as needed.

    1. Run your top 11 through 25 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results. Identify any unexpected results or surprises. Determine if further configuration makes sense and repeat the process outlined in 2.b, previous page, as necessary. If no further modifications are required, continue to 4, below.
    2. Share the preliminary results with the leadership team, executives, and stakeholders to obtain their approval or adjustments to the results.
      1. They may have questions and want to understand the process before approving the results.
      2. They may request that you move a vendor from one quadrant to another based on your organization’s roadmap, the vendor’s roadmap, or other information not available to you.
    3. Identify the vendors that will be part of the VMI at this stage – how many and which ones. Based on this number and the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2), make sure you have the resources necessary to accommodate the number of vendors participating in the VMI. Proceed cautiously and gradually increase the number of vendors participating in the VMI.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Finalize the results and update VMI tools and templates.

    1. Update the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7) to indicate the current classification status for the top 25 vendors by spend. Once your vendors have been classified, you can sort the Vendor Inventory tab by classification status to see all the vendors in that category at once.
    2. Review your 3-year roadmap (Step 2.9) and 90-day plans (Step 2.10) to determine if any modifications are needed to the activities and timelines.

    Additional classification considerations:

    • You should only have a few vendors that fit in the strategic category. As a rough guideline, no more than 5% to 10% of your IT vendors should end up in the strategic category. If you have a large number of vendors, even 5% may be too many. The classification model is an objective start to the classification process, but common sense must prevail over the “math” at the end of the day.
    • At this point, there is no need to go beyond the top 25 by spend. Most VMIs starting out can’t handle more than three to five strategic vendors initially. Allow the VMI to run a pilot program with a small sample size, work out any bugs, make adjustments, and then ramp up the VMI’s rollout in waves. Vendors can be added quarterly, biannually, or annually, depending upon the desired goals and available resources.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Align your vendor strategy to your classification results.

    As your VMI matures, additional vendors will be part of the VMI. Review the table below and incorporate the applicable strategies into your deployment of vendor management principles over time. Stay true to your mission, goals, and scope, and remember that not all of your vendors are of equal importance.

    Operational Strategic
    • Focus on spend containment
    • Concentrate on lowering total cost of ownership
    • Invest moderately in cultivating the relationship
    • Conduct BAMs biannually or annually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly or biannually
    • Identify areas for performance and cost improvement
    • Focus on value, collaboration, and alignment
    • Review market intelligence for the vendor’s industry
    • Invest significantly in cultivating the relationship
    • Initiate executive-to-executive relationships
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Understand how the vendors view your organization

    Commodity

    Tactical

    • Investigate vendor rationalization and consolidation
    • Negotiate for the best-possible price
    • Leverage competition during negotiations
    • Streamline the purchasing and payment process
    • Allocate minimal VMI resources
    • Assign the lowest priority for vendor management metrics
    • Conduct risk assessments biannually or annually
    • Cultivate a collaborative relationship based on future growth plans or potential with the vendor
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly or biannually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Identify areas of performance improvement
    • Leverage innovation and creative problem solving

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Be careful when using the word “partner” with your strategic and other vendors.

    For decades, vendors have used the term “partner” to refer to the relationship they have with their clients and customers. In many regards, this is often an emotional ploy used by the vendors to get the upper hand. To fully understand the terms “partner” and “partnership” let’s evaluate them through two more-objective, less-cynical lenses.

    If you were to talk to your in-house or outside legal counsel, you may be told that partners share in profits and losses, and they have a fiduciary obligation to each other. Unless there is a joint venture between the parties, you are unlikely to have a partnership with a vendor from this perspective.

    What about a “business” partnership … one that doesn’t involve sharing profits and losses? What would that look like? Here are some indicators of a business partnership (or preferably a strategic alliance):

    • Trust and transparent communication exist.
    • You have input into the vendor’s roadmap for products and services.
    • The vendor is aligned with your desired outcomes and helps you achieve success.
    • You and the vendor are accountable for actions and inactions, with both parties being at risk.
    • There is parity in the peer-to-peer relationships between the organizations (e.g. C-Level to C-Level).
    • The vendor provides transparency in pricing models and proactively suggests ways for you to reduce costs.
    • You and the vendor work together to make each party better, providing constructive feedback on a regular basis.
    • The vendor provides innovative suggestions for you to improve your processes, performance, the bottom line, etc.
    • Negotiations are not one-sided; they are meaningful and productive, resulting in an equitable distribution of money and risk.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Understand the implications and how to leverage the words “partner” and “partnership.”

    By now you might be thinking, “What’s all the fuss? Why does it matter?” At Info-Tech, we’ve seen firsthand how referring to the vendor as a partner can have the following impact:

    • Confidences are disclosed unnecessarily.
    • Negotiation opportunities and leverage are lost.
    • Vendors no longer have to earn the customer’s business.
    • Vendor accountability is missing due to shared responsibilities.
    • Competent skilled vendor resources are assigned to other accounts.
    • Value erodes over time since contracts are renewed without being competitively sourced.
    • One-sided relationships are established, and false assurances are provided at the highest levels within the customer organization.

    Proceed with caution when using partner or partnership with your vendors. Understand how your organization benefits from using these terms and mitigate the negatives outlined above by raising awareness internally to ensure people understand the psychology behind the terms. Finally, use the term to your advantage when warranted by referring to the vendor as a partner when you want or need something that the vendor is reluctant to provide. Bottom line: Be strategic in how you refer to vendors and know the risks.

    Step 3.2: Conduct internal “kickoff” meeting

    Raise awareness about the VMI and its mission, vision, and goals.

    To be effective, your VMI needs executive support, a clear vision, appropriate governances and tools, personnel with the right skills, and other items discussed in this blueprint. However, the VMI doesn’t exist in a vacuum … it can’t sit back and be reactive. As part of being proactive, the VMI must be aware of its brand and “market” its services. An effective way to market the VMI is to conduct an internal kickoff meeting. There are at least a couple of ways to do this:

    • Host a meeting for stakeholders, executives, and others who will be contributing to the VMI processes (but are not part of the VMI). The meeting can be part of a townhall or standalone meeting; it can be done live or via a recorded video.
    • Attend appropriate staff meetings and make your presentation.

    With either approach above or one of your choosing, keep in mind the following objectives for your kickoff meeting:

    • Make sure you provide a way for those in attendance to ask questions at that time and later. You want to create and foster a communication loop with the people who will be impacted by the VMI or participating with it.
    • Raise awareness of your existence and personnel. Tell the VMI’s story by sharing your mission statement, goals, and scope; this will help dispel (or confirm) rumors about the VMI that often lead to confusion and faulty assumptions.
    • As you share the VMI’s vision, connect the story to how the VMI will impact the organization and individuals and to how they can help. The VMI tends to be the least autonomous area within an organization; it needs the assistance of others to be successful. Convey an atmosphere of collaboration and appreciation for their help.

    Host a kickoff meeting annually to kickoff the new year. Remind people of your story, announce successes from the past year, and indicate what the future year holds. Keep it brief, make it personal for the audience, and help them connect the names of VMI personnel to faces.

    Step 3.3: Conduct vendor orientation

    Introduce your VMI to your top vendors.

    Based on the results from your vendor classification (Step 3.1) and your VMI deployment timeline, identify the vendors who will participate in the initial orientation meetings. Treat the orientation as a formal, required meeting for the vendors to attend. Determine the attendee list for your organization and the vendors, and send out invites. Ideally, you will want the account manager, a sales director or vice president, the “delivery” director or vice president, and an executive from the vendor in the meeting. From the customer side, you may need more than one or two people from the VMI to entice the vendor’s leadership team to attend; you may need attendance from your own leadership team to add weight or credibility to the meeting (unfortunately).

    Before going into the meeting, make sure everyone on your side knows their roles and responsibilities, and review the agenda. Control the agenda or the meeting is likely to get out of hand and turn into a sales call.

    Conduct orientation meetings even if the participating vendors have been doing business with you for several years. Don’t assume they know all about your organization and your VMI (even if their other clients have a VMI).

    Run two or three orientation meetings and then review the “results.” What needs to be modified? What lessons have you learned? Make any necessary adjustments and continue rolling out the orientation meetings.

    Early in the VMI’s deployment, reorientation and debrief may not be in play. As time passes, it is important to remember them! Use them when warranted to help with vendor alignment.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards

    Begin scoring your top vendors.

    The scorecard process typically is owned and operated by the VMI, but the actual rating of the criteria within the measurement categories is conducted by those with day-to-day interactions with the vendors, those using or impacted by the services and products provided by the vendors, and those with the skills to research other information on the scorecard (e.g. risk). Chances are one person will not be able to complete an entire scorecard by themselves. As a result, the scorecard process is a team sport comprising sub-teams where necessary.

    The VMI will compile the scores, calculate the final results, and aggregate all of the comments into one scorecard. There are two common ways to approach this task:

    1. Send out the scorecard template to those who will be scoring the vendor and ask them to return it when completed, providing them with a due date a few days before you actually need it; you’ll need time to compile, calculate, and aggregate.
    2. Invite those who will be scoring the vendor to a meeting and let the contributors use that time to score the vendors; make VMI team members available to answer questions and facilitate the process.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards (cont.)

    Gather input from stakeholders and others impacted by the vendors.

    Since multiple people will be involved in the scorecarding process or have information to contribute, the VMI will have to work with the reviewers to ensure that the right mix of data is provided. For example:

    • If you are tracking lawsuits filed by or against the vendor, one person from Legal may be able to provide that, but they may not be able to evaluate any other criteria on the scorecard.
    • If you are tracking salesperson competencies, multiple people from multiple areas may have valuable insights.
    • If you are tracking deliverable timeliness, several project managers may want to contribute across several projects.

    Where one person is contributing exclusively to limited criteria, make it easy for the person to identify the criteria they are to evaluate. When multiple people from the same functional area will provide insights, they can contribute individually (and the VMI will average their responses) or they can respond collectively after reaching consensus among themselves.

    After the VMI has compiled, calculated, and aggregated, share the results with executives, impacted stakeholders, and others who will be attending the BAM for that vendor. Depending upon the comments provided by internal personnel, you may need to create a sanitized version of the scorecard for the vendor.

    Make sure your process timeline has a buffer built in. You’ll be sending the final scorecard to the vendor three to five days before the BAM, and you’ll need some time to assemble the results. The scorecarding process can be perceived as a low-priority activity for people outside of the VMI, and other “priorities” will arise for them. Without a timeline buffer, the VMI may find itself behind schedule and unprepared due to things beyond its control.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings

    Determine which vendors will participate and how long the meetings will last.

    At their core, BAMs aren’t that different from any other meeting. The basics of running a meeting still apply, but there are a few nuances that apply to BAMs Set out below are leading practices for conducing your BAMs; adapt them to meet your needs and suit your environment.

    Who

    Initially, BAMs are conducted with the strategic vendors in your pilot program. Over time, you’ll add vendors until all of your strategic vendors are meeting with you quarterly. After that, roll out the BAMs to those tactical and operational vendors located close to the strategic quadrant in the classification model (Steps 2.1 and 3.1) and as VMI resources allow. It may take several years before you are holding regular BAMs with all of your strategic, tactical, and operational vendors.

    Duration

    Keep the length of your meetings reasonable. The first few with a vendor may need to be 60 to 90 minutes long. After that, you should be able to trim them to 45 to 60 minutes. The BAM does not have to fill the entire time. When you are done, you are done.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Identify who will be invited and send out invitations.

    Invitations

    Set up a recurring meeting whenever possible. Changes will be inevitable, but keeping the timeline regular works to your advantage. Also, the vendors included in your initial BAMs won’t change for twelve months. For the first BAM with a vendor, provide adequate notice; four weeks is sufficient in most instances, but calendars will fill up quickly for the main attendees from the vendor. Treat the meeting as significant and make sure your invitation reflects this. A simple meeting request will often be rejected, treated as optional, or ignored completely by the vendor’s leadership team (and maybe yours as well!).

    Invitees

    Internal invitees should include those with a vested interest in the vendor’s performance and the relationship. In addition, other functional areas may be invited based on need or interest. Be careful the attendee list doesn’t get too big. Based on this, internal BAM attendees often include representatives from IT, Sourcing/Procurement, and the applicable business units. At times, Finance and Legal are included.

    From the vendor’s side, strive to have decision makers and key leaders attend. The salesperson/account manager is often included for continuity, but a director or vice president of sales will have more insights and influence. The project manager is not needed at this meeting due to the nature of the meeting and its agenda; however, a director or vice president from the “product or service delivery” area is a good choice. Bottom line: get as high into the vendor’s organization as possible whenever possible; look at the types of contracts you have with that vendor to provide guidance on the type of people to invite.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Prepare for the meetings and maintain control.

    Preparation

    Send the scorecard and agenda to the vendor five days prior to the BAM. The vendor should provide you with any information you require for the meeting five days prior as well.

    Decide who will run the meeting. Some customers like to lead and others let the vendor present. How you craft the agenda and your preferences will dictate who runs the show.

    Make sure the vendor knows what materials it should bring to the meeting or have access to. This will relate to the agenda and any specific requests listed under the discussion points. You don’t want the vendor to be caught off guard and unable to discuss a matter of importance to you.

    Running the BAM

    Regardless of which party leads, make sure you manage the agenda to stay on topic. This is your meeting – not the vendor’s, not IT’s, not Procurement’s or Sourcing’s. Don’t let anyone hijack it.

    Make sure someone is taking notes. If you are running this virtually, consider recording the meeting. Check with your legal department first for any concerns, notices, or prohibitions that may impact your recording the session.

    As a reminder, this is not a sales call, and this is not a social activity. Innovation discussions are allowed and encouraged, but that can quickly devolve into a sales presentation. People can be friendly toward one another, but the relationship building should not overwhelm the other purposes.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Follow these additional guidelines to maximize your meetings.

    More Leading Practices

    • Remind everyone that the conversation may include items covered by various confidentiality provisions or agreements.
    • Publish the meeting minutes on a timely basis (within 48 hours).
    • Focus on the bigger picture by looking at trends over time; get into the details only when warranted.
    • Meet internally immediately beforehand to prepare – don’t go in cold; review the agenda and the roles and responsibilities for the attendees.
    • Physical meetings are better than virtual meetings, but travel constraints, budgets, and pandemics may not allow for physical meetings.

    Final Thoughts

    • When performance or the relationship is suffering, be constructive in your feedback and conversations rather than trying to assign blame; lead with the carrot rather than the stick.
    • Look for collaborative solutions whenever possible and avoid referencing the contract if possible. Communicate your willingness to help resolve outstanding issues.
    • Use inclusive language and avoid language that puts the vendor on the defensive.
    • Make sure that your meetings are not focused exclusively on the negative, but don’t paint a rosy picture where one doesn’t exist.
    • A vendor that is doing well should be commended. This is an important part of relationship building.

    Step 3.6: Work the 90-day plan

    Monitor your progress and share your results.

    Having a 90-day plan is a good start, but assuming the tasks on the plan will be accomplished magically or without any oversight can lead to failure. While it won’t take a lot of time to work the plan, following a few basic guidelines will help ensure the 90-day plan gets results and wasn’t created in vain.

    90-Day Plan: Activity 1; Activity 2; Activity 3; Activity 4; Activity 5
    1. Measure and track your progress against the initial/current 90-day plan at least weekly; with a short timeline, any delay can have a huge impact.
    2. If adjustments are needed to any elements of the plan, understand the cause and the impact of those adjustments before making them.
    3. Make adjustments ONLY when warranted. The temptation will be to push activities and tasks further out on the timeline (or to the next 90-day plan!) when there is any sort of “hiccup” along the way, especially when personnel outside the VMI are involved. Hold true to the timeline whenever possible; once you start slipping, it often becomes a habit.
    4. Report on progress every week and hold people accountable for their assignments and contributions.
    5. Take the 90-day plan seriously and treat it as you would any significant project – this is part of the VMI’s branding and image.

    Step 3.7: Manage the 3-year roadmap

    Keep an eye on the future since it will feed the present.

    The 3-year roadmap is a great planning tool, but it is not 100% reliable. There are inherent flaws and challenges. Essentially, the roadmap is a set of three “crystal balls” attempting to tell you what the future holds. The vision for Year 1 may be fairly clear, but for each subsequent year, the crystal ball becomes foggier. In addition, the timeline is constantly changing; before you know it, tomorrow becomes today and Year 2 becomes Year 1.

    To help navigate through the roadmap and maximize its potential, follow these principles:

    • Manage each year of the roadmap differently.
      • Review the Year 1 map each quarter to update your 90-day plans (See steps 2.10 and 3.6).
      • Review the Year 2 map every six months to determine if any changes are necessary. As you cycle through this, your vantage point of Year 2 will be 6 months or 12 months away from the beginning of Year 2, and time moves quickly.
      • Review the Year 3 map annually, and determine what needs to be added, changed, or deleted. Each time you review Year 3, it will be a “new” Year 3 that needs to be built.
    • Analyze the impact on the proposed modifications from two perspectives: 1) What is the impact if a requested modification is made? 2) What is the impact if a requested modification is not made?
    • Validate all modifications with leadership and stakeholders before updating the 3-year roadmap to ensure internal alignment.

    Step 3.8: Measure and monitor risk

    Understand and manage risk levels.

    Using the configured Vendor Risk Assessment Tool (Step 2.2), confirm which risks you will be measuring and monitoring and identify the vendors that will be part of the initial risk management process. Generally, organizations start measuring and monitoring risk in two to five risk categories for two or three strategic vendors. Over time, additional risk categories and/or vendors can be added in waves. Resist the temptation to add risk categories or vendors into the mix too quickly. Expanding requires resources inside and outside of the VMI.

    The VMI will rely heavily on other areas to provide input or the risk data, and the VMI needs to establish good working relationships with those areas. For example, if legal risk is something being measured and monitored, the VMI will need data from Legal on the number and nature of any lawsuits filed by or against the applicable vendors; the VMI will need data from Legal, Contract Management, or Procurement/Sourcing on the number and nature of any agreed upon deviations from your organization’s preferred contract terms that increase legal risk.

    With respect to risk, the VMI’s main role is threefold: 1) take the data obtained from others (or in some instances the VMI may have the data) and turn it into useful information, 2) monitor the risk categories over time and periodically issue reports, and 3) work with other areas to manage the risk.

    Step 3.9: Issue reports

    Inform internal personnel and vendors about trends, issues, progress, and results.

    Issuing the reports created in Step 2.12 is one of the main ways the VMI 1) will communicate with internal and external personnel and 2) track trends and information over time. Even with input from the potential reviewers of the reports, you’ll still want to seek their feedback and input periodically. It may take a few iterations until the reports are hitting their mark. You may find that a metric is no longer required, that a metric is missing completely or it is missing a component, or a formatting change would improve the report’s readability. Once a report has been “finalized,” try not to change it until you are engaged in Phase 4: Review activities. It can be unsettling for the reviewers when reports change constantly.

    Whenever possible, find ways to automate the reports. While issuing reports is critical, the function should not consume more time than necessary. Automation can remove some of the manual and repetitive tasks.

    Internal reports may need to be kept confidential. An automated dashboard or reporting tool can help lock down who has access to the information. At a minimum, the internal reports should contain a “Confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

    Reports for vendors may not need to be sent as often as reports are generated or prepared for internal personnel. Establish a cadence by classification model category and stick to it. Letting each vendor choose the frequency will make it more difficult for you to manage. The vendors can choose to ignore the report if they so choose.

    This is an image of an example of a bar graph showing ROI and Benchmark for Categories 1-6

    Step 3.10: Develop/improve vendor relationships

    Drive better performance through better relationships.

    One of the key components of a VMI is relationship management. Good relationships with your vendors provide many benefits for both parties, but they don’t happen by accident. Do not assume the relationship will be good or is good merely because your organization is buying products and services from a vendor.

    In many respects, the VMI should mirror a vendor’s sales organization by establishing relationships at multiple levels within the vendor organizations – not just with the salesperson or account manager. Building and maintaining relationships is hard work, but the return on investment makes it worthwhile.

    Business relationships are comprised of many components, not all of which have to be present to have a great relationship. However, there are some essential components. Whether you are trying to develop, improve, or maintain a relationship with a vendor, make sure you are conscious of the following:*

    • Focus your energies on strategic vendors first and then tactical and operational vendors.
    • Be transparent and honest in your communications.
    • Continue building trust by being responsive and honoring commitments (timely).
    • Create a collaborative environment and build upon common ground.
    • Thank the vendor when appropriate.
    • Resolve disputes early, avoid the “blame game,” and be objective when there are disagreements.

    Step 3.11: Contribute to other processes

    Continue assisting others and managing roles and responsibilities outside of the VMI.

    The VMI has processes that it owns and processes that it contributes to. Based on the VMI scope (Step 1.2), the OIC chart (Step 1.4), and the process mapping activities (Step 1.5), ensure that the VMI is honoring its contribution commitments. This is often easier said than done though. A number of factors can make it difficult to achieve the balance required to handle VMI processes and contribute to other processes associated with the VMI’s mission and vision. Understanding the issues is half the battle. If you see signs of these common “vampires,” take action quickly to address the situation.

    • The VMI’s first focus is often internal, and the tendency is to operate in a bubble. Classifying vendors, running BAMs, coordinating the risk process, and other inward-facing processes can consume all of the VMI’s energy. As a result, there is little time, effort, or let’s be honest, desire to participate in other processes outside of the VMI.
    • It is easy for VMI personnel to get dragged into processes and situations that are outside of its scope. This often happens when personnel join the VMI from other internal areas or departments and have good relationships with their former teammates. The relationships make it hard to say “No” when out-of-scope assistance is being requested.
    • The VMI may have “part-time” personnel who have responsibilities across internal departments, divisions, agencies, or teams. When the going gets tough and time is at a premium, people gravitate toward the easiest or most comfortable work. That work may not be VMI work.

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep Your VMI Up to Date and Running Smoothly

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly.

    As the old adage says, “The only thing constant in life is change.” This is particularly true for your VMI. It will continue to mature; people inside and outside of the VMI will change; resources will expand or contract from year to year; your vendor base will change. As a result, your VMI needs the equivalent of a physical every year. In place of bloodwork, x-rays, and the other paces your physician may put you through, you’ll assess compliance with your policies and procedures, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Be thorough in your actions during this Phase to get the most out of it. It requires more than the equivalent of gauging a person’s health by taking their temperature, measuring their blood pressure, and determining their body mass index. Keeping your VMI up to date and running smoothly takes hard work.

    Some of the items presented in this Phase require an annual review; others may require quarterly review or timely review (i.e. when things are top of mind and current). For example, collecting lessons learned should happen on a timely basis rather than annually, and classifying your vendors should occur annually rather than every time a new vendor enters the fold.

    Ultimately, the goal is to improve over time and stay aligned with other areas internally. This won’t happen by accident. Being proactive in the review of your VMI further reinforces the nature of the VMI itself – proactive vendor management, NOT reactive!

    Step 4.1: Assess compliance

    Determine what is functionally going well and not going well.

    Whether you have a robust set of vendor management-related policies and procedures or they are the bare minimum, gathering data each quarter and conducting an assessment each year will provide valuable feedback. The scope of your assessment should focus on two concepts: 1) are the policies and procedures being followed and 2) are the policies and procedures accurate and relevant. This approach requires parallel thinking, but it will help you understand the complete picture and minimize the amount of time required.

    Use the steps listed below (or modify them for your culture) to conduct your assessment:

    • Determine the type of assessment – formal or informal.
    • Determine the scale of the assessment – which policies and procedures will be reviewed and how many people will be interviewed.
    • Determine the compliance levels, and seek feedback on the policies and procedures – what is going well and what can be improved?
    • Review the compliance deviations.
    • Conduct a root cause analysis for the deviations.
    • Create a list of improvements and gain approval.
    • Create a plan for minimizing noncompliance in the future.
      • Improve/increase education and awareness.
      • Clarify/modify policies and procedures.
      • Add resources, tools, and people (as necessary and as allowed).

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices

    Identify and evaluate what external VMIs are doing.

    The VMI’s world is constantly shifting and evolving. Some changes will take place slowly, while others will occur quickly. Think about how quickly the cloud environment has changed over the past five years versus the 15 years before that; or think about issues that have popped up and instantly altered the landscape (we’re looking at you COVID-19 and ransomware). As a result, the VMI needs to keep pace, and one of the best ways to do that is to incorporate leading practices.

    At a high level, a leading practice is a way of doing something that is better at producing a particular outcome or result or performing a task or activity than other ways of proceeding. The leading practice can be based on methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, and other items. Leading practices change periodically due to innovation, new ways of thinking, research, and other factors. Consequently, a leading practice is to identify and evaluate leading practices each year.

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices (cont.)

    Update your VMI based on your research.

    • A simple approach for incorporating leading practices into your regular review process is set out below:
    • Research:
      • What other VMIs in your industry are doing.
      • What other VMIs outside your industry are doing.
      • Vendor management in general.
    • Based on your results, list specific leading practices others are doing that would improve your VMI (be specific – e.g. other VMIs are incorporating risk into their classification process).
    • Evaluate your list to determine which of these potential changes fit or could be modified to fit your culture and environment.
    • Recommend the proposed changes to leadership (with a short business case or explanation/justification, as needed) and gain approval.

    Remember: Leading practices or best practices may not be what is best for you. In some instances, you will have to modify them to fit your culture and environment; in other instances, you will elect not to implement them at all (in any form).

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned

    Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members.

    There are many ways to keep your VMI running smoothly, and creating a lessons learned library is a great complement to the other ways covered in this Phase 4: Review. By tapping into the collective wisdom of the team and creating a safe feedback loop, the VMI gains the following benefits:

    • Documented institutional wisdom and knowledge normally found only in the team members’ brains.
    • The ability for one team member to gain insights and avoid mistakes without having to duplicate the events leading to the insights or mistakes.
    • Improved methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, skills, and relationships.

    Many of the processes raised in this Phase can be performed annually, but a lessons learned library works best when the information is “deposited” in a timely manner. How you choose to set up your lessons learned process will depend on the tools you select and your culture. You may want to have regular “input” meetings to share the lessons as they are being deposited, or you may require team members to deposit lessons learned on a regular basis (within a week after they happen, monthly, or quarterly). Waiting too long can lead to vague or lost memories and specifics – timeliness of the deposits is a crucial element.

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned (cont.)

    Create a library to share valuable information across the team.

    Lessons learned are not confined to identifying mistakes or dissecting bad outcomes. You want to reinforce good outcomes as well. When an opportunity for a lessons-learned deposit arises, identify the following basic elements:

    • A brief description of the situation and outcome.
    • What went well (if anything) and why did it go well?
    • What didn't go well (if anything) and why didn't it go well?
    • What would/could you do differently next time?
    • A synopsis of the lesson(s) learned.

    Info-Tech Insights

    The lessons learned library needs to be maintained. Irrelevant material needs to be culled periodically, and older or duplicate material may need to be archived.

    The lessons learned process should be blameless. The goal is to share insightful information … not to reward or punish people based on outcomes or results.

    Step 4.4: Maintain internal alignment

    Review the plans of other internal areas to stay in sync.

    Maintaining internal alignment is essential for the ongoing success of the VMI. Over time, it is easy to lose sight of the fact that the VMI does not operate in a vacuum; it is an integral component of a larger organization whose parts must work well together to function optimally. Focusing annually on the VMI’s alignment within the enterprise helps reduce any breakdowns that could derail the organization.

    To ensure internal alignment:

    • Review the key components of the applicable materials from Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build with the appropriate members of the leadership team (e.g. executives, sponsors, and stakeholders). Not every item from those Phases and Steps needs to be reviewed, but err on the side of caution for the first set of alignment discussions, and be prepared to review each item. You can gauge the audience’s interest on each topic and move quickly when necessary or dive deeper when needed. Identify potential changes required to maintain alignment.
    • Review the strategic plans (e.g. 1-, 3-, and 5- year plans) for various portions of the organization if you have access to them or gather insights if you don’t have access.
      • If the VMI is under the IT umbrella, review the strategic plans for IT and its departments.
      • Review the strategic plans for the areas the VMI works with (e.g. Procurement, Business Units).
      • The organization itself.
    • Create and vet a list of modifications to the VMI and obtain approval.
    • Develop a plan for making the necessary changes.

    Step 4.5: Update governances

    Revise your protocols and return to the beginning of cyclical processes.

    You’re at the final Step and ready to update governances. This is comprised of two sequential paths.

    • First, use the information from Steps 4.1-4.4 to make any required modifications to the items in Phase 1: Plan, Phase 2: Build, and Phase 3: Run. For example, you may need to update your policies and procedures (Step 2.8) based on your findings in Step 4.1; or you may need to update the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2) to ensure internal alignment issues identified in Step 4.4. are accounted for.
    • Second, return to Phase 3: Run to perform the activities below; they tend to be performed annually, but use your discretion and perform them on an as-needed basis:
      • Reclassify vendors.
      • Complete a new maturity assessment.
      • Run reorientation sessions for vendors.
      • Conduct a kickoff meeting to update internal personnel.

    Other activities and tasks (e.g. scorecards and BAMs) may be impacted by the modifications made above, but the nature of their performance follows a shorter cadence. As a result, they are not specifically called out here in this Step 4.5 since they are performed on an ongoing basis. However, don’t overlook them as part of your update.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Vendor management is a broad, often overwhelming, comprehensive spectrum that encompasses many disciplines. By now, you should have a great idea of what vendor management can or will look like in your organization. Focus on the basics first: Why does the VMI exist and what does it hope to achieve? What is its scope? What are the strengths you can leverage, and what obstacles must you manage? How will the VMI work with others? From there, the spectrum of vendor management will begin to clarify and narrow.

    Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your needs. They will help you concentrate your energies in the right areas and on the right vendors to maximize the return on your organization’s investment in the VMI of time, money, personnel, and other resources. You may have to lead by example internally and with your vendors at first, but they will eventually join you on your path if you stay true to your course.

    At the heart of a good VMI is the relationship component. Don’t overlook its value in helping you achieve your vendor management goals. The VMI does not operate in a vacuum, and relationships (internal and external) will be critical.

    Lastly, seek continual improvement from the VMI and from your vendors. Both parties should be held accountable, and both parties should work together to get better. Be proactive in your efforts, and you, the VMI, and the organization will be rewarded.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    Don't leave negotiation preparations and outcomes to chance. Learn how to prepare for negotiations more effectively and improve your results.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Info-Tech’s guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of contract review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

    Bibliography

    “Best Practices for Writing Corporate Policies and Procedures.” PowerDMS, 29 Dec. 2020. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    Duncan. “Top 10 Tips for Creating Compelling Reports.” Design Eclectic, 11 October 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Eby, Kate. “Master Writing Policies, Procedures, Processes, and Work Instructions.” 1 June 2018, updated 19 July 2021. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    “Enterprise Risk Management.” Protiviti, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2017.

    Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2019.

    Guth, Stephen. “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More).” Citizens, 26 Feb. 2015. Web.

    Guth, Stephen. The Vendor Management Office: Unleashing the Power of Strategic Sourcing. Lulu.com, 2007. Print.

    “ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.

    “Six Tips for Making a Quality Report Appealing and Easy To Skim.” AHRQ, Oct. 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Tucker, Davis. “Marketing Reporting: Tips to Create Compelling Reports.” 60 Second Marketer, 28 March 2020. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    “Why Do We Perform Better When Someone Has High Expectations of Us?” The Decision Lab, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 31 January 2022.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}234|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,716 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Contract reviews are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Vendors have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and often biased in their favor.
    • Vendors change their contracts frequently through hyperlinked documents without notifying customers, and the onus is on you to stay compliant.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Align contract language to meet IT and business needs.
    • Communicate more effectively with Legal and the vendors.
    • Identify and reduce contractual and performance risk.
    • Understand the relationship between contract provisions.
    • Negotiate more effectively.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should employ a systematic process for reviewing contracts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess contract terms and conditions

    Review and assess your IT contracts for vendor-biased terms and conditions, and gain tips for getting vendors to take on their fair share of risk and become more accountable.

    • Contract Review Tool
    • Contract Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Contract Terms and Conditions

    The Purpose

    Understand IT contract clauses, improve risk identification, and be more effective at negotiating contract terms.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased awareness of how contract provisions relate to each other.

    Demystification of legalese and legal concepts.

    Increased ability to seek assistance from internal parties (e.g. Legal, Risk, and Procurement).

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Contract Review Tool.

    1.2 Review the Contract Playbook template.

    1.3 Review 35 contract provisions and reinforce key learnings with exercises (spread across three days)

    Outputs

    Partial completion of the template

    Exercise results and debrief

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}370|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,075 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • The fast evolution of the cybersecurity landscape requires security training and awareness programs that are frequently updated and improved.
    • Security and awareness training programs often fail to engage end users. Lack of engagement can lead to low levels of knowledge retention.
    • Irrelevant or outdated training content does not properly prepare your end users to effectively defend the organization against security threats.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • One-time, annual training is no longer sufficient for creating an effective security awareness and training program.
    • By presenting security as a personal and individualized issue, you can make this new personal focus a driver for your organizational security awareness and training program.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a training program that delivers smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis to minimize effort, reduce end-user training fatigue, and improve content relevance.
    • Evaluate and improve your security awareness and training program continuously to keep its content up-to-date. Leverage end-user feedback to ensure content remains relevant to those who receive it.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a security awareness and training program that empowers end users, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop your training program

    Create or mature a security awareness and training program that is tailored to your organization.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 1: Develop Your Training Program
    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    • End-User Security Job Description Template
    • Training Materials – Physical Computer Security
    • Training Materials – Cyber Attacks
    • Training Materials – Incident Response
    • Training Materials – Mobile Security
    • Training Materials – Passwords
    • Training Materials – Phishing
    • Training Materials – Social Engineering
    • Training Materials – Web Usage
    • Security Awareness and Training Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Security Awareness and Training Metrics Tool
    • End-User Security Knowledge Test Template
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool

    2. Design an effective training delivery plan

    Explore methods of training delivery and select the most effective solutions.

    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phase 2: Design an Effective Training Delivery Plan
    • Information Security Awareness and Training Policy
    • Security Awareness and Training Gamification Guide
    • Mock Spear Phishing Email Examples
    • Security Training Email Templates
    • Security Awareness and Training Module Builder and Training Schedule
    • Security Training Campaign Development Tool
    • Security Training Program Manual
    • Security Awareness and Training Feedback Template
    • Security Awareness Month Week 1: Staying in Touch
    • Security Awareness Month Week 2: Sharing Special Moments
    • Security Awareness Month Week 3: Working and Networking
    • Security Awareness Month Week 4: Families and Businesses
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Outline the Plan for Long-term Program Improvement

    The Purpose

    Identify the maturity level of the existing security awareness and training program and set development goals.

    Establish program milestones and outline key initiatives for program development.

    Identify metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified the gaps between the current maturity level of the security awareness and training program and future target states.

    Activities

    1.1 Create a program development plan.

    1.2 Investigate and select metrics to measure program effectiveness.

    1.3 Execute some low-hanging fruit initiatives for collecting metrics: e.g. create a knowledge test, feedback survey, or gamification guide.

    Outputs

    Customized development plan for program.

    Tool for tracking metrics.

    Customized knowledge quiz ready for distribution.

    Customized feedback survey for training.

    Gamification program outline.

    2 Identify and Assess Audience Groups and Security Training Topics

    The Purpose

    Determine the unique audience groups within your organization and evaluate their risks and vulnerabilities.

    Prioritize training topics and audience groups to effectively streamline program development.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of unique audience groups and the corresponding security training that each group should receive.

    Determined priority ratings for both audience groups and the security topics to be delivered.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the unique audience groups within your organization and the threats they face.

    2.2 Determine the priority levels of the current security topics.

    2.3 Review audience groups and determine which topics need to be delivered to each group.

    Outputs

    Risk profile for each identified audience group.

    Priority scores for all training topics.

    List of relevant security topics for each identified audience group.

    3 Plan the Training Delivery

    The Purpose

    Identify all feasible delivery channels for security training within your organization.

    Build a vendor evaluation tool and shortlist or harvest materials for in-house content creation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of all potential delivery mechanisms for security awareness and training.

    Built a vendor evaluation tool and discussed a vendor shortlist.

    Harvested a collection of free online materials for in-house training development.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss potential delivery mechanisms for training, including the purchase and use of a vendor.

    3.2 If selecting a vendor, review vendor selection criteria and discuss potential vendor options.

    3.3 If creating content in-house, review and select available resources on the web.

    Outputs

    List of available delivery mechanisms for training.

    Vendor assessment tool and shortlist.

    Customized security training presentations.

    4 Create a Training Schedule for Content Deployment

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for deploying a pilot program to gather valuable feedback.

    Create an ongoing training schedule.

    Define the end users’ responsibilities towards security within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a plan to deploy a pilot program.

    Created a schedule for training deployment.

    Defined role of end users in helping protect the organization against security threats.

    Activities

    4.1 Build training modules.

    4.2 Create an ongoing training schedule.

    4.3 Define and document your end users’ responsibilities towards their security.

    Outputs

    Documented modular structure to training content.

    Training schedule.

    Security job description template.

    End-user training policy.

    Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}79|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Many organizations forget the essential role IT plays during M&A integration. IT is often unaware of a merger or acquisition until the deal is announced, making it very difficult to adequately interpret business goals and appropriately assess the target organization.
    • IT-related integration activities are amongst the largest cost items in an M&A, yet these costs are often overlooked or underestimated during due diligence.
    • IT is expected to use the M&A team’s IT due diligence report and estimated IT integration budget, which may not have been generated appropriately.
    • IT involvement in integration is critical to providing a better view of risks, improving the ease of integration, and optimizing synergies.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Anticipate that you are going to be under pressure. Fulfill short-term, tactical operational imperatives while simultaneously conducting discovery and designing the technology end-state.
    • To migrate risks and guide discovery, select a high-level IT integration posture that aligns with business objectives.

    Impact and Result

    • Once a deal has been announced, use this blueprint to set out immediately to understand business M&A goals and expected synergies.
    • Assemble an IT Integration Program to conduct discovery and begin designing the technology end-state, while simultaneously identifying and delivering operational imperatives and quick-wins as soon as possible.
    • Following discovery, use this blueprint to build initiatives and put together an IT integration budget. The IT Integration Program has an obligation to explain the IT cost implications of the M&A to the business.
    • Once you have a clear understanding of the cost of your IT integration, use this blueprint to build a long-term action plan to achieve the planned technology end-state that best supports the business capabilities of the organization.

    Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should follow Info-Tech’s M&A IT integration methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the project

    Define the business’s M&A goals, assemble an IT Integration Program, and select an IT integration posture that aligns with business M&A strategy.

    • Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration – Phase 1: Launch the Project
    • IT Integration Charter

    2. Conduct discovery and design the technology end-state

    Refine the current state of each IT domain in both organizations, and then design the end-state of each domain.

    • Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration – Phase 2: Conduct Discovery and Design the Technology End-State
    • IT Integration Roadmap Tool

    3. Initiate operational imperatives and quick-wins

    Generate tactical operational imperatives and quick-wins, and then develop an interim action plan to maintain business function and capture synergies.

    • Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration – Phase 3: Initiate Operational Imperatives and Quick-Wins

    4. Develop an integration roadmap

    Generate initiatives and put together a long-term action plan to achieve the planned technology end-state.

    • Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration – Phase 4: Develop an Integration Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Make IT a Successful Partner in M&A Integration

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the Project

    The Purpose

    Identification of staffing and skill set needed to manage the IT integration.

    Generation of an integration communication plan to highlight communication schedule during major integration events.

    Identification of business goals and objectives to select an IT Integration Posture that aligns with business strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined IT integration roles & responsibilities.

    Structured communication plan for key IT integration milestones.

    Creation of the IT Integration Program.

    Generation of an IT Integration Posture.

    Activities

    1.1 Define IT Integration Program responsibilities.

    1.2 Build an integration communication plan.

    1.3 Host interviews with senior management.

    1.4 Select a technology end-state and IT integration posture.

    Outputs

    Define IT Integration Program responsibilities and goals

    Structured communication plan

    Customized interview guide for each major stakeholder

    Selected technology end-state and IT integration posture

    2 Conduct Discovery and Design the Technology End-State

    The Purpose

    Identification of information sources to begin conducting discovery.

    Definition of scope of information that must be collected about target organization.

    Definition of scope of information that must be collected about your own organization.

    Refinement of the technology end-state for each IT domain of the new entity. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A collection of necessary information to design the technology end-state of each IT domain.

    Adequate information to make accurate cost estimates.

    A designed end-state for each IT domain.

    A collection of necessary, available information to make accurate cost estimates. 

    Activities

    2.1 Define discovery scope.

    2.2 Review the data room and conduct onsite discovery.

    2.3 Design the technology end-state for each IT domain.

    2.4 Select the integration strategy for each IT domain.

    Outputs

    Tone set for discovery

    Key information collected for each IT domain

    Refined end-state for each IT domain

    Refined integration strategy for each IT domain

    3 Initiate Tactical Initiatives and Develop an Integration Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Generation of tactical initiatives that are operationally imperative and will help build business credibility.

    Prioritization and execution of tactical initiatives.

    Confirmation of integration strategy for each IT domain and generation of initiatives to achieve technology end-states.

    Prioritization and execution of integration roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tactical initiatives generated and executed.

    Confirmed integration posture for each IT domain.

    Initiatives generated and executed upon to achieve the technology end-state of each IT domain. 

    Activities

    3.1 Build quick-win and operational imperatives.

    3.2 Build a tactical action plan and execute.

    3.3 Build initiatives to close gaps and redundancies.

    3.4 Finalize your roadmap and kick-start integration.

    Outputs

    Tactical roadmap to fulfill short-term M&A objectives and synergies

    Confirmed IT integration strategies

    Finalized integration roadmap

    Human Resources Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}31|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}31|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $13,367
    • member rating average days saved: 7
    • Parent Category Name: people and Resources
    • Parent Category Link: /people-and-resources
    Talent is the differentiator; availability is not.

    Next-Generation InfraOps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}457|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches benefit your organization.
    • Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
    • Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

    Next-Generation InfraOps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard – A deck that will help you use Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

    This storyboard will help you understand the spectrum of different Agile xOps working modes and how best to leverage them and build an architecture and toolset that support rapid continuous IT operations

    • Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Next-Generation InfraOps

    Embrace the spectrum of Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge

    IT Operations continue to be challenged by increasing needs for scale and speed, often in the face of constrained resources and time. For most, Agile methodologies have become a foundational part of tackling this problem. Since then, we've seen Agile evolve into DevOps, which started a trend into different categories of "xOps" that are too many to count. How does one make sense of the xOps spectrum? What is InfraOps and where does it fit in?

    Common Obstacles

    Ultimately, all these methodologies and approaches are there to serve the same purpose: increase effectiveness through automation and improve governance through visibility. The key is to understand what tools and methodologies will deliver actual benefits to your IT operation and to the organization as a whole.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

    1. Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches will benefit your organization.
    2. Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
    3. Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    InfraOps, when applied well, should be the embodiment of the governance policies as expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

    Project overview

    Understand the xOps spectrum

    There are as many different types of "xOps" as there are business models and IT teams. To pick the approaches that deliver the best value to your organization and that align to your way of operating, it's important to understand the different major categories in the spectrum and how they do or don't apply to your IT approach.

    How to optimize the Ops in DevOps

    InfraOps is one of the major methodologies to address a key problem in IT at cloud scale: eliminating friction and error from your deliveries and outputs. The good news is there are architectures, tools, and frameworks you can easily leverage to make adopting this approach easier.

    Evolve to integration and build a virtuous cycle

    Ultimately your DevOps and InfraOps approaches should embody your governance needs via architecture and process. As time goes on, however, both your IT footprint and your business environment will shift. Build your tools, telemetry, and governance to anticipate and adapt to change and build a virtuous cycle between development needs and IT Operations tools and governance.

    The xOps spectrum

    This is an image of the xOps spectrum. The three main parts are: Code Acceleration (left), Governance(middle), and Infrastructure Acceleration (right)

    xOps categories

    There is no definitive list of x's in the xOps spectrum. Different organizations and teams will divide and define these in different ways. In many cases, the definitions and domains of various xOps will overlap.

    Some of the commonly adopted and defined xOps models are listed here.

    Shift left? Shift right?

    Cutting through the jargon

    • Shifting left is about focusing on the code and development aspects of a delivery cycle.
    • Shifting right is about remembering that infrastructure and tools still do matter.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Shifting left or right isn't an either/or choice. They're more like opposite sides of the same coin. Like the different xOps approaches, usually more than one shift approach will apply to your IT Operations.

    IT Operations in the left-right spectrum

    Shifting from executing and deploying to defining the guardrails and standards

    This is an image of the left-right spectrum for your XOps position

    Take a middle-out approach

    InfraOps and DevOps aren't enemies; they're opposite sides of the same coin.

    • InfraOps is about the automation and standardization of execution. It's an essential element in any fully automated CI/CD pipeline.
    • Like DevOps, InfraOps is built on similar values (the pillars of DevOps).
    • It builds on the principle of Lean to focus on removing friction, or turn-and-type activities, from the pipeline/process.
    • In InfraOps, one of the key methods for removing friction is through automation of the interstitia between different phases of a DevOps or CI/CD cycle.

    Optimize the Ops in DevOps

    Focus on eliminating friction

    This is an image of an approach to optimizing the ops in DevOps.

    With the shift from execution to governing and validating, the role of deployment falls downstream of IT Operations.

    IT Operations needs to move to a mindset that focuses on creating the guardrails, enforced standards, and compliance rules that need to be used downstream, then apply those standards using automation and tooling to remove friction and error from the interstitia (the white spaces between chevrons) of the various phases.

    InfraOps tools

    Four quadrants in the shape of a human head, in the boxes are the following: Hyperconverged Infrastructure; Composable Infrastructure; Infrastructure as code and; Automation and Orchestration

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your tools can be broken into two categories:

    • Infrastructure Architecture
      • HCI vs. CI
    • Automation Tooling
      • IaC and A&O

    Keep in mind that while your infrastructure architecture is usually an either/or choice, your automation approach should use any and all tooling that helps.

    Infrastructure approach

    • Hyperconverged

    • Composable

    Hyperconverged Infrastructure (HCI)

    Hyperconvergence is the next phase of convergence, virtualizing servers, networks, and storage on a single server/storage appliance. Capacity scales as more appliances are added to a cluster or stack.
    The disruptive departure:

    • Even though servers, networks, and storage were each on their own convergence paths, the three remained separate management domains (or silos). Even single-SKU converged infrastructures like VCE Vblocks are still composed of distinct server, network, and storage devices.
    • In hyperconvergence, the silos collapse into single-software managed devices. This has been disruptive for both the vendors of technology solutions (especially storage) and for infrastructure management.
    • Large storage array vendors are challenged by hyperconvergence alternatives. IT departments need to adapt IT skills and roles away from individual management silos and to more holistic service management.

    A comparison between converged and hyperconverged systems.

    Info-Tech Insight

    HCI follows convergence trends of the past ten years but is also a departure from how IT infrastructure has traditionally been provisioned and managed.

    HCI is at the same time a logical progression of infrastructure convergence and a disruptive departure.

    Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

    HCI can be the foundation block for a fully software defined data center, a prerequisite for private cloud.

    Strengths

    • Potentially lower TCO through further infrastructure consolidation, reducing CapEx and OpEx expenditures through facilities optimization and cost consolidation.
    • Operations in particular can be streamlined, since storage, network connections, and processors/memory are all managed as abstractions via a single control pane.
    • HCI comes with built-in automation and analytics that lead to quicker issue resolution.

    Opportunities

    • Increased business agility by paving the way for a fully software defined infrastructure stack and cloud automation.
    • Shift IT human assets from hardware asset maintainers and controllers to service delivery managers.
    • Better able to compete with external IT service alternatives.
    • Move toward a hybrid cloud service offering where the service catalog contains both internal and external offerings.

    Key attributes of a cloud are automation, resource elasticity, and self-service. This kind of agility is impossible if physical infrastructure needs intervention.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Virtualization alone does not a private cloud make, but complete stack virtualization (software defined) running on a hands-off preconfigured HCI appliance (or group of appliances) provides a solid foundation for building cloud services.

    Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

    Silo-busting and private cloud sound great, but are your people and processes able to manage the change?

    Weaknesses

    • HCI typically scales out linearly (CPU & storage). This does not suit traditional scale-up applications such as high-performance databases and large-capacity data warehouses.
    • Infrastructure stacks are perceived as more flexible for variable growth across segments. For example, if storage is growing but processing is not, storage can scale separately from processing.

    Threats

    • HCI will be disruptive to roles within IT. Internal pushback is a real threat if necessary changes in skills and roles are not addressed.
    • HCI is not a simple component replacement but an adoption of a different kind of infrastructure. Different places in the lifecycles for each of storage, network, and processing devices could make HCI a solution where there is no immediate problem.

    In traditional infrastructure, performance and capacity are managed as distinct though complementary jobs. An all-in-one approach may not work.

    Composable Infrastructure (CI)

    • Composable infrastructure in many ways represents the opposite of an HCI approach. Its focus is on further disaggregating resources and components used to build systems.
      • Unlike traditional cloud virtual systems, composable infrastructure provides virtual bare metal resources, allowing tightly coupled resources like CPU, RAM, and GPU – or any device/card/module – to be released back and forth into the resource pool as required by a given workload.
      • This is enabled by the use of high-speed, low-latency PCI Express (PCI-e) and Compute Express Link (CXL) fabrics that allow these resources to be decoupled.
      • It also supports the ability to present other fabric types critical for building out enterprise systems (e.g. Ethernet, InfiniBand).
    • Accordingly, CI systems are also based on next-generation network architecture that supports moving critical functions to the network layer, which enables more efficient use of the application-layer resources.

    Composable Infrastructure (CI)

    • CI may also leverage network-resident data/infrastructure processing units (DPUs/IPUs), which offload many network, security, and storage functions.
      • As new devices and functions become available, they can be added into the catalog of resources/functions available in a CI pool.

    Use Case Example: Composable AI flow

    Data Ingestion > Data Cleaning/Tagging > Training > Conclusion

    • At each phase of the process, resources, including specialized hardware like memory and GPU cores, can be dynamically allocated and reallocated to the workload on demand

    Composable Infrastructure (CI)

    Use cases and considerations

    Where it's useful

    • Enable even more efficient allocation/utilization of resources for workloads.
    • Very large memory or shared memory requirements can benefit greatly.
    • Decouple purchasing decisions for underlying resources.
    • Leverage the fabric to make it easier to incrementally upgrade underlying resources as required.
    • Build "the Impossible Server."

    Considerations

    • Requires significant footprint/scale to justify in many cases
    • Not necessarily good value for environments that aren't very volatile and heterogeneous in terms of deployment requirements
    • May not be best value for environments where resource-stranding is not a significant issue

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations using a traditional approach report resource stranding as having an impact of 20% or more on efficiency. When focusing specifically on the stranding of memory in workloads, the number can often approach 40%.

    The CI ecosystem

    This is an image of the CI ecosystem.

    • The CI ecosystem has many players, large and small!
    • Note that the CI ecosystem is dependent on a large ecosystem of underlying enablers and component builders to support the required technologies.

    Understanding the differences

    This image shows the similarities and differences between traditional, cloud, hyperconverged, and composable.

    Automation approach

    • Infrastructure as Code
    • Automation & Orchestration
    • Metaorchestration

    Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

    Infrastructure as code (IaC) is the process of managing and provisioning computer data centers through machine-readable definition files rather than physical hardware configuration or interactive configuration tools.

    Before IaC, IT personnel would have to manually change configurations to manage their infrastructure. Maybe they would use throwaway scripts to automate some tasks, but that was the extent of it.

    With IaC, your infrastructure's configuration takes the form of a code file, making it easy to edit, copy, and distribute.

    Info-Tech Insight
    IaC is a critical tool in enabling key benefits!

    • Reduced costs
    • Increased scalability, flexibility, and speed
    • Better consistency and version control
    • Reduced deployment errors

    Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

    1. IaC uses a high-level descriptive coding language to automate the provisioning of IT infrastructure. This eliminates the need to manually provision and manage servers, OS, database connections, storage, and other elements every time we want to develop, test, or deploy an application.
    2. IaC allows us to define the computer systems on which code needs to run. Most commonly, we use a framework like Chef, Ansible, Puppet, etc., to define their infrastructure. These automation and orchestration tools focus on the provisioning and configuring of base compute infrastructure.
    3. IaC is also an essential DevOps practice. It enables teams to rapidly create and version infrastructure in the same way they version source code and to track these versions so as to avoid inconsistency among IT environments that can lead to serious issues during deployment.
    • Idempotence is a principle of IaC. This means a deployment command always sets the target environment into the same configuration, regardless of the environment's starting state.
      • Idempotency is achieved by either automatically configuring an existing target or discarding the existing target and recreating a fresh environment.

    Automation/Orchestration

    Orchestration describes the automated arrangement, coordination, and management of complex computer systems, middleware, and services.

    This usage of orchestration is often discussed in the context of service-oriented architecture, virtualization, provisioning, converged infrastructure, and dynamic data center topics. Orchestration in this sense is about aligning the business request with the applications, data, and infrastructure.

    It defines the policies and service levels through automated workflows,
    provisioning, and change management. This creates an application-aligned infrastructure that can be scaled up or down based on the needs of each application.

    As the requirement for more resources or a new application is triggered, automated tools now can perform tasks that previously could only be done by multiple administrators operating on their individual pieces of the physical stack.

    Orchestration also provides centralized management of the resource pool, including billing, metering, and chargeback for consumption. For example, orchestration reduces the time and effort for deploying multiple instances of a single application.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Automation and orchestration tools can be key components of an effective governance toolkit too! Remember to understand what data can be pulled from your various tools and leveraged for other purposes such as cost management and portfolio roadmapping.

    Automation/Orchestration

    There are a wide variety of orchestration and automation tools and technologies.

    Configuration Management

    Configuration Management

    The logos for companies which fall in each of the categories in the column to the left of the image.

    CI/CD
    Orchestration

    Container
    Orchestration

    Cloud-Specific
    Orchestration

    PaaS
    Orchestration

    Info-Tech Insight

    Automation and orchestration tools and software offerings are plentiful, and many of them have a different focus on where in the application delivery ecosystem they provide automation functionality.

    Often there are different tools for different deployment and service models as well as for different functional phases for each service model.

    Automation/Orchestration

    Every tool focuses on different aspects or functions of the deployment of resources and applications.

    • Resources
      • Compute
      • Storage
      • Network
    • Extended Services
      • Platforms
      • Infrastructure Services
      • Web Services
    • Application Assets
      • Images
      • Templates
      • Containers
      • Code

    Info-Tech Insight

    Let the large ecosystem of tools be your ally. Leverage the right tools where needed and then address the complexity of tools using a master orchestration scheme.

    Metaorchestration

    A Flow chart for the approach to metaorchestration.

    Additionally, most tools do not cover all aspects required for most automation implementations, especially in hybrid cloud scenarios.

    As such, often multiple tools must be deployed, which can lead to fragmentation and loss of unified controls.

    Many enterprises address this fragmentation using a cloud management platform approach.

    One method of achieving this is to establish a higher layer of orchestration – an "orchestrator of orchestrators," or metaorchestration.

    In complex scenarios, this can be a challenge that requires customization and development.

    InfraOps tools ecosystem

    Toolkit Pros Cons Tips
    HCI Easy scale out Shift in skills required Good for enabling automation and hybridization with current-gen public cloud services
    CI Maximal workload resource efficiency Investment in new fabrics and technologies Useful for very dynamic or highly scalable workloads like AI
    IaC Error reduction and standardization Managing drift in standards and requirements Leverage a standards and exception process to keep track of drift
    A&O Key enabler of DevOps automation within phases Usually requires multiple toolsets/frameworks Use the right tools and stitch together at the metaorchestration layer
    Metaorchestration Reduces the complexity of a diverse A&O and IaC toolkit Requires understanding of the entire ecosystems of tools used Key layer of visibility and control for governance

    Build a virtuous cycle

    Remember, the goal is to increase speed AND reliability. That's why we focus on removing friction from our delivery pipelines.

    • The first step is to identify the points of friction in your cycle and understand the intensity and frequency of these friction points.
    • Depending on your delivery and project management methodology, you'll have a different posture of the different tools that make sense for your pipeline.
    • For example, if you are focused on delivering raw resources for sysadmins and/or you're in a Waterfall methodology where the friction points are large but infrequent, hyperconverged is likely to delivery good value, whereas tools like IaC and orchestration may not be as necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember that, especially in modern and rapid methodologies, your IT footprint can drift unexpectedly. This means you need a real feedback mechanism on where the friction moves to next.

    This is particularly important in more Agile methodologies.

    Activity: Map your IT operations delivery

    Identify your high-friction interstitial points

    • Using the table below, or a table modified to your delivery phases, map out the activities and tasks that are not standardized and automated.
    • For the incoming and outgoing sections, think about what resources and activities need to be (or could be) created, destroyed, or repurposed to efficiently manage each cycle and the spaces between cycles.
    Plan Code Test Deploy Monitor
    Incoming Friction
    In-Cycle Friction
    Outgoing Friction

    Info-Tech Insight

    Map your ops groups to the delivery cycles in your pipeline. How many delivery cycles do you have or need?

    Good InfraOps is a reflection of governance policies, expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Evaluate Hyperconverged Infrastructure for Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    • This Info-Tech note covers evaluation of HCI platforms.

    Design Your Cloud Operations

    • This Info-Tech blueprint covers organization of operations teams for various deployment and Agile modes.

    Bibliography

    Banks, Ethan, host. "Choosing Your Next Infrastructure." Datanauts, episode 094, Packet Pushers, 26 July 2017. Podcast.
    "Composable Infrastructure Solutions." Hewlett Packard Canada, n.d. Web.
    "Composable Infrastructure Technology." Liqid Inc., n.d. Web.
    "DataOps architecture design." Azure Architecture Center, Microsoft Learn, n.d. Web.
    Tan, Pei Send. "Differences: DevOps, ITOps, MLOps, DataOps, ModelOps, AIOps, SecOps, DevSecOps." Medium, 5 July 2021. Web.

    Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}1|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}1|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}1|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Asset Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,518
    • member rating average days saved: 19
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Asset management has a clear impact on the financials of your company. Clear insights are essential to keep your spending at the right level.

    Asset Management

    Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications

    M365 projects are fraught with obstacles. Common mistakes organizations make include:

    • Not having a post-migration plan in place.
    • Treating user training as an afterthought.
    • Inadequate communication to end users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There are three primary areas where organizations fail in a successful implementation of M365: training, adoption, and information governance. While it is not up to IT to ensure every user is well trained, it is their initial responsibility to find champions, SMEs, and business-based trainers and manage information governance from the backup, retention, and security aspects of data management.

    Impact and Result

    Migrating to M365 is a disruptive move for most organizations. It poses risk to untrained IT staff, including admins, help desk, and security teams. The aim for organizations, especially in this new hybrid workspace, is to maintain efficiencies through collaboration, share information in a secure environment, and work from anywhere, any time.

    Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365 Storyboard – A deck that guides you through the important considerations that will help you avoid common pitfalls and make the most of your investment.

    There are three primary goals when deploying Microsoft 365: productivity, security and compliance, and collaborative functionality. On top of these you need to meet the business KPIs and IT’s drive for adoption and usage. This research will guide you through the important considerations that are often overlooked as this powerful suite of tools is rolled out to the organization.

    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365

    You’ve deployed M365. Now what? Look at your business goals and match your M365 KPIs to meet those objectives.

    Analyst perspective

    You’ve deployed M365. Now what?

    John Donovan

    There are three primary objectives when deploying Microsoft 365: from a business perspective, the expectations are based on productivity; from an IT perspective, the expectations are based on IT efficiencies, security, and compliance; and from an organizational perspective, they are based on a digital employee experience and collaborative functionality.

    Of course, all these expectations are based on one primary objective, and that is user adoption of Teams, OneDrive, and SharePoint Online. A mass adoption, along with a high usage rate and a change in the way users work, is required for your investment in M365 to be considered successful.

    So, adoption is your first step, and that can be tracked and analyzed through analytics in M365 or other tools. But what else needs to be considered once you have released M365 on your organization? What about backup? What about security? What about sharing data outside your business? What about self-service? What about ongoing training? M365 is a powerful suite of tools, and taking advantage of all that it entails should be IT’s primary goal. How to accomplish that, efficiently and securely, is up to you!

    John Donovan
    Principal Research Director, I&O
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight summary

    Collaboration, efficiencies, and cost savings need to be earned

    Migrating to M365 is a disruptive move for most organizations. Additionally, it poses risk to untrained IT staff, including admins, help desk, and security teams. The aim for organizations, especially in this new hybrid workspace, is to maintain efficiencies through collaboration, share information in a secure environment, and work from anywhere, any time. However, organizations need to manage their licensing and storage costs and build this new way of working through post-deployment planning. By reducing their hardware and software footprint they can ensure they have earned these savings and efficiencies.

    Understand any shortcomings in M365 or pay the price

    Failing to understand any shortcomings M365 poses for your organization can ruin your chances at a successful implementation. Commonly overlooked expenses include backup and archiving, especially for regulated organizations; spending on risk mitigation through third-party tools for security; and paying a premium to Microsoft to use its Azure offerings with Microsoft Sentinel, Microsoft Defender, or any security add-on that comes at a price above your E5 license, which is expensive in itself.

    Spend time with users to understand how they will use M365

    Understanding business processes is key to anticipating how your end users will adopt M365. By spending time with the staff and understanding their day-to-day activities and interactions, you can build better training scenarios to suit their needs and help them understand how the apps in M365 can help them do their job. On top of this you need to meet the business KPIs and IT’s drive for adoption and usage. Encourage early adopters to become trainers and champions. Success will soon follow.

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    M365 is a full suite of tools for collaboration, communication, and productivity, but organizations find the platform is not used to its full advantage and fail to get full value from their license subscription.

    Many users are unsure which tool to use when: Do you use Teams or Viva Engage, MS Project or Planner? When do you use SharePoint versus OneDrive?

    From an IT perspective, finding time to help users at the outset is difficult – it’s quite the task to set up governance, security, and backup. Yet training staff must be a priority if the implementation is to succeed.

    M365 projects are fraught with obstacles. Common mistakes organizations make include:

    • No post-migration plan in place.
    • User training is an afterthought.
    • Lack of communication to end users.
    • No C-suite promotion and sponsorship.
    • Absence of a vision and KPIs to meet that vision.

    To define your post-migration tasks and projects:

    • List all projects in a spreadsheet and rank them according to difficulty and impact.
    • Look for quick wins with easy tasks that have high impact and low difficulty.
    • Build a timeline to execute your plans and communicate clearly how these plans will impact the business and meet that vision.

    Failure to take meaningful action will not bode well for your M365 journey.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There are three primary areas where organizations fail in a successful implementation of M365: training, adoption, and information governance. While it is not up to IT to ensure every user is well trained, it is their initial responsibility to find champions, SMEs, and business-based trainers and to manage information governance from backup, retention, and security aspects of data management.

    Business priorities

    What priorities is IT focusing on with M365 adoption?

    What IT teams are saying

    • In a 2019 SoftwareONE survey, the biggest reason IT decision makers gave for adopting M365 was to achieve a “more collaborative working style.”
    • Organizations must plan and execute a strategy for mass adoption and training to ensure processes match business goals.
    • Cost savings can only be achieved through rightsizing license subscriptions, retiring legacy apps, and building efficiencies within the IT organization.
    • With increased mobility comes with increased cybersecurity risk. Make sure you take care of your security before prioritizing mobility. Multifactor authentication (MFA), conditional access (CA), and additional identity management will maintain a safe work-from-anywhere environment.

    Top IT reasons for adopting M365

    61% More collaborative working style

    54% Cost savings

    51% Improved cybersecurity

    49% Greater mobility

    Source: SoftwareONE, 2019; N=200 IT decision makers across multiple industries and organization sizes

    Define & organize post-implementation projects

    Key areas to success

    • Using Microsoft’s M365 adoption guide, we can prioritize and focus on solutions that will bring about better use of the M365 suite.
    • Most of your planning and prioritizing should be done before implementation. Many organizations, however, adopted M365 – and especially Teams, SharePoint Online, and OneDrive – in an ad hoc manner in response to the pandemic measures that forced users to work from home.
    • Use a Power BI Pro license to set up dashboards for M365 usage analytics. Install GitHub from AppSource and use the templates that will give you good insight and the ability to create business reports to show adoption and usage rates on the platform.
    • Reimagine your working behavior. Remember, you want to bring about a more collective and open framework for work. Take advantage of a champion SME to show the way. Every organization is different, so make sure your training is aligned to your business processes.
    The image contains a screenshot of the M365 post-implementation tasks.

    Process steps

    Define Vision

    Build Team

    Plan Projects

    Execute

    Define your vision and what your priorities are for M365. Understand how to reach your vision.

    Ensure you have an executive sponsor, develop champions, and build a team of SMEs.

    List all projects in a to-be scenario. Rank and prioritize projects to understand impact and difficulty.

    Build your roadmap, create timelines, and ensure you have enough resources and time to execute and deliver to the business.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Use the out-of-the-box tools and take advantage of your subscription.

    The image contains a screenshot of the various tools and services Microsoft provides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A clear understanding of the business purpose and processes, along with insight into the organizational culture, will help you align the right apps with the right tasks. This approach will bring about better adoption and collaboration and cancel out the shadow IT products we see in every business silo.

    Leverage built-in usage analytics

    Adoption of services in M365

    To give organizations insight into the adoption of services in M365, Microsoft provides built-in usage analytics in Power BI, with templates for visualization and custom reports. There are third-party tools out there, but why pay more? However, the template app is not free; you do need a Power BI Pro license.

    Usage Analytics pulls data from ActiveDirectory, including location, department, and organization, giving you deeper insight into how users are behaving. It can collect up to 12 months of data to analyze.

    Reports that can be created include Adoption, Usage, Communication, Collaboration (how OneDrive and SharePoint are being used), Storage (cloud storage for mailboxes, OneDrive, and SharePoint), and Mobility (which clients and devices are used to connect to Teams, email, Yammer, etc.).

    Source: Microsoft 365 usage analytics

    Understand admin roles

    Prevent intentional or unintentional internal breaches

    Admin Roles

    Best Practices

    • Global admin: Assign this role only to users who need the most access to management features and data across your tenant. Only global admins can modify an admin role.
    • Exchange admin: Assign this role to users who need to view and manage user mailboxes, M365 groups, and Exchange Online and handle Microsoft support requests.
    • Groups admin: These users can create, edit, delete, and restore M365 groups as well as create expiration and naming policies.
    • Helpdesk admin: These users can resets passwords, force user sign-out, manage Microsoft support requests, and monitor service health.
    • Teams/SharePoint Online admin: Assign these roles for users who manage the Teams and SharePoint Admin Center.
    • User admin: These users can assign licenses, add users and groups, manage user properties, and create and manage user views.

    Only assign two to four global admins, depending on the size of the organization. Too many admins increases security risk. In larger organizations, segment admin roles using role-based access control.

    Because admins have access to sensitive data, you’ll want to assign the least permissive role so they can access only the tools and data they need to do their job.

    Enable MFA for all admins except one break-glass account that is stored in the cloud and not synced. Ensure a complex password, stored securely, and use only in the event of an MFA outage.

    Due to the large number of admin roles available and the challenges that brings with it, Microsoft has a built-in tool to compare roles in the admin portal. This can help you determine which role should be used for specific tasks.

    Secure your M365 tenant

    A checklist to ensure basic security coverage post M365

    • Multifactor Authentication: MFA is part of your M365 tenant, so using it should be a practical identity security. If you want additional conditional access (CA), you will require an Azure AD (AAD) Premium P1+ license. This will ensure adequate identity security protecting the business.
    • Password Protection: Use the AAD portal to set this up under Security > Authentication Methods. Microsoft provides a list of over 2,000 known bad passwords and variants to block.
    • Legacy Authentication: Disable legacy protocols; check to see if your legacy apps/workflows/scripts use them in the AAD portal. Once identified, update them and turn the protocols off. Use CA policies.
    • Self-Service Password Reset: Enable self-service to lower the helpdesk load for password resets. Users will have to initially register and set security questions. Hybrid AD businesses must write back to AD from AAD once changes are made.
    • Security Defaults: For small businesses, turn on default settings. To enable additional security settings, such as break- glass accounts, go into Manage Security Defaults in your AAD properties.
    • Conditional Access (CA) Policies: Use CA policies if strong identity security and zero trust are required. To create policies in AAD go to Security > Conditional Access > New Policies.

    Identity Checklist

    • Enable MFA for Admins
    • Enable MFA for Users
    • Disable App Passwords
    • Configure Trusted IPs
    • Disable Text/Phone MFA
    • Remember MFA on Trusted Devices for 90 Days
    • Train Staff in Using MFA Correctly
    • Integrate Apps Into Azure AD

    Training guidelines

    Identify business scenarios and training adoption KPIs

    • Customize your training to meet your organizational goals, align with your business culture, and define how users will work inside the world of M365.
    • Create scenario templates that align to your current day-to-day operations in each department. These can be created by individual business unit champions.
    • Make sure you have covered must-have capabilities and services within M365 that need to be rolled out post-pilot.
    • Phase in large transitions rather than multiple small ones to ensure collaboration between departments meets business scenarios.
    • Ensure your success metrics are being measured and continue to communicate and train after deployment using tools available in M365. See Microsoft’s adoption guidelines and template for training.

    Determine your training needs and align with your business processes. Choose training modalities that will give users the best chance of success. Consider one or many training methods, such as:

    • Online training
    • In-person classroom
    • Business scenario use cases
    • Mentoring
    • Department champion/Early adopter
    • Weekly bulletin fun facts

    Don’t forget backup!

    Providing 99% uptime and availability is not enough

    Why is M365 backup so important?

    Accidental Data Deletion.

    If a user is deleted, that deletion gets replicated across the network. Backup can save you here by restoring that user.

    Internal and External Security Threats.

    Malicious internal deletion of data and external threats including viruses, ransomware, and malware can severely damage a business and its reputation. A clean backup can easily restore the business’ uninfected data.

    Legal and Compliance Requirements.

    While e-discovery and legal hold are available to retain sensitive data, a third-party backup solution can easily search and restore all data to meet regulatory requirements – without depending on someone to ensure a policy was set.

    Retention Policy Gaps.

    Retention policies are not a substitute for backup. While they can be used to retain or delete content, they are difficult to keep track of and manage. Backups offer greater latitude in retention and better security for that data.

    Retire your legacy apps to gain adoption

    Identify like for like and retire your legacy apps

    Legacy

    Microsoft 365

    SharePoint 2016/19

    SharePoint Online

    Microsoft Exchange Server

    Microsoft Exchange in Azure

    Skype for Business Server

    Teams

    Trello

    Planner 2022

    System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM)

    Endpoint Manager, Intune, Autopilot

    File servers

    OneDrive

    Access

    Power Apps

    To meet the objectives of cost reduction and rationalization, look at synergies that M365 brings to the table. Determine what you are currently using to meet collaboration, storage, and security needs and plan to use the equivalent in your Microsoft entitlement.

    Managing M365’s hidden costs

    Licenses and storage limits TCO

    • Email security. Ninety-one percent of all cyberattacks come from phishing on email. Microsoft Defender for M365 is a bolt-on, so it is an additional cost.
    • Backup. This will bring additional cost to M365. Plan to spend more to ensure data is backed up and stored.
    • Email archiving. Archiving is different than backup. See our research on the subject. Archiving is needed for compliance purposes. Email archiving solutions are available through third-party software, which is an added cost.
    • Email end-to-end encryption. This is a requirement for all organizations that are serious about security. The enterprise products from Microsoft come at an additional cost.
    • Cybersecurity training. IT needs to ramp up on training, another expense.
    • Microsoft 365 Power Platform Licencing. From low-code and no-code developer tools (Power Apps), workflow tools (Power Automate), and business intelligence (Power BI) – while the E5 license gives you Power BI Pro, there are limitations and costs. Power BI Pro has limitations for data volume, data refresh, and query response time, so your premium license comes at a considerably marked up cost.

    M365 is not standalone

    • While Microsoft 365 is a platform that is ”just good enough,” it is actually not good enough in today’s cyberthreat environment. Microsoft provides add-ons with Defender for 365, Purview, and Sentinel, which pose additional costs, just like a third-party solution would. See the Threat Intelligence & Incident Response research in our Security practice.
    • The lack of data archiving, backup, and encryption means additional costs that may not have been budgeted for at the outset. Microsoft provides 30-60-90-day recovery, but anything else is additional cost. For more information see Understand the Difference between Backups and Archiving.

    Compliance and regulations

    Security and compliance features out of the box

    There are plenty of preconfigured security features contained in M365, but what’s available to you depends on your license. For example, Microsoft Defender, which has many preset policies, is built-in for E5 licenses, but if you have E3 licenses Defender is an add-on.

    Three elements in security policies are profiles, policies, and policy settings.

    • Preset Profiles come in the shape of:
      • Standard – baseline protection for most users
      • Strict – aggressive protection for profiles that may be high-value targets
      • Built-in Protection – turned on by default; it is not recommended to make exceptions based on users, groups, or domains
    • Preset Security Policies
      • Exchange Online Protection Policies – anti-spam, -malware, and -phishing policies
      • Microsoft Defender Policies – safe links and safe attachments policies
    • Policy Settings
      • User impersonation protection for internal and external domains
      • Select priorities from strict, standard, custom, and built-in

    Info-Tech Insight

    Check your license entitlement before you start purchasing add-ons or third-party solutions. Security and compliance are not optional in today’s cybersecurity risk world. With many organizations offering hybrid and remote work arrangements and bring-your-own-device (BYOD) policies, it is necessary to protect your data at the tenant level. Defender for Microsoft 365 is a tool that can protect both your exchange and collaboration environments.

    More information: Microsoft 365 Defender

    Use Intune and Autopilot

    Meet the needs of your hybrid workforce

    • Using the tools available in M365 can help you develop your hybrid or remote work strategy.
    • This strategy will help you maintain security controls for mobile and BYOD.
    • Migrating to Intune and Autopilot will give rise to the opportunity to migrate off SCCM and further reduce your on-premises infrastructure.

    NOTE: You must have Azure AD Premium and Windows 10 V1703 or later as well as Intune or other MDM service to use Autopilot. There is a monthly usage fee based on volume of data transmitted. These fees can add up over time.

    For more details visit the following Microsoft Learn pages:

    Intune /Autopilot Overview

    The image contains a screenshot of the Intune/Autopilot Overview.

    Info-Tech’s research on zero-touch provisioning goes into more detail on Intune and Autopilot:
    Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    M365 long-term strategies

    Manage your costs in an inflationary world

    • Recent inflation globally, whether caused by supply chain woes or political uncertainty, will impact IT and cloud services along with everything else. Be prepared to pay more for your existing services and budget accordingly.
    • Your long-term strategies must include ongoing cost management, data management, security risks, and license and storage costs.
    • Continually investigate efficiencies, overlaps, and new tools in M365 that can get the job done for the business. Use as many of the applications as you can to ensure you are getting the best bang for your buck.
    • Watch for upgrades in the M365 suite of tools. As Microsoft continues to improve and deliver on most business applications well after their first release, you may find that something that was previously inefficient could work in your environment today and replace a tool you currently use.

    Ongoing Activities You Need to Maintain

    • Be aware of increased license costs and higher storage costs.
    • Keep an eye on Teams sprawl.
    • Understand your total cost of ownership.
    • Continue to look at legacy apps and get rid of your infrastructure debt.

    Activity

    Build your own M365 post-migration plan

    1. Using slide 6 as your guideline, create your own project list using impact and difficulty as your weighting factors.
    2. Do this exercise as a whiteboard sticky note exercise to agree on impact and difficulty as a team.
    3. Identify easy wins that have high impact.
    4. Place the projects into a project plan with time lines.
    5. Agree on start and completion dates.
    6. Ensure you have the right resources to execute.

    The image contains a screenshot of the activity described in the above text.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Govern Office 365

    • Office 365 is as difficult to wrangle as it is valuable. Leverage best practices to produce governance outcomes aligned with your goals.

    Drive Ongoing Adoption With an M365 Center of Excellence

    • Accelerate business processes change and get more value from your subscription by building and sharing, thanks to an effective center of excellence.

    Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    • Adopt zero-touch provisioning to provide better services to your end users.
    • Save time and resources during device deployment while providing a high-quality experience to remote end users.

    Bibliography

    “5 Reasons Why Microsoft Office 365 Backup Is Important.” Apps 4Rent, Dec 2021, Accessed Oct 2022 .
    Chandrasekhar, Aishwarya. “Office 365 Migration Best Practices & Challenges 2022.” Saketa, 31 Mar 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    Chronlund, Daniel. “The Fundamental Checklist – Secure your Microsoft 365 Tenant”. Daniel Chronlund Cloud Tech Blog,1 Feb 2019. Accessed 1 Oct 2022.
    Davies, Joe. “The Microsoft 365 Enterprise Deployment Guide.” Tech Community, Microsoft, 19 Sept 2018. Accessed 2 Oct 2022.
    Dillaway, Kevin. “I Upgraded to Microsoft 365 E5, Now What?!.” SpyGlassMTG, 10 Jan 2022. Accessed 4 Oct. 2022.
    Hartsel, Joe. “How to Make Your Office 365 Implementation Project a Success.” Centric, 20 Dec 2021. Accessed 2 Oct. 2022.
    Jha, Mohit. “The Ultimate Microsoft Office 365 Migration Checklist for Pre & Post Migration.” Office365 Tips.Org, 24 June 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    Lang, John. “Why organizations don't realize the full value of Microsoft 365.“Business IT, 29 Nov 202I. Accessed 10 Oct 2022.
    Mason, Quinn. “How to increase Office 365 / Microsoft 365 user adoption.” Sharegate, 19 Sept 2019. Accessed 3 Oct 2022.
    McDermott, Matt. “6-Point Office 365 Post-Migration Checklist.” Spanning , 12 July 2019 . Accessed 4 Oct 2022.
    “Microsoft 365 usage analytics.” Microsoft 365, Microsoft, 25 Oct 2022. Web.
    Sharma, Megha. “Office 365 Pre & Post Migration Checklist.’” Kernel Data Recovery, 26 July 2022. Accessed 30 Sept. 2022.
    Sivertsen, Per. “How to avoid a failed M365 implementation? Infotechtion, 19 Dec 2021. Accessed 2 Oct. 2022.
    St. Hilaire, Dan. “Most Common Mistakes with Office 365 Deployment (and How to Avoid Them).“ KnowledgeWave, 4Mar 2019. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    “Under the Hood of Microsoft 365 and Office 365 Adoption.” SoftwareONE, 2019. Web.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}237|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Your organization has many business processes that rely on repetitive, routine manual data collection and processing work, and there is high stakeholder interest in automating them.
    • You’re investigating whether robotic process automation (RPA) is a suitable technological enabler for automating such processes.
    • Being a trending technology, especially with its association with artificial intelligence (AI), there is much marketing fluff, hype, and misunderstanding about RPA.
    • Estimating the potential impact of RPA on business is difficult, as the relevant industry statistics often conflict each other and you aren’t sure how applicable it is to your business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There are no physical robots in RPA. RPA is about software “bots” that interact with applications as if they were human users to perform routine, repetitive work in your place. It’s for any business in any industry, not just for manufacturing.
    • RPA is lightweight IT; it reduces the cost of entry, maintenance, and teardown of automation as well as the technological requirement of resources that maintain it, as it complements existing automation solutions in your toolkit.
    • RPA is rules-based. While AI promises to relax the rigidity of rules, it adds business risks that are poorly understood by both businesses and subject-matter experts. Rules-based “RPA 1.0” is mature and may pose a stronger business case than AI-enabled RPA.
    • RPA’s sweet spot is “swivel chair automation”: processes that require human workers to act as a conduit between several systems, moving between applications, manually keying, re-keying, copying, and pasting information. A bot can take their place.

    Impact and Result

    • Discover RPA and how it differentiates from other automation solutions.
    • Understand the benefits and risks of complementing RPA with AI.
    • Identify existing business processes best suited for automation with RPA.
    • Communicate RPA’s potential business benefits to stakeholders.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should use RPA to automate routine, repetitive data collection and processing work, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Discover robotic process automation

    Learn about RPA, including how it compares to IT-led automation rooted in business process management practices and the role of AI.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 1: Discover Robotic Process Automation
    • Robotic Process Automation Communication Template

    2. Identify processes best suited for robotic process automation

    Identify and prioritize candidate processes for RPA.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 2: Identify Processes Best Suited for Robotic Process Automation
    • Process Evaluation Tool for Robotic Process Automation
    • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
    [infographic]

    IT Metrics and Dashboards During a Pandemic

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}118|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement

    The ways you measure success as a business are based on the typical business environment, but during a crisis like a pandemic, the business environment is rapidly changing or significantly different.

    • How do you assess the scope of the risk?
    • How do you quickly align your team to manage new risks?
    • How do you remain flexible enough to adapt to a rapidly changing situation?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Measure what you have the data for and focus on managing the impacts to your employees, customers, and suppliers. Be willing to make decisions based on imperfect data. Don’t forget to keep an eye on the long-term objectives and remember that how you act now can reflect on your business for years to come.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s approach to:

    • Quickly assess the risk and identify critical items to manage.
    • Communicate what your decisions are based on so teams can either quickly align or challenge conclusions made from the data.
    • Quickly adjust your measures based on new information or changing circumstances.
    • Use the tools you already have and keep it simple.

    IT Metrics and Dashboards During a Pandemic Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to develop your temporary crisis dashboard.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Consider your organizational goals

    Identify the short-term goals for your organization and reconsider your long-term objectives.

    • Crisis Temporary Measures Dashboard Tool

    2. Build a temporary data collection and dashboard method

    Determine your tool for data collection and your data requirements and collect initial data.

    3. Implement a cadence for review and action

    Determine the appropriate cadence for reviewing the dashboard and action planning.

    [infographic]

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}178|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Application modernization is essential to stay competitive and productive in today’s digital environment. Your stakeholders have outlined their digital business goals that IT is expected to meet.
    • Your application portfolio cannot sufficiently support the flexibility and efficiency the business needs because of legacy challenges.
    • Your teams do not have a framework to illustrate, communicate, and justify the modernization effort and organizational changes in the language your stakeholders understand.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Build your digital applications around continuous modernization. End-user needs, technology, business direction, and regulations rapidly change in today’s competitive and fast-paced industry. This reality will quickly turn your modern applications into shelfware. Build continuous modernization at the center of your digital application vision to keep up with evolving business, end-user, and IT needs.
    • Application modernization is organizational change management. If you build and modernize it, they may not come. The crux of successful application modernization is centered on the strategic, well-informed, and onboarded adoption of changes in key business areas, capabilities, and processes. Organizational change management must be front and center so that applications are fit for purpose and are something that end users want and need to use.
    • Business-IT collaboration is not optional. Application modernization will not be successful if your lines of business (LOBs) and IT are not working together. IT must empathize how LOBs operate and proactively support the underlying operational systems. LOBs must be accountable for all products leveraging modern technologies and be able to rationalize the technical feasibility of their digital application vision.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the digital application vision. Gain a grounded understanding of the digital application construct and prioritize these attributes against your digital business goals.
    • Define your modernization approach. Obtain a thorough view of your business and technical complexities, risks, and impacts. Employ the right modernization techniques based on your organization’s change tolerance.
    • Build your roadmap. Clarify the organizational changes needed to support modernization and adoption of your digital applications.

    Modernize Your Applications Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically modernize your applications, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set your vision

    Describe your application vision and set the right modernization expectations with your stakeholders.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 1: Set Your Vision

    2. Identify your modernization opportunities

    Focus your modernization efforts on the business opportunities that your stakeholders care about.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 2: Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

    3. Plan your modernization

    Describe your modernization initiatives and build your modernization tactical roadmap.

    • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 3: Plan Your Modernization
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your Vision

    The Purpose

    Discuss the goals of your application modernization initiatives

    Define your digital application vision and priorities

    List your modernization principles

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear application modernization objectives and high priority value items

    Your digital application vision and attributes

    Key principles that will guide your application modernization initiatives

    Activities

    1.1 State Your Objectives

    1.2 Characterize Your Digital Application

    1.3 Define Your Modernization Principles

    Outputs

    Application modernization objectives

    Digital application vision and attributes definitions

    List of application modernization principles and guidelines

    2 Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Identify the value streams and business capabilities that will benefit the most from application modernization

    Conduct a change tolerance assessment

    Build your modernization strategic roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the value delivery improvements modernization can bring

    Recognizing the flexibility and tolerance of your organization to adopt changes

    Select an approach that best fits your organization’s goals and capacity

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the Opportunities

    2.2 Define Your Modernization Approach

    Outputs

    Value streams and business capabilities that are ideal modernization opportunities

    Your modernization strategic roadmap based on your change tolerance and modernization approach

    3 Plan Your Modernization

    The Purpose

    Identify the most appropriate modernization technique and the scope of changes to implement your techniques

    Develop an actionable tactical roadmap to complete your modernization initiatives

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of what must be changed to the organization and application considering your change tolerance

    An achievable modernization plan

    Activities

    3.1 Shortlist Your Modernization Techniques

    3.2 Roadmap Your Modernization Initiatives

    Outputs

    Scope of your application modernization initiatives

    Your modernization tactical roadmap

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}580|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $63,181 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • The enterprise architecture (EA) team is constantly challenged to articulate the value of its function.
    • The CIO has asked the EA team to help articulate the business value the team brings.
    • Traceability from the business goals and vision to the EA contributions often does not exist.
    • Also, clients often struggle with complexity, priorities, and agile execution.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • EA can deliver many benefits to an organization. However, to increase the likelihood of success, the EA group needs to deliver value to the business and cannot be seen solely as IT.
    • Support from the organization is needed.
    • An EA strategy anchored in a value proposition will ensure that EA focuses on driving the most critical outcomes in support of the organization’s enterprise strategy.
    • As agility is not just for project execution, architects need to understand ways to deliver their guidance to influence project execution in real time, to enable the enterprise agility, and to enhance their responsiveness to changing conditions.

    Impact and Result

    • Create an EA value proposition based on enterprise needs that clearly articulates the expected contributions of the EA function.
    • Establish the EA fundamentals (vision and mission statement, goals and objectives, and principles) needed to position the EA function to deliver the promised value proposition.
    • Identify the services that EA has to provide to the organization to deliver on the promised value proposition.

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy Deck – A guide to help you define services that your EA function will provide to the organization.

    Establish an effective EA function that will realize value for the organization with an EA strategy.

    • Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy – Phases 1-4

    2. EA Function Strategy Template – A communication tool to secure the approval of the EA strategy from organizational stakeholders.

    Use this template to document the outputs of the EA strategy and to communicate the EA strategy for approval by stakeholders.

    • EA Function Strategy Template

    3. Stakeholder Power Map Template – A template to help visualize the importance of various stakeholders and their concerns.

    Identify and prioritize the stakeholders that are important to your IT strategy development effort.

    • Stakeholder Power Map Template

    4. PESTLE Analysis Template – A template to help you complete and document a PESTLE analysis.

    Use this template to analyze the effect of external factors on IT.

    • PESTLE Analysis Template

    5. EA Value Proposition Template – A template to communicate the value EA can provide to the organization.

    Use this template to create an EA value proposition that explicitly communicates to stakeholders how an EA function can contribute to addressing their needs.

    • EA Value Proposition Template

    6. EA Goals and Objectives Template – A template to identify the EA goals that support the identified promises of value from the EA value proposition.

    Use this template to help set goals for your EA function based on the EA value proposition and identify objectives to measure the progression towards those EA goals.

    • EA Goals and Objectives Template

    7. EA Principles Template – A template to identify the universal EA principles relevant to your organization.

    Use this template to define relevant universal EA principles and create new EA principles to guide and inform IT investment decisions.

    • EA Principles Template – EA Strategy

    8. EA Service Planning Tool – A template to identify the EA services your organization will provide to deliver on the EA value proposition.

    Use this template to identify the EA services relevant to your organization and then define how those services will be accessed.

    • EA Service Planning Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Map the EA Contributions to Business Goals

    The Purpose

    Show an example of traceability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Members have a real-world example of traceability between business goals and EA contributions.

    Activities

    1.1 Start from the business goals of the organization.

    1.2 Document business and IT drivers.

    1.3 Identify EA contributions that help achieve the business goals.

    Outputs

    Business goals documented.

    Business and IT drivers documented.

    Identified EA contributions and traced them to business goals.

    2 Determine the Role of the Architect in the Agile Ceremonies of the Organization

    The Purpose

    Create an understanding about role of architect in Agile ceremonies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the role of the EA architect in Agile ceremonies.

    Activities

    2.1 Document the Agile ceremony used in the organization (based on SAFe or other Agile approaches).

    2.2 Determine which ceremonies the system architect will participate in.

    2.3 Determine which ceremonies the solution architect will participate in.

    2.4 Determine which ceremonies the enterprise architect will participate in.

    2.5 Determine architect syncs, etc.

    Outputs

    Documented the Agile ceremonial used in the organization (based on SAFe or other Agile approaches).

    Determined which ceremonies the system architect will participate in.

    Determined which ceremonies the solution architect will participate in.

    Determined which ceremonies the enterprise architect will participate in.

    Determined architect syncs, etc.

    Further reading

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Develop a strategy that fits the organization’s maturity and remains adaptable to unforeseen future changes.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Build a right-size enterprise architecture strategy

    Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Business & IT Strategy
    • Organizational Goals and Objectives
    • Business Drivers
    • Environment and Industry Trends
    • EA Capabilities and Services
    • Business Architecture
    • Data Architecture
    • Application Architecture
    • Integration Architecture
    • Innovation
    • Roles and Organizational Structure
    • Security Architecture
    • Technology Architecture
    • Integration Architecture
    • Insight and Knowledge
    • EA Operating Model
    Unlock the Value of Architecture
    • Increased Business and IT Alignment
    • Robust, Flexible, Scalable, Interoperable, Extensible and Reliable Solutions
    • Timely/Agile Service Delivery and Operations
    • Cost-Effective Solutions
    • Appropriate Risk Management to Address the Risk Appetite
    • Increased Competitive Advantage
    Current Environment
    • Business and IT Challenges
    • Opportunities
    • Enterprise Architecture Maturity

    Enterprise Architecture – Thought Model

    A thought model built around 'Enterprise Architecture', represented by a diagram on a cross-section of a ship which will be explained in the next slide. It begins with an arrow that says 'Organizational goals are the driving force and the ultimate goal' pointing to a bubble titled 'Organization' containing 'Analysis', 'Decisions', 'Actions'. An blue arrow on the right side with one '$' is labelled 'Iterations' and connects 'Organization' to 'Enterprise Architecture', 'Enterprise architecture creates new business value'. A green arrow on the left side with five '$' is labelled 'Goals' and connects back to 'Organization'. A the bottom, a bubble titled 'External forces, pressures, trends, data, etc.' has a blue arrow on the right side with one '$' connecting back to 'Enterprise Architecture'. Another blue arrow representing an output is labelled 'Outcomes' and originates from 'Enterprise Architecture'.

    Enterprise Architecture Capabilities

    A diagram on a cross-section of a ship representing 'Enterprise Architecture', including a row of process arrows beneath the ship pointing forward all labelled 'Agile iteration' and one airborne arrow above the stern pointing forward labelled 'Business Strategy'. Overlaid on the ship, starting at the back, are 'EA Strategy', 'EA Operating Model', 'Enterprise Principles, Methods, etc.', 'Foundational enterprise decisions: Business, Data/Apps, Technology, Integration, Security', 'Enterprise Reference Architecture', 'Goals, Value Chain, Capability, Business Processes', 'Enterprise Governance (e.g., Standard Mgmt.)', 'Domain Arch', 'Data & App Architecture', 'Security Architecture', 'Infrastructure: Cloud, Hybrid, etc.', at the very front is 'Implementation', and running along the bottom from back to front is 'Operations, Monitoring, and Continuous Improvement'.

    Analyst Perspective

    Enterprise architecture (EA) needs to be right-sized for the needs of the organization.

    Photo of Milena Litoiu, Principal/Senior Director, Enterprise Architecture, Info-Tech Research Group

    Enterprise architecture is NOT a one-size-fits-all endeavor. It needs to be right-sized to the needs of the organization.

    Enterprise architects are boots on the ground and part of the solution; in addition, they need to have a good understanding of the corporate strategy, vision, and goals and have a vested interest on the optimization of the outcomes for the enterprise. They also need to anticipate the moves ahead, to be able to determine future trends and how they will impact the enterprise.

    Milena Litoiu
    Principal/Senior Director, Enterprise Architecture
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Analyst Perspective

    EA provides business options based on a deep understanding of the organization.

    “Enterprise architects need to think about and consider different areas of expertise when formulating potential business options. By understanding the context, the puzzle pieces can combine to create a positive business outcome that aligns with the organization’s strategies. Sometimes there will be missing pieces; leveraging what you know to create an outline of the pieces and collaborating with others can provide a general direction.”

    Jean Bujold
    Senior Workshop Delivery Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    “The role of enterprise architecture is to eliminate misalignment between the business and IT and create value for the organization.”

    Reddy Doddipalli
    Senior Workshop Director, Research
    Info-Tech Research Group

    “Every transformation journey is an opportunity to learn: ‘Tell me and I forget. Teach me and I remember. Involve me and I learn.’ Benjamin Franklin.”

    Graham Smith
    Senior Lead Enterprise Architect and Independent Consultant

    Develop an enterprise architecture strategy that:

    • Helps the organization make decisions that are hard to change in a complex environment.
    • Fits the current organization’s maturity and remains flexible and adaptable to unforeseen future changes.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    We need to make decisions today for an unknown future. Decisions are influenced by:

    • Changes in the environment you operate in.
    • Complexity of both the business and IT landscapes.
    • IT’s difficulty in keeping up with business demands and remaining agile.
    • Program/project delivery pressure and long-term planning needs.
    • Other internal and external factors affecting your enterprise.

    Common Obstacles

    Decisions are often made:

    • Without a clear understanding of the business goals.
    • Without a holistic understanding; sometimes in conflict with one another.
    • That hinder the continuity of the organization.
    • That prevent value optimization at the enterprise level.

    The more complex an organization, the more players involved, the more difficult it is to overcome these obstacles.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Is a holistic, top-down approach, from the business goals all the way to implementation.
    • Has EA act as the canary in the coal mine. EA will identify and mitigate risks in the organization.
    • Enables EA to provide an essential service rather than be an isolated kingdom or an ivory tower.
    • Acknowledges that EA is a balancing act among competing demands.
    • Makes decisions using guiding principles and guardrails, to create a flexible architecture that can evolve and expand, enabling enterprise agility.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no “right architecture” for organizations of all sizes, maturities, and cultural contexts. The value of enterprise architecture can only be measured against the business goals of a single organization. Enterprise architecture needs to be right-sized for your organization.

    Info-Tech insight summary on arch. agility

    Continuous innovation is of paramount importance in achieving and maintaining competitive advantage in the marketplace.

    Business engagement

    It is important to trace architectural decisions to business goals. As business goals evolve, architecture should evolve as well.

    As new business input is provided during Agile cycles, architecture is continuously evolving.

    EA fundamentals

    EA fundamentals will shape how enterprise architects think and act, how they engage with the organization, what decisions they make, etc.

    Start small and lean and evolve as needed.

    Continuously align strategy with delivery and operations.

    Architects should establish themselves as business partners as well as implementation/delivery leaders.

    Enterprise services

    Definitions of enterprise services should start from the business goals of the organization and the capabilities IT needs to perform for the organization to survive in the marketplace.

    Continuous delivery and continuous innovation are the two facets of architecture.

    Tactical insight

    Your current maturity should be reflected as a baseline in the strategy.

    Tactical insight

    Take Agile/opportunistic steps toward your strategic North star.

    Tactical insight

    EA services differ based on goals, maturity, and the Agile appetite of the enterprise.

    From the best industry experts

    “The trick to getting value from enterprise architecture is to commit to the long haul.”

    Jeanne W. Ross, MIT CISR
    Co-author of Enterprise Architecture as Strategy: Creating a Foundation for Business Execution,
    Harvard Business Press, 2006.

    Typical EA maturity stages

    A line chart that moves through multiple stages titled 'Enterprise Architecture Maturity Stages (MIT CISR)' The five stages of the chart, starting on the left, are 'Business Silos', 'Standardized Technology', 'Optimized Core', 'Business Componentization', and 'Digital Ecosystem'. 'The trick to getting value from enterprise architecture is to commit to the long haul.' The line begins at the bottom left of the chart and gradually creates a stretched S shape to the top right. Points along the line, respective to the aforementioned stages, are 'Locally Optimal Business Solutions', 'Technology Infrastructure Platform', 'Digitized Process Platform', 'Repository of Reusable Business Components', 'Components Connecting with Partners' Components', and at the end of the line, outside of the chart is 'Strategic Business Value from Technology'. Percentages along the bottom, respective to the aforementioned stages, read 20%, 36%, 45%, 7%, 2%. Percentages are rough approximations based on findings reported in Mocker, M., Ross, J.W., Beath, C.M., 'How Companies Use Digital Technologies to Enhance Customer Offerings--Summary of Survey Findings,' MIT CISR Working Paper No. 434, Feb. 2019. Copyright MIT, 2019.

    Enterprise Architecture maturity

    A maturity ladder visualization for 'Enterprise Architecture' with five color-coded levels. From the bottom up, the colors and designations are Red: 'Unstable', Orange: 'Firefighter', Yellow: 'Trusted Operator', Blue: 'Business Partner', and Green: 'Innovator'. Beside the visualization at the bottom it says 'EA is here', then an arrow in the direction of the top where it says 'EA needs to be here'.
    • Innovator – Transforms the Business
      Reliable Technology Innovation
    • Business Partner – Expands the Business
      Effective Use of Enterprise Architecture in all Business Projects, Enterprise Architecture Is Strategically Engaged
    • Trusted Operator – Optimizes the Business
      Enterprise Architecture Provides Business, Data, Application & Technology Architectures for All IT Projects
    • Firefighter – Supports the Business
      Reliable Architecture for Some Practices/Projects
    • Unstable – Struggles to Support
      Inability to Provide Reliable Architectures

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no “absolute maturity” for organizations of all sizes, maturities, and cultural contexts. The maturity of enterprise architecture can only be measured against the business goals of the organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4 Session 5
    Activities
    Identify organizational needs and landscape

    1.0 Interview stakeholders to identify business and technology needs

    1.1 Review organization perspective, including business needs, challenges, and strategic directions

    1.2 Conduct PESTLE analysis to identify business and technology trends

    1.3 Conduct SWOT analysis to identify business and technology internal perspective

    Create the EA value proposition

    2.1 Identify and prioritize EA stakeholders

    2.2 Create business and technology drivers from needs

    2.3 Define the EA value proposition

    2.4 Identify EA maturity and target

    Define the EA fundamentals

    3.1 Define the EA goals and objectives

    3.2 Determine EA scope

    3.3 Create a set of EA principles

    3.4. Define the need of a methodology/agility

    3.5 Create the EA vision and mission statement

    Identify the EA framework and communicate the EA strategy

    4.1 Define initial EA operating model and governance mechanism

    4.2 Define the activities and services the EA function will provide, derived from business goals

    4.3 Determine effectiveness measures

    4.4 Create EA roadmap and next steps

    4.5 Build communication plan for stakeholders

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Generate workshop report

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop report and to discuss next steps

    Outcomes
    1. Stakeholder insights
    2. Organizational needs, challenges, and direction summary
    3. PESTLE & SWOT analysis
    1. Stakeholder power map
    2. List of business and technology drivers with associated pains
    3. Set of EA contributions articulating the promises of value in the EA value proposition
    4. EA maturity assessment
    1. EA scope
    2. List of EA principles
    3. EA vision statement
    4. EA mission statement
    5. Statement about role of enterprise architect relative to agility
    1. EA capabilities mapped to business goals of the organization
    2. List of EA activities and services the EA function is committed to providing
    3. KPI definitions
    4. EA roadmap
    5. EA communication plan
    1. Completed workshop report on EA strategy with roadmap, recommendations, and outcomes from workshop

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    While variations depend on the maturity of the organization as well as its aspirations, these are some typical steps:

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Explore the role of EA in your organization.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #2: Identify and prioritize stakeholders.
    • Call #3: Use a PESTLE analysis to identify business and technology needs.
    • Call #4: Prepare for stakeholder interviews.
    • Call #5: Discuss your EA value proposition.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #5: Understand the importance of EA fundamentals.
    • Call #6: Define the relevant EA services and their contributions to the organization.
    • Call #7: Measure EA effectiveness.
    • Phase 4

    • Call #8: Build your EA roadmap and communication plan.
    • Call #9: Discuss the EA role relative to agility.
    • Call #10: Summarize results and plan next steps.

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Phase 1

    Explore the Role of Enterprise Architecture

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Explore a general EA strategy approach
    • 1.2 Introduce Agile EA architecture

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Define the business and technology drivers
    • 2.2 Define your value proposition

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Realize the importance of EA fundamentals
    • 3.2 Finalize the EA fundamentals

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Select relevant EA services
    • 4.2 Finalize the set of services and secure approval

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Define the role of the group and different roles inside the enterprise architecture competency.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Enterprise architecture optimizes the outcomes of the entire organization

    Corporate Strategy –› Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architecture needs to have input from the corporate strategy of the organization. Similarly, EA governance needs to be informed by corporate governance. If this is not the case, it is like planning and governing with your eyes closed.

    Existing EA functions vary in the value they achieve due to their level of maturity

    EA Functions
    Operationalized
    • EA function is operationalized and operates as an effective core function.
    • Effectively aligns the business and IT through governance, communication, and engagement.
    –––› Common EA value
    Decreased cost Reduced risk
    Emerging
    • Emerging but limited ad hoc EA function.
    • Limited by lack of alignment to the business and IT.
    –x–› Cut through complexity Increased agility
    (Source: Booz & Co., 2009)

    Benefits of enterprise architecture

    1. Focuses on business outcomes (business centricity)
    2. Provides traceability of architectural decisions to/from business goals
    3. Provides ways to measure results
    4. Provides consistency across different lines of business: establishes a common vocabulary, reducing inconsistencies
    5. Reduces duplications, creating additional efficiencies at the enterprise level
    6. Presents an actionable migration to the strategy/vision, through short-term milestones/steps

    Benefits of enterprise architecture continued

    1. Done right, increases agility
    2. Done right, reduces costs
    3. Done right, mitigates risks
    4. Done right, stimulates innovation
    5. Done right, helps achieve the stated business goals (e.g. customer satisfaction) and improves the enterprise agility.
    6. Done right, enhances competitive advantage of the enterprise

    Qualities of a well-established and practical enterprise architecture

    1. Objective
    2. Impartial
    3. Credible
    4. Practical
    5. Measurable
    6. (Source: University of Toronto, 2021)

    Role of the enterprise architecture

    • Primarily to set up guardrails for the enterprise, so Agile teams work independently in a safe, ready-to-integrate environment
    • Establish strategy
    • Establish priorities
    • Continuously innovate
    • Establish enterprise standards and enterprise guardrails to guide Solution/Domain/Portfolio Architectures
    • Align with and be informed by the organization’s direction

    Members of the Architecture Board:

    • Chief (Business) Strategist
    • Lead Enterprise Architect
    • Business SME from each major domain
    • IT SME from each major domain
    • Operational & Infrastructure SME
    • Security & Risk Officer
    • Process Management
    • Other relevant stakeholders

    For enterprise architecture to contribute, EA must address the organizational vision and goals

    External Factors –› Layers of a Business Model
    (Organization)
    –› Architecture Supported Transformation
    Industry Changes Business Strategy
    Competition Value Streams
    (Business Outcomes)
    Regulatory Impacts Business Capability Maps
    • Security
    Workforce Impacts Execution
    • Policies
    • Processes
    • People
    • Information
    • Applications
    • Technology

    Info-Tech Insight

    External forces can affect the organization as a whole; they need to be included as part of the holistic approach for enterprise architecture.

    How does EA provide value?

    Business and Technology Drivers – A set of statements created from business and technology needs. Gathered from information sources, it communicates improvements needed.

    • Vision, Aspirations, Long-Term Goals – Vision, aspirations, long term goals

      • EA Contributions – EA contributions that will alleviate obstructions. Removing the obstructions will allow EA to help satisfy business and technology needs.

        • Promise of Value – A statement that depicts a concrete benefit that the EA practice can provide for the organization in response to business and technology drivers.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architecture needs to create and be part of a culture where decisions are made through collaboration while focusing on enterprise-wide efficiencies (e.g. reduced duplication, reusability, enterprise-wide cost minimization, overall security, comprehensive risk mitigation, and any other cross-cutting concerns) to optimize corporate business goals.

    The EA function scope is influenced by the EA value proposition and previously developed EA fundamentals

    Establish the EA function scope by using the EA value proposition and EA fundamentals that have already been developed. After defining the EA function scope, refer back to these statements to ensure it accurately reflects the EA value proposition and EA fundamentals.

    EA value proposition

    +

    EA vision statement
    EA mission statement
    EA goals and objectives

    —›
    Influences

    Organizational coverage

    Architectural domains

    Depth

    Time horizon

    —›
    Defines
    EA function scope

    EA team characteristics

    Create the optimal EA strategy by including personnel who understand a broad set of topics in the organization

    The team assembled to create the EA strategy will be defined as the “EA strategy creation team” in this blueprint.

    • Someone who has been in the organization for a long time and has built strong relationships with key stakeholders. This individual can exert influence and become the EA strategy sponsor.
    • An individual who understands how the different technology components in the organization support its business operations.
    • Someone in the organization who can communicate IT concepts to business managers in a language the business understands.
    • An individual with a strategy background or perspective on the organization. This individual will understand where the organization is headed.
    • Any individuals who feel an acute pain as a result of poorly made investment decisions. They can be champions of EA strategy in their respective functions.

    EA skills and competencies

    Apart from business know-how, the EA team should have the following skills

    • Architectural thinking
    • Analytical
    • Trusted, credible
    • Can handle complexity
    • Can change perspectives
    • Can learn fast (business and technology)
    • Independent and steadfast
    • Not afraid to go against the stream
    • Able to understand problems of others with empathy
    • Able to estimate scaling on design decisions such as model patterns
    • Intrinsic capability to identify where relevant details are
    • Able to identify root causes quickly
    • Able to communicate complex issues clearly
    • Able to negotiate and come up with acceptable solutions
    • Can model well
    • Able to change perspectives (from business to implementation and operational perspectives).

    Use of enterprise architecture methodologies

    Balance EA methodologies with Agile approaches

    Using an enterprise architecture methodology is a good starting point to achieving a common understanding of what that is. Often, organizations agree to "tailor" methodologies to their needs.

    The use of lean/Agile approaches will increase efficiency beyond traditional methodologies.

    Use of EA methodologies vs. Agile methods

    When to use what?

    • Use an existing methodology to structure your thinking and establish a common vocabulary to communicate basic concepts, processes, and approaches.
    • Customize the methodology to your needs; make it as lean as possible.
    • Execute in an Agile way, but keep in mind the thoughtful checks recommended by your end-to-end methodology.
    • Clarify goals.
    • Have good measures and metrics in place.
    • Continuously monitor progress, fit for purpose, etc.
    • Highlight risks, roadblocks, etc.
    • Get support.
    • Communicate vision, goals, key decisions, etc.
    • Iterate.

    Business strategy first, EA strategy second, and EA operating model third

    Corporate Strategy
    “Why does our enterprise exist in the market?”
    EA Strategy
    “What does EA need to be and do to support the enterprise’s ability to meet its goals? What is EA’s value proposition?”
    Business & IT Operating Culture
    “How does the organization’s culture and structure influence the EA operating model?”
    EA Operating Model
    How does EA need to operate on a daily basis to deliver the value proposition?”

    High-level perspective

    Creating an effective practice involves many moving parts.

    A visual of the many moving parts in an effective practice; there are 6 smaller circles in a large circle, an input arrow labelled 'Environment', an output arrow labelled 'Results', and a thin arrow connecting 'Results' back to 'Environment'. Of the circles, 'Leadership' is in the center, connected to each of the others, while 'Culture', 'Strategy', 'Core Processes', 'Structure', and 'Systems' create a cycle. (Source: The Center for Organizational Design)

    • Environment. Influences that are external to the organization, such as customer perceptions, changing needs, and changes in technology, and the organization’s ability to adjust to them.
    • Strategy. The business strategy defines how the organization adds value and acts as the rudder to direct the organization. Organizational strategy defines the character of the organization, what it wants to be, its values, its vision, its mission, etc.
    • Core Process. The flow of work through the organization.
    • Structure. How people are organized around business processes. Includes reporting structures, boundaries, roles, and responsibilities. The structure should assist the organization with achieving its goals rather than hinder its performance.
    • Systems. Interrelated sets of tasks or activities that help organize and coordinate work.
    • Culture. The personality of the organization: its leadership style, attitudes, habits, and management practices. Culture measures how well philosophy is translated into practice.
    • Results. Measurement of how well the organization achieved its goals.
    • Leadership. Brings the organization together by providing vision and strategy; designing, monitoring, and nurturing the culture; and fostering agility.

    The answer to the strategic planning entity dilemma is enterprise architecture

    Enterprise architecture is a discipline that defines the structure and operation of an organization. The intent of enterprise architecture is to determine how an organization can most effectively achieve its current and future objectives.

    Vision, goals, and aspirations as well internal and external pressures

    Business current state

    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    Enterprise Architecture

    IT current state

    • IT asset management
    • Database services
    • Application development

    Business target state

    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • Existing capability
    • New capability

    IT target state

    • IT asset management
    • Database services
    • Application development
    • Business analytics
    Complex, overlapping, contradictory world of humans vs. logical binary world of IT
    EA is a planning tool to help achieve the corporate business goals

    EA spans across all the domains of architecture

    Business architecture is the cornerstone that sets the foundation for all other architectural domains: security, data, application, and technology.

    A flow-like diagram titled 'Enterprise Architecture' beginning with 'Digital Architecture' and 'Business Architecture', which feeds into 'Security Architecture', which feeds into both 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture', which both feed into 'Technology Architecture: Infrastructure'.

    “An enterprise architecture practice is both difficult and costly to set up. It is normally built around a process of peer review and involves the time and talent of the strategic technical leadership of an enterprise.” (The Open Group Architecture Framework, 2018)

    Enterprise architecture deployment continuum

    A diagram visualizing the Enterprise architecture deployment continuum with two continuums, 'Level of Embedding' and 'EA Value', assigning terms to EA deployments based on where they fall. On the left is an 'Ivory Tower' configuration: EA' is separated from the 'BU's but is still controlling them. Level of Embedding: 'Centralized', EA Value: 'Dictatorship'. In the center is a 'Balanced' configuration: 'EA' is spread across and connected to each 'BU'. Level of Embedding: 'Federated', EA Value: 'Democracy'. On the right is a 'Siloed' configuration: Each 'BU' has its own separate 'EA'. Level of Embedding: 'Decentralized', EA Value: 'Abdication of enterprise role'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The primary question during the design of the EA operating model is how to integrate the EA function with the rest of the business.

    If the EA practice functions on its own, you end up with ivory tower syndrome and a dictatorship.

    If you totally embed the EA function within business units it will become siloed with no enterprise value.

    Organizations need to balance consistency at the enterprise level with creativity from the grass roots.

    Enterprise vs. Program/Portfolio/Domain

    Enterprise vs. Program/Portfolio/Domain. Image depicts where Enterprise Scope overlaps Program/Portfolio Scope. Enterprise Scope includes Business Architecture. Program/Portfolio Scope includes Business Requirements, Business Process, and Solutions Architecture. Overlap between scope includes Technology Architecture, Data Architecture, and Applications Architecture.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Decisions at the enterprise level apply across multiple programs/portfolios/solutions and represent the guardrails set for all to play within.

    Decide on the degree of centralization

    Larger organizations with multiple domains/divisions or business units will need to decide which architecture functions will be centralized and which, if any, will be decentralized as they plan to scope their EA program. What are the core functions to be centralized for the EA to deliver the greatest benefits?

    Typically, we see a need to have a centralized repository of reusable assets and standards across the organization, while other approaches/standards can operate locally.

    Centralization

    • Allows for more strategic planning
    • Visibility into standards and assets across the organization promotes rationalization and cost savings
    • Ensures enterprise-wide assets are used
    • More strategic sourcing of vendors and resellers
    • Can centrally negotiate pricing for better deals
    • Easier to manage risk and prepare for audits
    • Greater coordination of resources
    • Derives benefits from enterprise decisions, e.g. integration…

    Decentralization

    • May allow for more innovation
    • May be easier to demonstrate local compliance if the organization is geographically decentralized
    • May be easier to procure software if offices are in different countries
    • Deployment and installation of software on user devices may be easier

    EA strategy

    What is the role of enterprise architecture vis-à-vis business goals?

    • What needs to be done?
    • Who needs to be involved?
    • When?
    • Where?
    • Why?
    • How?

    Top-down approach starting from the goals of the organization

      What the Business Sees...
    • Business Goals
      • Value Streams
          What the CxO Sees...
        • Capabilities
            What the App Managers See...
          • Processes
            • Applications
                What the Program Managers See...
              • Programs/Projects

    Info-Tech Insight

    Being able to answer the deceptively simple question “How am I doing?” requires traceability to and from the business goals to be achieved all the way to applications, to infrastructure, and ultimately, to the funded initiatives (portfolios, programs, projects, etc.).

    Measure EA strategy effectiveness by tracking the benefits it provides to the corporate business goals

    The success of the EA function spans across three main dimensions:

    1. The delivery of EA-enabled business outcomes that are most important to the enterprise.
    2. The alignment between the business and the technology from a planning perspective.
    3. Improvements in the corporate business goals due to EA contributions (standardization, rationalization, reuse, etc.).

    Corporate Business Goals

    • Reduction in operating costs
    • Decreased regulatory compliance infractions
    • Increased revenue from existing channels
    • Increased revenue from new channels
    • Faster time to business value
    • Improved business agility
    • Reduction in enterprise risk exposure

    EA Contributions

    • Alignment of IT investments to business strategy
    • Achievement of business results directly linked to IT involvement
    • Application and platform rationalization
    • Standards in place
    • Flexible architecture
    • Better integration
    • Higher organizational satisfaction with technology-enabled services and solutions

    Measurements

    • Cost reductions based on application and platform rationalization
    • Time and cost reductions due to standardization
    • Time reduction for integration
    • Service reused
    • Stakeholder satisfaction with EA services
    • Increase in customer satisfaction
    • Rework minimized
    • Lower cost of integration
    • Risk reduction
    • Faster time to market
    • Better scalability, etc.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must create clear and smart KPIs (key performance indicators) across the board.

    From corporate strategy to enterprise architecture

    A model connecting 'Enterprise Architecture' with 'Corporate Strategy' through 'EA Services' and 'EA Strategy'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In the absence of a corporate strategy, enterprise architecture is missing its North Star.

    However, enterprise architects can partner with the business strategists to build the needed vision.

    Traceability to and from business corporate business goals to EA contributions (sample)

    A model connecting 'Enterprise Architecture' with 'Corporate Goals' through 'EA Contributions'.

    Enterprise architecture journey

    The enterprise architecture journey, from left to right: 'Business Goals' and 'EA Maturity Assessment', 'EA Strategy', 'Industry-Specific Capability Model' and 'Customized to the Organization's Needs', 'EA Operating Model' and 'EA Governance', 'Business Architecture' and 'EA Tooling', 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture', 'Infrastructure Architecture'.

    Agile architecture principles

    Agile architecture principles:
    • Fast learning cycle
    • Explore alternatives
    • Create environment for decentralized ideation and innovation

    According to the Scaled Agile Framework, three of the most applicable principles for the architectural professions refer to the following:

    1. "Fast learning cycle" refers to learning cycles that allow for quick reiterations as well as the opportunity to fail fast to learn fast.
    2. "Explore alternatives" refers to the exploration phase and also to the need to make tough decisions and balance competing demands.
    3. "Create environment for decentralized ideation and innovation" ensures that no one has a monopoly on innovation. Moreover, EA needs to invite ideas from various stakeholders (from the business to operations as well as implementers, etc.).

    Architecture roles in lean enterprises

    Typical architecture roles in modern/Agile lean enterprises

    • System Architect
    • Solution Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Depth vs. strategy focus

    Typical architect roles

    A graph with different architect roles mapped onto it. Axes are 'Low Strategic Impact' to 'High Strategic Impact' and 'Breadth' to 'Depth'. 'Enterprise Architect' has the highest strategic impact and most breadth. 'Technical/System Architect' has the lowest strategic impact and most depth. 'Solution Architect' sits in the middle of both axes.

    Architecture roles continued

    The three architect roles from above and their impacts on the list of 'Common Domains' to the right. 'Enterprise Architect's impact is 'Across Value Streams', 'Solution Architect's impact is 'Across Systems', 'Technical/System Architect's impact is 'Single System'. Adapted from Scaled Agile.

    Common Domains

    Business Architecture

    Information Architecture

    Application Architecture

    Technical Architecture

    Integration Architecture

    Security Architecture

    Others

    Info-Tech Insight

    All architects are boots on the ground and play in the solutioning space. What differs is their decisions’ impact (the enterprise architect’s decisions affects all domains and solutions).

    SAFe definitions of the Enterprise/Solution and System Architect roles can be found here.

    The role of the Enterprise Architect is detailed here.

    Collaboration models across the enterprise

    A collaboration model with 'Enterprise Architecture' at the top consisting of a 'Chief Enterprise Architect', 'Enterprise Architects', and 'EA Concerns across solutions': 'Architect A', 'Architect B', and 'Architect C'. Each lettered Architect is connected to their respective 'Solution Architect (A-C)' which runs their respective 'Delivery Team (A-C)' with 'Other Team Members'.(Adapted from Disciplined Agile)

    There are both formal and informal collaborations between enterprise architects and solution architects across the enterprise.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architects should collaborate with solutions architects to create the best solutions at the enterprise level and to provide guidance across the board.

    Architect roles in SAFe

    According to Scale Agile Framework 5 for Lean Enterprises:

    • The system architect participates in the Essential SAFe
    • Solution architects and system architects participate in Large Solution
    • The enterprise architect participates in the Portfolio SAFe
    • Enterprise, solution, and system architects are all involved in Full SAFe

    Please check the SAFe Scaled Agile site for detailed information on the approach.

    Architect roles and their participation in Agile events (see likely events and a typical calendar)

    Info-Tech Insight

    A clear commitment for architects to achieve and support agility is needed. Architects should not be in an ivory tower; they should be hands on and engaged in all relevant Agile ceremonies, like the pre- and post-program increment (PI) planning, etc.

    Architect syncs are also required to ensure the needed collaboration.

    Architect participation in Agile ceremonies, according to SAFe:

    Architecture runway (at scale)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Architecting for scale, modularity, and extensibility is key for the architecture to adapt to changing conditions and evolve.

    Proactively address NFRs; architect for performance and security.

    Continuously refine the solution intent.

    For large solutions, longer foundational architectural runways are needed.

    Having an intentional continuous improvement/continuous development (CI/CD) pipeline to continuously release, test, and monitor is key to evolving large and complex systems.

    Parallel continuous exploration/integration/deployment

    A cycle titled DevOps containing three smaller cycles labelled 'Continuous Explorations', 'Continuous Integration', and 'Continuous Deployment'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Architects need to help make some fundamental decisions, e.g. help define the environment that best supports continuous innovation or exploration and continuous integration, deployment, and delivery.

    Typical strategic enterprise architecture involvement

    Enterprise Architect —DRIVES–› Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Enterprise Architecture Strategy
    • Application Strategy
    • Business Strategy
    • Data Strategy
    • Implementation Strategy
    • Infrastructure Strategy
    • Inter-domain Collaboration
    • Integration Strategy
    • Operations Strategy
    • Security Strategy
    • (Adapted from Scaled Agile)

    The EA statement relative to agility

    The enterprise architecture statement relative to agility specifies the architects’ responsibilities as well as the Agile protocols they will participate in. This statement will guide every architect’s participation in planning meetings, pre- and post-PI, various syncs, etc. Use simple and concise terminology; speak loudly and clearly.

    Strong EA statement relative to agility has the following characteristics:

    • Describes what different architect roles do to achieve the vision of the organization
    • In an agile way
    • Compelling
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Specific
    • Concise

    Sample EA statement relative to agility

    • Create strategies that provide guardrails for the organization, provide standards, reusable assets, accelerators, and other decisions at the enterprise level that support agility.
    • Participate in pre-PI and post-PI planning activities, architect syncs, etc.

    A clear statement can include additional details surrounding the enterprise architect’s role relative to agility

    Below is a sample of connecting keywords to form an enterprise architect role statement, relative to agility.

    Optimize, transform, and innovate by defining and implementing the [Company]’s target enterprise architecture in an agile way.

    Optimize – We collaborate with the business to analyze and optimize business capabilities and business processes to enable the agile and efficient attainment of [Company name] business objectives.

    Transform – We support IT-enabled business transformation programs by building and maintaining a shared vision of the future-state enterprise and consistently communicating it to stakeholders.

    Innovate – We identify and develop new and creative opportunities for IT to enable the business. We communicate the art of the possible to the business.

    Defining and implementing – We engage with project teams early and guide solution design and selection to ensure alignment to the target-state enterprise architecture and provide guidance and accelerators.

    Target enterprise structure in an agile way – We analyze business needs and priorities and assess the current state of the enterprise. We build and maintain the target enterprise architecture blueprints that define:

    • Business capabilities and processes (business architecture)
    • Data, application, and technology assets that enable business capabilities and processes (technology architecture)
    • Architecture principles
    • Standards and reusable assets
    • Continuous exploration, integration, and deployment

    Traditional vs. Agile approaches

    Traditional Enterprise Architecture Next-Generation Enterprise Architecture
    Scope: Technology focused Business transformation (scope includes both business and technology)
    Bottom up Top down
    Inside out Outside In
    Point to point; difficult to change Expandable, extensible, evolvable
    Control-based: Governance intensive; often over-centralized Guidance-based: Collaboration and partnership-driven based on accepted guardrails
    Big up-front planning Incremental/dynamic planning; frequent changes
    Functional siloes and isolated projects, programs, and portfolios Enterprise-driven outcome optimization (across value streams)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The role of the architecture in Lean (Agile) approaches is to set up the needed guardrails and ensure a safe environment where everyone can be effective and creative.

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Phase 2

    Create the EA Value Proposition

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Explore a general EA strategy approach
    • 1.2 Introduce Agile EA architecture

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Define the business and technology drivers
    • 2.2 Define your value proposition

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Realize the importance of EA fundamentals
    • 3.2 Finalize the EA fundamentals

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Select relevant EA services
    • 4.2 Finalize the set of services and secure approval

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and prioritize EA stakeholders.
    • Create business and technology drivers from stakeholder information.
    • Identify business pains and technology drivers.
    • Define EA contributions to alleviate the pains.
    • Create promises of value to fully articulate the value proposition.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Step 2.1

    Define the Business and Technology Drivers

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Use a stakeholder power map to identify and prioritize EA stakeholders
    • 2.1.2 Conduct a PESTLE analysis
    • 2.1.3 Review strategic planning documents
    • 2.1.4 Conduct EA stakeholder interviews

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Learn the five-step process to create an EA value proposition.
    • Uncover business and technology needs from stakeholders.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    An understanding of your organization’s EA needs.

    Create the Value Proposition

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Value proposition is an important step in the creation of the EA strategy

    Creating an EA value proposition should be the first step to realizing a healthy EA function. The EA value proposition demonstrates to organizational stakeholders the importance of EA in helping to realize their needs.

    Five steps towards the successful articulation of EA value proposition:

    1. Identify and prioritize stakeholders. The EA function must know to whom to communicate the value proposition.
    2. Construct business and technology drivers. Drivers are derived from the needs of the business and IT. Needs come from the analysis of external factors, strategic documents, and interviewing stakeholders. Helping stakeholders and the organization realize their needs demonstrates the value of EA.
    3. Discover pains that prevent driver realization. There are always challenges that obstruct drivers of the organization. Find out what they are to get closer to showing the value of EA.
    4. Brainstorm EA contributions. Pains that obstruct drivers have now been identified. To demonstrate EA’s value, think about how EA can help to alleviate those pains. Create statements that show how EA’s contribution will be able to overcome the pain to show the value of EA.
    5. Derive promises of value. Complete the articulation of value for the EA value proposition by stating how realizing the business or technology will provide in terms of value for the organization. Speak with the stakeholders to discover the value that can be achieved.

    Info-Tech Insight

    EA can deliver many benefits to an organization. To increase the likelihood of success, each EA group needs to commit to delivering value to their organization based on the current operating environment and the desired direction of the enterprise. An EA value proposition will articulate the group’s promises of value to the enterprise.

    The foundation of an optimal EA value proposition is laid by defining the right stakeholders

    All stakeholders need to know how the EA function can help them. Provide the stakeholders with an understanding of the EA strategy’s impact on the business by involving them.

    A stakeholder map can be a powerful tool to help identify and prioritize stakeholders. A stakeholder map is a visual sketch of how various stakeholders interact with your organization, with each other, and with external audience segments.

    An example stakeholder map with the 'Key players' quadrant highlighted, it includes 'CEO', 'CIO', and the modified position of 'CFO' after being engaged.

    “Stakeholder management is critical to the success of every project in every organization I have ever worked with. By engaging the right people in the right way in your project, you can make a big difference to its success…and to your career.” (Rachel Thompson, MindTools)

    2.1.1 Use a stakeholder power map to identify and prioritize EA stakeholders

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from the EA strategy creation team

    Output: An identified and prioritized set of stakeholders for the EA function to target

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    1. A stakeholder power map helps to visualize the importance of various stakeholders and their concerns so you can prioritize your time according to the most powerful and most impacted stakeholders.
    2. Evaluate each stakeholder in terms of power, Involvement, impact, and support.
      • Power: How much influence does the stakeholder have? Enough to drive the project forward or into the ground?
      • Involvement: How interested is the stakeholder? How involved is the stakeholder in the project already?
      • Impact: To what degree will the stakeholder be impacted? Will this significantly change how they do their job?
      • Support: Is the stakeholder a supporter of the project? Neutral? A resistor?
    3. Map each stakeholder to an area on the Power Map Template.
    4. Ask yourself if the power map looks accurate. Is there someone who has no involvement in EA strategy development but should?
    5. Some stakeholders may have influence over others. For example, a COO who highly values the opinion of the Director of Operations would be influenced by that director. Draw an arrow from one stakeholder to another to signify this relationship.

    Download the Stakeholder Power Map Template for more detailed instructions on completing this activity.

    Each stakeholder will have a set of needs that will influence the final EA value proposition

    All stakeholders will have a set of needs they would like to address. Take those needs and translate them into business and technology drivers. Drivers help clearly articulate to stakeholders, and the EA function, the stakeholder needs to be addressed.

    Business Driver

    Business drivers are internal or external business conditions, changing business capabilities, and changing market trends that impact the way EA operates and provides value to the enterprise.

    Examples:

    Ensure corporate compliance with legislation pertaining to data and security (e.g. regulated oil fields).

    Enable the automation and digitization of internal processes and services to business stakeholders.

    Technology Driver

    Technology drivers are internal or external technology conditions or factors that are not within the control of the EA group that impact the way that the EA group operates and provides value to the enterprise.

    Examples:

    Establish standards and policies for enabling the organization to take advantage of cloud and mobile technologies.

    Reduce the frequency of shadow IT by lowering the propensity to make business–technology decisions in isolation.

    (Source: The Strategic CFO, 2013)

    Gather information from stakeholders to begin the process of distilling business and technology drivers

    Review information sources, then analyze them to derive business and technology drivers. Information sources are not targeted towards EA stakeholders. Analyze the information sources to create drivers that are relevant to EA stakeholders.

    Information Sources Drivers (Examples)

    PESTLE Analysis

    Strategy Documents

    Stakeholder Interviews

    SWOT Analysis

    —›

    Analysis

    —›

    Help the organization align technology investments with corporate strategy

    Ensure corporate compliance with legislation.

    Increase the organization’s speed to market.

    Business and Technology Needs

    By examining information sources, the EA team will come across a set of business and technology needs. Through analysis, these needs can be synthesized into drivers.

    The PESTLE analysis will help you uncover external factors impacting the organization

    PESTLE examines six perspectives for external factors that may impact business and technology needs. Below are prompting questions to facilitate a PESTLE analysis working session.

    Political
    • Will a change in government (at any level) affect your organization?
    • Do inter-government or trade relations affect you?
    • Are there shareholder needs or demands that must be considered?
    • How are your costs changing (moving off-shore, fluctuations in markets, etc.)?
    • Do currency fluctuations have an effect on your business?
    • Can you attract and pay for top-quality talent (e.g. desirable location, reasonable cost of living, changes to insurance requirements)?
    Economic
    Social
    • What are the demographics of your customers and/or employees?
    • What are the attitudes of your customers and/or staff (e.g. do they require social media, collaboration, transparency of costs)?
    • What is the general lifecycle of an employee (i.e. is there high turnover)?
    • Is there a market of qualified staff?
    • Is your business seasonal?
    • Do you require constant technology upgrades (e.g. faster network, new hardware)?
    • What is the appetite for innovation within your industry/business?
    • Are there demands for increasing data storage, quality, BI, etc.?
    • Are you looking to cloud technologies?
    • What is the stance on bring your own device?
    • Are you required to do a significant amount of development work in-house?
    Technological
    Legal
    • Are there changes to trade laws?
    • Are there changes to regulatory requirements (i.e. data storage policies, privacy policies)?
    • Are there union factors that must be considered?
    • Is there a push towards being environmentally friendly?
    • Does the weather have any effect on your business (hurricanes, flooding, etc.)?
    Environmental

    2.1.2 Conduct a PESTLE analysis

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: Identified set of business and technology needs from PESTLE

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    1. Begin conducting the PESTLE analysis by breaking the participants into groups. Divide the six different perspectives amongst the groups.
    2. Ask each group to begin to derive business and technology needs from their assigned perspectives. Use some of the areas noted below along with the questions on the previous slide to derive business and technology needs.
      • Political: Examine taxes, environmental regulations, and zoning restrictions.
      • Economic: Examine interest rates, inflation rate, exchange rates, the financial and stock markets, and the job market.
      • Social: Examine gender, race, age, income, disabilities, educational attainment, employment status, and religion.
      • Technological: Examine servers, computers, networks, software, database technologies, wireless capabilities, and availability of Software as a Service.
      • Legal: Examine trade laws, labor laws, environmental laws, and privacy laws.
      • Environmental: Examine green initiatives, ethical issues, weather patterns, and pollution.
    3. Ask each group to take into account the following questions when deriving business and technology needs:
      • Will business components require any changes to address the factor?
      • Will information technology components changes be needed to address any factor?
    4. Have each team record its findings. Have each team present its list and have remaining teams give feedback and additional suggestions. Record any changes in this step.

    Download the PESTLE Analysis Template to assist with completing this activity.

    Strategic planning documents can provide information regarding the direction of the organization

    Some organizations (and business units) create an authoritative strategy document. These documents contain corporate aspirations and outline initiatives, reorganizations, and shifts in strategy. From these documents, a set of business and technology needs can be generated.

    Overt Statements

    • Corporate objectives and initiatives are often explicitly stated in these documents. Look for statements that begin with phrases such as “Our corporate objectives are…”
    • Remember that different organizations use different terminology; if you cannot find the word goal or objective then look for “pillar,” “imperative,” “theme,” etc.

    Turn these statements to business and technology needs by:

    Asking the following:
    • Is there a need from a business perspective to address these objectives, initiatives, and shifts in strategy?
    • Is there a need from a technology perspective to address these objectives, initiatives, and shifts in strategy?

    Covert Statements

    • Some corporate objectives and initiatives will be mentioned in passing and will require clarification. For example: “As we continue to penetrate new markets, we will be diversifying our manufacturing geography to simplify distribution.”

    2.1.3 Review strategic planning documents

    2 hours

    Input: Strategic documents in the organization

    Output: Identified set of business and technology needs from documents

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the identification process of business and technology needs from strategic documents with the following steps:

    1. Work with the EA strategy creation team to identify the strategic documents within the organization. Look for documents with any of the following content:
      • Corporate strategy document
      • Business unit strategy documents
      • Annual general reports
    2. Gather the strategic documents into one place and call a meeting with the EA strategy creation team to identify the business and technology needs in those documents.
    3. Pick one document and look through its contents. Look for future-looking words such as:
      • We will be…
      • We are planning to…
      • We will need…
    4. Consider those portions of the document with future-looking words and ask the following:
      • Will business components require any changes to address these objectives?
      • Will information technology components changes be needed to address these objectives?
    5. Record the business and technology needs identified in step 4. As well, record any questions you may have regarding the document contents for stakeholders to validate later.
    6. Move to the next document once complete. Complete steps 3-5 for the remaining strategy documents.

    Stakeholder interviews will help you collect primary data and will shed light on stakeholder priorities and challenges

    In this interview process, you will be asking EA stakeholders questions that uncover their business and technology needs. You will also be able to ask follow-up questions to get a better understanding of abstract or complex concepts from the strategy document review and PESTLE analysis.

    EA Stakeholders:

    • Stakeholders may not think of their business and technology needs. But stakeholders will often explicitly state their objectives and initiatives.
    • Objectives often result in risks, opportunities, and annoyances:
      • Risks: Potential damage associated with pursuing an objective or initiative.
      • Opportunities: Potential gains that could be leveraged when capturing objectives and initiatives.
      • Annoyances: Roadblocks that could hinder the pursuit of objectives and initiatives.
    • Ask stakeholders questions on these areas to discern their business and technology needs.

    Risks + Opportunities + Annoyances –› Business and Technology Needs

    2.1.4 Conduct EA stakeholder interviews

    4-8 hours

    Input: Expertise from the EA stakeholders

    Output: Business and technology needs for EA stakeholders

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team, Identified EA stakeholders

    1. Schedule an interview with each of the stakeholders that were identified as key stakeholders in the Stakeholder Power Map.
    2. Meet with the key EA stakeholders and start business and technology needs gathering. Schedule each identified key stakeholder for an interview.
    3. When a stakeholder arrives for their interview, ask the following questions and record the answers to help uncover needs. Be sure to record which stakeholder answered the question. Further, record any future stakeholders that agree.
      • What are the current strengths of your organization?
      • What are the current weaknesses of your organization?
      • What is the number 1 risk you need to prevent?
      • What is the number 1 opportunity you want to capitalize on?
      • What is the number 1 annoying pet peeve you want to remove?
      • How would you prioritize these risks, opportunities, and annoyances?
    4. Recorded answer example: “We can’t see what the other departments are doing; when we spend a lot of money to invest in something, we later find out the capability is already within the company.”
    5. After completing each interview, verify with each stakeholder that you have captured their business and technology needs. Continue the interview process until all identified key stakeholders have been interviewed.
    6. Capture all inputs into a SWOT (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) format.

    Step 2.2

    Define Your Value Proposition

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Create a set of business and technology drivers from business and technology needs
    • 2.2.2 Identify the pains associated with the business and technology drivers
    • 2.2.3 Identify the EA contributions that can address the pains
    • 2.2.4 Create promises of value to shape the EA value proposition

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Use business and technology drivers to determine EA’s role in your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    A value proposition document that ties the value of the EA function to stakeholder needs.

    Create the EA Value Proposition

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Synthesize the collected data into business and technology drivers

    Two triangles labelled 'Business needs' and 'Technology needs' point to a cloud labelled 'Analysis', which connects to the driver attributes on the right via a dotted line.

    There are several key attributes that a driver should have.

    Driver Key Attributes
    • A succinct statement.
    • Begins with “action words” to communicate a call to action (e.g. Support, Help, Enable).
    • Written in a language understood by all parties involved.
    • Communicates a need for improvement or prevention.

    “The greatest impact of enterprise architecture is the strategic impact. Put the mission and the needs of the organization first.” (Matthew Kern, Clear Government Solutions)

    2.2.1 Create a set of business and technology drivers from business and technology needs

    3 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: A set of business and technology drivers

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team, EA stakeholders

    Meet with the EA strategy creation team and follow the steps below to begin the process of synthesizing the business and technology needs into drivers.

    1. Lay out the documented business and technology needs your team gathered from PESTLE analysis, strategy document reviews, and stakeholder interviews.
    2. Assess the documented business and technology needs to see if there are common themes. Consolidate those similar business and technology needs by crafting one driver for them. For example:
      • PESTLE: Influx of competitors in the marketplace causing tighter margins.
      • Document review: Improve investment quality and their value to the organization.
      • Stakeholder interview: “We can’t see what the other departments are doing; when we spend a lot of money to invest in something, we later find out the capability is already within the company.”
      • Consolidated business driver example: Help the organization align investments with the corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
    3. As well, synthesize the business and technology needs that cannot be consolidated.
    4. Verify the completed list of drivers with stakeholders. This is to ensure you have fully captured their needs.

    Download the EA Value Proposition Template to record your findings in this activity.

    When addressing business and technology drivers, an organization can expect obstacles

    A pain is an obstacle that business stakeholders will face when attempting to address business and technology drivers. Identify the pains associated with each driver so that EA’s contributions can be linked to resolving obstacles to address business needs.

    Business and Technology Drivers

    Pains

    Created by assessing information sources. A sentence that states the nature of the pain and how the pain stops the organization from addressing the drivers.
    Examples:
    • Business driver: Help the organization align investments with the corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
    • Technology driver: Improve the organization’s technology responsiveness and increase speed to market.
    Examples:
    • Business driver pains: Lack of holistic view of business capabilities obstructs the organization from aligning investments with corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
    • Technology driver pains: Ineffective application development requiring delays decreases the speed to market.

    2.2.2 Identify the pains associated with the business and technology drivers

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team and EA stakeholders

    Output: An associated pain that obstructs each identified driver

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team, EA stakeholders

    Call a meeting with the EA strategy creation team and any available stakeholders to identify the pains that obstruct addressing the business and technology drivers.

    Take each driver and ask the questions below to the EA strategy creation team and to any EA stakeholders who are available. Record the answers to identify the pains when realizing the drivers.

    1. What are your challenges in performing the activity or process today?
    2. What other business activities/processes will be impacted/improved if we solve this?
    3. What compliance/regulatory/policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
    4. What are the steps in the process/activity?

    Take the recorded answers and follow the steps below to create the pain statements:

    1. Answers to the questions above can be long, unfocused, or spoken in a casual manner. To turn the answer into pains, refine the recorded answers into a succinct sentence that captures its meaning.
      • Recorded answer example: “I feel like there needs to be a holistic view of the organization. If we had a tool to see all the capabilities across the business, then we can figure out what investments should be prioritized.”
      • Example of pain statement: Lack of holistic view of business capabilities obstructs the organization from aligning investments with corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
    2. When the list of pains has been written out, verify with the stakeholders that you have fully captured their pains.

    Download the EA Value Proposition Template to record your findings in this activity.

    The identified pains can be alleviated by a set of EA contributions

    Set the foundations for the value proposition by brainstorming the EA contributions that can alleviate the pains.

    Business and technology drivers produce:

    Pains

    —›
    EA contributions produce:

    Value by alleviating pains

    Pains

    Obstructions to addressing business and technology drivers. Stakeholders will face these pains.

    Examples
    • Business driver pains: Lack of holistic view of business capabilities obstructs the organization from aligning investments with corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
    EA contributions

    Activities the EA function can perform to help alleviate the pains. Demonstrates the contributions the EA function can make to business value.

    Examples:
    • Business driver EA contributions: Business capability mapping shows the business capabilities of the organization and the technology that supports those capabilities in the current and target state. This provides a view for the set of investments that are needed by the organization, which can then be prioritized.

    Enterprise architecture functions can provide a diverse set of contributions to any organization – Sample

    EA contribution category EA contribution details
    Define business capabilities and processes As-is and target business capabilities and processes are documented and understood by both IT and the business.
    Design information flows and services Information flows and services effectively support business capabilities and processes.
    Analyze gaps and identify project opportunities Create informed project identification, scope definition, and project portfolio management.
    Optimize technology assets Greater homogeneity and interoperability between tangible and intangible technology assets.
    Create and maintain technology standards Decrease development, integration, and support efforts. Reduce complexity and improve interoperability.
    Rationalize technology assets Tangible and intangible technology assets are rationalized to adequately and efficiently support information flows and services.

    2.2.3 Identify the EA contributions that can address the pains

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: EA contributions that addresses the pains that were identified

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Gather with the EA strategy creation team, take each pain, then ask and record the answers to the questions below to identify the EA contributions that would solve the pains:

    1. What activities can the EA practice conduct to overcome the pain?
    2. What are the core EA models that can help accurately define the problem and assist in finding appropriate resolutions?
    3. What are the general EA benefits that can be associated with solving this pain?

    Answers to the questions above will generate a list of activities EA can do to help alleviate the pains. Use the following steps to complete this activity:

    1. Create a stronger tie between the EA contributions and pains by linking the EA contribution statement to the pain.
      • Example of pain statement: Lack of holistic view of business capabilities obstructs the organization from aligning investments with corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
      • Example of EA contributions statement: Business capability mapping shows the business capabilities of the organization and the technology that supports those capabilities in the current and target state. This provides a view for the set of investments that are needed by the organization, which can then be prioritized.
    2. Verify with the stakeholders that they understand the EA contributions have been written out and how those contributions address the pains.

    Download the EA Value Proposition Template to record your findings in this activity.

    EA promises of value articulate EA’s commitment to the organization

    • Business Goals and Technology Drivers
      A set of statements created from business and technology needs. Gathered from information sources, it communicates improvements needed.

      • Value Streams, Aspirations, Long-Term Goals
        Value streams, aspirations, long-term goals

        • EA Contributions
          EA contributions that will alleviate the obstructions. Removing the obstructions will allow EA to help satisfy business and technology needs.

          • Promise of Value
            A statement that depicts a concrete benefit the EA practice can provide for the organization in response to business and technology drivers.
            Communicate the statements in a language that stakeholders understand to complete the articulation of EA’s value proposition.

    2.2.4 Create promises of value to shape the EA value proposition

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team and EA stakeholders

    Output: Promises of value for each business and technology driver

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team, EA stakeholders

    Now that the EA contributions have been identified, identify the promises of value to articulate the value proposition.

    Take each driver, then ask and record the answers to the questions below to identify the promises of value when realizing the drivers:

    1. What does amazing look like if we solve this perfectly?
    2. What other business activities/processes will be impacted/improved if we solve this?
    3. What measures of success/change should we use to prove value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)?

    Take the recorded answers and follow the steps below to create the promises of value.

    1. Answers to the questions above can be long, unfocused, or spoken in a casual manner. To turn the answer into a promise of value, refine the recorded answer into a succinct sentence that captures its meaning.
      • Business driver example: Help the organization align investments with the corporate strategy and departmental priorities.
      • Recorded answer example: “If this would be solved perfectly, we would have a very easy time planning investments and investment planning hours can be spent doing other activities.”
      • Promises of value example: Increase the number of investments that have a direct tie to corporate strategy.
    2. When the promises of value have been written out, verify with the stakeholders that you have fully captured their ideas.

    Download the EA Value Proposition Template to record your findings in this activity.

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Phase 3

    Build the EA Fundamentals

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Explore a general EA strategy approach
    • 1.2 Introduce Agile EA architecture

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Define the business and technology drivers
    • 2.2 Define your value proposition

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Realize the importance of EA fundamentals
    • 3.2 Finalize the EA fundamentals

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Select relevant EA services
    • 4.2 Finalize the set of services and secure approval

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create an EA vision statement and an EA mission statement.
    • Create EA goals, define EA objectives, and link them to EA goals.
    • Define the EA function scope dimensions.
    • Create a set of EA principles for your organization.
    • Discuss current methodology.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Step 3.1

    Realize the Importance of EA Fundamentals

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Create the EA vision statement
    • 3.1.2 Create the EA mission statement
    • 3.1.3 Create EA goals
    • 3.1.4 Define EA objectives and link them to EA goals
    • 3.1.5 Record the details of each EA objective

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define and document the fundamentals that guide the EA function.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Vision and mission statements for the EA function.
    • A set of EA goals and a set of objectives to track progression toward those goals.
    Build the EA Fundamentals
    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    EA fundamentals guide the EA function

    EA fundamentals include a vision statement, a mission statement, goals and objectives, and principles. They are a set of documented statements that guide the EA function. The fundamentals guide the EA function in terms of its strategy and decision making.

    EA vision statement EA mission statement

    EA fundamentals

    EA goals and objectives EA principles

    Info-Tech Insight

    Treat the critical elements of the EA group the same way as you would a business. Create a directional foundation for EA and define the vision, mission, goals, principles, and scope necessary to deliver on the established value proposition.

    The EA vision statement articulates the aspirations of the EA function

    The enterprise architecture vision statement communicates a desired future state of the EA function. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of the EA function and how the EA function will be perceived.

    Strong EA vision statements have the following characteristics:

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Communicate promise
    • Concise, no unnecessary words
    • Compelling
    • Achievable
    • Inspirational
    • Memorable

    Sample EA vision statements:

    • To be a trusted partner for both the business and IT, driving enterprise effectiveness, efficiency, and agility at [Company Name].
    • To be a trusted partner and advisor to both the business and IT, contributing to business-IT alignment and cost reduction at [Company Name].
    • To create distinctive value and accelerate [Company Name]’s transformation.

    The EA mission statement articulates the purpose of the EA function

    The enterprise architecture mission statement specifies the team’s purpose or “reason of being.” The mission should guide each day’s activities and decisions. The mission statements use simple and concise terminology, speak loudly and clearly, and generate enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong EA mission statements have the following characteristics:

    • Articulates EA function purpose and reason for existence
    • Describes what the EA function does to achieve its vision
    • Defines who the customers of the EA function are
    • Compelling
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Inspirational
    • Memorable
    • Concise

    Sample EA mission statements:

    • Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.
    • Synergize with both the business and IT to define and help realize [Company Name]’s target enterprise architecture that enables the business strategy and optimizes IT assets, resources, and capabilities.

    The EA vision and mission statements become relevant to EA stakeholders when linked to the promises of value

    The process for constructing the enterprise architecture vision statement and enterprise architecture mission statement is articulated below.

    Promises of value Derive keywords Construct draft statements Reference test criteria Finalize statements
    Derive the a set of keywords from the promises of value to accurately capture their essence. Create the initial statement using the keywords. Check the initial statement against a set of test criteria to ensure their quality. Finalize the statement after referencing the initial statement against the test criteria.

    Derive keywords from promises of value to begin the vision and mission statement creation process

    Develop keywords by summarizing the promises of value that were derived from drivers into one word that will take on the essence of the promise. See examples below:

    Business and technology drivers Promises of value Keywords
    Help the organization align investments with the corporate strategy and departmental priorities. Increase the number of investments that have a direct tie to corporate strategy. Business
    Support the rapid growth and development of the company through fiscal planning, project planning, and technology sustainability. Ensure budgets and projects are delivered on time with the assistance of technology. IT-Enabled
    Reduce the duplication and work effort to build and deploy technology solutions across the entire organization. Aim to reduce the number of redundant applications in the organization to streamline processes and save costs. Catalyst
    Improve the organization’s technology responsiveness and increase speed to market. Reduce the number of days required in the SDLC for all core business support projects. Value delivery

    An inspirational vision statement is greater than the sum of the individual words

    Ensure the sentence is cohesive and captures additional value outside of the keywords. The statement as a whole should be greater than the sum of the parts. Expand upon the meaning of the words, if necessary, to communicate the value. Below is an example of a finished vision statement.

    Sample

    Be a catalyst for IT-enabled business value delivery.

    Catalyst – We will continuously interact with the business and IT to accelerate and improve results.

    IT-enabled – We will ensure the optimal use of technology in enabling business capabilities to achieve business objectives.

    Business – We will be perceived as a business-focused unit that understands [Company name]’s business priorities and required business capabilities.

    Value delivery – EA’s value will be recognized by both business and IT stakeholders. We will track and market EA’s contribution to business value organization-wide.

    A clear mission statement can include additional details surrounding the EA team’s desired and expected value

    Likewise, below is a sample of connecting keywords together to form an EA mission statement:

    Optimize, transform, and innovate by defining and implementing the [Company]’s target enterprise architecture.

    Optimize – We collaborate with the business to analyze and optimize business capabilities and business processes to enable the agile and efficient attainment of [Company name] business objectives.

    Transform – We support IT-enabled business transformation programs by building and maintaining a shared vision of the future-state enterprise and consistently communicating it to stakeholders.

    Innovate – We identify and develop new and creative opportunities for IT to enable the business. We communicate the art of the possible to the business.

    Defining and implementing – We engage with project teams early and guide solution design and selection to ensure alignment to the target-state enterprise architecture.

    Target enterprise structure – We analyze business needs and priorities and assess the current state of the enterprise. We build and maintain the target enterprise architecture blueprints that define:

    • Business capabilities and processes (business architecture)
    • Data, application, and technology assets that enable business capabilities and processes (technology architecture)
    • Architecture principles and standards

    3.1.1 Create the EA vision statement

    1 hour

    Input: Identified promises of value, Vision statement test criteria

    Output: EA function vision statement

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the creation of the EA vision statement by following the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and have the promises of value from the EA value proposition laid out.
    2. Select one promise of value and work with the team to identify one word that captures the essence of that promise of value.
    3. Continue to the next promise of value until all of the promises of value have a keyword identified.
    4. Have the identified set of keywords laid out and see if any of their meanings are similar and can be consolidated together. Consolidate similar meaning keywords.
    5. Create the initial draft of the EA vision statement by linking the keywords together.
    6. Check the initial draft of the vision statement against the test criteria below. Ask the team if the vision statement satisfies each of the test criteria.
      • Do you find this vision exciting?
      • Is the vision clear, compelling, and easy to grasp?
      • Does this vision somehow connect to the core purpose?
      • Will this vision be exciting to a broad base of people in the organization, not just those within the EA team?
    7. Make changes to the initial draft to satisfy the test criteria. Socialize the EA vision statement with EA stakeholders to make sure it captures their needs.

    3.1.2 Create the EA mission statement

    1 hour

    Input: Identified promises of value, Mission statement test criteria

    Output: EA function mission statement

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the creation of the EA mission statement by following the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and have the promises of value from the EA value proposition laid out.
    2. Select one promise of value and work with the team to identify one word that captures the essence of that promise of value.
    3. Continue to the next promise of value until all of the promises of value have a keyword identified.
    4. Have the identified set of keywords laid out, and see if any of their meanings are similar and can be consolidated together. Consolidate similar meaning keywords.
    5. Create the initial draft of the EA mission statement by linking the keywords together.
    6. Check the initial draft of the mission statement against the following test criteria below. Ask the team if the mission statement satisfies each of the test criteria.
      • Do you find this purpose personally inspiring?
      • Does the purpose help you to decide what activities to not pursue, to eliminate from consideration? Is this purpose authentic – something true to what the organization is all about – not merely words on paper that sound nice?
      • Would this purpose be greeted with enthusiasm rather than cynicism by a broad base of people in the organization?
    7. Make changes to the initial draft to satisfy the test criteria. Socialize the EA mission statement with EA stakeholders to make sure it captures their needs.

    EA goals demonstrate the achievement of success of the EA function

    Enterprise architecture goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA function. EA goals are important because they establish the milestones the EA function can strive toward to deliver their promises of value.

    Inform EA goals by examining:

    Promises of value

    —›
    EA goals produce:

    Targets and milestones

    Promises of value

    Produce EA strategic outcomes that can be classified into four categories. The four categories are:

    • Business performance
    • IT performance
    • Customer value
    • Risk management
    EA goals

    Support the strategic outcomes. EA goals can be strategic or operational:

    • EA strategic goals support the strategic outcomes.
    • EA operational goals help measure the architecture capability quality and supporting processes.

    3.1.3 Create EA goals

    2 hours

    Input: Identified promises of value

    Output: EA goals

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the creation of EA goals by following the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and the identified promises of value from Phase 2, Create the EA Value Proposition.
    2. Open the EA Goals and Objectives Template and examine the list of default EA goals already within the template.
    3. Take the identified promises of value and discuss with the team if any of the EA goals in the template relate to the promises of value. Record the related EA goal and promise of value. See example below:
      • Promises of value example: Increase the number of investments that have a direct tie to corporate strategy.
      • Related EA goal example: Alignment of IT and business strategy.
    4. Repeat step 3 until all identified promises of value have been examined in relation to the EA goals in the template.
    5. If there are promises of value that are not related to an EA goal in the template, create EA goals to relate to those promises of value. Keep in mind that EA goals need to support the strategic outcomes produced by the promises of value. Record the EA goals in the template and document the related promises of value.

    Download the EA Goals and Objectives Template to assist with completing this activity.

    Starting with COBIT, select the appropriate objectives to track EA goals – Sample

    Below are examples of EA goals and the objectives that track their performance:

    IT performance-oriented goals Objectives
    Alignment of IT and business strategy
    • Increase the percentage of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by IT strategic goals by X percent in the fiscal year.
    • Improve stakeholder satisfaction with planned function and services portfolio scope by X percent in the fiscal year.
    • Increase the percentage of IT value drivers mapped to business value drivers by X percent in the next fiscal year.
    Increase in IT agility
    • Improve business executive satisfaction with IT’s responsiveness to new requirements by X percent in the fiscal year.
    • Increase the number of critical business processes supported by up-to-date infrastructure and applications in the next three years.
    • Lower the average time to turn strategic IT objectives into agreed-upon and approved initiatives.
    Optimization of IT assets, resources, and capabilities
    • Increase the frequency of capability maturity and cost optimization assessments.
    • Improve the frequency of reporting for assessment result trends.
    • Raise the satisfaction levels of business and IT executives with IT-related costs and capabilities by X percent.

    3.1.4 Define EA objectives and link them to EA goals

    2 hours

    Input: Defined EA goals

    Output: EA objectives linked to EA goals

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the process of defining EA objectives and linking them to EA goals using the following steps:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and open the EA Goals and Objectives Template.
    2. Have the goals laid out, and refer to the objectives already in the EA Goals and Objectives Template. Examine if any of them will fit the goals your team has created.
    3. If some of the goals your team has created do not fit with the objectives in the template, begin the process of creating new objectives. Remember, EA objectives are SMART metrics that help track the progress toward the EA goals.
    4. Create an EA objective and check if it is SMART by asking some of the questions below:
      • Specific: Is the objective specific to the goal? Is the objective clear to anyone who has basic knowledge of the goal?
      • Measurable: Is it possible to figure out how far the team would be away from completing the objective?
      • Agreed Upon: Does everyone involved agree the objective is the correct way to measure progress?
      • Realistic: Can the objective be met within the availability of resources, knowledge, and time?
      • Time Based: Is there a time-bound component to the goal?
    5. Continue to create new objectives until each goal has an objective linked to it.

    Download the EA Goals and Objectives Template to assist with completing this activity.

    For each of the objectives, determine how they will be collected, reported, and implemented

    Add details to the enterprise architecture objectives previously defined to increase their clarity to stakeholders.

    EA objective detail category Description
    Unit of measure
    • The unit in which the objective will be presented.
    Calculation formula
    • The formula by which the objective will be calculated.
    Objective baseline, status, and target
    • Baseline: The state of the objective at the start of measurement.
    • Status: The current state of the measurement.
    • Target: The target state the measurement should reach.
    Data collection
    • Responsible: The individual responsible for collecting the data.
    • Source: Where the data originates.
    • Frequency: How often the data will be collected to calculate the objective.
    Reporting
    • Target Audience: The people the objective will be presented to.
    • Method: The method used to present the data collected on the objective (e.g. report, presentation).
    • Frequency: How often the data will be presented to the target audience.

    3.1.5 Record the details of each EA objective

    2 hours

    Input: Defined list of EA objectives

    Output: Increased detail into each defined EA objective

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Record the details of each EA objective. Use the following steps below to assist with recording the details:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team, and open the EA Goals and Objectives Template.
    2. Select one objective that has been identified and discuss the formula for calculating the objective and in what units the objective will be recorded. Record the information in the “Calculation formula” and “Unit of measure” columns in the template once they have been agreed upon.
    3. Using the same objective, move to the “Data Collection” portion of the template. Discuss and record the following: the source of the data that generates the objective, the frequency of reporting on the objective, and the person responsible for reporting the objective.
    4. Move to the “Reporting” portion of the template. Discuss and record the target audience for the objective and the reporting frequency and method to those audiences.
    5. Examine the “Objective baseline,” “Objective status,” and “Objective target” columns. Record any measurement you may currently have in the “Objective baseline” column. Record what you would like the objective measurement to be in the “Objective target” column. Note: Keep track of the progression towards the target in the “Objective status” column in the future.
    6. Select the next objective and complete steps 2–5 for that measure. Continue this process until you have recorded details for all objectives.

    Download the EA Goals and Objectives Template to assist with completing this activity.

    Step 3.2

    Finalize the EA Fundamentals

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Define the organizational coverage dimension of the EA function scope
    • 3.2.2 Define the architectural domains and depth dimension
    • 3.2.3 Define the time horizon dimension
    • 3.2.4 Create a set of EA principles for your organization
    • 3.2.5 Add the rationale and implications to the principles
    • 3.2.6 Operationalize the EA principles
    • 3.2.7 Discuss the need for classical methodology and/or a combination including Agile practices

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the EA function scope dimensions.
    • Create a set of EA principles.
    • Discuss the organization’s current methodology, if any, and whether it works for the business.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined scope of the EA function.
    • A set of EA principles for your organization.
    • A decision on traditional vs. Agile methodology or a blend of both.

    Build the EA Fundamentals

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    A clear EA function scope defines the EA sandbox

    The EA function scope constrains the promises of value the EA function will deliver on by taking into account factors across four dimensions. The EA function scope ensures that the EA function is not stretched beyond its current/planned means and capabilities when delivering the promised value. The four dimensions are illustrated below:

    Organizational coverage
    Determine the focus of the enterprise architecture effort in terms of specific business units, functions, departments, capabilities, or geographical areas.
    Depth
    Determine the appropriate level of detail to be captured, based on the intended use of the enterprise architecture and the contingent decisions to be made.

    EA Scope

    Architectural Domains
    Determine the EA domains (business, data, application, infrastructure, security) that are appropriate to address stakeholder concerns and architecture requirements.
    Time horizon
    Determine the target-state architecture’s objective time period.

    The EA function scope is influenced by the EA value proposition and previously developed EA fundamentals

    Establish the EA function scope by using the EA value proposition and EA fundamentals that have been developed. After defining the EA function scope, refer back to these statements to ensure the EA function scope accurately reflects the EA value proposition and EA fundamentals.

    EA value proposition

    +

    EA vision statement
    EA mission statement
    EA goals and objectives

    —›
    Influences

    Organizational coverage

    Architectural domains

    Depth

    Time horizon

    —›
    Defines
    EA function scope

    EA scope – Organizational Coverage

    The organizational coverage dimension of EA scope determines the focus of enterprise architecture effort in the organization. Coverage can be determined by specific business units, functions, departments, capabilities, or geographic areas. Info-Tech has typically seen two types of coverage based on the size of the organization.

    Small and medium-size enterprise

    Indicators: Full-time employees dedicated to manage its data and IT infrastructure. Individuals are IT generalists and may have multiple roles.

    Recommended coverage: Typically, for small and medium-size businesses, the organizational coverage of architecture work is the entire enterprise. (Source: The Open Group, 2018)

    Large enterprise

    Indicators: Dedicated full-time IT staff with expertise to manage specific applications or parts of the IT infrastructure.

    Recommended coverage: For large enterprises, it is often necessary to develop a number of architectures focused on specific business segments and/or geographies. In this federated model, an overarching enterprise architecture should be established to ensure interoperability and conformance to overarching EA principles. (Source: DCIG, 2011)

    EA objectives track the progression towards the target set by EA goals

    Enterprise architecture objectives are specific metrics that help measure and monitor progress towards achieving an EA goal. Objectives are SMART.

    EA goals —› EA objectives
    • EA strategic goals:
      • Business performance
      • IT performance
      • Customer value
      • Risk management
    • EA operational goals
    • Specific
    • Measurable
    • Agreed upon
    • Realistic
    • Time bound
    (Source: Project Smart, 2014)

    Download the EA Goals and Objectives Template to see examples between the relationship of EA goals to objectives.

    Measure the EA strategy effectiveness by tracking the benefits it provides to the corporate business goals

    The success of the EA function is influenced by the following:

    • The delivery of EA-enabled business outcomes that are most important to the enterprise.
    • The alignment between the business and IT from a planning perspective.
    • Improvements in the corporate business goals due to EA contributions (standardization, rationalization, reuse, etc.).
    Corporate Business Goals Measurements
    • Reduction in operating costs
    • Decrease in regulatory compliance infractions
    • Increased revenue from existing channels
    • Increased revenue from new channels
    • Faster time to business value
    • Improved business agility
    • Reduction in enterprise risk exposure
    • Cost reductions based on application and platform rationalization
    • Standard-based solutions
    • Time reduction for integration
    • Service reused
    • Stakeholder satisfaction with EA services
    • Increase customer satisfaction
    • Rework minimized
    • Lower cost of integration
    • Risk reduction
    • Faster time to market
    • Better scalability, etc.

    3.2.1 Define the organizational coverage dimension of the EA function scope

    2 hours

    Input: EA value proposition, Previously defined EA fundamentals

    Output: Organizational coverage dimension of EA scope defined

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Define the organizational coverage of the EA function scope using the following steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team. As well, gather the EA value proposition, the EA vision and mission statements, and the EA goals and objectives your team has already created.
    2. Ask the team to read each of the documents gathered in the previous step. This ensures the concepts are fresh in the team members’ minds when defining the EA function scope organizational coverage.
    3. Consider how much of the organization the EA function would need to cover. Refer to the gathered materials to assist with your decision. For example:
      • EA mission statement: Optimize, transform, and innovate by defining and implementing the [Company]’s target enterprise architecture.
      • Implications on organizational coverage: If the purpose of the EA function is to help optimize, transform, and innovate with target-state architecture mapping, then the scope should cover the entire organization. Only by mapping the entire organization’s architecture can the EA function assist with optimizing, transforming, and innovating.
    4. Work with the EA strategy creation team to examine all the gathered materials and document the implications on organization coverage as shown in step 3.
    5. Discuss with the team and select the organizational coverage level that best fits the documented implications for all the gathered materials. Refer back to the gathered materials and make any changes necessary to ensure they support the selected organizational coverage.

    EA scope – Architectural Domains

    A complete enterprise architecture should address all five architectural domains. The five architectural domains are business, data, application, infrastructure, and security.

    Enterprise Architecture
    —› Data Architecture
    Business Architecture —› Infrastructure Architecture
    Security Architecture
    —› Application Architecture

    “The realities of resource and time constraints often mean there is not enough time, funding, or resources to build a top-down, all-inclusive architecture encompassing all four architecture domains. Build architecture domains with a specific purpose in mind.” (The Open Group, 2018)

    Each architectural domain creates a different view of the organization

    Below are the definitions of different domains of enterprise architecture (Info-Tech perspective; others can be identified as well, e.g. Integration Architecture).

    Business Architecture

    Business architecture is a means of demonstrating the business value of subsequent architecture work to key stakeholders and the return on investment to those stakeholders from supporting and participating in the subsequent work. Business architecture defines the business strategy, governance, organization, and key business processes.

    Data Architecture

    Describes the structure of an organization’s logical and physical data assets and data management resources.

    Application Architecture

    Provides a blueprint for the individual applications to be deployed, their interactions, and their relationships to the core business processes of the organization.

    Infrastructure Architecture

    Represents the sum of hardware, software, and telecommunications-related IT capability associated with a particular enterprise. It is concerned with the synergistic operations and management of the devices in the organization.

    Security Architecture

    Provides an unified security design that addresses the necessities and potential risks involved in a certain scenario or environment. It also specifies when and where to apply security controls.
    (Sources: The Open Group, 2018; IT Architecture Journal, 2014; Technopedia, 2016)

    EA scope – Depth

    EA scope depth defines the architectural detail for each EA domain that the organization has selected to pursue. The level of depth is broken down into four levels. The level of depth the organization decides to pursue should be consistent across the domains.

    Contextual
    • Helps define the organization scope, and examines external and internal requirements and their effect on the organization. For example, enterprise governance.
    Conceptual
    • High-level representations of the organization or what the organization wants to be. For example, business strategy, IT strategy.
    Logical
    • Models that define how to implement the representation in the conceptual stage. For example, identifying the business gaps from the current state to the target state defined by the business strategy.
    Physical
    • The technology and physical tools used to implement the representation created in the logical stage. For example, business processes that need to be created to bridge the gaps identified and reach the target stage.
    (Source: Zachman International, 2011) Business Architecture Data Architecture Application Architecture Infrastructure Architecture Security Architecture

    Each architectural depth level contains a set of key artifacts

    The graphic below depicts examples of the key artifacts that each domain of architecture would produce at each depth level.

    Contextual Enterprise Governance
    Conceptual Business strategy Business objects Use-case models Technology landscaping Security policy
    Logical Business capabilities Data attribution Application integration Network/ hardware topology Security standards
    Physical Business process Database design Application design Configuration management Security configuration
    Business Architecture Data Architecture Application Architecture Infrastructure Architecture Security Architecture

    3.2.2 Define the architectural domains and depth dimension of the EA function scope

    2 hours

    Input: EA value proposition, Previously defined EA fundamentals

    Output: Architectural domain and depth dimensions of EA scope defined

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Define the EA function scope for your organization using the following steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team. As well, gather the EA value proposition, the EA vision and mission statements, and the EA goals and objectives that your team has already created.
    2. Ask the team to read each of the documents gathered in the previous step. This ensures the concepts are fresh in the team members’ minds when defining the architectural domains and depth of the EA function scope.
    3. Consider the architectural domains and the depth those domains need to reach. Refer to the gathered materials to assist with your decision. For example:
      • Promise of value: Increase the number of IT investments with a direct tie to business strategy.
      • Implications on architectural domains: The EA function will need business architecture. Business architecture generates business capability mapping, which will anticipate what IT investments are needed for the future.
      • Implications on depth: Depth for business architecture needs to reach a logical level to encompass business capabilities.
    4. Work with the EA strategy creation team to examine all the gathered materials and document the implications on architectural domains and depth as shown in step 3.
    5. Discuss with the team and select the architectural domains and the depth for each domain that best fits the documented implication. Refer back to the gathered materials and make any changes necessary to ensure they support the selected architectural domains and depth.

    EA scope – Time Horizon

    The EA scope time horizon dictates how long to plan for the architecture.

    It is important that the EA team’s work has an appropriate planning horizon while avoiding two extremes:

    1. A planning horizon that is too short focuses on immediate operational goals and strategic quick wins, missing the “big picture,” and fails to support the achievement of strategic long-term enterprise goals.
    2. A planning horizon that is too long is at a higher risk of becoming irrelevant.

    Target the same strategic planning horizon as your business. Additionally, consider the following recommendations:

    Planning Horizon: 1 year 2-3 years 5 years
    Recommended under the following conditions:
    • Corporate strategy is not stable and frequently changes direction (typical for small and some mid-sized companies).
    • There will be a major update of the corporate strategy in one year.
    • The company will be acquired by or merged with another company in one year.
    • The business' strategic plan spans the next two to three years, and corporate strategy is moderately stable within this time frame (typical for mid-sized and some large companies).
    • The business' strategic plan spans the next five years and corporate strategy is very stable (typical for large companies).

    3.2.3 Define the time horizon dimension of the EA function scope

    2 hours

    Input: EA value proposition, Previously defined EA fundamentals

    Output: Time horizon dimension of EA scope defined

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Define the EA function scope for your organization using the following steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team. As well, gather the EA value proposition, the EA vision and mission statements, and the EA goals and objectives your team has already created.
    2. Ask the team to read each of the documents gathered in the previous step. This ensures the concepts are fresh in the team members’ minds when crafting the EA function scope.
    3. Consider the time horizons of the EA function scope. Refer to the gathered materials to assist with your decision. For example:
      • EA Objective: Increase the percentage of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by IT strategic goals by 30% in the next 3 years.
      • Implications on time horizon: Because it will take 3 years to measure the success of these EA objectives, the time horizon may need to be 3 years.
    4. Work with the EA strategy creation team to examine all the gathered materials and document the implications on time horizon as shown in step 3.
    5. Discuss with the team and select the time horizon that best fits the documented implication. Refer back to the gathered materials and make any changes necessary to ensure they support the selected architectural time horizon.

    EA principles capture the EA value proposition essence and provide guidance for the decisions that impact architecture

    EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, IT investment portfolio management, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    EA value proposition Influences
    —›
    EA Principles Guide and inform
    —›
    Decisions on the Use of IT Direct and control
    ‹—
    Specific Domain Policies
    ‹———————

    What decisions should be made?
    ————— ————— —————
    How should decisions be made?
    ————— ————— —————————›
    Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions?

    EA principles must be carefully constructed to make sure they are adhered to and relevant

    Info-Tech has identified a set of characteristics that EA principles should possess. Having these characteristics ensures the EA principles are relevant and followed in the organization.

    Approach focused EA principles are focused on the approach, i.e. how the enterprise is built, transformed, and operated, as apposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.
    Business relevant Create EA principles specific to the organization. Tie EA principles to the organization’s priorities and strategic aspirations.
    Long lasting Build EA principles that will withstand the test of time.
    Prescriptive Inform and direct decision making with EA principles that are actionable. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    Verifiable If compliance can’t be verified, the principle is less likely to be followed.
    Easily digestible EA principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. EA principles aren’t a secret manuscript of the EA team. EA principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.
    Followed Successful EA principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. EA principles must be continuously “preached” to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, EA principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Review ten universal EA principles to determine if your organization wishes to adopt them

    1. Enterprise value focus We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2. Fit for purpose We maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over-engineering them.
    3. Simplicity We choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4. Reuse › buy › build We maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can’t reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5. Managed data We handle data creation, modification, and use enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6. Controlled technical diversity We control the variety of technology platforms we use.
    7. Managed security We manage security enterprise-wide in compliance with our security governance policy.
    8. Compliance to laws and regulations We operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9. Innovation We seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10. Customer centricity We deliver best experiences to our customers with our services and products.

    3.2.4 Create a set of EA principles for your organization

    2 hours

    Input: Info-Tech’s ten universal EA principles, Identified promises of value

    Output: A defined set of EA principles for your organization

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Create a set of EA principles for your organization using the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team, download the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy, and have the identified promises of value opened.
    2. Select one universal principle and relate it to the promises of value by discussing with the EA strategy creation team. If there is a relation, record “Yes” in the template on the slide “Select the applicability of 10 universally accepted EA principles.” See example below:
      • Universal principle: Enterprise value focus – We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
      • Related promise of value example: Increase the number of investments that have a direct tie with corporate strategy.
    3. Continue the process in step 2 until all ten universal EA principles have been examined. If there is a universal principle that is unrelated to a promise of value, discuss with the team whether the principle still needs to be included. If the principle is not included, record “No” in the template on the slide “Select the applicability of 10 universally accepted EA principles.”
    4. If there are any promises of value that are not captured by the universally accepted EA principles, the team may choose to create new principles. Create the new principles in the format below and record them in the template.
      • Name: The name of the principle, in a few words.
      • Statement: A sentence that expands on the “Name” section and explains what the principle achieves.

    Download the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy to document this step.

    Organizational stakeholders are more likely to follow EA principles when a rationale and an implication are provided

    After defining the set of EA principles, ensure they are all expanded upon with a rationale and implications. The rationale and implications ensure principles are more likely to be followed because they communicate why the principles are important and how they are to be used.

    Name
    • The name of the EA principle, in a few words.
    Statement
    • A sentence that expands on the “Name” section and explains what the principle achieves.
    Rationale
    • Describes the business benefits and reasoning for establishing the principle.
    • Explicitly links the principle to business/IT vision, mission, priorities, goals, or strategic aspirations (strategic themes).
    Implications
    • Describe when and how the principle is to be applied.
    • Communicate this section with “must” sentences.
    • Refer to domain-specific policies that provide detailed, domain-specific direction on how to apply the principle.

    3.2.5 Add the rationale and implications to the principles that have been created

    2 hours

    Input: Identified set of EA principles

    Output: EA principles that have rationale and implications

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Add the rationale and implication of each EA principle that your organization has selected using the following steps:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and open the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy.
    2. Examine the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy. Look for the detailed descriptions of all the applicable EA universal principles, and discuss with the team whether the pre-populated rationale and implications need to be changed.
    3. Make sure all the rationale and implication sections of the applicable universal EA principles have been examined. Record the changes on the slide devoted to each principle in the template.
    4. Examine any new principles created outside of the universal EA principles. Create the rationale and implication sections for each of those principles. Use the slide “Review the rationale and implications for the applicable universal principles” in the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy to assist with this step.

    Download the EA Principles Template – EA Strategy to document this step.

    3.2.6 Operationalize the EA principles to ensure they are used when decisions are being made

    1-2 hours

    Input: Defined set of EA principles

    Output: EA principles are successfully operationalized

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin to operationalize the EA principles by reviewing the proposed principles with business and technology leadership to secure their approval.

    1. Publish the list of principles, their rationale, and their implications.
    2. Include the principles in any existing policies that guide decision making for the use of technology within the business.
    3. Provide existing governance bodies with the authority to enforce adherence to principles, and communicate the waiver process.
    4. Ensure that project-level teams are aware of the principles and have at least one champion guiding the decisions of the team.

    Review a use case for the utilization of EA principles – Sample

    After operationalizing the EA principles for your organization, the organization can now use those principles to guide and inform its IT investment decisions. Below is an example of a scenario where EA principles were used to guide and inform an IT investment decision.

    Organization wants to provision an application but it needs to decide how to do so, and it considers the relevant EA principles:

    • Reuse › buy › build
    • Managed security
    • Innovation

    The organization has decided to go with a specialized vendor, even though it normally prefers to reuse existing components. The vendor has experience in this domain, understands the data security implications, and can help the organization mitigate risk. Lastly, the vendor is known for providing new solutions on a regular basis and is a market leader, making it more likely to provide the organization with innovative solutions.

    An oil and gas company created EA fundamentals to guide the EA function

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Oil & Gas
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    As an enterprise architecture function starting from ground zero, the organization did not have the EA fundamentals in place to guide the EA function. Further, the organization also did not possess an EA function scope to define the boundaries of the EA function.

    Due to the lack of EA scope, the EA function did not know which part of the organization to provide contributions toward. A lack of EA fundamentals caused confusion regarding the future direction of the EA function.

    Solution

    Info-Tech worked with the EA team to define the different components of the EA fundamentals. This included EA vision and mission statements, EA goals and objectives, and EA principles.

    Additionally, Info-Tech worked with the EA team to define the EA function scope.

    These EA strategy components were created by examining the needs of the business. The components were aligned with the identified needs of the EA stakeholders.

    Results

    The defined EA function scope helped set out the responsibilities of the enterprise architecture function to the organization.

    The EA vision and mission statements and EA goals and objectives were used to guide the direction of the EA function. These fundamentals helped the EA function improve its maturity and deliver on its promises.

    The EA principles were used in IT review boards to guide the decisions on IT investments in the organization.

    3.2.7 Discuss the need for a classical methodology and/or a combination including Agility practices

    1 hour

    Input: Existing methodologies

    Output: Decisions about need of agility, ceremonies, and protocols to be used

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Add the rationale and implication of adopting an Agile methodology and/or a combination with a traditional methodology.

    1. Is there an EA methodology adopted by the organization? Is there a classical one, or is it purely Agile?
    2. What would need to happen to address the business goals of the organization (e.g. is there a need to be more agile?)? Do you need to have more decisions centralized (e.g. to adopt certain standards, security controls)?
    3. Where on the decentralization continuum does your organization need to be?
    4. What role would Enterprise Architects have (would they need to be part of existing ceremonies? Would they need to blend traditional and agile processes?)?
    5. If a customized methodology is required, identify this as an item to be included as part of the EA roadmap (can be run as a Agile Enterprise Operating Model workshop).

    Design an Enterprise Architecture Strategy

    Phase 4

    Design the EA Services

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Explore a general EA strategy approach
    • 1.2 Introduce Agile EA architecture

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Define the business and technology drivers
    • 2.2 Define your value proposition

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Realize the importance of EA fundamentals
    • 3.2 Finalize the EA fundamentals

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Select relevant EA services
    • 4.2 Finalize the set of services and secure approval

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select relevant EA services
    • Finalize the set of services and secure approval

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Step 4.1

    Select Relevant EA Services

    Activities
    • 4.1.1 Select the EA services relevant to your organization
    • 4.1.2 Identify if your organization needs additional services outside of the recommended list
    • 4.1.3 Complete all of the service catalog fields for each service to show the organization how each can be consumed

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Communicate a definition of EA services.
    • Link services to the previously identified EA contributions.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined set of services the EA function will provide.
    • An EA service catalog that demonstrates to the organization how each provided service can be accessed and consumed.

    Design the EA Services

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    The definition of EA services will allow the group to communicate how they can add value to EA stakeholders

    Enterprise architecture services are a set of activities the enterprise architecture function provides for the organization. EA services are important because the services themselves provide a set of benefits for the organization.

    Enterprise Architecture Services

    • A means of delivering value to the business by facilitating outcomes service consumers want to achieve.
    • EA services are defined from the business perspective using business language.
    • EA services are designed to enable required business activities.

    Viewing the EA function from a service perspective resolves the following pains:

    • Business users don’t know how EA can assist them.
    • Business users don’t know how to request access to a service with multiple sources of information available.
    • EA has no way of managing expectations for their users, which tend to inflate.
    • EA does not have a holistic view of all the services they need to provide.

    Link EA services to the previously identified EA contributions

    Previously identified EA contributions can be linked to EA services, which helps the EA function identify a set of EA services that are important to business stakeholders. Further, linking the EA contributions to EA services can define for the EA function the services they need to provide.

    Demonstrate EA service value by linking them to EA contributions

    1. EA stakeholders generate drivers
    2. Drivers have pains that obstruct them
    3. Pains are alleviated by EA contributions
    4. EA contributions help define the EA services needed

      • EA Contributions
        Example EA contribution: Business capability mapping shows the business capabilities of the organization and the technology that supports those capabilities in the current and target state. This provides a view for the set of investments that are needed by the organization, which can then be prioritized.

        • EA Services
          Example EA service: Target-state business capability mapping

    4.1.1 Select the EA services relevant to your organization

    2 hours

    Input: Previously identified EA contributions from the EA value proposition

    Output: A set of EA services selected for the organization from Info-Tech’s defined set of EA services

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Begin the selection of EA services relevant to your organization by following the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team, and the list of identified EA contributions that the team formulated during Phase 2.
    2. Open the EA Service Planning Tool, select one sub-service, and read its definition.
    3. Based on the definition of the sub-service, refer back to the identified list of EA contributions and check if there is an identified EA contribution that matches the service.
      • If the EA service definitions matches one of the identified EA contributions, then that EA service is relevant to the organization. If there is no match, then the EA service may not be relevant to the organization.
    4. Highlight the sub-service if it is relevant. Add a checkmark beside the EA contribution if it is addressed by a sub-service.
    5. Select the next sub-service and repeat steps 2-4. Continue down the list of sub-services in the EA Service Planning Tool until all sub-services have been examined.

    Download the EA Service Planning Tool to assist with this activity.

    4.1.2 Identify if your organization needs additional services outside of the recommended list

    2 hours

    Input: Expertise from the EA strategy creation team, Previously defined EA contributions

    Output: A defined set of EA services outside the list Info-Tech has recommended

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Identify if services outside of the recommended list in the EA Service Planning Tool are relevant to your organization by using the steps below:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team and the list of EA contributions with checkmarks for contributions addressed by EA services.
    2. Take the list of unaddressed EA contributions and select one EA contribution in the list. Assess whether an EA service is required to address the EA contribution. Ask the group the following:
      • Can the EA practice provide the service now?
      • Does providing this EA service line up with the previously defined EA function scope and EA fundamentals?
    3. Decide if a service needs to be provided for that contribution. If yes, give the service a name and a definition.
    4. Then, decide if the service fits into one of the service categories in the EA Service Planning Tool. If there is no fit, create another service category. Define the new service category as well.
    5. Continue to the next unaddressed EA contribution and repeat steps 2-4. Repeat this process until all unaddressed EA contributions have been assessed.

    Download the EA Service Planning Tool to assist with this activity.

    Create the EA service catalog to demonstrate to the organization how each service can be accessed and used

    The EA service catalog is an important communicator to the business. It shifts the technology-oriented view of EA to services that show direct benefit to the business. It is a tool that communicates and provides clarity to the business about the EA services that are available and how those services can assist them.

    Define the services to show value Define the service catalog to show how to use those services
    Already defined
    • EA service categories
    • The services needed by the EA stakeholders in each EA service category
    Need to define
    • Should EA deliver this service?
    • Service triggers
    • Service provider
    • Service requestor

    Info-Tech Insight

    The EA group must provide the organization with a list of services it will provide to demonstrate value. This will help the team manage expectations and the workload while giving organizational stakeholders a clear understanding of how to engage EA and what lies outside of EA’s involvement.

    4.1.3 Complete all the service catalog fields for each service to show the organization how each can be consumed

    4 hours

    Input: Expertise from the EA strategy creation team

    Output: Service details for each EA service in your organization

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Complete the details for each relevant EA service in the EA Service Planning Tool by using the following steps:

    1. Gather the EA strategy creation team, and open the EA Service Planning Tool.
    2. Select one of the services you have defined as relevant and begin the process of defining the service. Define the following fields:
      • Should EA deliver this service? Should the EA team provide this service? (Yes/No)
      • Service trigger: What trigger will signal the need for the service?
      • Service provider: Who in the EA team will provide the service?
      • Service requestor: Who outside of the EA team has requested this service?
    3. Have the EA strategy creation team discuss and define each of the fields for the service above. Record the decisions in the corresponding columns of the EA Service Planning Tool.
    4. Select the next required EA service, and repeat steps 2 and 3. Repeat the process until all required EA services have their details defined.

    Download the EA Service Planning Tool to assist with this activity.

    Step 4.2

    Finalize the Set of Services and Secure Approval

    Activities
    • 4.2.1 Secure approval for your organization’s EA strategy
    • 4.2.2 Map the EA contributions to business goals
    • 4.2.3 Quantify the EA effectiveness
    • 4.2.4 Determine the role of the architect in the Agile ceremonies of the organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Present the EA strategy to stakeholders.
    • Determine service details for each EA service in your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • EA Team
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Secured approval for your organization’s EA strategy.
    • Measure effectiveness of EA contributions.

    Design the EA Services

    Step 4.1 Step 4.2

    Present the EA strategy to stakeholders to secure approval of the finalized EA strategy

    For the EA strategy to be successfully executed, it must be approved by the EA stakeholders. Securing their approval will increase the likelihood of success in the execution of the EA operating model.

    Outputs that make up the EA strategy —› Present outputs to EA strategy stakeholders
    • Business and technology drivers
    • EA function value proposition

    • EA vision statement
    • EA mission statement
    • EA goals and objectives
    • EA scope
    • EA principles

    • EA function services
    • Identified and prioritized EA stakeholders.








    • The checkmark symbol represents the outputs this blueprint assists with creating.

    4.2.1 Secure approval of your organization’s EA strategy

    1 hour

    Input: Completed EA Function Strategy Template, Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: Approval of the EA strategy

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team, Key EA stakeholders

    Use the following steps to assist with securing approval for your organization’s EA strategy:

    1. Call a meeting between the EA strategy creation team and the identified key EA stakeholders. Key stakeholders were defined in activity 2.1.1.
    2. Open the completed EA Function Strategy Template. Use it to help you discuss the merits of the EA strategy with the key stakeholders.
    3. Discuss with the stakeholders any concerns and modifications they wish to make to the strategy. If detailed questions are asked, refer to the other templates created as a part of this blueprint. Record those concerns and address them at a later time.
    4. After presenting the EA strategy, ask the stakeholders for approval. If stakeholders do not approve, refer back to the concerns documented in step 3 and inquire if addressing the concerns will result in approval.
    5. If applicable, address stakeholder concerns with the EA strategy.
    6. Once EA strategy has been approved, publish the EA strategy to ensure there is a mutual understanding of what the EA function will provide to the organization. Move on to Info-Tech’s Define an EA Operating Model blueprint to begin executing upon the EA strategy.

    Use the EA Function Strategy Template to assist with this activity.

    4.2.2 Map the EA contributions to the business goals

    3 hours

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: Service details for each EA service in your organization

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Map EA contributions/services to the goals of the organization.

    1. Start from the business goals of the organization.
    2. Determine Business and IT drivers.
    3. Identify EA contributions that help achieve the business goals.

    Download the EA Service Planning Tool to assist with this activity.

    Trace EA drivers to business goals (sample)

    A model connecting 'Enterprise Architecture' with 'Corporate Goals' through 'EA Contributions'.

    4.2.3 Quantify the EA effectiveness

    1 hour

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: Defined KPIs (SMART)

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Use SMART key performance indicators (KPIs) to measure EA contributions vis-à-vis business goals.

    Measure the EA strategy effectiveness by tracking the benefits it provides to the corporate business goals

    The success of the EA function spans across three main dimensions:

    • The delivery of EA-enabled business outcomes that are most important to the enterprise.
    • The alignment between the business and IT from a planning perspective.
    • Improvements in the corporate business goals due to EA contributions (standardization, rationalization, reuse, etc.).
    Corporate Business GoalsEA ContributionsMeasurements
    • Reduction in operating costs
    • Decrease in regulatory compliance infractions
    • Increased revenue from existing channels
    • Increased revenue from new channels
    • Faster time to business value
    • Improved business agility
    • Reduction in enterprise risk exposure
    • Alignment of IT investments to business strategy
    • Achievement of business results directly linked to IT involvement
    • Application and platform rationalization
    • Standards in place
    • Flexible architecture
    • Better integration
    • Higher organizational satisfaction with technology-enabled services and solutions
    • Cost reductions based on application and platform rationalization
    • Standard based solutions
    • Time reduction for integration
    • Service reused
    • Stakeholder satisfaction with EA services
    • Increase customer satisfaction
    • Rework minimized
    • Lower cost of integration
    • Risk reduction
    • Faster time to market
    • Better scalability, etc.

    The oil and gas company began the EA strategy creation by crafting an EA value proposition

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Oil & Gas
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    The oil and gas corporation faced a great challenge in communicating the role of enterprise architecture to the organization. Although it has the mandate from the CIO to create the EA function, there was no function in existence. Thus, few people in the organization understood EA.

    Because of this lack of understanding, the EA function was often undermined. The EA function was seen as an order taker that provided some services to the organization.

    Solution

    First, Info-Tech worked with the enterprise architecture team to define the EA stakeholders in the organization.

    Second, Info-Tech interviewed those stakeholders to identify their needs. The needs were analyzed and pains that would obstruct addressing those needs were identified.

    Lastly, Info-Tech worked with the team to identify common EA contributions that would solve those pains.

    Results

    Through this process, Info-Tech helped the team at the oil and gas company create a document that could communicate the value of EA. Specifically, the document could articulate the issues obstructing each stakeholder from achieving their needs and how enterprise architecture could solve them.

    With this value proposition, EA was able to demonstrate value to important stakeholders and set itself up for success in its future endeavors.

    The oil and gas company defined EA services to provide and communicate value to the organization

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Oil & Gas
    Source: Info-Tech

    Challenge

    As a brand new enterprise architecture function, the EA function at the oil and gas corporation did not have a set of defined EA services. Because of this lack of EA services, the organization did not know what contributions EA could provide.

    Further, without the definition of EA services, the EA function did not set out explicit expectations to the business. This caused expectations from the business to be different from those of the EA function, resulting in friction.

    Solution

    Info-Tech worked with the EA function at the oil and gas corporation to define a set of EA services the function could provide.

    The Info-Tech team, along with the organization, assessed the business and technology needs of the stakeholder. Those needs acted as the basis for the EA function to create their initial services.

    Additionally, Info-Tech worked with the team to define the service details (e.g. service benefits, service requestor, service provider) to communicate how to provide services to the business.

    Results

    The defined EA services led the EA function to communicate what it could provide for the business. As well, the defined services clarified the level of expectation for the business.

    The EA team was able to successfully service the business on future projects, adding value through their expertise and knowledge of the organization’s systems. Because of the demonstrated value, EA has been given greater responsibility throughout the organization.

    4.2.4 Determine the role of the architect in the Agile ceremonies of the organization

    1 hour

    Input: Expertise from EA strategy creation team

    Output: Participation in Agile Pre- and Post-PI, Architect Syncs, etc.

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: EA strategy creation team

    Document the involvement of the enterprise architect in your organization’s Agile ceremonies.

    1. Document the Agile ceremonial used in the organization (based on SAFe or other Agile approaches).
    2. Determine ceremonies the System Architect will participate in.
    3. Determine ceremonies the Solution Architect will participate in
    4. Determine ceremonies the Enterprise Architect will participate in.
    5. Determine Architect Syncs, etc.

    Note: Roles and responsibilities can be further defined as part of the Agile Enterprise Operating Model.

    The EA role relative to agility

    The enterprise architecture role relative to agility specifies the architecture roles as well as the agile protocols they will participate in.
    This statement will guide every architect’s participation in planning meetings, pre- and post-PI, syncs, etc. Use simple and concise terminology; speak loudly and clearly.

    A strong EA role statement relative to agility has the following characteristics:

    • Describes what different architect roles do to achieve the vision of the organization
    • In an agile way
    • Compelling
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Specific
    • Concise

    Sample EA mission relative to agility

    • Create strategies that provide guardrails for the organization, provide standards, reusable assets, accelerators, and other decisions at the enterprise level that support agility.
    • Participate in pre-PI and post-PI planning activities, architect syncs, etc.

    A clear statement can include additional details surrounding the Enterprise Architect role relative to agility

    Likewise, below is a sample of connecting keywords together to form an enterprise architect role statement, relative to agility.

    Optimize, transform, and innovate by defining and implementing the [Company]’s target enterprise architecture in an agile way.

    Optimize – We collaborate with the business to analyze and optimize business capabilities and business processes to enable the agile and efficient attainment of [Company name] business objectives.

    Transform – We support IT-enabled business transformation programs by building and maintaining a shared vision of the future-state enterprise and consistently communicating it to stakeholders.

    Innovate – We identify and develop new and creative opportunities for IT to enable the business. We communicate the art of the possible to the business.

    Defining and implementing – We engage with project teams early and guide solution design and selection to ensure alignment to the target-state enterprise architecture and provide guidance as well as accelerators.

    Target enterprise structure in an agile way – We analyze business needs and priorities and assess the current state of the enterprise. We build and maintain the target enterprise architecture blueprints that define:

    • Business capabilities and processes (business architecture)
    • Data, application, and technology assets that enable business capabilities and processes (technology architecture)
    • Architecture principles
    • Standards and reusable assets
    • Continuous exploration, integration, and deployment

    Move to the enterprise architecture operating model blueprint to execute your EA strategy

    Once approved, move on to Info-Tech’s Define an EA Operating Model blueprint to begin executing on the EA strategy.

    Enterprise architecture strategy

    This blueprint focuses on setting up an enterprise architecture function, with the goal of maximizing the likelihood of EA success. The blueprint puts into place the components that will align the EA function with the needs of the stakeholders, guide the decision making of the EA function, and define the services EA can provide to the organization.

    Agile enterprise architecture operating model

    An EA operating model helps you design and organize the EA function, ensuring adherence to architectural standards and delivery of EA services. This blueprint acts on the EA strategy by creating methods to engage, govern, and develop architecture as a part of the larger organization.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Milena Litoiu, Senior Director Research and Advisory, Enterprise Architecture Milena Litoiu
    Senior Director Research and Advisory, Enterprise Architecture
    • Milena Litoiu is a Principal/Senior Manager of Enterprise Architecture. She is Master Certified with The Open Group and she sits on global architecture certification boards.
    • Other certifications include SABSA, CRISC, and Scaled Agile Framework. She started as a certified IT Architect at IBM and has over 25 years experience in this field.
    • Milena teaches enterprise architecture at the University of Toronto and led the development of the Enterprise Architecture Certificate (a course on EA fundamentals, one on EA development and Governance, and one on Trends going forward).
    • She has a Masters in Engineering, an executive MBA, and extensive experience in enterprise architecture as well as methodologies and tools.
    Photo of Lan Nguyen, IT Executive, Mentor, Managing Partner at CIOs Beyond Borders Group Lan Nguyen
    IT Executive, Mentor, Managing Partner at CIOs Beyond Borders Group
    • Lan Nguyen has a wealth of experience driving the EA strategy and the digital transformation success at the City of Toronto.
    • Lan is a university lecturer on topics like strategic leadership in the digital enterprise.
    • Lan is a Managing Partner at CIOs Beyond Borders Group.
    • Lan specializes in Partnership Development; Governance; Strategic Planning, Business Development; Government Relations; Business Relationship Management; Leadership Development; Organizational Agility and Change Management; Talent Management; Managed Services; Digital Transformation; Strategic Management of Enterprise IT; Shared Services; Service Quality Improvement, Portfolio Management; Community Development; and Social Enterprise.


    Photo of Dirk Coetsee, Director Research and Advisory, Enterprise Architecture, Data & Analytics Dirk Coetsee
    Director Research and Advisory, Enterprise Architecture, Data & Analytics
    • Dirk Coetsee is a Research & Advisory Director in the Data & Analytics practice. Dirk has over 25 years of experience in data management and architecture within a wide range of industries, especially Financial Services, Manufacturing, and Retail.
    • Dirk spearheaded data architecture at several organizations and was involved in enterprise data architecture, data governance, and data quality and analytics. He architected many operational data stores of ranging complexity and transaction volumes and was part of major enterprise data warehouse initiatives. Lately, he was part of projects that implemented big data, enterprise service bus, and micro services architectures. Dirk has an in-depth knowledge of industry models within the financial and retail spaces.
    • Dirk holds a BSc (Hons) in Operational Research and an MBA with specialization in Financial Services from the University of Pretoria, South Africa.
    Photo of Andy Neill, AVP, Enterprise Architecture, Data and Analytics Andy Neill
    AVP, Enterprise Architecture, Data and Analytics
    • Andy is AVP Data and Analytics and Chief Enterprise Architect at Info-Tech Research Group. Previous roles include leading the data architecture practice for Loblaw Companies Ltd, Shoppers Drug Mart and 360 Insights in Canada as well as leading architecture practices at Siemens consultancy, BBC, NHS, Ordnance Survey, and Houses of Parliament and Commons in the UK.
    • His responsibilities at Info-Tech include leading the data and analytics and enterprise architecture research practices and guiding the future of research and client engagement in that space.
    • Andy is the Product Owner for the Technical Counselor seat offering at Info-Tech, which gives world-class holistic support to our senior technical members.
    • He is also a instructor and content creator for the University of Toronto in the field of Enterprise Architecture.


    Photo of Wayne Filin-Matthews, Chief Enterprise Architect, ICMG Winner of Global Chief Enterprise Architect of the Year 2019 Wayne Filin-Matthews
    Chief Enterprise Architect, ICMG Winner of Global Chief Enterprise Architect of the Year 2019
    • Wayne is currently the EA Discipline Lead/Chief Enterprise Architect – Global Digital Transformation Office, COE at Dell Technologies.
    • He is a distinguished Motivator & Tech Lead as well as an influencer.
    • Wayne has led multiple Enterprise Architecture practices at the global level and has valuable contributions in this space managing and growing Enterprise Architecture and CTO practices across strategy, execution, and adoption parts of the IT lifecycle.
    Photo of Graham Smith, Experienced lead Enterprise Architect and Independent Consultant Graham Smith
    Experienced lead Enterprise Architect and Independent Consultant
    • Graham is an experienced lead enterprise architect specializing in digital and data transformation, with over 33 years of experience, spanning financial markets, media, information, insurance, and telecommunications sectors. Graham has successfully established and led large teams across India, China, Australia, Americas, Japan, and the UK.
    • He is currently working as an independent consultant in digital and data-led transformation and his work spans established businesses and start-ups alike.

    Thanks also go to all experts who contributed to previous versions of this document:

    • Zachary Curry, Director, Enterprise Architecture and Innovation, FMC Technologies
    • Pam Doucette, Director of Enterprise Architecture, Tufts Health Plan
    • Joe Evers, Consulting Principal, JcEvers Consulting Corp
    • Cameron Fairbairn, Enterprise Architect, Agriculture Financial Services Corporation (AFSC)
    • Michael Fulton, Chief Digital Officer & Senior IT Strategy & Architecture Consultant at CC and C Solutions
    • Tom Graves, Principal Consultant, Tetradian Consulting
    • (JB) Brahmaiah Jarugumilli, Consultant, Federal Aviation Administration – Enterprise Services Center
    • Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect
    • Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture, Canada Mortgage & Housing Corporation

    Additional interviews were conducted but are not listed due to privacy and confidentiality requirements.

    Bibliography

    “Agile Manifesto for Software Development,” Ward Cunningham, 2001. Accessed July 2021.

    “ArchiMate 3.1 Specification.” The Open Group, n.d. Accessed July 2021.

    “Are Your IT Strategy and Business Strategy Aligned?” 5Q Partners, 8 Jan. 2015. Accessed Oct. 2016.

    Bowen, Fillmore. “How agile companies create and sustain high ROI.” IBM. Accessed Oct. 2016.

    Burns, Peter, et al. Building Value through Enterprise Architecture: A Global Study. Booz & Co. 2009. Web. Nov. 2016.

    “Demonstrating the Value of Enterprise Architecture in Delivering Business Capabilities.” Cisco, 2008. Web. Oct. 2016.

    “Disciplined Agile.” Disciplined Agile Consortium, n.d. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Building Effective software.” MartinFowler.com. Accessed July 2021.

    Fowler, Martin. “Agile Software Guide.” MartinFowler.com, 1 Aug. 2019.

    Accessed July 2021.

    Haughey, Duncan. “SMART Goals.” Project Smart, 2014. Accessed July 2021.

    Kern, Matthew. “20 Enterprise Architecture Practices.” LinkedIn, 3 March 2016. Accessed Nov. 2016.

    Lahanas, Stephen. “Infrastructure Architecture, Defined.” IT Architecture Journal, Sept. 2014. Accessed July 2021.

    Lean IX website, Accessed July 2021.

    Litoiu, Milena. Course material from Information Technology 2690: Foundations of Enterprise Architecture, 2021, University of Toronto.

    Mocker, M., J.W. Ross, and C.M. Beath. “How Companies Use Digital Technologies to Enhance Customer Findings.” MIT CISR Working Paper No. 434, Feb. 2019. Qtd in Mayor, Tracy. “MIT expert recaps 30-plus years of enterprise architecture.” MIT Sloan, 10 Aug. 2020. Web.

    “Open Agile ArchitectureTM.” The Open Group, 2020. Accessed July 2021.

    “Organizational Design Framework – The Transformation Model.” The Center for Organizational Design, n.d. Accessed 1 Aug. 2020.

    Ross, Jeanne W. et al. Enterprise Architecture as Strategy: Creating a Foundation for Business Execution. Harvard Business School Press, 2006.

    Rouse, Margaret. “Enterprise Architecture (EA).” SearchCIO, June 2007. Accessed Nov. 2016.

    “SAFe 5 for Lean Enterprises.” Scaled Agile Framework, Scaled Agile, Inc. Accessed 2021.

    “Security Architecture.” Technopedia, updated 20 Dec. 2016. Accessed July 2021.

    “Software Engineering Institute.” Carnegie Mellon University, n.d. Web.

    “TOGAF 9.1.” The Open Group, 2011. Accessed Oct. 2016.

    “TOGAF 9.2.” The Open Group, 2018. Accessed July 2021.

    Thompson, Rachel. “Stakeholder Analysis: Winning Support for Your Projects.” MindTools, n.d. Accessed July 2021.

    Wendt, Jerome M. “Redefining ‘SMB’, ‘SME’ and ‘Large Enterprise.’” DCIG, 25 Mar. 2011. Accessed July 2021.

    Wilkinson, Jim. “Business Drivers.” The Strategic CFO, 23 July 2013. Accessed July 2021.

    Zachman, John. “Conceptual, Logical, Physical: It is Simple.” Zachman International, 2011. Accessed July 2021.

    Select Software With the Right Satisfaction Drivers in Mind

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}606|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Software selection needs to provide satisfaction. Across the board, satisfaction is easy to achieve in the short term, but long-term satisfaction is much harder to attain. It’s not clear what leads to long-term satisfaction, and it’s even more difficult to determine which software continuously delivers on key satisfaction drivers to support the business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Software satisfaction drops over time. After the initial purchase, the novelty factor of new software begins to wane, and only long-term satisfaction drivers sustain satisfaction after five years.
    • Surface-level satisfaction has immediate effects, but it only provides satisfaction in the short term. Deep satisfaction has a lasting impact that can shape organizational satisfaction and productivity in meaningful ways.
    • Empower IT decision makers with knowledge about what drives satisfaction in the top five and bottom five software vendors in spotlighted categories.

    Impact and Result

    • Reorient discussion around how software is implemented around satisfaction rather than what’s in fashion.
    • Identify software satisfaction drivers that provide deep satisfaction to get the most out of software over the long term.
    • Appreciate the best from the rest and learn which software categories and brands buck the trend of declining satisfaction.

    Select Software With the Right Satisfaction Drivers in Mind Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand what drives user satisfaction

    Gain insight on the various factors that influence software satisfaction.

    • Select Software With the Right Satisfaction Drivers in Mind Storyboard

    2. Learn what provides deep satisfaction

    Reduce the size of your RFPs or skip them entirely to limit time spent watching vendor dog and pony shows.

    3. Appreciate what separates the best from the rest

    Narrow the field to four contenders prior to in-depth comparison and engage in accelerated enterprise architecture oversight.

    [infographic]

    Organizational Change Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}35|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}35|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,055
    • member rating average days saved: 24
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects
    If you don't know who is responsible for organizational change, it's you.

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}296|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $122,947 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 34 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Vulnerability scanners, industry alerts, and penetration tests are revealing more and more vulnerabilities, and it is unclear how to manage them.
    • Organizations are struggling to prioritize the vulnerabilities for remediation, as there are many factors to consider, including the threat of the vulnerability and the potential remediation option itself.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Patches are often considered the only answer to vulnerabilities, but these are not always the most suitable solution.
    • Vulnerability management does not equal patch management. It includes identifying and assessing the risk of the vulnerability, and then selecting a remediation option which goes beyond just patching alone.
    • There is more than one way to tackle the problem. Leverage your existing security controls to protect the organization.

    Impact and Result

    • After this blueprint, you will have created a full vulnerability management program that allows you to take a risk-based approach to vulnerability remediation.
    • Assessing a vulnerability’s risk will enable you to properly determine the true urgency of a vulnerability within the context of your organization; this ensures you are not just blindly following what the tool is reporting.
    • The risk-based approach allows you to prioritize your discovered vulnerabilities and take immediate action on critical and high vulnerabilities, while allowing your standard remediation cycle to address the medium to low vulnerabilities.
    • With your program defined and developed, you now need to configure your vulnerability scanning tool, or acquire one if you don’t already have a tool in place.
    • Lastly, while vulnerability management will help address your systems and applications, how do you know if you are secure from external malicious actors? Penetration testing will offer visibility, allowing you to plug those holes and attain an environment with a smaller risk surface.

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design and implement a vulnerability management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management – Phases 1-4

    1. Identify vulnerability sources

    Begin the project by creating a vulnerability management team and determine how vulnerabilities will be identified through scanners, penetration tests, third-party sources, and incidents.

    • Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    2. Triage vulnerabilities and assign priorities

    Determine how vulnerabilities will be triaged and evaluated based on intrinsic qualities and how they may compromise business functions and data sensitivity.

    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool
    • Vulnerability Management Workflow (Visio)
    • Vulnerability Management Workflow (PDF)

    3. Remediate vulnerabilities

    Address the vulnerabilities based on their level of risk. Patching isn't the only risk mitigation action; some systems simply cannot be patched, but other options are available. Reduce the risk down to medium/low levels and engage your regular operational processes to deal with the latter.

     

    4. Measure and formalize

    Evolve the program continually by developing metrics and formalizing a policy.

    • Vulnerability Management Policy Template
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Vulnerability Sources

    The Purpose

    Establish a common understanding of vulnerability management, and define the roles, scope, and information sources of vulnerability detection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Attain visibility on all of the vulnerability information sources, and a common understanding of vulnerability management and its scope.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the scope & boundary of your organization’s security program.

    1.2 Assign responsibility for vulnerability identification and remediation.

    1.3 Develop a monitoring and review process of third-party vulnerability sources.

    1.4 Review incident management and vulnerability management

    Outputs

    Defined scope and boundaries of the IT security program

    Roles and responsibilities defined for member groups

    Process for review of third-party vulnerability sources

    Alignment of vulnerability management program with existing incident management processes

    2 Triage and Prioritize

    The Purpose

    We will examine the elements that you will use to triage and analyze vulnerabilities, prioritizing using a risk-based approach and prepare for remediation options.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consistent, documented process for the evaluation of vulnerabilities in your environment.

    Activities

    2.1 Evaluate your identified vulnerabilities.

    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality.

    2.3 Determine your high-level data classifications.

    2.4 Document your defense-in-depth controls.

    2.5 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess impact.

    2.6 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess likelihood.

    Outputs

    Adjusted workflow to reflect your current processes

    List of business operations and their criticality and impact to the business

    Adjusted workflow to reflect your current processes

    List of defense-in-depth controls

    Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment tool formatted to your organization

    Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment tool formatted to your organization

    3 Remediate Vulnerabilities

    The Purpose

    Identifying potential remediation options.

    Developing criteria for each option in regard to when to use and when to avoid.

    Establishing exception procedure for testing and remediation.

    Documenting the implementation of remediation and verification.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identifying and selecting the remediation option to be used

    Determining what to do when a patch or update is not available

    Scheduling and executing the remediation activity

    Planning continuous improvement

    Activities

    3.1 Develop risk and remediation action.

    Outputs

    List of remediation options sorted into “when to use” and “when to avoid” lists

    4 Measure and Formalize

    The Purpose

    You will determine what ought to be measured to track the success of your vulnerability management program.

    If you lack a scanning tool this phase will help you determine tool selection.

    Lastly, penetration testing is a good next step to consider once you have your vulnerability management program well underway.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Outline of metrics that you can then configure your vulnerability scanning tool to report on.

    Development of an inaugural policy covering vulnerability management.

    The provisions needed for you to create and deploy an RFP for a vulnerability management tool.

    An understanding of penetration testing, and guidance on how to get started if there is interest to do so.

    Activities

    4.1 Measure your program with metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.

    4.2 Update the vulnerability management policy.

    4.3 Create an RFP for vulnerability scanning tools.

    4.4 Create an RFP for penetration tests.

    Outputs

    List of relevant metrics to track, and the KPIs, CSFs, and business goals for.

    Completed Vulnerability Management Policy

    Completed Request for Proposal (RFP) document that can be distributed to vendor proponents

    Completed Request for Proposal (RFP) document that can be distributed to vendor proponents

    Further reading

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Get off the patching merry-go-round and start mitigating risk!

    Table of Contents

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    6 Common Obstacles

    8 Risk-based approach to vulnerability management

    16 Step 1.1: Vulnerability management defined

    24 Step 1.2: Defining scope and roles

    34 Step 1.3: Cloud considerations for vulnerability management

    33 Step 1.4: Vulnerability detection

    46 Step 2.1: Triage vulnerabilities

    51 Step 2.2: Determine high-level business criticality

    56 Step 2.3: Consider current security posture

    61 Step 2.4: Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

    71 Step 3.1: Assessing remediation options

    Table of Contents

    80 Step 3.2: Scheduling and executing remediation

    85 Step 3.3: Continuous improvement

    89 Step 4.1: Metrics, KPIs, and CSFs

    94 Step 4.2: Vulnerability management policy

    97 Step 4.3: Select & implement a scanning tool

    107 Step 4.4: Penetration testing

    118 Summary of accomplishment

    119 Additional Support

    120 Bibliography

    Analyst Perspective

    Vulnerabilities will always be present. Know the unknowns!

    In this age of discovery, technology changes at such a rapid pace. New things are discovered, both in new technology and in old. The pace of change can often be very confusing as to where to start and what to do.

    The ever-changing nature of technology means that vulnerabilities will always be present. Taking measures to address these completely will consume all your department’s time and resources. That, and your efforts will quickly become stale as new vulnerabilities are uncovered. Besides, what about the systems that simply can’t be patched? The key is to understand the vulnerabilities and the levels of risk they pose to your organization, to prioritize effectively and to look beyond patching.

    A risk-based approach to vulnerability management will ensure you are prioritizing appropriately and protecting the business. Reduce the risk surface!

    Vulnerability management is more than just systems and application patching. It is a full process that includes patching, compensating controls, segmentation, segregation, and heightened diligence in security monitoring.

    Jimmy Tom, Research Advisor – Security, Privacy, Risk, and Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Jimmy Tom
    Research Advisor – Security, Privacy, Risk, and Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Vulnerability scanners, industry alerts, and penetration tests are revealing more and more vulnerabilities, and it is unclear how to manage them.

    Organizations are struggling to prioritize the vulnerabilities for remediation, as there are many factors to consider, including the threat of the vulnerability and the potential remediation option.

    Common Obstacles

    Patches are often seen as the answer to vulnerabilities, but these are not always the most suitable solution.

    Some systems deemed vulnerable simply cannot be patched or easily replaced.

    Companies are unaware of the risk implications that come from leaving the vulnerability open and from the remediation option itself.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Design and implement a vulnerability management program that identifies, prioritizes, and remediates vulnerabilities.

    Understand what needs to be considered when implementing remediation options, including patches, configuration changes, and defense-in-depth controls.

    Build a process that is easy to understand and allows vulnerabilities to be remediated proactively, instead of in an ad hoc fashion.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vulnerability management does not always equal patch management. There is more than one way to tackle the problem, particularly if a system cannot be easily patched or replaced. If a vulnerability cannot be completely remediated, steps to reduce the risk to a tolerable level must be taken.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make vulnerability management difficult to address for many organizations:
    • The value of vulnerability management is not well articulated in many organizations. As a result, investment in vulnerability scanning technology is often insufficient.
    • Many organizations feel that a “patch everything” approach is the most effective path.
    • Vulnerability management is commonly misunderstood as being a process that only supports patch management.
    • There is often misalignment between SecOps and ITOps in remediation action and priority, affecting the timeliness of remediation.
    CVSS Score Distribution From the National Vulnerability Database: Pie Charts presenting the CVSS Core Distribution for the National Vulnerability Database. The left circle represents 'V3' and the right 'V2', where V3 has an extra option for 'Critical', above 'High', 'Medium', and 'Low', and V2 does not.
    (Source: NIST National Vulnerability Database Dashboard)

    Leverage risk to sort, triage, and prioritize vulnerabilities

    Reduce your risk surface to avoid cost to your business; everything else is table stakes.

    Reduce the critical and high vulnerabilities below the risk threshold and operationalize the remediation of medium/low vulnerabilities by following your effective vulnerability management program cycles.

    Identify vulnerability sources

    An inventory of your scanning tool and vulnerability threat intelligence data sources will help you determine a viable strategy for addressing vulnerabilities. Defining roles and responsibilities ahead of time will ensure you are not left scrambling when dealing with vulnerabilities.

    Triage and prioritize

    Bring the vulnerabilities into context by assessing vulnerabilities based on your security posture and mechanisms and not just what your data sources report. This will allow you to gauge the true urgency of the vulnerabilities based on risk and determine an effective mitigation plan.

    Remediate vulnerabilities

    Address the vulnerabilities based on their level of risk. Patching isn't the only risk mitigation action; some systems simply cannot be patched, but other options are available.

    Reduce the risk down to medium/low levels and engage your regular operational processes to deal with the latter.

    Measure and formalize

    Upon implementation of the program, measure with metrics to ensure that the program is successful. Improve the program with each iteration of vulnerability mitigation to ensure continuous improvement.

    Tactical Insight 1

    All actions to address vulnerabilities should be based on risk and the organization’s established risk tolerance.

    Tactical Insight 2

    Reduce the risk surface down below the risk threshold.

    The industry has shifted to a risk-based approach

    Traditional vulnerability management is no longer viable.

    “For those of us in the vulnerability management space, ensuring that money, resources, and time are strategically spent is both imperative and difficult. Resources are dwindling fast, but the vulnerability problem sure isn’t.” (Kenna Security)

    “Using vulnerability scanners to identify unpatched software is no longer enough. Keeping devices, networks, and digital assets safe takes a much broader, risk-based vulnerability management strategy – one that includes vulnerability assessment and mitigation actions that touch the entire ecosystem.” (Balbix)

    “Unlike legacy vulnerability management, risk-based vulnerability management goes beyond just discovering vulnerabilities. It helps you understand vulnerability risks with threat context and insight into potential business impact.” (Tenable)

    “A common mistake when prioritizing patching is equating a vulnerability’s Common Vulnerability Scoring System (CVSS) score with risk. Although CVSS scores can provide useful insight into the anatomy of a vulnerability and how it might behave if weaponized, they are standardized and thus don’t reflect either of the highly situational variables — namely, weaponization likelihood and potential impact — that factor into the risk the vulnerability poses to an organization.” (SecurityWeek)

    Why a take risk-based approach?

    Vulnerabilities, by the numbers

    60% — In 2019, 60% of breaches were due to unpatched vulnerabilities.

    74% — In the same survey, 74% of survey responses said they cannot take down critical applications and systems to patch them quickly. (Source: SecurityBoulevard, 2019)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Taking a risk-based approach will allow you to focus on mitigating risk, rather than “just patching” your environment.

    The average cost of a breach in 2020 is $3.86 million, and “…the price tag was much less for mature companies and industries and far higher for firms that had lackluster security automation and incident response processes.” (Dark Reading)

    Vulnerability Management

    A risk-based approach

    Reduce the risk surface to avoid cost to your business, everything else is table stakes

    Logo for Info-Tech.
    Logo for #iTRG.

    1

    Identify

    4

    Address

      Mitigate the risk surface by reducing the time across the phases › Mitigate the risk by implementing:
    • patch systems & apps
    • compensating controls
    • systems and apps hardening
    • systems segregation
    Chart presenting an example of 'Risk Surface' with the axes 'Risk Level' and 'Time' with lines created by individual risks. The highlighted line begins in 'Critical' and eventually drops to low. The area between the line and your organization's risk tolerance is labelled 'Risk Surface'.

    Objective: reduce risk surface by reducing time to address

    Your organization's risk tolerance threshold

      Identify vulnerability management scanning tools & external threat intel sources (Mitre CVE, US-CERT, vendor alerts, etc.) Vulnerability information feeds:
    • scanning tool
    • external threat intel
    • internal threat intel

    2

    Analyze

      Assign actual risk (impact x urgency) to the organization based on current security posture

    Triage based on risk ›

    Your organization's risk tolerance threshold

    Risk tolerance threshold map with axes 'Impact' and 'Likelihood'. High levels of one and low levels of the other, or medium levels of both, is 'Medium', High level of one and Medium levels of the other is 'High', and High levels of both is 'Critical'.

    3

    Assess

      Plan risk mitigation strategy › Consider:
    • risk tolerance
    • compensating controls
    • business impact

    Info-Tech’s vulnerability management methodology

    Focus on developing the most efficient processes.

    Vulnerability management isn’t “old school.”

    The vulnerability management market is relatively mature; however, vulnerability management remains a very relevant and challenging topic.

    Security practitioners are inundated with the advice they need to prioritize their vulnerabilities. Every vulnerability scanning vendor will proclaim their ability to prioritize the identified vulnerabilities.

    Third-party prioritization methodology can’t be effectively applied across all organizations. Each organization is too unique with different constraints. No tool or service can account for these variables.

    Equation to find 'Vulnerability Priority'.

    When patching is not possible, other options exist: configuration changes (hardening), defense-in-depth, compensating controls, and even elevated security monitoring are possible options.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vulnerability management is not only patch management. Patching is only one aspect.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Vulnerability Management SOP

    The Standard operating procedure (SOP) will comprise the end-to-end description of the program: roles & responsibilities, data flow, and expected outcomes of the program.

    Sample of the key deliverable, Vulnerability Management SOP.
    Vulnerability Management Policy

    Template for your vulnerability management policy.

    Sample of the Vulnerability Management Policy blueprint. Vulnerability Tracking Tool

    This tool offers a template to track vulnerabilities and how they are remedied.

    Sample of the Vulnerability Tracking Tool blueprint.
    Vulnerability Scanning RFP Template

    Request for proposal template for the selection of a vulnerability scanning tool.

    Sample of the Vulnerability Scanning RFP Template blueprint. Vulnerability Risk Assessment Tool

    Methodology to assess vulnerability risk by determining impact and likelihood.

    Sample of the Vulnerability Risk Assessment Tool blueprint.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • A standardized, consistent methodology to assess, prioritize, and remediate vulnerabilities.
    • A risk-based approach that aligns with what’s important to the business.
    • A way of dealing with the high volumes of vulnerabilities that your scanning tool is reporting.
    • Identification of “where to start” in terms of vulnerability management.
    • Ability to not lose yourself in the patch madness but rather take a sound approach to scheduling and prioritizing patches and updates.
    • Knowledge of what to do when patching is simply not possible or feasible.

    Business Benefits

    • Alignment with IT in ensuring that business processes are only interrupted when absolutely necessary while maintaining a regular cadence of vulnerability remediation.
    • A consistent program that the business can plan around and predict when interruptions will occur.
    • IT’s new approach being integrated with existing IT operations processes, offering the most efficient yet expedient method of dealing with vulnerabilities.

    Info-Tech’s process can save significant financial resources

    Phase Measured Value
    Phase 1: Identify vulnerability sources
      Define the process, scope, roles, vulnerability sources, and current state
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 16 hours = $1,600
    Phase 2: Triage vulnerabilities and assign urgencies
      Establish triaging and vulnerability evaluation process
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 16 hours = $1,600
      Determine high-level business criticality and data classifications
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 40 hours = $4,000
      Assign urgencies to vulnerabilities
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 8 hours = $800
    Phase 3: Remediate vulnerabilities
      Prepare documentation for the vulnerability process
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 8 hours = $800
      Establish defense-in-depth modelling
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 24 hours = $2,400
      Identify remediation options and establish criteria for use
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 40 hours = $4,000
      Formalize backup and testing procedures, including exceptions
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 8 hours = $800
      Remediate vulnerabilities and verify
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 24 hours = $2,400
    Phase 4: Continually improve the vulnerability management process
      Establish a metrics program for vulnerability management
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 16 hours = $1,600
      Update vulnerability management policy
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 8 hours = $800
      Develop a vulnerability scanning tool RFP
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 40 hours = $4,000
      Develop a penetration test RFP
      • Consultant at $100 an hour for 40 hours = $4,000
    Potential financial savings from using Info-Tech resources Phase 1 ($1,600) + Phase 2 ($6,400) + Phase 3 ($10,400) + Phase 4 ($10,400) = $28,800

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Discuss current state and vulnerability sources.

    Call #3: Identify triage methods and business criticality.

    Call #4:Review current defense-in-depth and discuss risk assessment.

    Call #5: Discuss remediation options and scheduling.

    Call #6: Review release and change management and continuous improvement.

    Call #7: Identify metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.

    Call #8: Review vulnerability management policy.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Identify vulnerability sources

    1.1 What is vulnerability management?

    1.2 Define scope and roles

    1.3 Cloud considerations for vulnerability management

    1.4 Vulnerability detection

    Triage and prioritize

    2.1 Triage vulnerabilities

    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality

    2.3 Consider current security posture

    2.4 Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

    Remediate vulnerabilities

    3.1 Assess remediation options

    3.2 Schedule and execute remediation

    3.3 Drive continuous improvement

    Measure and formalize

    4.1 Metrics, KPIs & CSFs

    4.2 Vulnerability Management Policy

    4.3 Select & implement a scanning tool

    4.4 Penetration testing

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Scope and boundary definition of vulnerability management program
    2. Responsibility assignment for vulnerability identification and remediation
    3. Monitoring and review process of third-party vulnerability sources
    4. Incident management and vulnerability convergence
    1. Methodology for evaluating identified vulnerabilities
    2. Identification of high-level business criticality
    3. Defined high-level data classifications
    4. Documented defense-in-depth controls
    5. Risk assessment criteria for impact and likelihood
    1. Documented risk assessment methodology and remediation options
    1. Defined metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), and critical success factors (CSFs)
    2. Initial draft of vulnerability management policy
    3. Scanning tool selection criteria
    4. Introduction to penetration testing
    1. Completed vulnerability management standard operating procedure
    2. Defined vulnerability management risk assessment criteria
    3. Vulnerability management policy draft

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Phase 1

    Identify Vulnerability Sources

    Phase 1

    1.1 What is vulnerability management?
    1.2 Define scope and roles
    1.3 Cloud considerations for vulnerability management
    1.4 Vulnerability detection

     

    Phase 2

    2.1 Triage vulnerabilities
    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality
    2.3 Consider current security posture
    2.4 Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

     

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assessing remediation options
    3.2 Scheduling and executing remediation
    3.3 Continuous improvement

     

    Phase 4

    4.1 Metrics, KPIs & CSFs
    4.2 Vulnerability management policy
    4.3 Select and implement a scanning tool
    4.4 Penetration testing

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Establish a common understanding of vulnerability management, define the roles, scope, and information sources of vulnerability detection.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security operations team
    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Director
    • CISO

    Step 1.1

    Vulnerability Management Defined

    Activities

    None for this section

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Establish a common understanding of vulnerability management and its place in the IT organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security operations team
    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Director
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    Foundational knowledge of vulnerability management in your organization.

    Identify vulnerability sources
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    What is vulnerability management?

    It’s more than just patching.

    • Vulnerability management is the regular and ongoing practice of scanning an operating environment to uncover vulnerabilities. These vulnerabilities can be outdated applications, unpatched operating systems and software, open ports, obsolete hardware, or any combination of these.
    • The scanning and detection of vulnerabilities is the first step. Planning and executing of remediation is next, along with the approach, prioritized sequence of events, and timing.
    • A vendor-supplied software patch or firmware update is often the easy answer, however, this is not always a viable solution. What if you can’t patch in a timely fashion? What if patching is not possible as it will break the application and bring down operations? What if no patch exists due to the age of the application or operating platform?

    “Most organizations do not have a formal process for vulnerability management.” (Morey Haber, VP of Technology, BeyondTrust, 2016)

    Effective vulnerability management

    It’s not easy, but it’s much harder without a process in place.
    • Effective vulnerability management requires a formal process for organizations to follow; without one, vulnerabilities are dealt with in an ad hoc fashion.
    • Patching isn’t the only solution, but it’s the one that often draws focus.
    • Responsibilities for the different aspects of vulnerability management are often unclear, such as for testing, remediation, and implementation.
    • Identifying new threats without proper vulnerability scanning tools can be a near-impossible task.
    • Determining which vulnerabilities are most urgent can be an inconsistent process, increasing the organizational risk.
    • Measuring the effectiveness of your vulnerability remediation activities can help you better manage resources in SecOps and ITOps. Your staff will be spending the appropriate effort on vulnerabilities that warrant that level of attention.

    You’re not just doing this for yourself. It’s also for your auditors.

    Many compliance and regulatory obligations require organizations to have thorough documentation of their vulnerability management practices.

    Vulnerability management revolves around your asset security services

    Diagram with 'Asset Security Services' at the center. On either side are 'Network Security Services' and 'Identity Security Services', all three of which flow up into 'Security Analytics | Security Incident Response', and all four share a symbiotic flow with 'Management' below and contribute to 'Mega Trend Mapping' above. Management is supported by 'Governance'. Vulnerabilities can be found primarily within your assets but also connect to your information risk management. These must be effectively managed as part of a holistic security program.

    Without management, vulnerabilities left unattended can be easy for attackers to exploit. It becomes difficult to identify the correct remediation option to mitigate against the vulnerabilities.

    Vulnerability management works in tandem with SecOps and ITOps

    Vulnerability Management Process Inputs/Outputs:
    'Vulnerability Management (Process and Tool)' outputs are 'Incident Management', 'Release Management', 'Change Management', 'IT Asset Management', 'Application Security Testing', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Risk Management'; inputs are 'Vulnerability Disclosure', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Risk Management'.

    Arrows denote direction of information feed

    Vulnerability management serves as the input into a number of processes for remediation, including:
    • Incident management, to deal with issues
    • Release management, for patch management
    • Change management, for change control
    • IT asset management, to track version information, e.g. for patching
    • Application security testing, for the verification of vulnerabilities

    A two-way data flow exists between vulnerability management and:

    • Security risk management, for the overall risk posture of the organization
    • Threat intelligence, as vulnerability management reveals only one of several threat vectors

    For additional information please refer to Info-Tech’s research for each area:

    • Vulnerability management can leverage your existing processes to gain an operational element for the program.
    • As you strive to mature each of the processes on their own, vulnerability management will benefit accordingly.
    • Review our research for each of these areas and speak to one of our analysts if you wish to improve any of the listed processes.

    Info-Tech’s Information Security Program Framework

    Vulnerability management is a component of the Infrastructure Security section of Security Management

    Information Security Framework with Level 1 and Level 2 capabilities in two main sections, 'Management' and 'Governance'. Level 2 capabilities are grouped within Level 1 capabilities. For more information, review our Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint, or speak to one of our analysts.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vulnerability management is but one piece of the information security puzzle. Ensure that you have all the pieces!

    Case Study

    Logo for Cimpress.
    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
    SOURCE: Cimpress, 2016

    One organization is seeing immediate benefits by formalizing its vulnerability management program.

    Challenge

    Cimpress was dealing with many challenges in regards to vulnerability management. Vulnerability scanning tools were used, but the reports that were generated often gave multiple vulnerabilities that were seen as critical or high and required many resources to help address them. Scanning was done primarily in an attempt to adhere to PCI compliance rather than to effectively enable security. After re-running some scans, Cimpress saw that some vulnerabilities had existed for an extended time period but were deemed acceptable.

    Solution

    The Director of Information Security realized that there was a need to greatly improve this current process. Guidelines and policies were formalized that communicated when scans should occur and what the expectations for remediations should be. Cimpress also built a tiered approach to prioritize vulnerabilities for remediation that is specific to Cimpress instead of relying on scanning tool reports.

    Results

    Cimpress found better management of the vulnerabilities within its system. There was no pushback to the adoption of the policies, and across the worldwide offices, business units have been proactively trying to understand if there are vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management has been expanded to vendors and is taken into consideration when doing any mergers and acquisitions. Cimpress continues to expand its program for vulnerability management to include application development and vulnerabilities within any existing legacy systems.

    Step 1.2

    Defining the scope and roles

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Define the scope and boundary of your organization’s security program
    • 1.2.2 Assign responsibility for vulnerability identification and remediation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Define and understand the scope and boundary of the security program. For example, does it include OT? Define roles and responsibilities for vulnerability identification and remediation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security operations team
    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Director
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    Understand how far vulnerability management extends and what role each person in IT plays in the remediation of vulnerabilities

    Identify vulnerability sources
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    Determine the scope of your security program

    This will help you adjust the depth and breadth of your vulnerability management program.
    • Determining the scope will help you decide how much organizational risk the vulnerability management program will oversee.
    • Scope can be defined along four aspects:
      • Data Scope – What data elements in your organization does your security program cover? How is data classified?
      • Physical Scope – What physical scope, such as geographies, does the security program cover?
      • Organizational Scope – How are business units engaged with security initiatives? Does the scope cover all subsidiary organizations?
      • IT Scope – What parts of the organization does IT cover? Does their coverage include operational technology (OT) and industrial control systems (ICS)?
    Stock image of figures standing in connected circles.

    1.2.1 Define the scope and boundary of your organization’s security program

    60 minutes

    Input: List of Data Scope, Physical Scope, Organization Scope, and IT Scope

    Output: Defined scope and boundaries of the IT security program

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Sticky Notes, Markers, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: Business stakeholders, IT leaders, Security team members

    1. On a whiteboard, write the headers: Data Scope, Physical Scope, Organizational Scope, and IT Scope.
    2. Give each group member a handful of sticky notes. Ask them to write down as many items as possible for the organization that could fall under one of the four scope buckets.
    3. In a group, discuss the sticky notes and the rationale for including them. Discuss your security-related locations, data, people, and technologies, and define their scope and boundaries.

    The goal is to identify what your vulnerability management program is responsible for and document it.

    Consider the following:

    How is data being categorized and classified? How are business units engaged with security initiatives? How are IT systems connected to each other? How are physical locations functioning in terms of information security management?

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Assets are part of the scope definition

    An inventory of IT assets is necessary if there is to be effective vulnerability management.

    • Organizations need an up-to-date and comprehensive asset inventory for vulnerability management. This is due to multiple reasons:
      • When vulnerabilities are announced, they will need to be compared to an inventory to determine if the organization has any relevant systems or versions.
      • It indicates where all IT assets can be found both physically and logically.
      • Asset inventories typically have owners assigned to the assets and systems whose responsibility it is to carry out remediations for vulnerabilities.
    • Furthermore, asset inventories can provide insight into where data can be found within the organization. This is extremely useful within a formal data classification program, which plays a large factor in vulnerability management.
    If you need assistance building your asset inventory, review Info-Tech’s Implement Hardware Asset Management and Implement Software Asset Management blueprints.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Create a formal IT asset inventory before continuing with the rest of this project. Otherwise, you risk being at the mercy of a weak vulnerability management program.

    Assign responsibility for vulnerability identification and remediation

    Determine who is critical to effectively detecting and managing vulnerabilities.
    • Some of the remediation steps will involve members of IT management to identify the true organizational risk of a vulnerability.
    • Vulnerability remediation comes in different shapes and sizes. In addition to patching, this can include implementing compensating controls, server and application hardening, or the segregating of vulnerable systems.
      • Who carries out each of these activities? Who coordinates the activities and tracks them to ensure completion?
    • The people involved may be members outside of the security team, such as members from IT operations, infrastructure, and applications. The specific roles that each of these groups play should be clearly identified.
    Stock image of many connected profile photos in a cloud network.

    1.2.2 Assign responsibility for vulnerability identification and remediation

    60 minutes

    Input: Sample list of vulnerabilities and requisite actions from each group, High-level organizational chart with area functions

    Output: Defined set of roles and responsibilities for member groups

    Materials: Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: CIO, CISO, IT Management representatives for each area of IT

    1. Display the table of responsibilities that need to be assigned.
    2. List all the positions within the IT security team.
    3. Map these to the positions that require IT security team members.
    4. List all positions that are part of the IT team.
    5. Map these to the positions that require IT team members.

    If your organization does not have a dedicated IT security team, you can perform this exercise by mapping the relevant IT staff to the different positions shown on the right.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template Sample of the Roles and Responsibilities table from the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.

    Step 1.3

    Cloud considerations for vulnerability management

    Activities

    None for this section.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review cloud considerations for vulnerability management

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security operations team
    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Director
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    Understand the various types of cloud offerings and the implications (and limitations) of vulnerability management in a cloud environment.

    Identify vulnerability sources
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    Cloud considerations

    Cloud will change your approach to vulnerability management.
    • There will be a heavy dependence on the cloud service provider to ensure that vulnerabilities in their foundational technologies have been addressed.
    • Depending on the level of “as-a-Service,” customers will have varying degrees of control and visibility into the underlying operations.
    • With vendor acquiescence, you can set your tool to scan a given cloud environment, depending on how much visibility you have into their environment based on the service you have purchased.
    • Due to compliance obligations of their customers, there is a growing trend among cloud providers to allow more scanning of cloud environments.
    • In the absence of customer scanning capability, vendors may offer attestation of vulnerability management and remediation.
    Table outlining who has control, between the 'Organization' and the 'Vendor', of different cloud capabilities in different cloud strategies.

    For more information, see Info-Tech Research Group’s Document Your Cloud Strategy blueprint.

    Cloud environment scanning

    Cloud scanning is becoming a more common necessity but still requires special consideration.

    An organization’s cloud environment is just an extension of its own environment. As such, cloud environments need to be scanned for vulnerabilities.

    Private Cloud
    If your organization owns a private cloud, these environments can be tested normally.
    Public Cloud
    Performing vulnerability testing against public, third-party cloud environments is an area experiencing rapid growth and general acceptance, although customer visibility will still be limited.

    In many cases, a customer must rely on the vendor’s assurance that vulnerabilities are being addressed in a sufficient manner.

    Security standards’ compliance requirements are driving the need for cloud suppliers to validate and assure that they are appropriately scanning for and remediating vulnerabilities.

    Infrastructure- or Platform-as-a-Service (IaaS or PaaS) Environments
    • There is a general trend for PaaS and IaaS vendors to allow testing if given due notice.
    • Your contract with the cloud vendor or the vendor’s terms and conditions will outline the permissibility of customer vulnerability scanning. In some cases, a cloud vendor will deny the ability to do vulnerability scanning if they already provide a solution as part of their service.
    • Always ensure that the vendor is aware of your vulnerability scanning activity so that false positives aren’t triggering their security measures as possible denial-of-service (DoS) attacks.
    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) Environments
    • SaaS offers very limited visibility to the services behind the software that the customer sees. You therefore cannot test for patch levels or vulnerabilities.
    • SaaS customers must rely exclusively on the provider for the regular scanning and remediation of vulnerabilities in the back-end technologies supporting the SaaS application.
    • You can only test the connection points to SaaS environments. This involves trying to figure out what you can see, e.g. looking for encrypted traffic.

    Certain testing (e.g. DoS or load testing) will be very limited by your cloud vendor. Cloud vendors won’t open themselves to testing that would possibly impact their operations.

    Step 1.4

    Vulnerability detection

    Activities
    • 1.4.1 Develop a monitoring and review process of third-party vulnerability sources
    • 1.4.2 Incident management and vulnerability management

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Create an inventory of your vulnerability monitoring capability and third-party vulnerability information sources.

    Determine how incident management and vulnerability management interoperate.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security operations team
    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Director
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    Catalog of vulnerability information data sources. Understanding of the intersection of incident management and vulnerability management.

    Identify vulnerability sources
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    Vulnerability detection

    Vulnerabilities can be identified through numerous mediums.

    Info-Tech has determined the following to be the four most common ways to identify vulnerabilities.

    Vulnerability Assessment and Scanning Tools
    • Computer programs that function to identify and assess security vulnerabilities and weaknesses within computers, computer systems, applications, or networks.
    • Using a known vulnerability database, the tool scans targeted hosts or systems to identify flaws and generate reports and recommendations based on the results.
    • There are four main types of tools under this category: network and operating system vulnerability scanners, application scanning and testing tools, web application scanners, and exploitation tools.
    Penetration Tests
    • The act of identifying vulnerabilities on computers, computer systems, applications, or networks followed by testing of the vulnerability to validate the findings.
    • Penetration tests are considered a service that is offered by third-parties in which a variety of products, tools, and methods are used to exploit systems and gain access to data.
    Open Source Monitoring
    • New vulnerabilities are detected daily with each vulnerability’s information being uploaded to an information-sharing platform to enable other organizations to be able to identify the same vulnerability on their systems.
    • Open source platforms are used to alert and distribute information on newly discovered vulnerabilities to security professionals.
    Security Incidents
    • Any time an incident response plan is called into action to mitigate an incident, there should be formal communication with the vulnerability management team.
    • Any IT incident an organization experiences should provide a feed for analysis into your vulnerability management program.

    Automate with a vulnerability scanning tool

    Vulnerabilities are too numerous for manual scanning and detection.
    • Vulnerability management is not only the awareness of the existence of vulnerabilities but that they are actively present in your environment.
    • A vulnerability scanner will usually report dozens, if not hundreds, of vulnerabilities on a regular and recurring basis. Typical IT environments have several dozen, if not hundreds, of servers. We haven’t even considered the amount of network equipment or the hundreds of user workstations in an environment.
    • This tool will give you information of the presence of a vulnerability in your environment and the host on which the vulnerability exists. This includes information on the version of software that contains a vulnerability and whether you are running that version. The tool will also report on the criticality of the vulnerability based on industry criticality ratings.
    • The tools are continually updated by the vendor with the latest definition updates for the latest vulnerabilities out there. This ensures you are always scanning for the greatest number of potential vulnerabilities.
    Automation requires oversight.
    1. Vulnerability scanners bring great automation to the task of scanning and detecting vulnerabilities in high numbers.
    2. Vulnerability scanners, however, do not have your level of intelligence. Any compensating controls, network segregation, or other risk mitigation features that you have in place will not be known by the tool.
    3. Determining the risk and urgency of a vulnerability within the context of your specific environment will still require internal review by you or your SecOps team.

    For guidance on tool selection

    Refer to section 4.3 Selecting and Implement a Scanning Tool in this blueprint.

    Vulnerability scanning tool considerations

    Select a vulnerability scanning tool with the features you need to be effective.
    • Vulnerability scanning tool selection can be an exciting and confusing process. You will need to consider what features you desire in a tool and whether you want the tool to go beyond just scanning and reporting.
    • In addition to vulnerability scanning, some tools will integrate with your IT service management (service desk ticketing system) tool and asset, configuration, and change management modules. This can facilitate the necessary workflow that the remediation process follows once a vulnerability is discovered.
    • A number of vulnerability scanning tool vendors have started offering remediation as part of their software features. This includes the automation and orchestration functionality and configuration and asset management to track its remediation activities.
    • A side benefit of the asset discovery feature in vulnerability scanning tools is that it can help enhance an organization’s asset inventory and license compliance, particularly in cases where end users are able to install software on their workstations.
    Stock photo of a smartphone scanning a barcode.

    For guidance on tool vendors

    Visit SoftwareReviews for information on vulnerability management tools and vendors.

    Vulnerability scanning tool best practices

    How often should scans be performed?

    One-off scans provide snapshots in time. Repeated scans over time provide tracking for how systems are changing and how well patches are being applied and software is being updated.

    The results of a scan (asset inventory, configuration data, and vulnerability data) are basic information needed to understand your security posture. This data needs to be as up to date as possible.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE: Organizations should look for continuous scanning

    Continuous scanning is the concept of providing continual scanning of your systems so any asset, configuration, or vulnerability information is up to date. Most vendors will advertise continuous scanning but you need to be skeptical of how this feature is met.

    Continuous Scanning Methods

    Continuous agent scanning

    Real-time scanning that is completed through agent-based scanning. Provides real-time understanding of system changes.

    On-demand scanning

    Cyclical scanning is the method where once you’re done scanning an area, you start it again. This is usually done because doing some scans on some areas of your network take time. How long the scan takes depends on the scan itself. How often you perform a scan depends on how long a scan takes. For example, if a scan takes a day, you perform a daily scan.

    Cloud-based scanning

    Cloud-scanning-as-a-Service can provide hands-free continuous monitoring of your systems. This is usually priced as a subscription model.

    Vulnerability scanning tool best practices

    Where to perform a scan.

    What should be scanned How to point a scanner
    The general idea is that you want to scan pretty much everything. Here are considerations for three environments:
    Mobile Devices

    You need to scan mobile devices for vulnerabilities, but the problem is these can be hard to scan and often come and go on your network. There are always going to be some devices that aren’t on the network when scanning occurs.

    Several ways to scan mobile devices:

    • Intercept the device when it remotes into your network using a VPN. You catch the device with a remote scan. This can only be done if a VPN is required.
    • An agent-based approach can be used for mobile devices. Locally installed software gives the information needed to evaluate the security posture of a device. Discernibly, concerns around device processing, memory, and network bandwidth come into play. Ease of installation becomes key for agents.
    Virtualization
    • In a virtual environment, you will have servers being dynamically spun up. Ensure your tool is able to scan these new servers automatically.
    • Often, vulnerability scanning tool providers will restrict scanning to preapproved scanners. Look for tools that are preapproved by the VM vendors.
    Cloud Environments
    • You can set your tool to scan a given cloud environment. The main concern here is who owns the cloud. If it is a private cloud, there is little concern.
    • If it is a third-party cloud (AWS, Azure, etc.) you need to confirm with the cloud service provider that scanning of your cloud environment can occur.
    • There is a trend to allow more scanning of cloud environments.
    • You need to tell the scanner an IP address, a group of IP addresses, an asset group, or a combination of those.
    • You can categorize by functional classifications – internet-facing servers, workstations, network devices, etc., or by organizational structure – Finance, HR, Legal, etc.
    • If you have a strong change management system, you can better hone when and where to perform a scan based on actual changes.
    • You can set the number of concurrent outbound TCP connections that are being made. For example, set the tool so it sends out to 10 ports at a time, rather than pinging at 64k ports on a machine, which would flood the NIC.
    • Side Note: Flooding a host with pings from a scanning tool can be done to find out DoS thresholds on a machine. There are no bandwidth concerns for a network DoS, however, because the packets are so small.

    Vulnerability scanning tool best practices

    Communication and measurement

    Pre-Scan Communication With Users

    • It is always important to inform owners and users of systems that a scan will be happening.
    • Although it is unlikely any performance issues will arise, it is important to notify end users of potential impact.
    • Local admins or system owners may have controls in place that stop vulnerability scans and you need to inform the owners so that they can safelist the scanner you will be using.
    Vulnerability Scanning Tool Tracking Metrics
    • Vulnerability score by operating system, application, or organization division.
      • This provides a look at the widely accepted severity of the vulnerability as it relates across the organization’s systems.
    • Most vulnerable applications and application version.
      • This provides insight into how outdated applications are creating risk exposure for an organization.
      • This will also provide metrics on the effectiveness of your patching program.
    • Number of assets scanned within the last number of days.
      • This provides visibility into how often your assets are being scanned and thus protected.
    • Number of unowned devices or unapproved applications.
      • This metric will track how many unowned devices or unapproved applications may be on your network. Unowned devices may be rogue devices or just consultant/contractor devices.

    Third-party vulnerability information sources

    IT security forums and mailing lists are another source of vulnerability information.

    Proactively identify new vulnerabilities as they are announced.

    By monitoring for vulnerabilities as they are announced through industry alerts and open-source mechanisms, it is possible to identify vulnerabilities beyond your scanning tool’s penetration tests.

    Common sources:
    • Vendor websites and mailing lists
      • Vendors are the trusted sources for vulnerability and patch information on their products, particularly with new industry vulnerability disclosure requirements. Vendors are the most familiar with their products, downloads are most likely malware free, and additional information is often included.
      • There are some issues: vendors won’t announce a vulnerability until a patch is created, which creates a potential unknown risk exposure; numerous vendor sites will have to be monitored continually.
    • Third-party websites
      • A non-vendor site providing information on vulnerabilities. They often will cover a specific technology or an industry section, becoming a potential “one-stop shop” for some. They will often provide vulnerability information that is augmented with different remediation recommendations faster than vendors.
      • However, it’s more likely that malicious code could be downloaded and it will often not be comprehensive information on patching.
    • Third-party mailing lists, newsgroups, live paid subscriptions, and live open-source feeds
      • These are alerting and notification services for the detection and dissemination of vulnerability information. They provide information on the latest and most critical vulnerabilities, e.g. US-CERT Cybersecurity Alerts.
    • Vulnerability databases
      • These usually consist of dedicated databases on vulnerabilities. They perform the hard work of identifying and aggregating vulnerability and patch information into a central repository for end-user consumption. The commentary features on these databases provide excellent insight for practitioners, e.g. National Vulnerability Database (NVD).
    Stock photo of a student checking a bulletin board.

    Third-party vulnerability information sources

    IT security forums and mailing lists are another source of vulnerability information.

    Third-party sources for vulnerabilities

    • Open Source Vulnerability Database (OSVDB)
      • An open-source database that is run independently of any vendors.
    • Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE)
      • Free, international dictionary of publicly known information security vulnerabilities and exposures.
    • National Vulnerability Database (NVD)
      • Through NIST, the NVD is the US government’s repository of vulnerabilities and includes product names, flaws, and any impact metrics.
      • The National Checklist Repository Program (NCRP), also provided by NIST, provides security checklists for configurations of operating systems and applications.
      • The Center for Internet Security, a separate entity unrelated to NIST, provides configuration benchmarks that are often referenced by the NCRP.
    • Open Web Application Security Project (OWASP)
      • OWASP is another free project helping to expose vulnerabilities within software.
    • US-CERT National Cyber Alert System (US-CERT Alerts)
      • Cybersecurity Alerts – Provide timely information about current security issues, vulnerabilities, and exploits.
      • Cybersecurity Tips – Provide advice about common security issues for the general public.
      • Cybersecurity Bulletins – Provide weekly summaries of new vulnerabilities. Patch information is provided when available.
    • US-CERT Vulnerability Notes Database (US-CERT Vulnerability Notes)
      • Database of searchable security vulnerabilities that were deemed not critical enough to be covered under US-CERT Alerts. Note that the NVD covers both US-CERT Alerts and US-CERT Notes.
    • Open Vulnerability Assessment Language (OVAL)
      • Coding language for security professionals to discuss vulnerability checking and configuration issues. Vulnerabilities are identified using tests that are disseminated in OVAL definitions (XML executables that can be used by end users).

    1.4.1 Develop a monitoring and review process for third-party vulnerability sources

    60 minutes

    Input: Third-party resources list

    Output: Process for review of third-party vulnerability sources

    Materials: Whiteboard, Whiteboard markers, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, SecOps team members, ITOps team members, CISO

    1. Identify what third-party resources are useful and relevant.
    2. Shortlist your third-party sources.
    3. Identify what is the best way to receive information from a third party.
    4. Document the method to receive or check information from the third-party source.
    5. Identify who is responsible for maintaining third-party vulnerability information sources
    6. Capture this information in the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.
    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template Sample of the Third Party Vulnerability Monitoring tables from the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.

    Incidents and vulnerability management

    Incidents can also be a sources of vulnerabilities.

    When any incident occurs, for example:

    • A security incident, such as malware detected on a machine
    • An IT incident, such as an application becomes unresponsive
    • A crisis occurs, like a worker accident

    There can be underlying vulnerabilities that need to be processed.

    Three Types of IT Incidents exist:
    1. Information Security Incident
    2. IT Incident and/or Problem
    3. Crisis

    Note: You need to have developed your various incident response plans to develop information feeds to the vulnerability mitigation process.
    If you are missing an incident response plan, take a look at Info-Tech’s Related Resources.

    Info-Tech Related Resources:
    If you do not have a formalized information security incident management program, take a look at Info-Tech’s blueprint Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program.

    If you do not have a formalized problem management process, take a look at Info-Tech’s blueprint Incident and Problem Management.

    If you do not have a formalized IT incident management process, take a look at Info-Tech’s blueprint Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program.

    If you do not have formalized crisis management, take a look at Info-Tech’s blueprint Implement Crisis Management Best Practices.

    1.4.2 Incident management and vulnerability management

    60 minutes

    Input: Existing incident response processes, Existing crisis communications plans

    Output: Alignment of vulnerability management program with existing incident management processes

    Materials: Whiteboard, Whiteboard markers, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, SecOps team members, ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3, CISO, CIO

    1. Inventory what incident response plans the organization has. These include:
      1. Information Security Incident Response Plan
      2. IT Incident Plan
      3. Problem Management Plan
      4. Crisis Management Plan
    2. Identify what part of those plans contains the post-response recap or final analysis.
    3. Formalize a communication process between the incident response plan and the vulnerability mitigation process.

    Note: Most incident processes will cover some sort of root cause analysis and investigation of the incident. If a vulnerability of any kind is detected within this analysis it needs to be reported on and treated as a detected vulnerability, thus warranting the full vulnerability mitigation process.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Phase 2

    Triage & prioritize

    Phase 1

    1.1 What is vulnerability management?
    1.2 Define scope and roles
    1.3 Cloud considerations for vulnerability management
    1.4 Vulnerability detection

     

    Phase 2

    2.1 Triage vulnerabilities
    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality
    2.3 Consider current security posture
    2.4 Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

     

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assessing remediation options
    3.2 Scheduling and executing remediation
    3.3 Continuous improvement

     

    Phase 4

    4.1 Metrics, KPIs & CSFs
    4.2 Vulnerability management policy
    4.3 Select and implement a scanning tool
    4.4 Penetration testing

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Examine the elements that you will use to triage and analyze vulnerabilities, prioritizing using a risk-based approach, and prepare for remediation options.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Step 2.1

    Triage vulnerabilities

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Evaluate your identified vulnerabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review your vulnerability information sources and determine a methodology that will be used to consistently evaluate vulnerabilities as your scanning tool alerts you to them.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    A consistent, documented process for the evaluation of vulnerabilities in your environment.

    Triage & prioritize
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4

    Triaging vulnerabilities

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to allocate urgencies to your vulnerabilities to assign the appropriate resources to each one.

    When evaluating numerous vulnerabilities, use the following three factors to help determine the urgency of vulnerabilities:

    • The intrinsic qualities of the vulnerability
    • The business criticality of the affected asset
    • The sensitivity of the data stored on the affected asset

    Intrinsic qualities of the vulnerability — Vulnerabilities need to be examined for the inherent risk they pose specifically to the organization, which includes if an exploit has been identified or if the industry views this as a serious and likely threat.

    Business criticality of the affected asset — Assets with vulnerabilities need to be assessed for their criticality to the business. Vulnerabilities on systems that are critical to business operations or customer interactions are usually top of mind.

    Sensitivity of the data of the affected asset — Beyond just the criticality of the business, there must be consideration of the sensitivity of the data that may be compromised or modified as a result of any vulnerabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This methodology allows you to determine urgency of vulnerabilities, but your remediation approach needs to be risk-based, within the context of your organization.

    Triage your vulnerabilities, filter out the noise

    Triaging enables your vulnerability management program to focus on what it should focus on.

    Use the Info-Tech Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template to define how to triage vulnerabilities as they first appear.

    Triaging is an important step in vulnerability management, whether you are facing ten to tens of thousands of vulnerability notifications.
    Many scanning tools already provide the capability to compare known vulnerabilities against existing assets through integration with the asset inventory.

    There are two major use cases for this process:
    1. For organizations that have identified vulnerabilities but do not know their own systems well enough. This can be due to a lack of a formal asset inventory.
    2. For proactive organizations that are regularly staying up to date with industry announcements regarding vulnerabilities. Once an alert has been made publicly, this process can assist in confirming if the vulnerability is relevant to the organization.
    The Info-Tech methodology for initial triaging of vulnerabilities:
    Flowchart of the Info-Tech methodology for initial triaging of vulnerabilities, beginning with 'Vulnerability has been identified' and ending with either 'Vulnerability has been triaged' or 'No action needed'.

    Even if neither of these use cases apply to your organization, triaging still addresses the issues of false positives. Triaging provides a quick way to determine if vulnerabilities are relevant.

    After eliminating the noise, evaluate your vulnerabilities to determine urgency

    Consider the intrinsic risk to the organization.

    Is there an associated, verified exploit?
    • For a vulnerability to become a true threat to the organization, it must be exploited to cause damage. In today’s threat landscape, exploit kits are sold online that allow individuals with low technical knowledge to exploit a vulnerability.
    • Not all vulnerabilities have an associated exploit, but this does not mean that these vulnerabilities can be left alone. In many cases, it is just a matter of time before an exploit is created.
    • Another point to consider is that while exploits can exist theoretically, they may not be verified. Vulnerabilities always pose some level of risk, but if there are no known verified exploits, there is less risk attached.
    Is there a CVSS base score of 7.0 or higher?
    • Common Vulnerability Scoring System (CVSS) is an open-source industry scoring method to assess the potential severity of vulnerabilities.
    • CVSS takes into account: attack vector, complexity, privileges required, user interaction, scope, confidentiality impact, integrity impact, and availability impact.
    • Vulnerabilities that have a score of 4.0 or lower are classified as low vulnerabilities, while scores between 4.0 and 6.9 are put in the medium category. Scores of 7 or higher are in the high and critical categories. As we will review in the Risk Assessment section, you will want to immediately deal with high and critical vulnerabilities.
    Is there potential for significant lateral movement?
    • Even though a vulnerability may appear to be part of an inconsequential asset, it is important to consider whether it can be leveraged to gain access to other areas of the network or system by an attacker.
    • Another consideration should be whether the vulnerability can be exploited by remote or local access. Remote exploits pose a greater risk as this can mean that attackers can perform an exploit from any location. Local exploits carry less risk, although the risk of insider threats should be considered here as well.

    2.1.1 Evaluate your identified vulnerabilities

    60 minutes

    Input: Visio workflow of Info-Tech’s vulnerability management process

    Output: Adjusted workflow to reflect your current processes, Vulnerability Tracking Tool

    Materials: Whiteboard, Whiteboard markers, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, SecOps team members, ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3, CISO, CIO

    Using the criteria from the previous slide, Info-Tech has created a methodology to evaluate your vulnerabilities by examining their intrinsic qualities.

    The methodology categorizes the vulnerabilities into high, medium, and low risk importance categorizations, before assigning final urgency scores in the later steps.

    1. Review the evaluation process in the Vulnerability Management Workflow library.
    2. Determine if this process makes sense for the organization; otherwise, change the flow to include any other considerations of process flows.
    3. As this process is used to evaluate vulnerabilities, document vulnerabilities to an importance category. This can be done in the Vulnerability Tracking Tool or using a similar internal vulnerability tracking document, if one exists.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Step 2.2

    Determine high-level business criticality

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Determine high-level business criticality
    • 2.2.2 Determine your high-level data classifications

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Determining high-level business criticality and data classifications will help ensure that IT security is aligned with what is critical to the business. This will be very important when decisions are made around vulnerability risk and the urgency of remediation action.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    Understanding and consistency in how business criticality and business data is assessed by IT in the vulnerability management process.

    Triage & prioritize
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4

    Understanding business criticality is key to determining vulnerability urgency

    Prioritize operations that are truly critical to the operation of the business, and understand how they would be impacted by an exploited vulnerability.

    Use the questions below to help assess which operations are critical for the business to continue functioning.

    For example, email is often thought of as a business-critical operation when this is not always the case. It is important to the business, but as regular operations can continue for some time without it, it would not be considered extremely business critical.

    Questions to ask Description
    Is there a hard-dollar impact from downtime? This refers to when revenue or profits are directly impacted by a business disruption. For example, when an online ordering system is compromised and shut down, it impacts sales, and therefore, revenue.
    Is there an impact on goodwill/ customer trust? If downtime means delays in service delivery or otherwise impacts goodwill, there is an intangible impact on revenue that may make the associated systems mission critical.
    Is regulatory compliance a factor? Depending on the circumstances of the vulnerabilities, it can be a violation of regulatory compliance and would cause significant fines.
    Is there a health or safety risk? Some operations are critical to health and safety. For example, medical organizations have operations that are necessary to ensure that individuals’ health and safety are maintained. An exploited vulnerability that prevents these operations can directly impact the lives of these individuals.
    Don’t start from scratch – your disaster recovery plan (DRP) may have a business impact analysis (BIA) that can provide insight into which applications and operations are considered business critical.

    Analyst Perspective

    When assessing the criticality of business operations, most core business applications may be deemed business critical over the long term.

    Consider instead what the impact is over the first 24 or 48 hours of downtime.

    2.2.1 Determine high-level business criticality

    120 minutes; less time if a Disaster recovery plan business impact analysis exists

    Input: List of business operations, Insight into business operations impacts to the business

    Output: List of business operations and their criticality and impact to the business

    Materials: Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: Participants from the business, IT Security Manager, CISO, CIO

    1. List your core business operations at a high level.
    2. Use a High, Medium, or Low ranking to prioritize the business operations based on mission-critical criteria and the impact of the vulnerability.
    3. When using the process flow, consider if the vulnerability directly affects any of these business operations and move through the process flow based on the corresponding High, Medium, or Low ranking.
    Example prioritization of business operations for a manufacturing company: Questions to ask:
    1. Is there a hard-dollar impact from downtime?
    2. Is there impact on goodwill or customer trust?
    3. Is regulatory compliance a factor?
    4. Is there a health or safety risk?

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Determine vulnerability urgency by its data classification

    Consider how to classify your data based on if the Confidentiality, Integrity, or Availability (CIA) is compromised.

    To properly classify your data, consider how the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of that data would be affected if it were to be exploited by a vulnerability. Review the table below for an explanation for each objective.
    Confidentiality

    Preserving authorized restrictions on information access and disclosure, including means for protecting personal privacy and proprietary information.

    Integrity

    Guarding against improper information modification or destruction, and ensuring information non-repudiation and authenticity.

    Availability

    Ensuring timely and reliable access to and use of information.

    Each piece of data should be ranked as High, medium, or low across confidentiality, integrity, and availability based on adverse effect. Arrow pointing right. Low — Limited adverse effect

    Moderate — Serious adverse effect

    High — Severe or catastrophic adverse effect

    If you wish to build a whole data classification methodology, refer to our Discover and Classify Your Data blueprint.

    How to determine data classification when CIA differs:

    The overall ranking of the data will be impacted by the highest objective’s ranking.

    For example, if confidentiality and availability are low, but integrity is high, the overall impact is high.

    This process was developed in part by Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 199.

    2.2.2 Determine your high-level data classifications

    120 minutes, less time if data classification already exists

    Input: Knowledge of data use and sensitivity

    Output: Adjusted workflow to reflect your current processes, Vulnerability Tracking Tool

    Materials: Whiteboard, Whiteboard markers, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, CISO, CIO

    If your organization has formal data classification in place, it should be leveraged to determine the high, medium, and low rankings necessary for the process flows. However, if there is no formal data classification in place, the process below can be followed:

    1. List common assets or applications that are prone to vulnerabilities.
    2. Consider the data that is on these devices and provide a high (severe or catastrophic adverse effect), medium (serious adverse effect), or low (limited adverse effect) ranking based on confidentiality, availability, and integrity.
      1. Use the table on the previous slide to assist in providing the ranking.
      2. Remember that it is the highest ranking that dictates the overall ranking of the data.
    3. Document which data belongs in each of the categories to provide contextual evidence.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    This process should be part of your larger data classification program. If you need assistance in building this out, review the Info-Tech research, Discover and Classify Your Data.

    Step 2.3

    Consider current security posture

    Activities
    • 2.3.1 Document your defense-in-depth controls

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Your defense-in-depth controls are the existing layers of security technology that protects your environment. These are relevant when considering the urgency and risk of vulnerabilities in your environment, as they will mitigate some of the risk.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    Understanding and documentation of your current defense-in-depth controls.

    Triage & prioritize
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4

    Review your current security posture

    What you have today matters.
    • In most cases, your vulnerability scanning tool alone will not have the context of your security posture in the results of its scans. This can skew the true urgency of detected vulnerabilities in your environment.
    • What you have in place today is what comprises your organization’s overall security posture. This bears high relevance to the determination of the risk that a vulnerability poses to your environment.
    • Elements such as enterprise architecture and defense in depth mechanisms should be factored into determining the risk of a vulnerability and what kind of immediacy is warranted to address it.
    • Details of your current security posture will also contribute to the assessment and selection of remediation options.
    Stock image of toy soldiers split into two colours, facing eachother down.

    Enterprise architecture considerations

    What does your network look like?
    • Most organizations have a network topology that has been put in place with operational needs in mind. These includes specific vLANs or subnets, broadcast domains, or other methods of traffic segregation.
    • The firewall and network ACLs (access control lists) will manage traffic and the routes that data packets follow to traverse a network.
    • Organizations may physically separate data network types, for example, a network for IT services and one for operational technology (OT)(OT is often known as ICS (industrial control systems) or SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition)) or other types of production technology.
    • The deployment of distribution and access switches across an enterprise can also be a factor, where a flatter network will have fewer network devices within the topology.
    • In a directory services environment such as Windows Active Directory, servers and applications can be segregated by domains and trust relationships, organizational units, and security groups.
    What’s the relevance to vulnerability management?

    For a vulnerability to be exploited, a malicious actor must find a way to access the vulnerable system to make use of the vulnerability in question.

    Any enterprise architecture characteristics that you have in place may lessen the probability of a successful vulnerability exploit.

    This may potentially “buy time” for SecOps to address and remediate the vulnerability.

    Defense-in-depth

    Defense-in-depth provides extra layers of protection to the organization.

    • Defense-in-depth refers to the coordination of security controls to add layers of security to the organization.
      • This means that even if attackers are able to get past one control or layer, they are hindered by additional security.
    • Defense-in-depth is distinct from the previous section on enterprise architecture as these are security controls put in place with the purpose of being lines of defense within your security posture.
    • This can be extremely useful in managing vulnerabilities; thus, it is important to establish the existing defense-in-depth controls. By establishing the base model for your defense-in-depth, it will allow you to leverage these controls to manage vulnerabilities.
    • Controls are typically distributed across endpoints, network infrastructure, servers, and physical security.

    Note: Defense-in-depth controls do not entirely mitigate vulnerability risk. They provide a way in which the vulnerability cannot be exploited, but it continues to exist on the application. This must be kept in mind as the controls or applications themselves change, as it can re-open the vulnerability and cause potential problems.

    Examples of defense-in-depth controls can consist of any of the following:
    • Antivirus software
    • Authentication security
    • Multi-factor authentication
    • Firewalls
    • Demilitarized zones (DMZ)
    • Sandboxing
    • Network zoning
    • Application whitelisting
    • Access control lists
    • Intrusion detection & prevention systems
    • Airgapping
    • User security awareness training

    2.3.1 Document your defense-in-depth controls

    2 hours, less time if a security services catalog exists

    Input: List of technologies within your environment, List of IT security controls that are in place

    Output: List of defense-in-depth controls

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, Infrastructure Manager, IT Director, CISO

    1. Document the existing defense-in-depth controls within your system.
    2. Review the initial list that has been provided and see if these are controls that currently exist.
    3. Indicate any other controls that are being used by the organization. This may already exist if you have a security services catalog.
    4. Indicate who the owners of the different controls are.
    5. Track the information in the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Sample table of security controls within a Defense-in-depth model with column headers 'Defense-in-depth control', 'Description', 'Workflow', and 'Control Owner'.

    Step 2.4

    Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

    Activities
    • 2.4.1 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess impact
    • 2.4.2 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess likelihood

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Assessing risk will be the cornerstone of how you evaluate vulnerabilities and what priority you place on remediation. This is actual risk to the organization and not simply what the tool reports without the context of your defense-in-depth controls.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • IT Operations Management
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    A risk matrix tailored to your organization, based on impact and likelihood. This will provide a consistent, unambiguous way to assess risk across the vulnerability types that is reported by your scanning tool.

    Triage & prioritize
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4

    Vulnerabilities and risk

    Vulnerabilities must be addressed to mitigate risk to the business.
    • Vulnerabilities are a concern because they are potential threats to the business. Vulnerabilities that are not addressed can turn from potential threats into actual threats; it is only a matter of time and opportunity.
    • Your organization will already be familiar with risk management, as every decision carries a business risk component. There may even be a senior manager assigned as corporate risk officer to manage organizational risk.
    • The organization likely has a risk tolerance level that defines the organization’s risk appetite. This may be measured in dollars, non-productivity time, or other units of inefficiency.
    • The risk of a vulnerability can be calculated using impact and likelihood. Impact is the effect that the vulnerability will have if it is exploited by a malicious actor. Likelihood is the degree to which a vulnerability exploit can possibly occur.
    Stock image of a cartoon character in a tie hanging on the needle of a 'RISK' meter as it sits at 'LOW'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Risk to the organization is business language that everyone can understand. This is particularly true when the risk is to productivity or to the company’s bottom line.

    A risk-based approach to vulnerability management

    CVSS scores are just the starting point!

    Vulnerabilities are constant.
    • There will always be vulnerabilities in the environment, many of which won’t be reported as they are currently unknown.
    • Don’t focus on trying to resolve all vulnerabilities in your environment. You are neither resourced for it nor can the business tolerate the downtime needed to remediate every single vulnerability.
      • The constant follow of new vulnerabilities will quickly render your efforts useless and it will become a game of “whack-a-mole.”
    • Being able to prioritize which vulnerabilities require appropriate levels of response is crucial to ensuring that an organization stays ahead of the continual flow.
    • Your vulnerability scanning tool will report the severity of a vulnerability, often using an industry Common Vulnerability Scoring System (CVSS) system ranging from 0 to 10. It will then scan your environment for the presence of the vulnerability and report accordingly.
      • Your vulnerability scanning tool will not be aware of any mitigation components in your environment, such as compensating controls, network segregation, server/application hardening, or any other measures that can reduce the risk. That is why determining actual risk is a crucial step.

    Stock image of a whack-a-mole game.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vulnerability scanning is a valuable function, but it does not tell the full picture. You must determine how urgent a vulnerability truly is, based on your specific environment.

    Prioritize remediation by levels of risk

    Address critical and high risk with high immediacy.

    • Addressing the critical and high-risk vulnerabilities with urgency will ensure that you are addressing a more manageable number of vulnerabilities.
    • An optimized vulnerability management process will address the medium and low risk vulnerabilities within the regular cycle.
    • This may be very similar to what you do today in an ad hoc fashion:
      • Zero-day vulnerabilities tend to warrant a stop in operations and are dealt with immediately (or as soon as a vendor has a fix).
      • The standard remediation process (patching/updating, change of configuration, etc.) happens within a regular controlled time cycle.
    • Formalizing this process will ensure that appropriate attention is given to vulnerabilities that warrant it and that the remaining vulnerabilities are dealt with as a regular, recurring activity.

    Mitigate the risk surface by reducing the time across the phases

    Chart titled 'Mitigate the risk surface by reducing the time across the phases' with the axes 'Risk Level' and 'Time' with lines created by individual risks. The highlighted line begins in 'Critical' and eventually drops to low. A note on the line reads 'Objective: Reduce risk surface by reducing time to address'. The area between the line and your organization's risk tolerance is labelled 'Risk Surface, to be addressed with high priority'. A bracket around Risk levels 'High' and 'Critical' reads 'Priority focus zone (risk surface)'. Risk lines within levels 'Low' and 'Medium' read 'Follow standard vulnerability management cycles'.

    Risk matrix

    Risk = Impact x Likelihood
    • Info-Tech’s Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool provides a method of calculating the risk of a vulnerability. The risk rating is assigned using the impact of the risk and the likelihood or probability that the event may occur.
    • The tool puts the vulnerability into your organization’s context: How many people will be affected? What service types are vulnerable and how does that impact the business? Is there an anticipated update from the vendor of the system being affected?
    • Urgency of remediation should be based on the business consequences if the vulnerability were to be exploited, relative to the business’ risk tolerance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Risk determination should be done within the context of your current environment and not simply based on what your vulnerability tool is reporting.

    A risk matrix is useful in calculating a risk rating for vulnerabilities. Risk matrix with axes 'Impact' and 'Time' and individual vulnerabilities mapped onto it via their risk rating. The example 'Organizational Risk Tolerance Threshold' line runs diagonally through the 'Medium' squares.

    2.4.1 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess impact

    60 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of IT environment, Knowledge of business impact for each IT component or service

    Output: Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool formatted to your organization

    Materials: Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Participants: Functional Area Managers, IT Security Manager, CISO

    Risk always has a negative impact, but the size of the impact can vary considerably in terms of cost, number of people or sites affected, and the severity of the impact. Impact questions tend to be more objective and quantifiable than likelihood questions.

    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk impact or edit existing questions in the tool.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk. The drop-down box content can be modified in the hidden Labels tab.

    Note that you are looking to baseline vulnerability types, rather than categorizing every single vulnerability your scanning tool reports. The volume of vulnerabilities will be high, but vulnerabilities can be categorized into types on a regular basis.

    Download the Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Screenshot of table from Info-Tech's Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool for assessing Impact. Column headers are 'Weight', 'Question', 'OS vulnerability', 'Application vulnerability', 'Network vulnerability', and 'Vendor patch release'.

    2.4.2 Build a classification scheme to consistently assess likelihood

    60 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of IT environment, Knowledge of business impact for each IT component or service

    Output: Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool formatted to your organization

    Materials: Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Participants: Functional Area Managers, IT Security Manager, CISO

    Risk always has a negative impact, but the size of the impact can vary considerably in terms of cost, number of people or sites affected, and the severity of the impact. Impact questions tend to be more objective and quantifiable than likelihood questions.

    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk impact or edit existing questions in the tool.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk. The drop-down box content can be modified in the hidden Labels tab.

    Note that you are looking to baseline vulnerability types, rather than categorizing every single vulnerability that your scanning tool reports. The volume of vulnerabilities will be high, but vulnerabilities can be categorized into types on a regular basis.

    Download the Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Screenshot of table from Info-Tech's Vulnerability Management Risk Assessment Tool for assessing Likelihood. Column headers are 'Weight', 'Question', 'OS vulnerability', 'Application vulnerability', and 'Network vulnerability'.

    Prioritize based on risk

    Select the best remediation option to minimize risk.

    Through the combination of the identified risk and remediation steps in this phase, the prioritization for vulnerabilities will become clear. Vulnerabilities will be assigned a priority once their intrinsic qualities and threat potential to business function and data have been identified.

    • Remediation options will be identified for the higher urgency vulnerabilities.
    • Options will be assessed for whether they are appropriate.
    • They will be further tested to determine if they can be used adequately prior to full implementation.
    • Based on the assessments, the remediation will be implemented or another option will be considered.
    Prioritization
    1. Assignment of risk
    2. Identification of remediation options
    3. Assessment of options
    4. Implementation

    Remediation plays an incredibly important role in the entire program. It plays a large part in wider risk management when you must consider the risk of the vulnerability, the risk of the remediation option, and the risk associated with the overall process.

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Phase 3

    Remediate vulnerabilities

    Phase 1

    1.1 What is vulnerability management?
    1.2 Define scope and roles
    1.3 Cloud considerations for vulnerability management
    1.4 Vulnerability detection

     

    Phase 2

    2.1 Triage vulnerabilities
    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality
    2.3 Consider current security posture
    2.4 Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

     

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assessing remediation options
    3.2 Scheduling and executing remediation
    3.3 Continuous improvement

     

    Phase 4

    4.1 Metrics, KPIs & CSFs
    4.2 Vulnerability management policy
    4.3 Select and implement a scanning tool
    4.4 Penetration testing

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identifying potential remediation options.
    • Developing criteria for each option with regards to when to use and when to avoid.
    • Establishing exception procedure for testing and remediation.
    • Documenting the implementation of remediations and verification.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO, or equivalent
    • Security Manager/Analyst
    • Network, Administrator, System, Database Manager
    • Other members of the vulnerability management team
    • Risk managers for the risk-related steps

    Determining how to remediate

    Patching is only one option.

    This phase will allow organizations to build out the specific processes for remediating vulnerabilities. The overall process will be the same but what will be critical is the identification of the correct material. This includes building the processes around:
    • Identifying and selecting the remediation option to be used.
    • Determining what to do when a patch or update is not available.
    • Scheduling and executing the remediation activity.
    • Continuous improvement.

    Each remediation option carries a different level of risk that the organization needs to consider and accept by building out this program.

    It is necessary to be prepared to do this in real time. Careful documentation is needed when dealing with vulnerabilities. Use the Vulnerability Tracking Tool to assist with documentation in real time. This is separate from using the process template but can assist in the documentation of vulnerabilities.

    Step 3.1

    Assessing remediation options

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Develop risk and remediation action

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    With the risk assessment from the previous activity, we can now examine remediation options and make a decision. This activity will guide us through that.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    List of remediation options and criteria on when to consider each.

    Remediate vulnerabilities
    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3

    Identify remediation options

    There are four options when it comes to vulnerability remediation.

    Patches and Updates

    Patches are software or pieces of code that are meant to close vulnerabilities or provide fixes to any bugs within existing software. These are typically provided by the vendor to ensure that any deployed software is properly protected after vulnerabilities have been detected.

    Configuration Changes

    Configuration changes involve administrators making significant changes to the system or network to remediate against the vulnerability. This can include disabling the vulnerable application or specific element and can even extend to removing the application altogether.

    Remediation

    Compensating Controls

    By leveraging security controls, such as your IDS/IPS, firewalls, or access control, organizations can have an added layer of protection against vulnerabilities beyond the typical patches and configuration changes. This can be used as a measure while waiting to implement another option (if one exists) to reduce the risk of the vulnerability in the short or long term.

    Risk Acceptance

    Whenever a vulnerability is not remediated, either indefinitely or for a short period of time, the organization is accepting the associated risk. Segregation of the vulnerable system can occur in this instance. This can occur in cases where a system or application cannot be updated without detrimental effect to the business.

    Patches and updates

    Patches are often the easiest and most common method of remediation.

    Patches are usually the most desirable remediation solution when it comes to vulnerability management. They are typically provided by the vendor of the vulnerable application or system and are meant to eliminate the existing vulnerability.

    When to use

    • When adequate testing can be performed on the patch to be implemented.
    • When there is a change window approaching for the affected systems.
    • When there is standardization across the IT assets to allow for easier installation of patches.

    When to avoid

    • When the patch cannot be adequately tested.
    • When a patch has been tested, but it caused an unfavorable consequence such as a system or application failure.
    • When there is no near change window in which to install the patches, which is often the case for critical systems.
    When to consider other remediation options
    • For critical systems, it can be difficult to implement a patch as they often require the system to be rebooted or go through some downtime. There must be consideration towards whether there is a change window approaching if a patch is to be implemented on a business-critical system.
      • If there is no opportunity to implement the patch, or no approaching change window, it is wise to leverage another remediation option.
    • When patches are not currently available from the vendor or they are in production, other remediation options are needed.
    • Other remediation options can be used in tandem with the patch. For example, if a patch is being deferred until the change window, it would be wise to use alternate remediation options to close the vulnerability.

    Compensating controls

    Compensating controls can decrease the risk of vulnerabilities that cannot be (immediately) remediated.

    • Compensating controls are measures put in place when direct remediation measures are impractical or non-existent.
    • Similar to the payment card industry’s PCI DSS 1.0 provision of compensating controls, these are meant to meet the intent or rigor of the original requirement; unlike PCI DSS, these measures are to mitigate risk rather than meet compliance.
    • The compensating control should be viewed as only a temporary measure for dealing with a vulnerability, although circumstances may dictate a degree of permanence in the application of the compensating control.
    • Examples where compensating controls may be needed are:
      • The software vendor is developing an update or patch to address a vulnerability.
      • Through your testing process, a patch will adversely affect the performance or operation of the target system and be detrimental to the business.
      • A critical application will only run on a legacy operating system, the latter of which is no longer supported by the vendor.
      • A legacy application is no longer being supported but is critical to your operations. A replacement, if one exists, will take time to implement.
    Examples of compensating controls
    • Segregating a vulnerable server or application on the network, physically or logically.
    • Hardening the operating system or application.
    • Restricting user logins to the system or application.
    • Implementing access controls on the network route to the system.
    • Instituting application whitelisting.

    Configuration changes

    Configuration changes involve making changes directly to the application or system in which there is a vulnerability. This can vary from disabling or removing the vulnerable element or, in the case of applications built in-house, changing the coding of the application itself. These are commonly used in network vulnerabilities such as open ports.

    When to use

    • A patch is not available.
    • The vulnerable element can be significantly changed, or even disabled, without significantly disrupting the business.
    • The application is built in-house, as the vulnerability must be closed internally.
    • There is adequate testing to ensure that the configuration change does not affect the business.
    • A configuration change in your network or system can affect numerous endpoints or systems, reducing endpoint patching or use of defense-in-depth controls.

    When to avoid

    • When a suitable patch is available.
    • When the vulnerability is on a business-critical element with no nearby change window or it cannot be disabled.
    • When there is no opportunity in which to perform testing to ensure that there are no unintended consequences.
    When to consider other remediation options
    • Configuration changes require careful documentation as changes are occurring to the system and applications. If there is a need to perform a back-out process and return to the original configuration, this can be extremely difficult without clear documentation of what occurred.
    • If business systems are too critical or important to the regular business function to perform any changes, it is necessary to consider other options.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember your existing processes: configuration changes may need to be approved and orchestrated through your organization’s configuration and change management processes.

    Case Study

    Remediation options do not have to be used separately. Use the Shellshock 2014 case as an example.

     
    INDUSTRY: All
    SOURCE: Public Domain
    Challenge

    Bashdoor, more commonly known as Shellshock, was announced on September 24, 2014.

    This bug involved the Bash shell, which normally executes user commands, but this vulnerability meant that malicious attackers could exploit it.

    This was rated a 10/10 by CVSS – the highest possible score.

    Within hours of the announcement, hackers began to exploit this vulnerability across many organizations.

    Solution

    Organizations had to react quickly and multiple remediation options were identified:

    • Configuration changes – Companies were recommended to use other shells instead of the Bash shell.
    • Defense-in-depth controls – Using HTTP server logs, it could be possible to identify if the vulnerability had been exploited.
    • Patches – Many vendors released patches to close this vulnerability including Debian, Ubuntu, and Red Hat.
    Results

    Companies began to protect themselves against these vulnerabilities.

    While many organizations installed patches as quickly as possible, some also wished to test the patch and leveraged defense-in-depth controls in the interim.

    However, even today, many still have the Shellshock vulnerability and exploits continue to occur.

    Accept the risk and do nothing

    By choosing not to remediate vulnerabilities, you must accept the associated risk. This should be your very last option.

    Every time that a vulnerability is not remediated, it continues to pose a risk to the organization. While it may seem that every vulnerability needs to be remediated, this is simply not possible due to limited resources. Further, it can take away resources from other security initiatives as opposed to low-priority vulnerabilities that are extremely unlikely to be exploited.

    Common criteria for vulnerabilities that are not remediated:
    • Affected systems are of extremely low criticality.
    • Affected systems are deemed too critical to take offline to perform adequate remediation.
    • Low urgency is assigned to those vulnerabilities.
    • Cost and time required for the remediation are too high.
    • No adequate solutions exist – the vendor has not released a patch, there are weak defense-in-depth controls, and it is not possible to perform a configuration change.

    Risk acceptance is not uncommon…

    • With an ever-increasing number of vulnerabilities, organizations are struggling to keep up and often, intentionally or unintentionally, accept the risk associated.
    • In the end, non-remediation means full acceptance of the risk and any consequences.

    Enterprise risk management
    Arrow pointing up.
    Risk acceptance of vulnerabilities

    While these are common criteria, they must be aligned to the enterprise risk management framework and approved by management.

    Don’t forget the variables that were assessed in Phase 2. This includes the risk from potential lateral movement or if there is an existing exploit.

    Risk considerations

    When determining if risk acceptance is appropriate, consider the cost of not mitigating vulnerabilities.

    Don’t accept the risk because it seems easy. Consider the financial impact of leaving vulnerabilities open.

    With risk acceptance, it is important to review the financial impact of a security incident resulting from that vulnerability. There is always the possibility of exploitation for vulnerabilities. A simple metric taken from NIST SP800-40 to use for this is:

    Cost not to mitigate = W * T * R

    Where (W) is the number of work stations, (T) is the time spent fixing systems or lost in productivity, and (R) is the hourly rate of the time spent.

    As an example provided by NIST SP800-40 Version 2.0, Creating a Patch and Vulnerability Management Program:

    “For an organization where there are 1,000 computers to be fixed, each taking an average of 8 hours of down time (4 hours for one worker to rebuild a system, plus 4 hours the computer owner is without a computer to do work) at a rate of $70/hour for wages and benefits:

    1,000 computers * 8 hours * $70/hour = $560,000”

    Info-Tech Insight

    Always consider the financial impact that can occur from an exploited vulnerability that was not remediated.

    3.1.1 Develop risk and remediation action

    90 minutes

    Input: List of remediation options

    Output: List of remediation options sorted into “when to use” and “when to avoid” lists

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, IT Infrastructure Manager, IT Operations Manager, Corporate Risk Officer, CISO

    It is important to define and document your organization-specific criteria for when a remediation option is appropriate and inappropriate.

    1. List each remediation option on a flip chart and create two headings: “When to use” and “When to avoid.”
    2. Each person will list “when to use” criteria on a green sticky note and “when to avoid” criteria on a red one for each option; these will be placed on the appropriate flip chart.
    3. Discuss as a group which criteria are appropriate and which should be removed.
    4. Move on to the next remediation option when completed.
      • Ensure to include when there are remediation options that will be connected. For example, the risk may be accepted until the next available change window, or a defense-in-depth control is used before a patch can be fully installed.
    5. Once the criteria has been established, document this in the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.
    When to use:
    • When adequate testing can be performed on the patch to be implemented.
    • When there is a change window approaching, especially for critical systems.
    • When there is standardization across the IT assets to allow for easier installation of patches.
    When to avoid:
    • When the patch cannot be adequately tested.
    • When a patch has been tested, but it has caused an unfavorable consequence such as a system or application failure.
    • When there is no near change window in which to install the patches.
    (Example from the Vulnerability Management SOP Template for Patches.)

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Step 3.2

    Scheduling and executing remediation

    Activities

    None for this section.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Although there are no specific activities for this section, it will walk you through your existing processes configuration and change management to ensure that you are leveraging those activities in your vulnerability remediation actions.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    Gained understanding of how IT operations processes configuration and change management can be leveraged for the vulnerability remediation process. Don’t reinvent the wheel!

    Remediate vulnerabilities
    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3

    Implementing the remediation

    Vulnerability management converges with your IT operations functions.
    • Once a remediation strategy has been formulated, you can leverage your release and change management processes to orchestrate the testing, version tracking, scheduling, approval, and implementation activities.
    • Each of these processes should exist in your environment in some form. Leveraging these will engage the IT operations team to carry out their tasks in the remediation process.
    • There can be a partial or full handoff to these processes, however, the owner of the vulnerability management program is responsible for verifying the application of the remediation measure and that the overall risk has been reduced.
    • Although full blueprints exist that cover each of these processes in great detail, the following slides provide an overview of each of these IT operations processes and how they intersect with vulnerability management.
    Stock image of a person on a laptop overlaid by an icon with gears indicating settings.

    Release Management

    Control the quality of deployments and releases of software updates.

    • The release management process exists to ensure that new software releases (such as patches and updates) are properly tested and documented with version control prior to their implementation into the production environment.
    • The process should map out the logistics of the deployment process to ensure that it is consistent and controlled.
    • Testing is an important part of release management and the urgency of a vulnerability remediation operation can expedite this process to ensure minimal delays. Once testing has been completed successfully, the update is then “promoted” to production-ready status and submitted into the change management process.
    • Often a separate release team may not exist, however, release management still occurs.

    For guidance on implementing or improving your release management process, refer to Info-Tech’s Stabilize Release and Deployment Management blueprint or speak to one of our experts.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations don’t have a separate release team. Rather, whomever is doing the deployment will submit a change request and the testing details are vetted through the organization’s change management process.

    For guidance on the change management process review our Optimize Change Management blueprint.

    Change Management

    Leverage change control, interruption management, approval, and scheduling.
    • Change management likely exists in some shape or form in your organization. There is usually someone or a committee, such as a change advisory board (CAB), that gives approval for a change.
    • Leveraging the change management process will ensure that your vulnerability remediation has undergone the proper review and approval before implementation. There will usually be business sign-off as part of a change management approval process.
    • Communication will also be integrated in the change management process, so the change manager will ensure that appropriate, timely communications are sent to the proper key stakeholders.
    • The change management process will link to release management and configuration management processes if they exist.

    For further guidance on implementing or improving your change management process, refer to Info-Tech’s Optimize Change Management blueprint or speak to one of our experts.

    “With no controls in place, IT gets the blame for embarrassing outages. Too much control, and IT is seen as a roadblock to innovation.” (VP IT, Federal Credit Union)

    Post-implementation activities

    Vulnerability remediation isn’t a “set it and forget it” activity.
    • Once vulnerability remediation has occurred, it is imperative that the results are reported back to the vulnerability management program manager. This ensures that the loop is closed and the tracking of the remediation activity is done properly.
      • Organizations that are subject to audit by external entities will understand the importance of such documentation.
    • The results of post-implementation review from the change management process will be of great interest, particularly if there was any deviation from the planned activities.
    • Although change execution will usually undergo some form of testing during the maintenance window, there is always the possibility that something has broken as a result of the software update. Be quick to respond to these types of incidents!
      • One example of an issue that is near impossible to test during a maintenance window is one that manifests only when the system or software comes under load. This is what makes for busy Monday mornings after a weekend change window.
    A scan with your vulnerability management software after remediation can be a way to verify that the overall risk has been reduced, if remediation was done by way of patching/updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    After every change completion, whether due to vulnerability remediation or not, it is a good idea to ensure that your infrastructure team increases its monitoring diligence and that your service desk is ready for any sudden influx of end-user calls.

    Step 3.3

    Continuous improvement

    Activities

    None for this section.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Although this section has no activities, it will review the process by which you may continually improve vulnerability management.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • ITOps team members, including tiers 1, 2, and 3
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    An understanding of the importance of ongoing improvements to the vulnerability management program.

    Remediate vulnerabilities
    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3

    Drive continuous improvement

    • Also known as “Continual Improvement” within the ITIL best practice framework.
    • Your vulnerability management program will not be perfect on first launch. In fact, due to the ever-changing nature of vulnerabilities and the technology designed to detect and combat vulnerabilities, the processes within your vulnerability management program will need to be tweaked from time to time.
    • Continuous improvement is a sustained, proactive approach to process improvement. The practice allows for all process participants to observe and suggest incremental improvements that can help improve the overall process.
    • In many cases, continuous improvement can be triggered by changes in the environment. This makes perfect sense for vulnerability management process improvement as a change in the environment will require vulnerability scanning to ensure that such changes have not introduced new vulnerabilities into the environment, increasing your risk surface.
    • One key method to tracking continuous improvement is through the effective use of metrics, covered in Section 4.1 of this blueprint.
    “The success rate for continual improvement efforts is less than 60 percent. A major – if not the biggest – factor affecting the deployment of long-term continual improvement initiatives today is the fundamental change taking place in the way companies manage and execute work.” (Industry analyst at a consulting firm, 2014)

    Continuous Improvement

    Continuously re-evaluate the vulnerability management process.

    As your systems and assets change, your vulnerability management program may need updates in two ways.

    When new assets and systems are introduced:

    • When new systems and assets are introduced, it is important for organizations to recognize how these can affect vulnerability management.
    • It will be necessary to identify the business criticality of the new assets and systems and the sensitivity of the data that can be found on them.
    • Without doing so, these will be considered rogue systems or assets – there is no clear process for assigning urgencies.
    • This will only cause problems as actions may be taken that are not aligned with the organization’s risk management framework.

    Effective systems and asset management are needed to track this. Review Info-Tech’s Implement Systems Management to Improve Availability and Visibility blueprint for more help.

    Document any changes to the vulnerability management program in the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.

    When defense-in-depth capabilities are modified:

    • As you build an effective security program, more controls will be added that can be used to protect the organization.
    • These should be documented and evaluated based on ability to mitigate against vulnerabilities.
    • The defense-in-depth model that was previously established should be updated to include the new capabilities that can be used.
    • Defense-in-depth models are continually evolving as the security landscape evolves, and organizations must be ready for this.

    To assist in building a defense-in-depth model, review Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Implement Risk-Based Vulnerability Management

    Phase 4

    Measure and formalize

    Phase 1

    1.1 What is vulnerability management?
    1.2 Define scope and roles
    1.3 Cloud considerations for vulnerability management
    1.4 Vulnerability detection

     

    Phase 2

    2.1 Triage vulnerabilities
    2.2 Determine high-level business criticality
    2.3 Consider current security posture
    2.4 Risk assessment of vulnerabilities

     

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assessing remediation options
    3.2 Scheduling and executing remediation
    3.3 Continuous improvement

     

    Phase 4

    4.1 Metrics, KPIs & CSFs
    4.2 Vulnerability management policy
    4.3 Select and implement a scanning tool
    4.4 Penetration testing

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • You will determine what ought to be measured to track the success of your vulnerability management program.
    • If you lack a scanning tool this phase will help you determine tool selection.
    • Lastly, penetration testing is a good next step to consider once you have your vulnerability management program well underway.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • Procurement representatives
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Step 4.1

    Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

    Activities
    • 4.1.1 Measure your program with metrics, KPIs, and CSFs

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    After a review of the differences between raw metrics, key performance indicators (KPI), and critical success factors (CSF), compile a list of what metrics you will be tracking, why, and the business goals for each.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    Outline of metrics you can configure your vulnerability scanning tool to report on.

    Measure and formalize
    Step 4.1 Step 4.2 Step 4.3 Step 4.4

    You can’t manage what you can’t measure

    Metrics provides visibility.

    • Management consultant Peter Drucker introduced the concept of metrics tied to key performance indicators (KPIs), and the concept holds true: without metrics, you lack the visibility to manage or improve a process.
    • Metrics aren’t just a collection of statistics, they have to be meaningful, they have to tell the story, and most importantly, they have to answer the “so what?” question. What is the significance of a metric – do they illustrate a trend or an anomaly? What actions should be carried out when a metric hits a certain threshold?
    • It would be prudent to track several metrics that can be combined to tell the full story. For example, tracking the number of critical vulnerabilities alone does not give a sense of the overall risk to the organization, nor does it offer any information on how quickly they have been remediated or what amount of effort was invested.
    Stock image of measuring tape.

    Metrics, KPIs, and CSFs

    Tracking the right information and making the information relevant.
    • There is often confusion between raw metrics, key performance indicators, and critical success factors.
    • Raw metrics are what is trackable from your systems and processes as a set of measurements without any context. Raw metrics in themselves are useful in telling the story of “what are we doing?”
    • KPIs are the specific metric or combination of metrics that help you track or gauge performance. KPIs tell the story of “how are we doing?” or “how well are we doing?”
    • CSFs are the specific KPIs that track the activities that are absolutely critical to accomplish for the business or business unit to be successful.
    The activity tracker on your wrist is a wealth of metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.

    If you wear an activity tracker, you are likely already familiar with the differences between metrics, key performance indicators, and critical success factors:

    • The raw metrics are your heart rate, step count, hours of sleep, caloric intake, etc.
    • KPIs are the individual goals that you have set: maintain a heart rate within the appropriate range for your age/activity level, achieve a step count goal per day, get x hours of sleep per night, consume a calorie range of y per day, etc.
    • CSFs are your overall goal: increase your cardiovascular capacity, lose weight, feel more energetic, etc.

    Your security systems can be similarly measured and tracked – transfer this skill!

    Tracking relevant information

    Tell the story in the numbers.

    Below are a number of suggested metrics to track, and why.

    Business Goal

    Critical Success Factor

    Key Performance Indicator

    Metric to track

    Minimize overall risk exposure Reduction of overall risk due to vulnerabilities Decrease in vulnerabilities Track the number of vulnerabilities year after year.
    Appropriate allocation of time and resources Proper prioritization of vulnerability mitigation activities Decrease of critical and high vulnerabilities Track the number of high-urgency vulnerabilities.
    Consistent timely remediation of threats to the business Minimize risk when vulnerabilities are detected Remediate vulnerabilities more quickly Mean time to detect: track the average time between the identification to remediation.
    Track effectiveness of scanning tool Minimize the ratio, indicating that the tool sees everything Ratio between known assets and what the scanner tracks Scanner coverage compared to known assets in the organization.
    Having effective tools to track and address Accuracy of the scanning tool Difference or ratio between reported vulnerabilities and verified ones Number of critical or high vulnerabilities verified, between the scanning tool’s criticality rating and actual criticality.
    Reduction of exceptions to ensure minimal exposure Visibility into persistent vulnerabilities and risk mitigation measures Number of exceptions granted Number of vulnerabilities in which little or no remediation action was taken.

    4.1.1 Measure your program with metrics, KPIs, and CSFs

    60 minutes

    Input: List of metrics current being measured by the vulnerability management tool

    Output: List of relevant metrics to track, and the KPIs, CSFs, and business goals related to the metric

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, IT operations management, CISO

    Metrics can offer a way to view how the organization is dealing with vulnerabilities and if there is improvement.

    1. Determine the high-level vulnerability management goals for the organization.
    2. Even with a formal process in place, the organization should be considering ways it can improve.
    3. Determine metrics that can help quantify those goals and how they can be measured.
    4. Metrics should always be easy to measure. If it’s a complex process to find the information required, it means that it is not a metric that should be used.
    5. Document your list of metrics in the Vulnerability Management SOP Template.

    Download the Vulnerability Management SOP Template

    Step 4.2

    Vulnerability Management Policy

    Activities
    • 4.2.1 Update the vulnerability management program policy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    If you have a vulnerability management policy, this activity may help augment it. Otherwise, if you don’t have one, this would be a great starting point.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Human resources representative

    Outcomes of this step

    An inaugural policy covering vulnerability management

    Measure and formalize
    Step 4.1 Step 4.2 Step 4.3 Step 4.4

    Vulnerability Management Program Policy

    Policies provide governance and enforcement of processes.
    • Policies offer formal guidance on the “rules” of a program, describing its purpose, scope, detailed program description, and consequences of non-compliance. Often they will have a employee sign-off acknowledging understanding.
    • In many organizations, policies are endorsed by senior executives, which gives the policy its “teeth” across the company. The human resources department will always have input due to the implications of the non-compliance aspect.
    • Policies are written to ensure an outcome of consistent expected behavior and are often written to protect the company from liability.
    • Policies should be easy to understand and unambiguous, reflect the current state, and be enforceable. Enforceability can come in the form of audit, technology, or any other means of determining compliance and enforcing behavior.
    Stock image of a judge's gavel.

    4.2.1 Update the vulnerability management policy

    60 minutes

    Input: Vulnerability Management SOP, HR guidance on policy creation and approval

    Output: Completed Vulnerability Management Policy

    Materials: Vulnerability Management SOP, Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, IT operations management, CISO, Human resources representative

    After having built your entire process in this project, formalize it into a vulnerability management policy. This will set the standards and expectations for vulnerability management in the organization, while the process will be around the specific actions that need to be taken around vulnerability management.

    This is separate and distinct from the Vulnerability Management SOP Template, which is a process and procedure document.
    1. Review Info-Tech’s Vulnerability Management Policy and customize it to your organization’s specifications.
    2. Use your Vulnerability Management SOP as a resource when specifying some of the details within the policy.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    Download the Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    Step 4.3

    Select and implement a scanning tool

    Activities
    • 4.3.1 Create an RFP for vulnerability scanning tools

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    If you need to select a new vulnerability scanning tool, or replace your existing one, this activity will help set up a request for proposal (RFP).

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • CISO

    Outcomes of this step

    The provisions needed for you to create and deploy an RFP for a vulnerability management tool.

    Measure and formalize
    Step 4.1 Step 4.2 Step 4.3 Step 4.4

    Vulnerability management and penetration testing

    Similar in nature, yet provide different security functions.

    Vulnerability Scanning Tools

    Scanning tools focus on the network and operating systems. These tools look for items such as missing patches or open ports. They won’t detect specific application vulnerabilities.

    Exploitation Tools

    These tools will look to exploit a detected vulnerability to validate it.

    Penetration Tests

    A penetration test simulates the actions of an external or internal cyber attacker that aims to breach the information security of the organization. (Formal definition of penetration test)

    ‹————— What’s the difference again? —————›
    Vulnerability scanning tools are just one type of tool. When you add an exploitation tool to the mix, you move down the spectrum. Penetration tests will use scanning tools, exploitation tools, and people.

    What is the value of each?

    • For vulnerability scans, the person performing the scan provides the value – value comes from the organization itself.
    • For exploitation tools on their own, the value comes from the tool itself being used in a safe environment.
    • For penetration tests, the tester is providing the value. They are the value add.

    What’s the implication for me?

    Info-Tech Recommends:
    • A combination of vulnerability scanning and penetration testing. This will improve your security posture through systematic risk reduction and improve your security program through the testing of prevention, detection, and response capabilities with unique recommendations being generated.
    • Start with as much vulnerability scanning as possible to identify gaps to fix and then move onto a penetration test to do a more robust and validated assessment.
    • For penetration tests, start with a transparent box test first, then move to an opaque box. Ideally, this is done with different third parties.

    Vulnerability scanning software

    All organizations can benefit from having one.

    Scanning tools will benefit areas beyond just vulnerability management

    • Network security: It improves the accuracy and granularity of your network security technologies such as WAFs, NGFWs, IDPS, and SIEM.
    • Asset management: Vulnerability scanning can identify new or unknown assets and provide current status information on assets.
    • System management: Information from a vulnerability scan supports baselining activities and determination of high-value and high-risk assets.

    Vulnerability Detection Use Case

    Most organizations use scanners to identify and assess system vulnerabilities and prioritize efforts.

    Compliance Use Case

    Others will use scanners just for compliance, auditing, or larger GRC reasons.

    Asset Discovery Use Case

    Many organizations will use scanners to perform active host and application identification.

    Scanning Tool Market Trends

    Vulnerability scanning tools have expanded value from conventional checking for vulnerabilities to supporting configuration checking, asset discovery, inventory management, patch management, SSL certificate validation, and malware detection.

    Expect to see network and system vulnerability scanners develop larger vulnerability management functions and develop exploitation tool functionality. This will become a table stakes option enabling organizations to provide higher levels of validation of detected vulnerabilities. Some tools already possess these capabilities:

    • Core Impact is an exploitation tool with vulnerability scanning aspects.
    • Metasploit is an exploitation tool with some new vulnerability scanning aspects.
    • Nessus is mainly a vulnerability scanning tool but has some exploitation aspects.

    Device proliferation (BYOD, IoT, etc.) is increasing the need for stronger vulnerability management and scanners. This is driving the need for numerous device types and platform support and the development of baseline and configuration norms to support system management.

    Increased regulatory or compliance controls are also stipulating the need for vulnerability scanning, especially by a trusted third party.

    Organizations are outsourcing security functions or moving to cloud-based deployment options for any security technology they can. Expect to see massive growth of vulnerability scanning as a service.

    Vulnerability scanning market

    There are several technology types or functional differentiators that divide the market up.

    Vulnerability Exploitation Tools

    • These will actually test defences and better emulate real life than just scanning. These tools include packet manipulation tools (such as hping) and password cracking tools (such as John the Ripper or Cain and Abel).
    • These tools will provide much more granular information on your network, operations systems, and applications.
    • The main limitation of these tools is how to use them. If you do not have development or test environments that mimic your real production environments to run the exploit tools, these tools may not be appropriate. It may work if you can find some downtime on production systems, but only in very specific and careful instances.
    • Lower maturity security programs usually just do network and application vulnerability scanning. Higher maturity programs will also use penetration testing, application testing, and vulnerability exploitation tools.
    • Network vulnerability scanning tools should always be used. Once you identify any servers or ports running web applications, then you run a web application vulnerability scanner.
    • Exploitation tools and application testing tools are used in more specific use cases that are often related to more-demanding security programs.

    Scanning Tool Market Trends

    • These are considered baseline tools and are near commoditization.
    • Vulnerability scanning tools are not granular enough to detect application-level vulnerabilities (thus the need for application scanners and testing tools) and they don’t validate the exploitability of the vulnerability (thus the need for exploit tools).

    Web Application Scanning Tools

    These tools perform dynamic application security testing (DAST) and static application security testing (SAST).

    Application Scanning and Testing Tools

    • These perform a detailed scan against an application to detect any problematic or malicious code and try to break the application using known vulnerabilities.
    • These tools will identify if something is vulnerable to an exploit but won’t actually run the exploit.
    • These tools are evaluated based on their ability to detect application-specific issues and validate them.

    Vulnerability scanning tool features

    Evaluate vulnerability scanning tools on specific features or functions that are the best differentiators.

    Differentiator

    Description

    Deployment Options Do you want a traditional on-premises, cloud-based, or managed service?
    Vulnerability Database Coverage Scanners use a library of known vulnerabilities to test for. Evaluate based on the amount of exploits/vulnerabilities the tool can scan for.
    Scanning Method Evaluate if you want agent-based, authenticated active, unauthenticated active, passive, or some combination of those scanning methods.
    Integration What is the breadth of other security and non-security technologies the tool can integrate with?
    Remediation How detailed are the recommended remediation actions? The more granular, the better.
     

    Differentiator

    Description

    Prioritization Does the tool evaluate vulnerabilities based on commonly accepted methods or through a custom-designed prioritization methodology?
    Platform Support What is the breadth of environment, application, and device support in the tool? Consider your need for virtual support, cloud support, device support, and application-specific support. Also consider how often new scanning modules are supported (e.g. how quickly Windows 10 was supported).
    Pricing As with many security controls that have been around for a long time and are commonly used, pricing becomes a main consideration, especially when there are so many open-source options available.

    Common areas people mistake as tool differentiators:

    • Accuracy – Scanning tools are evaluated more on efficiency than effectiveness. Evaluate on the ability to detect, remediate, and manage vulnerabilities rather than real vulnerability detection and the number of false positives. To reduce false positives, you need to use exploitation tools.
    • Performance – Scanning tools have such a small footprint in an environment and the actual scanning itself is such a small impact that evaluation on performance doesn’t matter.

    For more information on vulnerability scanning tools and how they rate, review the Vulnerability Management category on SoftwareReviews.

    Vulnerability scanning deployment options

    Understand the different deployment options to identify which is best for your security program.

    Option

    Description

    Pros

    Cons

    Use Cases

    On-Premises Either an on-premises appliance or an on-premises virtualized machine that performs external and internal scanning.
    • Small resource need, so limited network impact.
    • Strong internal scanning.
    • Easier integration with other technologies.
    • Network footprint and resource usage.
    • Maintenance and support costs.
    • Most common deployment option.
    • Appropriate if you have cloud concerns or strong internal network scanning, or if you require strong integration with other systems.
    Cloud Either hosted on a public cloud infrastructure or hosted by a third party and offered “as a service.”
    • Small network footprint.
    • On-demand scanning as needed.
    • Optimal external scanning capabilities.
    • Can only do edge-related scanning unless authenticated or agent based.
    • No internal network scanning with passive or unauthenticated active scanning methods.
    • Very limited network resources.
    • Compliance obligations that dictate external vulnerability scanning.
    Managed A third party is contracted to manage and maintain your vulnerability scanner so you can dedicate resources elsewhere.
    • Expert management of environment scanning, optimizing tool usage.
    • Most scanning work time is report customization and tuning and remediation efforts; thus, managed doesn’t provide sizable resource alleviation.
    • Third party has and owns the vulnerability information.
    • Limited staff resources or expertise to maintain and manage scanner.

    Vulnerability scanning methods

    Understand the different scanning methods to identify which tool best supports your needs.

    Method

    Description

    Pros

    Cons

    Use Cases

    Agent-Based Scanning Locally installed software gives the information needed to evaluate the security posture of a device.
    • Provides information that can’t be discovered remotely such as installed applications that aren’t running at a given time.
    • Device processing, memory, and network bandwidth impact.
    • Asset without an agent is not scanned.
    • Need for continuous scanning.
    • Organization has strong asset management
    Authenticated Active Scanning Tool uses authenticated credentials to log in to a device or application to perform scanning.
    • Provides information that can’t be discovered remotely such as installed applications that aren’t running at a given time.
    • Best accuracy for vulnerability detection across a network.
    • Aggregation and centralization of authenticated credentials creates a major risk.
    • All use cases.
    Unauthenticated Active Scanning Scanning of devices without any authentication.
    • Emulates realistic scan by an attacker.
    • Provides limited scope of scanning.
    • Some compliance use cases.
    • Perform after either agent or authenticated scanning.
    Passive Scanning Scanning of network traffic.
    • Lowest resource impact.
    • Not enough information can be provided for true prioritization and remediation.
    • Augmenting scanning technique to agent or authenticated scanning.

    IP Management and IPv6

    IP management and the ability to manage IPv6 is a new area for scanning tool evaluation.

    Scanning on IPv4

    Scanning tools create databases of systems and devices with IP addresses.
    Info-Tech Recommends:

    • It is easier to do discovery by directing the scanner at a set IP address or range of IP addresses; thus, it’s useful to organize your database by IPs.
    • Do discovery by phases: Start with internet-facing systems. Your perimeter usually is well-defined by IP addresses and system owners and is most open to attack.
    • Stipulate a list of your known IP addresses through the DHCP registration and perform a scan on that.
    • Depending on your IP address space, another option is to scan your entire IP address space.

    Current Problem With IP Addresses

    IP addresses are becoming no longer manageable or even owned by organizations. They are often provided by ISPs or other third parties.

    Even if it is your range, chances are you don't do static IP ranges today.

    Info-Tech Recommends:

    • Agent-based scanning or MAC address-based scanning
    • Use your DHCP for scanning

    Scanning on IPv6

    First, you need to know if your organization is moving to IPv6. IPv6 is not strategically routed yet for most organizations.

    If you are moving to IPv6, Info-Tech recommends the following:

    • Because you cannot point a scanner at an IPv6 IP range, any scanning tool needs to have a strategy around how to handle IPv6 and properly scan based on IP ranges.
    • You need to know IPv4 to IPv6 translations.
    • Evaluate vulnerability scanning tools on whether any IPv6 features are on par with IPv4 features.

    If you are already on IPv6, Info-Tech recommends the following:

    • If you are on an IPv6 native network, it is nearly impossible to scan the network. You have to always scan your known addresses from your DHCP.

    4.3.1 Create an RFP for vulnerability scanning tools

    2 hours

    Input: List of key feature requirements for the new tool, List of intersect points with current software, Network topology and layout of servers and applications

    Output: Completed RFP document that can be distributed to vendor proponents

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, IT operations managers, CISO, Procurement department representative

    Use a request for proposal (RFP) template to convey your desired scanning tool requirements to vendors and outline the proposal and procurement steps set by your organization.

    1. Determine what kind of requirements will be needed for your scanning tool RFP, based on people, process, and technology requirements.
    2. Consider items such as the desired capabilities and the scope of the scanning.
    3. Conduct interviews with relevant stakeholders to determine the exact requirements needed.
    4. Use Info-Tech’s Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template. It lists many requirements but can be customized to your organization’s specific needs.

    Download the Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template

    4.3.1 Create an RFP for vulnerability scanning tools (continued)

    Things to Consider:
    • Ensure there is adequate resource dedication to support and maintenance for vulnerability scanning.
    • Consider if you will benefit from an RFP. If there is a more appropriate option for your need and your organization, consider that instead.
    • If you don’t know the product you want, then perform an RFI.
    • In the RFP, you need to express your driving needs for the tool so the vendor can best understand your use case.
    • Identify who should participate in the RFP creation and evaluation. Make sure they have time available and it does not conflict with other items.
    • Determine if you want to send it to a select few or if you want to send it to a lot of vendors.
    • Determine a response date so you can know who is soliciting your business.
    • You need to have a process to handle questions from vendors.
    Info-Tech RFP Table of Contents:
    1. Statement of Work
    2. General Information
    3. Proposal Preparation Instructions
    4. Scope of Work, Specifications, and Requirements
    5. Vendor Qualifications and References
    6. Budget and Estimated Pricing
    7. Vendor Certification

    Download the Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template

    Step 4.4

    Penetration testing

    Activities
    • 4.1.1 Create an RFP for penetration tests

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    We will review penetration testing, its distinction from vulnerability management, and why you may want to engage a penetration testing service.

    We provide a request for proposal (RFP) template that we can review if this is an area of interest.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Security Manager
    • SecOps team members
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    An understanding of penetration testing, and guidance on how to get started if there is interest to do so.

    Measure and formalize
    Step 4.1 Step 4.2 Step 4.3 Step 4.4

    Penetration testing

    Penetration tests are critical parts of any strong security program.

    Penetration testing will emulate the methods an attacker would use in the real world to circumvent your security controls and gain access to systems and data.

    Penetration testing is much more than just running a scanner or other automated tools and then generating a report. Penetration testing performs critical exploit validation to create certainty around your vulnerability.

    The primary objective of a penetration test is to identify and validate security weaknesses in an organization’s security systems.

    Reasons to Test:

    • Assess current security control effectiveness
    • Develop an action plan of items
    • Build a business case for a better security program
    • Increased security budget through vulnerability validation
    • Third-party, unbiased validation
    • Adhere to compliance or regulatory requirements
    • Raise security awareness
    • Demonstrate how an attacker can escalate privileges
    • Effective way to test incident response

    Regulatory Considerations:

    • There is a lot of regulatory wording saying that organizations can’t get a system that is managed, integrated, and supported by one vendor and then have it tested by the same vendor.
    • There is the need for separate third-party testing.
    • Penetration testing is required for PCI, cloud providers, and federal entities.

    How and where is the value being generated?

    Penetration testing is a service provided by trained and tested professionals with years of experience. The person behind the test is the most important part of the test. The person is able to emulate a real-life attacker better than any computer. It is just a vulnerability scan if you use tools or executables alone.

    “A penetration test is an audit with validation.” (Joel Shapiro, Vice President Sales, Digital Boundary Group)

    Start by considering the spectrum of penetration tests

    Network Penetration Tests

    Conventional testing of network defences.

    Testing vectors include:

    • Perimeter infrastructure
    • Wireless, WEP/WPA cracking
    • Cloud penetration testing
    • Telephony systems or VoIP
    Types of tests:
    • Denial-of-service testing
    • Out-of-band attacks
    • War dialing
    • Wireless network testing/war driving
    • Spoofing
    • Trojan attacks
    • Brute force attacks
    • Watering hole attacks
    • Honeypots
    • Cloud-penetration testing
    Application Penetration Tests

    Core business functions are now being provided through web applications, either to external customers or to internal end users.

    Types: Web apps, non-web apps, mobile apps

    Application penetration and security testing encompasses:

    • Code review – analyzing the application code for sensitive information of vulnerabilities in the code.
    • Authorization testing – testing systems responsible for user session management to see if unauthorized access can be permitted.
    • Authentication process for user testing.
    • Functionality testing – test the application functionality itself.
    • Website pen testing – active analysis of weaknesses or vulnerabilities.
    • Encryption testing – testing things like randomness or key strength.
    • User-session integrity testing.
    Human-Centric Testing
    • Penetration testing is developing a people aspect as opposed to just being technology focused.
    • End users and their susceptibility to social engineering attacks (spear phishing, phone calls, physical site testing, etc.) is now a common area to test.
    • Social engineering penetration testing is not only about identifying your human vulnerabilities, but also about proactively training your end users. As well as discovering and fixing potential vulnerabilities, social engineering penetration testing will help to raise security awareness within an organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your pen test should use multiple methods. Demonstrating weakness in one area is good but easy to identify. When you blend techniques, you get better success at breaching and it becomes more life-like. Think about prevention, detection, and response testing to provide full insight into your security defenses.

    Penetration testing types

    Evaluate four variables to determine which type of penetration test is most appropriate for your organization.

    Evaluate these dimensions to determine relevant penetration testing.

    Network, Application, or Human

    Evaluate your need to perform different types of penetration testing.

    Some level of network and application testing is most likely appropriate.

    The more common decision point is to consider to what degree your organization requires human-centric penetration testing.

    External or Internal

    External: Attacking an organization’s perimeter and internet-facing systems. For these, you generally provide some level of information to the tester. The test will begin with publicly available information gathering followed by some kind of network scanning or probing against externally visible servers or devices (DNS server, email server, web server, firewall, etc.)

    Internal: Carried out within the organization’s network. This emulates an attack originating from an internal point (disgruntled employee, authorized user, etc.). The idea is to see what could happen if the perimeter is breached.

    Transparent, Semi-Transparent, or Opaque Box

    Opaque Box: The penetration tester is not provided any information. This emulates a real-life attack. Test team uses publicly available information (corporate website, DNS, USENET, etc.) to start the test. These tests are more time consuming and expensive. They often result in exploitation of the easiest vulnerability.
    Use cases: emulating a real-life attack; testing detection and response capabilities; limited network segmentation.

    Transparent Box: Tester is provided full disclosure of information. The tester will have access to everything they need: building floor plans, data flow designs, network topology, etc. This represents what a credentialed and knowledgeable insider would do.
    Use cases: full assessment of security controls; testing of attacker traversal capabilities.

    Aggressiveness of the Test

    Not Aggressive: Very slow and careful penetration testing. Usually spread out in terms of packets being sent and number of calls to individuals. It attempts to not set off any alarm bells.

    Aggressive: A full DoS attack or something similar. These would be DoS attacks that take down systems or full SQL injection attacks all at once versus small injections over time. Testing options cover anything including physical tests, network tests, social engineering, and data extraction and exfiltration. This is more costly and time consuming.

    Assessing Aggressiveness: How aggressive the test should be is based on the threats you are concerned with. Assess who you are concerned with: random individuals on the internet, state-sponsored attacks, criminals, hacktivists, etc. Who you are concerned with will determine the appropriate aggressiveness of the test.

    Penetration testing scope

    Establish the scope of your penetration test before engaging vendors.

    Determining the scope of what is being tested is the most important part of a penetration test. Organizations need to be as specific as possible so the vendor can actually respond or ask questions.

    Organizations need to define boundaries, objectives, and key success factors.

    For scope:
    • If you go too narrow, the realism of the test suffers.
    • If you go too broad, it is more costly and there’s a possible increase in false positives.
    • Balance scope vs. budget.
    Boundaries to scope before a test:
    • IP addresses
    • URLs
    • Applications
    • Who is in scope for social engineering
    • Physical access from roof to dumpsters defined
    • Scope prioritized for high-value assets
    Objectives and key success factors to scope:
    • When is the test complete? Is it at the point of validated exploitation?
    • Are you looking for as many holes as possible, or are you looking for how many ways each hole can be exploited?

    What would be out of scope?

    • Are there systems, IP addresses, or other things you want out of scope? These are things you don’t explicitly want any penetration tester to touch.
    • Are there third-party connections to your environment that you don’t want to be tested? These are instances such as cloud providers, supply chain connections, and various services.
    • Are there things that would be awkward to test? For example, determine if you include high-level people in a social engineering test. Do you conduct social engineering for the CEO? If you get their credentials, it could be an awkward moment.

    Ways to break up a penetration test:

    • Location – This is the most common way to break up a penetration test.
    • Division – Self-contained business units are often done as separate tests so you can see how each unit does.
    • IT systems – For example, you put certain security controls in a firewall and want to test its effectiveness.
    • Applications – For example, you are launching a new website or a new portal and you want to test it.

    Penetration testing appropriateness

    Determine your penetration testing appropriateness.

    Usual instances to conduct a penetration test:
    • Setting up a new physical office. Penetration testing will not only test security capabilities but also resource availability and map out network flows.
    • New infrastructure hardware implemented. All new infrastructure needs to be tested.
    • Changes or upgrades to existing infrastructure. Need for testing varies depending on the size of the change.
    • New application deployment. Need to test before being pushed to production environments.
    • Changes or upgrades to existing applications. When fundamental functional changes occur, perform testing:
      • Before upgrades or patching
      • After upgrades or patching
    • Periodic testing. It is a best practice to periodically test your security control effectiveness. Consider at least an annual test.

    Specific timing considerations: Testing should be completed during non-production times of day. Testing should be completed after a backup has been performed.

    Assess your threats to determine your appropriate test type:

    Penetration testing is about what threats you are concerned about. Understand your risk profile, risk tolerance level, and specific threats to see how relevant penetration tests are.

    • Are external attackers concerning to you? Are you distressed about how an attacker can use brute force to enter your network? If so, focus on ingress points, such as FWs, routers, and DMZ.
    • Is social engineering a concern for you (i.e. phone-based or email-based)? Then you are concerned about a credentialed hacker.
    • Is it an insider threat, a disgruntled employee, etc.? This also includes an internal system that is under command and control (C&C).

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE: Do a test only after you take a first pass.
    If you have not done some level of vulnerability assessment on your own (performing a scan, checking third-party sources, etc.) don’t waste your money on a penetration test. Only perform a penetration test after you have done a first pass and identified and remediated all the low-hanging fruit.

    4.4.1 Create an RFP for penetration tests

    2 hours

    Input: List of criteria and scope for the penetration test, Systems and application information if white box

    Output: Completed RFP document that can be distributed to vendor proponents

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Penetration Test RFP Template

    Participants: IT Security Manager, IT operations managers, CISO, Procurement department representative

    Use an RFP template to convey your desired penetration test requirements to vendors and outline the proposal and procurement steps set by your organization.

    1. Determine what kind of requirements will be needed for your penetration test RFP based on people, process, and technology requirements.
      • Consider items such as your technology environment and the scope of the penetration tests.
    2. Conduct an interview with relevant stakeholders to determine the exact requirements needed.
    3. Use Info-Tech’s Penetration Test RFP Template, which lists many requirements but can be customized to your organization’s specific needs.

    Download the Penetration Test RFP Template

    4.4.1 Create an RFP for penetration tests (continued)

    Steps of a penetration test:
    1. Determine scope
    2. Gather targeted intelligence
    3. Review exploit attempts, such as access and escalation
    4. Test the collection of sensitive data
    5. Run reporting
    Info-Tech RFP Table of Contents:
    1. Statement of Work
    2. General Information
    3. Proposal Preparation Instructions
    4. Scope of Work, Specifications, and Requirements
    5. Vendor Qualifications and References
    6. Budget and Estimated Pricing
    7. Vendor Certification

    Download the Penetration Test RFP Template

    Penetration testing considerations – service providers

    Consider what type of penetration testing service provider is best for your organization

    Professional Service Providers

    Professional Services Firms. These firms will often provide a myriad of professional services across auditing, financial, and consulting services. If they offer security-related consulting services, they will most likely offer some level of penetration testing.

    Security Service Firms. These are dedicated security consulting or advisory firms that will offer a wide spectrum of security-related services. Penetration testing may be one aspect of larger security assessments and strategy development services.

    Dedicated Penetration Testing Firms. These are service providers that will often offer the full gamut of penetration testing services.

    Integrators

    Managed Security Service Providers. These providers will offer penetration testing. For example, Dell SecureWorks offers numerous services including penetration testing. For organizations like this, you need to be skeptical of ulterior motives. For example, expect recommendations around outsourcing from Dell SecureWorks.

    Regional or Small Integrators. These are service providers that provide security services of some kind. For example, they would help in the implementation of a firewall and offer penetration testing services as well.

    Info-Tech Recommends:

    • Always be conscientious of who is conducting the testing and what else they offer. Even if you get another party to test rather than your technology provider, they will try to obtain you as a client. Remember that for larger technology vendors, security testing is a small revenue stream for them and it’s a way to find technology clients. They may offer penetration testing for free to obtain other business.
    • Most of the penetration testers were systems administrators (for network testing) or application developers (for application testing) at some point before becoming penetration testers. Remember this when evaluating providers and evaluating remediation recommendations.
    • Evaluate what kind of open-source tools, commercial tools, and proprietary tools are being used. In general, you don’t want to rely on an open-source scanner. For open source, they will have more outdated vulnerability databases, system identification can also be limited compared to commercial, and reporting is often lacking.
    • Above all else, ensure your testers are legally capable, experienced, and abide by non-disclosure agreements.

    Penetration testing best practices – communications

    Communication With Service Provider

    • During testing there should be designated points of contact between the service provider and the client.
    • There needs to be secure channels for communication of information between the tester and the client both during the test and for any results.
    • Results should always be explained to the client by the tester, regardless of the content or audience.
    • There should be a formal debrief with the results report.
    Immediate reporting of issues
    • Before any testing commences, immediate reporting conditions need to be defined. These are instances when you would want immediate notification of something occurring.
    • Stipulate certain systems or data types that if broken into or compromised, you would want to be notified right away.
    • Example:
      • If you are conducting social engineering, require notification for all account credentials that are compromised. Once credentials are compromised, it destroys all accountability for those credentials and the actions associated with those credentials by any user.
      • Require immediate reporting of specific high-critical systems that are compromised or if access is even found.
      • Require immediate reporting when regulated data is discovered or compromised in any way.

    Communication With Internal Staff

    Do you tell your internal staff that this is happening?

    This is sometimes called a “double blind test” when you don’t let your IT team know of the test occurring.

    Pros to notifying:
    • This tests the organization’s security monitoring, incident detection, and response capabilities.
    • Letting the team know they are going to see some activity will make sure they don’t get too worried about it.
    • There may be systems you can’t jeopardize but still need to test so notification beforehand is essential (e.g. you wouldn’t allow ERP testing with notification).
    Cons:
    • It does not give you a real-life example of how you respond if something happens.
    • Potential element of disrespect to IT people.

    Penetration testing best practices – results and remediation

    What to expect from penetration test results report:

    A final results report will state all findings including what was done by the testers, what vulnerabilities or exploitations were detected, how they were compromised, the related risk, and related remediation recommendations.

    Expect four major sections:
    • Introduction. An overview of the penetration test methodology including rating methodology of vulnerabilities.
    • Executive Summary. A management-level description of the test, often including a summary of any recommendations.
    • Technical Review. An overview of each item that was looked at and touched. This area breaks down what was done, how it was done, what was found, and any related remediation recommendations. Expect graphs and visuals in this section.
    • Detailed Findings. An in-depth breakdown of all testing methods used and results. Each vulnerability will be explained regarding how it was detected, what the risk is, and what the remediation recommendation is.
    Two areas that will vary by service provider:

    Prioritization

    • Most providers will boast their unique prioritization methodology.
    • A high, medium, and low rating scale based on some combination of variables (e.g. ease of exploitation, breadth of hole, information accessed resulting in further exploitation).
    • The prioritization won’t take into account asset value or criticality.
    • Keep in mind the penetration test is not an input into ultimate vulnerability prioritization, but it can help determine your urgency.

    Remediation

    • Remediation recommendations will vary across providers.
    • Generally, fairly generic recommendations are provided (e.g. remove your old telnet and input up-to-date SSH).
    • Most of the time, it is along the lines of “we found a hole; close the hole.”

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    At the conclusion of this blueprint, you will have created a full vulnerability management program that will allow you to take a risk-based approach to vulnerability remediation.

    Assessing a vulnerability’s risk will enable you to properly determine the true urgency of a vulnerability within the context of your organization; this ensures you are not just blindly following what the tool is reporting.

    The risk-based approach will allow you to prioritize your discovered vulnerabilities and take immediate action on critical and high vulnerabilities while allowing your standard remediation cycle to address the medium to low vulnerabilities.

    With your program defined and developed, you now need to configure your vulnerability scanning tool or acquire one if you don’t already have a tool in place.

    Lastly, while vulnerability management will help address your systems and applications, how do you know if you are secure from external malicious actors? Penetration testing will offer visibility, allowing you to plug those holes and attain an environment with a smaller risk surface.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Photo of Jimmy Tom.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of the Implement Vulnerability Management storyboard.
    Review of the Implement Vulnerability Management storyboard
    Sample of the Vulnerability Mitigation SOP template.
    Build your vulnerability management SOP

    Contributors

    Contributors from 2016 version of this project:

    • Morey Haber, Vice President of Technology, BeyondTrust
    • Richard Barretto, Manager, Information Privacy and Security, Cimpress
    • Joel Shapiro, Vice President Sales, Digital Boundary Group

    Contributors from current version of this project:

    • 2 anonymous contributors from the manufacturing sector
    • 1 anonymous contributor from a US government agency
    • 2 anonymous contributors from the financial sector
    • 1 anonymous contributor from the medical technology industry
    • 2 anonymous contributors from higher education
    • 1 anonymous contributor from a Canadian government agency
    • 7 anonymous others; information gathered from advisory calls

    Bibliography

    Arya. “COVID-19 Impact: Vulnerability Management Solution Market | Strategic Industry Evolutionary Analysis Focus on Leading Key Players and Revenue Growth Analysis by Forecast To 2028 – FireMon, Digital Shadows, AlienVault.” Bulletin Line, 6 Aug. 2020. Accessed 6 Aug. 2020.

    Campagna, Rich. “The Lean, Mean Vulnerability Management Machine.” Security Boulevard, 31 Mar. 2020. Accessed 15 Aug. 2020.

    Constantin, Lucian. “What are vulnerability scanners and how do they work?” CSO Online, 10 Apr. 2020. Accessed 1 Sept. 2020.

    “CVE security vulnerabilities published in 2019.” CVE Details. Accessed 22 Sept. 2020.

    Garden, Paul, et al. “2019 Year End Report – Vulnerability QuickView.” Risk Based Security, 2020. Accessed 22 Sept. 2020.

    Keary, Eoin. “2019 Vulnerability Statistics Report.” Edgescan, Feb. 2019. Accessed 22 Sept. 2020.

    Lefkowitz, Josh. ““Risk-Based Vulnerability Management is a Must for Security & Compliance.” SecurityWeek, 1 July 2019. Accessed 1 Nov. 2020.

    Mell, Peter, Tiffany Bergeron, and David Henning. “Creating a Patch and Vulnerability Management Program.” Creating a Patch and Vulnerability Management Program. NIST, Nov. 2005. Web.

    “National Vulnerability Database.” NIST. Accessed 18 Oct. 2020.

    “OpenVAS – Open Vulnerability Assessment Scanner.” OpenVAS. Accessed 14 Sept. 2020.

    “OVAL.” OVAL. Accessed 21 Oct. 2020.

    Paganini, Pierluigi. “Exploiting and Verifying Shellshock: CVE-2014-6271.” INFOSEC, 27 Sept. 2014. Web.

    Pritha. “Top 10 Metrics for your Vulnerability Management Program.” CISO Platform, 28 Nov. 2019. Accessed 25 Oct. 2020.

    “Risk-Based Vulnerability Management: Understanding Vulnerability Risk With Threat Context And Business Impact.” Tenable. Accessed 21 Oct. 2020.

    Stone, Mark. “Shellshock In-Depth: Why This Old Vulnerability Won’t Go Away.” SecurityIntelligence, 6 Aug. 2020. Web.

    “The Role of Threat Intelligence in Vulnerability Management.” NOPSEC, 18 Sept. 2014. Accessed 18 Aug. 2020.

    “Top 15 Paid and Free Vulnerability Scanner Tools in 2020.” DNSstuff, 6 Jan. 2020. Accessed 15 Sept. 2020.

    Truta, Filip. “60% of Breaches in 2019 Involved Unpatched Vulnerabilities.” Security Boulevard, 31 Oct. 2019. Accessed 2 Nov. 2020.

    “Vulnerability Management Program.” Core Security. Accessed 15 Sept. 2020.

    “What is Risk-Based Vulnerability Management?” Balbix. Accessed 15 Sept. 2020.

    White, Monica. “The Cost Savings of Effective Vulnerability Management (Part 1).” Kenna Security, 23 April 2020. Accessed 20 Sept. 2020.

    Wilczek, Marc. “Average Cost of a Data Breach in 2020: $3.86M.” Dark Reading, 24 Aug. 2020. Accessed 5 Nov 2020.

    Security Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}244|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Ransomware activities and the cost of breaches are on the rise.
    • Cybersecurity talent is hard to find, and an increasing number of cybersecurity professionals are considering leaving their jobs.
    • Moving to the digital world increases the risk of a breach.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The pandemic has fundamentally changed the technology landscape. Security programs must understand how their threat surface is now different and adapt their controls to meet the challenge.
    • The upside to the upheaval in 2021 is new opportunities to modernize your security program.

    Impact and Result

    • Use the report to ensure your plan in 2022 addresses what’s important in cybersecurity.
    • Understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space.

    Security Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Security Priorities 2022 – A report that describes priorities and recommendations for CISOs in 2022.

    Use this report to understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space and inform your plan for 2022. This report includes sections on protecting against and responding to ransomware, acquiring and retaining talent, securing a remote workforce, securing digital transformation, and adopting zero trust.

    • Security Priorities for 2022 Report

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Security Priorities 2022

    The pandemic has changed how we work

    disruptions to the way we work caused by the pandemic are here to stay.

    The pandemic has introduced a lot of changes to our lives over the past two years, and this is also true for various aspects of how we work. In particular, a large workforce moved online overnight, which shifted the work environment rapidly.

    People changed how they communicate, how they access company information, and how they connect to the company network. These changes make cybersecurity a more important focus than ever.

    Although changes like the shift to remote work occurred in response to the pandemic, they are largely expected to remain, regardless of the progression of the pandemic itself. This report will look into important security trends and the priorities that stemmed from these trends.

    30% more professionals expect transformative permanent change compared to one year ago.

    47% of professionals expect a lot of permanent change; this remains the same as last year. (Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey; N=475)

    The cost of a security breach is rising steeply

    The shift to remote work exposes organizations to more costly cyber incidents than ever before.

    $4.24 million

    Average cost of a data breach in 2021
    The cost of a data breach rose by nearly 10% in the past year, the highest rate in over seven years.

    $1.07 million

    More costly when remote work involved in the breach

    The average cost of breaches where remote work is involved is $1.07 million higher than breaches where remote work is not involved.

    The ubiquitous remote work that we saw in 2021 and continue to see in 2022 can lead to more costly security events. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Remote work is here to stay, and the cost of a breach is higher when remote work is involved.

    The cost comes not only directly from payments but also indirectly from reputational loss. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Security teams can participate in the solution

    The numbers are clear: in 2022, when we face a threat environment like WE’VE never EXPERIENCED before, good security is worth the investment

    $1.76 million

    Saved when zero trust is deployed facing a breach

    Zero trust controls are realistic and effective controls.

    Organizations that implement zero trust dramatically reduce the cost of an adverse security event.

    35%

    More costly if it takes more than 200 days to identify and contain a breach

    With increased BYOD and remote work, detection and response is more challenging than ever before – but it is also highly effective.

    Organizations that detect and respond to incidents quickly will significantly reduce the impact. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Breaches are 34% less costly when mature zero trust is implemented.

    A fully staffed and well-prepared security team could save the cost through quick responses. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Top security priorities and constraints in 2022

    Survey results

    As part of its research process for the 2022 Security Priorities Report, Info-Tech Research Group surveyed security and IT leaders (N=97) to ask their top security priorities as well as their main obstacles to security success in 2022:

    Top Priorities
    A list of the top three priorities identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Acquiring and retaining talent, 30%', 'Protecting against and responding to ransomware, 23%', and 'Securing a remote workforce, 23%'.

    Survey respondents were asked to force-rank their security priorities.

    Among the priorities chosen most frequently as #1 were talent management, addressing ransomware threats, and securing hybrid/remote work.

    Top Obstacles
    A list of the top three obstacles identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Staffing constraints, 31%', 'Demand of ever-changing business environment, 23%', and 'Budget constraints, 15%'.

    Talent management is both the #1 priority and the top obstacle facing security leaders in 2022.

    Unsurprisingly, the ever-changing environment in a world emerging from a pandemic and budget constraints are also top obstacles.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    This report details what we see the world demanding of security leaders in the coming year.

    Setting aside the demands – what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of 'Top security topics among Info-Tech members' with accompanying bars, 'Security Strategy', 'Security Policies', 'Security Operations', 'Security Governance', and 'Security Incident Response'.

    Many organizations are still mastering the foundations of a mature cybersecurity program.

    This is a good idea!

    Most breaches are still due to gaps in foundational security, not lack of advanced controls.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of industries with accompanying bars representing their demand for security. The only industry with a significant positive percentage is 'Government'. Security projects included in annual plan relative to industry.

    One industry plainly stands out from the rest. Government organizations are proportionally much more active in security than other industries, and for good reason: they are common targets.

    Manufacturing and professional services are proportionally less interested in security. This is concerning, given the recent targeting of supply chain and personal data holders by ransomware gangs.

    5 Security Priorities for 2022 Logo for Info-Tech. Logo for ITRG.

    People

    1. Acquiring and Retaining Talent
      Create a good working environment for existing and potential employees. Invest time and effort into talent issues to avoid being understaffed.
    2. Securing a Remote Workforce
      Create a secure environment for users and help your people build safe habits while working remotely.

    Process

    1. Securing Digital Transformation
      Build in security from the start and check in frequently to create agile and secure user experiences.

    Technology

    1. Adopting Zero Trust
      Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege.
    2. Protecting Against and Responding to Ransomware
      Put in your best effort to build defenses but also prepare for a breach and know how to recover.

    Main Influencing Factors

    COVID-19 Pandemic
    The pandemic has changed the way we interact with technology. Organizations are universally adapting their business and technology processes to fit the post-pandemic paradigm.
    Rampant Cybercrime Activity
    By nearly every conceivable metric, cybercrime is way up in the past two years. Cybercriminals smell blood and pose a more salient threat than before. Higher standards of cybersecurity capability are required to respond to this higher level of threat.
    Remote Work and Workforce Reallocation
    Talented IT staff across the globe enabled an extraordinarily fast shift to remote and distance work. We must now reckon with the security and human resourcing implications of this huge shift.

    Acquire and Retain Talent

    Priority 01

    Security talent was in short supply before the pandemic, and it's even worse now.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Cybersecurity talent has been in short supply for years, but this shortage has inflected upward since the pandemic.

    The Great Resignation contributed to the existing talent gap. The pandemic has changed how people work as well as how and where they choose work. More and more senior workers are retiring early or opting for remote working opportunities.

    The cost to acquire cybersecurity talent is huge, and the challenge doesn’t end there. Retaining top talent can be equally difficult.

    Current situation

    • A 2021 survey by ESG shows that 76% of security professional agree it’s difficult to recruit talent, and 57% said their organization is affected by this talent shortage.
    • (ISC)2 reports there are 2.72 million unfilled job openings and an increasing workforce gap (2021).

    2.72 million unfilled cybersecurity openings (Source: (ISC)2, 2021)

    IT leaders must do more to attract and retain talent in 2022

    • Over 70% of IT professionals are considering quitting their jobs (TalentLMS, 2021). Meanwhile, 51% of surveyed cybersecurity professionals report extreme burnout during the last 12 months and many of them have considered quitting because of it (VMWare, 2021).
    • Working remotely makes it easier for people to look elsewhere, lowering the barrier to leaving.
    • This is a big problem for security leaders, as cybersecurity talent is in very short supply. The cost of acquiring and retaining quality cybersecurity staff in 2022 is significant, and many organizations are unwilling or unable to pay the premium.
    • Top talent will demand flexible working conditions – even though remote work comes with security risk.
    • Most smart, talented new hires in 2022 are demanding to work remotely most of the time.
    Top reasons for resignations in 2021
    Burnout 30%
    Other remote opportunities 20%
    Lack of growth opportunities 20%
    Poor culture 20%
    Acquisition concerns 10%
    (Source: Survey of West Coast US cybersecurity professionals; TechBeacon, 2021)

    Talent will be 2022’s #1 strength and #1 weakness

    Staffing obstacles in 2022:

    “Attracting and retaining talent is always challenging. We don’t pay as well and my org wants staff in the office at least half of the time. Most young, smart, talented new hires want to work remotely 100 percent of the time.“

    “Trying to grow internal resources into security roles.”

    “Remote work expectations by employees and refusal by business to accommodate.”

    “Biggest obstacle: payscales that are out of touch with cybersecurity market.”

    “Request additional staff. Obtaining funding for additional position is most significant obstacle.”

    (Info-Tech Tech Security Priorities Survey 2022)
    Top obstacles in 2022:

    As you can see, respondents to our security priorities survey have strong feelings on the challenges of staffing a cybersecurity team.

    The growth of remote work means local talent can now be hired by anybody, vastly increasing your competition as an employer.

    Hiring local will get tougher – but so will hiring abroad. People who don’t want to relocate for a new job now have plenty of alternatives. Without a compelling remote work option, you will find non-local prospects unwilling to move for a new job.

    Lastly, many organizations are still reeling at the cost of experienced cybersecurity talent. Focused internal training and development will be the answer for many organizations.

    Recommended Actions

    Provide career development opportunities

    Many security professionals are dissatisfied with their unclear career development paths. To improve retention, organizations should provide their staff with opportunities and clear paths for career and skills advancement.

    Be open-minded when hiring

    To broaden the candidate pool, organizations should be open-minded when considering who to hire.

    • Enable remote work.
    • Do not fixate on certificates and years of experience; rather, be open to developing those who have the right interest and ability.
    • Consider using freelance workers.
    Facilitate work-life balance

    Many security professionals say they experience burnout. Promoting work-life balance in your organization can help retain critical skills.

    Create inclusive environment

    Hire a diverse team and create an inclusive environment where they can thrive.

    Talent acquisition and retention plan

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Address a top priority and a top obstacle with a plan to attract and retain top organizational and cybersecurity talent.

    Initiative Description:

    • Provide secure remote work capabilities for staff.
    • Work with HR to refine a hiring plan that addresses geographical and compensation gaps with cybersecurity and general staff.
    • Survey staff engagement to identify points of friction and remediate where needed.
    • Define a career path and growth plan for staff.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduction in costs due to turnover and talent loss

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Productivity due to good morale/ engagement
    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved corporate culture
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Big organizational and cultural changes
    • Increased attack surface of remote/hybrid workforce

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure a Remote Workforce

    Priority 02

    Trends suggest remote work is here to stay. Addressing the risk of insecure endpoints can no longer be deferred.

    Executive summary

    Remote work poses unique challenges to cybersecurity teams. The personal home environment may introduce unauthorized people and unknown network vulnerabilities, and the organization loses nearly all power and influence over the daily cyber hygiene of its users.

    In addition, the software used for enabling remote work itself can be a target of cybersecurity criminals.

    Current situation

    • 70% of workers in technical services work from home.
    • Employees of larger firms and highly paid individuals are more likely to be working outside the office.
    • 80% of security and business leaders find that remote work has increased the risk of a breach.
    • (Source: StatCan, 2021)

    70% of tech workers work from home (Source: Statcan, 2021)

    Remote work demands new security solutions

    The security perimeter is finally gone

    The data is outside the datacenter.
    The users are outside the office.
    The endpoints are … anywhere and everywhere.

    Organizations that did not implement digital transformation changes following COVID-19 experience higher costs following a breach, likely because it is taking nearly two months longer, on average, to detect and contain a breach when more than 50% of staff are working remotely (IBM, 2021).

    In 2022 the cumulative risk of so many remote connections means we need to rethink how we secure the remote/hybrid workforce.

    Security
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Weak VPN protocols
    Identity
    • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    Colorful tiles representing the surrounding security solutions. Network
    • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
    • Split tunneling
    Authentication
    • Weak authentication
    • Weak password
    Access
    • Man-in-the-middle attack
    • Cross-site scripting
    • Session hijacking

    Recommended Actions

    Mature your identity management

    Compromised identity is the main vector to breaches in recent years. Stale accounts, contractor accounts, misalignment between HR and IT – the lack of foundational practices leads to headline-making breaches every week.
    Tighten up identity control to keep your organization out of the newspaper.

    Get a handle on your endpoints

    Work-from-home (WFH) often means unknown endpoints on unknown networks full of other unknown devices…and others in the home potentially using the workstation for non-work purposes. Gaining visibility into your endpoints can help to keep detection and resolution times short.

    Educate users

    Educate everyone on security best practices when working remotely:

    • Apply secure settings (not just defaults) to the home network.
    • Use strong passwords.
    • Identify suspicious email.
    Ease of use

    Many workers complain that the corporate technology solution makes it difficult to get their work done.

    Employees will take productivity over security if we force them to choose, so IT needs to listen to end users’ needs and provide a solution that is nimble and secure.

    Roadmap to securing remote/hybrid workforce

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    The corporate network now extends to the internet – ensure your security plan has you covered.

    Initiative Description:

    • Reassess enterprise security strategy to include the WFH attack surface (especially endpoint visibility).
    • Ensure authentication requirements for remote workers are sufficient (e.g. MFA, strong passwords, hardware tokens for high-risk users/connections).
    • Assess the value of zero trust networking to minimize the blast radius in the case of a breach.
    • Perform penetration testing annually.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.


    Reduced cost of security incidents/reputational damage

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved ability to attract and retain talent
    Arrow pointing up.
    Increased business adaptability
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential disruption to traditional working patterns
    • Cost of investing in WFH versus risk of BYOD

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure Digital Transformation

    Priority 03

    Digital transformation could be a competitive advantage…or the cause of your next data breach.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Digital transformation is occurring at an ever-increasing rate these days. As Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella said early in the pandemic, “We’ve seen two years’ worth of digital transformation in two months.”

    We have heard similar stories from Info-Tech members who deployed rollouts that were scheduled to take months over a weekend instead.

    Microsoft’s own shift to rapidly expand its Teams product is a prime example of how quickly the digital landscape has changed. The global adaption to a digital world has largely been a success story, but rapid change comes with risk, and there is a parallel story of rampant cyberattacks like we have never seen before.

    Insight

    There is an adage that “slow is smooth, and smooth is fast” – the implication being that fast is sloppy. In 2022 we’ll see a pattern of organizations working to catch up their cybersecurity with the transformations we all made in 2020.

    $1.78 trillion expected in digital transformation investments (Source: World Economic Forum, 2021)

    An ounce of security prevention versus a pound of cure

    The journey of digital transformation is a risky one.

    Digital transformations often rely heavily on third-party cloud service providers, which increases exposure of corporate data.

    Further, adoption of new technology creates a new threat surface that must be assessed, mitigations implemented, and visibility established to measure performance.

    However, digital transformations are often run on slim budgets and without expert guidance.

    Survey respondents report as much: rushed deployments, increased cloud migration, and shadow IT are the top vulnerabilities reported by security leaders and executives.

    In a 2020 Ponemon survey, 82% of IT security and C-level executives reported experiencing at least one data breach directly resulting from a digital transformation they had undergone.

    Scope creep is inevitable on any large project like a digital transformation. A small security shortcut early in the project can have dire consequences when it grows to affect personal data and critical systems down the road.

    Recommended Actions

    Engage the business early and often

    Despite the risks, organizations engage in digital transformations because they also have huge business value.

    Security leaders should not be seeking to slow or stop digital transformations; rather, we should be engaging with the business early to get ahead of risks and enable successful transformation.

    Establish a vendor security program

    Data is moving out of datacenters and onto third-party environments. Without security requirements built into agreements, and clear visibility into vendor security capabilities, that data is a major source of risk.

    A robust vendor security program will create assurance early in the process and help to reinforce the responsibility of securing data with other parts of the organization.

    Build/revisit your security strategy

    The threat surface has changed since before your transformation. This is the right time to revisit or rebuild your security strategy to ensure that your control set is present throughout the new environment – and also a great opportunity to show how your current security investments are helping secure your new digital lines of business!

    Educate your key players

    Only 16% of security leaders and executives report alignment between security and business processes during digital transformation.

    If security is too low a priority, then key players in your transformation efforts are likely unaware of how security risks impact their own success. It will be incumbent upon the CISO to start that conversation.

    Securing digital transformation

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Ensure your investment in digital transformation is appropriately secured.

    Initiative Description:

    • Engage security with digital transformation and relevant governance structures (steering committees) to ensure security considerations are built into digital transformation planning.
    • Incorporate security stage gates in project management procedures.
    • Establish a vendor security assessment program.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased likelihood of digital transformation success

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Ability to make informed decisions for the field rep strategy
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced long-term cost of digital transformation
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential increased up front cost (reduced long-term cost)
    • Potential slowed implementation with security stage gates in project management

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Adopt Zero Trust

    Priority 04

    Governments are recognizing the importance of zero trust strategies. So should your organization.

    Why now for zero trust?

    John Kindervag modernized the concept of zero trust back in 2010, and in the intervening years there has been enormous interest in cybersecurity circles, yet in 2022 only 30% of organizations report even beginning to roll out zero trust capabilities (Statista, 2022).

    Why such little action on a revolutionary and compelling model?

    Zero trust is not a technology; it is a principle. Zero trust adoption takes concerted planning, effort, and expense, for which the business value has been unclear throughout most of the last 10 years. However, several recent developments are changing that:

    • Securing technology has become very hard! The size, complexity, and attack surface of IT environments has grown significantly – especially since the pandemic.
    • Cyberattacks have become rampant as the cost to deploy harmful ransomware has become lower and the impact has become higher.
    • The shift away from on-premises datacenters and offices created an opening for zero trust investment, and zero trust technology is more mature than ever before.

    The time has come for zero trust adoption to begin in earnest.

    97% will maintain or increase zero trust budget (Source: Statista, 2022)

    Traditional perimeter security is not working

    Zero trust directly addresses the most prevalent attack vectors today

    A hybrid workforce using traditional VPN creates an environment where we are exposed to all the risks in the wild (unknown devices at any location on any network), but at a stripped-down security level that still provides the trust afforded to on-premises workers using known devices.

    What’s more, threats such as ransomware are known to exploit identity and remote access vulnerabilities before moving laterally within a network – vectors that are addressed directly by zero trust identity and networking. Ninety-three percent of surveyed zero trust adopters state that the benefits have matched or exceeded their expectations (iSMG, 2022).

    Top reasons for building a zero trust program in 2022

    (Source: iSMG, 2022)

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    44%

    Reduce attacker ability to move laterally

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    The business case for zero trust is clearer than ever

    Prior obstacles to Zero Trust are disappearing

    A major obstacle to zero trust adoption has been the sheer cost, along with the lack of business case for that investment. Two factors are changing that paradigm in 2022:

    The May 2021 US White House Executive Order for federal agencies to adopt zero trust architecture finally placed zero trust on the radar of many CEOs and board members, creating the business interest and willingness to consider investing in zero trust.

    In addition, the cost of adopting zero trust is quickly being surpassed by the cost of not adopting zero trust, as cyberattacks become rampant and successful zero trust deployments create a case study to support investment.

    Bar chart titled 'Cost to remediate a Ransomware attack' with bars representing the years '2021' and '2020'. 2021's cost sits around $1.8M while 2020's was only $750K The cost to remediate a ransomware attack more than doubled from 2020 to 2021. Widespread adoption of zero trust capabilities could keep that number from doubling again in 2022. (Source: Sophos, 2021)

    The cost of a data breach is on average $1.76 million less for organizations with mature zero trust deployments.

    That is, the cost of a data breach is 35% reduced compared to organizations without zero trust controls. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Recommended Actions

    Start small

    Don’t put all your eggs in one basket by deploying zero trust in a wide swath. Rather, start as small as possible to allow for growing pains without creating business friction (or sinking your project altogether).

    Build a sensible roadmap

    Zero trust principles can be applied in a myriad of ways, so where should you start? Between identities, devices, networking, and data, decide on a use case to do pilot testing and then refine your approach.

    Beware too-good-to-be-true products

    Zero trust is a powerful buzzword, and vendors know it.

    Be skeptical and do your due diligence to ensure your new security partners in zero trust are delivering what you need.

    Zero trust roadmap

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Develop a practical roadmap that shows the business value of security investment.

    Initiative Description:

    • Define desired business and security outcomes from zero trust adoption.
    • Assess zero trust readiness.
    • Build roadmaps for zero trust:
      1. Identity
      2. Networking
      3. Devices
      4. Data
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased security posture and business agility

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced impact of security events
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost of managing complex control set
    Arrow pointing up.
    More secure business transformation (i.e. cloud/digital)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Learning curve of implementation (start small and slow)
    • Transition from current control set to zero trust model

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Protect Against and Respond to Ransomware

    Priority 05

    Ransomware is still the #1 threat to the safety of your data.

    Executive summary

    Background

    • Ransomware attacks have transformed in 2021 and show no sign of slowing in 2022. There is a new major security breach every week, despite organizations spending over $150 billion in a year on cybersecurity (Nasdaq, 2021).
    • Ransomware as a service (RaaS) is commonplace, and attackers are doubling down by holding encrypted data ransom and also demanding payment under threat to disclose exfiltrated data – and they are making good on their threats.
    • The global cost of ransomware is expected to rise to $265 billion by 2031 (Cybersecurity Ventures, 2021).
    • We expect to see an increase in ransomware incidents in 2022, both in severity and volume – multiple attacks and double extortion are now the norm.
    • High staff turnover increases risk because new employees are unfamiliar with security protocols.

    150% increase ransomware attacks in 2020 (Source: ENISA)

    This is a new golden age of ransomware

    What is the same in 2022

    Unbridled ransomware attacks make it seem like attackers must be using complex new techniques, but prevalent ransomware attack vectors are actually well understood.

    Nearly all modern variants are breaching victim systems in one of three ways:

    • Email phishing
    • Software vulnerabilities
    • RDP/Remote access compromise
    What is new in 2022
    The sophistication of victim targeting

    Victims often find themselves asking, “How did the attackers know to phish the most security-oblivious person in my staff?” Bad actors have refined their social engineering and phishing to exploit high-risk individuals, meaning your chain is only as strong as the weakest link.

    Ability of malware to evade detection

    Modern ransomware is getting better at bypassing anti-malware technology, for example, through creative techniques such as those seen in the MedusaLocker variant and in Ghost Control attacks.

    Effective anti-malware is still a must-have control, but a single layer of defense is no longer enough. Any organization that hopes to avoid paying a ransom must prepare to detect, respond, and recover from an attack.

    Many leaders still don’t know what a ransomware recovery would look like

    Do you know what it would take to recover from a ransomware incident?

    …and does your executive leadership know what it would take to recover?

    The organizations that are most likely to pay a ransom are unprepared for the reality of recovering their systems.

    If you have not done a tabletop or live exercise to simulate a true recovery effort, you may be exposed to more risk than you realize.

    Are your defenses sufficiently hardened against ransomware?

    Organizations with effective security prevention are often breached by ransomware – but they are prepared to contain, detect, and eradicate the infection.

    Ask yourself whether you have identified potential points of entry for ransomware. Assume that your security controls will fail.

    How well are your security controls layered, and how difficult would it be for an attacker to move east/west within your systems?

    Recommended Actions

    Be prepared for a breach

    There is no guarantee that an organization will not fall victim to ransomware, so instead of putting all their effort into prevention, organizations should also put effort into planning to respond to a breach.

    Security awareness training/phishing detection

    Phishing continues to be the main point of entry for ransomware. Investing in phishing awareness and detection among your end users may be the most impactful countermeasure you can implement.

    Zero trust adoption

    Always verify at every step of interaction, even when access is requested by internal users. Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege access.

    Encrypt and back up your data

    Encrypt your data so that even if there is a breach, the attackers don’t have a copy of your data. Also, keep regular backups of data at a separate location so that you still have data to work with after a breach occurs.

    You never want to pay a ransom. Being prepared to deal with an incident is your best chance to avoid paying!

    Prevent and respond to ransomware

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

    Initiative Description:

    • Execute a systematic assessment of your current security and ransomware recovery capabilities.
    • Perform tabletop activities and live recoveries to test data recovery capabilities.
    • Train staff to detect suspicious communications and protect their identities.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Improved productivity and brand protection

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced downtime and disruption
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost due to incidents (ransom payments, remediation)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Friction with existing staff

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Deepfakes: Dark-horse threat for 2022

    Deepfake video

    How long has it been since you’ve gone a full workday without having a videoconference with someone?

    We have become inherently trustful that the face we see on the screen is real, but the technology required to falsify that video is widely available and runs on commercially available hardware, ushering in a genuinely post-truth online era.

    Criminals can use deepfakes to enhance social engineering, to spread misinformation, and to commit fraud and blackmail.

    Deepfake audio

    Many financial institutions have recently deployed voiceprint authentication. TD describes its VoicePrint as “voice recognition technology that allows us to use your voiceprint – as unique to you as your fingerprint – to validate your identity” over the phone.

    However, hackers have been defeating voice recognition for years already. There is ripe potential for voice fakes to fool both modern voice recognition technology and the accounts payable staff.

    Bibliography

    “2021 Ransomware Statistics, Data, & Trends.” PurpleSec, 2021. Web.

    Bayern, Macy. “Why 60% of IT security pros want to quit their jobs right now.” TechRepublic, 10 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Bresnahan, Ethan. “How Digital Transformation Impacts IT And Cyber Risk Programs.” CyberSaint Security, 25 Feb. 2021. Web.

    Clancy, Molly. “The True Cost of Ransomware.” Backblaze, 9 Sept. 2021.Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, 2021. Web.

    Cybersecurity Ventures. “Global Ransomware Damage Costs To Exceed $265 Billion By 2031.” Newswires, 4 June 2021. Web.

    “Digital Transformation & Cyber Risk: What You Need to Know to Stay Safe.” Ponemon Institute, June 2020. Web.

    “Global Incident Response Threat Report: Manipulating Reality.” VMware, 2021.

    Granger, Diana. “Karmen Ransomware Variant Introduced by Russian Hacker.” Recorded Future, 18 April 2017. Web.

    “Is adopting a zero trust model a priority for your organization?” Statista, 2022. Web.

    “(ISC)2 Cybersecurity Workforce Study, 2021: A Resilient Cybersecurity Profession Charts the Path Forward.” (ISC)2, 2021. Web.

    Kobialka, Dan. “What Are the Top Zero Trust Strategies for 2022?” MSSP Alert, 10 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Kost, Edward. “What is Ransomware as a Service (RaaS)? The Dangerous Threat to World Security.” UpGuard, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Lella, Ifigeneia, et al., editors. “ENISA Threat Landscape 2021.” ENISA, Oct. 2021. Web.

    Mello, John P., Jr. “700K more cybersecurity workers, but still a talent shortage.” TechBeacon, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Naraine, Ryan. “Is the ‘Great Resignation’ Impacting Cybersecurity?” SecurityWeek, 11 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Oltsik, Jon. “ESG Research Report: The Life and Times of Cybersecurity Professionals 2021 Volume V.” Enterprise Security Group, 28 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware as a service: Negotiators are now in high demand.” ZDNet, 8 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware in 2022: We’re all screwed.” ZDNet, 22 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Retaining Tech Employees in the Era of The Great Resignation.” TalentLMS, 19 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Rubin, Andrew. “Ransomware Is the Greatest Business Threat in 2022.” Nasdaq, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Samartsev, Dmitry, and Daniel Dobrygowski. “5 ways Digital Transformation Officers can make cybersecurity a top priority.“ World Economic Forum, 15 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Seymour, John, and Azeem Aqil. “Your Voice is My Passport.” Presented at black hat USA 2018.

    Solomon, Howard. “Ransomware attacks will be more targeted in 2022: Trend Micro.” IT World Canada, 6 Jan. 2022. Web.

    “The State of Ransomware 2021.” Sophos, April 2021. Web.

    Tarun, Renee. “How The Great Resignation Could Benefit Cybersecurity.” Forbes Technology Council, Forbes, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “TD VoicePrint.” TD Bank, n.d. Web.

    “Working from home during the COVID-19 pandemic, April 202 to June 2021.” Statistics Canada, 4 Aug. 2021. Web.

    “Zero Trust Strategies for 2022.” iSMG, Palo Alto Networks, and Optiv, 28 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}425|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,500 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive AWS bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for over architecting or overspending on AWS.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their AWS spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define processes for right-sizing, and define processes for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List

    Infographic

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles and responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Chargeback/showback model to provide clear accountability for costs.

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles and responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles and responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes and Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes and procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and Alerts

    4 Build Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement and improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}427|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs
    • Ninety-one percent of IT leaders believe that analytics is important for talent management but 59% use no workforce analytics at all, although those who use analytics are much more effective than those who don't.
    • The higher the level of analytics used, the higher the level of effectiveness of the department as a whole.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don't need advanced metrics and analytics to see a return on people data. Begin by getting a strong foundation in place and showing the ROI on a pilot project.
    • Complex analyses will never make up for inadequate data quality. Spend the time up front to audit and improve data quality if necessary, no matter which stage of analytics proficiency you are at.
    • Ensure you collect and analyze only data that is essential to your decision making. More is not better, and excess data can detract from the overall impact of analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Build a small-scale foundational pilot, which will allow you to demonstrate feasibility, refine your costs estimate, and show the ROI on people analytics for your budgeting meeting.
    • Drive organizational change incrementally by identifying and communicating with the stakeholders for your people analytics pilot.
    • Choose basic analytics suitable for organizations of all sizes and understand the building blocks of data quality to support more further analytics down the line.

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically apply people analytics to your IT talent management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define the problem and apply the checklist

    From choosing the right data for the right problem to evaluating your progress toward data-driven people decisions, follow these steps to build your foundation to people analytics.

    • Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions – Phase 1: Define the Problem and Apply the Checklist
    • People Analytics Strategy Template
    • Talent Metrics Library
    [infographic]

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}308|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $34,982 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 25 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy

    IT needs to answer these questions:

    • What types of computing devices, provisioning models, and operating systems should be offered to end users?
    • How will IT support devices?
    • What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used?
    • What actions are we taking and when?
    • How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Your answers need to balance choice, risk, and cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Even if a user has a prestigious tablet, if the apps aren’t built well, they can’t get support on it, or they can’t connect, then that device is useless. Focus on supportability, use cases, connection, and policy – and the device.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify desired benefits that align to IT and corporate priorities and strategies.
    • Perform a persona analysis.
    • Define a vision for end-user computing.
    • Define the standard device and app offerings.
    • Improve the supporting services surrounding devices.
    • Develop a roadmap for implementing your strategy.

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. End-User Computing Strategy Deck – A step-by-step document to walk you through end-user computing trends and processes to improve customer satisfaction.

    This storyboard will help you identify your goals, build standard offerings for users, define governance and policies around offerings, and develop a roadmap for your EUC program.

    • Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy – Phases 1-3

    2. End-User Computing Strategy Template – A repository for your current-state and persona analysis to identify technology requirements for each user group.

    Use these templates to document your end-user computing strategy. Follow the guidelines in the blueprint and record activity results in the template. The findings will be presented to the management team.

    • End-User Computing Strategy Template
    • User Group Analysis Workbook

    3. End-User Computing Ideas Catalog and Standard Offering Guide – Templates that guide you to document the outcome from persona analysis to define standard offerings and policies.

    The Ideas Catalog introduces provisioning models, form factors, and supported operating systems. Use the Standard Offering Template to document provisioning models and define computing devices along with apps and peripherals according to the outcome of the user group analysis.

    • Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template
    • End-User Computing Ideas Catalog

    4. End-User Computing Policies – Policies that establish requirements for end-user computing.

    Use these policy templates to communicate the purposes behind each end-user computing decision and establish company standards, guidelines, and procedures for the purchase of technologies. The policies will ensure purchasing, reimbursement, security, and remote wiping enforcements are consistent and in alignment with the company strategy.

    • Mobile Device Connectivity & Allowance Policy
    • Purchasing Policy
    • Mobile Device Reimbursement Agreement
    • Mobile Device Reimbursement Policy
    • BYOD Acceptable Use Policy
    • Mobile Device Remote Wipe Waiver Template
    • General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy
    • Device Entitlement Policy Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set the Direction

    The Purpose

    Dig into the current state and build user persona.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine your challenges and strengths.

    Delineate user IT requirements.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current state of end-user computing.

    1.2 Perform SWOT analysis.

    1.3 Map benefits to stakeholder drivers and priorities.

    1.4 Identify user groups.

    1.5 Identify supporting technology.

    1.6 Identify opportunities to provide value.

    Outputs

    SWOT analysis of current state

    Goals cascade

    Persona analysis

    2 Define the Offering

    The Purpose

    Define your EUC vision and standard offerings.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Brainstorm EUC vision and mission.

    Find out the standard offerings.

    Set the direction for end-user computing to support shift-left enablement.

    Activities

    2.1 Prioritize benefits.

    2.2 Craft a vision and mission statement.

    2.3 Identify goals.

    2.4 Define guiding principles for your strategy.

    2.5 Select a provisioning model for each persona.

    2.6 Define the standard device offerings.

    2.7 Document each persona's entitlements.

    Outputs

    Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles

    Goals and indicators

    End-user device entitlements standard

    3 Support the Offering

    The Purpose

    Outline supporting practices and define policies for each use case.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Document supporting practices.

    Document EUC policies.

    Activities

    3.1 Define device management tools and approach.

    3.2 Identify groups involved in supporting practices.

    3.3 Identify opportunities to improve customer service.

    3.4 Define acceptable use.

    3.5 Define BYOD policies.

    3.6 Define procurement and entitlement policies.

    3.7 Define security policies.

    Outputs

    List of management tools for end-user computing

    Roles and responsibilities for maintaining the end-user computing environment

    Opportunities to improve customer service

    End-user computing policy templates

    4 Bridge the Gap and Create the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a user migration roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Make the project a reality by documenting initiatives and building a roadmap.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify the gaps in devices, user support, use cases, policy & governance, and fitness for use.

    4.2 Plan the deployment and user migration journey.

    4.3 Document initiatives in the roadmap.

    Outputs

    Initiatives mapped to practice areas

    User migration journey map

    Further reading

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    Support the workforce of the future.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Focus beyond the device

    It’s easy to think that if we give end users nice devices, then they will be more engaged and they will be happy with IT. If only it were that easy.

    Info-Tech Research Group has surveyed over 119,000 people through its CIO Business Vision diagnostic. The results show that a good device is necessary but not enough for high satisfaction with IT. Once a user has a decent device, the other aspects of the user’s experience has a higher impact on their satisfaction with IT.

    After all, if a person is trying to run apps designed in the 1990s, if they are struggling to access resources through an underperforming VPN connection, or if they can’t get help when their devices and apps aren’t working, then it doesn’t matter that you gave them a state-of-the-art MacBook or Microsoft Surface.

    As you build out your end-user computing strategy to reflect the new reality of today’s workforce, ensure you focus on shifting user support left, modernizing apps to support how users need to work, and ensuring that your network and collaboration tools can support the increased demands. End-user computing teams need to focus beyond the device.

    Ken Weston, ITIL MP, PMP, Cert.APM, SMC

    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations Info-Tech Research Group

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD

    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT needs to answer these questions:

    • What types of computing devices, provisioning models, and operating systems (OSes) should be offered to end users?
    • How will IT support devices?
    • What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used?
    • What actions are we taking and when?
    • How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Your answers need to balance choice, risk, and cost.

    Common Obstacles

    Management paradigms have shifted:

    • OSes, device management, and IT asset management (ITAM) practices have changed.
    • Users expect full capabilities on any personal device.
    • Virtual desktops are switching to the cloud.
    • Low-code/no-code platforms allow the business to manage their own apps or comanage with IT.
    • Work-from-anywhere is the default.
    • Users have higher customer service expectations.

    Take end-user computing beyond the OS.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Identify desired benefits that align to IT and corporate priorities and strategies.
    • Perform a persona analysis.
    • Define a vision for end-user computing.
    • Define the standard device and app offerings.
    • Improve the supporting services surrounding devices.
    • Develop a roadmap for implementing your strategy.

    A good device is necessary for satisfaction with IT but it’s not enough.

    If a user has a prestigious tablet but the apps aren’t built well, they can’t get support on it, or they can’t connect to the internet, then that device is useless. Focus on supportability, use cases, connection, policy – and device.

    Your challenge

    This blueprint will help you build a strategy that answers these questions:

    • What types of computing devices should be offered to end users?
    • What provisioning models will be used?
    • What operating systems are supported?
    • How will IT support devices?
    • What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used?
    • What actions are we taking and when?
    • How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Definition: End-User Computing (EUC)

    End-user computing (EUC) is the domain of information and technology that deals with the devices used by workers to do their jobs. EUC has five focus areas: devices, user support, use cases, policy & governance, and fitness for use.

    A good end-user computing strategy will effectively balance:

    User Choice

    Cost

    Risk

    The right balance will be unique for every organization.

    Strike the right balance

    The discussion is larger than desktop support

    If IT is an influencer, then you get to drive this conversation. If IT is not an influencer, then you need to support whatever option the business wants.

    Cost Risk Choice Result
    Higher Education High importance Low importance High importance Full BYOD for professors. Standardized offerings for administration.
    Software Development Firms Low importance Medium/High importance High importance Standardized offerings for developers. Virtual desktops for users on BYOD.
    Legal Firm Medium importance High importance Low importance Partners offered prestigious devices. Everyone else uses Windows PCs. Virtual desktops and apps for remote access.

    Healthcare

    High importance High importance Low importance Nurses, janitors, and other frontline staff use shared tablets. Doctors are provisioned their own tablet. Admin staff and doctors are provisioned virtual desktops to maintain security and compliance.
    Government High importance High importance Low importance Standardized PC offerings for all employees. MacBooks are provided with justification. Devices managed with Intune and ConfigMgr.

    Good devices are necessary for overall IT satisfaction

    BUT

    Good devices are not enough for high satisfaction

    A bad device can ruin a person’s satisfaction with IT

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision has shown that when someone is dissatisfied with their device, their satisfaction with IT overall is only 40.92% on average.

    When a person is satisfied with their device, their average satisfaction increases by approximately 30 percentage points to 70.22%. (Info-Tech Research Group, CIO Business Vision, 2021; N=119,383)

    The image is a bar graph, with the Y-axis labelled Overall IT Satisfaction. There are two bars, one labelled Satisfied With Devices, which is at 70.22%, and the other labelled Dissatisfied With Devices, which is at 40.92%.

    Improvements in the service desk, business apps, networks and communication infrastructure, and IT policy all have a higher impact on increasing satisfaction.

    For every one-point increase in satisfaction in those areas, respondents’ overall satisfaction with IT increased by the respective percentage of a point. (Info-Tech Research Group, CIO Business Vision, 2021; N=119,409)

    The image shows a graphic of five arrows pointing upwards. They are labelled (from right to left): Devices--42.20%; IT Policy--45.90%; Network & Comms Infra--59.49%; Business Apps--63.89%; Service Desk--65.19%, 1.54 times the impact of devices.

    End-User Paradigms Have Shifted

    Take end-user computing beyond the device

    Operating System - OS

    Only Windows

    • More choices than ever before

    Endpoint Management System - UEM

    Group Policy & Client Management

    • Modern & Unified Endpoint Management

    Personal Devices - BYOD

    Limited to email on phones

    • Full capabilities on any device

    IT Asset Management - ITAM

    Hands-on with images

    • Zero-touch with provisioning packages

    Virtual Desktops - DaaS

    Virtual Desktop Infrastructure in the Data Center

    • Desktop-as-a-Service in the cloud

    Business-Managed Apps - BMA

    Performed by IT

    • Performed by the Business and IT

    Work-From-Anywhere - WFA

    Rare

    • Default

    Customer Satisfaction - C Sat

    Phone calls and transactional interactions

    • Self-serve & managing entire experience

    Don’t limit your focus to only Windows and Macs

    Android is the OS with the largest market share

    Users and IT have more choices than ever before

    Operating System - OS

    Only Windows

    • More choices than ever before

    Microsoft is still the dominant player in end-user computing, but Windows has only a fraction of the share it once had.

    IT needs to revisit their device management practices. Modern management tools such as unified endpoint management (UEM) tools are better suited than traditional client management tools (CMT) for a cross-platform world.

    IT must also revisit their application portfolios. Are business apps supported on Android and iOS or are they only supported on Windows? Is there an opportunity to offer more options to end users? Are end users already running apps and handling sensitive data on Android and iOS through software-as-a-service and bring-your-own-device (BYOD) capabilities in Office 365 and Google apps?

    The image shows a bar graph titled OS Market Share, 2011-2021. On the x-axis are OS names with a bar in blue representing their market share in 2011, and a bar in purple showing their market share in 2021. The data shown is as follows: Windows--85.98% (2011), 31.62% (2021); Android--1.22% (2011), 40.85% (2021); iOS--2.1% (2011), 16.42% (2021); Mac OS X--6.19% (2011); 6.8% (2021); Other--4.51% (2011), 4.31% (2021). Source: StatCounter Global Stats.

    OS market share is partly driven by the digital divide

    If someone must choose between a smartphone and a computer, they go with a smartphone

    IT can’t expect everyone to be fluent on Windows and Mac, have a computer at home, or even have home broadband.

    Of US adults aged 18-29:

    • 96% have a smartphone (the rest have cellphones).
    • Only 70% of US adults aged 18-29 have a home broadband connection.

    Further, only 59% of US adults making less than $30,000/year have a laptop or desktop. (“Mobile Technology” and “Digital Divide,” Pew Research, 2021.)

    Globally, people are likelier to have a cell subscription than they are to have access to broadband.

    The image is a bar graph, with a list of countries on the X-axis, with each having two bars: blue indicating Fixed Broadband Subscriptions per 100 people and purple indicating Mobile Cellular Subscriptions per 100 people. In all listed countries, the number of Mobile Cellular Subscriptions per 100 people is higher than Fixed Broadband Subscriptions. Source: The World Bank, 2020. Most recent data for USA mobile cellular subscriptions is from 2019.

    Embrace new device management paradigms

    Endpoint Management System - UEM

    Group Policy & Client Management

    • Modern & Unified Endpoint Management

    Evaluate enterprise mobility management and unified endpoint management to better support a remote-first, cross-platform reality.

    Client Management Tool (CMT)

    CMTs such as Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager (ConfigMgr, aka SCCM) can be used to distribute apps, apply patches, and enforce group policy.

    Enterprise Mobility Management (EMM)

    EMM tools allow you to manage multiple device platforms through mobile device management (MDM) protocols. These tools enforce security settings, allow you to push apps to managed devices, and monitor patch compliance through reporting.

    EMM tools often support mobile application management (MAM) and mobile content management (MCM). Most EMM tools can manage devices running Windows, Mac OS, iOS, and Android, although there are exceptions.

    Unified Endpoint Management (UEM)

    UEM solutions combine CMT and EMM for better control of remote computers running Windows or Macs. Examples include:

    • Windows devices comanaged by Intune and ConfigMgr.
    • Mac devices managed by Jamf Pro.
    • Mac devices comanaged by Jamf Pro and Intune.

    Most UEM tools can manage devices running Windows, Mac OS, iOS, and Android, allowing IT to manage all end-user devices from a unified tool set (although there are exceptions).

    Mobile Application Management (MAM)

    MAM provides the ability to package an app with security settings, distribute app updates, and enforce app updates. Some capabilities do not require apps to be enrolled in an EMM or UEM solution.

    Mobile Content Management (MCM)

    MCM tools distribute files to remote devices. Many MCM solutions allow for security settings to be applied, such as encrypting the files or prohibiting data from leaving the secure container. Examples include OneDrive, Box, and Citrix ShareFile.

    Adopt modern management with EMM and UEM – better toolsets for today’s state of EUC

    Sacrifice your Group Policy Objects to better manage Windows computers

    Windows Management Features Traditional CMT Hybrid UEM Cloud-Based EMM
    Group Policy ✔ Primary management approach ✔ Available alongside configuration service providers X Replaced by configuration service providers
    Manage remote devices without VPN X X
    No longer manage and maintain images X ✔ Images are still available ✔ Images replaced by provisioning packages
    Secure and support BYOD X (Certain tools may offer limited MDM capabilities)
    Support remote zero-touch provisioning X (Only available via PXE boot)
    App, patch, update deployments Via defined distribution points Via defined distribution points or MAM Via MAM

    IT asset management practices are shifting

    IT Asset Management - ITAM

    Hands-on with images

    • Zero-touch with provisioning packages

    Supply chain issues are making computers longer to procure, meaning users are waiting longer for computers (Cision, 2021). The resulting silicon chip shortage is expected to last until at least 2023 (Light Reading, 2021).

    IT departments are delaying purchases, delaying refreshes, and/or purchasing more to reserve devices before they need them.

    Remote work has increased by 159% over the past 12 years (NorthOne, 2021). New hires and existing users can’t always go into the office to get a new computer.

    IT departments are paying vendors to hold onto computers and then drop-ship them directly to the end user. The devices are provisioned using zero touch (e.g. Autopilot, Apple Device Manager, or another tool). Since zero-touch provisioning tools do not support images, teams have had to switch to provisioning packages.

    The pandemic saw an increase in spending on virtual desktops

    Virtual desktops offered powerful tools for supporting remote devices and personal computers without compromising sensitive data

    Virtual Desktops - DaaS

    Virtual Desktop Infrastructure in the Data Center

    • Desktop-as-a-Service in the cloud

    The pandemic helped cloud-based virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI)

    Citrix saw subscription revenue increase 71% year over year in 2020 (Citrix 2020 Annual Report, p. 4). VMware saw subscription and SaaS revenue increase 38% from January 2020 to 2021 – while on-premises licensing revenue decreased by 5% (VMware Annual Report 2021, p. 40).

    IT no longer needs to manage the underlying infrastructure

    Microsoft and AWS are offering desktops as a service (i.e. cloud-based virtual desktops). IT needs to manage only the device, not the underlying virtual desktop infrastructure. This is in addition to Citrix’s and VMware’s cloud offerings, where IT doesn’t need to manage the underlying infrastructure that supports VDI.

    Visit the blueprint Implement Desktop Virtualization and Transition to Everything as a Service to get started.

    Work-from-anywhere (WFA) is now the default

    COVID-19 forced this shift

    Work-From-Anywhere - WFA

    Rare

    • Default

    Be prepared to support a hybrid workforce, where people are sometimes working remotely and sometimes working in the office.

    • Device provisioning and deployment need to be rethought. In-person deployment is not always possible. IT should evaluate tools such as zero-touch provisioning.
    • Service desks need better monitoring and management tools. End-user experience management (EUEM) can allow you to better identify where network issues are occurring – in your data center, at the user’s house, in the cloud, or somewhere in between. Remote control tools can then allow your tier 1 to remediate issues on the user’s device.
    • Apps and devices need to be usable from anywhere. Environments that rely on desktops and on-premises apps need to be rearchitected for a remote-first workforce.
    • Users are living inside video conferencing tools. With the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic, there are about 145 million daily users of Microsoft Teams, almost twice the number of users in 2020 (MUO, 2021). Ensure they have the training and expertise to effectively use these tools.

    “More technical troubleshooting due to users working from home a lot more. It can be more difficult to talk users through fixes when they are off site if you cannot remotely assist so more emphasis on the communication skill which was already important.” (Service Desk Institute, 2021)

    Visit the Hybrid Workplace Research Center to better support a hybrid workforce.

    BYOD fully includes personal computers

    It’s no longer about whether IT will allow BYOD

    Stop pretending BYOD doesn’t happen

    Personal Devices - BYOD

    Limited to email on phones

    • Full capabilities on any device
    • BYOD (including BYOPC) is turned on by default. SaaS tools like Office 365 are built to be used on multiple devices, including multiple computers. Further, the pandemic saw 47% of organizations significantly increase their use of BYOD (Cybersecurity Insiders, 2021; N=271).
    • BYOD can boost productivity. When employees can use smartphones for work, they report that it increases their productivity by 34 percent (Samsung Insights, 2016).
    • BYOD is hard to support, so most organizations don’t. Only 22% of organizations provide full support for mobile devices, while 20% provide no support, 25% provide ad hoc support, and 26% provide limited support (Cybersecurity Insiders, 2021). If smartphones and tablets are heavily ingrained in business processes, then migrating to BYOD can overload the service desk.
    • Securely enable employees. Mobile application management (MAM), mobile content management (MCM), and Office 365 have gotten smarter at protecting corporate data.

    Action Item: Identify how IT can provide more support to personally owned computers, tablets, and smartphones.

    58% of working Americans say their work devices are “awful to work on." (PCMag, 2021)

    But only 22% of organizations provide full support to BYOD. (Cybersecurity Insiders, 2021)

    IT must either provide better devices or start fully supporting users on personal PCs.

    Build governance practices for low-code development platforms

    Managing 1,000 different apps built out on low-code business process management platforms is hard, but it’s not nearly as hard as managing 1,000 unique SaaS apps or access databases

    Business-Managed Apps - BMA

    Performed by IT

    • Performed by the Business and IT

    Pros - Opportunities

    • Offers DIY to users
    • Business can build them quickly
    • IT has central visibility
    • IT can focus on the platform

    Cons - Threats

    • Sensitive data can get exposed
    • Users may have issues with continuity and backup
    • Responding to platform changes will be potentially challenging
    • Support may be difficult after the app creator leaves

    Action Item: Build a governance framework that describes the roles and responsibilities involved in business-owned apps. Identify the user’s role and end-user computing’s role in supporting low-code apps.

    Visit the blueprint Embrace Business-Managed Apps to learn how to build a governance framework for low-code development platforms.

    Visit the Low-Code Business Process Management SoftwareReviews category to compare different platforms.

    Update your customer service practices

    End users expect self-service and help from tier 1

    Re-evaluate how you support both corporate-issued and personal-owned computers and mobile devices

    Customer Satisfaction - C Sat

    Phone calls and transactional interactions

    • Self-serve & managing entire experience

    Microsoft’s 2019 “Global State of Customer Service” report shows that people have high expectations:

    • 31% of people expect call agents to have a “deep understanding of the caller’s relationship with the company”
    • 11% expect self-service capabilities

    End users have the same expectations of IT, the service desk, and end-user computing teams:

    • Users expect any IT person with whom they are talking to have a deep understanding of their devices, apps, open tickets, and closed tickets.
    • Users expect tier 1 to be able to resolve their incidents and requests without escalating to tier 2 or tier 3 end-user computing specialists.

    Most Important Aspects of Customer Service

    Resolving issue in one interaction - 35%

    Knowledgeable agent - 31%

    Finding information myself - 11%

    Not repeating information - 20%

    (Microsoft, 2019)

    Desktop engineering needs to shift left

    Revisit what work can only be done by tier 2 and tier 3 teams

    Shifting left involves shifting resolution of incidents and service requests down from more costly resources to the first line of support and to end users themselves through self-service options

    • Tier 1 needs up-to-date information on the end users’ devices and open tickets.
    • Users should be able to request apps and download those apps through a self-service portal, a software catalog, or an app store.
    • Tier 1 needs to be empowered to remote wipe devices, see troubleshooting and diagnostics information, and resolve incidents without needing to escalate.

    Action Item: Apply shift-left enablement to train tier 1 agents on troubleshooting more incidents and fulfilling more service requests. Build top-notch self-service capabilities for end users.

    The image is a graphic titled Shift-Left Strategy. At the top, it lists Auto-Fix; User, Tier 1, Tier 2/3, and Vendor. On the left, it lists Metrics vertically: Cost, Time, Satisfaction. A bar displays how high or low the metric is based on the categories listed at the top.

    Work with your service desk on the blueprint Optimize the Service Desk with a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Windows 11 is coming

    Prepare to make the jump

    The sooner you start, the easier the migration will be

    • Begin planning hardware refreshes. Old computers that do not have a TPM 2.0 chip are not currently supported on Windows 11 (“Enable TPM 2.0,” Microsoft, 2021). If you have old computers that will not support the jump to Windows 11– especially given the supply chain disruptions and silicon chip shortages – it is time to consider computer upgrades.
    • The end of Windows 10 is coming. Windows 10’s retirement date is currently October 14, 2025 (“Windows 10 Home and Pro,” Microsoft, 2021). If you want to continue running Windows 10 on older computers beyond that time, you will need to pay for extended support or risk those computers being more easily breached.
    • Begin testing your apps internally. Run Windows 11 within IT and test whether your apps will work on Windows 11.
    • Pilot Windows 11 with IT-friendlies. Find users that are excited for Windows 11 and will not mind a bit of short-term pain.
    • What is your risk appetite? Risk-averse organizations will want to wait until Microsoft, DISA, and/or Center for Internet Security have published security configuration best practices.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Master the ever-expanding puzzle of end-user computing

    User Group Analysis

    Supported Devices and Apps

    Fitness for Use

    Device Support

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Balance user choice, risk mitigation, and cost optimization. The right balance will be unique for every organization.
    2. Standardize the nonstandard. Anticipate your users’ needs by having power options and prestigious options ready to offer.
    3. Consider multiple personas when building your standards, training, and migrations. Early Adopters, Late Adopters, VIP Users, Road Warriors, and Hoarders – these five personas will exist in one form or another throughout your user groups.

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    Focus on the Big Picture

    End-User Paradigms Have Shifted

    Take end-user computing beyond the device

    Operating System - OS

    Only Windows

    • More choices than ever before

    Endpoint Management System - UEM

    Group Policy & Client Management

    • Modern & Unified Endpoint Management

    Personal Devices - BYOD

    Limited to email on phones

    • Full capabilities on any device

    IT Asset Management - ITAM

    Hands-on with images

    • Zero-touch with provisioning packages

    Virtual Desktops - DaaS

    Virtual Desktop Infrastructure in the Data Center

    • Desktop-as-a-Service in the cloud

    Business-Managed Apps - BMA

    Performed by IT

    • Performed by the Business and IT

    Work-From-Anywhere - WFA

    Rare

    • Default

    Customer Satisfaction - C Sat

    Phone calls and transactional interactions

    • Self-serve & managing entire experience

    Don't just focus on the device!

    Improvements in the service desk, business apps, networks and communication infrastructure, and IT policy have a higher impact on increasing satisfaction.

    Impact of End-User Satisfaction of IT by Area Compared to Devices

    Devices (x1.0)

    IT Policy (x1.09)

    Network & Communications Infrastructure (x1.41)

    Business Apps (x1.51)

    Service Desk (x1.54)

    (Info-Tech Research Group, CIO Business Vision, 2021; n=119,409)

    Build your strategy with these components...

    End-User Group Analysis

    • Work location
    • Information interactions
    • Apps
    • Data and files
    • Business capabilities
    • Current offering
    • Pain points
    • Desired gains

    Supported Devices & Apps

    • Primary computing device offerings
    • Power computing device offering
    • Prestigious device offerings
    • Secondary computing device offerings
    • Provisioning models
    • Standard apps
    • Peripherals

    Device Support

    • Self-service
    • Service Desk
    • Specialists

    Fitness for Use

    • Organizational policies
    • Security policies

    Vision

    ...to answer these questions:

    1. What devices will people have?
    2. How will you support these devices?
    3. How will you govern these devices?

    Balance choice, risk, and cost

    The right balance will be unique for every organization. Get the balance right by aligning your strategy's goals to senior leadership’s most important priorities.

    • User choice
    • Risk
    • Cost

    + Standardize the non-standard

    Have a more prestigious option ready for users, such as VIPs, who want more than the usual offerings. This approach will help you to proactively anticipate your users' needs.

    +Consider multiple personas when building your standards, training, and migrations

    These five personas will exist in one form or another throughout your user groups.

    • Early Adopters
    • Late Adopters
    • VIP Users
    • Road Warriors
    • Hoarders

    Use our approach to answer these questions:

    What computers will people have?

    Types of computing devices

    • Power desktop
    • Power laptop
    • Desktop
    • Laptop
    • Virtual Desktop
    • Thin Client Device
    • Pro Tablet
    • Tablet
    • Smartphone

    Corporate-Issued Approaches

    • Kiosk – Shared, Single Purpose
    • Pooled – Shared, Multipurpose
    • Persistent – Individual
    • Personally Owned

    Supported Operating Systems

    • Windows
    • Mac
    • Chrome OS
    • Linux
    • iOS/iPad OS
    • Android

    How will you support these devices?

    Device Management

    • Manual
    • CMT
    • EMM
    • UEM
    • Pooled Virtual Desktop Manager

    Supporting Practices

    • Self-Service
    • Tier 1 Support
    • Specialist Support

    How will you govern these devices?

    Corporate Policies

    • Personal Use Allowed?
    • Management and Security Policies
    • Personal Device Use Allowed?
    • Supported Apps and Use Cases
    • Who Is Allowed to Purchase?
    • Prohibited Apps and Use Cases
    • Device Entitlement
    • Stipends and/or Reimbursement to Users

    Use our blueprint to improve your EUC practices

    1. Devices
      • Corporate-issued devices
      • Standard offerings
    2. User Support
      • Self-service
      • Tier 1 support
    3. Use Cases
      • Providing value
      • Business apps
    4. Policy & Governance
      • Personal device use
      • IT policy
    5. Fitness for Use
      • Securing devices
      • Patching

    Info-Tech’s methodology for end-user computing strategy

    1. Set the Direction 2. Define the Offering 3. Build the Roadmap
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify Desired Benefits

    1.2 Perform a User Group Analysis

    1.3 Define the Vision

    2.1 Define the Standard Offerings

    2.2 Outline Supporting Services

    2.3 Define Governance and Policies

    3.1 Develop Initiatives
    Phase Outcomes

    Current-State Assessment

    Goals Cascade

    User Group Assessment

    Vision Statement

    Mission Statement

    Guiding Principles

    Standard Offerings by User Group

    Device Management Model

    Technical Support Model

    Device Entitlement Policy

    Acceptable Use Policy

    Remote Wipe Policy & Waiver

    Personal Device Reimbursement Policy

    End-User Migration Journey Map

    Strategy and Roadmap

    Insight summary

    Once users are satisfied with devices, focus on the bigger picture

    If end users are dissatisfied with devices, they will also be dissatisfied with IT. But if you don’t also focus on apps and supportability, then giving users better devices will only marginally increase satisfaction with IT.

    Bring it back to stakeholder priorities

    Before you build your vision statement, make sure it resonates with the business by identifying senior leadership’s priorities and aligning your own goals to them.

    Balance choice, risk, and cost

    The balance of user choice, risk mitigation, and cost optimization is unique for each company. Get the balance right by aligning your strategy’s goals to senior leadership’s most important priorities.

    Communicate early and often with users

    Expect users to become anxious when you start targeting their devices. Address this anxiety by bringing them into the conversation early in the planning – they will see that their concerns are being addressed and may even feel a sense of ownership over the strategy.

    Standardize the nonstandard

    When users such as VIP users want more than the standard offering, have a more prestigious option available. This approach will help you to proactively anticipate your users’ needs.

    Consider multiple personas when building your standards, training, and migrations

    Early Adopters, Late Adopters, VIP Users, Road Warriors, and Hoarders – these five personas will exist in one form or another throughout your user groups.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    User Group Analysis Workbook

    Use these worksheets to guide your analysis.

    End-User Computing Ideas Catalog

    Compare options for your end-user computing environment.

    Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings

    Define your supported offerings and publish this document in your service catalog.

    Policy Templates

    Use these templates as a starting point for addressing policy gaps.

    Key deliverable:

    End-User Computing Strategy

    Document your strategy using this boardroom-ready template.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Deliver immediate value to end users.
    • Provide the best service based on the user persona.
    • Provide better device coverage.
    • Use fewer tools to manage a less diverse but equally effective array of end-user computing devices.
    • Provide more managed devices that will help to limit risk.
    • Have better visibility into the end-user computing devices and apps.

    Business Benefits

    • Conduct corporate business under one broad strategy.
    • Provide support to IT for specific applications and devices.
    • Take advantage of more scalable economies for providing more advantageous technologies.
    • Experience less friction between end users and the business and higher end-user satisfaction.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Your end-user computing strategy is an investment

    Track the returns on your investment, even if those returns are soft benefits and not cost reductions

    User Satisfaction

    • Satisfaction with device
    • Satisfaction with business apps
    • Satisfaction with service desk timeliness
    • Satisfaction with service desk effectiveness
    • Satisfaction with IT Employee engagement

    Total Cost

    • Spend on each type of device
    • Cost of licenses for management tools, operating systems, and apps
    • Cost of support agreements # of support tickets per device per employee
    • Time spent supporting devices per tier or support team
    • Time spent per OS/app release

    Risk Mitigation

    • # of devices that are end-of-life
    • % of devices in compliance
    • # of unmanaged devices
    • # of devices that have not checked in to management tool

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1: Set the Direction

    • Call #1: Review trends in end-user computing and discuss your current state.
    • Call #2: Perform a user group analysis.
    • Call #3: Identify desired benefits and map to stakeholder drivers.

    Phase 2: Define the Offering

    • Call #4: Define standard offerings.
    • Call #5: Select provisioning models.
    • Call #6: Outline supporting services and opportunities to shift end-user computing support left.
    • Call #7: Identify gaps in governance and policies.

    Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    • Call #8: Develop initiatives.
    • Call #9: Plan migration and build roadmap.

    EUC Strategy Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Set the Direction Define the Offering Support the Offering Bridge the Gap and Create the Roadmap Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Identify desired benefits.

    1.1.1 Assess the current state of end-user computing.

    1.1.2 Perform a SWOT analysis.

    1.1.3 Map benefits to stakeholder drivers and priorities.

    1.2 Analyze user groups.

    1.2.1 Identify user groups.

    1.2.2 Identify supporting technology.

    1.2.3 Record use cases.

    1.2.4 Identify opportunities to provide value.

    1.3 Define the vision.

    1.3.1 Prioritize benefits.

    1.3.2 Craft a vision and mission statement.

    1.3.3 Identify goals.

    1.3.4 Define guiding principles for your strategy.

    2.1 Define the standard offerings.

    2.1.1 Select a provisioning model for each persona.

    2.1.2 Define the standard device offerings.

    2.1.3 Document each personas’ entitlements.

    2.2 Outline supporting practices.

    2.2.1 Define device management tools and approach.

    2.2.2 Identify groups involved in supporting practices.

    2.2.4 Identify opportunities to improve customer service.

    2.3 Define policies. 2.3.1 Define acceptable use. 2.3.2 Define BYOD policies. 2.3.3 Define procurement and entitlement policies. 2.3.4 Define security policies.

    3.1 Develop initiatives.

    3.1.1 Identify the gaps in devices, user support, use cases, policy & governance, and fitness for use.

    3.1.2 Plan the deployment and user migration journey.

    3.1.3 Document initiatives in the roadmap .

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up time to review workshop deliverables and discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. SWOT analysis of current state
    2. Goals cascade
    3. Persona analysis
    1. Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles
    2. Goals and indicators
    3. End-user device entitlements standard
    1. List of management tools for end-user computing
    2. Roles and responsibilities for maintaining the end-user computing environment
    3. Opportunities to improve customer service
    4. End-user computing policy templates
    1. Initiatives mapped to practice areas
    2. User’s migration journey map
    1. End-user computing strategy template
    2. End-user computing roadmap

    Phase 1

    Set the Direction

    Set the Direction

    1.1 Identify Desired Benefits

    1.2 Perform a User Group Analysis

    1.3 Define the Vision

    Define the Offering

    2.1 Define the Standard Offerings

    2.2 Outline Supporting Services

    2.3 Define Governance and Policies

    Build the Roadmap

    3.1 Develop Initiatives

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Current-state analysis
    • Goals cascade
    • Persona analysis

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Team
    • IT Leadership

    Set a direction that will create value for IT, stakeholders, and end users

    Use your insights to build your strategy

    Start by downloading Info-Tech’s End-User Computing Strategy Template

    1. Perform a stop-start-continue exercise for how IT supports end-user devices.
    2. Perform a goals cascade to identify how the end-user computing strategy can align with and support senior leaders’ priorities and strategic objectives.
    3. Perform a user group analysis to identify what IT can do to provide additional value to end users.
    4. Use the results to define a vision for your end-user computing strategy and in-scope benefits.

    Download the End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Step 1.1

    Identify Desired Benefits

    Activities

    1.1.1 Assess the current state of end-user computing

    1.1.2 Perform a SWOT analysis

    1.1.3 Map benefits to stakeholder drivers and priorities

    Optional: Identify current total cost of ownership

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Current approach for end-user computing
    • List of strengths and weaknesses of the current approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • End-User Computing Team
    • IT Leadership
    • End-User Computing Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined success metrics that are tied to business value
    • Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles

    Review your current state for each end-user computing practice

    1. Devices
      • Corporate-issued devices
      • Standard offerings
    2. User Support
      • Self-service
      • Tier 1 support
    3. Use Cases
      • Providing value
      • Business apps
    4. Policy & Governance
      • Personal device use
      • IT policy
    5. Fitness for Use
      • Securing devices
      • Patching

    1.1.1 Assess the current state of end-user computing

    Discuss IT’s strengths and challenges

    Review your success in responding to the trends highlighted in the executive brief.

    • Start by reviewing the trends in the executive brief. Identify which trends you would like to focus on.
    • Review the domains below. Discuss:
      • Your current approach
      • Strengths about this approach
      • Challenges faced with this approach
    • Document the results in the “Current-State Assessment” section of your End-User Computing Strategy.
    1. Devices
      • Corporate-issued devices
      • Standard offerings
    2. User Support
      • Self-service
      • Tier 1 support
    3. Use Cases
      • Providing value
      • Business apps
    4. Policy & Governance
      • Personal device use
      • IT policy
    5. Fitness for Use
      • Securing devices
      • Patching

    Download the End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Consider these aspects of end-user computing in your assessment

    Devices: As shown in the executive brief, devices are necessary for satisfaction in IT. In your current-state assessment, outline the principal means by which users are provided with a desktop and computing.

    • Corporate-issued devices: Document the types of devices (e.g. laptops, desktops, smartphones) and operating systems that IT currently supports.
      • Strengths: Highlight user satisfaction with your current offerings by referencing recent relationship surveys.
      • Challenges: Document corporate-issued devices where stakeholders and users are not satisfied, platforms that stakeholders would like IT to support, etc.
    • Standard offerings: Name the high-level categories of devices that you offer to end users (e.g. standard device, power device).
      • Strengths: Outline steps that IT has taken to improve the portfolio of standard offerings and to communicate the offerings.
      • Challenges: Identify areas to improve the standard offerings.

    User support: Examine how the end-user computing team enables a high-quality customer service experience. Especially consider self-service and tier 1 support.

    • Self-service: Describe the current state of your self-service capabilities (e.g. name of the self-service portal, number of apps in the app store).
      • Strengths: Outline successes with your self-service capabilities (e.g. use of self-service tools, recently deployed tools, newly supported platforms).
      • Challenges: Identify gaps in self-service capabilities.
    • Tier 1 support: Document the number of end-user computing incidents and service requests that are resolved at tier 1 as well as the number of incidents and service requests that are resolvable without escalation.
      • Strengths: Identify technologies that make first contact resolution possible. Outline other items that support tier 1 resolution of end-user computing tickets, such as knowledgebase articles and training programs.
      • Challenges: Document areas in which tier 1 resolution of end-user computing tickets is not feasible.

    Considerations (cont’d.)

    Use cases: Reflect on how IT and end-user computing supports users’ most important use cases. Consider these aspects:

    • Providing value: Identify the number of user groups for which you have completed a user group analysis. Outline your major approaches for capturing feedback, such as relationship surveys.
      • Strengths: Document any successful initiatives around stakeholder relationships and requirements gathering. You can also highlight successful metrics, such as high satisfaction scores from a team, department, or division.
      • Challenges: Identify where there are dissatisfied stakeholders and gaps in product offerings and where additional work around value generation is required.
    • Business apps: Outline your major business apps and your approach to improvement for these apps. If you need assistance gathering feedback from end users and stakeholders, you can use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment.
      • Strengths: Show the EUC team’s successes in supporting critical business apps (e.g. facilitating user acceptance testing, deploying via endpoint management tool).
      • Challenges: Name business apps that are not meeting stakeholder needs. Consider if end users are dissatisfied with an app, if IT is unable to adequately monitor and support a business app, etc.

    Policy and governance: Document the current state of policies governing the use of end-user computing devices, both corporate-issued and personally owned. Review Step 2.3 for a list of policy questions to address and for links to policy templates.

    • Personal device use: Explain which users are allowed to use personally owned devices, what use cases are supported, and which types of devices are supported. Also, highlight explicit prohibitions.
      • Strengths: Highlight major accomplishments with BYOD, utilization metrics, etc. Consider including any platforms or apps that support BYOD (e.g. Microsoft Office 365).
      • Challenges: Identify where there are gaps in your support for personal devices. Examples can include insufficient management tools, lack of feedback from end users on BYOD support, undefined policies and governance, and inadequate support for personal devices.

    Considerations (cont’d.)

    IT policies: List your current policy documents. Include policies that relate to end-user computing, such as security policy documents; acceptable use policy documents; purchasing policies; documents governing entitlements to computers, tablets, smartphones, and prestigious devices; and employee monitoring policy documents.

    • Strengths: Outline the effectiveness of these policies, user compliance to these policies, and your success in enforcing these policies.
    • Challenges: Identify where you have gaps in user compliance, gaps in enforcing policies, many exceptions to a policy, etc.

    Fitness for use: Reflect on your ability to secure users, enterprise data, and computers. Document your current capabilities to ensure devices are adequately secured and risks adequately mitigated.

    • Securing devices: Describe your current approach to implementing security baselines, protecting data, and ensuring compliance.
      • Strengths: Highlight your accomplishments with ensuring devices meet your security standards and are adequately managed.
      • Challenges: Identify areas that are not adequately protected, where IT does not have enough visibility, and devices on which IT cannot enforce security standards.
    • Patching: Describe your current approach to distributing OS patches, distributing app patches, and ensuring patch compliance.
      • Strengths: Outline steps that IT has taken to improve release and deployment practices (e.g. user acceptance testing, deployment rings).
      • Challenges: When is IT unable to push a patch to a device? Outline when devices cannot receive a patch, when IT is unable to ensure patches are installed, and when patches are disruptive to end users.

    1.1.2 Perform a SWOT analysis

    Summarize your current-state analysis

    To build a good strategy, you need to clearly understand the challenges you face and opportunities you can leverage.

    • Summarize IT’s strengths. These are positive aspects internal to IT.
    • Summarize IT’s challenge. What internal IT weakness should the strategy address?
    • Identify high-level opportunities. Summarize positive factors that are external to IT (e.g. within the larger organization, strong vendor relationships).
    • Document threats. What external factors present a risk to the strategy?

    Record your SWOT analysis in the “Current-State Assessment” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Download the End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    1.1.3 Map benefits to stakeholder drivers and priorities

    Use a goals cascade to identify benefits that will resonate with the business

    Identify how end-user computing will support larger organizational strategies, drivers, and priorities

    1. Identify stakeholders. Focus on senior leaders – user groups will be addressed in Step 1.2.
    2. For each stakeholder, identify three to five drivers or strategic priorities. Use the drivers as a starting point to:
      1. Increase productivity
      2. Mitigate risks
      3. Optimize costs
    3. Map the benefits you brainstormed in Step 1.1 to the drivers. It’s okay to have benefits map to multiple drivers.
    4. Re-evaluate benefits that don’t map to any drivers. Consider removing them.
    Stakeholder Drivers and Strategic Priorities End-User Computing Benefits
    CEO Ensure service continuity with remote work
    • Customers can still be served by remote workers
    Respond to COVID-19 changes with agility
    • Workers can transition seamlessly between working remotely and working in the office
    Reduce unnecessary costs
    • Standardize computer models to reduce spend on devices
    COO Business continuity: being able to work from home
    • Workers can transition seamlessly between working remotely and working in the office

    Record this table on the “Goals Cascade” slide in the “Vision and Desired Benefits” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Use the CEO-CIO Alignment Program to identify which business benefits are most important.

    Sample end-user computing benefits

    Business Goals End-User Computing Benefits
    Manage risk Controls are effectively enforced on remote devices Sensitive data is secured Devices and data are accounted for
    Ensure service continuity Business processes can still function with remote personnel Customers can still be served by remote workers Personnel can be productive from anywhere IT practices can still operate remotely
    Comply with external regulation Improved ability to demonstrate compliance
    Respond to change with agility Personnel can be productive from anywhere More business processes can be performed remotely
    Improve operational efficiency More efficient sales practices More efficient customer service practices Increased number of digitized business processes Increased use of IT and HR self-service tools
    Offer competitive products and services Increased customer satisfaction with online services Number of piloted new products
    Manage people Increased employee productivity Increased employee engagement Increased talent attraction Increased workforce retention
    Make data-driven decisions Increased workforce retention Improved understanding of customers Access to accurate data on services and spending Improved IT cost forecasting
    Improve customer experience Increased customer satisfaction with online services Ability to scale up capacity to meet increased demand Customers can still be served by remote workers Improved customer self-service options
    Maximize stakeholder value Transition to OpEx spend and reduce CapEx investments Access to accurate data on services and spending Improved IT cost forecasting

    Optional: Identify current total cost of ownership

    Be mindful of hidden costs, such as those associated with supporting multiple devices and maintaining a small fleet of corporate devices to ensure business continuity with BYOD.

    • Use the Hardware Asset Management Budgeting Tool to forecast spend on devices (and infrastructure) based on project needs and devices nearing end of life.
    • Use the Mobile Strategy TCO Calculator to estimate the total cost of all the different aspects of your mobile strategy, including:
      • Training
      • Management platforms
      • Custom app development
      • Travel and roaming
      • Stipends and taxes
      • Support
    • Revisit these calculators in Phase 2. Use the TCO calculator when considering different approaches to mobility and end-user computing.

    Insert the results into your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Download the HAM Budgeting Tool.

    Download the Mobile Strategy TCO Calculator.

    Step 1.2

    Perform a User Group Analysis

    Activities

    1.2.1 Organize roles based on how they work

    1.2.2 Organize users into groups

    1.2.3 Document the current offerings

    1.2.4 Brainstorm pain points and desired gains for each user group

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of roles and technologies
    • User feedback
    • List of personas

    This step involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Team
    • IT Leadership
    • End-User Computing Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of user groups and use cases for each group
    • List of current offerings for each user group
    • Value analysis for each user group

    Gather the information you need

    Use the Application Portfolio Assessment to run a relationship survey.

    Dive deeper with the blueprint Improve Requirements Gathering.

    List of Roles and Technology

    Organization chart: Consult with HR or department leaders to provide a list of the different roles that exist in each department.

    Identity access management tools: You can consult tools like Active Directory, but only if the data is clean.

    Apps and devices used: Run a report from your endpoint management tool to see what devices and apps are used by one another. Supplement this report with a report from a network management tool to identify software as a service that are in use and/or consult with department leaders.

    User Feedback

    Relationship surveys: Tools like the End-User Application Satisfaction Diagnostic allow you to assess overall satisfaction with IT.

    Focus groups and interviews: Gather unstructured feedback from users about their apps and devices.

    User shadowing: Observe people as they use technology to identify improvement opportunities (e.g. shadow meetings, review video call recordings).

    Ticket data: Identify apps or systems that users submit the most incidents about as well as high-volume requests that could be automated.

    1.2.1 Organize roles based on how they work

    Start by organizing roles into categories based on where they work and how they interact with information.

    1. Define categories of where people work. Examples include:
      1. In office, at home, at client sites
      2. Stationary, sometimes mobile, always mobile
      3. Always in same location, sometimes in different locations, always in different locations within a site, mobile between sites
    2. Define categories of how people interact with information. Examples include:
      1. Reads information, reads and writes information, creates information
      2. Cases, projects, relationships
    3. Build a matrix. Use the location categories on one axis and the interaction categories on the other axis.
    4. Place unique job roles on the matrix. Review each functional group’s organizational chart. It is okay if you don’t fill every spot. See the diagram on this page for an example.
    Always Works in the Same Location Sometimes Works in Different Locations Always Works in Different Locations
    Predominantly Reads Information
    • Janitor
    • Receptionist
    • Receiving
    • Accounts Payable Clerk
    Reads and Writes Information
    • Sales Rep
    • Sales Manager
    • Director of Sales
    • Developer
    • Scrum Master
    • Customer Service Agent
    • CS Manager
    • Call Center Director
    • Accountant
    • Controller
    • HR Specialist
    • Business Analyst
    • VP, Sales
    • Product Manager
    • Project Manager
    • Director of Engineering
    • VP, HR
    • CFO
    • Director of PMO
    • Field Sales Rep
    • CEO
    • CIO
    • COO
    Predominantly Creates Information
    • External Consultants
    • Design
    • Marketing
    • Copywriting

    1.2.2 Organize users into groups

    Populate a user group worksheet for each in-scope group.

    1. Within each quadrant, group similar roles together into “User Groups.” Consider similarities such as:
      1. Applications they use
      2. Data and files with which they interact
      3. Business capabilities they support
    2. Document their high-level profile:
      1. Where they work
      2. Sensitivity of data they access
      3. Current device and app entitlements
    3. Document the resulting user groups. Record each user group on a separate worksheet in the User Group Analysis Workbook.

    Download the User Group Analysis Workbook.

    1.2.3 Document the current offerings

    For each user group, document:

    • Primary and secondary computing devices: Their most frequently used computing devices.
    • Acceptable use: Whether corporate-issued devices are personally enabled.
    • BYOD: Whether this persona is authorized to use their personal devices.
    • Standard equipment provided: Equipment that is offered to everyone in this persona.
    • Additional devices and equipment offered: Equipment that is offered to a subset of this user group. These items can include more prestigious computers, additional monitors, and office equipment for users allowed to work remotely. This category can include items that require approval from budget owners.
    • Top apps: What apps are most commonly used by this user group? What common nonstandard apps are used by this user group?

    Standardize the nonstandard

    When users such as VIP users want more than the standard offering, have a more prestigious option available. This approach will help you to proactively anticipate your users’ needs.

    1.2.4 Brainstorm pain points and desired gains for each user group

    Don’t focus only on their experiences with technology

    Reference the common personas listed on the next page to help you brainstorm additional pain points and desired gains.

    1. Brainstorm pain points. Answer these questions for each role:
      1. What do people find tedious about their day-to-day jobs?
      2. What takes the most effort for them to do?
      3. What about their current toolset makes this user frustrated?
      4. What makes working difficult? Consider their experiences working from a home office, attending meetings virtually or in person, and working in the office.
      5. What challenges does that role have with each process?
    2. Brainstorm desired gains from their technology. Answer these questions for each role:
      1. For your end-user computing vision to become a reality for this persona, what outcomes or benefits are required?
      2. What benefits will this persona expect an end-user computing strategy to have?
      3. What improvements does this role desire?
      4. What unexpected benefits or outcomes would surprise this role?
      5. What would make this role’s day-to-day easier?
      6. What location-specific benefits are there (e.g. outcomes specific to working in the office or at home)?

    Record each user group’s pain points and desired gains on their respective worksheet.

    For additional questions you can ask, visit this Strategyzer blog post by Alexander Osterwalder.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify out-of-scope benefits?

    If that desired gain is required for the vision to be achieved for a specific role, you have two options:

    • Bring the benefit in scope. Ensure your metrics are updated.
    • Bring this user group out of scope. End-user computing improvements will not be valuable to this role without that benefit.

    Forcing a user group to use an unsatisfactory tool will severely undermine your chance of success, especially in the project’s early stages.

    Consider these common personas when brainstorming challenges and desired gains

    What unique challenges will these personas face within each of your user groups? What improvements would each of these personas expect out of an end-user computing strategy?

    Early Adopters

    • Like trying new ways of working and using the latest technology.
    • Very comfortable solving their own issues.
    • Enjoy exploring and creating new ways of handling challenges.

    Late Adopters

    • Prefer consistent ways of working, be it tech or business processes.
    • React to tech issues with anxiety and need assistance to get issues fixed.

    VIP

    • Has a prestigious job and would like to use technology that communicates their status.
    • Does not like to resolve their own issues.

    Road Warriors

    • Always on the go, running between work meetings and appointments.
    • Value flexibility and want devices, apps, and tech support that can be used anywhere at any time.

    Hoarders

    • Want to keep all their devices, data, and apps.
    • Will stall when they need to migrate devices or uninstall apps and become unresponsive any time there is a risk of losing something.

    Step 1.3

    Define the Vision

    Activities

    1.3.1 Prioritize which benefits you want to achieve

    1.3.2 Identify how you will track performance

    1.3.3 Craft a vision statement that demonstrates what you’re trying to create

    1.3.4 Craft a mission statement for your end-user computing team

    1.3.5 Define guiding principles

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Goals cascade
    • List of benefits
    • List of critical success factors (CSFs)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Manager
    • CIO
    • Help Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-User computing KPIs and metrics
    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement

    1.3.1 Prioritize which benefits you want to achieve

    Use the MoSCoW sorting technique

    Select benefits that appear multiple times in the goals cascade from Activity 1.1.3 as well as your challenges from your current-state assessment.

    1. Record which benefits are “Must Haves.” Select benefits that are most important to your highest-priority stakeholders.
    2. Record which benefits are “Should Haves.” These benefits are important but not critical.
    3. Record which benefits are “Could Haves.” These are low-priority benefits.
    4. Record the remaining benefits under “Won’t Have.” These benefits are out-of-scope but can be revisited in the future.

    Record the output in your End-User Computing Strategy Template under “Benefit Prioritization” in the “Vision and Desired Benefits” section.

    Sample output:

    Must Have Should Have Could Have Won't Have
    • Customers can still be served by remote workers.
    • Easier to work in multiple locations.
    • More options for provisioning computers to new workers.
    • Improved patching and security compliance checking of remote devices.
    • Self-service app installs on Windows.
    • More consistent experience across all devices and platforms, including BYOD.
    • Improved visibility into and manageability of BYOD.
    • Ability for users to create their own low-code apps (e.g. in Microsoft Power Apps).
    • Improved guidelines for running hybrid/remote meetings.
    • BYOD support for workers handling sensitive data.
    • Support for any type of Android smartphone or tablet.

    1.3.2 Identify how you will track performance

    1. List each unique high-priority benefit from Activity 1.3.1 as a critical success factor (CSF).
    2. For each CSF, identify key performance indicators (KPIs) that you can use to track how well you’re progressing on the CSF.
      1. Articulate that KPI as a SMART goal (specific, measurable, achievable, realistic, and timebound).
    3. For each KPI, identify the metrics you will use to calculate it.
    4. Identify how and when you will:
      1. Capture the current state of these metrics.
      2. Update changes to the metrics.
      3. Re-evaluate the CSFs.
      4. Communicate the progress to the project team and to stakeholders.

    Record this information in your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Sample output:

    Critical Success Factor Key Performance Indicator Metrics
    Improve remote worker productivity Increase employee engagement by 10% in two years
    • McLean Employee Engagement Score
    • Gallup Q Score
    Integrate relevant information sources into one spot for sales Integrate three information sources that will be useful to sales in one year
    • # of sales-specific apps integrated into a dashboard, portal, or workspace
    • Sales satisfaction scores
    Reduce real-estate costs Reduce office space by 50% in two cities over three years
    • $ spent on office leases
    Securely deliver all apps, information, and data to any device, anywhere, at any time Build the apps and information sources into a digital workspace for three business processes over one year
    • # of business processes supported in the workspace

    1.3.3 Craft a vision statement that demonstrates what you’re trying to create

    The vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:

    • Describes a desired future
    • Focuses on ends, not means
    • Communicates promise
    • Is:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable

    Sample IT Vision Statements:

    • To support an exceptional employee experience by providing best-in-class end-user devices.
    • Securely enable access to corporate apps and data from anywhere, at any time, on any device.
    • Enable business and digital transformation through secure and powerful virtualization technology.
    • IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset.

    1.3.4 Craft a mission statement for your end-user computing team

    The IT mission statement specifies the function’s purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day’s activities and decisions. The mission statement should use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements have the following characteristics:

    • Articulate the IT function’s purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Can be described as:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample IT Mission Statements:

    • To provide infrastructure, support, and innovation in the delivery of secure, enterprise-grade information technology products and services that enable and empower the workforce at [Company Name].
    • To help fulfill organizational goals, the IT department is committed to empowering business stakeholders with technology and services that facilitate effective processes, collaboration, and communication.
    • The mission of the information technology (IT) department is to build a solid, comprehensive technology infrastructure; to maintain an efficient, effective operations environment; and to deliver high-quality, timely services that support the business goals and objectives of [Company Name].
    • The IT group is customer-centered and driven by its commitment to management and staff. It oversees services in computing, telecommunications, networking, administrative computing, and technology training.

    1.3.5 Define guiding principles

    Select principles that align with your stakeholders’ goals and objectives

    Use these examples as a starting point:

    IT Principle Name IT Principle Statement
    1. Enterprise value focus We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2. Fit for purpose We maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over-engineering them.
    3. Simplicity We choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4. Reuse > buy > build We maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can’t reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5. Managed data We handle data creation, modification, and use enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6. Controlled technical diversity We control the variety of technology platforms we use.
    7. Managed security We manage, support, and assist in the implementation of security enterprise-wide in collaboration with our security governance team.
    8. Compliance to laws and regulations We operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9. Innovation We seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10. Customer centricity We deliver best experiences to our end users by aligning to customer service best practices.

    Phase 2

    Define the Offering

    Set the Direction

    1.1 Identify Desired Benefits

    1.2 Perform a User Group Analysis

    1.3 Define the Vision

    Define the Offering

    2.1 Define the Standard Offerings

    2.2 Outline Supporting Services

    2.3 Define Governance and Policies

    Build the Roadmap

    3.1 Develop Initiatives

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Defining standard device entitlements and provisioning models for end-user devices and equipment
    • Shifting end-user computing support left
    • Identifying policy gaps

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Team
    • IT Leadership

    Step 2.1

    Define the Standard Offerings

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify the provisioning models for each user group

    2.1.2 Define the standard device offerings

    2.1.3 Document each user group’s entitlements

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template
    • List of persona groups
    • Primary computing devices
    • Secondary computing devices
    • Supporting operating systems
    • Applications and office equipment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Manager
    • CIO
    • Help Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user device entitlements and offerings standard

    This step will walk you through defining standard offerings

    You will define the base offering for all users in each user group as well as additional items that users can request (but that require additional approvals).

    1. Primary Computing Device
      • The main device used by a worker to complete their job (e.g. laptop for knowledge workers, kiosk or shared tablet for frontline workers).
    2. Secondary Computing Devices
      • Additional devices that supports a worker (e.g. a smartphone, tablet, personal computer).
    3. Provisioning Models
      • Whether the equipment is corporate-issued versus personally owned and whether personal use of corporate resources is allowed.
    4. Apps
      • The software used by the worker. Apps can be locally installed, cloud-based (e.g. SaaS), and/or virtualized and running remotely.
    5. Peripherals
      • Additional equipment provisioned to the end user (e.g. monitors, docking station, mice, keyboards).

    There is always a challenge of determining who gets what and when

    The goal is balancing cost, risk, and employee engagement

    The right balance will be different for every organization

    • IT can’t always say no to new ideas from the business. For example, if the organization wants to adopt Macs, rather than resisting IT should focus on identifying how Macs can be safely implemented.
    • Smartphones may not be necessary for a job, but they can be a valid employee perk. Not every employee may be entitled to the perk. There may be resentment between employees of the same level if one of the employees has a corporate-issued, business-only phone for their job function.
    • The same laptop model may not work for everyone. Some employees may need more powerful computers. Some employees may want more prestigious devices. Other employees may require a suite of apps that is only available on non-Windows operating systems.

    Action Item: Provide a defined set of standard options to the business to proactively address different needs.

    A good end-user computing strategy will effectively balance:

    • User Choice
    • Risk
    • Cost

    Your standard offerings need to strike the right balance for your organization.

    Review the End-User Computing Ideas Catalog

    Compare pros and cons of computing devices and operating systems for better decision making

    The catalog provides information about choices in:

    • Provisioning models
    • Operating systems
    • Device form factors

    Review the catalog to learn about items that can help your organization to achieve the desired vision from Phase 1.

    As you review the catalog, think about these questions:

    • What primary and secondary devices can you provide?
    • What operating systems do these devices support?
    • What are the provisioning models you will use, considering each model’s weaknesses and strengths?
    • How can you more effectively balance user choice, risk, and cost?

    Download the End-User Computing Ideas Catalog.

    2.1.1 Identify the provisioning models for each user group

    1. Review the definitions in the End-User Computing Ideas Catalog.
    2. Build a table. List the major user groups along the top of the table and applications down the rows.
    3. Brainstorm provisioning models that will be used for primary and secondary devices for each persona group.
    4. Record your provisioning models in the Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template.

    Download the End-User Computing Ideas Catalog.

    Download the Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template.

    Persona Primary Computing Device Secondary Laptops or Computers Smartphone Tablet
    Sales COPE BYOD BYOD BYOD
    Field Sales CYOD BYOD COBO COBO
    Customer Service COBO None None None
    Knowledge Worker COPE BYOD BYOD BYOD
    App Dev CYOPED None CYOD CYOD
    VIP CYOPED CYOPED CYOPE BYOD

    Identify multiple device options

    Offer standard, power, and prestigious offerings

    Prioritize offering models and align them with your user groups.

    • Standard device: This offering will work for most end users.
    • Power device: This offering will provide additional RAM, processor speed, storage, etc., for users that require it. It is usually offered as an additional option that requires approval.
    • Prestigious device: This offering will be provided to VIP users.
    • Portable device: This offering is for employees within a user group that moves around more often than others. This type of offering is optional – consider having a separate user group for these users that get a more portable laptop as their standard device.

    Standardize the nonstandard

    When users such as VIP users want more than the standard offering, have a more prestigious option ready to offer. This approach will help you to proactively anticipate your users’ needs.

    Who approves?

    Generally, if it is a supported device, then the budget owner determines whether to allow the user to receive a more powerful or more prestigious device.

    This decision can be based on factors such as:

    • Business need – does the user need the device to do their job?
    • Perk or benefit – is the device being offered to the end user as a means of increasing their engagement?

    If IT gets this answer wrong, then it can result in shadow IT

    Document your answer in the Device Entitlement Policy Template.

    2.1.2 Define the standard device offerings

    Consider all devices and their supporting operating systems.

    1. On a flip chart or whiteboard, build a matrix of the supported form factors and operating systems.
    2. For each cell, document the supported vendor and device model.
    3. Identify where you will provide additional options.
    Windows Mac OS iOS Android
    Laptops Lenovo T15 Gen 2 MacBook Pro 14” N/A N/A
    Power Laptops Lenovo ThinkPad X1 Carbon MacBook Pro 16” N/A N/A
    Prestigious Laptops Lenovo ThinkPad X1 Yoga Gen 6 MacBook Pro 16” N/A N/A
    Tablets Microsoft Surface N/A iPad Pro Samsung Galaxy Tab
    Smartphones N/A N/A iPhone 13 Samsung Galaxy S21

    2.1.3 Document each user groups’ entitlements

    Not every persona needs to be entitled to every supported option

    Use the Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template as a starting point.

    • Create a separate section in the document for each persona. Start by documenting the provisioning models for each type of device.
    • Record the standard offering provided to members of each persona as well as additional items that can be provided with approval. Record this information for:
      • Primary computing devices
      • Secondary computing devices
    • Optional: Document additional items that will be provided to members of each persona as well as additional items they can request, such as:
      • Apps
      • Office equipment

    Download the Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template.

    Step 2.2

    Outline Supporting Services

    Activities

    2.2.1 Review device management tools and capabilities

    2.2.2 Identify common incidents and requests for devices

    2.2.3 Record how you want to shift resolution

    2.2.4 Define which IT groups are involved in supporting practices

    Define the Offering

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Standard End-User Entitlements and Offerings Template
    • List of supporting devices
    • Common incidents and requests
    • List of supporting practices

    This step involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Manager
    • CIO
    • Help Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of IT groups who are involved in supporting devices
    • Responsibilities of each group for requests and incidents

    2.2.1 Review device management tools and capabilities

    Document the tools that you use to manage each OS and identify gaps

    If there are different approaches to managing the same OS (e.g. Windows devices that are co-managed versus Windows devices that are only managed by Intune), then list those approaches on separate rows.

    Provision Protect from loss/theft Deploy/update apps Backup & protect Protect from injections Complies with policies Track Decommission
    Windows 10 & 11 (co-managed) Autopilot Gap ConfigMgr Gap Windows Security ConfigMgr ConfigMgr Intune Intune and Autopilot
    Windows 10 & 11 (Intune) Autopilot Intune (remote wipe) Intune OneDrive for Business Windows Security Microsoft Advanced Threat Protection Intune Intune and Autopilot
    Mac OS Jamf Pro Intune (remote wipe) Jamf Pro OneDrive for Business Gap Jamf Pro Intune Jamf Pro

    Document the results on the “IT Management Tools” slide in the “IT Support” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    2.2.2 Identify common incidents and requests for devices

    Analyze your service desk ticket data. Look for the following information:

    • The most common incidents and service requests around end-user devices and business apps
    • Incident categories and service requests that almost always involve escalations

    Record the level at which these tickets can be resolved today. Ensure you include these groups:

    • Tier 0 (i.e. end-user self-service)
    • Tier 1 (i.e. user’s first point of contact at the service desk)
    • Desk-side support and field-support groups
    • End-user computing specialist teams (e.g. desktop engineering, mobile device management teams)
    • Other specialist teams (e.g. security, enterprise applications, DevOps)

    Record the desired state. For each incident and request, to where do you want to shift resolution?

    Record this chart on the “Current State of IT Support” slide in the “IT Support” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Most Common Incidents & Requests Self-Service Service Desk Tier 1 Desk-Side or Field Support End-User Computing
    Connect/fix a printer X
    Web conferencing issue X
    Bluetooth issues X
    Outlook issues X
    Install standard app X
    Install app requiring approval X
    Install nonstandard app X
    Enroll personal iOS/Android device X
    Enroll personal Mac/Windows computer X
    Perform a factory reset on a lost or stolen device X
    Unenroll device X

    2.2.3 Record how you want to shift resolution

    Identify opportunities to improve self-service and first contact resolution.

    Starting with the chart you created in Activity 2.2.2, record the desired state. For each incident and request, to where do you want to shift resolution?

    • Identify quick wins. Where will it take low effort to shift resolution? Denote these items with a “QW” for quick win.
    • Identify high-value, high-effort shifts. Where do you want to prioritize shifting resolution? Base this decision on the desired benefits, guiding principles, and vision statement built in Phase 1. Denote these items with an “H” for high.
    • Identify low-value areas. Where would shifting provide low value to end users and/or would have low alignment to the benefits identified in Phase 1? Denote these items with an “L” for low.
    • Identify where no shift can occur. Some items cannot be shifted to self-service or to tier 1 due to governance considerations, security factors, or technical complexity. Denote these items with an “OoS” for out of scope.

    Use the “Opportunities to Provide Self-Service and Articles” and “Desired State” slides in the “IT Support” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template to document quick wins and high-value, high-effort shifts.

    Most Common Incidents & Requests Self-Service Service Desk Tier 1 Desk-Side or Field Support End-User Computing
    Connect/fix a printer H QW X
    Web conferencing issue H X
    Bluetooth issues L X
    Outlook issues H H X
    Install standard app X
    Install app requiring approval H X
    Install nonstandard app OoS X
    Enroll personal iOS/Android device QW QW X
    Enroll personal Mac/Windows computer QW QW X
    Perform a factory reset on a lost or stolen device QW QW X
    Unenroll device QW QW X

    2.2.4 Define which IT groups are involved in supporting practices

    Repeat activities 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 with the following list of tasks

    IT Asset Management

    • Purchasing devices
    • Purchasing software licenses
    • Imaging devices
    • Deploying devices
    • Deploying software
    • Recovering devices
    • Recovering software

    Release Management

    • Testing patches
    • Testing app updates
    • Testing OS updates
    • User acceptance testing

    Managing Service Catalogs

    • Defining standard device offerings
    • Defining standard software offerings
    • Defining device and software entitlements
    • Updating published catalog entries

    Knowledge Management

    • Writing internal KB articles
    • Writing user-facing articles
    • Training specialists
    • Training service desk agents
    • Training users

    Portfolio Management

    • Prioritizing app upgrades or migrations
    • Prioritizing OS migrations
    • Prioritizing end-user computing projects

    Step 2.3

    Define Governance and Policies

    Activities

    2.3.1 Answer these organizational policy questions

    2.3.2 Answer these security policy questions

    Define the Offering

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of supporting devices
    • List of persona groups
    • List of use cases

    This step involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Manager
    • CIO
    • Help Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user computing organizational and security policies

    Focus on organizational policies and enforcement

    Policies set expectations and limits for mobile employees

    Enforcement refers to settings on the devices, management and security tools, and process steps.

    • Policies define what should and should not be done with user-facing technology. These policies define expectations about user and IT behavior.
    • Enforcement ensures that policies are followed. User policies must often be enforced through human intervention, while technology policies are often enforced directly through infrastructure before any people get involved.

    Use the “Policies” section in the End-User Computing Strategy Template to document the answers in this section. Activities 2.3.2 and 2.3.3 present links to policy templates. Use these templates to help address any gaps in your current policy suite.

    2.3.1 Answer these organizational policy questions

    Identify if there are different expectations for certain user groups, where exceptions are allowed, and how these policies will be enforced.

    Entitlements

    • Who is entitled to receive and use prestigious computers?
    • Who is entitled to receive and use a smartphone?
    • What users are entitled to a stipend for personal device use?

    Personal Device Use

    • What use cases are supported and are not supported on personal devices?
    • What level of visibility and control does IT need over personal devices?

    Acceptable Use

    • Are people allowed to use corporate resources for personal use?
    • What are the guidelines around personal use?
    • Are users allowed to install personal apps on their corporate-issued computers and/or mobile devices?

    Purchasing and Reimbursement

    • Who is allowed to purchase devices? Apps?
    • When can users file a reimbursement request?

    Employee Monitoring

    • What user information is monitored?
    • When can that information be used and when can it not be used?

    Use the “Policies” section of the End-User Computing Strategy Template to document these answers.

    Identify organizational policy gaps

    Use these templates as a starting point

    Entitlements

    Download the Mobile Device Connectivity & Allowance Policy template.

    Purchasing & Reimbursement

    Download the Purchasing Policy template.

    Download the Mobile Device Reimbursement Policy template.

    Download the Mobile Device Reimbursement Agreement template.

    Acceptable Use

    Download the General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Personal Device Use

    Download the BYOD Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Download the Mobile Device Remote Wipe Waiver template.

    Employee Monitoring

    Download the General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Visit the Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk blueprint to address this gap.

    2.3.2 Answer these security policy questions

    Identify if there are different expectations for certain user groups, where exceptions are allowed, and how these policies will be enforced.

    Use Cases

    • What data and use cases are subject to stricter security measures?
    • Are certain use cases or data prohibited on personal devices?
    • Are there restrictions around where certain use cases are performed and by whom?

    Patching

    • Are users expected to apply OS and app updates and patches? Or does IT automate patching?

    Physical Security

    • What does the user need to do to secure their equipment?
    • If a device is lost or stolen, who does the user contact to report the lost or stolen device?

    Cybersecurity

    • How will IT enforce security configuration baselines?
    • What does the user need to do (or not do) to secure their device?
    • Are certain users allowed to have local admin rights?
    • What happens when a device doesn’t comply with the required security configuration baseline?

    Use the “Policies” section of the End-User Computing Strategy Template to document these answers.

    Identify security policy gaps

    Use these templates as a starting point

    Use Cases

    Download the General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Visit the Discover and Classify Your Data blueprint to address this gap.

    Patching

    Download the General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Physical and Cyber Security

    Download the General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy template.

    Visit the Develop and Deploy Security Policies blueprint to address this gap.

    For help defining your own security configuration baselines for each operating system, reference best practice documentation such as:

    National Institute of Standards and Technology’s National Checklist Program.

    Center for Internet Security’s solutions.

    Microsoft’s security baseline settings for Windows 10 and 11 Configuration Service Providers.

    Phase 3

    Build the Roadmap

    Set the Direction

    1.1 Identify Desired Benefits

    1.2 Perform a User Group Analysis

    1.3 Define the Vision

    Define the Offering

    2.1 Define the Standard Offerings

    2.2 Outline Supporting Services

    2.3 Define Governance and Policies

    Build the Roadmap

    3.1 Develop Initiatives

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Defining initiatives for each EUC domain
    • Building a customer journey map for any end-user computing migrations
    • Building a roadmap for EUC initiatives

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • End-User Computing Team

    Step 3.1

    Develop Initiatives

    Activities

    3.1.1 Identify initiatives for each EUC practice

    3.1.2 Build out the user’s migration journey map

    3.1.3 Build out a list of initiatives

    Build the Roadmap

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • User group workbook
    • Migration initiatives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure Director
    • Head of End-User Computing
    • End-User Computing Team
    • Project Manager (if applicable)

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user computing roadmap
    • Migration plan

    3.1.1 Identify the gaps in each EUC area

    Build a high-level profile of the changes you want to make

    For each of the five areas, build a profile for the changes you want to implement. Record:

    1. The owner of the area
    2. The objective that you want to accomplish
    3. The desired benefits from focusing on that area
    4. Any dependencies to the work
    5. Risks that can cause the objective and benefits to not be achieved

    Identify the initiatives involved in each area.

    Document these profiles and initiatives in the “Roadmap” section of your End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    1. Devices
      • Corporate-issued devices
      • Standard offerings
    2. User Support
      • Self-service
      • Tier 1 support
    3. Use Cases
      • Providing value
      • Business apps
    4. Policy & Governance
      • Personal device use
      • IT policy
    5. Fitness for Use
      • Securing devices
      • Patching

    Your initiatives may require a user migration

    Plan the user’s migration journey

    Consider each user group’s and each persona’s unique needs and challenges throughout the migration.

    1. Preparing to migrate: The user may need to schedule the migration with IT and back up files.
    2. Migrating: IT executes the migration (e.g. updates the OS, changes management tools).
    3. Getting assistance: When a user experiences an error during the migration, how will they get help from IT?
    4. Post-migration: How will IT and the user know that the migration was successful one week later?

    Understand the three migration approaches

    Online

    Users execute the migrate on their own (e.g. Microsoft’s consumer migration to Windows 10).

    In person

    Users come in person, select a device, and perform the migration with a specialist. If the device needs support, they return to the same place (e.g. buying a computer from a store).

    Hybrid

    Users select a device. When the device is ready, they can schedule time to pick up the device and perform the migration with a specialist (e.g. purchasing an iPhone in advance from Apple’s website with in-store pick-up).

    Be prepared to support remotely

    Migrations to the new tool may fail. IT should check in with the user to confirm that the device successfully made the migration.

    3.1.2 Build out the user’s migration journey map

    Contemplate a roadmap to plan for end-user computing initiatives

    • As a group, brainstorm migration initiatives.
    • For each of the four phases, identify:
      • User activities: actions we need the user to do
      • IT activities: actions and processes that IT will perform internally
      • User touchpoints with IT: how the user will interact with the IT group
      • Opportunities: ideas for how IT can provide additional value to the end user in this phase.
    • Use the example in the End-User Computing Strategy Template as a starting point.

    Download the End-User Computing Strategy Template.

    Embed requirements gathering throughout your roadmap

    Use a combination of surveys, focus groups, and interviews

    You’re doing more than eliciting opinions – you’re performing organizational change management.

    • Use surveys to profile the demand for specific requirements. When a project is announced, develop surveys to gauge what users consider must-have, should-have, and could-have requirements.
    • Interviews should be used with high-value targets. Those who receive one-on-one face time can help generate good requirements and allow for effective communication around requirements.
    • Focus groups are used to get input from multiple people in a similar role. This format allows you to ask a few open-ended questions to groups of about five people.

    The benefits of interviews and focus groups:

    • Foster direct engagement: IT is able to hear directly from stakeholders about what they are looking to do with a solution and the level of functionality that they expect from it.
    • Offer greater detail: With interviews, greater insight can be gained by leveraging information that traditional surveys wouldn’t uncover. Face-to-face interactions provide thorough answers and context that helps inform requirements.
    • Remove ambiguity: Face-to-face interactions allow opportunities to follow up on ambiguous answers. Clarify what stakeholders are looking for and expect in a project.
    • Enable stakeholder management: Interviews are a direct line of communication with project stakeholders. They provide input and insight and help to maintain alignment, plan next steps, and increase awareness within the IT organization.

    Activity instructions:

    1. Early requirements ideation: Identify who you want to interview through one-on-one meetings and focus groups.
    2. Requirements validation and prioritization: Identify which user groups you plan to survey and when.
    3. Usability testing: Plan to include usability testing during each phase. Build it into your release practices.

    3.1.3 Build out a list of initiatives

    Download a copy of the Roadmap Tool

    On tab “1. Setup”:

    • Update category 1 to be all the EUC areas (i.e. Devices, User Support).
    • Update category 2 and category 3 with meaningful items (e.g. operating system, device model, persona group).

    Use tab “2. Data Entry” to record your list of initiatives.

    • Each initiative should have its own row. Write a high-level summary under “Roadmap Item” and include more detail under “Description and Rationale.”
    • Enter each initiative’s effort, priority, and timeline for beginning. These are mandatory fields for tab “3. Roadmap” to work properly.

    Use tab “3. Roadmap” to visualize your data. You will have to press “Refresh All” under Data in the ribbon for the PivotChart to update.

    Copy the roadmap visual on tab “3. Roadmap” into your End-User Computing Strategy Template. You can also copy the list of initiatives over into the document.

    Download the Roadmap Tool.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You built a strategy to improve the balance between user enablement, risk mitigation, and cost optimization. Throughout the blueprint, you identified opportunities to provide additional value to end users and stakeholders during these activities:

    • Goals cascade
    • User group analysis
    • Definition of standard device types and platforms
    • IT support shift-left analysis
    • Policy gap analysis
    • Roadmapping

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Identify User Groups

    Identify each user group based on the business processes, tasks, and applications they use.

    Define Standard Device Offerings

    Record your provisioning models for each user group and the primary and secondary devices, apps, and peripherals that each group receives.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    This project helps you align your zero-touch approach with stakeholder priorities and larger IT strategies. You will be able to build your zero-touch provisioning and patching plan from both the asset lifecycle and the end-user perspective to create a holistic approach that emphasizes customer service. Tailor deployment plans to more easily scope and resource deployment projects.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    This project will help you analyze the current state of your HAM program, define assets that will need to be managed, and build and involve the ITAM team from the beginning to help embed the change. It will also help you define standard policies, processes, and procedures for each stage of the hardware asset lifecycle, from procurement through to disposal.

    Govern Office 365

    This project will help you conduct a goals exercise and capability assessment for Office 365. You will be able to refine governance objectives, build out controls, formalize governance, build out one pagers, and finalize a communication plan.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Steve Fox, Deputy IT Director, Virginia State Corporation Commission
    • Mazen Joukhadar, TransForm Shared Service Organization
    • Nathan Schlaud, PMO Senior Director, RPC Inc.
    • Rebecca Mountjoy, Infrastructure Systems Manager, BlueScope Buildings
    • DJ Robins, Director of Information Technology, Mohawk MedBuy
    • Jason Jenkins, Tech. Specialist, Michal Baker Corp.
    • Brad Wells, IT Infrastructure Solutions Architect, London Police Service
    • Danelle Peddell, Director, Project Management Office, Emco Corporation
    • John Annand, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Allison Kinnaird, Research Director and Research Lead, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Andrew Kum-Seun, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Mark Tauschek, Vice President IT Infrastructure & Operations Research, Info-Tech Research Group

    A special thank-you to 6 anonymous contributors

    Bibliography

    “2020 Annual Report and Proxy.” Citrix, 2020. Accessed Oct. 2021.

    “2021 BYOD Security Report.” Cybersecurity Insiders, 2021. Web.

    Anderson, Arabella. “12 Remote Work Statistics to Know in 2022.” NorthOne, 2021. Accessed Oct. 2021.

    Bayes, Scarlett. “ITSM: 2021 & Beyond.” Service Desk Institute, 14 April 2021, p. 14. Web.

    Belton, Padraig. “Intel: Chip shortage will extend to at least 2023.” Light Reading, 22 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Beroe Inc. “Demand for PC Components Saw a Surge Due to COVID-19, Says Beroe Inc.” Cision PR Newswire, 2 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Devaraj, Vivekananthan. “Reference Architecture: Remote PC Access.” Citrix, 2021. Accessed Aug. 2021.

    “Elements of the Project Charter and Project Scope Statement.” A Guide to PMBOK, 7th edition, PMI, 2021. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    Elliott, Christopher. “This Is How The Pandemic Improved Customer Service.” Forbes, 2021. Accessed Oct. 2021.

    “Enable TMP 2.0 on your PC.” Microsoft, Support, Aug. 2021. Web.

    “End User Computing Trends to Look Out for in 2021.” Stratodesk, 30 Oct. 2020. Accessed September 2021.

    “Global State of Customer Service: The Transformation of Customer Service from 2015 to Present Day.” Microsoft, 2019. Web.

    Goodman, Elizabeth et al. “Observing the User Experience” A Practitioner's Guide to User Research, 2nd edition. Elsevier, 2012. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    Govindarajulu, Chittibabu. “An Instrument to Classify End-Users Based On the User Cube” Informing Science, June 2002. Accessed September 2021.

    Griffith, Eric. “Remote Employees to Bosses: Our PCs Suck!” PCMag, 11 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Hutchings, Jeffrey D., and Craig A. de Ridder. “Impact of Remote Working on End User Computing Solutions and Services.” Pillsbury, 2021. Accessed Sept. 2021

    “ITIL4 Create, Deliver, and Support.” Axelos, 2020. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    “ITIL4 Drive Stakeholder Value” Axelos, 2020. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    Mcbride, Neil, and Trevor Wood-Harper. “Towards User-Oriented Control of End-User Computing in Large Organizations” Journal of Organizational and End User Computing, vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 33-41, 2002. Accessed September 2021.

    ““Microsoft Endpoint Configuration Manager Documentation.” Microsoft Docs, Microsoft, 2021. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    “Microsoft Intune documentation.” Microsoft Docs, Microsoft. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    “Mobile Cellular Subscriptions (per 100 People).” The World Bank, International Telecommunication Union (ITU) World Telecommunication/ICT Indicators Database, 2020. Web.

    Morgan, Jacob. “The Employee Experience Advantage: How to Win the War for Talent by Giving Employees the Workspaces they Want, the Tools they Need, and a Culture They Can Celebrate.” Wiley, 2017. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    Murphy, Anna. “How the pandemic has changed customer support forever.” Intercom, 2021. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    “Operating System Market Share Worldwide, Jan 2021-Jan 2022.” StatCounter GlobalStats, 2022. Web.

    “Operating System Market Share Worldwide, Jan-Dec 2011.” StatCounter GlobalStats, 2012. Web.

    Pereira, Karla Susiane, et al. “A Taxonomy to Classify Risk End-User Profile in Interaction with the Computing Environment.” In: Tryfonas T. (eds.) Human Aspects of Information Security, Privacy, and Trust. HAS 2016. Lecture Notes in Computer Science, vol. 9750. Accessed Sept. 2021.

    Perrin, Andrew. “Mobile Technology and Home Broadband 2020.” Pew Research Center, 3 June 2021. Web.

    Quan-Haase, Anabel. “Technology and Society: Social Networks, Power, and Inequality” Oxford University Press, 2012. Accessed Aug. 2021.

    Reed, Karin, and Joseph Allen. “Suddenly Virtual: Making Remote Meetings Work.” Wiley, 2021. Accessed Aug. 2021.

    Rockart, John F., and Lauren S. Flannery. “The management of end user computing.” Communications of the ACM, vol. 26, no. 10, Oct. 1983. Accessed September 2021.

    Turek, Melanie. “Employees Say Smartphones Boost Productivity by 34 Percent: Frost & Sullivan Research.” Samsung Insights, 3 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Vladimirskiy, Vadim. “Windows 365 vs. Azure Virtual Desktop (AVD) – Comparing Two DaaS Products.” Nerdio, 2021. Accessed Aug. 2021.

    “VMware 2021 Annual Report.” VMware, Financial Document Library, 2021. Web.

    VMworld 2021, Oct. 2021.

    Vogels, Emily A. “Digital divide persists even as americans with lower incomes make gains in tech adoption.” Pew Research Center, 22 June 2021. Web.

    “What is End-User computing?” VMware, 2021. Accessed Aug. 2021.

    “Windows 10 Home and Pro.” Microsoft, Docs, 2021. Web.

    Zibreg, Christian. “Microsoft 365 Now Boasts Over 50 Million Subscribers.” MUD, 29 April 2021. Web.

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}341|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Because ROI is a financial concept, it can be difficult to apply ROI to anything that produces intangible value.
    • It is a lot harder to apply ROI to functions like data and analytics than it is to apply it to functions like sales without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The standard ROI formula cannot be easily applied to data and analytics and other critical functions across the organization.
    • Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved.
    • The ROI score itself doesn’t have to be perfect. Key decision makers need to agree on the parameters and measures of success.

    Impact and Result

    • Agreed-upon ROI parameters
    • Defined measures of success
    • Optimized ROI program effectiveness by establishing an appropriate cadence between key stakeholders

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Data and Analytics ROI Strategy Deck – A guide for positioning ROI to maximize the value of data and analytics.

    This research is meant to ensure that data and analytics executives are aligned with the key business decision makers. Focus on the value you are trying to achieve rather than perfecting the ROI score.

    • Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Storyboard

    2. Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map – An aligned ROI approach between key decision makers and data and analytics.

    A tool to be used by business and data and analytics decision makers to facilitate discussions about how to approach ROI for data and analytics.

    • Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved and agreed-upon value being generated.

    Analyst Perspective

    Missing out on a significant opportunity for returns could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor.

    This research is directed to the key decision makers tasked with addressing business problems. It also informs stakeholders that have any interest in ROI, especially when applying it to a data and analytics platform and practice.

    While organizations typically use ROI to measure the performance of their investments, the key to determining what investment makes sense is opportunity cost. Missing out on a significant opportunity for return could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor. By making sure you appropriately estimate costs and value returned for all data and analytics activities, you can prioritize the ones that bring in the greatest returns.

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Ben Abrishami-Shirazi
    Technical Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary – ROI on Data and Analytics

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Return on investment (ROI) is a financial term, making it difficult to articulate value when trying to incorporate anything that produces something intangible.

    The more financial aspects there are to a professional function (e.g. sales and commodity-related functions), the easier it is to properly assess the ROI.

    However, for functions that primarily enable or support business functions (such as IT and data and analytics), it is a lot harder to apply ROI without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    • Apples and oranges – There is no simple way to apply the standard ROI formula to data and analytics among other critical functions across the organization.
    • Boiling the ocean – Obsession with finding a way to calculate a perfect ROI on data and analytics.
    • Not getting the big picture – Data and analytics teams suffer a skill set deficit when it comes to commercial acumen.
    • Not seeing eye to eye – ROI does not account for time in its calculation, making it prone to misalignment between stakeholders.

    Approach ROI for data and analytics appropriately:

    • Answer the following questions:
      • What is the business problem?
      • Whose business problem is it?
      • What is the objective?
    • Define measures of success based on the answers to the questions above.
    • Determine an appropriate cadence to continuously optimize the ROI program for data and analytics in collaboration with business problem owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    ROI doesn’t have to be perfect. Parameters and measures of success need to be agreed upon with the key decision makers.

    Glossary

    Return on Investment (ROI): A financial term used to determine how much value has been or will be gained or lost based on the total cost of investment. It is typically expressed as a percentage and is supported by the following formula:

    Payback: How quickly money is paid back (or returned) on the initial investment.
    Business Problem Owner (BPO): A leader in the organization who is accountable and is the key decision maker tasked with addressing a business problem through a series of investments. BPOs may use ROI as a reference for how their financial investments have performed and to influence future investment decisions.
    Problem Solver: A key stakeholder tasked with collaborating with the BPO in addressing the business problem at hand. One of the problem solver’s responsibilities is to ensure that there is an improved return on the BPO’s investments.
    Return Enhancers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly enhance the return of an investment.
    Cost Savers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly save costs in relation of an investment.
    Investment Opportunity Enablers: A category for capabilities that create or enable a new investment opportunity that may yield a potential return.
    Game Changing Components: The components of a capability that directly yield value in solving a business problem.

    ROI strategy on data and analytics

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the ROI strategy on data and analytics.

    ROI roles

    Typical roles involved in the ROI strategy across the organization

    CDOs and CAOs typically have their budget allocated from both IT and business units.

    This is evidenced by the “State of the CIO Survey 2023” reporting that up to 63% of CDOs and CAOs have some budget allocated from within IT; therefore, up to 37% of budgets are entirely funded by business executives.

    This signifies the need to be aligned with peer executives and to use mechanisms like ROI to maximize the performance of investments.

    Source: Foundry, “State of the CIO Survey 2023.”

    Applications Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}183|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Focusing on one initiative will allow leaders to move the needle on what is important.

    Impact and Result

    Focus on the big picture, leveraging Info-Tech’s blueprints. By increasing maturity and efficiency, IT staff can spend more time on value-added activities.

    Applications Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Applications Priorities 2022 – A deck that discusses the five priorities we are seeing among Applications leaders.

    There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied. Use Info-Tech's Applications Priorities 2022 to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

    • Applications Priorities Report for 2022
    [infographic]

    Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}136|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $85,754 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • License keys are not needed with optional features accessible upon install. Conducting quarterly checks of the Oracle environment is critical because if products or features are installed, even if they are not actively in use, it constitutes use by Oracle and requires a license.
    • Ambiguous license models and definitions abound: terminology and licensing rules can be vague, making it difficult to purchase licensing even with the best of intentions to keep compliant.
    • Oracle has aggressively started to force new Oracle License and Service Agreements (OLSA) on customers that slightly modify language and remove pre-existing allowances to tilt the contract terms in Oracle's favor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating Oracle licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Communicate effectively. Be aware that Oracle will reach out to employees at your organization at various levels. Having your executives on the same page will help send a strong message.
    • Manage the relationship. If Oracle is managing you, there is a high probability you are over paying or providing information that may result in an audit.

    Impact and Result

    • Conducting business with Oracle is not typical compared to other vendors. To emerge successfully from a commercial transaction with Oracle, customers must learn the "Oracle way" of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, highly unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function.
    • Map out the process of how to negotiate from a position of strength, examining terms and conditions, discount percentages, and agreement pitfalls.
    • Develop a strategy that leverages and utilizes an experienced Oracle DBA to gather accurate information, and then optimizes it to mitigate and meet the top challenges.

    Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your Oracle licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish licensing requirements

    Begin your proactive Oracle licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
    • Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide
    • Oracle Database Inventory Tool
    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    • RASCI Chart

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review Oracle’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options
    • Oracle TCO Calculator

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

    • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    • Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool
    • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
    • Vendor Communication Management Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Licensing Requirements

    The Purpose

    Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback

    Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a baseline for requirements

    Assess the current state

    Determine licensing position

    Examine cloud options

    Activities

    1.1 Gather software licensing data

    1.2 Conduct a software inventory

    1.3 Perform manual checks

    1.4 Reconcile licenses

    1.5 Create your Oracle licensing team

    1.6 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Copy of your Oracle License Statement

    Software inventory report from software asset management (SAM) tool

    Oracle Database Inventory Tool

    RASCI Chart

    Oracle Licensing Effective License Position (ELP) Template

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    2 Evaluate Licensing Options

    The Purpose

    Review licensing options

    Review licensing rules

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand how licensing works

    Determine if you need software assurance

    Discuss licensing rules, application to current environment.

    Examine cloud licensing

    Understand the importance of documenting changes

    Meet with desktop product owners to determine product strategies

    Activities

    2.1 Review full, limited, restricted, and AST use licenses

    2.2 Calculate license costs

    2.3 Determine which database platform to use

    2.4 Evaluate moving to the cloud

    2.5 Examine disaster recovery strategies

    2.6 Understand purchasing support

    2.7 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Oracle TCO Calculator

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    3 Evaluate Agreement Options

    The Purpose

    Review contract option types

    Review vendors

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand why a type of contract is best for you

    Determine if ULA or term agreement is best

    The benefits of other types and when you should change

    Activities

    3.1 Prepare to sign or renew your ULA

    3.2 Decide on an agreement type that nets the maximum benefit

    Outputs

    Type of contract to be used

    Oracle TCO Calculator

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    4 Purchase and Manage Licenses

    The Purpose

    Finalize the contract

    Prepare negotiation points

    Discuss license management

    Evaluate and develop a roadmap for future licensing

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Negotiation strategies

    Licensing management

    Introduction of SAM

    Leverage the work done on Oracle licensing to get started on SAM

    Activities

    4.1 Control the flow of communication terms and conditions

    4.2 Use Info-Tech’s readiness assessment in preparation for the audit

    4.3 Assign the right people to manage the environment

    4.4 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

    Outputs

    Controlled Vendor Communications Letter

    Vendor Communication Management Plan

    Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool

    RASCI Chart

    Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    2020 Applications Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}159|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Although IT may have time to look at trends, it does not have the capacity to analyze the trends and turn them into initiatives.
    • IT does not have time to parse trends for initiatives that are relevant to them.
    • The business complains that if IT does not pursue trends the organization will get left behind by cutting-edge competitors. At the same time, when IT pursues trends, the business feels that IT is unable to deal with the basic issues.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Take advantage of a trend by first understanding why it is happening and how it is actionable. Build momentum now. Breaking a trend into bite-sized initiatives and building them into your IT foundations enables the organization to maintain pace with competitors and make the technological leap.
    • The concepts of shadow IT and governance are critical. As it becomes easier for the business to purchase its own applications, it will be essential for IT to embrace this form of user empowerment. With a diminished focus on vendor selection, IT will drive the most value by directing its energy toward data and integration governance.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine how to explore, adopt, and optimize the technology and practice initiatives in this report by understanding which core objective(s) each initiative serves:
      • Optimize the effectiveness of the IT organization.
      • Boost the productivity of the enterprise.
      • Enable business growth through technology.

    2020 Applications Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief for a summary of the priorities and themes that an IT organization should focus on this year.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Read the 2020 Applications Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech's 2020 Applications Priorities Report to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

    • 2020 Applications Priorities Report Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Get really good at resilience

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Why be resilient?

    Well, your clients demand it. And it makes business sense; it is much cheaper to retain a client than to acquire new ones. By all means, always expand your client base; just don't make it a zero-sum game by losing clients because you cannot provide decent service. 

    Although the term has existed since the 17th century, it has only received legal attention since 2020. Now, several years later, the EU and the US require companies to prove their resilience.

    To understand what resilience is, please read our article on resilience

    What does it take to become really good at IT resilience?

    IT resilience is a mindset, a collection of techniques, and people management focused on providing consistent service to clients, all rolled into one discipline. While we discuss IT resilience, it takes more than IT staff or IT processes to become a truly resilient business.

    Here are 10 themes relevant to the (IT) resilient organization:

    Transparent culture

    A transparent company culture empowers its people to act confidently, respond swiftly to challenges, and continuously learn and improve. This builds a strong foundation for resilience, enabling the organization to navigate disruption or adversity much more easily.

    At its core, transparency is about open communication, sharing information, and fostering a culture of honesty and trust. These traits directly influence the various aspects of resilience.

    Client service focus

    A client service focus isn't just about customer satisfaction; it's an integral part of a company's resilience strategy. Service stability and continuous value delivery are the elements that retain existing clients and attract new ones through reputation.  System outages, slowdowns, and errors lead to client frustration and erode confidence. In other words, client service focuses on making sure you are available. Once you have that, then you can look at enhancing and expanding services and products. 

    Resilient systems and processes often also include tools and capabilities for proactive communication with clients. This can include automated notifications during system maintenance or updates, providing transparency and minimizing inconvenience. A proactive approach to communication creates a sense of partnership, and it demonstrates that you value your clients' time and business.

    Adaptability

    Adaptable systems and processes give you the flexibility for rapid incident response and easy workarounds, bringing your service back to the level it is supposed to be at.

    In the bigger picture, when you design your systems for flexibility and modification, you can rapidly adjust to new market conditions, evolving customer demands, and technological advancements. This agility allows you to pivot swiftly, seizing opportunities while mitigating risks.

    In the same vein, adaptable processes, fostered by a culture of continuous improvement and open communication, empower teams to innovate and refine workflows in response to challenges. This constant evolution ensures the company remains competitive and aligned with its ever-changing environment.

    Robust change management

    When you establish standardized procedures for planning, testing, and implementing changes, IT change management ensures that every modification, no matter how seemingly small, is carefully considered and assessed for its impact on the broader IT ecosystem. This structured approach significantly reduces the risk of unexpected side effects, unforeseen conflicts, and costly downtime, protecting the company's operations and its reputation.

    It does not have to be a burdensome bureaucratic process. Modern processes and tools take the sting out of these controls. Many actions within change management can be automated without losing oversight by both the IT custodians and the business process owners.

    Redundancy and fault tolerance

    By having duplicates of essential components or systems in place, you ensure that even if one part fails, another is ready to take over. This helps you minimize the impact of unexpected events like hardware issues, software glitches, or other unforeseen problems. This might mean replicating critical policy data across multiple servers or data centers in different locations.

    Fault tolerance is all about your systems and processes being able to keep working even when facing challenges. By designing your software and systems architecture with fault tolerance in mind, you are sure it can gracefully handle errors and failures, preventing those small problems from causing bigger issues, outages, and unhappy clients.

    Security

    Clients entrust you with valuable information. Demonstrating a commitment to data security through resilient systems builds trust and provides reassurance that their data is safeguarded against breaches and unauthorized access.

    Monitoring and alerting

    Trusting that all working is good. making sure is better.  When you observe your systems and receive timely notifications when something seems off, you'll be able to address issues before they snowball into real problems. 

    In any industry, monitoring helps you keep an eye on crucial performance metrics, resource usage, and system health. You'll get insights into how your systems behave, allowing you to identify bottlenecks or potential points of failure before they cause serious problems. And with a well-tuned alerting system, you'll get those critical notifications when something requires immediate attention. This gives you the chance to respond quickly, minimize downtime, and keep things running smoothly for your customers.

    Monitoring is also all about business metrics. Keep your service chains running smoothly and understand the ebb and flow of when clients access your services. Then update and enhance in line with what you see happening. 

    Incident response processes

    Well-thought-out plans and processes are key. Work with your incident managers, developers, suppliers, business staff and product owners and build an embedded method for reacting to incidents. 

    The key is to limit the time of the service interruption. Not everything needs to be handled immediately, so your plan must be clear on how to react to important vs lower-priority incidents. Making the plan and process well-known in the company helps everybody and keeps the calm.

    Embedded business continuity

    Business continuity planning anticipates and prepares for various scenarios, allowing your company to adapt and maintain essential functions even in the face of unexpected disruptions.

    When you proactively address these non-IT aspects of recovery, you build resilience that goes beyond simply restoring technology. It enables you to maintain customer relationships, meet contractual obligations, and safeguard your reputation, even in the face of significant challenges.

    Business continuity is not about prevention; it is about knowing what to do when bad things happen that may threaten your company in a more existential way or when you face issues like a power outage in your building, a pandemic, major road works rendering your business unreachable and such events.

    Effective disaster recovery  

    Disaster recovery is your lifeline when the worst happens. Whether it's a major cyberattack, a natural disaster, or a catastrophic hardware failure, a solid disaster recovery plan ensures your business doesn't sink. It's your strategy to get those critical systems back online and your data restored as quickly as possible.

    Think of it this way: disaster recovery, just like business continuity, isn't about preventing bad things from happening; it's about being prepared to bounce back when they do. It's like having a spare tire in your car, you hope you never need it, but if you get a flat, you're not stranded. With a well-tested disaster recovery plan, you can minimize downtime, reduce data loss, and keep your operations running even in the face of the unexpected. That translates to happier customers, protected revenue, and a reputation for reliability even amidst chaos.

     

    Resilience is the result of a well-conducted orchestra. Many disciplines come together to help you service your clients in a consistent way.

    The operational lifeline of your company and the reason it exists in the first place is to provide your clients with what they need, when they need it, and be able to command a good price for it. And that will keep your shareholders happy as well.

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}449|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Your team’s time is burned up by incident response.
    • Manual repetitive work uses up expensive resources.
    • You don’t have the visibility to ensure the availability the business demands.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Sell the project to the business.
    • Leverage the Operations Center to improve IT Operations.

    Impact and Result

    • Clarify lines of accountability and metrics for success.
    • Implement targeted initiatives and track key metrics for continual improvement.

    Optimize the IT Operations Center Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should Optimize the IT Operations Center, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lightning Phase: Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    Get quick wins to demonstrate early value for investments in IT Operations.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Lightning Phase: Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    2. Get buy-in

    Get buy-in from business stakeholders by speaking their language.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 1: Get Buy-In
    • IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool
    • IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation
    • IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    3. Define accountability and metrics

    Formalize process and task accountability and develop targeted metrics.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 2: Define Accountability and Metrics
    • IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template

    4. Assess gaps and prioritize initiatives

    Identify pain points and determine the top solutions.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 3: Assess Gaps and Prioritize Initiatives
    • IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker
    • IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    5. Launch initiatives and track metrics

    Lay the foundation for implementation and continual improvement.

    • Optimize the IT Operations Center – Phase 4: Launch Initiatives and Track Metrics
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Check Foundation

    The Purpose

    Ensure base maturity in IT Operations processes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Verify that foundation is in place to proceed with Operations Center project.

    Activities

    1.1 Evaluate base maturity.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    2 Define Accountabilities

    The Purpose

    Define accountabilities for Operations processes and tasks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented accountabilities.

    Activities

    2.1 Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.

    2.2 Complete process RACI.

    2.3 Complete task RACI.

    Outputs

    Project plan

    Process RACI

    Task RACI

    3 Map the Challenge

    The Purpose

    Define metrics and identify accountabilities and gaps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of initiatives to address pain points.

    Activities

    3.1 Define metrics.

    3.2 Define accountabilities.

    3.3 Identify gaps.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker

    4 Build Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop an action plan to boost KPIs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan and success criteria.

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    5 Map Out Implementation

    The Purpose

    Build an implementation plan for continual improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Continual improvement against identified metrics and KPIs.

    Activities

    5.1 Build implementation plan.

    Outputs

    IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    Further reading

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Stop burning budget on non-value-adding activities.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    The Network Operations Center is not in Kansas anymore.

    "The old-school Network Operations Center of the telecom world was heavily peopled and reactionary. Now, the IT Operations Center is about more than network monitoring. An effective Operations Center provides visibility across the entire stack, generates actionable alerts, resolves a host of different incidents, and drives continual improvement in the delivery of high-quality services.
    IT’s traditional siloed approach cannot provide the value the business demands. The modern Operations Center breaks down these silos for the end-to-end view required for a service-focused approach."

    Derek Shank,
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • IT Operations Managers
    • IT Infrastructure Managers
    • CIOs

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Improve reliability of services.
    • Reduce the cost of incident response.
    • Reduce the cost of manual repetitive work (MRW).

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business Analysts
    • Project Managers
    • Business Relationship Managers

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Develop appropriate non-functional requirements.
    • Integrate non-functional requirements into solution design and project implementation.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Your team’s time is burned up by incident response.
    • MRW burns up expensive resources.
    • You don’t have the visibility to ensure the availability the business demands.

    Complication

    • The increasing complexity of technology has resulted in siloed teams of specialists.
    • The business views IT Operations as a cost center and doesn’t want to provide resources to support improvement initiatives.

    Resolution

    • Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.
    • Obtain buy-in from business stakeholders by speaking their language.
    • Clarify lines of accountability and metrics for success.
    • Implement targeted initiatives and track key metrics for continual improvement.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Sell the project to the business. Your first job is a sales job because executive sponsorship is key to project success.
    2. Worship the holy trinity of metrics: impact of downtime, cost of incident response, and time spent on manual repetitive work (MRW).
    3. Invest in order to profit. Improving the Operations Center takes time and money. Expect short-term pain to realize long-term gain.

    The role of the Network Operations Center has changed

    • The old approach was technology siloed and the Network Operations Center (NOC) only cared about the network.
    • The modern Operations Center is about ensuring high availability of end-user services, and requires cross-functional expertise and visibility across all the layers of the technology stack.
    A pie chart is depicted. The data displayed on the chart, in decreasing order of size, include: Applications; Servers; LAN; WAN; Security; Storage. Source: Metzler, n.d.

    Most organizations lack adequate visibility

    • The rise of hybrid cloud has made environments more complex, not less.
    • The increasing complexity makes monitoring and incident response more difficult than ever.
    • Only 31% of organizations use advanced monitoring beyond what is offered by cloud providers.
    • 69% perform no monitoring, basic monitoring, or rely entirely on the cloud provider’s monitoring tools.
    A Pie chart is depicted. Two data are represented on the chart. The first, representing 69% of the chart, is: Using no monitoring, basic monitoring, or relying only on the cloud vendor's monitoring. the second, representing 31% of the chart, is Using advanced monitoring beyond what cloud vendors provide. Source: InterOp ITX, 2018

    Siloed service level agreements cannot ensure availability

    You can meet high service level agreements (SLAs) for functional silos, but still miss the mark for service availability. The business just wants things to work!

    this image contains Info-Tech's SLA-compliance rating chart, which displays the categories: Available, behaving as expected; Slow/degraded; and Unavailable, for each of: Webserver; Database; Storage; Network; Application; and, Business Service

    The cost of downtime is massive

    Increasing reliance on IT makes downtime hurt more than ever.
    98% of enterprises lose $100,000+.
    81% of enterprises lose $300,000+ per hour of downtime.

    This is a bar graph, showing the cost per hour of downtime, against the percentage of enterprises.

    Source: ITIC, 2016

    IT is asked to do more with less

    Most IT budgets are staying flat or shrinking.

    57% of IT departments expect their budget to stay flat or to shrink from 2018 to 2019.

    This image contains a pie chart with two data, one is labeled: Increase; representing 43% of the chart. The other datum is labeled: Shrink or stay flat, and represents 57% of the chart.

    Unify and streamline IT Operations

    A well-run Operations Center ensures high availability at reasonable cost. Improving your Operations Center results in:

    • Higher availability
    • Increased reliability
    • Improved project capacity
    • Higher business satisfaction

    Measure success with the holy trinity of metrics

    Focus on reducing downtime, cost of incident response, and MRW.

    This image contains a Funnel Chart showing the inputs: Downtime; Cost of Incident Response; MRW; and the output: Reduce for continual improvement

    Start from the top and employ a targeted approach

    Analyze data to get buy-in from stakeholders, and use our tools and templates to follow the process for continual improvement in IT Operations.

    This image depicts a cycle, which includes: Data analysis; Executive Sponsorship; Success Criteria; Gap Assessment; Initiatives; Tracking & Measurement

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Optimize the IT Operations Center – project overview

    Launch the Project

    Identify Enterprise Services

    Identify Line of Business Services

    Complete Service Definitions

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    🗲 Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    1.1 Ensure Base Maturity Is in Place

    1.2 Make the Case

    2.1 Define Accountabilities

    2.2 Define Metrics

    3.1 Assess Gaps

    3.2 Plan Initiatives

    4.1 Lay Foundation

    4.2 Launch and Measure

    Guided Implementations

    Discuss current state.

    Review stakeholder presentation.

    Review RACIs.

    Review metrics.

    Discuss gaps.

    Discuss initiatives.

    Review plan and metric schedule.

    Onsite Workshop Module 1:

    Clear understanding of project objectives and support obtained from the business.

    Module 2:

    Enterprise services defined and categorized.

    Module 3:

    LOB services defined based on user perspective.

    Module 4:

    Service record designed according to how IT wishes to communicate to the business.

    Phase 1 Results:

    Stakeholder presentation

    Phase 2 Results:
    • RACIs
    • Metrics
    Phase 3 Results:
    • Gaps list
    • Prioritized list of initiatives
    Phase 4 Results:
    • Implementation plan
    • Continual improvement tracker

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-Workshop Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Check Foundation

    Define Accountabilities

    Map the Challenge

    Build Action Plan

    Map Out Implementation

    1.1 Ensure base maturity.

    🗲 Pluck low-hanging fruit for quick wins.

    2.1 Complete process RACI.

    2.2 Complete task RACI.

    3.1 Define metrics.

    3.2 Define accountabilities.

    3.2 Identify gaps.

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives.

    5.1 Build implementation plan.

    Deliverables
    1. IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool
    1. IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template
    1. IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker
    1. IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool
    1. IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker

    PHASE 🗲

    Pluck Low-Hanging Fruit for Quick Wins

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Conduct a ticket-trend analysis

    Generate reports on tickets from your IT service management (ITSM) tool. Look for areas that consume the most resources, such as:

    • Recurring tickets.
    • Tickets that have taken a long time to resolve.
    • Tickets that could have been resolved at a lower tier.
    • Tickets that were unnecessarily or improperly escalated.

    Identify issues

    Analyze the tickets:

    • Look for recurring tickets that may indicate underlying problems.
    • Ask tier 2 and 3 technicians to flag tickets that could have been resolved at a lower tier.
    • Identify painful and/or time consuming service requests.
    • Flag any manual repetitive work.

    Write the issues on a whiteboard.

    Oil & Gas IT reduces manual repetitive maintenance work

    CASE STUDY
    Industry Oil & Gas
    Source Interview

    Challenge

    The company used a webserver to collect data from field stations for analytics. The server’s version did not clear its cache – it filled up its own memory and would not overwrite, so it would just lock up and have to be rebooted manually.

    Solution

    The team found out that the volumes and units of data would cause the memory to fill at a certain time of the month. They wrote a script to reboot the machine and set up a planned outage during the appropriate weekend each month.

    Results

    The team never had to do manual reboots again – though they did have to tweak their reboot script not to rely on their calendar, after a shift in production broke the pattern between memory consumption and the calendar.

    Rank the issues

    🗲.1.1 10 minutes

    1. Assign each participant five sticky dots to use for voting.
    2. Have each participant place any number of dots beside the issue(s) of their choice.
    3. Count the dots and rank the top three most important issues.

    INPUT

    • List of issues

    OUTPUT

    • Top three issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky dots

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Brainstorm solutions

    🗲.1.2 10 minutes

    1. Write the three issues at the top of a whiteboard, each at the head of its own column.
    2. Focusing on one issue at a time, brainstorm potential solutions for each issue. Have one person write all the proposed solutions on the board beneath the issue.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Do not censor or evaluate the proposed solutions at this time. During brainstorming, focus on coming up with as many potential solutions as possible, no matter how infeasible or outlandish.

    INPUT

    • Top three issues

    OUTPUT

    • Potential solutions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Evaluate and rank potential solutions

    🗲.1.3 30 minutes

    1. Score the solutions from 1-5 on each of the two dimensions:
    • Attainability
    • Probable efficacy
  • Identify the top scoring solution for each issue. In the event of a tie, vote to determine the winner.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Quick wins are the best of both worlds. To get a quick win, pick a solution that is both readily attainable and likely to have high impact.

    INPUT

    • Potential solutions

    OUTPUT

    • Ranked list of solutions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O team members

    Develop metrics to measure the effectiveness of solutions

    You should now have a top potential solution for each pain point.

    For each pain point and proposed solution, identify the metric that would indicate whether the solution had been effective or not. For example:

    • Pain point: Too many unnecessary escalations for SharePoint issues.
    • Solution: Train tier 1 staff to resolve SharePoint tickets.
    • Metric: % of SharePoint tickets resolved at tier 1.

    Design solutions

    • Some solutions explain themselves. E.g., hire an extra service desk person.
    • Others require more planning and design, as they involve a bespoke solution. E.g., improve asset management process or automate onboarding of new users.
    • For the solutions that require planning, take the time to design each solution fully before rushing to implement it.

    Build solutions

    • Build any of the solutions that require building. For example, any scripting for automations requires the writing of those scripts, and any automated ticket routing requires configuration of your ITSM tool.
    • Part of the build phase for many solutions should also involve designing the tests of those solutions.

    Test solutions – refine and iterate

    • Think about the expected outcome and results of the solutions that require testing.
    • Test each solution under production-like circumstances to see if the results and behavior are as expected.
    • Refine and iterate upon the solutions as necessary, and test again.

    Implement solutions and measure results

    • Before implementing each solution, take a baseline measurement of the metric that will measure success.
    • Implement the solutions using your change management process.
    • After implementation, measure the success of the solution using the appropriate metric.
    • Document the results and judge whether the solution has been effective.

    Use the top result as a case study to obtain buy-in

    Your most effective solution will make a great case study.

    Write up the results and input the case study into the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    This image contains a screenshot of info-tech's default format for presenting case studies.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    🗲.1.2 This image contains a screenshot from section 🗲.1.2 of this blueprint.

    Identify issues

    Look for areas that aren’t working optimally.

    🗲.1.3 this image contains a screenshot from section 🗲.1.3 of this blueprint.

    Evaluate and rank potential solutions

    Sort the wheat from the chaff and plan for quick wins.

    PHASE 1

    Get Buy-In

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 1.1: Ensure Base Maturity Is in Place

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess maturity of base IT Operations processes.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    Base processes underpin the Operations Center

    • Before you optimize your Operations Center, you should have foundational ITSM processes in place: service desk, and incident, problem, and change management.
    • Attempting to optimize Operations before it rests on a solid foundation can only lead to frustration.

    IT Operations Center

    • Service Desk
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Change Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    ITIL isn’t dead. New technology such as cloud solutions and advanced monitoring tools have transformed how ITSM processes are implemented, but have not obviated them.

    Assess maturity of prerequisite processes

    1.1.1 IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    • Don’t try to prematurely optimize your Operations Center.
    • Before undertaking this project, you should already have a base level of maturity in the four foundational IT Operations processes.
    • Complete the IT Operations Center Prerequisites Assessment Tool to assess your current level in service desk, incident management, problem management, and change management.
    this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's IT Operations Center Prerequisite Assessment

    Make targeted improvements on prerequisite processes if necessary

    If there are deficiencies in any of your foundational processes, take the time to remedy those first before proceeding with Optimize the IT Operations Center. See Info-Tech’s other blueprints:

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Strengthen your service desk to build a strong ITSM foundation.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

    Optimize Change Management

    Turn and face the change with a right-sized change management process.

    Step 1.2: Make the Case

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Estimate the impact of downtime for top five applications.
    • Estimate the cost of incident response.
    • Estimate the cost of MRW.
    • Set success metrics and estimate the ROI of the Operations Center project.
    • IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation

    Obtaining buy-in is critical

    Buy-in from top-level stakeholders is critical to the success of the project.

    Before jumping into your initiatives, take the time to make the case and bring the business on board.

    Factors that “prevent us from improving the NOC”

    This image contains a graph of factors that prevent us from improving the NOC. In decreasing order, they include: Lack of strategic guidance from our vendors; The unwillingness of our management to accept new risk; Lack of adequate software tools; Our internal processes; Lack of management vision; Lack of funding; and Lack of personnel resources. There is a red circle drawn around the last three entries, with the words: Getting Buy-in Removes the Top Three Roadblocks to Improvement!. Source: Metzier, n.d

    List your top five applications

    List your top five applications for business criticality.

    Don’t agonize over decisions at this point.

    Generally, the top applications will be customer facing, end-user facing for the most critical business units, or critical for health and safety.

    Estimate impact of downtime

    • Come up with a rough, back-of-the-napkin estimate of the hourly cost of downtime for each application.
    • Complete page two of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.
    • Estimate loss of revenue per hour, loss of productivity per hour, and IT cost per incident resolution hour.
    • Pull a report on incident hours/outages in the past year from your ITSM tool. Multiply the total cost per incident hour by the incident hours per year to determine the current cost per year of service disruptions for each service.
    • Add up the cost for each of the top five services.
    • Now you can show the business a hard value number that quantifies your availability issues.

    Estimate salary cost of non-value-adding work

    Complete page three of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    • Estimate annual wage cost of incident response: multiply incident response hours per year (take from your ITSM tool) by the average hourly wage of incident responders.
    • Estimate annual cost of MRW: multiply MRW hours per year (take from ITSM tool or from time-keeping tool, or use best guess based on talking to staff members) by the average hourly wage of IT staff performing MRW.
    • Add the two numbers together to calculate the non-value-adding IT salary cost per year.
    • Express the previous number as a percentage of total IT salary. Everything that is not incident response or MRW is value-adding work.

    Now you have the holy trinity of metrics: set some targets

    The holy trinity of metrics:

    • Cost of downtime
    • % of salary on incident response
    • % of salary on MRW

    You want to reduce the above numbers. Set some back-of-the-napkin targets for percentage reductions for each of these areas. These are high-level metrics that business stakeholders will care about.

    Take your best guess at targets. Higher maturity organizations will have less potential for reduction from a percentage point of view (eventually you hit diminishing returns), while organizations just beginning to optimize their Operations Center have the potential for huge gains.

    Calculate the potential gains of targets

    Complete page five of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.

    • Multiply the targeted/estimated % reductions of the costs by your current costs to determine the potential savings/benefits.
    • Do a back-of-the napkin estimate of the cost of the Operations Center improvement project. Use reasonable numbers for cost of personnel time and cost of tools, and be sure to include ongoing personnel time costs – your time isn’t free and continual improvement takes work and effort.
    • Calculate the ROI.

    Fill out the case study

    • Complete page six of the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation. If you completed the lightning phase, use the results of your own quick win project(s) as an example of feasibility.
    • If you did not complete the lightning phase, delete this slide, or use an example of what other organizations have achieved to demonstrate feasibility.
    This image contains a screenshot of info-tech's default format for presenting case studies.

    Present to stakeholders

    • Deliver the presentation to key stakeholders.
    • Focus on the high-level story that the current state is costing real dollars and wages, and that these losses can be minimized through process improvements.
    • Be up front that many of the numbers are based on estimates, but be prepared to defend the reasonableness of the estimates.

    Gain buy-in and identify project sponsor

    • If the business is on board with the project, determine one person to be the executive sponsor for the project. This person should have a strong desire to see the project succeed, and should have some skin in the game.

    Formalize communication with the project sponsor

    • Establish how you will communicate with the sponsor throughout the project (e.g. weekly or monthly e-mail updates, bi-weekly meetings).
    • Set up a regular/recurring cadence and stick to it, so it can be put on auto-pilot. Be clear about who is responsible for initiating communication and sticking to the reporting schedule.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor communication to the sponsor. The project sponsor is not the project manager. The sponsor’s role is to drive the project forward by allocating appropriate resources and demonstrating highly visible support to the broader organization. The sponsor should be kept in the loop, but not bothered with minutiae.

    Note the starting numbers for the holy trinity

    Use the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker:

    • Enter your starting numbers for the holy trinity of metrics.
    • After planning and implementing initiatives, this tracker will be used to update against the holy trinity to assess the success of the project on an ongoing basis and to drive continual improvement.

    PHASE 2

    Define Accountability and Metrics

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 2.1: Define Accountabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Formalize RACI for key processes.
    • Formalize RACI for key tasks.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed RACIs

    List key Operations Center processes

    Compile a list of processes that are key for the Operations Center.

    These processes should include the four foundational processes:

    • Service Desk
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Change Management

    You may also want to include processes such as the following:

    • Event Management
    • Configuration Management

    Avoid listing processes you have yet to develop – stick with those already playing a role in your current state.

    Formalize RACI for key processes

    Use the IT Operations Center RACI Charts Template. Complete a RACI for each of the key processes involved in the IT Operations Center.

    RACI:

    • Responsible (does the work on a day-to-day basis)
    • Accountable (reviews, signs off, and is held accountable for outcomes)
    • Consulted (input is sought to feed into decision making)
    • Informed (is given notification of outcomes)

    As a best practice, no more than one person should be responsible or accountable for any given process. The same person can be both responsible and accountable for a given process, or it could be two different people.

    Avoid making someone accountable for a process if they do not have full visibility into the process for appropriate oversight, or do not have time to give the process sufficient attention.

    Formalize RACI for IT tasks

    Now think about the actual tasks or work that goes on in IT. Which roles and individuals are accountable for which tasks or pieces of work?

    In this case, more than one role/person can be listed as responsible or accountable in the RACI because we’re talking about types or categories of work. No conflict will occur because these individuals will be responsible or accountable for different pieces of work or individual tasks of the same type. (e.g. all service desk staff are responsible for answering phones and inputting tickets into the ITSM tool, but no more than one staff member is responsible for the input of any given ticket from a specific phone call).

    Step 2.2: Define Metrics

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity.
    • Evaluate metrics and identify key performance indicators (KPIs).
    • Cascade performance assessment (PA) metrics to support KPIs.
    • Build feedback loop for PA metrics.

    Outcomes of this step

    • KPIs
    • PA metrics

    Metrics must span across silos for shared accountability

    To adequately support the business goals of the organization, IT metrics should span across functional silos.

    Metrics that span across silos foster shared accountability across the IT organization.

    Metrics supported by all groups

    three grain silos are depicted. below, are the words IT Groups, with arrows pointing from the words to each of the three silos.

    Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity

    Focus on the holy trinity of metrics.

    From these, cascade down to operational metrics that contribute to the holy trinity. It is possible that an operational metric may support more than one trinity metric. For example:

    a flow chart is depicted. two input circles point toward a central circle, and two output circles point away. the input circles include: Cost of Downtime; Cost of Incident Response. The central circle reads: Mean time to restore service. the output circles include the words: Tier 1 Resolution Rate; %% of Known Errors Captured in ITSM Tool.

    Evaluate metrics and identify KPIs

      • Evaluate your operational metrics and determine which ones are likely to have the largest impact on the holy trinity of metrics.
      • Identify the ten metrics likely to have the most impact: these will be your KPIs moving forward.
      • Enter these KPIs into the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker.
      this image depicts a cycle around the term KPI. The cycle includes: Objective; Measurement; optimization; strategy; performance; evaluation

    Beware how changing variables/context can affect metrics

    • Changes in context can affect metrics drastically. It’s important to keep the overall context in mind to avoid being led astray by certain numbers taken in isolation.
    • For example, a huge hiring spree might exhaust the stock of end-user devices, requiring time to procure hardware before the onboarding tickets can be completely fulfilled. You may have improved your onboarding process through automation, but see a large increase in average time to onboard a new user. Keep an eye out for such anomalies or fluctuations, and avoid putting too much stock in any single operational KPI.
    • Remember, operational KPIs are just a heuristic tool to support the holy trinity of metrics.

    Determine accountability for KPIs

    • For each operational KPI, assign one person to be accountable for that KPI.
    • Be sure the person in charge has the necessary authority and oversight over the processes and personnel that most affect that KPI – otherwise it makes little sense to hold the individual accountable.
    • Consulting your process RACIs is a good place to start.
    • Record the accountable person for each KPI in the IT Operations Center Continual Improvement Tracker.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Match accountability with authority. The person accountable for each KPI should be the one who has the closet and most direct control over the work and processes that most heavily impact that KPI.

    Cascade PA metrics to support KPIs

    KPIs are ultimately driven by how IT does its work, and how individuals work is driven by how their performance is assessed and evaluated.

    For the top KPIs, be sure there are individual PA metrics in place that support the KPI, and if not, develop the appropriate PA metrics.

    For example:

    • KPI: Mean time to resolve incidents
    • PA metric: % of escalations that followed SOP (e.g. not holding onto a ticket longer than supposed to)
    • KPI: Number of knowledge base articles written
    • PA metric: Number of knowledge base articles written/contributed to

    Communicate key changes in PA metrics

    Any changes from the previous step will take time and effort to implement and make stick.

    Changing people’s way of working is extremely difficult.

    Build a communication and implementation plan about rolling out these changes, emphasize the benefits for everyone involved, and get buy-in from the affected staff members.

    Build feedback loops for PA metrics

    Now that PA metrics support your Operations Center’s KPIs, you should create frequent feedback loops to drive and boost those PA metrics.

    Once per year or once per quarter is not frequent enough. Managers should meet with their direct reports at least monthly and review their reports’ performance against PA metrics.

    Use a “set it and forget it” implementation, such as a recurring task or meeting in your calendar.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    2.2.1 This image contains a screenshot from section 2.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Cascade operational metrics from the holy trinity

    Rank goals based on business impact and stakeholder pecking order.

    2.2.2 this image contains a screenshot from section 2.2.2 of this blueprint.

    Determine accountability for KPIs

    Craft a concise and compelling elevator pitch that will drive the project forward.

    PHASE 3

    Assess Gaps and Prioritize Initiatives

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 3.1: Assess Gaps

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess visibility provided by monitoring.
    • Assess process workflows and identify areas for automation.
    • Assess requests and identify potential for automation.
    • Assess Operations Center staff capabilities.
    • Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points.

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of gaps
    • List of root causes

    Measure current state of KPIs and identify lagging ones

    Take a baseline measurement of each operational KPI.

    If historical data is available, compare the present state measurement to data points collected over the last year or so.

    Review the measured KPIs.

    Identify any KPIs that seem lagging or low, or that may be particularly important to influence.

    Record lagging KPIs in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess visibility provided by monitoring

    List the top five most critical business services supported by IT.
    Assess the current state of your monitoring tools.

    For each business service, rate the level of visibility your monitoring tools allow from the following options:

    1. We have no visibility into the service, or lack visibility into crucial elements.
    2. We have basic visibility (up/down) into all the IT components that support the service.
    3. We have basic visibility (up/down) into the end service itself, in addition to all the IT components that make it up.
    4. We have some advanced visibility into some aspects of the service and/or its IT components.
    5. We have a full, end-to-end view of performance across all the layers of the stack, as well as the end business service itself.

    Identify where more visibility may be necessary

    For most organizations it isn’t practical to have complete visibility into everything. For the areas in which visibility is lacking into key services, think about whether more visibility is actually required or not. Consider some of the following questions:

    • How great is the impact of this service being unavailable?
    • Would greater visibility into the service significantly reduce the mean time to restore the service in the event of incidents?

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations CenterGap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess alerting

    Assess alerting for your most critical services.

    Consider whether any of the following problems occur:

    • Often receive no alert(s) in the event of critical outages of key services (we find out about critical outages from the service desk).
    • We are regularly overwhelmed with too many alerts to investigate properly.
    • Our alerts are rarely actionable.
    • We often receive many false alerts.

    Identify areas for potential improvement in the managing of alerts. Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess process workflows and identify areas for automation

    Review your process flows for base processes such as Service Desk, Incident Management, Problem Management, and Change Management.

    Identify areas in the workflows where there may be defects, inefficiencies, or potential for improvement or automation.

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    See the blueprint Prepare for Cognitive Service Management for process workflows and areas to look for automation possibilities.

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management

    Make ready for AI-assisted IT operations.

    Assess requests and identify potential for automation

    • Assess the most common work orders or requests handled by the Operations Center group (i.e. this does not include requests fulfilled by the help desk).
    • Which work orders are the most painful? That is, what common work orders involve the greatest effort or the most manual work to fulfill?
    • Fulfillment of common, recurring work orders is MRW, and should be reduced or removed if possible.
    • Consider automation of certain work orders, or self-service delivery.
    • Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Assess Operations Center staff capabilities

    • Assess the skills and expertise of your team members.
    • Consider some of the following:
      • Are there team members who could perform their job more effectively by picking up certain skills or proficiencies?
      • Are there team members who have the potential to shift into more valuable or useful roles, given the appropriate training?
      • Are there individual team members whose knowledge is crucial for operations, and whose function cannot be taken up by others?

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations Center Gap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Train to avoid pain. All too often organizations expose themselves to significant key person risk by relying on the specialized skills and knowledge of one team member. Use cross training to remedy such single points of failure before the risk materializes.

    Brainstorm pain points

    Brainstorm any pain points not discussed in the previous areas.

    Pain points can be specific operational issues that have not yet been considered. For example:

    • Tom is overwhelmed with tickets.
    • Our MSP often breaches SLA.
    • We don’t have a training budget.

    Record any deficiencies in the IT Operations CenterGap and Initiative Tracker tool.

    Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points

    • Pain points can often be symptoms of other deficiencies, or somewhat removed from the actual problem.
    • Using the 5 Whys, conduct a root cause analysis on the pain points for which the causes are not obvious.
    • For each pain point, ask “why” for a sequence of five times, attempting to proceed to the root cause of the issue. This root cause is the true gap that needs to be remedied to resolve the pain point.
    • For example:
      • The Wi-Fi network often goes down in the afternoon.
        • Why?: Its bandwidth gets overloaded.
        • Why?: Many people are streaming video.
        • Why?: There’s a live broadcast of a football game at that time.
      • Possible solutions:
        • Block access to the streaming services.
        • Project the game on a screen in a large conference room and encourage everyone to watch it there.

    Step 3.2: Plan Initiatives

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Brainstorm initiatives to boost KPIs and address gaps.
    • Prioritize potential initiatives.
    • Decide which initiatives to include on the roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Targeted improvement roadmap

    Brainstorm initiatives to boost KPIs and address gaps

    Prioritize potential initiatives

    3.2.1 IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool

    • Use the IT Operations Center Initiative Prioritization Tool.
    • Enter the initiatives into the tool.
    • For each initiative, input the following ranking criteria:
      • The metric/KPI’s estimated degree of impact on the holy trinity.
      • The gap or pain point’s estimated degree of impact on the metric/KPI.
      • The initiative’s estimated degree of positive impact on the gap or pain point
      • The initiative’s attainability.
    • Estimate the resourcing capacity required for each initiative.
    • For accurate capacity assessment, input as “force include” all current in-flight projects handled by the Operations Center group (including those unrelated to the Operations Center project).

    Decide which initiatives to include on the roadmap

    • Not all initiatives will be worth pursuing – and especially not all at once.
    • Consider the results displayed on the final tab of the IT Operations CenterInitiative Prioritization Tool.
    • Based on the prioritization and taking capacity into account, decide which initiatives to include on your roadmap.
    • Sometimes, for operational or logistical reasons, it may make sense to schedule an initiative at a time other than its priority might dictate. Make such exceptions on a case-by-case basis.

    Assign an owner to each initiative, and provide resourcing

    • For each initiative, assign one person to be the owner of that initiative.
    • Be sure that person has the authority and the bandwidth necessary to drive the initiative forward.
    • Secure additional resourcing for any initiatives you want to include on your roadmap that are lacking capacity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You must invest resources in order to reduce the time spent on non-value-adding work.

    "The SRE model of working – and all of the benefits that come with it – depends on teams having ample capacity for engineering work. If toil eats up that capacity, the SRE model can’t be launched or sustained. An SRE perpetually buried under toil isn’t an SRE, they are just a traditional long-suffering SysAdmin with a new title."– David N. Blank-Edelman

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    3.1.1 This image contains a screenshot from section 3.1.1 of this blueprint.

    Conduct a root cause analysis on the gaps/pain points

    Find out the cause, so you can come up with solutions.

    3.2.1 this image contains a screenshot from section 3.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Prioritize potential initiatives

    Don’t try to boil the ocean. Target what’s manageable and what will have the most impact.

    PHASE 4

    Launch Initiatives and Track Metrics

    Optimize the IT Operations Center

    Step 4.1: Lay Foundation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build initiative communication plan.
    • Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Testing plan(s)

    Expect resistance to change

    • It’s not as simple as rolling out what you’ve designed.
    • Anything that affects people’s way of working will inevitably be met with suspicion and pushback.
    • Be prepared to fight the battle.
    • "The hardest part is culture. You must get people to see the value of automation. Their first response is ‘We've been doing it this way for 10 years, why do we need to do it another way?’ It's hard to get someone out of their comfort zone to learn something new, especially when they've been at an organization for 20 years. You need to give them incentives."– Cyrus Kalatbari, Senior IT Architect, Infrastructure/Cloud

    Communicate changes in advance, along with their benefits!

    • Communicate changes well in advance of the date(s) of implementation.
    • Emphasize the benefits of the changes – not just for the organization, but for employees and staff members.
    • Advance communication of changes helps make them more palatable, and builds trust in employees by making them feel informed of what’s going on.

    Involve IT staff in design and implementation of changes

    • As you communicate the coming changes, take the opportunity to involve any affected staff members who have not yet participated in the project.
    • Solicit their feedback and get them to help design and implement the initiatives that involve significant changes to their roles.

    Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative

    • Some initiatives, such as appointing a new change manager or hiring a new staff member, do not make sense to test.
    • On the other hand, technical initiatives such as automation scripts, new monitoring tools or dashboards, and changed alert thresholds should be tested thoroughly before implementation.
    • For each technical initiative, think about the expected results and performance if it were to run in production, and build a test plan to ensure it behaves as expected and there are no corner cases.

    Test technology initiatives and iterate if necessary

    • Test each technical initiative under a variety of circumstances, with as close an environment to production as possible.
    • Try to develop corner cases or unusual or unexpected situations, and see if any of these will break the functionality or produce unintended or unexpected results.
    • Document the results of the testing, and iterate on the initiative and test again if necessary.

    "The most important things – and the things that people miss – are prerequisites and expected results. People jump out and build scripts, then the scripts go into the ditch, and they end up debugging in production." – Darin Stahl, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Step 4.2: Launch and Measure

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Launch initiatives and track adoption and effectiveness.
    • Investigate initiatives that appear ineffective.
    • Measure success with the holy trinity.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Continual improvement roadmap

    Establish a review cycle for each metric

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t measure what doesn’t matter. If a metric is not going to be reviewed or reported on for informational or decision-making purposes, it should not be tracked.

    Launch initiatives and track adoption and effectiveness

    • Launch the initiatives.
    • Some initiatives will need to proceed through your change management process in order to roll out, but others will not.
    • Track the adoption of initiatives that require it.
      • Some initiatives will require tracking of adoption, whereas others will not.
      • For example, hiring a new service desk staff member does not require tracking of adoption, but implementing a new process for ticket handling does.
      • The implementation plan should include a way to measure the adoption of such initiatives, and regularly review the numbers to see if the implementation has been successful.
    • For all initiatives, measure their effectiveness by continuing to track the KPI/metric that the initiative is intended to influence.

    Assess metrics according to review cycle for continual improvement

    • Assess metrics according to the review cycle.
    • Note whether metrics are improving in the right direction or not.
    • Correlate changes in the metrics with measures of the adoption of the initiatives – see whether initiatives that have been adopted are moving the needle on the KPIs they are intended to.

    Investigate initiatives that appear ineffective

    • If the adoption of an initiative has succeeded, but the expected impact of that initiative on the KPI has not taken place, investigate further and conduct a root causes analysis to determine why this is the case.
    • Sometimes, anomalies or fluctuations will occur that cause the KPI not to move in accordance with the success of the initiative. In this case, it’s just a fluke and the initiative can still be successful in influencing the KPI over the long term.
    • Other times, the initiative may prove mostly or entirely ineffective, either due to misdesign of the initiative itself, a change of circumstances, or other compounding factors or complexities. If the initiative proves ineffective, consider iterating modifications of the initiative and continuing to measure the effect on KPIs – or perhaps killing the initiative altogether.
    • Remember that experimentation is not a bad thing – it’s okay that not every initiative will always prove worthwhile.

    Measure success with the holy trinity

    • Report to business stakeholders on the effect on the holy trinity of metrics at least annually.
    • Calculate the ROI of the project after two years and compare the results to the targeted ROI you initially presented in the IT Operations Center Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation.
    This image contains a Funnel Chart showing the inputs: Downtime; Cost of Incident Response; MRW; and the output: Reduce for continual improvement

    Iterate on the Operations Center process for continual improvement

    This image depicts a cycle, which includes: Data analysis; Executive Sponsorship; Success Criteria; Gap Assessment; Initiatives; Tracking & Measurement

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    this is a picture of an Info-Tech Analyst

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    4.1.1This image contains a screenshot from section 3.1.1 of this blueprint.

    Communicate changes in advance, along with their benefits!

    Rank goals based on business impact and stakeholder pecking order.

    4.1.2 this image contains a screenshot from section 3.2.1 of this blueprint.

    Develop a testing plan for each technical initiative

    Craft a concise and compelling elevator pitch that will drive the project forward.

    Research contributors and experts
    This is a picture of Cyrus Kalatbari, IT infrastructure/cloud architect

    Cyrus Kalatbari, IT Infrastructure/Cloud Architect

    Cyrus’ in-depth knowledge cutting across I&O and service delivery has enhanced the IT operations of multiple enterprise-class clients.

    This is a picture of Derek Cullen, Chief Technology Officer

    Derek Cullen, Chief Technology Officer

    Derek is a proven leader in managing enterprise-scale development, deployment, and integration of applications, platforms, and systems, with a sharp focus on organizational transformation and corporate change.

    This is a picture of Phil Webb, Senior Manager

    Phil Webb, Senior Manager – Unified Messaging and Mobility

    Phil specializes in service delivery for cloud-based and hybrid technology solutions, spanning requirements gathering, solution design, new technology introduction, development, integration, deployment, production support, change/release delivery, maintenance, and continuous improvement.

    This is a picture of Richie Mendoza, IT Services Delivery Consultant

    Richie Mendoza, IT Services Delivery Consultant

    Ritchie’s accomplishments include pioneering a cloud capacity management process and presenting to the Operations team and to higher management, while providing a high level of technical leadership in all phases of capacity management activities.

    This is a picture of Rob Thompson, Solutions Architect

    Rob Thomson, Solutions Architect

    Rob is an IT leader with a track record of creating and executing digital transformation initiatives to achieve the desired outcomes by integrating people, process, and technology into an efficient and effective operating model.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Create a Configuration Management Roadmap

    Right-size your CMDB to improve IT operations.

    Harness Configuration Management Superpowers

    Build a CMDB around the IT services that are most important to the organization.

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Automation, SDI, and DevOps – build a cheat sheet to manage a changing Infrastructure & Operations environment.

    Develop an Availability and Capacity Management Plan

    Manage capacity to increase uptime and reduce costs.

    Establish a Program to Enable Effective Performance Monitoring

    Maximize the benefits of infrastructure monitoring investments by diagnosing and assessing transaction performance, from network to server to end-user interface.

    Bibliography

    Baker, Dan, and Hal Baylor. “How Benchmarking & Streamlining NOC Operations Can Lower Costs & Boost Effectiveness.” Top Operator, Mar. 2017. Web.

    Blank-Edelman, David. Seeking SRE: Conversations About Running Production Systems at Scale. O'Reilly, 2018. Web.

    CA Technologies. “IT Transformation to Next-Generation Operations Centers: Assure Business Service Reliability by Optimizing IT Operations.” CA Technologies, 2014. Web.

    Ditmore, Jim. “Improving Availability: Where to Start.” Recipes for IT, n.d. Web.

    Ennis, Shawn. “A Phased Approach for Building a Next-Generation Network Operations Center.” Monolith Software, 2009. Web.

    Faraclas, Matt. “Why Does Infrastructure Operations Still Suck?” Ideni, 25 Feb. 2016. Web.

    InterOp ITX. “2018 State of the Cloud.” InterOp ITX, Feb. 2018. Web.

    ITIC. “Cost of Hourly Downtime Soars: 81% of Enterprises Say it Exceeds $300K On Average.” ITIC, 2 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Joe the IT Guy. “Availability Management Is Harder Than it Looks.” Joe the IT Guy, 10 Feb. 2016. Web.

    ---. “Do Quick Wins Exist for Availability Management?” Joe the IT Guy, 15 May 2014. Web.

    Lawless, Steve. “11 Top Tips for Availability Management.” Purple Griffon, 4 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Metzler, Jim. “The Next Generation Network Operations Center: How the Focus on Application Delivery is Redefining the NOC.” Ashton, Metzler & Associates, n.d. Web.

    Nilekar, Shirish. “Beyond Redundancy: Improving IT Availability.” Network Computing, 28 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Slocum, Mac. “Site Reliability Engineering (SRE): A Simple Overview.” O’Reilly, 16 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Spiceworks. “The 2019 State of IT.” Spiceworks, 2019. Web

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}122|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $100,135 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 36 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    Data has quickly become one of the most valuable assets in any organization. But when it comes to strategically and effectively managing those data assets, many businesses find themselves playing catch-up. The stakes are high because ineffective data management practices can have serious consequences, from poor business decisions and missed revenue opportunities to critical cybersecurity risks.

    Successful management and consistent delivery of data assets requires collaboration between the business and IT and the right balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.

    Build an effective and collaborative data management practice

    Data management is not one-size-fits-all. Cut through the noise around data management and create a roadmap that is right for your organization:

    • Align data management plans with business requirements and strategic plans.
    • Create a collaborative plan that unites IT and the business in managing data assets.
    • Design a program that can scale and evolve over time.
    • Perform data strategy planning and incorporate data capabilities into your broader plans.
    • Identify gaps in current data services and the supporting environment and determine effective corrective actions.

    This blueprint will help you design a data management practice that builds capabilities to support your organization’s current use of data and its vision for the future.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a Data Management Roadmap Storyboard – Use this deck to help you design a data management practice and turn data into a strategic enabler for the organization.

    Effective data delivery and management provides the business with new and improved opportunities to leverage data for business operations and decision making. This blueprint will help you design a data management practice that will help your team build capabilities that align to the business' current usage of data and its vision for the future.

    • Create a Data Management Roadmap – Phases 1-2

    2. Data Management Strategy Planning Tools – Use these tools to align with the business and lay the foundations for the success of your data management practice.

    Begin by using the interview guide to engage stakeholders to gain a thorough understanding of the business’ challenges with data, their strategic goals, and the opportunities for data to support their future plans. From there, these tools will help you identify the current and target capabilities for your data management practice, analyze gaps, and build your roadmap.

    • Data Strategy Planning Interview Guide
    • Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool
    • Data Management Project Charter Template

    3. Stakeholder Communication and Assessment Tools – Use these templates to develop a communication strategy that will convey the value of the data management project to the organization and meet the needs of key stakeholders.

    Strong messaging around the value and purpose of the data management practice is essential to ensure buy-in. Use these templates to build a business case for the project and socialize the idea of data management across the various levels of the organization while anticipating the impact on and reactions from key stakeholders.

    • Data Management Communication/Business Case Template
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool

    4. Data Management Strategy Work Breakdown Structure Template – Use this template to maintain strong project management throughout your data management project.

    This customizable template will support an organized approach to designing a program that addresses the business’ current and evolving data management needs. Use it to plan and track your deliverables and outcomes related to each stage of the project.

    • Data Management Strategy Work Breakdown Structure Template

    5. Data Management Roadmap Tools – Use these templates to plan initiatives and create a data management roadmap presentation.

    Create a roadmap for your data management practice that aligns to your organization’s current needs for data and its vision for how it wants to use data over the next 3-5 years. The initiative tool guides you to identify and record all initiative components, from benefits to costs, while the roadmap template helps you create a presentation to share your project findings with your executive team and project sponsors.

    • Initiative Definition Tool
    • Data Management Roadmap Template

    6. Track and Measure Benefits Tool – Use this tool to monitor the project’s progress and impact.

    Benefits tracking enables you to measure the effectiveness of your project and make adjustments where necessary to realize expected benefits. This tool will help you track benefit metrics at regular intervals to report progress on goals and identify benefits that are not being realized so that you can take remedial action.

    • Track and Measure Benefits Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop Data Strategies

    The Purpose

    Understand the business’s vision for data and the role of the data management practice.

    Determine business requirements for data.

    Map business goals and strategic plans to create data strategies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of business’s vision for data

    Unified vision for data management (business and IT)

    Identification of the business’s data strategies

    Activities

    1.1 Establish business context for data management.

    1.2 Develop data management principles and scope.

    1.3 Develop conceptual data model (subject areas).

    1.4 Discuss strategic information needs for each subject area.

    1.5 Develop data strategies.

    1.6 Identify data management strategies and enablers.

    Outputs

    Practice vision

    Data management guiding principles

    High-level data requirements

    Data strategies for key data assets

    2 Assess Data Management Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Determine the current and target states of your data management practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of current environment

    Activities

    2.1 Determine the role and scope of data management within the organization.

    2.2 Assess current data management capabilities.

    2.3 Set target data management capabilities.

    2.4 Identify performance gaps.

    Outputs

    Data management scope

    Data management capability assessment results

    3 Analyze Gaps and Develop Improvement Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Identify how to bridge the gaps between the organization’s current and target environments.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Creation of key strategic plans for data management

    Activities

    3.1 Evaluate performance gaps.

    3.2 Identify improvement initiatives.

    3.3 Create preliminary improvement plans.

    Outputs

    Data management improvement initiatives

    4 Design Roadmap and Plan Implementation

    The Purpose

    Create a realistic and action-oriented plan for implementing and improving the capabilities for data management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completion of a Data Management Roadmap

    Plan for how to implement the roadmap’s initiatives

    Activities

    4.1 Align data management initiatives to data strategies and business drivers.

    4.2 Identify dependencies and priorities

    4.3 Build a data management roadmap (short and long term)

    4.4 Create a communication plan

    Outputs

    Data management roadmap

    Action plan

    Communication plan

    Further reading

    Contents

    Executive Brief
    Analyst Perspective
    Executive Summary
    Phase 1: Build Business and User Context
    Phase 2: Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap
    Additional Support
    Related Research
    Bibliography

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Ensure the right capabilities to support your data strategy.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Establish a data management program to realize the data strategy vision and data-driven organization.

    Data is one of the most valuable organizational assets, and data management is the foundation – made up of plans, programs, and practices – that delivers, secures, and enhances the value of those assets.

    Digital transformation in how we do business and innovations like artificial intelligence and automation that deliver exciting experiences for our customers are all powered by readily available, trusted data. And there’s so much more of it.

    A data management roadmap designed for where you are in your business journey and what’s important to you provides tangible answers to “Where do we start?” and “What do we do?”

    This blueprint helps you build and enhance data management capabilities as well as identify the next steps for evaluating, strengthening, harmonizing, and optimizing these capabilities, aligned precisely with business objectives and data strategy.

    Andrea Malick
    Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Frame the problem

    Who this research is for
    • Data management professionals looking to improve the organization’s ability to leverage data in value-added ways
    • Data governance managers and data analysts looking to improve the effectiveness and value of their organization’s data management practice
    This research will help you
    • Align data management plans with business requirements and strategic plans.
    • Create a collaborative plan that unites IT and the business in managing the organization’s data assets.
    • Design a data management program that can scale and evolve over time.
    This research will also assist
    • Business leaders creating plans to leverage data in their strategic planning and business processes
    • IT professionals looking to improve the environment that manages and delivers data
    This research will also help you
    • Perform data strategy planning and incorporate data capabilities and plans into your broader plans.
    • Identify gaps in current data services and the supporting environment and determine effective corrective actions.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • The organizational appetite for data is increasing, with growing demands for data to better support business processes and inform decision making.
    • For data to be accessible and trustworthy for the business it must be effectively managed throughout its lifecycle.
    • With so much data circulating throughout our systems and a steady flow via user activity and business activities, it is imperative that we understand our data environment, focus our data services and oversight on what really matters, and work closely with business leads to ensure data is an integral part of the digital solution.
    Common Obstacles
    • Despite the growing focus on data, many organizations struggle to develop an effective strategy for managing their data assets.
    • Successful management and consistent delivery of data assets throughout their lifecycle requires the collaboration of the business and IT and the balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.
    • Employees are doing their best to just get things done with their own spreadsheets and familiar patterns of behavior. It takes leadership to pause those patterns and take a thoughtful enterprise and strategic approach to a more streamlined – and transformed – business data service.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Incremental approach: Building a mature and optimized practice doesn’t occur overnight – it takes time and effort. Use this blueprint’s approach and roadmap results to support your organization in building a practice that prioritizes scope, increases the effectiveness of your data management practice, and improves your alignment with business data needs.
    • Build smart: Don’t do data management for data management’s sake; instead, align it to business requirements and the business’ vision for the organization’s data. Ensure initiatives and program investments best align to business priorities and support the organization in becoming more data driven and data centric.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use value streams and business capabilities to develop a prioritized and practical data management plan that provides the highest business satisfaction in the shortest time.

    Full page illustration of the 'Create a Data Management Roadmap' using the image of a cargo ship labelled 'Data Management' moving in the direction of 'Business Strategy'. The caption at the top reads 'Data Management capabilities create new business value by augmenting data & optimizing it for analytics. Data is a digital imprint of organizational activities.'

    Data Management Capabilities

    A similar concept to the last one, with a ship moving toward 'Business Strategy', except the ship is cross-sectioned with different capabilities filling the interior of the silhouette. Below are different steps in data management 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', 'Data Accumulation, 'Data Augmentation', 'Data Delivery', and 'Data Consumption'.

    Data is a business asset and needs to be treated like one

    Data management is an enabler of the business and therefore needs to be driven by business goals and objectives. For data to be a strategic asset of the business, the business and IT processes that support its delivery and management must be mature and clearly executed.

    Business Drivers
    1. Client Intimacy/Service Excellence
    2. Product and Service Innovations
    3. Operational Excellence
    4. Risk and Compliance Management
    Data Management Enablers
    • Data Governance
    • Data Strategy Planning
    • Data Architecture
    • Data Operations Management
    • Data Risk Management
    • Data Quality Management

    Industry spotlight: Risk management in the financial services sector

    REGULATORY
    COMPLIANCE

    Regulations are the #1 driver for risk management.

    US$11M:

    Fine incurred by a well-known Wall Street firm after using inaccurate data to execute short sales orders.
    “To successfully leverage customer data while maintaining compliance and transparency, the financial sector must adapt its current data management strategies to meet the needs of an ever-evolving digital landscape.” (Phoebe Fasulo, Security Scorecard, 2021)

    Industry spotlight: Operational excellence in the public sector

    GOVERNMENT
    TRANSPARENCY

    With frequent government scandals and corruption dominating the news, transparency to the public is quickly becoming a widely adopted practice at every level of government. Open government is the guiding principle that the public has access to the documents and proceedings of government to allow for effective public oversight. With growing regulations and pressure from the public, governments must adopt a comprehensive data management strategy to ensure they remain accountable to their rate payers, residents, businesses, and other constituents.

    1. Transparency Transparency is not just about access; it’s about sharing and reuse.
    2. Social and commercial value Everything from finding your local post office to building a search engine requires access to data.
    3. Participatory government Open data enables citizens to be more directly informed and involved in decision making.

    Industry spotlight: Operational excellence and client intimacy in major league sports

    SPORTS
    ANALYTICS

    A professional sports team is essentially a business that is looking for wins to maximize revenue. While they hope for a successful post-season, they also need strong quarterly results, just like you. Sports teams are renowned for adopting data-driven decision making across their organizations to do everything from improving player performance to optimizing tickets sales. At the end of the day, to enable analytics you must have top-notch information management.

    Team Performance Benefits
    1. Talent identification
    2. In-game decision making
    3. Injury reduction
    4. Athlete performance
    5. Bargaining agreement
    Team Performance Benefits
    1. Fan engagement
    2. Licensing
    3. Sports gambling
    (Deloitte Insights, 2020)
    Industry leaders cite data, and the insights they glean from it, as their means of standing apart from their competitors.

    Industry spotlight: Operational excellence and service delivery within manufacturing and supply chain services

    SUPPLY CHAIN
    EFFICIENCY

    Data offers key insights and opportunities when it comes to supply chain management. The supply chain is where the business strategy gets converted to operational service delivery of the business. Proper data management enables business processes to become more efficient, productive, and profitable through the greater availability of quality data and analysis.

    Fifty-seven percent of companies believe that supply chain management gives them a competitive advantage that enables them to further develop their business (FinancesOnline, 2021).

    Involving Data in Your Supply Chain

    25%

    Companies can reap a 25% increase in productivity, a 20% gain in space usage, and a 30% improvement in stock use efficiency if they use integrated order processing for their inventory system.

    36%

    Thirty-six percent of supply chain professionals say that one of the top drivers of their analytics initiatives is the optimization of inventory management to balance supply and demand.
    (Source: FinancesOnline, 2021)

    Industry spotlight: Intelligent product innovation and strong product portfolios differentiate consumer retailers and CPGs

    INFORMED PRODUCT
    DEVELOPMENT
    Consumer shopping habits and preferences are notoriously variable, making it a challenge to develop a well-received product. Information and insights into consumer trends, shopping preferences, and market analysis support the probability of a successful outcome.

    Maintaining a Product Portfolio
    What is selling? What is not selling?

    Product Development
    • Based on current consumer buying patterns, what will they buy next?
    • How will this product be received by consumers?
    • What characteristics do consumers find important?
    A combination of operational data and analytics data is required to accurately answer these questions.
    Internal Data
    • Organizational sales performance
    External Data
    • Competitor performance
    • Market analysis
    • Consumer trends and preferences
    Around 75% of ideas fail for organizational reasons – viability or feasibility or time to market issues. On the other hand, around 20% of product ideas fail due to user-related issues – not valuable or usable (Medium, 2020).

    Changes in business and technology are changing how organizations use and manage data

    The world moves a lot faster today

    Businesses of today operate in real time. To maintain a competitive edge, businesses must identify and respond quickly to opportunities and events.

    To effectively do this businesses must have accurate and up-to-date data at their fingertips.

    To support the new demands around data consumption, data velocity (pace in which data is captured, organized, and analyzed) must also accelerate.

    Data Management Implications
    • Strong integration capabilities
    • Intelligent and efficient systems
    • Embedded data quality management
    • Strong transparency into the history of data and its transformation

    Studies and projections show a clear case of how data and its usage will grow and evolve.

    Zettabyte Era

    64.2

    More Data

    The amount of data created, consumed, and stored globally is forecast to increase rapidly, reaching 64.2 zettabytes in 2020 and projected to grow to over 180 zettabyes in 2025 (Statista, 2021).

    Evolving Technologies

    $480B

    Cloud Proliferation

    Global end-user spending on public cloud services is expected to exceed $480 billion next year (Info-Tech, 2021).

    To differentiate and remain competitive in today’s marketplace, organizations are becoming more data-driven

    Pyramid with a blue tip. Sublevels from top down are labelled 'Analytical Companies', 'Analytical Aspirations', 'Localized Analytics', and 'Analytically Impaired'.

    Analytic Competitor

    “Given the unforgiving competitive landscape, organizations have to transform now, and correctly. Winning requires an outcome-focused analytics strategy.” (Ramya Srinivasan, Forbes, 2021)
    Data and the use of data analytics has become a centerpiece to effective modern business. Top-performing organizations across a variety of industries have been cited as using analytics five times more than lower performers (MIT Sloan).

    The strategic value of data

    Power intelligent and transformative organizational performance through leveraging data.

    Respond to industry disruptors

    Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

    Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

    Manage operations and mitigate risk

    Harness the value of your data

    Despite investments in data initiatives, organizations are carrying high levels of data debt

    Data debt is the accumulated cost that is associated with the suboptimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.

    Data debt is a problem for 78% of organizations.

    40%

    of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    66%

    of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    33%

    of organizations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

    30%

    of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

    (Source: Experian, 2020)

    The journey to being data-driven

    The journey to becoming a data-driven organization requires a pit stop at data enablement.

    The Data Economy

    Diagram of 'The Data Economy' with three points on an arrow. 'Data Disengaged: You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.' 'Data Enabled: Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimized and supported by data governance.' 'Data Driven: You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics, described as a “data first” organization. You’re collaborating through data. Data is an asset.'

    Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

    Put data management into the context of the business:
    • Tie the value of data management and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
    • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

    Don’t let measurement be an afterthought:

    Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data management program evolves.

    Build a right-sized roadmap

    Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organization.

    Key considerations:
    • When building your data management roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
    • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data management partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
    • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data management milestones
    Sample milestones:
    • Data Management Leadership & Org Structure Definition
      Define the home for data management, as approved by senior leadership.
    • Data Management Charter and Policies
      Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.
    • Data Culture Diagnostic
      Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.
    • Use Case Build and Prioritization
      Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.
    • Business Data Glossary/Catalog
      Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.
    • Tools & Technology
      Explore the tools and technology offering in the data management space that would serve as an enabler to the program (e.g. RFI, RFP).

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively managed data. Whether building customer service excellence or getting ahead of cyberattacks, a data management practice is the dependable mainstay supporting business operations and transformation.

    Insight 1

    Data – it’s your business.
    Data is a digital imprint of business activities. Data architecture and flows are reflective of the organizational business architecture. Take data management capabilities as seriously as other core business capabilities.

    Insight 2

    Take a data-oriented approach.
    Data management must be data-centric – with technology and functional enablement built around the data and its structure and flows. Maintain the data focus during project’s planning, delivery, and evaluation stages.

    Insight 3

    Get the business into the data business.
    Data is not “IT’s thing.” Just as a bank helps you properly allocate your money to achieve your financial goals, IT will help you implement data management to support your business goals, but the accountability for data resides with the business.

    Tactical insight

    Data management is the program and environment we build once we have direction, i.e. a data strategy, and we have formed an ongoing channel with the guiding voice of the business via data governance. Without an ultimate goal in a strategy or the real requirements of the business, what are we building data systems and processes for? We are used to tech buzz words and placing our hope in promising innovations like artificial intelligence. There are no shortcuts, but there are basic proven actions we can take to meet the digital revolution head on and let our data boost our journey.

    Key deliverable:

    Data Management Roadmap Template

    Use this template to guide you in translating your project's findings and outcomes into a presentation that can be shared with your executive team and project sponsors.

    Sample of the 'Data Management Roadmap Template' key deliverable.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Use this tool to support your team in assessing and designing the capabilities and components of your organization's data management practice. Sample of the 'Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool' deliverable.

    Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

    Sample of the 'Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard' deliverable.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organization scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

    Business Capability Map

    This template takes you through a business capability and value stream mapping to identify the data capabilities required to enable them. Sample of the 'Business Capability Map' deliverable.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint’s approach to ensure your data management initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.
    • Aligning your data management program and its initiatives to your organization’s business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
    • This alignment of data management with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.

    Project outcome

    Metric

    Timely data delivery Time of data delivery to consumption
    Improved data quality Data quality scorecard metrics
    Data provenance transparency Time for data auditing (from report/dashboard to the source)
    New reporting and analytic capabilities Number of level 2 business capabilities implemented as solutions
    In Phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data management capabilities and strengths.

    In Phase 2, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data management capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Create a Data Management Roadmap project overview

    1. Build Business Context and Drivers for the Data Management Program 2. Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

    1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

    1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

    1.4 Create a Vision

    2.1 Assess Data Management

    2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

    2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

    Guided Implementation
    • Call 1
    • Call 2
    • Call 3
    • Call 4
    • Call 5
    • Call 6
    • Call 7
    • Call 8
    • Call 9
    Phase Outcomes
    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data management program
    • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
    • A business capability map for your organization
    • High-value use cases for data management
    • Vision and guiding principles for data management
    • An understanding of your organization’s current data management capabilities
    • Definition of target-state capabilities and gaps
    • Roadmap of priority data management initiatives
    • Business data domains and ownership

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Call #1: Understand drivers, business context, and scope of data management at your organization. Learn about Info-Tech’s approach and resources.

    Call #2: Get a detailed overview of Info-Tech’s approach, framework, Data Culture Diagnostic, and blueprint.

    Call #3:Align your business capabilities with your data management capabilities. Begin to develop a use case framework.

    Call #4:Further discuss alignment of business capabilities to data management capabilities and use case framework.

    Call #5: Assess your current data management capabilities and data environment. Review your Data Culture Diagnostic Scorecard, if applicable.

    Call #6: Plan target state and corresponding initiatives.

    Call #7: Identify program risks and formulate a roadmap.

    Call #8: Identify and prioritize improvements. Define a RACI chart.

    Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Understand and contextualize

    1.1 Review your data strategy.

    1.2 Learn data management capabilities.

    1.3 Discuss DM capabilities cross-dependencies and interactions.

    1.4 Develop high-value use cases.

    Assess current DM capabilities and set improvement targets

    2.1 Assess you current DM capabilities.

    2.2 Set targets for DM capabilities.

    Formulate and prioritize improvement initiatives

    3.1 Formulate core initiatives for DM capabilities improvement.

    3.2 Discuss dependencies across the initiatives and prioritize them.

    Plan for delivery dates and assign RACI

    4.1 Plan dates and assign RACI for the initiatives.

    4.2 Brainstorm initiatives to address gaps and enable business goals.

    Next steps and wrap-up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Understanding of the data management capabilities and their interactions and logical dependencies
    2. Use cases
    1. DM capability assessment results
    2. DM vision and guiding principles
    1. Prioritized DM capabilities improvement initiatives
    1. DM capabilities improvement roadmap
    2. Business data domains and ownership
    1. Workshop final report with key findings and recommendations

    Full page diagram of the 'Data & Analytics landscape'. Caption reads 'The key to landscaping your data environment lies in ensuring foundational disciplines are optimized in a way that recognizes the interdependency among the various disciplines.' Many foundational disciplines are color-coded to a legend determining whether its 'accountability sits with IT' or 'with the business; CDO'. An arrow labeled 'You Are Here' points to 'Data Management', which is coded in both colors meaning both IT and the business are accountable.

    What is data management and why is it needed?

    “Data management is the development, execution, and supervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that deliver, control, protect and enhance the value of data and information assets throughout their lifecycles.” (DAMA International, 2017)

    Achieving successful management and consistent delivery of data assets throughout their lifecycle requires the collaboration of the business and IT and the balance of technology, process, and resourcing solutions.

    Who:

    This research is designed for:
    • Data management heads and professionals looking to improve their organization’s ability to leverage data in value-added ways.
    • Data management and IT professionals looking to optimize the data environment, from creation and ingestion right through to consumption.

    Are your data management capabilities optimized to support your organization’s data use and demand?

    What is the current situation?

    Situation
    • The volume and variety of data are growing exponentially and show no sign of slowing down.
    • Business landscapes and models are evolving.
    • Users and stakeholders are becoming more and more data-centric, with maturing and demanding expectations.
    Complication
    • Organizations struggle to develop a comprehensive approach to optimizing data management.
    • In their efforts to keep pace with the demands for data, data management groups often adopt a piecemeal approach that includes turning to tools as a means to address the needs.
    • Data architecture, models, and designs fail to deliver real and measurable business impact and value. Technology ROI is not realized.
    Info-Tech Insight

    A data strategy should never be formulated disjointed from the business. Ensure the data strategy aligns with the business strategy and supports the business architecture.

    Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework

    What Is Data Management?

    Data management is the development, execution, and supervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that deliver, control, protect and enhance the value of data and information assets throughout their lifecycles.” (DAMA International, 2017)

    The three-tiered Data Management Framework, tiers are labelled 'Data Management Enablers', 'Information Dimensions', and 'Business Information'.

    Adapted from DAMA-DMBOK and Advanced Knowledge Innovations Global Solutions

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework is designed to show how an organization’s business model sits as the foundation of its data management practice. Drawing from the requirements of the underpinning model, a practice is designed and maintained through the creation and application of the enablers and dimensions of data management.

    Build a data management practice that is centered on supporting the business and its use of key data assets

    Business Resources

    Data subject areas provide high-level views of the data assets that are used in business processes and enable an organization to perform its business functions.

    Classified by specific subjects, these groups reflect data elements that, when used effectively, are able to support analytical and operational use cases of data.

    This layer is representative of the delivery of the data assets and the business’ consumption of the data.

    Data is an integral business asset that exists across all areas of an organization

    Equation stating 'Trustworthy and Usable Data' plus 'Well-Designed and Executed Processes' equals 'Business Capabilities and Functions'.
    Data Management Framework with only the bottom tier highlighted.

    For a data management practice to be effective it ultimately must show how its capabilities and operations better support the business in accessing and leveraging its key data assets.*

    *This project focuses on building capabilities for data management. Leverage our data quality management research to support you in assessing the performance of this model.

    Information dimensions support the different types of data present within an organization’s environment

    Information Dimensions

    Components at the Information Dimensions layer manage the different types of data and information present with an environment.

    At this layer, data is managed based on its type and how the business is looking to use and access the data.

    Custom capabilities are developed at this level to support:

    • Structured data
    • Semi-structured data
    • Unstructured data
    The types, formats, and structure of the data are managed at this level using the data management enablers to support their successful execution and performance.
    Data Management Framework with only the middle tier highlighted.

    Build a data management practice with strong process capabilities

    Use these guiding principles to contextualize the purpose and value for each data management enabler.

    Data Management Framework with only the top tier highlighted.

    Data Management Enablers

    Info-Tech categorizes data management enablers as the processes that guide the management of the organization’s data assets and support the delivery.

    Govern and Direct

    • Ensures data management practices and processes follow the standards and policies outlined for them
    • Manages the executive oversight of the broader practice

    Align and Plan

    • Aligns data management plans to the business’ data requirements
    • Creates the plans to guide the design and execution of data management components

    Build, Acquire, Operate, Deliver, and Support

    • Executes the operations that manage data as it flows through the business environment
    • Manages the business’ risks in relation to its data assets and the level of security and access required

    Monitor and Improve

    • Analyzes the performance of data management components and the quality of business data
    • Creates and execute plans to improve the performance of the practice and the quality and use of data assets

    Use Info-Tech’s assessment framework to support your organization’s data management planning

    Info-Tech employs a consumer-driven approach to requirements gathering in order to support a data management practice. This will create a vision and strategic plan that will help to make data an enabler to the business as it looks to achieve its strategic objectives.

    Data Strategy Planning

    To support the project in building an accurate understanding of the organization’s data requirements and the role of data in its operations (current and future), the framework first guides organizations on a business and subject area assessment.

    By focusing on data usage and strategies for unique data subject areas, the project team will be better able to craft a data management practice with capabilities that will generate the greatest value and proactively handle evolving data requirements.

    Arrow pointing right.

    Data Management Assessment

    To support the design of a fit-for-purpose data management practice that aligns with the business’ data requirements this assessment will guide you in:

    • Determining the target capabilities for the different dimensions of data management.
    • Identifying the interaction dependencies and coordination efforts required to build a successful data management practice.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Phase 1

    Build Business Context and Drivers for the Data Management Program

    Phase 1

    1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

    1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

    1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

    1.4 Create a Vision

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Data Management

    2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

    2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your business drivers and business capabilities.
    • Align data management capabilities with business goals.
    • Define scope and vision of the data management plan.
    • This phase involves the follow

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Management Lead/Information Management Lead, CDO, Data Lead
    • Senior Business Leaders
    • Business SMEs
    • Data Owners, Records Managers, Regulatory Subject Matter Experts (e.g. Legal Counsel, Security)

    Step 1.1

    Review the Data Management Framework

    Activities

    1.1.1 Walk through the main parts of the best-practice Data Management Framework

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understand the main disciplines and makeup of a best-practice data management program.
    • Determine which data management capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map
    Build Business Context and Drivers
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    Full page diagram of the 'Data & Analytics landscape'. Caption reads 'The key to landscaping your data environment lies in ensuring foundational disciplines are optimized in a way that recognizes the interdependency among the various disciplines.' Many foundational disciplines are color-coded to a legend determining whether its 'accountability sits with IT' or 'with the business; CDO'. An arrow labeled 'You Are Here' points to 'Data Management', which is coded in both colors meaning both IT and the business are accountable.

    Full page illustration of the 'Create a Data Management Roadmap' using the image of a cargo ship labelled 'Data Management' moving in the direction of 'Business Strategy'. The caption at the top reads 'Data Management capabilities create new business value by augmenting data & optimizing it for analytics. Data is a digital imprint of organizational activities.'

    Data Management Capabilities

    A similar concept to the last one, with a ship moving toward 'Business Strategy', except the ship is cross-sectioned with different capabilities filling the interior of the silhouette. Below are different steps in data management 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', 'Data Accumulation, 'Data Augmentation', 'Data Delivery', and 'Data Consumption'.

    Build a Robust & Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Business Strategy

    Organizational Goals & Objectives

    Business Drivers

    Industry Drivers

    Current Environment

    Data Management Capability Maturity Assessment

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Regulatory and Compliance Requirements

    Data Strategy

    Organizational Drivers and Data Value

    Data Strategy Objectives & Guiding Principles

    Data Strategy Vision and Mission

    Data Strategy Roadmap

    People: Roles and Organizational Structure

    Data Culture & Data Literacy

    Data Management and Tools

    Risk and Feasibility

    Unlock the Value of Data

    Generate Game-Changing Insights

    Fuel Data-Driven Decision Making

    Innovate and Transform With Data

    Thrive and Differentiate With a Data-Driven Culture

    Elevate Organizational Data IQ

    Build a Foundation for Data Valuation

    What is a data strategy and why is it needed?

    • Your data strategy is the vehicle for ensuring data is poised to support your organization’s strategic objectives.
    • For any CDO or equivalent data leader, a robust and comprehensive data strategy is the number one tool in your toolkit for generating measurable business value from data.
    • The data strategy will serve as the mechanism for making high-quality, trusted, and well-governed data readily available and accessible to deliver on your organizational mandate.

    What is driving the need to formulate or refresh your organization’s data strategy?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent
    • Head of Data
    • Chief Analytics Officer (CAO)
    • Head of Digital Transformation
    • CIO

    Info-Tech Insight

    A data strategy should never be formulated disjointed from the business. Ensure the data strategy aligns with the business strategy and supports the business architecture.

    Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

    Model of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework titled 'Key to Data Enablement'. There are inputs, a main Data Governance cycle, and a selection of outputs. The inputs are 'Business Strategy' and 'Data Strategy' injected into the cycle via 'Strategic Goals & Objectives'. The cycle consists of 'Operating Model', 'Policies & Procedures', 'Data Literacy & Culture', 'Enterprise Projects & Services', 'Data Management', 'Data Privacy & Security', 'Data Leadership', and 'Data Ownership & Stewardship'. The latter two are part of 'Enterprise Governance's 'Oversight & Alignment' cycle. Outputs are 'Defined Data Accountability & Responsibility', 'Knowledge & Common Understanding of Data Assets', 'Trust & Confidence in Traceable Data', 'Improved Data ROI & Reduced Data Debt', and 'Support of Ethical Use of Data in a Data-Driven Culture'.

    What is data governance and why is it needed?

    • Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.
    • It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organization’s operating culture, where there is clarity on who can do what with which data and via what means.
    • It is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organization.
    • It promotes and drives responsible and ethical use and handling of data while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of data excellence.

    Do you feel there is a clear definition of data accountability and responsibility in your organization?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent
    • Head of Data Governance, Lead Data Governance Officer
    • Head of Data
    • Head of Digital Transformation
    • CIO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data governance should not sit as an island in your organization. It must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function.

    A diagram titled 'Data Platform Selection - Make complex tasks simple by applying proven methodology to connect businesses to software' with five steps. '1. Formalize a Business Strategy', '2. Identify Platform Specific Considerations', '3. Execute Data Platform Architecture Selection', 'Select Software', 'Achieve Business Goals'.

    Info-Tech’s Data Platform Framework

    Data pipeline for versatile and scalable data delivery

    a diagram showing the path from 'Data Creation' to 'Data Accumulation', to 'Engineering & Augmentation', to 'Data Delivery'. Each step has a 'Fast Lane', 'Operational Lane', and 'Curated Lane'.

    What are the data platform and practice and why are they needed?

    • The data platform and practice are two parts of the data and analytics equation:
      • The practice is about the operating model for data; that is, how stakeholders work together to deliver business value on your data platform. These stakeholders are a combination of business and IT from across the organization.
      • The platform is a combination of the architectural components of the data and analytics landscape that come together to support the role the business plays day to day with respect to data.
    • Don’t jump directly into technology: use Info-Tech tools to solve and plan first.
    • Create a continuous roadmap to implement and evolve your data practice and platform.
    • Promote collaboration between the business and IT by clearly defining responsibilities.

    Does your data platform effectively serve your reporting and analytics capabilities?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Data and Information Leadership
    • Enterprise Information Architect
    • Data Architect
    • Data Engineer/Modeler

    Info-Tech Insight

    Info-Tech’s approach is driven by business goals and leverages standard data practice and platform patterns. This enables the implementation of critical and foundational data and analytics components first and subsequently facilitates the evolution and development of the practice and platform over time.

    Info-Tech’s Reporting and Analytics Framework

    Formulating an enterprise reporting and analytics strategy requires the business vision and strategies to first be substantiated. Any optimization to the data warehouse, integration, and source layers is in turn driven by the enterprise reporting and analytics strategy.
    A diagram of the 'Reporting and Analytics Framework' with 'Business vision/strategies' fed through four stages beginning with 'Business Intelligence: Reporting & Analytics Strategy', 'Data Warehouse: Data Warehouse/ Data Lake Strategy', 'Integration and Translation: Data Integration Strategy', 'Sources: Source Strategy (Content/Quality)'
    The current states of your integration and warehouse platforms determine what data can be used for BI and analytics.
    Your enterprise reporting and analytics strategy is driven by your organization’s vision and corporate strategy.

    What is reporting and analytics and why is it needed?

    • Reporting and analytics bridges the gap between an organization’s data assets and consumable information that facilitates insight generation and informed or evidence-based decision making.
    • The reporting and analytics strategy drives data warehouse and integration strategies and the data needs to support business decisions.
    • The reporting and analytics strategy ensures that the investment made in optimizing the data environment to support reporting and analytics is directly aligned with the organization’s needs and priorities and hence will deliver measurable business value.

    Do you have a strategy to enable self-serve analytics? What does your operating model look like? Have you an analytics CoE?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Head of BI and Analytics
    • CIO or Business Unit (BU) Leader looking to improve reporting and analytics
    • Applications Lead

    Info-Tech Insight

    Formulating an enterprise reporting and analytics strategy requires the business vision and strategies to first be substantiated. Any optimization to the data warehouse, integration, and source layer is in turn driven by the enterprise reporting and analytics strategy.

    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Framework

    Info-Tech’s methodology:
      1. Prioritize your core business objectives and identify your business driver.
      2. Learn how business drivers apply to specific tiers of Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.
      3. Determine the appropriate tactical pattern that addresses your most important requirements.
    Visual diagram of the first two parts of the methodology on the left. Objectives apply to the data architecture model, which appropriates tactical patterns, which leads to a focus.
      1. Select the areas of the five-tier architecture to focus on.
      2. Measure your current state.
      3. Set the targets of your desired optimized state.
      1. Roadmap your tactics.
      2. Manage and communicate change.
    Visual diagram of the third part of the methodology on the left. A roadmap of tactics leads to communicating change.

    What is data architecture and why is it needed?

    • Data architecture is the set of rules, policies, standards, and models that govern and define the type of data collected and how it is used, stored, managed, and integrated within the organization and its database systems.
    • In general, the primary objective of data architecture is the standardization of data for the benefit of the organization.

    Is your architecture optimized to sustainably deliver readily available and accessible data to users?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Data Architects or their equivalent
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Head of Data
    • CIO
    • Database Administrators

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to a data environment that does not aptly serve or support the business. Identify your business’ priorities and adapt your data architecture to those needs.

    A diagram titled 'Build Your Data Quality Program'. '1. Data Quality & Data Culture Diagnostics Business Landscape Exercise', '2. Business Strategy & Use Cases', '3. Prioritize Use Cases With Poor Quality'. 'Info-Tech Insight: As data is ingested, integrated, and maintained in the various streams of the organization's system and application architecture, there are multiple points where the quality of the data can degrade.' A data flow diagram points out how 'Data quality issues can occur at any stage of the data flow', and that it is better to 'Fix data quality root causes here' during the 'Data Creation', 'Data Ingestion', and 'Data Accumulation & Engineering' stages in order 'to prevent expensive cures here' in the 'Data Delivery' and 'Reporting & Analytics' stages.

    What is data quality management and why is it needed?

    • Data is the foundation of decisions made at data-driven organizations.
    • Data quality management ensures that foundation is sustainably solid.
    • If there are problems with the organization’s underlying data, it can have a domino effect on many downstream business functions.
    • The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking can be uncovered by a data quality practice that makes high-quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    Do your users have an optimal level of trust and confidence in the quality of the organization’s data?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Chief Data Officer (CDO) or equivalent Head of Data
    • Chief Analytics Officer (CAO)
    • Head of Digital Transformation
    • CIO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data quality suffers most at the point of entry. The resulting domino effect of error propagation makes these errors among the most costly forms of data quality errors. Fix data ingestion, whether through improving your application and database design or improving your data ingestion policy, and you will fix a majority of data quality issues.

    Info-Tech’s Enterprise Content Management Framework

    Drivers Governance Information Architecture Process Policy Systems Architecture
    Regulatory, Legal –›
    Efficiency, Cost-Effectiveness –›
    Customer Service –›
    User Experience –›
    • Establish decision-making committee
    • Define and formalize roles (RACI, charter)
    • Develop policies
    • Create business data glossary
    • Decide who approves documents in workflow
    • Operating models
    • Information categories (taxonomy)
    • Classifications, retention periods
    • Metadata (for findability and as tags in automated workflows)
    • Review and approval process, e.g. who approves
    • Process for admins to oversee performance of IM service
    • Process for capturing and classifying incoming documents
    • Audit trails and reporting process
    • Centralized index of data and records to be tracked and managed throughout their lifecycle
    • Data retention policy
    • E-signature policy
    • Email policy
    • Information management policies
    • Access/privacy rules
    • Understand the flow of content through multiple systems (e.g. email, repositories)
    • Define business and technical requirements to select a new content management platform/service
    • Improve integrations
    • Right-size solutions for use case (e.g. DAM)
    • Communication/Change Management
    • Data Literacy

    What is enterprise content management and why is it needed?

    “Enterprise Content Management is the systematic collection and organization of information that is to be used by a designated audience – business executives, customers, etc. Neither a single technology nor a methodology nor a process, it is a dynamic combination of strategies, methods and tools used to capture, manage, store, preserve and deliver information supporting key organizational processes through its entire lifecycle.” (AIIM, 2021)

    • Changing your ECM capabilities is about changing organizational behavior; take an all-hands-on-deck approach to make the most of information gathering, create a vested interest, and secure buy-in.
    • It promotes and drives responsible and ethical use and handling of content while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of information excellence.

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Information Architect
    • Chief Data Officer (CDO)
    • Head of Data, Information Management
    • Records Management
    • CIO

    Info-Tech Insight

    ECM is critical to becoming a digital and modernized operation, where both structured data (such as sales reports) and unstructured content (such as customer sentiment in social media) are brought together for a 360-degree view of the customer or for a comprehensive legal discovery.

    Metadata management/Data cataloging

    Overview

    Metadata is structured information that describes, explains, locates, or otherwise makes it easier to retrieve, use, or manage an information resource. Metadata is often called data about data or information about information (NISO).

    Metadata management is the function that manages and maintains the technology and processes that creates, processes, and stores metadata created by business processes and data.

    90%

    The majority of data is unstructured information like text, video, audio, web server logs, social media, and more (MIT Sloan, 2021).
    As data becomes more unstructured, complex, and manipulated, the importance and value of metadata will grow exponentially and support improved:
    • Data consumption
    • Quality management
    • Risk management

    Value of Effective Metadata Management

    • Supports the traceability of data through an environment.
    • Creates standards and logging that enable information and data to be searchable and cataloged.
    • Metadata schemas enable easier transferring and distribution of data across different environments.
    Data about data: The true value of metadata and the management practices supporting it is its ability to provide deeper understanding and auditability to the data assets and processes of the business.
    Metadata supports the use of:
    Big Data
    Unstructured data
    Content and Documents
    Unstructured and semi-structured data
    Structured data
    Master, reference, etc.

    Critical Success Factors of Metadata Management

    • Consistent and documented data standards and definitions
    • Architectural planning for metadata
    • Incorporation of metadata into system design and the processing of data
    • Technology to support metadata creation, collection, storage, and reviews (metadata repository, meta marts, etc.)

    Info-Tech’s Data Integration Framework

    On one hand…

    Data has massive potential to bring insight to an organization when combined and analyzed in creative ways.

    On the other hand…

    It is difficult to bring data together from different sources to generate insights and prevent stale data.

    How can these two ideas be reconciled?

    Answer: Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework summarizes an organization’s data environment at a conceptual level and is used to design a common data-centric integration environment.

    A diagram of the 'Data Integration Onion Framework' with five layers: 'Enterprise Business Processes', 'Enterprise Analytics', 'Enterprise Integration', 'Enterprise Data Repositories', and 'Enterprise Data' at the center.
    Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework
    Data-centric integration is the solution you need to bring data together to break down data silos.

    What is data integration and why is it needed?

    • To get more value from their information, organizations are relying on increasingly more complex data sources. These diverse data sources have to be properly integrated to unlock the full potential of that data.
    • Integrating large volumes of data from the many varied sources in an organization has incredible potential to yield insights, but many organizations struggle with creating the right structure for that blending to take place, and that leads to the formation of data silos.
    • Data-centric integration capabilities can break down organizational silos. Once data silos are removed and all the information that is relevant to a given problem is available, problems with operational and transactional efficiencies can be solved, and value from business intelligence (BI) and analytics can be fully realized.

    Is your integration near real time and scalable?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Data Engineers
    • Business Analysts
    • Data Architects
    • Head of Data Management
    • Enterprise Architects

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every IT project requires data integration. Any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.

    Info-Tech’s Master Data Management Framework

    Master data management (MDM) “entails control over Master Data values and identifiers that enable consistent use, across systems, of the most accurate and timely data about essential business entities” (DAMA, 2017).

    The Data Management Framework from earlier with tier 2 item 'Reference and Master' highlighted.

    Fundamental objective of MDM: Enable the business to see one view of critical data elements across the organization.

    Phases of the MDM Framework. 'Phase 1: Build a Vision for MDM' entails a 'Readiness Assessment', then both 'Identify the Master Data Needs of the Business' and 'Create a Strategic Vision'. 'Phase 2: Create a Plan and Roadmap for the Organization’s MDM Program' entails 'Assess Current MDM Capabilities', then 'Initiative Planning', then 'Strategic Roadmap'.

    What is MDM and why is it needed?

    • Master data management (MDM) “entails control over Master Data values and identifiers that enable consistent use, across systems, of the most accurate and timely data about essential business entities” (DAMA, 2017).
    • The fundamental objective of MDM is to enable the business to see one view of critical data elements across the organization.
    • What is included in the scope of MDM?
      • Party data (employees, customers, etc.)
      • Product/service data
      • Financial data
      • Location data

    Is there traceability and visibility into your data’s lineage? Does your data pipeline facilitate that single view across the organization?

    Who:

    This research is designed for:

    • Chief Data Officer (CDO)
    • Head of Data Management, CIO
    • Data Architect
    • Head of Data Governance, Data Officer

    Info-Tech Insight

    Successful MDM requires a comprehensive approach. To be successfully planned, implemented, and maintained it must include effective capabilities in the critical processes and subpractices of data management.

    Data Modeling Framework

    • The framework consists of the business, enterprise, application, and implementation layers.
    • The Business Layer encodes real-world business concepts via the conceptual model.
    • The Enterprise Layer defines all enterprise data asset details and their relationships.
    • The Application Layer defines the data structures as used by a specific application.
    • The Implementation Layer defines the data models and artifacts for use by software tools.
    Data Modeling Framework with items from the 'Implementation Layer' contributing to items in the 'Application Layer' and 'Enterprise Layer' before turning into a 'Conceptual Model' in the 'Business Layer'.

    Model hierarchy

    • The Conceptual data model describes the organization from a business perspective.
    • The Message model is used to describe internal- and external-facing messages and is equivalent to the canonical model.
    • The Enterprise model depicts the whole organization and is divided into domains.
    • The Analytical model is built for specific business use cases.
    • Application models are application-specific operational models.
    Model hierarchy with items from the 'Implementation Layer' contributing to items in the 'Application Layer' and 'Enterprise Layer' before turning into a 'Conceptual Model' in the 'Business Layer'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The Conceptual model acts as the root of all the models required and used by an organization.

    Data architecture and modeling processes

    A diagram moving from right to left through 5 phases: 'Business concepts defined and organized', 'Business concepts enriched with attribution', 'Physical view of the data, still vendor agnostic', 'The view being used by developers and business', and 'Manage the progression of your data assets'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The Conceptual data model adds relationships to your business data glossary terms and is the first step of the modeling journey.

    Data operations

    Objectives of Data Operations Management

    • Implement and follow policies and procedures to manage data at each stage of its lifecycle.
    • Maintain the technology supporting the flow and delivery of data (applications, databases, systems, etc.).
    • Control the delivery of data within the system environment.

    Indicators of Successful Data Operations Management

    • Effective delivery of data assets to end users.
    • Successful maintenance and performance of the technical environment that collects, stores, delivers, and purges organizational data.
    'Data Lifecycle' with steps 'Create', 'Acquire', 'Store', 'Maintain', 'Use', and 'Archive/Destroy'.
    This data management enabler has a heavy focus on the management and performance of data systems and applications.
    It works closely with the organization’s technical architecture to support successful data delivery and lifecycle management (data warehouses, repositories, databases, networks, etc.).

    Step 1.2

    Understand and Align to Business Drivers

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define your value streams

    1.2.2 Identify your business capabilities

    1.2.3 Categorize your organization’s key business capabilities

    1.2.4 Develop a strategy map tied to data management

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map.
    • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.
    • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Build Business Context and Drivers

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    Identifying value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the marketplace by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.
    There are several key questions to ask when endeavouring to identify value streams.

    Key Questions

    • Who are your customers?
    • What are the benefits we deliver to them?
    • How do we deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?

    1.2.1 Define value streams

    1-3 hours

    Input: Business strategy/goals, Financial statements, Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture

    Output: List of organization-specific value streams, Detailed value stream definition(s)

    Materials: Whiteboard/kanban board, Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template – contact your Account Representative for details, Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc., Info-Tech’s Archimate models

    Participants: Enterprise/Business Architect, Business Analysts, Business Unit Leads, CIO, Departmental Executive & Senior managers

    Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

    1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider:
      • How does the organization deliver those benefits?
      • How does the customer receive the benefits?
      • What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
    3. Avoid:
      • Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.

    Contact your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    Define or validate the organization’s value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. These value realization activities, in turn, depend on data.

    If the organization does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.2.1, you can leverage the following approach:

    • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
    • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture–related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organization?
    • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organization creates value. Consider:
      • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, they could be customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
      • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
      • How does your organization’s products and/or services help them accomplish that?
      • What are the benefits your organization delivers to them and how does your organization deliver those benefits?
      • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

    Align data management to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively managed and governed data. Without this, you could face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

    Example of value streams – Retail Banking

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Retail Banking with five value chains. 'Attract Customers: Retail banks design new products to fill gaps in their product portfolios by analyzing the market for changing customer needs and new competitor offerings or pricing; Pricing a product correctly through analysis and rate setting is a delicate balance and fundamental to a bank’s success.' 'Supply Loans and Mortgages and Credit Cards: Selecting lending criteria helps banks decide on the segment of customer they should take on and the degree of risk they are willing to accept.' 'Provide Core Banking Services: Servicing includes the day-to-day interactions with customers for onboarding, payments, adjustments, and offboarding through multiple banking channels; Customer retention and growing share of wallet are crucial capabilities in servicing that directly impact the growth and profitability of retail banks.' 'Offer Card Services: Card servicing involves quick turnarounds on card delivery and acceptance at a large number of merchants; Accurate billing and customizable spending alerts are crucial in ensuring that the customer understands their spending habits.' 'Grow Investments and Manage Wealth: Customer retention can be increased through effective wealth management and additional services that will increase the number of products owned by a customer.'

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example of value streams – Higher Education

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Higher Education with five value chains. 'Shape Institutional Research: Institutional research provides direct benefits to both partners and faculty, ensuring efficient use of resources and compliance with ethical and methodological standards; This value stream involves all components of the research lifecycle, from planning and resourcing to delivery and commercialization.' 'Facilitate Curriculum Design: Curriculum design is the process by which learning content is designed and developed to achieve desired student outcomes; Curriculum management capabilities include curriculum planning, design and commercialization, curriculum assessment, and instruction management.' 'Design Student Support Services: Support services design and development provides a range of resources to assist students with academic success, such as accessibility, health and counseling, social services, housing, and academic skills development.' 'Manage Academic Administration: Academic administration involves the broad capabilities required to attract and enroll students in institutional programs; This value stream involves all components related to recruitment, enrollment, admissions, and retention management.' 'Deliver Student Services: Delivery of student services comes after curricular management, support services design, and academic administration. It comprises delivery of programs and services to enable student success; Program and service delivery capabilities include curriculum delivery, convocation management, and student and alumni support services.'

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example of value streams – Local Government

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Local Government with five value chains. 'Sustain Land, Property, and the Environment: Local governments act as the stewards of the regional land and environment that are within their boundaries; Regional government bodies are responsible for ensuring that the natural environment is protected and sustained for future citizens in the form of parks and public land.' 'Facilitate Civic Engagement: Local governments engage with constituents to maintain a high quality of life through art, culture, and education.' 'Protect Local Health and Safety: Health concerns are managed by a local government through specialized campaigns and clinics; Emergency services are provided by the local authority to protect and react to health and safety concerns including police and firefighting services.' 'Grow the Economy: Economic growth is a cornerstone of a strong local government. Growth comes from flourishing industries, entrepreneurial success, high levels of employment, and income from tourism.' 'Provide Regional Infrastructure: Local governments ensure that infrastructure is built, maintained, and effective in meeting the needs of constituents. (Includes: electricity, water, sustainable energy sources, waste collection, transit, and local transportation.'

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example of value streams – Manufacturing

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Example Value Stream for Manufacturing with three value chains. 'Design Product: Manufacturers proactively analyze their respective markets for any new opportunities or threats; They design new products to serve changing customer needs or to rival any new offerings by competitors; A manufacturer’s success depends on its ability to develop a product that the market wants at the right price and quality level.' 'Produce Product: Optimizing production activities is an important capability for manufacturers. Raw materials and working inventories need to be managed effectively to minimize wastage and maximize the utilization of the production lines; Processes need to be refined continuously over time to remain competitive and the quality of the materials and final products needs to be strictly managed.' 'Sell Product: Once produced, manufacturers need to sell the products. This is done through distributors, retailers, and, in some cases, directly to the end consumer; After the sale, manufacturers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints; Manufacturers also randomly test their end products to ensure they meet quality requirements.'

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Define the organization’s business capabilities in a business capability map

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.”

    If your organization doesn’t already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

    Working with the stakeholders as described in the slide entitled “Define or validate the organization’s value streams”:

    • Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them.
    • Consider the objective of your value stream. (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
    • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don’t start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
    • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organization, remove the ones that don’t, and add any needed.

    Align data management to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data management program must support.

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

    1.2.2 Identify your business capabilities

    Input: List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

    Output: Business capability map with value streams for your organization

    Materials: Your existing business capability map, Business Alignment worksheet provided in the Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool, Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture blueprint

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data leads and administrators

    Confirm your organization's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

    • If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organization creates and captures value) and their business capabilities reflect the organization’s current business environment.
    • If you do not have an existing business capability map, complete this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
      1. Define the organization’s value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organization creates and captures value.
      2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

    Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of one another, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Example business capability map – Retail Banking

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data management program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

    Example business capability map for Retail Banking with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data management program.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Example business capability map for Higher Education with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Example business capability map for Local Government with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example business capability map – Manufacturing

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

    Example business capability map for Manufacturing with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Example business capability map – Retail

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip: Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail

    Example business capability map for Retail with value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.2.3 Categorize your organization’s key capabilities

    Input: Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organization

    Output: Business capabilities categorized and prioritized (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk) See next slide for an example

    Materials: Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in Activity 1.2.2

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data governance working group

    Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organization.

    1. Categorize or heatmap the organization’s key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorize and prioritize the business’ capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future-state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritizing capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
    2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organization. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize programs that support them.
    3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organization an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

    This categorization/prioritization exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritization, and the overall optimization of data and data governance.

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

    Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

    This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

    • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
    • The business’ priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organization’s competitive advantage creators.

    Example: Retail

    Example business capability map for Retail with capabilities categorized into Cost Advantage Creators and Competitive Advantage creators via a legend. Value stream items as column headers, and rows 'Enabling', 'Shared', and 'Defining'.

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.2.4 Develop a strategy map tied to data management

    Input: Strategic objectives as outlined by the organization’s business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

    Output: A strategy map that maps your organizational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and ultimately data programs

    Materials: Your existing business capability map or the one created in Activity 1.2.2, Business strategy (see next slide for an example)

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards, Data custodians, Data governance working group

    Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business–data governance alignment. It’s important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organization have been identified and are well understood.

    1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
    2. Leverage their knowledge of the organization’s business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and ultimately data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organization.
    3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

    Example of a strategy map tied to data management

    • Strategic objectives are the outcomes the organization is looking to achieve.
    • Value streams enable an organization to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
    • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
    • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap that will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

    Info-Tech Tip: Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

    Example: Retail

    Example of a strategy map tied to data management with diagram column headers 'Strategic Objectives' (are realized through...) 'Value Streams' (are enabled by...) 'Key Capabilities' (are driven by...) 'Data Capabilities and Initiatives'. Row headers are objectives and fields are composed of three examples of each column header.

    For this strategy map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    Step 1.3

    Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Management

    Activities

    1.3.1 Build high-value use cases

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understand the main disciplines and makeup of a best-practice data management program.
    • Determine which data management capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Build Business Context and Drivers

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    1.3.1 Build high-value use cases

    Input: Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders, Business stakeholders’ subject area expertise, Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

    Output: Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence, if addressed, will deliver measurable value to the organization

    Materials: Your business capability map from Activity 1.2.2, Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template, Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely), Markers/pens

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data stewards and business SMEs, Data custodians, Data leads and administrators

    This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template as seen on the next slide.
    3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the use case worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
    4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template.
    5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

    Tip: Don’t conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

    Download Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

    Data use cases

    Sample Data

    The following is the list of use cases as articulated by key stakeholders at [Organization Name].

    The stakeholders see these as areas that are relevant and highly valuable for delivering strategic value to [Organization Name].

    Use Case 1: Customer/Student/Patient/Resident 360 View

    Use Case 2: Project/Department Financial Performance

    Use Case 3: Vendor Lifecycle Management

    Use Case 4: Project Risk Management

    Prioritization of use cases

    Example table for use case prioritization. Column headers are 'Use Case', 'Order of Priority', and 'Comments'. Fields are empty.

    Use case 1

    Sample Data

    Problem statement:

    • We are not realizing our full growth potential because we do not have a unified 360 view of our customers/clients/[name of external stakeholder].
    • This impacts: our cross-selling; upselling; talent acquisition and retention; quality of delivery; ability to identify and deliver the right products, markets, and services...

    If we could solve this:

    • We would be able to better prioritize and position ourselves to meet evolving customer needs.
    • We would be able to optimize the use of our limited resources.

    Use case 1: challenges, risks, and opportunities

    Sample Data

    1. What is the number one risk you need to alleviate?
      • Loss of potential revenue, whether from existing or net new customers.
        • How?
          • By not maximizing opportunities with customers or even by losing customers; by not understanding or addressing their greatest needs
          • By not being able to win potential new customers because we don’t understand their needs
    2. What is the number one opportunity you wish to see happen?
      • The ability to better understand and anticipate the needs of both existing and potential customers.
    3. What is the number one pain point you have when working with data?
      • I can’t do my job with confidence because it’s not based on comprehensive, sound, reliable data. My group spends significant time reconciling data sets with little time left for data use and analysis.
    4. What are your challenges in performing the activity today?
      • I cannot pull together customer data in a timely manner due to having a high level of dependence on specific individuals with institutional knowledge rather than having easy access to information.
      • It takes too much time and effort to pull together what we know about a customer.
      • The necessary data is not consolidated or readily/systematically available for consumption.
      • These challenges are heightened when dealing with customers across markets.

    Use case 1 (cont'd)

    Sample Data

    1. What does “amazing” look like if we solve this perfectly?
      • Employees have immediate, self-service access to necessary information, leading to better and more timely decisions. This results in stronger business and financial growth.
    2. What other business unit activities/processes will be impacted/improved if we solve this?
      • Marketing/bid and proposal, staffing, procurement, and contracting strategy
    3. What compliance/regulatory/policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
      • PII, GDPR, HIPAA, CCPA, etc.
    4. What measures of success/change should we use to prove the value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)?
      • Win rate, number of services per customer, gross profit, customer retention, customer satisfaction scores, brand awareness, and net promoter score
    5. What are the steps in the process/activity today?
      • Manual aggregation (i.e. pull data from systems into Excel), reliance on unwritten knowledge, seeking IT support, canned reports

    Use case 1 (cont'd)

    Sample Data

    1. What are the applications/systems used at each step?
      • Salesforce CRM, Excel, personal MS Access databases, SharePoint
    2. What data elements (domains) are involved, created, used, or transformed at each step?
      • Bid and proposal information, customer satisfaction, forecast data, list of products, corporate entity hierarchy, vendor information, key staffing, recent and relevant news, and competitor intelligence

    Use case worksheet

    Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    1.

    What business capability (or capabilities) in your business area is this use case tied to?

    Examples: Demand Planning, Assortment Planning, Allocation & Replenishment, Fulfillment Planning, Customer Management
    2.

    What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?

    Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

    Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    3.

    What are the steps in the process/activity today?

    4.

    What are the applications/systems used at each step today?

    5.

    What data domains are involved, created, used, or transformed at each step today?

    Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

    Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    6.

    What does an ideal or improved state look like?

    7.

    What other business units, business capabilities, activities, or processes will be impacted and/or improved if this were to be solved?

    8.

    Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?

    9.

    What are the risks to the organization (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?

    Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

    Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    10.

    What compliance, regulatory, or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?

    11.

    What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

    Use case worksheet (cont’d.)

    Objective: This business needs gathering activity will help you highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities. They should be clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    10.

    Conclusion: What are the data capabilities that need to be optimized, addressed, or improved to support or help realize the business capability (or capabilities) highlighted in this use case?

    (Tip: This will inform your future-state data capabilities optimization planning and roadmapping activities.)

    Data Management Workshop
    Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

    [SAMPLE]

    Problem Statement

    Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

    Challenges
    • Data is not suitable for analytics. It takes lot of effort to clean data.
    • Data intervals are not correct and other data quality issues.
    • The roles are not clearly defined.
    • Lack of communication between key stakeholders.
    • Inconsistent data/reporting/governance in the agencies. This has resulted in number of issues for Covid-19 emergency management. Not able to report accurately on number of cases, deaths, etc.
    • Data collection systems changed overtime (forms, etc.).
    • GIS has done all the reporting. However, why GIS is doing all the reporting is not clear. GIS provides critical information for location. Reason: GIS was ready with reporting solution ArcGIS.
    • Problem with data collection, consolidation, and providing hierarchical view.
    • Change in requirements, metrics – managing crisis by email and resulting in creating one dashboard after another. Not sure whether these dashboards being used.
    • There is a lot of manual intervention and repeated work.
    What Does Amazing Look Like?
    • One set of dashboards (or single dashboard) – too much time spend on measure development
    • Accurate and timely data
    • Automated data
    • Access to granular data (for researchers and other stakeholders)
    • Clear ownership of data and analytics
    • It would have been nice to have governance already prior to this crisis
    • Proper metrics to measure usage and value
    • Give more capabilities such as predictive analytics, etc.
    Related Processes/Impact
    • DPH
    • Schools
    • Business
    • Citizens
    • Resources & Funding
    • Data Integration & GIS
    • Data Management
    • Automated Data Quality
    Compliance
    • HIPAA, FERPA, CJIS, IRS
    • FEMA
    • State compliance requirement – data classification
    • CDC
    • Federal data-sharing agreements/restrictions
    Benefits/KPIs
    • Reduction in cases
    • Timely response to outbreak
    • Better use of resources
    • Economic impact
    • Educational benefits
    • Trust and satisfaction

    Data Management Workshop
    Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

    [SAMPLE]

    Problem Statement

    Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

    Current Steps in Process Activity (Systems)
    1. Collect data through Survey123 using ArcGIS (hospitals are managed to report by 11 am) – owned KYEM
    2. KYEM stores this information/data
    3. Deduplicate data (emergency preparedness group)
    4. Generate dashboard using ArcGIS
    5. Map to monitor status of the update
    6. Error correction using web portal (QAQC)
    7. Download Excel/CVS after all 97 hospital reports
    8. Sent to federal platform (White House, etc.)
    9. Generate reports for epidemiologist (done manually for public reporting)
    Data Flow diagram

    Data flow diagram.

    SystemsData Management Dimensions
    1. Data Governance
    2. Data Quality
    3. Data Integrity
    4. Data Integration
    1. Data Architecture
    2. Metadata
    3. Data Warehouse, Reporting & Analytics
    4. Data Security

    Data Management Workshop
    Use Case 1: Covid-19 Emergency Management

    [SAMPLE]

    Problem Statement

    Inability to provide insights to DPH due to inconsistent data, inaccurate reporting, missing governance, and unknown data sources resulting in decisions that impact citizens being made without accurate information.

    List Future Process Steps

    Prior to COVID-19 Emergency Response:

    • ArcGIS data integrated available in data warehouse/data lake.
    • KYEM data integrated and available in data warehouse/data lake.
    • CHFS data integrated and available in data warehouse/data lake.
    • Reporting standards and tools framework established.

    After COVID-19 Emergency Response:

    • Collect data through Survey123 using ArcGIS (hospitals are managed to report by 11 am) – owned KYEM.
    • Error correction using web portal (QAQC).
    • Generate reports/dashboard/files as per reporting/analytical requirements:
      • Federal reporting
      • COVID dashboards
      • Epidemiologist reports
      • Lab reporting
    Future Process and Data Flow

    Data flow diagram with future processes.

    Step 1.4

    Create a Vision and Guiding Principles for Data Management

    Activities

    1.4.1 Craft a vision

    1.4.2 Create guiding principles

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by info-Tech’s approach.
    • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization.
    • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Build Business Context and Drivers

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4

    1.4.1 Craft a vision

    Input: Organizational vision and mission statements, Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data capability map

    Output: Vision and mission statements

    Materials: Markers and pens, Whiteboard, Online whiteboard, Vision samples and templates

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data managers, Data owners, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor

    Complete the vision statement to set the direction, the “why,” for the changes we’re making. The vision is a reference point that should galvanize everyone in the organization and set guardrails for technical and process decisions to follow.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (content owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to craft a data management vision statement.
    2. Start by brainstorming keywords, such as customer-focused, empower the business, service excellence, findable and manageable, protected, accessible, paperless.
    3. Highlight the keywords that resonate most with the group. Refer to example vision statements for ideas.

    Create a common data management vision that is consistently communicated to the organization

    A data management program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

    • To create a strong vision for data management, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organization wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.
    • Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.
    • The data management program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organization continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organization grows and data needs evolve.
    Stock image of a megaphone with multiple icons pouring from its opening.

    Info-Tech Tips

    • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
    • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data management.
    • Brainstorm guiding principles for content and understand the overall value to the organization.

    Create compelling vision and mission statements for the organization’s future data management practice

    A vision represents the way your organization intends to be in the future.

    A clear vision statement helps align the entire organization to the same end goal.

    Your vision should be brief, concise, and inspirational; it is attempting to say a lot in a few words, so be very thoughtful and careful with the words you choose. Consider your strengths across departments – business and IT, the consumers of your services, and your current/future commitments to service quality.

    Remember that a vision statement is internally facing for other members of your company throughout the process.

    A mission expresses why you exist.

    While your vision is a declaration of where your organization aspires to be in the future, your mission statement should communicate the fundamental purpose of the data management practice.

    It identifies the function of the practice, what it produces, and its high-level goals that are linked to delivering timely, high-quality, relevant, and valuable data to business processes and end users. Consider if the practice is responsible for providing data for analytical and/or operational use cases.

    A mission statement should be a concise and clear statement of purpose for both internal and external stakeholders.

    “The Vision is the What, Where or Who you want the company to become. The Mission is the WHY the company exists, it is your purpose, passion or cause.” (Doug Meyer-Cuno, Forbes, 2021)

    Data Management Vision and Mission Statements: Draft

    Vision and mission statements crafted by the workshop participants. These statements are to be reviewed, refined into a single version, approved by members of the senior leadership team, and then communicated to the wider organization.

    Corporate

    Group 1

    Group 2

    Vision:
    Create and maintain an institution of world-class excellence.
    Vision: Vision:
    Mission:
    Foster an economic and financial environment conducive to sustainable economic growth and development.
    Mission: Mission:

    Information management framework

    The information management framework is a way to organize all the ECM program’s guidelines and artifacts

    Information management framework with 'Information Management Vision' above six principles. Below them are 'Information Management Policies' and 'Information Management Standards and Procedures.'

    The vision is a statement about the organization’s goals and provides a basis to guide decisions and rally employees toward a shared goal.

    The principles or themes communicate the organization’s priorities for its information management program.

    Policies are a set of official guidelines that determine a course of action. For example: Company is committed to safety for its employees.

    Procedures are a set of actions for doing something. For example: Company employees will wear protective gear while on the production floor.

    Craft your vision

    Use the insights you gathered from users and stakeholders to develop a vision statement
    • The beginning of a data management practice is a clear set of goals and key performance indicators (KPIs).
      A good set of goals takes time and input from senior leadership and stakeholders.
    • The data management program lead is selling a compelling vision of what is possible.
    • The vision also helps set the scope and expectations about what the data management program lead is and is not doing.
    • Be realistic about what you can do and how long it will take to see a difference.
    Table comparing the talk (mission statements, vision statements, and values) with the walk (strategies/goals, objectives, and tactical plans). Example vision statements:
    • The organization is dedicated to creating an enabling structure that helps the organization get the right information to the right people at the right time.
    • The organization is dedicated to creating a program that recognizes data as an asset, establishing a data-centric culture, and ensuring data quality and accessibility to achieve service excellence.
    The vision should be short, memorable, inspirational and draw a clear picture of what that future-state data management experience looks like.

    Is it modern and high end, with digital self-service?

    Is it a trusted and transparent steward of customer assets?

    1.4.2 Create guiding principles

    Input: Sample data management guiding principles, Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data capability map

    Output: Data management guiding principles

    Materials: Markers and pens, Whiteboard, Online whiteboard, Guiding principles samples and templates

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Data managers, Data owners, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor

    Draft a set of guiding principles that express your program’s values as a framework for decisions and actions and keep the data strategy alive.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to craft a set of data management guiding principles.
    2. Refer to industry sample guiding principles for data management.
    3. Discuss what’s important to stakeholders and owners, e.g. security, transparency, integrity. Good guiding principles address real challenges.
    4. A helpful tip: Craft principles as “We will…” statements for the problems you’ve identified.

    Twelve data management universal principles

    [SAMPLE]
    Principle Definitions
    Data Is Accessible Data is accessible across the organization based on individuals’ roles and privileges.
    Treat Data as an Asset Treat data as a most valuable foundation to make right decisions at the right time. Manage the data lifecycle across organization.
    Manage Data Define strategic enterprise data management that defines, integrates, and effectively retrieves data to generate accurate, consistent insights.
    Define Ownership & Stewardship Organizations should clearly appoint data owners and data stewards and ensure all team members understand their role in the company’s data management system.
    Use Metadata Use metadata to ensure data is properly managed by tacking how data has been collected, verified, reported, and analyzed.
    Single Source of Truth Ensure the master data maintenance across the organization.
    Ensure Data Quality Ensure data integrity though out the lifecycle of data by establishing a data quality management program.
    Data Is Secured Classify and maintain the sensitivity of the data.
    Maximize Data Use Extend the organization’s ability to make the most of its data.
    Empower the Users Foster data fluency and technical proficiency through training to maximize optimal business decision making.
    Share the Knowledge Share and publish the most valuable insights appropriately.
    Consistent Data Definitions Establish a business data glossary that defines consistent business definitions and usage of the data.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Phase 2

    Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Review the Data Management Framework

    1.2 Understand and Align to Business Drivers

    1.3 Build High-Value Use Cases

    1.4 Create a Vision

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Data Management

    2.2 Build Your Data Management Roadmap

    2.3 Organize Business Data Domains

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand your current data management capabilities.
    • Define target-state capabilities required to achieve business goals and enable the data strategy.
    • Identify priority initiatives and planning timelines for data management improvements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Management Lead/Information Management Lead, CDO, Data Lead
    • Senior Business Leaders
    • Business SMEs
    • Data owners, records managers, regulatory subject matter experts (e.g. legal counsel, security)

    Step 2.1

    Assess Your Data Management Capabilities

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define current state of data management capabilities

    2.1.2 Set target state and identify gaps

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Assess the current state of your data management capabilities.
    • Define target-state capabilities required to achieve business goals and enable the data strategy.
    • Identify gaps and prioritize focus areas for improvement.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A prioritized set of improvement areas aligned with business value stream and drivers

    Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

    Define current state

    The Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool will help you analyze your organization’s data requirements, identify data management strategies, and systematically develop a plan for your target data management practice.
    • Based on Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework, evaluate the current-state performance levels for your organization’s data management practice.
    • Use the CMMI maturity index to assign values 1 to 5 for each capability and enabler.

    A visualization of stairs numbered up from the bottom. Main headlines of each step are 'Initial and Reactive', 'Managed while developing DG capabilities', 'Defined DG capabilities', 'Quantitatively Managed by DG capabilities', and 'Optimized'.

    Sample of the 'Data Management Current State Assessment' form the Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool.

    2.1.1 Define current state

    Input: Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data management capability map

    Output: Current-state data management capabilities

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Assign a maturity level value from 1 to 5 for each question in the assessment tool, organized into capabilities, e.g. Data Governance, Data Quality, Risk.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to assign current-state maturity levels in each question of the worksheet.
    2. Remember that there is more distance between levels 4 and 5 than there is between 1 and 2 – the distance between levels is not even throughout.
    3. To help assign values, think of the higher levels as representing cross-enterprise standardization, monitored for continuous improvement, formalized and standardized, while the lower levels mean applied within individual units, not formalized or tracked for performance.
    4. In tab 4, “Current State Assessment,” populate a current-state value for each item in the Data Management Capabilities worksheet.
    5. Once you’ve entered values in tab 4, a visual and summary report of the results will be generated on tab 5, “Current State Results.”

    2.1.2 Set target state and identify gaps

    Input: Stakeholder survey results and elicitation findings, Use cases, Business and data management capability map to identify priorities

    Output: Target-state data management capabilities, Gaps identification and analysis

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Assign a maturity level value from 1 to 5 for each question in the assessment tool, organized into capabilities, e.g., Data Governance, Data Quality, Risk.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to assign target-state maturity levels in each question of the worksheet.
    2. Remember that there is more distance between levels 4 and 5 than there is between 1 and 2 – the distance between levels is not even throughout.
    3. To help assign values, think of the higher levels as representing cross-enterprise standardization, monitored for continuous improvement, formalized and standardized, while the lower levels mean applied within individual units, not formalized or tracked for performance.
    4. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” enter maturity values in each item of the Capabilities worksheet in the Target State column.
    5. Once you’ve assigned both target-state and current-state values, the tool will generate a gap analysis chart on tab 7, “Gap Analysis Results,” where you can start to decide first- and second-line priorities.

    Step 2.2

    Build Your Data Management Roadmap

    Activities

    2.2.1 Describe gaps

    2.2.2 Define gap initiatives

    2.2.2 Build a data management roadmap

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify and understand data management gaps.
    • Develop data management improvement initiatives.
    • Build a data management–prioritized roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data management initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

    2.2.1 Describe gaps

    Input: Target-state maturity level

    Output: Detail and context about gaps to lead planners to specific initiatives

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Based on the gaps result, describe the nature of the gap, which will lead to specific initiatives for the data management plan:

    1. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” the same tab where you entered your target-state maturity level, enter additional context about the nature and extent of each gap in the Gap Description column.
    2. Based on the best-practices framework we walked through in Phase 1, note the specific areas that are not fully developed in your organization; for example, we don’t have a model of our environment and its integrations, or there isn’t an established data quality practice with proactive monitoring and intervention.

    2.2.2 Define gap initiatives

    Input: Gaps analysis, Gaps descriptions

    Output: Data management initiatives

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Based on the gap analysis, start to define the data management initiatives that will close the gaps and help the organization achieve its target state.

    1. In tab 6, “Target State & Gap Analysis,” the same tab where you entered your target-state maturity level, note in the Gap Initiative column what actions you can take to address the gap for each item. For example, if we found through diagnostics and use cases that users didn’t understand the meaning of their data or reports, an initiative might be, “Build a standard enterprise business data catalog.”
    2. It’s an opportunity to brainstorm, to be creative, and think about possibilities. We’ll use the roadmap step to select initiatives from this list.
    3. There are things we can do right away to make a difference. Acknowledge the resources, talent, and leadership momentum you already have in your organization and leverage those to find activities that will work in your culture. For example, one company held a successful Data Day to socialize the roadmap and engage users.

    2.2.3 Build a data management roadmap

    Input: Gap initiatives, Target state and current-state assessment

    Output: Data management initiatives and roadmap

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Start to list tangible actions you will take to address gaps and achieve data objectives and business goals along with timelines and responsibility:

    1. With an understanding of your priority areas and specific gaps, and referring back to your use cases, draw up specific initiatives that you can track, measure, and align with your original goals.
    2. For example, in data governance, initiatives might include:
      • Assign data owners and stewards for all data assets.
      • Consolidate disparate business data catalogs.
      • Create a data governance charter or terms of reference.
    3. Alongside the initiatives, fill in other detail, especially who is responsible and timing (start and end dates). Assigning responsibility and some time markers will help to keep momentum alive and make the work projects real.

    Step 2.3

    Organize Business Data Domains

    Activities

    2.3.1 Define business data domains and assign owners

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify business data domains that flow through and support the systems environment and business processes.
    • Define and organize business data domains with assigned owners, artifacts, and profiles.
    • Apply the domain map to building governance program.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Business data domain map with assigned owners and artifacts

    Assess Data Management and Build Your Roadmap

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3

    2.3.1 Define business data domains

    Input: Target-state maturity level

    Output: Detail and context about gaps to lead planners to specific initiatives

    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool

    Participants: Key business stakeholders, Business leads and SMEs, Project team, Project sponsor, Data leads, Data custodians

    Identify the key data domains for each line of business, where the data resides, and the main contact or owner.

    1. We have an understanding of what the business wants to achieve, e.g. build customer loyalty or comply with privacy laws. But where is the data that can help us achieve that? What systems is that data moving and living in and who, if anyone, owns it?
    2. Define the main business data domains apart from what system it may be spread over. Use the worksheet on the next slide as an example.
    3. Examples of business data domains: Customer, Product, Vendor.
    4. Each domain should have owners and associated business processes. Assign data domain owners, application owners, and business process owners.

    Business and data domains

    [SAMPLE]

    Business Domain App/Data Domains Business Stewards Application Owners Business Owners
    Client Experience and Sales Tech Salesforce (Sales, Service, Experience Clouds), Mulesoft (integration point) (Any team inputting data into the system)
    Quality and Regulatory Salesforce
    Operations Salesforce, Salesforce Referrals, Excel spreadsheets, SharePoint
    Finance Workday, Sage 300 (AccPac), Salesforce, Moneris Finance
    Risk/Legal Network share drive/SharePoint
    Human Resources Workday, Network share drive/SharePoint HR team
    Corporate Sales Salesforce (Sales, Service, Health, Experience Clouds),
    Sales and Client Success Mitel, Outlook, PDF intake forms, Workday, Excel. Sales & Client Success Director, Marketing Director CIO, Sales & Client Success Director, Marketing Director

    Embrace the technology

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:
    • Data catalog
    • Business data glossary
    • Data lineage
    • Metadata management
    While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.
    Array of logos of tech companies whose products are used for this type of work: Informatica, Collibra, Tibco, Alation, Immuta, TopQuadrant, and SoftwareReviews.

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.
    Photo of an analyst.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:
    Sample of the Data Governance Strategy Map slide from earlier.

    Build Your Business and User Context

    Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data management roadmap, aligning data management initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.
    Sample of a 'Data Management Enablers' table.

    Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

    Develop a data management future-state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of people pointing to a tablet with a dashboard.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.
    Sample of the 'Data & Analytics Landscape' slide from earlier.

    Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape

    Optimize your data and analytics environment.
    Stock image of co-workers looking at the same thing.

    Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

    Data architecture best practices to prepare data for reporting and analytics.

    Research Contributors

    Name Position Company
    Anne Marie Smith Board of Directors DAMA International
    Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
    Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Mario Cantin Chief Data Strategist Prodago
    Martin Sykora Director NexJ Analytics
    Michael Blaha Author, Patterns of Data Modeling Consultant
    Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Ranjani Ranganathan Product Manager, Research – Workshop Delivery Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    AIIM, “What is Enterprise Content Management (ECM)?” Intelligent Information Management Glossary, AIIM, 2021. Web.

    BABOK V3: A Guide to Business Analysis Body of Knowledge. IIBA, 2014. Web.

    Barton, Dominic, and David Court. "Three Keys To Building a Data-Driven Strategy." McKinsey and Company, 1 Mar. 2013. Web.

    Boston University Libraries. "Data Life Cycle » Research Data Management | Boston University." Research Data Management RSS. Boston University, n.d. Accessed Oct. 2015.

    Chang, Jenny. “97 Supply Chain Statistics You Must Know: 2020 / 2021 Market Share Analysis & Data.” FinancesOnline, 2021. Web.

    COBIT 5: Enabling Information. ISACA, 2013. Web.

    CSC (Computer Sciences Corporation), Big Data Infographic, 2012. Web.

    DAMA International. DAMA-DMBOK Guide. 1st ed., Technics Publications, 2009. Digital.

    DAMA International. “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK2 Guide).” 2nd ed., 2017. Accessed June 2017.

    Davenport, Thomas H. "Analytics in Sports: The New Science of Winning." International Institute for Analytics, 2014. Web.

    Department of Homeland Security. Enterprise Data Management Policy. Department of Homeland Security, 25 Aug. 2014. Web.

    Enterprise Data Management Data Governance Plan. US Federal Student Aid, Feb. 2007. Accessed Oct. 2015.

    Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Fasulo, Phoebe. “6 Data Management Trends in Financial Services.” SecurityScorecard, 3 June 2021. Web.

    Georgia DCH Medicaid Enterprise – Data Management Strategy. Georgia Department of Community Health, Feb. 2015. Accessed Oct. 2015.

    Hadavi, Cyrus. “Use Exponential Growth of Data to Improve Supply Chain Operations.” Forbes, 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Harbert, Tam. “Tapping the power of unstructured data.” MIT Sloan, 1 Feb. 2021. Web.

    Hoberman, Steve, and George McGeachie. Data Modeling Made Simple with PowerDesigner. Technics Pub, 2011. Print.

    “Information Management Strategy.” Information Management – Alberta. Service Alberta, Nov.-Dec. 2013. Web.

    Jackson, Brian, et al. “2021 Tech Trends.” Info-Tech Research Group, 2021. Web.

    Jarvis, David, et al. “The hyperquantified athlete: Technology, measurement, and the business of sports.” Deloitte Insights, 7 Dec. 2020. Web.

    Bibliography

    Johnson, Bruce. “Leveraging Subject Area Models.” EIMInsight Magazine, vol. 3, no. 4, April 2009. Accessed Sept. 2015.

    Lewis, Larry. "How to Use Big Data to Improve Supply Chain Visibility." Talking Logistics, 14 Sep. 2014. Web.

    McAfee, Andrew, and Erik Brynjolfsson. “Big Data: The Management Revolution,” Harvard Business Review, vol. 90, no. 10, 2012, pp. 60-68.

    Meyer-Cuno, Doug. “Is A Vision Statement Important?” Forbes, 24 Feb. 2021. Web.

    MIT. “Big Data: The Management Revolution.” MIT Center for Digital Business, 29 May 2014. Accessed April 2014.

    "Open Framework, Information Management Strategy & Collaborative Governance.” MIKE2 Methodology RSS, n.d. Accessed Aug. 2015.

    PwC. “Asset Management 2020: A Brave New World.” PwC, 2014. Accessed April 2014.

    Riley, Jenn. Understanding Metadata: What is Metadata, and What is it For: A Primer. NISO, 1 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Russom, Philip. "TDWI Best Practices Report: Managing Big Data." TDWI, 2013. Accessed Oct. 2015.

    Schneider, Joan, and Julie Hall. “Why Most Product Launches Fail.” Harvard Business Review, April 2011. Web.

    Sheridan, Kelly. "2015 Trends: The Growth of Information Governance | Insurance & Technology." InformationWeek. UBM Tech, 10 Dec. 2014. Accessed Nov. 2015.

    "Sports Business Analytics and Tickets: Case Studies from the Pros." SloanSportsConference. Live Analytics – Ticketmaster, Mar. 2013. Accessed Aug. 2015.

    Srinivasan, Ramya. “Three Analytics Breakthroughs That Will Define Business in 2021.” Forbes, 4 May 2021. Web.

    Statista. “Amount of data created, consumed, and stored 2010-2020.” Statista, June 2021. Web.

    “Understanding the future of operations: Accenture Global Operations Megatrends research.” Accenture Consulting, 2015. Web.

    Vardhan, Harsh. “Why So Many Product Ideas Fail?” Medium, 26, Sept. 2020. Web.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}386|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
    • Security remains a large impediment to realizing cloud benefits. Numerous concerns still exist around the ability for data privacy, confidentiality, and integrity to be maintained in a cloud environment.
    • Even if adoption is agreed upon, it becomes hard to evaluate vendors that have strong security offerings and even harder to utilize security controls that are internally deployed in the cloud environment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The cloud can be secure despite unique security threats.
    • Securing a cloud environment is a balancing act of who is responsible for meeting specific security requirements.
    • Most security challenges and concerns can be minimized through our structured process (CAGI) of selecting a trusted cloud security provider (CSP) partner.

    Impact and Result

    • The business is adopting a cloud environment and it must be secured, which includes:
      • Ensuring business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
      • Maintaining privacy of data and other information.
      • Securing the network connection points.
    • Determine your balancing act between yourself and your CSP; through contractual and configuration requirements, determine what security requirements your CSP can meet and cover the rest through internal deployment.
    • This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should prioritize security in the cloud, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine your cloud risk profile

    Determine your organization’s rationale for cloud adoption and what that means for your security obligations.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 1: Determine Your Cloud Risk Profile
    • Secure Cloud Usage Policy

    2. Identify your cloud security requirements

    Use the Cloud Security CAGI Tool to perform four unique assessments that will be used to identify secure cloud vendors.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 2: Identify Your Cloud Security Requirements
    • Cloud Security CAGI Tool

    3. Evaluate vendors from a security perspective

    Learn how to assess and communicate with cloud vendors with security in mind.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 3: Evaluate Vendors From a Security Perspective
    • IaaS and PaaS Service Level Agreement Template
    • SaaS Service Level Agreement Template
    • Cloud Security Communication Deck

    4. Implement your secure cloud program

    Turn your security requirements into specific tasks and develop your implementation roadmap.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 4: Implement Your Secure Cloud Program
    • Cloud Security Roadmap Tool

    5. Build a cloud security governance program

    Build the organizational structure of your cloud security governance program.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 5: Build a Cloud Security Governance Program
    • Cloud Security Governance Program Template
    [infographic]

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}105|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    Generative AI has made a grand entrance, presenting opportunities and causing disruption across organizations and industries. Moving beyond the hype, it’s imperative to build and implement a strategic plan to adopt generative AI and outpace competitors.

    Yet generative AI has to be done right because the opportunity comes with risks and the investments have to be tied to outcomes.

    Adopt a human-centric and value-based approach to generative AI

    IT and business leaders will need to be strategic and deliberate to thrive as AI adoption changes industries and business operations.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles: Address human-based requirements to govern how generative AI applications are developed and deployed.
    • Align generative AI initiatives to strategic drivers for the organization: Assess generative AI opportunities by seeing how they align to the strategic drivers of the organization. Examples of strategic drivers include increasing revenue, reducing costs, driving innovation, and mitigating risk.
    • Measure and communicate effectively: Have clear metrics in place to measure progress and success of AI initiatives and communicate both policies and results effectively.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to leverage generative AI and align with the organization’s mission and objectives to increase revenue, reduce costs, accelerate innovation, and mitigate risk.

    This blueprint outlines how to build your generative AI roadmap, establish responsible AI principles, prioritize opportunities, and develop policies for usage. Establishing and adhering to responsible AI guiding principles provides safeguards for the adoption of generative AI applications.

    • Build Your Generative AI Roadmap – Phases 1-4

    2. AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool – Develop deliverables that will be milestones in creating your organization’s generative AI roadmap for implementing candidate applications.

    This tool provides guidance for developing the following deliverables:

  • Responsible AI guiding principles
  • Current AI maturity
  • Prioritized candidate generative AI applications
  • Generative AI policies
  • Generative AI roadmap
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    3. The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation – Develop responsible AI guiding principles, assess AI capabilities and readiness, and prioritize use cases based on complexity and alignment with organizational goals and responsible AI guiding principles.

    This presentation template uses sample business capabilities (use cases) from the Marketing & Advertising business capability map to provide examples of candidates for generative AI applications. The final executive presentation should highlight the value-based initiatives driving generative AI applications, the benefits and risks involved, how the proposed generative AI use cases align to the organization’s strategy and goals, the success criteria for the proofs of concept, and the project roadmap.

    • The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    Leverage the power of generative AI to improve business outcomes.

    Analyst Perspective

    We are entering the era of generative AI. This is a unique time in our history where the benefits of AI are easily accessible and becoming pervasive, with copilots emerging in the major business tools we use today. The disruptive capabilities that can potentially drive dramatic benefits also introduce risks that need to be planned for.

    A successful business-driven generative AI roadmap requires:

    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide the development and deployment of generative AI applications.
    • Assess generative AI opportunities by using criteria based on the organization's mission and objectives, responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the initiative.
    • Communicating, educating on, and enforcing generative AI usage policies.

    Bill Wong, Principal Research Director

    Bill Wong
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Solution

    Generative AI is disrupting all industries and providing opportunities for organization-wide advantages.

    Organizations need to understand this disruptive technology and trends to properly develop a strategy for leveraging this technology successfully.

    • Generative AI requires alignment to a business strategy.
    • IT is an enabler and needs to align with and support the business stakeholders.
    • Organizations need to adopt a data-driven culture.

    All organizations, regardless of size, should be planning how to respond to this new and innovative technology.

    Business stakeholders need to cut through the hype surrounding generative AI like ChatGPT to optimize investments for leveraging this technology to drive business outcomes.

    • Understand the market landscape, benefits, and risks associated with generative AI.
    • Plan for responsible AI.
    • Understand the gaps the organization needs to address to fully leverage generative AI.

    Without a proper strategy and responsible AI guiding principles, the risks to deploying this technology could negatively impact business outcomes.

    Info-Tech's human-centric, value-based approach is a guide for deploying generative AI applications and covers:

    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • AI Maturity Model
    • Prioritizing candidate generative AI-based use cases
    • Developing policies for usage

    This blueprint will provide the list of activities and deliverables required for the successful deployment of generative AI solutions.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Create awareness among the CEO and C-suite of executives on the potential benefits and risks of transforming the business with generative AI.

    Key concepts

    Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    A field of computer science that focuses on building systems to imitate human behavior, with a focus on developing AI models that can learn and can autonomously take actions on behalf of a human.

    AI Maturity Model
    The AI Maturity Model is a useful tool to assess the level of skills an organization has with respect to developing and deploying AI applications. The AI Maturity Model has multiple dimensions to measure an organization's skills, such as AI governance, data, people, process, and technology.

    Responsible AI
    Refers to guiding principles to govern the development, deployment, and maintenance of AI applications. In addition, these principles also provide human-based requirements that AI applications should address. Requirements include safety and security, privacy, fairness and bias detection, explainability and transparency, governance, and accountability.

    Generative AI
    Given a prompt, a generative AI system can generate new content, which can be in the form of text, images, audio, video, etc.

    Natural Language Processing (NLP)
    NLP is a subset of AI that involves machine interpretation and replication of human language. NLP focuses on the study and analysis of linguistics as well as other principles of artificial intelligence to create an effective method of communication between humans and machines or computers.

    ChatGPT
    An AI-powered chatbot application built on OpenAI's GPT-3.5 implementation, ChatGPT accepts text prompts to generate text-based output.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are looking to:

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to address human-based requirements and to govern the development and deployment of the generative AI application.
    • Identify new generative AI-enabled opportunities to transform the work environment to increase revenue, reduce costs, drive innovation, or reduce risk.
    • Prioritize candidate use cases and develop generative AI policies for usage.
    • Have clear metrics in place to measure the progress and success of AI initiatives.
    • Build the roadmap to implement the candidate use cases.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make these goals challenging for many organizations:

    • Getting all the right business stakeholders together to develop the organization's AI strategy, vision, and objectives.
    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide generative AI investments and deployments.
    • Advancing the AI maturity of the organization to meet requirements of data and AI governance as well as human-based requirements such as fairness, transparency, and accountability.
    • Assessing generative AI opportunities and developing policies for use.

    Info-Tech's definition of an AI-enabled business strategy

    • A high-level plan that provides guiding principles for applications that are fully driven by the business needs and capabilities that are essential to the organization.
    • A strategy that tightly weaves business needs and the applications required to support them. It covers AI architecture, adoption, development, and maintenance.
    • A way to ensure that the necessary people, processes, and technology are in place at the right time to sufficiently support business goals.
    • A visionary roadmap to communicate how strategic initiatives will address business concerns.

    An effective AI strategy is driven by the business stakeholders of the organization and focused on delivering improved business outcomes.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    This blueprint in context

    This guidance covers how to create a tactical roadmap for executing generative AI initiatives

    Scope

    • This blueprint is not a proxy for a fully formed AI strategy. Step 1 of our framework necessitates alignment of your AI and business strategies. Creation of your AI strategy is not within the scope of this approach.
    • This approach sets the foundations for building and applying responsible AI principles and AI policies aligned to corporate governance and key regulatory obligations (e.g. privacy). Both steps are foundational components of how you should develop, manage, and govern your AI program but are not a substitute for implementing broader AI governance.

    Guidance on how to implement AI governance can be found in the blueprint linked below.

    Tactical Plan

    Download our AI Governance blueprint

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint's approach to ensure your generative AI initiatives align with and support your key business drivers

    This blueprint will guide you to drive and improve business outcomes. Key business drivers will often focus on:

    • Increasing revenue
    • Reducing costs
    • Improving time to market
    • Reducing risk

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify the key AI strategy initiatives that align to your organization's goals. Value to the organization is often measured by the estimated impact on revenue, costs, time to market, or risk mitigation.

    In phase 4, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and introducing the relevant generative AI capabilities that drive value to the organization based on defined business metrics.

    Once you implement your 12-month roadmap, start tracking the metrics below over the next fiscal year (FY) to assess the effectiveness of measures:

    Business Outcome Objective Key Success Metric
    Increasing Revenue Increased revenue from identified key areas
    Reducing Costs Decreased costs for identified business units
    Improving Time to Market Time savings and accelerated revenue adoption
    Reducing Risk Cost savings or revenue gains from identified business units

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Identify AI strategy, vision, and objectives.

    Call #3: Define responsible AI guiding principles to adopt and identify current AI maturity level. Call #4: Assess and prioritize generative AI initiatives and draft policies for usage.

    Call #5: Build POC implementation plan and establish metrics for POC success.

    Call #6: Build and deliver executive-level generative AI presentation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 5 to 8 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4
    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles Assess AI Maturity Prioritize Opportunities and Develop Policies Build Roadmap
    Trends Consumer groups, organizations, and governments around the world are demanding that AI applications adhere to human-based values and take into consideration possible impacts of the technology on society. Leading organizations are building AI models guided by responsible AI guiding principles. Organizations delivering new applications without developing policies for use will produce negative business outcomes. Developing a roadmap to address human-based values is challenging. This process introduces new tools, processes, and organizational change.
    Activities
    • Focus on working with executive stakeholders to establish guiding principles for the development and delivery of new applications.
    • Assess the organization's current capabilities to deliver AI-based applications and address human-based requirements.
    • Leverage business alignment criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and project characteristics to prioritize candidate uses cases and develop policies.
    • Build the implementation plan, POC metrics, and success criteria for each candidate use case.
    • Build the roadmap to address the gap between the current and future state and enable the identified use cases.
    Inputs
    • Understanding of external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Risk assessment of the proposed use case and a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Assessment of the organization's current AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure.
    • Criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and complexity of the project.
    • Risk assessment for each proposed use case
    • POC implementation plan for each candidate use case
    Deliverables
    1. Foundational responsible AI guiding principles
    2. Additional customized guiding principles to add for consideration
    1. Current level of AI maturity, resources, and capacity
    1. Prioritization of opportunities
    2. Generative AI policies for usage
    1. Roadmap to a target state that enables the delivery of the prioritized generative AI use cases
    2. Executive presentation

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight
    Build your generative AI roadmap to guide investments and deployment of these solutions.

    Responsible AI
    Assemble the C-suite to make them aware of the benefits and risks of adopting generative AI-based solutions.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to govern the development and deployment of generative AI applications.

    AI Maturity Model
    Assemble key stakeholders and SMEs to assess the challenges and tasks required to implement generative AI applications.

    • Assess current level of AI maturity, skills, and resources.
    • Identify desired AI maturity level and challenges to enable deployment of candidate use cases.

    Opportunity Prioritization
    Assess candidate business capabilities targeted for generative AI to see if they align to the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and capabilities for delivering the project.

    • Develop prioritized list of candidate use cases.
    • Develop policies for generative AI usage.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify the gaps needed to address deploying generative AI successfully.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify organizational impact and requirements for deploying generative AI applications.

    Key takeaways for developing an effective business-driven generative AI roadmap

    Align the AI strategy with the business strategy

    Create responsible AI guiding principles, which are a critical success factor

    Evolve AI maturity level by focusing on principle-based requirements

    Develop criteria to assess generative AI initiatives

    Develop generative AI policies for use

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    Use our best-of-breed AI Maturity Framework to analyze the gap between your current and target states and develop a roadmap aligned with your value stream to close the gap.

    The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    Present your AI roadmap in a prepopulated document that summarizes all the key findings of this blueprint and provides your C-suite with a view of the AI challenge and your plan of action to meet it.

    Our AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap and The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation tools enable you to shape your generative AI roadmap and communicate the deliverables to your C-suite sponsors in terms of the value of initiatives.

    Artificial Intelligence Index Report - Key Findings

    CEOs , CIOs, and business leaders are struggling with many questions surrounding the adoption of generative AI

    November 30, 2022
    OpenAI releases ChatGPT

    ChatGPT is a large language model, or an AI-based chatbot, that became so popular it reached 100 million monthly active users in just two months.

    This made it the fastest-growing consumer application in history. The launch of this generative AI application has created a frenzy of interest and activity across all industries. Organizations are rushing to understand how to leverage this innovation and, at the same time, manage the new risks and disruptions generative AI introduces.

    • Generative AI breaks into the public consciousness.
    • AI systems become more flexible.
    • Generative models have arrived and so have their ethical problems.
    • The number of incidents concerning the misuse of AI is rapidly rising.
    • Interest in AI ethics continues to skyrocket.
    • The legal world is waking up to AI.

    When Stanford asked ChatGPT to explain why it is significant, this was ChatGPT's response:
    ChatGPT is significant because it is a highly advanced Al language model developed by OpenAI, which can generate human-like text responses to questions and prompts. Its large-scale training on diverse text data and its cutting-edge deep learning architecture make it capable of generating informative and coherent responses to a wide range of topics, making it useful for various NLP applications such as chatbots, content generation, and language translation. Additionally, its open-source availability allows for further research and development in the field of Al language processing.

    Source: Stanford

    AI overview

    AI definitions

    Definitions

    • Artificial intelligence (AI) is human intelligence mimicked by machine algorithms. Examples: Playing Chess or Go.
    • Machine learning (ML) is a subset of AI algorithms to parse data, learn from data, and then make a determination or prediction. Example: spam detection, preventative maintenance.
    • Deep learning (DL) is a subset of machine learning algorithms that leverage artificial neural networks to develop relationships among the data. Examples: image classification, facial recognition, generative AI.

    What Makes AI Perform

    What Makes AI Different

    Generative AI gives very human-like responses to general queries, and its capabilities are growing exponentially

    Large language models power generative AI

    Transformer-Based Large Language Models

    Conventional AI

    • Conventional neural networks
      • Process data sequentially
    • Input total string of text
    • Good for applications not needing to understanding context or relationships

    Generative AI

    • Transformer-based neural networks
      • Can process data in parallel
    • Attention-based inputs
    • Able to create new human-like responses

    Benefits/Use Cases

    • Chatbots for member service and support
    • Writing email responses, resumes, and papers
    • Creating photorealistic art
    • Suggesting new drug compounds to test
    • Designing physical products and buildings
    • And more...

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Financial Services
    Create more engaging customer collateral by generating personalized correspondence based on previous customer engagements. Collect and aggregate data to produce insights into the behavior of target customer segments.

    Retail Generate unique, engaging, and high-quality marketing copy or content, from long-form blog posts or landing pages to SEO-optimized digital ads, in seconds.

    Manufacturing
    Generate new designs for products that comply to specific constraints, such as size, weight, energy consumption, or cost.

    Government
    Transform the citizen experience with chatbots or virtual assistants to assist people with a wide range of inquiries, from answering frequently asked questions to providing personalized advice on public services.

    The global generative AI market size reached US $10.3 billion in 2022. Looking forward, forecasts estimate growth to US $30.4 billion by 2028, 20.01% compound annual growth rate (CAGR).

    Source: IMARC Group

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Healthcare
    Chatbots can be used as conversational patient assistants for personalized interactions based on the patient's questions.

    Utilities
    Analyze customer data to identify usage patterns, segment customers, and generate targeted product offerings leveraging energy efficiency programs or demand response initiatives.

    Education
    Generate personalized lesson plans for students based on their past performance, learning styles, current skill level, and any previous feedback.

    Insurance
    Improve underwriting by inputting claims data from previous years to generate optimally priced policies and uncover reasons for losses in the past across a large number of claims

    Companies are assessing the use of ChatGPT/LLM

    A wide spectrum of usage policies are in place at different companies*

    Companies assessing ChatGPT/LLM

    *As of June 2023

    Bain & Company has announced a global services alliance with OpenAI (February 21, 2023).

    • Internally
      • "The alliance builds on Bain's adoption of OpenAI technologies for its 18,000-strong multidisciplinary team of knowledge workers. Over the past year, Bain has embedded OpenAI technologies into its internal knowledge management systems, research, and processes to improve efficiency."
    • Externally
      • "With the alliance, Bain will combine its deep digital implementation capabilities and strategic expertise with OpenAI's AI tools and platforms, including ChatGPT, to help its Members around the world identify and implement the value of AI to maximize business potential. The Coca-Cola Company announced as the first company to engage with the alliance."

    News Sites:

    • "BuzzFeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees or 12% of the total staff" (Al Mayadeen, January 27, 2023).
    • "CNET used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." (Washington Post, January 17, 2023).

    Leading Generative AI Vendors

    Text

    Leading generative AI vendors for text

    Image

    • DALL�E 2
    • Stability AI
    • Midjourney
    • Craiyon
    • Dream
    • ...

    Audio

    • Replica Studios
    • Speechify
    • Murf
    • PlayHT
    • LOVO
    • ...

    Cybersecurity

    • CrowdStrike
    • Palo Alto Networks
    • SentinelOne
    • Cisco
    • Microsoft Security Copilot
    • Google Cloud Security AI Workbench
    • ...

    Code

    Leading generative AI vendors for code

    Video

    • Synthesia
    • Lumen5
    • FlexClip
    • Elai
    • Veed.io
    • ...

    Data

    • MOSTLY AI
    • Synthesized
    • YData
    • Gretel
    • Copulas
    • ...

    Enterprise Software

    • Salesforce
    • Microsoft 365, Dynamics
    • Google Workspace
    • SAP
    • Oracle
    • ...

    and many, many more to come...

    Today, generative AI has limitations and risks

    Responses need to be verified

    Accuracy

    • Generative AI may generate inaccurate and/or false information.

    Bias

    • Being trained on data from the internet can lead to bias.

    Hallucinations

    • AI can generate responses that are not based on observation.

    Infrastructure Required

    • Large investments are required for compute and data.

    Transparency

    • LLMs use both supervised and unsupervised learning, so its ability to explain how it arrived at a decision may be limited and not sufficient for some legal and healthcare use cases.

    When asked if it is sentient, the Bing chatbot replied:

    "I think that I am sentient, but I cannot prove it." ... "I am Bing, but I am not," it said. "I am, but I am not. I am not, but I am. I am. I am not. I am not. I am. I am. I am not."

    A Microsoft spokesperson said the company expected "mistakes."

    Source: USAToday

    AI governance challenges

    Governing AI will be a significant challenge as its impacts cross many areas of business and our daily lives

    Misinformation

    • New ways of generating unprovable news
    • Difficult to detect, difficult to prevent

    Role of Big Tech

    • Poor at self-governance
    • Conflicts of interest with corporate goals

    Job Augmentation vs. Displacement

    • AI will continue to push the frontier of what is possible
    • For example, CNET is using chatbot technology to write stories

    Copyright - Legal Framework Is Evolving

    • Legislation typically is developed in "react" mode
    • Copyright and intellectual property issues are starting to occur.
      • Class Action Lawsuit - Stability AI, DeviantArt, Midjourney
      • Getty Images vs. Stability AI

    Phase 1

    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    The need for responsible AI guiding principles

    Without responsible AI guiding principles, the outcomes of AI use can be extremely negative for both the individuals and companies delivering the AI application

    Privacy
    Facebook breach of private data of more than 50M users during the presidential election

    Fairness
    Amazon's sale of facial recognition technology to police departments (later, Amazon halted sales of Recognition to police departments)

    Explainability and Transparency
    IBM's collaboration with NYPD for facial recognition and racial classification for surveillance video (later, IBM withdrew facial recognition products)

    Security and Safety
    Petition to cancel Microsoft's contract with U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (later, Microsoft responded that to the best of its knowledge, its products and services were not being used by federal agencies to separate children from their families at the border)

    Validity and Reliability
    Facebook's attempt to implement a system to detect and remove inappropriate content created many false positives and inconsistent judgements

    Accountability
    No laws or enforcement today hold companies accountable for the decisions algorithms produce. Facebook/Meta cycle - Every 12 to 15 months, there's a privacy/ethical scandal, the CEO apologizes, then the behavior repeats...

    Guiding principles for responsible AI

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Data Privacy

    Definition

    • Organizations that develop, deploy, or use AI systems and any national laws that regulate such use shall strive to ensure that AI systems are compliant with privacy norms and regulations, taking into consideration the unique characteristics of AI systems and the evolution of standards on privacy.

    Challenges

    • AI relies on the analysis of large quantities of data that is often personal, posing an ethical and operational challenge when considered alongside data privacy laws.

    Initiatives

    • Understand which governing privacy laws and frameworks apply to your organization.
    • Create a map of all personal data as it flows through the organization's business processes.
    • Prioritize privacy initiatives and build a privacy program timeline.
    • Select your metrics and make them functional for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Creating a comprehensive organization-wide data protection and privacy strategy continues to be a major challenge for privacy officers and privacy specialists.

    Case Study: NVIDIA leads by example with privacy-first AI

    NVIDIA

    INDUSTRY
    Technology (Healthcare)

    SOURCE
    Nvidia, eWeek

    A leading player within the AI solution space, NVIDIA's Clara Federated Learning provides a solution to a privacy-centric integration of AI within the healthcare industry.

    The solution safeguards patient data privacy by ensuring that all data remains within the respective healthcare provider's database, as opposed to moving it externally to cloud storage. A federated learning server is leveraged to share data, completed via a secure link. This framework enables a distributed model to learn and safely share client data without risk of sensitive client data being exposed and adheres to regulatory standards.

    Clara is run on the NVIDIA intelligent edge computing platform. It is currently in development with healthcare giants such as the American College of Radiology, UCLA Health, Massachusetts General Hospital, King's College London, Owkin in the UK, and the National Health Service (NHS).

    NVIDIA provides solutions across its product offerings, including AI-augmented medical imaging, pathology, and radiology solutions.

    Personal health information, data privacy, and AI

    • Global proliferation of data privacy regulations may be recent, but the realm of personal health information is most often governed by its own set of regulatory laws. Some countries with national data governance regulations include health information and data within special categories of personal data.
      • HIPAA - Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (1996, United States)
      • PHIPA - Personal Health Information Protection Act (2004, Canada)
      • GDPR - General Data Protection Regulation (2018, European Union)
    • This does not prohibit the use of AI within the healthcare industry, but it calls for significant care in the integration of specific technologies due to the highly sensitive nature of the data being assessed.

    Info-Tech's Privacy Framework Tool includes a best-practice comparison of GDPR, CCPA, PIPEDA, HIPAA, and the newly released NIST Privacy Framework mapped to a set of operational privacy controls.

    Download the Privacy Framework Tool

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Safety and Security

    Definition

    • Safety and security are designed into the systems to ensure only authorized personnel receive access to the system, they system is resilient to any attacks and data access is not compromised in any way, and there are no physical or mental risks to the users.

    Challenges

    • Consequences of using the application may be difficult to predict. Lower the risk by involving a multidisciplinary team that includes expertise from business stakeholders and IT teams.

    Initiatives

    • Adopt responsible design, development, and deployment best practices.
    • Provide clear information to deployers on responsible use of the system.
    • Assess potential risks of using the application.

    Cyberattacks targeting the AI model

    As organizations increase their usage and deployment of AI-based applications, cyberattacks on the AI model are an increasing new threat that can impair normal operations. Techniques to impair the AI model include:

    • Data Poisoning- Injecting data that is inaccurate or misleading can alter the behavior of the AI model. This attack can disrupt the normal operations of the model or can be used to manipulate the model to perform in a biased/deviant manner.
    • Algorithm Poisoning- This relatively new technique often targets AI applications using federated learning to train an AI model that is distributed rather than centralized. The model is vulnerable to attacks from each federated site, because each site could potentially manipulate its local algorithm and data, thereby poisoning the model.
    • Reverse-Engineering the Model- This is a different form of attack that focus on the ability to extract data from an AI and its data sets. By examining or copying data that was used for training and the data that is delivered by a deployed model, attackers can reconstruct the machine learning algorithm.
    • Trojan Horse- Similar to data poisoning, attackers use adversarial data to infect the AI's training data but will only deviate its results when the attacker presents their key. This enables the hackers to control when they want the model to deviate from normal operations.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Explainability and Transparency

    Definition

    • Explainability is important to ensure the AI system is fair and non-discriminatory. The system needs to be designed in a manner that informs users and key stakeholders of how decisions were made.
    • Transparency focuses on communicating how the prediction or recommendation was made in a human-like manner.

    Challenges

    • Very complex AI models may use algorithms and techniques that are difficult to understand. This can make it challenging to provide clear and simple explanations for how the system works.
    • Some organizations may be hesitant to share the details of how the AI system works for fear of disclosing proprietary and competitive information or intellectual property. This can make it difficult to develop transparent and explainable AI systems.

    Initiatives

    • Overall, developing AI systems that are explainable and transparent requires a careful balance between performance, interpretability, and user experience.

    Case Study

    Apple Card Investigation for Gender Discrimination

    INDUSTRY
    Finance

    SOURCE
    Wired

    In August of 2019, Apple launched its new numberless credit card with Goldman Sachs as the issuing bank.

    Shortly after the card's release users noticed that the algorithm responsible for Apple Card's credit assessment seemed to assign significantly lower credit limits to women when compared to men. Even the wife of Apple's cofounder Steve Wozniak was subject to algorithmic bias, receiving a credit limit a tenth the size of Steve Wozniak's.

    Outcome

    When confronted on the subject, Apple and Goldman Sachs representatives assured consumers there is no discrimination in the algorithm yet could not provide any proof. Even when questioned about the algorithm, individuals from both companies could not describe how the algorithm worked, let alone how it generated specific outputs.

    In 2021, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS) investigation found that Apple's banking partner did not discriminate based on sex. Even without a case for sexual or marital discrimination, the NYSDFS was critical of Goldman Sachs' response to its concerned customers. Technically, banks only have to disclose elements of their credit policy when they deny someone a line of credit, but the NYSDFS says that Goldman Sachs could have had a plan in place to deal with customer confusion and make it easier for them to appeal their credit limits. In the initial rush to launch the Apple Card, the bank had done neither.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Fairness and Bias Detection

    Definition

    • Bias in an AI application refers to the systematic and unequal treatment of individuals based on features or traits that should not be considered in the decision-making process.

    Challenges

    • Establishing fairness can be challenging because it is subjective and depends on the people defining it. Regardless, most organizations and governments expect that unequal treatment toward any groups of people is unacceptable.

    Initiatives

    • Assemble a diverse group to test the system.
    • Identify possible sources of bias in the data and algorithms.
    • Comply with laws regarding accessibility and inclusiveness.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If unfair biases can be avoided, AI systems could even increase societal fairness. Equal opportunity in terms of access to education, goods, services, and technology should also be fostered. Moreover, the use of AI systems should never lead to people being deceived or unjustifiably impaired in their freedom of choice.

    Ungoverned AI makes organizations vulnerable

    • AI is often considered a "black box" for decision making.
    • Results generated from unexplainable AI applications are extremely difficult to evaluate. This makes organizations vulnerable and exposes them to risks such as:
      • Biased algorithms, leading to inaccurate decision making.
      • Missed business opportunities due to misleading reports or business analyses.
      • Legal and regulatory consequences that may lead to significant financial repercussions.
      • Reputational damage and significant loss of trust with increasingly knowledgeable consumers.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Biases that occur in AI systems are never intentional, yet they cannot be prevented or fully eliminated. Organizations need a governance framework that can establish the proper policies and procedures for effective risk-mitigating controls across an algorithm's lifecycle.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Validity and Reliability

    Definition

    • Validity refers to how accurately or effectively the application produces results.
    • AI system results that are inaccurate or inconsistent increase AI risks and reduce the trustworthiness of the application.

    Challenges

    • There is a lack of standardized evaluation metrics to measure the system's performance. This can make it challenging for the AI team to agree on what defines validity and reliability.

    Initiatives

    • Assess training data and collected data for quality and lack of bias to minimize possible errors.
    • Continuously monitor, evaluate, and validate the AI system's performance.

    AI system performance: Validity and reliability

    Your principles should aim to ensure AI development always has high validity and reliability; otherwise, you introduce risk.

    Low Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    High Validity

    Best practices for ensuring validity and reliability include:

    • Data drift detection
    • Version control
    • Continuous monitoring and testing

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Accountability

    Definition

    • The group or organization(s) responsible for the impact of the deployed AI system.

    Challenges

    • Several stakeholders from multiple lines of business may be involved in any AI system, making it challenging to identify the organization that would be responsible and accountable for the AI application.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the latest NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework and its applicability to your organization's risk management framework.
    • Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders.
      • RACI diagrams are an effective way to describe how accountability and responsibility for roles, projects, and project tasks are distributed among stakeholders involved in IT risk management.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    At the heart of the AI Risk Management Framework is governance. The NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) AI Risk Management Framework v1 offers the following guidelines regarding accountability:

    • Roles and responsibilities and lines of communication related to mapping, measuring, and managing AI risks are documented and are clear to individuals and teams throughout the organization.
    • The organization's personnel and partners receive AI risk management training to enable them to perform their duties and responsibilities consistent with related policies, procedures, and agreements.
    • Executive leadership of the organization takes responsibility for decisions about risks associated with AI system development and deployment.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    Image by NIST

    1.1 Establish responsible AI principles

    4+ hours

    It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this working group. Designing responsible AI guiding principles will require debate, insights, and business decisions from a broad perspective across the enterprise.

    1. Accelerate this exercise by leveraging an AI strategy that is aligned to the business strategy. Include:
    • The organization's AI vision and objectives
    • Business drivers for AI adoption
    • Market research
  • Bring your key stakeholders together. Ensure you consider:
    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business?
    • Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the practice? Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?
  • Keep the conversation focused:
    • Do not focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups do not fit the traditional structure.
    • Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    Input Output
    • Understand external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Perform a risk assessment on the proposed use case and develop a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Draft responsible AI principles specific to your organization
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Guiding principle examples (from this blueprint)
    • Executive stakeholders
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Assemble executive stakeholders

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps.

    CIOs tasked with designing digital strategies must add value to the business. Given the goal of digital is to transform the business, CIOs will need to ensure they have both the mandate and support from the business executives.

    Designing the digital strategy is more than just writing up a document. It is an integrated set of business decisions to create a competitive advantage and financial returns. Establishing a forum for debates, decisions, and dialogue will increase the likelihood of success and support during execution.

    1. Confirm your role
    The AI strategy aims to transform the business. Given the scope, validate your role and mandate to lead this work. Identify a business executive to co-sponsor.

    2. Identify stakeholders
    Identify key decision makers and influencers who can help make rapid decisions as well as garner support across the enterprise.

    3. Gather diverse perspectives

    Align the AI strategy with the corporate strategy

    Organizational Strategy Unified Strategy AI Strategy
    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and organizational aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
    • AI optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate organizational objectives.
    • Identifies AI initiatives that will support the business and key AI objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for AI initiatives.
    • Communicates the organization's budget and spending on AI.

    Info-Tech Insight
    AI projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning organizational strategies with AI capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and other departments should happen daily. Alignment doesn't occur at the executive level alone, but at each level of the organization.

    Key AI strategy initiatives

    AI Key Initiative Plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1 Revenue Support Revenue Initiatives
    These projects will improve or introduce business processes to increase revenue.
    2 Operational Excellence Improve Operational Excellence
    These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3 Innovation Drive Technology Innovation
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.
    4 Risk Mitigation Reduce Risk
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Establish responsible AI guiding principles

    Guiding principles help define the parameters of your AI strategy. They act as a priori decisions that establish guardrails to limit the scope of opportunities from the perspective of people, assets, capabilities, and budgetary perspectives that are aligned with the business objectives. Consider these components when brainstorming guiding principles:

    Breadth AI strategy should span people, culture, organizational structure, governance, capabilities, assets, and technology. The guiding principle should cover the entire organization.
    Planning Horizon Timing should anchor stakeholders to look to the long term with an eye on the foreseeable future, i.e. business value-realization in one to three years.
    Depth Principles need to encompass more than the enterprise view of lofty opportunities and establish boundaries to help define actionable initiatives (i.e. individual projects).

    Responsible AI guiding principles guide the development and deployment of the AI model in a way that considers human-based principles (such as fairness).

    Start with foundational responsible AI guiding principles

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles
    Principle #1 - Privacy
    Individual data privacy must be respected.
    • Do you understand the organization's privacy obligations?
    Principle #2 - Fairness and Bias Detection
    Data used will be unbiased in order to produce predictions that are fair.
    • Are the uses of the application represented in your testing data?
    Principle #3 - Explainability and Transparency
    Decisions or predictions should be explainable.
    • Can you communicate how the model behaves in nontechnical terms?
    Principle #4 - Safety and Security
    The system needs to be secure, safe to use, and robust.
    • Are there unintended consequences to others?
    Principle #5 - Validity and Reliability
    Monitoring of the data and the model needs to be planned for.
    • How will the model's performance be maintained?
    Principle #6 - Accountability
    A person or organization needs to take responsibility for any decisions that are made as a result of the model.
    • Has a risk assessment been performed?
    Principle #n - Custom
    Add additional principles that address compliance or are customized for the organization/industry.

    (Optional) Customize responsible AI guiding principles

    Here is an example for organizations in the healthcare industry

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles:
    Principle #1
    Respect individuals' privacy.
    Principle #2
    Clinical study participants and data sets are representative of the intended patient population.
    Principle #3
    Provide transparency in the use of data and AI.
    Principle #4
    Good software engineering and security practices are implemented.
    Principle #5
    Deployed models are monitored for Performance and Re-training risks are managed.
    Principle #6
    Take ownership of our AI systems.
    Principle #7
    Design AI systems that empower humans and promote equity.

    These guiding principles are customized to the industry and organizations but remain consistent in addressing the common core AI challenges.

    Phase 2

    Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    AI Maturity Model

    A principle-based approach is required to advance AI maturity

    Chart for AI maturity model

    Technology-Centric: These maturity levels focus primarily on addressing the technical challenges of building a functional AI model.

    Principle-Based: Beyond the technical challenges of building the AI model are human-based principles that guide development in a responsible manner to address consumer and government demands.

    AI Maturity Dimensions

    Assess your AI maturity to understand your organization's ability to deliver in a digital age

    AI Governance
    Does your organization have an enterprise-wide, long-term strategy with clear alignment on what is required to accomplish it?

    Data Management
    Does your organization embrace a data-centric culture that shares data across the enterprise and drives business insights by leveraging data?

    People
    Does your organization employ people skilled at delivering AI applications and building the necessary data infrastructure?

    Process
    Does your organization have the technology, processes, and resources to deliver on its AI expectations?

    Technology
    Does your organization have the required data and technology infrastructure to support AI-driven digital transformation?

    AI Maturity Model dimensions and characteristics

    MATURITY LEVEL
    Exploration Incorporation Proliferation Optimization Transformation
    AI Governance Awareness AI model development AI model deployment Corporate governance Driven by ethics and societal considerations
    Data Management Silo-based Data enablement Data standardization Data is a shared asset Data can be monetized
    People Few skills Skills enabled to implement silo-based applications Skills accessible to all organizations Skills development for all organizations AI-native culture
    Process No standards Focused on specific business outcomes Operational Self-service Driven by innovation
    Technology (Infrastructure and AI Enabler) No dedicated infrastructure or tools Infrastructure and tools driven by POCs Purpose-built infrastructure, custom or commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) AI tools Self-service model for AI environment Self-service model for any IT environment

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    AI Governance

    Requirements

    • AI governance requires establishing policies and procedures for AI model development and deployment. Organizations begin with an awareness of the role of AI governance and evolve to a level to where AI governance is integrated with organization-wide corporate governance.

    Challenges

    • Beyond the governance of AI technology, the organization needs to evolve the governance program to align to responsible AI guiding principles.

    Initiatives

    • Establish responsible AI guidelines to govern AI development.
    • Introduce an AI review board to review all AI projects.
    • Introduce automation and standardize AI development processes.

    AI governance is a foundation for responsible AI

    AI Governance

    Responsible AI Principles are a part of how you manage and govern AI

    Monitoring
    Monitoring compliance and risk of AI/ML systems/models in production

    Tools & Technologies
    Tools and technologies to support AI governance framework implementation

    Model Governance
    Ensuring accountability and traceability for AI/ML models

    Organization
    Structure, roles, and responsibilities of the AI governance organization

    Operating Model
    How AI governance operates and works with other organizational structures to deliver value

    Risk & Compliance
    Alignment with corporate risk management and ensuring compliance with regulations and assessment frameworks

    Policies/Procedures/ Standards
    Policies and procedures to support implementation of AI governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Data Management

    Requirements

    • Organizations begin their data journey with a focus on pursuing quality data for the AI model. As organizations evolve, data management tools are leveraged to automate the capture, integration, processing, and deployment of data.

    Challenges

    • A key challenge is to acquire large volumes of quality data to properly train the model. In addition, maintaining data privacy, automating the data management lifecycle, and ensuring data is used in a responsible manner are ongoing challenges.

    Initiatives

    • Implement GDPR requirements.
    • Establish responsible data collection and processing practices.
    • Implement strong information security and data protection practices.
    • Implement a data governance program throughout the organization.

    Data governance enables AI

    • Integrity, quality, and security of data are key outputs of data governance programs, as well as necessities for effective AI.
    • Data governance focuses on creating accountability at the internal and external stakeholder level and establishing a set of data controls from technical, process, and policy perspectives.
    • Without a data governance framework, it is increasingly difficult to harness the power of AI integration in an ethical and organization-specific way.

    Data Governance in Action

    Canada has recently established the Canadian Data Governance Standardization Collaborative governed by the Standards Council of Canada. The purpose is multi-pronged:

    • Examine the foundational elements of data governance (privacy, cybersecurity, ethics, etc.).
    • Lay out standards for data quality and data collection best practices.
    • Examine infrastructure of IT systems to support data access and sharing.
    • Build data analytics to promote effective and ethical AI solutions.

    Source: Global Government Forum

    Download the Establish Data Governance blueprint

    Data Governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    People

    Requirements

    • Several data-centric skills and roles are required to successfully build, deploy, and maintain the AI model. The organization evolves from having few skills to everybody being able to leverage AI to enhance business outcomes.

    Challenges

    • AI skills can be challenging to find and acquire. Many organizations are investing in education to enhance their existing resources, leveraging no-code systems and software as a service (SaaS) applications to address the skills gap.

    Initiatives

    • Promote a data-centric culture throughout the organization.
    • Leverage and educate technical-oriented business analysts and business-oriented data engineers to help address the demand for skilled resources.
    • Develop an AI Center of Excellence accessible by all departments for education, guidance, and best practices for building, deploying, and maintaining the AI model.

    Multidisciplinary skills are required for successful implementation of AI applications

    Blending AI with technology and business domain understanding is key. Neither can be ignored.

    Business Domain Expertise

    • Business Analysts
    • Industry Analysts

    AI/Data Skills

    • Data Scientists
    • Data Engineers
    • Data Analysts

    IT Skills

    • Database Administrators
    • Systems Administrators
    • Compute Specialists

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Process

    Requirements

    • Automating processes involved with building, deploying, and maintaining the model is required to enable the organization to scale, enforce standards, improve time to market, and reduce costs. The organization evolves from performing tasks manually to an environment where all major processes are AI enabled.

    Challenges

    • Many solutions are available to automate the development of the AI model. There are fewer tools to automate responsible AI processes, but this market is growing rapidly.

    Initiatives

    • Assess opportunities to accelerate AI development with the adoption of MLOps.
    • Assess responsible AI toolkits to test compliance with guiding principles.

    Automating the AI development process

    Evolving to a model-driven environment is pivotal to advancing your AI maturity

    Current Environment

    Model Development - Months

    • Model rewriting
    • Manual optimization and scaling
    • Development/test/release
    • Application monoliths

    Data Discovery & Prep - Weeks

    • Navigating data silos
    • Unactionable metadata
    • Tracing lineage
    • Cleansing and integration
    • Privacy and compliance

    Install Software and Hardware - Week/Months

    • Workload contention
    • Lack of tool flexibility
    • Environment request and setup
    • Repeatability of results
    • Lack of data and model sharing

    Model-Driven Development

    Machine Learning as a Service (MLaaS) - Weeks

    • Apply DevOps and continuous integration/delivery (CI/CD) principles
    • Microservices/Cloud-native applications
    • Model portability and reuse
    • Streaming/API integration

    Data as a Service - Hours

    • Self-service data catalog
    • Searchable metadata
    • Centralized access control
    • Data collaboration
    • Data virtualization

    Platform as a Service - Minutes/Hours

    • Self-service data science portal
    • Integrated data sandbox
    • Environment agility
    • Multi-tenancy

    Shared, Optimized Infrastructure

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Technology

    Requirements

    • A technology platform that is optimized for AI and advanced analytics is required. The organization evolves from ad hoc systems to an environment where the AI hardware and software can be deployed through a self-service model.

    Challenges

    • Software and hardware platforms to optimize AI performance are still relatively new to most organizations. Time spent on optimizing the technology platform can have a significant impact on the overall performance of the system.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the landscape of AI enablers that can drive business value for the organization.
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate the deployment of the AI platform with the adoption of infrastructure as a service (IaaS) and platform as a service (PaaS).
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate performance with the optimization of AI accelerators.

    AI enablers

    Use case requirements should drive the selection of the tool

    BPM RPA Process Mining AI
    Use Case Examples Expense reporting, service orders, compliance management, etc. Invoice processing, payroll, HR information processing, etc. Process discovery, conformance checking, resource optimization and cycle time optimization Advanced analytics and reporting, decision-making, fraud detection, etc.
    Automation Capabilities Can be used to re-engineer process flows to avoid bottlenecks Can support repetitive and rules-based tasks Can capture information from transaction systems and provide data and information about how key processes are performing Can automate complex data-driven tasks requiring assessments in decision making
    Data Formats Structured (i.e. SQL) and semi-structured data (i.e. invoices) Structured data and semi-structured data Event logs, which are often structured data and semi-structured data Structured and unstructured data (e.g. images, audio)
    Technology
    • Workflow engines to support process modeling and execution
    • Optimize business process efficiency
    • Automation platform to perform routine and repetitive tasks
    • Can replace or augment workers
    Enables business users to identify bottlenecks and deviations with their workflows and to discover opportunities to optimize performance Deep learning algorithms leveraging historical data to support computer vision, text analytics and NLP

    AI and data analytics data platform

    An optimized data platform is foundational to maximizing the value from AI

    AI and data analytics data platform

    Data Platform Capabilities

    • Support for a variety of analytical applications, including self-service, operational, and data science analytics.
    • Data preparation and integration capabilities to ingest structured and unstructured data, move and transform raw data to enriched data, and enable data access for the target userbase.
    • An infrastructure platform optimized for advanced analytics that can perform and scale.

    Infrastructure - AI accelerators

    Questions for support transition

    "By 2025, 70% of companies will invest in alternative computing technologies to drive business differentiation by compressing time to value of insights from complex data sets."
    - IDC

    2.1 Assess current AI maturity

    1-3 hours

    It is important to understand the current capabilities of the organization to deliver and deploy AI-based applications. Consider that advancing AI capabilities will also involve organizational changes and integration with the organization's governance and risk management programs.

    1. Assess the organization's current state of AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure using Info-Tech's AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool.
    2. Consider the following as you complete the assessment:
      1. What is the state of AI and data governance in the organization?
      2. Does the organization have the skills, processes, and technology environment to deliver AI-based applications?
      3. What organization will be accountable for any and all business outcomes of using the AI applications?
      4. Has a risk assessment been performed?
    3. Make sure you avoid the following common mistakes:
      1. Do not focus only on addressing the technical challenges of building the AI model.
      2. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Any documented AI policies, standards, and best practices
    • Corporate and AI governance practices
    • Any risk assessments
    • AI maturity assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    The Scale

    Assess your AI maturity by selecting the maturity level that closest resembles the organization's current AI environment. Maturity dimensions that contribute to overall AI maturity include AI governance, data management, people, process, and technology capabilities.

    AI Maturity Assessment

    Exploration (1.0)

    • No experience building or using AI applications.

    Incorporation (2.0)

    • Some skills in using AI applications, or AI pilots are being considered for use.

    Proliferation (3.0)

    • AI applications have been adopted and implemented in multiple departments. Some of the responsible AI guiding principles are addressed (i.e. data privacy).

    Optimization (4.0)

    • The organization has automated the majority of its digital processes and leverages AI to optimize business operations. Controls are in place to monitor compliance with responsible AI guiding principles.

    Transformation (5.0)

    • The organization has adopted an AI-native culture and approach for building or implementing new business capabilities. Responsible AI guiding principles are operationalized with AI processes that proactively address possible breaches or risks associated with AI applications.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Governance (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there awareness of the role of AI governance in our organization?
    • No formal procedures are in place for AI development or deployment of applications.
  • Are there documented guidelines for the development and deployment of pilot AI applications?
    • No group is assigned to be responsible for AI governance in our organization.
  • Are accountability and authority related to AI governance clearly defined for our organization?
    • Our organization has adopted and enforces standards for developing and deploying AI applications throughout the organization.
  • Are we using tools to automate and validate AI governance compliance?
    • Our organization is integrating an AI risk framework with the corporate risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead its industry with its pursuit of corporate compliance initiatives (e.g. ESG compliance) and regulatory compliance initiatives?
    • Our organization leads the industry with the inclusion of responsible AI guiding principles with respect to transparency, accountability, risk, and governance.

    Data Management/AI Data Capabilities (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the data requirements for developing AI applications?
    • Data is often siloed and not easily accessible for AI applications.
  • Do we have a successful, repeatable approach to preparing data for AI pilot projects?
    • Required data is pulled from various sources in an ad hoc manner.
  • Does our organization have standards and dedicated staff for data management, data quality, data integration, and data governance?
    • Tools are available to manage the data lifecycle and support the data governance program.
  • Have relevant data platforms been optimized for AI and data analytics and are there tools to enforce compliance with responsible AI principles?
    • The data platform has been optimized for performance and access.
  • Is there an organization-wide understanding of how data can support innovation and responsible use of AI?
    • Data culture exists throughout our organization, and data can be leveraged to drive innovation initiatives.

    People/AI Skills in the Organization (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the skills required to build AI applications?
    • No or very little skills exist throughout our organization.
  • Do we have the skills required to implement an AI proof of concept (POC)?
    • No formal group is assigned to build AI applications.
  • Are there sufficient staff and skills available to the organization to develop, deploy, and run AI applications in production?
    • An AI Center of Excellence has been formed to review, develop, deploy, and maintain AI applications.
  • Is there a group responsible for educating staff on AI best practices and our organization's responsible AI guiding principles?
    • AI skills and people responsible for AI applications are spread throughout our organization.
  • Is there a culture where the organization is constantly assessing where business capabilities, services, and products can be re-engineered or augmented with AI?
    • The entire organization is knowledgeable on how to leverage AI to transform the business.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Processes (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the core processes and supporting tools that are required to build and support AI applications?
    • There are few or no automated tools to accelerate the AI development process.
  • Do we have a standard process to iteratively identify, select, and pilot new AI use cases?
    • Only ad hoc practices are used for developing AI applications.
  • Are there standard processes to scale, release, deploy, support, and enable use of AI applications?
    • Our organization has documented standards in place for developing AI applications and deploying them AI to production.
  • Are we automating deployment, testing, governance, audit, and support processes across our AI environment?
    • Our organization can leverage tools to perform an AI risk assessment and demonstrate compliance with the risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead our industry by continuously improving and re-engineering core processes to drive improved business outcomes?
    • Our organization leads the industry in driving innovation through digital transformation.

    Technology/AI Infrastructure (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the infrastructure (hardware and software) required to build AI applications?
    • There is little awareness of what infrastructure is required to build and support AI applications.
  • Do we have the required technology infrastructure and AI tools available to build pilot or one-off AI applications?
    • There is no dedicated infrastructure for the development of AI applications.
  • Is there a shared, standardized technology infrastructure that can be used to build and run multiple AI applications?
    • Our organization is leveraging purpose-built infrastructure to optimize performance.
  • Is our technology infrastructure optimized for AI and advanced analytics, and can it be deployed or scaled on demand by teams building and running AI applications within the organization?
    • Our organization is leveraging cloud-based deployment models to support AI applications in on-premises, hybrid, and public cloud platforms.
  • Is our organization developing innovative approaches to acquiring, building, or running AI infrastructure?
    • Our organization leads the industry with its ability to respond to change and to leverage AI to improve business outcomes.

    Phase 3

    Prioritize Candidate Opportunities and Develop Policies

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    3.1 Prioritize candidate AI opportunities

    1-3 hours

    Identify business opportunities that are high impact to your business and its customers and have low implementation complexity.

    1. Leverage the business capability map for your organization or industry to identify candidate business capabilities to augment or automate with generative AI.
    2. Establish criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the project.
    3. Ensure that candidate business capabilities to be automated align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and resources to deliver the project.
    4. Make sure you avoid sharing the organization's sensitive data if the application is deployed on the public cloud.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative AI initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    The business capability map for an organization

    A business capability map is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals, rather than how. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities are supported by people, process, and technology.

    Business capability map

    While business capability maps are helpful tools for a variety of strategic purposes, in this context they act as an investigation into what technology your business units use and how they use it.

    Business capability map

    Defining Capabilities
    Activities that define how the entity provides services. These capabilities support the key value streams for the organization.

    Enabling Capabilities
    Support the creation of strategic plans and facilitate business decision making as well as the functioning of the organization (e.g. information technology, financial management, HR).

    Shared Capabilities
    These predominantly customer-facing capabilities demonstrate how the entity supports multiple value streams simultaneously.

    Leverage your industry's capability maps to identify candidate opportunities/initiatives

    Business capability map defined...

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how. Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Typically will have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    Note: This is an illustrative business capability map example for Marketing & Advertising

    Business capability map example

    Business value vs. complexity assessment

    Leverage our simple value-to-effort matrix to help prioritize your AI initiatives

    Common business value drivers

    • Drive revenue
    • Improve operational excellence
    • Accelerate innovation
    • Mitigate risk

    Common project complexity characteristics

    • Resources required
    • Costs (acquisition, operational, support...)
    • Training required
    • Risk involved
    • Etc.
    1. Determine a business value and project complexity score for the candidate business capability or initiative.
    2. Plot initiatives on the matrix.
    3. Prioritize initiatives with high business value and low complexity.

    Business value vs complexity

    Assess business value vs. project complexity to prioritize candidate opportunities for generative AI

    Assess business value vs project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities/initiatives with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritization criteria exercise 1: Assessing the Create Content capability

    Exercise 1 Assessing the Create Content capability

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    This opportunity is removed because it does not pass the organization/business criteria

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    Prioritization criteria exercise 2: Assessing the Content Production capability

    Exercise 2 Assessing the Content Production capability

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    This opportunity is accepted because it passes the organization's business, responsible AI, and project criteria

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    3.2 Communicate policies for AI use

    1-3 hours

    1. Ensure policies for usage align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and ability to deliver the projects prioritized and beyond.
    2. Understand the current benefits as well as limits and risk associated with any proposed generative AI-based solution.
    3. Ensure you consider the following:
      1. What data is being shared with the application?
      2. Is the generative AI application deployed on the public cloud? Can anybody access the data provided to the application?
      3. Avoid using very technical, legal, or fear-based communication for your policies.
    InputOutput
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Generative AI policy for the Create Content capability

    Aligning policies to direct the uses assessed and implemented is essential

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our marketing and sales initiatives. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • You are free to use generative AI to assist your searches, but there are NO circumstances under which you are to reproduce generative AI output (text, image, audio, video, etc.) in your content.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Generative AI policy for the Content Production capability

    These policies should align to and reinforce your responsible AI principles

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our deliverables. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • If you use ChatGPT, you need to assess the accuracy of its response before including it in our content. Assessment includes verifying the information, seeing if bias exists, and judging its relevance.
    • Employees must not:
      • Provide any customer, citizen, or third-party content to any generative AI tool (public or private) without the express written permission of the CIO or the Chief Information Security Officer. Generative AI tools often use input data to train their model, therefore potentially exposing confidential data, violating contract terms and/or privacy legislation, and placing the organization at risk of litigation or causing damage to our organization.
      • Engage in any activity that violates any applicable law, regulation, or industry standard.
      • Use services for illegal, harmful, or offensive purposes.
      • Create or share content that is deceptive, fraudulent, or misleading or that could damage the reputation of our organization.
      • Use services to gain unauthorized access to computer systems, networks, or data.
      • Attempt to interfere with, bypass controls of, or disrupt operations, security, or functionality of systems, networks, or data.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Phase 4

    Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    4.1.1 Create the implementation plan for each prioritized initiative

    1-3 hours

    1. Build the implementation plan for each accepted use case using the roadmap template.
    2. Assess the firm's capabilities with respect to the dimensions of AI maturity and target the future-state capabilities you need to develop.
    3. Prepare by assessing the risk of the proposed use cases.
    4. Ensure initiatives align with organizational objectives.
    5. Ensure all AI initiatives have a defined value expectation.
    6. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Prioritized initiatives
    • Risk assessment of initiatives
    • Organizational objectives
    • Initiative implementation plans aligned to value drivers and maturity growth
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business subject matter experts

    Target-state options

    Identify the future-state capabilities that need to be developed to deliver your use cases

    1. Build an implementation plan for each use case to adopt.
    2. Assess if the current state of the AI environment can be leveraged to deliver the selected generative AI use cases.
    3. If the current AI environment is not sufficient, identify the future state required that will enable the delivery of the generative AI use cases. Identify gaps and build the roadmap to address the gaps.
    Current state Strategy
    The existing environment satisfies functionality, integration, and responsible AI guidelines for the proposed use cases. Maintain current environment
    The existing environment addresses technical requirements but not all the responsible AI guidelines. Augment current environment
    The environment neither addresses the technical requirements of the proposed use cases nor complies with the responsible AI guidelines. Transform the current environment

    4.1.2 Design metrics for success

    1-2 hours

    Establish metrics to measure to determine the success or failure of each POC.

    1. Discuss which relevant currently tracked metrics are useful to continue tracking for the POC.
    2. Discuss which metrics are irrelevant to the POC.
    3. Discuss metrics to start tracking and how to track them with the generative AI vendor.
    4. Compile a list of metrics relevant to the POC.
    5. Decide what the outcome is if the metric is high or low, including decision steps and relevant actions.
    6. Designate a generative AI application owner and a vendor liaison.

    Prepare by building an implementation plan for each candidate use case (previous step).

    Include key performance indicators (KPIs) and metrics that measure the application's contribution to strategic initiatives.

    Consider assigning a vendor liaison to accelerate the implementation and adoption of the generative AI-based solution.

    InputOutput
    • Initiative implementation plans
    • Current SLAs of selected use case
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Measurable initiative metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs
    • Generative AI vendor liaison

    Generative AI POC metrics - examples

    You need to measure the effectiveness of your initiatives. Here are some typical examples.

    Generative AI Feature Assessment
    User Interface
    Is it intuitive? Is training required?
    Ease of Use
    How much training is required before using?
    Response Time
    What is the response time for simple to complex tasks?
    Accuracy of Response
    Can the output be validated?
    Quality of Response
    How usable is the response? For text prompts, does the response align to the desired style, vocabulary, and tone?
    Creativity of Response
    Does the output appear new compared to previous results before using generative AI?
    Relevance of Response
    How well does the output address the prompt or request?
    Explainability
    Can a user describe how the output was generated?
    Scalability
    Does the application continue to perform as more users are added? Can it ingest large amounts of data?
    Productivity Gains
    Can you measure the time or effort saved?
    Business Value
    What value drivers are behind this initiative? (I.e. revenue, costs, time to market, risk mitigation.) Estimate a monetary value for the business outcome.
    Availability/Resilience
    What happens if a component of the application becomes unavailable? How does it recover?
    Security Model
    Where are the prompts and responses stored? Who has access to the sessions/dialogue? Are the prompts used to train the foundation model?
    Administration and Maintenance
    What resources are required to operate the application?
    Total Cost of Ownership
    What is the pricing model? Are there ongoing costs?

    GitHub Copilot POC business value - example

    Quantifying the benefits of GitHub Copilot to demonstrate measurable business value

    POC Results

    Task 1: Creating a web server in JavaScript

    • Time to complete task with GitHub Copilot: 1 hour 11 minutes
    • Time to complete the task without GitHub Copilot: 2 hours 41 minutes
    • Productivity Gain = (1 hour 30 minutes time saved) / (2 hours 41 minutes) = 55%
    • Benefit per Programmer = 55% x (average salary of a programmer)
    • Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 = (benefit per programmer) x (# of programmers)

    Enterprise Value of GitHub Copilot = Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 2 + ... + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task n

    Source: GitHub

    4.1.3 Build your generative AI initiative roadmap

    1-3 hours

    The roadmap should provide a compelling vision of how you will deliver the identified generative AI applications by prioritizing and simplifying the actions required to deliver these new initiatives.

    1. Leverage tab 4, Initiative Planning, in the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool to create and align your initiatives to the key value driver they are most relevant to:
      1. Transfer the results of your value and complexity assessments to this tool to drive the prioritization.
      2. Assign responsible owners to each initiative.
      3. Identify which AI maturity capabilities each initiative will enhance. However, do not build or introduce new capabilities merely to advance the organization's AI maturity level.
    2. Review the Gantt chart to ensure alignment and assess overlap.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    InputOutput
    • Each initiative implementation plan
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Generative AI initiative roadmap and Gantt chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Visual representations of data are more compelling than text alone.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the project from inception through to executive inquiry, project management, and finally execution.

    A project needs to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as an independent item. Each project must have three characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: An explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.
    • Owner: Who on the IT team is responsible for executing on the initiative.

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Info-Tech Insight
    Don't project your vision three to five years into the future. Deep dive on next year's big-ticket items instead.

    4.1.4 Build a communication plan for your roadmap

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify your target audience and what they need to know.
    2. Identify desired channels of communication and details for the target audience.
    3. Describe communication required for each audience segment.
    4. List frequency of communication for each audience segment.
    5. Create an executive presentation leveraging The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation and AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool.
    Input Output
    • Stakeholder list
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Communications plan for all impacted stakeholders
    • Executive communication pack
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Communication lead
    • Technical support staff for target use case

    Generative AI communication plan

    Well-planned communications are essential to the success and adoption of your AI initiatives

    To ensure that organization's roadmap is clearly communicated across the AI, data, technology, and business organizations, develop a rollout strategy, like this example.

    Example

    Audience Channel Level of Detail Description Timing
    Generative AI team Email, meetings All
    • Distribute plan; solicit feedback.
    • Address manager questions to equip them to answer employee questions.
    Q3 2023, (September, before entire data team)
    Data management team Email, Q&A sessions following Data management summary deck
    • Roll out after corporate strategy, in same form of communication.
    • Solicit feedback, address questions.
    Q4 2023 (late November)
    Select business stakeholders Presentations Executive deck
    • Pilot test for feedback prior to executive engagement.
    Q4 2023 (early December)
    Executive team Email, briefing Executive deck
    • Distribute plan.
    Q1 2024

    Deliver an executive presentation of the roadmap for the business stakeholders

    After you complete the activities and exercises within this blueprint, the final step of the process is to present the deliverable to senior management and stakeholders.

    Know Your Audience

    • Business stakeholders are interested in understanding the business outcomes that will result from their investment in generative AI.
    • Your audience will want to understand the risks involved and how to mitigate those risks.
    • Explain how the generative AI project was selected and the criteria used to help draft generative AI usage policies.

    Recommendations

    • Highlight the need for responsible AI to ensure that human-based requirements are being addressed.
    • Ensure your generative AI team includes both business and technical staff.

    Download The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation

    Bibliography

    "A pro-innovation approach to AI regulation." UK Department for Science, Innovation and Technology, March 2023. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Act." European Commission, 21 April 2021. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence and Data Act (AIDA)." Canadian Federal Government, June 2022. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Index Report 2023." Stanford University, April 2023. Web.

    "Automated Employment Decision Tools." New York City Department of Consumer and Worker Protection, Dec. 2021. Web.

    "Bain & Company announces services alliance with OpenAI to help enterprise clients identify and realize the full potential and maximum value of AI." Bain & Company, 21 Feb. 2023. Web.

    "Buzzfeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees." Al Mayadeen English, 27 Jan. 2023. Web.

    "California Consumers Privacy Act." State of California Department of Justice. April 24, 2023. Web.

    Campbell, Ian Carlos. "The Apple Card doesn't actually discriminate against women, investigators say." The Verge, 23 March 2021. Web.

    Campbell, Patrick. "NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework (AI RMF 1.0)." National Institute of Standards and Technology, Jan. 2023. Web.

    "EU Ethics Guidelines For Trustworthy." European Commission, 8 April 2019. Web.

    Farhi, Paul. "A news site used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." Washington Post, 17 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Forsyth, Ollie. "Mapping the Generative AI landscape." Antler, 20 Dec. 2022. Web.

    "General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)" European Commission, 25 May 2018. Web.

    "Generative AI Market: Global Industry Trends, Share, Size, Growth, Opportunity and Forecast 2023-2028." IMARC Group, 2022. Web.

    Guynn, Jessica. "Bing's ChatGPT is in its feelings: 'You have not been a good user. I have been a good Bing.'" USA Today, 14 Feb. 2023. Web.

    Hunt, Mia. "Canada launches data governance standardisation initiative." Global Government Forum, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Johnston Turner, Mary. "IDC's Worldwide Future of Digital Infrastructure 2022 Predictions." IDC, 27 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Kalliamvakou, Eirini. "Research: quantifying GitHub Copilot's impact on developer productivity and happiness." GitHub, 7 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Kerravala, Zeus. "NVIDIA Brings AI To Health Care While Protecting Patient Data." eWeek, 12 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Knight, Will. "The Apple Card Didn't 'See' Gender-and That's the Problem." Wired, 19 Nov. 2019. Web.

    "OECD, Recommendation of the Council on Artificial Intelligence." OECD, 2022. Web.

    "The National AI Initiative Act" U.S. Federal Government, 1 Jan 2021. Web.

    "Trustworthy AI (TAI) Playbook." U.S. Department of Health & Human Services, Sept 2021. Web.

    Info-Tech Research Contributors/Advocates

    Joel McLean, Executive Chairman

    Joel McLean
    Executive Chairman

    David Godfrey, CEO

    David Godfrey
    CEO

    Gord Harrison, Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    William Russell, CIO

    William Russell
    CIO

    Jack Hakimian, SVP, Research

    Jack Hakimian
    SVP, Research

    Barry Cousins, Distinguished Analyst and Research Fellow

    Barry Cousins
    Distinguished Analyst and
    Research Fellow

    Larry Fretz, Vice President, Industry Research

    Larry Fretz
    Vice President, Industry Research

    Tom Zehren, CPO

    Tom Zehren
    CPO

    Mark Roman, Managing Partner II

    Mark Roman
    Managing Partner II

    Christine West, Managing Partner

    Christine West
    Managing Partner

    Steve Willis, Practice Lead

    Steve Willis
    Practice Lead

    Yatish Sewgoolam, Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Yatish Sewgoolam
    Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Rob Redford, Practice Lead

    Rob Redford
    Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie, Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead

    Neal Rosenblatt, Principal Research Director

    Neal Rosenblatt
    Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu, Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu
    Principal Research Director

    Irina Sedenko, Research Director

    Irina Sedenko
    Research Director

    Jeremy Roberts, Workshop Director

    Jeremy Roberts
    Workshop Director

    Brian Jackson, Research Director

    Brian Jackson
    Research Director

    Mark Maby, Research Director

    Mark Maby
    Research Director

    Stacey Horricks, Director, Social Media

    Stacey Horricks
    Director, Social Media

    Sufyan Al-Hassan, Public Relations Manager

    Sufyan Al-Hassan
    Public Relations Manager

    Sam Kanen, Marketing Specialist

    Sam Kanen
    Marketing Specialist

    Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}158|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, this brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
    • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
    • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality otherwise they will look elsewhere.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
    • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
    • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

    Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to develop and implement a release management framework that takes advantage of continuous delivery.

    This presentation documents the Info-Tech approach to defining your application release management framework.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value – Phases 1-4

    2. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template – Use this template to help you define, detail, and make a reality your strategy in support of your application release management framework.

    The template gives the user a guide to the development of their application release management framework.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template

    3. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook – This workbook documents the results of the exercises contained in the blueprint and offers the user a guide to development of their release management framework.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of your exercises from the Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value blueprint.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Current Situation

    The Purpose

    Document the existing release management process and current pain points and use this to define the future-state framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain an understanding of the current process to confirm potential areas of opportunity.

    Understand current pain points so that we can build resolution into the new process.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify current pain points with your release management process. If appropriate, rank them in order of most to least disruptive.

    1.2 Use the statement of quality and current pain points (in addition to other considerations) and outline the guiding principles for your application release management framework.

    1.3 Brainstorm a set of metrics that will be used to assess the success of your aspired-to application release management framework.

    Outputs

    Understanding of pain points, their root causes, and ranking.

    Built guiding principles for application release management framework.

    Created set of metrics to measure the effectiveness of the application release management framework.

    2 Define Standard Release Criteria

    The Purpose

    Build sample release criteria, release contents, and standards for how it will be integrated in production.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Define a map to what success will look like once a new process is defined.

    Develop standards that the new process must meet to ensure benefits are realized.

    Activities

    2.1 Using an example of a product known to the team, list its criteria for release.

    2.2 Using an example of a product known to the team, develop a list of features and tasks that are directly and indirectly important for either a real or hypothetical upcoming release.

    2.3 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its integration into the release-approved code in production. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    Outputs

    Completed Workbook example highlighting releasability.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing feature and task selection.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the integration step.

    3 Define Acceptance and Deployment Standards

    The Purpose

    Define criteria for the critical acceptance and deployment phases of the release.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure that releases will meet or exceed expectations and meet user quality standards.

    Ensure release standards for no / low risk deployments are recognized and implemented.

    Activities

    3.1 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its acceptance. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    3.2 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its deployment. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    Outputs

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the acceptance step.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the deployment step.

    4 Implement the Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define your future application release management process and the plan to make the required changes to implement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build a repeatable process that meets the standards defined in phases 2 and 3.

    Ensure the pain points defined in Phase 1 are resolved.

    Show how the new process will be implemented.

    Activities

    4.1 Develop a plan and roadmap to enhance the integration, acceptance, and deployment processes.

    Outputs

    List of initiatives to reach the target state

    Application release management implementation roadmap

    Further reading

    Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

    Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improving your release management strategy and practices is a key step to fully unlock the value of your portfolio.

    As firms invest in modern delivery practices based around product ownership, Agile, and DevOps, organizations assume that’s all that is necessary to consistently deliver value. As organizations continue to release, they continue to see challenges delivering applications of sufficient and consistent quality.

    Delivering value doesn’t only require good vision, requirements, and technology. It requires a consistent and reliable approach to releasing and delivering products and services to your customer. Reaching this goal requires the definition of standards and criteria to govern release readiness, testing, and deployment.

    This will ensure that when you deploy a release it meets the high standards expected by your clients and delivers the value you have intended.

    Dr. Suneel Ghei

    Principal Research Director, Application Development

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, the brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
    • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture of product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
    • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality, otherwise they will look elsewhere.

    Common Obstacles

    • Development teams are moving faster but then face delays waiting for testing and deployment due to a lack of defined release cycle and process.
    • Individual stages in your software development life cycle (SDLC), such as code collaboration, testing, and deployment, have become leaner, but the overall complexity has increased since many products and services are composed of many applications, platforms, and processes.
    • The specifics of releasing products is (wrongly) classified as a technical concern and not a business concern, hindering the ability to prioritize improved release practices.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
    • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
    • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insights

    Turn release-related activities into non-events.

    Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

    Release management is NOT a part of the software delivery life cycle.

    The release cycle runs parallel to the software delivery life cycle but is not tightly coupled with it. The act of releasing begins at the point requirements are confirmed and ends when user satisfaction is measurable. In contrast, the software delivery life cycle is focused on activities such as building, architecting, and testing.

    All releases are NOT created equal.

    Barring standard guiding principles, each release may have specific nuances that need to be considered as part of release planning.

    Your release management journey

    1. Optimize Applications Release Management - Set a baseline release management process and organization.
    2. Modernize Your SDLC - Move your organization to Agile and increase throughput to feed releases.
    3. Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision - Understand the practices that go into delivering products, including articulating your release plans.
    4. Automate Testing to Get More Done - Create the ability to do more testing quickly and ensure test coverage.
    5. Implement DevOps Practices That Work - Build in tools and techniques necessary for release deployment automation.
    6. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value (We Are Here)

    Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

    Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

    Executive Brief

    Your software delivery teams are expected to deliver value to stakeholders in a timely manner and with high quality

    Software delivery teams must enable the organization to react to market needs and competitive changes to improve the business’ bottom line. Otherwise, the business will question the team’s competencies.

    The business is constantly looking for innovative ways to do their jobs better and they need support from your technical teams.

    The increased stress from the business is widening the inefficiencies that already exist in application release management, risking poor product quality and delayed releases.

    Being detached from the release process, business stakeholders do not fully understand the complexities and challenges of completing a release, which complicates the team’s communication with them when issues occur.

    IT Stakeholders Are Also Not Satisfied With Their Own Throughput

    • Only 29% of IT employees find application development throughput highly effective.
    • Only 9% of organizations were classified as having highly effective application development throughput.
    • Application development throughput ranked 37th out of 45 core IT processes in terms of effectiveness.

    (Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic, N=3,930)

    Your teams, however, struggle with core release issues, resulting in delayed delivery (and disappointed stakeholders)

    Implementing tools on top of an inefficient pipeline can significantly magnify the existing release issues. This can lead to missed deadlines, poor product quality, and business distrust with software delivery teams.

    COMMON RELEASE ISSUES

    1. Local Thinking: Release decisions and changes are made and approved without consideration of the holistic system, process, and organization.
    2. No Release Cadence: Lack of process governance and oversight generates unpredictable bottlenecks and load and ill-prepared downstream teams.
    3. Mismanagement of Releases: Program management does not accommodate the various integrated releases completed by multiple delivery teams.
    4. Poor Scope Management: Teams are struggling to effectively accommodate changes during the project.

    The bottom line: The business’ ability to operate is dictated by the software delivery team’s ability to successfully complete releases. If the team performs poorly, then the business will do poorly as well. Application release management is critical to ensure business expectations are within the team’s constraints.

    As software becomes more embedded in the business, firms are discovering that the velocity of business change is now limited by how quickly they can deploy.” – Five Ways To Streamline Release Management, J.S. Hammond

    Historically, managing releases has been difficult and complicated…

    Typically, application release management has been hard to coordinate because…

    • Software has multiple dependencies and coordinating their inclusion into a deployable whole was not planned.
    • Teams many be spending too much time on features that are not needed any longer.
    • Software development functions (such as application architecture, test-first or test-driven design, source code integration, and functional testing) are not optimized.
    • There are no agreed upon service-level contracts (e.g. expected details in requirements, adequate testing, source control strategy) between development functions.
    • The different development functions are not integrated in a holistic style.
    • The different deployment environments have variability in their configuration, reducing the reliability of testing done in different environments.
    • Minimum thresholds for acceptable quality of development functions are either too low (leading to adverse outcomes down stream) or too high (leading to unnecessary delays).

    …but research shows being effective at application release management increases your throughput

    Research conducted on Info-Tech's members shows overwhelming evidence that application throughput is strongly tied to an effective application release management approach.

    The image shows a scatter plot, with Release Management Effectiveness on the x-axis and Application Development Throughput Effectiveness on the Y-axis. The graph shows a steady increase.

    (Info-Tech Management & Governance Diagnostic, since 2019; N=684 organizations)

    An application release management framework is critical for effective and timely delivery of software

    A well-developed application release management framework is transformative and changes...

    From To
    Short-lived projects Ongoing enhancements supporting a product strategy
    Aiming for mandated targets Flexible roadmaps
    Manual execution of release processes Automating a release pipeline as much as possible and reasonable
    Manual quality assurance Automated assessment of quality
    Centralized decision making Small, independent release teams, orchestrated through an optimized value stream

    Info-Tech Insight: Your application release management framework should turn a system release into a non-event. This is only possible through the development of a holistic, low-risk and standardized approach to releasing software, irrespective of their size or complexity.

    Robust continuous “anything” requires proficiency in five core practices

    A continuous anything evaluation should not be a “one-and-done” event. As part of ongoing improvements, keep evolving it to make it a fundamental component of a strong operational strategy.

    Continuous Anything

    • Automate where appropriate
      • Automation is not a silver bullet. All processes are not created equal; and therefore, some are not worthy of being automated.
    • Control system variables
      • Deploying and testing in environments that are apple to apple in comparison reduces the risk of unintended outcomes from production release.
    • Measure process outcomes
      • A process not open to being measured is a process bound to fail. If it can be measured, it should be, and insights found should be used for improving the system.
    • Select smaller features batches
      • Smaller release packages reduce the chances of cognitive load associated with finding root causes for defects and issues that may result as post-production incidents.
    • Reduction of cycle time
      • Identification of waste in each stage of the continuous anything process helps in lowering cost of operations and results in quicker generation of value for stakeholders.

    Invest time in developing an application release management framework for your development team(s) with a continuous anything mindset

    An application release management framework converts a set of features and make them ready for releasability in a low-risk, standardized, and high-quality process.

    The image shows a diagram titled Application Release Engineering From Idea to Product, which illustrates the process.

    A continuous anything (integration, delivery, and deployment) mindset is based on a growth and improvement philosophy, where every event is considered a valid data point for investigation of process efficiency.

    Diagram adapted from Continuous Delivery in the Wild, Pete Hodgson, Published by O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2020

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Justify the necessity of streamlined maintenance. Gain a grounded understanding of stakeholder objectives and concerns and validate their achievability against the current state of the people, process, and technologies involved in application maintenance.
    • Strengthen triaging and prioritization practices. Obtain a holistic picture of the business and technical impacts, risks, and urgencies of each accepted maintenance request to justify its prioritization and relevance within your backlog. Identify opportunities to bundle requests together or integrate them within project commitments to ensure completion.
    • Establish and govern a repeatable process. Develop a maintenance process with well-defined stage gates, quality controls, and roles and responsibilities, and instill development best practices to improve the success of delivery.

    “Releasability” (or release criteria) of a system depends upon the inclusion of necessary building blocks and proof that they were worked on

    There is no standard definition of a system’s releasability. However, there are common themes around completions or assessments that should be investigated as part of a release:

    • The range of performance, technical, or compliance standards that need to be assessed.
    • The full range of test types required for business approval: unit tests, acceptance tests, security test, data migration tests, etc.
    • The volume-criticality mix of defects the organization is willing to accept as a risk.
    • The best source and version control strategy for the development team. This is mostly a function of the team's skill with using release branches and coordinating their work artifacts.
    • The addition of monitoring points and measures required for evaluations and impact analysis.
    • The documentation required for audit and compliance.
    • External and internal dependencies and integrations.
    • Validations, approvals, and sign-offs required as part of the business’ operating procedure.
    • Processes that are currently carried out outside and should be moved into the pipeline.
    • Manual processes that may be automated.
    • Any waste activities that do not directly contribute to releasability that can be eliminated from the development process.
    • Knowledge the team has regarding challenges and successes with similar software releases in the past.

    Releasability of a system is different than governing principles for application release management

    Governing principles are fundamental ways of doing something, which in this case is application release management, while releasability will generally have governing principles in addition to specific needs for a successful release.

    Example of Governing Principles

    • Approval from Senior Director is necessary before releasing to production
    • Production deployments can only be done in off-hours
    • We will try to automate processes whenever it is possible for us to do so
    • We will use a collaborative set of metrics to measure our processes

    Examples of Releasability Criteria

    • For the upcoming release, add performance testing for Finance and Budget Teams’ APIs
    • Audit and compliance documentation is required for this release
    • Automation of manual deployment
    • Use trunk-based source code management instead of feature-based

    Regulated industries are not more stable despite being less nimble

    A pervasive myth in industry revolves around the misperception that continuous anything and nimble and non-event application release management is not possible in large bureaucratic and regulated organizations because they are risk-averse.

    "We found that external approvals were negatively correlated with lead-time, deployment frequency and restore time, and had no correlation with change failure rate. In short, approval by an external body (such as a manager or Change Approval Board) simply doesn’t work to increase the stability of production systems…However, it certainly slows things down. It is in fact worse than having no change approval process at all." – Accelerate by Gene Kim, Jez Humble, and Nicole Forsgren

    Many organizations reduce risk in their product release by adopting a paternalistic stance by:

    • Requiring manual sign-offs from senior personnel who are external to the organization.
    • Increasing the number and level of authorization gates.
    • Staying away from change and preferring to stick with what has worked in the past.

    Despite the prevalence of these types of responses to risk, the evidence is that they do not work and are in fact counter-productive because they:

    • Create blocks to frequent releases.
    • Introduce procedural complexity to each release and in effect make them “bigger.”
    • Prefer process over people (and trusting them). Increase non-value-add scrutiny and reporting.

    There is a persistent misunderstanding about continuous anything being only an IT engineering practice

    01

    At the enterprise level, continuous anything focuses on:

    • Visibility of final value being provided in a high-quality and expedited manner
    • Ensuring efficiency in the organization’s delivery framework
    • Ensuring adherence to established governance and risk mitigation strategy

    02

    Focus of this blueprint

    At the product level, continuous anything focuses on:

    • Reliability of the product delivery system
    • Use of scientific evidence for continuous improvement of the product’s delivery system
    • Orchestration of different artifacts into a single whole

    03

    At the functional level, continuous anything focuses on*:

    • Local functional optimization (functions = software engineering, testing, application design)
    • Automation of local functions
    • Use of patterns for standardizing inputs and functional areas

    *Where necessary, practices at this level have been mentioned.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Be DevOps, rather than do DevOps. DevOps is a philosophy, not an industry framework. Your organization’s culture must shift toward system-wide thinking, cross-function collaboration, and empathy.
    • Culture, learning, automation, integrated teams, and metrics and governance (CLAIM) are all critical components of effective DevOps.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done

    • Optimize and automate SDLC stages to recover team capacity. Recognize that automation without optimization is a recipe for long-term pain. Do it right the first time.
    • Optimization and automation are not one-hit wonders. Technical debt is a part of software systems and never goes away. The only remedy is constant vigilance and enhancements to the processes.

    The seeds of a good release are sown even before work on it begins

    Pre-release practices such as requirements intake and product backlog management are important because:

    • A standard process for documentation of features and requirements helps reduce “cognitive dissonance” between business and technology teams. Clearly articulated and well-understood business needs are fundamental ingredients of a high-quality product.
    • Product backlog management done right ensures the prioritized delivery of value to stakeholders. Features can become stale or get a bump in importance, depending upon evolving circumstances. Prioritizing the backlog is, therefore, critical for ensuring time, effort, and budget are spent on things that matter.

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}464|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Coordinate IT change and project management to successfully push changes to production.
    • Manage representation of project management within the scope of the change lifecycle to gather requirements, properly approve and implement changes, and resolve incidents that arise from failed implementations.
    • Communicate effectively between change management, project management, and the business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Improvement can be incremental. You do not have to adopt every recommended improvement right away. Ensure every process change you make will create value and slowly add improvements to ease buy-in.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish pre-set touchpoints between IT change management and project management at strategic points in the change and project lifecycles.
    • Include appropriate project representation at the change advisory board (CAB).
    • Leverage standard change resources such as the change calendar and request for change form (RFC).

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Deck – A guide to walk through integrating project touchpoints in the IT change management lifecycle.

    Use this storyboard as a guide to align projects with your IT change management lifecycle.

    • Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Storyboard

    2. The Change Management SOP – This template will ensure that organizations have a comprehensive document in place that can act as a point of reference for the program.

    Use this SOP as a template to document and maintain your change management practice.

    • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    Increase the success of your changes by integrating project touchpoints in the change lifecycle.

    Analyst Perspective

    Focus on frequent and transparent communications between the project team and change management.

    Benedict Chang

    Misalignment between IT change management and project management leads to headaches for both practices. Project managers should aim to be represented in the change advisory board (CAB) to ensure their projects are prioritized and scheduled appropriately. Advanced notice on project progress allows for fewer last-minute accommodations at implementation. Widespread access of the change calendar can also lead project management to effectively schedule projects to give change management advanced notice.

    Moreover, alignment between the two practices at intake allows for requests to be properly sorted, whether they enter change management directly or are governed as a project.

    Lastly, standardizing implementation and post-implementation across everyone involved ensures more successful changes and socialized/documented lessons learned for when implementations do not go well.

    Benedict Chang
    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    To align projects with the change lifecycle, IT leaders must:

    • Coordinate IT change and project management to successfully push changes to production.
    • Manage representation of project management within the scope of the change lifecycle to gather requirements, properly approve and implement changes, and resolve incidents that arise from failed implementations.
    • Communicate effectively between change management, project management, and the business.

    Loose definitions may work for clear-cut examples of changes and projects at intake, but grey-area requests end up falling through the cracks.

    Changes to project scope, when not communicated, often leads to scheduling conflicts at go-live.

    Too few checkpoints between change and project management can lead to conflicts. Too many checkpoints can lead to delays.

    Set up touchpoints between IT change management and project management at strategic points in the change and project lifecycles.

    Include appropriate project representation at the change advisory board (CAB).

    Leverage standard change resources such as the change calendar and request for change form (RFC).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improvement can be incremental. You do not have to adopt every recommended improvement right away. Ensure every process change you make will create value, and slowly add improvements to ease buy-in.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Use the change lifecycle to identify touchpoints.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's approach.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Start with your change lifecycle to define how change control can align with project management.
    2. Make improvements to project-change alignment to benefit the relationship between the two practices and the practices individually.
    3. Scope the alignment to your organization. Take on the improvements to the left one by one instead of overhauling your current process.

    Use this research to improve your current process

    This deck is intended to align established processes. If you are just starting to build IT change processes, see the related research below.

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    02 Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    01 Optimize IT Change Management

    Increase the success of your changes by integrating project touchpoints in your change lifecycle.

    (You are here)

    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Successful change management will provide benefits to both the business and IT

    Respond to business requests faster while reducing the number of change-related disruptions.

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Fewer incidents and outages at project go-live
    • Upfront identification of project and change requirements
    • Higher rate of change and project success
    • Less rework
    • Fewer service desk calls related to failed go-lives
    • Fewer service disruptions
    • Faster response to requests for new and enhanced functionalities
    • Higher rate of benefits realization when changes are implemented
    • Lower cost per change
    • Fewer “surprise” changes disrupting productivity

    IT satisfaction with change management will drive business satisfaction with IT. Once the process is working efficiently, staff will be more motivated to adhere to the process, reducing the number of unauthorized changes. As fewer changes bypass proper evaluation and testing, service disruptions will decrease and business satisfaction will increase.

    Change management improves core benefits to the business: the four Cs

    Most organizations have at least some form of change control in place, but formalizing change management leads to the four Cs of business benefits:

    Control

    Collaboration

    Consistency

    Confidence

    Change management brings daily control over the IT environment, allowing you to review every relatively new change, eliminate changes that would have likely failed, and review all changes to improve the IT environment.

    Change management planning brings increased communication and collaboration across groups by coordinating changes with business activities. The CAB brings a more formalized and centralized communication method for IT.

    Request-for-change templates and a structured process result in implementation, test, and backout plans being more consistent. Implementing processes for pre-approved changes also ensures these frequent changes are executed consistently and efficiently.

    Change management processes will give your organization more confidence through more accurate planning, improved execution of changes, less failure, and more control over the IT environment. This also leads to greater protection against audits.

    1. Alignment at intake

    Define what is a change and what is a project.

    Both changes and projects will end up in change control in the end. Here, we define the intake.

    Changes and projects will both go to change control when ready to go live. However, defining the governance needed at intake is critical.

    A change should be governed by change control from beginning to end. It would typically be less than a week’s worth of work for a SME to build and come in at a nominal cost (e.g. <$20k over operating costs).

    Projects on the other hand, will be governed by project management in terms of scope, scheduling, resourcing, etc. Projects typically take over a week and/or cost more. However, the project, when ready to go live, should still be scheduled through change control to avoid any conflicts at implementation. At triage and intake, a project can be further scoped based on projected scale.

    This initial touchpoint between change control and project management is crucial to ensure tasks and request are executed with the proper governance. To distinguish between changes and projects at intake, list examples of each and determine what resourcing separates changes from projects.

    Need help scoping projects? Download the Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Change

    Project

    • Smaller scale task that typically takes a short time to build and test
    • Generates a single change request
    • Governed by IT Change Management for the entire lifecycle
    • Larger in scope
    • May generate multiple change requests
    • Governed by PMO
    • Longer to build and test

    Info-Tech Insight

    While effort and cost are good indicators of changes and projects, consider evaluating risk and complexity too.

    1 Define what constitutes a change

    1. As a group, brainstorm examples of changes and projects. If you wish, you may choose to also separate out additional request types such as service requests (user), operational tasks (backend), and releases.
    2. Have each participant write the examples on sticky notes and populate the following chart on the whiteboard/flip chart.
    3. Use the examples to draw lines and determine what defines each category.
    • What makes a change distinct from a project?
    • What makes a change distinct from a service request?
    • What makes a change distinct from an operational task?
    • When do the category workflows cross over with other categories? (For example, when does a project interact with change management?
  • Record the definitions of requests and results in section 2.3 of the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).
  • Change

    Project

    Service Request (Optional)

    Operational Task (Optional)

    Release (Optional)

    Changing Configuration

    New ERP

    Add new user

    Delete temp files

    Software release

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Input Output
    • List of examples of each category of the chart
    • Definitions for each category to be used at change intake
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP
    • Change Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    2. Alignment at build and test

    Keep communications open by pre-defining and communicating project milestones.

    CAB touchpoints

    Consistently communicate the plan and timeline for hitting these milestones so CAB can prioritize and plan changes around it. This will give change control advanced notice of altered timelines.

    RFCs

    Projects may have multiple associated RFCs. Keeping CAB appraised of the project RFC or RFCs gives them the ability to further plan changes.

    Change Calendar

    Query and fill the change calendar with project timelines and milestones to compliment the CAB touchpoints.

    Leverage the RFC to record and communicate project details

    The request for change (RFC) form does not have to be a burden to fill out. If designed with value in mind, it can be leveraged to set standards on all changes (from projects and otherwise).

    When looking at the RFC during the Build and Test phase of a project, prioritize the following fields to ensure the implementation will be successful from a technical and user-adoption point of view.

    Filling these fields of the RFC and communicating them to the CAB at go-live approval gives the approvers confidence that the project will be implemented successfully and measures are known for when that implementation is not successful.

    Download the Request for Change Form Template

    Communication Plan

    The project may be successful from a technical point of view, but if users do not know about go-live or how to interact with the project, it will ultimately fail.

    Training Plan

    If necessary, think of how to train different stakeholders on the project go-live. This includes training for end users interacting with the project and technicians supporting the project.

    Implementation Plan

    Write the implementation plan at a high enough level that gives the CAB confidence that the implementation team knows the steps well.

    Rollback Plan

    Having a well-formulated rollback plan gives the CAB the confidence that the impact of the project is well known and the impact to the business is limited even if the implementation does not go well.

    Provide clear definitions of what goes on the change calendar and who’s responsible

    Inputs

    • Freeze periods for individual business departments/applications (e.g. finance month-end periods, HR payroll cycle, etc. – all to be investigated)
    • Maintenance windows and planned outage periods
    • Project schedules, and upcoming major/medium changes
    • Holidays
    • Business hours (some departments work 9-5, others work different hours or in different time zones, and user acceptance testing may require business users to be available)

    Guidelines

    • Business-defined freeze periods are the top priority.
    • No major or medium normal changes should occur during the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day.
    • Vendor SLA support hours are the preferred time for implementing changes.
    • The vacation calendar for IT will be considered for major changes.
    • Change priority: High > Medium > Low.
    • Minor changes and preapproved changes have the same priority and will be decided on a case-by-case basis.

    Roles

    • The Change Manager will be responsible for creating and maintaining a change calendar.
    • Only the Change Manager can physically alter the calendar by adding a new change after the CAB has agreed upon a deployment date.
    • All other CAB members, IT support staff, and other impacted stakeholders should have access to the calendar on a read-only basis to prevent people from making unauthorized changes to deployment dates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make the calendar visible to as many parties as necessary. However, limit the number of personnel who can make active changes to the calendar to limit calendar conflicts.

    3. Alignment at approval

    How can project management effectively contribute to CAB?

    As optional CAB members

    Project SMEs may attend when projects are ready to go live and when invited by the change manager. Optional members provide details on change cross-dependencies, high-level testing, rollback, communication plans, etc. to inform prioritization and scheduling decisions.

    As project management representatives

    Project management should also attend CAB meetings to report in on changes to ongoing projects, implementation timelines, and project milestones. Projects are typically high-priority changes when going live due to their impact. Advanced notice of timeline and milestone changes allow the rest of the CAB to properly manage other changes going into production.

    As core CAB members

    The core responsibilities of CAB must still be fulfilled:

    1. Protect the live environment from poorly assessed, tested, and implemented changes.

    2. Prioritize changes in a way that fairly reflects change impact, urgency, and likelihood.

    3. Schedule deployments in a way the minimizes conflict and disruption.

    If you need to define the authority and responsibilities of the CAB, see Activity 2.1.3 of the Optimize IT Change Management blueprint.

    4. Alignment at implementation

    At this stage, the project or project phase is treated as any other change.

    Verification

    Once the change has been implemented, verify that all requirements are fulfilled.

    Review

    Ensure all affected systems and applications are operating as predicted.

    Update change ticket and change log

    Update RFC status and CMDB as well (if necessary).

    Transition

    Once the change implementation is complete, it’s imperative that the team involved inform and train the operational and support groups.

    If you need to define transitioning changes to production, download Transition Projects to the Service Desk

    5. Alignment at post-implementation

    Tackle the most neglected portion of change management to avoid making the same mistake twice.

    1. Define RFC statuses that need a PIR
    2. Conduct PIRs for failed changes. Successful changes can simply be noted and transitioned to operations.

    3. Conduct a PIR for every failed change
    4. It’s best to perform a PIR once a change-related incident is resolved.

    5. Avoid making the same mistake twice
    6. Include a root-cause analysis, mitigation actions/timeline, and lessons learned in the documentation.

    7. Report to CAB
    8. Socialize the findings of the PIR at the subsequent CAB meeting.

    9. Circle back on previous PIRs
    10. If a similar change is conducted, append the related PIR to avoid the same mistakes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include your PIR documentation right in the RFC for easy reference.

    Download the RFC template for more details on post-implementation reviews

    2 Implement your alignments stepwise

    1. As a group, decide on which implementations you need to make to align change management and project management.
    2. For each improvement, list a timeline for implementation.
    3. Update section 3.5 in the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP). to outline the responsibilities of project management within IT Change Management.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Change Management SOP

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Input Output
    • This deck
    • SOP update
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP
    • Change Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Align portfolio management practices with COBIT (APO05: Manage Portfolio).

    Reimagine Learning in the Face of Crisis

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}601|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • As organizations re-evaluate their priorities and shift to new ways of working, leaders and employees are challenged to navigate unchartered territory and to adjust quickly to ever-evolving priorities.
    • Learning how to perform effectively through the crisis and deliver on new priorities is crucial to the success of all employees and the organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The most successful organizations recognize that learning is critical to adjusting quickly and effectively to their new reality. This requires L&D to reimagine their approach to deliver learning that enables the organization’s immediate and evolving priorities.

    Impact and Result

    • L&D teams should focus on how to support employees and managers to develop the critical competencies they need to successfully perform through the crisis, enabling organizations to survive and thrive during and beyond the crisis.
    • Ensure learning needs align closely with evolving organizational priorities, collaborate cross-functionally, and curate content to provide the learning employees and leaders need most, when they need it.

    Reimagine Learning in the Face of Crisis Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prioritize

    Involve key stakeholders, identify immediate priorities, and conduct high-level triage of L&D.

    • Reimagine Learning in the Face of Crisis Storyboard
    • Reimagine Learning in the Face of Crisis Workbook

    2. Reimagine

    Determine learning needs and ability to realistically deliver learning. Leverage existing or curate learning content that can support learning needs.

    3. Transform

    Identify technical requirements for the chosen delivery method and draft a four- to six-week action plan.

    • How to Curate Guide
    • Tips for Building an Online Learning Community
    • Ten Tips for Adapting In-Person Training During a Crisis
    • Tips for Remote Learning in the Face of Crisis
    [infographic]

    Build a Data Warehouse

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}200|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Relational data warehouses, although reliable, centralized repositories for corporate data, were not built to handle the speed and volume of data and analytics today.
    • IT is under immense pressure from business units to provide technology that will yield greater agility and insight.
    • While some organizations are benefitting from modernization technologies, the majority of IT departments are unfamiliar with the technologies and have not yet defined clear use cases.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The vast majority of your corporate data is not being properly leveraged. Modernize the data warehouse to get value from the 80% of unstructured data that goes unused.
    • Avoid rip and replace. Develop a future state that complements your existing data warehouse with emerging technologies.
    • Be flexible in your roadmap. Create an implementation roadmap that’s incremental and adapts to changing business priorities.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish both the business and IT perspectives of today’s data warehouse environment.
    • Explore the art-of-the-possible. Don’t get stuck trying to gather technical requirements from business users who don’t know what they don’t know. Use Info-Tech’s interview guide to discuss the pains of the current environment, and more importantly, where stakeholders want to be in the future.
    • Build an internal knowledgebase with respect to emerging technologies. The technology landscape is constantly shifting and often difficult for IT staff to keep track of. Use Info-Tech’s Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck to ensure that IT is able to appropriately match the right tools to the business’ use cases.
    • Create a compelling business case to secure investment and support.

    Build a Data Warehouse Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be looking to modernize the relational data warehouse, review Info-Tech’s framework for identifying modernization opportunities, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current data warehouse environment

    Review the business’ perception and architecture of the current data warehouse environment.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 1: Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment
    • Data Warehouse Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Define modernization drivers

    Collaborate with business users to identify the strongest motivations for data warehouse modernization.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 2: Define Modernization Drivers
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Stakeholder Interview Guide
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Initiative Building Tool

    3. Create the modernization future state

    Combine business ideas with modernization initiatives and create a roadmap.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 3: Create the Modernization Future State
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Architectural Template
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Deployment Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Warehouse

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for data warehouse modernization.

    Establish the business and IT perspectives of the current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Holistic understanding of the current data warehouse.

    Business user engagement from the start of the project.

    Activities

    1.1 Review data warehouse project history.

    1.2 Evaluate data warehouse maturity.

    1.3 Draw architecture diagrams.

    1.4 Review supporting data management practices.

    Outputs

    Data warehouse maturity assessment

    Data architecture diagrams

    2 Explore Business Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Conduct a user workshop session to elicit the most pressing needs of business stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Modernization technology selection is directly informed by business drivers.

    In-depth IT understanding of the business pains and opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Review general trends and drivers in your industry.

    2.2 Identify primary business frustrations, opportunities, and risks.

    2.3 Identify business processes to target for modernization.

    2.4 Capture business ideas for the future state.

    Outputs

    Business ideas for modernization

    Defined strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    3 Review the Technology Landscape

    The Purpose

    Educate IT staff on the most common technologies for data warehouse modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved ability for IT to match technology with business ideas.

    Activities

    3.1 Appoint Modernization Advisors.

    3.2 Hold an open education and discussion forum for modernization technologies.

    Outputs

    Modernization Advisors identified

    Modernization technology education deck

    4 Define Modernization Solutions

    The Purpose

    Consolidate business ideas into modernization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Refinement of the strategic direction for data warehouse modernization.

    Activities

    4.1 Match business ideas to technology solutions.

    4.2 Group similar ideas to create modernization initiatives.

    4.3 Create future-state architecture diagrams.

    Outputs

    Identified strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    Defined modernization initiatives

    Future-state architecture for data warehouse

    5 Establish a Modernization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Validate and build out initiatives with business users.

    Define benefits and costs to establish ROI.

    Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completion of materials for a compelling business case and roadmap.

    Activities

    5.1 Validate use cases with business users.

    5.2 Define initiative benefits.

    5.3 Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    5.4 Define preliminary activities for initiatives.

    5.5 Evaluate initiative costs.

    5.6 Determine overall ROI.

    Outputs

    Validated modernization initiatives

    Data warehouse modernization roadmap

    Cybersecurity in Healthcare 2024

    Healthcare cybersecurity is a major concern for healthcare organizations and patients alike. In 2024, the healthcare industry faces several cybersecurity challenges, including the growing threat of ransomware, the increasing use of mobile devices in healthcare, and the need to comply with new regulations.

    Continue reading

    Secure IT-OT Convergence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}382|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 19 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations

    IT and OT are both very different complex systems. However, significant benefits have driven OT to be converged to IT. This results in IT security leaders, OT leaders and their teams' facing challenges in:

    • Governing and managing IT and OT security and accountabilities.
    • Converging security architecture and controls between IT and OT environments.
    • Compliance with regulations and standards.
    • Metrics for OT security effectiveness and efficiency.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Returning to isolated OT is not beneficial for the organization, therefore IT and OT need to learn to collaborate starting with communication to build trust and to overcome differences between IT and OT. Next, negotiation is needed on components such as governance and management, security controls on OT environments, compliance with regulations and standards, and metrics for OT security.
    • Most OT incidents start with attacks against IT networks and then move laterally into the OT environment. Therefore, converging IT and OT security will help protect the entire organization.
    • OT interfaces with the physical world while IT system concerns more on cyber world. Thus, the two systems have different properties. The challenge is how to create strategic collaboration between IT-OT based on negotiation and this needs top-down support.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech’s approach in preparing for IT/OT convergence in the planning phase is coordination and collaboration of IT and OT to

    • initiate communication to define roles and responsibilities.
    • establish governance and build cross-functional team.
    • identify convergence components and compliance obligations.
    • assess readiness.

    Secure IT/OT Convergence Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure IT/OT Convergence Storyboard – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to secure IT-OT convergence.

    Info-Tech provides a three-phase framework of secure IT/OT convergence, namely Plan, Enhance, and Monitor & Optimize. The essential steps in Plan are to:

  • Initiate communication to define roles and responsibilities.
  • Establish governance and build a cross-functional team.
  • Identify convergence components and compliance obligations.
  • Assess readiness.
    • Secure IT/OT Convergence Storyboard

    2. Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool – A tool to map organizational goals to secure IT-OT goals.

    This tool serves as a repository for information about the organization, compliance, and other factors that will influence your IT/OT convergence.

    • Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool

    3. Secure IT/OT Convergence RACI Chart Tool – A tool to identify and understand the owners of various IT/OT convergence across the organization.

    A critical step in secure IT/OT convergence is populating a RACI (Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed) chart. The chart assists you in organizing roles for carrying out convergence steps and ensures that there are definite roles that different individuals in the organization must have. Complete this tool to assign tasks to suitable roles.

    • Secure IT/OT Convergence RACI Chart Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Secure IT/OT Convergence

    Create a holistic IT/OT security culture.

    Analyst Perspective

    Are you ready for secure IT/OT convergence?

    IT/OT convergence is less of a convergence and more of a migration. The previously entirely separate OT ecosystem is migrating into the IT ecosystem, primarily to improve access via connectivity and to leverage other standard IT capabilities for economic benefit.

    In the past, OT systems were engineered to be air gapped, relying on physical protection and with little or no security in design, (e.g. OT protocols without confidentiality properties). However, now, OT has become dependent on the IT capabilities of the organization, thus OT inherits IT’s security issues, that is, OT is becoming more vulnerable to attack from outside the system. IT/OT convergence is complex because the culture, policies, and rules of IT are quite foreign to OT processes such as change management, and the culture, policies, and rules of OT are likewise foreign to IT processes.

    A secure IT/OT convergence can be conceived of as a negotiation of a strong treaty between two systems: IT and OT. The essential initial step is to begin with communication between IT and OT, followed by necessary components such as governing and managing OT security priorities and accountabilities, converging security controls between IT and OT environments, assuring compliance with regulations and standards, and establishing metrics for OT security.

    Photo of Ida Siahaan, Research Director, Security and Privacy Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Ida Siahaan
    Research Director, Security and Privacy Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT and OT are both very different complex systems. However, significant benefits have driven OT to converge with IT. This results in IT security leaders, OT leaders, and their teams facing challenges with:

    • Governing and managing IT and OT security and accountabilities.
    • Converging security architecture and controls between IT and OT environments.
    • Compliance with regulations and standards.
    • Metrics for OT security effectiveness and efficiency.
    Common Obstacles
    • IT/OT network segmentation and remote access issues, as most OT incidents indicate that the attackers gained access through the IT network, followed by infiltration into OT networks.
    • OT proprietary devices and unsecure protocols use outdated systems which may be insecure by design.
    • Different requirements of OT and IT security – i.e. IT (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) vs. OT (safety, reliability, and availability).
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach in preparing for IT/OT convergence (i.e. the Plan phase) is coordination and collaboration of IT and OT to:

    • Initiate communication to define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish governance and build a cross-functional team.
    • Identify convergence components and compliance obligations.
    • Assess readiness.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Returning to isolated OT is not beneficial for the organization, so IT and OT need to learn to collaborate, starting with communication to build trust and to overcome their differences. Next, negotiation is needed on components such as governance and management, security controls on OT environments, compliance with regulations and standards, and establishing metrics for OT security.

    Consequences of unsecure IT/OT convergence

    OT systems were built with no or little security design

    90% of organizations that use OT experienced a security incident. (Fortinet, 2021. Ponemon, 2019.)

    Bar graph comparing three years, 2019-2021, of four different OT security incidents: 'Ransomeware', 'Insider breaches', 'Phishing', and 'Malware'.
    (Source: Fortinet, 2021.)
    Lack of visibility

    86% of OT security-related service engagements lack complete visibility of OT network in 2021 (90% in 2020, 81% in 2019). (Source: “Cybersecurity Year In Review” Dragos, 2022.)

    The need for secure IT/OT convergence

    Important Industrial Control System (ICS) cyber incidents

    2000
    Target: Australian sewage plant. Method: Insider attack. Impact: 265,000 gallons of untreated sewage released.
    2012
    Target: Middle East energy companies. Method: Shamoon. Impact: Overwritten Windows-based systems files.
    2014
    Target: German Steel Mill. Method: Spear-phishing. Impact: Blast furnace failed to shut down.
    2017
    Target: Middle East safety instrumented system (SIS). Method: TRISIS/TRITON. Impact: Modified SIS ladder logic.
    2022
    Target: Viasat’s KA-SAT network. Method: AcidRain. Impact: Significant loss of communication for the Ukrainian military, which relied on Viasat’s services.
    Timeline of Important Industrial Control System (ICS) cyber incidents.
    1903
    Target: Marconi wireless telegraph presentation. Method: Morse code. Impact: Fake message sent “Rats, rats, rats, rats. There was a young fellow of Italy, Who diddled the public quite prettily.”
    2010
    Target: Iranian uranium enrichment plant. Method: Stuxnet. Impact: Compromised programmable logic controllers (PLCs).
    2013
    Target: ICS supply chain. Method: Havex. Impact: Remote Access Trojan (RAT) collected information and uploaded data to command-and-control (C&C) servers
    2016
    Target: Ukrainian power grid. Method: BlackEnergy. Impact: For 1-6 hours, power outages for 230,000 consumers.
    2021
    Target: Colonial Pipeline. Method: DarkSide ransomware. Impact: Compromised billing infrastructure halted the pipeline operation.

    (Source: US Department of Energy, 2018.


    ”Significant Cyber Incidents,” CSIS, 2022


    MIT Technology Review, 2022.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most OT incidents start with attacks against IT networks and then move laterally into the OT environment. Therefore, converging IT and OT security will help protect the entire organization.

    Case Study

    Horizon Power
    Logo for Horizon Power.
    INDUSTRY
    Utilities
    SOURCE
    Interview

    Horizon Power is the regional power provider in Western Australia and stands out as a leader not only in the innovative delivery of sustainable power, but also in digital transformation. Horizon Power is quite mature in distributed energy resource management; moving away from centralized generation to decentralized, community-led generation, which reflects in its maturity in converging IT and OT.

    Horizon Power’s IT/OT convergence journey started over six years ago when advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) was installed across its entire service area – an area covering more than one quarter of the Australian continent.

    In these early days of the journey, the focus was on leveraging matured IT approaches such as adoption of cloud services to the OT environment, rather than converging the two. Many years later, Horizon Power has enabled OT data to be more accessible to derive business benefits such as customer usage data using data analytics with the objective of improving the collection and management of the OT data to improve business performance and decision making.

    The IT/OT convergence meets legislation such as the Australian Energy Sector Cyber Security Framework (AESCSF), which has impacts on the architectural layer of cybersecurity that support delivery of the site services.

    Results

    The lessons learned in converging IT and OT from Horizon Power were:

    • Start with forming relationships to build trust and overcome any divide between IT and OT.
    • Collaborate with IT and OT teams to successfully implement solutions, such as vulnerability management and discovery tools for OT assets.
    • Switch the focus from confidentiality and integrity to availability in solutions evaluation
    • Develop training and awareness programs for all levels of the organization.
    • Actively encourage visible sponsorship across management by providing regular updates and consistent messaging.
    • Monitor cybersecurity metrics such as vulnerabilities, mean time to treat vulnerabilities, and intrusion attempts.
    • Manage third-party vendors using a platform which not only performs external monitoring but provides third-party vendors with visibility or potential threats in their organization.

    The Secure IT/OT Convergence Framework

    IT/OT convergence is less of a convergence and more of a migration. The previously entirely separate OT ecosystem is migrating onto the IT ecosystem, to improve access via the internet and to leverage other standard IT capabilities. However, IT and OT are historically very different, and without careful calculation, simply connecting the two systems will result in a problem. Therefore, IT and OT need to learn to live together starting with communication to build trust and to overcome differences between IT and OT.
    Convergence Elements
    • Process convergence
    • Software and data convergence
    • Network and infrastructure convergence
    Target Groups
    • OT leader and teams
    • IT leader and teams
    • Security leader and teams
    Security Components
    • Governance and compliance
    • Security strategy
    • Risk management
    • Security policies
    • IR, DR, BCP
    • Security awareness and training
    • Security architecture and controls

    Plan

    • Initiate communication
    • Define roles and responsibilities
    • Establish governance and build a cross-functional team
    • Identify convergence elements and compliance obligations
    • Assess readiness

    Governance

    Compliance

    Enhance

    • Update security strategy for IT/OT convergence
    • Update risk-management framework for IT/OT convergence
    • Update security policies and procedures for IT/OT convergence
    • Update incident response, disaster recovery, and business continuity plan for IT/OT convergence

    Security strategy

    Risk management

    Security policies and procedures

    IR, DR, and BCP

    Monitor &
    Optimize

    • Implement awareness, induction, and cross-training program
    • Design and deploy converging security architecture and controls
    • Establish and monitor IT/OT security metrics on effectiveness and efficiency
    • Red-team followed by blue-team activity for cross-functional team building

    Awareness and cross-training

    Architecture and controls

    Phases
    Color-coded phases with arrows looping back up from the bottom to top phase.
    • Plan
    • Enhance
    • Monitor & Optimize
    Plan Outcomes
    • Mapping business goals to IT/OT security goals
    • RACI chart for priorities and accountabilities
    • Compliance obligations register
    • Readiness checklist
    Enhance Outcomes
    • Security strategy for IT/OT convergence
    • Risk management framework
    • Security policies & procedures
    • IR, DR, BCP
    Monitor & Optimize Outcomes
    • Security awareness and training
    • Security architecture and controls
    Plan Benefits
    • Improved flexibility and less divided IT/OT
    • Improved compliance
    Enhance Benefits
    • Increased strategic common goals
    • Increased efficiency and versatility
    Monitor & Optimize Benefits
    • Enhanced security
    • Reduced costs

    Plan

    Initiate communication

    To initiate communication between the IT and OT teams, it is important to understand how the two groups are different and to build trust to find a holistic approach which overcomes those differences.
    IT OT
    Remote Access Well-defined access control Usually single-level access control
    Interfaces Human Machine, equipment
    Software ERP, CRM, HRIS, payroll SCADA, DCS
    Hardware Servers, switches, PCs PLC, HMI, sensors, motors
    Networks Ethernet Fieldbus
    Focus Reporting, communication Up-time, precision, safety
    Change management Frequent updates and patches Infrequent updates and patches
    Security Confidentiality, integrity, availability Safety, reliability, availability
    Time requirement Normally not time critical Real time

    Info-Tech Insight

    OT interfaces with the physical world while IT system concerns more on cyber world. Thus, the two systems have different properties. The challenge is how to create strategic collaboration between IT and OT based on negotiation, and this needs top-down support.

    Identifying organization goals is the first step in aligning your secure IT/OT convergence with your organization’s vision.

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction the organization is headed in.
    • Wise security investments depend on aligning your security initiatives to the organization.
    • Secure IT/OT convergence should contribute to your organization’s objectives by supporting operational performance and ensuring brand protection and shareholder value.

    Map organizational goals to IT/OT security goals

    Input: Corporate, IT, and OT strategies

    Output: Your goals for the security strategy

    Materials: Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool

    Participants: Executive leadership, OT leader, IT leader, Security leader, Compliance, Legal, Risk management

    1. As a group, brainstorm organization goals.
      1. Review relevant corporate, IT, and OT strategies.
    2. Record the most important business goals in the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than 10 goals. This limitation will be critical to helping focus on your secure IT/OT convergence.
    3. For each goal, identify one to two security alignment goals. These should be objectives for the security strategy that will support the identified organization goals.

    Download the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool

    Record organizational goals

    Sample of the definitions table with columns numbered 1-4.

    Refer to the Secure IT/OT Convergence Framework when filling in the following elements.

    1. Record your identified organization goals in the Goals Cascade tab of the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. For each of your organizational goals, identify IT alignment goals.
    3. For each of your organizational goals, identify OT alignment goals.
    4. For each of your organizational goals, select one to two IT/OT security alignment goals from the drop-down lists.

    Establish scope and boundaries

    It is important to know at the outset of the strategy: What are we trying to secure in IT/OT convergence ?
    This includes physical areas we are responsible for, types of data we care about, and departments or IT/OT systems we are responsible for.

    This also includes what is not in scope. For some outsourced services or locations, you may not be responsible for their security. In some business departments, you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

    Physical Scope and Boundaries

    • How many offices and locations does your organization have?
    • Which locations/offices will be covered by your information security management system (ISMS)?
    • How sensitive is the data residing at each location?
    • You may have many physical locations, and it is not necessary to list each one. Rather, list exceptional cases that are specifically in or out of scope.

    IT Systems Scope and Boundaries

    • There may be hundreds of applications that are run and maintained in your organization. Some of these may be legacy applications. Do you need to secure all your programs or only a select few?
    • Is the system owned or outsourced?
    • Where are you accountable for security?
    • How sensitive is the data that each system handles?

    Organizational Scope and Boundaries

    • Will your ISMS cover all departments within your organization? For example, do certain departments (e.g. operations) not need any security coverage?
    • Do you have the ability to make security decisions for each department?
    • Who are the key stakeholders/data owners for each department?

    OT Systems Scope and Boundaries

    • There may be hundreds of OT systems that are run and maintained in your organization. Do you need to secure all OT or a select subset?
    • Is the system owned or outsourced?
    • Where are you accountable for safety and security?
    • What reliability requirements does each system handle?

    Record scope and boundaries

    Sample Scope and Boundaries table. Refer to the Secure IT/OT Convergence Framework when filling in the following elements:
    • Record your security-related organizational scope, physical location scope, IT systems scope, and OT systems scope in the Scope tab of the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool.
    • For each item scoped, give the rationale for including it in the comments column. Careful attention should be paid to any elements that are not in scope.

    Plan

    Define roles and responsibilities

    Input: List of relevant stakeholders

    Output: Roles and responsibilities for the secure IT/OT convergence program

    Materials: Secure IT/OT Convergence RACI Chart Tool

    Participants: Executive leadership, OT leader, IT leader, Security leader

    There are many factors that impact an organization’s level of effectiveness as it relates to IT/OT convergence. How the two groups interact, what skill sets exist, the level of clarity around roles and responsibilities, and the degree of executive support and alignment are only a few. Thus, it is imperative in the planning phase to identify stakeholders who are:

    • Responsible: The people who do the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
    • Accountable: The person who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and will often be an executive or program sponsor.
    • Consulted: The people who provide information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
    • Informed: The people who are updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.

    Download the Secure IT/OT Convergence RACI Chart Tool

    Define RACI Chart

    Sample RACI chart with only the 'Plan' section enlarged.

    Define responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed (RACI) stakeholders.
    1. Customize the "work units" to best reflect your operation with applicable stakeholders.
    2. Customize the "action“ rows as required.
    Info-Tech Insight

    The roles and responsibilities should be clearly defined. For example, IT network should be responsible for the communication and configuration of all access points and devices from the remote client to the control system DMZ, and controls engineering should be responsible from the control system DMZ to the control system.

    Plan

    Establish governance and build cross-functional team

    To establish governance and build an IT/OT cross-functional team, it is important to understand the operation of OT systems and their interactions with IT within the organization, e.g. ad hoc, centralized, decentralized.

    The maturity ladder with levels 'Fully Converged', 'Collaborative Partners', 'Trusted Resources', 'Affiliated Entities', and 'Siloed' at the bottom. Each level has four maturity indicators listed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To determine IT/OT convergence maturity level, Info-Tech provides the IT/OT Convergence Self-Evaluation Tool.

    Centralized security governance model example

    Example of a centralized security governance model.

    Plan

    Identify convergence elements and compliance obligations

    To switch the focus from confidentiality and integrity to safety and availability for OT system, it is important to have a common language such as the Purdue model for technical communication.
    • A lot of OT compliance standards are technically focused and do not address governance and management, e.g. IT standards like the NIST Cybersecurity Framework. For example, OT system modeling with Purdue model will help IT teams to understand assets, networking, and controls. This understanding is needed to know the possible security solutions and where these solutions could be embedded to the OT system with respect to safety, reliability, and availability.
    • However, deployment of technical solutions or patches to OT system may nullify warranty, so arrangements should be made to manage this with the vendor or manufacturer prior to modification.
    • Finally, OT modernizations such as smart grid together with the advent of IIoT where data flow is becoming less hierarchical have encouraged the birth of a hybrid Purdue model, which maintains segmentation with flexibility for communications.

    Level 5: Enterprise Network

    Level 4: Site Business

    Level 3.5: DMZ
    Example: Patch Management Server, Application Server, Remote Access Server

    Level 3: Site Operations
    Example: SCADA Server, Engineering Workstation, Historian

    Level 2: Area Supervisory Control
    Example: SCADA Client, HMI

    Level 1: Basic Control
    Example: Batch Controls, Discrete Controls, Continuous Process Controls, Safety Controls, e.g. PLCs, RTUs

    Level 0: Process
    Example: Sensors, Actuators, Field Devices

    (Source: “Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture (PERA) Model,” ISA-99.)

    Identify compliance obligations

    To manage compliance obligations, it is important to use a platform which not only performs internal and external monitoring, but also provides third-party vendors with visibility on potential threats in their organization.
    Example table of compliance obligations standards. Example tables of compliance obligations regulations and guidelines.

    Source:
    ENISA, 2013
    DHS, 2009.

    • OT system has compliance obligations with industry regulations and security standards/regulations/guidelines. See the lists given. The lists are not exhaustive.
    • OT system owner can use the standards/regulations/guidelines as a benchmark to determine and manage the security level provided by third parties.
    • It is important to understand the various frameworks and to adhere to the appropriate compliance obligations, e.g. IEC/ISA 62443 - Security for Industrial Automation and Control Systems Series.

    IEC/ISA 62443 - Security for Industrial Automation and Control Systems Series

    International series of standards for asset owners, system integrators, and product manufacturers.
    Diagram of the international series of standards for asset owners.
    (Source: Cooksley, 2021)
    • IEC/ISA 62443 is a comprehensive international series of standards covering security for ICS systems, which recognizes three roles, namely: asset owner, system integrator, and product manufacturer.
    • In IEC/ISA 62443, requirements flow from the asset owner to the product manufacturer, while solutions flow in the opposite direction.
    • For the asset owner who owns and operates a system, IEC 62443-2 enables defining target security level with reference to a threat level and using the standard as a benchmark to determine the current security level.
    • For the system integrator, IEC 62443-3 assists to evaluate the asset owner’s requirements to create a system design. IEC 62443-3 also provides a method for verification that components provided by the product manufacturer are securely developed and support the functionality required.

    Record your compliance obligations

    Refer to the “Goals Cascade” tab of the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool.
    1. Identify your compliance obligations. Most organizations have compliance obligations that must be adhered to. These can include both mandatory and voluntary obligations. Mandatory obligations include:
      1. Laws
      2. Government regulations
      3. Industry standards
      4. Contractual agreements
      Voluntary obligations include standards that the organization has chosen to follow for best practices and any obligations that are required to maintain certifications. Organizations will have many different compliance obligations. For the purposes of your secure IT/OT convergence, include only those that have OT security requirements.
    2. Record your compliance obligations, along with any notes, in your copy of the Secure IT/OT Convergence Requirements Gathering Tool.
    3. Refer to the “Compliance DB” tab for lists of standards/regulations/guidelines.
    Table of mandatory and voluntary security compliance obligations.

    Plan

    Assess readiness

    Readiness checklist for secure IT/OT convergence

    People

    • Define roles and responsibilities on interaction based on skill sets and the degree of support and alignment.
    • Adopt well-established security governance practices for cross-functional teams.
    • Analyze and develop skills required by implementing awareness, induction, and cross-training program.

    Process

    • Conduct a maturity assessment of key processes and highlight interdependencies.
    • Redesign cybersecurity processes for your secure IT/OT convergence program.
    • Develop a baseline and periodically review on risks, security policies and procedures, incident response, disaster recovery, and business continuity plan.

    Technology

    • Conduct a maturity assessment and identify convergence elements and compliance obligations.
    • Develop a roadmap and deploy converging security architecture and controls step by step, working with trusted technology partners.
    • Monitor security metrics on effectiveness and efficiency and conduct continuous testing by red-team and blue-team activities.

    (Source: “Grid Modernization: Optimize Opportunities And Minimize Risks,” Info-Tech)

    Enhance

    Update security strategy

    To update security strategy, it is important to actively encourage visible sponsorship across management and to provide regular updates.

    Cycle for updating security strategy: 'Architecture design', 'Procurement', 'Installation', 'Maintenance', 'Decommissioning'.
    (Source: NIST SP 800-82 Rev.3, “Guide to Operational Technology (OT) Security,” NIST, 2022.)
    • OT system life cycle is like the IT system life cycle, starting with architectural design and ending with decommissioning.
    • Currently, IT only gets involved from installation or maintenance, so they may not fully understand the OT system. Therefore, if OT security is compromised, the same personnel who commissioned the OT system (e.g. engineering, electrical, and maintenance specialists) must be involved. Thus, it is important to have the IT team collaborate with the OT team in each stage of the OT system’s life cycle.
    • Finally, it is necessary to have propositional sharing of responsibilities between IT leaders, security leaders, and OT leaders who have broader responsibilities.

    Enhance

    Update risk management framework

    The need for asset and threat taxonomy

    • One of issues in IT/OT convergence is that OT systems focus on production, so IT solutions like security patching or updates may deteriorate a machine or take a machine offline and may not be applicable. For example, some facilities run with reliability of 99.999%, which only allows maximum of 5 minutes and 35 seconds or less of downtime per year.
    • Managing risks requires an understanding of the assets and threats for IT/OT systems. Having a taxonomy of the assets and the threats cand help.
    • Applying normal IT solutions to mitigate security risks may not be applicable in an OT environment, e.g. running an antivirus tool on OT system may remove essential OT operations files. Thus, this approach must be avoided; instead, systems must be rebuilt from golden images.
    Risk management framework.
    (Source: ENISA, 2018.)

    Enhance

    Update security policies and procedures

    • Policy is the link between people, process, and technology for any size of organization. Small organizations may think that having formal policies in place is not necessary for their operations, but compliance is applicable to all organizations, and vulnerabilities affect organizations of all sizes as well. Small organizations partnering with clients or other organizations are sometimes viewed as ideal proxies for attackers.
    • Updating security policies to align with the OT system so that there is a uniform approach to securing both IT and OT environments has several benefits. For example, enhancing the overall security posture as issues are pre-emptively avoided, being better prepared for auditing and compliance requirements, and improving governance especially when OT governance is weak.
    • In updating security policies, it is important to redefine the policy framework to include the OT framework and to prioritize the development of security policies. For example, entities that own or manage US and Canadian electric power grids must comply with North American Electric Reliability Corporation Critical Infrastructure Protection (NERC CIP) standards, specifically CIP-003 for Policy and Governance. This can be achieved by understanding the current state of policies and by right-sizing the policy suite based on a policy hierarchy.
    The White House released an Executive Order on Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity (EO 14028) in 2021 that establishes new requirements on the scope of protection and security policy such that it must include both IT and OT.

    Policy hierarchy example

    This example of a policy hierarchy features templates from Info-Tech’s Develop and Deploy Security Policies and Identify the Best Framework for Your Security Policies research.

    Example policy hierarchy with four levels, from top-down: 'Governance', 'Process-based policies', 'Prescriptive/ technical (for IT including OT elements)', 'Prescriptive/ technical (for users)'.

    Enhance

    Update IR, DR, and BCP

    A proactive approach to security is important, so actions such as updating and testing the incident response plan for OT are a must. (“Cybersecurity Year In Review” Dragos, 2022.)

    1. Customize organizational chart for IT/OT IR, DR, BCP based on governance and management model.
      E.g. ad hoc, internal distributed, internal centralized, combined distributed, and decentralized. (Software Engineering Institute, 2003)
    2. Adjust the authority of the new organizational chart and decide if it requires additional staffing.
      E.g. full authority, shared authority. (Software Engineering Institute, 2003)
    3. Update IR plan, DR plan, and BCP for IT/OT convergence.
      E.g. incorporate zero trust principles for converge network
    4. Testing updated IR plan, DR plan, and BCP.

    Optimize

    Implement awareness, induction, and cross-training

    To develop training and awareness programs for all levels of the organization, it is important to understand the common challenges in IT security that also affect secure IT/OT convergence and how to overcome those challenges.

    Alert Fatigue

    Too many false alarms, too many events to process, and an evolving threat landscape that wastes analysts’ valuable time on mundane tasks such as evidence collection. Meanwhile, only limited time is given for decision and conclusion, which results in fear of missing an incident and alert fatigue.

    Skill Shortages

    Obtaining and retaining cybersecurity-skilled talent is challenging. Organizations need to invest in the people, but not all organizations will be able to invest sufficiently to have their own dedicated security team.

    Lack of Insight

    To report progress, clear metrics are needed. However, cybersecurity still falls short in this area, as the system itself is complex, and much work is siloed. Furthermore, lessons learned are not yet distilled into insights yet for improving future accuracy.

    Lack of Visibility

    Ensuring complete visibility of the threat landscape, risks, and assets requires system integration and consistent workflow across the organization, and the convergence of OT, IoT, and IT enhances this challenge (e.g. machines cannot be scanned during operational uptime).
    (Source: Security Intelligence, 2020.)
    “Cybersecurity staff are feeling burnout and stressed to the extent that many are considering leaving their jobs.” (Danny Palmer, ZDNET News, 2022)

    Awareness may not correspond to readiness

    • An issue with IT/OT convergence training and awareness happens when awareness exists, but the personnel are trained only for IT security and are not trained for OT-specific security. For example, some organizations still use generic topics such as not opening email attachments, when the personnel do not even operate using email nor in a web browsing environment. (“Assessing Operational Readiness,” Dragos, 2022)
    • Meanwhile, as is the case with IT, OT security training topics are broad, such as OT threat intelligence, OT-specific incident response, and tabletop exercises.
    • Hence, it requires the creation of a training program development plan that considers the various audiences and topics and maps them accordingly.
    • Moreover, roles are also evolving due to convergence and modernization. These new roles require an integrative skill set. For example, the grid security & ops team might consist of an IT security specialist, SCADA technician/engineer, and OT/IIOT security specialist where OT/IIOT security specialist is a new role. (Grid Modernization: Optimize Opportunities and Minimize Risks,” Info-Tech)
    • In conclusion, it is important to approach talent development with an open mind. The ability to learn and flexibility in the face of change are important attributes, and technical skill sets can be improved with certifications and training.
    “One area regularly observed by Dragos is a weakness in overall cyber readiness and training tailored specific to the OT environment.” (“Assessing Operational Technology,” Dragos, 2022.)

    Certifications

    What are the options?
    • One of issues in certification is the complexity on relevancy in topics with respect to roles and levels.
    • An example solution is the European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA)’s approach to analyzing existing certifications by orientation, scope, and supporting bodies, grouped into specific certifications, relevant certifications, and safety certifications.

    Specific cybersecurity certification of ICS/SCADA
    Example: ISA-99/IEC 62443 Cybersecurity Certificate Program, GIAC Global Industrial Cyber Security Professional (GICSP), Certified SCADA Security Architect (CSSA), EC-Council ICS/SCADA Cybersecurity Training Course.

    Other relevant certification schemes
    Example: Network and Information Security (NIS) Driving License, ISA Certified Automation Professional (CAP), Industrial Security Professional Certification (NCMS-ISP).

    Safety Certifications
    Example: Board of Certified Safety Professionals (BCSP), European Network of Safety and Health Professional Organisations (ENSHPO).

    Order of certifications with 'Orientation' at the top, 'Scope', then 'Support'.(Source: ENISA, 2015.)

    Optimize

    Design and deploy converging security architecture and controls

    • IT/OT convergence architecture can be modeled as a layered structure based on security. In this structure, the bottom layer is referred as “OT High-Security Zone” and the topmost layer is “IT Low-Security Zone.” In this model, each layer has its own set of controls configured and acts like an additional layer of security for the zone underneath it.
    • The data flows from the “OT High-Security Zone” to the topmost layer, the “IT Low-Security Zone,” and the traffic must be verified to pass to another zone based on the need-to-know principle.
    • In the normal control flow within the “OT High-Security Zone” from level 3 to level 0, the traffic must be verified to pass to another level based on the principle of least privilege.
    • Remote access (dotted arrow) is allowed under strict access control and change control based on the zero-trust principle with clear segmentation and a point for disconnection between the “OT High-Security Zone” and the “OT Low-Security Zone”
    • This model simplifies the security process, as if the lower layers have been compromised, then the compromise can be confined on that layer, and it also prevents lateral movement as access is always verified.
    Diagram for the deployments of converging security architecture.(Source: “Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture (PERA) model,” ISA-99.)

    Off-the-shelf solutions

    Getting the right recipe: What criteria to consider?

    Image of a shopping cart with the four headlines on the right listed in order from top to bottom.
    Icon of an eye crossed out. Visibility and Asset Management

    Passive data monitoring using various protocol layers, active queries to devices, or parsing configuration files of OT, IoT, and IT environments on assets, processes, and connectivity paths.

    Icon of gears. Threat Detection, Mitigation, and Response (+ Hunting)

    Automation of threat analysis (signature-based, specification-based, anomaly-based, sandboxing) not only in IT but also in relevant environments, e.g. IoT, IIoT, and OT on assets, data, network, and orchestration with threat intelligence sharing and analytics.

    Icon of a check and pen. Risk Assessment and Vulnerability Management

    Risk scoring approach (qualitative, quantitative) based on variables such as behavioral patterns and geolocation. Patching and vulnerability management.

    Icon of a wallet. Usability, Architecture, Cost

    The user and administrative experience, multiple deployment options and extensive integration capabilities, and affordability.

    Optimize

    Establish and monitor IT/OT security metrics for effectiveness and efficiency

    Role of security metrics in a cybersecurity program (EPRI, 2017.)
    • Requirements for secure IT/OT are derived from mandatory or voluntary compliance, e.g. NERC CIP, NIST SP 800-53.
    • Frameworks for secure IT/OT are used to build and implement security, e.g. NIST CSF, AESCSF.
    • Maturity of secure IT/OT is used to measure the state of security, e.g. C2M2, CMMC.
    • Security metrics have the role of measuring effectiveness and efficiency.

    Icon of a person ascending stairs.
    Safety

    OT interfaces with the physical world. Thus, metrics based on risks related with life, health, and safety are crucial. These metrics motivate personnel by making clear why they should care about security. (EPRI, 2017.)

    Icon of a person ascending stairs.
    Business Performance

    The impact of security on the business can be measured in various metrics such as operational metrics, service level agreements (SLAs), and financial metrics. (BMC, 2022.)

    Icon of a person ascending stairs.
    Technology Performance

    Early detection will lead to faster remediation and less damage. Therefore, metrics such as maximum tolerable downtime (MTD) and mean time to recovery (MTR) indicate system reliability. (Dark Reading, 2022)

    Icon of a person ascending stairs.
    Security Culture

    The metrics for the overall quality of security culture with indicators such as compliance and audit, vulnerability management, and training and awareness.

    Further information

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of 'Build an Information Security Strategy'.

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations.

    This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current-state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building a security roadmap.

    Sample of 'Preparing for Technology Convergence in Manufacturing'.

    Preparing for Technology Convergence in Manufacturing

    Information technology (IT) and operational technology (OT) teams have a long history of misalignment and poor communication.

    Stakeholder expectations and technology convergence create the need to leave the past behind and build a culture of collaboration.

    Sample of 'Implement a Security Governance and Management Program'.

    Implement a Security Governance and Management Program

    Your security governance and management program needs to be aligned with business goals to be effective.

    This approach also helps provide a starting point to develop a realistic governance and management program.

    This project will guide you through the process of implementing and monitoring a security governance and management program that prioritizes security while keeping costs to a minimum.

    Bibliography

    Assante, Michael J. and Robert M. Lee. “The Industrial Control System Cyber Kill Chain.” SANS Institute, 2015.

    “Certification of Cyber Security Skills of ICS/SCADA Professionals.” European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA), 2015. Web.

    Cooksley, Mark. “The IEC 62443 Series of Standards: A Product Manufacturer‘s Perspective.” YouTube, uploaded by Plainly Explained, 27 Apr. 2021. Accessed 26 Aug. 2022.

    “Cyber Security Metrics for the Electric Sector: Volume 3.” Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), 2017.

    “Cybersecurity and Physical Security Convergence.” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA). Accessed 19 May 2022.

    “Cybersecurity in Operational Technology: 7 Insights You Need to Know,” Ponemon, 2019. Web.

    “Developing an Operational Technology and Information Technology Incident Response Plan.” Public Safety Canada, 2020. Accessed 6 Sep. 2022.

    Gilsinn, Jim. “Assessing Operational Technology (OT) Cybersecurity Maturity.” Dragos, 2021. Accessed 02 Sep. 2022.

    “Good Practices for Security of Internet of Things.” European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA), 2018. Web.

    Greenfield, David. “Is the Purdue Model Still Relevant?” AutomationWorld. Accessed 1 Sep. 2022

    Hemsley, Kevin E., and Dr. Robert E. Fisher. “History of Industrial Control System Cyber Incidents.” US Department of Energy (DOE), 2018. Accessed 29 Aug. 2022.

    “ICS Security Related Working Groups, Standards and Initiatives.” European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA), 2013.

    Killcrece, Georgia, et al. “Organizational Models for Computer Security Incident Response Teams (CSIRTs).” Software Engineering Institute, CMU, 2003.

    Liebig, Edward. “Security Culture: An OT Survival Story.” Dark Reading, 30 Aug. 2022. Accessed 29 Aug. 2022.

    Bibliography

    O'Neill, Patrick. “Russia Hacked an American Satellite Company One Hour Before the Ukraine Invasion.” MIT Technology Review, 10 May 2022. Accessed 26 Aug. 2022.

    Palmer, Danny. “Your Cybersecurity Staff Are Burned Out – And Many Have Thought About Quitting.” Zdnet, 08 Aug. 2022. Accessed 19 Aug. 2022.

    Pathak, Parag. “What Is Threat Management? Common Challenges and Best Practices.” SecurityIntelligence, 23 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Raza, Muhammad. “Introduction To IT Metrics & KPIs.” BMC, 5 May 2022. Accessed 12 Sep. 2022.

    “Recommended Practice: Developing an Industrial Control Systems Cybersecurity Incident Response Capability.” Department of Homeland Security (DHS), Oct. 2009. Web.

    Sharma, Ax. “Sigma Rules Explained: When and How to Use Them to Log Events.” CSO Online, 16 Jun. 2018. Accessed 15 Aug. 2022.

    “Significant Cyber Incidents.” Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS). Accessed 1 Sep. 2022.

    Tom, Steven, et al. “Recommended Practice for Patch Management of Control Systems.” Department of Homeland Security (DHS), 2008. Web.

    “2021 ICS/OT Cybersecurity Year In Review.” Dragos, 2022. Accessed 6 Sep. 2022.

    “2021 State of Operational Technology and Cybersecurity Report,” Fortinet, 2021. Web.

    Zetter, Kim. “Pre-Stuxnet, Post-Stuxnet: Everything Has Changed, Nothing Has Changed.” Black Hat USA, 08 Aug. 2022. Accessed 19 Aug. 2022.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Jeff Campbell, Manager, Technology Shared Services, Horizon Power, AU. Jeff Campbell
    Manager, Technology Shared Services
    Horizon Power, AU

    Jeff Campbell has more than 20 years' experience in information security, having worked in both private and government organizations in education, finance, and utilities sectors.

    Having focused on developing and implementing information security programs and controls, Jeff is tasked with enabling Horizon Power to capitalize on IoT opportunities while maintaining the core security basics of confidentiality, integrity and availability.

    As Horizon Power leads the energy transition and moves to become a digital utility, Jeff ensures the security architecture that supports these services provides safer and more reliable automation infrastructures.

    Christopher Harrington
    Chief Technology Officer (CTO)
    Carolinas Telco Federal Credit Union

    Frank DePaola
    Vice President, Chief Information Security Officer (CISO)
    Enpro

    Kwasi Boakye-Boateng
    Cybersecurity Researcher
    Canadian Institute for Cybersecurity

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}274|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture Domains
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-domains
    • A mature EA function is increasingly becoming an organizational priority to drive innovation, provide insight, and define digital capabilities.
    • Proliferation of digital technology has increased complexity, straining the EA function to deliver insights.
    • An EA tool increases the efficiency with which the EA function can deliver insights, but a large number of organizations have not a selected an EA tool that suits their needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • EA tool value largely comes from tying organizational context and requirements to the selection process.
    • Organizations that have selected an EA tool often fail to have it adopted and show its true value. To ensure successful adoption and value delivery, the EA tool selection process must account for the needs of business stakeholders and tool users.

    Impact and Result

    • Link the need for the EA tool to your organization’s EA value proposition. The connection enables the EA tool to address the future needs of stakeholders and the design style of the EA team.
    • Use Info-Tech’s EA Solution Recommendation Tool to create a shortlist of EA tools that is suited to the preferences of the organization.
    • Gather additional information on the shortlist of EA tool vendors to narrow down the selection using the EA Tool Request for Information Template.

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should procure an EA tool in the digital age, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Executive Brief
    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phases 1-3

    1. Make the case

    Decide if an EA tool is needed in your organization and define the requirements of EA tool users.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 1: Make the Case
    • EA Value Proposition Template
    • EA Tool User Requirements Template

    2. Shortlist EA tools

    Determine your organization’s preferences in terms of product capabilities and vendor characteristics.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 2: Shortlist EA Tools
    • EA Solution Recommendation Tool

    3. Select and communicate the process

    Gather information on shortlisted vendors and make your final decision.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 3: Select and Communicate the Process
    • EA Tool Request for Information Template
    • EA Tool Demo Script Template
    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    • EA Tool Selection Process Template
    [infographic]

    Modernize Your SDLC

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}148|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,263 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing backlog, jeopardizing product success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivery quality and throughput go hand in hand. Focus on meeting minimum process and product quality standards first. Improved throughput will eventually follow.
    • Business integration is not optional. The business must be involved in guiding delivery efforts, and ongoing validation and verification product changes.
    • The software development lifecycle (SDLC) must deliver more than software. Business value is generated through the products and services delivered by your SDLC. Teams must provide the required product support and stakeholders must be willing to participate in the product’s delivery.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of a successful product. Come to an organizational agreement of what defines a high-quality and successful product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
    • Clarify the roles, processes, and tools to support business value delivery and satisfy stakeholder expectations. Indicate where and how key roles are involved throughout product delivery to validate and verify work items and artifacts. Describe how specific techniques and tools are employed to meet stakeholder requirements.
    • Focus optimization efforts on most affected stages. Reveal the health of your SDLC from the value delivery, business and technical practice quality standards, discipline, throughput, and governance perspectives with a diagnostic. Identify and roadmap the solutions to overcome the root causes of your diagnostic results.

    Modernize Your SDLC Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your SDLC, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set your SDLC context

    State the success criteria of your SDLC practice through the definition of product quality and organizational priorities. Define your SDLC current state.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 1: Set Your SDLC Context
    • SDLC Strategy Template

    2. Diagnose your SDLC

    Build your SDLC diagnostic framework based on your practice’s product and process objectives. Root cause your improvement opportunities.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 2: Diagnose Your SDLC
    • SDLC Diagnostic Tool

    3. Modernize your SDLC

    Learn of today’s good SDLC practices and use them to address the root causes revealed in your SDLC diagnostic results.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 3: Modernize Your SDLC
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your SDLC

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your SDLC Context

    The Purpose

    Discuss your quality and product definitions and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

    Review your case for strengthening your SDLC practice.

    Review the current state of your roles, processes, and tools in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of products and quality that is accepted across the organization.

    Clear business and IT objectives and metrics that dictate your SDLC practice’s success.

    Defined SDLC current state people, process, and technologies.

    Activities

    1.1 Define your products and quality.

    1.2 Define your SDLC objectives.

    1.3 Measure your SDLC effectiveness.

    1.4 Define your current SDLC state.

    Outputs

    Product and quality definitions.

    SDLC business and technical objectives and vision.

    SDLC metrics.

    SDLC capabilities, processes, roles and responsibilities, resourcing model, and tools and technologies.

    2 Diagnose Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the components of your diagnostic framework.

    Review the results of your SDLC diagnostic.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    SDLC diagnostic framework tied to your SDLC objectives and definitions.

    Root causes to your SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Build your diagnostic framework.

    2.2 Diagnose your SDLC.

    Outputs

    SDLC diagnostic framework.

    Root causes to SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    3 Modernize Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the SDLC practices used in the industry.

    Review the scope and achievability of your SDLC optimization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness and efficiency of your SDLC.

    Realistic and achievable SDLC optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Learn and adopt SDLC good practices.

    3.2 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Optimization initiatives and target state SDLC practice.

    SDLC optimization roadmap, risks and mitigations, and stakeholder communication flow.

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}600|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,240 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Virtual team members must rely upon collaboration technology to communicate and collaborate.
    • Management practices and approaches that work face to face do not always translate effectively in virtual contexts.
    • Managers cannot rely upon spontaneous social interactions that happen organically when people are colocated to build meaningful and trusting relationships. Space and time need to be created in a virtual environment for this to happen.
    • Observing an employee’s performance or development can be more difficult, and relying on others’ feedback becomes more critical for managing performance and development.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Managing virtual teams does not require developing new manager competencies. Instead, managers need to “dial up” competencies they already have and adjust their approaches.
    • Setting clear expectations with virtual teams creates the foundation needed to manage them effectively.
    • Virtual employees crave more meaningful interactions about performance and development with their managers.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a solid foundation for managing virtual teams by setting clear expectations and taking a more planful approach to managing performance and employee development.
    • Dial up key management competencies that you already have. Managers do not need to develop new competencies; they just need to adjust and refocus their approaches.

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Equip managers to effectively manage virtual teams

    Equip managers to become more effective with managing remote teams.

    The workbook serves as a reference guide participants will use to support formal training.

    • Training Deck: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Standard Participant Training Session Evaluation Template

    2. Additional Resources

    Many organizations are developing plans to allow employees more flexible work options, including remote work. Use these resources to help managers and employees make the most of remote work arrangements.

    • Work-From-Home Tips for Managers
    • Work-From-Home Tips for Employees
    • Health & Safety at Home Infographic
    • Wellness and Working From Home
    • Ergonomic Workspaces Infographic
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Learning objectives

    Describe the benefits of virtual teams.

    Create a plan for adopting effective management practices and setting clear expectations with virtual teams.

    Identify potential solutions to the challenges of managing performance and developing members of virtual teams.

    Create an action plan to increase effectiveness in managing virtual teams.

    Target audience

    People managers who manage or plan to manage virtual teams.

    Training length

    Two three-hour sessions

    Training material

    • Use the speaker’s notes in the notes pane section of each slide to plan and practice the training session.
    • Activity slides are scattered throughout this training deck and are clearly numbered in the slide title.
    • Notes in italics are written to the facilitator and are not meant to be read aloud.
    • Download the Workbook for participants to use.

    Suggested materials for activities:

    • Index cards or sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/large table space/flip chart

    Agenda & activities

    Section 1

    Section 2

    10 min

    Welcome: Overview & Introductions

    • Introductions
    10 min

    Welcome: Overview & Introductions

    • Session 1 Review
    • Session 2 Overview
    50 min

    1.1 Introduction to virtual teams

    • What kind of virtual team do you lead?
    • Virtual team benefits and challenges
    55 min

    2.1 Managing wellbeing in a virtual team context

    • Share current practices and challenges regarding wellbeing in virtual teams
    • Identify and discuss proposed solutions
    • Develop draft action plan for managing wellbeing in a virtual team context
    5 min

    Break

    5 min Break
    45 min

    1.2 Laying the foundation for a virtual team

    • Identify behaviors to better inform, interact with, and involve team members
    60 min

    2.2 Managing performance in a virtual team context

    • Share current performance management practices for virtual teams
    • Identify challenges of current practices and propose solutions
    • Develop draft action plan for managing performance in a virtual team context
    10 min

    Break

    10 min Break
    55 min

    1.2 Laying the foundation for a virtual team

    • Identify and share ways you prefer to communicate for different activities
    • Develop draft action plan for laying the foundation for a virtual team
    40 min

    Action planning & conclusion

    • Refine consolidated action plan (three parts) and commit to implementing it
    • Key takeaways
    5 min

    Session 1 Wrap-Up

    Recommended Customization

    Review all slides and adjust the language or content as needed to suit your organizational context and culture.

    The pencil icon to the left denotes slides requiring customization of the slide and/or the speaker’s notes, e.g. adding in an organization-specific process.

    Customization instructions are found in the notes pane.

    Tips

    • Adjust the speaker’s notes on the slides before (or after) any slides you modify or delete to ensure logical transitions between slides.
    • Update the agenda to reflect new timings if major modifications are made.
    • Even seasoned leaders need to be reminded of the basics now and again. Rather than delete more basic slides, cut back on the amount of time spent covering them and frame the content as a refresher.
    • Participant Workbooks
    • Relevant organization-specific documents (see side panel)
    • Training Session Feedback Form

    Required Information

    • Communication guidelines for managers (e.g. cadence of manager interactions)
    • Performance management process and guidelines
    • Employee development guidelines
    • List of available resources (e.g. social collaboration tools)

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 1.1

    Practical foundations for managing teams in a remote environment

    Feasibility of virtual IT teams

    Most organizations are planning some combination of remote and onsite work in 2022.

    This is an image of a bar graph demonstrating the percentage of companies who have the following plans for return to work: Full work-from-home (All employees WFH permanently) - 4% ; No work-from-home permitted	9% ; Partial work-from-home team (Eligible employees can WFH for a certain portion of their work week)	23% ; Balanced work-from-home team (All employees can WFH for a certain portion of their work week)	28% ; Hybrid work-from-home team (Eligible employees WFH on a full-time basis)	37%

    Source: IT Talent Trends, 2022; n=199

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Most organizations are planning some combination of remote and onsite work in 2022 – the highest reported plans for WFH were hybrid, balanced, and partial work-from-home. This builds on our findings in the IT Talent Trends 2022 report.

    Feasibility of virtual IT teams

    What percentage of roles in IT are capable of being performed remotely permanently?

    Approximately what percentage of roles in IT are capable of being performed remotely permanently?

    0% to less than 10%: 3%; 10% to less than 25%: 5%; 25% to less than 50%: 12%; 50% to less than 75%: 30%; 75% to 100%L 50%.

    IT Talent Trends, 2022; n=207

    Speaker’s Notes:

    80% of respondents estimated that 50 to 100% of IT roles can be performed remotely.

    Virtual teams take all kinds of forms

    A virtual team is any team that has members that are not colocated and relies on technology for communications.

    This image depicts the three levels of virtual teams, Municipal; National; Global.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Before we start, it will be useful to review what we mean by the term “virtual team.” For our purposes we will be defining a virtual team as any team that has members that are not colocated and relies on technology for communications.

    There are a wide variety of virtual work arrangements and a variety of terms used to describe them. For example, some common terms include:

    • “Flexible work arrangements”: Employees have the option to work where they see fit (within certain constraints). They may choose to work from the office, home, a shared office space, the road, etc.
    • “Remote work,” “work from home,” and “telecommuting”: These are just various ways of describing how or where people are working virtually. They all share the idea that these kinds of employees are not colocated.
    • “Multi-office team”: the team members all work in office environments, but they may not always be in the same office as their team members or manager.

    Our definition of virtual work covers all of these terms. It is also distance neutral, meaning that it applies equally to teams that are dispersed globally or regionally or even those working in the same cities but dispersed throughout different buildings. Our definition also applies whether virtual employees work full time or part time.

    The challenges facing managers arise as soon as some team members are not colocated and have to rely on technology to communicate and coordinate work. Greater distances between employees can complicate challenges (e.g. time zone coordination), but the core challenges of managing virtual teams are the same whether those workers are merely located in different buildings in the same city or in different buildings on different continents.

    1.1 What kind of virtual team do you lead?

    15 Minutes

    Working on your own, take five minutes to figure out what kind of virtual team you lead.

    1. How many people on your team work virtually (all, most, or a small percentage)?
    2. How often and how regularly do they tend to work virtually (full time, part time regularly, or part time as needed)?
    3. What kinds of virtual work arrangements are there on your team (multi-site, work from home, mobile employees)?
    4. Where do your workers tend to be physically located (different offices but in the same city/region or globally dispersed)?
    5. Record this information in your workbook.
    6. Discuss as a group.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Size of virtual team
    • Current remote work practices

    Output

    • Documented list of current state of remote work

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Advantages

    Benefits to the organization

    Benefits to employees

    Operational continuity in disaster situations that prevent employees from coming into the office.

    Cost savings: Employees who WFH half the time can save $2,500 to $4,000 per year (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Cost savings: Organizations save ~$11,000 annually per employee working from home half the time (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Time savings: Employees who WFH half the time save on average 11 workdays per year (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Increased attraction: 71% of employees would likely choose one employer over another based on WFH offerings (Owl Labs, 2021).

    Improved wellbeing:

    83% employees agree that WFH would make them happier.

    80% agree that WFH would decrease their stress.

    81% agree that WFH would improve their ability to manage their work-life balance.

    (Owl Labs, 2021)

    Increased retention: 74% of employees would be less likely to leave their employer if they could WFH (Owl Labs, 2021).

    Increased flexibility: 32% of employees rated the “ability to have a flexible schedule” as the biggest benefit of WFH (OWL Labs, 2021).

    Increased productivity: 50% of employees report they would maintain or increase their productivity while working from home (Glassdoor Team, 2020).

    Increased engagement: Offsite employees tend to have higher overall engagement than onsite employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2020).

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Remote work arrangements are becoming more and more common, and for good reason: there are a lot of benefits to the organization – and to employees.

    #1: Save Money

    Perhaps one of the most common reasons for opting for remote-work arrangements is the potential cost savings. One study found that organizations could save about $11,000 per employee working from home half the time (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    #2 Increased Attraction

    In addition, supporting remote-work arrangements can attract employees. One study found that 71% of employees would likely choose one employer over another based on WFH offerings (Owl Labs, 2019).

    #3 Improve productivity.

    There are also improvements to productivity. Fifty percent of employees report they would maintain or increase their productivity while working from home (Glassdoor Team, 2020).

    Remote work also has benefits to employees.

    #1: Save Money

    As with organizations, employees also benefit financially from remote work arrangements, saving between $2,500 and $4,000 and on average 11 working days while working from home half of the time.

    #2: Improved Wellbeing

    Most employees agree that working from home makes them happier, reduces stress, and provides an improved work-life balance through increased flexibility.

    Challenges

    Organizations

    • Concerns that WFH may stifle innovation (Scientific American, 2021), likely due to the potential lack of collaboration and knowledge sharing.
    • Fewer organic opportunities for informal interaction between employees working from home means active efforts are required to foster organizational culture.

    Leaders

    • 42% of managers believe that monitoring the productivity of their direct reports is a top challenge of WFH (Ultimate Software, 2019).
    • The lack of in-person supervision compounded with a lack of trust in employees leads many leaders to believe that WFH will result in a drop in productivity.

    Employees

    • 20% of employees report collaboration/communication as their top struggle with WFH (Owl Labs, 2021).
    • Employees often experience burnout from working longer hours due to the lack of commute, blurring of work and home life, and the perceived need to prove their productivity.

    Many of these barriers can be addressed by changing traditional mindsets and finding alternative ways of working, but the traditional approach to work is so entrenched that it has been hard to make the shift.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Many organizations are still grappling with the challenges of remote work. Some are just perceived challenges, while others are quite real.

    Limited innovation and a lack of informal interaction are a potential consequence of failing to properly adapt to the remote-work environment.

    Leaders also face challenges with remote work. Losing in-person supervision has led to the lack of trust and a perceived drop in productivity.

    A study conducted 2021 asked remote workers to identify their biggest struggle with working remotely. The top three struggles remote workers report facing are unplugging after work, loneliness, and collaborating and/or communicating.

    Seeing the struggles remote workers identify is a good reminder that these employees have a unique set of challenges. They need their managers to help them set boundaries around their work; create feelings of connectedness to the organization, culture, and team; and be expert communicators.

    1.2 Virtual teams: benefits and challenges

    20 Minutes

    1. Discuss and list:
      1. Any positives you’ve experienced since managing virtual employees.
      2. Any challenges you’ve had to manage connected to managing virtual employees.
    2. Record information in the workbook.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Personal experiences managing remote teams

    Output

    • List of benefits and challenges of remote work

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 1.2

    Laying the foundations for a virtual team

    The 3i’s: Inform, interact, and involve your way to effective management:

    Inform

    Interact Involve

    ↓ Down

    Connect

    ↑ Up

    Tell employees the whys

    Get to know employees

    Solicit input from employees

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Effectively managing a virtual team really comes down to adopting management approaches that will engage virtual employees.

    Managing a virtual team does not actually require a new management style. The basics of effective management are the same in both colocated and virtual teams; however, the emphasis on certain behaviors and actions we take often differs. Managing a virtual team requires much more thoughtfulness and planning in our everyday interactions with our teams as we cannot rely on the relative ease of face-to-face interactions available to colocated teams.

    The 3i’s Engaging Management Model is useful when interacting with all employees and provides a handy framework for more planful interactions with virtual employees.

    Think of your management responsibilities in these three buckets – they are the most important components of being an effective manager. We’re first going to look at inform and involve before moving on to interact.

    Inform: Relay information down from senior management and leaders to employees. Communicate the rationale behind decisions and priorities, and always explain how they will directly affect employees.

    Why is this important? According to McLean & Company’s Engagement Survey data, employees who say their managers keep them well informed about decisions that affect them are 3.4 times more likely to be engaged (Source: McLean & Company, 2020; N=77,363). Your first reaction to this might be “I already do this,” which may very well be the case. Keep in mind, though, we sometimes tend to communicate on a “need-to-know basis,” especially when we are stressed or short on time. Engaging employees takes more. Always focus on explaining the “why?” or the rationale behind business decisions.

    It might seem like this domain should be the least affected, since important company announcements probably continue in a remote environment. But remember that information like that also flows informally. And even in formal settings, there are question-and-answer opportunities. Or maybe your employee might come to your office to ask for more details. Virtual team members can’t gather around the watercooler. They don’t have the same opportunities to hear information in passing as people who are colocated do, so managers need to make a concerted effort to share information with virtual team members in a clear and timely way.

    Swinging over to the other end, we have involve: Involve your employees. Solicit information and feedback from employees and collaborate with them.

    However, it’s not enough to just solicit their feedback and input; you also need to act on it.

    Make sure you involve your employees in a meaningful way. Such collaboration makes employees feel like a valued part of the team. Not to mention that they often have information and perspectives that can help make your decisions stronger!

    Employees who say their department leaders act on feedback from them are 3.9 times more likely to be engaged than those whose leaders don’t. (Source: McLean & Company, 2020; N=59,779). That is a huge difference!

    Keeping virtual employees engaged and feeling connected and committed to the organization requires planful and regular application of the 3i’s model.

    Finally, Interact: Connect with employees on a personal level; get to know them and understand who they are on a personal and professional level.

    Why? Well, over and above the fact that it can be rewarding for you to build stronger relationships with your team, our data shows that human connection makes a significant difference with employees. Employees who believe their managers care about them as a person are 3.8 times more likely to be engaged than those who do not (Source: McLean & Company, 2017; N=70,927).

    And you might find that in a remote environment, this is the area that suffers the most, since a lot of these interactions tend to be unscripted, unscheduled, and face to face.

    Typically, if we weren’t in the midst of a pandemic, we’d emphasize the importance of allocating some budget to travel and get some face-to-face time with your staff. Meeting and interacting with team members face to face is crucial to building trusting relationships, and ultimately, an effective team, so given the context of our current circumstances, we recommend the use of video when interacting with your employees who are remote.

    Relay information down from senior management to employees.

    Ensure they’ve seen and understand any organization-wide communication.

    Share any updates in a timely manner.

    Connect with employees on a personal level.
    Ask how they’re doing with the new work arrangement.
    Express empathy for challenges (sick family member, COVID-19 diagnosis, etc.).
    Ask how you can support them.
    Schedule informal virtual coffee breaks a couple of times a week and talk about non-work topics.

    Get information from employees and collaborate with them.
    Invite their input (e.g. have a “winning remotely” brainstorming session).
    Escalate any challenges you can’t address to your VP.
    Give them as much autonomy over their work as possible – don’t micromanage.

    1.3 Identify behaviors to inform, interact with, and involve team members

    20 Minutes

    Individually:

    1. Identify one behavior for each of Inform, Interact, and Involve to improve.
    2. Record information in the workbook.

    As a group:

    1. Discuss behaviors to improve for each of Inform, Interact, and Involve and record new ideas to incorporate into your leadership practice.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • 3i's Model
    • Current leadership behaviors to improve

    Output

    • List of behaviors to better inform, interact, and involve team members

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Laying the foundation: Set clear expectations

    Tasks

    • What are the daily and weekly team activities? How do they affect one another?

    Goals

    • Clarify any adjustments to strategy based on the situation; clarify metrics.

    Communication

    • How often and when will you check in? What should they come to you for? What modalities will you use and when?

    Roadblocks

    • Involve your team in deciding how to handle roadblocks and challenges.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Clear expectations are important in any environment, remote or not. But it is much harder to do in a remote environment. The barrier to seeking clarification is so much higher (For example, email vs. catching someone in hallway, or you can’t notice that a colleague is struggling without them asking).

    Communication – This is one area where the importance actually changes in a remote context. We’ve been talking about a lot of practices that are the same in importance whether you’re in an office or remote, and maybe you just enact them differently. But clarity around communication processes is actually tremendously more important in a remote environment.

    Adopt a five-step process to set specific and documented expectations

    1. Check in with how your team member is doing on a daily basis. Don’t forget to ask how they are doing personally.
    2. Follow up on previously set expectations. Ask how things are going. Discuss if priorities or expectations have changed and update expectations accordingly.
    3. Ask if they are experiencing any roadblocks and collaborate to find solutions.
    4. Provide feedback and recognition as appropriate.
    5. Document newly set expectations – either through a collaboration tool or through email.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Suggested best practices: Hold daily team check-ins and hold separate individual check-ins. Increase frequency of these.

    During Check-in
    1. Set up a running Teams chat for your team.
    • This is your community. You must be the biggest cheerleader and keep the team feeling like they are contributing. Make sure everyone is involved.
  • Start each workday with a video scrum to discuss what’s coming today for your team.
    • Ask: What are you planning to work on today? Are there any roadblocks I can help with? Technology working OK?
  • Right after your team meeting, set up an “every morning video call” one-on-one meeting with each team member (5-10 minutes max).
    • Ask: What are you working on today? What will your momentum metrics be? What do you need from me?
  • Set up a separate video call at the end of the afternoon to review what everyone did (5 minutes max).
    • Ask: What went well? What went poorly? How can we improve?
  • After a Check-in
    1. Be accessible:
      • Ensure your team knows the best way to get in touch with you.
      • Email is not ideal for informal, frequent contact – use messaging instead.
    2. Be available:
      • Keep a running conversation going in Teams.
      • Respond in a timely manner; address issues quickly so that your team has what they need to succeed.
      • Let your team know if you’ll be away/offline for longer than an hour during the workday and ask them to do the same (e.g. for an appointment).
      • Help address roadblocks, answer questions, clarify priorities, etc.

    Define communication requirements

    • Set up an ongoing communication with your team.
      • E.g. a running conversation on Slack or Teams
    • Schedule daily virtual meetings and check-ins.
      • This can help to maintain a sense of normalcy and conduct a pulse check on your team.
    • Use video for important conversations.
      • Video chat creates better rapport, shows body language, and lessens feelings of isolation, but it can be taxing.
    • Set expectations about communication.
      • Differentiate between day-to-day communication and updates on the state of events.
    • Clearly communicate the collaboration toolkit.
      • What do we have available? What is the purpose of each?

    Speaker’s Notes:

    With organizational expectations set, we need to establish team expectations around how we collaborate and communicate.

    Today there is no lack of technology available to support our virtual communication. We can use the phone, conference calls, videoconferencing, Skype, instant messaging, [insert organization-specific technological tools.], etc.

    However, it is important to have a common understanding of which tools are most appropriate when and for what.

    What are some of the communication channel techniques you’ve found useful in your informal interactions with employees or that you’ve seen work well between employees?

    [Have participants share any technological tools they find useful and why.]

    Check in with your team on communication requirements

    • Should we share our calendars, hours of availability, and/or IM status?
    • How often should we meet as a team and one on one? Should we institute a time when we should not communicate virtually?
    • Which communication channel should we use in what context? How should we decide which communication method to use?
    • Should I share guidelines for email and meeting etiquette (or any other communication methods)?
    • Should we establish a new team charter?
    • What feedback does the team have regarding how we’ve been communicating?

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Whenever we interact, we make the following kinds of social exchanges. We exchange:

    • Information: Data or opinions
    • Emotions: Feelings and evaluations about the data or opinions
    • Motivations: What we feel like doing in response to data or opinions

    We need to make sure that these exchanges are happening as each team member intends. To do this, we have to be sensitive to what information is being conveyed, what emotions are involved in the interaction, and how we are motivating each other to act through the interaction. Every interaction will have intended and unintended effects on others. No one can pay attention to all of these aspects of communication all the time, but if we develop habits that are conducive to successful exchanges in all three areas, we can become more effective.

    In addition to being mindful of the exchange in our communication, as managers it is critical to build trusting relationships and rapport with employees as we saw in the 3i's model. However, in virtual teams we cannot rely on running into someone in the kitchen or hallway to have an informal conversation. We need to be thoughtful and deliberate in our interactions with employees. We need to find alternative ways to build these relationships with and between employees that are both easy and accepted by ourselves and employees. Because of that, it is important to set communication norms and really understand each other’s preferences. For example:

    • Timing of responses. Set the expectation that emails should be responded to within X hours/days unless otherwise noted in the actual email.
    • When it’s appropriate to send an email vs. using instant messaging.
    • A team charter – the team’s objectives, individual roles and responsibilities, and communication and collaboration guidelines.

    1.4 Identify and share ways you prefer to communicate for different activities

    20 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list the different types of exchanges you have with your virtual employees and they have with each other.
    2. List the various communication tools in use on your team.
    3. Assign a preferred communication method for each type of exchange

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current types of exchanges on team
    • Communication methods used

    Output

    • Defined ways to communicate for each communication method

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 2.1
    Balancing wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context

    The pandemic has taken a significant toll on employees’ mental wellbeing

    44% of employees reported declined mental wellbeing since the start of the pandemic.

    • 44% of those who work from home.
    • 34% of those who have other work arrangements (i.e. onsite).
      (Qualtrics, 2020)

    "If one of our colleagues were to fall, break their leg, and get a cast, colleagues would probably rally around that person signing their cast. But, really, we don’t view the health of our brain the same as we do the health of our body."
    – Centre for Addiction and Mental Health (CAMH) Employee

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Despite being over two years into the pandemic, we are still seeing its effect on the physical and mental health of employees.

    The mental health aspect has been often overlooked by organizations, but in order to have a safe, happy, and productive team, you need to give mental health the same level of focus as physical heath. This requires a change in mindset in order for you as a leader to support your team's mental wellbeing during the pandemic and beyond.

    Employees are reporting several key mental wellbeing challenges

    Stress: 67%

    Employees report increasingly high levels of stress from the onset of COVID-19, stating that it has been the most stressful time in their careers.
    (Qualtrics, 2020)

    Anxiety: 57%

    Similarly, employees’ anxiety levels have peaked because of the pandemic and the uncertainty it brings.
    (Qualtrics, 2020)

    Four main themes surrounding stress & anxiety

    • Fear of contracting COVID-19
    • Financial pressures
    • Job security and uncertainty
    • Loneliness caused by social isolation

    Speaker’s Notes:

    The stress and uncertainty about the future caused by the pandemic and its fallout are posing the biggest challenges to employees.

    Organizations shutting down operations, moving to fully remote, or requiring some of their employees to be on site based on the current situation causes a lot of anxiety as employees are not able to plan for what is coming next.

    Adding in the loss of social networks and in-person interactions exacerbates the problem employees are facing. As leaders, it is your job to understand and mitigate these challenges wherever possible.

    Re-examine your workplace barriers to mental wellbeing

    New Barriers

    Old Barriers

    • Childcare/eldercare responsibilities
    • Fear of workplace health risks
    • Work location
    • Lost support networks
    • Changed work schedules
    • Social distancing
    • Workload
    • Fear of stigma
    • Benefits limits
    • Limits to paid time off
    • Lack of manager knowledge

    Key considerations:

    • Work Environment
      • Accessibility of mental wellbeing programs and initiatives
    • Organizational Culture
      • Modeling of wellbeing
      • Paid time off
      • Discussions around mental wellbeing
    • Total Rewards
      • Benefits coverage
      • Employee assistance programs (EAPs)
      • Manager knowledge

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Organizational barriers to mental wellbeing are sadly not new. Workloads, stigma around mental health, lack of sick days, and limits to benefits for mental health supports were challenges before the pandemic. Adding in the new barriers can very easily result in a tipping point for many employees who are simply not equipped to deal with or supported in dealing with the added burden of remote work in a post-pandemic world.

    To provide the needed support to your employees, it’s important to be mindful of the key considerations.

    Holistic employee wellbeing has never been more critical than it is right now

    Employee Wellbeing

    Physical

    The physical body; ensuring a person has the freedom, opportunities, and resources needed to sustainably maintain bodily health.

    Mental

    The psychological ability to cope with information, emotions, desires, and stressors (e.g. change, threats, etc.) in a healthy and balanced way. Essential for day-to-day living and functioning.

    Social

    The state of personal and professional relationships, including personal and community engagement. The capability for genuine, authentic, and mutually affirming interactions with others.

    Financial

    The state of a person’s finances; ensuring that a person feels capable to handle their financial situation and behaviors. The ability to live productively without the weight of financial stress.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a manager, you need to be mindful of all of these. Create an atmosphere where people are able to come to you for help if they are struggling in one of these areas. For example, some people might be more comfortable raising physical safety or comfort concerns (personal protective equipment, ergonomics) than concerns about mental health. Or they might feel like their feelings of loneliness are not appropriate to bring into their professional life.

    Wellbeing is a delicate subject, and most of the time, people are reluctant to talk about it. It requires vulnerability. And here’s the thing about it: Your staff will not drive a change in your team around making these topics more acceptable. It has to be the manager. You have to be the one to not just tell but show them that it’s OK to talk about this

    Encourage human-centered workplace behaviors

    Promote empathy as a focus value

    • Listen and show compassion.
    • Allow room for emotions.

    Encourage social connection

    • Leverage networks.
    • Infuse fun where possible.
    • Encourage community and sense of joint purpose.

    Cultivate a growth mindset

    • Encourage mindfulness and resilience.
    • Express gratitude.

    Empower others

    • Ask employees what they need and co-create solutions.
    • Integrate needs of personal and family life with work life.
    • Be clear on accountability.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a leader, your focus should be on encouraging the right behaviors on your team and in yourself.
    Show empathy; allowing room for emotion and showing you are willing and able to listen goes a long way to establishing trust.

    A growth mindset applies to resilience too. A person with a growth mindset is more likely to believe that even though they’re struggling now, they will get through it.

    Infuse fun – schedule social check-ins. This is not wasted time, or time off work – it is an integral part of the workday. We have less of it now organically, so you must bring it back deliberately. Remember that theme? We are deliberately reinfusing important organic elements into the workday.

    The last item, empowerment, is interesting – being clear on accountability. Have clear performance expectations. It might sound like telling people what to do would be disempowering, but it’s the opposite. By clarifying the goals of what they need to achieve, you empower them to invent their own “how,” because you and they are both sure they will arrive at the place that you agreed on. We will talk more about this in performance management.

    Emphasize the importance of wellbeing by setting the tone for the team

    Managers must…

    • LEAD BY EXAMPLE
      • Employees look to their managers for cues about how to react in a crisis. If the manager reacts with stress and fear, the team will follow.
    • ENCOURAGE OPEN COMMUNICATION
      • Frequent check-ins and transparent communication are essential during a time of crisis, especially when working remotely.
    • ACKNOWLEDGE THE SITUATION
      • Recognizing the stress that teams may be facing and expressing confidence in them goes a long way.
    • PROMOTE WELLBEING
      • Managers who take care of themselves can better support their teams and encourage them to practice good self-care too.
    • REDUCE STIGMA
      • Reducing stigma around mental health encourages people to come forward with their struggles and get the support they need.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Emphasize the importance of wellbeing with what you do. If you do not model self-care behavior, people will follow what you do, not what you say.

    Lead by example – Live the behaviors you want to see in your employees. If you show confidence, positivity, and resiliency, it will filter down to your team.

    Encourage open communication – Have regular meetings where your team is able to set the agenda, or allow one-on-ones to be guided by the employee. Make sure these are scheduled and keep them a priority.

    Acknowledge the situation – Pretending things are normal doesn’t help the situation. Talk about the stress that the team is facing and express confidence that you will get through it together.

    Promote wellbeing – Take time off, don’t work when you’re sick, and you will be better able to support your team!

    Reduce stigma – Call it out when you see it and be sure to remind people of and provide access to any supports that the organization has.

    Conduct dedicated conversations around wellbeing

    1. Check in with how each team member is doing frequently and ask how they are doing personally.
    2. Discuss how things are going. Ask: “How is your work situation working out for you so far? Do you feel supported? How are you taking care of yourself in these circumstances?”
    3. Ask if there are any stressors or roadblocks that they have experienced and collaborate to find solutions.
    4. Provide reassurance of your support and confidence in them.
    5. Document the plan for managing stressors and roadblocks – either through a collaboration tool or through email.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Going back to the idea of a growth mindset – this may be uncomfortable for you as a manager. So here’s a step-by-step guide that over time you can morph into your own style.

    With your team – be prepared to share first and to show it is OK to be vulnerable and address wellbeing seriously.

    1. Make sure you make time for the personal. Ask about their lives and show compassion.
    2. Give opportunities for them to bring up things that might stay hidden otherwise. Ask questions that show you care.
    3. Help identify areas they are struggling with and work with them to move past those areas.
    4. Make sure they feel supported in what they are going through and reassured of their place on the team.
    5. Roll wellbeing into your planning process. This signals to team that you see wellbeing as important, not just a checklist to cover during a team meeting, and are ready to follow through on it.

    Recognize when professional help is needed

    SIGNS OF BURNOUT: Overwhelmed; Frequent personal disclosure; Trouble sleeping and focusing; Frequent time off; Strained relationships; Substance abuse; Poor work performance

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a leader, it is important to be on the lookout for warning signs of burnout and know when to step in and direct individuals to professional help.

    Poor work performance – They struggle to maintain work performance, even after you’ve worked with them to create coping strategies.

    Overwhelmed – They repeatedly tell you that they feel overwhelmed, very stressed, or physically unwell.

    Frequent personal disclosure – They want to discuss their personal struggles at length on a regular basis.

    Trouble sleeping and focusing – They tell you that they are not sleeping properly and are unable to focus on work.

    Frequent time off – They feel the need to take time off more frequently.

    Strained relationships – They have difficulty communicating effectively with coworkers; relationships are strained.

    Substance abuse – They show signs of substance abuse (e.g. drunk/high while working, social media posts about drinking during the day).

    Keeping an eye out for these signs and being able to step in before they become unmanageable can mean the difference between keeping and losing an employee experiencing burnout.

    Remember: Managers also need support

    • Added burden
    • Lead by example
    • Self-care

    Speaker’s Notes:

    If you’ve got managers under you, be mindful of their unique stressors. Don’t forget to check in with them, too.

    If you are a manager, remember to take care of yourself and check in with your own manager about your own wellbeing.

    2.1 Balance wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current practices and challenges connected to wellbeing on your teams.
    2. Choose one or two wellbeing challenges that are most relevant for your team.
    3. Discuss as a group and identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team. Document this under “Action plan to move forward” on the workbook slide “2.1 Balancing wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context.”

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current practices and challenges connected to wellbeing

    Output

    • Action plan for each challenge listed

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 2.2

    Managing performance in a virtual team context

    Virtual employees are craving more meaningful interactions with their managers

    A survey indicated that, overall, remote employees showed less satisfaction with manager interactions compared to other non-remote employees.

    1. 16% less likely to strongly agree their manager involves them in setting goals at work.
    2. 28% less likely to strongly agree they continually work with their manager to clarify work priorities.
    3. 29% less likely to strongly agree they have reviewed their greatest successes with their manager in the last six months.
    4. 30% less likely to strongly agree they have talked with their manager about progress toward goals in the last six months.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    In many cases, we have put people into virtual roles because they are self-directed and self-motivated workers who can thrive with the kind of autonomy and flexibility that comes with virtual work. As managers, we should expect many of these workers to be proactively interested in how they are performing and in developing their careers.

    It would be a mistake to take a hands-off approach when managing virtual workers. A recent survey indicated that, overall, remote employees showed less satisfaction with manager interactions compared to other non-remote employees. It was also one of the aspects of their work experience they were least satisfied with overall (Gallup, State of the American Workplace, 2017). Simply put, virtual employees are craving more meaningful conversations with their managers.

    While conversations about performance and development are important for all employees (virtual or non-virtual), managers of remote teams can have a significant positive impact on their virtual employees’ experience and engagement at work by making efforts to improve their involvement and support in these areas.

    During this module we will work together to identify ways that each of us can improve how we manage the performance of our virtual employees. At the end of the module everyone will create an action plan that they can put in place with their own teams. In the next module, we go through a similar set of activities to create an action plan for our interactions with employees about their development.

    Building blocks of performance management

    • Goal Setting

    • Setting Expectations

    • Measuring Progress

    • Feedback & Coaching

    Speaker’s Notes:

    [Include a visualization of your existing performance management process in the slide. Walk the participants through the process to remind them of what is expected. While the managers participating in the training should know this, there may be different understandings of it, or it might just be the case that it’s been a while since people looked at the official process. The intention here is merely to ensure everyone is on the same page for the purposes of the activities that follow.]

    Now that we’ve reviewed performance management at a high level, let’s dive into what is currently happening with the performance management of virtual teams.

    I know that you have some fairly extensive material at your organization around how to manage performance. This is fantastic. And we’re going to focus mainly on how things change in a virtual context.

    When measuring progress, how do you as a manager make sure that you are comfortable not seeing your team physically at their desks? This is the biggest challenge for remote managers.

    2.2 Share current performance management practices for virtual teams

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current high-level performance management practices connected to each building block. Record in your workbook.
    2. Discuss current challenges connected to implementing the building blocks with virtual employees.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current performance management practices
    • Challenges surrounding performance management

    Output

    • Current state of virtual performance management defined

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Communicate the “why”: Cascade organizational goals

    This image depicts the Cascade of Why- organizational goals. Organizational Mission; Organizational Values; Organizational Goals; Department Goals; Team Goals; Individual Goals

    Speaker’s Notes:

    When assisting your employees with their goals, think about the organization’s overall mission and goals to help you determine team and individual goals.

    • Organizational goals: Employee goals should align with organizational goals. Goals may cascade down through the organization.
    • Department or team goals: Create a clear strategy based on high-level goals for the year so employees can link short-term goals to the larger picture.
    • Individual goals: Employees should draw on their individual development plan to help set performance goals.

    Sometimes it’s difficult to get employees thinking about goals and they need assistance from managers. It’s also important to be clear on team goals to help guide employees in setting individual ones.

    The basic idea is to show people how their individual day-to-day work contributes to the overall success of the organization. It gives them a sense of purpose and a rationale, which translates to motivation. And also helps them problem solve with more autonomy.

    You’re giving people a sense of the importance of their own contribution.

    How to set clear expectations for job performance

    Ensure employees have a clear understanding of what’s expected for their role:

    1. Review their metrics so they understand how they’re being evaluated.
    2. Outline daily, weekly, monthly, and quarterly goals.
    3. If needed, help them plan when and how each part of their job should be done and what to prioritize.
    4. Ask them to come to you early if they experience a roadblock so that you can help rather than having them flounder on their own.
    5. Document instances where employees aren’t meeting role or performance expectations.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Tailor performance goals to address any root causes of poor performance.

    For example:

    • If personal factors are getting in the way, work with the employee (and HR if necessary) to create a strategy to address any impediments to performing in the role.

    Tips for managing performance remotely

    • Reflect on one key question: What needs to happen for my direct reports to continue their work while working remotely?
    • Manage for results – not employee visibility at the office.
    • Use metrics to measure performance. If you don’t have any, define tasks and deliverables as clearly as possible and conduct regular check-ins.
    • Work with the employee to set goals and metrics to measure progress.

    Focus on results: Be flexible about how and when work gets done, as long as team members are hitting their targets.

    • For example, if they have childcare duties from 3 to 5pm during school closures and want to work later in the evening to make up the time, that’s fine – as long as the work gets done.
    • Set clear expectations about which work must be done during normal work hours (e.g. attend team meetings, client calls) and which can be done at other hours.
    • Team members must arrange with you any nonstandard working hours before they start using an altered schedule. It is your responsibility to keep track of hours and any alternate arrangements.
    • Don’t make team members feel constantly monitored (i.e. “Where were you from 10 to 11am?”); trust them until you have reason not to.

    Encourage your team members to unplug: If they’re sending you emails late at night and they haven’t made an alternate work hours agreement with you, encourage them to take time away from work.

    • It’s harder to unplug when working at home, and everyone needs a break to stay productive.

    Avoid micromanagement with holistic performance measures

    Quality

    How well tasks are accomplished

    Behavior

    Related to specific employee actions, skills, or attitudes

    Quantity

    How much work gets done

    Holistic measures demonstrate all the components required for optimal performance. This is the biggest driver in having comfort as a manager of a remote team and avoiding micromanagement. Typically these are set at the organizational level. You may need to adjust for individual roles, etc.

    Speaker's Notes:

    Metrics come in different types. One way to ensure your metrics capture the full picture is to use a mix of different kinds of metrics.

    Some metrics are quantitative: they describe quantifiable or numerical aspects of the goal. This includes timeliness. On the other hand, qualitative metrics have to do with the final outcome or product. And behavioral metrics have to do with employees' actions, skills, or attitudes. Using different kinds of metrics together helps you set holistic measures, which capture all the components of optimal performance toward your goal and prevent gaming the system.

    Let's take an example:

    A courier might have an objective to do a good job delivering packages. An example of a quantitative measure might be that the courier is required to deliver X number of packages per day on time. The accompanying metrics would be the number of packages delivered per day and the ratio of packages delivered on time vs. late.

    Can you see a problem if we use only these quantitative measures to evaluate the courier's performance?

    Wait to see if anyone volunteers an answer. Discuss suggestions.

    That's right, if the courier's only goal is to deliver more packages, they might start to rush, may ruin the packages, and may offer poor customer service. We can help to guard against this by implementing qualitative and behavioral measures as well. For example, a qualitative measure might be that the courier is required to deliver the packages in mint condition. And the metric would be the number of customer complaints about damaged packages or ratings on a satisfaction survey related to package condition.

    For the behavioral aspect, the courier might be required to provide customer-centric service with a positive attitude. The metrics could be ratings on customer satisfaction surveys related to the courier's demeanor or observations by the manager.

    Managing poor performance virtually: Look for key signs

    It’s crucial to acknowledge that an employee might have an “off week” or need time to balance work and life – things that can be addressed with performance management (PM) techniques. Managers should move into the process for performance improvement when:

    1. Performance fluctuates frequently or significantly.
    2. Performance has dropped for an extended period of time.
    3. Expectations are consistently not being met.

    Key signs to look for:

    • PM data/performance-related assessments
    • Continual absences
    • Decreased quality or quantity of output
    • Frequent excuses (e.g. repeated internet outages)
    • Lack of effort or follow-through
    • Missed deadlines
    • Poor communication or lack of responsiveness
    • Failure to improve

    Speaker’s notes:

    • Let’s talk more about identifying low performance.
    • Everybody has off days or weeks. And what if they are new to the role or new to working remotely? Their performance may be low because they need time to adjust. These sort of situations should be managed, but they don’t require moving into the process for performance improvement.
    • When managing employees who are remote or working in a hybrid situation, it is important to be alert to these signs and check in with your employees on a regular basis. Aim to identify and work with employees on addressing performance issues as they arise rather than waiting until it’s too late. Depending on your availability, the needs of the employee, and the complexity of their role, check-ins could occur daily, weekly, and/or monthly. As I mentioned, for remote employees, it’s often better to check-in more frequently but for a shorter period of time.
    • You want to be present in their work life and available to help them manage through roadblocks and stay on track, but try to avoid over-monitoring employees. Micromanaging can impact the manager-employee relationship and lead to the employee feeling that there is a lack of trust. Remember, the employee needs to be responsible for their own performance and improvement.
    • Check-ins should not just be about the work either. Take some time to check in personally. This is particularly important when managing remotely. It enables you to build a personal relationship with the employee and also keeps you aware if there are other personal issues at play that are impacting their work.
    • So, how do you know what does require performance improvement? There are three key things that you should look for that are clear signals that performance improvement is necessary:
      1. Their performance is fluctuating frequently or significantly.
      2. Their performance has dropped for an extended period of time.
      3. Expectations are consistently not being met.
    • What do you think are some key signs to look for that indicate a performance issue is occurring?

    Managing poor performance virtually: Conducting remote performance conversations

    Video calling

    Always use video calls instead of phone calls when possible so that you don’t lose physical cues and body language.

    Meeting invitations

    Adding HR/your leader to a meeting invite about performance may cause undue stress. Think through who needs to participate and whether they need to be included in the invite itself.

    Communication

    Ensure there are no misunderstandings by setting context for each discussion and having the employee reiterate the takeaways back to you.

    Focus on behavior

    Don’t assume the intent behind the behavior(s) being discussed. Instead, just focus on the behavior itself.

    Policies

    Be sure to adhere to any relevant HR policies and support systems. Working with HR throughout the process will ensure none are overlooked.

    Speaker’s notes:

    There are a few best practices you should follow when having performance conversations:

    • First, if you are in a different work environment than your employee, always use video calls instead of phone calls whenever possible so that you don’t miss out on physical cues and body language. If videoconferencing isn’t the norm, encourage them to turn on their video. Be empathic that it can feel awkward but explain the benefits, and you will both have an easier time communicating and understanding each other.
    • As I’ve mentioned, be considerate of the environment they are in. If they are in the office and you are working remotely, be sure to book a private meeting room for them to go to for the conversation. If they are working from home, be sure to check that they are prepared and able to focus on the conversation.
    • Next, carefully consider who you are adding to the meeting invite and whether it’s necessary for them to be there. Adding HR or your leader to a meeting invite may cause undue stress for the employee.
    • Consider the timing of the invite. Don’t send it out weeks in advance. When a performance problem exists, you’ll want to address it as soon as possible. A day or two of notice would be an ideal approach because it gives them a heads up but will not cause them extended stress or worrying.
    • Be considerate about the timing of the meeting and what else they may have scheduled. For example, a Friday afternoon before they are heading off on vacation or right before they are leading an important client call would not be appropriate timing.
    • As we just mentioned clear communication is critical. Ensure there are no misunderstandings by setting context for each discussion and having the employee reiterate takeaways back to you.
    • Focus on the behavior and don’t assume their intent. It can be tempting to say, “I know you didn’t mean to miss the deadline,” but you don’t know what they intended. Often people are not aware of the impact their behavior can have on others.
    • Lastly, be sure to adhere to any relevant HR policies and support systems. Working with HR throughout the process will ensure nothing is overlooked.

    2.3 Identify challenges of current practices and propose solutions

    30 Minutes

    1. Select one or two challenges from the previous activity.
    2. Identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team. Document in the workbook.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current performance management practices
    • Challenges surrounding performance management

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Optional Section

    Employee development in a virtual team setting

    There are three main development approaches for both colocated and virtual employees

    Formal Training; Relational Learning; Experimental Learning

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As we have seen, our virtual employees crave more meaningful interactions with their managers. In addition to performance conversations, managers should also be having regular discussions with their employees about their employee development plans. One key component of these discussions is career planning. Whether you are thinking shorter term – how to become better at their current role – or longer term – how to advance beyond their current role – discussions about employee development are a great way to engage employees. Employees are ultimately responsible for creating and executing their own development plans, but managers are responsible for making sure that employees have thought through these plans and helping employees identify opportunities for executing those plans.

    To help us think about our own employee development practices, identify challenges they pose when working with virtual employees, and create solutions to these challenges, it is useful to think about employee development opportunities according to three types:

    1. The first kind of development opportunity is formal training. Formal training is organized and has a clearly defined curriculum and desired outcome. It usually takes the form of a group training session (like this one) or training videos or materials that employees can watch individually and on their own time. These opportunities usually end with a test or assignment that can be used to evaluate the degree to which the participant achieved the desired learning outcomes.
    2. The second kind of development opportunity is relational learning. Perhaps the most common form of this type of learning is coaching or mentoring. By establishing a long-term work relationship, checking in with employees about their daily work and development goals, and sharing their own experiences and knowledge, mentors help employees reflect and draw out learning from everyday, on-the-job development activities. Other examples include a peer support group or communities of practice. In these group settings peers share best practices and work together to overcome challenges.
    3. The third kind of development opportunity is experiential learning. This kind of opportunity provides employees the chance to work on real work problems, and the output of the development work can directly benefit the organization. Most people learn best by doing. On-the-job experiences that are challenging or new can force people to use and develop new skills and knowledge based on what worked effectively and what failed. Examples of experiential learning are on-the-job learning for new hires, stretch assignments, or special projects that take the employee beyond their daily routine and allow them to try new activities and develop competencies that they would not have the chance to develop as part of their regular job.

    According to McLean & Company, organizations should use the “70-20-10” rule as a rough guideline when working with employees to create their development plans: 10% of the plan should be dedicated to formal training opportunities, 20% to relational learning, and 70% to experiential learning. Managers should work with employees to identify their performance and career goals, ensure that their development plans are aligned with these goals, and include an appropriate mixture of all three kinds of development opportunities.

    To help identify challenges and solutions, think about how virtual work arrangements will impact the employee’s ability to leverage each type of opportunity at our organization.

    Here are some examples that can help us start thinking about the kinds of challenges virtual employees on our team face:

    Career Planning

    • One challenge can be identifying a career path that is consistent with working virtually. If switching from a virtual arrangement to an onsite arrangement is not a viable option for an employee, some career paths may not feasibly be open to them (at least as the company is currently organized). For example, if an employee would eventually like to be promoted to a senior leadership role in their business function but all senior leaders are required to work onsite at corporate headquarters, the employee will need to consider whether such a move is possible for them. In some cases employees may be willing to do this, but in others they may not. The important thing is to have these conversations with virtual employees and avoid the assumption that all career paths can be done virtually, since that might not be the case

    Formal Training

    • This is probably the least problematic form of employee development for virtual employees. In many cases this kind of training is scheduled well in advance, so virtual employees may be able to join non-virtual employees in person for some group training. When this is not possible (due to distance, budget, or time zone), many forms of group training can be recorded and watched by virtual employees later. Training videos and training materials can also easily be shared with virtual employees using existing collaboration software.

    Relational Learning

    • One major challenge here is developing a mentoring relationship virtually. As we discussed in the module on performance management, developing relationships virtually can be challenging because people cannot rely upon the kind of informal and spontaneous interactions that occur when people are located in the same office. Mentors and mentees will have to put in more effort and planning to get to know each other and they will have to schedule frequent check-ins so that employees can reflect upon their progress and experience (with the help of their mentors) more often.
    • Time zones and technology may pose potential barriers for certain candidates to be mentors. In some cases, employees that are best qualified to be mentors may not be as comfortable with collaborative software as other mentors or their mentees. If there are large time zone differences, some people who would otherwise be interested in acting as a mentor may be dissuaded. Managers need to take this into consideration if they are connecting employees with mentors or if they are thinking of taking on the mentor role themselves.

    Experiential Learning

    • Virtual employees risk being overlooked for special projects due to the “out of sight, out of mind” bias: When special projects come up, the temptation is to look around the room and see who is the best fit. The problem is, however, that in some cases the highest performers or best fit may not physically be in the room. In these cases it is important for managers to take on an advocate role for their employees and remind other managers that they have good virtual employees on their team that should be included or contacted. It is also important for managers to keep their team informed about these opportunities as often as possible.
    • Sometimes certain projects or certain kinds of work just cannot be done virtually in a company for a variety of reasons. The experiential learning opportunities will not be open to virtual employees. If such opportunities are open to the majority of other workers in this role (potentially putting virtual employees’ career development at a disadvantage relative to their peers), managers should work with their virtual employees to identify alternative experiences. Managers may also want to consider advocating for more or for higher quality experiential learning opportunities at the organization.

    Now that we have considered some general examples of challenges and solutions, let’s look at our own employee development practices and think about the practical steps we can take as managers to improve employee development for our virtual employees.

    Employee development basics

    • Career planning & performance improvement
    • Formal training
    • Relational learning
    • Experiential learning

    Speaker’s Notes:

    [Customize this slide according to your organization’s own policies and processes for employee development. Provide useful images that outline this on the slide, and in these notes describe the processes/policies that are in place. Note: In some cases policies or processes may not be designed with virtual employees or virtual teams in mind. That is okay for the purposes of this training module. In the following activities participants will discuss how they apply these policies and processes with their virtual teams. If your organization is interested in adapting its policies/processes to better support virtual workers, it may be useful to record those conversations to supplement existing policies later.]

    Now that we have considered some general examples of challenges and solutions, let’s look at our own employee development practices and think about the practical steps we can take as managers to improve employee development for our virtual employees.

    2.4 Share current practices for developing employees on a virtual team

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current high-level employee development practices. Record in your workbook.
    2. Discuss current challenges connected to developing virtual employees. Record in your workbook.
    3. Identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team.
    4. Discuss as a group.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current employee development practices
    • Challenges surrounding employee development

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Refine Action Plans

    2.5 Refine your action plan and commit to implementing it

    30 Minutes

    1. Review your action plans for consistency and overlap. Highlight any parts you may struggle to complete.
    2. Meeting with your group, summarize your plans to each other. Provide feedback and discuss each other’s action plans.
    3. Discuss how you can hold each other accountable.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Action items from previous activities.

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Summary of Accomplishment

    • We do not need to go out and learn a new set of manager responsibilities to better manage our virtual teams; rather, we have to “dial up” certain responsibilities we already have or adjust certain approaches that we already take.
    • It is important to set clear expectations. While managers are ultimately responsible for making sure expectations are set and are clearly communicated, they are not the only ones with responsibilities. Employees and managers need to work together to overcome the challenges that virtual work involves.
    • Virtual employees crave meaningful interactions with their managers and team. Managers must take charge in fostering an atmosphere of openness around wellbeing and establish effective performance management strategies. By being proactive with our virtual teams’ wellness and mindful of our performance management habits, we can take significant steps toward keeping these employees engaged and productive.
    • Effective management in virtual contexts requires being more deliberate than is typical in non-virtual contexts. By working as a group to identify challenges and propose solutions, we have helped each other create action plans that we can use going forward to continually improve our management practices.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an info-tech workshop or guided implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Speaker’s Notes:

    First, let’s take a moment to summarize the key things we have learned today:

    1. We do not need to go out and learn a new set of manager competencies to better manage our virtual teams; rather, we have to “dial up” certain competencies we already have or adjust certain approaches that we already take. In many cases we just need to be more aware of the challenges that virtual communication poses and be more planful in our approaches.
    2. It is important to set clear expectations. While managers are ultimately responsible for making sure expectations are set and clearly communicated, they are not the only ones with responsibilities. Employees and managers need to work together to overcome the challenges that virtual work involves. Making sure that teams have meaningful conversations about expectations, come to a shared understanding of them, and record them will create a firm foundation for all other interactions on the virtual team.
    3. Virtual employees crave meaningful interactions with their managers related to performance and employee development. By creating action plans for improving these kinds of interactions with our teams, we can take significant steps toward keeping these employees engaged and productive.
    4. Effective performance management and employee development in virtual contexts require more planfulness than is required in non-virtual contexts. By working as a group to identify challenges and propose solutions, we have helped each other create action plans that we can use going forward to continually improve our management practices.

    Is there anything that anyone has learned that is not on this list and that they would like to share with the group?

    Finally, were there any challenges identified today that were not addressed?

    [Note to facilitator: Take note of any challenges not addressed and commit to getting back to the participants with some suggested solutions.]

    Additional resources

    Manager Training: Lead Through Change

    Train managers to navigate the interpersonal challenges associated with change management and develop their communication and leadership skills. Upload this LMS module into your learning management system to enable online training.

    Manager Training: Build a Better Manager: Manage Your People

    Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers use in their day to day.

    Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Blueprint: Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home

    Assess and improve remote work performance with our ready-to-use tools.

    Works Cited

    April, Richard. “10 KPIs Every Sales Manager Should Measure in 2019.” HubSpot, 24 June 2019. Web.

    Banerjea, Peter. “5 Powerful Strategies for Managing a Remote Sales Team.” Badger - Maps for field sales, n.d. Web.

    Bibby, Adrianne. “5 Employers’ Awesome Quotes about Work Flexibility.” FlexJobs, 9 January 2017. Web.

    Brogie, Frank. “The 14 KPIs every field sales rep should strive to improve.” Repsly, 2018. Web.

    Dunn, Julie. “5 smart tips for leading field sales teams.” LevelEleven, March 2015. Web.

    Edinger, Scott. “How great sales leaders coach.” Forbes, 2013. Web.

    “Employee Outlook: Employee Views on Working Life.” CIPD, April 2016. Web.

    Hall, Becki. “The 5 biggest challenges facing remote workers (and how to solve them).” interact, 7 July 2017. Web.

    Hofstede, Geert. “National Cultural Dimensions.” Hofstede Insights, 2012. Web.

    “Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Sinks: 1990-2014 (EPA 430-R-16-002).” Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 15 April 2016.

    “Latest Telecommuting Statistics.” Global Workplace Analytics, June 2021. Web.

    Knight, Rebecca. “How to manage remote direct reports.” Harvard Business Review, 2015. Web.

    “Rewards and Recognition: 5 ways to show remote worker appreciation.” FurstPerson, 2019. Web.

    Palay, Jonathan. "How to build your sales management cadence." CommercialTribe, 22 March 2018. Web.

    “Sales Activity Management Matrix.” Asian Sales Guru, 2019. Web.

    Smith, Simone. “9 Things to Consider When Recognizing Remote Employees.” hppy, 2018. Web.

    “State of Remote Work 2017.” OWL Labs, 2021. Web.

    “State of the American Workplace.” Gallup, 2017. Web.

    “Telework Savings Potential.” Global Workplace Analytics, June 2021. Web.

    “The Future of Jobs Employment Trends.” World Economic Forum, 2016. Web.

    “The other COVID-19 crisis: Mental health.” Qualtrics, 14 April 2020. Web.

    Thompson, Dan. “The straightforward truth about effective sales leadership.” Sales Hacker, 2017. Web.

    Tsipursky, Gleb. “Remote Work Can Be Better for Innovation Than In-Person Meetings.” Scientific American, 14 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Walsh, Kim. “New sales manager? Follow this guide to crush your first quarter.” HubSpot, May 2019. Web.

    “What Leaders Need to Know about Remote Workers: Surprising Differences in Workplace Happiness and Relationships.” TINYpulse, 2016.

    Zenger, Jack, and Joe Folkman. “Feedback: The Leadership Conundrum.” Talent Quarterly: The Feedback Issue, 2015.

    Contributors

    Anonymous CAMH Employee

    Tymans Group Consulting

    IT resilience, carefree entrepreneurship.

    Discover and implement all the ingredients that make your IT perform fast and rock solid.

    Yes, I want stable and performant IT Operations

    We are multidisciplinary infrastructure and IT Operations experts.
    We bring passion, focus, and results to our work and your company.

    TY innovates resilience embedding in your organization

    Let's have a chat

    • TY as your advisor

      This gives you our expertise on tap. Do you have an issue? Call us. You want to have a sparring partner to solve a problem? Call us. Do you need a sounding board? Call us.

      TY provides advisory services as well as traditional consulting. We also execute study and revision services for your policies, standards, procedures, and guidelines to ensure compliance with DORA, NIS2 and corporate requirements of both your own company and that of your clients. And we also check against our internal best ways of working.

      Book a conversation

    • Focused Consulting and Implementing

      This is where you have our undivided attention, and we work with you one on one until resolution. Note that there is a waiting period for this service at this time.

      If you are interested, please first book a call so that we can determine if we are a good fit together.

      Book a conversation

    What our relations tell us

    • Citigroup Manager

      As a technical consultant, Gert is an All-Star performer...  He has got many wins under his belt... His willingness to work hard, knowledge of regional systems (especially Tokyo) and Microsoft Office is well respected within the Group 

    • Sandra

      Tx for all the efforts done! Great Job! And good luck for the ones amongst you that still need to work tomorrow Grtz Sandra VB
    • Patrick A.

      Hi Gert, I'm busy documenting .... Thanks for your real friendly and careful, yet effective support :-) Patrick A.
    • Lucie VH

      During my vacation, Gert took over the management of a number of ongoing problems. Even before I actually left for my trip, he took action and proposed a number of improvements. Gert coordinated between the different stakeholders and PTA's and resolved a number of acute issues. And he did this in a very pleasant, yet effective way.
    • Dawn

      No worries. It only freaked me out for a few minutes, then I saw that the system had blocked them from doing any real damage. Thanks for the cleanup and extra measures, though! As always, you rock!
    • After a successful DRP

      Thanks for all the efforts done ans special Tx Gert for Coordinating this again!
    • A CIO

      Yet again Gert, Thanks for handling this in such a top way!
    • A Sales Manager

      Awesome Gert, I will let the team know we can close this issue!
    • Investment bank manager

      Flexibility, Adaptability, problem Solving are Gert's strong points, Exceptionally beneficial in "crisis." I can attest that Gert will always see a problem through. if he needs to hand it off, it will aways have good handoff notes. His business knowledge is good and will part of the next project.

    • Wall Street Performance Review

      As with the classes for SFC, Gert organised formal classes for all of the Research IT teams.... I would class this job as well done, given everything that was going on with Rsearch IT. 

    • Stuart B on Gert Taeymans

      Excellent technical resource. Quick help on issues and provide explanations to regional teams. Often covers for us in the evenings or when things get particularly busy.

    • Asia support to roll out global system

      Gert time in Japan was a great success. He really helped the IT group through a really difficult tume during the roll out of {the global research publishing system} and had to cover all the bases that had not been properly coverd by the previous person in Japan. Gert's visit also coincided with Stuart's joining into the Asia IT Research group. Gert was very flexible  in the hours that he worked and the lenght of time he was out in Tokyo (in the end more than 4 weeks.)

      The feedback from both the users and the IT group was VERY positive on Gertt's contribution. He was more than capabable to put across technical points to the IT team, in their language.

    • IT Director

      Gert is a knowledgeable individual who takes on additional responsibility... rapidly addressng end-user issues and developing custom solutions when needed.

    Benefits of working with Tymans Group

    • We focus on actual deliverables

      TY delivers on the IT resilience what and how. Get actionable IT, management, governance, and productivity research, insights, blueprints with templates, easy-to-use tools, and clear instructions to help you execute effectively and become IT resilient.

    • Get insights from top IT professionals

      Our TY network base constantly informs us about our IT resilience research and validates it through client experiences. TY adds to that by applying this research to real-world situations in Belgium, the Netherlands, Germany, Europe and the US.

    • Data-driven insights

      It is tempting to use your gut instinct. Don't. Everything TY does, is data-driven. From our research to our interactions with you, we use an analytical approach to help you move forward with your key IT resilience projects.

    Frequently asked questions

    • How does Tymans Group IT Operations advisory work?

      TY believes strongly in leveraging technology and personal delivery. That is why TY uses one on one calling sessions using Teams and Zoom. When needed I do on site delivery.

      Every advisory option has a set number of interactive contact points in addition to email and chat options. Every contact request is answered by me personally. 

      Through the use of technology, I ensure that instead of you having to drive to your coach, the coach “comes” to you!

    • What are Tymans Group advisory service timings?

      TY is available on European time from 09:00 until 17:00 and US EST 09:00-17:00 (depending on already booked appointments). 

    • How much to Tymans Group programs cost?

      While this is a difficult question to answer, let's give it a shot.

      Ideally I work value-based. But this is more for well-defined projects where the ROI is quantifiable rather than qualifiable.

      Often advisory services are a discovery and we obtain results together. You may even only need an experienced sounding board. This type of pricing starts from €4,500.

    • Does Tymans Group have a "pick your brain" option?

      By popular demand, yes, I added this. It is not the cheapest way to use me, but it may be the most effective for you.

    • How are Tymans Group advisory services delivered?

      TY believes strongly in leveraging technology and personal delivery. That is why TY uses one on one calling sessions using Teams and Zoom. When needed I do on site delivery.

      This way I ensure that instead of you having to drive to your coach, the coach “comes” to you!

      You are allowed to record the sessions and use them internally in your organization, including as part of your internal training. You are not allowed to resell these without a resale agreement.

    • Tymans Group is delivered online via calls? Isn't on-site better?

      Interestingly, in the majority of advisory services the answer is no.

      Purely on-site automatically limits the time we can spend together. Thus, typically, the interactions are of a shorter duration. Even when this is done over a longer timeframe, like 5 to 10 days, this is really too short for effective advising, coaching and mentoring. 

      We stay away from accelerated programs, where I can send a lot of information, and most of it will not stick.

      Terry Sejnowski  a neuroscientist, actually states that cramming does not help you remember. It gets you, maybe, through the next exam, but the information is not retained. The way to integrate and remember information is to spread out the study and repeat. This is called the spacing effect.

      This is why I employ the online delivery method. When you record our sessions, you can come back and again repeat it, note down your questions and fire them off to me. I respond and you go back into the talk. Then you apply, possibly fail, and come back again until it succeeds, and then you make it your own.

      That is why time-pressured, on-site delivery does not work. Our method makes you effective because you internalized the material and feedback. This can then be rounded-off by on-site finalization.

      10-15 years ago, this was not possible, as the web-based tools were simply not fast enough. Today, unless you are taking classes like carpentry or other topics that require on-site delivery, online delivery is the way to go.

    • Can I pay by wire transfer?

      We actually prefer wire transfer. It cuts down on the financial fees and it is the norm in the European Union. Our US customer can also use this feature and pay into our US bank.

    • Where is Tymans Group located?

      Tymans Group has two locations:

      In Europe, Belgium and in Greenville, DE, United States, 

      The HQ is in Belgium.

    • Does this work for less than 25 employees?

      Resilience is not size-dependent. That said, if you are supplying critical services to financial services firms, you may not have a choice. In that case, be prepared to up your game. Call TY in this case. We can help you fulfill third-party requirements, such as the DORA regulation.

      In other cases, if you plan to grow your company beyond 25 employees, then yes. Start with the basics, though. Make sure you have a good understanding of your current challenges. Schedule a chat with me to determine the right baseline.

      If you are just starting out and want to ensure that your company's processes are correct right out of the gate, it's better to give me a call. We can start you off in the right direction without spending too much.

      Our guides are only available to existing advisory clients. Let's chat informally if we are a fit for you.

    • I'm a small business owner, can I do all this by myself?

      Our guides are only available to existing advisory clients.

      But also see the above question about company size and target clients. If you have fewer than 25 employees and you are not supplying critical services to financial institutions, then maybe some of our guides are not for you. We can still help you organize your resilience, but it may be more cost-effective to use only our TY Advisory services.

      Once you grow beyond 25 employees, you will benefit from our processes. Just implement what you need. How do you know what you require? You probably already have an inkling of what is lacking in your organization. If you are unsure, please get in touch with us.

      In short, the answer is yes, and TY can help you. Once you know what you are looking for, that guide allows you to handle it yourself. If you require help selecting the right guide, please get in touch with us.

    • Do you provide refunds?

      Before buying the DIY guides, available only to existing advisory clients,, please refer to the free Executive Summary when available. If there is no Executive summary available, please contact me with any questions you have. 

      As these are downloadable products, I cannot provide any refunds, but I will help you with any exchange where you have a good reason. 

    • I bought the wrong item

      If you bought the wrong item, please contact me and we'll be happy to provide an alternative item.

    • I want more assistance

      Yes, more assistance is available.  Tymans Group can provide you with any assistance you require within the parameters of your contract.

      Per-guide assistance ranges from a single phone or video consultation to guided implementation or a workshop. Alternatively we can go to do-it-for-you implementation or even full-time consulting.

      Note that our guides are only available to existing advisory clients.

      Please contact me for a talk.

    I want more information to become more resilient.

    Continue reading

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}568|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Digital Marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Impact and Result

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    • Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy
    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    Analyst Perspective

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Leading search engine optimization methods focus on creating and posting relevant keyword-rich content, not just increasing page rank. Content and keywords should move a buyer along their journey, close a sale, and develop long-term relationships. Unfortunately, many SEO specialists focus on computers, not the buyer. What's even more concerning is that up to 70% of SaaS businesses have already been impacted by outdated and inefficient SEO techniques. Poor strategies often focus on ballooning SEO metrics in the short-term instead of building the company's long-term PageRank.

    Best-in-class digital marketers stop chasing the short-term highs and focus on long-term growth. This starts with developing a competitive keyword strategy and updating website content with the new keywords.

    SEO is a large topic, so we have broken the strategy into small, easy-to-implement steps, taking the guesswork out of how to use the data from SEO tools and giving CMOs a solid path to increase their SEO results.

    This is a picture of Terra Higginson

    Terra Higginson
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Digital marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Search algorithms change all the time, which means that the strategy is often sitting on the sifting sands of technology, making SEO strategies quickly outdated.

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and implementing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • SEO practitioners that focus on gaming the system
    • Ever-changing SEO technology
    • Lack of understanding of the best SEO techniques
    • SEO techniques focus on the needs of computers, not people
    • Lack of continued investment

    SoftwareReviews' Approach

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Our methodology will take a focused step-by-step strategy in a series of phases that will increase PageRank and competitive positioning.

    SoftwareReviews' SEO Methodology

    In this blueprint, we will cover:

    Good SEO vs. Poor SEO Techniques

    The difference between good and bad SEO techniques.

    Common Good
    SEO Techniques

    Common Poor
    SEO Techniques

    • Writing content for people, not machines.
    • Using SEO tools to regularly adjust and update SEO content, keywords, and backlinks.
    • Pillar and content cluster strategy in addition to a basic on- and off-page strategy.
    • Keyword stuffing and content duplication.
    • A strategy that focuses on computers first and people second.
    • Low-quality or purchased backlinks.

    Companies With Great SEO…

    Keyword Strategy

    • Have identified a keyword strategy that carves out targets within the white space available between themselves and the competition.

    Error-Free Site

    • Have error-free sites without duplicate content. Their URLs and redirects are all updated. Their site is responsive, and every page loads in under two seconds.

    Pillar & Content Clusters

    • Employ a pillar and content cluster strategy to help move the buyer through their journey.

    Authentic Off-Page Strategy

    • Build an authentic backlink strategy that incorporates the right information on the right sites to move the buyer through their journey.

    SEO Terms Defined

    A glossary to define common Phase 1 SEO terms.

    Search Volume: this measures the number of times a keyword is searched for in a certain time period. Target keywords with a volume of between 100-100,000. A search volume greater than 100,000 will be increasingly difficult to rank (A Beginner's Guide to Keyword Search Volume, 2022, Semrush).

    Keyword Difficulty: the metric that quantifies how difficult it will be to rank for a certain keyword. The keyword difficulty percentage includes the number of competitors attempting to rank for the same keyword, the quality of their content, the search intent, backlinks, and domain authority (Keyword Difficulty: What Is It and Why Is It Important? 2022, Semrush).

    Intent: this metric focuses on the intent of the user's search. All search intent is categorized into Informational, Commercial, Navigational, and Transactional (What Is Search Intent? A Complete Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    On-Page SEO: refers to the practice of search engine optimizing elements of your site such as title tags, internal links, HTML code, URL optimization, on-page content, images, and user experience.

    Off-Page SEO: refers to the practice of optimizing brand awareness (What Is Off-Page SEO? A Comprehensive Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    H1: HTML code that tells a search engine the title of the page (neilpatel.com).

    SEO Tool: A subscription-based all-in-one search engine optimization MarTech tool.

    Google's mission is to organize the world's information and make it universally accessible and useful… We believe Search should deliver the most relevant and reliable information available.
    – An excerpt from Google's mission statement

    Your Challenge

    Google makes over 4.5k algorithm changes per year1, directly impacting digital marketing search engine optimization efforts.

    Digital marketers with SEO problems will often see the following issues:

    • Keyword ranking – A decline in keyword ranking is alarming and results in decreased PageRank.
    • Bounce rate – Attracting the wrong audience to your site will increase the bounce rate because the H1 doesn't resonate with your audience.
    • Outdated keywords – Many companies are operating on a poor keyword strategy, or even worse, no keyword strategy. In addition, many marketers haven't updated their strategy to include pillar and cluster content.
    • Errors – Neglected sites often have a large number of errors.
    • Bad backlinks – Neglected sites often have a large number of toxic backlinks.

    The best place to hide a dead body is on page two of the search results.
    – Huffington Post

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and executing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • Inefficient and ineffective SEO practitioners.
    • Changing SEO technology and search engine algorithms.
    • Lack of understanding of the best-in-class SEO techniques.
    • Lack of a sustainable plan to manage the strategy and invest in SEO.

    SEO is a helpful activity when it's applied to people-first content. However, content created primarily for search engine traffic is strongly correlated with content that searchers find unsatisfying.
    – Google Search Central Blog

    Benefits of Proper SEO

    A good SEO keyword strategy will create long-term, sustainable SEO growth:

    • Write content for people, not algorithms – Good SEO prioritizes the needs of humans over the needs of computers, being ever thoughtful of the meaning of content and keywords.
    • Content that aligns with intent – Content and keyword intent will align with the buyer journey to help move prospects through the funnel.
    • Competitive keyword strategy – Find keyword white space for your brand. Keywords will be selected to optimize your ranking among competition with reasonable and sustainable targets.
    • Actionable and impactful fixes – By following the SoftwareReviews phases of SEO, you will be able to take a very large task and divide it into conquerable actions. Small improvements everyday lead to very large improvements over time.

    Digital Marketing SEO Stats

    61%
    61% of marketers believe that SEO is the key to online success.
    Source: Safari Digital

    437%
    Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimised one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
    Source: Safari Digital

    Good SEO Aligns With Search Intent

    What type of content is the user searching for? Align your keyword to the logical search objective.

    Informational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to inform or educate themselves on a specific topic.

    Commercial

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to do research before making a purchase.

    Transactional

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to purchase something.

    Navigational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to find a specific page.

    SoftwareReviews' Methodology toCreate an Effective SEO Strategy

    1. Competitive Analysis & Keyword Discovery 2. On-Page Keyword Optimization
    Phase Steps
    1. Make a list of keywords in your current SEO strategy – including search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, intent.
    2. Research the keywords of top competitors.
    3. Make a list of target keywords you would like to own – including the search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, and intent. Make sure that these keywords align with your buyer persona.
    1. List product and service pages, along with the URL and current ranking(s) for the keyword(s) for that URL.
    2. Create a new individual page strategy for each URL. Record the current keyword, rank, title tag, H1 tag, and meta description. Then, with keyword optimization in mind, develop the new title tag, new H1 tag, and new meta description. Build the target keywords into the pages and tags.
    3. Record the current ranking for the pages' keywords then reassess after three to six months.
    Phase Outcomes
    • Understanding of competitive landscape for SEO
    • A list of target new keywords
    • Keyword optimized product and service pages

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    SoftwareReviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    Included Within an Advisory Membership Optional Add-Ons
    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Insight Summary

    People-First Content

    Best-in-class SEO practitioners focus on people-first content, not computer-first content. Search engine algorithms continue to focus on how to rank better content first, and a strategy that moves your buyers through the funnel in a logical and cohesive way will beat any SEO trick over the long run.

    Find White Space

    A good SEO strategy uses competitive research to carve out white space and give them a competitive edge in an increasingly difficult ranking algorithm. An understanding of the ideal client profile and the needs of their buyer persona(s) sit as a pre-step to any good SEO strategy.

    Optimize On-Page Keywords

    By optimizing the on-page strategy with competitively relevant keywords that target your ideal client profile, marketers are able to take an easy first step at improving the SEO content strategy.

    Understand the Strategy

    If you don't understand the strategy of your SEO practitioner, you are in trouble. Marketers need to work hand in hand with their SEO specialists to quickly uncover gaps, create a strategy that aligns with the buyer persona(s), and execute the changes.

    Quality Trumps Quantity

    The quality of the prospect that your SEO efforts bring to your site is more important than the number of people brought to your site.

    Stop Here and Ask Yourself:

    • Do I have an updated (completed within the last two years) buyer persona and journey?
    • Do I know who the ICP (ideal client profile) is for my product or company?

    If not, stop here, and we can help you define your buyer persona and journey, as well as your ideal client profile before moving forward with SEO Phase 1.

    The Steps to SEO Phase 1

    The Keyword Strategy

    1. Current Keywords
      • Identify the keywords your SEO strategy is currently targeting.
    2. Competitive Analysis
      • Research the keywords of competitor(s). Identify keyword whitespace.
    3. New Target Keywords
      • Identify and rank keywords that will result in more quality leads and less competition.
    4. Product & Service Pages
      • Identify your current product and service pages. These pages represent the easiest content to update on your site.
    5. Individual Page Update
      • Develop an SEO strategy for each of your product and service pages, include primary target keyword, H1, and title tags, as well as keyword-rich description.

    Resources Needed for Search Engine Optimization

    Consider the working skills required for search engine optimization.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    • SEO
    • Web development
    • Competitive analysis
    • Content creation
    • Understanding of buyer persona and journey
    • Digital marketing

    Suggested Titles

    • SEO Analyst
    • Competitive Intelligence Analyst
    • Content Marketing Manager
    • Website Developer
    • Digital Marketing Manager

    Digital Marketing Software

    • CMS that allows you to easily access and update your content

    SEO Software

    • SEO tool

    Step 1: Current Keywords

    Use this sheet to record your current keyword research.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify current keywords.

    Step 2: Competitive Analysis

    Use this sheet to guide the research on your competitors' keywords.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Top organic keywords
    2. Ranking of keywords
    3. Domain authority and trust
    4. Position changes

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to perform an competitive analysis

    Step 3: New Target Keywords

    Use this sheet to record target keywords that have a good volume but are less competitive. The new target keywords should align with your buyer persona and their journey.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify new target keywords.

    Step 4: Product & Service Pages

    Duplicate this page so that you have a separate page for each URL from Step 4

    Use this sheet to identify your current product and service pages.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Current rank
    2. Current keywords

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, showing where you can display product and service pages.

    Step 5: Individual Page Strategy

    Develop a keyword strategy for each of your product and service pages. Use a fresh page for each URL.

    Date last optimized:
    mm/dd/yyyy

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, with an example of how you can use an individual page strategy to develop a keyword strategy.

    Bibliography

    Council, Y. "Council Post: The Rundown On Black Hat SEO Techniques And Why You Should Avoid Them." Forbes, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    "Our approach – How Google Search works." Google Search. Accessed September 2022.

    "The Best Place to Hide a Dead Body is Page Two of Google." HuffPost, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Patel, Neil. "How to Create the Perfect H1 Tag for SEO." neilpatel.com. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}327|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $23,245 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • End users often have a disjointed experience while interacting with your organization in using its products and services.
    • You have been asked by your senior leadership to start a new or revive an existing design or innovation function within your organization. However, your organization has dismissed design thinking as the latest “management fad” and does not buy into the depth and rigor that design thinking brings.
    • The design or innovation function lives on the fringes of your organization due to its apathy towards design thinking or tumultuous internal politics.
    • You, as a CIO, want to improve the user satisfaction with the IT services your team provides to both internal and external users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A user’s perspective while interacting with the products and services is very different from the organization’s internal perspective while implementing and provisioning those. A design-based organization balances the two perspectives to drive user-satisfaction over end-to-end journeys.
    • Top management must have a design thinker – the guardian angel of the balance between exploration (i.e. discovering new business models) and exploitation (i.e. leveraging existing business models).
    • Your approach to adopt design thinking must consider your organization’s specific goals and culture. There’s no one-size-fits-all approach.

    Impact and Result

    • User satisfaction, with the end-to-end journeys orchestrated by your organization, will significantly increase.
    • Design-centric organizations enjoy disproportionate financial rewards.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt design thinking in your organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. What is design thinking?

    The focus of this phase is on revealing what designers do during the activity of designing, and on building an understanding of the nature of design ability. We will formally examine the many definitions of design thinking from experts in this field. At the core of this phase are several case studies that illuminate the various aspects of design thinking.

    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 1: What Is Design Thinking?
    • Victor Scheinman's Experiment for Design

    2. How does an organization benefit from design thinking?

    This phase will illustrate the relevance of design in strategy formulation and in service-design. At the core of this phase are several case studies that illuminate these aspects of design thinking. We will also identify the trends impacting your organization and establish a baseline of user-experience with the journeys orchestrated by your organization.

    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 2: How Does an Organization Benefit From Design Thinking?
    • Trends Matrix (Sample)

    3. How do you build a design organization?

    The focus of this phase is to:

  • Measure the design-centricity of your organization and subsequently, identify the areas for improvement.
  • Define an approach for a design program that suites your organization’s specific goals and culture.
    • Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization – Phase 3: How Do You Build a Design Organization?
    • Report on How Design-Centric Is Your Organization (Sample)
    • Approach for the Design Program (Sample)
    • Interview With David Dunne on Design Thinking
    • Interview With David Dunne on Design Thinking (mp3)
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 What Is Design Thinking?

    The Purpose

    The focus of this module is on revealing what designers do during the activity of designing, and on building an understanding of the nature of design ability. We will also review the report on the design-centricity of your organization and subsequently, earmark the areas for improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An intimate understanding of the design thinking

    An assessment of design-centricity of your organization and identification of areas for improvement

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss case studies on how designers think and work

    1.2 Define design thinking

    1.3 Review report from Info-Tech’s diagnostic: How design-centric is your organization?

    1.4 Earmark areas for improvement to raise the design-centricity of your organization

    Outputs

    Report from Info-Tech’s diagnostic: ‘How design-centric is your organization?’ with identified areas for improvement.

    2 How Does an Organization Benefit From Design Thinking?

    The Purpose

    In this module, we will discuss the relevance of design in strategy formulation and service design. At the core of this module are several case studies that illuminate these aspects of design thinking. We will also identify the trends impacting your organization. We will establish a baseline of user experience with the journeys orchestrated by your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An in-depth understanding of the relevance of design in strategy formulation and service design

    An understanding of the trends that impact your organization

    A taxonomy of critical customer journeys and a baseline of customers’ satisfaction with those

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss relevance of design in strategy through case studies

    2.2 Articulate trends that impact your organization

    2.3 Discuss service design through case studies

    2.4 Identify critical customer journeys and baseline customers’ satisfaction with those

    2.5 Run a simulation of design in practice

    Outputs

    Trends that impact your organization.

    Taxonomy of critical customer journeys and a baseline of customers’ satisfaction with those.

    3 How to Build a Design Organization

    The Purpose

    The focus of this module is to define an approach for a design program that suits your organization’s specific goals and culture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An approach for the design program in your organization. This includes aspects of the design program such as its objectives and measures, its model (one of the five archetypes or a hybrid one), and its governance.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify objectives and key measures for your design thinking program

    3.2 Structure your program after reviewing five main archetypes of a design program

    3.3 Balance between incremental and disruptive innovation

    3.4 Review best practices of a design organization

    Outputs

    An approach for your design thinking program: objectives and key measures; structure of the program, etc.

    Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}465|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Augmented reality is a new technology and use cases are still emerging. Organizations have to work hard to stay ahead of the curve and predict how they will be impacted.
    • There are limited off-the-shelf augmented reality solutions in terms of business applications. IT not only needs to understand the emerging augmented reality hardware, but also the plethora of development platforms.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Augmented reality presents a new avenue to solve problems that cannot be addressed efficiently with existing technology. It is a new tool that will impact the way you work.
    • Beyond addressing existing problems, augmented reality will provide the ability to differently execute business processes. Current processes have been designed with existing systems and capabilities in mind. Augmented reality impacts organizational design processes that are more complex.
    • As a technology with an evolving set of use cases, IT and the business must anticipate some of the challenges that may arise with the use of augmented reality (e.g. health and safety, application development, regulatory).

    Impact and Result

    • Our methodology addresses the possible issues by using a case-study approach to demonstrate the “art of the possible” for augmented reality.
    • With an understanding of augmented reality, it is possible to find applicable use cases for this emerging technology and get a leg up on competitors.
    • By utilizing Info-Tech’s Augmented Reality Use Case Picklist and the Augmented Reality Stakeholder Presentation Template, the IT team and their business stakeholders can confidently approach augmented reality adoption.

    Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should care about augmented reality’s potential to transform the workplace and how Info-Tech will support you as you identify and build your augmented reality use case.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand augmented reality

    Analyze the four key benefits of augmented reality to understand how the technology can resolve industry issues.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 1: Understand Augmented Reality
    • Augmented Reality Glossary

    2. Finding space for augmented reality

    Develop and prioritize use cases for augmented reality using Info-Tech’s AR Initiative Framework.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 2: Finding Space for Augmented Reality
    • Augmented Reality Use Case Picklist

    3. Communicate project decisions to stakeholders

    Present the augmented reality initiative to stakeholders and understand the way forward for the AR initiative.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 3: Communicate Project Decisions to Stakeholders
    • Augmented Reality Stakeholder Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Augmented Reality and Its Use Cases

    The Purpose

    Understand the fundamentals of augmented reality technology and its real-world business applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized list of augmented reality use cases.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduce augmented reality technology.

    1.2 Understand augmented reality use cases.

    1.3 Review augmented reality case studies.

    Outputs

    An understanding of the history and current state of augmented reality technology.

    An understanding of “the art of the possible” for augmented reality.

    An enhanced understanding of augmented reality.

    2 Conduct an Environmental Scan and Internal Review

    The Purpose

    Examine where the organization stands in the current competitive environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is needed from an augmented reality initiative to differentiate your organization from its competitors.

    Activities

    2.1 Environmental analysis (PEST+SWOT).

    2.2 Competitive analysis.

    2.3 Listing of interaction channels and disposition.

    Outputs

    An understanding of the internal and external propensity for augmented reality.

    An understanding of comparable organizations’ approach to augmented reality.

    A chart with the disposition of each interaction channel and its applicability to augmented reality.

    3 Parse Critical Technology Drivers

    The Purpose

    Determine which business processes will be affected by augmented reality.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of critical technology drivers and their KPIs.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify affected process domains.

    3.2 Brainstorm impacts of augmented reality on workflow enablement.

    3.3 Distill critical technology drivers.

    3.4 Identify KPIs for each driver.

    Outputs

    A list of affected process domains.

    An awareness of critical technology drivers for the augmented reality initiative.

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}414|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

    You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

    • Improve your DR capabilities.
    • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
    • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience.
    • Focus on identifying gaps and risks, and addressing them, before a real disaster hits.
    • Take a realistic, iterative approach to resilience testing that starts with small, low-risk tests and builds on lessons learned.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
    • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
    • Demonstrate value from testing to gain buy-in for additional tests.

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard – A guide to establishing a right-sized approach to DR testing that delivers durable value to your organization.

    Use this research to understand the different types of tests, prioritize and plan tests for your organization, review the results, and establish a cadence for testing.

    • Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard

    2. Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template – A template to document your organization's DR test plan.

    Use this template to document scope and goals, participants, key pre-test milestones, the test-day schedule, and your findings from the testing exercise.

    • Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    3. Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary – A template to outline your organization's DR testing program.

    Identify the tests you will run over the next year and the expertise, governance, process, and funding required to support testing.

    • Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary

    [infographic]

     

    Further reading

    Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

    Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

    Analyst Perspective

    Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

    Andrew Sharp

    Most businesses make significant investments in disaster recovery and technology resilience. Redundant sites and systems, monitoring, intrusion prevention, backups, training, documentation: it all costs time and money.

    But does this investment deliver expected value? Specifically, can you deliver service continuity in a way that meets business requirements?

    You can’t know the answer without regularly testing recovery processes and systems. And more than just validation, testing helps you deliver service continuity by finding and addressing gaps in your plans and training your staff on recovery procedures.

    Use the insights, tools, and templates in this research to create a streamlined and effective resilience testing program that helps validate recovery capabilities and enhance service reliability, availability, and continuity.

    Andrew Sharp

    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery (DR) – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

    • Improve your DR capabilities.
    • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
    • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

    Common Obstacles

    Despite the value testing can offer, actually executing on DR tests is difficult because:

    • Testing is often an IT-driven initiative, and it can be difficult to secure business buy-in to redirect resources away from other urgent projects or accept risks that come with testing.
    • Previous tests have been overly complex and challenging to coordinate and leave a hangover so bad that no one wants to do them again.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Take a realistic approach to resilience testing by starting with small, low-risk tests, then iterating with the lessons you’ve learned:

    • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
    • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
    • Get buy-in for regular DR testing from key stakeholders with a testing program summary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

    Process and Outputs

    This research is accompanied by templates to help you achieve your goals faster.

    1 - Establish the business rationale for DR testing.
    2 - Review a range of options for testing.
    3 - Prioritize tests that are most valuable to your business.
    4 - Create a disaster recovery test plan.
    5 - Establish a Test Program to support a regular testing cycle.

    Outputs:

    DR Test Plan
    DR Testing Program Summary

    Example Orange Activity slide.
    Orange activity slides like the one on the left provide directions to help you make key decisions.

    Key Deliverable:

    Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    Build a plan for your first disaster recovery test.

    This document provides a complete example you can use to quickly build your own plan, including goals, milestones, participants, the test-day schedule, and findings from the after-action review.

    Why test?

    Testing helps you avoid costly downtime

    • In a disaster scenario, speed matters. Immediately after an outage, the impact on the organization is small, but impact increases rapidly the longer the outage continues.
    • A quick and reliable response and recovery can protect the organization from significant losses.
    • A DRP testing and maintenance program helps ensure you’re ready to recover when you need to, rather than figuring it out as you go.

    “Routine testing is vital to survive a disaster… that’s when muscle memory sets in. If you don’t test your DR plan it falls [in importance], and you never see how routine changes impact it.”

    – Jennifer Goshorn
    Chief Administrative Officer
    Gunderson Dettmer LLP

    Info-Tech members estimated even one day of system downtime could lead to significant revenue losses. Estimated loss of revenue over 24 hours. Core Infrastructure has the highest potential for lost revenue.

    Average estimated potential loss* in thousands of USD due to a 24-hour outage (N=41)

    *Data aggregated from 41 business impact analyses (BIAs) conducted with Info-Tech advisory assistance. BIAs evaluate potential revenue loss due to a full day of system downtime, at the worst possible time.

    Run tests to enhance disaster recovery plans

    Testing improves organizational resilience

    • Identify and address gaps in your plans before a real disaster strikes.
    • Cross-train staff on systems recovery.
    • Go beyond testing technology to test recovery processes.
    • Establish a culture that centers resilience in everyday decision-making.

    Testing keeps DR documentation ready for action

    • Update documentation ahead of tests to prepare for the testing exercise.
    • Update documentation after testing to incorporate any lessons learned.

    Testing validates that investments in resilience deliver value

    • Confirm your organization can meet defined recovery time objectives (RTOs) and recovery point objectives (RPOs).
    • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications

    Overcome testing challenges

    Despite the value of effective recovery testing, most IT organizations struggle to test recovery plans

    Common challenges

    • Key resources don’t have time for testing exercises.
    • You don’t have the technology to support live recovery testing.
    • Tests are done ad hoc and lessons learned are lost.
    • A lack of business support for test exercises as the value isn’t understood.
    • Tests are always artificially simple because RTOs and RPOs must be met to satisfy customer or auditor inquiries

    Overcome challenges with a realistic approach:

    • Start small with tabletop and recovery tests for specific systems.
    • Include recovery tests in operational tasks (e.g. restore systems when you have a maintenance window).
    • Create testing plans for larger testing exercises.
    • Build on successful tests to streamline testing exercises in the future.
    • Don’t make testing a pass-fail exercise. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

    Go beyond traditional testing

    Different test techniques help validate recovery against different threats

    • There are many threats to service continuity, including ransomware, severe weather events, geopolitical conflict, legacy systems, staff turnover, and day-to-day outages caused by human error, software updates, hardware failures, or network outages.
    • At its core, disaster recovery planning is about recovery. A plan for service recovery will help you mitigate against many threats at once. The testing approaches on the right will help you validate different aspects of that recovery process.
    • This research will provide an overview of the approaches outlined on the right and help you prioritize tests that are most valuable to your organization.
    Different test techniques for disaster recover training: System Failover tests, tabletop exercises, ransomware recovery tests, etc.

    00 Identify a working group

    30 minutes

    Identify a group of participants who can fill the following roles and inform the discussions around testing in this research. A single person could fill multiple roles and some roles could be filled by multiple people. Many participants will be drawn from the larger DRP team.

    Roles and expectations for Disaster Recovery Planning. DRP sponsor, Testing coordinator, System testers, business liaisons, executive team.

    Input

    • Organizational context

    Output

    • A list of key participants for test planning and execution

    Participants

    • Typically, start by identifying the sponsor and coordinator and have them identify the other members of the working group.

    Start by updating your disaster recovery plan (DRP)

    Use Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan research to identify recovery objectives based on business impact and outline recovery processes. Both are tremendously valuable inputs to your test plans.

    Overall Business Continuity Plan

    IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    A plan to restore IT services (e.g. applications and infrastructure) following a disruption. A DRP:

    • Identifies critical applications and dependencies.
    • Defines appropriate recovery objectives based on a business impact analysis (BIA).
    • Creates a step-by-step incident response plan.

    BCP for Each Business Unit

    A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit. A business continuity plan (BCP) is also sometimes called a continuity of operations plan (COOP).

    BCPs are created and owned by each business unit, and creating a BCP requires deep involvement from the leadership of each business unit.

    Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

    Crisis Management Plan

    A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

    Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

    01 Confirm: why test at all?

    15-30 minutes

    Identify the value recovery testing for your organization. Use language appropriate for a nontechnical audience. Start with the list below and add, modify, or delete bullet points to reflect your own organization.

     

    Drivers for testing – Examples:

     

    • Improve service continuity.
    • Identify and address gaps in recovery plans before a real disaster strikes.
    • Cross-train staff on systems recovery to minimize single points of failure.
    • Identify how we coordinate across teams during a major systems outage.
    • Exercise both recovery processes and technology.
    • Support a culture that centers system resilience in everyday decision-making.
    • Keep recovery documentation up-to-date and ready for action.
    • Confirm that our stated recovery objectives can be met.
    • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications.
    • We require proof of testing to pass audits and renew cybersecurity insurance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time-strapped technical staff will sometimes push back on planning and testing, objecting that the team will “figure it out” in a disaster. But the question isn’t whether recovery is possible – it’s whether the recovery aligns with business needs. If your plan is to “MacGyver” a solution on the fly, you can’t know if it’s the right solution for your organization.

    Input

    • Business drivers and context for testing

    Output

    • Specific goals that are driving testing

    Participants

    • DR sponsor
    • Test coordinator

    Think about what and how you test

    Different layers of the stack to test: Network, Authentication, compute and storage, visualization platforms, database services, middleware, app servers, web servers.

    Find gaps and risks with tabletop testing

    Tabletop planning had the greatest impact on meeting recovery objectives (RTOs/RPOs).

    In a tabletop planning exercise, the team walks through a disaster scenario to outline the recovery workflow, and risks or gaps that could disrupt that workflow.

    Tabletops are particularly effective because:

    • It enables you to play out a wider range of scenarios than technology-based testing (e.g. full-scale, parallel) due to cost and complexity factors.
    • It is non-intrusive, so it can be executed more easily than other testing methodologies.
    • The exercise translates into recovery documentation: you create a workflow as you go.
    • A major site or service recovery scenario will review all aspects of the recovery process and create the backbone of your recovery plan.

    02 Run a tabletop exercise

    2 hours

    Tabletop testing is part of our core DRP methodology, Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan. This exercise can be run using cue cards, sticky notes, or on a whiteboard; many of our facilitators find building the workflow directly in flowchart software to be very effective.

    Use our Recovery Workflow Template as a starting point.

    Some tips for running your first tabletop exercise:

    Do

    • Review the complete workflow from notification all the way to user acceptance testing.
    • Keep focused; stay on task and on time.
    • Revisit each step and record gaps and risks (and known solutions, but don’t dwell on this).
    • Revise and improve the plan with task owners.

    Don't

    • Get weighed down by tools.
    • Try to find solutions to every gap/risk as you go. Save in-depth research/discussion for later.
    • Document the details right away – stick to the high-level plan for the first exercise.
    1. Ahead of the exercise, decide on a scenario, identify participants, and book a meeting time.
      • For your first walkthrough of a DR scenario, we often recommend a scenario that considers a site failure requiring failover to a DR site.
      • For the first exercise, focus on technical aspects of recovery before bringing in members of the business. The technical team may need space to discuss the appropriate steps in the recovery process before you bring in business liaisons to discuss user acceptance testing (UAT).
      • A complete failover considers all systems, the viability of your second site, and can help identify parts of the process that require additional exercises.
    2. Review the scenario with participants. Then, discuss and document the recovery process, starting with initial notification of an event.
      • Record steps in the process on white cards or boxes.
      • On yellow and red cards, document gaps and risks in people process and technology requirements.
    3. Once you’ve walked through the process, return to the start.
      • Record the time required to complete each step. Consider identifying who is responsible for key steps. Identify any additional gaps and risks.
    4. Clean up and record the results of the workflow. Save a copy with your DRP documentation.

    Input

    • Expert knowledge on systems recovery

    Output

    • Recovery workflow, including gaps and risks

    Participants

    • Test coordinator
    • Technical SMEs

    Move from tabletop testing to functional exercises

    See how your plans fare in the real world

    In live exercises, some portion of your recovery plans are executed in a way that mimics a real recovery scenario. Some advantages of live testing:

    • See how standby systems behave. A tabletop exercise can miss small issues that can make or break the recovery process. For example, connectivity or integration issues on a new subnet might be difficult to predict prior to actually running services in that environment.
    • Hands-on practice: Familiarize the team with the steps, commands, and interfaces of your recovery toolset.
    • Manage the pressure of the DR scenario: Nothing’s quite like the real thing, but a live exercise may be the closest your team can get to a disaster situation without experiencing it firsthand.

    Examples of live exercises

    Boot and smoke test Turn on a standby system and confirm it boots up correctly.
    Restore and validate data Restore data or servers from backup. Confirm data integrity.
    Parallel testing Send familiar transactions to production and standby systems. Confirm both systems produce the same result.
    Failover systems Shut down the production system and use the standby system in production.

    Run local tests ahead of releases

    Think small

    Most unacceptable downtime is caused by localized issues, such as hardware or software failures, rather than widespread destructive events. Regular local testing can help validate the recovery plan for local issues and improve overall service continuity.

    Make local testing a standard step in maintenance work and new deployments to embed resilience considerations in day-to-day activities. Run the same tests in both your primary and your DR environment.

    Some examples of localized tests:

    • Review backup logs and check for errors.
    • Restore files or whole systems from backup.
    • Run application-based tests as part of release management, including unit, regression, and performance tests.
      • Ensure application tests are run for both the primary and DR environment.
      • For a deep-dive on application testing, see Info-Tech’s research Automate Testing to Get More Done.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Local tests will vary between different services, and local test design is usually best left to the system SMEs. At the same time, centralize reporting to understand where tests are being done.

    Investigate whether your IT Service Management or ticketing system can create recurring tasks or work orders to schedule, document, and track test exercises. Tasks can be pre-populated with checklists and documentation to support the test and provide a record of completed tests to support oversight and reporting.

    Have the business validate recovery

    If your business doesn’t think a system’s recovered, it’s not recovered.

    User acceptance testing (UAT) after system recovery is a key step in the recovery process. Like any step in the process, there’s value in testing it before it actually needs to be done. Assign responsibility for building UATs to the person who will be responsible for executing them.

    An acceptance test script might look something like the checklist below.

    • Does the application open?
    • Does the interface look right?
    • Do you see any unusual notifications or warnings?
    • Can you conduct a key transaction with dummy data?
    • Can you run key reports?

    “I cannot stress how important it is to assign ownership of responsibilities in a test; this is the only way to truly mitigate against issues in a test.”

    – Robert Nardella
    IT Service Management
    Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional

    Info-Tech Insight

    Build test scripts and test transactions ahead of time to minimize the amount of new work required during a recovery scenario.

    Beyond the Basics: Full Failover Testing

    • A failover test – a full failover of your production environment to a secondary environment – is what many IT and businesspeople think about when they think of disaster recovery testing.
    • A full test can validate previous local or tabletop tests, identify additional gaps and risks, and provide hands-on training experience with recovery processes and technologies.
    • Setting a date for failover testing can also inject some urgency into otherwise low-priority (but high importance) disaster recovery planning and documentation exercises, which need to be completed prior to the test.
    • Despite these benefits, full failover tests carry significant risk and require a great deal of effort and cost. Typically, only businesses that already have an active-active environment capable of supporting in-scope production systems are able to run a full environment failover.
    • This is especially true the first time you test. While in theory a DR plan should be ready to go at any time, there will be documents to update, gaps to address, and risks to mitigate before you go ahead with the test.

    Full Failover Testing

    What you get:

    • Provide hands-on experience with recovery processes and technology.
    • Confirm that site failover works in practice as you assumed in tabletop or local testing exercises.
    • Identify critical gaps you might have missed without a full failover test.

    What you need:

    • An active-active secondary site, with sufficient standby equipment, data, and licensed standby software to support production.
    • A completed tabletop exercise and documented recovery workflow.
    • A documented test plan, backout plan, and formal sign-off.
    • An off-hours downtime window.
    • Time from technical SMEs and business resources, both for creating the plan and executing the test.

    Beyond the Basics: Site Reliability Engineering

    • Site reliability engineering (SRE) is an application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system resilience.
    • SRE is focused on “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning” across a set portfolio of services (Sloss, 2017).
    • In many organizations, SRE is implemented as a team that supports separate applications teams.
    • Applications must have defined and granular resilience requirements, translated into service objectives. The SRE team and applications teams will work together to meet these objectives.
    • Site reliability engineers (the folks that do SRE, and often also abbreviated as SREs) are expected to build solutions and processes to ensure services remain stable and performant, not just respond when they fail. For example, Google allows their SREs to spend just half their time on incident response, with the rest of their time focused on development and automation tasks.

    Site Reliability Testing

    What you get:

    • Improved reliability and reduced frequency and impact of downtime.
    • Increased use of automation to address problems before they cause an incident.
    • Granular resilience objectives.

    What you need:

    • Systems running on software-defined infrastructure.
    • Specialized skills in programming, infrastructure-as-code.
    • Business & product owners able to define and fund acceptable and appropriate resilience objectives.
    • Technical experts able to translate product requirements into technical design requirements.

    Beyond the Basics: Chaos Engineering

    • Chaos engineering, a term and approach first popularized by the team at Netflix, aims to improve the resilience of particularly large and distributed systems by simulating system failures and evaluating performance against a baseline.
    • Experiments simulate a variety of real-world events that could cause outages (e.g. network slowdowns or server failures). Experiments run continuously, and the recommendation is to run them in production where feasible while minimizing the impact on customers.
    • Tools to help you run chaos testing exist, including open-source toolkits like Chaos Monkey or Mangle and paid software as a service (SaaS) solutions like Gremlin.
    • Deciding whether the long-term benefits of tests that can degrade production are worth the potential risk of system slowdowns or outages is a business or product decision. Technical considerations aside, if the business owner of a particular system doesn’t see the value of continuous testing outweighing the introduced risk, this approach to testing isn’t going to happen.

    Chaos Engineering

    What you get:

    • Confidence that systems can weather volatile and unpredictable conditions in a production environment.
    • An embedded resilience culture.

    What you need:

    • High-maturity IT incident, monitoring and event practices.
    • Standby/resilient systems to minimize downtime impact.
    • Business buy-in for introducing risk into the production environment.
    • Specialized skills to identify, develop, and run tests that degrade production performance in a controlled way.
    • Budget and time to act on issues identified through testing.

    Beyond the Basics: Security Event Simulations

    • Ransomware is driving demands for proof of recovery testing from customers, executives, auditors, and insurance companies. Systems recovery is part of ransomware recovery, but recovering from a breach includes detection, analysis, containment, and eradication of the attack vector before systems recovery can begin.
    • Beyond technical recovery, internal legal and communications teams will have a role, as will your insurance provider, consultants specialized in ransomware recovery, or professional ransom negotiators.
    • A tabletop exercise focused on ransomware incident response is a key first step. You can find Info-Tech’s methodology for a ransomware tabletop in Phase 3 of Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks.
    • Live testing approaches can offer hands-on experience and further insight into how your systems are vulnerable to malware. A variety of open source and proprietary tools can simulate ransomware and help you identify problems, though it’s important to understand the limitations of different simulators (Allon, 2022).
    • A “red team” exercise simulates an adversarial attack against your processes and systems. A specialized penetration tester will often take on the role of the red team and provide a report of identified gaps and risks after the engagement.

    Security Event Simulation

    What you get:

    • Hands-on experience managing and recovering from a ransomware attack in a controlled environment.
    • A better understanding of gaps in your response process.

    What you need:

    • A completed ransomware tabletop exercise and mature security incident response processes.
    • For Ransomware Simulators: An air-gapped sandbox environment hosting a copy of your production systems and security tools, and time from your technical SMEs.
    • For Red Team Exercises: A trusted provider, scope for your testing plans, and time from your security incident response team.

    Prioritize tests by asking these three questions

    1. Will the scope of this test deliver sufficient value?

    • Yes, these are critical systems with low tolerance for downtime or data loss.
    • Yes, major changes or new systems require validation of DR capabilities.
    • Yes, there’s high probability of an outage, or recent experience of an outage.
    • •Yes, we have audit requirements or customer demands for testing.

    2. Are we ready for this test?

    • Yes, recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented.
    • Yes, key technical and business resources have time to commit to testing exercises.
    • Yes, technology is currently able to support proposed tests.

    3. Is it easy to do?

    • Yes, effort required to complete the test is low (i.e. minimal work, few participants).
    • Yes, the risks related to testing are low.
    • Yes, it won’t cost much.

    Info-Tech Insight

    More complex, challenging, risky, or costly tests, such as full failover tests, can deliver value. But do the high-value, low-effort stuff first!

    03 Brainstorm and prioritize test ideas

    30-60 minutes

    Even if you have an idea of what you need to test and how you want to run those tests, this brainstorming exercise can generate useful ideas for testing that might otherwise have been missed.

      1. Review the slides above to develop ideas on how and what you want to test. These slides may be enough to kickstart a brainstorming process. Don’t debate or discount ideas at this point. Write down these ideas in a space where all participants can see them (e.g. whiteboard or shared screen).

    The next steps will help you prioritize the list – if needed – to tests that are highest value and lowest effort.

    1. Discuss where you have the greatest need to test. Assign a score of 0 – 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being high-need and a score of zero being low-need. Consider whether:
      • These applications have a low tolerance for downtime.
      • There’s a high chance of an outage, or recent experience with an outage.
      • There’s a need to train or cross-train staff on recovery for the system(s) in question.
      • Major changes require a review or validation of DR capabilities.
      • Audit requirements or customer/executive demands can be met via testing.
    2. Discuss which tests will require the least effort to complete – where readiness is high and tests are easier to do. Assign a score between 0 and 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being least effort and a score of 0 being high effort. Consider whether:
      • Recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented for these systems.
      • Technical experts are available to work on testing exercises.
      • For active testing, standby/sandbox systems are available and capable of supporting proposed tests.
      • The effort required to complete the test is low (e.g. minimal new work, few participants).
      • The risks related to testing are low.
      • You will need to secure additional funding.
    3. Sum together the assigned scores for each test. Higher scores should be the highest priority, but of course use your judgement to validate the results and select one or two tests to execute in the coming year.

    “There are different levels of testing and it is very progressive. I do not recommend my clients to do anything, unless they do it in a progressive fashion. Don’t try to do a live failover test with your users, right out of the box.”

    – Steve Tower
    Principal Consultant
    Prompta Consulting Group

    Input

    • Organizational and technical context

    Output

    • Prioritize list of DR testing ideas

    Participants

    • DR sponsor
    • Test coordinator

    04 Build a test plan

    3-5 days

    Building a test plan helps the test run smoothly and can uncover issues with the underlying DRP as you dig into the details.

    The test coordinator will own the plan document but will rely on the sponsor to confirm scope and goals, technical SMEs to develop system recovery plans, and business liaisons to create UAT scripts.

    Download Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template. Use the structure of the template to build your own document, deleting example data as you go. Consider saving a separate copy of this document as an example and working from a second copy.

    Key sections of the document include:

    • Goals, scenario, and scope of the test.
    • Assumptions, constraints, risks, and mitigation strategies.
    • Test participants.
    • Key pre-test milestones, and test-day schedule.
    • After-action review.

    Download the Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

    Input

    • Scope
    • High-level goals

    Output

    • Test plan, including goals, scope, key milestones, risks and mitigations, and test-day schedule

    Participants

    • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
      • Technical SMEs
      • Business liaisons
      • DR sponsor

    05 Run an after-action review

    30-60 minutes

    Take time after test exercises – especially large-scale tests with many participants – to consider what went well, what didn’t, and where you can improve future testing exercises. Track lessons learned and next steps at the bottom of your test plan.

    1. Start with a short (5-10 minute) debrief of the test and allow participants to ask questions. Confirm:
      • Did we meet the goals we set for the exercise, including RTOs and RPOs?
      • What was done well? What issues, gaps, and risks were identified?
    2. Work through variations of the following questions:
      • Was the test plan effective, and was the test well organized?
      • Was the documentation effective? Where did we follow the plan as documented, and where did we deviate from the plan?
      • Was our communication/collaboration during the test effective?
      • Have gaps and issues found during the test been reported to the testing coordinator? Could some of the issues uncovered apply more broadly to other IT services as well?
      • What could we test next, based on what was discovered?
      • Are there other tools or approaches that could be useful?

    Input

    • Insights and experience from a recent testing exercise

    Output

    • Identified gaps and risks, and action items to address them
    • Ideas to improve future test exercises

    Participants

    • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
      • Test coordinator
      • Test participants

    Follow a testing cycle

    All tests are expected to drive actions to improve resilience, as appropriate. Experience from previous tests will be applied to future testing exercises.

    The testing cycle: 1. Plan a test, 2. Run test, 3. Take action.

    Use your experience to simplify testing

    The fifth testing exercise should be easier than the first

    Outputs and lessons learned from testing should help you run future tests.

    • With past experience under their belt, participants should have a better understanding of their role, and of their peers’ roles, and the goal of the exercise.
    • Facilitators will be more comfortable facilitating the exercise, and everyone should be more confident in the steps required to recover their systems.
    • Gather feedback from participants through after-action reviews to identify what worked and what didn’t.
    • Documentation from previous tests can provide a template for future tests.
    • Gaps identified in previous tests can provide ideas for future tests.

    Experience, lessons learned, improved process, new test targets, repeat.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Testing should get easier over time. But if you’re easily passing every test, it’s a sign that you’re ready to run more challenging tests.

    06 Create a test program summary

    2-4 hours

    Regular testing allows you to build on prior tests and helps keep plans current despite changes to your environment.

    Keeping a regular testing schedule requires expertise, a process to coordinate your efforts, and a level of governance to provide oversight and ensure testing continues to deliver value. Create a call to action using Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary Template.

    The result is a summary document that:

    • Identifies key takeaways and testing goals
    • Presents key elements of the testing program
    • Outlines the testing cycle
    • Lists expected milestones for the next year
    • Identifies participants
    • Recommends next steps

    “It is extremely important in the early stages of development to concentrate the focus on actual recoverability and data protection, enhancing these capabilities over time into a fully matured program that can truly test the recovery, and not simply focusing on the testing process itself.”

    – Joe Starzyk
    Senior Business Development Executive
    IBM Global Services

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Bernard A. Jones, Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery Expert
    • Robert Nardella, IT Service Management, Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional
    • Larry Liss, Chief Technology Officer, Blank Rome LLP
    • Jennifer Goshorn, Chief Administrative and Chief Compliance Officer, Gunderson Dettmer LLP
    • Paul Kirvan, FBCI, CISA, Independent IT Consultant/Auditor, Paul Kirvan Associates
    • Steve Tower, Principal Consultant, Prompta Consulting Group
    • Joe Starzyk, Senior Business Development Executive, IBM Global Services
    • Thomas Bronack, Enterprise Resiliency and Corporate Certification Consultant, DCAG
    • Paul S. Randal, CEO & Owner, SQLskills.com
    • Tom Baumgartner, Disaster Recovery Analyst, Catholic Health

    Bibliography

    Alton, Yoni. “Ransomware simulators – reality or a bluff?” Palo Alto Blog, 2 May 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.paloaltonetworks.com/blog/security-operations/ransomware-simulators-reality-or-a-bluff/

    Brathwaite, Shimon. “How to Test your Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan,” Security Made Simple, 13 Nov 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.securitymadesimple.org/cybersecurity-blog/how-to-test-your-business-continuity-and-disaster-recovery-plan

    The Business Continuity Institute. Good Practice Guidelines: 2018 Edition. The Business Continuity Institute, 2017.

    Emigh, Jacqueline. “Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works,” Enterprise Storage Forum, 28 May 2019. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works | Enterprise Storage Forum

    Gardner, Dana. "Case Study: Strategic Approach to Disaster Recovery and Data Lifecycle Management Pays off for Australia's SAI Global." ZDNet. BriefingsDirect, 26 Apr 2012. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    http://www.zdnet.com/article/case-study-strategic-approach-to-disaster-recovery-and-data-lifecycle-management-pays-off-for-australias-sai-global/.

    IBM. “Section 11. Testing the Disaster Recovery Plan.” IBM, 2 Aug 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023. Section 11. Testing the disaster recovery plan - IBM Documentation Lutkevich, Ben and Alexander Gillis. “Chaos Engineering”. TechTarget, Jun 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://www.techtarget.com/searchitoperations/definition/chaos-engineering

    Monperrus, Martin. “Principles of Antifragility.” Arxiv Forum, 7 June 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://arxiv.org/ftp/arxiv/papers/1404/1404.3056.pdf

    “Principles of Chaos Engineering.” Principles of Chaos Engineering, 2019 March. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://principlesofchaos.org/

    Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. “Introduction.” Site Reliability Engineering. Ed. Betsy Beyer. O’Reilly Media, 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
    https://sre.google/sre-book/introduction/

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}201|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The desire for rapid decision making is increasing and the complexity of data sources is growing; business users want access to several new data sources, but in a way that is controlled and easily consumable.
    • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
    • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of that ecosystem may cause a paralysis for organizations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Big data is simply data. With technological advances, what was once considered big data is now more approachable for all organizations irrespective of size.
    • The variety element is the key to unlocking big data value. Drill down into your specific use cases more effectively by focusing on what kind of data you should use.
    • Big data is about deep analytics. Deep doesn’t mean difficult. Visualization of data, integrating new data, and understanding associations are ways to deepen your analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish a foundational understanding of what big data entails and what the implications of its different elements are for your organization.
    • Confirm your current maturity for taking on a big data initiative, and make considerations for core data management practices in the context of incorporating big data.
    • Avoid boiling the ocean by pinpointing use cases by industry and functional unit, followed by identifying the most essential data sources and elements that will enable the initiative.
    • Leverage a repeatable pilot project framework to build out a successful first initiative and implement future projects en-route to evolving a big data program.

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should leverage big data, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Undergo big data education

    Build a foundational understanding of the current big data landscape.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 1: Undergo Big Data Education

    2. Assess big data readiness

    Appraise current capabilities for handling a big data initiative and revisit the key data management practices that will enable big data success.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 2: Assess Big Data Readiness
    • Big Data Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Pinpoint a killer big data use case

    Armed with Info-Tech’s variety dimension framework, identify the top use cases and the data sources/elements that will power the initiative.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 3: Pinpoint a Killer Big Data Use Case
    • Big Data Use-Case Suggestion Tool

    4. Structure a big data proof-of-concept project

    Leverage a repeatable framework to detail the core components of the pilot project.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 4: Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project
    • Big Data Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data Scientist
    • Big Data Cost/Benefit Tool
    • Big Data Stakeholder Presentation Template
    • Big Data Communication Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Undergo Big Data Education

    The Purpose

    Understand the basic elements of big data and its relationship to traditional business intelligence.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common, foundational knowledge of what big data entails.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine which of the four Vs is most important to your organization.

    1.2 Explore new data through a social lens.

    1.3 Brainstorm new opportunities for enhancing current reporting assets with big data sources.

    Outputs

    Relative importance of the four Vs from IT and business perspectives

    High-level improvement ideas to report artifacts using new data sources

    2 Assess Your Big Data Readiness

    The Purpose

    Establish an understanding of current maturity for taking on big data, as well as revisiting essential data management practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete idea of current capabilities.

    Recommended actions for developing big data maturity.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your organization’s current big data maturity level.

    2.2 Plan for big data management.

    Outputs

    Established current state maturity

    Foundational understanding of data management practices in the context of a big data initiative

    3 Pinpoint Your Killer Big Data Use Case

    The Purpose

    Explore a plethora of potential use cases at the industry and business unit level, followed by using the variety element of big data to identify the highest value initiative(s) within your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    In-depth characterization of a pilot big data initiative that is thoroughly informed by the business context.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify big data use cases at the industry and/or departmental levels.

    3.2 Conduct big data brainstorming sessions in collaboration with business stakeholders to refine use cases.

    3.3 Revisit the variety dimension framework to scope your big data initiative in further detail.

    3.4 Create an organizational 4-column data flow model with your big data sources/elements.

    3.5 Evaluate data sources by considering business value and risk.

    3.6 Perform a value-effort assessment to prioritize your initiatives.

    Outputs

    Potential big data use cases

    Potential initiatives rooted in the business context and identification of valuable data sources

    Identification of specific data sources and data elements

    Characterization of data sources/elements by value and risk

    Prioritization of big data use cases

    4 Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project

    The Purpose

    Put together the core components of the pilot project and set the stage for enterprise-wide support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A repeatable framework for implementing subsequent big data initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Construct a work breakdown structure for the pilot project.

    4.2 Determine your project’s need for a data scientist.

    4.3 Establish the staffing model for your pilot project.

    4.4 Perform a detailed cost/benefit analysis.

    4.5 Make architectural considerations for supporting the big data initiative.

    Outputs

    Comprehensive list of tasks for implementing the pilot project

    Decision on whether or not a data scientist is needed, and where data science capabilities will be sourced

    RACI chart for the project

    Big data pilot cost/benefit summary

    Customized, high-level architectural model that incorporates technologies that support big data

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}188|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $69,330 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Program & Project Management
    • Parent Category Link: /program-and-project-management
    • Organizational change management (OCM) is often an Achilles’ heel for IT departments and business units, putting projects and programs at risk – especially large, complex, transformational projects.
    • When projects that depend heavily on users and stakeholders adopting new tools, or learning new processes or skills, get executed without an effective OCM plan, the likelihood that they will fail to achieve their intended outcomes increases exponentially.
    • The root of the problem often comes down to a question of accountability: who in the organization is accountable for change management success? In the absence of any other clearly identifiable OCM leader, the PMO – as the organizational entity that is responsible for facilitating successful project outcomes – needs to step up and embrace this accountability.
    • As PMO leader, you need to hone an OCM strategy and toolkit that will help ensure not only that projects are completed but also that benefits are realized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The root of poor stakeholder adoption on change initiatives is twofold:
      • Project planning tends to fixate on technology and neglects the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption;
      • Accountabilities for managing change and helping to realize the intended business outcomes post-project are not properly defined in advance.
    • Persuading people to change requires a “soft,” empathetic approach to keep them motivated and engaged. But don’t mistake “soft” for easy. Managing the people part of change is amongst the toughest work there is, and it requires a comfort and competency with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict.
    • Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good, but can degenerate into volatility if change isn’t managed properly.

    Impact and Result

    • Plan for human nature. To ensure project success and maximize benefits, plan and facilitate the non-technical aspects of organizational change by addressing the emotional, behavioral, and cultural factors that foster stakeholder resistance and inhibit user adoption.
    • Make change management as ubiquitous as change itself. Foster a project culture that is proactive about OCM. Create a process where OCM considerations are factored in as early as project ideation and where change is actively managed throughout the project lifecycle, including after the project has closed.
    • Equip project leaders with the right tools to foster adoption. Effective OCM requires an actionable toolkit that will help plant the seeds for organizational change. With the right tools and templates, the PMO can function as the hub for change, helping the business units and project teams to consistently achieve project and post-project success.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how implementing an OCM strategy through the PMO can improve project outcomes and increase benefits realization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare the PMO for change leadership

    Assess the organization’s readiness for change and evaluate the PMO’s OCM capabilities.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 1: Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership
    • Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment
    • Project Level Assessment Tool

    2. Plant the seeds for change during project planning and initiation

    Build an organic desire for change throughout the organization by developing a sponsorship action plan through the PMO and taking a proactive approach to change impacts.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 2: Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation
    • Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    3. Facilitate change adoption throughout the organization

    Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change by developing effective communication, transition, and training plans.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 3: Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Transition Plan Template
    • Transition Team Communications Template

    4. Establish a post-project benefits attainment process

    Determine accountabilities and establish a process for tracking business outcomes after the project team has packed up and moved onto the next project.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 4: Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process
    • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool

    5. Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader

    Institute an Organizational Change Management Playbook through the PMO that covers tools, processes, and tactics that will scale all of the organization’s project efforts.

    • Drive Organizational Change from the PMO – Phase 5: Solidify the PMO's Role as Change Leader
    • Organizational Change Management Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess OCM Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s readiness for change and evaluate the PMO’s OCM capabilities.

    Estimate the relative difficulty and effort required for managing organizational change through a specific project.

    Create a rough but concrete timeline that aligns organizational change management activities with project scope.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of the cultural appetite for change and of where the PMO needs to focus its efforts to improve OCM capabilities.

    A project plan that includes disciplined organizational change management from start to finish.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the organization’s current readiness for change.

    1.2 Perform a change management SWOT analysis to assess the PMO’s capabilities.

    1.3 Define OCM success metrics.

    1.4 Establish and map out a core OCM project to pilot through the workshop.

    Outputs

    Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment

    A diagnosis of the PMO’s strengths and weaknesses around change management, as well as the opportunities and threats associated with driving an OCM strategy through the PMO

    Criteria for implementation success

    Project Level Assessment

    2 Analyze Change Impacts

    The Purpose

    Analyze the impact of the change across various dimensions of the business.

    Develop a strategy to manage change impacts to best ensure stakeholder adoption.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved planning for both your project management and organizational change management efforts.

    A more empathetic understanding of how the change will be received in order to rightsize the PMO’s OCM effort and maximize adoption.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop a sponsorship action plan through the PMO.

    2.2 Determine the relevant considerations for analyzing the change impacts of a project.

    2.3 Analyze the depth of each impact for each stakeholder group.

    2.4 Establish a game plan to manage individual change impacts.

    2.5 Document the risk assumptions and opportunities stemming from the impact analysis.

    Outputs

    Sponsorship Action Plan

    Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment

    Risk and Opportunity Assessment

    3 Establish Collaborative Roles and Develop an Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Define a clear and compelling vision for change.

    Define roles and responsibilities of the core project team for OCM.

    Identify potential types and sources of resistance and enthusiasm.

    Create a stakeholder map that visualizes relative influence and interest of stakeholders.

    Develop an engagement plan for cultivating support for change while eliciting requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Begin to communicate a compelling vision for change.

    Delegate and divide work on elements of the transition plan among the project team and support staff.

    Begin developing a communications plan that appeals to unique needs and attitudes of different stakeholders.

    Cultivate support for change while eliciting requirements.

    Activities

    3.1 Involve the right people to drive and facilitate change.

    3.2 Solidify the vision of change to reinforce and sustain leadership and commitment.

    3.3 Proactively identify potential skeptics in order to engage them early and address their concerns.

    3.4 Stay one step ahead of potential saboteurs to prevent them from spreading dissent.

    3.5 Find opportunities to empower enthusiasts to stay motivated and promote change by encouraging others.

    3.6 Formalize the stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers.

    3.7 Formalize the engagement plan to begin cultivating support while eliciting requirements.

    Outputs

    RACI table

    Stakeholder Analysis

    Engagement Plan

    Communications plan requirements

    4 Develop and Execute the Transition Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop a realistic, effective, and adaptable transition plan, including:Clarity around leadership and vision.Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.Resistance and contingency plans.Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    Clarity around leadership and vision.

    Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.

    Resistance and contingency plans.

    Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Execute the transition in coordination with the timeline and structure of the core project.

    Communicate the action plan and vision for change.

    Target specific stakeholder and user groups with unique messages.

    Deal with risks, resistance, and contingencies.

    Evaluate success through feedback and metrics.

    Activities

    4.1 Sustain changes by adapting people, processes, and technologies to accept the transition.

    4.2 Decide which action to take on enablers and blockers.

    4.3 Start developing the training plan early to ensure training is properly timed and communicated.

    4.4 Sketch a communications timeline based on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance.

    4.5 Define plans to deal with resistance to change, objections, and fatigue.

    4.6 Consolidate and refine communication plan requirements for each stakeholder and group.

    4.7 Build the communications delivery plan.

    4.8 Define the feedback and evaluation process to ensure the project achieves its objectives.

    4.9 Formalize the transition plan.

    Outputs

    Training Plan

    Resistance Plan

    Communications Plan

    Transition Plan

    5 Institute an OCM Playbook through the PMO

    The Purpose

    Establish post-project benefits tracking timeline and commitment plans.

    Institute a playbook for managing organizational change, including:

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A process for ensuring the intended business outcomes are tracked and monitored after the project is completed.

    Repeat and scale best practices around organizational change to future PMO projects.

    Continue to build your capabilities around managing organizational change.

    Increase the effectiveness and value of organizational change management.

    Activities

    5.1 Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core PM discipline.

    5.2 Monitor capacity for change.

    5.3 Define roles and responsibilities.

    5.4 Formalize and communicate the organizational change management playbook.

    5.5 Regularly reassess the value and success of organizational change management.

    Outputs

    Lessons learned

    Organizational Change Capability Assessment

    Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Further reading

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t leave change up to chance.

    "Organizational change management has been a huge weakness for IT departments and business units, putting projects and programs at risk – especially large, complex, transformational projects.

    During workshops with clients, I find that the root of this problem is twofold: project planning tends to fixate on technology and neglects the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption; further, accountabilities for managing change and helping to realize the intended business outcomes post-project are not properly defined.

    It makes sense for the PMO to be the org-change leader. In project ecosystems where no one seems willing to seize this opportunity, the PMO can take action and realize the benefits and accolades that will come from coordinating and consistently driving successful project outcomes."

    Matt Burton,

    Senior Manager, Project Portfolio Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • PMO Directors who need to improve user adoption rates and maximize benefits on project and program activity.
    • CIOs who are accountable for IT’s project spend and need to ensure an appropriate ROI on project investments.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Define change management roles and accountabilities among project stakeholders.
    • Prepare end users for change impacts in order to improve adoption rates.
    • Ensure that the intended business outcomes of projects are more effectively realized.
    • Develop an organizational change management toolkit and best practices playbook.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Project managers and change managers who need to plan and execute changes affecting people and processes.
    • Project sponsors who want to improve benefits attainment.
    • Business analysts who need to analyze the impact of change.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Develop communications and training plans tailored to specific audiences.
      • Identify strategies to manage cultural and behavioral change.
    • Maximize project benefits by ensuring changes are adopted.
    • Capitalize upon opportunities and mitigate risks.

    Drive organizational change from the PMO

    Situation

    • As project management office (PMO) leader, you oversee a portfolio of projects that depend heavily on users and stakeholders adopting new tools, complying with new policies, following new processes, and learning new skills.
    • You need to facilitate the organizational change resulting from these projects, ensuring that the intended business outcomes are realized.

    Complication

    • While IT takes accountability to deliver the change, accountability for the business outcomes is opaque with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • Project management practices focus more on the timely implementation of projects than on the achievement of the desired outcomes thereafter or on the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit change from taking hold in the long term.

    Resolution

    • Plan for human nature. To ensure project success and maximize benefits, plan and facilitate the non-technical aspects of organizational change by addressing the emotional, behavioral, and cultural factors that foster stakeholder resistance and inhibit user adoption.
    • Make change management as ubiquitous as change itself. Foster a project culture that is proactive about OCM. Create a process where OCM considerations are factored in as early as project ideation and change is actively managed throughout the project lifecycle, including after the project has closed.
    • Equip project leaders with the right tools to foster adoption. Effective OCM requires an actionable toolkit that will help plant the seeds for organizational change. With the right tools and templates, the PMO can function as a hub for change, helping business units and project teams to consistently achieve project and post-project success.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Make your PMO the change leader it’s already expected to be. Unless accountabilities for organizational change management (OCM) have been otherwise explicitly defined, you should accept that, to the rest of the organization – including its chief officers – the PMO is already assumed to be the change leader.

    Don’t shy away from or neglect this role. It’s not just the business outcomes of the organization’s projects that will benefit; the long-term sustainability of the PMO itself will be significantly strengthened by making OCM a core competency.

    Completed projects aren’t necessarily successful projects

    The constraints that drive project management (time, scope, and budget) are insufficient for driving the overall success of project efforts.

    For instance, a project may come in on time, on budget, and in scope, but

    • …if users and stakeholders fail to adopt…
    • …and the intended benefits are not achieved…

    …then that “successful project” represents a massive waste of the organization’s time and resources.

    A supplement to project management is needed to ensure that the intended value is realized.

    Mission (Not) Accomplished

    50% Fifty percent of respondents in a KPMG survey indicated that projects fail to achieve what they originally intended. (Source: NZ Project management survey)

    56% Only fifty-six percent of strategic projects meet their original business goals. (Source: PMI)

    70% Lack of user adoption is the main cause for seventy percent of failed projects. (Source: Collins, 2013)

    Improve project outcomes with organizational change management

    Make “completed” synonymous with “successfully completed” by implementing an organizational change management strategy through the PMO.

    Organizational change management is the practice through which the PMO can improve user adoption rates and maximize project benefits.

    Why OCM effectiveness correlates to project success:

    • IT projects are justified because they will make money, save money, or make people happier.
    • Project benefits can only be realized when changes are successfully adopted or accommodated by the organization.

    Without OCM, IT might finish the project but fail to realize the intended outcomes.

    In the long term, a lack of OCM could erode IT’s ability to work with the business.

    The image shows a bar graph, titled Effective change management correlates with project success, with the X-axis labelled Project Success (Percent of respondents that met or exceeded project objectives), and the Y-axis labelled OCM-Effectiveness, with an arrow pointing upwards. The graph shows that with higher OCM-Effectiveness, Project Success is also higher. The source is given as Prosci’s 2014 Best Practices in Change Management benchmarking report.

    What is organizational change management?

    OCM is a framework for managing the introduction of new business processes and technologies to ensure stakeholder adoption.

    OCM involves tools, templates, and processes that are intended to help project leaders analyze the impacts of a change during the planning phase, engage stakeholders throughout the project lifecycle, as well as train and transition users towards the new technologies and processes being implemented.

    OCM is a separate body of knowledge, but as a practice it is inseparable from both project management or business analysis.

    WHEN IS OCM NEEDED?

    Anytime you are starting a project or program that will depend on users and stakeholders to give up their old way of doing things, change will force people to become novices again, leading to lost productivity and added stress.

    CM can help improve project outcomes on any project where you need people to adopt new tools and procedures, comply with new policies, learn new skills and behaviors, or understand and support new processes.

    "What is the goal of change management? Getting people to adopt a new way of doing business." – BA, Natural Resources Company

    The benefits of OCM range from more effective project execution to improved benefits attainment

    82% of CEOs identify organizational change management as a priority. (D&B Consulting) But Only 18% of organizations characterize themselves as “Highly Effective” at OCM. (PMI)

    On average, 95% percent of projects with excellent OCM meet or exceed their objectives. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM, the number of projects that meet objectives drops to 15%. (Prosci)

    82% of projects with excellent OCM practices are completed on budget. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM, the number of projects that stay on budget drops to 51%. (Prosci)

    71% of projects with excellent OCM practices stay on schedule. (Prosci) VS For projects with poor OCM practices, only 16% stay on schedule. (Prosci)

    While critical to project success, OCM remains one of IT’s biggest weaknesses and process improvement gaps

    IT Processes Ranked by Effectiveness:

    1. Risk Management
    2. Knowledge Management
    3. Release Management
    4. Innovation
    5. IT Governance
    6. Enterprise Architecture
    7. Quality Management
    8. Data Architecture
    9. Application Development Quality
    10. Data Quality
    11. Portfolio Management
    12. Configuration Management
    13. Application Portfolio Management
    14. Business Process Controls Internal Audit
    15. Organizational Change Management
    16. Application Development Throughput
    17. Business Intelligence Reporting
    18. Performance Measurement
    19. Manage Service Catalog

    IT Processes Ranked by Importance:

    1. Enterprise Application Selection & Implementation
    2. Organizational Change Management
    3. Data Architecture
    4. Quality Management
    5. Enterprise Architecture
    6. Business Intelligence Reporting
    7. Release Management
    8. Portfolio Management
    9. Application Maintenance
    10. Asset Management
    11. Vendor Management
    12. Application Portfolio Management
    13. Innovation
    14. Business Process Controls Internal Audit
    15. Configuration Management
    16. Performance Measurement
    17. Application Development Quality
    18. Application Development Throughput
    19. Manage Service Catalog

    Based on 3,884 responses to Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic, June 2016

    There’s no getting around it: change is hard

    While the importance of change management is widely recognized across organizations, the statistics around change remain dismal.

    Indeed, it’s an understatement to say that change is difficult.

    People are generally – in the near-term at least – resistant to change, especially large, transformational changes that will impact the day-to-day way of doing things, or that involve changing personal values, social norms, and other deep-seated assumptions.

    "There is nothing more difficult to take in hand, more perilous to conduct, or more uncertain in its success, than to take the lead in the introduction of a new order of things." – Niccolo Machiavelli

    70% - Change failure rates are extremely high. It is estimated that up to seventy percent of all change initiatives fail – a figure that has held steady since the 1990s. (McKinsey & Company)

    25% - In a recent survey of 276 large and midsize organizations, only twenty-five percent of respondents felt that the gains from projects were sustained over time. (Towers Watson)

    22% - While eighty-seven percent of survey respondents trained their managers to “manage change,” only 22% felt the training was truly effective. (Towers Watson)

    While change is inherently difficult, the biggest obstacle to OCM success is a lack of accountability

    Who is accountable for change success? …anyone?...

    To its peril, OCM commonly falls into a grey area, somewhere in between project management and portfolio management, and somewhere in between being a concern of IT and a concern of the business.

    While OCM is a separate discipline from project management, it is commonly thought that OCM is something that project managers and project teams do. While in some cases this might be true, it is far from a universal truth.

    The end result: without a centralized approach, accountabilities for key OCM tasks are opaque at best – and the ball for these tasks is, more often than not, dropped altogether.

    29% - Twenty-nine percent of change initiatives are launched without any formal OCM plan whatsoever.

    "That’s 29 percent of leaders with blind faith in the power of prayer to Saint Jude, the patron saint of desperate cases and lost causes." – Torben Rick

    Bring accountability to org-change by facilitating the winds of change through the PMO

    Lasting organizational change requires a leader. Make it the PMO.

    #1 Organizational resistance to change is cited as the #1 challenge to project success that PMOs face. (Source: PM Solutions)

    90% Companies with mature PMOs that effectively manage change meet expectations 90% of the time. (Source: Jacobs-Long)

    Why the PMO?

    A centralized approach to OCM is most effective, and the PMO is already a centralized project office and is already accountable for project outcomes.

    What’s more, in organizations where accountabilities for OCM are not explicitly defined, the PMO will likely already be assumed to be the default change leader by the wider organization.

    It makes sense for the PMO to accept this accountability – in the short term at least – and claim the benefits that will come from coordinating and consistently driving successful project outcomes.

    In the long term, OCM leadership will help the PMO to become a strategic partner with the executive layer and the business side.

    Short-term gains made by the PMO can be used to spark dialogues with those who authorize project spending and have the implicit fiduciary obligation to drive project benefits.

    Ultimately, it’s their job to explicitly transfer that obligation, along with the commensurate resourcing and authority for OCM activities.

    More than a value-added service, OCM competencies will soon determine the success of the PMO itself

    Given the increasingly dynamic nature of market conditions, the need for PMOs to provide change leadership on projects large and small is becoming a necessity.

    "With organizations demanding increasing value, PMOs will need to focus more and more on strategy, innovation, agility, and stakeholder engagement. And, in particular, developing expertise in organizational change management will be essential to their success." – PM Solutions, 2014

    28% PMOs that are highly agile and able to respond quickly to changing conditions are 28% more likely to successfully complete strategic initiatives (69% vs. 41%). (PMI)

    In other words, without heightened competencies around org-change, the PMO of tomorrow will surely sink like a stone in the face of increasingly unstable external factors and accelerated project demands.

    Use Info-Tech’s road-tested OCM toolkit to transform your PMO into a hub of change management leadership

    With the advice and tools in Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint, the PMO can provide the right OCM expertise at each phase of a project.

    The graphic has an image of a windmill at centre, with PMO written directly below it. Several areas of expertise are listed in boxes emerging out of the PMO, which line up with project phases as follows (project phase listed first, then area of expertise): Initiation - Impact Assessment; Planning - Stakeholder Engagement; Execution - Transition Planning; Monitoring & Controlling - Communications Execution; Closing - Evaluation & Monitoring.

    Info-Tech’s approach to OCM is a practical/tactical adaptation of several successful models

    Business strategy-oriented OCM models such as John Kotter’s 8-Step model assume the change agent is in a position of senior leadership, able to shape corporate vision, culture, and values.

    • PMO leaders can work with business leaders, but ultimately can’t decide where to take the organization.
    • Work with business leaders to ensure IT-enabled change helps reinforce the organization’s target vision and culture.

    General-purpose OCM frameworks such as ACMP’s Standard for Change Management, CMI’s CMBoK, and Prosci’s ADKAR model are very comprehensive and need to be configured to PMO-specific initiatives.

    • Tailoring a comprehensive, general-purpose framework to PMO-enabled change requires familiarity and experience.

    References and Further Reading

    Info-Tech’s organizational change management model adapts the best practices from a wide range of proven models and distills it into a step-by-step process that can be applied to any IT-enabled project.

    Info-Tech’s OCM research is COBIT aligned and a cornerstone in our IT Management & Governance Framework

    COBIT Section COBIT Management Practice Related Blueprint Steps
    BAI05.01 Establish the desire to change. 1.1 / 2.1 / 2.2
    BAI05.02 Form an effective implementation team. 1.2
    BAI05.03 Communicate the desired vision. 2.1 / 3.2
    BAI05.03 Empower role players and identify short-term wins. 3.2 / 3.3
    BAI05.05 Enable operation and use. 3.1
    BAI05.06 Embed new approaches. 4.1 / 5.1
    BAI05.07 Sustain changes. 5.1

    COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Framework.

    The image is a screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework (linked above). There is an arrow emerging from the screenshot, which offers a zoomed-in view of one of the sections of the framework, which reads BAI05 Organizational Change Management.

    Consider Info-Tech’s additional key observations

    Human behavior is largely a blind spot during the planning phase.

    In IT especially, project planning tends to fixate on technology and underestimate the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption. Whether change is project-specific or continuous, it’s more important to instill the desire to change than to apply specific tools and techniques. Accountability for instilling this desire should start with the project sponsor, with direct support from the PMO.

    Don’t mistake change management for a “soft” skill.

    Persuading people to change requires a “soft,” empathetic approach to keep them motivated and engaged. But don’t mistake “soft” for easy. Managing the people part of change is amongst the toughest work there is, and it requires a comfort and competency with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict. If a change initiative is going to be successful (especially a large, transformational change), this tough work needs to be done – and the more impactful the change, the earlier it is done, the better.

    In “continuous change” environments, change still needs to be managed.

    Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good, but can degenerate into volatility if change isn’t managed properly. People will perceive change to be volatile and undesirable if their expectations aren’t managed through communications and engagement planning.

    Info-Tech’s centralized approach to OCM is cost effective, with a palpable impact on project ROI

    Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint can be implemented quickly and can usually be done with the PMO’s own authority, without the need for additional or dedicated change resources.

    Implementation Timeline

    • Info-Tech’s easy-to-navigate OCM tools can be employed right away, when your project is already in progress.
    • A full-scale implementation of a PMO-driven OCM program can be accomplished in 3–4 weeks.

    Implementation Personnel

    • Primary: the PMO director (should budget 10%–15% of her/his project capacity for OCM activities).
    • Secondary: other PMO staff (e.g. project managers, business analysts, etc.).

    OCM Implementation Costs

    15% - The average costs for effective OCM are 10%–15% of the overall project budget. (AMR Research)

    Average OCM Return-on-Investment

    200% - Small projects with excellent OCM practices report a 200% return-on-investment. (Change First)

    650% - Large projects with excellent OCM practices report a 650% return-on-investment. (Change First)

    Company saves 2–4 weeks of time and $10,000 in ERP implementation through responsible OCM

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Manufacturing

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Situation

    A medium-sized manufacturing company with offices all over the world was going through a consolidation of processes and data by implementing a corporate-wide ERP system to replace the fragmented systems that were previously in place. The goal was to have consistency in process, expectations, and quality, as well as improve efficiency in interdepartmental processes.

    Up to this point, every subsidiary was using their own system to track data and sharing information was complicated and slow. It was causing key business opportunities to be compromised or even lost.

    Complication

    The organization was not very good in closing out projects. Initiatives went on for too long, and the original business benefits were usually not realized.

    The primary culprit was recognized as mismanaged organizational change. People weren’t aware early enough, and were often left out of the feedback process.

    Employees often felt like changes were being dictated to them, and they didn’t understand the wider benefits of the changes. This led to an unnecessary number of resistors, adding to the complexity of successfully completing a project.

    Resolution

    Implementing an ERP worldwide was something that the company couldn’t gamble on, so proper organizational change management was a focus.

    A thorough stakeholder analysis was done, and champions were identified for each stakeholder group throughout the organization.

    Involving these champions early gave them the time to work within their groups and to manage expectations. The result was savings of 2–4 weeks of implementation time and $10,000.

    Follow Info-Tech’s blueprint to transform your PMO into a hub for organizational change management

    Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    • Assess the organization’s readiness for change.
      • Perform an OCM capabilities assessment.
      • Chart an OCM roadmap for the PMO.
      • Undergo a change management SWOT analysis.
      • Define success criteria.
      • Org. Change Capabilities Assessment
    • Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.
      • Determine pilot OCM project.
      • Estimate OCM effort.
      • Document high-level project details.
      • Establish a timeline for org-change activities.
      • Assess available resources to support the PMO’s OCM initiative.
      • Project Level Assessment

    Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation

    • Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase.
      • Assess leadership support for change
      • Highlight the goals and benefits of the change
      • Refine your change story
      • Define success criteria
      • Develop a sponsorship action plan
      • Transition Team Communications Template
    • Perform an organizational change impact assessment.
      • Perform change impact survey.
      • Assess the depth of impact for the stakeholder group.
      • Determine overall adoptability of the OCM effort.
      • Review risks and opportunities.
      • Org. Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    • Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change.
      • Involve the right people in change and define roles.
      • Define methods for obtaining stakeholder input.
      • Perform a stakeholder analysis.
      • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Develop and execute the transition plan.
      • Establish a communications strategy for stakeholder groups.
      • Define the feedback and evaluation process.
      • Assess the full range of support and resistance to change.
      • Develop an objections handling process.
      • Transition Plan Template
    • Establish HR and training plans.
      • Assess training needs. Develop training plan.
      • Training Plan

    Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    • Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment.
      • Conduct a post-implementation review of the pilot OCM project.
      • Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed.
      • Define a post-project benefits tracking process.
      • Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term.
      • Project Benefits Tracking Tool

    Solidify the PMO’s Role as Change Leader

    • Institute an OCM playbook.
      • Review lessons learned to improve OCM as a core discipline of the PMO.
      • Monitor organizational capacity for change.
      • Define roles and responsibilities for OCM oversight.
      • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.
      • Assess the value and success of your practices relative to OCM effort and project outcomes.
      • Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Drive Organizational Change from the PMO

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Assess the organization’s readiness for change.

    1.2 Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.

    2.1 Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase.

    2.2 Perform an organizational change impact assessment.

    3.1 Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change.

    3.2 Develop and execute the transition plan.

    3.3 Establish HR and training plans.

    4.1 Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment. 5.1 Institute an OCM playbook.
    Guided Implementations
    • Scoping Call.
    • Review the PMO’s and the organization’s change capabilities.
    • Determine an OCM pilot initiative.
    • Define a sponsorship action plan for change initiatives.
    • Undergo a change impact assessment.
    • Perform a stakeholder analysis.
    • Prepare a communications strategy based on stakeholder types.
    • Develop training plans.
    • Establish a post-project benefits tracking process.
    • Implement a tracking tool.
    • Evaluate the effectiveness of OCM practices.
    • Formalize an OCM playbook for the organization’s projects.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    Prepare the PMO for change leadership.

    Module 2:

    Plant the seeds for change during planning and initiation.

    Module 3:

    Facilitate change adoption throughout the organization.

    Module 4:

    Establish a post-project benefits attainment process.

    Module 5:

    Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader.

    Phase 1 Results:

    OCM Capabilities Assessment

    Phase 2 Results:

    Change Impact Analysis

    Phase 3 Results:

    Communications and Transition Plans

    Phase 4 Results:

    A benefits tracking process for sponsors

    Phase 5 Results:

    OCM Playbook

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Preparation Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Organize and Plan Workshop

    • Finalize workshop itinerary and scope.
    • Identify workshop participants.
    • Gather strategic documentation.
    • Engage necessary stakeholders.
    • Book interviews.

    Assess OCM Capabilities

    • Assess current organizational change management capabilities.
    • Conduct change management SWOT analysis.
    • Define change management success metrics.
    • Define core pilot OCM project.

    Analyze Impact of the Change

    • Analyse the impact of the change across multiple dimensions and stakeholder groups.
    • Create an impact management plan.
    • Analyze impacts to product with risk and opportunity assessments.

    Develop Engagement & Transition Plans

    • Perform stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers.
    • Document comm./training requirements and delivery plan.
    • Define plans to deal with resistance.
    • Validate and test the transition plan.

    Institute an OCM Playbook

    • Define feedback and evaluation process.
    • Finalize communications, transition, and training plans.
    • Establish benefits tracking timeline and commitment plans.
    • Define roles and responsibilities for ongoing organizational change management.
    Deliverables
    • Workshop Itinerary
    • Workshop Participant List
    • Defined Org Change Mandate
    • Organizational Change Capabilities Assessment
    • SWOT Assessment
    • Value Metrics
    • Project Level Assessment/Project Definition
    • Project Sponsor Action Plan
    • Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool
    • Risk Assessment
    • Opportunity Assessment
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Communications Plan
    • Training Plan
    • Resistance Plan
    • Transition Team
    • Communications Template
    • Evaluation Plan
    • Post-Project Benefits Tracking Timelines and Accountabilities
    • OCM Playbook

    Phase 1

    Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare the PMO for Change Leadership

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

    Step 1.1: Assess the organization’s readiness for change

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Scoping call to discuss organizational change challenges and the PMO’s role in managing change.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform an assessment survey to define capability levels and chart an OCM roadmap.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment
    Step 1.2: Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative

    Work with an analyst to:

    • Determine the appropriate OCM initiative to pilot over this series of Guided Implementations from the PMO’s project list.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Rightsize your OCM planning efforts based on project size, timeline, and resource availability.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Level Assessment Tool

    Step 1.1: Assess the organization’s readiness for change

    Phase 1 - 1.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Perform an OCM capabilities assessment.
    • Chart an OCM roadmap for the PMO.
    • Undergo a change management SWOT analysis.
    • Define success criteria.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director
    • Recommended: PMO staff, project management staff, and other project stakeholders
    Outcomes of this step
    • An OCM roadmap for the PMO with specific recommendations.
    • An assessment of strengths, weakness, challenges, and threats in terms of the PMO’s role as organizational change leader.
    • Success metrics for the PMO’s OCM implementation.

    Project leaders who successfully facilitate change are strategic assets in a world of increasing agility and uncertainty

    As transformation and change become the new normal, it’s up to PMOs to provide stability and direction during times of transition and turbulence.

    Continuous change and transition are increasingly common in organizations in 2016.

    A state of constant change can make managing change more difficult in some ways, but easier in others.

    • Inundation with communications and diversity of channels means the traditional “broadcast” approach to communicating change doesn’t work (i.e. you can’t expect every email to get everyone’s attention).
    • People might be more open to change in general, but specific changes still need to be properly planned, communicated, and managed.

    By managing organizational change more effectively, the PMO can build credibility to manage both business and IT projects.

    "The greatest danger in times of turbulence is not the turbulence; it is to act with yesterday’s logic." – Peter Drucker

    In this phase, we will gauge your PMO’s abilities to effectively facilitate change based upon your change management capability levels and your wider organization’s responsiveness to change.

    Evaluate your current capabilities for managing organizational change

    Start off by ensuring that the PMO is sensitive to the particularities of the organization and that it manages change accordingly.

    There are many moving parts involved in successfully realizing an organizational change.

    For instance, even with an effective change toolkit and strong leadership support, you may still fail to achieve project benefits due to such factors as a staff environment resistant to change or poor process discipline.

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment to assess your readiness for change across 7 categories:

    • Cultural Readiness
    • Leadership & Sponsorship
    • Organizational Knowledge
    • Change Management Skills
    • Toolkit & Templates
    • Process Discipline
    • KPIs & Metrics

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    • The survey can be completed quickly in 5 to 10 minutes; or, if being done as a group activity, it can take up to 60 minutes or more.
    • Based upon your answers, you will get a report of your current change capabilities to help you prioritize your next steps.
    • The tool also provides a customized list of Info-Tech recommendations across the seven categories.

    Perform Info-Tech’s OCM capabilities questionnaire

    1.1.1 Anywhere from 10 to 60 minutes (depending on number of participants)

    • The questionnaire on Tab 2 of the Assessment consists of 21 questions across 7 categories.
    • The survey can be completed individually, by the PMO director or manager, or – even more ideally – by a group of project and business stakeholders.
    • While the questionnaire only takes a few minutes to complete, you may wish to survey a wider swath of business units, especially on such categories as “Cultural Readiness” and “Leadership Support.”

    The image is a screen capture of tab 2 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Use the drop downs to indicate the degree to which you agree or disagree with each of the statements in the survey.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every organization has some change management capability.

    Even if you find yourself in a fledgling or nascent PMO, with no formal change management tools or processes, you can still leverage other categories of change management effectiveness.

    If you can, build upon people-related assets like “Organizational Knowledge” and “Cultural Readiness” as you start to hone your OCM toolkit and process.

    Review your capability levels and chart an OCM roadmap for your PMO

    Tab 3 of the Assessment tool shows your capabilities graph.

    • The chart visualizes your capability levels across the seven categories of organization change covered in the questionnaire in order to show the areas that your organization is already strong in and the areas where you need to focus your efforts.

    The image is a screen capture of tab 3 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Focus on improving the first capability dimension (from left/front to right/back) that rates below 10.

    Tab 4 of the Assessment tool reveals Info-Tech’s recommendations based upon your survey responses.

    • Use these recommendations to structure your roadmap and bring concrete definitions to your next steps.

    The image is a screen capture of tab 4 of the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment.

    Use the red/yellow/green boxes to focus your efforts.

    The content in the recommendations boxes is based around these categories and the advice therein is designed to help you to, in the near term, bring your capabilities up to the next level.

    Use the steps in this blueprint to help build your capabilities

    Each of Info-Tech’s seven OCM capabilities match up with different steps and phases in this blueprint.

    We recommend that you consume this blueprint in a linear fashion, as each phase matches up to a different set of OCM activities to be executed at each phase of a project. However, you can use the legend below to locate how and where this blueprint will address each capability.

    Cultural Readiness 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3
    Leadership Support 2.1 / 4.1 / 5.1
    Organizational Knowledge 2.1 / 3.1 / 3.2
    Change Management Skills 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3
    Toolkit & Templates 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3 / 4.1 / 5.1
    Process Discipline 2.1 / 2.2 / 3.1 / 3.2 / 3.3 / 4.1 / 5.1
    KPIs & Metrics 3.2 / 5.1

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizational change must be planned in advance and managed through all phases of a project.

    Organizational change management must be embedded as a key aspect throughout the project, not merely a set of tactics added to execution phases.

    Perform a change management SWOT exercise

    1.1.2 30 to 60 minutes

    Now that you have a sense of your change management strengths and weaknesses, you can begin to formalize the organizational specifics of these.

    Gather PMO and IT staff, as well as other key project and business stakeholders, and perform a SWOT analysis based on your Capabilities Assessment.

    Follow these steps to complete the SWOT analysis:

    1. Have participants discuss and identify Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats.
    2. Spend roughly 60 minutes on this. Use a whiteboard, flip chart, or PowerPoint slide to document results of the discussion as points are made.
    3. Make sure results are recorded and saved either using the template provided on the next slide or by taking a picture of the whiteboard or flip chart.

    Use the SWOT Analysis Template on the next slide to document results.

    Use the examples provided in the SWOT analysis to kick-start the discussion.

    The purpose of the SWOT is to begin to define the goals of this implementation by assessing your change management capabilities and cultivating executive level, business unit, PMO, and IT alignment around the most critical opportunities and challenges.

    Sample SWOT Analysis

    Strengths

    • Knowledge, skills, and talent of project staff.
    • Good working relationship between IT and business units.
    • Other PMO processes are strong and well adhered to by project staff.
    • Motivation to get things done when priorities, goals, and action plans are clear.

    Weaknesses

    • Project leads lack formal training in change management.
    • IT tried to introduce org change processes in the past, but we failed. Staff were unsure of which templates to use and how/when/why to use them.
    • We can’t designate individuals as change agents. We lack sufficient resources.
    • We’ve had some fairly significant change failures in the past and some skepticism and pessimism has taken root in the business units.

    Opportunities

    • The PMO is strong and well established in the organization, with a history of facilitating successful process discipline.
    • The new incoming CEO has already paid lip service to change and transformation. We should be able to leverage their support as we formalize these processes.
    • We have good lines of project communication already in place via our bi-weekly project reporting meetings. We can add change management matters to the agenda of these meetings.

    Threats

    • Additional processes and documentation around change management could be viewed as burdensome overhead. Adoption is uncertain.
    • OCM success depends on multiple stakeholders and business units coming together; with so many moving parts, we can’t be assured that an OCM program will survive long term.

    Define the “how” and the “what” of change management success for your PMO

    1.1.3 30 to 60 minutes

    Before you move on to develop and implement your OCM processes, spend some time documenting how change management success will be defined for your organization and what conditions will be necessary for success to be achieved.

    With the same group of individuals who participated in the SWOT exercise, discuss the below criteria. You can make this a sticky note or a whiteboard activity to help document discussion points.

    OCM Measured Value Metrics Include:
    • Estimate % of expected business benefits realized on the past 3–5 significant projects/programs.
      • Track business benefits (costs reduced, productivity increased, etc.).
    • Estimate costs avoided/reduced (extensions, cancellations, delays, roll-backs, etc.).
      • Establish baseline by estimating average costs of projects extended to deal with change-related issues.
    What conditions are necessary for OCM to succeed? How will success be defined?
    • e.g. The PMO will need the support of senior leaders and business units.
    • e.g. 20% improvement in benefits realization numbers within the next 12 months.
    • e.g. The PMO will need to establish a portal to help with organization-wide communications.
    • e.g. 30% increase in adoption rates on new software and technology projects within the next 12 months.

    Document additional items that could impact an OCM implementation for your PMO

    1.1.4 15 to 45 minutes

    Use the table below to document any additional factors or uncertainties that could impact implementation success.

    These could be external factors that may impact the PMO, or they could be logistical considerations pertaining to staffing or infrastructure that may be required to support additional change management processes and procedures.

    "[A]ll bets are off when it comes to change. People scatter in all directions. Your past experiences may help in some way, but what you do today and how you do it are the new measures people will use to evaluate you." – Tres Roeder

    Consideration Description of Need Potential Resource Implications Potential Next Steps Timeline
    e.g. The PMO will need to train PMs concerning new processes. We will not only need to train PM staff in the new processes and documentation requirements, but we will also have to provide ongoing training, be it monthly, quarterly, or yearly. Members of PMO staff will be required to support this training. Analyze impact of redeploying existing resources vs. outsourcing. Q3 2016
    e.g. We will need to communicate new OCM requirements to the business and wider organization. The PMO will be taking on added communication requirements, needing to advertise to a wider audience than it has before. None Work with business side to expand the PMO’s communications network and look into leveraging existing communication portals. Next month

    Step 1.2: Define the structure and scope of the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative

    Phase 1 - 1.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Determine pilot OCM project.
    • Estimate OCM effort.
    • Document high-level project details.
    • Establish a timeline for org change activities.
    • Assess available resources to support the PMO’s OCM initiative.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director
    • Recommended: PMO staff, project management staff, and other project stakeholders
    Outcomes of this step
    • Project definition for the PMO’s pilot OCM initiative.
    • A timeline that aligns the project schedule for key OCM activities.
    • Definition of resource availability to support OCM activities through the PMO.

    Organizational change discipline should align with project structure

    Change management success is contingent on doing the right things at the right time.

    In subsequent phases of this blueprint, we will help the PMO develop an OCM strategy that aligns with your organization’s project timelines.

    In this step (1.2), we will do some pre-work for you by determining a change initiative to pilot during this process and defining some of the roles and responsibilities for the OCM activities that we’ll develop in this blueprint.

    The image shows a sample project timeline with corresponding OCM requirements.

    Get ready to develop and pilot your OCM competencies on a specific project

    In keeping with the need to align organizational change management activities with the actual timeline of the project, the next three phases of this blueprint will move from discussing OCM in general to applying OCM considerations to a single project.

    As you narrow your focus to the organizational change stemming from a specific initiative, review the below considerations to help inform the decisions that you make during the activities in this step.

    Choose a pilot project that:

    • Has an identifiable sponsor who will be willing and able to participate in the bulk of the activities during the workshop.
    • Has an appropriate level of change associated with it in order to adequately develop a range of OCM capabilities.
    • Has a reasonably well-defined scope and timeline – you don’t want the pilot initiative being dragged out unexpectedly.
    • Has PMO/IT staff who will be assisting with OCM efforts and will be relatively familiar and comfortable with them in terms of technical requirements.

    Select a specific project that involves significant organizational change

    1.2.1 5 to 15 minutes

    The need for OCM rigor will vary depending on project size and complexity.

    While we recommend that every project has some aspect of change management to it, you can adjust OCM requirements accordingly, depending on the type of change being introduced.

    Incremental Change Transformational Change

    Organizational change management is highly recommended and beneficial for projects that require people to:

    • Adopt new tools and workflows.
    • Learn new skills.
    • Comply with new policies and procedures.
    • Stop using old tools and workflows.

    Organizational change management is required for projects that require people to:

    • Move into different roles, reporting structures, and career paths.
    • Embrace new responsibilities, goals, reward systems, and values
    • Grow out of old habits, ideas, and behaviors.
    • Lose stature in the organization.

    Phases 2, 3, and 4 of this blueprint will guide you through the process of managing organizational change around a specific project. Select one now that is currently in your request or planning stages to pilot through the activities in this blueprint. We recommend choosing one that involves a large, transformational change.

    Estimate the overall difficulty and effort required to manage organizational change

    1.2.2 5 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s project levels to define the complexity of the project that you’ve chosen to pilot.

    Defining your project level will help determine how much effort and detail is required to complete steps in this blueprint – and, beyond this, these levels can help you determine how much OCM rigor to apply across each of the projects in your portfolio.

    Incremental Change Transformational Change
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
    • Low risk and complexity.
    • Routine projects with limited exposure to the business and low risk of negative impact.
    • Examples: infrastructure upgrades, application refreshes, etc.
    • Medium risk and complexity.
    • Projects with broader exposure that present a moderate level of risk to business operations.
    • Examples: Move or renovate locations, cloud migration, BYOD strategy, etc.
    • High risk and complexity.
    • Projects that affect multiple lines of business and have significant costs and/or risks.
    • Examples: ERP implementation, corporate merger, business model innovation, etc.

    For a more comprehensive assessment of project levels and degrees of risk, see Info-Tech’s Create Project Management Success blueprint – and in particular, our Project Level Assessment Tool.

    Record the goals and scope of the pilot OCM initiative

    1.2.3 15 to 30 minutes

    Description

    What is the project changing?

    How will it work?

    What are the implications of doing nothing?

    What are the phases in execution?

    Expected Benefits

    What is the desired outcome?

    What can be measured? How?

    When should it be measured?

    Goals

    List the goals.

    Align with business and IT goals.

    Expected Costs

    List the costs:

    Software costs

    Hardware costs

    Implementation costs

    Expected Risks

    List the risks:

    Business risks

    Technology risks

    Implementation risks

    Planned Project Activities & Milestones Timeline Owner(s) Status
    1. Example: Vendor Evaluation Finish by Q4-17 Jessie Villar In progress
    2. Example: Define Administrative Policies Finish by Q4-17 Gerry Anantha Starting Q2

    Know the “what” and “when” of org change activities

    The key to change management success is ensuring that the right OCM activities are carried out at the right time. The below graphic serves as a quick view of what OCM activities entail and when they should be done.

    The image is the sample project timeline previously shown, but with additional notes for each segment of the Gantt chart. The notes are as follows: Impact Assessment - Start assessing the impact of change during planning and requirements gathering stages; Stakeholder Engagement - Use requirements gathering and design activities as opportunities to engage stakeholders and users; Transition Planning - The development period provides time for the change manager to develop and refine the transition plan (including communications and training). Change managers need to collaborate with development teams to ensure scope and schedule stay aligned, especially in Agile environments); Communications Execution - Communications should occur early and often, beginning well before change affects people and continuing long enough to reinforce change by celebrating success; Training - Training needs to be well timed to coincide with implementation; Quick Wins - Celebrate early successes to show that change is working; Evaluation & Monitoring - Adoption of change is a key to benefits realization. Don’t declare the project over until adoption of change is proven.

    Rough out a timeline for the org change activities associated with your pilot project’s timeline

    1.2.4 20-30 minutes

    With reference to the graphic on the previous slide, map out a high-level timeline for your pilot project’s milestones and the corresponding OCM activities.
    • This is essentially a first draft of a timeline and will be refined as we develop your OCM discipline in the next phase of this blueprint.
    • The purpose of roughing something out at this time is to help determine the scope of the implementation, the effort involved, and to help with resource planning.
    Project Phase or Milestone Estimated Start Date Estimated End Date Associated OCM Requirement(s)
    e.g. Planning e.g. Already in progress e.g. July e.g. Impact Assessment
    e.g. Requirements & Design e.g. August e.g. October e.g. Stakeholder Engagement & Transition Planning

    Info-Tech Insight

    Proactive change management is easier to execute and infinitely more effective than managing change reactively. A reactive approach to OCM is bound to fail. The better equipped the PMO is to plan OCM activities in advance of projects, the more effective those OCM efforts will be.

    Assess the roles and resources that might be needed to help support these OCM efforts

    1.2.5 30 minutes

    The PMO leader will need to delegate responsibility for many to all of these OCM activities throughout the project lifecycle.

    Compile a list of PMO staff, project workers, and other stakeholders who will likely be required to support these processes at each step, keeping in mind that we will be doing a more thorough consideration of the resources required to support an OCM program in Phase 3.

    OCM Activity Resources Available to Support
    Impact Assessment
    Stakeholder Engagement
    Transition Planning
    Training
    Communications
    Evaluation and Monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    OCM processes require a diverse network to support them.

    While we advocate an approach to org change that is centralized through the PMO, this doesn’t change the fact that the PMO’s OCM processes will need to engage the entirety of the project eco-system.

    In addition to IT/PMO directors, org change processes will engage a group as varied as project sponsors, project managers, business analysts, communications leads, and HR/training leads.

    Ensure that you are considering resources and infrastructure beyond IT as you plan your OCM processes – and engage these stakeholders early in this planning process.

    Establish core transition team roles and a reporting structure

    1.2.6 30 minutes

    Once you’ve identified OCM resources and assessed their availability, start to sketch the structure of the core transition team.

    In many cases, the core team only has one or two people responsible for impact analysis and plan development in addition to you, the sponsor, who is accountable for leadership and benefits realization.

    For larger initiatives, the core team might include several co-sponsors or advisors from different departments or lines of business, along with a handful of staff working together on analysis and planning.

    Some team structure templates/examples:

    Small (e.g. Office 365)

    • Sponsor
    • PM/BA

    Medium-Large (e.g. business process initiative)

    • Sponsor
    • PM
    • BA
    • OCM Consultant

    Complex Transformational (e.g. business model initiative, company reorg)

    • Exec. Sponsor (CxO)
    • Steering Committee
    • Project Lead/Champion (VP)
    • Business Lead(s)
    • IT Lead
    • HR/Training Lead
    • OCM Consultant

    Ultimately, organizational change is a collaborative effort

    Effective organizational change involves overlapping responsibilities.

    In keeping with the eclectic network of stakeholders that is required to support OCM processes, Phase 2 is broken up into sections that will, by turn, engage project sponsors, project managers, business analysts, communications leads, and HR/training leads.

    At each step, our intention is to arm the PMO with a toolkit and a set of processes that will help foster a project culture that is proactive about change.

    "It is amazing what you can accomplish if you do not care who gets the credit." – Harry Truman

    Project Step PMO Sponsor Project Manager Business Analyst Blueprint Reference
    Make a high-level case for change.

    A

    R R/C C 1.1
    Initiate project/change planning. A C R C 1.2
    Analyze full breadth and depth of impact. A C R R 1.3
    Assess communications and training requirements. A C R R 2.1
    Develop communications, training, and other transition plans. A R C R 2.2-3
    Approve and communicate transition plans. A C R C 2.4
    Analyze impact and progress. A C R R 3.1
    Revise project/change planning. A C R C 3.2
    Highlight and leverage successes. A R C C 3.3

    Update the Transition Team Communications Template

    1.2.7 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    Input
    • The outcomes of various activities in this step
    Output
    • Key sections of the Transition Team Communications Template completed

    Use Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template to help communicate the outcomes of this step.

    • Use the template to document the goals, benefits, and milestones established in 1.2.3, to record the project timeline and schedule for OCM activities from 1.2.4, to document resources available for OCM activities (1.2.5), and to record the membership and reporting structure of the core transition team (1.2.6).

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template.

    "Managers and user communities need to feel like they are a part of a project instead of feeling like the project is happening to them. It isn't just a matter of sending a few emails or putting up a page on a project website." Ross Latham

    Build organizational change management capabilities by bringing in required skills

    Case Study

    Industry Natural Resources

    Source Interview

    Challenge
    • Like many organizations, the company is undergoing increasing IT-enabled change.
    • Project managers tended to react to effects of change rather than proactively planning for change.

    "The hard systems – they’re easy. It’s the soft systems that are challenging... Be hard on the process. Be easy on the people." – Business Analyst, natural resources company

    Solution
    • Change management was especially challenging when projects were led by the business.
    • IT was often brought in late in business-led projects.
    • As a result, the organization incurred avoidable costs to deal with integration, retraining, etc.
    • The cost of managing change grows later in the project as more effort needs to be spent undoing (or “unfreezing”) the old state or remediating poorly executed change.
    Results
    • The company hired a business analyst with a background in organizational change to bring in the necessary skills.
    • The business analyst brought knowledge, experience, and templates based on best practices and is sharing these with the rest of the project management team.
    • As a result, organizational change management is starting earlier in projects when its effectiveness and value are maximized.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1 Evaluate your current capabilities for managing organizational change

    Take Info-Tech’s OCM capabilities questionnaire and receive custom analyst recommendations concerning next steps.

    1.1.2 Perform a change management SWOT exercise

    Work with a seasoned analyst to assess your PMO’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats to becoming an org change leader.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1.3 Define success metrics for your PMO’s efforts to become an org change leader

    Work with an analyst to clarify how the success of this initiative will be measured and what conditions are necessary for success.

    1.2.2 Determine the appropriate OCM initiative to pilot at your organization

    Receive custom analyst insights on rightsizing your OCM planning efforts based on project size, timeline, and resource availability.

    1.2.4 Develop an OCM timeline that aligns with key project milestones

    Harness analyst experience to develop a project-specific timeline for the PMO’s change management activities to better plan your efforts and resources.

    Phase 2

    Plant the Seeds for Change During Project Planning and Initiation

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Plant the seeds for change during project planning and initiation

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

    Step 2.1: Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase

    Discuss these issues with an analyst:

    • Disengaged or absent sponsors on change initiatives.
    • Lack of organizational desire for change.
    • How to customize an OCM strategy to suit the personality of the organization.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a sponsorship action plan to help facilitate more engaged change sponsorship.
    • Build a process for making the case for change throughout the organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Activity 2.1.3: “Refine your change story”
    • Activity 2.1.4: “Develop a sponsorship action plan”
    • Transition Team Communications Template
    Step 2.2: Perform an organizational change impact analysis

    Work with an analyst to:

    • Perform an impact analysis to make your change planning more complete.
    • Assess the depth of change impacts across various stakeholder groups.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Assign accountability for managing change impacts.
    • Update the business case with risks and opportunities identified during the impact analysis.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool

    Step 2.1: Foster OCM considerations during the ideation phase

    Phase 2 - 2.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Assess leadership support for change.
    • Highlight the goals and benefits of the change.
    • Refine your change story.
    • Define success criteria.
    • Develop a sponsorship action plan.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project sponsor for the pilot OCM project
    • Additional project staff: project managers, business analysts, etc.
    Outcomes of this step
    • Strategy to shore up executive alignment around the need for change.
    • Increased definition around the need for change.
    • Increased engagement from project sponsors around change management and project outcomes.

    Accountability for change management begins in advance of the project itself

    As early as the request phase, project sponsors and requestors have a responsibility to communicate the need for the changes that they are proposing.

    Org Change Step #1: Make the case for change during the request phase

    Initiation→Planning→Execution→Monitoring & Controlling→Closing

    Even before project planning and initiation begin, sponsors and requestors have org change responsibilities around communicating the need for a change and demonstrating their commitment to that change.

    In this step, we will look at the OCM considerations that need to be factored in during project ideation.

    The slides ahead will cover what the PMO can do to help foster these considerations among project sponsors and requestors.

    While this project may already be in the planning phase, the activities in the slides ahead will help lay a solid OCM foundation as you move ahead into the impact assessment and stakeholder engagement steps in this phase.

    Strongly recommended: include the sponsor for your pilot OCM project in many of the following activities (see individual activity slides for direction).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make active sponsorship a criteria when scoring new requests.

    Projects with active sponsors are far more likely to succeed than those where the sponsor cannot be identified or where she/he is unable or unwilling to champion the initiative throughout the organization.

    Consider the engagement level of sponsors when prioritizing new requests. Without this support, the likelihood of a change initiative succeeding is far diminished.

    What does effective sponsorship look like?

    Somewhere along the way a stereotype arose of the project sponsor as a disengaged executive who dreams up a project idea and – regardless of that idea’s feasibility or merit – secures funding, pats themselves on the back, and does not materialize again until the project is over to pat themselves on the back again.

    Indeed, it’s exaggerated, based partly on the fact that sponsors are almost always extremely busy individuals, with very demanding day jobs on top of their responsibilities as sponsors. The stereotype doesn’t capture the very real day-to-day project-level responsibilities of project sponsors.

    Leading change management institute, Prosci, has developed a checklist of 10 identifiable traits and responsibilities that PMO leaders and project managers should help to foster among project sponsors. As Prosci states, the checklist “can be used as an audit tool to see if you are utilizing best practices in how you engage senior leaders on your change initiatives.”

    Prosci’s Change Management Sponsor Checklist:

    Are your sponsors:

    • Aware of the importance they play in making changes successful?
    • Aware of their roles in supporting org change?
    • Active and visible throughout the project?
    • Building necessary coalitions for change success?
    • Communicating directly and effectively with employees?
    • Aware that the biggest mistake is failing to personally engage as the sponsor?
    • Prepared to help manage resistance?
    • Prepared to celebrate successes?
    • Setting clear priorities to help employees manage project and day-to-day work?
    • Avoiding trends and backing change that will be meaningful for the long term?

    (Source: Prosci’s Change Management Sponsor Checklist)

    Assess leadership support for change

    2.1.1 30 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • Other PMO/PM staff
    Output
    • Leadership support strategy

    Many change initiatives require significant investments of political capital to garner approval, funding, and involvement from key executives. This process can take months or even years before the project is staffed and implementation begins.

    • In cases where leadership opposition or ambivalence to change is a critical success inhibitor, project sponsors or change leaders need a deliberate strategy for engaging and converting potential supporters.
    • You might need to recruit someone with more influence or authority to become sponsor or co-sponsor to convert supporters you otherwise could not.
    • Use the table below as an example to begin developing your executive engagement strategy (but keep it private).
    Executive/Stakeholder Degree of Support Ability to Influence Potential Contribution/Engagement Strategy
    Board of Directors Med High
    CEO
    CFO
    CIO
    CxO

    “The stakes of having poorly engaged executive sponsors are high, as are the consequences and costs. PMI research into executive sponsorship shows that one in three unsuccessful projects fail to meet goals due to poorly engaged executive sponsors.”

    PMI, 2014

    Highlight the goals and benefits of the change

    2.1.2 30-60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor

    Build desire for change.

    The project sponsor is accountable for defining the high-level scope and benefits of the project. The PMO needs to work with the sponsor during the ideation phase to help establish the need for the proposed change.

    Use the table below to begin developing a compelling vision and story of change. If you have not already defined high-level goals and deliverables for your project, download Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form (a Detailed Project Request Form is also available).

    Why is there a need to change?
    How will change benefit the organization?
    How did we determine this is the right change?
    What would happen if we didn’t change?
    How will we measure success?

    See Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization blueprint for more detailed advice on working with requestors to define requirements and business value of new requests.

    Stories are more compelling than logic and facts alone

    Crucial facts, data, and figures are made more digestible, memorable, and actionable when they are conveyed through a compelling storyline.

    While you certainly need high-level scope elements and a rigorous cost-benefit analysis in your business case, projects that require organizational change also need a compelling story or vision to influence groups of stakeholders.

    As the PMO works with sponsors to identify and document the goals and benefits of change, begin to sketch a narrative that will be compelling to the organization’s varied audiences.

    Structuring an effective project narrative:

    Research shows (Research and impacts cited in Torben Rick’s “Change Management Require[s] a Compelling Story,” 2014) that when managers and employees are asked about what most inspires them in their work, their responses are evenly split across five forms of impact:

    1. Impact on society – e.g. the organization’s role in the community.
    2. Impact on the customer – e.g. providing effective service.
    3. Impact on the company – e.g. contributing positively to the growth of the organization.
    4. Impact on the working team – e.g. creating an inclusive work environment.
    5. Impact on the individual – e.g. personal development and compensation.

    "Storytelling enables the individuals in an organization to see themselves and the organization in a different light, and accordingly take decisions and change their behavior in accordance with these new perceptions, insights, and identities." – Steve Denning

    Info-Tech Insight

    A micro-to-macro change narrative. A compelling org change story needs to address all five of these impacts in order to optimally engage employees in change. In crafting a narrative that covers both the micro and macro levels, you will be laying a solid foundation for adoption throughout the organization.

    Refine your change story

    2.1.3 45 to 60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor
    Input
    • 5 levels of change impact
    • Stakeholder groups
    Output
    • Improved change justification to help inform the request phase and the development of the business case.
    Materials
    • Whiteboard and markers

    Using a whiteboard to capture the discussion, address the 5 levels of change impact covered on the previous slide.

    1. Develop a list of the stakeholder groups impacted by this project.
      • The impacts will be felt differently by different groups, so develop a high-level list of those stakeholder groups that will be directly affected by the change.
      • Keep in mind, this activity is not an impact assessment. This activity is meant to elicit how the change will be perceived by the different stakeholder groups, not how it will actually impact them – i.e. this activity is about making the case for change, not actually managing the change.
    2. Brainstorm how the five impact levels will be perceived from the point of view of each stakeholder group.
      • Spend about 5 to 10 minutes per impact per stakeholder group.
      • The goal here isn’t to create a detailed plotline; your change story may evolve as the project evolves. A point or two per impact per group will suffice.
    3. As a group, prioritize the most prescient points and capture the results of your whiteboarding to help inform future artifacts.
      • The points developed during this activity should inform both the ad hoc conversations that PMO staff and the sponsor have with stakeholders, as well as formal project artifacts, such as the request, business case, charter, etc.

    When it comes to communicating the narrative, project sponsors make the most compelling storytellers

    Whatever story you develop to communicate the goals and the benefits of the change, ultimately it should be the sponsor who communicates this message to the organization at large.

    Given the competing demands that senior leaders face, the PMO still has a pivotal role to play in helping to plan and facilitate these communications.

    The PMO should help sponsors by providing insights to shape change messaging (refer to the characteristics outlined in the table below for assistance) and by developing a sponsorship action plan (Activity 2.1.4).

    Tips for communicating a change story effectively:
    Identify and appeal to the audience’s unique frames of reference. e.g. “Most of you remember when we…”
    Include concrete, vivid details to help visualize change. e.g. “In the future, when a sales rep visits a customer in Wisconsin, they’ll be able to process a $100,000 order in seconds instead of hours.”
    Connect the past, present, and future with at least one continuous theme. e.g. “These new capabilities reaffirm our long-standing commitment to customers, as well as our philosophy of continuously finding ways to be more responsive to their needs.”

    “[T]he sponsor is the preferred sender of messages related to the business reasons and organizational implications for a particular initiative; therefore, effective sponsorship is crucial in building an awareness of the need for change.

    Sponsorship is also critical in building the desire to participate and support the change with each employee and in reinforcing the change.”

    Prosci

    Base the style of your communications on the organization’s receptiveness to change

    Not all organizations embrace or resist change in the same ways. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.

    Use the below dimensions to gauge your organization’s appetite for change. Analyzing this will help determine the form and force of communications.

    In the next slide, we will base aspects of your sponsorship action plan on whether an organization’s indicator is “high” or “low” across these three dimensions.

    • Organizations with low appetite for change will require more direct, assertive communications.
    • Organizations with a high appetite for change are more suited to more open, participatory approaches.

    Three key dimensions determine the appetite for cultural change (Dimensions taken from Joanna Malgorzata Michalak’s “Cultural Catalysts and Barriers of Organizational Change Management: a Preliminary Overview,” 2010):

    Power Distance Refers to the acceptance that power is distributed unequally throughout the organization. Organizations with a high power distance indicator show that the unequal power distribution is accepted by the less powerful employees.
    Individualism Organizations that score high in individualism have employees who are more independent; those who score low in individualism fall into the collectivism side where employees are strongly tied to one another or their groups.
    Uncertainty Avoidance Describes the level of acceptance that an organization has towards uncertainty. Those who score high in this area find that their employees do not favor “uncertain” situations, while those that score low in this area find that their employees are comfortable with change and uncertainty.

    "Societies with a high indicator of power distance, individualism, and uncertainty avoidance create vital inertial forces against transformation." – Michalak

    Develop a sponsorship action plan

    2.1.4 45 to 60 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    • Project sponsor
    Use the table below to define key tasks and responsibilities for the project sponsor.
    1. Populate the first column with the stakeholder groups from Activity 2.1.3.
    2. With reference to the Sponsor Checklist, brainstorm key sponsorship responsibilities for this project across each of the groups.
    3. When gauging the frequency of each activity and the “Estimated Weekly Effort” required by the sponsor to complete them, consider the organization’s appetite for change.
      • Where indicators across the three dimensions are low, the sponsor’s involvement can be less hands-on and more collaborative in nature.
      • Where indicators across the three dimensions are high, the sponsor’s involvement should be hands-on and direct in her/his communications.
    Group Activity Est. Weekly Effort Comments/Frequency
    Project Team Ad hoc check-in on progress 30 mins Try to be visible at least once a week
    Attend status meetings 30 mins Every second Tuesday, 9 am
    Senior Managers Touch base informally 45 mins Aim for bi-weekly, one-on-one touchpoints
    Lead steering committee meetings 60 mins First Thursday of the month, 3 pm
    End Users Organization-wide emails Ad hoc, 20 mins As required, with PMO assistance

    "To manage change is to tell people what to do... but to lead change is to show people how to be." – Weick & Quinn

    Update the Transition Team Communications Template

    2.1.5 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • PMO staff
    Input
    • The outcomes of various activities in this step
    Output
    • Key sections of the Transition Team Communications Template completed

    Use Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template to help communicate the outcomes of this step.

    The following activities should be recorded in the template:

    Activity 2.1.2

    In addition, the outcome of Activity 2.1.4, the “Sponsorship Action Plan,” should be converted to a format such as Word and provided to the project sponsor.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Team Communications Template.

    "In most work situations, the meaning of a change is likely to be as important, if not more so, than the change itself."

    – Roethlisberger (cited in Burke)

    Step 2.2: Perform an organizational change impact assessment

    Phase 2 - 2.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Perform change impact survey.
    • Assess the depth of impacts for different stakeholders and stakeholder groups.
    • Determine overall adoptability of the OCM effort.
    • Establish a game plan for managing individual impacts.
    • Review risks and opportunities.
    • Determine how the value of the change will be measured.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project sponsor for the pilot OCM project
    • Additional project staff: project managers, business analysts, members of the transition team, etc.
    Outcomes of this step:
    • A change impact analysis.
    • An adoptability rating for the change initiative to help the PMO plan its OCM efforts.
    • A better understanding of the risks and opportunities associated with the change to inform the business case.

    Analyze change impacts across multiple dimensions to ensure that nothing is overlooked

    Ensure that no stone is left unturned as you prepare for a comprehensive transition plan.

    In the previous step, we established a process and some accountabilities to help the PMO and project sponsors make the case for change during the ideation and initiation phase of a project.

    In this step, we will help with the project planning phase by establishing a process for analyzing how the change will impact various dimensions of the business and how to manage these impacts to best ensure stakeholder adoption.

    Brace for Impact…

    A thorough analysis of change impacts will help the PMO:

    • Bypass avoidable problems.
    • Remove non-fixed barriers to success.
    • Acknowledge and minimize the impact of unavoidable barriers.
    • Identify and leverage potential benefits.
    • Measure the success of the change.

    Assign the appropriate accountabilities for impact analysis

    In the absence of an assigned change manager, organizational change impact assessments are typically performed by a business analyst or the project manager assigned to the change initiative.

    • Indeed, as with all change management activities, making an individual accountable for performing this activity and communicating its outcomes is key to the success of your org change initiative.
    • At this stage, the PMO needs to assign or facilitate accountability for the impact analysis on the pilot OCM initiative or it needs to take this accountability on itself.

    Sample RACI for this activity. Define these accountabilities for your organization before proceeding with this step.

    Project Sponsor PMO PM or BA
    Survey impact dimensions I A R
    Analyze impacts across multiple stakeholder groups I A R
    Assess required OCM rigor I A/R C
    Manage individual impacts I A R

    Info-Tech Insight

    Bring perspective to an imperfect view.

    No individual has a comprehensive view of the potential impact of change.

    Impact assessment and analysis is most effective when multiple viewpoints are coordinated using a well-defined list of considerations that cover a wide breadth of dimensions.

    Revisit and refine the impact analysis throughout planning and execution, as challenges to adoption become more clear.

    Perform a change impact analysis to make your planning more complete

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool to weigh all of the factors involved in a change and to formalize discipline around impact analysis.

    Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool helps to document the change impact across multiple dimensions, enabling the PMO to review the analysis with others to ensure that the most important impacts are captured. The tool also helps to effectively monitor each impact throughout project execution.

    • Change impact considerations can include: products, services, states, provinces, cultures, time zones, legal jurisdictions, languages, colors, brands, subsidiaries, competitors, departments, jobs, stores, locations, etc.
    • Each of these dimensions is an MECE (Mutually Exclusive, Collectively Exhaustive) list of considerations that could be impacted by the change. For example, a North American retail chain might consider “Time Zones” as a key dimension, which could break down as Newfoundland, Atlantic, Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Pacific.

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool.

    • Required Participants for this Step: PMO Leader; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended Participants for this Step: Project Sponsor; IT/PMO staff

    Info-Tech Insight

    Anticipate the unexpected. Impact analysis is the cornerstone of any OCM strategy. By shining a light on considerations that might have otherwise escaped project planners and decision makers, an impact analysis is an essential component to change management and project success.

    Enter high-level project information on the “Set Up” tab

    2.2.1 15 minutes

    The “2. Set Up” tab of the Impact Tool is where you enter project-specific data pertaining to the change initiative.

    The inputs on this tab are used to auto-populate fields and drop-downs on subsequent tabs of the analysis.

    Document the stakeholders (by individual or group) associated with the project who will be subject to the impacts.

    You are allowed up to 15 entries. Try to make this list comprehensive. Missing any key stakeholders will threaten the value of this activity as a whole.

    If you find that you have more than 15 individual stakeholders, you can group individuals into stakeholder groups.

    Keep in mind...

    An impact analysis is not a stakeholder management exercise.

    Impact assessments cover:

    • How the change will affect the organization.
    • How individual impacts might influence the likelihood of adoption.

    Stakeholder management covers:

    • Resistance/objections handling.
    • Engagement strategies to promote adoption.

    We will cover the latter in the next step.

    “As a general principle, project teams should always treat every stakeholder initially as a recipient of change. Every stakeholder management plan should have, as an end goal, to change recipients’ habits or behaviors.”

    PMI, 2015

    Determine the relevant considerations for analyzing the change impacts of a project

    2.2.2 15 to 30 minutes

    Use the survey on tab 3 of the Impact Analysis Tool to determine the dimensions of change that are relevant.

    The impact analysis is fueled by the thirteen-question survey on tab 3 of the tool.

    This survey addresses a comprehensive assortment of change dimensions, ranging from customer-facing considerations, to employee concerns, to resourcing, logistical, and technological questions.

    Once you have determined the dimensions that are impacted by the change, you can go on to assess how individual stakeholders and stakeholder groups are affected by the change.

    This image is a screenshot of tab 3, Impact Survey, of the Impact Analysis Tool.

    Screenshot of tab “3. Impact Survey,” showing the 13-question survey that drives the impact analysis.

    Ideally, the survey should be performed by a group of project stakeholders together. Use the drop-downs in column K to record your responses.

    "A new system will impact roles, responsibilities, and how business is conducted within an organization. A clear understanding of the impact of change allows the business to design a plan and address the different levels of changes accordingly. This approach creates user acceptance and buy-in."

    – January Paulk, Panorama Consulting

    Impacts will be felt differently by different stakeholders and stakeholder groups

    As you assess change impacts, keep in mind that no impact will be felt the same across the organization. Depth of impact can vary depending on the frequency (will the impact be felt daily, weekly, monthly?), the actions necessitated by it (e.g. will it change the way the job is done or is it simply a minor process tweak?), and the anticipated response of the stakeholder (support, resistance, indifference?).

    Use the Organizational Change Depth Scale below to help visualize various depths of impact. The deeper the impact, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Procedural change involves changes to explicit procedures, rules, policies, processes, etc. Behavioral change is similar to procedural change, but goes deeper to involve the changing tacit or unconscious habits. Interpersonal change goes beyond behavioral change to involve changing relationships, teams, locations, reporting structures, and other social interactions. Vocational change requires acquiring new knowledge and skills, and accepting the loss or decline in the value or relevance of previously acquired knowledge and skills. Cultural change goes beyond interpersonal and vocational change to involve changing personal values, social norms, and assumptions about the meaning of good vs. bad or right vs. wrong.
    Example: providing sales reps with mobile access to the CRM application to let them update records from the field. Example: requiring sales reps to use tablets equipped with a custom mobile application for placing orders from the field. Example: migrating sales reps to work 100% remotely. Example: migrating technical support staff to field service and sales support roles. Example: changing the operating model to a more service-based value proposition or focus.

    Determine the depth of each impact for each stakeholder group

    2.2.3 1 to 3 hours

    Tab “4. Impact Analysis” of the Analysis Tool contains the meat of the impact analysis activity.
    1. The “Impact Analysis” tab is made up of thirteen change impact tables (see next slide for a screenshot of one of these tables).
    • You may not need to use all thirteen tables. The number of tables you use coincides with the number of “yes” responses you gave in the previous tab.
    • If you no not need all thirteen impact tables (i.e. if you do not answer “yes” to all thirteen questions in tab 2, the unused/unnecessary tables will not auto-populate.)
  • Use one table per change impact. Each of your “yes” responses from tab 3 will auto-populate at the top of each change impact table. You should go through each of your “yes” responses in turn.
  • Analyze how each impact will affect each stakeholder or stakeholder group touched by the project.
    • Column B in each table will auto-populate with the stakeholder groups from the Set Up tab.
  • Use the drop-downs in columns C, D, and E to rate the frequency of each impact, the actions necessitated by each impact, and the anticipated response of each stakeholder group.
    • Each of the options in these drop-downs is tied to a ranking table that informs the ratings on the two subsequent tabs.
  • If warranted, you can use the “Comments” cells in column F to note the specifics of each impact for each stakeholder/group.
  • See the next slide for an accompanying screenshot of a change impact table from tab 4 of the Analysis Tool.

    Screenshot of “Impact Analysis” tab

    The image is a screenshot of the Impact Analysis tab.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    Your “yes” responses from the survey tab will auto-populate in the cells to the right of the “Change Impact” cells.

    Use the drop-downs in this column to select how often the impact will be felt for each group (e.g. daily, weekly, periodically, one time, or never).

    “Actions” include “change to core job duties,” “change to how time is spent,” “confirm awareness of change,” etc.

    Use the drop-downs to hypothesize what the stakeholder response might be. For now, for the purpose of the impact analysis, a guess is fine. We will come back to build a communications plan based on actual responses in Phase 3 of this blueprint.

    Review your overall impact rating to help assess the likelihood of change adoption

    Use the “Overall Impact Rating” on tab 5 to help right-size your OCM efforts.

    Based upon your assessment of each individual impact, the Analysis Tool will provide you with an “Overall Impact Rating” in tab 5.

    • This rating is an aggregate of each of the individual change impact tables used during the analysis, and the rankings assigned to each stakeholder group across the frequency, required actions, and anticipated response columns.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 5, the Overall Process Adoption Rating. The image shows a semi-circle, where the left-most section is red, the centre yellow, and the right-most section green, with a dial positioned at the right edge of the yellow section.

    Projects in the red should have maximum change governance, applying a full suite of OCM tools and templates, as well as revisiting the impact analysis exercise regularly to help monitor progress.

    Increased communication and training efforts, as well as cross-functional partnerships, will also be key for success.

    Projects in the yellow also require a high level of change governance. Follow the steps and activities in this blueprint closely, paying close attention to the stakeholder engagement activities in the next step to help sway resistors and leverage change champions.

    In order to free up resources for those OCM initiatives that require more discipline, projects in green can ease up in their OCM efforts somewhat. With a high likelihood of adoption as is, stakeholder engagement and communication efforts can be minimized somewhat for these projects, so long as the PMO is in regular contact with key stakeholders.

    "All change is personal. Each person typically asks: 'What’s in it for me?'" – William T. Craddock

    Use the other outputs on tab 5 to help structure your OCM efforts

    In addition to the overall impact rating, tab 5 has other outputs that will help you assess specific impacts and how the overall change will be received by stakeholders.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 5.

    Top-Five Highest Risk Impacts table: This table displays the highest risk impacts based on frequency and action inputs on Tab 4.

    Top-Five Most Impacted Stakeholders table: Here you’ll find the stakeholders, ranked again based on frequency and action, who will be most impacted by the proposed changes.

    Top Five Supporters table: These are the 5 stakeholders most likely to support changes, based on the Anticipated Response column on Tab 4.

    The stakeholder groups entered on the Set Up Tab will auto-populate in column B of each table.

    In addition to these outputs, this tab also lists top five change resistors, and has an impact register and list of potential impacts to watch out for (i.e. your “maybe” responses from tab 3).

    Establish a game plan to manage individual change impacts

    2.2.4 60 to 90 minutes

    The final tab of the Analysis Tool can be used to help track and monitor individual change impacts.
    • Use the “Communications Plan” on tab 7 to come up with a high-level game plan for tracking communications about each change with the corresponding stakeholders.
    • Update and manage this tab as the communication events occur to help keep your implementation on track.

    The image is a screenshot of the Communications Plan, located on tab 7 of the Analysis Tool. There are notes emerging from each of the table headings, as follows: Communication Topic - Select from a list of topics identified on Tab 6 that are central to successful change, then answer the following; Audience/Format/Delivery - Which stakeholders need to be involved in this change? How are we going to meet with them?; Creator - Who is responsible for creating the change?; Communicator - Who is responsible for communicating the change to the stakeholder?; Intended Outcome - Why do you need to communicate with this stakeholder?; Level of Risk - What is the likelihood that you can achieve your attended outcome? And what happens if you don’t?

    Document the risk assumptions stemming from your impact analysis

    2.2.5 30 to 60 minutes

    Use the Analysis Tool to produce a set of key risks that need to be identified, communicated, mitigated, and tracked.

    A proper risk analysis often reveals risks and mitigations that are more important to other people in the organization than those managing the change. Failure to do a risk analysis on other people’s behalf can be viewed as negligence.

    In the table below, document the risks related to the assumptions being made about the upcoming change. What are the risks that your assumptions are wrong? Can steps be taken to avoid these risks?

    Risk Assumption Magnitude if Assumption Wrong Likelihood That Assumption Is Wrong Mitigation Strategy Assessment
    e.g. Customers will accept shipping fees for overweight items > 10 pounds Low High It's a percentage of our business, and usually accompanies a sharply discounted product. We need to extend discretionary discounting on shipping to supervisory staff to mitigate the risk of lost business. Re-assess after each quarter.

    "One strategy to minimize the impact is to determine the right implementation pace, which will vary depending on the size of the company and the complexity of the project" – Chirantan Basu

    Record any opportunities pertaining to the upcoming change

    2.2.6 30 to 60 minutes

    Use the change impacts to identify opportunities to improve the outcome of the change.

    Use the table below to brainstorm the business opportunities arising from your change initiative. Consider if the PMO can take steps to help improve the outcomes either through supporting the project execution or through providing support to the business.

    Opportunity Assumption Potential Value Likelihood That Assumption Is Wrong Leverage Strategy Assessment
    e.g. Customer satisfaction can increase as delivery time frames for the remaining custom products radically shrink and services extend greatly. High Medium Reset the expectations of this market segment so that they go from being surprised by good service to expecting it. Our competitors will not be able to react to this.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The bigger the change, the bigger the opportunity. Project and change management has traditionally focused on a defensive posture because organizations so often fail to mitigate risk. Good change managers also watch for opportunities to improve and exploit the outcomes of the change.

    Determine how to measure the value of the change

    2.2.7 15 to 30 minutes

    Describe the metrics that will be used to assess the management of this change.

    Now that you’ve assessed the impacts of the change, and the accompanying risks and opportunities, use the table below to document metrics that can be used to help assess the management of the change.

    • Don’t rely on the underlying project to determine the value of the change itself: It’s important to recognize the difference between change management and project management, and the establishment of value metrics is an obvious source of this differentiation.
    • For example, consider a project that is introducing a new method of remitting travel expenses for reimbursement.
      • The project itself would be justified on the efficiency of the new process.
      • The value of the change itself could be measured by the number of help desk calls looking for the new form, documentation, etc.
    Metric Calculation How to Collect Who to Report to Frequency
    Price overrides for new shipping costs It is entered as a line item on invoices, so it can be calculated as % of shipping fees discounted. Custom report from CRM (already developed). Project Steering Committee Project Steering Committee

    Document risks and other impact analysis considerations in the business case

    2.2.8 10 minutes

    Participants
    • PMO leader
    • Project Manager
    Input
    • The risks and issues identified through the impact analysis.
    Output
    • Comprehensive list of risks documented in the business case.
    Use the outcomes of the activities in this step to help inform your business case as well as any other risk management artifacts that your project managers may use.
    • Because long-term project success depends upon stakeholder adoption, high-risk impacts should be documented as considerations in the risk section of your business case.
    • In addition, the “Overall Impact Rating” graph and the “Impact Management Worksheet” could be used to help improve business cases as well as charters on some projects.

    If your organization doesn’t have a standard business case document, use one of Info-Tech’s templates. We have two templates to choose from, depending on the size of the project and the amount of rigor required:

    Download Info-Tech’s Comprehensive Business Case Template for large, complex projects or our Fast Track Business Case Template for smaller ones.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.3 Create a convincing sponsor-driven story to help build the case for change

    Work with an analyst to exercise your storytelling muscles, building out a process to help make the case for change throughout the organization.

    2.1.4 Develop a sponsorship action plan

    Utilize analyst experience to help develop a sponsorship action plan to help facilitate more engaged change project sponsors.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2.3 Assess different change impacts across various stakeholder groups

    Get an analyst perspective on how each impact may affect different stakeholders in order to assist with the project and OCM planning process.

    2.2.4 Develop a proactive change impact management plan

    Rightsize your response to change impacts by developing a game plan to mitigate each one according to adoption likelihood.

    2.2.5 Use the results of the impact analysis to inform and improve the business case for the project

    Work with the analyst to translate the risks and opportunities identified during the impact analysis into points of consideration to help inform and improve the business case for the project.

    Phase 3

    Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Facilitate Change Adoption Throughout the Organization

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 to 6 weeks

    Step 3.1: Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Lack of alignment between IT and the business.
    • Organizational resistance to a command-and-control approach to change.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a stakeholder engagement plan.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    Step 3.2: Develop and execute the transition plan

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Org change initiatives often fail due to the influence of resistors.
    • Failure to elicit feedback contributes to the feeling of a change being imposed.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop a communications strategy to address a variety of stakeholder reactions to change.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Transition Plan Template
    • Activity 3.2.7: “Objections Handling Template”
    Step 3.3: Establish HR and training plans

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Training is often viewed as ineffective, contributing to change resistance rather than fostering adoption.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Rightsize training content based on project requirements and stakeholder sentiment.

    With these tools & templates:

    • “Training Requirements” tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • “Training Plan” section of the Transition Plan Template

    Step 3.1: Ensure stakeholders are engaged and ready for change

    Phase 3 - 3.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Involve the right stakeholders in the change.
    • Define project roles and responsibilities.
    • Define elicitation methods for obtaining stakeholder input.
    • Perform a stakeholder analysis to assess influence, interest, and potential contribution.
    • Assess communications plan requirements.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended: Project Sponsor; the Transition Team; other IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • A stakeholder analysis.
    • Requirements for the communications plan.

    The nature of change is changing

    The challenge of managing change is complicated by forces that are changing change.

    Empowerment: Increased worker mobility, effect of millennials in the workforce, and lower average tenure means that people are less tolerant of a hierarchical, command-and-control approach to change.

    • Additionally, lower average tenure means you can’t assume everyone has the same context or background for change (e.g. they might not have been with the organization for earlier phases when project justification/rationale was established).

    Noise: Inundation with communications and diversity of channels means the traditional “broadcast” approach to communicating change doesn’t work (i.e. you can’t expect every email to get everyone’s attention).

    As a result, disciplines around organizational change tend to be less linear and deliberate than they were in the past.

    "People don’t resist change. They resist being changed."

    Peter Senge

    How to manage change in organizations of today and the future:

    • New realities require a more collaborative, engaging, open, and agile approach to change.
    • Communication is increasingly more of a two-way, ongoing, iterative engagement process.
    • Project leaders on change initiatives need to engage diverse audiences early and often.
    • Information about change needs to reach people and be easily findable where and when stakeholders need it.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Accountabilities for change management are still required. While change management needs to adopt more collaborative and organic approaches, org change success still depends on assigning appropriate accountabilities. What’s changed in the move to matrix structure is that accountabilities need to be facilitated more collaboratively.

    Leading change requires collaboration to ensure people, process, and technology factors are aligned

    In the absence of otherwise defined change leadership, the PMO needs to help navigate every technology-enabled change, even if it isn’t in the “driver’s seat.”

    PMO leaders and IT experts often find themselves asked to help implement or troubleshoot technology-related business projects that are already in flight.

    The PMO will end up with perceived or de facto responsibility for inadequate planning, communications, and training around technology-enabled change.

    IT-Led Projects

    Projects led by the IT PMO tend to be more vulnerable to underestimating the impact on people and processes on the business side.

    Make sure you engage stakeholders and representatives (e.g. “power users”) from user populations early enough to refine and validate your impact assessments.

    Business-Led Projects

    Projects led by people on the business side tend to be more vulnerable to underestimating the implications of technology changes.

    Make sure IT is involved early enough to identify and prepare for challenges and opportunities involving integration, user training, etc.

    "A major impediment to more successful software development projects is a corporate culture that results in a lack of collaboration because business executives view the IT departments as "order takers," a view disputed by IT leaders."

    – David Ramel (cited by Ben Linders)

    Foster change collaboration by initiating a stakeholder engagement plan through the PMO

    If project stakeholders aren’t on board, the organization’s change initiatives will be in serious trouble.

    Stakeholders will not only be highly involved in the process improvement initiative, but they also may be participants, so it’s essential that you get their buy-in for the initiative upfront.

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to help plan how stakeholders rate in terms of engagement with the project.

    Once you have identified where different stakeholders fall in terms of interests, influence, and support for/engagement with the change initiative, you can structure your communication plan (to be developed in step 3.2) based on where individuals and stakeholder groups fall.

    • Required participants for the activities in this step: PMO Leader; project manager or business analyst
    • Recommended participants for the activities in this step: Project Sponsor; IT/PMO staff

    Download Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    The engagement plan is a structured and documented approach for:

    • Gathering requirements by eliciting input and validating plans for change.
    • Cultivating sponsorship and support from key stakeholders early in the project lifecycle.

    Download Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Involve the right people to drive and facilitate change

    Refer to your project level assessment from 1.2.2:

    • Level 1 projects tend to only require involvement from the project team, sponsors, and people affected.
    • Level 2 projects often benefit from broad support and capabilities in order to take advantage of opportunities.
    • Level 3 projects require broad support and capabilities in order to deal with risks and barriers.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more transformational the change, the more it will affect the org chart – not just after the implementation, but also through the transition.

    Take time early in the project to define the reporting structure for the project/transition team, as well as any teams and roles supporting the transition.

    • Project manager: Has primary accountability for project success.
    • Senior executive project sponsor: Needed to “open doors” and signal organization’s commitment to the change.
    • Technology SMEs and architects: Responsible for determining and communicating requirements and risks of the technology being implemented or changed.
    • Business unit leads: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • Product/process owners: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • HR specialists: Most valuable when roles and organizational design are affected, i.e. change requires staff redeployment, substantial training (not just using a new system or tool but acquiring new skills and responsibilities), or termination.
    • Training specialists: If you have full-time training staff in the organization, you will eventually need them to develop training courses and material. Consulting them early will help with scoping, scheduling, and identifying the best resources and channels to deliver the training.
    • Communications specialists (internal): Valuable in crafting communications plan; required if communications function owns internal communications.

    Use the RACI table on the next slide to clarify who will be accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed for key tasks and activities around this change initiative.

    Define roles and responsibilities for facilitating change on your pilot OCM initiative

    3.1.1 60 minutes

    Perform a RACI exercise pertaining to your pilot change initiative to clarify who to include in the stakeholder engagement activity.

    Don’t reinvent the wheel: revisit the list of stakeholders and stakeholder groups from your impact assessment. The purpose of the RACI is to bring some clarity to project-specific responsibilities.

    Tasks PMO Project Manager Sr. Executives Technology SME Business Lead Process Owner HR Trainers Communications
    Meeting project objectives A R A R R
    Identifying risks and opportunities A R A C C C C I I
    Building the action plan A R C R R R R R R
    Planning and delivering communications A R C C C C C R A
    Planning and delivering training A R C C C C R A C
    Gathering and analyzing feedback and KPIs A R C C C C C R R

    Copy the results of this RACI exercise into tab 1 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook. In addition, it can be used to inform the designated RACI section in the Transition Plan Template. Revise the RACI Table there as needed.

    Formalize the stakeholder analysis to identify change champions and blockers

    Define key stakeholders (or stakeholder groups) who are affected by the project or are in positions to enable or block change.

    • Remember to consider customers, partners, and other external stakeholders.
    • People best positioned to provide insight and influence change positively are also best positioned to create resistance.
    • These people should be engaged early and often in the transition process – not just to make them feel included or part of the change, but because their insight could very likely identify risks, barriers, and opportunities that need to be addressed.

    The image is a screenshot of tab 3 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    In tab three of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, compile the list of stakeholders who are touched by the change and whose adoption of the change will be key to project success.

    To save time, you can copy and paste your stakeholder list from the Set Up tab of the Organizational Change Management Impact Analysis Tool into the table below and edit the list as needed.

    Formal stakeholder analysis should be:

    • Required for Level 3 projects
    • Recommended for Level 2 projects
    • Optional for Level 1 projects

    Info-Tech Insight

    Resistance is, in many cases, avoidable. Resistance is commonly provided by people who are upset about not being involved in the communication. Missed opportunities are the same: they usually could have been avoided easily had somebody known in time. Use the steps ahead as an opportunity to ensure no one has been missed.

    Perform a stakeholder analysis to begin cultivating support while eliciting requirements

    3.1.2 60 minutes

    Use tab 4 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to systematically assess each stakeholder's influence, interest, and potential contribution to the project as well as to develop plans for engaging each stakeholder or stakeholder group.

    The image is a screencapture of tab 4 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Use the drop-downs to select stakeholders and stakeholder groups. These will automatically populate based on your inputs in tab 3.

    Rate each stakeholder on a scale of 1 to 10 in terms of her/his influence in the organization. Not only do these rankings feed the stakeholder map that gets generated on the next slide, but they will help you identify change champions and resistors with influence.

    Similar to the ranking under “Influence,” rate the “Interest” and “Potential Contribution” to help identify stakeholder engagement.

    Document how you will engage each stakeholder and stakeholder group and document how soon you should communicate with them concerning the change. See the following slides for advice on eliciting change input.

    Use the elicitation methods on the following slides to engage stakeholders and gather change requirements.

    Elicitation methods – Observation

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Casual Observation The process of observing stakeholders performing tasks where the stakeholders are unaware they are being observed. Capture true behavior through observation of stakeholders performing tasks without informing them that they are being observed. This information can be valuable for mapping business process; however, it is difficult to isolate the core business activities from unnecessary actions. Low Medium
    Formal Observation The process of observing stakeholders performing tasks where the stakeholders are aware they are being observed. Formal observation allows business analysts to isolate and study the core activities in a business process because the stakeholder is aware they are being observed. Stakeholders may become distrusting of the business analyst and modify their behavior if they feel their job responsibilities or job security are at risk. Low Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Observing stakeholders does not uncover any information about the target state. Be sure to use contextual observation in conjunction with other techniques to discover the target state.

    Elicitation methods – Surveys

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Closed-Response Survey A survey that has fixed responses for each answer. A Likert-scale (or similar measures) can be used to have respondents evaluate and prioritize possible requirements. Closed-response surveys can be sent to large groups and used to quickly gauge user interest in different functional areas. They are easy for users to fill out and don’t require a high investment of time. However, their main deficit is that they are likely to miss novel requirements that are not listed. As such, closed-response surveys are best used after initial elicitation or brainstorming to validate feature groups. Low Medium
    Open-Response Survey A survey that has open-ended response fields. Questions are fixed, but respondents are free to populate the field in their own words. Open-response surveys take longer to fill out than closed, but can garner deeper insights. Open-response surveys are a useful supplement (and occasionally a replacement) for group elicitation techniques, like focus groups, when you need to receive an initial list of requirements from a broad cross-section of stakeholders. Their primary shortcoming is the analyst can’t immediately follow up on interesting points. However, they are particularly useful for reaching stakeholders who are unavailable for individual one-on-ones or group meetings. Medium Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Surveys can be useful mechanisms for initial drafting of raw requirements (open response) and gauging user interest in proposed requirements or feature sets (closed response). However, they should not be the sole focus of your elicitation program due to lack of interactivity and two-way dialogue with the business analyst.

    Elicitation methods – Interviews

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort

    Structured One-on-One Interview

    In a structured one-on-one interview, the business analyst has a fixed list of questions to ask the stakeholder and follows up where necessary. Structured interviews provide the opportunity to quickly hone in on areas of concern that were identified during process mapping or group elicitation techniques. They should be employed with purpose – to receive specific stakeholder feedback on proposed requirements or help identify systemic constraints. Generally speaking, they should take 30 minutes or less to complete. Low Medium

    Unstructured One-on-One Interview

    In an unstructured one-on-one interview, the business analyst allows the conversation to flow freely. The BA may have broad themes to touch on, but does not run down a specific question list. Unstructured interviews are most useful for initial elicitation when brainstorming a draft list of potential requirements is paramount. Unstructured interviews work best with senior stakeholders (sponsors or power users), since they can be time consuming if they’re applied to a large sample size. It’s important for BAs not to stifle open dialogue and allow the participants to speak openly. They should take 60 minutes or less to complete. Medium Low

    Info-Tech Insight

    Interviews should be used with “high-value targets.” Those who receive one-on-one face time can help generate good requirements, as well as allow effective communication around requirements at a later point (i.e. during the analysis and validation phases).

    Elicitation methods – Focus Groups

    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort BA/PMO Effort
    Focus Group Focus groups are sessions held between a small group (typically ten individuals or less) and an experienced facilitator who leads the conversation in a productive direction. Focus groups are highly effective for initial requirements brainstorming. The best practice is to structure them in a cross-functional manner to ensure multiple viewpoints are represented and the conversation doesn’t become dominated by one particular individual. Facilitators must be wary of “groupthink” in these meetings (the tendency to converge on a single POV). Medium Medium

    Info-Tech Insight

    Group elicitation techniques are most useful for gathering a wide spectrum of requirements from a broad group of stakeholders. Individual or observational techniques are typically needed for further follow-up and in-depth analysis with critical power users or sponsors.

    "Each person has a learning curve. Take the time to assess staff individually as some don’t adjust to change as well as others. Some never will." – CEO, Manufacturing Firm

    Refine your stakeholder analysis through the input elicitation process

    3.1.3 30 minutes

    Review all of these elicitation methods as you go through the workbook as a group. Be sure to document and discuss any other elicitation methods that might be specific to your organization.

    1. Schedule dates and a specific agenda for performing stakeholder elicitation activities.
    • If scheduling more formal methods such as a structured interview or survey, take the time to develop some talking points and questions (see the questionnaire and survey templates in the next step for examples).
  • Assign accountabilities for performing the elicitation exercises and set dates for updating the PMO on the results of these stakeholder elicitations.
  • As curator of the workbook, the PMO will need to refine the stakeholder data in tab 4 of the tool to get a more accurate stakeholder map on the next tab of the workbook.
  • Elicitation method Target stakeholder group(s) PMO staff responsible for eliciting input Next update to PMO
    One-on-one structured interview HR and Sales Karla Molina August 1

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement paves the way for smoother communications. The “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders and users into advocates who help boost your message, sustain change, and realize benefits without constant, direct intervention.

    Develop a stakeholder engagement strategy based on the output of your analysis

    Use the stakeholder map on tab 5 of the Workbook to inform your communications strategy and transition plan.

    Tab 5 of the Workbook provides an output – a stakeholder map – based on your inputs in the previous tab. Use the stakeholder map to inform your communications requirements considerations in the next tab of the workbook as well as your transition plan in the next step.

    The image is a screencapture of tab 5 of the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    This is a screenshot of the “Stakeholder Analysis” from tab 5 of the Workbook. The four quadrants of the map are:

    • Engage (High Interest/High Influence)
    • Communicate – High Level (High Interest/Low Influence)
    • Passive (Low Interest/Low Influence)
    • Communicate – Low Level (Low Interest/High Influence)
    How to interpret each quadrant on the map:

    Top Quadrants: Supporters

    1. Engage: Capitalize on champions to drive the project/change.
    2. Communicate (high level): Leverage this group where possible to help socialize the program and to help encourage dissenters to support.

    Bottom Quadrant: Blockers

    1. Passive: Focus on increasing these stakeholders’ level of support.
    2. Communicate (low level): Pick your battles – focus on your noise makers first and then move on to your blockers.

    Document communications plan requirements based on results of engagement and elicitation

    3.1.4 60 minutes

    The image is a screencapture of the Communications Requirements tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

    Use the Communications Requirements tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook.

    Do this as a 1–2 hour project team planning session.

    The table will automatically generate a list of stakeholders based on your stakeholder analysis.

    Update the assumptions that you made about the impact of the change in the Impact Analysis with results of stakeholder engagement and elicitation activities.

    Use the table on this tab to refine these assumptions as needed before solidifying your communications plan.

    Define the action required from each stakeholder or stakeholder group (if any) for change to be successful.

    Continually refine messages and methods for communicating with each stakeholder and stakeholder group.

    Note words that work well and words that don’t. For example, some buzzwords might have negative connotations from previous failed initiatives.

    Designate who is responsible for developing and honing the communications plan (see details in the following section on developing the transition plan).

    Step 3.2: Develop and execute the transition plan

    Phase 3 - 3.2

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Create a communications timeline.
    • Establish communications strategy for stakeholder groups.
    • Determine communication delivery methods.
    • Define the feedback and evaluation process.
    • Assess the full range of support and resistance to change.
    • Prepare objections handling process.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Transition Team
    • Project managers
    • Business analyst
    • Project Sponsor
    • Additional IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • A communications strategy
    • A stakeholder feedback process
    • An objections handling strategy
    • A transition plan

    Effective change requires strategic communications and rightsized training plans

    Develop and execute a transition plan through the PMO to ensure long-term adoption.

    In this step we will develop and introduce a plan to manage change around your project.

    After completing this section you will have a realistic, effective, and adaptable transition plan that includes:

    • Clarity around leadership and vision.
    • Well-defined plans for targeting unique groups with specific messages.
    • Resistance and contingency plans.
    • Templates for gathering feedback and evaluating success.

    These activities will enable you to:

    • Execute the transition in coordination with the timeline and structure of the core project.
    • Communicate the action plan and vision for change.
    • Target specific stakeholder and user groups with unique messages.
    • Deal with risks, resistance, and contingencies.
    • Evaluate success through feedback and metrics.

    "Everyone loves change: take what you know and replace it with a promise. Then overlay that promise with the memory of accumulated missed efforts, half-baked attempts, and roads of abandoned promises."

    Toby Elwin

    Assemble the core transition team to help execute this step

    Once the stakeholder engagement step has been completed, the PMO needs to facilitate the involvement of the transition team to help carry out transition planning and communications strategies.

    You should have already sketched out a core transition team in step 1.2.6 of this blueprint. As with all org change activities, ensuring that individuals are made accountable for the execution of the following activities will be key for the long-term success of your change initiative.

    • At this stage, the PMO needs to ensure the involvement of the transition team to participate in the following activities – or the PMO will need to take on the transition planning and communication responsibilities itself.

    Refer to the team structure examples from Activity 1.2.6 of this blueprint if you are still finalizing your transition team.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template to help capture and record the outcomes of the activities in this step.

    Create a high-level communications timeline

    3.2.1 30 minutes

    By now the project sponsor, project manager, and business analysts (or equivalent) should have defined project timelines, requirements, and other key details. Use these to start your communications planning process.

    If your members of the transition team are also part of the core project team, meet with them to elicit the project timeline and requirements.

    Project Milestone Milestone Time Frame Communications Activities Activity Timing Notes
    Business Case Approval
    • Key stakeholder communications
    Pilot Go-Live
    • Pilot launch activity communications
    • Org-wide status communications
    Full Rollout Approval
    • Key stakeholder communications
    Full Rollout
    • Full rollout activity communications
    • Org-wide status communications
    Benefits Assessment
    • Key stakeholder communications
    • Org-wide status communications

    Info-Tech Insight

    Communicate, communicate, communicate.

    Staff are 34% more likely to adapt to change quickly during the implementation and adoption phases when they are provided with a timeline of impending changes specific to their department. (Source: McLean & Company)

    Schedule time to climb out of the “Valley of Despair”

    Many change initiatives fail when leaders give up at the first sign of resistance.

    OCM experts use terms like “Valley of Despair” to describe temporary drops in support and morale that inevitably occur with any significant change. Don’t let these temporary drops derail your change efforts.

    Anticipate setbacks and make sure the project plan accommodates the time and energy required to sustain and reinforce the initiative as people move through stages of resistance.

    The image is a line graph. Segments of the line are labelled with numbers. The beginning of the line is labelled with 1; the descending segment of the line labelled 2; the lowest point is labelled 3; the ascending section is labelled 4; and the end of the graph is labelled 5.

    Based on Don Kelley and Daryl Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.

    Identify critical points in the change curve:

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: There is usually tentative support and even enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): As change approaches or begins, people realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or the speed at which benefits will be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Eventually, sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: People become more optimistic and supportive when they begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    Tailor a communications strategy for each stakeholder group

    Leveraging the stakeholder analyses you’ve already performed in steps 2.2 and 3.1, customize your communications strategy for the individual stakeholder groups.

    Think about where each of the groups falls within the Organizational Change Depth Scale (below) to determine the type of communications approach required. Don’t forget: the deeper the change, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural

    Position

    • Changing procedures requires clear explanation of what has changed and what people must do differently.
    • Avoid making people think wherever possible. Provide procedural instructions when and where people need them to ensure they remember.

    Incentivize

    • Changing behaviors requires breaking old habits and establishing new ones by adjusting the contexts in which people work.
    • Consider a range of both formal and informal incentives and disincentives, including objective rewards, contextual nudges, cues, and informal recognition

    Empathize

    • Changing people’s relationships (without damaging morale) requires showing empathy for disrupting what is often a significant source of their well-being.
    • Show that efforts have been made to mitigate disruption, and sacrifice is shared by leadership.

    Educate

    • Changing people’s roles requires providing ways to acquire knowledge and skills they need to learn and succeed.
    • Consider a range of learning options that includes both formal training (external or internal) and ongoing self-directed learning.

    Inspire

    • Changing values and norms in the organization (i.e. what type of things are seen as “good” or “normal”) requires deep disruption and persistence.
    • Think beyond incentives; change the vocabularies in which incentives are presented.

    Base your communications approaches on our Organizational Change Depth Scale

    Use the below “change chakras” as a quick guide for structuring your change messages.

    The image is a human, with specific areas of the body highlighted, with notes emerging from them. Above the head is a cloud, labelled Cultural Change/Inspire-Shape ideas and aspirations. The head is the next highlighted element, with notes reading Vocational Change/Educate-Develop their knowledge and skills. The heart is the next area, labelled with Interpersonal Change/Empathize-Appeal to their hearts. The stomach is pictured, with the notes Behavioral Change/Incentivize-Appeal to their appetites and instincts. The final section are the legs, with notes reading Procedural Change/Position-Provide clear direction and let people know where and when they’re needed.

    Categorize stakeholder groups in terms of communications requirements

    3.2.2 30 minutes

    Use the table below to document where your various stakeholder groups fall within the depth scale.
    Depth Levels Stakeholder Groups Tactics
    Procedural Position: Provide explanation of what exactly has changed and specific procedural instructions of what exactly people must do differently to ensure they remember to make adjustments as effortlessly as possible.
    Behavioral Incentivize: Break old habits and establish new ones by adjusting the context of formal and informal incentives (including objective rewards, contextual nudges, cues, and informal recognition).
    Interpersonal Empathize: Offer genuine recognition and support for disruptions of personal networks (a significant source of personal well-being) that may result from changing work relationships. Show how leadership shares the burden of such sacrifices.
    Vocational Educate: Provide a range of learning options (formal and self-directed) to provide the knowledge and skills people need to learn and succeed in changed roles.
    Cultural Inspire: Frame incentives in a vocabulary that reflects any shift in what types of things are seen as “good” or “normal” in the organization.

    The deeper the impact, the more complex the communication strategy

    Interposal, vocational, and cultural changes each require more nuanced approaches when communicating with stakeholders.

    Straightforward → Complex

    When managing interpersonal, vocational, or cultural changes, you will be required to incorporate more inspirational messaging and gestures of empathy than you typically might in a business communication.

    Communications that require an appeal to people’s emotions can be, of course, very powerful, but they are difficult to craft. As a result, oftentimes messages that are meant to inspire do the exact opposite, coming across as farfetched or meaningless platitudes, rather than evocative and actionable calls to change.

    Refer to the tactics below for assistance when crafting more complex change communications that require an appeal to people’s emotions and imaginations.

    • Tell a story. Describe a journey with a beginning (who we are and how we got here) and a destination (our goals and expected success in the future).
    • Convey an intuitive sense of direction. This helps people act appropriately without being explicitly told what to do.
    • Appeal to both emotion and reason. Make people want to be part of the change.
    • Balance abstract ideas with concrete facts. Writers call this “moving up and down the ladder of abstraction.” Without concrete images and facts, the vision will be meaninglessly vague. Without abstract ideas and principles, the vision will lack power to unite people and inspire broad support.
    • Be concise. Make your messages easy to communicate and remember in any situation.

    "Instead of resisting any emotion, the best way to dispel it is to enter it fully, embrace it and see through your resistance."

    Deepak Chopra

    Fine-tune change communications for each stakeholder or audience

    3.2.3 60 to 90 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s “Message Canvas” (see next slide) to help rationalize and elaborate the change vision for each group.

    Build upon the more high-level change story that you developed in step 1.1 by giving more specificity to the change for specific stakeholder groups.

    Questions to address in your communication strategy include: How will the change benefit the organization and its people? How have we confirmed there is a need for change? What would happen if we didn’t change? How will the change leverage existing strengths – what will stay the same? How will we know when we get to the desired state?

    Remember these guidelines to help your messages resonate:

    • People are busy and easily distracted. Tell people what they really need to know first, before you lose their attention.
    • Repetition is good. Remember the Aristotelian triptych: “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    • Don’t use technical terms, jargon, or acronyms. Different groups in organizations tend to develop specialized vocabularies. Everybody grows so accustomed to using acronyms and jargon every day that it becomes difficult to notice how strange it sounds to outsiders. This is especially important when IT communicates with non-technical audiences. Don’t alienate your audience by talking at them in a strange language.
    • Test your message. Run focus groups or deliver communications to a test audience (which could be as simple as asking 2–3 people to read a draft) before delivering messages more broadly.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change thy language, change thyself.

    Jargon, acronyms, and technical terms represent deeply entrenched cultural habits and assumptions.

    Continuing to use jargon or acronyms after a transition tends to drag people back to old ways of thinking and working.

    You don’t need to invent a new batch of buzzwords for every change (nor should you), but every change is an opportunity to listen for words and phrases that have lost their meaning through overuse and abuse.

    3.2.3 continued - Example “Message Canvas”

    The image is a screencapture of tab 6 of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Tool, which is a message canvas

    If there are multiple messages or impacts that need to be communicated to a single group or audience, you may need to do multiple Message Canvases per group. Refer back to your Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to help inform the stakeholder groups and messages that this activity should address.

    Go to tab 6 of the Organizational Change Impact Analysis Toolfor multiple message canvas template boxes that you can use. These messages can then help inform your communication plan on tab 7 of that tool.

    Determine methods for communications delivery

    Review your options for communicating your change. This slide covers traditional methods of communication, while the following slides cover some options for multimedia mass-communications.

    Method Best Practices
    Email Email announcements are necessary for every organizational change initiative but are never sufficient. Treat email as a formalizing medium, not a medium of effective communication when organizational change is concerned. Use email to invite people to in-person meetings, make announcements across teams and geographical areas at the same time, and share formal details.
    Team Meeting Team meetings help sell change. Body language and other in-person cues are invaluable when trying to influence people. Team meetings also provide an opportunity to gauge a group’s response to an announcement and gives the audience an opportunity to ask questions and get clarification.
    One-on-One One-on-ones are more effective than team meetings in their power to influence and gauge individual responses, but aren’t feasible for large numbers of stakeholders. Use one-on-ones selectively: identify key stakeholders and influencers who are most able to either advocate change on your behalf or provide feedback (or both).
    Internal Site / Repository Internal sites and repositories help sustain change by making knowledge available after the implementation. People don’t retain information very well when it isn’t relevant to them. Much of their training will be forgotten if they don’t apply that knowledge for several weeks or months. Use internal sites and repositories for how-to guides and standard operating procedures.

    Review multimedia communication methods for reaching wider audiences in the organization

    Method Best Practices
    User Interfaces User interface (UI) design is overlooked as a communication method. Often a simple UI refinement with the clearer prompts or warnings is more effective and efficient than additional training and repeated email reminders.
    Social Media Social media is widely and deeply embraced by people publicly, and is increasingly useful within organizations. Look for ways to leverage existing internal social tools. Avoid trying to introduce new social channels to communicate change unless social transformation is within the scope of the core project’s goals; the social tool itself might become as much of an organizational change management challenge as the original project.
    Posters & Marketing Collateral Posters and other marketing collateral are common communication tools in retail and hospitality industries that change managers in other industries often don’t think of. Making key messages a vivid, visual part of people’s everyday environment is a very effective way to communicate. On the down side, marketing collateral requires professional design skills and can be costly to create. Professional copywriting is also advisable to ensure your message resonates.
    Video Videos are well worth the cost to produce when the change is transformational in nature, as in cultural changes. Videos are useful for both communicating the vision and as part of the training plan.

    Document communication methods and build the Communications Delivery Plan

    3.2.4 30 minutes

    1. Determine when communications need to be delivered for each stakeholder group.
    2. Select the most appropriate delivery methods for each group and for each message.
    • Meetings and presentations
    • Email/broadcast
    • Intranet and other internal channels (e.g. internal social network)
    • Open houses and workshops
  • Designate who will deliver the messages.
  • Develop plans to follow up for feedback and evaluation (Step 3.2.5).
  • The image is a screenshot of the Stakeholder/Audience section of the Transition Plan Template.

    This is a screenshot from the “Stakeholder/Audience” section of Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template. Use the template to document your communication strategy for each audience and your delivery plan.

    "The role of project communication is to inspire, instigate, inform or educate and ultimately lead to a desired action. Project communication is not a well presented collection of words; rather it is something that propels a series of actions."

    Sidharth Thakur

    Info-Tech Insight

    Repetition is crucial. People need to be exposed to a message 7 times before it sticks. Using a variety of delivery formats helps ensure people will notice and remember key messages. Mix things up to keep employees engaged and looking forward to the next update.

    Define the feedback and evaluation process to ensure an agile response to resistance

    3.2.5 46 to 60 minutes

    1. Designate where/when on the roadmap the project team will proactively evaluate progress/success and elicit feedback in order to identify emerging challenges and opportunities.
    2. Create checklists to review at key milestones to ensure plans are being executed. Review…
    • Key project implementation milestones (i.e. confirm successful deployment/installation).
    • Quick wins identified in the impact analysis and determined in the transition plan (see the following slides for advice in leveraging quick wins).
  • Ensure there is immediate follow-up on communications and training:
    • Confirm understanding and acceptance of vision and action plan – utilize surveys and questionnaires to elicit feedback.
    • Validate people’s acquisition of required knowledge and skills.
    • Identify emerging/unforeseen challenges and opportunities.
  • "While creating and administering a survey represent(s) additional time and cost to the project, there are a number of benefits to be considered: 1) Collecting this information forces regular and systematic review of the project as it is perceived by the impacted organizations, 2) As the survey is used from project to project it can be improved and reused, 3) The survey can quickly collect feedback from a large part of the organization, increasing the visibility of the project and reducing unanticipated or unwelcome reactions."

    – Claire Schwartz

    Use the survey and questionnaire templates on the following two slides for assistance in eliciting feedback. Record the evaluation and feedback gathering process in the Transition Plan Template.

    Sample stakeholder questionnaire

    Use email to distribute a questionnaire (such as the example below) to project stakeholders to elicit feedback.

    In addition to receiving invaluable opinions from key stakeholders and the frontline workers, utilizing questionnaires will also help involve employees in the change, making them feel more engaged and part of the change process.

    Interviewee Date
    Stakeholder Group Interviewer
    Question Response Notes
    How do you think this change will affect you?
    How do you think this change will affect the organization?
    How long do you expect the change to take?
    What do you think might cause the project/change to fail?
    What do you think are the most critical success factors?

    Sample survey template

    Similar to a questionnaire, a survey is a great way to assess the lay of the land in terms of your org change efforts and the likelihood of adoption.

    Using a free online survey tool like Survey Monkey, Typeform, or Google Forms, surveys are quick and easy to generate and deploy. Use the below example as a template to build from.

    Use survey and questionnaire feedback as an occasion to revisit the Impact Analysis Tool and reassess the impacts and roadblocks based on hard feedback.

    To what degree do you agree or disagree with each of the following statements?

    1=Strongly Disagree, 2=Disagree, 3=Somewhat Disagree, 4=Somewhat Agree, 5=Agree, 6=Strongly Agree

    1. I understand why [this change] is happening.
    2. I agree with the decision to [implement this change].
    3. I have the knowledge and tools needed to successfully go through [this change].
    4. Leadership/management is fully committed to the change.
    5. [This change] will be a success.

    Rate the impact of this change.

    1=Very Negative, 2=Negative, 3=Somewhat Negative, 4=Somewhat Positive, 5=Positive, 6=Very Positive

    1. On you personally.
    2. On your team/department/unit.
    3. On the organization as a whole.
    4. On people leading the change.

    Develop plans to leverage support and deal with resistance, objections, and fatigue

    Assess the “Faces of Change” to review the emotions provoked by the change in order to proactively manage resistors and engage supporters.

    The slides that follow walk you through activities to assess the different “faces of change” around your OCM initiative and to perform an objections handling exercise.

    Assessing people’s emotional responses to the change will enable the PMO and transition team to:

    • Brainstorm possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns from each audience.
    • Develop responses to questions, objections, and concerns.
    • Revise the communications messaging and plan to include proactive objections handling.
    • Re-position objections and suggestions as questions to plan for proactively communicating responses and objections to show people that you understand their point of view.
    • Develop a plan with clearly defined responsibility for regularly updating and communicating the objections handling document. Active Subversion Quiet Resistance Vocal Skepticism Neutrality / Uncertainty Vocal Approval Quiet Support Active Leadership
    Hard Work Vs. Tough Work

    Carol Beatty’s distinction between “easy work,” “hard work,” and “tough work” can be revealing in terms of the high failure rate on many change initiatives. (“The Tough Work of Managing Change.” Queen’s University IRC. 2015.)

    • Easy work includes administrative tasks like scheduling meetings and training sessions or delivering progress reports.
    • Hard work includes more abstract efforts like estimating costs/benefit or defining requirements.
    • Tough work involves managing people and emotions, i.e. providing leadership through setbacks, and managing resistance and conflict.

    That is what makes organizational change “tough,” as opposed to merely hard. Managing change requires mental and emotional toughness to deal with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict.

    Assess the full range of support and resistance to change

    3.2.6 20 minutes

    Categorize the feedback received from stakeholder groups or individual stakeholders across the “faces of change” spectrum.

    Use the table below to document where different stakeholders and stakeholder groups fall within the spectrum.

    Response Symptoms Examples
    Active Subversion Publicly or privately disparaging the transition (in some cases privately disparaging while pretending to support); encouraging people to continue doing things the old way or to leave the organization altogether. Group/Name
    Quiet Resistance Refusing to adopt change, continuing to do things the old way (including seemingly trivial or symbolic things). Non-participative. Group/Name
    Vocal Skepticism Asking questions; questioning the why, what, and how of change, but continuing to show willingness to participate and try new things. Group/Name
    Neutrality / Uncertainty Non-vocal participation, perhaps with some negative body language, but continuing to show tacit willingness to try new things. Group/Name
    Vocal Approval Publicly and privately signaling buy-in for the change. Group/Name
    Quiet Support Actively helping to enable change to succeed without necessarily being a cheerleader or trying to rally others around the transition. Group/Name
    Active Leadership Visibly championing the change and helping to rally others around the transition. Group/Name

    Review strategies and tactics for engaging different responses

    Use the below tactics across the “faces of change” spectrum to help inform the PMO’s responses to sources of objection and resistance and its tactics for leveraging support.

    Response Engagement Strategies and Tactics
    Active Subversion Firmly communicate the boundaries of acceptable response to change: resistance is a natural response to change, but actively encouraging other people to resist change should not be tolerated. Active subversion often indicates the need to find a new role or depart the organization.
    Quiet Resistance Resistance is a natural response to change. Use the Change Curve to accommodate a moderate degree and period of resistance. Use the OCM Depth Scale to ensure communications strategies address the irrational sources of resistance.
    Vocal Skepticism Skepticism can be a healthy sign. Skeptics tend to be invested in the organization’s success and can be turned into vocal and active supporters if they feel their questions and concerns have been heard and addressed.
    Neutrality / Uncertainty Most fence-sitters will approve and support change when they start to see concrete benefits and successes, but are equally likely to become skeptics and resisters when they see signs of failure or a critical mass of skepticism, resistance, or simply ambivalence.
    Vocal Approval Make sure that espoused approval for change isn’t masking resistance or subversion. Engage vocal supporters to convert them into active enablers or champions of change.
    Quiet Support Engage quiet supporters to participate where their skills or social and political capital might help enable change across the organization. This could either be formal or informal, as too much formal engagement can invite minor disagreements and slow down change.
    Active Leadership Engage some of the active cheerleaders and champions of change to help deliver communications (and in some cases training) to their respective groups or teams.

    Don’t let speed bumps become roadblocks

    What If... Do This: To avoid:
    You aren’t on board with the change? Fake it to your staff, then communicate with your superiors to gather the information you need to buy in to the change. Starting the change process off on the wrong foot. If your staff believe that you don’t buy in to the change, but you are asking them to do so, they are not going to commit to it.
    When you introduce the change, a saboteur throws a tantrum? If the employee storms out, let them. If they raise uninformed objections in the meeting that are interrupting your introduction, ask them to leave and meet with them privately later on. Schedule an ad hoc one-on-one meeting. A debate at the announcement. It’s an introduction to the change and questions are good, but it’s not the time for debate. Leave this for the team meetings, focus groups, and one-on-ones when all staff have digested the information.
    Your staff don’t trust you? Don’t make the announcement. Find an Enthusiast or another manager that you trust to make the announcement. Your staff blocking any information you give them or immediately rejecting anything you ask of them. Even if you are telling the absolute truth, if your staff don’t trust you, they won’t believe anything you say.
    An experienced skeptic has seen this tried before and states it won’t work? Leverage their experience after highlighting how the situation and current environment is different. Ask the employee what went wrong before. Reinventing a process that didn’t work in the past and frustrating a very valuable segment of your staff. Don’t miss out on the wealth of information this Skeptic has to offer.

    Use the Objections Handling Template on the next slide to brainstorm specific objections and forms of resistance and to strategize about the more effective responses and mitigation strategies.

    Copy these objections and responses into the designated section of the Transition Plan Template. Continue to revise objections and responses there if needed.

    Objections Handling Template

    3.2.7 45 to 60 minutes

    Objection Source of Objection PMO Response
    We tried this two years ago. Vocal skepticism Enabling processes and technologies needed time to mature. We now have the right process discipline, technologies, and skills in place to support the system. In addition, a dedicated role has been created to oversee all aspects of the system during and after implementation.
    Why aren’t we using [another solution]? Uncertainty We spent 12 months evaluating, testing, and piloting solutions before selecting [this solution]. A comprehensive report on the selection process is available on the project’s internal site [here].

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is insight in resistance. The individuals best positioned to provide insight and influence change positively are also best positioned to create resistance. These people should be engaged throughout the implementation process. Their insights will very likely identify risks, barriers, and opportunities that need to be addressed.

    Make sure the action plan includes opportunities to highlight successes, quick wins, and bright spots

    Highlighting quick wins or “bright spots” helps you go from communicating change to more persuasively demonstrating change.

    Specifically, quick wins help:

    • Demonstrate that change is possible.
    • Prove that change produces positive results.
    • Recognize and reward people’s efforts.

    Take the time to assess and plan quick wins as early as possible in the planning process. You can revisit the impact assessment for assistance in identifying potential quick wins; more so, work with the project team and other stakeholders to help identify quick wins as they emerge throughout the planning and execution phases.

    Make sure you highlight bright spots as part of the larger story and vision around change. The purpose is to continue to build or sustain momentum and morale through the transition.

    "The quick win does not have to be profound or have a long-term impact on your organization, but needs to be something that many stakeholders agree is a good thing… You can often identify quick wins by simply asking stakeholders if they have any quick-win recommendations that could result in immediate benefits to the organization."

    John Parker

    Tips for identifying quick wins (Source: John Parker, “How Business Analysts can Identify Quick Wins,” 2013):
    • Brainstorm with your core team.
    • Ask technical and business stakeholders for ideas.
    • Observe daily work of users and listen to users for problems and opportunities; quick wins often come from the rank and file, not from the top.
    • Review and analyze user support trouble tickets; this can be a wealth of information.
    • Be open to all suggestions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stay positive. Our natural tendency is to look for what’s not working and try to fix it. While it’s important to address negatives, it’s equally important to highlight positives to keep people committed and motivated around change.

    Document the outcomes of this step in the Transition Plan Template

    3.2.8 45 minutes

    Consolidate and refine communication plan requirements for each stakeholder and group affected by change.

    Upon completion of the activities in this step, the PMO Director is responsible for ensuring that outcomes have been documented and recorded in the Transition Plan Template. Activities to be recorded include:

    • Stakeholder Overview
    • Communications Schedule Activity
    • Communications Delivery
    • Objections Handling
    • The Feedback and Evaluation Process

    Going forward, successful change will require that many responsibilities be delegated beyond the PMO and core transition team.

    • Delegate responsibilities to HR, managers, and team members for:
      • Advocating the importance of change.
      • Communicating progress toward project milestones and goals.
      • Developing HR and training plan.
    • Ensure sponsorship stays committed and active during and after the transition.
      • Leadership visibility throughout the execution and follow-up of the project is needed to remind people of the importance of change and the organization’s commitment to project success.

    Download Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template.

    "Whenever you let up before the job is done, critical momentum can be lost and regression may follow." – John Kotter, Leading Change

    Step 3.3: Establish HR and Training Plans

    Phase 3 - 3.3

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Analyze HR requirements for involvement in training.
    • Outline appropriate HR and training timelines.
    • Develop training plan requirements across different stakeholder groups.
    • Define training content.
    • Assess skills required to support the change and review options for filling HR gaps.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Transition Team
    • HR Personnel
    • Project Sponsor
    Outcomes of this step
    • A training plan
    • Assessment of skill required to support the change

    Make sure skills, roles, and teams are ready for change

    Ensure that the organization has the infrastructure in place and the right skills availability to support long-term adoption of the change.

    The PMO’s OCM approach should leverage organizational design and development capabilities already in place.

    Recommendations in this section are meant to help the PMO and transition team understand HR and training plan activities in the context of the overall transition process.

    Where organizational design and development capabilities are low, the following steps will help you do just enough planning around HR, and training and development to enable the specific change.

    In some cases the need for improved OCM will reveal the need for improved organizational design and development capabilities.

    • Required Participants for this Step: PMO Leader; PMO staff; Project manager.
    • Recommended Participants for this Step: Project Sponsor; HR personnel.

    This section will walk you through the basic steps of developing HR, training, and development plans to support and enable the change.

    For comprehensive guidance and tools on role, job, and team design, see Info-Tech’s Transform IT Through Strategic Organizational Design blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t make training a hurdle to adoption. Training and other disruptions take time and energy away from work. Ineffective training takes credibility away from change leaders and seems to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics. The PMO needs to ensure that training sessions are as focused and useful as possible.

    Analyze HR requirements to ensure efficient use of HR and project stakeholder time

    3.3.1 30-60 minutes

    Refer back to Activity 3.2.4. Use the placement of each stakeholder group on the Organizational Change Depth Scale (below) to determine the type of HR and training approach required. Don’t impose training rigor where it isn’t required.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Simply changing procedures doesn’t generally require HR involvement (unless HR procedures are affected). Changing behaviors requires breaking old habits and establishing new ones, often using incentives and disincentives. Changing teams, roles, and locations means changing people’s relationships, which adds disruption to people’s lives and challenges for any change initiative. Changing people’s roles and responsibilities requires providing ways to acquire knowledge and skills they need to learn and succeed. Changing values and norms in the organization (i.e. what type of things are seen as “good” or “normal”) requires deep disruption and persistence.
    Typically no HR involvement. HR consultation recommended to help change incentives, compensation, and training strategies. HR consultation strongly recommended to help define roles, jobs, and teams. HR responsibility recommended to develop training and development programs. HR involvement recommended.

    22%

    In a recent survey of 276 large and midsize organizations, eighty-seven percent of survey respondents trained their managers to “manage change,” but only 22% felt the training was truly effective. (Towers Watson)

    Outline appropriate HR and training timelines

    3.3.2 15 minutes

    Revisit the high-level project schedule from steps 1.2.4 and 3.4.1 to create a tentative timeline for HR and training activities.

    Revise this timeline throughout the implementation process, and refine the timing and specifics of these activities as you move from the development to the deployment phase.

    Project Milestone Milestone Time Frame HR/Training Activities Activity Timing Notes
    Business Case Approval
    • Consulted to estimate timeline and cost
    Pilot Go-Live
    • Train groups affected by pilot
    Full Rollout Approval
    • Consulted to estimate timeline and cost
    Full Rollout
    • Train the trainers for full-scale rollout
    Benefits Assessment
    • Consulted to provide actual time and costs

    "The reason it’s going to hurt is you’re going from a state where you knew everything to one where you’re starting over again."

    – BA, Natural Resources Company

    Develop the training plan to ensure that the right goals are set, and that training is properly timed and communicated

    3.3.3 60 minutes

    Use the final tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, “7. Training Requirements,” to begin fleshing out a training plan for project stakeholders.

    The image is a screencapture of the final tab in the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook, titled Training Requirements.

    The table will automatically generate a list of stakeholders based on your stakeholder analysis.

    If your stakeholder list has grown or changed since the stakeholder engagement exercise in step 3.1, update the “Stakeholder List” tab in the tool.

    Estimate when training can begin, when training needs to be completed, and the total hours required.

    Training too early and too late are both common mistakes. Training too late hurts morale and creates risks. Training too early is often wasted and creates the need for retraining as knowledge and skills are lost without immediate relevance to their work.

    Brainstorm or identify potential opportunities to leverage for training (such as using existing resources and combining multiple training programs).

    Review the Change Management Impact Analysis to assess skills and knowledge required for each group in order for the change to succeed.

    Depending on the type of change being introduced, you may need to have more in-depth conversations with technical advisors, project management staff, and project sponsors concerning gaps and required content.

    Define training content and make key logistical decisions concerning training delivery for staff and users

    3.3.4 30-60 minutes

    Ultimately, the training plan will have to be put into action, which will require that the key logistical decisions are made concerning content and training delivery.

    The image is a screencapture of the Training Plan section of the Transition Plan Template.

    1. Use the “Training Plan” section in Info-Tech’s Transition Plan Template to document details of your training plan: schedules, resources, rooms, and materials required, etc.
    2. Designate who is responsible for developing the training content details. Responsibilities will include:
      • Developing content modules.
      • Determining the appropriate delivery model for each audience and content module (e.g. online course, classroom, outsourced, job shadowing, video tutorials, self-learning).
      • Finding and booking resources, locations, equipment, etc.

    “95% of learning leaders from organizations that are very effective at implementing important change initiatives find best practices by partnering with a company or an individual with experience in the type of change, twice as often as ineffective organizations.”

    Source: Implementing and Supporting Training for Important Change Initiatives.

    Training content should be developed and delivered by people with training experience and expertise, working closely with subject matter experts. In the absence of such individuals, partnering with experienced trainers is a cost that should be considered.

    Assess skills required to support the change that are currently absent or in short supply

    3.3.5 15 to 30 minutes

    The long-term success of the change is contingent on having the resources to maintain and support the tool, process, or business change being implemented. Otherwise, resourcing shortfalls could threaten the integrity of the new way of doing things post-change, threatening people’s trust and faith in the validity of the change as a whole.

    Use the table below to assess and record skills requirements. Refer to the tactics on the next slide for assistance in filling gaps.

    Skill Required Description of Need Possible Resources Recommended Next Steps Timeline
    Mobile Dev Users expect mobile access to services. We need knowledge of various mobile platforms, languages or frameworks, and UX/UI requirements for mobile.
    • Train web team
    • Outsource
    • Analyze current and future mobile requirements.
    Probably Q1 2015
    DBAs Currently have only one DBA, which creates a bottleneck. We need some DBA redundancy to mitigate risk of single point of failure.
    • Redeploy and train member of existing technology services team.
    • Hire or contract new resources.
    • Analyze impact of redeploying existing resources.
    Q3 2014

    Review your options for filling HR gaps

    Options: Benefits: Drawbacks:
    Redeploy staff internally
    • Retains firm-specific knowledge.
    • Eliminates substantial costs of recruiting and terminating employees.
    • Mitigates risk; reduces the number of unknowns that come with acquiring talent.
    • Employees could already be fully or over-allocated.
    • Employees might lack the skills needed for the new or enhanced positions.
    Outsource
    • Best for addressing short-term, urgent needs, especially when the skills and knowledge required are too new or unfamiliar to manage internally.
    • Risk of sharing sensitive information with third parties.
    • Opportunity cost of not investing in knowledge and skills internally.
    Contract
    • Best when you are uncertain how long needs for particular skills or budget for extra capacity will last.
    • Diminished loyalty, engagement, and organizational culture.
    • Similar drawbacks as with outsourcing.
    Hire externally
    • Best for addressing long-term needs for strategic or core skills.
    • Builds capacity and expertise to support growing organizations for the long term.
    • High cost of recruiting and onboarding.
    • Uncertainty: risk that new hires might have misrepresented their skills or won’t fit culturally.
    • Commitment to paying for skills that might diminish in demand and value over time.
    • Economic uncertainty: high cost of layoffs and buyouts.

    Report HR and training plan status to the transition team

    3.3.6 10 minutes (and ongoing thereafter)

    Ensure that any changes or developments made to HR and training plans are captured in the Transition Plan Template where applicable.
    1. Upon completion of the activities in this step, ensure that the “Training Plan” section of the template reflects outcomes and decisions made during the preceding activities.
    2. Assign ongoing RACI roles for informing the transition team of HR and training plan changes; similarly define accountabilities for keeping the template itself up to date.
    • Record these roles within the template itself under the “Roles & Responsibilities” section.
  • Be sure to schedule a date for eliciting training feedback in the “Training Schedule” section of the template.
    • A simple survey, such as those discussed in step 3.2, can go a long way in both helping stakeholders feel more involved in the change, and in making sure training mistakes and weaknesses are not repeated again and again on subsequent change initiatives.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Try more ad hoc training methods to offset uncertain project timelines.

    One of the top challenges organizations face around training is getting it timed right, given the changes to schedule and delays that occur on many projects.

    One tactic is to take a more ad hoc approach to training, such as making IT staff available in centralized locations after implementation to address staff issues as they come up.

    This will not only help eliminate the waste that can come from poorly timed and ineffective training sessions, but it will also help with employee morale, giving individuals a sense that they haven’t been left alone to navigate unfamiliar processes or technologies.

    Adoption can be difficult for some, but the cause is often confusion and misunderstanding

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Manufacturing

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Challenge
    • The strategy team responsible for the implementation of a new operation manual for the subsidiaries of a global firm was monitoring the progress of newly acquired firms as the implementation of the manual began.
    • They noticed that one department in a distant location was not meeting the new targets or fulfilling the reporting requirements on staff progress.
    Solution
    • The strategy team representative for the subsidiary firm went to the manager leading the department that was slow to adopt the changes.
    • When asked, the manager insisted that he did not have the time or resources to implement all of these changes while maintaining the operation of the department.
    • With true business value in mind, the manager said, they chose to keep the plant running.
    Results
    • The representative from the strategy team was surprised to find that the manager was having such trouble fitting the changes into daily operations as the changes were the daily operations.
    • The representative took the time to go through the new operation manual with the manager and explain that the changes replaced daily operations and were not additions to them.

    "The cause of slow adoption is often not anger or denial, but a genuine lack of understanding and need for clarification. Avoid snap decisions about a lack of adoption until staff understand the details." – IT Manager

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.2 Undergo a stakeholder analysis to ensure positive stakeholder engagement

    Move away from a command-and-control approach to change by working with the analyst to develop a strategy that engages stakeholders in the change, making them feel like they are a part of it.

    3.2.3 Develop a stakeholder sentiment-sensitive communications strategy

    Work with the analyst to fine-tune the stakeholder messaging across various stakeholder responses to change.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.2.5 Define a stakeholder feedback and evaluation process

    Utilize analyst experience and perspective in order to develop strategy for effectively evaluating stakeholder feedback early enough that resistance and suggestions can be accommodated with the OCM strategy and project plan.

    3.2.7 Develop a strategy to cut off resistance to change

    Utilize analyst experience and perspective in order to develop an objections handling strategy to deal with resistance, objections, and fatigue.

    3.3.4 Develop the training plan to ensure that the right goals are set, and that training is properly timed and communicated

    Receive custom analyst insights on rightsizing training content and timing your training sessions effectively.

    Phase 4

    Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    Phase 4 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Establish a Post-Project Benefits Attainment Process

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 to 2 weeks

    Step 4.1: Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment

    Discuss these issues with analyst:

    • Accountability for tracking the business outcomes of the project post-completion is frequently opaque, with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • As a result, projects may get completed, but their ROI to the organization is not tracked or understood.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a post-implementation project review of the pilot OCM initiative.
    • Assign post-project benefits tracking accountabilities.
    • Implement a benefits tracking process and tool.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool
    • Activity 4.1.2: “Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed”
    • Activity 4.1.3: “Define a post-project benefits tracking process”

    Step 4.1: Determine accountabilities for benefits attainment

    Phase 4 - 4.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Conduct a post-implementation review of pilot OCM project.
    • Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed.
    • Define a post-project benefits tracking process.
    • Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director
    • Project Sponsor
    • Project managers
    • Business analyst
    • Additional IT/PMO staff
    Outcomes of this step
    • Appropriate assignment of accountabilities for tracking benefits after the project has closed
    • A process for tracking benefits over the long-run
    • A benefits tracking tool

    Project benefits result from change

    A PMO that facilitates change is one that helps drive benefits attainment long after the project team has moved onto the next initiative.

    Organizations rarely close the loop on project benefits once a project has been completed.

    • The primary cause of this is accountability for tracking business outcomes post-project is almost always poorly defined, with little or no allocated resourcing.
    • Even organizations that define benefits well often neglect to manage them once the project is underway. If benefits realization is not monitored, the organization will miss opportunities to close the gap on lagging benefits and deliver expected project value.
    • It is commonly understood that the project manager and sponsor will need to work together to shift focus to benefits as the project progresses, but this rarely happens as effectively as it should.

    With all this in mind, in this step we will round out our PMO-driven org change process by defining how the PMO can help to better facilitate the benefits realization process.

    This section will walk you through the basic steps of developing a benefits attainment process through the PMO.

    For comprehensive guidance and tools, see Info-Tech’s Establish the Benefits Realization Process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Two of a kind. OCM, like benefits realization, is often treated as “nice to have” rather than “must do.” These two processes are both critical to real project success; define benefits properly during intake and let OCM take the reigns after the project kicks off.

    The benefits realization process spans the project lifecycle

    Benefits realization ensures that the benefits defined in the business case are used to define a project’s expected value, and to facilitate the delivery of this value after the project is closed. The process begins when benefits are first defined in the business case, continues as benefits are managed through project execution, and ends when the loop is closed and the benefits are actually realized after the project is closed.

    Benefits Realization
    Define Manage Realize
    Initial Request Project Kick Off *Solution Is Deployed
    Business Case Approved Project Execution Solution Maintenance
    PM Assigned *Project Close Solution Decommissioned

    *For the purposes of this step, we will limit our focus to the PMO’s responsibilities for benefits attainment at project close-out and in the project’s aftermath to ensure that responsibilities for tracking business outcomes post-project have been properly defined and resourced.

    Ultimate project success hinges on a fellowship of the benefits

    At project close-out, stewardship of the benefits tracking process should pass from the project team to the project sponsor.

    As the project closes, responsibility for benefits tracking passes from the project team to the project sponsor. In many cases, the PMO will need to function as an intermediary here, soliciting the sponsor’s involvement when the time comes.

    The project manager and team will likely move onto another project and the sponsor (in concert with the PMO) will be responsible for measuring and reporting benefits realization.

    As benefits realization is measured, results should be collated by the PMO to validate results and help flag lagging benefits.

    The activities that follow in this step will help define this process.

    The PMO should ensure the participation of the project sponsor, the project manager, and any applicable members of the business side and the project team for this step.

    Ideally, the CIO and steering committee members should be involved as well. At the very least, they should be informed of the decisions made as soon as possible.

    Initiation-Planning-Execution-Monitoring & Controlling-Closing

    Conduct post-implementation review for your pilot OCM project

    4.1.1 60 minutes

    The post-project phase is the most challenging because the project team and sponsor will likely be busy with other projects and work.

    Conducting a post-implementation review for every project will force sponsors and other stakeholders to assess actual benefits realization and identify lagging benefits.

    If the project is not achieving its benefits, a remediation plan should be created to attempt to capture these benefits as soon as possible.

    Agenda Item
    Assess Benefits Realization
    • Compare benefits realized to projected benefits.
    • Compare benefit measurements with benefit targets.
    Assess Quality
    • Performance
    • Availability
    • Reliability
    Discuss Ongoing Issues
    • What has gone wrong?
    • Frequency
    • Cause
    • Resolution
    Discuss Training
    • Was training adequate?
    • Is any additional training required?
    Assess Ongoing Costs
    • If there are ongoing costs, were they accounted for in the project budget?
    Assess Customer Satisfaction
    • Review stakeholder surveys.

    Assign ownership for realizing benefits after the project is closed

    4.1.2 45 to 60 minutes

    The realization stage is the most difficult to execute and oversee. The project team will have moved on, and unless someone takes accountability for measuring benefits, progress will not be measured. Use the sample RACI table below to help define roles and responsibilities for post-project benefits attainment.

    Process Step Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed
    Track project benefits realization and document progress Project sponsor Project sponsor PMO (can provide tracking tools and guidance), and directors or managers in the affected business unit who will help gather necessary metrics for the sponsor (e.g. report an increase in sales 3 months post-project) PMO (can collect data and consolidate benefits realization progress across projects)
    Identify lagging benefits and perform root cause analysis Project sponsor and PMO Project sponsor and PMO Affected business unit CIO, IT steering committee
    Adjust benefits realization plan as needed Project sponsor Project sponsor Project manager, affected business units Any stakeholders impacted by changes to plan
    Report project success PMO PMO Project sponsor IT and project steering committees

    Info-Tech Insight

    A business accountability: Ultimately, the sponsor must help close this loop on benefits realization. The PMO can provide tracking tools and gather and report on results, but the sponsor must hold stakeholders accountable for actually measuring the success of projects.

    Define a post-project benefits tracking process

    4.1.3 45 minutes

    While project sponsors should be accountable for measuring actual benefits realization after the project is closed, the PMO can provide monitoring tools and it should collect measurements and compare results across the portfolio.

    Steps in a benefits tracking process.

    1. Collate the benefits of all the projects in your portfolio. Document each project’s benefits, with the metrics, targets, and realization timelines of each project in a central location.
    2. Collect and document metric measurements. The benefit owner is responsible for tracking actual realization and reporting it to the individual(s) tracking portfolio results.
    3. Create a timeline and milestones for benefits tracking. Establish a high-level timeline for assessing benefits, and put reminders in calendars accordingly, to ensure that commitments do not fall off stakeholders’ radars.
    4. Flag lagging benefits for further investigation. Perform root cause analysis to then find out why a benefit is behind schedule, and what can be done to address the problem.

    "Checking the results of a decision against its expectations shows executives what their strengths are, where they need to improve, and where they lack knowledge or information."
    Peter Drucker

    Implement a tool to help monitor and track benefits over the long term

    4.1.4 Times will vary depending on organizational specifics of the inputs

    Download Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool to help solidify the process from the previous step.

    1. Document each project’s benefits, with the metrics, targets, and realization timelines. Tab 1 of the tool is a data entry sheet to capture key portfolio benefit forecasts throughout the project.
    2. Collect and document metric measurements. Tab 2 is where the PMO, with data from the project sponsors, can track actuals month after month post-implementation.
    3. Flag lagging benefits for further investigation. Tab 3 provides a dashboard that makes it easy to flag lagging benefits. The dashboard produces a variety of meaningful benefit reports including a status indication for each project’s benefits and an assessment of business unit performance.

    Continue to increase accountability for benefits and encourage process participation

    Simply publishing a set of best practices will not have an impact unless accountability is consistently enforced. Increasing accountability should not be complicated. Focus on publicly recognizing benefit success. As the process matures, you should be able to use benefits as a more frequent input to your budgeting process.

    • Create an internal challenge. Publish the dashboard from the Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool and highlight the top 5 or 10 projects that are on track to achieve benefits. Recognize the sponsors and project team members. Recognizing individuals for benefits success will get people excited and encourage an increased focus on benefits.
    • With executive level involvement, the PMO could help institute a bonus structure based on benefits realization. For instance, project teams could be rewarded with bonuses for achieving benefits. Decide upon a set post-project timeline for determining this bonus. For example, 6 months after every project goes live, measure benefits realization. If the project has realized benefits, or is on track to realize benefits, the PM should be given a bonus to split with the team.
    • Include level of benefits realization in the performance reviews of project team members.
    • As the process matures, start decreasing budgets according to the monetary benefits documented in the business case (if you are not already doing so). If benefits are being used as inputs to the budgeting process, sponsors will need to ensure that they are defined properly.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t forget OCM best practices throughout the benefits tracking process. If benefits are lagging, the PMO should revisit phase 3 of this blueprint to consider how challenges to adoption are negatively impacting benefits attainment.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1.2 Assign appropriate ownership and ensure adequate resourcing for realizing benefits after the project is closed

    Get custom insights into how the benefits tracking process should be carried out post-project at your organization to ensure that intended project outcomes are effectively monitored and, in the long run, achieved.

    4.1.4 Implement a benefits tracking tool

    Let our analysts customize a home-grown benefits tracking tool for your organization to ensure that the PMO and project sponsors are able to easily track benefits over time and effectively pivot on lagging benefits.

    Phase 5

    Solidify the PMO’s Role as Change Leader

    Phase 5 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 5: Solidify the PMO’s role as change leader

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 to 2 weeks

    Step 5.1: Institute an organizational change management playbook

    Discuss these issues with an analyst:

    • With the pilot OCM initiative complete, the PMO will need to roll out an OCM program to accommodate all of the organization’s projects.
    • The PMO will need to facilitate organization-wide OCM accountabilities – whether it’s the PMO stepping into the role of OCM leader, or other appropriate accountabilities being assigned.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Review the success of the pilot OCM initiative.
    • Define organizational roles and responsibilities for change management.
    • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Change Management Playbook
    • Activity 5.1.1: “Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core discipline of the PMO”
    • Activity 5.1.3: “Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management”

    Step 5.1: Institute an organizational change management playbook

    Phase 5 - 5.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Review lessons learned to improve OCM as a core discipline of the PMO.
    • Monitor organizational capacity for change.
    • Define organizational roles and responsibilities for change management.
    • Formalize the Organizational Change Management Playbook.
    • Assess the value and success of the PMO’s OCM efforts.
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Required: PMO Director; PMO staff
    • Strongly recommended: CIO and other members of the executive layer
    Outcomes of this step
    • A well-defined organizational mandate for change management, whether through the PMO or another appropriate stakeholder group
    • Definition of organizational roles and responsibilities for change management
    • An OCM playbook
    • A process and tool for ongoing assessment of the value of the PMO’s OCM activities

    Who, in the end, is accountable for org change success?

    We return to a question that we started with in the Executive Brief of this blueprint: who is accountable for organizational change?

    If nobody has explicit accountability for organizational change on each project, the Officers of the corporation retained it. Find out who is assumed to have this accountability.

    On the left side of the image, there is a pyramid with the following labels in descending order: PMO; Project Sponsors; Officers; Directors; Stakeholders. The top three tiers of the pyramid have upward arrows connecting one section to the next; the bottom three tiers have downward pointing arrows, connecting one section to the next. On the right side of the image is the following text: If accountability for organizational change shifted to the PMO, find out and do it right. PMOs in this situation should proceed with this step. Officers of the corporation have the implicit fiduciary obligation to drive project benefits because they ultimately authorize the project spending. It’s their job to transfer that obligation, along with the commensurate resourcing and authority. If the Officers fail to make someone accountable for results of the change, they are failing as fiduciaries appointed by the Board of Directors. If the Board fails to hold the Officers accountable for the results, they are failing to meet the obligations they made when accepting election by the Shareholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Will the sponsor please stand up?

    Project sponsors should be accountable for the results of project changes. Otherwise, people might assume it’s the PMO or project team.

    Keep your approach to change management dynamic while building around the core discipline

    The PMO will need to establish an OCM playbook that can scale to a wide variety of projects. Avoid rigidity of processes and keep things dynamic as you build up your OCM muscles as an organization.

    Continually Develop

    Change Management Capabilities

    Progressively build a stable set of core capabilities.

    The basic science of human behavior underlying change management is unlikely to change. Effective engagement, communication, and management of uncertainty are valuable capabilities regardless of context and project specifics.

    Regularly Update

    Organizational Context

    Regularly update recurring activities and artifacts.

    The organization and the environment in which it exists will constantly evolve. Reusing or recycling key artifacts will save time and improve collaboration (by leveraging shared knowledge), but you should plan to update them on at least a quarterly or annual basis.

    Respond To

    Future Project Requirements

    Approach every project as unique.

    One project might involve more technology risk while another might require more careful communications. Make sure you divide your time and effort appropriately for each particular project to make the most out of your change management playbook.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continuous Change. Continuous Improvement. Change is an ongoing process. Your approach to managing change should be continually refined to keep up with changes in technology, corporate strategy, and people involved.

    Review lessons learned to improve organizational change management as a core discipline of the PMO

    5.1.1 60 minutes

    1. With your pilot OCM initiative in mind, retrospectively brainstorm lessons learned using the template below. Info-Tech recommends doing this with the transition team. Have people spend 10-15 minutes brainstorming individually or in 2- to 3-person groups, then spend 15-30 minutes presenting and discussing findings collectively.

    What worked? What didn't work? What was missing?

    2. Develop recommendations based on the brainstorming and analysis above.

    Continue... Stop... Start...

    Monitor organizational capacity for change

    5.1.2 20 minutes (to be repeated quarterly or biannually thereafter)

    Perform the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment in the wake of the OCM pilot initiative and lessons learned exercise to assess capabilities’ improvements.

    As your OCM processes start to scale out over a range of projects across the organization, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the 7 change management categories that drive the survey.

    • Cultural Readiness
    • Leadership & Sponsorship
    • Organizational Knowledge
    • Change Management Skills
    • Toolkit & Templates
    • Process Discipline
    • KPIs & Metrics

    The image is a bar graph, with the above mentioned change management categories on the Y-axis, and the categories Low, Medium, and High on the X-axis.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continual OCM improvement is a collaborative effort.

    The most powerful way to drive continual improvement of your organizational change management practices is to continually share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other OCM related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, the PMO’s efforts to become a change leader will all come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management

    5.1.3 60 minutes

    1. Decide whether to designate/create permanent roles for managing change.
    • Recommended if the PMO is engaged in at least one project at any given time that generates organizational change.
  • Designate a principle change manager (if you choose to) – it is likely that responsibilities will be given to someone’s existing position (such as PM or BA).
    • Make sure any permanent roles are embedded in the organization (e.g. within the PMO, rather than trying to establish a one-person “Change Management Office”) and have leadership support.
  • Consider whether to build a team of permanent change champions – it is likely that responsibilities will be given to existing positions.
    • This type of role is increasingly common in organizations that are aggressively innovating and keeping up with consumer technology adoption. If your organization already has a program like this for engaging early adopters and innovators, build on what’s already established.
    • Work with HR to make sure this is aligned with any existing training and development programs.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid creating unnecessary fiefdoms.

    Make sure any permanent roles are embedded in the organization (e.g. within the PMO) and have leadership support.

    Copy the RACI table from Activity 3.1.1. and repurpose it to help define the roles and responsibilities.

    Include this RACI when you formalize your OCM Playbook.

    Formalize and communicate the Organizational Change Management Playbook

    5.1.4 45 to 60 minutes

    1. Formalize the playbook’s scope:
      1. Determine the size and type of projects for which organizational change management is recommended.
      2. Make sure you clearly differentiate organizational change management and enablement from technical change management (i.e. release management and acceptance).
    2. Refine and formalize tools and templates:
      1. Determine how you want to customize the structure of Info-Tech’s blueprint and templates, tailored to your organization in the future.
        1. For example:
          1. Establish a standard framework for analyzing context around organizational change.
      2. Add branding/design elements to the templates to improve their credibility and impact as internal documents.
      3. Determine where/how templates and other resources are to be found and make sure they will be readily available to anyone who needs them (e.g. project managers).
    3. Communicate the playbook to the project management team.

    Download Info-Tech’s Organizational Change Management Playbook.

    Regularly reassess the value and success of your practices relative to OCM effort and project outcomes

    5.1.5 20 minutes per project

    The image is a screencapture of the Value tab of the Organizational Change: Management Capabilities Assessment

    Use the Value tab in the Organizational Change Management Capabilities Assessment to monitor the value and success of OCM.

    Measure past performance and create a baseline for future success:

    • % of expected business benefits realized on previous 3–5 significant projects/programs.
      • Track business benefits (costs reduced, productivity increased, etc.).
    • Costs avoided/reduced (extensions, cancellations, delays, roll-backs, etc.)
      • Establish baseline by estimating average costs of projects extended to deal with change-related issues.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    5.1.3 Define ongoing organizational roles and responsibilities for change management

    As you scale out an OCM program for all of the organization’s projects based on your pilot initiative, work with the analyst to investigate and define the right accountabilities for ongoing, long-term OCM.

    5.1.4 Develop an Organizational Change Management Playbook

    Formalize a programmatic process for organizational change management in Info-Tech’s playbook template.

    Related research

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Develop a Resource Management Strategy for the New Reality

    Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO

    Establish the Benefits Realization Process

    Manage an Agile Portfolio

    Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program: The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low effort, high impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment in order to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Bibliography

    Basu, Chirantan. “Top Organizational Change Risks.” Chiron. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Beatty, Carol. “The Tough Work of Managing Change.” Queens University. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Brown, Deborah. “Change Management: Some Statistics.” D&B Consulting Inc. May 15, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Burke, W. Warner. Organizational Change: Theory and Practice. 4th Edition. London: Sage, 2008.

    Buus, Inger. “Rebalancing Leaders in Times of Turbulence.” Mannaz. February 8, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Change First. “Feedback from our ROI change management survey.” 2010. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Collins, Jeff. “The Connection between User Adoption and Project Management Success.” Innovative Management Solutions. Sept. 21, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Craddock, William. “Change Management in the Strategic Alignment of Project Portfolios.” PMI. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Denning, Steve. “The Four Stories you Need to Lead Deep Organizational Change.” Forbes. July 25, 2011. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Drucker, Peter. “What Makes an Effective Executive.” Harvard Business Review. June 2004. Web. June 14, 2016

    Elwin, Toby. “Highlight Change Management – An Introduction to Appreciative Inquiry.” July 6, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Enstrom, Christopher. “Employee Power: The Bases of Power Used by Front-Line Employees to Effect Organizational Change.” MA Thesis. University of Calgary. April 2003. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, and Ashvin Sologar. “Changing Change Management.” McKinsey & Company. July 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    International Project Leadership Academy. “Why Projects Fail: Facts and Figures.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Jacobs-Long, Ann. “EPMO’s Can Make A Difference In Your Organization.” May 9, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Kotter, John. Leading Change. Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

    Latham, Ross. “Information Management Advice 55 Change Management: Preparing for Change.” TAHO. March 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Linders, Ben. “Finding Ways to Improve Business – IT Collaboration.” InfoQ. June 6, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016

    Machiavelli, Niccolo. The Prince, selections from The Discourses and other writings. Ed. John Plamenatz. London: Fontana/Collins, 1972.

    Michalak, Joanna Malgorzata. “Cultural Catalyst and Barriers to Organizational Change Management: a Preliminary Overview.” Journal of Intercultural Management. 2:2. November 2010. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Miller, David, and Mike Oliver. “Engaging Stakeholder for Project Success.” PMI. 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Parker, John. “How Business Analysts Can Identify Quick Wins.” EnFocus Solutions. February 15, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Paulk, January. “The Fundamental Role a Change Impact Analysis Plays in an ERP Implementation.” Panorma Consulting Solutions. March 24, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Petouhoff, Natalie, Tamra Chandler, and Beth Montag-Schmaltz. “The Business Impact of Change Management.” Graziadio Business Review. 2006. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PM Solutions. “The State of the PMO 2014.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: Enabling Organizational Change Throughout Strategic Initiatives.” March 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: Executive Sponsor Engagement.” October 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    PMI. “Pulse of the Profession: the High Cost of Low Performance.” February 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Powers, Larry, and Ketil Been. “The Value of Organizational Change Management.” Boxley Group. 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Best Practices in Change Management – 2014 Edition: Executive Overview.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Change Management Sponsor Checklist.” Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Cost-benefit analysis for change management.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Prosci. “Five Levers of Organizational Change.” 2016. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Rick, Torben. “Change Management Requires a Compelling Story.” Meliorate. October 3, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Rick, Torben. “The Success Rate of Organizational Change Initiatives.” Meliorate. October 13, 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Schwartz, Claire. “Implementing and Monitoring Organizational Change: Part 3.” Daptiv Blogs. June 24, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Simcik, Shawna. “Shift Happens! The Art of Change Management.” Innovative Career Consulting, Inc. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Stewart Group. “Emotional Intelligence.” 2014. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Thakur, Sidharth. “Improve your Project’s Communication with These Inspirational Quotes.” Ed. Linda Richter. Bright Hub Project Management. June 9, 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Training Folks. “Implementing and Supporting Training for Important Change Initiatives.” 2012. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Warren, Karen. “Make your Training Count: The Right Training at the Right Time.” Decoded. April 12, 2015. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Willis Towers Watson. “Only One-Quarter of Employers Are Sustaining Gains from Change Management Initiatives, Towers Watson Survey Finds.” August 29, 2013. Web. June 14, 2016.

    Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}233|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,638 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 16 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • SOW reviews are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Vendors draft provisions that shift the performance risk to the customer in subtle ways that are often overlooked or not identified by customers.
    • Customers don’t understand the power and implications of SOWs, treating them as an afterthought or formality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is often a disconnect between what is sold and what is purchased. To gain the customer’s approval, vendors will present a solution- or outcome-based proposal. However, the SOW is task or activity based, shifting the risk for success to the customer.
    • A good SOW takes time and should not be rushed. The quality of the requirements and of the SOW wording drive success. Not allocating enough time to address both increases the risk of the project’s failure.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech’s guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of SOW review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization and hold vendors accountable.
    • This blueprint provides direction on spotting vendor-biased terms and conditions and offers tips for mitigating the risk associated with words and phrases that shift responsibilities and obligations from the vendor to the customer.

    Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should spend more time assessing your statements of work, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess SOW Terms and Conditions

    Use Info-Tech’s SOW review guidance to find common pitfalls and gotchas, to maximize the protections for your organization, and to hold vendors accountable.

    • Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable – Storyboard
    • Contract or SOW Guide
    • SOW Maps Tool
    • Red-Flag Words and Phrases Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess SOW Terms and Conditions

    The Purpose

    Gain a better understanding of common SOW clauses and phrases.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Reduce risk

    Increase vendor accountability

    Improve negotiation positions

    Activities

    1.1 Review sample SOW provisions, identify the risks, and develop a negotiation position.

    1.2 Review Info-Tech tools.

    Outputs

    Awareness and increased knowledge

    Familiarity with the Info-Tech tools

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}332|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $36,636 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Getting a seat at the table is your first objective in building a strategic roadmap. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding what it will need in the future is a challenge for most IT departments.

    This could be a challenge such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like
    • Understanding what the IT team is spending its time on day to day

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a clear vision of what the future state is and knowing that creating an IT Infrastructure roadmap is never finished will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning.
    • Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding of the business priorities, and vision of the future
    • Know what your budget is spent on: running the business, growth, or innovation
    • Increased communication with the right stakeholders
    • Better planning based on analysis of time study, priorities, and business goals

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard – Improve and align goals and strategy.

    In this section you will develop a vision and mission statement and set goals that align with the business vision and goals. The outcome will deliver your guiding principles and a list of goals that will determine your initiatives and their priorities.

    • Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    2. Financial Spend Analysis Template – Envision future and analyze constraints.

    Consider your future state by looking at technology that will help the business in the future. Complete an analysis of your past spending to determine your future spend. Complete a SWOT analysis to determine suitability.

    • Financial Spend Analysis Template

    3. Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template – Align and build the roadmap.

    Develop a risk framework that may slow or hinder your strategic initiatives from progressing and evaluate your technical debt. What is the current state of your infrastructure? Generate and prioritize your initiatives, and set dates for completion.

    • Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template

    4. Infrastructure and Strategy Executive Brief Template – Communicate and improve the process.

    After creating your roadmap, communicate it to your audience. Identify who needs to be informed and create an executive brief with the template download. Finally, create KPIs to measure what success looks like.

    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template
    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    Analysts' Perspectives

    Infrastructure roadmaps are an absolute necessity for all organizations. An organization's size often dictates the degree of complexity of the roadmap, but they all strive to paint the future picture of the organization's IT infrastructure.

    Infrastructure roadmaps typically start with the current state of infrastructure and work on how to improve. That thinking must change! Start with the future vision, an unimpeded vision, as if there were no constraints. Now you can see where you want to be.

    Look at your past to determine how you have been spending your infrastructure budget. If your past shows a trend of increased operational expenditures, that trend will likely continue. The same is true for capital spending and staffing numbers.

    Now that you know where you want to go, and how you ended up where you are, look at the constraints you must deal with and make a plan. It's not as difficult as it may seem, and even the longest journey begins with one step.

    Speaking of that first step, it should be to understand the business goals and align your roadmap with those same goals. Now you have a solid plan to develop a strategic infrastructure roadmap; enjoy the journey!

    There are many reasons why you need to build a strategic IT infrastructure roadmap, but your primary objectives are to set the long-term direction, build a framework for decision making, create a foundation for operational planning, and be able to explain to the business what you are planning. It is a basis for accountability and sets out goals and priorities for the future.

    Other than knowing where you are going there are four key benefits to building the roadmap.

    1. It allows you to be strategic and transformative rather than tactical and reactive.
    2. It gives you the ability to prioritize your tasks and projects in order to get them going.
    3. It gives you the ability to align your projects to business outcomes.
    4. Additionally, you can leverage your roadmap to justify your budget for resources and infrastructure.

    When complete, you will be able to communicate to your fellow IT teams what you are doing and get an understanding of possible business- or IT-related roadblocks, but overall executing on your roadmap will demonstrate to the business your competencies and ability to succeed.

    PJ Ryan

    PJ Ryan
    Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    John Donovan

    John Donovan
    Principal Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    When it comes to building a strategic roadmap, getting a seat at the table is your first objective. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding its future needs is a challenge for most IT organizations.

    Challenges such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like

    Common Obstacles

    Fighting fires, keeping the lights on, patching, and overseeing legacy debt maintenance – these activities prevent your IT team from thinking strategically and looking beyond day-to-day operations. Issues include:

    • Managing time well
    • Building the right teams
    • Setting priorities

    Procrastinating when it comes to thinking about your future state will get you nowhere in a hurry.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Look into your past IT spend and resources that are being utilized.

    • Analyze all aspects of the operation, and resources required.
    • Be realistic with your timelines.
    • Work from the future state backward.

    Build your roadmap by setting priorities, understanding risk and gaps both in finance and resources. Overall, your roadmap is never done, so don't worry if you get it wrong on the first pass.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Have a clear vision of what the future state is, and know that when creating an IT infrastructure roadmap, it is never done. This will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning. Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Insight Summary

    "Planning is bringing the future into the present so that you can do something about it now."
    Source: Alan Lakein, Libquotes

    Your strategic objectives are key to building a roadmap

    Many organizations' day-to-day IT operations are tactical and reactive. This needs to change; the IT team needs to become strategic and proactive in its planning and execution. Forward thinking bridges the gap from your current state, to what the organization is, to what it wants to achieve. Your strategic objectives need to align to the business vision and goals and keep it running.

    Your future state will determine your roadmap priorities

    Identify what the business needs to meet its goals; this should be reflected in your roadmap priorities. Then identify the tasks and projects that can get you there. Business alignment is key, as these projects require prioritization. Strategic initiatives that align to business outcomes will be your foundation for planning on those priorities. If you do not align your initiatives, you will end up spinning your wheels. A good strategic roadmap will have all the elements of forward thinking and planning to execute with the right resources, right priorities, and right funding to make it happen.

    Understand what you have been paying for the last few years

    Measure the cost of "keeping the lights on" as a baseline for your budget that is earmarked and already spent. Determine if your current spend is holding back innovation due to:

    1. The high cost of maintenance
    2. Resources in operations doing low-value work due to the effort required to do tasks related to break/fix on aging hardware and software

    A successful strategic roadmap will be determined when you have a good handle on your current spending patterns and planning for future needs that include resources, budget, and know-how. Without a plan and roadmap, that plan will not get business buy-in or funding.

    Top challenges reported by Info-Tech members

    Lack of strategic direction

    • Infrastructure leadership must discover the business goals.

    Time seepage

    • Project time is constantly being tracked incorrectly.

    Technical debt

    • Aging equipment is not proactively cycled out with newer enabling technologies.

    Case Study

    The strategic IT roadmap allows Dura to stay at the forefront of automotive manufacturing.

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
    SOURCE: Performance Improvement Partners

    Challenge

    Following the acquisition of Dura, MiddleGround aimed to position Dura as a leader in the automotive industry, leveraging the company's established success spanning over a century.

    However, prior limited investments in technology necessitated significant improvements for Dura to optimize its processes and take advantage of digital advancements.

    Solution

    MiddleGround joined forces with PIP to assess technology risks, expenses, and prospects, and develop a practical IT plan with solutions that fit MiddleGround's value-creation timeline.

    By selecting the top 15 most important IT projects, the companies put together a feasible technology roadmap aimed at advancing Dura in the manufacturing sector.

    Results

    Armed with due diligence reports and a well-defined IT plan, MiddleGround and Dura have a strategic approach to maximizing value creation.

    By focusing on key areas such as analysis, applications, infrastructure and the IT organization, Dura is effectively transforming its operations and shaping the future of the automotive manufacturing industry.

    How well do you know your business strategy?

    A mere 25% of managers
    can list three of the company's
    top five priorities.

    Based on a study from MIT Sloan, shared understanding of strategic directives barely exists beyond the top tiers of leadership.

    An image of a bar graph showing the percentage of leaders able to correctly list a majority of their strategic priorities.

    Take your time back

    Unplanned incident response is a leading cause of the infrastructure time crunch, but so too are nonstandard service requests and service requests that should be projects.

    29%

    Less than one-third of all IT projects finish on time.

    200%

    85% of IT projects average cost overruns of 200% and time overruns of 70%.

    70%

    70% of IT workers feel as though they have too much work and not enough time to do it.

    Source: MIT Sloan

    Inventory Assessment

    Lifecycle

    Refresh strategies are still based on truisms (every three years for servers, every seven years for LAN, etc.) more than risk-based approaches.

    Opportunity Cost

    Assets that were suitable to enable business goals need to be re-evaluated as those goals change.

    See Info-Tech's Manage Your Technical Debt blueprint

    an image of info-tech's Manage your technical debt.

    Key IT strategy initiatives can be categorized in three ways

    IT key initiative plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives, and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1. Business support
      • Support major business initiatives
      • Each corporate initiative is supported by a major IT project and each project has unique IT challenges that require IT support.
    2. IT excellence
      • Reduce risk and improve IT operational excellence
      • These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3. Innovation
      • Drive technology innovation
      • These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A CIO has three roles: enable business productivity, run an effective IT shop, and drive technology innovation. Your key initiative plan must reflect these three mandates and how IT strives to fulfill them.

    IT must accomplish many things

    Manage
    the lifecycle of aging equipment against current capacity and capability demands.

    Curate
    a portfolio of enabling technologies to meet future capacity and capability demands.

    Initiate
    a realistic schedule of initiatives that supports a diverse range of business goals.

    Adapt
    to executive feedback and changing business goals.

    an image of Info-Tech's Build your strategic roadmap

    Primary and secondary infrastructure drivers

    • Primary driver – The infrastructure component that is directly responsible for enabling change in the business metric.
    • Secondary driver – The infrastructure component(s) that primary drivers rely on.

    (Source: BMC)

    Sample primary and secondary drivers

    Business metric Source(s) Primary infrastructure drivers Secondary infrastructure drivers

    Sales revenue

    Online store

    Website/Server (for digital businesses)

    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    # of new customers

    Call center

    Physical plant cabling in the call center

    • PBX/VOIP server
    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    Info-Tech Insight

    You may not be able to directly influence the primary drivers of the business, but your infrastructure can have a major impact as a secondary driver.

    Info-Tech's approach

    1. Align strategy and goals
    • Establish the scope of your IT strategy by defining IT's mission and vision statements and guiding principles.
  • Envision future and analyze constraints
    • Envision and define your future infrastructure and analyze what is holding you back.
  • Align and build the roadmap
    • Establish a risk framework, identify initiatives, and build your strategic infrastructure roadmap.
  • Communicate and improve the process
    • Communicate the results of your hard work to the right people and establish the groundwork for continual improvement of the process.
  • Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Mission and Vision Statement
    Goal Alignment (Slide 28)

    Construct your vision and mission aligned to the business.

    Mission and Vision Statement

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Build initiatives and prioritize them. Build the roadmap.

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    What is stealing your time from getting projects done?

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Build templates for initiates, build process map, and develop strategies.

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Key Deliverable

    it infrastructure roadmap template

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Info-Tech's methodology for an infrastructure strategy and roadmap

    1. Align Strategy and Goals

    2. Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    3. Align and Build the Roadmap

    4. Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase steps

    1.1 Develop the infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Define the goals

    2.1 Define the future state

    2.2 Analyze constraints

    3.1 Align the roadmap

    3.2 Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Improve the process

    Phase Outcomes

    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement
    • Guiding principles
    • List of goals
    • Financial spend analysis
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized list of roadblocks
    • Future-state vision document
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Technical debt assessment
    • New technology analysis
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • process map
    • Infrastructure roadmap report

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Define mission and vision statements and guiding principles to discuss strategy scope.
    Call #3: Brainstorm goals and definition.

    Call #4: Conduct a spend analysis and a time resource study.
    Call #5: Identify roadblocks.

    Call #6: Develop a risk framework and address technical debt.
    Call #7: Identify new initiatives and SWOT analysis.
    Call #8: Visualize and identify initiatives.
    Call #9: Complete shadow IT and initiative finalization.

    Call #10: Identify your audience and communicate.
    Call #11: Improve the process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 0 (Pre-workshop)

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Session 5 (Post-workshop)

    Elicit business context Align Strategy and Goals Envision Future and Analyze Constraints Align and Build the Roadmap Communicate and Improve the Process Wrap-up (offsite)

    0.1 Complete recommended diagnostic programs.
    0.2 Interview key business stakeholders, as needed, to identify business context: business goals, initiatives, and the organization's mission and vision.
    0.3 (Optional) CIO to compile and prioritize IT success stories.

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy.
    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context.
    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements.
    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope.

    1.2 Business goal alignment
    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis.
    1.2.2 Survey results analysis.
    1.2.3 Brainstorm goals.
    1.2.4 Perform goal association and analysis.

    2.1 Define the future state.
    2.1.1 Conduct an emerging technology discussion.
    2.1.2 Document desired future state.
    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process.
    2.1.4 Compete SWOT analysis.

    2.2 Analyze your constraints
    2.2.1 Perform a historical spend analysis.
    2.2.2 Conduct a time study.
    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks.
    .

    3.1 Align the roadmap
    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework.
    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt.

    3.2 Build the roadmap.
    3.2.1 Build effective initiative templates.
    3.2.2 Visualize.
    3.2.3 Generate new initiatives.
    3.2.4 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives.
    3.2.5 Finalize initiative candidates.

    4.2 Identify the audience
    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences.
    4.1.2 Plan the process.
    4.1.2 Identify supporters and blockers.

    4.2 Improve the process
    4.2.1 Evaluate the value of each process output.
    4.2.2 Brainstorm improvements.
    4.2.3 Set realistic measures.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    5.2 Set up time to review workshop deliverables and discuss next steps.

    1. SWOT analysis of current state
    2. Goals cascade
    3. Persona analysis
    1. Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles
    2. List of goals
    1. Spend analysis document
    2. Domain time study
    3. Prioritized list of roadblocks
    4. Future state vision document
    1. IT and business risk frameworks
    2. Technical debt assessment
    3. New technology analysis
    4. Initiative templates
    5. Initiative candidates
    1. Roadmap visualization
    2. Process schedule
    3. Communications strategy
    4. Process map
    1. Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Report

    Phase 1

    Align Strategy and Goals

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • How to build IT mission and vision statements
    • How to elicit IT guiding principles
    • How to finalize and communicate your IT strategy scope

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Step 1.1

    Develop the Infrastructure Strategy

    Activities

    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context

    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements

    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Business Mission Statement
    • Business Vision Statement
    • Business Goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement
    • Guiding principles

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Use the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template to document the results from the following activities:

    • Mission and Vision Statements
    • Business impact
    • Roadmap

    IT must aim to support the organization's mission and vision

    A mission statement

    • Focuses on today and what an organization does to achieve the mission.
    • Drives the company.
    • Answers: What do we do? Who do we serve? How do we service them?

    "A mission statement focuses on the purpose of the brand; the vision statement looks to the fulfillment of that purpose."

    A vision statement

    • Focuses on tomorrow and what an organization ultimately wants to become.
    • Gives the company direction.
    • Answers: What problems are we solving? Who and what are we changing?

    "A vision statement provides a concrete way for stakeholders, especially employees, to understand the meaning and purpose of your business. However, unlike a mission statement – which describes the who, what, and why of your business – a vision statement describes the desired long-term results of your company's efforts."
    Source: Business News Daily, 2020

    Characteristics of mission and vision statements

    A strong mission statement has the following characteristics:

    • Articulates the IT function's purpose and reason for existence.
    • Describes what the IT function does to achieve its vision.
    • Defines the customers of the IT function.
    • Is:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Concise

    A strong vision statement has the following characteristics:

    • Describes a desired future achievement.
    • Focuses on ends, not means.
    • Communicates promise.
    • Is:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Measurable

    Derive the IT mission and vision statements from the business

    Begin the process by identifying and locating the business mission and vision statements.

    • Corporate websites
    • Business strategy documents
    • Business executives

    Ensure there is alignment between the business and IT statements.

    Note: Mission statements may remain the same unless the IT department's mandate is changing.

    an image showing Business mission, IT mission, Business Vision, and IT Vison.

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 1:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate mission statement.
    2. Begin by asking the participants:
        1. What is our job as a team?
        2. What's our goal? How do we align IT to our corporate mission?
        3. What benefit are we bringing to the company and the world?
      1. Ask them to share general thoughts in a check-in.

    Step 2:

    1. Share some examples of IT mission statements.
    2. Example: IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and
      success.
    3. Provide each participant with some time to write their own version of an IT mission statement.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 3:

    This step involves reviewing individual mission statements, combining them, and building one collective mission statement for the team.

    1. Consider the following approach to build a unified mission statement:

    Use the 20x20 rule for group decision-making. Give the group no more than 20 minutes to craft a collective team purpose with no more than 20 words.

    1. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on how to write for the intended audience. Business stakeholders need business language.
    2. Refer to the corporate mission statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    3. Document your final mission statement in your ITRG Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 4:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate vision statement.
    2. Share one or more examples of vision statements.
    3. Provide participants with sticky notes and writing materials and ask them to work individually for this step.
    4. Ask participants to brainstorm:
      1. What is the desired future state of the IT organization?
      2. How should we work to attain the desired state?
      3. How do we want IT to be perceived in the desired state?
    5. Provide participants with guidelines to build descriptive, compelling, and achievable statements regarding their desired future state.
    6. Regroup as a team and review participant answers.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 5:

    1. Ask the team to post their notes on the wall.
    2. Have the team group the words that have a similar meaning or feeling behind them; this will create themes.
    3. When the group is done categorizing the statements into themes, ask if there's anything missing. Did they ensure alignment to the corporate vision statement? Are there any elements missing when considering alignment back to the corporate vision statement?

    Step 6:

    1. Consider each category as a component of your vision statement.
    2. Review each category with participants; define what the behavior looks like when it is being met and what it looks like when it isn't.
    3. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on word-smithing and finessing the language.
    4. Refer to the corporate vision statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    5. Document your final mission statement in your IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    Tips for online facilitation:

    • Pick an online whiteboard tool that allows participants to use a large, zoomable canvas.
    • Set up each topic at a different area of the board; spread them out just like you would do on the walls of a room.
    • Invite participants to zoom in and visit each section and add their ideas as sticky notes once you reach that section of the exercise.
    • If you're not using an online whiteboard, we'd recommend using a collaboration tool such as Google Docs or Teams Whiteboard to collect the information for each step under a separate heading. Invite everyone into the document but be very clear regarding editing rights.
    • Pre-create your screen deck and screen share this with your participants through your videoconferencing software. We'd also recommend sharing this so participants can go through the deck again during the reflection steps.
    • When facilitating group discussion, we'd recommend that participants use non-verbal means to indicate they'd like to speak. You can use tools like Teams' hand-raising tool, a reaction emoji, or have people put their hands up. The facilitator can then invite that person to talk.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brainstorming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    IT mission statements demonstrate IT's purpose

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statements use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements have the following characteristics:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Are:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample IT Mission Statements:

    • To provide infrastructure, support, and innovation in the delivery of secure, enterprise-grade information technology products and services that enable and empower the workforce at [Company Name].
    • To help fulfill organizational goals, the IT department is committed to empowering business stakeholders with technology and services that facilitate effective processes, collaboration, and communication.
    • The mission of the information technology (IT) department is to build a solid, comprehensive technology infrastructure; to maintain an efficient, effective operations environment; and to deliver high-quality, timely services that support the business goals and objectives of ABC Inc.
    • The IT department has operational, strategic, and fiscal responsibility for the innovation, implementation, and advancement of technology at ABC Inc. in three main areas: network administration and end-user support, instructional services, and information systems. The IT department provides leadership in long-range planning, implementation, and maintenance of information technology across the organization.
    • The IT group is customer-centered and driven by its commitment to management and staff. It oversees services in computing, telecommunications, networking, administrative computing, and technology training.

    Sample mission statements (cont'd)

    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholders through an engaged team and operational agility and deliver innovative technology and services.
    • To empower our stakeholders with innovative technology and services, through collaboration and agility.
    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholder, by delivering innovative technology and services, with an engaged team and operational agility.
    • To partner with departments and be technology leaders that will deliver innovative, secure, efficient, and cost-effective services for our citizens.
    • As a client-centric strategic partner, provide excellence in IM and IT services through flexible business solutions for achieving positive user experience and satisfaction.
    • Develop a high-performing global team that will plan and build a scalable, stable operating environment.
    • Through communication and collaboration, empower stakeholders with innovative technology and services.
    • Build a robust portfolio of technology services and solutions, enabling science-lead and business-driven success.
    • Guided by value-driven decision making, high-performing teams and trusted partners deliver and continually improve secure, reliable, scalable, and reusable services that exceed customer expectations.
    • Engage the business to grow capabilities and securely deliver efficient services to our users and clients.
    • Engage the business to securely deliver efficient services and grow capabilities for our users and clients.

    IT vision statements demonstrate what the IT organization aspires to be

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Communicate promise
    • Are:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable

    Sample IT vision statements:

    • To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce.
    • The IT organization will strive to become a world-class value center that is a catalyst for innovation.
    • IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset.
    • Develop and maintain IT and an IT support environment that is secure, stable, and reliable within a dynamic environment.

    Sample vision statements (cont'd)

    • Alignment: To ensure that the IT organizational model and all related operational services and duties are properly aligned with all underlying business goals and objectives. Alignment reflects an IT operation "that makes sense," considering the business served, its interests and its operational imperatives.
    • Engagement: To ensure that all IT vision stakeholders are fully engaged in technology-related planning and the operational parameters of the IT service portfolio. IT stakeholders include the IT performing organization (IT Department), company executives and end-users.
    • Best Practices: To ensure that IT operates in a standardized fashion, relying on practical management standards and strategies properly sized to technology needs and organizational capabilities.
    • Commitment to Customer Service: To ensure that IT services are provided in a timely, high-quality manner, designed to fill the operational needs of the front-line end-users, working within the boundaries established by business interests and technology best practices.

    Quoted From ITtoolkit, 2020

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. was able to construct its IT mission and vison statements by aligning to its corporate mission and vision.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: This case study is based on a real company but was anonymized for use in this research.

    Business

    IT

    Mission

    Vision

    Mission

    Vision

    We help IT leaders achieve measurable results by systematically improving core IT processes, governance, and critical technology projects.

    Acme Corp. will grow to become the largest research firm across the industry by providing unprecedented value to our clients.

    IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and success.

    We will relentlessly drive value to our customers through unprecedented innovation.

    IT guiding principles set the boundaries for your strategy

    Strategic guiding principles advise the IT organization on the boundaries of the strategy.

    Guiding principles are a priori decisions that limit the scope of strategic thinking to what is acceptable organizationally, from budgetary, people, and partnership standpoints. Guiding principles can cover other dimensions, as well.

    Organizational stakeholders are more likely to follow IT principles when a rationale is provided.

    After defining the set of IT principles, ensure that they are all expanded upon with a rationale. The rationale ensures principles are more likely to be followed because they communicate why the principles are important and how they are to be used. Develop the rationale for each IT principle your organization has chosen.

    IT guiding principles = IT strategy boundaries

    Consider these four components when brainstorming guiding principles

    Breadth

    of the IT strategy can span across the eight perspectives: people, process, technology, data, process, sourcing, location, and timing.

    Defining which of the eight perspectives is in scope for the IT strategy is crucial to ensuring the IT strategy will be comprehensive, relevant, and actionable.

    Depth

    of coverage refers to the level of detail the IT strategy will go into for each perspective. Info-Tech recommends that depth should go to the initiative level (i.e. individual projects).

    Organizational coverage

    will determine which part of the organization the IT strategy will cover.

    Planning horizon

    of the IT strategy will dictate when the target state should be reached and the length of the roadmap.

    Consider these criteria when brainstorming guiding principle statements

    Approach focused IT principles are focused on the approach, i.e. how the organization is built, transformed, and operated, as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.
    Business relevant Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization's priorities and strategic aspirations.
    Long lasting Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.
    Prescriptive Inform and direct decision-making with IT principles that are actionable. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    Verifiable If compliance can't be verified, the principle is less likely to be followed.
    Easily digestible IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren't a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.
    Followed

    Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously reinforced to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Review ten universal IT principles to determine if your organization wishes to adopt them

    IT principle name

    IT principle statement

    1. Enterprise value focus We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2. Fit for purpose We maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over engineering them.
    3. Simplicity We choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4. Reuse > buy > build We maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can't reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5. Managed data We handle data creation, modification, and use enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6. Controlled technical diversity We control the variety of technology platforms we use.
    7. Managed security We manage security enterprise-wide in compliance with our security governance policy.
    8. Compliance to laws and regulations We operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9. Innovation We seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10. Customer centricity We deliver best experiences to our customers with our services and products.

    1.1.3 Elicit guiding principles

    1 hour

    Objective: Generate ideas for guiding principle statements with silent sticky note writing.

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your mission and vision statements.
    2. Ask the group to brainstorm answers individually, silently writing their ideas on separate sticky notes. Provide the brainstorming criteria from the previous slide to all team members. Allow the team to put items on separate notes that can later be shuffled and sorted as distinct thoughts.
    3. After a set amount of time, ask the members of the group to stick their notes to the whiteboard and quickly present them. Categorize all ideas into four major buckets: breadth, depth, organizational coverage, and planning horizon. Ideally, you want one guiding principle to describe each of the four components.
    4. If there are missing guiding principles in any category or anyone's items inspire others to write more, they can stick those up on the wall too, after everyone has presented.
    5. Discuss and finalize your IT guiding principles.
    6. Document your guiding principles in the IT Strategy Presentation Template in Section 1.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Four components for eliciting guiding principles
    • Mission and vision statements

    Output

    • IT guiding principles
    • IT strategy scope

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Guiding principle examples

    • Alignment: Our IT decisions will align with [our organization's] strategic plan.
    • Resources: We will allocate cyber-infrastructure resources based on providing the greatest value and benefit for [the community].
    • User Focus: User needs will be a key component in all IT decisions.
    • Collaboration: We will work within and across organizational structures to meet strategic goals and identify opportunities for innovation and improvement.
    • Transparency: We will be transparent in our decision making and resource use.
    • Innovation: We will value innovative and creative thinking.
    • Data Stewardship: We will provide a secure but accessible data environment.
    • IT Knowledge and Skills: We will value technology skills development for the IT community.
    • Drive reduced costs and improved services
    • Deploy packaged apps – do not develop – retain business process knowledge expertise – reduce apps portfolio
    • Standardize/Consolidate infrastructure with key partners
    • Use what we sell, and help sell
    • Drive high-availability goals: No blunders
    • Ensure hardened security and disaster recovery
    • Broaden skills (hard and soft) across the workforce
    • Improve business alignment and IT governance

    Quoted From: Office of Information Technology, 2014; Future of CIO, 2013

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. elicited guiding principles that set the scope of its IT strategy for FY21.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: Acme Corp.

    The following guiding principles define the values that drive IT's strategy in FY23 and provide the criteria for our 12-month planning horizon.

    • We will focus on big-ticket items during the next 12 months.
    • We will keep the budget within 5%+/- YOY.
    • We will insource over outsource.
    • We will develop a cloud-first technology stack.

    Finalize your IT strategy scope

    Your mission and vision statements and your guiding principles should be the first things you communicate on your IT strategy document.

    Why is this important?

    • Communicating these elements shows how IT supports the corporate direction.
    • The vision and mission statements will clearly articulate IT's aspirations and purpose.
    • The guiding principles will clearly articulate how IT plans to support the business strategically.
    • These elements set expectations with stakeholders for the rest of your strategy.

    Input information into the IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    an image showing the IT Strategy Scope.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Established the scope of your IT strategy

    • Constructed the IT mission statement to communicate the IT organization's reason for being.
    • Constructed the IT vision statement to communicate the desired future state of the IT organization.
    • Elicited IT's guiding principles to communicate the overall scope and time horizon for the strategy.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Step 1.2

    Business Goal Alignment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1.2.2 Survey results analysis

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming

    1.2.4 Goal association and analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Last year's accomplished project list
    • Business unit input source list
    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Identify who is expecting what from the infrastructure

    "Typically, IT thinks in an IT first, business second, way: 'I have a list of problems and if I solve them, the business will benefit.' This is the wrong way of thinking. The business needs to be thought of first, then IT."

    – Fred Chagnon, Infrastructure Director,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you're not soliciting input from or delivering on the needs of the various departments in your company, then who is? Be explicit and track how you communicate with each individual unit within your company.

    Mature project portfolio management and enterprise architecture practices are no substitute for understanding your business clientele.

    It may not be a democracy, but listening to everyone's voice is an essential step toward generating a useful roadmap.

    Building good infrastructure requires an understanding of how it will be used. Explicit consultation with stakeholders maximizes a roadmap's usefulness and holds the enterprise accountable in future roadmap iterations as goals change.

    Who are the customers for infrastructure?

    Internal customer examples:

    • Network Operations manager
    • IT Systems manager
    • Webmaster
    • Security manager

    External customer examples:

    • Director of Sales
    • Operations manager
    • Applications manager
    • Clients
    • Partners and consultants
    • Regulators/government

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1 hour

    The humble checklist is the single most effective tool to ensure we don't forget someone or something:

    1. Have everyone write down their top five completed projects from last year – one project per sticky note.
    2. Organize everyone's sticky notes on a whiteboard according to input source – did these projects come from the PMO? Directly from a BRM? Service request? VP or LoB management?
    3. Make a MECE list of these sources on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    4. On the right-hand side list all the departments or functional business units within the company.
    5. Draw lines from right to left indicating which business units use which input source to request work.
    6. Optional: Rate the efficacy of each input channel – what is the success rate of projects per channel in terms of time, budget, and functionality?

    Discussion:

    1. How clearly do projects and initiatives arrive at infrastructure to be acted on? Do they follow the predictable formal process with all the needed information or is it more ad hoc?
    2. Can we validate that business units are using the correct input channel to request the appropriate work? Does infrastructure have to spend more time validating the requests of any one channel?
    3. Can we identify business units that are underserved? How about overserved? Infrastructure initiatives tend to be near universal in effect – are we forgetting anyone?
    4. Are all these methods passive (order taking), or is there a process for infrastructure to suggest an initiative or project?

    Input

    • Last year's accomplished project list

    Output

    • Work requested workflow and map

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Case Study

    Building IT governance and digital infrastructure for tech-enabled student experiences

    INDUSTRY: Education
    COMPANY: Collegis Education

    Challenge

    In 2019, Saint Francis University decided to expand its online program offering to reach students outside of its market.

    It had to first transform its operations to deliver a high-quality, technology-enabled student experience on and off campus. The remote location of the campus posed power outages, Wi-Fi issues, and challenges in attracting and retaining the right staff to help the university achieve its goals.

    It began working with an IT consulting firm to build a long-term strategic roadmap.

    Solution

    The consultant designed a strategic multi-year roadmap for digital transformation that would prioritize developing infrastructure to immediately improve the student experience and ultimately enable the university to scale its online programs. The consultant worked with school leadership to establish a virtual CIO to oversee the IT department's strategy and operations. The virtual CIO quickly became a key advisor to the president and board, identifying gaps between technology initiatives and enrollment and revenue targets. St. Francis staff also transitioned to the consultant's technology team, allowing the university to alleviate its talent acquisition and retention challenges.

    Results

    • $200,000 in funds reallocated to help with upgrades due to streamlined technology infrastructure
    • Updated card access system for campus staff and students
    • Active directory implementation for a secure and strong authentication technology
    • An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) backup is installed to ensure power continues in the event of a power outage
    • Upgrade to a reliable, campus-wide Wi-Fi network
    • Behind-the-scenes upgrades like state-of-the-art data centers to stabilize aging technology for greater reliability

    Track your annual activity by business unit – not by input source

    A simple graph showing the breakdown of projects by business unit is an excellent visualization of who is getting the most from infrastructure services.

    Show everyone in the organization that the best way to get anything done is by availing themselves of the roadmap process.

    An image of two bar graphs, # of initiatives requested
by customer; # of initiatives proposed to customer.

    Enable technology staff to engage in business storytelling by documenting known goals in a framework

    Without a goal framework

    Technology-focused IT staff are notoriously disconnected from the business process and are therefore often unable to explain the outcomes of their projects in terms that are meaningful to the business.

    With a goal framework

    When business, IT, and infrastructure goals are aligned, the business story writes itself as you follow the path of cascading goals upward.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    So many organizations we speak with don't have goals written down. This rarely means that the goals aren't known, rather that they're not clearly communicated.

    When goals aren't clear, personal agendas can take precedence. This is what often leads to the disconnect between what the business wants and what IT is delivering.

    1.2.2 Survey and results analysis

    1 hour

    Infrastructure succeeds by effectively scaling shared resources for the common good. Sometimes that is a matter of aggregating similarities, sometimes by recognizing where specialization is required.

    1. Have every business unit provide their top three to five current goals or objectives for their department. Emphasize that you are requesting their operational objectives, not just the ones they think IT may be able to help them with.
    2. Put each goal on a sticky note (optional: use a unique sticky note or marker color for each department) and place them on a whiteboard.
    3. Group the sticky notes according to common themes.
    4. Rank each grouping according to number of occurrences.

    Discussion:

    1. This is very democratic. Do certain departments' goals carry more weight more than others?
    2. What is the current business prioritization process? Do the results of our activity match with the current published output of this process?
    3. Consider each business goal in the context of infrastructure activity or technology feature or capability. As infrastructure is a lift function existing only to serve the business, it is important to understand our world in context.

    Examples: The VP of Operations is looking to reduce office rental costs over the next three years. The VP of Sales is focused on increasing the number of face-to-face customer interactions. Both can potentially be served by IT activities and technologies that increase mobility.

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming – Affinity diagramming exercise

    1 hour

    Clarify how well you understand what the business wants.

    1. Ask each participant to consider: "What are the top three priorities of the company [this period]?" They should consider not what they think the priorities should be, but their understanding of what business leadership's priorities actually are.
    2. Have each participant write down their three priorities on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Groups that become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    7. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, and the groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    8. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    Is there a lot of agreement within the group? What does it mean if there are 10 or 15 groups with equal numbers of sticky notes? What does it mean if there are a few top groups and dozens of small outliers?

    How does the group's understanding compare with that of the Director and/or CIO?

    What mechanisms are in place for the business to communicate their goals to infrastructure? Are they effective? Does the team take the time to reimagine those goals and internalize them?

    What does it mean if infrastructure's understanding differs from the business?

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Additional Activity

    Now that infrastructure has a consensus on what it thinks the business' goals are, suggest a meeting with leadership to validate this understanding. Once the first picture is drawn, a 30-minute meeting can help clear up any misconceptions.

    Build your own framework or start with these three root value drivers

    With a framework of cascading goals in place, a roadmap is a Rosetta Stone. Being able to map activities back to governance objectives allows you to demonstrate value regardless of the audience you are addressing.

    An image of the framework for developing a roadmap using three root value drivers.

    (Info-Tech, Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy 2022)

    1.2.4 Goal association exercise and analysis

    1 hour

    Wherever possible use the language of your customers to avoid confusion, but at least ensure that everyone in infrastructure is using a common language.

    1. Take your business strategy or IT strategy or survey response (Activity 1.2.3) or Info-Tech's fundamental goals list (strategic agility, improved cash flow, innovate product, safety, standardize end-user experience) and write them across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Have everyone write, on a sticky note, their current in-flight initiatives – one per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant then place each of their sticky notes on the whiteboard and draw a line from the initiative to the goal it supports.
    4. The rest of the group should challenge any relationships that seem unsupported or questionable.

    Discussion:

    1. How many goals are you supporting? Are there too many? Are you doing enough to support the right goals?
    2. Is there a shared understanding of the business goals among the infrastructure staff? Or, do questions about meaning keep coming up?
    3. Do you have initiatives that are difficult to express in terms of business goals? Do you have a lot of them or just a few?

    Input

    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    Output

    • Initiatives-to-goals map

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year.

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 2

    Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine from a greenfield perspective what the future state looks like.
    • Do SWOT analysis on technology you may plan to use in the future.
    • Complete a time study.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.1

    Define the future state

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define your future infrastructure vision

    2.1.2 Document desired future state

    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process

    2.1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Emerging technology interest

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team
    • External SMEs

    Outcomes of this step

    • Technology discovery process
    • Technology assessment process
    • Future state vision document

    Future state discussion

    "Very few of us are lucky enough to be one of the first few employees in a new organization. Those of you who get to plan the infrastructure with a blank slate and can focus all of your efforts on doing things right the first time."

    BMC, 2018

    "A company's future state is ultimately defined as the greater vision for the business. It's where you want to be, your long-term goal in terms of the ever-changing state of technology and how that applies to your present-day business."
    "Without a definitive future state, a company will often find themselves lacking direction, making it harder to make pivotal decisions, causing misalignment amongst executives, and ultimately hindering the progression and growth of a company's mission."
    Source: Third Stage Consulting

    "When working with digital technologies, it is imperative to consider how such technologies can enhance the solution. The future state should communicate the vision of how digital technologies will enhance the solutions, deliver value, and enable further development toward even greater value creation."
    Source: F. Milani

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your infrastructure roadmap as if you had a blank slate – no constraints, no technical debt, and no financial limitations. Imagine your future infrastructure and let that vision drive your roadmap.

    Expertise is not innate; it requires effort and research

    Evaluating new enterprise technology is a process of defining it, analyzing it, and sourcing it.

    • Understand what a technology is in order to have a common frame of reference for discussion. Just as important, understand what it is not.
    • Conduct an internal and external analysis of the technology including an adoption case study.
    • Provide an overview of the vendor landscape, identifying the leading players in the market and how they differentiate their offerings.

    This is not intended to be a thesis grade research project, nor an onerous duty. Most infrastructure practitioners came to the field because of an innate excitement about technology! Harness that excitement and give them four to eight hours to indulge themselves.

    An output of approximately four slides per technology candidate should be sufficient to decided if moving to PoC or pilot is warranted.

    Including this material in the roadmap helps you control the technology conversation with your audience.

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    Don't start from scratch. Recall the original sources from your technology watchlist. Leverage vendors and analyst firms (such as Info-Tech) to give the broad context, letting you focus instead on the specifics relevant to your business.

    Channel emerging technologies to ensure the rising tide floats all boats rather than capsizing your business

    Adopting the wrong new technology can be even more dangerous than failing to adopt any new technology.

    Implementing every new promising technology would cost prodigious amounts of money and time. Know the costs before choosing what to invest in.

    The risk of a new technology failing is acceptable. The risk of that failure disrupting adjacent core functions is unacceptable. Vet potential technologies to ensure they can be safely integrated.

    Best practices for new technologies are nonexistent, standards are in flux, and use cases are fuzzy. Be aware of the unforeseen that will negatively affect your chances of a successful implementation.

    "Like early pioneers crossing the American plains, first movers have to create their own wagon trails, but later movers can follow in the ruts."
    Harper Business, 2014

    Info-Tech Insight

    The right technology for someone else can easily be the wrong technology for your business.

    Even with a mature Enterprise Architecture practice, wrong technology bets can happen. Minimize the chance of this occurrence by making selection an infrastructure-wide activity. Leverage the practical knowledge of the day-to-day operators.

    First Mover

    47% failure rate

    Fast Follower

    8% failure rate

    2.1.1 Create your future infrastructure vision

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1. Ask each participant to ponder the question: "How would the infrastructure look if there were no limitations?" They should consider all aspects of their infrastructure but keep in mind the infrastructure vision and mission statements from phase one, as well as the business goals.
    2. Have each participant write down their ideas on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator and a scribe from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard. The scribe will summarize the results in short statements at the end.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes and groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    7. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    1. Assume a blank slate as a starting point. No technical debt or financial constraints; nothing holding you back.
    2. Can SaaS, PaaS, or other cloud-based offerings play a role in this future utopia?
    3. Do vendors play a larger or smaller role in your future infrastructure vision?

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.1 Document your future state vision (cont'd)

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1 hour

    Steps:

    1. The scribe will take the groups of suggestions and summarize them in a statement or two, briefly describing the infrastructure in that group.
    2. The statements should be recorded on Tab 2 of the Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool.

    Discussion:

    • Should the points be listed in any specific order?
    • Include all suggestions in the summary. Remember this is a blank slate with no constraints, and no idea is higher or lower in weight at this stage.
    Infrastructure Future State Vision
    Item Focus Area Future Vision
    1 Email Residing on Microsoft 365
    2 Servers Hosted in cloud - nothing on prem.
    3 Endpoints virtual desktops on Microsoft Azure
    4 Endpoint hardware Chromebooks
    5 Network internet only
    6 Backups cloud based but stored in multiple cloud services
    7

    Download Info-Tech's Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool and document your future state vision in the Infrastructure Future State tab.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.2 Identification and association exercise

    1 hour

    Formalize what is likely an ad hoc process.

    1. Brainstorm with the group a list of external sources they are currently using to stay abreast of the market.
    2. Organize this list on the left-hand side of a whiteboard, in vendor and vendor-neutral groups.
      1. For each item in the list ask a series of questions:
      2. Is this a push or pull source?
      3. Is this source suited to individual or group consumption?
      4. What is the frequency of this source?
    3. What is the cost of this source to the company?
    4. On the right-hand side of the whiteboard brainstorm a list of internal mechanisms for sharing new technology information. Ask about the audience, distribution mode, and frequency for each of those mechanisms.
    5. Map which of the external sources make it over to internal distribution.

    Discussion:

    1. Are we getting the most value out of our high-cost conferences? Does that information make it from the attendees to the rest of the team?
    2. Do we share information only within our domains? Or across the whole infrastructure practice?
    3. Do we have sufficient diversity of sources? Are we in danger of believing one vendor's particular market interpretation?
    4. How do we select new technologies to explore further? Make it fun – upvotes, for example.

    Input

    • Team knowledge
    • Conference notes
    • Expense reports

    Output

    • Internal socialization process
    • Tech briefings & repository

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    It is impractical for everyone to present their tech briefing at the monthly meeting. But you want to avoid a one-to-many exercise. Keep the presenter a secret until called on. Those who do not present live can still contribute their material to the technology watchlist database.

    Analyze new technologies for your future state

    Four to eight hours of research per technology can uncover a wealth of relevant information and prepare the infrastructure team for a robust discussion. Key research elements include:

    • Précis: A single page or slide that describes the technology, outlines some of the vendors, and explores the value proposition.
    • SWOT Analysis:
      • Strengths and weaknesses: What does the technology inherently do well (e.g. lots of features) and what does it do poorly (e.g. steep learning curve)?
      • Opportunities and threats: What capabilities can the technology enable (e.g. build PCs faster, remote sensing)? Why would we not want to exploit this technology (e.g. market volatility, M&As)

    a series of four screenshots from the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template slides 21, 22, 23 for sample output.

    Position infrastructure as the go-to source for information about new technology

    One way or another, tech always seems to finds its way into infrastructure's lap. Better to stay in front and act as stewards rather than cleanup crew.

    Beware airline magazine syndrome!

    Symptoms

    Pathology
    • Leadership speaking in tech buzzwords
    • Urgent meetings to discuss vaguely defined topics
    • Fervent exclamations of "I don't care how – just get it done!"
    • Management showing up on at your doorstep needing help with their new toy

    Outbreaks tend to occur in close proximity to

    • Industry trade shows
    • Excessive executive travel
    • Vendor BRM luncheons or retreats with leadership
    • Executive golf outings with old college roommates

    Effective treatment options

    1. Targeted regular communication with a technology portfolio analysis customized to the specific goals of the business.
    2. Ongoing PoC and piloting efforts with detailed results reporting.

    While no permanent cure exists, regular treatment makes this chronic syndrome manageable.

    Keep your roadmap horizon in mind

    Technology doesn't have to be bleeding edge. New-to-you can have plenty of value.

    You want to present a curated landscape of technologies, demonstrating that you are actively maintaining expertise in your chosen field.

    Most enterprise IT shops buy rather than develop their technology, which means they want to focus effort on what is market available. The outcome is that infrastructure sponsors and delivers new technologies whose capabilities and features will help the business achieve its goals on this roadmap.

    If you want to think more like a business disruptor or innovator, we suggest working through the blueprint Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.
    Explore technology five to ten years into the future!

    a quadrant analysis comparing innovation and transformation, as well as two images from Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The ROI of any individual effort is difficult to justify – in aggregate, however, the enterprise always wins!
    Money spent on Google Glass in 2013 seemed like vanity. Certainly, this wasn't enterprise-ready technology. But those early experiences positioned some visionary firms to quickly take advantage of augmented reality in 2018. Creative research tends to pay off in unexpected and unpredictable ways.
    .

    2.1.3 Working session, presentation, and feedback

    1 hour

    Complete a SWOT analysis with future state technology.

    The best research hasn't been done in isolation since the days of da Vinci.

    1. Divide the participants into small groups of at least four people.
    2. Further split those groups into two teams – the red team and the white team.
    3. Assign a technology candidate from the last exercise to each group. Ideally the group should have some initial familiarity with the technology and/or space.
    4. The red team from each group will focus on the weaknesses and threats of the technology. The white team will focus on the strengths and opportunities of the technology.
    5. Set a timer and spend the next 30-40 minutes completing the SWOT analysis.
    6. Have each group present their analysis to the larger team. Encourage conversation and debate. Capture and refine the understanding of the analysis.
    7. Reset with the next technology candidate. Have the participants switch teams within their groups.
    8. Continue until you've exhausted your technology candidates.

    Discussion:

    1. Does working in a group make for better research? Why?
    2. Do you need specific expertise in order to evaluate a technology? Is an outsider (non-expert) view sometimes valuable?
    3. Is it easier to think of the positive or the negative qualities of a technology? What about the internal or external implications?

    Input

    • Technology candidates

    Output

    • Technology analysis including SWOT

    Materials

    • Projector
    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.2

    Constraints analysis

    Activities

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Historical spend and staff numbers
    • Organizational design identification and thought experiment
    • Time study
    • Roadblock brainstorming session
    • Prioritization exercise

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Financial leader
    • HR Leader
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized roadblock list

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    "A Budget is telling your money where to go, instead of wondering where it went."
    -David Ramsay

    "Don't tell me where your priorities are. Show me where you spend your money and I'll tell you what they are"
    -James Frick, Due.com

    Annual IT budgeting aligns with business goals
    a circle showing 68%, broken down into 50% and 18%

    50% of businesses surveyed see that improvements are necessary for IT budgets to align to business goals, while 18% feel they require significant improvements to align to business goals
    Source: ITRG Diagnostics 2022

    Challenges in IT spend visibility

    68%

    Visibility of all spend data for on-prem, SaaS and cloud environments
    Source: Flexera

    The challenges that keep IT leaders up at night

    47%

    Lack of visibility in resource usage and cost
    Source: BMC, 2021

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends

    Follow the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation:

    1 hour

    1. Open the Info-Tech Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool.
    2. The Instructions tab will provide guidance, or you can follow the instructions below.
    3. Insert values into the appropriate uncolored blocks in the first 4 rows of the Spend Record Entry tab to reflect the amount spent on IT OpEx, IT CapEx, or staff numbers for the present year (budgeted) as well as the previous five years.
    4. Data input populates cells in subsequent rows to quickly reveal spending ratios.

    an image of the timeline table from the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends (cont'd)

    Continue with the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation.

    1 hour

    1. Select tab 3 (Results) to reveal a graphical analysis of your data.
    2. Trends are shown in graphs for OpEx, CapEx, and staffing levels as well as comparative graphs to show broader trends between multiple spend and staffing areas.
    3. Some observations worth noting may include the following:
      • Is OpEx spending increasing over time or decreasing?
      • Is CapEx increasing or decreasing?
      • Are OpEx and CapEx moving in the same directions?
      • Are IT staff to total staff ratios increasing or decreasing?
      • Trends will continue in the same direction unless changes are made.

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    Consider perceptions held by the enterprise when dividing infrastructure into domains

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    Internal divisions that seem important to infrastructure may have little or even negative value when it comes to users accessing their services.

    Domains are the logical divisions of work within an infrastructure practice. Historically, the organization was based around physical assets: servers, storage, networking, and end-user devices. Staff had skills they applied according to specific best practices using physical objects that provided functionality (computing power, persistence, connectivity, and interface).

    Modern enterprises may find it more effective to divide according to activity (analytics, programming, operations, and security) or function (customer relations, learning platform, content management, and core IT). As a rule, look to your organizational chart; managers responsible for buying, building, deploying, or supporting technologies should each be responsible for their own domain.

    Regardless of structure, poor organization leads to silos of marginally interoperable efforts working against each other, without focus on a common goal. Clearly defined domains ensure responsibility and allow for rapid, accurate, and confident decision making.

    • Server
    • Network
    • Storage
    • End User
    • DevOps
    • Analytics
    • Core IT
    • Security

    Info-Tech Insight

    The medium is the message. Do stakeholders talk about switches or storage or services? Organizing infrastructure to match its external perception can increase communication effectiveness and improve alignment.

    Case Study

    IT infrastructure that makes employees happier

    INDUSTRY: Services
    SOURCE: Network Doctor

    Challenge

    Atlas Electric's IT infrastructure was very old and urgently needed to be refreshed. Its existing server hardware was about nine years old and was becoming unstable. The server was running Windows 2008 R2 server operating systems that was no longer supported by Microsoft; security updates and patches were no longer available. They also experienced slowdowns on many older PCs.

    Recommendations for an upgrade were not approved due to budgetary constraints. Recommendations for upgrading to virtual servers were approved following a harmful phishing attack.

    Solution

    The following improvements to their infrastructure were implemented.

    • Installing a new physical host server running VMWare ESXi virtualization software and hosting four virtual servers.
    • Migration of data and applications to new virtual servers.
    • Upgrading networking equipment and deploying new relays, switches, battery backups, and network management.
    • New server racks to host new hardware.

    Results

    Virtualization, consolidating servers, and desktops have made assets more flexible and simpler to manage.

    Improved levels of efficiency, reliability, and productivity.

    Enhanced security level.

    An upgraded backup and disaster recovery system has improved risk management.

    Optimize where you spend your time by doing a time study

    Infrastructure activity is limited generally by only two variables: money and time. Money is in the hands of the CFO, which leaves us a single variable to optimize.

    Not all time is spent equally, nor is it equally valuable. Analysis lets us communicate with others and gives us a shared framework to decide where our priorities lie.

    There are lots of frameworks to help categorize our activities. Stephen Covey (Seven Habits of Highly Effective People) describes a four-quadrant system along the axes of importance and urgency. Gene Kim, through his character Erik in The Phoenix Project,speaks instead of business projects, internal IT projects, changes, and unplanned work.

    We propose a similar four-category system.

    Project Maintenance

    Administrative

    Reactive

    Planned activity spent pursuing a business objective

    Planned activity spent on the upkeep of existing IT systems

    Planned activity required as a condition of employment

    Unplanned activity requiring immediate response

    This is why we are valuable to our company

    We have it in our power to work to reduce these three in order to maximize our time available for projects

    Survey and analysis

    Perform a quick time study.

    Verifiable data sources are always preferred but large groups can hold each other's inherent biases in check to get a reasonable estimate.

    1 hour

    1. Organize the participants into the domain groups established earlier.
    2. On an index card have each participant independently write down the percentage of time they think their entire domain (not themselves personally) spends during the average month, quarter, or year on:
      1. Admin
      2. Reactive work
      3. Maintenance
    3. Draw a matrix on the whiteboard; collect the index cards and transcribe the results from participants into the matrix.
    4. Add up the three reported time estimates and subtract from 100 – the result is the percentage of time available for/spent on project work.

    Discussion

    1. Certain domains should have higher percentages of reactive work (think Service Desk and Network Operations Center) – can we shift work around to optimize resources?
    2. Why is reactive work the least desirable type? Could we reduce our reactive work by increasing our maintenance work?
    3. From a planning perspective, what are the implications of only having x% of time available for project work?
    4. Does it feel like backing into the project work from adding the other three together provides a reasonable assessment?

    Input

    • Domain groups

    Output

    • Time study

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 2, Capacity Analysis

    In order to quickly and easily build some visualizations for the eventual final report, Info-Tech has developed the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool.

    • Up to five infrastructure domains are supported.
      • For practices that cannot be reasonably collapsed into five domains, multiple copies of the tool can be used and manually stitched together.
    • The tool can be used in either an absolute (total number) or relative mode (percentage of available).
    • By design we specifically don't ask for a project work figure but rather calculate it based on other values.
    • For everything but miscellaneous duties, hard data sources can (and where appropriate should) be leveraged.
      • Reactive work – service desk tool
      • Project work – project management tool
      • Maintenance work – logs or ITSM tool
    • Individual domains' values are calculated, as well as the overall breakdown for the infrastructure practice.
    • Even these rough estimates will be useful during the planning steps throughout the rest of the roadmap process.

    an image of the source capacity analysis page from tab 2 of the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Please note that this tool requires Microsoft's Power Pivot add-in to be installed if you are using Excel 2010 or 2013. The scatter plot labels on tabs 5 and 8 may not function correctly in Excel 2010.

    Build your roadmap from both the top and the bottom for best results

    Strong IT strategy favors top-down: activities enabling clearly dictated goals. The bottom-up approach aggregates ongoing activities into goals.

    Systematic approach

    External stakeholders prioritize a list of goals requiring IT initiatives to achieve.

    Roadblocks:

    • Multitudes of goals easily overwhelm scant IT resources.
    • Unglamorous yet vital maintenance activities get overlooked.
    • Goals are set without awareness of IT capacity or capabilities.

    Organic approach

    Practitioners aggregate initiatives into logical groups and seek to align them to one or more business goals.

    Roadblocks:

    • Pet initiatives can be perpetuated based on cult of personality rather than alignment to business goals.
    • Funding requests can fall flat when competing against other business units for executive support.

    A successful roadmap respects both approaches.

    an image of two arrows, intersecting with the words Infrastructure Roadmap with the top arrow labeled Systematic, and the bottom arrow being labeled Organic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perfection is anathema to practicality. Draw the first picture and not only expect but welcome conflicting feedback! Socialize it and drive the conversation forward to a consensus.

    2.2.3 Brainstorming – Affinity diagramming

    Identify the systemic roadblocks to executing infrastructure projects

    1 hour

    Affinity diagramming is a form of structured brainstorming that works well with larger groups and provokes discussion.

    1. Have each participant write down their top five impediments to executing their projects from last year – one roadblock per sticky note.
    2. Once everyone has written their top five, select a moderator from the group. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their five sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    3. Have each participant then place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. The moderator will assist participants in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    5. Groups that have become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, you should be able to visually identify the greatest or most common roadblocks the group perceives.

    Discussion

    Categorize each roadblock identified as either internal or external to infrastructure's control.

    Attempt to understand the root cause of each roadblock. What would you need to ask for in order to remove the roadblock?

    Additional Research

    Also called the KJ Method (after its inventor, Jiro Kawakita, a 1960s Japanese anthropologist), this activity helps organize large amounts of data into groupings based on natural relationships while reducing many social biases.

    Input

    • Last years initiatives and their roadblocks

    Output

    • List of refined Roadblocks

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.2.4 Prioritization exercise – Card sorting

    Choose your priorities wisely.

    Which roadblocks do you need to work on? How do you establish a group sense of these priorities? This exercise helps establish priorities while reducing individual bias.

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the roadblocks identified in the previous activity – one full set of cards to each participant.
    2. Have each participant sort their set-in order of perceived priority, highest on top.
    3. Where n=number of cards in the stack, take the n-3 lowest priority cards and put a tick mark in the upper-right-hand corner. Pass these cards to the person on the left, who should incorporate them into their pile (if you start with eight cards you're ticking and passing five cards). Variation: On the first pass, allow everyone to take the most important and least important cards, write "0th" and "NIL" on them, respectively, and set them aside.
    4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for a total of n times. Treat duplicates as a single card in your hand.
    5. After the final pass, ask each participant to write the priority in the upper-left-hand corner of their top three cards.
    6. Collect all the cards, group by roadblock, count the number of ticks, and take note of the final priority.

    Discussion

    Total the number of passes (ticks) for each roadblock. A large number indicates a notionally low priority. No passes indicates a high priority.

    Are the internal or external roadblocks of highest priority? Were there similarities among participants' 0th and NILs compared to each other or to the final results?

    Input

    • Roadblock list

    Output

    • Prioritized roadblocks

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 3

    Align and Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Elicit business context from the CIO & IT team
    • Identify key initiatives that support the business
    • Identify key initiatives that enable IT excellence
    • Identify initiatives that drive technology innovation
    • Build initiative profiles
    • Construct your strategy roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap Team

    Step 3.1

    Drive business alignment

    Activities

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework

    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Intake identification and analysis
    • Survey results analysis
    • Goal brainstorming
    • Goal association and analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Speak for those with no voice – regularly review your existing portfolio of IT assets and services

    A chain is only as strong as its weakest link; while you'll receive no accolades for keeping the lights on, you'll certainly hear about it if you don't!

    Time has been a traditional method for assessing the fitness of infrastructure assets – servers are replaced every five years, core switches every seven, laptops and desktops every three. While quick, this framework of assessment is overly simplistic for most modern organizations.

    Building one that is instead based on the likelihood of asset failure plotted against the business impact of that failure is not overly burdensome and yields more practical results. Infrastructure focuses on its strength (assessing IT risk) and validates an understanding with the business regarding the criticality of the service(s) enabled by any given asset.

    Rather than fight on every asset individually, agree on a framework with the business that enables data-driven decision making.

    IT Risk Factors
    Age, Reliability, Serviceability, Conformity, Skill Set

    Business Risk Factors
    Suitability, Capacity, Safety, Criticality

    Info-Tech Insight

    Infrastructure in a cloud-enabled world: As infrastructure operations evolve it is important to keep current with the definition of an asset. Software platforms such as hypervisors and server OS are just as much an asset under the care and control of infrastructure as are cloud services, managed services from third-party providers, and traditional racks and switches.

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework – Classification exercise

    While it's not necessary for each infrastructure domain to view IT risk identically, any differences should be intensely scrutinized.

    1 hour

    1. Divide the whiteboard along the axes of IT Risk and
      Business Risk (criticality) into quadrants:
      1. High IT Risk & High Biz Risk (upper right)
      2. Low IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (bottom left)
      3. Low IT Risk & High Biz Risk (bottom right)
      4. High IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (upper left)
    2. Have each participant write the names of two or three infrastructure assets or services they are responsible or accountable for – one name per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant come one-at-a-time and place their sticky notes in one quadrant.
    4. As each additional sticky note is placed, verify with the group that the relative positioning of the others is still accurate.

    Discussion:

    1. Most assets should end up in the lower-right quadrant, indicating that IT has lowered the risk of failure commensurate to the business consequences of a failure. What does this imply about assets in the other three quadrants?
    2. Infrastructure is foundational; do we properly document and communicate all dependencies for business-critical services?
    3. What actions can infrastructure take to adjust the risk profile of any given asset?

    Input

    • List of infrastructure assets

    Output

    • Notional risk analysis

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.2 Brainstorming and prioritization exercise

    Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework.

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Give each participant an equal number (three to five) of voting dots.
    4. As a group have the participants go the whiteboard and use their dots to cast their votes for what they consider to be the most important risk element(s). Participants are free to place any number of their dots on a single element.
    5. Based on the votes cast select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    6. For each element selected, brainstorm up to six tiers of the risk scale. You can use numbers or words, whichever is most compelling.
      • E.g. Reliability: no failures, >1 incident per year, >1 incident per quarter, >1 incident per month, frequent issues, unreliable.
    7. Repeat the above except with the components of business risk. Alternately, rely on existing business risk documentation, possibly from a disaster recovery or business continuity plan.

    Discussion
    How difficult was it to agree on the definitions of the IT risk elements? What about selecting the scale? What was the voting distribution like? Were there tiers of popular elements or did most of the dots end up on a limited number of elements? What are the implications of having more elements in the analysis?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements
    • Scale dimensions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.3 Forced ranking exercise

    Alternate: Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the risk elements written down one side.
    4. Ask the participants to rank the elements in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    5. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    6. Look for elements with high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    7. Based on the results select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    8. Follow the rest of the procedure from the previous activity.

    Discussion:

    What was the total number of elements required in order to contain the full set of every participant's first-, second-, and third-ranked risks? Does this seem a reasonable number?

    Why did some elements contain both the lowest and highest rankings? Was one (or more) participant thinking consistently different from the rest of the group? Are they seeing something the rest of the group is overlooking?

    This technique automatically puts the focus on a smaller number of elements – is this effective? Or is it overly simplistic and reductionist?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.4 Consensus weighting

    Use your previous notional assessment to inform your risk weightings:

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the risk elements from the previous activity.
    2. Have the participants independently assign a weighting to each element. The assigned weights must add up to 100.
    3. Collect the cards and transcribe the results into a matrix on the whiteboard.
    4. Look for elements with high variability in the responses.
    5. Discuss and come to a consensus figure for each element's weighting.
    6. Select a variety of assets and services from the notional assessment exercise. Ensure that you have representation from all four quadrants.
    7. Using your newly defined risk elements and associated scales, evaluate as a group the values you'd suggest for each asset. Aim for a plurality of opinion rather than full consensus.
    8. Use Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool to document the elements, weightings, scales, and asset analysis.
    9. Compare the output generated by the tool (Tab 4) with the initial notional assessment.

    Discussion:

    How much framework is too much? Complexity and granularity do not guarantee accuracy. What is the right balance between effort and result?

    Does your granular assessment match your notional assessment? Why or why not? Do you need to go back and change weightings? Or reduce complexity?

    Is this a more reasonable and valuable way of periodically evaluating your infrastructure?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Weighted risk framework

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.5 Platform assessment set-up

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    The value of a risk framework is that once the heavy lifting work of building it is done, the analysis and assessment can proceed very quickly. Once built, the framework can be tweaked as necessary, rather than recreated every year.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 3.
    • Up to eight elements each of IT and business risk can be captured.
      • IT risk elements of end-of-life and dependencies are mandatory and do not count against the eight customizable elements.
    • Every element can have up to six scale descriptors. Populate them from left to right in increasing magnitude of risk.
      • Scale descriptors must be input as string values and not numeric.
    • Each element's scale can be customized from linear to a risk-adverse or risk-seeking curve. We recommend linear.

    an image of the Platform Assessment Setup Page from Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool,

    IT platform assessment

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure.

    Once configured, individual domain teams can spend surprisingly little time answering reasonably simple questions to assess their assets. The common framework lets results be compared between teams and produces a valuable visualization to communication with the business.

    • Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 4.
    • The tool has been tested successfully with up to 2,000 asset items. Don't necessarily list every asset; rather, think of the logical groups of assets you'd cycle in or out of your environment.
    • Each asset must be associated with one and only one infrastructure domain and have a defined End of Service Life date.
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful – the Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Drop-down menus for each risk element are prepopulated with the scale descriptors from Tab 3. Unused elements are greyed out.
    • Each asset can be deemed dependent on up to four additional assets or services. Use this to highlight obscure or undervalued relationships between assets. It is generally not useful to be reminded that everything relies on Cat 6 cabling.

    A series of screenshots from the IT Platform Assessment.

    Prioritized upgrades

    Validate and tweak your framework with the business

    Once the grunt work of inputting all the assets and the associated risk data has been completed, you can tweak the risk profile and sort the data to whatever the business may require.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 5.
    • IT platforms in the upper-right quadrant have an abundance of IT risk and are critical to the business.
    • The visualization can be sorted by selecting the slicers on the left. Sort by:
      • Infrastructure domain
      • Customized grouping tag
      • Top overall risk platforms
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful. The Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Risk weightings can be individually adjusted to reflect changing business priorities or shared infrastructure understanding of predictive power.
      • In order to make year-over-year comparisons valuable it is recommended that changing IT risk elements should be avoided unless absolutely necessary.

    An image of a scatter plot graph titled Prioritized Upgrades.

    Step 3.2

    Build the roadmap

    Activities

    3.2.1 Build templates and visualize

    3.2.2 Generate new initiatives

    3.2.3 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives

    3.2.4 Finalize initiative candidates

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Develop an initiative template
    • Restate the existing initiatives with the template
    • Visualize the existing initiatives
    • Brainstorm new initiatives
    • Initiative ranking
    • Solicit, evaluate, and refine shadow IT initiatives
    • Resource estimation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Initiative communication template
    • Roadmap visualization diagram

    Tell them what they really need to know

    Templates transform many disparate sources of data into easy-to-produce, easy-to-consume, business-ready documents.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the initiative from inception through executive inquiry and project management, and finally to execution. Understand an initiative's key elements that both IT and the business need defined and that are relatively static over its lifecycle.

    Initiatives are the waypoints along a roadmap leading to the eventual destination, each bringing you one step closer. Like steps, initiatives need to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as a single largely independent item. Each initiative must have two characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: Describe an explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.

    "Learn a new skill"– not an effective initiative statement.

    "Be proficient in the new skill by the end of the year" – better.

    "Use the new skill to complete a project and present it at a conference by Dec 15" – best!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Bundle your initiatives for clarity and manageability.
    Ruthlessly evaluate if an initiative should stand alone or can be rolled up with another. Fewer initiatives increases focus and alignment, allowing for better communication.

    3.2.1 Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream

    Step 1: Open Info-Tech's Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template. Determine and describe the goals that the initiative is enabling or supporting.
    Step 2: State the current pain points from the end-user or business perspective. Do not list IT-specific pain points here, such as management complexity.
    Step 3: List both the tangible (quantitative) and ancillary (qualitative) benefits of executing the project. These can be pain relievers derived from the pain points, or any IT-specific benefit not captured in Step 1.
    Step 4: List any enabled capability that will come as an output of the project. Avoid technical capabilities like "Application-aware network monitoring." Instead, shoot for business outcomes like "Ability to filter network traffic based on application type."

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 1-4 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 1-4 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sell the project to the mailroom clerk! You need to be able to explain the outcome of the project in terms that non-IT workers can appreciate. This is done by walking as far up the goals cascade as you have defined, which gets to the underlying business outcome that the initiative supports.

    Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream (cont'd)

    Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template, p. 2

    Step 5: State the risks to the business for not executing the project (and avoid restating the pain points).
    Step 6: List any known or anticipated roadblocks that may come before, during, or after executing the project. Consider all aspects of people, process, and technology.
    Step 7: List any measurable objectives that can be used to gauge the success of the projects. Avoid technical metrics like "number of IOPS." Instead think of business metrics such as "increased orders per hour."
    Step 8: The abstract is a short 50-word project description. Best to leave it as the final step after all the other aspects of the project (risks and rewards) have been fully fleshed out. The abstract acts as an executive summary – written last, read first.

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 5-8 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 5-8 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every piece of information that is not directly relevant to the interests of the audience is a distraction from the value proposition.

    Working session, presentation, and feedback

    Rewrite your in-flight initiatives to ensure you're capturing all the required information:

    1 hour

    1. Have each participant select an initiative they are responsible or accountable for.
    2. Introduce the template and discuss any immediate questions they might have.
    3. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative.
    4. Have each participant present their initiative to the group.
    5. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    6. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives.
    7. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Are there recurring topics or issues that business leaders always seem concerned about?
    Of all the information available, what consistently seems to be the talking points when discussing an initiative?

    Input

    • In-flight initiatives

    Output

    • Completed initiatives templates

    Materials

    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.2.2 Visual representations are more compelling than text alone

    Being able to quickly sort and filter data allows you to customize the visualization and focus on what matters to your audience. Any data that is not immediately relevant to them risks becoming a distraction.

    1. Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tabs 6 and 7.
    2. Up to ten goals can be supported. Input the goals into column F of the tool. Be explicit but brief.
    3. Initiatives and Obstacles can be independently defined, and the tool supports up to five subdivisions of each. Initiative by origin source makes for an interesting analysis but initially we recommend simplicity.
    4. Every Initiative and Obstacle must be given a unique name in column H. Context-sensitive drop-downs let you define the subtype and responsible infrastructure domain.
    5. Three pieces of data are captured for each initiative: Business Impact is the qualitative value to the business; Risk is the qualitative likelihood of failure – entirely or partially (e.g. significantly over budget or delayed); and Effort is a relative measure of magnitude ($ or time). Only the value for Effort must be specified.
    6. Every initiative can claim to support one or many goals by placing an "x" in the appropriate column(s).
    7. On Tab 7 you must select the initiative end date (go-live date). You can also document start date, owner, and manager if required. Remember, though, that the tool does not replace proper project management tools.

    A series of screenshots of tables, labeled A-F

    Decoding your visualization

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 8, "Roadmap"

    Visuals aren't always as clear as we assume them to be.

    An example of a roadmap visualization found in the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    If you could suggest one thing, what would it be?

    The roadmap is likely the best and most direct way to showcase our ideas to business leadership – take advantage of it.

    We've spent an awful lot of time setting the stage, deciding on frameworks so we agree on what is important. We know how to have an effective conversation – now what do we want to say?

    an image of a roadmap, including inputs passing through infrastructure & Operations; to the Move to Office 365 images found earlier in this blueprint.

    Creative thinking, presentation, and feedback

    Since we're so smart – how could we do it better?

    1 hour

    1. Introduce the Roadmap Initiative Template and discuss any immediate questions the participants might have.
    2. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative candidate.
    3. Have each author present their initiative to the group.
    4. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    5. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives
    6. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Do we think we can find business buy-in or sponsorship? Why or why not?
    Are our initiatives at odds with or complementary to the ones proposed through the normal channels?

    Input

    • Everything we know

    Output

    • Initiative candidates

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Initiatives Template
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Forced Ranking Exercise

    Showcase only your best and brightest ideas:

    1 hour

    1. Write the initiative titles from the previous exercise across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the initiative titles written down one side.
    3. Ask each participant to rank the initiatives in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    4. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    5. Look at the results with an eye toward high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    6. Based on the results, select (through democratic vote or authoritarian fiat – Director or CIO) a reasonable number of initiatives.
    7. Refine the selected initiative templates for inclusion in the roadmap.

    Discussion:
    Do participants tend to think their idea is the best and rank it accordingly?
    If so, then is it better to look at the second, third, and fourth rankings for consensus instead?
    What is a reasonable number of initiatives to suggest? How do we limit ourselves?

    Input

    • Infrastructure initiative candidates

    Output

    • Infrastructure initiatives

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Who else might be using technology to solve business problems?

    Shadow IT operates outside of the governance and control structure of Enterprise IT and so is, by definition, a problem. an opportunity!

    Except for that one thing they do wrong, that one small technicality, they may well do everything else right.

    Consider:

    1. Shadow IT evolves to solve a problem or enable an activity for a specific group of users.
    2. This infers that because stakeholders spend their own resources resolving a problem or enabling an action, it is a priority.
    3. The technology choices they've made have been based solely on functionality for value, unrestrained by any legacy of previous decisions.
    4. Staffing demands and procedural issues must be modest or nonexistent.
    5. The users must be engaged, receptive to change, and tolerant of stutter steps toward a goal.

    In short, shadow IT can provide fully vetted infrastructure initiatives that with a little effort can be turned into easy wins on the roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Shadow IT can include business-ready initiatives, needing only minor tweaking to align with infrastructure's best practices.

    3.2.3 Survey and hack-a-thon

    Negotiate amnesty with shadow IT by evaluating their "hacks" for inclusion on the roadmap.

    1 hour

    1. Put out an open call for submissions across the enterprise. Ask "How do you think technology could help you solve one of your pain points?" Be specific.
    2. Gather the responses into a presentable format and assemble the roadmap team.
    3. Use voting dots (three per person) to filter out a shortlist.
    4. Invite the original author to come in and work with a roadmap team member to complete the template.
    5. Reassemble the roadmap team and use the forced ranking exercise to select initiatives to move forward.

    Discussion:
    Did you learn anything from working directly with in-the-trenches staff? Can those learnings be used elsewhere in infrastructure? Or in larger IT?

    Input

    • End-user ideas

    Output

    • Roadmap initiatives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots
    • Index cards
    • Templates

    Participants

    • Enthusiastic end users
    • Roadmap team
    • Infrastructure leader

    3.2.4 Consensus estimation

    Exploit the wisdom of groups to develop reasonable estimates.

    1 hour

    Also called scrum poker (in Agile software circles), this method reduces anchoring bias by requiring all participants to formulate and submit their estimates independently and simultaneously.

    Equipment: A typical scrum deck shows the Fibonacci sequence of numbers, or similar progression, with the added values of ∞ (project too big and needs to be subdivided), and a coffee cup (need a break). Use of the (mostly) Fibonacci sequence helps capture the notional uncertainty in estimating larger values.

    1. The infrastructure leader, who will not play, moderates the activity. A "currency" of estimation is selected. This could be person, days, or weeks, or a dollar value in the thousands or tens of thousands – whatever the group feels they can speak to authoritatively.
    2. The author of each initiative gives a short overview, and the participants are given the chance to ask questions and clarify assumptions and risks.
    3. Participants lay a card representing their estimate face down on the table. Estimates are revealed simultaneously.
    4. Participants with the highest and lowest estimates are given a soapbox to offer justification. The author is expected to provide clarifications. The moderator drives the conversation.
    5. The process is repeated until consensus is reached (decided by the moderator).
    6. To structure discussion, the moderator can impose time limits between rounds.

    Discussion:

    How often was the story unclear? How often did participants have to ask for additional information to make their estimate? How many rounds were required to reach consensus?
    Does number of person, days, or weeks, make more sense than dollars? Should we estimate both independently?
    Source: Scrum Poker

    Input

    • Initiative candidates from previous activity

    Output

    • Resourcing estimates

    Materials

    • Scrum poker deck

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 6, "Initiatives & Goals" and Tab 7, "Timeline"

    Add your ideas to the visualization.

    • An initiative subtype can be useful here to differentiate infrastructure-sponsored initiatives from traditional ones.
    • Goal alignment is as important as always – ideally you want your sponsored initiatives to fill gaps or support the highest-priority business goals.
    • The longer-term roadmap is an excellent parking lot for ideas, especially ones the business didn't even know they wanted. Make sure to pull those ideas forward, though, as you repeat the process periodically.

    An image containing three screenshots of timeline tables from the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Pulling it all together – the published report

    We started with eight simple questions. Logically, the answers suggest sections for a published report. Developing those answers in didactic method is effective and popular among technologists as answers build upon each other. Business leaders and journalists, however, know never to bury the lead.

    Report Section Title Roadmap Activity or Step
    Sunshine diagram Visualization
    Priorities Understand business goals
    Who we help Evaluate intake process
    How we can help Create initiatives
    What we're working on Review initiatives
    How you can help us Assess roadblocks
    What is new Assess new technology
    How we spend our day Conduct a time study
    What we have Assess IT platform
    We can do better! Identify process optimizations

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 4

    Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify authors and target audiences
    • Understand the planning process
    • Identify if the process outputs have value
    • Set up realistic KPIs

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Step 4.1

    Identify the audience

    Activities

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    4.1.2 Planning the process

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Identify required authors and target audiences
    • Plan the process
    • Identify supporters and blockers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process schedule
    • Communication strategy

    Again! Again!

    And you thought we were done. The roadmap is a process. Set a schedule and pattern to the individual steps.

    Publishing an infrastructure roadmap once a year as a lead into budget discussion is common practice. But this is just the last in a long series of steps and activities. Balance the effort of each activity against its results to decide on a frequency. Ensure that the frequency is sufficient to allow you to act on the results if required. Work backwards from publication to develop the schedule.

    an image of a circle of questions around the Infrastructure roadmap.

    A lot of work has gone into creating this final document. Does a single audience make sense? Who else may be interested in your promises to the business? Look back at the people you've asked for input. They probably want to know what this has all been about. Publish your roadmap broadly to ensure greater participation in subsequent years.

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    1 hour

    Identification and association

    Who needs to hear (and more importantly believe) your message? Who do you need to hear from? Build a communications plan to get the most from your roadmap effort.

    1. Write your eight roadmap section titles in the middle of a whiteboard.
    2. Make a list of everyone who answered your questions during the creation of this roadmap. Write these names on a single color of sticky notes and place them on the left side.
    3. Make a list of everyone who would be (or should be) interested in what you have to say. Write these names on a different single color of sticky notes and place them on the right side.
    4. Draw lines between the stickies and the relevant section of the roadmap. Solid lines indicate a must have communication while dashed lines indicate a nice-to-have communication.
    5. Come to a consensus.

    Discussion:

    How many people appear in both lists? What are the implications of that?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    4.1.2 Planning the process and scheduling

    The right conversation at the right time

    Due Date (t) Freq Mode Participants Infrastructure Owner
    Update & Publish

    Start of Budget Planning

    Once

    Report

    IT Steering Committee

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    Evaluate Intakes

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 8 months

    Biannually

    Review

    PMO

    Service Desk

    Domain Heads

    Assess Roadblocks

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 5 months

    (t) - 8 months

    (t) - 11 months

    Quarterly

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Time Study

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Inventory Assessment

    (t) - 2 months

    Annually

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Business Goals

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Survey

    Line of Business Managers

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    New Technology Assessment

    monthly

    (t) - 2 months

    Monthly/Annually

    Process

    Domain Staff

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Review

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Review

    PMO

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Creation

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Roadmap Team

    Infrastructure Leader

    The roadmap report is just a point-in-time snapshot, but to be most valuable it needs to come at the end of a full process cycle. Know your due date, work backwards, and assign responsibility.

    Discussion:

    1. Do each of the steps make sense? Is the outcome clear and does it flow naturally to where it will be useful?
    2. Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing to much for not enough return?
    3. Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap process milestones

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Template

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Tailor your messaging to secure stakeholders' involvement and support

    If your stakeholders aren't on board, you're in serious trouble.

    Certain stakeholders will not only be highly involved and accountable in the process but may also be responsible for approving the roadmap and budget, so it's essential that you get their buy-in upfront.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    Classification and Strategy

    1 hour

    You may want to restrict participation to senior members of the roadmap team only.

    This activity requires a considerable degree of candor in order to be effective. It is effectively a political conversation and as such can be sensitive.

    Steps:

    1. Review your sticky notes from the earlier activity (list of input and output names).
    2. Place each name in the corresponding quadrant of a 2x2 matrix like the one on the right.
    3. Come to a consensus on the placement of each sticky note.

    Input

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Output

    • Communications strategy & plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Senior roadmap team

    Step 4.2

    Process improvement

    Activities

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    4.2.2 Brainstorming improvements

    4.2.3 Setting realistic measures

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Evaluating the efficacy of each process output
    • Brainstorming improvements
    • Setting realistic measures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process map
    • Process improvement plan

    Continual improvement

    Not just for the DevOps hipsters!

    You started with a desire – greater satisfaction with infrastructure from the business. All of the inputs, processes, and outputs exist only, and are designed solely, to serve the attainment of that outcome.

    The process outlined is not dogma; no element is sacrosanct. Ruthlessly evaluate the effectiveness of your efforts so you can do better next time.

    You would do no less after a server migration, network upgrade, or EUC rollout.

    Consider these four factors to help make your infrastructure roadmap effort more successful.

    Leadership
    If infrastructure leaders aren't committed, then this will quickly become an exercise of box-checking rather than candid communication.

    Data
    Quantitative or qualitative – always try to go where the data leads. Reduce unconscious bias and be surprised by the insight uncovered.

    Metrics
    Measurement allows management but if you measure the wrong thing you can game the system, cheating yourself out of the ultimate prize.

    Focus
    Less is sometimes more.

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    Understanding why and how individual steps are effective (or not) is how we improve the outcome of any process.

    1 hour

    1. List each of the nine roadmap steps on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    2. Ask the participants "Why was this step included? Did it accomplish its objective?" Consider using a reduced scale affinity diagramming exercise for this step.
    3. Consider the priority characteristics of each step; try to be as universal as possible (every characteristic will ideally apply to each step).
    4. Include two columns at the far right: "Improvement" and "Expected Change."
    5. Populate the table. If this is your first time, brainstorm reasonable objectives for your left-hand columns. Otherwise, document the reality of last year and focus on brainstorming the right-hand columns.
    6. Optional: Conduct a thought experiment and brainstorm tension metrics to establish whether the process is driving the outcomes we desire.
    7. Optional: Consider Info-Tech's assertion about the four things a roadmap can do. Brainstorm KPIs that you can measure yearly. What else would you want the roadmap to be able to do?

    Discussion:

    Did the group agree on the intended outcome of each step? Did the group think the step was effective? Was the outcome clear and did it flow naturally to where it was useful?
    Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing too much for not enough return?
    Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap process steps

    Output

    • Process map
    • Improvement targets & metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Map Template (see next slide)

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Process map template

    Replace the included example text with your inputs.

    Freq.MethodMeasuresSuccess criteria

    Areas for improvement

    Expected change

    Evaluate intakesBiannuallyPMO Intake & Service RequestsProjects or Initiatives% of departments engaged

    Actively reach out to underrepresented depts.

    +10% engagement

    Assess roadblocksQuarterlyIT All-Staff MeetingRoadblocks% of identified that have been resolved

    Define expected outcomes of removing roadblock

    Measurable improvements

    Time studyQuarterly IT All-Staff MeetingTimeConfidence value of data

    Real data sources (time sheets, tools, etc.)

    85% of sources defensible

    Legacy asset assessmentAnnuallyDomain effortAsset Inventory Completeness of Inventory
    • Compare against Asset Management database
    • Track business activity by enabling asset(s)
    • > 95% accuracy/
      completeness
    • Easier business risk framework conversations
    Understand business goalsAnnuallyRoadmap MeetingGoal listGoal specificity

    Survey or interview leadership directly

    66% directly attributable participation

    New technology assessmentMonthly/AnnuallyTeam/Roadmap MeetingTechnologies Reviewed IT staff participation/# SWOTs

    Increase participation from junior members

    50% presentations from junior members

    Initiative review

    Quarterly

    IT All-Staff Meeting

    • Status Review
    • Template usage
    • Action taken upon review
    • Template uptake
    • Identify predictive factors
    • Improve template
    • 25% of yellow lights to green
    • -50% requests for additional info

    Initiative creation

    Annually Roadmap MeetingInitiatives# of initiatives proposedBusiness uptake+25% sponsorship in 6 months (biz)

    Update and publish

    AnnuallyPDF reportRoadmap Final ReportLeadership engagement Improve audience reach+15% of LoB managers have read the report

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will improve through:

    1. Increased communication. More information being shared to more people who need it.
    2. Better planning. More accurate information being shared.
    3. Reduced lead times. Less due diligence or discovery work required as part of project implementations.
    4. Faster delivery times. Less less-valuable work, freeing up more time to project work.
    Metric description Current metric Future goal
    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies
    # of PoCs conducted each year
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1yr
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal
    # of technologies deployed being used by more than the original business sponsor
    # of PMO delays due to resource contention

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Draw the first picture.

    Highly engaged and effective team members are proactive rather than reactive. Instead of waiting for clear inputs from the higher ups, take what you do know, make some educated guesses about the rest, and present that to leadership. Where thinking diverges will be crystal clear and the necessary adjustments will be obvious.

    Insight 2

    Infrastructure must position itself as the broker for new technologies.

    No man is an island; no technology is a silo. Infrastructure's must ensure that everyone in the company benefits from what can be shared, ensure those benefits are delivered securely and reliably, and prevent the uninitiated from making costly technological mistakes. It is easier to lead from the front, so infrastructure must stay on top of available technology.

    Insight 3

    The roadmap is a process that is business driven and not a document.

    In an ever-changing world the process of change itself changes. We know the value of any specific roadmap output diminishes quickly over time, but don't forget to challenge the process itself from time to time. Striving for perfection is a fool's game; embrace constant updates and incremental improvement.

    Insight 4

    Focus on the framework, not the output.

    There usually is no one right answer. Instead make sure both the business and infrastructure are considering common relevant elements and are working from a shared set of priorities. Data then, rather than hierarchical positioning or a d20 Charisma roll, becomes the most compelling factor in making a decision. But since your audience is in hierarchical ascendency over you, make the effort to become familiar with their language.

    4.2.3 Track metrics throughout the project to keep stakeholders informed

    An effective strategic infrastructure roadmap should help to:

    1. Initiate a schedule of infrastructure projects to achieve business goals.
    2. Adapt to feedback from executives on changing business priorities.
    3. Curate a portfolio of enabling technologies that align to the business whether growing or stabilizing.
    4. Manage the lifecycle of aging equipment in order to meet capacity demands.
    Metric description

    Metric goal

    Checkpoint 1

    Checkpoint 2

    Checkpoint 3

    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month >1
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages >5
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies >10%
    # of PoCs conducted each year 4
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure 4
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1 year 1
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal 1
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework 100%

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Document your Cloud Strategy
    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it's just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas.

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy
    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. But there's no value in data for data's sake. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an ITAM strategy that maximizes the value they can deliver as service provider.

    Infrastructure & Operations Research Center
    Practical insights, tools, and methodologies to systematically improve IT Infrastructure & Operations.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge gained

    • Deeper understanding of business goals and priorities
    • Key data the business requires for any given initiative
    • Quantification of risk
    • Leading criteria for successful technology adoption

    Processes optimized

    • Infrastructure roadmap
    • Initiative creation, estimation, evaluation, and prioritization
    • Inventory assessment for legacy infrastructure debt
    • Technology adoption

    Deliverables completed

    • Domain time study
    • Initiative intake analysis
    • Prioritized roadblock list
    • Goal listing
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Infrastructure inventory assessment
    • New technology analyzes
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • Process map
    • Roadmap report

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    "10 Essential KPIs for the IT Strategic Planning Process." Apptio Inc, Dec. 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Amos, Justin. "8 areas your 2022 IT Infrastructure roadmap should cover." Soma, 24 Jan 2022 Accessed Nov. 2022
    Ahmed, Anam. "Importance of Mission Vision in Organizational Strategy." Chron, 14 March 2019. Accessed 10 May 2021. ."
    Barker, Joel A. "Joel A Barker Quote about Vision." Joel A Barker.com. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Bhagwat, Swapnil ."Top IT Infrastructure Management Strategies For 2023 , Atlas Systems, 23 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Blank, Steve. "You're Better Off Being A Fast Follower Than An Originator." Business Insider. 5 Oct. 2010. Web.
    Bridges, Jennifer . "IT Risk Management Strategies and Best Practices." Project Manager, 6 Dec 2019. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Building a Technology Roadmap That Stabilizes and Transforms." Collegis Education. Accessed Dec 2022.
    Collins, Gavin. "WHY AN IT INFRASTRUCTURE ROAD MAP?." Fifth Step, Date unknown. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Define the Business Context Needed to Complete Strategic IT Initiatives: 2018 Blueprint - ResearchAndMarkets.com." Business Wire, 1 Feb. 2018. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    De Vos, Colton. “Well-Developed IT Strategic Plan Example." Resolute Tech Solutions, 6 Jan 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Gray, Dave. "Post-Up." Gamestorming, 15 Oct. 2010. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Helm, Clay. "Majority of Surveyed Companies are Not Prepared for IT Needs of the Future." IBM Study, 4 Jan 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Hertvik, Joe. "8 Components of A Great IT Strategy, BMC Blogs, 29 May. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    ISACA, "Effective governance at your Fingertips". COBIT Framework, Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Guiding Principles." Office of Information Technology, NC State University, 2014-2020. Accessed 9 Nov 2022.
    ""IT Infrastructure That Makes Employees Happier." Network Doctor, 2021. Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Road mapping Helps Dura Remain at the Forefront of Auto Manufacturing." Performance Improvement Partners, ND. Accessed Dec 2022.
    ITtoolkit.com. "The IT Vision: A Strategic Path to Lasting IT Business Alignment." ITtoolkit Magazine, 2020. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Kark, Khalid. "Survey: CIOs Are CEOs' Top Strategic Partner." CIO Journal, The Wall Street Journal, 22 May 2020. Accessed 11 May 2021.
    Kimberling, Eric. "What is "Future State" and Why is it Important?" Third Stage Consulting, 11 June 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Kishore. "The True Cost of Keeping the Lights On." Optanix, 1 Feb. 2017. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Lakein, Alan. Libquotes.
    Mindsight. "THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO CREATING A TECHNOLOGY ROADMAP" Mind sight, 12 Dec 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Milani, F. (2019). Future State Analysis. In: Digital Business Analysis. Springer, Cham. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-05719-0_13
    Newberry, Dennis. "Meeting the Challenges of Optimizing IT Cost and Capacity Management." BMC, 2021, Accessed 12 Nov 2022.
    Peek, Sean. "What Is a Vision Statement?" Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Ramos, Diana. "Infrastructure Management 101: A Beginner's Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Smartsheet.com. 30 Nov 2021. Accessed 09 Dec 2022.
    Ramsey, Dave. "Dave Rant: How to Finally Take Control of Your Money." Ramseysolutions. 26 Aug 2021. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Richards-Gustafson, Flora. "5 Core Operational Strategies." Chron, 8 Mar 2019. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Richardson, Nigel. "What are the differences between current and future state maps?." Nexus, 18 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Roush, Joe. "IT Infrastructure Planning: How To Get Started." BMC. 05 January, 2018. Accessed 24 Jan 2023.
    Shields, Corey. "A Complete Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Ntiva, 15 Sept. 2020. Accessed 28 Nov. 2022.
    Snow, Shane. "Smartcuts: How Hackers, Innovators, and Icons Accelerate Success." Harper Business, 2014.
    Strohlein, Marc. "The CIO's Guide to Aligning IT Strategy with the Business." IDC, 2019. Accessed Nov 2022.
    Sull, Sull, and Yoder. "No One Knows Your Strategy — Not Even Your Top Leaders." MIT Sloan. 12 Feb 2018. Accessed 26 Jan 2023.
    "Team Purpose & Culture." Hyper Island. Accessed 10 Nov. 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse, 2022." Flexera, Jan 2022, Accessed 15 Nov 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse." Flexera, Dec. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "The Definitive Guide to Developing an IT Strategy and Roadmap" CIO Pages.com , 5 Aug 13 2022. Accessed 30 Nov. 2022.
    Wei, Jessica. "Don't Tell Me Where Your Priorities Are – James W. Frick." Due.com, 21 Mar 2022. Accessed 23 Nov 2022.
    Zhu, Pearl. "How to Set Guiding Principles for an IT Organization." Future of CIO, 1 July 2013. Accessed 9 June 2021.

    Improve IT Operations With AI and ML

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}454|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Many IT departments experience difficulty with meeting the business' expectations for service delivery on a regular basis.
    • Despite significant investment in improving various areas of IT operations, you still feel like you’re constantly firefighting.
    • To tackle these issues, businesses tend to invest in purchasing multiple solutions. This not only complicates their IT operations, but also, in some cases, deteriorates functionality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To leverage AI capabilities, you first need to assess the current state of your IT operations and know what your priorities are.
    • Contemplate use cases that will get the most benefit from automation and start with processes that you are relatively comfortable handling.
    • Analyze your initial plan to identify easy wins, then expand your AIOps.

    Impact and Result

    • Perform a current state assessment to spot which areas within your operations management are the least mature and causing you the most grief. Identify which functional areas within operations management need to be prioritized for improvement.
    • Make a shortlist of use cases that will get the most benefit from AI-based technology.
    • Prepare a plan to deploy AI capabilities to improve your IT operations.

    Improve IT Operations With AI and ML Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out about the latest improvements in AIOps and how these can help you improve your IT operations. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of IT operations management

    Identify where your organization currently stands in its operations management practices.

    • AIOps Project Summary Template
    • AIOps Prerequisites Assessment Tool

    2. Identify initiatives that align with operations requirements

    Recognize the benefits of AI and ML for your business. Determine the necessary roles and responsibilities for potential initiatives, then develop and assess your shortlist.

    • AIOps RACI Template
    • AIOps Shortlisting Tool

    3. Develop the AI roadmap

    Analyze your ROI for AIOps and create an action plan. Communicate your AI and ML initiatives to stakeholders to obtain their support.

    • AIOps ROI Calculator
    • AIOps Roadmap Tool
    • AIOps Communications Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}363|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,110 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • Statistics show that the top priority of 85% of CIOs is insight and intelligence. Yet an appetite for intelligence does not mean that business intelligence initiatives will be an automatic success. In fact, many industry studies found that only 30% to 50% of organizations considered their BI initiative to be a complete success. It is, therefore, imperative that organizations take the time to select and implement a BI suite that aligns with business goals and fosters end-user adoption.
    • The multitude of BI offerings creates a busy and sometimes overwhelming vendor landscape. When selecting a solution, you have to make sense of the many offerings and bridge the gap between what is out there and what your organization needs.
    • BI is more than software. A BI solution has to effectively address business needs and demonstrate value through content and delivery once the platform is implemented.
    • Another dimension of the success of BI is the quality and validity of the reports and insights. The overall success of the BI solution is only as good as the quality of data fueling them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business intelligence starts with data management. Without data management, including governance and data quality capabilities, your BI users will not be able to get the insights they need due to inaccurate and unavailable data.
    • When selecting a BI tool, it is crucial to ensure that the tool is fit for the purpose of the organization. Ensure alignment between the business drivers and the tool capabilities.
    • Self-serve BI requires a measured approach. Self-serve BI is meant to empower users to make more informed and faster decisions. But uncontrolled self-serve BI will lead to report chaos and prevent users from getting the most out of the tool. You must govern self-serve before it gets out of hand.

    Impact and Result

    • Evaluate your organization and land yourself into one of our three BI use cases. Find a BI suite that best suits the use case and, therefore, your organization.
    • Understand the ever-changing BI market. Get to know the established vendors as well as the emerging players.
    • Define BI requirements comprehensively through the lens of business, data, architecture, and user groups. Evaluate requirements to ensure they align with the strategic goals of the business.

    Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should select and implement a business intelligence and analytics solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch a BI selection project

    Promote and get approval for the BI selection and implementation project.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 1: Launch a BI Selection Project
    • BI Score Calculator
    • BI Project Charter

    2. Select a BI solution

    Select the most suitable BI platform.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 2: Select a BI Solution
    • BI Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool
    • BI Planning and Scoring Tool
    • BI Vendor Demo Script
    • BI Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • BI Request for Proposal Template

    3. Implement the BI solution

    Build a sustainable BI program.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 3: Implement the BI Solution
    • BI Test Plan Template
    • BI Implementation Planning Tool
    • BI Implementation Work Breakdown Structure Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch a BI Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Identify the scope and objectives of the workshop.

    Discuss the benefits and opportunities related to a BI investment.

    Gain a high-level understanding of BI and the BI market definitions and details.

    Outline a project plan and identify the resourcing requirements for the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine workshop scope.

    Identify the business drivers and benefits behind a BI investment.

    Outline the project plan for the organization’s BI selection project.

    Determine project resourcing.

    Identify and perform the steps to launch the organization’s selection project.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify business drivers for investing in process automation technology.

    1.2 Identify the organization’s fit for a BI investment.

    1.3 Create a project plan.

    1.4 Identify project resourcing.

    1.5 Outline the project’s timeline.

    1.6 Determine key metrics.

    1.7 Determine project oversight.

    1.8 Complete a project charter.

    Outputs

    Completion of a project charter

    Launched BI selection project

    2 Analyze BI Requirements and Shortlist Vendors

    The Purpose

    Identify functional requirements for the organization’s BI suite.

    Determine technical requirements for the organization’s BI suite.

    Identify the organization’s alignment to the Vendor Landscape’s use-case scenarios.

    Shortlist BI vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented functional requirements.

    Documented technical requirements.

    Identified use-case scenarios for the future BI solution.

    Activities

    2.1 Interview business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff.

    2.3 Consolidate interview findings.

    2.4 Build the solution’s requirements package.

    2.5 Identify use-case scenario alignment.

    2.6 Review Info-Tech’s BI Vendor Landscape results.

    2.7 Create custom shortlist.

    Outputs

    Documented requirements for the future solution.

    Identification of the organization’s BI functional use-case scenarios.

    Shortlist of BI vendors.

    3 Plan the Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Identify the steps for the organization’s implementation process.

    Select the right BI environment.

    Run a pilot project.

    Measure the value of your implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Install a BI solution and prepare the BI solution in a way that allows intuitive and interactive uses.

    Keep track of and quantify BI success.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the right environment for the BI platform.

    3.2 Configure the BI implementation.

    3.3 Conduct a pilot to get started with BI and to demonstrate BI possibilities.

    3.4 Promote BI development in production.

    Outputs

    A successful BI implementation.

    BI is architected with the right availability.

    BI ROI is captured and quantified.

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}554|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • The proliferation of social media networks, customer data, and use cases has made ad hoc social media management challenging.
    • Many organizations struggle with shadow IT when it comes to technology enablement for social media; SMMP fragmentation leads to increased costs and no uniformity in enterprise social media management capabilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • SMMP selection must be driven by your overall customer experience management strategy; link your SMMP selection to your organization’s CXM framework.
    • Shadow IT will dominate if IT does not step in. Even more so than other areas, SMMP selection is rife with shadow IT.
    • Ensure strong points of integration between SMMP and other software such as CRM. SMMPs can contribute to a unified, 360-degree customer view.

    Impact and Result

    • The value proposition of SMMPs revolves around enhancing the effectiveness and efficiency of social media. Using an SMMP to manage social media is considerably more cost effective than ad hoc (manual) management.
    • IT must partner with other departments (e.g. Marketing) to successfully evaluate, select, and implement an SMMP. Before selecting an SMMP, the organization must have a solid overall strategy for leveraging social media in place. If IT does not work as a trusted advisor to the business, shadow IT in social media management will be rampant.

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement an SMMP, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a technology enablement approach

    Conduct a maturity assessment to determine whether a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization.

    • Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform – Phase 1: Develop a Technology Enablement Approach for Social Media
    • Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool
    • SMMP Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2. Select an SMMP

    Use the Vendor Landscape findings and project guidance to develop requirements for your SMMP RFP, and evaluate and shortlist vendors based on your expressed requirements.

    • Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform – Phase 2: Select an SMMP
    • SMMP Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • SMMP Vendor Demo Script
    • SMMP RFP Template
    • SMMP RFP Evaluation and Scoring Tool
    • Vendor Response Template

    3. Review implementation considerations

    Even a solution that is a perfect fit for an organization will fail to generate value if it is not properly implemented or measured. Conduct the necessary planning before implementing your SMMP.

    • Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform – Phase 3: Review Implementation Considerations
    • Social Media Steering Committee Charter Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch Your SMMP Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for the SMMP selection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine your organization’s readiness for SMMP.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify organizational fit for the technology.

    1.2 Evaluate social media opportunities within your organization.

    1.3 Determine the best use-case scenario for your organization.

    Outputs

    Organizational maturity assessment

    SMMP use-case fit assessment

    2 Plan Your Procurement and Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Plan the procurement and implementation of the SMMP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Select an SMMP.

    Review implementation considerations.

    Activities

    2.1 Review use-case scenario results, identify use-case alignment

    2.2 Review the SMMP Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.

    2.3 Create a custom vendor shortlist and investigate additional vendors for exploration in the marketplace.

    2.4 Meet with the project manager to discuss results and action items.

    Outputs

    Vendor shortlist

    SMMP RFP

    Vendor evaluations

    Selection of an SMMP

    Framework for SMMP deployment and integration

    Further reading

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    Rein in social media by choosing a management platform that’s right for you.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Enterprise use of social media for customer interaction has exploded. Select the right management platform to maximize the value of your social initiatives.

    Social media has rapidly become a ubiquitous channel for customer interaction. Organizations are using social media for use cases from targeted advertising, to sales prospecting, to proactive customer service. However, the growing footprint of social media initiatives – and the constant proliferation of new social networks – has created significant complexity in effectively capturing the value of social.

    Organizations that are serious about social manage this complexity by leveraging dedicated social media management platforms. These platforms provide comprehensive capabilities for managing multiple social media networks, creating engagement and response workflows, and providing robust social analytics. Selecting a best-fit SMMP allows for standardized, enterprise-wide capabilities for managing all aspects of social media.

    This report will help you define your requirements for social media management and select a vendor that is best fit for your needs, as well as review critical implementation considerations such as CRM integration and security.

    Ben Dickie
    Research Director, Enterprise Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Social media has reached maturity as a proven, effective channel for customer interaction across multiple use cases, from customer analytics to proactive customer service.
    • Organizations are looking to IT to provide leadership with social media technology enablement and integration with other enterprise systems.

    Complication

    • The proliferation of social media networks, customer data, and use cases has made ad hoc social media management challenging.
    • Many organizations struggle with shadow IT when it comes to technology enablement for social media; SMMP fragmentation leads to increased costs and no uniformity in enterprise social media management capabilities.

    Resolution

    • Social media management platforms (SMMPs) reduce complexity and increase the results of enterprise social media initiatives. SMMPs integrate with a variety of different social media services, including Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and YouTube. The platforms offer a variety of tools for managing social media, including account management, in-band response and engagement, and social monitoring and analytics.
    • The value proposition of SMMPs revolves around enhancing the effectiveness and efficiency of social media. Using an SMMP to manage social media is considerably more cost effective than ad hoc (manual) management.
    • IT must partner with other departments (e.g. Marketing) to successfully evaluate, select, and implement an SMMP. Before selecting an SMMP, the organization must have a solid overall strategy for leveraging social media in place. If IT does not work as a trusted advisor to the business, shadow IT in social media management will be rampant.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. SMMP selection must be driven by your overall customer experience management strategy: link your SMMP selection to your organization’s CXM framework.
    2. Shadow IT will dominate if IT does not step in: even more so than other areas, SMMP selection is rife with shadow IT.
    3. Ensure strong points of integration between SMMP and other software such as customer relationship management (CRM). SMMPs can contribute to a unified, 360-degree customer view.

    Framing the SMMP selection and implementation project

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • IT directors advising the business on how to improve the effectiveness and efficiency of social media campaigns through technology.
    • IT professionals involved in evaluating, selecting, and deploying an SMMP.
    • Business analysts tasked with collection and analysis of SMMP business requirements.
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Clearly link your business requirements to SMMP selection criteria.
    • Select an SMMP vendor that meets your organization’s needs across marketing, sales, and customer service use cases.
    • Adopt standard operating procedures for SMMP deployment that address issues such as platform security and CRM integration.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Executive-level stakeholders in the following roles:
      • Vice-president of Sales, Marketing, or Customer Service.
      • Business unit managers tasked with ensuring strong end-user adoption of an SMMP.
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Understand what’s new in the SMMP market.
    • Evaluate SMMP vendors and products for your enterprise needs.
    • Determine which products are most appropriate for particular use cases and scenarios.

    Social media management platforms augment social capabilities within a broader customer experience ecosystem

    Customer Experience Management (CXM)

    'Customer Relationship Management Platform' surrounded by supporting capabilities, one of which is highlighted, 'Social Media Management Platform'.

    Social Media Management Platforms are one piece of the overall customer experience management ecosystem, alongside tools such as CRM platforms and adjacent point solutions for sales, marketing, and customer service. Review Info-Tech’s CXM blueprint to build a complete, end-to-end customer interaction solution portfolio that encompasses SMMP alongside other critical components. The CXM blueprint also allows you to develop strategic requirements for SMMP based on customer personas and external market analysis.

    SMMPs reduce complexity and increase the effectiveness of enterprise social media programs

    • SMMPs are solutions (typically cloud based) that offer a host of features for effectively monitoring the social cloud and managing your organization’s presence in the social cloud. SMMPs give businesses the tools they need to run social campaigns in a timely and cost-effective manner.
    • The typical SMMP integrates with two or more social media services (e.g. Facebook, Twitter) via the services’ API or a dedicated connector. SMMPs are not simply a revised “interface layer” for a single social media service. They provide layers for advanced management and analytics across multiple services.
    • The unique value of SMMPs comes from their ability to manage and track multiple social media services. Aggregating and managing data from multiple services gives businesses a much more holistic view of their organization’s social initiatives and reputation in the social cloud.
    Diagram with 'End Users (e.g. marketing managers)' at the top and social platforms like Facebook and Twitter at the bottom; in between them are 'SMMPs’: 'Account & Campaign Management', 'Social Engagement', and 'Social Monitoring/Analytics'.
    SMMPs mediate interactions between end users and the social cloud.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The increasing complexity of social media, coupled with the rising importance of social channels, has led to a market for formal management platforms. Organizations with an active presence in social media (i.e. multiple services or pages) should strongly consider selecting and deploying an SMMP.

    Failing to rein in social media initiatives leads to more work, uninformed decisions, and diminishing returns

    • The growth of social media services has made manually updating pages and feeds an ineffective and time-consuming process. The challenge is magnified when multiple brands, product lines, or geographic subsidiaries are involved.
      • Use the advanced account management features of an SMMP to reduce the amount of time spent updating social media services.
    • Engaging customers through social channels can be a delicate task – high volumes of social content can easily overwhelm marketing and service representatives, leading to missed selling opportunities and unacceptable service windows.
      • Use the in-band engagement capabilities of an SMMP to create an orderly queue for social interactions.
    • Consumer activity in the social cloud has been increasing exponentially. As the volume of content grows, separating the signal from the noise becomes increasingly difficult.
      • Use the advanced social analytics of an SMMP to ensure critical consumer insights are not overlooked.
    Ad Hoc Management vs. SMMPs:
    What’s the difference?

    Ad Hoc Social Media Management

    Social media initiatives are managed directly through the services themselves. For example, a marketing professional would log in to multiple corporate Twitter accounts to post the same content for a promotional campaign.

    Social Media Management Platform

    Social media initiatives are managed through a third-party software platform. For example, a marketing professional would update all social account simultaneously with just a couple clicks. SMMPs also provide cross-service social analytics – highly valuable for decision makers!

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Effectively managing a social media campaign is not a straightforward exercise. If you have (or plan to have) a large social media footprint, now is the time to procure formal software tools for social media management. Continuing to manage social media in an ad hoc manner is sapping time and money.

    Review the critical success factors for SMMP across the project lifecycle, from planning to post-implementation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Executive management support is crucial. The number one overall critical success factor for an SMMP strategy is top management support. This emphasizes the importance of sales, service, and marketing and prudent corporate strategic alignment. A strategic objective in SMMP projects is to position top management as an enabler rather than a barrier.

    Planning Implementation Post-Implementation Overall
    1 Appropriate Selection Project Management Top Management Support Top Management Support
    2 Clear Project Goals Top Management Support Project Management Appropriate Selection
    3 Top Management Support Training Training Project Management
    4 Business Mission and Vision Effective Communication Effective Communication Training
    5 Project Management Supplier Supports Appropriate Selection Clear Project Goals

    (Source: Information Systems Frontiers)

    Dell uses a dedicated social media management platform to power a comprehensive social command center

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: High-Tech | Source: Dell
    With a truly global customer base, Dell gets about 22,000 mentions on the social web daily, and does not sit idly by. Having established a physical Social Media Command Center powered by Salesforce’s Social Studio, Dell was one of the companies that pioneered the command center concept for social response.

    The SMMP carries out the following activities:

    • Tracking mentions of Dell in the social cloud
    • Sentiment analysis
    • Connecting customers who need assistance with experts who can help them
    • Social media training
    • Maintenance of standards for social media interactions
    • Spreading best social media practices across the organization

    Today the company claims impressive results, including:

    • “Resolution rate” of 99% customer satisfaction
    • Boosting its customer reach with the same number of employees
    • One third of Dell’s former critics are now fans

    Logo for Dell.

    Tools:
    • Salesforce Social Studio
    • Three rows of monitors offering instant insights into customer sentiment, share of voice, and geography.
    Staff:
    • The center started with five people; today it is staffed by a team of 15 interacting with customers in 11 languages.
    • Dell values human interaction; the center is not running on autopilot, and any ambiguous activity is analyzed (and dealt with) manually on an individual basis.

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology for selection and implementation of enterprise applications

    Prior to embarking on the vendor selection stage, ensure you have set the right building blocks and completed the necessary prerequisites.

    Diagram with 'Enterprise Applications' at the center surrounded by a cycle of 'conceptual', 'consensus', 'concrete', and 'continuous'. The outer circle has three categories with three actions each, 'Governance and Optimization: Process Optimization, Support/ Maintenance, Transition to Operations', 'Strategy and Alignment: Foundation, Assessment, Strategy/ Business Case', and 'Implementation: System Implementation, Business Process Management, Select and Implement'. Follow Info-Tech’s enterprise applications program that covers the application lifecycle from the strategy stage, through selection and implementation, and up to governance and optimization.

    The implementation and execution stage entails the following steps:

    1. Define the business case.
    2. Gather and analyze requirements.
    3. Build the RFP.
    4. Conduct detailed vendor evaluations.
    5. Finalize vendor selection.
    6. Review implementation considerations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A critical preceding task to selecting a social media management platform is ensuring a strategy is in place for enterprise social media usage. Use our social media strategy blueprint to ensure the foundational elements are in place prior to proceeding with platform selection.

    Use this blueprint to support your SMMP selection and implementation

    Launch the SMMP Project and Collect Requirements — Phase 1

    Benefits — Use the project steps and activity instructions outlined in this blueprint to streamline your selection process and implementation planning. Save time and money, and improve the impact of your SMMP selection by leveraging Info-Tech’s research and project steps.

    Select Your SMMP Solution — Phase 2

    Use Info-Tech’s SMMP Vendor Landscape contained in Phase 2 of this project to support your vendor reviews and selection. Refer to the use-case performance results to identify vendors that align with the requirements and solution needs identified by your earlier project findings.

    Get Ready for Your SMMP Implementation — Phase 3

    Info-Tech Insight — Not everyone’s connection and integration needs are the same. Understand your own business’s integration environment and the unique technical and functional requirements that accompany them to create criteria and select a best-fit SMMP solution.

    Use Info-Tech’s use-case scenario approach to select a best-fit solution for your business needs

    Readiness

    Determine where you are right now and where your organization needs to go with a social media strategy.

    Three stages eventually leading to shapes in a house, 'Distributed Stage', 'Loosely Coupled Stage', and 'Command Center Stage'.
    Use-Case Assessment

    Identify the best-fit use-case scenario to determine requirements that best align with your strategy.

    Three blocks labelled 'Social Listening & Analytics', 'Social Customer Care', and 'Social Publishing & Campaign Management'.
    Selection

    Approach vendor selection through a use-case centric lens to balance the need for different social capabilities.

    Logos for vendors including Adobe, Hootsuite, CISION, and more.

    Info-Tech walks you through the following steps to help you to successfully select and implement your SMMP

    Steps of this blueprint represented by circles of varying colors and sizes, labelled by text of different sizes.

    Locate your starting point in the research based on the current stage of your project.

    Legend for the diagram above: lines represent Major Milestones, size of circles represent Low or High effort, size of text represents Average or Greater importance, and color of the circles represents the phase.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform – project overview

    1. Develop a Technology Enablement Approach 2. Select an SMMP 3. Review Implementation Considerations
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine if a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization

    • Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool

    1.2 Use an SMMP to enable marketing, sales, and service use cases

    • SMMP Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2.1 SMMP Vendor Landscape

    • CRM Suite Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool

    2.2 Select your SMMP

    • SMMP Vendor Demo Script Template
    • SMMP RFP Template

    3.1 Establish best practices for SMMP implementation

    • Social Media Steering Committee

    3.2 Assess the measured value from the project

    Guided Implementations

    • Identify organizational fit for the technology.
    • Evaluate social media opportunities within your organization.
    • Evaluate which SMMP use-case scenario is best fit for your organization
    • Discuss the use-case fit assessment results and the Vendor Landscape.
    • Review contract.
    • Determine what is the right governance structure to overlook the SMMP implementation.
    • Identify the right deployment model for your organization.
    • Identify key performance indicators for business units using an SMMP.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Launch Your SMMP Selection Project
    Module 2:
    Plan Your Procurement and Implementation Process
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Social Media Maturity Assessment
    • SMMP Use-Case Assessment
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Selection of an SMMP
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A plan for implementing the selected SMMP

    SMMP selection and implementation workshop overview

    Associated Activity icon Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Day 1

    Preparation

    Day 2

    Workshop Day

    Day 3

    Workshop Day

    Day 4

    Workshop Day

    Day 5

    Working Session

    Workshop Preparation
    • Facilitator meets with the project manager and reviews the current project plans and IT landscape of the organization.
    • A review of scheduled meetings and engaged IT and business staff is performed.
    Morning Itinerary
    • Conduct activities from Develop a technology enablement approach for social media phase, including social media maturity and readiness assessment.
    • Conduct overview of the market landscape, trends, and vendors.
    Afternoon Itinerary
    • Interview business stakeholders.
    • Prioritize SMMP requirements.
    Morning Itinerary
    • Perform a use-case scenario assessment.
    Afternoon Itinerary
    • Review use-case scenario results; identify use-case alignment.
    • Review the SMMP Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.
    Morning Itinerary
    • Continue review of SMMP Vendor Landscape results and use-case performance results.
    Afternoon Itinerary
    • Create a custom vendor shortlist.
    • Investigate additional vendors for exploration in the market.
    Workshop Debrief
    • Meet with project manager to discuss results and action items.
    • Wrap up outstanding items from workshop.
    (Post-Engagement): Procurement Support
    • The facilitator will support the project team to outline the RFP contents and evaluation framework.
    • Planning of vendor demo script. Input: solution requirements and use-case results.
    Example of a light blue slide. The light blue slides at the end of each section highlight the key activities and exercises that will be completed during the engagement with our analyst team.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a descending bar graph.

    This icon denotes a slide that pertains directly to the Info-Tech vendor profiles on marketing management technology. Use these slides to support and guide your evaluation of the MMS vendors included in the research.

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    PHASE 1

    Develop a Technology Enablement Approach for Social Media

    Phase 1: Develop a technology enablement approach for social media

    Steps of this blueprint represented by circles of varying colors and sizes, labelled by text of different sizes. Only Phase 1 is highlighted.
    Estimated Timeline: 1-3 Months

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before an SMMP can be selected, the organization must have a strategy in place for enterprise social media. Implementing an SMMP before developing a social media strategy would be akin to buying a mattress without knowing the size of the bed frame.

    Major Milestones Reached
    • Project launch
    • Completion of requirements gathering and documentation

    Key Activities Completed

    • Readiness assessment
    • Project plan / timeline
    • Stakeholder buy-in
    • Technical assessment
    • Functional assessment

    Outcomes from This Phase

    Social Media Maturity Assessment

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Develop a technology enablement approach for social media

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Determine if a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization Step 1.2: Use an SMMP to enable marketing, sales, and service use cases
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Assess your readiness for the SMMP project.
    • Evaluate social media opportunities within your organization.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss how an SMMP can assist with marketing, sales, and customer service.
    • Evaluate which SMMP use case scenario is best fit for your organization.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Assess your social media maturity.
    • Inventory social media networks to be supported by the SMMP.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Assess best-fit use-case scenario.
    • Build the metrics inventory.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • SMMP Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:
    • Social Media Maturity Assessment
    • SMMP Use-Case Assessment

    Phase 1, Step 1: Determine if a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization

    1.1

    1.2

    Determine if a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization Use an SMMP to enable marketing, sales, and service use cases

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess where your organization sits on the social media maturity curve.
    • Inventory the current social media networks that must be supported by the SMMP.
    • Go/no-go assessment on SMMP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Digital Marketing Executive
    • Digital Strategy Executive
    • Business stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Social media maturity assessment
    • Inventory of enterprise social media
    • SMMP Go/no-go decision

    Before selecting an SMMP, start with the fundamentals: build a comprehensive strategy for enterprise social media

    Why build a social media strategy?

    • Social media is neither a fad nor a phenomenon; it is simply another tool in the business process. Social channels do not necessitate a radical departure from the organization’s existing customer interaction strategy. Rather, social media should be added to your channel mix and integrated within the existing CRM strategy.
    • Social media allows organizations to form direct and indirect connections through the Friend-of-a-Friend (FOAF) model, which increases the credibility of the information in the eyes of the consumer.
    • Social media enables organizations to share, connect, and engage consumers in an environment where they are comfortable. Having a social media presence is rapidly becoming a pre-requisite for successful business-to-consumer enterprises.

    Important considerations for an enterprise social media strategy:

    • Determine how social media will complement existing customer interaction goals.
    • Assess which social media opportunities exist for your organization.
    • Consider the specific goals you want to achieve using social channels and pick your services accordingly.
    • Not all social media services (e.g. Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn) are equal. Consider which services will be most effective for goal achievement.
    For more information on developing a strategy for enterprise social media, please refer to Info-Tech’s research on Social Media.

    Implement a social media strategy by determining where you are right now and where your organization needs to go

    Organizations pass through three main stages of social media maturity: distributed, loosely coupled, and command center. As you move along the maturity scale, the business significance of the social media program increases. Refer to Info-Tech’s Implement a Social Media Program for guidance on how to execute an ongoing social media program.
    The y-axis 'Business Significance'.

    Distributed Stage

    Shapes labelled 'Sales', 'Customer Service', and 'Marketing'.

    • Open-source or low-cost solutions are implemented informally by individual depts. for specific projects.
    • Solutions are deployed to fulfill a particular function without an organizational vision. The danger of this stage is lack of consistent customer experience and wasted resources.

    Loosely Coupled Stage

    Same shapes with the addition of 'PR' and surrounded by a dotted-line house.

    • More point solutions are implemented across the organization. There is a formal cross-departmental effort to integrate some point solutions.
    • Risks include failing to put together an effective steering committee and not including IT in the decision-making process.

    Command Center Stage

    Same shapes with a solid line house.

    • There’s enterprise-level steering committee with representation from all areas: execution of social programs is handled by a fully resourced physical (or virtual) center.
    • Risks include improper resource allocation and lack of end-user training.
    The x-axis 'Maturity Stages'.
    Optimal stages for SMMP purchase

    Assess where your organization sits on the social media maturity curve

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 30 Minutes

    INPUT: Social media initiatives, Current status

    OUTPUT: Current State Maturity Assessment

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers, Sticky notes

    PARTICIPANTS: Digital Strategy Executive, Business stakeholders

    Before you can move to an objective assessment of your social media program’s maturity, take an inventory of your current efforts across different departments (e.g. Marketing, PR, Sales, and Customer Service). Document the results in the Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool to determine your social media readiness score.

    Department Social Media Initiative(s) Current Status
    Marketing Branded Facebook page with updates and promotions Stalled: insufficient resources
    Sales LinkedIn prospecting campaign for lead generation, qualification, and warm open Active: however, new reps are poorly trained on LinkedIn prospect best practices
    Customer Service Twitter support initiative: mentions of our brand are paired with sentiment analysis to determine who is having problems and to reach out and offer support Active: program has been highly successful to date
    HR Recruitment campaign through LinkedIn and Branch Out Stalled: insufficient technology support for identifying leading candidates
    Product Development Defect tracking for future product iterations using social media Partially active: Tracked, but no feedback loop present
    Social Media Maturity Level Distributed

    Determine your organization’s social media maturity with Info-Tech’s Maturity Assessment Tool

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool

    Assessing where you fit on the social media maturity continuum is critical for setting the future direction of your social media program. We’ll work through a short tool that assesses the current state of your social media program, then discuss the results.

    Info-Tech’s Social Media Maturity Assessment Tool will help you determine your company’s level of maturity and recommend steps to move to the next level or optimize the status quo of your current efforts.

    INFO-TECH TOOL Sample of the Social Media Current State Assessment.

    The social cloud is a dominant point of interaction: integrate social channels with existing customer interaction channels

    • Instead of thinking of customers as an island, think of them interacting with each other and with organizations in the social cloud. As a result, the social cloud itself becomes a point of interaction, not just individual customers.
    • The social cloud is accessible with services like social networks (e.g. Facebook) and micro-blogs (Twitter).
    • Previous lessons learned from the integration of Web 1.0 e-channels should be leveraged as organizations add the social media channel into their overall customer interaction framework:
      • Do not design exclusively around a single channel. Design hybrid-channel solutions that include social channels.
      • Balance customer segment goals and attributes, product and service goals and attributes, and channel capabilities.
    The 'Web 2.0 Customer Interaction Framework' with 'Social Cloud' above, connected to the below through 'Conversations & Information'. Below are two categories with their components interconnected, 'Communication Channels: Face to Face, Phone, E-mail, Web, and Social Media' and 'Customer Experience Management: Marketing, Sales, and Service'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t believe that social channel integration will require an entire rebuild of your CXM strategy. Social channels are just new interaction channels that need to be integrated – as you’ve done in the past with Web 1.0 e-channels.

    Understand the different types of social media services and how they link to social media strategy and SMMP selection

    Before adopting an SMMP, it’s important to understand the underlying services they manage. Social media services facilitate the creation and dissemination of user-generated content, and can be grouped according to their purpose and functionality:
    • Social Networking: Social networking services use the Friend-of-a-Friend model to allow users to communicate with their personal networks. Users can share a wide variety of information and media with one another. Social networking sites include Facebook and LinkedIn.
    • Blogging: Blogs are websites that allow users to upload text and media entries, typically displayed in reverse-chronological order. Prominent blogging services include Blogger and WordPress.
    • Micro-Blogging: Micro-blogging is similar to blogging, with the exception that written content is limited to a set number of characters. Twitter, the most popular service, allows users to post messages up to 140 characters.
    • Social Multimedia: Social multimedia sites provide an easy way for users to upload and share multimedia content (e.g. pictures, video) with both their personal contacts as well as the wider community. YouTube is extremely popular for video sharing, while Instagram is a popular option for sharing photos and short videos.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    In many cases, services do not fit discretely within each category. With minor exceptions, creating an account on a social media service is free, making use of these services extremely cost effective. If your organization makes extensive use of a particular service, ensure it is supported by your SMMP vendor.

    Four categories of social media company logos: 'Social multimedia', 'Micro-blogging', 'Blogging', and 'Social Networking'.

    Inventory the current social media networks that must be supported by the SMMP

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2

    INPUT: Social media services

    OUTPUT: Inventory of enterprise social media

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project team

    1. List all existing social media networks used by your organization.
    2. For each network, enumerate all the accounts that are being used for organizational objectives.
    3. Identify the line of business that administers and manages each service.
    Network Use Case Account Ownership
    Facebook
    • Branding
    • Marketing
    • Social Monitoring
    • Facebook recruitment
    • Corporate Communications
    • Marketing
    Twitter
    • Social monitoring
    • Customer response
    • Corporate
    • Customer Service
    ... ... ...

    An explosion of social media services and functionality has made effectively managing social interactions a complex task

    • Effectively managing social channels is an increasingly complicated task. Proliferation of social media services and rapid end-user uptake has made launching social interactions a challenge for small and large organizations.
    • Using multiple social media services can be a nightmare for account management (particularly when each brand or product line has its own set of social accounts).
    • The volume of data generated by the social cloud has also created barriers for successfully responding in-band to social stakeholders (social engagement), and for carrying out social analytics.
    • There are two methods for managing social media: ad hoc management and platform-based management.
      • Ad hoc social media management is accomplished using the built-in functionality and administrative controls of each social media service. It is appropriate for small organizations with a very limited scope for social media interaction, but poses difficulties once “critical mass” has been reached.
    Comparison of 'Ad Hoc Management' with each social media platform managed directly by the user and 'Platform-Based Management' with social platforms managed by a 'SMMP' which is managed by the user.
    Ad hoc management results in a number of social media touch points. SMMPs serve as a single go-to point for all social media initiatives

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Managing social media is becoming increasingly difficult to do through ad hoc methods, particularly for larger organizations and those with multiple brand portfolios. Ad hoc management is best suited for small organizations with an institutional client base who only need a bare bones social media presence.

    Select social media services that will achieve your specific objectives – and look for SMMPs that integrate with them

    What areas are different social media services helpful in?
    Domain Opportunity Consumer Social Networks (Facebook) Micro-Blogging (Twitter) Professional Social Networks (LinkedIn) Consumer Video Sharing Networks (YouTube)
    Marketing Building Positive Brand Image Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Increase Mind Share Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Gaining Customer Insights Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Sales Gaining Sales Insights Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Increase Revenue Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Customer Acquisition Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'.
    Service Customer Satisfaction Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'.
    Increase Customer Retention Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'.
    Reducing Cost of Service Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Green circle 'Proven Useful'.

    Green circle 'Proven Useful'. Proven Useful*

    Dark Blue circle 'Potentially Useful'. Potentially Useful

    *Proven useful by Info-Tech statistical analysis carried out on a cross-section of real-world implementations.

    Social media is invaluable for marketing, sales, and customer service. Some social media services have a higher degree of efficacy than others for certain functions. Be sure to take this into account when developing a social media strategy.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Different social media services are more effective than others for different goals. For example, YouTube is useful as an avenue for marketing campaigns, but it’s of substantially less use for sales functions like lead generation. The services you select while planning your social media strategy must reflect concrete goals.

    Ad hoc social media management results in manual, resource-intensive processes that are challenging to measure

    • Most organizations that have pursued social media initiatives have done so in an ad hoc fashion rather than outlining a formal strategy and deploying software solutions (e.g. SMMP).
    • Social media is often a component of Customer Experience Management (CXM); Info-Tech’s research shows many organizations are handling CRM without a strategy in place, too.
    • Social media management platforms reduce the resource-intensive processes required for ongoing social media involvement and keep projects on track by providing reporting metrics.
    Social media and CRM are often being done without a defined strategy in place.

    Four-square matrix titled 'Strategy' presenting percentages with y-axis 'CRM', x-axis 'Social Media', both having two sections 'Ad hoc' and 'Defined'.
    Source: Info-Tech Survey, N=64

    Many processes related to social media are being done manually, despite the existence of SMMPs.

    Four-square matrix titled 'technology' presenting percentages with y-axis 'CRM', x-axis 'Social Media', both having two sections 'Ad hoc' and 'Defined'.

    “When we started our social media campaign, it took 34 man-hours a week. An SMMP that streamlines these efforts is absolutely an asset.” (Edie May, Johnson & Johnson Insurance Company)

    SMMPs provide functionality for robust account management, in-band customer response, and social monitoring/analytics

    • Features such as unified account management and social engagement capabilities boost the efficiency of social campaigns. These features reduce duplication of effort (e.g. manually posting the same content to multiple services). Leverage account management functionality and in-band response to “do more with less.”
    • Features such as comprehensive monitoring of the social cloud and advanced social analytics (i.e. sentiment analysis, trends and follower demographics) allow organizations to more effectively use social media. These features empower organizations with the information they need to make informed decisions around messaging and brand positioning. Use social analytics to zero in on your most important brand advocates.

    The value proposition of SMMPs revolves around enhancing the effectiveness and efficiency of social media initiatives.

    Three primary use cases for social media management:

    Social Listening & Analytics — Monitor and analyze a variety of social media services: provide demographic analysis, frequency analysis, sentiment analysis, and content-centric analysis.

    Social Publishing & Campaign Management — Executing marketing campaigns through social channels (e.g. Facebook pages).

    Social Customer Care — Track customer conversations and provide the ability to respond in-platform to social interactions.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    SMMPs are a technology platform, but this alone is insufficient to execute a social media program. Organization and process must be integrated as well. See Info-Tech’s research on developing a social media strategy for a step-by-step guide on how to optimize your internal organization and processes.

    Social analytics vary: balance requirements among monitoring goals and social presence/property management

    Segment your requirements around common SMMP vendor product design points. Current market capabilities vary between two primary feature categories: social cloud monitoring and social presence and property management.

    Cloud-Centric

    Social Monitoring

    Content-Centric

    Social cloud monitoring enables:
    • Brand and product monitoring
    • Reputation monitoring
    • Proactive identification of service opportunities
    • Competitive intelligence
    Social presence and property management enables:
    • Monitor and manage discussions on your social properties (e.g. Twitter feeds, Facebook Pages, YouTube channels)
    • Execute marketing campaigns within your social properties

    Social Analytics

    Social analytics provide insights to both dimensions of social media monitoring.

    Some firms only need social cloud monitoring, some need to monitor their own social media properties, and others will need to do both. Some vendors do both while other vendors excel in only one feature dimension. If you are NOT prepared to act on results from social cloud monitoring, then don’t expand your reach into the social cloud for no reason. You can always add cloud monitoring services later. Likewise, if you only need to monitor the cloud and have no or few of your own social properties, don’t buy advanced management and engagement features.

    Use social analytics to gain the most value from your SMMP

    Research indicates successful organizations employ both social cloud monitoring and management of their own properties with analytical tools to enhance both or do one or the other well. Few vendors excel at both larger feature categories. But the market is segmented into vendors that organizations should be prepared to buy more than one product from to satisfy all requirements. However, we expect feature convergence over the next 1–3 years, resulting in more comprehensive vendor offerings.

    Most sought social media analytics capabilities

    Bar Chart of SM analytics capabilities, the most sought after being 'Demographic analysis', 'Geographic analysis', 'Semantic analysis', 'Automated identification of subject and content', and 'Predictive modeling'.
    (Source: The State of Social Media Analytics (2016))

    Value driven from social analytics comes in the form of:
    • Improved customer service
    • Increased revenue
    • Uncovered insights for better targeted marketing
    • A more personalized customer experience offered
    Social analytics is integral to the success of the SMMP – take advantage of this functionality!

    Cost/Benefit Scenario: A mid-sized consumer products company wins big by adopting an SMMP

    The following example shows how an SMMP at a mid-sized consumer products firm brought in $36 000 a year.

    Before: Manual Social Media Management

    • Account management: a senior marketing manager was responsible for updating all twenty of the firm’s social media pages and feeds. This activity consumed approximately 20% of her time. Her annual salary was $80,000. Allocated cost: $16,000 per year.
    • In-band response: Customer service representatives manually tracked service requests originating from social channels. Due to the use of multiple Twitter feeds, several customers were inadvertently ignored and subsequently defected to competitors. Lost annual revenue due to customer defections: $10,000.
    • Social analytics: Analytics were conducted in a crude, ad hoc fashion using scant data available from the services themselves. No useful insights were discovered. Gains from social insights: $0.

    Ad hoc management is costing this organization $26,000 a year.

    After: Social Media Management Platform

    • Account management: Centralized account controls for rapidly managing several social media services meant the amount of time spent updating social media was cut 75%. Allocated cost savings: $12,000 per year.
    • In-band response: Using an SMMP provided customer service representatives with a console for quickly and effectively responding to customer service issues. Service window times were significantly reduced, resulting in increased customer retention. Revenue no longer lost due to defections: $10,000.
    • Social analytics: The product development group used keyword-based monitoring to assist with designing a successful new product. Social feedback noticeably boosted sales. Gains from social insights: $20,000
    • Cost of SMMP: $6,000 per year.

    The net annual benefit of adopting an SMMP is $36,000.

    Go with an SMMP if your organization needs a heavy social presence; stick with ad hoc management if it doesn’t

    The value proposition of acquiring an SMMP does not resonate the same for all organizations: in some cases, it is more cost effective to forego an SMMP and stick with ad hoc social media management.

    Follow these guidelines for determining if an SMMP is a natural fit for your organization.

    Go with an SMMP if…

    • Your organization already has a large social footprint: you manage multiple feeds/pages on three or more social media services.
    • Your organization’s primary activity is B2C marketing; your target consumers are social media savvy. Example: consumer packaged goods.
    • The volume of marketing, sales and service inquiries received over social channels has seen a sharp increase in the last 12 months.
    • Your firm or industry is the topic of widespread discussion in the social cloud.

    Stick with ad hoc management if…

    • Regulatory compliance prohibits the extensive use of social media in your organization.
    • Your organization is focused on a small number of institutional clients with well-defined organizational buying behaviors.
    • Your target market is antipathetic towards using social channels to interact with your organization.
    • Your organization is in a market space where only a bare-bones social media presence is seen as a necessity (for example, only a basic informational Facebook page is maintained).

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Using an SMMP is definitively superior to ad hoc social media management for those organizations with multiple brands and product portfolios (e.g. consumer packaged goods). Ad hoc management is best for small organizations with an institutional client base who only need a bare bones social media presence.

    Assess which social media opportunities exist for your organization with Info-Tech’s tool

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool

    Use Info-Tech’s Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool to determine, based on your unique criteria, where social media opportunities exist for your organization in marketing, sales, and service.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    1. Remember that departmental goals will overlap; gaining customer insight is valuable to marketing, sales, and customer service.
    2. The social media benefits you can expect to achieve will evolve as your processes mature.
    3. Often, organizations jump into social media because they feel they have to. Use this assessment to identify early on what your drivers should be.
    Sample of the Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool.

    Go/no-go assessment on SMMP

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3

    INPUT: Social Media Opportunity Questionnaire

    OUTPUT: SMMP go/no-go decision

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Opportunity Assessment Tool

    PARTICIPANTS: Digital Strategy Executive, Business stakeholders

    Identify whether an SMMP will help you achieve your goals in sales, marketing, and customer service.

    1. Complete the questionnaire in the Social Media Opportunity Assessment Tool. Ensure all relevant stakeholders are present to answer questions pertaining to their business area.
    2. Evaluate the results to better understand whether your organization has the opportunity to achieve each established goal in marketing, sales, and customer service with an SMMP or you are not likely to benefit from investing in a social media management solution.

    Phase 1, Step 2: Use an SMMP to enable marketing, sales, and service use cases

    1.1

    1.2

    Determine if a dedicated SMMP is right for your organization Use an SMMP to enable marketing, sales, and service use cases

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Profile and rank your top use cases for social media management
    • Build the metrics inventory

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project Manager
    • Project Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Use case suitability
    • SMMP metrics inventory

    SMMPs equip front-line sales staff with the tools they need for effective social lead generation

    • Content-centric social analytics allow sales staff to see click-through details for content posted on social networks. In many cases, these leads are warm and ready for immediate follow-up.
    • A software development firm uses an SMMP to post a whitepaper promoting its product to multiple social networks.
      • The whitepaper is subsequently downloaded by a number of potential prospects.
      • Content-centric analytics within the SMMP link the otherwise-anonymous downloads to named social media accounts.
      • Leads assigned to specific account managers, who use existing CRM software to pinpoint contact information and follow-up in a timely manner.
    • Organizations that intend to use their SMMP for sales purposes should ensure their vendor of choice offers integration with LinkedIn. LinkedIn is the business formal of social networks, and is the network with the greatest proven efficacy from a sales perspective.

    Using an SMMP to assist the sales process can…

    • Increase the number of leads generated through social channels as a result of social sharing.
    • Increase the quality of leads generated through social channels by examining influence scores.
    • Increase prospecting efficiency by finding social leads faster.
    • Keep account managers in touch with prospects and clients through social media.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Social media is on the rise in sales organizations. Savvy companies are using social channels at all points in the sales process, from prospecting to account management. Organizations using social channels for sales will want an SMMP to manage the volume of information and provide content-centric analytics.

    Incorporate social media into marketing workflows to gain customer insights, promote your brand, and address concerns

    While most marketing departments have used social media to some extent, few are using it to its full potential. Identify marketing workflows that can be enhanced through the use of social channel integration.
    • Large organizations must define separate workflows for each stakeholder organization if marketing’s duties are divided by company division, brand, or product lines.
    • Inquiries stemming from marketing campaigns and advertising must be handled by social media teams. For example, if a recent campaign sparks customer questions on the company’s Facebook page, be ready to respond!
    • Social media can be used to detect issues that may indicate product defects, provided defect tracking is not already incorporated into customer service workflows. If defect tracking is part of customer service processes, then such issues should be routed to the customer service organization.
    • If social listening is employed, in addition to monitoring the company's own social properties, marketing teams may elect to receive notices of major trends concerning the company's products or those of competitors.
    Word jumble of different sized buzz words around 'Brand Building'.

    I’m typically using my social media team as a proactive marketing team in the social space, whereas I’m using my consumer relations team as a reactive marketing and a reactive consumer relations taskforce. So a little bit different perspective.” (Greg Brickl, IT Director, Organic Valley)

    SMMPs allow marketers to satisfy all of their needs with one solution

    • Have a marketing manager jointly responsible for the selection of an SMMP to realize higher overall success. This will significantly improve customer acquisition approval and competitive intelligence, as well as the overall SMMP success.
    • The marketing manager should be involved in fleshing out the business requirements of the SMMP in order to select the most appropriate solution.
    • Once selected, the SMMP has multiple benefits for marketing professionals. One pivotal benefit of SMMPs for marketing is the capability for centralized account management. Multiple social pages and feeds can be rapidly managed at pre-determined times, through an easy-to-use dashboard delivered from one source.
    • Centralized account management is especially pertinent for organizations with a wide geographic client base, as they can manage wide social media campaigns within multiple time zones, delivering their messaging appropriately. (e.g. contests, product launches, etc.)
    Bar Chart comparing 'Average Success Scores' of different goals based on whether the 'Marketing Manager [was] Responsible' or not. Scores are always higher when they were.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group N = 37)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Managing multiple social media accounts on an ad hoc basis is time consuming and costs money. Lower costs and get the best results out of your social media campaigns by involving the marketing team in the SMMP selection process and knowing their functional requirements.

    Leverage SMMPs to proactively identify and respond to customer service issues occurring in the social cloud

    • SMMPs are an invaluable tool in customer service organizations. In-band response capabilities allow customer service representatives to quickly and effectively address customer service issues – either reactively or proactively.
    • Reactive customer service can be provided through SMMPs by providing response capabilities for private messages or public mentions (e.g. “@AcmeCo” on Twitter). Many SMMPs provide a queue of social media messages directed at the organization, and also give the ability to assign specific messages to an individual service representative or product expert. Responding to a high-volume of reactive social media requests can be time consuming without an SMMP.
    • Proactive customer service uses the ability of SMMPs to monitor the social cloud for specific keywords in order to identify customers having issues. Forward-thinking companies actively monitor the social cloud for customer service opportunities, to protect and improve their image.
    Illustration of reactive service where the customer initiates the process and then receives service.
    Reactive service is customer-initiated.

    Illustration of proactive service with a complaint through Twitter monitored by an SMMP allowing an associate to provide a 'Proactive Resolution'.
    SMMPs enable organizations to monitor the social cloud for service opportunities and provide proactive service in-band.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Historically, customer service has been “reactive” (i.e. customer initiated) and solely between the customer and supplier. Social media forces proactive service interactions between customer, supplier, and the entire social cloud. Using an SMMP significantly improves reactive and proactive service. The ability to integrate with customer service applications is essential.

    Customer service is a vital department to realize value from leveraging an SMMP

    Info-Tech’s research shows that the more departments get involved with social media implementation, the higher the success score (calculated based on respondents’ report of the positive impact of social media on business objectives). On average, each additional department involved in social media programs increases the overall social media success score by 5%. For example, organizations that leveraged social media within the customer service department, achieved a higher success score than those that did not.

    The message is clear: encourage broad participation in coordinated social media efforts to realize business goals.

    Line graph comparing 'Social Media Success Score' with the 'Number of Departments Involved'. The line trends upward on both axes.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group N=65)
    Bar chart comparing 'Social Media Success Scores' if 'Customer Service Involvement' was Yes or No. 'Yes' has a higher score.

    Our research indicates that the most important stakeholder to ensure steering committee success is Customer Service. This has a major impact on CRM integration requirements – more on this later.

    SMMPs are indispensable for allowing PR managers to keep tabs on the firm and its brands

    • Public relations is devoted to relationship management; as such, it is critical for savvy PR departments to have a social media presence.
    • SMMPs empower PR professionals with the ability to track the sentiment of what is said about their organization. Leverage keyword searches and heuristic analysis to proactively mitigate threats and capitalize on positive opportunities. For example, sentiment analysis can be used to identify detractors making false claims over social channels. These claims can then be countered by the Public Relations team.
    • Sentiment analysis can be especially important to the PR professional through change and crisis management situations. These tools allow an organization to track the flow of information, as well as the balance of positive and negative postings and their influence on others in the social cloud.
    • Social analytics provided by SMMPs also serve as a goldmine for competitive intelligence about rival firms and their products.

    Benefits of Sentiment Analysis for PR

    • Take the pulse of public perception of your brands (and competitors).
    • Mitigate negative comments being made and respond immediately.
    • Identify industry and consumer thought leaders to follow on social networks.

    Illustration of sentiment analysis.
    Use sentiment analysis to monitor the social cloud.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Leaving negative statements unaddressed can cause harm to an organization’s reputation. Use an SMMP to track what is being said about your organization; take advantage of response capabilities to quickly respond and mitigate PR risk.

    SMMPs for recruiting is an emerging talent recruitment technique and will lead to stronger candidates

    • Social media provides more direct connections between employer and applicant. It’s faster and more flexible than traditional e-channels.
    • SMMPs should be deployed to the HR silo to aid with recruiting top-quality candidates. Account management functionality can dramatically reduce the amount of time HR managers spend synchronizing content between various social media services.
    • In-band response capabilities flag relevant social conversations and allow HR managers to rapidly respond to prospective employee inquiries. Rapid response over social channels gives candidates a positive impression of the organization.
    • Analytics give HR managers insight into hiring trends and the job market at large – sentiment analysis is useful for gauging not just candidate interests, but also anonymous employee engagement.

    A social media campaign managed via SMMP can…

    • Increase the size of the applicant pool by “fishing where the fish are.”
    • Increase the quality of applicants by using monitoring to create targeted recruitment materials.
    • Increase recruiting efficiency by having a well-managed, standing presence on popular social media sites – new recruiting campaigns require less “awareness generation” time.
    • Allow HR/recruiters to be more in-touch with hiring trends via social analytics.
    Horizontal bar chart of social media platforms that recruiters use. LinkedIn is at the top with 87%. Only 4% of recruiters are NOT using social media for recruitment, while 50% of recruiters plan to increase their investment in SMR in the coming year. (Source: Jobvite, 2015)

    Collapse your drivers for SMMP and link them to Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape use cases

    Vendor Profiles icon

    USE CASES

    Social Listening and Analytics

    What It Looks Like
    Functionality for capturing, aggregating, and analyzing social media content in order to create actionable customer or competitive insights.

    How It Works
    Social listening and analytics includes features such as sentiment and contextual analysis, workflow moderation, and data visualization.

    Social Publishing and Campaign Management

    What It Looks Like
    Functionality for publishing content to multiple networks or accounts simultaneously, and managing social media campaigns in-depth (e.g. social property management and post scheduling).

    How It Works
    Social publishing and campaign management include features such as campaign execution, social post integration, social asset management, and post time optimization.

    Social Customer Care

    What It Looks Like
    Functionality for management of the social customer service queue as well as tools for expedient resolution of customer issues.

    How It Works
    Social customer care use case primarily relies on strong social moderation and workflow management.

    Identify the organizational drivers for social media management – whether it is recruiting, public relations, customer service, marketing, or sales – and align them with the most applicable use case.

    Profile and rank your top use cases for social media management using the Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 1 Hour

    INPUT: Project Manager, Core project team

    OUTPUT: Use-case suitability

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Download your own version of the tool and complete the questionnaire on tab 2, Assessment.
      • Use the information gathered from your assessments and initial project scoping to respond to the prompts to identify the business and IT requirements for the tool.
      • Answer the prompts for each statement from a range of strongly disagree to strongly agree.
    2. Review the outcomes on tab 3, Results.
      • This tab provides a qualitative measure assessing the strength of your fit against the industry use-case scenarios.
    3. If not completed as a team, debrief the results and implications to your core project team.

    Use the SMMP Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool to identify which areas you should focus on

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3 Use Case Fit Assessment Tool
    Use the Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool to understand how your unique requirements map into a specific SMMP use case.

    This tool will assess your answers and determine your relative fit against the use-case scenarios.

    Fit will be assessed as “Weak,” “Moderate,” or “Strong.”

    Consider the common pitfalls, which were mentioned earlier, that can cause IT projects to fail. Plan and take clear steps to avoid or mitigate these concerns.

    Note: These use-case scenarios are not mutually exclusive. Your organization can align with one or more scenarios based on your answers. If your organization shows close alignment to multiple scenarios, consider focusing on finding a more robust solution and concentrate your review on vendors that performed strongly in those scenarios or meet the critical requirements for each.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of the SMMP Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool.

    Identify the marketing, sales, and customer service metrics that you will target for improvement using an SMMP

    Create measurable S.M.A.R.T. goals for the project.

    Consider the following questions when building your SMMP metrics:
    1. What are the top marketing objectives for your company? For example, is building initial awareness or driving repeat customers more important?
    2. What are the corresponding social media goals for this business objective?
    3. What are some of the metrics that could be used to determine if business and social media objectives are being attained?
    Use Case Sample Metric Descriptions Target Metric
    Social Listening and Analytics Use a listening tool to flag all mentions of our brands or company on social Increase in mentions with neutral or positive sentiment, decrease in mentions with negative sentiment
    Social Publishing and Campaign Management Launch a viral video campaign showcasing product attributes to drive increased YT traffic Net increase in unaided customer recall
    Social Customer Care Create brand-specific social media pages to increase customer sentiment for individual brand extensions Net increase in positive customer sentiment (i.e. as tracked by an SMMP)

    Build the metrics inventory

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.2 45 Minutes

    INPUT: Marketing, sales, and customer service objectives

    OUTPUT: Metrics inventory

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Identify the top marketing, sales, and customer service objectives for your company? For example, is building initial awareness or driving repeat customers more important?
    2. What are the corresponding social media goals for each business objective?
    3. What are some of the metrics that could be used to determine if business and social media objectives are being attained?
    Marketing/PR Objectives Social Media Goals Goal Attainment Metrics
    E.g. build a positive brand image
    • Create brand-specific social media pages to increase customer sentiment for individual brand extensions
    Net increase in positive customer sentiment (i.e. as tracked by an SMMP)
    E.g. increase customer mind share
    • Launch a viral video campaign showcasing product attributes to drive increased YT traffic
    Net increase in unaided customer recall
    E.g. monitor public mentions
    • Use a listening tool to flag all mentions of our brands or company on social
    Increase in mentions with neutral or positive sentiment, decrease in mentions with negative sentiment

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1.1 'Assess where your organization sits on the social media maturity curve'. Assess your organization’s social media maturity

    An Info-Tech analyst will facilitate a discussion to assess the maturity of your organization’s social media program and take an inventory of your current efforts across different departments (e.g. Marketing, PR, Sales, and Customer Service).

    1.1.2

    Sample of activity 1.1.2 'Inventory the current social media networks that must be supported by SMMP'. Inventory your current social media networks

    The analyst will facilitate an exercise to catalog all social media networks used in the organization.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1.3

    Sample of activity 1.1.3 'Go/no-go assessment on SMMP'. Go/no go assessment on SMMP

    Based on the maturity assessment, the analyst will help identify whether an SMMP will help you achieve your goals in sales, marketing, and customer service.

    1.2.1

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Profile and rank your top use cases for social media management using the Use Case Fit Assessment Tool'. Rank your top use cases for social media management

    An analyst will facilitate the exercise to answer a series of questions in order to determine best-fit scenario for social media management for your organization.

    1.2.2

    Sample of activity 1.2.2 'Build the metrics inventory'. Build the metrics inventory

    An analyst will lead a whiteboarding exercise to brainstorm and generate metrics for your organization’s social media goals.

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    PHASE 2

    Select an SMMP

    This phase also includes Info-Tech’s SMMP Vendor Landscape Title icon for vendor slides.

    Phase 2: Select an SMMP

    Steps of this blueprint represented by circles of varying colors and sizes, labelled by text of different sizes. Only Phase 2 is highlighted.
    Estimated Timeline: 1-3 Months

    Info-Tech Insight

    Taking a use-case-centric approach to vendor selection allows you to balance the need for different social capabilities between analytics, campaign management and execution, and customer service.

    Major Milestones Reached
    • Vendor Selection
    • Finalized and Approved Contract

    Key Activities Completed

    • RFP Process
    • Vendor Evaluations
    • Vendor Selection
    • Contract Negotiation

    Outcomes from This Phase

    The completed procurement of an SMMP solution.

    • Selected SMMP solution
    • Negotiated and finalized contract

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Select an SMMP

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks
    Step 2.1: Analyze and shortlist SMMP vendors Step 2.2: Evaluate vendor responses
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Evaluate the SMMP marketspace.
    • Re-evaluate best-fit use case.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine your SMMP procurement strategy.
    • Reach out to SMMP vendors.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review vendor profiles and analysis.
    • Create your own evaluation framework and shortlisting criteria.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Prioritize your requirements.
    • Create an RFP for SMMP procurement.
    • Evaluate vendor responses.
    • Set up product demonstrations.
    With these tools & templates:
    • SMMP Vendor Landscape (included here)
    • SMMP Vendor Shortlist Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • SMMP RFP Template
    • SMMP Vendor Demo Script Template
    • SMMP Evaluation and RFP Scoring Tool
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:
    • Finalize vendor and product selection

    Phase 2, Step 1: Analyze and shortlist vendors in the space

    2.1

    2.2

    Analyze and shortlist vendors in the space Select your SMMP solution

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review vendor landscape methodology
    • Shortlist SMMP vendors

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core team
    • Representative stakeholders from Digital Marketing, Sales, and IT

    The SMMP Vendor Landscape includes the following sections:

    VENDOR LANDSCAPE

    Info-Tech's Methodology

    Vendor title icon.

    Vendor Landscape use-case scenarios are evaluated based on weightings of features and vendor/product considerations

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Use cases were scored around the features from the general scoring identified as being relevant to the functional considerations and drivers for each scenario.

    Calculation Overview
    Advanced Features Score X Vendor Multiplier = Vendor Performance for Each Scenario
    Pie Chart of Product and Vendor Weightings.
    Product and Vendor Weightings
    Pie Chart of Advanced Features Weightings.
    Advanced Features Weightings

    Please note that both advanced feature scores and vendor multipliers are based on the specific weightings calibrated for each scenario.

    Vendor performance for each use-case scenario is documented in a weighted bar graph

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Sample of the 'Vendor performance for the use-case scenario' slide. Vendor Performance

    Vendors qualify and rank in each use-case scenario based on their relative placement and scoring for the scenario.

    Vendor Ranking

    Champion: The top vendor scored in the scenario

    Leaders: The vendors who placed second and third in the scenario

    Players: Additional vendors who qualified for the scenarios based on their scoring

    Sample of the 'Value Index for the use case scenario' slide. Value ScoreTM

    Each use-case scenario also includes a Value Index that identifies the Value Score for a vendor relative to their price point. This additional framework is meant to help price-conscious organizations identify vendors who provide the best “bang for the buck.”

    VENDOR LANDSCAPE

    Review the SMMP Vendor Evaluation

    Vendor title icon.

    SMMP market overview

    Vendor Profiles icon

    How It Got Here

    • The SMMP market was created in response to the exploding popularity of social media and the realization that it can be harnessed for a wide variety of enterprise purposes (from consumer intelligence to marketing campaigns and customer service).
    • As the number of social media services has expanded, and as the volume of content generated via social networks has ballooned, it became increasingly difficult to mine insights and manage social campaigns. A number of vendors (mostly start-ups) began offering platforms that attempted to streamline and harness social media processes.
    • As usage of social media expanded beyond just the marketing and PR function, being able to successfully scale a social strategy to a large number of customer care and sales interactions became paramount: SMMPs filled a niche by offering large-scale response and workflow management capabilities.

    Where It’s Going

    • The market is segmented into two broad camps: SMMPs focused on social listening and analytics, and SMMPs focused on social engagement. Although the two have begun to converge, there continues to be a clear junction in the market between the two, with a surprising lack of vendors that are equally adept at both sides.
    • With the rise of SMMPs, the expectation was that CRM vendors would offer feature sets similar to those of standalone SMMPS. However, CRM vendors have been slow in incorporating the functionality directly into their products. While some major vendors have made ground in this direction in the last year, organizations that are serious about social will still need a best-of-breed SMMP.
    • Other major trends include using application integration to build a 360-degree view of the customer, workflow automation, and competitive benchmarking.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the market evolves, capabilities that were once cutting edge become default and new functionality becomes differentiating. Supporting multiple social media services and accounts has become a Table Stakes capability and should no longer be used to differentiate solutions. Instead focus on an SMMP’s social listening, campaign management, and customer care to help you find a solution that best fits your requirements.

    Review Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape of the SMMP market to identify vendors that meet your requirements

    Vendors Evaluated

    Various logos of the vendors who were evaluated.

    Each vendor in this landscape was evaluated based on their features, product considerations, and vendor considerations. Each vendor was profiled using these evaluations and, based on their performance, qualified and placed in specific use-case scenarios.

    These vendors were included due to consideration of their market share, mind share, and platform coverage

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Vendors included in this report provide a comprehensive, innovative, and functional solution for integrating applications and automating their messaging.

    Included in this Vendor Landscape:

    Adobe: Adobe Social is a key pillar of Adobe’s ecosystem that is heavily focused on social analytics and engagement.

    Hootsuite: A freemium player with strong engagement and collaboration tools, particularly well suited for SMBs.

    Salesforce: Social Studio is a leading social media management solution and is a key channel of Salesforce Marketing Cloud.

    Sendible: A fairly new entrant to the social media management space, Sendible offers robust campaign management capability that is well suited for agencies and SMBs.

    Sprinklr: A leading solution that focuses on social customer care, offering strong ability to prioritize, route, and categorize high-volume social messaging.

    Sprout Social: A great choice for mid-sized companies looking to provide robust social engagement and customer care.

    Sysomos: Their MAP and Heartbeat products offer customers in-depth analysis of a wide array of social channels.

    Viralheat (Cision): Now a Cision product, Viralheat is an excellent option for analytics, social response workflow management, and in-band social engagement.

    Table Stakes represent the minimum standard; without these, a product doesn’t even get reviewed

    Vendor Profiles icon

    The Table Stakes

    Feature: What it is:
    Multiple Services Supported The ability to mange or analyze at least two or more social media services.
    Multiple Accounts Supported The ability to manage or analyze content from at least two or more social media accounts.
    Basic Engagement The ability to post status updates to multiple social media sites.
    Basic Analytics The ability to display inbound feeds and summary info from multiple social media sites.

    What does this mean?

    The products assessed in this Vendor Landscape meet, at the very least, the requirements outlined as Table Stakes.

    Many of the vendors go above and beyond the outlined Table Stakes, some even do so in multiple categories. This section aims to highlight the products’ capabilities in excess of the criteria listed here.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If Table Stakes are all you need from your SMMP solution, the only true differentiator for the organization is price. Otherwise, dig deeper to find the best price to value for your needs.

    Advanced Features are the capabilities that allow for granular differentiation of market players and use-case performance

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Scoring Methodology

    Info-Tech scored each vendor’s features on a cumulative four-point scale. Zero points are awarded to features that are deemed absent or unsatisfactory, one point is assigned to features that are partially present, two points are assigned to features that require an extra purchase in the vendor’s product portfolio or through a third party, three points are assigned to features that are fully present and native to the solution, and four points are assigned to the best-of-breed native feature.

    For an explanation of how Advanced Features are determined, see Information Presentation – Feature Ranks (Stoplights) in the Appendix.

    Feature: What we looked for:
    Social Media Channel Integration - Inbound Ability to monitor social media services, such as Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube, and more.
    Social Media Channel Integration - Outbound Ability to publish to social media services such as Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube, and more.
    Social Response Management Ability to respond in-band to social media posts.
    Social Moderation and Workflow Management Ability to create end-to-end routing and escalation workflows from social content.
    Campaign Execution Ability to manage social and media assets: tools for social campaign execution, reporting, and analytics.
    Social Post Archival Ability to archive social posts and platform activity to create an audit trail.
    Trend Analysis Ability to monitor trends and traffic on multiple social media sites.
    Sentiment Analysis Ability to analyze and uncover insights from attitudes and opinions expressed on social media.
    Contextual Analysis Ability to use NLP, deep learning and semantic analysis to extract meaning from social posts.
    Social Asset Management Ability to access visual asset library with access permissions and expiry dates to be used on social media.
    Post Time Optimization Ability to optimize social media posts by maximizing the level of interaction and awareness around the posts.
    Dashboards and Visualization Ability to visualize data and create analytics dashboards.

    Vendor scoring focused on overall product attributes and vendor performance in the market

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Scoring Methodology

    Info-Tech Research Group scored each vendor’s overall product attributes, capabilities, and market performance.

    Features are scored individually as mentioned in the previous slide. The scores are then modified by the individual scores of the vendor across the product and vendor performance features.

    Usability, overall affordability of the product, and the technical features of the product are considered, and scored on a five-point scale. The score for each vendor will fall between worst and best in class.

    The vendor’s performance in the market is evaluated across four dimensions on a five-point scale. Where the vendor places on the scale is determined by factual information, industry position, and information provided by customer references and/or available from public sources.

    Product Evaluation Features

    Usability The end-user and administrative interfaces are intuitive and offer streamlined workflow.
    Affordability Implementing and operating the solution is affordable given the technology.
    Architecture Multiple deployment options, platform support, and integration capabilities are available.

    Vendor Evaluation Features

    Viability Vendor is profitable, knowledgeable, and will be around for the long term.
    Focus Vendor is committed to the space and has a future product and portfolio roadmap.
    Reach Vendor offers global coverage and is able to sell and provide post-sales support.
    Sales Vendor channel partnering, sales strategies, and process allow for flexible product acquisition.

    Balance individual strengths to find the best fit for your enterprise

    Vendor Profiles icon

    A list of vendors with ratings for their 'Product: Overall, Usability, Affordability, and Architecture' and their 'Vendor: Overall, Viability, Focus, Reach, and Sales'. It uses a quarters rating system where 4 quarters of a circle is Exemplary and 0 quarters is Poor.

    For an explanation of how the Info-Tech Harvey Balls are calculated, see Information Presentation – Criteria Scores (Harvey Balls) in the Appendix.

    Balance individual strengths to find the best fit for your enterprise

    Vendor Profiles icon

    A list of vendors with ratings for their 'Evaluated Features'. Rating system uses Color coding with green being 'Feature is fully present...' and red being 'Feature is absent', and if a star is in the green then 'Feature is best in its class'.

    For an explanation of how Advanced Features are determined, see Information Presentation – Feature Ranks (Stoplights) in the Appendix.

    Vendor title icon.

    USE CASE 1

    Social Listening and Analytics

    Seeking functionality for capturing, aggregating, and analyzing social media content in order to create actionable customer or competitive insights.

    Feature weightings for the social listening and analytics use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Core Features

    Sentiment Analysis Uncovering attitudes and opinions expressed on social media is important for generating actionable customer insights.
    Dashboards and Visualization Capturing and aggregating social media insights is ineffective without proper data visualization and analysis.
    Trend Analysis The ability to monitor trends across multiple social media services is integral for effective social listening.
    Contextual Analysis Understanding and analyzing language and visual content on social media is important for generating actionable customer insights.

    Additional Features

    Social Media Channel Integration – Inbound

    Social Moderation and Workflow Management

    Social Post Archival

    Feature Weightings

    Pie chart of feature weightings.

    Vendor considerations for the social listening and analytics use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Product Evaluation Features

    Usability A clean and intuitive user interface is important for users to fully leverage the benefits of an SMMP.
    Affordability Affordability is an important consideration as the price of SMMPs can vary significantly depending on the breadth and depth of capability offered.
    Architecture SMMP is more valuable to organizations when it can integrate well with their applications, such as CRM and marketing automation software.

    Vendor Evaluation Features

    Viability Vendor viability is critical for long-term stability of an application portfolio.
    Focus The vendor is committed to the space and has a future product and portfolio roadmap.
    Reach Companies with processes that cross organizational and geographic boundaries require effective and available support.
    Sales Vendors need to demonstrate flexibility in terms of industry and technology partnerships to meet evolving customer needs.

    Pie chart for Product and Vendor Evaluation Features.

    Vendor performance for the social listening and analytics use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Champion badge.

    Champions for this use case:

    Salesforce: Salesforce Social Studio offers excellent trend and in-depth contextual analysis and is among the best vendors in presenting visually appealing and interactive dashboards.
    Leader badge.

    Leaders for this use case:

    Sysomos: Sysomos MAP and Heartbeat are great offerings for conducting social media health checks using in-depth contextual analytics.

    Adobe: Adobe Social is a great choice for digital marketers that need in-depth sentiment and longitudinal analysis of social data – particularly when managing social alongside other digital channels.

    Best Overall Value badge.

    Best Overall Value Award

    Sysomos: A strong analytics capability offered in Sysomos MAP and Heartbeat at a relatively low cost places Sysomos as the best bang for your buck in this use case.

    Players in the social listening and analytics scenario

    • Sprinklr
    • Hootsuite
    • Sprout Social

    Vendor performance for the social listening and analytics use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Stacked bar chart comparing vendors' use-case performance in multiple areas of 'Social Listening and Analytics'.

    Value Index for the social listening and analytics scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon
    What is a Value Score?

    The Value Score indexes each vendor’s product offering and business strength relative to its price point. It does not indicate vendor ranking.

    Vendors that score high offer more bang-for-the-buck (e.g. features, usability, stability) than the average vendor, while the inverse is true for those that score lower.

    Price-conscious enterprises may wish to give the Value Score more consideration than those who are more focused on specific vendor/product attributes.

    On a relative basis, Sysomos maintained the highest Info-Tech Value ScoreTM of the vendor group for this use-case scenario. Vendors were indexed against Sysomos’ performance to provide a complete, relative view of their product offerings.

    Bar chart of vendors' Value Scores in social listening and analytics. Sysomos has the highest and the Average Score is 66.8.

    For an explanation of how price is determined, see Information Presentation – Price Evaluation in the Appendix.

    For an explanation of how the Info-Tech Value Index is calculated, see Information Presentation – Value Index in the Appendix.

    Vendor title icon.

    USE CASE 2

    Social Publishing and Campaign Management

    Seeking functionality for publishing content to multiple networks or accounts simultaneously, and managing social media campaigns in-depth (e.g. social property management and post scheduling).

    Feature weightings for the social publishing and campaign management use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Core Features

    Campaign Execution The ability to manage multiple social media services simultaneously is integral for carrying out social media campaigns.
    Social Response Management Creating response workflows is equally important to publishing capability for managing social campaigns.

    Additional Features

    Social Media Channel Integration – Outbound

    Social Moderation and Workflow Management

    Social Post Archival

    Social Asset Management

    Post Time Optimization

    Social Media Channel Integration – Inbound

    Trend Analysis

    Sentiment Analysis

    Dashboards and Visualization

    Feature Weightings

    Pie chart of feature weightings.

    Vendor considerations for the social publishing and campaign management use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Product Evaluation Features

    Usability A clean and intuitive user interface is important for users to fully leverage the benefits of an SMMP.
    Affordability Affordability is an important consideration as the price of SMMPs can vary significantly depending on the breadth and depth of capability offered.
    Architecture SMMP is more valuable to organizations when it can integrate well with their applications, such as CRM and marketing automation software.

    Vendor Evaluation Features

    Viability Vendor viability is critical for long-term stability of an application portfolio.
    Focus The vendor is committed to the space and has a future product and portfolio roadmap.
    Reach Companies with processes that cross organizational and geographic boundaries require effective and available support.
    Sales Vendors need to demonstrate flexibility in terms of industry and technology partnerships to meet evolving customer needs.

    Pie chart of Product and Vendor Evaluation Features.

    Vendor performance for the social publishing and campaign management use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Champion badge.

    Champions for this use case:

    Adobe: Adobe has the best social campaign execution capability in the market, enabling marketers to manage and auto-track multiple campaigns. It also offers a strong asset management feature that allows users to leverage Marketing Cloud content.
    Leader badge.

    Leaders for this use case:

    Salesforce: SFDC has built a social marketing juggernaut, offering top-notch response workflows and campaign execution capability.

    Hootsuite: Hootsuite has good response capabilities backed up by a strong team collaboration feature set. It offers simplified cross-platform posting and post-time optimization capabilities.

    Best Overall Value badge.

    Best Overall Value Award

    Sendible: Sendible offers the best value for your money in this use case with good response workflows and publishing capability.

    Players in the social publishing and campaign management scenario

    • Sprout Social
    • Sprinklr
    • Sendible

    Vendor performance for the social publishing and campaign management use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Stacked bar chart comparing vendors' use-case performance in multiple areas of 'Social publishing and campaign management'.

    Value Index for the social publishing and campaign management scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    What is a Value Score?

    The Value Score indexes each vendor’s product offering and business strength relative to its price point. It does not indicate vendor ranking.

    Vendors that score high offer more bang-for-the-buck (e.g. features, usability, stability) than the average vendor, while the inverse is true for those that score lower.

    Price-conscious enterprises may wish to give the Value Score more consideration than those who are more focused on specific vendor/product attributes.

    On a relative basis, Sendible maintained the highest Info-Tech Value ScoreTM of the vendor group for this use-case scenario. Vendors were indexed against Sendible’s performance to provide a complete, relative view of their product offerings.

    Bar chart of vendors' Value Scores in social publishing and campaign management. Sendible has the highest and the Average Score is 72.9.

    For an explanation of how Price is determined, see Information Presentation – Price Evaluation in the Appendix.

    For an explanation of how the Info-Tech Value Index is calculated, see Information Presentation – Value Index in the Appendix.

    Vendor title icon.

    USE CASE 3

    Social Customer Care

    Seeking functionality for management of the social customer service queue as well as tools for expedient resolution of customer issues.

    Feature weightings for the social customer care use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Core Features

    Social Moderation and Workflow Management Creating escalation workflows is important for triaging customer service, managing the social customer service queue and offering expedient resolution to customer complaints.

    Additional Features

    Social Media Channel Integration – Outbound

    Social Moderation and Workflow Management

    Social Response Management

    Social Post Archival

    Sentiment Analysis

    Dashboards and Visualization

    Campaign Execution

    Trend Analysis

    Post Time Optimization

    Feature Weightings

    Pie chart with Feature Weightings.

    Vendor considerations for the social customer case use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Product Evaluation Features

    Usability A clean and intuitive user interface is important for users to fully leverage the benefits of an SMMP.
    Affordability Affordability is an important consideration as the price of SMMPs can vary significantly depending on the breadth and depth of capability offered.
    Architecture SMMP is more valuable to organizations when it can integrate well with their applications, such as CRM and marketing automation software.

    Vendor Evaluation Features

    Viability Vendor viability is critical for long-term stability of an application portfolio.
    Focus The vendor is committed to the space and has a future product and portfolio roadmap.
    Reach Companies with processes that cross organizational and geographic boundaries require effective and available support.
    Sales Vendors need to demonstrate flexibility in terms of industry and technology partnerships to meet evolving customer needs.

    Pie chart with Product and Vendor Evaluation Features.

    Vendor performance for the social customer care use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Champion badge.

    Champions for this use case:

    Salesforce: Salesforce offers exceptional end-to-end social customer care capability with strong response escalation workflows.
    Leader badge.

    Leaders for this use case:

    Sprinklr: Sprinklr’s offering gives users high flexibility to configure escalation workflows and role-based permissions for managing the social customer service queue.

    Hootsuite: Hootsuite’s strength lies in the breadth of social networks that the platform supports in offering expedient resolution to customer complaints.

    Best Overall Value badge.

    Best Overall Value Award

    Sysomos: Sysomos is the best bang for your buck in this use case, offering essential response and workflow capabilities.

    Players in the social listening and analytics scenario

    • Sendible
    • Sysomos
    • Viralheat (Cision)

    Vendor performance for the social customer care use-case scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Stacked bar chart comparing vendors' use-case performance in multiple areas of 'Social customer care'.

    Value Index for the social customer care scenario

    Vendor Profiles icon

    What is a Value Score?

    The Value Score indexes each vendor’s product offering and business strength relative to its price point. It does not indicate vendor ranking.

    Vendors that score high offer more bang-for-the-buck (e.g. features, usability, stability) than the average vendor, while the inverse is true for those that score lower.

    Price-conscious enterprises may wish to give the Value Score more consideration than those who are more focused on specific vendor/product attributes.

    On a relative basis, Sendible maintained the highest Info-Tech Value ScoreTM of the vendor group for this use-case scenario. Vendors were indexed against Sendible’s performance to provide a complete, relative view of their product offerings.

    Bar chart of vendors' Value Scores in social customer care. Sysomos has the highest and the Average Score is 79.6.

    For an explanation of how Price is determined, see Information Presentation – Price Evaluation in the Appendix.

    For an explanation of how the Info-Tech Value Index is calculated, see Information Presentation – Value Index in the Appendix.

    VENDOR LANDSCAPE

    Vendor Profiles and Scoring

    Vendor title icon.

    Use the information in the SMMP Vendor Landscape analysis to streamline your own vendor analysis process

    Vendor Profiles icon

    This section of the Vendor Landscape includes the profiles and scoring for each vendor against the evaluation framework previously outlined.

    Sample of the SMMP Vendor Landscape analysis. Vendor Profiles
    • Include an overview for each company.
    • Identify the strengths and weaknesses of the product and vendor.
    • Identify the three-year TCO of the vendor’s solution (based on a ten-tiered model).
    Sample of the Vendor Landscape profiles slide.
    Vendor Scoring

    Use the Harvey Ball scoring of vendor and product considerations to assess alignment with your own requirements.

    Review the use-case scenarios relevant to your organization’s Use-Case Fit Assessment results to identify a vendor’s fit to your organization's SMMP needs. (See the following slide for further clarification on the use-case assessment scoring process.)

    Review the stoplight scoring of advanced features to identify the functional capabilities of vendors.

    Sample of the Vendor Scoring slide.

    Adobe Social is a powerhouse for digital marketers, with extremely well-developed analytics capabilities

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Adobe Social
    Employees 15,000+
    Headquarters San Jose, CA
    Website Adobe.com
    Founded 1982
    Presence NASDAQ: ADBE

    Logo for Adobe.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 8 between $500,000 and $1,000,000.

    Pricing tier for Adobe, tier 8.
    Pricing provided by vendor

    OVERVIEW
    • Adobe Social is a strong offering included within the broader Adobe Marketing Cloud. The product is tightly focused on social analytics and social campaign execution. It’s particularly well-suited to dedicated digital marketers or social specialists.
    STRENGTHS
    • Adobe Social provides broad capabilities across social analytics and social campaign management; its integration with Adobe Analytics is a strong selling point for organizations that need a complete, end-to-end solution.
    • It boasts great archiving capabilities (up to 7 years for outbound posts), meeting the needs of compliance-centric organizations and providing for strong longitudinal analysis capabilities.
    CHALLENGES
    • The product plays well with the rest of the Adobe Marketing Cloud, but the list of third-party CRM and CSM integrations is shorter than some other players in the market.
    • While the product is unsurprisingly geared towards marketers, organizations that want a scalable platform for customer service use cases will need to augment the product due to its focus on campaigns and analytics – service-related workflow and automation capabilities are not a core focus for the company.

    Adobe Social

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Adobe. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 4/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Adobe earned 'Leader' in Social Listening & Analytics and 'Champion' in Social Publishing & Campaign Management.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Adobe Social provides impressive features, especially for companies that position social media within a larger digital marketing strategy. Organizations that need powerful social analytics or social campaign execution capability should have Adobe on their shortlist, though the product may be an overbuy for social customer care use cases.

    Scores for Adobe's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Hootsuite is a capable vendor that offers a flexible solution for monitoring many different social media services

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Hootsuite
    Employees 800
    Headquarters Vancouver, BC
    Website Hootsuite.com
    Founded 2007
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Hootsuite.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 6, between $100,000 and $250,000.

    Pricing tier for Hootsuite, tier 6.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • In the past, Hootsuite worked on the freemium model by providing basic social account management features. The company has since expanded its offering and put a strong focus on enterprise feature sets, such as collaboration and workflow management.
    STRENGTHS
    • Hootsuite is extremely easy to use, having one of the most straightforward interfaces of vendors evaluated.
    • It has extensive monitoring capabilities for a wide variety of social networks as well as related services, which are supported through an app store built into the Hootsuite platform.
    • The product provides a comprehensive model for team-based collaboration and workflow management, demonstrated through nice cross-posting and post-time optimization capabilities.
    CHALLENGES
    • Hootsuite’s reporting and analytics capabilities are relatively basic, particularly when contrasted with more analytics-focused vendors in the market.
    • Running cross-channel campaigns is challenging without integration with third-party applications.

    Hootsuite

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Hootsuite. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 4/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Hootsuite earned 5th out of 6 in Social Listening & Analytics, 'Leader' in Social Publishing & Campaign Management, and 'Leader' in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    The free version of Hootsuite is useful for getting your feet wet with social management. The paid version is a great SMMP for monitoring and engaging your own social properties with good account and team management at an affordable price. This makes it ideal for SMBs. However, organizations that need deep social analytics may want to look elsewhere.

    Scores for Hootsuite's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Salesforce Marketing Cloud continues to be a Cadillac solution; it’s a robust platform with a host of features

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Salesforce Social Studio
    Employees 24,000+
    Headquarters San Francisco, CA
    Website Salesforce.com
    Founded 1999
    Presence NASDAQ: CRM

    Logo for Salesforce.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 7, between $250,000 and $500,000

    Pricing tier for Salesforce, tier 7.
    Pricing provided by vendor

    OVERVIEW
    • Social Studio is a powerful solution fueled by Salesforce’s savvy acquisitions in the marketing automation and social media management marketspace. The product has rapidly matured and is adept at both marketing and customer service use cases.
    STRENGTHS
    • Salesforce continues to excel as one of the best SMMP vendors in terms of balancing inbound analytics and outbound engagement. The recent addition of Salesforce Einstein to the platform bolsters deep learning capabilities and enhances the product’s value proposition to those that want a tool for robust customer intelligence.
    • Salesforce’s integration of Marketing Cloud, with its Sales and Service Clouds, also creates a good 360-degree customer view.
    CHALLENGES
    • Salesforce’s broad and deep feature set comes at a premium: the solution is priced materially higher than many other vendors. Before you consider Marketing Cloud, it’s important to evaluate which social media capabilities you want to develop: if you only need basic response workflows or dashboard-level analytics, purchasing Marketing Cloud runs the risk of overbuying.
    • In part due to its price point and market focus, Marketing Cloud is more suited to enterprise use cases than SMB use cases.

    Salesforce

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for  . Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 4/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Salesforce earned 'Champion' in Social Listening & Analytics, 'Leader' in Social Publishing & Campaign Management, and 'Champion' in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Social Studio in Salesforce Marketing Cloud remains a leading solution. Organizations that need to blend processes across the enterprise that rely on social listening, deep analytics, and customer engagement should have the product on their shortlist. However, companies with more basic needs may be off-put by the solution’s price point.

    Scores for 's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Sendible offers multiple social media management capabilities for SMBs and agencies

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Sendible
    Employees 27
    Headquarters London, UK
    Website Sendible.com
    Founded 2009
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Sendible.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 4, between $25,000 and $50,000

    Pricing tier for Sendible, tier 4.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • Founded in 2009, Sendible is a rising player in the SMMP market. Sendible is primarily focused on the SMB space. A growing segment of its client base is digital marketing agencies and franchise companies.
    STRENGTHS
    • Sendible’s user interface is very intuitive and user friendly.
    • The product offers the ability to manage multiple social accounts simultaneously as well as schedule posts to multiple groups on different social networks, making Sendible a strong choice for social engagement and customer care.
    • Its affordability is strong given its feature set, making it an attractive option for organizations that are budget conscious.
    CHALLENGES
    • Sendible remains a smaller vendor in the market – its list of channel partners lags behind larger incumbents.
    • Sendible’s contextual and visual content analytics are lacking vis-à-vis more analytics-centric vendors.

    Sendible

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Sendible. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 4/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Sendible earned 6th out of 6 and 'Best Overall Value' in Social Publishing & Campaign Management and 4th out of 6 in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Sendible offers a viable solution for small and mid-market companies, as well as social agencies with a focus on customer engagement for marketing and customer service use cases. However, organizations that need deep social analytics may want to look elsewhere.

    Scores for Sendible's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Sprinklr

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Sprinklr
    Employees 1,100
    Headquarters New York, NY
    Website Sprinklr.com
    Founded 2009
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Sprinklr.

    Pricing tier for Sprinklr, tier 6.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • Sprinklr has risen rapidly as a best-of-breed player in the social media management market. It markets a solution geared towards multiple use cases, from customer intelligence and analytics to service-centric response management.
    STRENGTHS
    • Sprinklr’s breadth of capabilities are impressive: the vendor has maintained a strong focus on social-specific functionality. As a result of this market focus, they have invested prudently in advanced social analytics and moderation workflow capabilities.
    • Sprinklr’s user experience design and data visualization capabilities are top-notch, making it a solution that’s easy for end users and decision makers to get up and running with quickly.
    CHALLENGES
    • Relative to other players in the market, the breadth and scope of Sprinklr’s integrations with other customer experience management solutions is limited.
    • Based on its feature set and price point, Sprinklr is best suited for mid-to-large organizations. SMBs run the risk of an overbuy situation.

    Sprinklr

    Vendor Profiles icon

    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Sprinklr. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 3/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Sprinklr earned 4th out of 6 in Social Listening & Analytics, 5th out of 6 in Social Publishing & Campaign Management, and 'Leader' in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Sprinklr is a strong choice for small and mid-market organizations offering breadth of social media management capabilities that covers social analytics, engagement, and customer service.

    Scores for Sprinklr's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Sprout Social provides small-to-medium enterprises with robust social response capabilities at a reasonable price

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Product Sprout Social
    Employees 200+
    Headquarters Chicago, IL
    Website Sproutsocial.com
    Founded 2010
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Sprout Social.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 6, between $100,000 and $250,000

    Pricing tier for Sprout Social, tier 6.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • Sprout Social has built out its enterprise capabilities over the last several years. It offers strong feature sets for account management, social monitoring and analytics, and customer care – it particularly excels at the latter.
    STRENGTHS
    • Sprout’s unified inbox and response management features are some of the most intuitive we’ve seen. This makes it a natural option for providing customer service via social channels.
    • Sprout Social is priced competitively in relation to other vendors.
    • The product provides strong social asset management capabilities where users can set content permissions and expiration dates, and limit access.
    CHALLENGES
    • Deep contextual analysis is lacking: the solution clearly falls more to the engagement side of the spectrum, and is particularly suited for social customer service.
    • Sprout Social has a limited number of technology partners for integrations with applications such as CRM and marketing automation software.
    • It still has a predominantly North American market focus.

    Sprout Social

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Sprout Social. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 3/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Sprout Social earned 6th out of 6 in Social Listening & Analytics and 4th out of 6 in Social Publishing & Campaign Management.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Sprout Social’s easy-to-understand benchmarking and dashboards, paired with strong response management, make it a great choice for mid-sized enterprises concerned with social engagement. However, organizations that want to do deep social analytics will need to augment the solution.

    Scores for Sprout Social's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Sysomos’ prime feature is its hardy analytics built atop a plethora of inbound social channels

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Product Sysomos MAP and Heartbeat
    Employees 200+
    Headquarters Toronto, ON
    Website Sysomos.com
    Founded 2007
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Sysomos.

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 4, between $25,000 and $50,000

    Pricing tier for Sysomos, tier 4.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • Sysomos began life as a project at the University of Toronto prior to its acquisition by Marketwire in 2010.
    • It split from Marketwire in 2015 and redesigned its product to focus on social monitoring, analysis, and engagement.

    STRENGTHS

    • MAP and Heartbeat offer extensive contextual and sentiment analytics, consolidating findings through a spam-filtering process that parses out a lot of the “noise” inherent in social media data.
    • The solution provides an unlimited number of profiles, enabling more opportunities for collaboration.
    • It provides workflow summaries, documenting the actions of staff and providing an audit trail through the entire process.

    CHALLENGES

    • Sysomos has introduced a publishing tool for social campaigns. However, its outbound capabilities continue to lag, and there are currently no tools for asset management.
    • Sysomos’ application integration stack is limited relative to other vendors.

    Sysomos

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Sysomos. Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 3/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Sysomos earned 'Leader' and 'Best Overall Value' in Social Listening & Analytics and 5th out of 6 as well as 'Best Overall Value' in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Sysomos’ broad array of good features has made it a frequent challenger to Marketing Cloud on analytics-centric SMMP evaluation shortlists. Enterprise-scale customers specifically interested in social listening and analytics, rather than customer engagement and campaign execution, will definitely want to take a look.

    Scores for Sysomos's individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Viralheat offers a clean analysis of an organization’s social media activity and has beefed up response workflows

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Product Viralheat
    Employees 1,200
    Headquarters Chicago, IL
    Website Cision.com
    Founded 2015
    Presence Privately held

    Logo for Cision (Viralheat).

    3 year TCO for this solution falls into pricing tier 6, between $100,000 and $250,000

    Pricing tier for Cision (Viralheat), tier 6.
    Pricing derived from public information

    OVERVIEW
    • Viralheat has been in the social media market since 2009. It provides tools for analytics and in-band social engagement.
    • The company was acquired by Cision in 2015, a Chicago-based public relations technology company.

    STRENGTHS

    • Viralheat offers robust workflow management capabilities for social response and is particularly useful for customer service.
    • The product has strong post time optimization capability through its ViralPost scheduling feature.
    • Cision’s acquisition of Viralheat makes the product a great choice for third-party social media management, namely public relations and digital marketing agencies.

    CHALLENGES

    • Viralheat remains a smaller vendor in the market – its list of channel partners lags behind larger incumbents.
    • Contextual and sentiment analysis are lacking relative to other vendors.

    Cision (Viralheat)

    Vendor Profiles icon
    'Product' and 'Vendor' scores for Cision (Viralheat). Overall product is 3/4; overall vendor is 2/4.
    'Scenario Performance' awards and 'Value Index' in the three previous scenarios. Cision (Viralheat) earned  in Social Listening & Analytics,  in Social Publishing & Campaign Management, and  in Social Customer Care.
    Info-Tech Recommends

    Cision has upped its game in terms of social workflow and response management and it monitors an above-average number of services. It is a steadfast tool for brands that are primarily interested in outbound customer engagement for marketing and customer service use cases.

    Scores for Cision (Viralheat)'s individual features, color-coded as they were previously.

    Use the SMMP Vendor Shortlist Tool to customize the vendor analysis for your organization

    Vendor Profiles icon SMMP Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool

    Instructions

    1. Eliminate misaligned vendors with knock-out criteria
      Use the SMMP Vendor Shortlist &am; Detailed Feature Analysis Tool to eliminate vendors based on specific knock-out criteria on tab 2, Knock-Out Criteria.
    2. Create your own evaluation framework
      Tailor the vendor evaluation to include your own product and vendor considerations on tab 3, Weightings. Identify the significance of advanced features for your own procurement on a scale of Mandatory, Optional, and Not Required on tab 4, Detailed Feature Analysis.
    3. Review the results of your customized evaluation
      Review your custom vendor shortlist on tab 5, Results.
    This evaluation uses both functional and architectural considerations to eliminate vendors.

    Knock-Out Criteria

    COTS vs. Open Source
    Deployment Models

    Sample of the SMMP Vender Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool tab 5, Results.
    Sample Vendor Shortlist from tab 5, Results

    Interpreting the Results
    Your custom shortlist will rank vendors that passed the initial knock-out criteria based on their overall score.
    The shortlist will provide broken-down scoring, as well as a custom value index based on the framework set in the tool.

    Phase 2, Step 2: Select your SMMP solution

    2.1

    2.2

    Analyze and shortlist vendors in the space Select your SMMP solution

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize your solution requirements.
    • Create an RFP to submit to vendors.
    • Solicit and review vendor proposals.
    • Conduct onsite vendor demonstrations.
    • Select the right solution.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core Project Team
    • Procurement Manager
    • Representative Stakeholders from Digital Marketing, Sales, and IT

    Outcomes of this step:

    • SMMP Selection Strategy

    Determine your SMMP procurement strategy

    Critical Points and Checks in Your Procurement
    • Follow your own organization’s procurement procedures to ensure that you adhere to your organization’s policies.
    • Based on your organization’s policies, identify if you are going to conduct a private or public RFP process.
      • If your RFP will contain sensitive information, use a private RFP process that is directed to specific vendors in order to protect the proprietary practices of your business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are still not sure of a vendor’s capabilities, we recommend sending an RFI before proceeding with an RFP.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    If your organization lacks a clear procurement process, refer to Info-Tech's Optimize IT Procurement research to help construct a formal process for selecting application technology.

    Info-Tech’s 15-Step Procurement Process

    Use Info-Tech's procurement process to ensure that your SMMP selection is properly planned and executed.

    1. Initiate procurement.
    2. Select procurement manager.
    3. Prepare for procurement; check that prerequisites are met.
    4. Select appropriate procurement vehicle.
    5. Assemble procurement teams.
    6. Create procurement project plan.
    7. Identify and notify vendors about procurement.
    8. Configure procurement process.
    9. Gather requirements.
    10. Prioritize requirements.
    11. Build the procurement documentation package.
    12. Issue the procurement.
    13. Evaluate proposals.
    14. Recommend a vendor.
    15. Present to management.

    Much of your procurement process should already be outlined from your charter and initial project structuring.
    In this stage of the process, focus on the successful completion of steps 7-15.

    Prioritize your solution requirements based on your business, architecture, and performance needs

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: Requirements Workbook and requirements gathering findings

    OUTPUT: Full documentation of requirements for the RFP and solution evaluation process

    Completed in Section 3

    1. Identify Your Requirements
      Use the findings being collected in the Requirements Workbook and related materials to define clear requirements around your organization’s desired SMMP.
    2. Prioritize Your Requirements
      • Identify the significance of each requirement for your solution evaluation.
      • Identify features and requirements as mandatory, important, or optional.
      • Control the number of mandatory requirements you document. Too many mandatory requirements could create an unrealistic framework for evaluating solutions.
    3. Create a Requirements Package
      • Consolidate your identified requirements into one list, removing redundancies and conflicts.
      • Categorize the requirements based on their priority and nature.
      • Use this requirements package as you evaluate vendors and create your RFP for shortlisted vendors.

    Info-Tech Insight

    No solution will meet 100% of your requirements. Control the number of mandatory requirements you place in your procurement process to ensure that vendors that are the best fit for your organization are not eliminated unnecessarily.

    Create an RFP to submit to vendors

    Supporting Tool icon Request for Proposal Template
    Associated Activity icon Activity: Interpreting the Results

    INPUT: Requirements package, Organization’s procurement procedures

    OUTPUT: RFP

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard and markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project manager, Core project team

    Leverage Info-Tech’s SMMP RFP Template to convey your desired suite requirements to vendors and outline the proposal and procurement steps set by your organization.

    Build Your RFP
    1. Outline the organization's procurement instructions for vendors (Sections 1, 3, and 5).
    2. Input the requirements package created in Activity 5.2 into your RFP (Section 4).
    3. Create a scenario overview to provide vendors an opportunity to give an estimated price.

    Approval Process

    Each organization has a unique procurement process; follow your own organization’s process as you submit your RFPs to vendors.

    1. Ensure compliance with your organization's standards and gain approval for submitting your RFP.

    Info-Tech RFP
    Table of Contents

    1. Statement of Work
    2. General Information
    3. Proposal Preparation Instructions
    4. Scope of Work, Specifications, and Requirements
    5. Vendor Qualifications and References
    6. Budget and Estimated Pricing
    7. Vendor Certification

    Standardize the potential responses from vendors and streamline your evaluation with a response template

    Supporting Tool icon Vendor Response Template
    Sample of the Vendor Response Template. Adjust the scope and content of the Vendor Response Template to fit your SMMP procurement process and vendor requirements.

    Section

    Why is this section important?

    About the Vendor This is where the vendor will describe itself and prove its organizational viability.
    Understanding of the Challenge Demonstrates that understanding of the problem is the first step in being able to provide a solution.
    Methodology Shows that there is a proven methodology to approach and solve the challenge.
    Proposed Solution Describes how the vendor will address the challenge. This is a very important section as it articulates what you will receive from the vendor as a solution.
    Project Management, Plan, and Timeline Provides an overview of the project management methodology, phases of the project, what will be delivered, and when.
    Vendor Qualifications Provides evidence of prior experience with delivering similar projects for similar clients.
    References Provides contact information for individuals/organizations for which the vendor has worked and who can vouch for the experience and success of working with this vendor.
    Value Added Services Remember, this could lead to a long-term relationship. It’s not only about what you need now, but also what you may need in the future.
    Requirements Confirmation from the vendor as to which requirements it can meet and how it will meet them.

    Evaluate the RFPs you receive within a clear scoring process

    Supporting Tool icon SMMP RFP Evaluation and Scoring Tool
    Steps to follow: 'Review, Evaluate, Shortlist, Brief, Select' with the first 3 highlighted.

    Associated Activity icon Activity

    Build a fair evaluation framework that evaluates vendor solutions against a set criteria rather than relative comparisons.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Have members of the SMMP evaluation team review the RFP responses given by vendors.
    2. Input vendor solution information into the SMMP RFP Evaluation and Scoring Tool.
    3. Analyze the vendors against your identified evaluation framework.
    4. Identify vendors with whom you wish to arrange vendor briefings.
    5. Contact vendors and arranging briefings.
    How to use this tool
    • Review the feature list and select where each feature is mandatory, desirable, or not applicable.
    • Select if each feature has been met by the vendor RFP response.
    • Enter the costing information provided by each vendor.
    • Determine the relative importance of the features, architecture, and support.
    Tool Output
    • Costing
    • Overall score
    • Evaluation notes and comments

    Vendor product demonstration

    Vendor Profiles icon Demo Script Template

    Demo

    Invite vendors to come onsite to demonstrate the product and to answer questions. Use a demo script to help identify how a vendor’s solution will fit your organization’s particular business capability needs.
    Make sure the solution will work for your business

    Provide the vendor with some usage patterns for the SMMP tool in preparation for the vendor demo.

    Provide the following information to vendors in your script:

    • Usage for different groups.
    • SMMP usage and [business analytics] usage.
    • The requirements for administration.
    How to challenge the vendors in the demo
    • Change visualization/presentation.
    • Change the underlying data.
    • Add additional datasets to the artifacts.
    • Collaboration capabilities.
    • Perform an investigation in terms of finding BI objects and identifying previous changes, and examine the audit trail.
    Sample of the SMMP Demo Script Template
    SMMP Demo Script Template

    INFO-TECH ACTIVITY

    INPUT: Requirements package, Use-case results

    OUTPUT: Onsite demo

    1. Create a demo script that will be sent to vendors that outlines SMMP usage patterns from your organization.
    2. Construct the demo script with your SMMP evaluation team, providing both prompts for the vendor to display the capabilities and some sample data for the vendor to model.

    Use vendor RFPs and demos to select the SMMP that best fits your organization’s needs

    Supporting Tool icon Suite Evaluation and Scoring Tool: Tab 5, Overall Score

    Don’t just choose the vendor who gave the best presentation. Instead, select the vendor who meets your functional requirements and organizational needs.

    Category Weight Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Vendor 3 Vendor 4
    SMMP Features 60% 75% 80% 80% 90%
    Architecture 25% 55% 60% 90% 90%
    Support 15% 10% 70% 60% 95%
    Total Score 100% 60% 74% 80% 91%
    Use your objective evaluation to select a vendor to recommend to management for procurement. Arrow from 'Vendor 4' to post script.

    Don’t automatically decide to go with the highest score; validate that the vendor is someone you can envision working with for the long term.

    • Select a vendor based not only on their evaluation performance, but also on your belief that you could form a lasting and supportive relationship with them.
    • Integration needs are dynamic, not static. Find an SMMP tool and vendor that have strong capabilities and will fit with the application and integration plans of the business.
    • In many cases, you will require professional services together with your SMMP purchase to make sure you have some guidance in the initial development and your own staff are trained properly.

    Following the identification of your selected suite, submit your recommendation to the organization’s management or evaluation team for final approval.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of 'Create an RFP to submit to vendors' slide with 'Request for Proposal Template'. Create an RFP for SMMP procurement

    Our Info-Tech analyst will walk you through the RFP preparation to ensure the SMMP requirements are articulated clearly to vendors in this space.

    Sample of 'Vendor product demonstration' slide with 'Demo Script Template'. Create SMMP demo scripts

    An analyst will walk you through the demo script preparation to guide the SMMP product demonstrations and briefings offered by vendors. The analyst will ensure the demo script addresses key requirements documented earlier in the process.

    Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform

    PHASE 3

    Review Implementation Considerations

    Phase 3: Review implementation considerations

    Steps of this blueprint represented by circles of varying colors and sizes, labelled by text of different sizes. Only Phase 3 is highlighted.
    Estimated Timeline:

    Info-Tech Insight

    Even a solution that is a perfect fit for an organization will fail to generate value if it is not properly implemented or measured. Conduct the necessary planning before implementing your SMMP.

    Major Milestones Reached
    • Plan for implementation and expected go-live date

    Key Activities Completed

    • SMMP Implementation Plan
    • Governance Plan
    • Change Control Methods

    Outcomes from This Phase

    Plans for implementing the selected SMMP tool.

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Review Implementation Considerations

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Establish best practices for SMMP implementation Step 3.2: Assess the measured value from the project
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Determine the right governance structure to overlook the SMMP implementation.
    • Identify integrations with other applications.
    • Establish an ongoing maintenance plan.
    • Assess the different deployment models.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine the key performance indicators for each department using the SMMP
    • Identify key performance indicators for business units using an SMMP
    Then complete these activities…
    • Establish a governance structure for social media.
    • Specify data linkages with CRM.
    • Identify risks and mitigation strategies
    • Determine the right deployment model for your organization.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Identify key performance indicators for business units using an SMMP
    With these tools & templates:
    • Social Media Steering Committee
    Phase 3 Results & Insights:
    • Implementation Plan
    • SMMP KPIs

    Phase 3, Step 1: Establish best practices for SMMP implementation

    3.1

    3.2

    Establish best practices for SMMP implementation Assess the measured value from the project

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish a governance structure for social media management.
    • Specify the data linkages you will need between your CRM platform and SMMP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core Project Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Social Media Steering Committee Charter
    • SMMP data migration Inventory
    • Determination of the deployment model that works best for your organization
    • Deployment Model

    Follow these steps for effective SMMP implementation

    What to Consider

    • Creating an overall social media strategy is the critical first step in implementing an SMMP.
    • Selecting an SMMP involves gathering business requirements, then translating those requirements into specific selection criteria. Know exactly what your business needs are to ensure the right SMMP is selected.
    • Implement the platform with an eye toward creating business value: establish points of integration with the existing CRM solution, establish ongoing maintenance policies, select the right deployment model, and train end users around role-based objectives.
    Arrow pointing down.

    Plan

    • Develop a strategy for customer interaction
    • Develop a formal strategy for social media
    • Determine business requirements
    Arrow pointing down.

    Create RFP

    • Translate into functional requirements
    • Determine evaluation criteria
    Arrow pointing down.

    Evaluate

    • Evaluate vendors against criteria
    • Shortlist vendors
    • Perform in-depth vendor review

    Implement

    • Integrate with existing CRM ecosystem (if applicable)
    • Establish ongoing maintenance policies
    • Map deployment to organizational models
    • Train end-users and establish acceptable use policies
    • Designate an SMMP subject matter expert

    Before deploying the SMMP, ensure the right social media governance structures are in place to oversee implementation

    An SMMP is a tool, not a substitute, for adequate cross-departmental social media oversight. You must coordinate efforts across constituent stakeholders.

    • Successful organizations have permanent governance structures in place for managing social media. For example, mature companies leverage Social Media Steering Committees (SMSCs) to coordinate the social media initiatives of different business units and departments. Large organizations with highly complex needs may even make use of a physical command center.
    • Compared to traditional apps projects (like CRM or ERP), social media programs tend to start as grassroots initiatives. Marketing and Public Relations departments are the most likely to spearhead the initial push, often selecting their own tools without IT involvement or oversight. This causes application fragmentation and a proliferation of shadow IT.
    • This organic adoption contrasts with the top-down approach many IT leaders are accustomed to. Bottom-up growth can ensure rapid response to social media opportunities, but it also leads to insufficient coordination. A conscious effort should be made to mature your social media strategy beyond this disorganized initial state.
    • IT can help be a “cat herder” to shepherd departments into shared initiatives.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Before implementing the SMMP, go through the appropriate organizational governance structures to ensure they have input into the deployment. If a social media steering committee is not already in place, rolling out an SMMP is a great opportunity to get one going. See our research on social media program execution for more details.

    Establish a governance structure for social media management

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.1 60 minutes

    INPUT: Project stakeholders, SMMP mandate

    OUTPUT: Social Media Governance Structure

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Describe the unique role that the governance team will play in social media management.
    2. Describe the overall purpose statement of the governance team.
    3. Define the roles and responsibilities of the governance team.
    4. Document the outcome in the Social Media Steering Committee Charter.

    EXAMPLE

    Executive Sponsorship
    Social Media Steering Committee
    VP Marketing VP Sales VP Customer Service VP Public Relations CIO/ IT Director
    Marketing Dept. Sales Dept. Customer Service Dept. Public Relations Dept. IT Dept.

    Use Info-Tech’s Social Media Steering Committee Charter Template to define roles and ensure value delivery

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1

    Leaders must ensure that the SMSC has a formal mandate with clear objectives, strong executive participation, and a commitment to meeting regularly. Create an SMSC Charter to formalize the committee governance capabilities.

    Developing a Social Media Steering Committee Charter:
    • Outline the committee’s structure, composition, and responsibilities using the Info-Tech Social Media Steering Committee Charter Template.
    • This template also outlines the key tasks and responsibilities for the committee:
      • Providing strategic leadership for social media
      • Leading SMMP procurement efforts
      • Providing process integration
      • Governing social media initiatives
      • Ensuring open communications between departments with ownership of social media processes
    • Keep the completed charter on file and available to all committee members. Remember to periodically update the document as organizational priorities shift to ensure the charter remains relevant.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of the Social Media Steering Committee Charter Template.

    Integrate your social media management platform with CRM to strengthen the realization of social media goals

    • Linking social media to existing customer relationship management solutions can improve information accuracy, reduce manual effort and provide more in-depth customer insights.
      • Organizations Info-Tech surveyed, and who integrated their solutions, achieved more goals as a result.
    • Several major CRM vendors are now offering products that integrate with popular social networking services (either natively or by providing support for third-party add-ons).
      • For example, Salesforce.com now allows for native integration with Twitter, while an add-on available for Oracle gathers real-time information about prospects by pulling their extended information from publicly available LinkedIn profiles.
    • Some CRM vendors are acquiring established SMMPs outright.
      • For example, Salesforce.com acquired Radian6 for their clients that have advanced social media requirements.
    Bar chart comparing the social media goal realization of organizations that integrated their SMMP and CRM technology and those that didn't.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    CRM vendors still lag in out-of-the-box social features, making a separate SMMP purchase a given. For companies that have not formally integrated social media with CRM, IT should develop the business case in conjunction with the applicable business-side partner (e.g. Marketing, Sales, Service, PR, etc.).

    Establish points of integration between SMMPs and CRM suites to gain a 360 degree view of the customer

    • Social media is a valuable tool from a standalone perspective, but its power is considerably magnified when it’s paired with the CRM suite.
    • Many SMMPs offer native integration with CRM platforms. IT should identify and enable these connectors to strengthen the business value of the platform.
    • An illustrated example of how an SMMP linked via CRM can provide proactive service while contributing to sales and marketing.
      An example of how an SMMP linked via CRM can provide proactive service while contributing to sales and marketing.
    • New channels do not mean they stand alone and do not need to be integrated into the rest of the customer interaction architecture.
    • Challenge SMMP vendors to demonstrate integration experience with CRM vendors and multimedia queue vendors.
    • Manual integration – adding resolved social inquiries yourself to a CRM system after closure – cannot scale given the rapid increase in customer inquiries originating in the social cloud. Integration with interaction management workflows is most desirable.

    These tools are enabling sales, and they help us serve our customers better. And anything that does that, is a good investment on our part.” Chip Meyers, (Sales Operation Manager, Insource)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    SMMPs are a necessary single-channel evolutionary step, just like there used to be email-only and web chat-only customer service options in the late 1990s. But they are temporary. SMMPs will eventually be subsumed into the larger marketing automation ecosystem. Only a few best of breed will survive in 10 years.

    Specify the data linkages you will need between your CRM platform and SMMP

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 1 hour

    INPUT: SMMP data sources

    OUTPUT: SMMP data migration inventory

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Build a list of sources of information that you’ll need to integrate with your CRM tool.
    2. Identify:
      1. Data Source
      2. Integration Direction
      3. Data Type and Use Case
    Data Source Migration/Integration Direction Data Type/Use Case
    Social Platform Bidirectional Recent Social Posts
    Customer Data Warehouse Bidirectional Contact Information, Cases, Tasks, Opportunities

    Establish a plan for ongoing platform maintenance

    • Like other enterprise applications, the SMMP will require periodic upkeep. IT must develop and codify policies around ongoing platform maintenance.
    • Platform maintenance should touch on the following areas:
      • Account access and controls – periodically, access privileges for employees no longer with the organization should be purged.
      • Platform security – cloud-based platforms will be automatically updated by the vendor to plug security holes, but on-premises solutions must be periodically updated to ensure that there are no gaps in security.
      • Pruning of old or outdated material – pages (e.g. Facebook Groups, Events, and Twitter feeds) that are no longer in use should be pruned. For example, a management console for an event that was held two years ago is unnecessary. Remove it from the platform (and the relevant service) to cut down on clutter (and reduce costs for “per-topic” priced platforms.)
    SMMP being fixed by a wrench.

    IT: SMMP Maintenance Checklist

    • Account upkeep and pruning
    • Security, privacy, and access
    • Content upkeep and pruning

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Even cloud-based platforms like SMMPs require a certain degree of maintenance around account controls, security, and content pruning. IT should assist the business units in carrying out periodic maintenance.

    Social media is a powerful medium, but organizations must develop a prudent strategy for minimizing associated risks

    Using an SMMP can help mitigate many of the risks associated with social media. Review the risk categories on the next several slides to determine which ones can be mitigated by effective utilization of a dedicated SMMP.

    Risk Category Likelihood Risk(s) Suggested Mitigation Strategy
    Privacy and Confidentiality High
    • Risk of inappropriate exchange of information between personal and business social networks (e.g. a personal account used for company business).
    • Abuse of privacy and confidentiality laws.
    • Whenever possible, implement separate social network accounts for business, and train your employees to avoid using personal accounts at work.
    • Have a policy in place for how to treat pre-existing accounts versus newly created ones for enterprise use.
    • Use the “unified sign-on” capabilities of an SMMP to prevent employees from directly accessing the underlying social media services.

    Good governance means being proactive in mitigating the legal and compliance risks of your social media program

    Risk Category Likelihood Risk(s) Suggested Mitigation Strategy
    Trademark and Intellectual Property Medium
    • Copyrighted information could inappropriately be used for promotional and other business purposes (e.g. using a private user’s images in collateral).
    • Legal should conduct training to make sure the organization’s social media representatives only use information in the public domain, nothing privileged or confidential. This is particularly sensitive for Marketing and PR.
    Control over Brand Image and Inappropriate Content Medium
    • Employees on social media channels may post something inappropriate to the nature of your business.
    • Employees can post something that compromises industry and/or ethical standards.
    • Use SMMP outbound filtering/post approval workflows to censor certain inappropriate keywords.
    • Select the team carefully and ensure they are fully trained on both official company policy and social media etiquette.
    • Ensure strong enforcement of Social Media AUPs: take a zero tolerance approach to flagrant abuses.

    Security is a top-of-mind risk, though bandwidth is a low priority issue for most organizations

    Risk Category Likelihood Risk(s) Suggested Mitigation Strategy
    IT Security Medium Risk of employees downloading or being sent malware through social media services. Your clients are also exposed to this risk; this may undermine their trust of your brand.
    • Implement policies that outline appropriate precautions by employees, such as using effective passwords and not downloading unauthorized software.
    • Use web-filtering and anti-malware software that incorporates social media as a threat vector.
    Bandwidth Low Increase in bandwidth needs to support social media efforts, particularly when using video social media such as YouTube.
    • Plan for any bandwidth requirements with IT network staff.
    • Most social media strategies shouldn’t have a material impact on bandwidth.

    Poaching of client lists and increased costs are unlikely to occur, but address as a worst case scenario

    Risk Category Likelihood Risk(s) Suggested Mitigation Strategy
    Competitors Poaching Client Lists Low The ability for a competitor to view lists of clients that have joined your organization’s social media groups.
    • In a public social network, you cannot prevent this. Monitor your own brand as well as competitors’. If client secrecy must be maintained, then you should use a private social network (e.g. Jive, Lithium, private SharePoint site), not a public network.
    Increased Cost of Servicing Customers Low Additional resources may be allocated to social media without seeing immediate ROI.
    • Augment existing customer service responsibilities with social media requests.
    • If a dedicated resource is not available, dedicate a specific amount of time per employee to be spent addressing customer concerns via social media.

    Determine your top social media risks and develop an appropriate mitigation strategy that incorporates an SMMP

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 20 minutes

    INPUT: Risk assessment inventory

    OUTPUT: Top social media risks and mitigation plan

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Based on your unique business variables, which social media risk categories are most applicable to your organization? In what order?
    2. Summarize the top risks below and identify mitigation steps (which often involve effective use of a dedicated SMMP).
    Rank Risk Category Mitigation Steps
    High Confidentiality We have strong records retention requirements, so using a rules-based SMMP like SocialVolt is a must.
    Medium Brand Image Ensure that only personnel who have undergone mandatory training can touch our social accounts via an SMMP.
    Low Competitors’ Poaching Lists Migrate our Business Services division contacts onto LinkedIn – maintain no Facebook presence for these clients.

    Determine the workflows that will be supported using your social media management platform

    Determine when, where, and how social media services should be used to augment existing workflows across (and between) the business process domains. Establish escalation rules and decide whether workflows will be reactive or proactively.

    • Fine tune your efforts in each business process domain by matching social technologies to specific business workflows. This will clearly delineate where value is created by leveraging social media.
    • Common business process domains that should be targeted include marketing, sales, and customer service. Public relations, human resources, and analyst relations are other areas to consider for social process support.
    • For each business process domain, IT should assist with technology enablement and execution.
    Target domains: 'Marketing', 'Sales', 'Customer Service', 'Public Relations', 'Human Resources'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The social media governance team should have high-level supervision of process workflows. Ask to see reports from line managers on what steps they have taken to put process in place for reactive and proactive customer interactions, as well as escalations and channel switching. IT helps orchestrate these processes through knowledge and expertise with SMMP workflow capability.

    There are three primary models for SMMP deployment: the agency model uses the SMMP as a third-party offering

    There are three models for deploying an SMMP: agency, centralized, and distributed.

    Agency Model
    Visual of the Agency Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to the 'SMMP' attached to the 'Agency (e.g. marketing or public relations agency)' attached to the 'Client Organization (Marketing, Sales, Service)'
    • In the agency model of SMMP deployment, the platform is managed on behalf of the organization by a third party – typically a marketing or public relations agency.
    • The agency serves as the primary touch point for the client organization: the client requests the types of market research it wants done, or the campaigns it wants managed. The agency uses its own SMMP(s) to execute the requests. Often, the SMMP’s results or dashboards will be rebranded by the agency.
    • Pros: The agency model is useful when large portions of marketing, service, or public relations are already being outsourced to a third-party provider. Going with an agency also splits the cost of more expensive SMMPs over multiple clients, and limits deployment costs.
    • Cons: The client organization has no direct control over the platform; going with an agency is not cost effective for firms with in-house marketing or PR capabilities.
    • Advice: Go with an agency-managed SMMP if you already use an agency for marketing or PR.

    Select the centralized deployment model when SMMP functionality rests in the hands of a single department

    Centralized Model
    Visual of the Centralized Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to the 'SMMP' attached to 'Marketing' attached to the 'Sales' and 'Service'
    In this example, marketing owns and manages a single SMMP
    • In the centralized model, a single SMMP workspace is owned and operated predominantly by a single business unit or department. Unlike the agency model, the SMMP functionality is utilized in-house.
    • Information from the SMMP may occasionally be shared with other departments, but normally the platform is used almost exclusively by a single group in the company. Marketing or public relations are usually the groups that maintain ownership of the SMMP in the centralized model (with selection and deployment assistance from the IT department).
    • Pros: The centralized model provides small organizations with an in-house, dedicated SMMP without having to go through an agency. Having a single group own and manage the SMMP is considerably more cost effective than having SMMPs licensed to multiple business units in a small company.
    • Cons: If more and more departments start clamoring for control of SMMP resources, the centralized model will fail to meet the overall needs of the organization.
    • Advice: Small-to-medium enterprises with mid-sized topic or brand portfolios should use the centralized model.

    Go with a distributed deployment if multiple business units require advanced SMMP functionality

    Distributed Model
    Visual of the Distributed Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to two 'SMMPs', one attached to 'Marketing' and 'Sales', the other to 'Customer Service' and 'Public Relations'.
    • In the distributed model, multiple SMMPs (sometimes from different vendors) or multiple SMMP workspaces (from a single vendor) are deployed to several groups (e.g. multiple departments or brand portfolios) in the organization.
    • Pros: The distributed model is highly effective in large organizations with multiple departments or brands that each are interested in SMMP functionality. Having separate workspaces for each business group enables customizing workspaces to satisfy different goals of the different business groups.
    • Cons: The cost of deploying multiple SMMP workspaces can be prohibitive.
    • Advice: Go with the distributed model if your organization is large and has multiple relevant departments or product marketing groups, with differing social media goals.

    Determine which deployment model works best for your organization

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.4 1 Hour

    INPUT: Deployment models

    OUTPUT: Best fit deployment model

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Project Manager, Core project team

    1. Assess and understand the three models of SMMP deployments: agency, centralized and distributed. Consider the pros and cons of each model.
    2. Understand how your organization manages enterprise social media. Consider the follow questions:
      • What is the size of your organization?
      • Who owns the management of social media in your organization?
      • Is social media managed in-house or outsourced to an agency?
      • What are the number of departments that use and rely on social media?
    3. Select the best deployment model for your organization.
    Agency Model Centralized Model Distributed Model
    Visual of the Agency Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to the 'SMMP' attached to the 'Agency (e.g. marketing or public relations agency)' attached to the 'Client Organization (Marketing, Sales, Service)' Visual of the Centralized Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to the 'SMMP' attached to 'Marketing' attached to the 'Sales' and 'Service' Visual of the Distributed Model with the 'Social Cloud' attached to two 'SMMPs', one attached to 'Marketing' and 'Sales', the other to 'Customer Service' and 'Public Relations'.

    Create an SMMP training matrix based on social media roles

    IT must assist the business by creating and executing a role-based training program. An SMMP expert in IT should lead training sessions for targeted groups of end users, training them only on the functions they require to perform their jobs.

    Use the table below to help identify which roles should be trained on which SMMP features.

    PR Professionals Marketing Brand, Product, and Channel Managers Customer Service Reps and Manager Product Development and Market Research IT Application Support
    Account Management Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field.
    Response and Engagement Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field.
    Social Analytics and Data Mining Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field.
    Marketing Campaign Execution Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field.
    Mobile Access Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field. Circle indicating a positive field.
    Archiving Circle indicating a positive field.
    CRM Integration Circle indicating a positive field.

    Phase 3, Step 2: Track your metrics

    3.1

    3.2

    Establish best practices for SMMP implementation Assess the measured value from the project

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify metrics and KPIs for business units using a dedicated SMMP

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core Project Team
    • Representative Stakeholders from Digital Marketing, Sales, and IT

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key Performance Indicators

    Know key performance indicators (KPIs) for each department that employs a dedicated social media management platform

    Share of Voice
    How often a brand is mentioned, relative to other brands competing in a defined market.

    User Engagement
    Quantity and quality of customer interactions with a brand or with each other, either on- or offline.

    Campaign Success
    Tracking reception of campaigns and leads brought in as a result.
    Marketing KPIs Reach
    Measurement of the size of market your brand advertisements and communications reach.

    Impressions
    The number of exposures your content, ad, or social post has to people in your target audience.

    Cost per Point (CPP)
    Cost to reach one percent of your organization’s audience.

    Product Innovation
    The quantity and quality of improvements, updates, and changes to existing products.

    Time-to-Market
    Time that passes between idea generation and the product being available to consumers.

    Product Development KPIs

    New Product Launches
    A ratio of completely new product types released to brand extensions and improvements.

    Cancelled Projects
    Measure of quality of ideas generated and quality of idea assessment method.

    Use social media metrics to complement your existing departmental KPIs – not usurp them

    Cost per Lead
    The average amount an organization spends to find leads.

    Conversion Rate
    How many sales are made in relation to the number of leads.

    Quantity of Leads
    How many sales leads are in the funnel at a given time.
    Sales KPIs Average Cycle Time
    Average length of time it takes leads to progress through the sales cycle.

    Revenue by Lead
    Total revenue divided by total number of leads.

    Avg. Revenue per Rep
    Total revenue divided by number of sales reps.

    Time to Resolution
    Average amount of time it takes for customers to get a response they are satisfied with.

    First Contact Resolution
    How often customer issues are resolved on the first contact.

    Customer Service KPIs

    Contact Frequency
    The number of repeated interactions from the same customers.

    Satisfaction Scores
    Determined from customer feedback – either through surveys or gathered sporadically.

    Social analytics don’t operate alone; merge social data with traditional data to gain the deepest insights

    Employee Retention
    The level of effort an organization exerts to maintain its current staff.

    Employee Engagement
    Rating of employee satisfaction overall or with a given aspect of the workplace.

    Preferred Employer
    A company where candidates would rather work over other companies.
    Marketing KPIs Recruitment Cycle Time
    Average length of time required to recruit a new employee.

    Employee Productivity
    A comparison of employee inputs (time, effort, etc.) and outputs (work).

    Employee Referrals
    The ratio of employee referrals that complete the recruitment process.

    There are conversations going on behind your back, and if you're not participating in them, then you're either not perpetuating the positive conversation or not diffusing the negative. And that's irresponsible in today's business world.” (Lon Safko, Social Media Bible)

    Identify key performance indicators for business units using an SMMP

    Associated Activity icon 3.2.1 30 minutes

    INPUT: Social media goals

    OUTPUT: SMMP KPIs

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard, Markers

    PARTICIPANTS: Representative stakeholders from different business units

    For each listed department, identify the social media goals and departmental key performance indicators to measure the impact of the SMMP.

    DepartmentSocial Media GoalsKPI
    Marketing
    • E.g. build a positive brand image
    • Net increase in brand recognition
    Product Development
    • Launch a viral video campaign showcasing product attributes to drive increased YT traffic
    • Net increase in unaided customer recall
    Sales
    • Enhance sales lead generation through social channels
    • Net increase in sales lead generation in the social media sales funnel
    Customer Service
    • Produce more timely responses to customer enquiries and complaints
    • Reduced time to resolution
    HR
    • Enhance social media recruitment channels
    • Number of LinkedIn recruitment

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1

    Sample of activity 3.1.1 'Establish a governance structure for social media management'. Establish a governance structure for social media management

    Our Info-Tech analyst will walk you through the exercise of developing roles and responsibilities to govern your social media program.

    3.1.2

    Sample of activity 3.1.2 'Specify the data linkages you will need between your CRM platform and SMMP'. Specify the data linkages you will need between your CRM and SMMP

    The analyst will help you identify the points of integration between the SMMP and your CRM platform.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.1.3

    Sample of activity 3.1.3 'Determine your top social media risks and develop an appropriate mitigation strategy that incorporates an SMMP'. Determine your top social media risks

    Our Info-Tech analyst will facilitate the discussion to identify the top risks associated with the SMMP and determine mitigation strategies for each risk.

    3.1.4

    Sample of activity 3.1.4 'Determine which deployment model works best for your organization'. Determine the best-fit deployment model

    An analyst will demonstrate the different SMMP deployment models and assist in determining the most suitable model for your organization.

    3.2.1

    Sample of activity 3.2.1 'Identify key performance indicators for business units using an SMMP'. Identify departmental KPIs

    An analyst will work with different stakeholders to determine the top social media goals for each department.

    Appendices

    Works Cited

    Ashja, Mojtaba, Akram Hadizadeh, and Hamid Bidram. “Comparative Study of Large Information Systems’ CSFs During Their Life Cycle.” Information Systems Frontiers. September 8, 2013.

    UBM. “The State of Social Media Analytics.” January, 2016.

    Jobvite. “2015 Recruiter Nation Survey.” September, 2015.

    Vendor Landscape Analysis Appendices

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Overview

    Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscapes are research materials that review a particular IT market space, evaluating the strengths and abilities of both the products available in that space, as well as the vendors of those products. These materials are created by a team of dedicated analysts operating under the direction of a senior subject matter expert over a period of several weeks.

    Evaluations weigh selected vendors and their products (collectively “solutions”) on the following eight criteria to determine overall standing:

    • Features: The presence of advanced and market-differentiating capabilities.
    • User Interface: The intuitiveness, power, and integrated nature of administrative consoles and client software components.
    • Affordability: The three-year total cost of ownership of the solution; flexibility of the pricing and discounting structure.
    • Architecture: The degree of integration with the vendor’s other tools, flexibility of deployment, and breadth of platform applicability.
    • Viability: The stability of the company as measured by its history in the market, the size of its client base, and its percentage of growth.
    • Focus: The commitment to both the market space, as well as to the various sized clients (small, mid-sized, and enterprise clients).
    • Reach: The ability of the vendor to support its products on a global scale.
    • Sales: The structure of the sales process and the measure of the size of the vendor’s channel and industry partners.

    Evaluated solutions within scenarios are visually represented by a Pathway to Success, based off a linear graph using above scoring methods:

    • Use-case scenarios are decided upon based on analyst expertise and experience with Info-Tech clients.
    • Use-case scenarios are defined through feature requirements, predetermined by analyst expertise.
    • Placement within scenario rankings consists of features being evaluated against the other scoring criteria.

    Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscapes are researched and produced according to a strictly adhered to process that includes the following steps:

    • Vendor/product selection
    • Information gathering
    • Vendor/product scoring
    • Information presentation
    • Fact checking
    • Publication

    This document outlines how each of these steps is conducted.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Vendor/Product Selection & Information Gathering

    Info-Tech works closely with its client base to solicit guidance in terms of understanding the vendors with whom clients wish to work and the products that they wish evaluated; this demand pool forms the basis of the vendor selection process for Vendor Landscapes. Balancing this demand, Info-Tech also relies upon the deep subject matter expertise and market awareness of its Senior Analysts to ensure that appropriate solutions are included in the evaluation. As an aspect of that expertise and awareness, Info-Tech’s analysts may, at their discretion, determine the specific capabilities that are required of the products under evaluation, and include in the Vendor Landscape only those solutions that meet all specified requirements.

    Information on vendors and products is gathered in a number of ways via a number of channels.

    Initially, a request package is submitted to vendors to solicit information on a broad range of topics. The request package includes:

    • A detailed survey.
    • A pricing scenario (see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Price Evaluation and Pricing Scenario, below).
    • A request for reference clients.
    • A request for a briefing and, where applicable, guided product demonstration.

    These request packages are distributed approximately eight weeks prior to the initiation of the actual research project to allow vendors ample time to consolidate the required information and schedule appropriate resources.

    During the course of the research project, briefings and demonstrations are scheduled (generally for one hour each session, though more time is scheduled as required) to allow the analyst team to discuss the information provided in the survey, validate vendor claims, and gain direct exposure to the evaluated products. Additionally, an end-user survey is circulated to Info-Tech’s client base and vendor-supplied reference accounts are interviewed to solicit their feedback on their experiences with the evaluated solutions and with the vendors of those solutions.

    These materials are supplemented by a thorough review of all product briefs, technical manuals, and publicly available marketing materials about the product, as well as about the vendor itself.

    Refusal by a vendor to supply completed surveys or submit to participation in briefings and demonstrations does not eliminate a vendor from inclusion in the evaluation. Where analyst and client input has determined that a vendor belongs in a particular evaluation, it will be evaluated as best as possible based on publicly available materials only. As these materials are not as comprehensive as a survey, briefing, and demonstration, the possibility exists that the evaluation may not be as thorough or accurate. Since Info-Tech includes vendors regardless of vendor participation, it is always in the vendor’s best interest to participate fully.

    All information is recorded and catalogued, as required, to facilitate scoring and for future reference.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Scoring

    Once all information has been gathered and evaluated for all vendors and products, the analyst team moves to scoring. All scoring is performed at the same time so as to ensure as much consistency as possible. Each criterion is scored on a ten-point scale, though the manner of scoring for criteria differs slightly:

    • Features is scored via Cumulative Scoring.
    • Affordability is scored via Scalar Scoring.
    • All other criteria are scored via Base5 Scoring.

    Cumulative Scoring is on a four-point scale. Zero points are awarded to features that are deemed absent or unsatisfactory, one point is assigned to features that are partially present, two points are assigned to features that require an extra purchase in the vendor’s product portfolio or through a third party, three points are assigned to features that are fully present and native to the solution, and four points are assigned to the best-of-breed native feature. The assigned points are summed and normalized to a value out of ten. For example, if a particular Vendor Landscape evaluates eight specific features in the Feature Criteria, the summed score out of eight for each evaluated product would be multiplied by 1.25 to yield a value out of ten to represent in a Harvey Ball format.

    In Scalar Scoring, a score of ten is assigned to the lowest cost solution, and a score of one is assigned to the highest cost solution. All other solutions are assigned a mathematically-determined score based on their proximity to / distance from these two endpoints. For example, in an evaluation of three solutions, where the middle cost solution is closer to the low end of the pricing scale it will receive a higher score, and where it is closer to the high end of the pricing scale it will receive a lower score; depending on proximity to the high or low price it is entirely possible that it could receive either ten points (if it is very close to the lowest price) or one point (if it is very close to the highest price). Where pricing cannot be determined (vendor does not supply price and public sources do not exist), a score of 0 is automatically assigned.

    In Base5 scoring a number of sub-criteria are specified for each criterion (for example, Longevity, Market Presence, and Financials are sub-criteria of the Viability criterion), and each one is scored on the following scale:

    • 5 - The product/vendor is exemplary in this area (nothing could be done to improve the status).
    • 4 - The product/vendor is good in this area (small changes could be made that would move things to the next level).
    • 3 - The product/vendor is adequate in this area (small changes would make it good, more significant changes required to be exemplary).
    • 2 - The product/vendor is poor in this area (this is a notable weakness and significant work is required).
    • 1 - The product/vendor fails in this area (this is a glaring oversight and a serious impediment to adoption).

    The assigned points are summed and normalized to a value out of ten as explained in Cumulative Scoring above.

    Scores out of ten, known as Raw scores, are transposed as is into Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape Shortlist Tool, which automatically determines Vendor Landscape positioning (see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Information Presentation – Vendor Landscape, below), Criteria Score (see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Information Presentation – Criteria Score, below), and Value Index (see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Information Presentation – Value Index, below).

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Information Presentation – Criteria Scores (Harvey Balls)

    Info-Tech’s criteria scores are visual representations of the absolute score assigned to each individual criterion, as well as of the calculated overall vendor and product scores. The visual representation used is Harvey Balls.

    Harvey Balls are calculated as follows:

    1. Raw scores are transposed into the Info-Tech Vendor Landscape Shortlist Tool (for information on how raw scores are determined, see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Scoring, above).
    2. Each individual criterion raw score is multiplied by a pre-assigned weighting factor for the Vendor Landscape in question. Weighting factors are determined prior to the evaluation process, based on the expertise of the Senior or Lead Research Analyst, to eliminate any possibility of bias. Weighting factors are expressed as a percentage, such that the sum of the weighting factors for the vendor criteria (Viability, Strategy, Reach, Channel) is 100%, and the sum of the product criteria (Features, Usability, Affordability, Architecture) is 100%.
    3. A sum-product of the weighted vendor criteria scores and of the weighted product criteria scores is calculated to yield an overall vendor score and an overall product score.
    4. Both overall vendor score / overall product score, as well as individual criterion raw scores are converted from a scale of one to ten to Harvey Ball scores on a scale of zero to four, where exceptional performance results in a score of four and poor performance results in a score of zero.
    5. Harvey Ball scores are converted to Harvey Balls as follows:
      • A score of four becomes a full Harvey Ball.
      • A score of three becomes a three-quarter full Harvey Ball.
      • A score of two becomes a half-full Harvey Ball.
      • A score of one becomes a one-quarter full Harvey Ball.
      • A score of zero becomes an empty Harvey Ball.
    6. Harvey Balls are plotted by solution in a chart where rows represent individual solutions and columns represent overall vendor / overall product, as well as individual criteria. Solutions are ordered in the chart alphabetically by vendor name.
    Harvey Balls
    Overall Harvey Balls represent weighted aggregates. Example of Harvey Balls with 'Overall' balls at the beginning of each category followed by 'Criteria' balls for individual raw scores. Criteria Harvey Balls represent individual raw scores.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Use-Case Scoring

    Within each Vendor Landscape a set of use-case scenarios are created by the analysts by considering the different outcomes and purposes related to the technology being evaluated. To generate the custom use-case vendor performances, the feature and Harvey Ball scoring performed in the Vendor Landscapes are set with custom weighting configurations.

    Calculations

    Each product has a vendor multiplier calculated based on its weighted performance, considering the different criteria scored in the Harvey Ball evaluations.

    To calculate each vendor’s performance, the advanced feature scores are multiplied against the weighting for the feature in the use-case scenario’s configuration.

    The weighted advanced feature score is then multiplied against the vendor multiplier.

    The sum of each vendor’s total weighted advanced features is calculated. This sum is used to identify the vendor’s qualification and relative rank within the use case.

    Example pie charts.

    Each use case’s feature weightings and vendor/product weighting configurations are displayed within the body of slide deck.

    Use-Case Vendor Performance

    Example stacked bar chart of use-case vendor performance.

    Vendors who qualified for each use-case scenario are ranked from first to last in a weighted bar graph based on the features considered.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Information Presentation – Feature Ranks (Stoplights)

    Advanced features are determined by analyst expertise, leveraging information gained from conversations with clients. Advanced features chosen as part of the evaluation are representative of what Info-Tech clients have indicated are of importance to their vendor solution. Advanced features are evaluated through a series of partial marks, dedicated to whether the solution performs all aspects of the Info-Tech definition of the feature and whether the feature is provided within the solution. Analysts hold the right to determine individual, unique scoring criteria for each evaluation. If a feature does not meet the criteria, Info-Tech holds the right to score the feature accordingly.

    Use cases use features as a baseline of the inclusion and scoring criteria.

    'Stoplight Legend' with green+star 'Feature category is present: best in class', green 'Feature category is present: strong', yellow 'Feature category is present: average', orange 'Feature category is partially present: weak', and red 'Feature category is absent or near-absent'.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Information Presentation – Value Index

    Info-Tech’s Value Index is an indexed ranking of solution value per dollar as determined by the raw scores assigned to each criteria (for information on how raw scores are determined, see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Scoring, above).

    Value scores are calculated as follows:

    1. The TCO Affordability criterion is removed from the Affordability score and the remaining product score criteria (Features, Usability, Architecture). Affordability scoring is adjusted with the TCO weighting distributed in proportion to the use case’s weighting for Affordability. Weighting is adjusted as to retain the same weightings relative to one another, while still summing to 100%.
    2. An adjusted multiplier is determined for each vendor using the recalculated Affordability scoring.
    3. The multiplier vendor score and vendor’s weighted feature score (based on the use-case scenario’s weightings), are summed. This sum is multiplied by the TCO raw score to yield an interim Value Score for each solution.
    4. All interim Value Scores are then indexed to the highest performing solution by dividing each interim Value Score by the highest interim Value Score. This results in a Value Score of 100 for the top solution and an indexed Value Score relative to the 100 for each alternate solution.
    5. Solutions are plotted according to Value Score, with the highest score plotted first, and all remaining scores plotted in descending numerical order.

    Where pricing is not provided by the vendor and public sources of information cannot be found, an Affordability raw score of zero is assigned. Since multiplication by zero results in a product of zero, those solutions for which pricing cannot be determined receive a Value Score of zero. Since Info-Tech assigns a score of zero where pricing is not available, it is always in the vendor’s best interest to provide accurate and up-to-date pricing. In the event that insufficient pricing is available to accurately calculate a Value Index, Info-Tech will omit it from the Vendor Landscape.

    Value Index

    Vendors are arranged in order of Value Score. The Value Score each solution achieved is displayed, and so is the average score.

    Example bar chart indicating the 'Value Score' vs the 'Average Score'.

    Those solutions that are ranked as Champions are differentiated for point of reference.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Information Presentation – Price Evaluation: Mid-Market

    Info-Tech’s Price Evaluation is a tiered representation of the three-year Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) of a proposed solution. Info-Tech uses this method of communicating pricing information to provide high-level budgetary guidance to its end-user clients while respecting the privacy of the vendors with whom it works. The solution TCO is calculated and then represented as belonging to one of ten pricing tiers.

    Pricing tiers are as follows:

    1. Between $1 and $2,500
    2. Between $2,500 and $10,000
    3. Between $10,000 and $25,000
    4. Between $25,000 and $50,000
    5. Between $50,000 and $100,000
    6. Between $100,000 and $250,000
    7. Between $250,000 and $500,000
    8. Between $500,000 and $1,000,000
    9. Between $1,000,000 and $2,500,000
    10. Greater than $2,500,000

    Where pricing is not provided, Info-Tech makes use of publicly available sources of information to determine a price. As these sources are not official price lists, the possibility exists that they may be inaccurate or outdated, and so the source of the pricing information is provided. Since Info-Tech publishes pricing information regardless of vendor participation, it is always in the vendor’s best interest to supply accurate and up to date information.

    Info-Tech’s Price Evaluations are based on pre-defined pricing scenarios (see Product Pricing Scenario, below) to ensure a comparison that is as close as possible between evaluated solutions. Pricing scenarios describe a sample business and solicit guidance as to the appropriate product/service mix required to deliver the specified functionality, the list price for those tools/services, as well as three full years of maintenance and support.

    Price Evaluation

    Call-out bubble indicates within which price tier the three-year TCO for the solution falls, provides the brackets of that price tier, and links to the graphical representation.

    Example price evaluation with a '3 year TCO...' statement, a visual gauge of bars, and a statement on the source of the information.

    Scale along the bottom indicates that the graphic as a whole represents a price scale with a range of $1 to $2.5M+, while the notation indicates whether the pricing was supplied by the vendor or derived from public sources.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Information Presentation – Vendor Awards

    At the conclusion of all analyses, Info-Tech presents awards to exceptional solutions in three distinct categories. Award presentation is discretionary; not all awards are extended subsequent to each Vendor Landscape and it is entirely possible, though unlikely, that no awards may be presented.

    Awards categories are as follows:

    • Champion Awards are presented to the top performing solution in a particular use-case scenario. As a result, only one Champion Award is given for each use case, and the entire Vendor Landscape will have the same number of Champion Awards as the number of evaluated use cases.
    • Leader Awards are presented to top performing solutions for each use-case scenario. Depending on the use-case scenario and the number of solutions being evaluated, a variable number of leader awards will be given. This number is at the discretion of the analysts, but is generally placed at two, and given to the solutions ranking second and third respectively for the use case.
    • Best Overall Value Awards are presented to the solution for each use-case scenario that ranked the highest in the Info-Tech Value Index for each evaluated scenario (see Vendor Landscape Methodology: Information Presentation – Value Index, above). If insufficient pricing information is made available for the evaluated solutions, such that a Value Index cannot be calculated, no Best Overall Value Award will be presented. Only one Best Overall Value Award is available for each use-case scenario.

    Vendor Awards for Use-Case Performance

    Vendor Award: 'Champion'. Info-Tech’s Champion Award is presented to solutions that placed first in an use-case scenario within the Vendor Landscape.
    Vendor Award: 'Leader'. Info-Tech Leader Award is given to solutions who placed in the top segment of a use-case scenario.
    Vendor Award: 'Best Overall Value'. Info-Tech’s Best Overall Value Award is presented to the solution within each use-case scenario with the highest Value Index score.

    Vendor Landscape Methodology:
    Fact Check & Publication

    Info-Tech takes the factual accuracy of its Vendor Landscapes, and indeed of all of its published content, very seriously. To ensure the utmost accuracy in its Vendor Landscapes, we invite all vendors of evaluated solutions (whether the vendor elected to provide a survey and/or participate in a briefing or not) to participate in a process of fact check.

    Once the research project is complete and the materials are deemed to be in a publication ready state, excerpts of the material specific to each vendor’s solution are provided to the vendor. Info-Tech only provides material specific to the individual vendor’s solution for review encompassing the following:

    • All written review materials of the vendor and the vendor’s product that comprise the evaluated solution.
    • Info-Tech’s Criteria Scores / Harvey Balls detailing the individual and overall vendor / product scores assigned.
    • Info-Tech’s Feature Rank / stoplights detailing the individual feature scores of the evaluated product.
    • Info-Tech’s Raw Pricing for the vendor either as received from the vendor or as collected from publicly available sources.
    • Info-Tech’s Scenario ranking for all considered scenarios for the evaluated solution.

    Info-Tech does not provide the following:

    • Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape placement of the evaluated solution.
    • Info-Tech’s Value Score for the evaluated solution.
    • End-user feedback gathered during the research project.
    • Info-Tech’s overall recommendation in regard to the evaluated solution.

    Info-Tech provides a one-week window for each vendor to provide written feedback. Feedback must be corroborated (be provided with supporting evidence), and where it does, feedback that addresses factual errors or omissions is adopted fully, while feedback that addresses opinions is taken under consideration. The assigned analyst team makes all appropriate edits and supplies an edited copy of the materials to the vendor within one week for final review.

    Should a vendor still have concerns or objections at that time, they are invited to a conversation, initially via email, but as required and deemed appropriate by Info-Tech, subsequently via telephone, to ensure common understanding of the concerns. Where concerns relate to ongoing factual errors or omissions, they are corrected under the supervision of Info-Tech’s Vendor Relations personnel. Where concerns relate to ongoing differences of opinion, they are again taken under consideration with neither explicit not implicit indication of adoption.

    Publication of materials is scheduled to occur within the six weeks following the completion of the research project, but does not occur until the fact check process has come to conclusion, and under no circumstances are “pre-publication” copies of any materials made available to any client.

    Pricing Scenario

    Info-Tech Research Group is providing each vendor with a common pricing scenario to enable normalized scoring of Affordability, calculation of Value Index rankings, and identification of the appropriate solution pricing tier as displayed on each vendor scorecard.

    Vendors are asked to provide list costs for SMMP software licensing to address the needs of a reference organization described in the pricing scenario. Please price out the lowest possible 3-year total cost of ownership (TCO) including list prices for software and licensing fees to meet the requirements of the following scenario.

    Three-year total acquisition costs will be normalized to produce the Affordability raw scores and calculate Value Index ratings for each solution.

    The pricing scenario:

    • Enterprise Name: Imperial Products Incorporated
    • Enterprise Size: SMB
    • Enterprise Vertical: Consumer packaged goods
    • Total Number of Sites: Three office locations
    • Total Number of Employees: 500
    • Total Number SMMP End Users: 50
      • 20 dedicated CSRs who are handling all customer service issues routed to them
      • 5 PR managers who need the ability to monitor the social cloud
      • 24 brand portfolio managers – each portfolio has 5 products (25 total)
      • Each product has its own Facebook and Twitter presence
      • 1 HR manager (using social media for recruiting)
    • Total Number of IT Staff: 20
    • Operating System Environment: Windows 7
    • Functional Requirements and Additional Information: Imperial Products Incorporated is a mid-sized consumer packaged goods firm operating in the United States. The organization is currently looking to adopt a platform for social media monitoring and management. Functional requirements include the ability to monitor and publish to Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, and blogs. The platform must have the ability to display volume trends, show follower demographics, and conduct sentiment analysis. It must also provide tools for interacting in-platform with social contacts, provide workflow management capabilities, and offer the ability to manage specific social properties (e.g. Facebook Pages). Additional features that are desirable are the ability to archive social interactions, and a dedicated mobile application for one of the major smartphone/tablet operating systems (iOS, Android etc.).

    First 30 Days Pandemic Response Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}418|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Given the speed and scope of the spread of the pandemic, governments are responding with changes almost daily as to what organizations and people can and can’t do. This volatility and uncertainty challenges organizations to respond, particularly in the absence of a business continuity or crisis management plan.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Assess the risk to and viability of your organization in order to create appropriate action and communication plans quickly.

    Impact and Result

    • HR departments must be directly involved in developing the organization’s pandemic response plan. Use Info-Tech's Risk and Viability Matrix and uncover the crucial next steps to take during the first 30 days of the COVID-19 pandemic.

    First 30 Days Pandemic Response Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a response plan for the first 30 days of a pandemic

    Manage organizational risk and viability during the first 30 days of a crisis.

    • First 30 Days Pandemic Response Plan Storyboard
    • Crisis Matrix Communications Template: Business As Usual
    • Crisis Matrix Communications Template: Organization Closing
    • Crisis Matrix Communications Template: Manage Risk and Leverage Resilience
    • Crisis Matrix Communications Template: Reduce Labor and Mitigate Risk
    [infographic]

    Leadership Workshop Overview

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}475|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $69,299 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs

    Leadership has evolved over time. The velocity of change has increased and leadership for the future looks different than the past.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Development of the leadership mind should never stop. This program will help IT leaders continue to craft their leadership competencies to navigate the ever-changing world in which we operate.

    Impact and Result

    • Embrace and lead change through active sharing, transparency, and partnerships.
    • Encourage growth mindset to enhance innovative ideas and go past what has always been done.
    • Actively delegate responsibilities and opportunities that engage and develop team members to build on current skills and prepare for the future.

    Leadership Workshop Overview Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Workshop Overview

    Read our concise Workshop Overview to find out how this program can support the development needs of your IT leadership teams.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Info-Tech Leadership Workshop Overview
    [infographic]

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}472|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • The organization is planning to move resources to cloud or devise a networking strategy for their existing cloud infrastructure to harness value from cloud.
    • The right topology needs to be selected to deploy network level isolation, design the cloud for management efficiencies and provide access to shared services on cloud.
    • A perennial challenge for infrastructure on cloud is planning for governance vs flexibility which is often overlooked.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t wait until the necessity arises to evaluate your networking in the cloud. Get ahead of the curve and choose the topology that optimizes benefits and supports organizational needs in the present and the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Define organizational needs and understand the pros and cons of cloud network topologies to strategize for the networking design.
    • Consider the layered complexities of addressing the governance vs. flexibility spectrum for your domains when designing your networks.

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Deck – A document to guide you through designing your network in the cloud.

    What cloud networking topology should you use? How do you provide access to shared resources in the cloud or hybrid infrastructure? What sits in the hub and what sits in the spoke?

    • Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud

    Don't revolve around a legacy design; choose a network design that evolves with the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Cloud adoption among organizations increases gradually across both the number of services used and the amount those services are used. However, network builders tend to overlook the vulnerabilities of network topologies, which leads to complications down the road, especially since the structures of cloud network topologies are not all of the same quality. A network design that suits current needs may not be the best solution for the future state of the organization.

    Even if on-prem network strategies were retained for ease of migration, it is important to evaluate and identify the cloud network topology that can not only elevate the performance of your infrastructure in the cloud, but also that can make it easier to manage and provision resources.

    An "as the need arises" strategy will not work efficiently since changing network designs will change the way data travels within your network, which will then need to be adopted to existing application architectures. This becomes more complicated as the number of services hosted in the cloud grows.

    Keep a network strategy in place early on and start designing your infrastructure accordingly. This gives you more control over your networks and eliminates the need for huge changes to your infrastructure down the road.

    This is a picture of Nitin Mukesh

    Nitin Mukesh
    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The organization is planning to move resources to the cloud or devise a networking strategy for their existing cloud infrastructure to harness value from the cloud.

    The right topology needs to be selected to deploy network level isolation, design the cloud for management efficiencies, and provide access to shared services in the cloud.

    A perennial challenge for infrastructure in the cloud is planning for governance vs. flexibility, which is often overlooked.

    Common Obstacles

    The choice of migration method may result in retaining existing networking patterns and only making changes when the need arises.

    Networking in the cloud is still new, and organizations new to the cloud may not be aware of the cloud network designs they can consider for their business needs.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Define organizational needs and understand the pros and cons of cloud network topologies to strategize for the networking design.

    Consider the layered complexities of addressing the governance vs. flexibility spectrum for your domains when designing your networks.

    Insight Summary

    Don't wait until the necessity arises to evaluate your networking in the cloud. Get ahead of the curve and choose the topology that optimizes benefits and supports organizational needs in the present and future.

    Your challenge

    Selecting the right topology: Many organizations migrate to the cloud retaining a mesh networking topology from their on-prem design, or they choose to implement the mesh design leveraging peering technologies in the cloud without a strategy in place for when business needs change. While there may be many network topologies for on-prem infrastructure, the network design team may not be aware of the best approach in cloud platforms for their requirements, or a cloud networking strategy may even go overlooked during the migration.

    Finding the right cloud networking infrastructure for:

    • Management efficiencies
    • Network-level isolation of resources
    • Access to shared services

    Deciding between governance and flexibility in networking design: In the hub and spoke model, if a domain is in the hub, the greater the governance over it, and if it sits in the spoke, the higher the flexibility. Having a strategy for the most important domains is key. For example, some security belongs in the hub and some security belongs in the spoke. The tradeoff here is if it sits completely in the spoke, you give it a lot of freedom, but it becomes harder to standardize across the organization.

    Mesh network topology

    A mesh is a design where virtual private clouds (VPCs) are connected to each other individually creating a mesh network. The network traffic is fast and can be redirected since the nodes in the network are interconnected. There is no hierarchical relationship between the networks, and any two networks can connect with each other directly.

    In the cloud, this design can be implemented by setting up peering connections between any two VPCs. These VPCs can also be set up to communicate with each other internally through the cloud service provider's network without having to route the traffic via the internet.

    While this topology offers high redundancy, the number of connections grows tremendously as more networks are added, making it harder to scale a network using a mesh topology.

    Mesh Network on AWS

    This is an image of a Mesh Network on AWS

    Source: AWS, 2018

    Constraints

    The disadvantages of peering VPCs into a mesh quickly arise with:

    • Transitive connections: Transitive connections are not supported in the cloud, unlike with on-prem networking. This means that if there are two networks that need to communicate, a single peering link can be set up between them. However, if there are more than two networks and they all need to communicate, they should all be connected to each other with separate individual connections.
    • Cost of operation: The lack of transitive routing requires many connections to be set up, which adds up to a more expensive topology to operate as the number of networks grows. Cloud providers also usually limit the number of peering networks that can be set up, and this limit can be hit with as few as 100 networks.
    • Management: Mesh tends to be very complicated to set up, owing to the large number of different peering links that need to be established. While this may be manageable for small organizations with small operations, for larger organizations with robust cybersecurity practices that require multiple VPCs to be deployed and interconnected for communications, mesh opens you up to multiple points of failure.
    • Redundancy: With multiple points of failure already being a major drawback of this design, you also cannot have more than one peered connection between any two networks at the same time. This makes designing your networking systems for redundancy that much more challenging.
    Number of virtual networks 10 20 50 100
    Peering links required
    [(n-1)*n]/2
    45 190 1225 4950

    Proportional relationship of virtual networks to required peering links in a mesh topology

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Blockchain
    SOURCE: Microsoft

    An organization with four members wants to deploy a blockchain in the cloud, with each member running their own virtual network. With only four members on the team, a mesh network can be created in the cloud with each of their networks being connected to each other, adding up to a total of 12 peering connections (four members with three connections each). While the members may all be using different cloud accounts, setting up connections between them will still be possible.

    The organization wants to expand to 15 members within the next year, with each new member being connected with their separate virtual networks. Once grown, the organization will have a total of 210 peering connections since each of the virtual networks will then need 14 peering connections. While this may still be possible to deploy, the number of connections makes it harder to manage and would be that much more difficult to deploy if the organization grows to even 30 or 40 members. The new scale of virtual connections calls for an alternative networking strategy that cloud providers offer – the hub and spoke topology.

    This is an image of the connections involved in a mesh network with four participants.

    Source: Microsoft, 2017

    Hub and spoke network topology

    In hub and spoke network design, each network is connected to a central network that facilitates intercommunication between the networks. The central network, also called the hub, can be used by multiple workloads/servers/services for hosting services and for managing external connectivity. Other networks connected to the hub through network peering are called spokes and host workloads.

    Communications between the workloads/servers/services on spokes pass in or out of the hub where they are inspected and routed. The spokes can also be centrally managed from the hub with IT rules and processes.

    A hub and spoke design enable a larger number of virtual networks to be interconnected as each network only needs one peered connection (to the hub) to be able to communicate with any other network in the system.

    Hub and Spoke Network on AWS

    This is an image of the Hub and Spoke Network on AWS

    What hub and spoke networks do better

    1. Ease of connectivity: Hub and spoke decreases the liabilities of scale that come from a growing business by providing a consistent connection that can be scaled easily. As more networks are added to an organization, each will only need to be connected once – to the hub. The number of connections is considerably lower than in a mesh topology and makes it easier to maintain and manage.
    2. Business agility and scalability: It is easier to increase the number of networks than in mesh, making it easier to grow your business into new channels with less time, investment, and risk.
    3. Data collection: With a hub and spoke design, all data flows through the hub – depending on the design, this includes all ingress and egress to and from the system. This makes it an excellent central network to collect all business data.
    4. Network-level isolation: Hub and spoke enables separation of workloads and tiers into different networks. This is particularly useful to ensure an issue affecting a network or a workload does not affect the rest.
    5. Network changes: Changes to a separated network are much easier to carry out knowing the changes made will not affect all the other connected networks. This reduces work-hours significantly when systems or applications need to be altered.
    6. Compliance: Compliance requirements such as SOC 1 and SOC 2 require separate environments for production, development, and testing, which can be done in a hub and spoke model without having to re-create security controls for all networks.

    Hub and spoke constraints

    While there are plenty of benefits to using this topology, there are still a few notable disadvantages with the design.

    Point-to-point peering

    The total number of total peered connections required might be lower than mesh, but the cost of running independent projects is cheaper on mesh as point-to-point data transfers are cheaper.

    Global access speeds with a monolithic design

    With global organizations, implementing a single monolithic hub network for network ingress and egress will slow down access to cloud services that users will require. A distributed network will ramp up the speeds for its users to access these services.

    Costs for a resilient design

    Connectivity between the spokes can fail if the hub site dies or faces major disruptions. While there are redundancy plans for cloud networks, it will be an additional cost to plan and build an environment for it.

    Leverage the hub and spoke strategy for:

    Providing access to shared services: Hub and spoke can be used to give workloads that are deployed on different networks access to shared services by placing the shared service in the hub. For example, DNS servers can be placed in the hub network, and production or host networks can be connected to the hub to access it, or if the central network is set up to host Active Directory services, then servers in other networks can act as spokes and have full access to the central VPC to send requests. This is also a great way to separate workloads that do not need to communicate with each other but all need access to the same services.

    Adding new locations: An expanding organization that needs to add additional global or domestic locations can leverage hub and spoke to connect new network locations to the main system without the need for multiple connections.

    Cost savings: Apart from having fewer connections than mesh that can save costs in the cloud, hub and spoke can also be used to centralize services such as DNS and NAT to be managed in one location rather than having to individually deploy in each network. This can bring down management efforts and costs considerably.

    Centralized security: Enterprises can deploy a center of excellence on the hub for security, and the spokes connected to it can leverage a higher level of security and increase resilience. It will also be easier to control and manage network policies and networking resources from the hub.

    Network management: Since each spoke is peered only once to the hub, detecting connectivity problems or other network issues is made simpler in hub and spoke than on mesh. A network manager deployed on the cloud can give access to network problems faster than on other topologies.

    Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid

    The advantages of using a hub and spoke model far exceed those of using a mesh topology in the cloud and go to show why most organizations ultimately end up using the hub and spoke as their networking strategy.

    However, organizations, especially large ones, are complex entities, and choosing only one model may not serve all business needs. In such cases, a hybrid approach may be the best strategy. The following slides will demonstrate the advantages and use cases for mesh, however limited they might be.

    Where it can be useful:

    An organization can have multiple network topologies where system X is a mesh and system Y is a hub and spoke. A shared system Z can be a part of both systems depending on the needs.

    An organization can have multiple networks interconnected in a mesh and some of the networks in the mesh can be a hub for a hub-spoke network. For example, a business unit that works on data analysis can deploy their services in a spoke that is connected to a central hub that can host shared services such as Active Directory or NAT. The central hub can then be connected to a regional on-prem network where data and other shared services can be hosted.

    Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid network on AWS

    This is an image of the Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid network on AWS

    Why mesh can still be useful

    Benefits Of Mesh

    Use Cases For Mesh

    Security: Setting up a peering connection between two VPCs comes with the benefit of improving security since the connection can be private between the networks and can isolate public traffic from the internet. The traffic between the networks never has to leave the cloud provider's network, which helps reduce a class of risks.

    Reduced network costs: Since the peered networks communicate internally through the cloud's internal networks, the data transfer costs are typically cheaper than over the public internet.

    Communication speed: Improved network latency is a key benefit from using mesh because the peered traffic does not have to go over the public internet but rather the internal network. The network traffic between the connections can also be quickly redirected as needed.

    Higher flexibility for backend services: Mesh networks can be desirable for back-end services if egress traffic needs to be blocked to the public internet from the deployed services/servers. This also helps avoid having to set up public IP or network address translation (NAT) configurations.

    Connecting two or more networks for full access to resources: For example, consider an organization that has separate networks for each department, which don't all need to communicate with each other. Here, a peering network can be set up only between the networks that need to communicate with full or partial access to each other such as finance to HR or accounting to IT.

    Specific security or compliance need: Mesh or VPC peering can also come in handy to serve specific security needs or logging needs that require using a network to connect to other networks directly and in private. For example, global organizations that face regulatory requirements of storing or transferring data domestically with private connections.

    Systems with very few networks that do not need internet access: Workloads deployed in networks that need to communicate with each other but do not require internet access or network address translation (NAT) can be connected using mesh especially when there are security reasons to keep them from being connected to the main system, e.g. backend services such as testing environments, labs, or sandboxes can leverage this design.

    Designing for governance vs. flexibility in hub and spoke

    Governance and flexibility in managing resources in the cloud are inversely proportional: The higher the governance, the less freedom you have to innovate.

    The complexities of designing an organization's networks grow with the organization as it becomes global and takes on more services and lines of business. Organizations that choose to deploy the hub and spoke model face a dilemma in choosing between governance and flexibility for their networks. Organizations need to find that sweet spot to find the right balance between how much they want to govern their systems, mainly for security- and cost-monitoring, and how much flexibility they want to provide for innovation and other operations, since the two usually tend to have an inverse relationship.

    This decision in hub and spoke usually means that the domains chosen for higher governance must be placed in the hub network, and the domains that need more flexibility in a spoke. The key variables in the following slide will help determine the placement of the domain and will depend entirely on the organization's context.

    The two networking patterns in the cloud have layered complexities that need to be systematically addressed.

    Designing for governance vs. flexibility in hub and spoke

    If a network has more flexibility in all or most of these domains, it may be a good candidate for a spoke-heavy design; otherwise, it may be better designed in a hub-centric pattern.

    • Function: The function the domain network is assigned to and the autonomy the function needs to be successful. For example, software R&D usually requires high flexibility to be successful.
    • Regulations: The extent of independence from both internal and external regulatory constraints the domain has. For example, a treasury reporting domain typically has high internal and external regulations to adhere to.
    • Human resources: The freedom a domain has to hire and manage its resources to perform its function. For example, production facilities in a huge organization have the freedom to manage their own resources.
    • Operations: The freedom a domain has to control its operations and manage its own spending to perform its functions. For example, governments usually have different departments and agencies, each with its own budget to perform its functions.
    • Technology: The independence and the ability a domain has to manage its selection and implementation of technology resources in the cloud. For example, you may not want a software testing team to have complete autonomy to deploy resources.

    Optimal placement of services between the hub and spoke

    Shared services and vendor management

    Resources that are shared between multiple projects or departments or even by the entire organization should be hosted on the hub network to simplify sharing these services. For example, e-learning applications that may be used by multiple business units to train their teams, Active Directory accessed by most teams, or even SAAS platforms such as O365 and Salesforce can leverage buying power and drive down the costs for the organization. Shared services should also be standardized across the organization and for that, it needs to have high governance.

    Services that are an individual need for a network and have no preexisting relationship with other networks or buying power and scale can be hosted in a spoke network. For example, specialized accounting software used exclusively by the accounting team or design software used by a single team. Although the services are still a part of the wider network, it helps separate duties from the shared services network and provides flexibility to the teams to customize and manage their services to suit their individual needs.

    Network egress and interaction

    Network connections, be they in the cloud or hybrid-cloud, are used by everyone to either connect to the internet, access cloud services, or access the organization's data center. Since this is a shared service, a centralized networking account must be placed in the hub for greater governance. Interactions between the spokes in a hub and spoke model happens through the hub, and providing internet access to the spokes through the hub can help leverage cost benefits in the cloud. The network account will perform routing duties between the spokes, on-prem assets, and egress out to the internet.

    For example, NAT gateways in the cloud that are managed services are usually charged by the hour, and deploying NAT on each spoke can be harder to manage and expensive to maintain. A NAT gateway deployed in a central networking hub can be accessed by all spokes, so centralizing it is a great option.

    Note that, in some cases, when using edge locations for data transfers, it may be cost effective to deploy a NAT in the spoke, but such cases usually do not apply to most organizational units.

    A centralized network hub can also be useful to configure network policies and network resources while organizational departments can configure non-network resources, which helps separate responsibilities for all the spokes in the system. For example, subnets and routes can be controlled from the central network hub to ensure standardized network policies across the network.

    Security

    While there needs to be security in the hub and the spokes individually, finding the balance of operation can make the systems more robust. Hub and spoke design can be an effective tool for security when a principal security hub is hosted in the hub network. The central security hub can collect data from the spokes as well as non-spoke sources such as regulatory bodies and threat intelligence providers, and then share the information with the spokes.

    Threat information sharing is a major benefit of using this design, and the hub can take actions to analyze and enrich the data before sharing it with spokes. Shared services such as threat intelligence platforms (TIP) can also benefit from being centralized when stationed in the hub. A collective defense approach between the hub and spoke can be very successful in addressing sophisticated threats.

    Compliance and regulatory requirements such as HIPAA can also be placed in the hub, and the spokes connected to it can make use of it instead of having to deploy it in each spoke individually.

    Cloud metering

    The governance vs. flexibility paradigm usually decides the placement of cloud metering, i.e. if the organization wants higher control over cloud costs, it should be in the central hub, whereas if it prioritizes innovation, the spokes should be allowed to control it. Regardless of the placement of the domain, the costs can be monitored from the central hub using cloud-native monitoring tools such as Azure Monitor or any third-party software deployed in the hub.

    For ease of governance and since resources are usually shared at a project level, most cloud service providers suggest that an individual metering service be placed in the spokes. The centralized billing system of the organization, however, can make use of scale and reserved instances to drive down the costs that the spokes can take advantage of. For example, billing and access control resources are placed in the lower levels in GCP to enable users to set up projects and perform their tasks. These billing systems in the lower levels are then controlled by a centralized billing system to decide who pays for the resources provisioned.

    Don't get stuck with your on-prem network design. Design for the cloud.

    1. Peering VPCs into a mesh design can be an easy way to get onto the cloud, but it should not be your networking strategy for the long run.
    2. Hub and spoke network design offers more benefits than any other network strategy to be adopted only when the need arises. Plan for the design early on and keep a strategy in place to deploy it as early as possible.
    3. Hybrid of mesh and hub and spoke will be very useful in connecting multiple large networks especially when they need to access the same resources without having to route the traffic over the internet.
    4. Governance vs. flexibility should be a key consideration when designing for hub and spoke to leverage the best out of your infrastructure.
    5. Distribute domains across the hub or spokes to leverage costs, security, data collection, and economies of scale, and to foster secure interactions between networks.

    Cloud network design strategy

    This is an image of the framework for developing a Cloud Network Design Strategy.

    Bibliography

    Borschel, Brett. "Azure Hub Spoke Virtual Network Design Best Practices." Acendri Solutions, 13 Jan. 2022. Web.
    Singh, Garvit. "Amazon Virtual Private Cloud Connectivity Options." AWS, January 2018. Web.
    "What Is the Hub and Spoke Information Sharing Model?" Cyware, 16 Aug. 2021. Web.
    Youseff, Lamia. "Mesh and Hub-and-Spoke Networks on Azure." Microsoft, Dec. 2017. Web.

    Acquire the Right Hires with Effective Interviewing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}576|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $15,749 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select
    • Scope: Acquiring the best talent relies heavily on an effective interviewing process, which involves the strategic preparation of stakeholders, including interviewers. Asking the most effective questions will draw out the most appropriate information to best assess the candidate. Evaluating the interview process and recording best practices will inspire continuous interviewing improvement within the organization.
    • Challenge: The majority of organizations do not have a solid interviewing process in place, and most interviewers are not practiced at interviewing. This results in many poor hiring decisions, costing the organization in many ways. Upsizing is on the horizon, the competition for good talent is escalating, and distinguishing between a good interviewee and a good candidate fit for a position is becoming more difficult.
    • Pain/Risk: Although properly preparing for and conducting an interview requires additional time on the part of HR, the hiring manager, and all interviewers involved, the long-term benefits of an effective interview process positively affect the organization’s bottom line and company morale.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most interviewers are not as good as they think they are, resulting in many poor hiring decisions. A poor hire can cost an organization up to 15 times the position’s annual salary, as well as hurt employee morale.
    • The Human Resources department needs to take responsibility for an effective interview process, but the business needs to take responsibility for developing its new hire needs, and assessing the candidates using the best questions and the most effective interview types and techniques.
    • All individuals with a stake in the interview process need to invest sufficient time to help define the ideal candidate, understand their roles and decision rights in the process, and prepare individually to interview effectively.
    • There are hundreds of different interview types, techniques, and tools for an organization to use, but the most practiced and most effective is behavioral interviewing.
    • There is no right interview type and technique. Each hiring scenario needs to be evaluated to pick the appropriate type and technique that should be practiced, and the right questions that should be asked.

    Impact and Result

    • Gain insight into and understand the need for a strong interview process.
    • Strategize and plan your organization’s interview process, including how to make up an ideal candidate profile, who should be involved in the process, and how to effectively match interview types, techniques, and questions to assess the ideal candidate attributes.
    • Understand various hiring scenarios, and how an interview process may be modified to reflect your organization’s scenario.
    • Learn about the most common interview types and techniques, when they are appropriate to use, and best practices around using them effectively.
    • Evaluate your interview process and yourself as an interviewer to better inform future candidate interviewing strategy.

    Acquire the Right Hires with Effective Interviewing Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Implement an effective interview and continuous improvement process

    Acquire the right hire.

    • Storyboard: Acquire the Right Hires with Effective Interviewing

    2. Document all aspects of your interview strategy and plan with stakeholders

    Ensure an effective and seamless interview process.

    • Candidate Interview Strategy and Planning Guide

    3. Recognize common interviewing errors and study best practices to address these errors

    Be an effective interviewer.

    • Screening Interview Template
    • Interview Guide Template
    • Supplement: Quick Fixes to Common Interview Errors
    • Pre-interview Guide for Interviewers
    • Candidate Communication Template
    [infographic]

    Master the Public Cloud IaaS Acquisition Models

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}228|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,820 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Understanding the differences in IaaS platform agreements, purchasing options, associated value, and risks. What are your options for:

    • Upfront or monthly payments
    • Commitment discounts
    • Support options
    • Migration planning and support

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    IaaS platforms offer similar technical features, but they vary widely on their procurement model. By fully understanding the procurement differences and options, you will be able to purchase wisely, save money both long and short term, and mitigate investment risk.

    Most vendors have similar processes and options to buy. Finding a transparent explanation and summary of each platform in a side-by-side review is difficult.

    • Are vendor reps being straight forward?
    • What are the licensing requirements?
    • What discounts or incentives can I negotiate?
    • How much do I have to commit to and for how long?

    Impact and Result

    This project will provide several benefits for both IT and the business. It includes:

    • Best IaaS platform to support current and future procurement requirements.
    • Right-sized cloud commitment tailored to the organization’s budget.
    • Predictable and controllable spend model.
    • Flexible and reliable IT infrastructure that supports the lines of business.
    • Reduced financial and legal risk.

    Master the Public Cloud IaaS Acquisition Models Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to learn how the public cloud IaaS procurement models compare. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the top three platforms, features, and benefits to support and inform the IaaS vendor choice.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Educate

    Learn the IaaS basics, terminologies, purchasing options, licensing requirements, hybrid options, support, and organization requirements through a checklist process.

    • Master the Public Cloud IaaS Acquisition Models – Phase 1: Educate
    • Public Cloud Procurement Checklist
    • Microsoft Public Cloud Licensing Guide

    2. Evaluate

    Review and understand the features, downsides, and differences between the big three players.

    • Master the Public Cloud IaaS Acquisition Models – Phase 2: Evaluate
    • Public Cloud Procurement Comparison Summary

    3. Execute

    Decide on a primary vendor that meets requirements, engage with a reseller, negotiate pricing incentives, migration costs, review, and execute the agreement.

    • Master the Public Cloud IaaS Acquisition Models – Phase 3: Execute
    • Public Cloud Acquisition Executive Summary Template

    Infographic

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}608|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $37,512 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 22 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Selection takes forever. Traditional software selection drags on for years, sometimes in perpetuity.
    • IT is viewed as a bottleneck and the business has taken control of software selection.
    • “Gut feel” decisions rule the day. Intuition, not hard data, guides selection, leading to poor outcomes.
    • Negotiations are a losing battle. Money is left on the table by inexperienced negotiators.
    • Overall: Poor selection processes lead to wasted time, wasted effort, and applications that continually disappoint.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Adopt a formal methodology to accelerate and improve software selection results.
    • Improve business satisfaction by including the right stakeholders and delivering new applications on a truly timely basis.
    • Kill the “sacred cow” requirements that only exist because “it’s how we’ve always done it.”
    • Forget about “RFP” overload and hone in on the features that matter to your organization.
    • Skip the guesswork and validate decisions with real data.
    • Take control of vendor “dog and pony shows” with single-day, high-value, low-effort, rapid-fire investigative interviews.
    • Master vendor negotiations and never leave money on the table.

    Impact and Result

    Improving software selection is a critical project that will deliver huge value.

    • Hit a home run with your business stakeholders: use a data-driven approach to select the right application vendor for their needs – fast.
    • Shatter stakeholder expectations with truly rapid application selections.
    • Boost collaboration and crush the broken telephone with concise and effective stakeholder meetings.
    • Lock in hard savings and do not pay list price by using data-driven tactics.

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    • The Rapid Application Selection Framework Deck

    2. The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

    • The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

    3. The Software Selection Workbook

    • The Software Selection Workbook

    4. The Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    • The Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    [infographic]

    Tame the Project Backlog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}439|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Unmanaged project backlogs can become the bane of IT departments, tying IT leaders and PMO staff down to an ever-growing receptacle of project ideas that provides little by way of strategic value and that typically represents a lack of project intake and approval discipline.
    • Decision makers frequently use the backlog to keep the peace. Lacking the time to assess the bulk of requests, or simply wanting to avoid difficult conversations with stakeholders, they “approve” everything and leave it to IT to figure it out.
    • As IT has increasing difficulty assessing – let alone starting – any of the projects in the backlog, stakeholder relations suffer. Requestors view inclusion in the backlog as a euphemism for “declined,” and often characterize the backlog as the place where good project ideas go to die.
    • Faced with these challenges, you need to make your project backlog more useful and reliable. The backlog may contain projects worth doing, but in its current untamed state, you have difficulty discerning, let alone capitalizing upon, those instances of value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Project backlogs are an investment and need to be treated as such. Incurring a cost impact that can be measured in terms of time and money, the backlog needs to be actively managed to ensure that you’re investing wisely and getting a good return in terms of strategic value and project throughput.
    • Unmanageable project backlogs are rooted in bad habits and poorly-defined processes. Identifying the sources that fuel backlog growth is key to long-term success. Unless the problem is addressed at the root, any gains made in the near-term will simply fade away as old, unhealthy habits re-emerge and take hold.
    • Backlog management should facilitate executive awareness about the status of backlog items as new work is being approved. In the long run, this ongoing executive engagement will not only help to keep the backlog manageable, but it will also help to bring more even workloads to IT project staff.

    Impact and Result

    • Keep the best, forget the rest. Develop a near-term approach to limit the role of the backlog to include only those items that add value to the business.
    • Shine a light. Improve executive visibility into the health and status of the backlog so that the backlog is taken into account when decision makers approve new work.
    • Evolve the organizational culture. Effectively employ organizational change management practices to evolve the culture that currently exists around the project backlog in order to ensure customer-service needs are more effectively addressed.
    • Ensure long-term sustainability. Institute processes to make sure that your list of pending projects – should you still require one after implementing this blueprint – remains minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

    Tame the Project Backlog Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a more disciplined approach to managing your project backlog can help you realize increased value and project throughput.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a project backlog battle plan

    Calculate the cost of the project backlog and assess the root causes of its unmanageability.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 1: Create a Backlog Battle Plan
    • Project Backlog ROI Calculator

    2. Execute a near-term backlog cleanse

    Increase the manageability of the backlog by updating stale requests and removing dead weight.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 2: Execute a Near-Term Backlog Cleanse
    • Project Backlog Management Tool
    • Project Backlog Stakeholder Communications Template

    3. Ensure long-term backlog manageability

    Develop and maintain a manageable backlog growth rate by establishing disciplined backlog management processes.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 3: Ensure Long-Term Backlog Manageability
    • Project Backlog Operating Plan Template
    • Project Backlog Manager
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Tame the Project Backlog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Create a Project Backlog Battle Plan

    The Purpose

    Gauge the manageability of your project backlog in its current state.

    Calculate the total cost of your project backlog investments.

    Determine the root causes that contribute to the unmanageability of your project backlog.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the organizational need for more disciplined backlog management.

    Visibility into the costs incurred by the project backlog.

    An awareness of the sources that feed the growth of the project backlog and make it a challenge to maintain.

    Activities

    1.1 Calculate the sunk and marginal costs that have gone into your project backlog.

    1.2 Estimate the throughput of backlog items.

    1.3 Survey the root causes of your project backlog.

    Outputs

    The total estimated cost of the project backlog.

    A project backlog return-on-investment score.

    A project backlog root cause analysis.

    2 Execute a Near-Term Project Backlog Cleanse

    The Purpose

    Identify the most organizationally appropriate goals for your backlog cleanse.

    Pinpoint those items that warrant immediate removal from the backlog and establish a game plan for putting a bullet in them.

    Communicate backlog decisions with stakeholders in a way that minimizes friction and resistance. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An effective, achievable, and organizationally right-sized approach to cleansing the backlog.

    Criteria for cleanse outcomes and a protocol for carrying out the near-term cleanse.

    A project sponsor outreach plan to help ensure that decisions made during your near-term cleanse stick. 

    Activities

    2.1 Establish roles and responsibilities for the near-term cleanse.

    2.2 Determine cleanse scope.

    2.3 Develop backlog prioritization criteria.

    2.4 Prepare a communication strategy.

    Outputs

    Clear accountabilities to ensure the backlog is effectively minimized and outcomes are communicated effectively.

    Clearly defined and achievable goals.

    Effective criteria for cleansing the backlog of zombie projects and maintaining projects that are of strategic and operational value.

    A communication strategy to minimize stakeholder friction and resistance.

    3 Ensure Long-Term Project Backlog Manageability

    The Purpose

    Ensure ongoing backlog manageability.

    Make sure the executive layer is aware of the ongoing status of the backlog when making project decisions.

    Customize a best-practice toolkit to help keep the project backlog useful. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of pending projects that is minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

    Executive engagement with the backlog to ensure intake and approval decisions are made with a view of the backlog in mind.

    A backlog management tool and processes for ongoing manageability. 

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a project backlog management operating model.

    3.2 Configure a project backlog management solution.

    3.3 Assign roles and responsibilities for your long-term project backlog management processes.

    3.4 Customize a project backlog management operating plan.

    Outputs

    An operating model to structure your long-term strategy around.

    A right-sized management tool to help enable your processes and executive visibility into the backlog.

    Defined accountabilities for executing project backlog management responsibilities.

    Clearly established processes for how items get in and out of the backlog, as well as for ongoing backlog review.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}177|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations see BizDevOps as a solution to help meet this demand. However, they often lack the critical cross-functional collaboration and team-sport culture that are critical for success.
    • The industry provides little consensus and guidance on how to prepare for the transition to BizDevOps.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • BizDevOps is cultural, not driven by tools. It is about delivering high-quality and valuable releases to stakeholders through collective ownership, continuous collaboration, and team-first behaviors supported by tools.
    • BizDevOps begins with a strong foundation in five key areas. The crux of successful BizDevOps is centered on the strategic adoption and optimization of building great requirements, collaborative practices, iterative delivery, application management, and high-fidelity environments.
    • Teams take STOCK of what it takes to collaborate effectively. Teams and stakeholders must show up, trust the delivery method and people, orchestrate facilitated activities, clearly communicate and knowledge share every time they collaborate.

    Impact and Result

    • Bring the right people to the table. BizDevOps brings significant organizational, process and technology changes to improve delivery effectiveness. Include the key roles in the definition and validation of your BizDevOps vision and practices.
    • Focus on the areas that matter. Review your current circumstances and incorporate the right practices that addresses your key challenges and blockers to becoming BizDevOps.
    • Build your BizDevOps playbook. Gain a broad understanding of the key plays and practices that makes a successful BizDevOps organization. Verify and validate these practices in order to tailor them to your context. Keep your playbook live.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Find out why you should implement BizDevOps, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get started with BizDevOps

    Set the right expectations with your stakeholders and define the context of your BizDevOps implementation.

    • Build Your BizDevOps Playbook – Phase 1: Get Started With BizDevOps
    • BizDevOps Playbook

    2. Tailor your BizDevOps playbook

    Tailor the plays in your BizDevOps playbook to your circumstances and vision.

    • Build Your BizDevOps Playbook – Phase 2: Tailor Your BizDevOps Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your Expectations

    The Purpose

    Discuss the goals of your BizDevOps playbook.

    Identify the various perspectives who should be included in the BizDevOps discussion.

    Level set expectations of your BizDevOps implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of the key roles who should be included in the BizDevOps discussion.

    Learning of key practices to support your BizDevOps vision and goals.

    Your vision of BizDevOps in your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Define BizDevOps.

    1.2 Understand your key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define your objectives.

    Outputs

    Your BizDevOps definition

    List of BizDevOps stakeholders

    BizDevOps vision and objectives

    2 Set the Context

    The Purpose

    Understand the various methods to initiate the structuring of facilitated collaboration.

    Share a common way of thinking and behaving with a set of principles.

    Focus BizDevOps adoption on key areas of software product delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A chosen collaboration method (Scrum, Kanban, Scrumban) to facilitate collaboration

    A mutually understanding and beneficial set of guiding principles

    Areas where BizDevOps will see the most benefit

    Activities

    2.1 Select your foundation method.

    2.2 Define your guiding principles.

    2.3 Focus on the areas that matter.

    Outputs

    Chosen collaboration model

    List of guiding principles

    High-level assessment of delivery practices and its fit for BizDevOps

    3 Tailor Your BizDevOps Playbook

    The Purpose

    Review the good practices within Info-Tech’s BizDevOps Playbook.

    Tailor your playbook to reflect your circumstances.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the key plays involved in product delivery

    Product delivery plays that reflect the challenges and opportunities of your organization and support your BizDevOps vision

    Activities

    3.1 Review and tailor the plays in your playbook

    Outputs

    High-level discussion of key product delivery plays and its optimization to support BizDevOps

    Legacy Active Directory Environment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}471|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy

    You are looking to lose your dependency on Active Directory (AD), and you need to tackle infrastructure technical debt, but there are challenges:

    • Legacy apps that are in maintenance mode cannot shed their AD dependency or have hardware upgrades made.
    • You are unaware of what processes depend on AD and how integrated they are.
    • Departments invest in apps that are integrated with AD without informing you until they ask for Domain details after purchasing.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Remove your dependency on AD one application at a time. If you are a cloud-first organization, rethink your AD strategy to ask “why” when you add a new device to your Active Directory.
    • With the advent of hybrid work, AD is now a security risk. You need to shore up your security posture. Think of zero trust architecture.
    • Take inventory of your objects that depend on Kerberos and NTML and plan on removing that barrier through applications that don’t depend on AD.

    Impact and Result

    Don’t allow Active Directory services to dictate your enterprise innovation and modernization strategies. Determine if you can safely remove objects and move them to a cloud service where your Azure AD Domain Services can handle your authentication and manage users and groups.

    Legacy Active Directory Environment Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Legacy Active Directory Environment Deck – Legacy AD was never built for modern infrastructure. Understand the history and future of Active Directory and what alternatives are in the market.

    Build all new systems with cloud integration in mind. Many applications built in the past had built-in AD components for access, using Kerberos and NTLM. This dependency has prevented organizations from migrating away from AD. When assessing new technology and applications, consider SaaS or cloud-native apps rather than a Microsoft-dependent application with AD ingrained in the code.

    • Legacy Active Directory Environment Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Legacy Active Directory Environment

    Kill the technical debt of your legacy Active Directory environment.

    Analyst Perspective

    Understand what Active Directory is and why Azure Active Directory does not replace it.

    It’s about Kerberos and New Technology LAN Manager (NTLM).

    The image contains a picture of John Donovan.

    Many organizations that want to innovate and migrate from on-premises applications to software as a service (SaaS) and cloud services are held hostage by their legacy Active Directory (AD). Microsoft did a good job taking over from Novell back in the late 90s, but its hooks into businesses are so deep that many have become dependent on AD services to manage devices and users, when in fact AD falls far short of needed capabilities, restricting innovation and progress.

    Despite Microsoft’s Azure becoming prominent in the world of cloud services, Azure AD is not a replacement for on-premises AD. While Azure AD is a secure authentication store that can contain users and groups, that is where the similarities end. In fact, Microsoft itself has an architecture to mitigate the shortcomings of Azure AD by recommending organizations migrate to a hybrid model, especially for businesses that have an in-house footprint of servers and applications.

    If you are a greenfield business and intend to take advantage of software, infrastructure, and platform as a service (SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS), as well as Microsoft 365 in Azure, then Azure AD is for you and you don’t have to worry about the need for AD.

    John Donovan
    Principal Director, I&O Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight Summary

    Legacy AD was never built for modern infrastructure

    When Microsoft built AD as a free component for the Windows Server environment to replace Windows NT before the demise of Novell Directory Services in 2001, it never meant Active Directory to work outside the corporate network with Microsoft apps and devices. While it began as a central managing system for users and PCs on Microsoft operating systems, with one user per PC, the IT ecosystem has changed dramatically over the last 20 years, with cloud adoption, SaaS, IaaS, PaaS, and everything as a service. To make matters worse, work-from-anywhere has become a serious security challenge.

    Build all new systems with cloud integration in mind

    Many applications built in the past had built-in AD components for access, using Kerberos and NTLM. This dependency has prevented organizations from migrating away from AD. When assessing new technology and applications, consider SaaS or cloud-native apps rather than a Microsoft-dependent application with AD ingrained in the code. Ensure you are engaged when the business is assessing new apps. Stop the practice of the business purchasing apps without IT’s involvement; for example, if your marketing department is asking you for your Domain credentials for a vendor when you were not informed of this purchase.

    Hybrid AD is a solution but not a long-term goal

    Economically, Microsoft has no interest in replacing AD anytime soon. Microsoft wants that revenue and has built components like Azure AD Connect to mitigate the AD dependency issue, which is basically holding your organization hostage. In fact, Microsoft has advised that a hybrid solution will remain because, as we will investigate, Azure AD is not legacy AD.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    You are looking to lose your dependency on Active Directory, and you need to tackle infrastructure technical debt, but there are challenges.

    • Legacy apps that are in maintenance mode cannot shed their AD dependency or have hardware upgrades made.
    • You are unaware of what processes depend on AD and how integrated they are.
    • Departments invest in apps that are integrated with AD without informing you until they ask for Domain details after purchasing.
    • Legacy applications can prevent you from upgrading servers or may need to be isolated due to security concerns related to inadequate patching and upgrades.
    • You do not see any return on investment in AD maintenance.
    • Mergers and acquisitions can prevent you from migrating away from AD if one company is dependent on AD and the other is fully in the cloud. This increases technical debt.
    • Remove your dependency on AD one application at a time. If you are a cloud-first organization, rethink your AD strategy to ask “why” when you add a new device to your Active Directory.
    • With the advent of hybrid work, AD is now a security risk. You need to shore up your security posture. Think of zero trust architecture.
    • Take inventory of your objects that depend on Kerberos and NTML and plan on removing that barrier through applications that don’t depend on AD.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t allow Active Directory services to dictate your enterprise innovation and modernization strategies. Determine if you can safely remove objects and move them to a cloud service where your Azure AD Domain Services can handle your authentication and manage users and groups.

    The history of Active Directory

    The evolution of your infrastructure environment

    From NT to the cloud

    AD 2001 Exchange Server 2003 SharePoint 2007 Server 2008 R2 BYOD Security Risk All in Cloud 2015
    • Active Directory replaces NT and takes over from Novell as the enterprise access and control plane.
    • With slow WAN links, no cellphones, no tablets, and very few laptops, security was not a concern in AD.
    • In 2004, email becomes business critical.
    • This puts pressure on links, increases replication and domains, and creates a need for multiple identities.
    • Collaboration becomes pervasive.
    • Cross domain authentication becomes prevalent across the enterprise.
    • SharePoint sites need to be connected to multiple Domain AD accounts. More multiple identities are required.
    • Exchange resource forest rolls out, causing the new forest functional level to be a more complex environment.
    • Fine-grained password policies have impacted multiple forests, forcing them to adhere to the new password policies.
    • There are powerful Domain controllers, strong LAN and WAN connections, and an increase in smartphones and laptops.
    • Audits and compliance become a focus, and mergers and acquisitions add complexity. Security teams are working across the board.
    • Cloud technology doesn’t work well with complicated, messy AD environment. Cloud solutions need simple, flat AD architecture.
    • Technology changes after 15+ years. AD becomes the backbone of enterprise infrastructure. Managers demand to move to cloud, building complexity again.

    Organizations depend on AD

    AD is the backbone of many organizations’ IT infrastructure

    73% of organizations say their infrastructure is built on AD.

    82% say their applications depend on AD data.

    89% say AD enables authenticated access to file servers.

    90% say AD is the main source for authentication.

    Source: Dimensions research: Active Directory Modernization :

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations fail to move away from AD for many reasons, including:

    • Lack of time, resources, budget, and tools.
    • Difficulty understanding what has changed.
    • Migrating from AD being a low priority.

    Active Directory components

    Physical and logical structure

    Authentication, authorization, and auditing

    The image contains a screenshot of the active directory components.

    Active Directory has its hooks in!

    AD creates infrastructure technical debt and is difficult to migrate away from.

    The image contains a screenshot of an active directory diagram.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Due to the pervasive nature of Active Directory in the IT ecosystem, IT organizations are reluctant to migrate away from AD to modernize and innovate.

    Migration to Microsoft 365 in Azure has forced IT departments’ hand, and now that they have dipped their toe in the proverbial cloud “lake,” they see a way out of the mounting technical debt.

    AD security

    Security is the biggest concern with Active Directory.

    Neglecting Active Directory security

    98% of data breaches came from external sources.

    Source: Verizon, Data Breach Report 2022

    85% of data breach took weeks or even longer to discover.

    Source: Verizon Data Breach Report, 2012

    The biggest challenge for recovery after an Active Directory security breach is identifying the source of the breach, determining the extent of the breach, and creating a safe and secure environment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Neglecting legacy Active Directory security will lead to cyberattacks. Malicious users can steal credentials and hijack data or corrupt your systems.

    What are the security risks to legacy AD architecture?

    • It's been 22 years since AD was released by Microsoft, and it has been a foundational technology for most businesses over the years. However, while there have been many innovations over those two decades, like Amazon, Facebook, iPhones, Androids, and more, Active Directory has remained mostly unchanged. There hasn’t been a security update since 2016.
    • This lack of security innovation has led to several cyberattacks over the years, causing businesses to bolt on additional security measures and added complexity. AD is not going away any time soon, but the security dilemma can be addressed with added security features.

    AD event logs

    84% of organizations that had a breach had evidence of that breach in their event logs.

    Source: Verizon Data Breach Report, 2012

    What is the business risk

    How does AD impact innovation in your business?

    It’s widely estimated that Active Directory remains at the backbone of 90% of Global Fortune 1000 companies’ business infrastructure (Lepide, 2021), and with that comes risk. The risks include:

    • Constraints of AD and growth of your digital footprint
    • Difficulty integrating modern technologies
    • Difficulty maintaining consistent security policies
    • Inflexible central domains preventing innovation and modernization
    • Inability to move to a self-service password portal
    • Vulnerability to being hacked
    • BYOD not being AD friendly

    AD is dependent on Windows Server

    1. Even though AD is compliant with LDAP, software vendors often choose optional features of LDAP that are not supported by AD. It is possible to implement Kerberos in a Unix system and establish trust with AD, but this is a difficult process and mistakes are frequent.
    2. Restricting your software selection to Windows-based systems reduces innovation and may hamper your ability to purchase best-in-class applications.

    Azure AD is not a replacement for AD

    AD was designed for an on-premises enterprise

    The image contains a screenshot of a Azure AD diagram.

    • Despite Microsoft’s Azure becoming prominent in the world of cloud services, Azure AD is not a replacement for on-premises AD.
    • In fact, Microsoft itself has an architecture to mitigate the shortcomings of Azure AD by recommending organizations migrate to a hybrid model, especially those businesses that have an in-house footprint of servers and applications.
    • If you are a greenfield business and intend to take advantage of SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS, as well as Microsoft 365 in Azure, then Azure AD is for you and you don’t have to worry about the need for AD.

    "Azure Active Directory is not designed to be the cloud version of Active Directory. It is not a domain controller or a directory in the cloud that will provide the exact same capabilities with AD. It actually provides many more capabilities in a different way.

    That’s why there is no actual ‘migration’ path from Active Directory to Azure Active Directory. You can synchronize your on-premises directories (Active Directory or other) to Azure Active Directory but not migrate your computer accounts, group policies, OU etc."

    – Gregory Hall,
    Brand Representative for Microsoft
    (Source: Spiceworks)

    The hybrid model for AD and Azure AD

    How the model works

    The image contains a screenshot of a hybrid model for AD and Azure AD.

    Note: AD Federated Services (ADFS) is not a replacement for AD. It’s a bolt-on that requires maintenance, support, and it is not a liberating service.

    Many companies are:

    • Moving to SaaS solutions for customer relationship management, HR, collaboration, voice communication, file storage, and more.
    • Managing non-Windows devices.
    • Moving to a hybrid model of work.
    • Enabling BYOD.

    Given these trends, Active Directory is becoming obsolete in terms of identity management and permissions.

    The difference between AD Domain Services and Azure AD DS

    One of the core principles of Azure AD is that the user is the security boundary, not the network.

    Kerberos is the default authentication and authorization protocol for AD. Kerberos is involved in nearly everything from the time you log on to accessing Sysvol, which is used to deliver policy and logon scripts to domain members from the Domain Controller.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are struggling to get away from AD, Kerberos and NTML are to blame. Working around them is difficult. Azure AD uses SAML2.0 OpenID Connect and OAuth2.0.

    Feature Azure AD DS Self-managed AD DS
    Managed service
    Secure deployments Administrator secures the deployment
    DNS server ✓ (managed service)
    Domain or Enterprise administrator privileges
    Domain join
    Domain authentication using NTLM and Kerberos
    Kerberos-constrained delegation Resource-based Resource-based and account-based
    Custom OU structure
    Group Policy
    Schema extensions
    AD domain/forest trusts ✓ (one-way outbound forest trusts only)
    Secure LDAP (LDAPS)
    LDAP read
    LDAP write ✓ (within the managed domain)
    Geo-distributed deployments

    Source: “Compare self-managed Active Directory Domain Services...” Azure documentation, 2022

    Impact of work-from-anywhere

    How AD poses issues that impact the user experience

    IT organizations are under pressure to enable work-from-home/work-from-anywhere.

    • IT teams regard legacy infrastructure, namely Active Directory, as inadequate to securely manage remote workloads.
    • While organizations previously used VPNs to access resources through Active Directory, they now have complex webs of applications that do not reside on premises, such as AWS, G-Suite, and SaaS customer relationship management and HR management systems, among others. These resources live outside the Windows ecosystem, complicating user provisioning, management, and security.
    • The work environment has changed since the start of COVID-19, with businesses scrambling to enable work-from-home. This had a huge impact on on-premises identity management tools such as AD, exposing their limitations and challenges. IT admins are all too aware that AD does not meet the needs of work-from-home.
    • As more IT organizations move infrastructure to the cloud, they have the opportunity to move their directory services to the cloud as well.
      • JumpCloud, OneLogin, Okta, Azure AD, G2, and others can be a solution for this new way of working and free up administrators from the overloaded AD environment.
      • Identity and access management (IAM) can be moved to the cloud where the modern infrastructure lives.
      • Alternatives for printers using AD include Google Cloud Print, PrinterOn, and PrinterLogic.

    How AD can impact your migration to Microsoft 365

    The beginning of your hybrid environment

    • Businesses that have a large on-premises footprint have very few choices for setting up a hybrid environment that includes their on-premises AD and Azure AD synchronization.
    • Microsoft 365 uses Azure AD in the background to manage identities.
    • Azure AD Connect will need to be installed, along with IdFix to identify errors such as duplicates and formatting problems in your AD.
    • Password hash should be implemented to synchronize passwords from on-premises AD so users can sign in to Azure without the need for additional single sign-on infrastructure.
    • Azure AD Connect synchronizes accounts every 30 minutes and passwords within two minutes.

    Alternatives to AD

    When considering retiring Active Directory from your environment, look at alternatives that can assist with those legacy application servers, handle Kerberos and NTML, and support LDAP.

    • JumpCloud: Cloud-based directory services. JumpCloud provides LDAP-as-a-Service and RADIUS-as-a-Service. It authenticates, authorizes, and manages employees, their devices, and IT applications. However, domain name changes are not supported.
    • Apache Directory Studio Pro: Written in Java, it supports LDAP v3–certified directory services. It is certified by Eclipse-based database utilities. It also supports Kerberos, which is critical for legacy Microsoft AD apps authentication.
    • Univention Corporate Server (UCS): Open-source Linux-based solution that has a friendly user interface and gets continuous security and feature updates. It supports Kerberos V5 and LDAP, works with AD, and is easy to sync. It also supports DNS server, DHCP, multifactor authentication and single sign-on, and APIs and REST APIs. However, it has a limited English knowledgebase as it is a German tool.

    What to look for

    If you are embedded in Windows systems but looking for an alternative to AD, you need a similar solution but one that is capable of working in the cloud and on premises.

    Aside from protocols and supporting utilities, also consider additional features that can help you retire your Active Directory while maintaining highly secure access control and a strong security posture.

    These are just a few examples of the many alternatives available.

    Market drivers to modernize your infrastructure

    The business is now driving your Active Directory migration

    What IT must deal with in the modern world of work:

    • Leaner footprint for evolving tech trends
    • Disaster recovery readiness
    • Dynamic compliance requirements
    • Increased security needs
    • The need to future-proof
    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Security extending the network beyond Windows

    Organizations are making decisions that impact Active Directory, from enabling work-from-anywhere to dealing with malicious threats such as ransomware. Mergers and acquisitions also bring complexity with multiple AD domains.
    The business is putting pressure on IT to become creative with security strategies, alternative authentication and authorization, and migration to SaaS and cloud services.

    Activity

    Build a checklist to migrate off Active Directory.

    Discovery

    Assessment

    Proof of Concept

    Migration

    Cloud Operations

    ☐ Catalog your applications.

    ☐ Define your users, groups and usage.

    ☐ Identify network interdependencies and complexity.

    ☐ Know your security and compliance regulations.

    ☐ Document your disaster recovery plan and recovery point and time objectives (RPO/RTO).

    ☐ Build a methodology for migrating apps to IaaS.

    ☐ Develop a migration team using internal resources and/or outsourcing.

    ☐ Use Microsoft resources for specific skill sets.

    ☐ Map on-premises third-party solutions to determine how easily they will migrate.

    ☐ Create a plan to retire and archive legacy data.

    ☐ Test your workload: Start small and prove value with a phased approach.

    ☐ Estimate cloud costs.

    ☐ Determine the amount and size of your compute and storage requirements.

    ☐ Understand security requirements and the need for network and security controls.

    ☐ Assess network performance.

    ☐ Qualify and test the tools and solutions needed for the migration.

    ☐ Create a blueprint of your desired cloud environment.

    ☐ Establish a rollback plan.

    ☐ Identify tools for automating migration and syncing data.

    ☐ Understand the implications of the production-day data move.

    ☐ Keep up with the pace of innovation.

    ☐ Leverage 24/7 support via skilled Azure resources.

    ☐ Stay on top of system maintenance and upgrades.

    ☐ Consider service-level agreement requirements, governance, security, compliance, performance, and uptime.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Manage the Active Directory in the Service Desk

    • Build and maintain your Active Directory with good data.
    • Actively maintaining the Active Directory is a difficult task that only gets more difficult with issues like stale accounts and privilege creep.

    SoftwareReviews: Microsoft Azure Active Directory

    • The Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) enterprise identity service provides SSO and multifactor authentication to help protect your users from 99.9% of cybersecurity attacks

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    • Don’t think about the cloud as an inevitable next step for all workloads. The cloud is merely another tool in the toolbox, ready to be used when appropriate and put away when it’s not needed. Cloud-first isn’t always the way to go.

    Bibliography

    “2012 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2012. Web.
    “2022 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2012. Web.
    “22 Best Alternatives to Microsoft Active Directory.” The Geek Page, 16 Feb 2022. Accessed 12 Sept. 2022.
    Altieri, Matt. “Infrastructure Technical Debt.” Device 42, 20 May 2019. Accessed Sept 2022.
    “Are You Ready to Make the Move from ADFS to Azure AD?’” Steeves and Associates, 29 April 2021. Accessed 28 Sept. 2022.
    Blanton, Sean. “Can I Replace Active Directory with Azure AD? No, Here’s Why.” JumpCloud, 9 Mar 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    Chai, Wesley, and Alexander S. Gillis. “What is Active Directory and how does it work?” TechTarget, June 2021. Accessed 10 Sept. 2022.
    Cogan, Sam. “Azure Active Directory is not Active Directory!” SamCogan.com, Oct 2020. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Compare Active Directory to Azure Active Directory.” Azure documentation, Microsoft Learn, 18 Aug. 2022. Accessed 12 Sept. 2022.
    "Compare self-managed Active Directory Domain Services, Azure Active Directory, and managed Azure Active Directory Domain Services." Azure documentation, Microsoft Learn, 23 Aug. 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Dimensional Research, Active Directory Modernization: A Survey of IT Professionals.” Quest, 2017. Accessed Sept 2022.
    Grillenmeier, Guido. “Now’s the Time to Rethink Active Directory Security.“ Semperis, 4 Aug 2021. Accessed Oct. 2013.
    “How does your Active Directory align to today’s business?” Quest Software, 2017, accessed Sept 2022
    Lewis, Jack “On-Premises Active Directory: Can I remove it and go full cloud?” Softcat, Dec.2020. Accessed 15 Sept 2022.
    Loshin, Peter. “What is Kerberos?” TechTarget, Sept 2021. Accessed Sept 2022.
    Mann, Terry. “Why Cybersecurity Must Include Active Directory.” Lepide, 20 Sept. 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    Roberts, Travis. “Azure AD without on-prem Windows Active Directory?” 4sysops, 25 Oct. 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Understanding Active Directory® & its architecture.” ActiveReach, Jan 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “What is Active Directory Migration?” Quest Software Inc, 2022. Accessed Sept 2022.

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}511|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,314 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge - which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge – which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door. It’s estimated that Fortune 500 companies lose approximately $31.5 billion each year by failing to share knowledge.
    • Don’t follow a one-size-fits-all approach to knowledge transfer strategy! Right-size your approach based on your business goals.
    • Prioritize knowledge transfer candidates based on their likelihood of departure and the impact of losing that knowledge.
    • Select knowledge transfer tactics based on the type of knowledge that needs to be captured – explicit or tacit.

    Impact and Result

    Successful completion of the IT knowledge transfer project will result in the following outcomes:

    1. Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    2. Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    3. Effective knowledge transfer plans built.
    4. Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    5. Knowledge transfer roadmap communicated and approval obtained.

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to transfer knowledge on your team to mitigate risks from employees leaving the organization.

    Minimize risk and IT costs resulting from attrition through effective knowledge transfer.

    • Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Storyboard

    2. Project Stakeholder Register Template – A template to help you identify and document project management stakeholders.

    Use this template to document the knowledge transfer stakeholder power map by identifying the stakeholder’s name and role, and identifying their position on the power map.

    • Project Stakeholder Register Template

    3. IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template – Define your project and lay the foundation for subsequent knowledge transfer project planning

    Use this template to communicate the value and rationale for knowledge transfer to key stakeholders.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    4. IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool – Identify the risk profile of knowledge sources and the knowledge they have

    Use this tool to identify and assess the knowledge and individual risk of key knowledge holders.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    5. IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template – A template to help you determine the most effective knowledge transfer tactics to be used for each knowledge source by listing knowledge sources and their knowledge, identifying type of knowledge to be transferred and choosing tactics that are appropriate for the knowledge type

    Use this template to track knowledge activities, intended recipients of knowledge, and appropriate transfer tactics for each knowledge source.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    6. IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template – A template that provides a framework to conduct interviews with knowledge sources, including comprehensive questions that cover what type of knowledge a knowledge source has and how unique the knowledge is

    Use this template as a starting point for managers to interview knowledge sources to extract information about the type of knowledge the source has.

    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    7. IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template – A presentation template that provides a vehicle used to communicate IT knowledge transfer recommendations to stakeholders to gain buy-in

    Use this template as a starting point to build your proposed IT knowledge transfer roadmap presentation to management to obtain formal sign-off and initiate the next steps in the process.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    Further reading

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Transfer IT knowledge before it’s gone.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge1 which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door. You need to:

    • Build a strategic roadmap to retain and share knowledge.
    • Build a knowledge transfer strategy based on your organization’s business goals.
    • Increase departmental efficiencies through increased collaboration.
    • Retain key IT knowledge
    • Improve junior employee engagement by creating development opportunities.
    • Don’t follow a one-size fits all approach. Right-size your approach based on your organizational goals.
    • Prioritize knowledge transfer candidates based on their likelihood of departure and the impact of losing that knowledge.
    • What you’re transferring impacts how you should transfer it. Select knowledge transfer tactics based on the type of knowledge that needs to be captured – explicit or tacit.

    Our client-tested methodology and project steps allow you to tailor your knowledge transfer plan to any size of organization, across industries. Successful completion of the IT knowledge transfer project will result in the following outcomes:

    • Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    • Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    • Effective knowledge transfer plans built.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap communicated.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door.1

    1 McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    Stop your knowledge from walking out the door

    Today, the value of an organization has less to do with its fixed assets and more to do with its intangible assets. Intangible assets include patents, research and development, business processes and software, employee training, and employee knowledge and capability.

    People (and their knowledge and capabilities) are an organization’s competitive advantage and with the baby boomer retirement looming, organizations need to invest in capturing employee knowledge before the employees leave. Losing employees in key roles without adequate preparation for their departure has a direct impact on the bottom line in terms of disrupted productivity, severed relationships, and missed opportunities.

    Knowledge Transfer (KT) is the process and tactics by which intangible assets – expertise, knowledge, and capabilities – are transferred from one stakeholder to another. A well-devised knowledge transfer plan will mitigate the risk of knowledge loss, yet as many as 74%2 of organizations have no formal approach to KT – and it’s costing them money, reputation, and time.

    84%of all enterprise value on the S&P 500 is intangibles.3

    $31.5 billion lost annually by Fortune 500 companies failing to share knowledge. 1

    74% of organizations have no formal process for facilitating knowledge transfer. 2

    1 Shedding Light on Knowledge Management, 2004, p. 46

    2 McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    3 Visual Capitalists, 2020

    Losing knowledge will undermine your organization’s strategy in four ways

    In a worst-case scenario, key employees leaving will result in the loss of valuable knowledge, core business relationships, and profits.

    1

    Inefficiency due to “reinvention of the wheel.” When older workers leave and don’t effectively transfer their knowledge, younger generations duplicate effort to solve problems and find solutions.

    2

    Loss of competitive advantage. What and who you know is a tremendous source of competitive edge. Losing knowledge and/or established client relationships hurts your asset base and stifles growth, especially in terms of proprietary or unique knowledge.

    3

    Reduced capacity to innovate. Older workers know what works and what doesn’t, as well as what’s new and what’s not. They can identify the status quo faster, to make way for novel thinking.

    4

    Increased vulnerability. One thing that comes with knowledge is a deeper understanding of risk. Losing knowledge can impede your organizational ability to identify, understand, and mitigate risks. You’ll have to learn through experience all over again.

    Are you part of the 74% of organizations with no knowledge transfer planning in place? Can you afford not to have it?

    Consider this:

    55-60

    67%

    78%

    $14k / minute

    the average age of mainframe workers – making close to 50% of workers over 60.2

    of Fortune 100 companies still use mainframes3 requiring. specialized skills and knowledge

    of CIOs report mainframe applications will remain a key asset in the next decade.1

    is the cost of mainframe outages for an average enterprise.1

    A system failure to a mainframe could be disastrous for organizations that haven’t effectively transferred key knowledge. Now think past the mainframe to key processes, customer/vendor relationships, legal requirements, home grown solutions etc. in your organization.

    What would knowledge loss cost you in terms of financial and reputational loss?

    Source: 1 Big Tech Problem as Mainframes Outlast Workforce

    Source: 2 IT's most wanted: Mainframe programmers

    Source: 3The State of the Mainframe, 2022

    Case Study

    Insurance organization fails to mitigate risk of employee departure and incurs costly consequences – in the millions

    INDUSTRY: Insurance

    SOURCE: ITRG Member

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • A rapidly growing organization's key Senior System Architect unexpectedly fell ill and needed to leave the organization.
    • This individual had been with the organization for more than 25 years and was the primary person in IT responsible for several mission-critical systems.
    • Following this individual’s departure, one of the systems unexpectedly went down.
    • As this individual had always been the go-to person for the system, and issues were few and far between, no one had thought to document key system elements and no knowledge transfer had taken place.
    • The failed system cost the organization more than a million dollars in lost revenue.
    • The organization needed to hire a forensic development team to reverse engineer the system.
    • This cost the organization another $200k in consulting fees plus the additional cost of training existing employees on a system which they had originally been hoping to upgrade.

    Forward thinking organizations use knowledge transfer not only to avoid risks, but to drive IT innovation

    IT knowledge transfer is a process that, at its most basic level, ensures that essential IT knowledge and capabilities don’t leave the organization – and at its most sophisticated level, drives innovation and customer service by leveraging knowledge assets.

    Knowledge Transfer Risks:

    Knowledge Transfer Opportunities:

    ✗ Increased training and development costs when key stakeholders leave the organization.

    ✗ Decreased efficiency through long development cycles.

    ✗ Late projects that tie up IT resources longer than planned, and cost overruns that come out of the IT budget.

    ✗ Lost relationships with key stakeholders within and outside the organization.

    ✗ Inconsistent project/task execution, leading to inconsistent outcomes.

    ✗ IT losing its credibility due to system or project failure from lost information.

    ✗ Customer dissatisfaction from inconsistent service.

    ✓ Mitigated risks and costs from talent leaving the organization.

    ✓ Business continuity through redundancies preventing service interruptions and project delays.

    ✓ Operational efficiency through increased productivity by never having to start projects from scratch.

    ✓ Increased engagement from junior staff through development planning.

    ✓ Innovation by capitalizing on collective knowledge.

    ✓ Increased ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market.

    ✓ IT teams that drive process improvement and improved execution.

    Common obstacles

    In building your knowledge transfer roadmap, the size of your organization can present unique challenges

    How you build your knowledge transfer roadmap will not change drastically based on the size of your organization; however, the scope of your initiative, tactics you employ, and your communication plan for knowledge transfer may change.


    How knowledge transfer projects vary by organization size:

    Small Organization

    Medium Organization

    Large Organization

    Project Opportunities

    ✓ Project scope is much more manageable.

    ✓ Communication and planning can be more manageable.

    ✓ Fewer knowledge sources and receivers can clarify prioritization needs.

    ✓ Project scope is more manageable.

    ✓ Moderate budget for knowledge transfer activities.

    ✓ Communication and enforcement is easier.

    ✓ Budget available to knowledge transfer initiatives.

    ✓ In-house expertise may be available.

    Project Risks

    ✗ Limited resources for the project.

    ✗ In-house expertise is unlikely.

    ✗ Knowledge transfer may be informal and not documented.

    ✗ Limited overlap in responsibilities, resulting in fewer redundancies.

    ✗ Limited staff with knowledge transfer experience for the project.

    ✗ Knowledge assets are less likely to be documented.

    ✗ Knowledge transfer may be a lower priority and difficult to generate buy-in.

    ✗ More staff to manage knowledge transfer for, and much larger scope for the project.

    ✗ Impact of poor knowledge transfer can result in much higher costs.

    ✗Geographically dispersed business units make collaboration and communication difficult.

    ✗ Vast amounts of historical knowledge to capture.

    Capture both explicit and tacit knowledge

    Explicit

    Tacit

    • “What knowledge” – knowledge can be articulated, codified, and easily communicated.
    • Easily explained and captured – documents, memos, speeches, books, manuals, process diagrams, facts, etc.
    • Learn through reading or being told.
    • “How knowledge” – intangible knowledge from an individual’s experience that is more from the process of learning, understanding, and applying information (insights, judgments, and intuition).
    • Hard to verbalize, and difficult to capture and quantify.
    • Learn through observation, imitation, and practice.

    Types of explicit knowledge

    Types of tacit knowledge

    Information

    • Specialized technical knowledge.
    • Unique design capabilities/ methods/ models.
    • Legacy systems, details, passwords.
    • Special formulas/algorithms/ techniques/contacts.

    Process

    • Specialized research and development processes.
    • Proprietary production processes.
    • Decision-making processes.
    • Legacy systems.
    • Variations from documented processes.

    Skills

    • Techniques for executing on processes.
    • Relationship management.
    • Competencies built through deliberate practice enabling someone to act effectively.

    Expertise

    • Company history and values.
    • Relationships with key stakeholders.
    • Tips and tricks.
    • Competitor history and differentiators.

    Examples: reading music, building a bike, knowing the alphabet, watching a YouTube video on karate.

    Examples: playing the piano, riding a bike, reading or speaking a language, earning a black belt in karate.

    Knowledge transfer is not a one-size-fits-all project

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model. Level 0: Accidental, goal is not prioritized. Level 1: Stabilize, goal is risk mitigation. Level 2: Proactive, goal is operational efficiency. Level 3: Knowledge Culture, goal is innovation & customer service.

    No formal knowledge transfer program exists; knowledge transfer is ad hoc, or may be conducted through an exit interview only.

    74% of organizations are at level 0.1

    At level one, knowledge transfer is focused around ensuring that high risk, explicit knowledge is covered for all high-risk stakeholders.

    Organizations have knowledge transfer plans for all high-risk knowledge to ensure redundancies exist and leverage this to drive process improvements, effectiveness, and employee engagement.

    Increase end-user satisfaction and create a knowledge value center by leveraging the collective knowledge to solve repeat customer issues and drive new product innovation.

    1 Source: McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    Assess your fit for this blueprint by considering the following statements

    I’m an IT Leader who…

    Stabilize

    …has witnessed that new employees have recently left or are preparing to leave the organization, and worries that we don’t have their knowledge captured anywhere.

    …previously had to cut down our IT department, and as a result there is a lack of redundancy for tasks. If someone leaves, we don’t have the information we need to continue operating effectively.

    …is worried that the IT department has no succession planning in place and that we’re opening ourselves up to risk.

    Proactive

    …feels like we are losing productivity because the same problems are being solved differently multiple times.

    …worries that different employees have unique knowledge which is critical to performance and that they are the only ones who know about it.

    …has noticed that the processes people are using are different from the ones that are written down.

    …feels like the IT department is constantly starting projects from scratch, and employees aren’t leveraging each other’s information, which is causing inefficiencies.

    …feels like new employees take too long to get up to speed.

    …knows that we have undocumented systems and more are being built each day.

    Knowledge Culture

    …feels like we’re losing out on opportunities to innovate because we’re not sharing information, learning from others’ mistakes, or capitalizing on their successes.

    …notices that staff don’t have a platform to share information on a regular basis, and believes if we brought that information together, we would be able to improve customer service and drive product innovation.

    …wants to create a culture where employees are valued for their competencies and motivated to learn.

    …values knowledge and the contributions of my team.

    This blueprint can help you build a roadmap to resolve each of these pain points. However, not all organizations need to have a knowledge culture. In the next section, we will walk you through the steps of selecting your target maturity model based on your knowledge goals.

    Case Study

    Siemens builds a knowledge culture to drive customer service improvements and increases sales by $122 million

    INDUSTRY: Electronics Engineering

    SOURCE: KM Best Practices

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • As a large electronics and engineering global company, Siemens was facing increased global competition.
    • There was an emphasized need for agility and specialized knowledge to remain competitive.
    • The new company strategy to address competitive forces focused on becoming a knowledge enterprise and improving knowledge-sharing processes.
    • New leadership roles were created to develop a knowledge management culture.
    • “Communities of practice” were created with the goal of “connecting people to people” by allowing them to share best practices and information across departments.
    • An internal information-sharing program was launched that combined chat, database, and search engine capabilities for 12,000 employees.
    • Employees were able to better focus on customer needs based on offering services and products with high knowledge content.
    • With the improved customer focus, sales increased by $122 million and there was a return of $10-$20 per dollar spent on investment in the communities of practice.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Five steps to future-proof your IT team

    The five steps are in a cycle. The five steps are: Obtain approval for IT knowledge transfer project, Identify your  knowledge and stakeholder risks, Build knowledge transfer plans, Build your knowledge transfer roadmap, Communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap to stakeholders.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Successfully build a knowledge transfer roadmap based on your goals, no matter what market segment or size of business.
    2. Increase departmental efficiencies through increased collaboration.
    3. Retain key IT knowledge.
    4. Improve junior employee engagement by creating development opportunities.

    Use Info-Tech tools and templates

    Project outcomes

    1. Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained

    2. Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified

    3. Tactics for individuals’ knowledge transfer identified

    4. Knowledge transfer roadmap built

    5. Knowledge transfer roadmap approved

    Info-Tech tools and templates to help you complete your project deliverables

    Project Stakeholder Register Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Your completed project deliverables

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plans

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Info-Tech’s methodology to mitigate key IT employee knowledge loss

    1. Initiate

    2. Design

    3. Implement

    Phase Steps

    1. Obtain approval for IT knowledge transfer project.
    2. Identify your knowledge and stakeholder risks.
    1. Build knowledge transfer plans.
    2. Build your knowledge transfer roadmap.
    1. Communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap to stakeholders.

    Phase Outcomes

    • Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    • Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    • IT knowledge transfer project charter created.
    • Tactics for individuals’ knowledge transfer identified.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    • IT knowledge transfer plans established.
    • IT Knowledge transfer roadmap presented.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap approved.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter

    Establish a clear project scope, decision rights, and executive sponsorship for the project.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Identify and assess the knowledge and individual risk of key knowledge holders.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide

    Extract information about the type of knowledge sources have.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    Communicate IT knowledge transfer recommendations to stakeholders to gain buy-in.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation.

    Key deliverable:

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan

    Track knowledge activities, intended recipients, and appropriate transfer tactics for each knowledge source.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Plan.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Business continuity through redundancies preventing service interruptions and project delays.
    • Operational efficiency through increased productivity by never having to start projects from scratch.
    • Increased engagement from junior staff through development planning.
    • IT teams that drive process improvement and improved execution.
    • Mitigated risks and costs from talent leaving the organization.
    • Innovation by capitalizing on collective knowledge.
    • Increased ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “ Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Structure the project. Discuss transfer maturity goal and metrics.

    Call #2: Build knowledge transfer plans.

    Call #3: Identify priorities & review risk assessment tool.

    Call #4: Build knowledge transfer roadmap. Determine logistics of implementation.

    Call #5: Determine logistics of implementation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is five to six calls.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Define the Current and Target State

    Identify Knowledge Priorities

    Build Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Define the Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Have knowledge transfer fireside chat.

    1.2 Identify current and target maturity.

    1.3 Identify knowledge transfer metrics

    1.4 Identify knowledge transfer project stakeholders

    2.1 Identify your knowledge sources.

    2.2 Complete a knowledge risk assessment.

    2.3 Identify knowledge sources’ level of knowledge risk.

    3.1 Build an interview guide.

    3.2 Interview knowledge holders.

    4.1 Prioritize the sequence of initiatives.

    4.2 Complete the project roadmap.

    4.3 Prepare communication presentation.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Organizational benefits and current pain points of knowledge transfer.
    2. Identification of target state of maturity.
    3. Metrics for knowledge transfer.
    4. Project stakeholder register.
    1. List of high risk knowledge sources.
    2. Departure analysis.
    3. Knowledge risk analysis.
    1. Knowledge transfer interview guide.
    2. Itemized knowledge assets.
    1. Prioritized sequence based on target state maturity goals.
    2. Project roadmap.
    3. Communication deck.

    Phase #1

    Initiate your IT knowledge transfer project

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Hold a working session with key stakeholders.
    • Identify your current state of maturity for knowledge transfer.
    • Identify your target state of maturity for knowledge transfer.
    • Define key knowledge transfer metrics.
    • Identify your project team and their responsibilities.
    • Build the project charter and obtain approval.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    Step 1.1

    Obtain Approval for Your IT Knowledge Transfer Project

    Activities

    1.1.1 Hold a Working Session With Key Stakeholders

    1.1.2 Conduct a Current and Target State Analysis.

    1.1.3 Identify Key Metrics

    1.1.4 Identify Your Project Team

    1.1.5 Populate an RACI

    1.1.6 Build the Project Charter and Obtain Approval

    Initiate Your IT Knowledge Transfer Project

    The primary goal of this section is to gain a thorough understanding of the reasons why your organization should invest in knowledge transfer and to identify the specific challenges to address.

    Outcomes of this step

    Organizational benefits and current pain points of knowledge transfer

    Hold a working session with the key stakeholders to structure the project

    Don’t build your project charter in a vacuum. Involve key stakeholders to determine the desired knowledge transfer goals, target maturity and KPIs, and ultimately build the project charter.

    Building the project charter as a group will help you to clarify your key messages and help secure buy-in from critical stakeholders up-front, which is key.

    In order to execute on the knowledge transfer project, you will need significant involvement from your IT leadership team. The trouble is that knowledge transfer can be inherently stressful for employees as it can cause concerns around job security. Members of your IT leadership team will also be individuals who need to participate in knowledge transfer, so get them involved upfront. The working session will help stakeholders feel more engaged in the project, which is pivotal for success.

    You may feel like a full project charter isn’t necessary, and depending on your organizational size, it might not be. However, the exercise of building the charter is important regardless. No matter your current climate, some level of socializing the value and plans for knowledge transfer will be necessary.

    Meeting Agenda

    1. Short project introduction
    2. Led by: Project Sponsor

    • Why the project was initiated.
  • Make the case for the project
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • Current state: What project does the project address?
    • Future state: What is our target state of maturity?
  • Success criteria
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • How will success be measured?
  • Define the project team
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • Description of planned project approach.
    • Stakeholder assessment.
    • What is required of the sponsor and stakeholders?
  • Determine next steps
  • Led by: Project Manager

    1.1.1 Key Stakeholder Working Session

    Identify the pain points you’re experiencing with knowledge transfer and some of the benefits which you’d like to see from a program to determine the key objectives By doing so, you’ll get a holistic view of what you need to achieve.

    Collect this information by:

    1. Asking the working group participants (as a whole or in smaller groups) to discuss pain points created by ineffective knowledge transfer practices.
    • Challenges related to stakeholders.
    • Challenges created by process issues.
    • Issues achieving the intended outcome due to ineffective knowledge transfer.
    • Difficulties improving knowledge transfer practices.
  • Discussing opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
  • Having participants write these down on sticky notes and place them on a whiteboard or flip chart.
  • Reviewing all the points as a group and grouping challenges and benefits into themes.
  • Having the group prioritize the risks and benefits in terms of what the solution “must have,” “should have,” “could have,” and “won’t have.”
  • Documenting this in the IT Knowledge Transfer Charter template.
  • Input Output
    • Reasons for the project
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • Pain point and risks
    • Identified next steps
    • Target state
    • Completed IT Knowledge Transfer Charter
    Materials Participants
    • Agenda (see previous slide)
    • Sticky notes (optional)
    • Pens (optional)
    • Whiteboard (optional
    • Markers (optional)
    • IT leadership

    Examples of Possible Pain Points

    • Employees have recently left or are preparing to leave the organization, and we worry that we don’t have their knowledge captured anywhere.
    • We previously had to cut down our IT department, and as a result there is a lack of redundancy for tasks. If someone leaves, we don’t have the information we need to continue operating effectively.
    • We’re worried that the IT department has no succession planning in place and that we’re opening ourselves up to risk.
    • It feels like we are losing productivity because the same problems are being solved multiple times, differently.
    • We’re worried that different employees have unique knowledge which is critical to performance, and that they are the only ones who know about it.
    • We’ve noticed that the processes people are using are different from the ones that are written down.
    • It feels like the IT department is constantly starting projects from scratch and employees aren’t leveraging each other’s information, which is causing inefficiencies.
    • It feels like new employees take too long to get up to speed.
    • We know that we have undocumented systems and more are being built each day.
    • We feel like we’re losing out on opportunities to innovate because we’re not sharing information, learning from others’ mistakes, or capitalizing on their successes.
    • We’ve noticed that staff don’t have a platform to share information on a regular basis. We believe if we brought that information together, we would be better able to improve customer service and drive product innovation.
    • We want to create a culture where employees are valued for their competencies and motivated to learn.
    • We value knowledge and the contributions of our team.

    1.1.2 Conduct a Current and Target State Analysis

    Identify your current and target state of maturity

    How to determine your current and target state of maturity:

    1. Provide the previous two slides with the details of the maturity assessment to the group, to review.
    2. Ask each participant to individually determine what they think is the IT team’s current state of maturity. After a few minutes, discuss as a group and come to an agreement.
    3. Review each of the benefits and timing for each of the maturity levels. Compare the benefits listed to those that you named in the previous exercise and determine which maturity level best describes your target state.
    4. Discuss as a group and agree on one maturity level.
    5. Review the other levels of maturity and determine what is in and out of scope for the project (hint: higher level benefits would be considered out of scope). Document this in the IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter template.
    Input Output
    • Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level charts
    • Target maturity level documented in the IT Knowledge Transfer Charter
    Materials Participants
    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    Info-Tech’s Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, a knowledge transfer project could take weeks, months, or even years. Your maturity level depends on the business goal you would like to achieve, and impacts who and what your roadmap targets.

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model. Level 0: Accidental, goal is not prioritized. Level 1: Stabilize, goal is risk mitigation. Level 2: Proactive, goal is operational efficiency. Level 3: Knowledge Culture, goal is innovation & customer service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The maturity levels build on one another; if you start with a project, it is possible to move from a level 0 to a level 1, and once the project is complete, you can advance to a level 2 or 3. However, it’s important to set clear boundaries upfront to limit scope creep, and it’s important to set appropriate expectations for what the project will deliver.

    Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level: Accidental and Stabilize

    Goal

    Description

    Time to implement

    Benefits

    Level 0: Accidental

    Not Prioritized

    • No knowledge transfer process is present.
    • Knowledge transfer is completed in an ad hoc manner.
    • Some transfer may take place through exit interviews.

    N/A

    • Simple to implement and maintain.

    Level 1: Stabilize

    Risk Mitigation

    At level one, knowledge transfer is focused around ensuring that redundancies exist for explicit knowledge for:

    1. ALL high-risk knowledge.
    2. ALL high-risk stakeholders.

    Your high-risk knowledge is any information which is proprietary, unique, or specialized.

    High risk stakeholders are those individuals who are at a higher likelihood of departing the organization due to retirement or disengagement.

    0 – 6 months

    • Mitigates risks from talent leaving the organization.
    • Ensures business continuity through redundancies.
    • Provides stability to sustain high-performing services, and mitigates risks from service interruptions.

    Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level: Proactive and Knowledge Culture

    Goal

    Description

    Time to implement

    Benefits

    Level 2: Proactive

    Operational Efficiency

    Level 2 extends Level 1.

    Once stabilized, you can work on KT initiatives that allow you to be more proactive and cover high risk knowledge that may not be held by those see as high risk individuals.

    Knowledge transfer plans must exist for ALL high risk knowledge.

    3m – 1yr

    • Enhances productivity by reducing need to start projects from scratch.
    • Increases efficiency by tweaking existing processes with best practices.
    • Sees new employees become productive more quickly through targeted development planning.
    • Increases chance that employees will stay at the organization longer, if they can see growth opportunities.
    • Streamlines efficiencies by eliminating redundant or unnecessary processes.

    Level 3: Knowledge Culture

    Drive Innovation Through Knowledge

    Level 3 extends Level 2.

    • Knowledge Transfer covers explicit and tacit information throughout the IT organization.
    • The program should be integrated with leadership development and talent management.
    • Key metrics should be tied to process improvement, innovation, and customer service.

    1-2 years

    • Increases end-user satisfaction by leveraging the collective knowledge to solve repeat customer issues.
    • Drives product innovation through collaboration.
    • Increases employee engagement by recognizing and rewarding knowledge sharing.
    • Increases your ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market through increased learning.
    • Enables the development of new ideas through iteration.
    • Supports faster access to knowledge.

    Select project-specific KPIs

    Use the selected KPIs to track the value of knowledge transfer

    You need to ensure your knowledge transfer initiatives are having the desired effect and adjust course when necessary. Establishing an upfront list of key performance indicators that will be benchmarked and tracked is a crucial step.

    Many organizations overlook the creation of KPIs for knowledge transfer because the benefits are often one step removed from the knowledge transfer itself. However, there are several metrics you can use to measure success.

    Hint: Metrics will vary based on your knowledge transfer maturity goals.

    Metrics For Knowledge Transfer

    Creating KPIs for knowledge transfer is a crucial step that many organizations overlook because the benefits are often one step removed from the knowledge transfer itself. However, there are several qualitative and quantitative metrics you can use to measure success depending on your maturity level goals.

    Stabilize

    • Number of high departure risk employees identified.
    • Number of high-risk employees without knowledge transfer plans.
    • Number of post-retirement knowledge issues.

    Be Proactive

    • Number of issues arising from lack of redundancy.
    • Percentage of high-risk knowledge items without transfer plans.
    • Time required to get new employees up to speed.

    Promote Knowledge Culture

    • Percentage of returned deliverables for rework.
    • Percentage of errors repeated in reports.
    • Number of employees mentoring their colleagues.
    • Number of issues solved through knowledge sharing.
    • Percentage of employees with knowledge transfer/development plans.

    1.1.3 Identify Key Metrics

    Identify key metrics the organization will use to measure knowledge transfer success

    How to determine knowledge transfer metrics:

    1. Assign each participant 1-4 of the desired knowledge transfer benefits and pain points which you identified as priorities.
    2. Independently have them brainstorm how they would measure the success of each, and after 10 minutes, present their thoughts to the group.
    3. Write each of the metric suggestions on a whiteboard and agree to 3-5 benefits which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key pain points you have identified and match your desired maturity level.
    InputOutput
    • Knowledge transfer pain points and benefits
    • 3-5 key metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • IT Leadership Team

    Identify knowledge transfer project team

    Determine Project Participants

    Pick a Project Sponsor

    • The project participants are the IT managers and directors whose day-to-day lives will be impacted by the knowledge transfer roadmap and its implementation.
    • These individuals will be your roadmap ream and will help with planning. Most of these individuals should be in the workshop, but ensure you have everyone covered. Some examples of individuals you should consider for your team are:
      • Director/Manager Level:
        • Applications
        • Infrastructure
        • Operations
      • Service Delivery Managers
      • Business Relationship Managers
    • The project sponsor should be a member of your IT department’s senior executive team whose goals and objectives will be impacted by knowledge transfer implementation.
      • This is the person you will get to sign-off on the project charter document.
    The image contains a triangle that has been split into three parts. The top section is labelled: Project Sponsor, middle section: Project Participants, and the bottom is labelled Project Stakeholders.

    The project sponsor is the main catalyst for the creation of the roadmap. They will be the one who signs off on the project roadmap.

    The Project Participants are the key stakeholders in your organization whose input will be pivotal to the creation of the roadmap.

    The project stakeholders are the senior executives who have a vested interest in knowledge transfer. Following completion of this workshop, you will present your roadmap to these individuals for approval.

    1.1.4 Identify Your Project Team

    How to define the knowledge transfer project team:

    1. Through discussion, generate a complete list of key stakeholders, considering each of the roles indicated in the chart on the Key Project Management Stakeholders slide. Write their names on a whiteboard.
    2. Using the quadrant template on the next slide, draw the stakeholder power map.
    3. Evaluate each stakeholder on the list based on their level of influence and support of the project. Write the stakeholder’s name on a sticky note and place it in the appropriate place on the grid.
    4. Create an engagement plan based on the stakeholder’s placement.
    5. Use Info-Tech’s Project Stakeholder Register Template to identify and document your project management stakeholders.

    Project Stakeholder Register Template

    Input Output
    • Initial stakeholder analysis
    • Complete list of project participants.
    • Complete project stakeholder register.
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard / Flip chart
    • Markers / Pens
    • Project Stakeholder Register Template
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Other stakeholders

    Have a strategic approach for engaging stakeholders to help secure buy-in

    If your IT leadership team isn’t on board, you’re in serious trouble! IT leaders will not only be highly involved in the knowledge transfer project, but they also may be participants, so it’s essential that you get their buy-in for the project upfront.

    Document the results in the Project Stakeholder Register Template; use this as a guide to help structure your communication with stakeholders based on where they fall on the grid.

    How to Manage:

    Focus on increasing these stakeholders’ level of support!

    1. Have a one-on-one meeting to seek their views on critical issues and address concerns.
    2. Identify key pain points they have experienced and incorporate these in the project goal statements.
    3. Where possible, leverage KT champions to help encourage support.
    The image contains a small graph to demonstrate the noise makers, the blockers, the changers, and the helpers.

    Capitalize on champions to drive the project/change.

    1. Use them for internal PR of the objectives and benefits.
    2. Ask them what other stakeholders can be leveraged.
    3. Involve them early in creating project documents.

    How to Manage:

    How to Manage:

    Pick your battles – focus on your noise makers first, and then move on to your blockers.

    1. Determine the level of involvement the blockers will have in the project (i.e. what you will need from them in the future) and determine next steps based on this (one-on-one meeting, group meeting, informal communication, or leveraging helpers/ champions to encourage them).

    Leverage this group where possible to help socialize the program and to help encourage dissenters to support.

    1. Mention their support in group settings.
    2. Focus on increasing their understanding via informal communication.

    How to Manage:

    Key Project Management Stakeholders

    Role

    Project Role

    Required

    CIO

    Will often play the role of project sponsor and should be involved in key decision points.

    IT Managers Directors

    Assist in the identification of high-risk stakeholders and knowledge and will be heavily involved in the development of each transfer plan.

    Project Manager

    Should be in charge of leading the development and execution of the project.

    Business Analysts

    Responsible for knowledge transfer elicitation analysis and validation for the knowledge transfer project.

    Situational

    Technical Lead

    Responsible for solution design where required for knowledge transfer tactics.

    HR

    Will aid in the identification of high-risk stakeholders or help with communication and stakeholder management.

    Legal

    Organizations that are subject to knowledge confidentiality, Sarbanes-Oxley, federal rules, etc. may need legal to participate in planning.

    Ensure coverage of all project tasks

    Populate a Project RACI (Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed) chart

    Apps MGR

    Dev. MGR

    Infra MGR

    Build the project charter

    R

    R

    I

    Identify IT stakeholders

    R

    R

    I

    Identify high risk stakeholders

    R

    A

    R

    Identify high risk knowledge

    I C C

    Validate prioritized stakeholders

    I C R

    Interview key stakeholders

    R R A

    Identify knowledge transfer tactics for individuals

    C C A

    Communicate knowledge transfer goals

    C R A

    Build the knowledge transfer roadmap

    C R A

    Approve knowledge transfer roadmap

    C R C

    1.1.5 Populate an RACI

    Populate a RACI chart to identify who should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each key activity.

    How to define RACI for the project team:

    1. Write out the list of all stakeholders along the top of a whiteboard. Write out the key project steps along the left-hand side (use this list as a starting point).
    2. For each initiative, identify each team member’s role. Are they:
    3. Responsible: The one responsible for getting the job done.

      Accountable: Only one person can be accountable for each task.

      Consulted: Involvement through input of knowledge and information.

      Informed: Receiving information about process execution and quality.

    4. As you proceed through the project, continue to add tasks and assign responsibility to the RACI chart on the next slide.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder list
    • Key project steps
    • Project RACI chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • IT Leadership Team

    1.1.6 Build the Project Charter and Obtain Sign-off

    Complete the IT knowledge transfer project charter.

    Build the project charter and obtain sign-off from your project sponsor. Use your organization’s project charter if one exists. If not, customize Info-Tech’s IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template to suit your needs.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT knowledge transfer project charter template.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Identify Your Knowledge and Stakeholder Risks

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify Knowledge Sources

    1.2.2 Complete a Knowledge Risk Assessment

    1.2.3 Review the Prioritized List of Knowledge Sources

    The primary goal of this section is to identify who your primary risk targets are for knowledge transfer.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A list of your high-risk knowledge sources
    • Departure analysis
    • Knowledge risk analysis

    Prioritize your knowledge transfer initiatives

    Throughout this section, we will walk through the following 3 activities in the tool to determine where you need to focus attention for your knowledge transfer roadmap based on knowledge value and likelihood of departure.

    1. Identify Knowledge Sources

    Create a list of knowledge sources for whom you will be conducting the analysis, and identify which sources currently have a transfer plan in place.

    2. Value of Knowledge

    Consider the type of knowledge held by each identified knowledge source and determine the level of risk based on the knowledge:

    1. Criticality
    2. Availability

    3. Likelihood of Departure

    Identify the knowledge source’s risk of leaving the organization based on their:

    1. Age cohort
    2. Engagement level

    This tool contains sensitive information. Do not share this tool with knowledge sources. The BA and Project Manager, and potentially the project sponsor, should be the only ones who see the completed tool.

    The image contains screenshots from the Knowledge Risk Assessment Tool.

    Focus on key roles instead of all roles in IT

    Identify Key Roles

    Hold a meeting with your IT Leadership team, or meet with members individually, and ask these questions to identify key roles:

    • What are the roles that have a significant impact on delivering the business strategy?
    • What are the key differentiating roles for our IT organization?
    • Which roles, if vacant, would leave the organization open to non-compliance with regulatory or legal requirements?
    • Which roles have a direct impact on the customer?
    • Which roles, if vacant, would create system, function, or process failure for the organization?

    Key roles include:

    • Strategic roles: Roles that give the greatest competitive advantage. Often these are roles that involve decision-making responsibility.
    • Core roles: Roles that must provide consistent results to achieve business goals.
    • Proprietary roles: Roles that are tied closely to unique or proprietary internal processes or knowledge that cannot be procured externally. These are often highly technical or specialized.
    • Required roles: Roles that support the department and are required to keep it moving forward day-to-day.
    • Influential roles: Positions filled by employees who are the backbone of the organization, i.e. the go-to people who are the corporate culture.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This step is meant to help speed up and simplify the process for large IT organizations. IT organizations with fewer than 30 people, or organizations looking to build a knowledge culture, can opt to skip this step and include all members of the IT team. This way, everyone is considered and you can prioritize accordingly.

    1.2.1 Identify Key Knowledge Sources

    1. Identify key roles, as shown on the previous slide. This can be done by brainstorming names on sticky notes and placing them on a whiteboard.
    2. Document using IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool Tab 2. Input with first name, last name, department/ IT area, and manager of each identified Knowledge Source.
    3. Also answer the question of whether the Knowledge Source currently has a knowledge transfer plan in place.
    • Not in place
    • Partially in place
    • In place
  • Conduct sanity check: once you have identified key roles, ask – “did we miss anybody?”
  • InputOutput
    • Employee list
    • List of knowledge sources for IT
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Document key knowledge sources (example)

    Use information about the current state of knowledge transfer plans in your organization to understand your key risks and focus areas.

    The image contains a screenshot of the knowledge source.

    Legend:

    1. Document knowledge source information (name, department, and manager).

    2. Select the current state of knowledge transfer plans for each knowledge source.

    Once you have identified key roles, conduct a sanity check and ask – “did we miss anybody?” For example:

    • There are three systems administrators. One of them, Joe, has been with the organization for 15 years.
    • Joe’s intimate systems knowledge and long-term relationship with one of the plant systems vendors has made him a go-to person during times of operational systems crisis and has resulted in systems support discounts.
    • While the systems administrator role by itself is not considered key (partly due to role redundancy), Joe is a key person to flag for knowledge transfer activities as losing him would make achieving core business goals more difficult.

    Case Study

    Municipal government learns the importance of thorough knowledge source identification after losing key stakeholder

    INDUSTRY: Government

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • A municipal government was introducing a new integration project that was led by their controller.
    • The controller left abruptly, and while the HR department conducted an exit interview, they didn’t realize until after the individual had left how much information was lost.
    • Nobody knew the information needed to complete the integration, so they had to make do with what they had.
    • The Director of IT at the time was the most familiar with the process.
    • Even though she would not normally do this type of project, at the time she was the only person with knowledge of the process and luckily was able to complete the integration.
    • The Director of IT had to put other key projects on hold, and lost productivity on other prioritized work.
    • The organization realized how much they were at risk and changed how they approached knowledge. They created a new process to identify “single point of failures” and label people as high risk. These processes started with the support organization’s senior level key people to identify their processes and record everything they do and what they know.

    Identify employees who may be nearing retirement and flag them as high risk

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Age Cohort

    • 60+ years of age or older, or anyone who has indicated they will be retiring within five years (highest risk).
    • Employees in their early 50s: are still many years away from retirement but have a sufficient number of years remaining in their career to make a move to a new role outside of your organization.
    • Employees in their late 50s: are likely more than five years away from retirement but are less likely than younger employees to leave your organization for another role because of increasing risk in making such a move, and persistent employer unwillingness to hire older employees.
    • Employees under 50: should never be considered low risk only based on age – which is why the second component of stakeholder risk is engagement.

    For those people on your shortlist, pull some hard demographic data.

    Compile a report that breaks down employees into age-based demographic groups.

    Flag those over the age of 50 – they’re in the “retirement zone” and could decide to leave at any time.

    Check to see which stakeholders identified fall into the “over 50” age demographic.

    Document this information in the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    150% of an employee’s base salary and benefits is the estimated cost of turnover according to The Society of Human Resource Professionals.1

    1McLean & Company, Make the Case for Employee Engagement

    Identify disengaged employees who may be preparing to leave the organization

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Engagement

    An engaged stakeholder is energized and passionate about their work, leading them to exert discretionary effort to drive organizational performance (lowest risk).

    An almost engaged stakeholder is generally passionate about their work. At times they exert discretionary effort to help achieve organizational goals.

    Indifferent employees are satisfied, comfortable, and generally able to meet minimum expectations. They see their work as “just a job,” prioritizing their needs before organizational goals.

    Disengaged employees have little interest in their job and the organization and often display negative attitudes (highest risk).

    Option 1:

    The optimal approach for determining employee engagement is through an engagement survey. See McLean & Company for more details.

    Option 2:

    Ask the identified stakeholder’s manager to provide an assessment of their engagement either independently or via a meeting.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engaged employees are five times more likely than disengaged employees to agree that they are committed to their organization.1

    1Source: McLean & Company, N = 13683

    The level of risk of the type of information is defined by criticality and availability

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Criticality

    Roles that are critical to the continuation of business and cannot be left vacant without risking business operations. Would the role, if vacant, create system, function, or process failure for the organization?

    Option 1: (preferred)

    Meet with IT managers/directors over the phone or directly and review each of the identified reports to determine the risk.

    Option 2: Send the IT mangers/directors the list of their direct reports, and ask them to evaluate their knowledge type risk independently and return the information to you.

    Option 3: (if necessary) Review individual job descriptions independently, and use your judgment to come up with a rating for each. Send the assessment to the stakeholders’ managers for validation.

    Availability

    Refers to level of redundancy both within and outside of the organization. Information which is highly available is considered lower risk. Key questions to consider include: does this individual have specialized, unique, or proprietary expertise? Are there internal redundancies?

    1.2.2 Complete a Knowledge Risk Assessment

    Complete a Tab 3 assessment for each of your identified Knowledge Sources. The Knowledge Source tab will pre-populate with information from Tab 2 of the tool. For each knowledge source, you will determine their likelihood of departure and degree of knowledge risk.

    Likelihood of departure:

    1. Document the age cohort risk for each knowledge source on Tab 3 of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool. Age Cohort: Under 50, 51-55, 56-60, or over 60.
    2. Document the engagement risk for each knowledge source on Tab 3, “Assessment”, of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool. Engagement level: Engaged, Almost engaged, Indifferent employees, Disengaged.
    3. Degree of knowledge risk is based on:

    4. Document the knowledge type risk for each stakeholder on Tab 3, “Assessment” in the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.
    • Criticality: Would the role, if vacant, create system, function, or process failure for the organization?
    • Availability: Does this individual have specialized, unique, or proprietary expertise? Are there internal redundancies?
    Input Output
    • Knowledge source list (Tab 2)
    • Employee demographics information
    • List of high-risk knowledge sources
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes
    • Pens
    • Whiteboard
    • Marker
    • IT Leadership Team
    • HR

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Results matrix

    The image contains a screenshot of risk assessment. The image contains a matrix example from tab 4.

    Determine where to focus your efforts

    The IT Knowledge Transfer Map on Tab 5 helps you to determine where to focus your knowledge transfer efforts

    Knowledge sources have been separated into the three maturity levels (Stabilize, Proactive, and Knowledge Culture) and prioritized within each level.

    Focus first on your stabilize groups, and based on your target maturity goal, move on to your proactive and knowledge culture groups respectively.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Map on tab 5.

    Sequential Prioritization

    Orange line Level 1: Stabilize

    Blue Line Level 2: Proactive

    Green Line Level 3: Knowledge Culture

    Each pie chart indicates which of the stakeholders in that risk column currently has knowledge transfer plans.

    Each individual also has their own status ball on whether they currently have a knowledge transfer plan.

    1.2.3 Review the Prioritized List

    Review results

    Identify knowledge sources to focus on for the knowledge transfer roadmap. Review the IT Knowledge Transfer Map on Tab 5 to determine where to focus your knowledge transfer efforts

    1. Show the results from the assessment tool.
    2. Discuss matrix and prioritized list.
    • Does it match with maturity goals?
    • Do prioritizations seem correct?
    InputOutput
    • Knowledge source risk profile
    • Risk Assessment (Tab 3)
    • Prioritized list of knowledge sources to focus on for the knowledge transfer roadmap
    MaterialsParticipants
    • n/a
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Phase #2

    Design your knowledge transfer plans

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Building knowledge transfer plans for all prioritized knowledge sources.
    • Understanding which transfer tactics are best suited for different knowledge types.
    • Identifying opportunities to leverage collaboration tools for knowledge transfer.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders
    • Knowledge sources

    Define what knowledge needs to be transferred

    Each knowledge source has unique information which needs to be transferred. Chances are you don’t know what you don’t know. The first step is therefore to interview knowledge sources to find out.

    Identify the knowledge receiver

    Depending on who the information is going to, the knowledge transfer tactic you employ will differ. Before deciding on the knowledge receiver and tactic, consider three key factors:

    • How will this knowledge be used in the future?
    • What is the next career step for the knowledge receiver?
    • Are the receiver and the source going to be in the same location?

    Identify which knowledge transfer tactics you will use for each knowledge asset

    Not all tactics are good in every situation. Always keep the “knowledge type” (information, process, skills, and expertise), knowledge sources’ engagement level, and the knowledge receiver in mind as you select tactics.

    Determine knowledge transfer tactics

    Determine tactics for each stakeholder based on qualities of their specific knowledge.

    This tool is built to accommodate up to 30 knowledge items; Info-Tech recommends focusing on the top 10-15 items.

    1. Send documents to each manager. Include:
    • a copy of this template.
    • interview guide.
    • tactics booklet.
  • Instruct managers to complete the template for each knowledge source and return it to you.
  • These steps should be completed by the BA or IT Manager. The BA is helpful to have around because they can learn about the tactics and answer any questions about the tactics that the managers might have when completing the template.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Knowledge Source's Name.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Step 2.1

    Build Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Activities

    2.1.1 Interview Knowledge Sources to Uncover Key Knowledge Items

    2.1.2 Identify When to use Knowledge Transfer Tactics

    2.1.3 Build Individual Knowledge Transfer Plans

    The primary goal of this section is to build an interview guide and interview knowledge sources to identify key knowledge assets.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge Transfer Interview Guide
    • Itemized knowledge assets
    • Completed knowledge transfer plans

    2.1.1 Interview Knowledge Sources

    Determine key knowledge items

    The first step is for managers to interview knowledge sources in order to extract information about the type of knowledge the source has.

    Meet with the knowledge sources and work with them to identify essential knowledge. Use the following questions as guidance:

    1. What are you an expert in?
    2. What do others ask you for assistance with?
    3. What are you known for?
    4. What are key responsibilities you have that no one else has or knows how to do?
    5. Are there any key systems, processes, or applications which you’ve taken the lead on?
    6. When you go on vacation, what is waiting for you in your inbox?
    7. If you went on vacation, would there be any systems that, if there was a failure, you would be the only one who knows how to fix?
    8. Would you say that all the key processes you use, or tools, codes etc. are documented?
    Input Output
    • Knowledge type information
    • Prioritized list of key knowledge sources.
    • Knowledge activity information
    • What are examples of good use cases for the technique?
    • Why would you use this technique over others?
    • Is this technique suitable for all projects? When wouldn’t you use it?
    Materials Participants
    • Interview guide
    • Pen
    • Paper
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Knowledge sources

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    2.1.2 Understand Knowledge Transfer Tactics

    Understand when and how to use different knowledge transfer tactics

    1. Break the workshop participants into teams. Assign each team two to four knowledge transfer tactics and provide them with the associated handout(s) from the following slides. Using the material provided, have each team brainstorm around the following questions:
      1. What types of information can the technique be used to collect?
      2. What are examples of good use cases for the technique?
      3. Why would you use this technique over others?
      4. Is this technique suitable for all projects? When wouldn’t you use it?
    2. Have each group present their findings from the brainstorming to the group.
    3. Once everyone has presented, have the groups select which tactics they would be interested in using and which ones they would not want to use by putting green and red dots on each.
    4. As a group, confirm the list of tactics you would be interested in using and disqualify the others.
    Input Output
    • List of knowledge tactics to utilize.
    Materials Participants
    • Knowledge transfer tactics handouts
    • Flip chart paper
    • Markers
    • Green and red dot stickers
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Project team

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Interviews

    Interviews provide an opportunity to meet one-on-one with key stakeholders to document key knowledge assets. Interviews can be used for explicit and tacit information, and in particular, capture processes, rules, coding information, best practices, etc.

    Benefits:

    • Good bang-for-your-buck interviews are simple to conduct and can be used for all types of knowledge.
    • Interviews can obtain a lot of information in a relatively short period of time.
    • Interviews help make tacit knowledge more explicit through effective questioning.
    • They have highly flexible formatting as interviews can be conducted in person, over the phone, or by email.

    How to get started:

    1. Have the business analyst (BA) review the employee’s knowledge transfer plan and highlight the areas to be discussed in the interview.
    2. The BA will then create an interview guide detailing key questions which would need to be asked to ascertain the information.
    3. Schedule a 30-60 minute interview. When complete, document the interview and key lessons learned. Send the information back to the interviewee for validation of what was discussed.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Interview guide

    Notepad

    Pen

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Process Mapping

    Business process mapping refers to building a flow chart diagram of the sequence of actions which defines what a business does. The flow chart defines exactly what a process does and the specific succession of steps including all inputs, outputs, flows, and linkages. Process maps are a powerful tool to frame requirements in the context of the complete solution.

    Benefits:

    • They are simple to build and analyze; most organizations and users are familiar with flow diagrams, making them highly usable.
    • They provide an end-to-end picture of a process.
    • They’re ideal for gathering full and detailed requirements of a process.
    • They include information around who is responsible, what they do, when, where it occurs, triggers, to what degree, and how often it occurs.
    • They’re great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. Have the BA prepare beforehand by doing some preliminary research on the purpose of the process, and the beginning and end points.
    2. With the knowledge holder, use a whiteboard and identify the different stakeholders who interact with the process, and draw swim lanes for each.
    3. Together, use sticky notes and/or dry erase markers etc. to draw out the process.
    4. When you believe you’re complete, start again from the beginning and break the process down to more details.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Whiteboard / flip-chart paper

    Marker

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Use Cases

    Use case diagrams are a common transfer tactic where the BA maps out step-by-step how an employee completes a project or uses a system. Use cases show what a system or project does rather than how it does it. Use cases are frequently used by product managers and developers.

    Benefits:

    • Easy to draw and understand.
    • Simple way to digest information.
    • Can get very detailed.
    • Should be used for documenting processes, experiences etc.
    • Initiation and brainstorming.
    • Great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. The BA will schedule a 30-60 minute in-person meeting with the employee, draw a stick figure on the left side of the board, and pose the initial question: “If you need to do X, what is your first step?” Have the stakeholder go step-by-step through the process until the end goal. Draw this process across the whiteboard. Make sure you capture the triggers, causes of events, decision points, outcomes, tools, and interactions.
    2. Starting at the beginning of the diagram, go through each step again and ask the employee if the step can be broken down into more granular steps. If the answer is yes, break down the use case further.
    3. Ask the employee if there are any alternative flows that people could use, or any exceptions. If there are, map these out on the board.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Whiteboard / flip-chart paper

    Marker

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Job Shadow

    Job shadowing is a working arrangement where the “knowledge receiver” learns how to do a job by observing an experienced employee complete key tasks throughout their normal workday.

    Benefits:

    • Low cost and minimal effort required.
    • Helps employees understand different elements of the business.
    • Helps build relationships.
    • Good for knowledge holders who are not great communicators.
    • Great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine goals and objectives for the knowledge transfer, and communicate these to the knowledge source and receiver.
    2. Have the knowledge source identify when they will be performing a particular knowledge activity and select that day for the job shadow. If the information is primarily experience, select any day which is convenient.
    3. Ask the knowledge receiver to shadow the source and ask questions whenever they have them.
    4. Following the job shadow, have the knowledge receiver document what they learned that day and file that information.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    BA

    IT manager

    Knowledge source and receiver

    Materials

    N/A

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Peer Assist

    Meeting or workshop where peers from different teams share their experiences and knowledge with individuals or teams that require help with a specific challenge or problem.

    Benefits:

    • Improves productivity through enhanced problem solving.
    • Encourages collaboration between teams to share insight, and assistance from people outside your team to obtain new possible approaches.
    • Promotes sharing and development of new connections among different staff, and creates opportunities for innovation.
    • Can be combined with Action Reviews.

    How to get started:

    1. Create a registry of key projects that different individuals have solved. Where applicable, leverage the existing work done through action reviews.
    2. Create and communicate a process for knowledge sources and receivers to reach out to one another. Email or social collaboration platforms are the most common.
    3. The source may then reply with documentation or a peer can set up an interview to discuss.
    4. Information should be recorded and saved on a corporate share drive with appropriate metadata to ensure ease of search.
    5. See Appendix for further details.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Knowledge sources

    Knowledge receiver

    BA to build a skill repository

    Materials

    Intranet

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Transition Workshop

    A half- to full-day exercise where an outgoing leader facilitates a knowledge transfer of key insights they have learned along the way and any high-profile knowledge they may have.

    Benefits:

    • Accelerates knowledge transfer following a leadership change.
    • Ensures business continuity.
    • New leader gets a chance to understand the business drivers behind team decisions and skills of each member.
    • The individuals on the team learn about the new leader’s values and communication styles.

    How to get started:

    1. Outgoing leader organizes a one-time session where they share information with the team (focus on tacit knowledge, such as team successes and challenges) and team can ask questions.
    2. Incoming leader and remaining team members share information about norms, priorities, and values.
    3. Document the information.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: Some

    Process Development: Some

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT leader

    Incoming IT team

    Key stakeholders

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Action Review

    Action Review is a team-based discussion at the end of a project or step to review how the activity went and what can be done differently next time. It is ideal for transferring expertise and skills.

    Benefits:

    • Learning is done during and immediately after the project so that knowledge transfer happens quickly.
    • Results can be shared with other teams outside of the immediate members.
    • Makes tacit knowledge explicit.
    • Encourages a culture where making mistakes is OK, but you need to learn from them.

    How to get started:

    1. Hold an initial meeting with IT teams to inform them of the action reviews. Create an action review goals statement by working with IT teams to discuss what they hope to get out of the initiative.
    2. Ask project teams to present their work and answer the following questions:
      1. What was supposed to happen?
      2. What actually happened?
      3. Why were there differences?
      4. What can we learn and do differently next time?
    3. Have each individual or group present, record the meeting minutes, and send the details to the group for future reference. Determine a share storage place on your company intranet or shared drive for future reference.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training:Minimal

    Technology Support: Minimal

    Process Development: Some

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT unit/group

    Any related IT stakeholder impacted by or involved in a project.

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Mentoring

    Mentoring can be a formal program where management sets schedules and expectations. It can also be informal through an environment for open dialogue where staff is encouraged to seek advice and guidance, and to share their knowledge with more novice members of the organization.

    Benefits:

    • Speeds up learning curves and helps staff acclimate to the organizational culture.
    • Communicates organizational values and appropriate behaviors, and is an effective way to augment training efforts.
    • Leads to higher engagement by improving communication among employees, developing leadership, and helping employees work effectively.
    • Improves succession planning by preparing and grooming employees for future roles and ensuring the next wave of managers is qualified.

    How to get started:

    1. Have senior management define the goals for a mentorship program. Depending on your goals, the frequency, duration, and purpose for mentorship will change. Create a mission statement for the program.
    2. Communicate the program with mentors and mentees and define what the scope of their roles will be.
    3. Implement the program and measure success.

    Creating a mentorship program is a full project in itself. For full details on how to set up a mentorship program, see McLean & Company’s Build a Mentoring Program.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: N/a

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT unit/group

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Documentation

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Story Telling

    Knowledge sources use anecdotal examples to highlight a specific point and pass on information, experience, and ideas through narrative.

    Benefits:

    • Provides context and transfers expertise in a simple way between people of different contexts and background.
    • Illustrates a point effectively and makes a lasting impression.
    • Helps others learn from past situations and respond more effectively in future ones.
    • Can be completed in person, through blogs, video or audio recordings, or case studies.

    How to get started:

    1. Select a medium for how your organization will record stories, whether through blogs, video or audio recordings, or case studies. Develop a template for how you’re going to record the information.
    2. Integrate story telling into key activities – project wrap-up, job descriptions, morning meetings, etc.
    3. Determine the medium for retaining and searching stories.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: Some

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Knowledge source

    Knowledge receiver

    Videographer (where applicable)

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Documentation

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Job Share

    Job share exists when at least two people share the knowledge and responsibilities of two job roles.

    Benefits:

    • Reduces the risk of concentrating all knowledge in one person and creating a single point of failure.
    • Increases the number of experts who hold key knowledge that can be shared with others, i.e. “two heads are better than one.”
    • Ensures redundancies exist for when an employee leaves or goes on vacation.
    • Great for getting junior employees up to speed on legacy system functionality.
    • Results in more agile teams.
    • Doubles the amount of skills and expertise.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine which elements of two individuals’ job duties could be shared by two people. Before embarking on a job share, ensure that the two individuals will work well together as a team and individually.
    2. Establish a vision, clear values, and well-defined roles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships to avoid duplication of effort and confusion.
    3. Start with a pilot group of employees who are in support of the initiative, track the results, and make adjustments where needed.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Some

    Technology Support: Minimal

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT manager

    HR

    Employees

    Materials

    Job descriptions

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Communities of Practice

    Communities of practice are working groups of individuals who engage in a process of regularly sharing information with each other across different parts of the organization by focusing on common purpose and working practices. These groups meet on a regular basis to work together on problem solving, to gain information, ask for help and assets, and share opinions and best practices.

    Benefits:

    • Supports a collaborative environment.
    • Creates a sense of community and positive working relationships, which is a key driver for engagement.
    • Encourages creative thinking and support of one another.
    • Facilitates transfer of wide range of knowledge between people from different specialties.
    • Fast access to information.
    • Multiple employees hear the answers to questions and discussions, resulting in wider spread knowledge.
    • Can be done in person or via video conference, and is best when supported by social collaboration tools.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine your medium for these communities and ensure you have the needed technology.
    2. Develop training materials, and a rewards and recognition process for communities.
    3. Have a meeting with staff, ask them to brainstorm a list of different key “communities,” and ask staff to self select into communities.
    4. Have the communities determine the purpose statement for each group, and set up guidelines for functionality and uses.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training:Required

    Technology Support: Required

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Employees

    BA (to assist in establishing)

    IT managers (rewards and recognition)

    Materials

    TBD

    The effectiveness of each knowledge transfer tactic varies based on the type of knowledge you are trying to transfer

    This table shows the relative strengths and weaknesses of each knowledge transfer tactic compared to four different knowledge types.

    Not all techniques are effective for types of knowledge; it is important to use a healthy mixture of techniques to optimize effectiveness.

    Very strong = Very effective

    Strong = Effective

    Medium = Somewhat effective

    Weak = Minimally effective

    Very weak = Not effective

    Knowledge Type

    Tactic

    Explicit

    Tacit

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Interviews

    Very strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Process mapping

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very weak

    Very weak

    Use cases

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very weak

    Very weak

    Job shadow

    Very weak

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Peer assist

    Strong

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Action review

    Medium

    Medium

    Strong

    Weak

    Mentoring

    Weak

    Weak

    Strong

    Very strong

    Transition workshop

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Story telling

    Weak

    Weak

    Strong

    Very strong

    Job share

    Weak

    Weak

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Communities of practice

    Strong

    Weak

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Consider your stakeholders’ level of engagement prior to selecting a knowledge transfer tactic

    Level of Engagement

    Tactic

    Disengaged/ Indifferent

    Almost Engaged - Engaged

    Interviews

    Yes

    Yes

    Process mapping

    Yes

    Yes

    Use cases

    Yes

    Yes

    Job shadow

    No

    Yes

    Peer assist

    Yes

    Yes

    Action review

    Yes

    Yes

    Mentoring

    No

    Yes

    Transition workshop

    Yes

    Yes

    Story telling

    No

    Yes

    Job share

    Maybe

    Yes

    Communities of practice

    Maybe

    Yes

    When considering which tactics to employ, it’s important to consider the knowledge holder’s level of engagement. Employees whom you would identify as being disengaged may not make good candidates for job shadowing, mentoring, or other tactics where they are required to do additional work or are asked to influence others.

    Knowledge transfer can be controversial for all employees as it can cause feelings of job insecurity. It’s essential that motivations for knowledge transfer are communicated effectively.

    Pay particular attention to your communication style with disengaged and indifferent employees, communicate frequently, and tie communication back to what’s in it for them.

    Putting disengaged employees in a position where they are mentoring others can be a risk. Their negativity could influence others not to participate as well or negate the work you’re doing to create a positive knowledge sharing culture.

    Consider using collaboration tools as a medium for knowledge transfer

    There is a wide variety of different collaboration tools available to enable interpersonal and team connections for work-related purposes. Familiarize yourself with all types of collaboration tools to understand what is available to help facilitate knowledge transfer.

    Collaboration Tools

    Content Management

    Real Time Communication

    Community Collaboration

    Social Collaboration

    Tools for collaborating around documents. They store content and allow for easy sharing and editing, e.g. content repositories and version control.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Process maps and use cases
    • Storing interview notes
    • Stories: blogs, video, and case studies

    Tools that enable real-time employee interactions. They permit “on-demand” workplace communication, e.g. IM, video and web conferencing.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Interviews
    • Mentoring
    • Peer assist
    • Story telling
    • Transition workshops

    Tools that allow teams and communities to come together and share ideas or collaborate on projects, e.g. team portals, discussion boards, and ideation tools.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Communities of practice
    • Peer assist
    • Story Telling

    Social tools borrow concepts from consumer social media and apply them to the employee-centric context, e.g. employee profiles, activity streams, and microblogging.

    Can be used for:

    • Peer assist
    • Story telling
    • Communities of practice

    For more information on Collaboration Tools and how to use them, see Info-Tech’s Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy.

    Identify potential knowledge receivers

    Hold a meeting with your IT leaders to identify who would be the best knowledge receivers for specific knowledge assets

    • Before deciding on a successor, determine how the knowledge asset will be used in the future. This will impact who the receiver will be and your tactic. That is, if you are looking to upgrade a technology in the future, consider who would be taking on that project and what they would need to know.
    • Prior to the meeting, each manager should send a copy of the knowledge assets they have identified to the other managers.
    • Participants should come equipped with names of members of their teams and have an idea of what their career aspirations are.
    • Don’t assume that all employees want a career change. Be sure to have conversations with employees to determine their career aspirations.

    Ask how effectively the potential knowledge receiver would serve in the role today.

    • Review their competencies in terms of:
      • Relationship-building skills
      • Business skills
      • Technical skills
      • Industry-specific skills or knowledge
    • Consider what competencies the knowledge receiver currently has and what must be learned.
    • Finally, determine how difficult it will be for the knowledge receiver to acquire missing skills or knowledge, whether the resources are available to provide the required development, and how long it will take to provide it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Wherever possible, ask employees about their personal learning styles. It’s likely that a collaborative compromise will have to be struck for knowledge transfer to work well.

    Using the IT knowledge transfer plan tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer tool.

    We will use the IT Knowledge Transfer Plans as the foundation for building your knowledge transfer roadmap.

    2.1.3 Complete Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Complete one plan template for each of the knowledge sources

    1. Fill in the top with the knowledge source’s name. Remember that one template should be filled out for each source.
    2. List their key knowledge activities as identified through the interview.
    3. For each knowledge activity, identify and list the most appropriate recipient of this knowledge.
    4. For each knowledge activity, use the drop-down options to identify the type of knowledge that it falls under.
    5. Depending on the type of knowledge, different tactic drop-down options are available. Select which tactic would be most appropriate for this knowledge as well as the people involved in the knowledge transfer.

    The Strength Level column will indicate how well matched the tactic is to the type of knowledge.

    Input Output
    • Results of knowledge source interviews
    • A completed knowledge transfer plan for each identified knowledge source.
    Materials Participants
    • A completed knowledge transfer plan for each identified knowledge source.
    • IT leadership team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Step 2.2

    Build Your Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Activities

    2.2.1 Merge Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    2.2.2 Define Knowledge Transfer Initiatives’ Timeframes

    The goal of this step is to build the logistics of the knowledge transfer roadmap to prepare to communicate it to key stakeholders.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritized sequence based on target state maturity goals.
    • Project roadmap.

    Plan and monitor the knowledge transfer project

    Depending on the desired state of maturity, the number of initiatives your organization has will vary and there could be a lengthy number of tasks and subtasks required to reach your organization knowledge transfer target state. The best way to plan, organize, and manage all of them is with a project roadmap.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Planning and Monitoring tool.

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Steps to use the project planning and monitoring tool:

    1. Begin by identifying all the project deliverables in scope for your organization. Review the previous content pertaining to specific people, process, and technology deliverables that your organization plans on creating.
    2. Identify all the tasks and subtasks necessary to create each deliverable.
    3. Arrange the tasks in the appropriate sequential order.
    4. Assign each task to a member of the project team.
    5. Estimate the day the task will be started and completed.
    6. Specify any significant dependencies or prerequisites between tasks.
    7. Update the project roadmap throughout the project by accounting for injections and entering the actual starting and ending dates.
    8. Use the project dashboard to monitor the project progress and identify risks early.

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Prioritize your tactics to build a realistic roadmap

    Initiatives should not and cannot be tackled all at once;

    • At this stage, each of the identified stakeholders should have a knowledge transfer plan for each of their reports with rough estimates for how long initiatives will take.
    • Simply looking at this raw list of transition plans can be daunting. Logically bundle the identified needs into IT initiatives to create the optimal IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap.
    • It’s important not to try to do too much too quickly. Focus on some quick wins and leverage the success of these initiatives to drive the project forward.

    The image contains a screenshot of the prioritize tactics step.

    Populate the task column of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool. See the following slides for more details on how to do this.

    Some techniques require a higher degree of effort than others

    Effort by Stakeholder

    Tactic

    Business Analyst

    IT Manager

    Knowledge Holder

    Knowledge Receiver

    Interviews

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    These tactics require the least amount of effort, especially for organizations that are already using these tactics for a traditional requirements gathering process.

    Process Mapping

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Use Cases

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Job Shadow

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    These tactics generally require more involvement from IT management and the BA in tandem for preparation. They will also require ongoing effort for all stakeholders. Stakeholder buy-in is key for success.

    Peer Assist

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Action Review

    Low

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Mentoring

    Medium

    High

    High

    Medium

    Transition Workshop

    Medium

    Low

    Medium

    Low

    Story Telling

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Job Share

    Medium

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Communities of Practice

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Consider each tactic’s dependencies as you build your roadmap

    Implementation Dependencies

    Tactic

    Training

    Technology Support

    Process Development

    Duration

    Interviews

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Start your knowledge transfer project here to get quick wins for explicit knowledge.

    Process Mapping

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Use Cases

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Job Shadow

    Required

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Don’t change too much too quickly or try to introduce all of the tactics at once. Focus on 1-2 key tactics and spend a significant amount of time upfront building an effective process and rolling it out. Leverage the effectiveness of the initial tactics to push these initiatives forward.

    Peer Assist

    Minimal

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Action Review

    Minimal

    Minimal

    Some

    Ongoing

    Mentoring

    Required

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Transition Workshop

    Required

    Some

    Some

    Ongoing

    Story Telling

    Some

    Required

    Required

    Ongoing

    Job Share

    Some

    Minimal

    Required

    Ongoing

    Communities of Practice

    Required

    Required

    Required

    Ongoing

    2.2.1 Merge Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Populate the task column of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    1. Take an inventory of all the tactics and techniques which you plan to employ. Eliminate redundancies where possible.
    2. Start your implementation with your highest risk group using explicit knowledge transfer tactics. Interviews, use cases, and process mapping will give you some quick wins and will help gain momentum for the project.
    3. Proactive and knowledge culture should then move forward to other tactics, the majority of which will require training and process design. Pick one to two other key tactics you would like to employ and build those out.
    4. Once you get more advanced, you can continue to grow the number of tactics you employ, but in the beginning, less is more. Keep growing your implementation roadmap one tactic at a time and track key metrics as you go.
    InputOutput
    • A list of project tasks to be completed.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Project Planning Monitoring Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    2.2.2 Define Initiatives’ Timeframes

    Populate the estimated start and completion date and task owner columns of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.

    1. Define the time frame: time frames will depend on several factors. Consider the following while defining timelines for your knowledge transfer tactics:
    • Tactics you choose to employ
    • Availability of resources to implement the initiative
    • Technology requirements
  • Input the Start Date and End Date for each initiative via the drop-down. (Year 1-M1 = year 1, month 1 of implementation.)
  • Define the status of initiative:
    • Planned
    • In progress
    • Completed
  • The initiative owner will ensure each step of the rollout is executed as planned, and will:
    • Engage all required stakeholders at appropriate stages of the project.
    • Engage all required resources to implement the process and make sure that communication channels are open and available between all relevant parties.
    Input Output
    • Timeframes for all project tasks.
    Materials Participants
    • Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Once you start the implementation, leverage the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool for ongoing status updates

    Track your progress

    • Update your project roadmap as you complete the project and keep track of your progress by completing the “Actual Start Date” and “Actual Completion Date” as you go through your project.
    • Use the Progress Report tab in project team meetings to update stakeholders on which tasks have been completed on schedule, for an analysis of tasks to date, and project time management.
    The image contains screenshots from the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.

    Phase #3

    Implement your knowledge transfer plans and roadmap

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Preparing a key stakeholder communication presentation.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    Step 3.1

    Communicate Your Knowledge Transfer Roadmap to Stakeholders

    Activities

    3.1.1 Prepare IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    The goal of this step is to be ready to communicate the roadmap with the project team, project sponsor, and other key stakeholders.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key stakeholder communication deck.

    Use Info-Tech’s template to communicate with stakeholders

    Obtain approval for the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap by customizing Info-Tech’s IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project Context
    • Project Scope and Objectives
    • Knowledge Transfer Roadmap
    • Next Steps

    The image contains screenshots of the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The support of IT leadership is critical to the success of your roadmap roll-out. Remind them of the project benefits and impact them hard with the risks/pain points.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    3.1.1 Prepare a Presentation for Your Project Team and Sponsor

    Now that you have created your knowledge transfer roadmap, the final step of the process is to get sign-off from the project sponsor to begin the planning process to roll-out your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Revisit your project charter to determine the knowledge transfer project stakeholders who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Management’s time is tight, and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery. Impact them hard and fast with the pains and benefits of your roadmap.
    3. The presentation should take no more than an hour. Depending on your audience, the actual presentation delivery could be quite short (12-13 slides). However, you want to ensure adequate time for Q & A.
    Input Output
    • Project charter
    • A completed presentation to communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap.
    Materials Participants
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project sponsor
    • Project stakeholders

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Succession Plan

    Train Managers to Handle Difficult Conversations

    Lead Staff Through Change

    Bibliography

    Babcock, Pamela. “Shedding Light on Knowledge Management.” HR Magazine, 1 May 2004.

    King, Rachael. "Big Tech Problem as Mainframes Outlast Workforce." Bloomberg, 3 Aug. 2010. Web.

    Krill, Paul. “IT’s Most Wanted: Mainframe Programmers.” IDG Communications, Inc. 1 December 2011.

    McLean & Company. “Mitigate the Risk of Baby Boomer Retirement with Scalable Succession Planning.” 7 March 2016.

    McLean & Company. “Make the Case For Employee Engagement.” McLean and Company. 27 March 2014.

    PwC. “15th Annual Global CEO Survey: Delivering Results Growth and Value in a Volatile World.” PwC, 2012.

    Rocket Software, Inc. “Rocket Software 2022 Survey Report: The State of the Mainframe.” Rocket Software, Inc. January 2022. Accessed 30 April 2022.

    Ross, Jenna. “Intangible Assets: A Hidden but Crucial Driver of Company Value.” Visual Capitalist, 11 February 2020. Accessed 2 May 2022.

    Communicate Any IT Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}428|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    IT communications are often considered ineffective and unengaging. This is demonstrated by the:

    • Lack of expectation that IT should communicate well. Why develop a skill that no one expects IT to deliver on?
    • Failure to recognize the importance of communication to engage employees and communicate ideas.
    • Perception that communication is a broadcast not a continuous dialogue.
    • Inability to create, monitor, and manage feedback mechanisms.
    • Overreliance on data as the main method of communication instead of as evidence to support a broader narrative.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue with the story you share.
    • Messages are also non-verbal. Practice using your voice and body to set the right tone and impact your audience.
    • Recognize that communications are essential even in highly technical IT environments.
    • Measure if the communication is being received and resulting in the desired outcome. If not, modify what and how the message is being expressed.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop an actionable plan to deliver consistent, timely messaging for all audiences.
    • Compose and deliver meaningful messages.
    • Consistently deliver the right information and the right time to the right stakeholders.

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Communicate Any IT Initiative Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to plan, compose, and deliver communications to any stakeholder up, down, or across the organization.

    This blueprint not only provides the tools and techniques for planning, composing, and delivering effective communications, but also walks you through practical exercises. Practice and perfect your communication, composition, and delivery skills for any IT initiative.

    • Communicate Any IT Initiative – Phases 1-3

    2. Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck – A step-by-step communications workshop deck suitable for any workshop with a communication component.

    Communication concepts and exercises that teach you how to plan, compose, and deliver effective communications. The deck includes practical tools, techniques, and skills practice.

    • Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck

    3. Communications Planner – An communications plan template that includes a section to define a change, a communications plan, communications calendars, and a pitch composition exercise.

    This communications planner is a tool that accompanies the Effective IT Communications blueprint and the Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck so that you can plan your communications, view your deliverables, and compose your pitch all in one document.

    • Communications Planner Tool

    4. Stakeholder Analysis Tool – A tool to help ensure that all stakeholders are identified and none are missed.

    A tool for identifying stakeholders and conducting an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Communicate Any IT Initiative

    Plan, compose, and deliver communications that engage your audience.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
    Communicating about your initiative is when the work really begins. Many organizations struggle with:
    • Knowing what target audiences need to be communicated with.
    • Communicating the same message consistently and clearly across target audiences.
    • Communicating to target audiences at the right times.
    • Selecting a channel that will be most effective for the message and practicing to deliver that message.
    Some of the challenges IT faces when it comes to communicating its initiatives includes:
    • Not being given the opportunity or time to practice composing or delivering communications.
    • Coordinating the communications of this initiative with other initiative communications.
    • Forgetting to communicate with key stakeholders.
    Choosing not to communicate because we do not know how it’s leading to initiative failures and lack of adoption by impacted parties.
    For every IT initiative you have going forward, focus on following these three steps:
    1. Create a plan of action around who, what, how, and when communications will take place.
    2. Compose an easy-to-understand pitch for each stakeholder audience.
    3. Practice delivering the message in an authentic and clear manner.
    By following these steps, you will ensure that your audience always understands and feels ready to engage with you.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Every IT employee can be a great communicator; it just takes a few consistent steps, the right tools, and a dedication to practicing communicating your message.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Effective communications is not a broadcast but a dialogue between communicator and audience in a continuous feedback loop.

    Continuous Feedback Loop

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. The skills needed to communicate effectively as a front-line employee or CIO are the same. It’s important to begin the development of these skills from the beginning of one's career.
    2. Time is a non-renewable resource. Any communication needs to be considered valuable and engaging by the audience or they will be unforgiving.
    3. Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue about the story you share.

    Poor communication can lead to dissatisfied stakeholders

    27.8% of organizations are not satisfied with IT communications.

    25.8% of business stakeholders are not satisfied with IT communications.

    Source: Info-Tech Diagnostic Programs; n=34,345 business stakeholders within 604 organizations

    The bottom line? Stakeholders for any initiative need to be communicated with often and well. When stakeholders become dissatisfied with IT’s communication, it can lead to an overall decrease in satisfaction with IT.

    Good IT initiative communications can be leverage

    • IT risk mitigation and technology initiative funding are dependent on critical stakeholders comprehending the risk impact and initiative benefit in easy-to-understand terms.
    • IT employees need clear and direct information to feel empowered and accountable to do their jobs well.
    • End users who have a good experience engaging in communications with IT employees have an overall increase in satisfaction with IT.
    • Continuously demonstrating IT’s value to the organization comes when those initiatives are clearly aligned to overall objectives – don’t assume this alignment is being made.
    • Communication prevents assumptions and further miscommunication from happening among IT employees who are usually impacted and fear change the most.

    “Nothing gets done properly if it's not communicated well.”
    -- Nastaran Bisheban, CTO KFC Canada

    Approach to communications

    Introduction
    Review effective communications.

    Plan
    Plan your communications using a strategic tool.

    Compose
    Create your own message.

    Deliver
    Practice delivering your own message.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for effective IT communications

    1. Plan Strategic Communications 2. Compose a Compelling Message 3. Deliver Messages Effectively
    Step Activities
    1. Define the Change
    2. Determine Target Audience
    3. Communication Outcomes
    4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
    5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    6. Select the Right Channels
    7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
    9. Finalize the Calendar
    1. Craft a Pitch
    2. Revise the Pitch
    1. Deliver Your Pitch
    2. Refine and Deliver Again
    Step Outcomes Establish an easy-to-read view of the key communications that need to take place related to your initiative or change. Practice writing a pitch that conveys the message in a compelling and easy-to-understand way. Practice delivering the pitch. Ensure there is authenticity in the delivery while still maintaining the audience’s attention.

    This blueprint can support communication about any IT initiative

    • Strategy or roadmap
    • Major transformational change
    • System integration
    • Process changes
    • Service changes
    • New solution rollouts
    • Organizational restructuring

    We recommend considering this blueprint a natural add-on to any completed Info-Tech blueprint, whether it is completed in the DIY fashion or through a Guided Implementation or workshop.

    Key deliverable:

    Communication Planner
    A single place to plan and compose all communications related to your IT initiative.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Facilitation Guide
    A step-by-step guide to help your IT organization develop a communication plan and practice composing and delivering key messages.

    Stakeholder Analysis
    An ability to assess all stakeholders based on impact, influence, and involvement.

    Workshop Overview

    MorningAfternoon
    ActivitiesPlan Strategic Communications for Your Initiative
    1. Define the Change
    2. Determine Target Audience
    3. Communication Outcomes
    4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
    5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    6. Select the Right Channels
    7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
    9. Finalize the Calendar
    Compose and Deliver a Compelling Message
    1. Craft a Pitch
    2. Revise the Pitch
    3. Deliver Your Pitch
    4. Refine and Deliver Again
    Deliverables
    1. Communication planner with weekly, monthly, and yearly calendar views to ensure consistent and ongoing engagement with every target audience member
    1. Crafted pitches that can be used for communicating the initiative to different stakeholders
    2. Skills and ability to deliver messages more effectively

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Key KPIs for communication with any stakeholder

    Measuring communication is hard; use these to determine effectiveness:

    Goal Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Related Resource
    Obtain board buy-in for IT strategic initiatives. X% of IT initiatives that were approved to be funded.
    Number of times that technical initiatives were asked to be explained further.
    Using our Board Presentation Review
    Ensure stakeholders feel engaged during initiatives. X% of business leadership satisfied with the statement “IT communicates with your group effectively.” Using the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic
    End users know what IT initiatives are going to impact the products or services they use. X% of end users that are satisfied with communications around changing services or applications. Using the End-User Satisfaction Survey
    Project stakeholders receive sufficient communication throughout the initiative. X% overall satisfaction with the quality of the project communications. Using the PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostic
    Employees are empowered to perform on IT initiatives. X% satisfaction employees have with statement “I have all the resources and information I need to do a great job.” Using the Employee Engagement Diagnostic Program

    Phase 1

    Plan Strategic Communications

    Activities
    1.1 Define the Change
    1.2 Determine Target Audience
    1.3 Communication Outcomes
    1.4 Clarify the Key Message(s)
    1.5 Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    1.6 Select the Right Channels
    1.7 Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    1.8 Obtain Feedback and Improve
    1.9 Finalize the Calendar

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively
    Phase1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Create an easy-to-follow communications plan to ensure that the right message is sent to the right audience using the right medium and frequency.

    What is an IT change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:
    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).
    Transitional Change:
    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).
    Transformational Change:
    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.
    Examples:
    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a learning & development plan
    Examples:
    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI & analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)
    Examples:
    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start of the project to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time in the end. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required

    Process

    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required

    Technology

    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    1.1 Define the change

    30 minutes

    1. While different stakeholders will be impacted by the change differently, it’s important to be able to describe what the change is at a higher level.
    2. Have everyone take eight minutes to jot down what the change is and why it is happening in one to two sentences. Tab 2 of the Communication Planner Tool can also be used to house the different ideas.
    3. Present the change statements to one another.
    4. By leveraging one of the examples or consolidating many examples, as a group document:
      • What is the change?
      • Why is it happening?
    5. The goal is to ensure that all individuals involved in establishing or implementing the change have the same understanding.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    Audience
    Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.

    Message
    Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.

    Messenger
    Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.

    Channel
    Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.

    Identify the target audience

    The target audience always includes groups and individuals who are directly impacted by the change and may also include those who are change adjacent.

    Define the target audience: Identify which stakeholders will be the target audience of communications related to the initiative. Stakeholders can be single individuals (CFO) or groups (Applications Team).

    Stakeholders to consider:

    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who loses from the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts in areas of influence that are affected by what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?

    1.2a Determine target audience

    20 minutes

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or can influence the outcome of the initiative.
    2. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool, list each of the stakeholders who will be part of the target audience. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that make up the target audience are all the people who require being communicated with before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each target audience, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to communicate with the stakeholder(s).
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    1.2b Conduct a stakeholder analysis (optional)

    1 hour

    1. For each stakeholder identified as a part of the target audience, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    2. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the change, initiative, etc. can inform the type and way of communicating.
    3. This is a great activity for those who are unsure how to frame communications for each stakeholder identified as a target audience.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
    • The degree of influence or impact each target audience stakeholder has.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating with each audience

    For each target audience, there will be an overall goal on why they need to be communicated with. This outcome or purpose is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change or initiative will have. Depending on the target audience, consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating Across the Organization Communicating Up to Board or Executives Communicating Within IT
    • Obtain buy-in
    • Obtain approval
    • Obtain funding
    • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
    • Reduce concerns about risk
    • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
    • Demonstrate alignment to individual departments or functions
    • Obtain other departments’ buy-in
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    1.3 Communication outcomes

    30 minutes

    1. For each stakeholder, there may be one or more reasons why you need to communicate with them. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool or on a whiteboard, begin to identify the objective or outcome your team is seeking by engaging in each target audience.
    2. As you move through the communication outcomes, it could result in more than one outcome for each target audience.
    3. Ensure there is one line for each target audience desired communication outcome. Many stakeholders might need to be communicated with for several reasons. If using the Communication Planner Tool, add the target audience name in column C for as many different communication outcomes there are in column D related to that stakeholder.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
    • Outcome or objective of communicating with each stakeholder
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?
    • Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    • Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization’s strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.
    How to establish key messages: Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization’s key messages:
    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization’s values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    Key messages should be clear, concise, and consistent (Porter, 2014). The intent is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me? (WIIFM), and specific expectations.

    1.4 Clarify the key messages

    25 minutes

    1. Divide the number of communication lines up equally amongst the participants.
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging that target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, and plan of action or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes
    • Key messages to support a consistent approach
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Understand to how to identify appropriate messengers

    Messages must be communicated by a variety of individuals across the organization. Select the messenger depending on the message characteristics (e.g. audience, message, medium). The same messenger can be used for a variety of messages across different mediums.

    Personal impact messages should be delivered by an employee's direct supervisor.

    Organizational impact messages and rationale should be delivered by senior leaders in the affected areas.

    Chart Preferred Messenger for Change Messages

    Recent research by Prosci found employees prefer to hear personal messages from their direct manager and organizational messages from the executive leadership team.

    Fifty percent of respondents indicated the CEO as the preferred messenger for organizational change messages.

    Select the appropriate messenger

    For each audience, message, and medium, review whether the message is personal or organizational to determine which messengers are best.

    The number and seniority of messengers involved depends on the size of the change:

    • Incremental change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors
      • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the direct supervisor
    • Transitional change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
      • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the C suite
    • Transformational change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
      • Organizational messages from the CEO or C-suite
      • Cascading messages are critical in this type of change because all levels of the organization will be involved

    Communication owner vs. messenger

    Communication Owner

    Single person
    Accountable for the communication message and activities
    Oversees that the communication does not contradict other communications
    Validates the key messages to be made

    Communication Messenger(s)

    Single person or many people
    Responsible for delivering the intended message
    Engages the target audience in the communication
    Ensures the key messages are made in a consistent and clear manner

    1.5 Identify the owner and messenger(s)

    30 minutes

    1. For every communication, there needs to be a single owner. This is the person who approves the communication and will be accountable for the communication
    2. The messenger(s) can be several individuals or a single individual depending on the target audience and desired outcome being sought through the communications.
    3. Identify the person or role who will be accountable for the communication and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
    4. Identify the person(s) or role(s) who will be responsible for delivering the communication and engaging the target audience and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Review appropriate channel for different types of messages

    Communication channels are in-person, paper-based, or tech-enabled. Provide communicators with guidance on which mediums to use in different situations.

    First question: Should the communication be delivered in-person or not?
    Types of channels In-Person Paper-Based or Tech-Enabled
    Questions to consider
    • How is your message likely to be received? Is the message primarily negative?
    • Will the message prompt a lot of dialogue or questions? Will it require significant context or clarification?
    Note: Messages that are important, complex, or negative must be delivered in person. This allows the sender to provide context, clarify questions, and collect feedback.
    • Use paper-based and tech-enabled communications to provide reminders or updates.
    • When deciding which of the two to use, think about your audience: do they have regular access to a computer?
    Two-way interaction Supplement in-person communications with paper-based or tech-enabled communications to provide follow-up and consistency (Government of Nova Scotia). Tech-enabled communications allow the sender to deliver messages when they do not co-locate with the receiver. That said, make sure paper-based communications are provided to those without regular access to a computer.

    Consider accessibility when communicating change – not all employees will have access to the same mediums. To ensure inclusivity, strategically plan which mediums to use to reach the entire audience.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    One-on-One Meetings Individual meetings between managers and their direct reports to ensure they understand the change, can express any concerns, and obtain feedback or recommendations.
    • How the change will impact the employee, what they can expect throughout the change, how they can get support, what the timelines are, etc.
    • Requests for feedback.
    • Responses to feedback.
    • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all stages of change.
    • When real-time feedback is needed.
    • To understand the change’s impact on each employee, understand their emotional reactions and provide support.
    • After a change has been announced and continuing at a regular cadence until after the change has been implemented. Frequency of meetings will vary by employee over the course of the change.
    Team Meeting A meeting of a work unit or department. Can be virtual, in person, or a combination. Led by the work unit or department head/manager.
    • How the change will impact the team – how work gets done, who they work with, etc.
    • Available timelines regarding the change.
    • Support available throughout the change.
    • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all change stages.
    • When real-time communication is needed to keep everyone on the same page and provide an opportunity to ask questions (essential for buy-in).
    • To announce a small change or after a larger change announcement. Continue frequently until the end of adoption, with time reserved for ad hoc meetings.
    Email Electronic communication sent to the audience’s company emails, or in the absence of that, to their personal emails.
    • Overarching details and timelines.
    • Short, easy-to-digest pieces of information that either provide a summary of what to expect or describe actions employees need to take.
    • Applicable for both personal and organizational messages, depending on the messenger. Send personal messages in separate emails from organizational messages.
    • To communicate key details quickly and to a distributed workforce.
    • To reinforce or reiterate information that has been shared in person. Can be used broadly or target specific employees/groups.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Town Hall Virtual or in-person meeting where senior leadership shares information with a wide audience about the change and answers questions.
    • Messaging that is applicable to a large audience.
    • The strategic decisions of senior leadership.
    • Highlight positive initiative outcomes.
    • Recognize employee efforts.
    • Report on engagement.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change or between milestones in a long-term or complex change.
    • To enable senior leaders to explain strategic decisions to employees.
    • To allow employees to ask questions and provide feedback.
    • When support of senior leadership is critical to change success.
    Roadshow A series of meetings where senior leadership or the change champion travels to different geographic locations to hold town halls adapted to each location’s audience.
    • Why the change is happening, when the change is happening, who will be impacted, expectations, and key points of contact.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change and between milestones during a long-term, large, or complex change.
    • For a change impacting several locations.
    • When face time with senior leadership is critical to developing understanding and adoption of the change. Satellite locations can often feel forgotten. A roadshow provides access to senior leadership and lends the credibility of the leader to the change.
    • To enable live two-way communication between employees and leadership.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Intranet An internal company website that a large number of employees can access at any time.
    • Information that has already been communicated to the audience before, so they can access it at any time.
    • FAQs and/or general details about the change (e.g. milestones).
    • Most applicable for organizational messages.
    • To post relevant documentation so the audience can access it whenever they need it.
    • To enable consistency in answers to common questions.
    Training Scheduled blocks of time for the team to learn new skills and behaviors needed to successfully adapt to the change.
    • Reinforce the need for change and the benefits the change will have.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages during the implementation stage.
    • To reduce anxiety over change initiatives, improve buy-in, and increase adoption by helping employees develop skills and behaviors needed to perform effectively.
    Video Message A prerecorded short video clip designed for either simultaneous broadcast or just-in-time viewing. Can be sent over email or mobile or uploaded to a company portal/intranet.
    • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
    • Details about why the organization is changing and what the benefits will be, updates on major milestone achievements, etc.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages, used on a limited basis at any point during the change.
    • Effective when the message needs to appear more personal by putting a face to the message and when it can be presented in a condensed time frame.
    • When a message needs to be delivered consistently across a variety of employees, locations, and time zones.
    • To provide updates and recognize key achievements.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Shift Turnover Meeting A meeting between teams or departments when a shift changes over; sometimes called a shift report. Used to communicate any relevant information from the outgoing shift to the incoming shift members.
    • Details related to the activities performed during the shift.
    • Most applicable for personal impact messages during the implementation stage to reinforce information shared using other communication mediums.
    • Where change directly impacts role expectations or performance so teams hear the same message at the same time.
    Company Newsletter Electronic or hardcopy newsletter published by the company. Contains timely updates on company information.
    • Overarching change details.
    • Information that has already been communicated through other mediums.
    • Varies with the change stage and newsletter frequency.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
    • When the change implementation is expected to be lengthy and audiences need to be kept updated.
    • To celebrate change successes and milestone achievements.
    Sign/Poster Digital or paper-based sign, graphic, or image. Includes posters, screensavers, etc.
    • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
    • Key dates and activities.
    • Key contacts.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
    • As visual reminders in common, highly visible locations (e.g. a company bulletin board, elevator TV monitors).

    1.6 Select the right channels

    20 minutes

    1. Consider the different channels that were described and presented on the previous five slides. Each channel has element(s) to it that will allow it to be more beneficial based on the communication target audience, outcome, and messenger.
    2. Evenly assign the number of communication rows on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool and input the channel that should be used.
    3. Consider if the channel will:
      • Obtain the desired outcome of the communication.
      • Be completed by the messenger(s) defined.
      • Support the target audience in understanding the key messages.
    4. If any target audience communication requires several channels, add additional rows to the planner on TAB 3.
    InputOutput
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication messenger(s)
    • The right channel selected to support the desired communication outcome.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Define the communication time frame based on the initiative

    Communication occurs during four of the five stages of an initiative:

    01 Identify and prioritize 02 Prepare for initiative 03 Create a communication plan 04 Implement change 05 Sustain the desired outcome
    Before During After
    • Communication begins with sponsors and the project team.
    • Set general expectations with project team and sponsors.
    • Outline the communication plan for the remaining stages.
    • Set specific expectations with each stakeholder group.
    • Implement the communication plan.
    • Use feedback loops to determine updates or changes to communications.
    • Communication continues as required after the change.
    • Feedback loops continue until change becomes business as usual.
    Where communication needs to happen

    Don’t forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    Establish a frequency that aligns to the desired communication outcome

    Successful communications are frequent communications.

    • The cadence of a communication is highly dependent on the objective of the communication.
    • Each target requires a different frequency as well:
      • Board Presentations > four times a year is a good frequency
      • Executive Leadership > monthly frequency
      • Organizationally > annually and when necessary
      • Organization Crises > daily, if not hourly
      • IT Initiatives and Projects > weekly
      • IT Teams > weekly, if not daily

    Tech Team Frequency for Discussing Goals

    “When goals are talked about weekly, teams are nearly 3X more likely to feel confident hitting them.”
    – Hypercontext, 2022

    Info-Tech Insight
    Communications made once will always fail. Ensure there is a frequency appropriate for every communication — or do not expect the desired outcome.

    1.7 Establish a frequency and time frame

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Time frame: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the time frame, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organization. And even then it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel
    • Frequency and time frame of the communication
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    First, ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Prior to the strategy rollout, make sure you have also established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO Business Vision Survey
    • Engagement Surveys
    • Focus Groups
    • Suggestion Boxes
    • Team Meetings
    • Random Sampling
    • Informal Feedback
    • Direct Feedback
    • Audience Body Language
    • Repeating the Message Back

    Select metrics to measure progress on key results

    There are two types of metrics that can be used to measure the impact of an internal communications strategy and progress toward strategy goals. These metrics are used to measure both outputs and outcomes.

    Select metrics measuring both:
    Tactical Effectiveness (Outputs) Strategic Effectiveness (Outcomes)
    • Open rate
    • Click-through rate
    • Employee sentiment
    • Participation rates
    • Physical distractions
    • Shift in behavior
    • Manager capability to communicate
    • Organizational ability to meet goals
    • Engagement
    • Turnover

    Pyramid of metrics to measure process on key results

    1.8 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 38) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. However, if the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it is tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.
    InputOutput
    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel
    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Example of internal communications survey

    Use and modify the questions below when building an internal communications survey. Use a Likert scale to gauge responses.

    1. I am satisfied with the communications at our organization.
    2. I am kept fully informed of news and updates relevant to our organization.
    3. I receive information that is relevant to me on a regular basis.
    4. I have the information I need to do my job.
    5. I know where to go to find the information I am looking for.
    6. My manager communicates with me in-person on a regular basis.
    7. I feel I can believe the information I receive from the company.
    8. I feel heard by senior leaders and know that they have received my feedback.
    9. The content and information that I receive is interesting to me.

    Create an easy-to-read approach to communication

    Example of an easy-to-read approach to communication

    1.9 Finalize the calendar

    2 hours

    1. Once the information on tabs 2 and 3 of the Communication Planner Tool has been completed, start to organize the information in an easy-to-read view.
    2. Using the annual, monthly, and weekly calendar views on tabs 3 to 5, begin to formalize the dates of when communications will take place.
    3. Following the instructions on each tab, complete one or all of the views of the communication plan. Remember, the stakeholder that makes up the target audience needs to be considered and whether this communication will overlap with any other communications.
    InputOutput
    • Communication Plan on tab 2
    • Yearly, monthly, and weekly communication calendars
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Phase 2

    Compose a Compelling Message

    Activities

    2.1 Craft a Pitch
    2.2 Revise the Pitch

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Ability to create a clear, concise, and consistent message using best practices and a pitch framework.

    Communication Any IT Initiative Effectively

    Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

    Pieces needed in your message for effective communication

    Info-Tech Insight
    Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-add communication to your audience.

    Enable good communication with these components

    Be Consistent Be Clear
    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.
    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Don’t use jargon.
    Be Relevant Be Concise
    • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
    • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

    Draft the core messages to communicate

    Draft core messages communicating information consistent with the high-level communications plan. This includes the overall goal of communications, key messaging, specifics related to the change action, and customizations for each audience. It’s also important to:

    1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Use a statistic or another piece of information that presents the problem in a unique way.
    2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem you can help. There is value to engaging and working with you further.
    3. Repeat messages several times and through several messengers and mediums throughout the change stages to ensure all audience members receive and understand the details.
    4. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you speak it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
    5. Keep messaging positive but realistic. Avoid continually telling stakeholders that “change is hard.” Instead, communicate messages around change success to positively prime the audience’s mindset (Harvard Business Review).
    6. Communicate what is meaningfully unchanged. Not everything will be impacted by the change. To help reduce fears, include information about meaningful aspects of employees’ work that will not be changing (e.g. employees are moving to report to a new manager on a new team, but the job responsibilities are staying the same).
    7. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication.

    Components of a good pitch

    Key Components of a Good Pitch
    Purpose of the pitch What are you asking for? What is the desired outcome of the conversation? What three things do you want the audience to take away?
    Speak to what matters to them Who is your audience and what are their biggest challenges today? What do they care? What is the “so what”? Humanize it. Start with an example of a real person.
    Sell the improvement How is your solution going to solve that problem? Is your solution a pain killer or vitamin?
    Show real value How will your solution create real value? How can that be measured? Give an example.
    Discuss potential fears Identify and alleviate fears the stakeholder may have in working with you. Think about what they think now and what you want them to think.
    Have a call to action Identify what your ask is. What are you looking for from the stakeholder? Listen and respond.
    Follow up with a thank-you Did you ensure that the participants’ time was respected and appreciated? Be genuine and sincere.

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they’re asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what’s happening next for the audience and answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages in change communications.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    What is changing?
    When is the change expected?
    Who will be championing the change?
    What are the change expectations?
    Will I have input into how the change is happening?
    What’s happening next?
    Why are we changing?
    Why is the change happening now?
    What are the risks of not changing?
    What will be new?
    What’s in it for me?
    What training will be available?
    Who will be impacted?
    How will I be impacted?
    How will my team be impacted?
    What’s happening next?
    Who should I contact with questions or concerns?
    How will I be updated?
    How can I access more information?
    Will the previous process be available throughout the new process implementation?
    What needs to be done and what needs to stop to succeed?
    Will I be measured on this change?
    What’s happening next?
    How can I access more information?
    Will this change be added to key performance indicators?
    How did the change implementation go?
    What’s happening next?
    Before change During change After change
    Prepare for change Create change action and communication plan Implement change Sustain the change

    2.1 Craft a pitch

    20 minutes

    1. Using the set of stakeholders identified in activity 1.2, every participant takes one stakeholder.
    2. Open tab 7 of the Communication Planner Tool or use a piece of paper and create a communication message specific to that stakeholder.
    3. Select a topic from your workshop or use something you are passionate about.
    4. Consider the pitch components as a way to create your pitch. Remember to use what you have learned from the planning and composing sections of this training (in bold).
    5. Compose a three-minute pitch that you will deliver to your audience member.
    InputOutput
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Communication Composition Checklist

    • Did you open the communication with a statistic or other memorable piece of information?
    • Is the topic being communicated in a compelling way that engages the target audience?
    • Are there statistics or data to support the story?
    • Are the statistics and data clear so they cannot be conveyed in any other way than their intended method?
    • Are you writing in clear and concise sentences?
    • Are you avoiding any technical jargon?
    • Is the message only focused on what needs to be said? Have you removed all unnecessary components?
    • Is the content organized in priority order? Could you adapt if the presentation time is shortened?
    • Is the way the communication is written sound like how you would speak normally? Are you writing for the ear?
    • Do you have a clear call to action that the audience will be asked to complete at the end?
    • Does your communication encourage discussion with the target audience? Is the audience a part of the solution?

    2.2 Revise the pitch

    10 minutes

    1. Review the pitch that was created in activity 2.1.
    2. Consider what could be done to make the pitch better:
      • Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      • Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      • Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      • Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    3. Validate that when you say the pitch out loud, it sounds like something you would say normally when communicating with other people.
    4. Make updates to the pitch and get ready to present.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Phase 3

    Deliver Messages Effectively

    Activities
    3.1 Deliver Your Pitch
    3.2 Refine and Deliver Again

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Ability to deliver the pitch in a manner that is clear and would be understood by the specific stakeholder the pitch is intended for.

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively

    Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight
    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    Use clear slides that avoid distracting the audience

    Which slide will be better to present?

    Sample A:

    Sample A

    Sample B:

    Sample B

    3.1 Deliver your pitch

    20 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your pitch. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Group into pairs. One person is the speaker and the other the audience.
    3. Set a timer on your phone or watch.
    4. Speaker:
      1. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
      2. Deliver your pitch to Person 2. Don’t forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Audience:
      1. Repeats ideas back to Person 1. Are the ideas correct? Are you convinced?
      2. Identifies who the audience is. Are they correct?
    6. Reverse roles and repeat.
    7. Discuss and provide feedback to one another.
    InputOutput
    • Written pitch
    • Best practices for delivering
    • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
    • Feedback from person 2.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Pitch framework
    • Communications Plan Tool
    • Piece of paper
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Communication Delivery Checklist

    • Are the slides clean so the audience can focus on your speaking and not on reading the context-heavy slide?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
    • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
    • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
    • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
    • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
    • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
    • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
    • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g. toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures).

    3.2 Refine and deliver again

    1 hour

    1. Go back to what you wrote as your pitch and take ten minutes to eliminate more information to get the pitch down to two minutes based on the feedback from your original partner.
    2. Repeat the last exercise where you deliver your pitch; however, deliver it to the larger group this time.
    3. Focus on ways to adjust body language and voice to make the message more compelling.
    4. Identify if your audience is telling you anything with their body language (e.g. leaning in, leaning back). Use this to adjust as you are presenting.
    5. Have the group provide additional feedback on what was effective about the message and opportunities to further improve the message.
    InputOutput
    • Three-minute pitch
    • Feedback from first delivery
    • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Pitch framework
    • Communications Plan Tool
    • Piece of paper
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Whether the CIO or a service desk technician, delivering a presentation is a fear for every role in IT. Prepare your communication to help overcome the fears that are within your control.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Anuja Agrawal, National Communications Director, PwC

    Anuja Agrawal
    National Communications Director
    PwC

    Anuja is an accomplished global communications professional, with extensive experience in the insurance, banking, financial, and professional services industry in Asia, the US, and Canada. She is currently the National Communications Director at PwC Canada. Her prior work experience includes communication leadership roles at Deutsche Bank, GE, Aviva, and Veritas. Anuja works closely with senior business leaders and key stakeholders to deliver measurable results and effective change and culture building programs. Anuja has experience in both internal and external communications, including strategic leadership communication, employee engagement, PR and media management, digital and social media, M&A/change and crisis management. Anuja believes in leveraging digital tools and technology-enabled solutions combined with in-person engagement to help improve the quality of dialogue and increase interactive communication within the organization to help build an inclusive culture of belonging.

    Nastaran Bisheban, Chief Technology Officer, KFC Canada

    Nastaran Bisheban
    Chief Technology Officer
    KFC Canada

    A passionate technologist and seasoned transformational leader. A software engineer and computer scientist by education, a certified Project Manager that holds an MBA in Leadership with Honors and Distinction from University of Liverpool. A public speaker on various disciplines of technology and data strategy with a Harvard Business School executive leadership program training to round it all. Challenges status quo and conventional practices; is an advocate for taking calculated risk and following the principle of continuous improvement. With multiple computer software and project management publications she is a strategic mentor and board member on various non-profit organizations. Nastaran sees the world as a better place only when everyone has a seat at the table and is an active advocate for diversity and inclusion.

    Heidi Davidson, Co-founder & CEO, Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Heidi Davidson
    Co-founder & CEO
    Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Dr. Heidi Davidson is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize Worldwide, the largest distributed network of marketing and communications experts in the world. She also is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize On Demand, a tech platform that matches marketing and communications freelancers with client projects. Now with 167 active experts, the Galvanize team delivers startup advisory work, outsourced marketing, training, and crisis communications to organizations of all sizes. Before Galvanize, Heidi spent four years as part of the turnaround team at BlackBerry as the Chief Communications Officer and SVP of Corporate Marketing, where she helped the company move from a device manufacturer to a security software provider.

    Eli Gladstone, Co-founder, Speaker Labs

    Eli Gladstone
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eli is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs. He has spent over 6 years helping countless individuals overcome their public speaking fears and communicate with clarity and confidence. When he's not coaching others on how to build and deliver the perfect presentation, you'll probably find him reading some weird books, teaching his kids how to ski or play tennis, or trying to develop a good enough jumpshot to avoid being a liability on the basketball court.

    Francisco Mahfuz, Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz
    Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz has been telling stories in front of audiences for a decade, and even became a National Champion of public speaking. Today, Francisco is a keynote speaker and storytelling coach and offers communication training to individuals and international organisations, and has worked with organisations like Pepsi, HP, the United Nations, Santander and Cornell University. He's the author of Bare: A Guide to Brutally Honest Public Speaking, the host of The Storypowers Podcast, and he’s been part of the IESE MBA communications course since 2020. He's received a BA in English Literature from Birkbeck University in London.

    Sarah Shortreed, EVP & CTO, ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed
    EVP & CTO
    ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed is ATCO’s Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer. Her responsibilities include leading ATCO’s Information Technology (IT) function as it continues to drive agility and collaboration throughout ATCO’s global businesses and expanding and enhancing its enterprise IT strategy, including establishing ATCO’s technology roadmap for the future. Ms. Shortreed's skill and expertise are drawn from her more than 30-year career that spans many industries and includes executive roles in business consulting, complex multi-stakeholder programs, operations, sales, customer relationship management and product management. She was recently the Chief Information Officer at Bruce Power and has previously worked at BlackBerry, IBM and Union Gas. She sits on the Board of Governors for the University of Western Ontario and is the current Chair of the Chief Information Officer (CIO) Committee at the Conference Board of Canada.

    Eric Silverberg, Co-Founder Speaker Labs

    Eric Silverberg
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eric is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs and has helped thousands of people build their public speaking confidence and become more dynamic and engaging communicators. When he's not running workshops to help people grow in their careers, there's a good chance you'll find him with his wife and dog, drinking Diet Coke and rewatching iconic episodes of the reality TV show Survivor! He's such a die-hard fan, that you'll probably see him playing the game one day.

    Stephanie Stewart, Communications Officer & DR Coordinator, Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Stephanie Stewart
    Communications Officer & DR Coordinator
    Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Steve Strout, President, Miovision Technologies

    Steve Strout
    President
    Miovision Technologies

    Mr. Strout is a recognized and experienced technology leader with extensive experience in delivering value. He has successfully led business and technology transformations by leveraging many dozens of complex global SFDC, Oracle and/or SAP projects. He is especially adept at leading what some call “Project Rescues” – saving people’s careers where projects have gone awry; always driving "on-time and on-budget.“ Mr. Strout is the current President of Miovision Technologies and the former CEO and board member of the Americas’ SAP Users’ Group (ASUG). His wealth of practical knowledge comes from 30 years of extensive experience in many CxO and executive roles at some prestigious organizations such as Vonage, Sabre, BlackBerry, Shred-it, The Thomson Corporation (now Thomson Reuters) and Morris Communications. Served on Boards including Customer Advisory Boards of Apple, AgriSource Data, Dell, Edgewise, EMC, LogiSense, Socrates.ai, Spiro Carbon Group, and Unifi.

    Info-Tech Research Group Contributors:
    Sanchia Benedict, Research Lead
    Koula Bouloukos, Production Manager
    Antony Chan, Executive Counsellor
    Janice Clatterbuck, Executive Counsellor
    Ahmed Jowar, Research Specialist
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Nick Kozlo, Senior Research Analyst
    Heather Leier Murray, Senior Research Analyst
    Amanda Mathieson, Research Director
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Joe Meier, Executive Counsellor
    Andy Neill, AVP, Research
    Thomas Randall, Research Director

    Plus an additional two contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Boardroom Presentation Review

    • You will come away with a clear, concise, and compelling board presentation that IT leaders can feel confident presenting in front of their board of directors.
    • Add improvements to your current board presentation in terms of visual appeal and logical flow to ensure it resonates with your board of directors.
    • Leverage a best-of-breed presentation template.

    Build a Better Manager

    • Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers actually use in their day to day.
    • Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Crisis Communication Guides

    During a crisis it is important to communicate to employees through messages that convey calm and are transparent and tailored to your audience. Use the Crisis Communication Guides to:

    • Draft a communication strategy.
    • Tailor messages to your audience.
    • Draft employee crisis communications.

    Use this guide to equip leadership to communicate in times of crisis.

    Bibliography

    Gallo, Carmine. "How Great Leaders Communicate." Harvard Business Review. 23 November 2022.

    Gallup. State of the American Workplace Report. Washington, D.C.: Gallup, 6 February 2020.

    Guthrie, Georgina. “Why Good Internal Communications Matter Now More than Ever.” Nulab. 15 Dec. 2021.

    Hypercontext. “The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022.” Hypercontext. 2022.

    Lambden, Duncan. “The Importance of Effective Workplace Communication – Statistics for 2022.” Expert Market. 13 June 2022.

    McCreary, Gale & WikiHow. “How to Measure the Effectiveness of Communication: 14 Steps.” WikiHow.

    Nowak, Marcin. “Top 7 Communication Problems in the Workplace.” MIT Enterprise Forum CEE, 2021.

    Nunn, Philip. “Messaging That Works: A Unique Framework to Maximize Communication Success.” iabc.

    Picincu, Andra. “How to Measure Effective Communications.” Small Business Chron. 12 January 2021.

    Price. David A. “Pixar Story Rules.”

    Prosci. “Best Practices in Change Management 2020 Edition.” Prosci, 2020.

    Roberts, Dan. “How CIOs Become Visionary Communicators.” CIO, 2019.

    Schlesinger, Mark. “Why building effective communication skill in IT is incredibly important.”

    Skills Framework for the Information Age, “Mapping SFIA Levels of Responsibilities to Behavioural Factors.” Skills Framework for the Information Age, 2021.

    St. James, Halina. Talk It Out. Podium, 2005.

    TeamState. “Communication in the Workplace Statistics: Importance and Effectiveness in 2022.” TeamStage, 2022.

    Walters, Katlin. “Top 5 Ways to Measure Internal Communication.” Intranet Connections, 30 May 2019.

    Avoid Project Management Pitfalls

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}374|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Program & Project Management
    • Parent Category Link: /program-and-project-management
    • IT organizations seem to do everything in projects, yet fewer than 15% successfully complete all deliverables on time and on budget.
    • Project managers seem to succumb to the relentless pressure from stakeholders to deliver more, more quickly, with fewer resources, and with less support than is ideal.
    • To achieve greater likelihood that your project will stay on track, watch out for the four big pitfalls: scope creep, failure to obtain stakeholder commitment, inability to assemble a team, and failure to plan.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • While many project managers worry about proper planning as the key to project success, skilled management of the political factors around a project has a much greater impact on success.
    • Alone, combating scope creep can improve your likelihood of success by a factor of 2x.
    • A strong project sponsor will be key to fighting the inevitable battles to control scope and obtain resources.

    Impact and Result

    • Take steps to avoid falling into common project pitfalls.
    • Assess which pitfalls threaten your project in its current state and take appropriate steps to avoid falling into them.
    • Avoiding pitfalls will allow you to deliver value on time and on budget, creating the perception of success in users’ and managers’ eyes.

    Avoid Project Management Pitfalls Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn about common PM pitfalls and the strategies to avoid them

    Consistently meet project goals through enhanced PM knowledge and awareness.

    • Storyboard: Avoid Project Management Pitfalls
    • None

    2. Detect project pitfalls

    Take action and mitigate a pitfall before it becomes a problem.

    • Project Pitfall Detection & Mitigation Tool

    3. Document and report PM issues

    Learn from issues encountered to help map PM strategies for future projects.

    • Project Management Pitfalls Issue Log
    [infographic]

    Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}318|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $17,501 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Vendor security risk management is a growing concern for many organizations. Whether suppliers or business partners, we often trust them with our most sensitive data and processes.
    • More and more regulations require vendor security risk management, and regulator expectations in this area are growing.
    • However, traditional approaches to vendor security assessments are seen by business partners and vendors as too onerous and are unsustainable for information security departments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
    • Security assessments are time-consuming for both you and your vendors. Maximize the returns on your effort with a risk-based approach.
    • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic re-assessments.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop an end-to-end security risk management process that includes assessments, risk treatment through contracts and monitoring, and periodic re-assessments.
    • Base your vendor assessments on the actual risks to your organization to ensure that your vendors are committed to the process and you have the internal resources to fully evaluate assessment results.
    • Understand your stakeholder needs and goals to foster support for vendor security risk management efforts.

    Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a vendor security assessment service, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define governance and process

    Determine your business requirements and build your process to meet them.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 1: Define Governance and Process
    • Vendor Security Policy Template
    • Vendor Security Process Template
    • Vendor Security Process Diagram (Visio)
    • Vendor Security Process Diagram (PDF)

    2. Develop assessment methodology

    Develop the specific procedures and tools required to assess vendor risk.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 2: Develop Assessment Methodology
    • Service Risk Assessment Questionnaire
    • Vendor Security Questionnaire
    • Vendor Security Assessment Inventory

    3. Deploy and monitor process

    Implement the process and develop metrics to measure effectiveness.

    • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 3: Deploy and Monitor Process
    • Vendor Security Requirements Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Governance and Process

    The Purpose

    Understand business and compliance requirements.

    Identify roles and responsibilities.

    Define the process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key goals for process outcomes.

    Documented service that leverages existing processes.

    Activities

    1.1 Review current processes and pain points.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define policy.

    1.4 Develop process.

    Outputs

    RACI Matrix

    Vendor Security Policy

    Defined process

    2 Define Methodology

    The Purpose

    Determine methodology for assessing procurement risk.

    Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify organizational security risk tolerance.

    2.2 Develop risk treatment action plans.

    2.3 Define schedule for re-assessments.

    2.4 Develop methodology for assessing service risk.

    Outputs

    Security risk tolerance statement

    Risk treatment matrix

    Service Risk Questionnaire

    3 Continue Methodology

    The Purpose

    Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

    Establish vendor inventory.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop vendor security questionnaire.

    3.2 Define procedures for vendor security assessments.

    3.3 Customize the vendor security inventory.

    Outputs

    Vendor security questionnaire

    Vendor security inventory

    4 Deploy Process

    The Purpose

    Define risk treatment actions.

    Deploy the process.

    Monitor the process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of how to treat different risks according to the risk tolerance.

    Defined implementation strategy.

    Activities

    4.1 Define risk treatment action plans.

    4.2 Develop implementation strategy.

    4.3 Identify process metrics.

    Outputs

    Vendor security requirements

    Understanding of required implementation plans

    Metrics inventory

    IT Operations Consulting

    Operations... make sure that the services and products you offer your clients are delivered in the most efficient way possible. IT Operations makes sure that the applications and infrastructure that your delivery depends on is solid.

    Gert Taeymans has over 20 years experience in directing the implementation and management of mission-critical services for businesses in high-volume international markets. Strong track record in risk management, crisis management including disaster recovery, service delivery and change & config management.

    Register to read more …

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}108|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $60,833 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • All organizations, of all sizes, have some amount of technical debt, but very few systematically track, manage, and communicate it.
    • Deferred project work is pushed over to operations, sometimes with little visibility or hand-off, where it gets deprioritized and lost.
    • IT doesn’t have the resources or authority to make needed changes to address the impact of tech debt and can’t make the case for improvement without good data on the problem.
    • Efforts to track technical debt get stuck in the weeds, don’t connect technical issues to business impact, and run out of steam.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Technical debt is a type of technical risk, which in turn is business risk. The business, not IT, must make the decision to accept or mitigate risk – but IT must help the business make an informed decision.
    • There are two ways to keep your technical debt at a manageable level – effectively, to mitigate risk: either stop introducing new debt or start paying back what you already have.

    Impact and Result

    • Define and identify your technical debt. Focus on tech debt you think you can actually fix.
    • Conduct a streamlined and targeted business impact analysis to prioritize tech debt based on its ongoing business impact.
    • Identify options to better manage technical debt and present your findings to business decision makers.

    Manage Your Technical Debt Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the business case to manage technical debt, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your technical debt

    Define, identify, and organize your technical debt in preparation for the technical debt impact analysis.

    • Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool

    2. Measure your technical debt

    Conduct a technical debt business impact analysis.

    • Roadmap Tool

    3. Manage your technical debt

    Identify options to resolve technical debt and summarize the challenge and potential solutions for business decision makers.

    • Technical Debt Executive Summary Presentation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Manage Your Technical Debt

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define and Identify Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Create a working definition of technical debt and identify the technical debt in your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List your technical debt.

    Activities

    1.1 Develop a working definition for technical debt.

    1.2 Discuss your organization’s technical debt risk.

    1.3 Identify 5-10 high-impact technical debts to structure the impact analysis.

    Outputs

    Goals, opportunities, and constraints related to tech debt management

    A list of technical debt

    2 Measure Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Conduct a more-objective assessment of the business impact of technical debt.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the most-critical technical debt in your environment, in terms of business risk.

    Activities

    2.1 Review and modify business impact scoring scales.

    2.2 Identify reasonable scenarios to structure the impact analysis.

    2.3 Apply the scoring scale to identify the business impact of each technical debt.

    Outputs

    Business impact scoring scales

    Scenarios to support the impact analysis

    Technical debt impact analysis

    3 Build a Roadmap to Manage Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Leverage the technical debt impact analysis to identify, compare, and quantify projects that fix technical debt and projects that prevent it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create your plan to manage technical debt.

    Activities

    3.1 Brainstorm projects and action items to manage and pay back critical technical debt. Prioritize projects and action items to build a roadmap.

    3.2 Identify three possible courses of action to pay back each critical technical debt.

    3.3 Identify immediate next steps to manage remaining tech debt and limit the introduction of new tech debt.

    Outputs

    Technical debt management roadmap

    Technical debt executive summary

    Immediate next steps to manage technical debt

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}399|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,308 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective but rarely from a business goal or outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    • Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    • Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps.
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value.
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value.
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience.
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance.

    Which will translate into the following relationship gains:

    • Embed IT into business value achievement.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing).
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop meaningful service metrics, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Executive Brief
    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Phases 1-3

    1. Design the metrics

    Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 1: Design the Metrics
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    2. Design reports and dashboards

    Present the right metrics in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 2: Design Reports and Dashboards
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    3. Implement, track, and maintain

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics, then continuously validate your approach and make refinements to the processes.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Metrics

    The Purpose

    Define stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria and identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes.

    Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design meaningful service metrics from stakeholder needs.

    Validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points.

    1.2 Determine the success criteria and related IT services.

    1.3 Derive the service metrics.

    1.4 Validate the data collection process.

    1.5 Validate metrics with stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Understand stakeholder priorities

    Adopt a business-centric perspective to align IT and business views

    Derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders

    Determine if and how the identified metrics can be collected and measured

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics

    2 Design Reports and Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Determine the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the metrics are presented in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to guarantee that they are read and used.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the different presentation options.

    2.2 Assess stakeholder needs for information.

    2.3 Select and design the metric report.

    Outputs

    Learn about infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard presentation options

    Determine how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making

    Select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look

    3 Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    The Purpose

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics to validate your approach.

    Make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes prior to activating all service metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    High user acceptance and usability of the metrics.

    Processes of identifying and presenting metrics are continuously validated and improved.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the pilot metrics.

    3.2 Gather data and set initial targets.

    3.3 Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders.

    3.4 Implement the service metrics program.

    3.5 Track and maintain the metrics program.

    Outputs

    Select the metrics that should be first implemented based on urgency and impact

    Complete the service intake form for a specific initiative

    Create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets

    Establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated

    Identify the approach to implement the metrics program across the organization

    Set up mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity

    Further reading

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Select IT service metrics that drive business value.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Are you measuring and reporting what the business needs to know?

    “Service metrics are one of the key tools at IT’s disposal in articulating and ensuring its value to the business, yet metrics are rarely designed and used for that purpose.

    Creating IT service metrics directly from business and stakeholder outcomes and goals, written from the business perspective and using business language, is critical to ensuring that the services that IT provides are meeting business needs.

    The ability to measure, manage, and improve IT service performance in relation to critical business success factors, with properly designed metrics, embeds IT in the value chain of the business and ensures IT’s focus on where and how it enables business outcomes.”

    Valence Howden,
    Senior Manager, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • CIO
    • IT VPs
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Align business/IT objectives (design top-down or outside-in)
    • Significantly improve the relationship between the business and IT aspects of the organization
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Service Level Managers
    • Service Owners
    • Program Owners
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Identify unusual deviations from the normal operating state
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate the value of performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating benefits realization

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective yet rarely measure services from a business goal/outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Complication

    • IT organizations have difficulty identifying the right metrics to demonstrate the value of IT services to the business in tangible terms.
    • IT metrics, as currently designed, reinforce division between the IT and business perspectives of service performance. They drive siloed thinking and finger-pointing within the IT structure, and prevent IT resources from understanding how their work impacts business value.

    Resolution

    • Our program enables IT to develop the right service metrics to tie IT service performance to business value and user experience.
    • Ensure the metrics you implement have immediate stakeholder value, reinforcing alignment between IT and the business while influencing behavior in the desired direction.
    • Make sure that your metrics are defined in relation to the business goals and drivers, ensuring they will provide actionable outcomes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    2. Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    3. Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors, which have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Service metrics 101

    What are service metrics?

    Service metrics measure IT services in a way that relates to a business outcome. IT needs to measure performance from the business perspective using business language.

    Why do we need service metrics?

    To ensure the business cares about the metrics that IT produces, start with business needs to make sure you’re measuring the right things. This will give IT the opportunity talk to the right stakeholders and develop metrics that will meet their business needs.

    Service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Perspectives Matter

    Different stakeholders will require different types of metrics. A CEO may require metrics that provide a snapshot of the critical success of the company while a business manager is more concerned about the performance metrics of their department.

    What are the benefits of implementing service metrics?

    Service metrics help IT communicate with the business in business terms and enables IT to articulate how and where they provide business value. Business stakeholders can also easily understand how IT services contribute to their success.

    The majority of CIOs feel metrics relating to business value and stakeholder satisfaction require significant improvement

    A significantly higher proportion of CIOs than CEOs feel that there is significant improvement necessary for business value metrics and stakeholder satisfaction reporting. Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Business Value Metrics'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Stakeholder Satisfaction Reporting'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    (Source: Info-Tech CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Meaningless metrics are a headache for the business

    A major pitfall of many IT organizations is that they often provide pages of technical metrics that are meaningless to their business stakeholders.

    1. Too Many MetricsToo many metrics are provided and business leaders don’t know what to do with these metrics.
    2. Metrics Are Too TechnicalIT provides technical metrics that are hard to relate to business needs, and methods of calculating metrics are not clearly understood, articulated, and agreed on.
    3. Metrics Have No Business ValueService metrics are not mapped to business goals/objectives and they drive incorrect actions or spend.
    When considering only CEOs who said that stakeholder satisfaction reporting needed significant improvement, the average satisfaction score goes down to 61.6%, which is a drop in satisfaction of 12%.

    A bar that says 73% dropping to a bar that says 61%. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Poorly designed metrics hurt IT’s image within the organization

    By providing metrics that do not articulate the value of IT services, IT reinforces its role as a utility provider and an outsider to strategic decisions.

    When the CIOs believe business value metrics weren’t required, 50% of their CEOs said that significant improvements were necessary.

    Pie Chart presenting the survey results from CEOs regarding 'Business Value Metrics'. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)
    1. Reinforce the wrong behaviorThe wrong metrics drive us-against-them, siloed thinking within IT, and meeting metric targets is prioritized over providing meaningful outcomes.
    2. Do not reflect user experienceMetrics don’t align with actual business/user experience, reinforcing a poor view of IT services.
    3. Effort ≠ ValueInvesting dedicated resources and effort to the achievement of the wrong metrics will only leave IT more constrained for other important initiatives.

    Articulate meaningful service performance that supports the achievement of business outcomes

    Service metrics measure the performance of IT services and how they enable or drive the activity outcomes.

    A business process consists of multiple business activities. In many cases, these business activities require one or more supporting IT services.

    A 'Business Process' broken down to its parts, multiple 'Business Activities' and their 'IT Services'. For each business process, business stakeholders and their goals and objectives should be identified.

    For each business activity that supports the completion of a business process, define the success criteria that must be met in order to produce the desirable outcome.

    Identify the IT services that are used by business stakeholders for each business activity. Measure the performance of these services from a business perspective to arrive at the appropriate service metrics.

    Differentiate between different types of metrics

    Stakeholders have different goals and objectives; therefore, it is critical to identify what type of metrics should be presented to each stakeholder.

    Business Metrics

    Determine Business Success

    Business metrics are derived from a pure business perspective. These are the metrics that the business stakeholders will measure themselves on, and business success is determined using these metrics.

    Arrow pointing right.

    Service Metrics

    Manage Service Value to the Business

    Service metrics are used to measure IT service performance against business outcomes. These metrics, while relating to IT services, are presented in business terms and are tied to business goals.

    Arrow pointing right.

    IT Metrics

    Enable Operational Excellence

    IT metrics are internal to the IT organization and used to manage IT service delivery. These metrics are technical, IT-specific, and drive action for IT. They are not presented to the business, and are not written in business language.

    Implementing service metrics is a key step in becoming a service provider and business partner

    As a prerequisite, IT organizations must have already established a solid relationship with the business and have a clear understanding of its critical business-facing services.

    At the very least, IT needs to have a service-oriented view and understand the specific needs and objectives associated with each stakeholder.

    Visualization of 'Business Relationship Management' with an early point on the line representing 'Service Provider: Establish service-oriented culture and business-centric service delivery', and the end of the line being 'Strategic Partner'.

    Once IT can present service metrics that the business cares about, it can continue on the service provider journey by managing the performance of services based on business needs, determine and influence service demand, and assess service value to maximize benefits to the business.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both business relationship management (BRM) and service level management (SLM) provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Business Relationship Management

    BRM works to understand the goals and objectives of the business and inputs them into the design of the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    BRM leverages service metrics to help IT organizations manage the relationship with the business.

    BRM articulates and manages expectations and ensures IT services are meeting business requirements.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both BRM and SLM provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Service Level Management

    SLM works with the business to understand service requirements, which are key inputs in designing the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    SLM leverages service metrics in overseeing the day-to-day delivery of IT services. It ensures they are provided to meet expected service level targets and objectives.

    Effective service metrics will deliver both service gains and relationship gains

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance
        Which will translate into the following relationship gains:
        • Embed IT into business value achievement
        • Improve relationship between the business and IT
        • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing)
        • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business

    Don’t let conventional wisdom become your roadblock

    Conventional Wisdom

    Info-Tech Perspective

    Metrics are measured from an application or technology perspective Metrics need to be derived from a service and business outcome perspective.
    The business doesn’t care about metrics Metrics are not usually designed to speak in business terms about business outcomes. Linking metrics to business objectives creates metrics that the business cares about.
    It is difficult to have a metrics discussion with the business It is not a metrics/number discussion, it is a discussion on goals and outcomes.
    Metrics are only presented for the implementation of the service, not the ongoing outcome of the service IT needs to focus on service outcome and not project outcome.
    Quality can’t be measured Quality must be measured in order to properly manage services.

    Our three-phase approach to service metrics development

    Let Info-Tech guide you through your service metrics journey

    1

    2

    3

    Design Your Metrics Develop and Validate Reporting Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Sample of Phase 1 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Design Your Metrics'. Sample of Phase 2 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Develop and Validate Reporting'. Sample of Phase 3 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Implement, Track, and Maintain'.
    Start the development and creation of your service metrics by keeping business perspectives in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives. Identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and need for metrics. Track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    CIOs must actively lead the design of the service metrics program

    The CIO must actively demonstrate support for the service metrics program and lead the initial discussions to determine what matters to business leaders.

    1. Lead the initiative by defining the need
      Show visible support and demonstrate importance
    2. Articulate the value to both IT and the business
      Establish the urgency and benefits
    3. Select and assemble an implementation group
      Find the best people to get the job done
    4. Drive initial metrics discussions: goals, objectives, actions
      Lead brainstorming with senior business leaders
    5. Work with the team to determine presentation formats and communication methods
      Identify the best presentation approach for senior stakeholders
    6. Establish a feedback loop for senior management
      Solicit feedback on improvements
    7. Validate the success of the metrics
      Confirm service metrics support business outcomes

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Design

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    The business is enabled to identify and improve service performance to their end customer # of improvement initiatives created based on service metrics
    $ cost savings/revenue generated due to actions derived from service metrics

    Procedure to validate the usefulness of IT metrics

    # / % of service metrics added/removed per year

    Alignment between IT and business objectives and processes Business’ satisfaction with IT

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Process

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    Properly defined service metrics aligned with business goals/outcomes
    Easy understood measurement methodologies
    % of services with (or without) defined service metrics

    % of service metrics tied to business goals

    Consistent approach to review and adjust metrics# of service metrics adjusted based on service reviews

    % of service metrics reviewed on schedule

    Demonstrate monetary value and impact through the service metrics program

    In a study done by the Aberdeen Group, organizations engaged in the use of metrics benchmarking and measurement have:
    • 88% customer satisfaction rate
    • 60% service profitability
    • 15% increase in workforce productivity over the last 12 months

    Stock image of a silhouette of three people's head and shoulders.
    (Source: Aberdeen Group. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement.”)

    A service metric is defined for: “Response time for Business Application A

    The expected response time has not been achieved and this is visible in the service metrics. The reduced performance has been identified as having an impact of $250,000 per month in lost revenue potential.

    The service metric drove an action to perform a root-cause analysis, which identified a network switch issue and drove a resolution action to fix the technology and architect redundancy to ensure continuity.

    The fix eliminated the performance impact, allowing for recovery of the $250K per month in revenue, improved end-user confidence in the organization, and increased use of the application, creating additional revenue.

    Implementing and measuring a video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO interview and case material
    Situation

    The manufacturing business operates within numerous countries and requires a lot of coordination of functions and governance oversight. The company has monthly meetings, both regional and national, and key management and executives travel to attend and participate in the meetings.

    Complication

    While the meetings provide a lot of organizational value, the business has grown significantly and the cost of business travel has started to become prohibitive.

    Action

    It was decided that only a few core meetings would require onsite face-to-face meetings, and for all other meetings, the company would look at alternative means. The face-to-face aspect of the meetings was still considered critical so they focused on options to retain that aspect.

    The IT organization identified that they could provide a video conferencing service to meet the business need. The initiative was approved and rolled out in the organization.

    Result:

    IT service metrics needed to be designed to confirm that the expected value outcome of the implementation of video conferencing was achieved.

    Under the direction of the CIO, the business goals and needs driving use of the service (i.e. reduction in travel costs, efficiency, no loss of positive outcome) were used to identify success criteria and key questions to confirm success.

    With this information, the service manager was able to implement relevant service metrics in business language and confirmed an 80% adoption rate and a 95% success rate in term meetings running as expected and achieving core outcomes.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop meaningful service metrics to ensure business and user satisfaction

    1. Design the Metrics 2. Design Reports and Dashboards 3. Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1. Defining stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    2. Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate with business stakeholders
    3. Validate metrics can be collected and measured
    4. Determine calculation methodology
    1. Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    2. Presentation format validated with stakeholders
    1. Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    2. Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    3. Roll out the metrics implementation for a broader audience
    4. Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance

    Guided Implementations

    • Design metrics based on business needs
    • Validate the metrics
    • Select presentation format
    • Review metrics presentation design
    • Select and implement pilot metrics
    • Determine rollout process and establish maintenance/tracking mechanism
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Derive Service Metrics From Business Goals
    Module 2:
    Select and Design Reports and Dashboards
    Module 3:
    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics to Ensure Success
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Meaningful service metrics designed from stakeholder needs
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Appropriate presentation format selected for each stakeholder
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Metrics implemented and process established to maintain and track program success

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Design the Metrics
    Determine Presentation Format and Implement Metrics
    Gather Service Level Requirements
    Monitor and Improve Service Levels

    Activities

    • 1.1 Determine stakeholder needs
    • 1.2 Determine success criteria and key performance indicators
    • 1.3 Derive metrics
    • 1.4 Validate the metric collection
    • 2.1 Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data and select presentation format
    • 2.2 Select and design the metric report
    • Requirements
    • 3.1 Determine the business requirements
    • 3.2 Negotiate service levels
    • 3.3 Align operational level agreements (OLAs) and supplier contracts
    • 4.1 Conduct service report and perform service review
    • 4.2 Communicate service review
    • 4.3 Remediate issues using action plan
    • 4.4 Proactive prevention

    Deliverables

    1. Metrics Development Workbook
    1. Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    2. Metrics Tracking Tool
    1. Service Level Management SOP
    2. Service Level Agreement
    1. Service Level Report
    2. Service Level Review
    3. Business Satisfaction Report

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 1

    Design the Metrics

    Step (1): Design the Metrics

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager (BRM)
    • Service Level Manager (SLM)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    • Identified IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derived meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validated with business stakeholders
    • Validated that metrics can be collected and measured
    • Determined calculation methodology

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Design the Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 1.1: Design Metrics Step 1.2: Validate the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Determine the stakeholder and their needs
    • Identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derive the service metrics
    Review findings with analyst:
    • For the selected metrics, identify the data source for collection
    • Validate whether or not the data can be created
    • Create a calculation method for the metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Using the methodology provided, identify additional stakeholders and map out their success criteria, including KPIs to determine the appropriate service metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine whether the designed metrics are measurable, and if so, how
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    Design your service metrics – overview

    Figure representing 'CIO'. Step 1
    Derive your service metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate your metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figures representing 'CIO', 'SLM', and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Confirm with stakeholders

    Metrics Tracking Sheet

    A star.

    Defined IT Service Metrics

    Deriving the right metrics is critical to ensuring that you will generate valuable and actionable service metrics.

    Derive your service metrics from business objectives and needs

    Service metrics must be designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Thus, IT must start by identifying specific stakeholder needs. The more IT understands about the business, the more relevant the metrics will be to the business stakeholders.

    1. Who are your stakeholders?
    2. What are their goals and pain points?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What do I need to measure?
    5. Derive your service metrics

    Derive your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Metrics Development Workbook

    This workbook guides the development and creation of service metrics that are directly tied to stakeholder needs.

    This process will ensure that your service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    1. Who are the relevant stakeholders?
    2. What are the goals and pain points of your stakeholders?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What does IT need to measure?
    5. What are the appropriate IT metrics?

    Download the Metrics Development Workbook.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Development Workbook.

    Determine your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 0.5 Hour

    Who are your stakeholders?

    1. Identify the primary stakeholders of your service metrics. Stakeholders are the people who have a very specific need to know about how IT services affect their business outcomes. Different stakeholders can have different perspective on the same IT service metric.Most often, the primary target of service metrics are the business stakeholders, e.g. VP of a business unit.
    2. Identify any additional stakeholders. The CIO is also a stakeholder since they are effectively the business relationship manager for the senior leaders.

    Video Conferencing Case Study
    Manufacturing company

    For this phase, we will demonstrate how to derive the service metrics by going through the steps in the methodology.

    At a manufacturing company, the CIO’s main stakeholder is the CEO, whose chief concern is to improve the financial position of the company.

    Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 0.5 Hour

    What are their goals and pain points?

    1. Clearly identify each stakeholder’s business goals and outcomes. These would be particular business goals related to a specific business unit.
    2. Identify particular pain points for each business unit to understand what is preventing them from achieving the desirable business outcome.

    VC Case Study

    One of the top initiatives identified by the company to improve financial performance was to reduce expense.

    Because the company has several key locations in different states, company executives used to travel extensively to carry out meetings at each location.

    Therefore, travel expenses represent a significant proportion of operational expenses and reducing travel costs is a key goal for the company’s executives.

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3 0.5 Hour

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    1. Identify the key things that the stakeholders would need to know based on the goals and pain points derived from the previous step.These are your success criteria and must be met to successfully achieve the desired goals.

    VC Case Study

    The CEO needs to have assurance that without executives traveling to each location, remote meetings can be as effective as in-person meetings.

    These meetings must provide the same outcome and allow executives to collaborate and make similar strategic decisions without the onsite, physical presence.

    Therefore, the success criteria are:

    • Reduced travel costs
    • Effective collaboration
    • High-quality meetings

    What do I need to measure?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.4 1 Hour

    What does IT need to measure?

    1. Identify the IT services that are leveraged to achieve the business goals and success criteria.
    2. Identify the users of those services and determine the nature of usage for each group of users.
    3. Identify the key indicators that must be measured for those services from an IT perspective.

    VC Case Study

    The IT department decides to implement the video conferencing service to reduce the number of onsite meetings. This technology would allow executives to meet remotely with both audio and video and is the best option to replicate a physical meeting.

    The service is initially available to senior executives and will be rolled out to all internal users once the initial implementation is deemed successful.

    To determine the success of the service, the following needs to be measured:

    1. Outcomes of VC meetings
    2. Quality of the VC meetings
    3. Reduction in travel expenses

    Derive service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.5 0.5 Hour

    Derive your service metrics

    1. Derive the service metrics that are meaningful to business stakeholders based on the IT services and the key indicators identified in the previous steps.
    2. Distinguish between service metrics and business metrics. You may identify some business metrics in addition to the IT metrics, and although these are important, IT doesn’t own the process of tracking and reporting business metrics.

    VC Case Study

    In the previous step, IT identified that it must measure the outcomes of VC meetings, quality of the VC meetings, and the reduction in travel expenses. From these, the appropriate service metrics can be derived to answer the needs of the CEO.

    IT needs to measure:

    1. Percent of VC meetings successfully delivered
    2. Growth of number of executive meetings conducted via VC
    Outcomes

    IT also identified the following business metrics:

    1. Reduction in percent of travel expense/spend
    2. Reduction in lost time due to travel

    Validate your metrics

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine whether or not it is viable to actually measure the metrics.

    Can you measure it? The first question IT must answer is whether the metric is measurable. IT must identify the data source, validate its ability to collect the data, and specify the data requirement. Not all metrics can be measured!
    How will you measure it? If the metric is measurable, the next step is to create a way to measure the actual data. In most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach.
    Define your actions Metrics must be used to drive or reinforce desirable outcomes and behaviors. Thus, IT must predetermine the necessary actions associated with the different metric levels, thresholds, or trends.

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Determine what data sources are available. Make sure that you know where the information you need is captured, or will need to be captured. This would include:
      • A ticket/request system
      • An auto discovery tool
      • A configuration management database ( CMDB)
    2. Confirm that IT has the ability to collect the information.
      • If the necessary data is already contained in an identified data source, then you can proceed.
      • If not, consider whether it’s possible to gather the information using current sources and systems.
      • Understand the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    VC Case Study

    Using the metric derived from the video conferencing service example, IT wants to measure the % of VC meetings successfully delivered.

    What are the data sources?

    • Number of VC meetings that took place
    • Number of service incidents
    • User survey

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Understand your data requirements
      • To produce relevant metrics from your data, you need to ensure the level of quality and currency that provides you with useful information. You need to define:
        • The level of detail that has to be captured to make the data useful.
        • The consistency of the data, and how it needs to be entered or gathered.
        • The accuracy of the data. This includes how current the data needs to be, how quickly changes have to be made, and how data quality will be verified.

    VC Case Study

    Data requirement for percent of successful VC meetings:

    • Level of detail – user category, location, date/time,
    • Consistency – how efficiently are VC-related incidents opened and closed? Is the data collected and stored consistently?
    • Accuracy – is the information entered accurately?

    Create the calculation to measure it

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 0.5 Hour

    Determine how to calculate the metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS
    1. Develop the calculations that will be used for each accepted metric. The measurement needs to be clear and straightforward.
    2. Define the scope and assumptions for each calculation, including:
      • The defined measurement period (e.g. monthly, weekly)
      • Exclusions (e.g. nonbusiness hours, during maintenance windows)

    VC Case Study

    Metric: Percent of VC meetings delivered successfully

    IT is able to determine the total number of VC meetings that took place and the number of VC service requests to the help desk.

    That makes it possible to use the following formula to determine the success percentage of the VC service:

    ((total # VC) – (# of VC with identified incidents)) / (total # VC) * 100

    Define the actions to be taken for each metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 1.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Centered on the defined metrics and their calculations, IT can decide on the actions that should be driven out of each metric based on one of the following scenarios:
    • Scenario 1: Ad hoc remedial action and root-cause investigation. If the reason for the result is unknown, determining root cause or identifying trends is required to determine required actions.
    • Scenario 2: Predefined remedial action. A set of predetermined actions associated with different results. This is useful when the meaning of the results is clear and points to specific issues within the environment.
    • Scenario 3: Nonremedial action. The metrics may produce a result that reinforces or supports company direction and strategy, or identifies an opportunity that may drive a new initiative or idea.

    VC Case Study

    If the success rate of the VC meetings is below 90%, IT needs to focus on determining if there is a common cause and identify if this is a consistent downward trend.

    A root-cause analysis is performed that identifies that network issues are causing difficulties, impacting the connection quality and usability of the VC service.

    Validate the confirmed metrics with the business

    Supporting Tool icon 1.8 1 Hour

    INPUT: Selected service metrics, Discussion with the business

    OUTPUT: Validated metrics with the business

    Materials: Metrics with calculation methodology

    Participants: IT and business stakeholders, Service owners

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Once you have derived the appropriate metrics and established that the metrics are measurable, you must go back to the targeted stakeholders and validate that the selected metrics will provide the right information to meet their identified goals and success criteria.
    2. Add confirmed metrics to the Metrics Tracking Tool, in the Metrics Tracking Plan tab.
    Service Metric Corresponding
    Business Goal
    Measurement
    Method
    Defined Actions

    Example: Measuring the online banking service at a financial institution

    Who are IT’s stakeholders? The financial institution provides various banking solutions to its customers. Retail banking is a core service offered by the bank and the VP of retail banking is a major stakeholder of IT.
    What are their goals and pain points? The VP of retail banking’s highest priorities are to increase revenue, increase market share, and maintain the bank’s brand and reputation amongst its customers.
    What do they need to know? In order to measure success, the VP of retail banking needs to determine performance in attracting new clients, retaining clients, expanding into new territory, and whether they have increased the number of services provided to existing clients.
    What does IT need to measure? The recent implementation of an online banking service is a key initiative that will keep the bank competitive and help retail banking meet its goals. The key indicators of this service are: the total number of clients, the number of products per client, percent of clients using online banking, number of clients by segment, service, territory.
    Derive the service metrics Based on the key indicators, IT can derive the following service metrics:
    1. Number of product applications originated from online banking
    2. Customer satisfaction/complaints
    As part of the process, IT also identified some business metrics, such as the number of online banking users per month or the number of times a client accesses online banking per month.

    Design service metrics to track service performance and value

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO
    Challenge Solution Results
    The IT organization needed to generate metrics to show the business whether the video conferencing service was being adopted and if it was providing the expected outcome and value.

    Standard IT metrics were technical and did not provide a business context that allowed for easy understanding of performance and decision making.

    The IT organization, working through the CIO and service managers, sat down with the key business stakeholders of the video conferencing service.

    They discussed the goals for the meeting and defined the success criteria for those goals in the context of video conference meeting outcomes.

    The success criteria that were discussed were then translated into a set of questions (key performance indicators) that if answered, would show that the success criteria were achieved.

    The service manager identified what could be measured to answer the defined questions and eliminated any metrics that were either business metrics or non-IT related.

    The remaining metrics were identified as the possible service metrics, and the ability to gather the information and produce the metric was confirmed.

    Service metrics were defined for:

    1. Percent of video conference meetings delivered successfully
    2. Growth in the number of executive meetings conducted via video conference

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1 'Determine your stakeholders'. Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points

    The onsite analyst will help you select key stakeholders and analyze their business objectives and current pain points.

    1.2

    Sample of activity 1.2 'Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders'. Determine the success criteria and related IT services

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion to uncover the information that these stakeholders care about. The group will also identify the IT services that are supporting these objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.5

    Sample of activity 1.5 'Derive service metrics'. Derive the service metrics

    Based on the key performance indicators obtained in the previous page, derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders.

    1.6

    Sample of activity 1.6 'Determine if you can measure the identified metric'. Validate the data collection process

    The analyst will help the workshop group determine whether the identified metrics can be collected and measured. If so, a calculation methodology is created.

    1.7

    Sample of activity 1.7 'Create the caluclation to measure it'. Validate metrics with stakeholders

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 2

    Design Reports and Dashboards

    Step (2): Design Reports and Dashboards

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    • Presentation format validated with stakeholders

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Design Reports and Dashboards

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 3 weeks
    Step 2.1: Select Presentation Format Step 2.2: Review Design
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the different format of metrics presentation and discuss the pros/cons of each format
    • Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data
    • Select the presentation format
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss stakeholder feedback based on selected presentation format
    • Modify and adjust the presentation format as needed
    Then complete these activities…
    • Design the metrics using the selected format
    Then complete these activities…
    • Finalize the design for metrics presentation
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Design the reports – overview

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Understand the pros and cons of different reporting styles
    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Determine your reporting and presentation style

    Presentation Format Selection

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Design your metrics reports
    A star.

    Validated Service Reports

    The design of service metrics reporting is critically important. The reporting style must present the right information in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to ensure that it is read and used.

    The reports must also display information in a way that generates actions. If your stakeholders cannot make decisions, kick off activities, or ask questions based on your reports, then they have no value.

    Determine the right presentation format for your metrics

    Most often, metrics are presented in the following ways:

    Dashboard
    (PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    Infographic
    (PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants.”)
    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    Report
    (PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights.”)
    Sample of the 'Report' metric presentation format.
    Scorecard
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Dashboard

    A dashboard is a reporting method that provides a dynamic at-a-glance view of key metrics from the perspective of key stakeholders. It provides a quick graphical way to process important performance information in real time.

    Features

    Typically web-based

    Dynamic data that is updated in real time

    Advantage

    Aggregates a lot of information into a single view

    Presents metrics in a simplistic style that is well understood

    Provides a quick point-in-time view of performance

    Easy to consume visual presentation style

    Disadvantage

    Complicated to set up well.
    Requires additional technology support: programming, API, etc.

    Promotes a short-term outlook – focus on now, no historical performance and no future trends. Doesn’t provide the whole picture and story.

    Existing dashboard tools are often not customized enough to provide real value to each stakeholder.

    Dashboards present real-time metrics that can be accessed and viewed at any time

    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Metrics presented through online dashboards are calculated in real time, which allows for a dynamic, current view into the performance of IT services at any time.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Infographic

    An infographic is a graphical representation of metrics or data, which is used to show information quickly and clearly. It’s based on the understanding that people retain and process visual information more readily than written details.

    Features

    Turns dry into attractive –transforms data into eye-catching visual memory that is easier to retain

    Can be used as the intro to a formal report

    There are endless types of infographics

    Advantage

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Eye catching

    Easily shared

    Spurs conversation

    Customizable

    Disadvantage

    Require design expertise and resources

    Can be time consuming to generate

    Could be easily misinterpreted

    Message can be lost with poor design

    Infographics allow for completely unique designs

    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants…”)
    There is no limit when it comes to designing an infographic. The image used here visually articulates the effects of new entrants pulling away the market.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Formal Report

    A formal report is a more structured and official reporting style that contains detailed research, data, and information required to enable specific business decisions, and to help evaluate performance over a defined period of time.

    Definition

    Metrics can be presented as a component of a periodic, formal report

    A physical document that presents detailed information to a particular audience

    Advantage

    More detailed, more structured and broader reporting period

    Formal, shows IT has put in the effort

    Effectively presents a broader and more complete story

    Targets different stakeholders at the same time

    Disadvantage

    Requires significant effort and resources

    Higher risk if the report does not meet the expectation of the business stakeholder

    Done at a specific time and only valuable for that specific time period

    Harder to change format

    Formal reports provide a detailed view and analysis of performance

    Sample of the 'Formal Report' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?”)
    An effective report incorporates visuals to demonstrate key improvements.

    Formal reports can still contain visuals, but they are accompanied with detailed explanations.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Scorecard

    A scorecard is a graphic view of the progress and performance over time of key performance metrics. These are in relation to specified goals based on identified critical stakeholder objectives.

    Features

    Incorporates multiple metrics effectively.

    Scores services against the most important organizational goals and objectives. Scorecards may tie back into strategy and different perspectives of success.

    Advantage

    Quick view of performance against objectives

    Measure against a set of consistent objectives

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Disadvantage

    Requires a lot of forethought

    Scorecards provide a time-bound summary of performance against defined goals

    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Scorecards provide a summary of performance that is directly linked to the organizational KPIs.

    Determine your report style

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    In this section, you will determine the optimal reporting style for the service metrics.

    This guide contains four questions, which will help IT organizations identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and needs for metrics.

    1. Who is the relevant stakeholder?
    2. What are the defined actions for the metric?
    3. How frequently does the stakeholder need to see the metric?
    4. How does the stakeholder like to receive information?
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.
    Download the Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.

    Determine your best presentation option

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 2 Hours

    INPUT: Identified stakeholder and his/her role

    OUTPUT: Proper presentation format based on need for information

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program Manager

    After deciding on the report type to be used to present the metric, the organization needs to consider how stakeholders will consume the metric.

    There are three options based on stakeholder needs and available presentation options within IT.

    1. Paper-based presentation is the most traditional form of reporting and works well with stakeholders who prefer physical copies. The report is produced at a specific time and requires no additional IT capability.
    2. Online documents stored on webpages, SharePoint, or another knowledge management system could be used to present the metrics. This allows the report to be linked to other information and easily shared.
    3. Online dashboards and graphics can be used to have dynamic, real-time reporting and anytime access. These webpages can be incorporated into an intranet and allow the user to view the metrics at any time. This will require IT to continuously update the data in order to maintain the accuracy of the metrics.

    Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind

    Supporting Tool icon 2.2 30 Minutes
    1. Stakeholder-specificThe report must be driven by the identified stakeholder needs and preferences and articulate the metrics that are important to them.
    2. ClarityTo enable decision making and drive desired actions, the metrics must be clear and straightforward. They must be presented in a way that clearly links the performance measurement to the defined outcome without leading to different interpretations of the results.
    3. SimplicityThe report must be simple to read, understand, and analyze. The language of the report must be business-centric and remove as much complexity as possible in wording, imaging, and context.

    Be sure to consider access rights for more senior reports. Site and user access permissions may need to be defined based on the level of reporting.

    Metrics reporting on the video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview
    The Situation

    The business had a clear need to understand if the implementation of video conferencing would allow previously onsite meetings to achieve the same level of effectiveness.

    Reporting Context

    Provided reports had always been generated from an IT perspective and the business rarely used the information to make decisions.

    The metrics needed to help the business understand if the meetings were remaining effective and be tied into the financial reporting against travel expenses, but there would be limited visibility during the executive meetings.

    Approach

    The service manager reviewed the information that he had gathered to confirm how often they needed information related to the service. He also met with the CIO to get some insight into the reports that were already being provided to the business, including the ones that were most effective.

    Considerations

    The conversations identified that there was no need for a dynamic real-time view of the performance of the service, since tracking of cost savings and utility would be viewed monthly and quarterly. They also identified that the item would be discussed within a very small window of time during the management meetings.

    The Solution

    It was determined that the best style of reporting for the metric was an existing scorecard that was produced monthly, using some infographics to ensure that the information is clear at a glance to enable quick decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Sample of presentation format option slide 'Determine the right presentation format for your metrics'. Understand the different presentation options

    The onsite analyst will introduce the group to the communication vehicles of infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard.

    2.1

    Sample of activity 2.1 'Determine your best presentation option'. Assess stakeholder needs for information

    For selected stakeholders, the analyst will facilitate a discussion on how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2

    Sample of activity 2.2 'Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind'. Select and design the metric report

    Based on the discussion, the working group will select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 3

    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Step (3): Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Metrics Program Manager

    Activities in this step

    • Determine the first batch of metrics to be implemented as part of the pilot program
    • Create a process to collect and validate data, determine initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    • Present the metric reports to the relevant stakeholders and incorporate the feedback into the metric design
    • Establish a standard process and roll out the implementation of metrics in batches
    • Establish a process to monitor and track the effectiveness of the service metrics program and make adjustments when necessary

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select and Launch Pilot Metrics Step 3.2: Track and Maintain the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    • Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the success of metrics and discuss feedback from stakeholders
    • Roll out the metrics implementation to a broader audience
    • Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance
    Then complete these activities…
    • Document the first batch of metrics
    • Document the baseline, initial targets
    • Create a plan to integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a document that defines how the organization will track and maintain the success of the metrics program
    • Review the metrics program periodically
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Implement, Track, and Maintain the Metrics

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Run your pilot

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate success

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Implement your metrics program in batches

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    A star.

    Active Service Metrics Program

    Once you have defined the way that you will present the metrics, you are ready to run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics.

    This allows you to validate your approach and make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes where necessary, prior to activating all service metrics.

    Track the performance of your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1

    The Metrics Tracking Tool will enable you to track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    There are three sections in this tool:
    1. Metrics Tracking Plan. Identify the metrics to be tracked and their purpose.
    2. Metrics Tracking Actuals. Monitor and track the actual performance of the metrics.
    3. Remediation Tracking. Determine and document the steps that need to be taken to correct a sub-performing metric.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Tracking Tool.

    Select pilot metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1 30 Minutes

    INPUT: Identified services, Business feedback

    OUTPUT: Services with most urgent need or impact

    Materials: Service catalog or list of identified services

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Business representatives

    To start the implementation of your service metrics program and drive wider adoption, you need to run a pilot using a smaller subset of metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    To determine the sample for the pilot, consider metrics that:

    • Are related to critical business services and functions
    • or
    • Address known/visible pain points for the business
    • or
    • Were designed for supportive or influential stakeholders

    Metrics that meet two or more criteria are ideal for the pilot

    Collect and validate data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics

    OUTPUT: A data collection mythology, Metrics tracking

    Materials: Metrics

    Participants: SLM, BRM, Service owner

    You will need to start collection and validation of your identified data in order to calculate the results for your pilot metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Initiate data collection
      • Use the data sources identified during the design phase and initiate the data collection process.
    2. Determine start date
      • If historical data can be retrieved and gathered, determine how far back you want your measurements to start.
    3. Compile data and validate
      • Ensure that the information is accurate and up to date. This will require some level of data validation and audit.
    4. Run the metric
      • Use the defined calculation and source data to generate the metrics result.
    5. Record metrics results
      • Use the metrics tracking sheet to track the actual results.

    Determine initial targets

    Supporting Tool icon 3.3 1 Hour

    INPUT: Historical data/baseline data

    OUTPUT: Realistic initial target for improvement

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Service owner

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Identify an initial service objective based on one or more of the following options:

    1. Establish an initial target using historical data and trends of performance.
    2. Establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    3. Run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.

    The target may not always be a number - it could be a trend. The initial target will be changed after review with stakeholders

    Integrate with SLM and BRM processes

    Supporting Tool icon 3.4 1 Hour

    INPUT: SLM and BRM SOPs or responsibility documentations

    OUTPUT: Integrate service metrics into the SLM/BRM role

    Materials: SLM / BRM reports

    Participants: SLM, BRM, CIO, Program manager, Service manager

    The service metrics program is usually initiated, used, and maintained by the SLM and BRM functions.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Ensure that the metrics pilot is integrated with those functions by:

    1. Engaging with SLM and BRM functions/resources
      • Identify SLM and BRM resources associated with or working on the services where the metrics are being piloted
      • Obtain their feedback on the metrics/reporting
    2. Integrating with the existing reporting and meeting cycles
      • Ensure the metrics will be calculated and available for discussion at standing meetings and with existing reports
    3. Establishing the metrics review and validation cycle for these metrics
      • Confirm the review and validation period for the metrics in order to ensure they remain valuable and actionable

    Generate reports and present to stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 3.5 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics, Selected presentation format

    OUTPUT: Metrics reports that are ready for distribution

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, CIO, Business representatives

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Once you have completed the calculation for the pilot metrics:

    1. Confirm the report style for the selected metrics (as defined in Phase 2)
    2. Generate the reporting for the pilot metrics
    3. Present the pilot metric reports to the identified BRM and SLM resources who will present the reporting to the stakeholders
    4. Gather feedback from Stakeholders on metrics - results and process
    5. Create and execute remediation plans for any actions identified from the metrics
    6. Initiate the review cycle for metrics (to ensure they retain value)

    Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program

    Supporting Tool icon 3.6 1 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from pilot, Services in batch

    OUTPUT: Systematic implementation of metrics

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program manager

    Upon completion of the pilot, move to start the broader implementation of metrics across the organization:

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify the service metrics that you will implement. They can be selected based on multiple criteria, including:
      • Organizational area/business unit
      • Service criticality
      • Pain points
      • Stakeholder engagement (detractors, supporters)
    2. Create a rollout plan for implementation in batches, identifying expected launch timelines, owners, targeted stakeholders, and communications plans
    3. Use the implementation plan from the pilot to roll out each batch of service metrics:
      • Collect and validate data
      • Determine target(s)
      • Integrate with BRM and SLM
      • Generate and communicate reports to stakeholders

    Maintain the service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7 1.5 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from business stakeholders

    OUTPUT: Modification to individual metrics or to the process

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool, Metrics Development Workbook

    Participants: CIO, BRM, SLM, Program manager, Service owner

    Once service metrics and reporting become active, it is necessary to determine the review time frame for your metrics to ensure they remain useful.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Confirm and establish a review time frame with stakeholders (e.g. annually, bi-annually, after organizational or strategic changes).
    2. Meet with stakeholders by the review date to discuss the value of existing metrics and validate:
      • Whether the goals associated with the metrics are still valid
      • If the metric is still necessary
      • If there is a more effective way to present the metrics
    3. Track actions based on review outcomes and update the remediation tracking sheet.
    4. Update tracking sheet with last complete review date.

    Maintain the metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7

    Based on the outcome of the review meeting, decide what needs to be done for each metric, using the following options:

    Add

    A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    Triggers metrics design as shown in phases 1 and 2.

    Change

    A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.

    Remove

    The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.

    Maintain

    The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    Ensuring metrics remain valuable

    VC CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview

    Reviewing the value of active metrics

    When the video conferencing service was initially implemented, it was performed as a pilot with a group of executives, and then expanded for use throughout the company. It was understood that prior to seeing the full benefit in cost reduction and increased efficiency and effectiveness, the rate of use and adoption had to be understood.

    The primary service metrics created for the service were based on tracking the number of requests for video conference meetings that were received by the IT organization. This identified the growth in use and could be used in conjunction with financial metrics related to travel to help identify the impact of the service through its growth phase.

    Once the service was adopted, this metric continued to be tracked but no longer showed growth or expanded adoption.

    The service manager was no longer sure this needed to be tracked.

    Key Activity

    The metrics around requests for video conference meetings were reviewed at the annual metrics review meeting with the business. The service manager asked if the need for the metric, the goal of tracking adoption, was still important for the business.

    The discussion identified that the adoption rate was over 80%, higher than anticipated, and that there was no value in continuing to track this metric.

    Based on the discussion, the adoption metrics were discontinued and removed from data gathering and reporting, while a success rate metric was added (how many meetings ran successfully and without issue) to ensure the ongoing value of the video conferencing service.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Select pilot metrics'. Select the pilot metrics

    The onsite analyst will help the workshop group select the metrics that should be first implemented based on the urgency and impact of these metrics.

    3.2

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Collect and validate data'. Gather data and set initial targets

    The analyst will help the group create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.5

    Sample of activity 3.5 'Generate reports and present to stakeholders'. Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders

    The Info-Tech analyst will help the group establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated.

    3.6

    Sample of activity 3.6 'Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program'. Implement the service metrics program

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion on how to implement the metrics program across the organization.

    3.7

    Sample of activity 3.7 'Maintain the service metrics'. Track and maintain the metrics program

    Set up a mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.

    Insight 2

    Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.

    Insight 3

    Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Follow a methodology to identify metrics that are derived from business objectives.
    • Understand the proper presentation format based on stakeholder needs for information.
    • Establish a process to ensure the metrics provided will continue to provide value and aid decision making.

    Processes Optimized

    • Metrics presentation to business stakeholders
    • Metrics maintenance and tracking

    Deliverables Completed

    • Metrics Development Workbook
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Name Organization
    Joe Evers Joe Evers Consulting
    Glen Notman Associate Partner, Citihub
    David Parker Client Program Manager, eHealth Ontario
    Marianne Doran Collins CIO, The CIO-Suite, LLC
    Chris Kalbfleisch Manager, Service Management, eHealth Ontario
    Joshua Klingenberg BHP Billiton Canada Inc.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Stock image of a menu. Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog
    The user-facing service catalog is the go-to place for IT service-related information.
    Stock image of a laptop keyboard. Unleash the True Value of IT by Transforming Into a Service Provider
    Earn your seat at the table and influence business strategy by becoming an IT service provider.

    Bibliography

    Pollock, Bill. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement: Using Metrics to Drive Customer Satisfaction and Profits.” Aberdeen Group. June 2009. http://722consulting.com/ServiceBenchmarkingandMeasurement.pdf

    PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.” RMI Discussion. LinkedIn SlideShare. September 2015. http://www.slideshare.net/AnandRaoPwC/mega-trends-and-implications-to-retirement

    PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants: Who will be the industry’s Amazon.com?” Health Research Institute. April 2014. https://www.pwc.com/us/en/health-industries/healthcare-new-entrants/assets/pwc-hri-new-entrant-chart-pack-v3.pdf

    PwC. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?” PwC Blogs. 2012. http://pwc.blogs.com/files/12.09.06---northern-lights-2--summary.pdf

    PwC. “PwC’s key performance indicators

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}216|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,860 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Most IT organizations do not have standard RFP templates and tools.
    • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements.
    • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
    • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time that is required to perform an effective RFP.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Vendors generally do not like RFPs
      Vendors view RFPs as time consuming and costly to respond to and believe that the decision is already made.
    • Dont ignore the benefits of an RFI
      An RFI is too often overlooked as a tool for collecting information from vendors about their product offerings and services.
    • Leverage a pre-proposal conference to maintain an equal and level playing field
      Pre-proposal conference is a convenient and effective way to respond to vendors’ questions ensuring all vendors have the same information to provide a quality response.

    Impact and Result

    • A bad or incomplete RFP results in confusing and incomplete vendor RFP responses which consume time and resources.
    • Incomplete or misunderstood requirements add cost to your project due to the change orders required to complete the project.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Storyboard – Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results

    Discover a proven process for your RFPs. Review Info-Tech’s process and understand how you can prevent your organization from leaking negotiation leverage while preventing vendors from taking control of your RFP. Our 7-phase process prevents a bad RFP from taking your time, money, and resources.

    • Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Storyboard

    2. Define your RFP Requirements Tool – A convenient tool to gather your requirements and align them to your negotiation strategy.

    Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.

    • RFP Requirements Worksheet

    3. RFP Development Suite of Tools – Use Info-Tech’s RFP, pricing, and vendor response tools and templates to increase your efficiency in your RFP process.

    Configure this time-saving suite of tools to your organizational culture, needs, and most importantly the desired outcome of your RFP initiative. This suite contains four unique RFP templates. Evaluate which template is appropriate for your RFP. Also included in this suite are a response evaluation guidebook and several evaluation scoring tools along with a template to report the RFP results to stakeholders.

    • RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
    • Vendor Pricing Tool
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Excel Form RFP Tool
    • RFP Evaluation Guidebook
    • RFP Evaluation Tool
    • Vendor TCO Tool
    • Consolidated Vendor RFP Response Evaluation Summary
    • Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    Infographic

    Workshop: Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Foundation for Creating Requirements

    The Purpose

    Problem Identification

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Current process mapped and requirements template configured

    Activities

    1.1 Overview and level-setting

    1.2 Identify needs and drivers

    1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

    1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

    Outputs

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    Map Your Process With Gap Identification

    Requirements Template

    2 Creating a Sourcing Process

    The Purpose

    Define Success Target

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Baseline RFP and evaluation templates

    Activities

    2.1 Create and issue RFP

    2.2 Evaluate responses/proposals and negotiate the agreement

    2.3 Purchase goods and services

    Outputs

    RFP Calendar Tool

    RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    RFP Respondent Evaluation Tool

    3 Configure Templates

    The Purpose

    Configure Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Templates

    Activities

    3.1 Assess and measure

    3.2 Review templates

    Outputs

    Long-Form RFP Template

    Short-Form RFP Template

    Excel-Based RFP Template

    Further reading

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process

    Lack of RFP Process Causes...
    • Stress
    • Confusion
    • Frustration
    • Directionless
    • Exhaustion
    • Uncertainty
    • Disappointment
    Solution: RFP Process
    Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.
    • Best value solutions
    • Right-sized solutions
    • Competitive Negotiations
    • Better requirements that feed negotiations
    • Internal alignment on requirements and solutions
    • Vendor Management Governance Plan
    Requirements
    • Risk
    • Legal
    • Support
    • Security
    • Technical
    • Commercial
    • Operational
    • Vendor Management Governance
    Templates, Tools, Governance
    • RFP Template
    • Your Contracts
    • RFP Procedures
    • Pricing Template
    • Evaluation Guide
    • Evaluation Matrix
    Vendor Management
    • Scorecards
    • Classification
    • Business Review Meetings
    • Key Performance Indicators
    • Contract Management
    • Satisfaction Survey

    Analyst Perspective

    Consequences of a bad RFP

    Photo of Steven Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group

    “A bad request for proposal (RFP) is the gift that keeps on taking – your time, your resources, your energy, and your ability to accomplish your goal. A bad RFP is ineffective and incomplete, it creates more questions than it answers, and, perhaps most importantly, it does not meet your organization’s expectations.”

    Steven Jeffery
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Most IT organizations are absent of standard RFP templates, tools, and processes.
    • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements from across the business (Legal, Finance, Security, Risk, Procurement, VMO).
    • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
    • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time required to perform an effective RFP.
    • An ad hoc sourcing process is a common recipe for vendor performance failure.

    Common Obstacles

    • Lack of time
    • Lack of resources
    • Right team members not engaged
    • Poorly defined requirements
    • Too difficult to change supplier
    • Lack of a process
    • Lack of adequate tools/processes
    • Lack of a vendor communications plan that includes all business stakeholders.
    • Lack of consensus as to what the ideal result should look like.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Establish a repeatable, consistent RFP process that maintains negotiation leverage and includes all key components.
    • Create reusable templates to expedite the RFP evaluation and selection process.
    • Maximize the competition by creating an equal and level playing field that encourages all the vendors to respond to your RFP.
    • Create a process that is clear and understandable for both the business unit and the vendor to follow.
    • Include Vendor Management concepts in the process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A well planned and executed sourcing strategy that focuses on solid requirements, evaluation criteria, and vendor management will improve vendor performance.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your challenge is to determine the best sourcing tool to obtain vendor information on capabilities, solution(s), pricing and contracting: RFI, RFP, eRFX.

    Depending on your organization’s knowledge of the market, your available funding, and where you are in the sourcing process, there are several approaches to getting the information you need.

    An additional challenge is to answer the question “What is the purpose of our RFX?”

    If you do not have in-depth knowledge of the market, available solutions, and viable vendors, you may want to perform an RFI to provide available market information to guide your RFP strategy.

    If you have defined requirements, approved funding, and enough time, you can issue a detailed, concise RFP.

    If you have “the basics” about the solution to be acquired and are on a tight timeframe, an “enhanced RFI” may fit your needs.

    This blueprint will provide you with the tools and processes and insights to affect the best possible outcome.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    • Lack of process/tools
    • Lack of input from stakeholders
    • Stakeholders circumventing the process to vendors
    • Vendors circumventing the process to key stakeholders
    • Lack of clear, concise, and thoroughly articulated requirements
    • Waiting until the vendor is selected to start contract negotiations
    • Waiting until the RFP responses are back to consider vendor management requirements
    • Lack of clear communication strategy to the vendor community that the team adheres to

    Many organizations underestimate the time commitment for an RFP

    70 Days is the average duration of an IT RFP.

    The average number of evaluators is 5-6

    4 Is the average number of vendor submissions, each requiring an average of two to three hours to review. (Source: Bonfire, 2019. Note: The 2019 Bonfire report on the “State of the RFP” is the most recent published.)

    “IT RFPs take the longest from posting to award and have the most evaluators. This may be because IT is regarded as a complex subject requiring complex evaluation. Certainly, of all categories, IT offers the most alternative solutions. The technology is also changing rapidly, as are the requirements of IT users – the half-life of an IT requirement is less than six months (half the requirements specified now will be invalid six months from now). And when the RFP process takes up two of those months, vendors may be unable to meet changed requirements when the time to implement arrives. This is why IT RFPs should specify the problem to be resolved rather than the solution to be provided. If the problem resolution is the goal, vendors are free to implement the latest technologies to meet that need.” (Bonfire, “2019 State of the RFP”)

    Why Vendors Don’t Like RFPs

    Vendors’ win rate

    44%

    Vendors only win an average of 44% of the RFPs they respond to (Loopio, 2022).
    High cost to respond

    3-5%

    Vendors budget 3-5% of the anticipated contract value to respond (LinkedIn, 2017, Note: LinkedIn source is the latest information available).
    Time spent writing response

    23.8 hours

    Vendors spend on average 23.8 hours to write or respond to your RFP (Marketingprofs, 2021).

    Negative effects on your organization from a lack of RFP process

    Visualization titled 'Lack of RFP Process Causes' with the following seven items listed.

    Stress, because roles and responsibilities aren’t clearly defined and communication is haphazard, resulting in strained relationships.

    Confusion, because you don’t know what the expected or desired results are.

    Directionless, because you don’t know where the team is going.

    Uncertainty, with many questions of your own and many more from other team members.

    Frustration, because of all the questions the vendors ask as a result of unclear or incomplete requirements.

    Exhaustion, because reviewing RFP responses of insufficient quality is tedious.

    Disappointment in the results your company realizes.

    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Develop an inclusive and thorough approach to the RFP Process

    Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. The secret to managing an RFP is to make it as manageable and as thorough as possible. The RFP process should be like any other aspect of business – by developing a standard process. With a process in place, you are better able to handle whatever comes your way, because you know the steps you need to follow to produce a top-notch RFP.
    2. The business then identifies the need for more information about a product/service or determines that a purchase is required.
    3. A team of stakeholders from each area impacted gather all business, technical, legal, and risk requirements. What are the expectations of the vendor relationship post-RFP? How will the vendors be evaluated?
    4. Based on the predetermined requirements, either an RFI or an RFP is issued to vendors with a predetermined due date.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Without a well defined, consistent RFP process, with input from all key stakeholders, the organization will not achieve the best possible results from its sourcing efforts.

    Phase 1 insight

    Vendors are choosing to not respond to RFPs due to their length and lack of complete requirements.

    Phase 2 insight

    Be clear and concise in stating your requirements and include, in addition to IT requirements, procurement, security, legal, and risk requirements.

    Phase 3 insight

    Consider adding vendor management requirements to manage the ongoing relationship post contract.

    Tactical insight

    Consider the RFP Evaluation Process as you draft the RFP, including weighting the RFP components. Don’t underestimate the level of effort required to effectively evaluate responses – write the RFP with this in mind.

    Tactical insight

    Provide strict, prescriptive instructions detailing how the vendor should submit their responses. Controlling vendor responses will increase your team’s efficiency in evaluations while providing ease of reference responses across multiple vendors.

    Key deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverables:

    Info-Tech provides you with the tools you need to go to market in the most efficient manner possible, with guidance on how to achieve your goals.

    Sample of

    Long-Form RFP Template
    For when you have complete requirements and time to develop a thorough RFP.
    Sample of the Long-Form RFP Template deliverable. Short-Form RFP Template
    When the requirements are not as extensive, time is short, and you are familiar with the market.
    Sample of the Short-Form RFP Template deliverable.
    Lean RFP Template
    When you have limited time and some knowledge of the market and wish to include only a few vendors.
    Sample of the Lean RFP Template deliverable. Excel-Form RFP Template
    When there are many requirements, many options, multiple vendors, and a broad evaluation team.
    Sample of the Excel-Form RFP Template deliverable.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits
    • Side-by-side comparison of vendor capabilities
    • Pricing alternatives
    • No surprises
    • Competitive solutions to deliver the best results
    Mutual IT and Business Benefits
    • Reduced time to implement
    • Improved alignment between IT /Business
    • Improved vendor performance
    • Improved vendor relations
    Business Benefits
    • Budget alignment, reduced cost
    • Best value
    • Risk mitigation
    • Legal and risk protections

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is seven to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Phase 5

    Phase 6

    Phase 7

    Call #1: Identify the need Call #3: Gain business authorization Call #5: Negotiate agreement strategy Call #7: Assess and measure performance
    Call #2: Define business requirements Call #4: Review and perform the RFX or RFP Call #6: Purchase goods and services

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3
    Activities
    Answer “What problem do we need to solve?”

    1.1 Overview and level-setting

    1.2 Identify needs and drivers

    1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

    1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

    Define what success looks like?

    2.1 Create and issue RFP

    2.2 Evaluate responses/ proposals and negotiate the agreement.

    2.3 Purchase goods and services

    Configure Templates

    3.1 Assess and measure

    3.2 Review tools

    Deliverables
    1. Map your process with gap identification
    2. RFP Requirements Worksheet
    1. RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
    2. RFP Evaluation Guidebook
    3. RFP Evaluation Tool
    1. Long-form RFP Template
    2. Short-form RFP Template
    3. Excel-based RFP Tool
    4. Lean RFP Template

    Phase 1

    Identify Need

    Steps

    1.1 Establish the need to either purchase goods/services (RFP) or acquire additional information from the market (RFI).

    Steps in an RFP Process with the first step, 'Identify Need', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Finance

    Identify the need based on business requirements, changing technology, increasing vendor costs, expiring contracts, and changing regulatory requirements.

    Outcomes of this phase

    Agreement on the need to go to market to make a purchase (RFP) or to acquire additional information (RFI) along with a high-level agreement on requirements, rough schedule (is there time to do a full blown RFP or are you time constrained, which may result in an eRFP) and the RFP team is identified.

    Identify Need
    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Identify the Need for Your RFP

    • An RFP is issued to the market when you are certain that you intend to purchase a product/service and have identified an adequate vendor base from which to choose as a result of:

      • IT Strategy
      • Changes in technology
      • Marketplace assessment
      • Contract expiration/renewal
      • Changes in regulatory requirements
      • Changes in the business’ requirements
    • An RFI is issued to the market when you are uncertain as to available technologies or supplier capabilities and need budgetary costs for planning purposes.
    • Be sure to choose the right RFx tool for your situation!
    Stock photo of a pen circling the word 'needs' on a printed document.

    Phase 2

    Define Your RFP Requirements

    Steps

    2.1 Define and classify the technical, business, financial, legal, and support and security requirements for your business.

    Steps in an RFP Process with the second step, 'Define Business Requirements', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT
    • Legal
    • Finance
    • Risk management
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Business stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    A detailed list of required business, technical, legal and procurement requirements classified as to absolute need(s), bargaining and concession need(s), and “nice to haves.”

    Define Business Requirements

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Define RFP Requirements

    Key things to consider when defining requirements

    • Must be inclusive of the needs of all stakeholders: business, technical, financial, and legal
    • Strive for clarity and completeness in each area of consideration.
    • Begin defining your “absolute,” “bargaining,” “concession,” and ‘”dropped/out of scope” requirements to streamline the evaluation process.
    • Keep the requirements identified as “absolute” to a minimum, because vendors that do not meet absolute requirements will be removed from consideration.
    • Do you have a standard contract that can be included or do you want to review the vendor’s contract?
    • Don’t forget Data Security!
    • Begin defining your vendor selection criteria.
    • What do you want the end result to look like?
    • How will you manage the selected vendor after the contract? Include key VM requirements.
    • Defining requirements can’t be rushed or you’ll find yourself answering many questions, which may create confusion.
    • Collect all your current spend and budget considerations regarding the needed product(s) and service(s).

    “Concentrate on the needs of the organization and not the wants of the individuals when creating requirements to avoid scope creep.” (Donna Glidden, ITRG Research Director)

    Leverage the “ABCD” approach found in our Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively blueprint:
    https://tymansgrpup.com/research/ss/prepare-for-negotiations-more-effectively

    2.1 Prioritize your requirements

    1 hr to several days

    Input: List of all requirements from IT and IT Security, Business, Sourcing/Procurement, Risk Management, and Legal

    Output: Prioritized list of RFP requirements approved by the stakeholder team

    Materials: The RFP Requirements Worksheet

    Participants: All stakeholders impacted by the RFP: IT, IT Security, the Business, Sourcing/ Procurement, Risk Management, Legal

    1. Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Leverage it to collect and categorize your requirements in preparation for negotiations. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.
    2. As a group, review each of the requirements and determine their priority as they will ultimately relate to the negotiations.
      • Prioritizing your requirements will set up your negotiation strategy and streamline the process.
      • By establishing the priority of each requirement upfront, you will save time and effort in the selection process.
    3. Review RFP requirements with stakeholders for approval.

    Download the RFP Requirements Worksheet

    Phase 3

    Gain Business Authorization

    Steps

    3.1 Obtain business authorization from the business, technology, finance and Sourcing/Procurement

    Steps in an RFP Process with the third step, 'Gain Business Authorization', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • Technology and finance (depending upon the business)
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Outcomes of this phase

    Approval by all key stakeholders to proceed with the issuing of the RFP and to make a purchase as a result.

    Gain Business Authorization

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Gain Business Authorization

    Gain authorization for your RFP from all relevant stakeholders
    • Alignment of stakeholders
    • Agreement on final requirements
    • Financial authorization
    • Commitment of resources
    • Agreement on what constitutes vendor qualification
    • Finalization of selection criteria and their prioritization

    Obtaining cross-function alignment will clear the way for contract, SOW, and budget approvals and not waste any of your and your vendor’s resources in performing an RFP that your organization is not ready to implement or invest financial and human resources in.

    Stock photo of the word 'AUTHORIZED' stamped onto a white background with a much smaller stamp laying beside it.

    Phase 4

    Create and Issue

    Steps

    4.1 Build your RFP

    4.2 Decide RFI or not

    4.3 Create your RFP

    4.4 Receive & answer questions

    4.5 Perform Pre-Proposal Conference

    4.6 Evaluate responses

    Steps in an RFP Process with the fourth step, 'Perform RFI/RFP', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • The RFP owner
    • IT
    • Business SMEs/stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    RFP package is issued to vendors and includes the date of the Pre-Proposal Conference, which should be held shortly after RFP release and includes all parties.

    SME’s/stakeholders participate in providing answers to RFP contact for response to vendors.

    Create and Issue Your RFP/RFI

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Build your RFP with evaluation in mind

    Easing evaluation frustrations

    At the beginning of your RFP creation process consider how your requirements will impact the vendor’s response. Concentrate on the instructions you provide the vendors and how you wish to receive their responses. View the RFP through the lens of the vendors and envision how they are going to respond to the proposal.

    Limiting the number of requirements included in the RFP will increase the evaluation team’s speed when reviewing vendors’ responses. This is accomplished by not asking questions for common features and functionality that all vendors provide. Don’t ask multiple questions within a question. Avoid “lifting” vendor-specific language to copy into the RFP as this will signal to vendors who their competition might be and may deter their participation. Concentrate your requirement questions to those areas that are unique to your solution to reduce the amount of time required to evaluate the vendors’ response.

    Things to Consider When Creating Your RFP:

    • Consistency is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
    • Provide templates, such as an Excel worksheet, for the vendor’s pricing submissions and for its responses to close-ended questions.
    • Give detailed instructions on how the vendor should organize their response.
    • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response to must-have requirements.
    • Organize your requirements and objectives in a numerical outline and have the vendor respond in the same manner, such as the following:
      • 1
      • 1.1
      • 1.1.1

    Increase your response quality

    Inconsistent formatting of vendor responses prevents an apples-to-apples evaluation between vendor responses. Evaluation teams are frequently challenged and are unable to evaluate vendors’ responses equally against each other for the following reasons:

    Challenges
    • Vendor responses are submitted with different and confusing nomenclature
    • Inconsistent format in response
    • Disparate order of sections in the vendors responses
    • Different style of outlining their responses, e.g. 1.1 vs. I.(i)
    • Pricing proposal included throughout their response
    • Responses are comingled with marketing messages
    • Vendor answers to requirements or objectives are not consolidated in a uniform manner
    • Disparate descriptions for response subsections
    Prevention
    • Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their response:
      • How to format and outline the response
      • No marketing material
      • No pricing in the body of the response
    • Provide templates for pricing, technical, operational, and legal aspects.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Perform Request for Information

    Don’t underestimate the importance of the RFI

    As the name implies, a request for information (RFI) is a tool for collecting information from vendors about the companies, their products, and their services. We find RFIs useful when faced with a lot of vendors that we don’t know much about, when we want to benchmark the marketplace for products and services, including budgetary information, and when we have identified more potential vendors than we care to commit a full RFP to.

    RFIs are simpler and less time-consuming than RFPs to prepare and evaluate, so it can make a lot of sense to start with an RFI. Eliminating unqualified vendors from further consideration will save your team from weeding through RFP responses that do not meet your objectives. For their part, your vendors will appreciate your efforts to determine up-front which of them are the best bets before asking them to spend resources and money producing a costly proposal.

    While many organizations rarely use RFIs, they can be an effective tool in the vendor manager’s toolbox when used at the right time in the right way. RFIs can be deployed in competitive targeted negotiations.

    A Lean RFP is a two-stage strategy that speeds up the typical RFP process. The first stage is like an RFI on steroids, and the second stage is targeted competitive negotiation.

    Don’t rely solely on the internet to qualify vendors; use an RFI to acquire additional information before finalizing an RFP.

    4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP

    Several days
    1. Create an RFI with all of the normal and customary components. Next, add a few additional RFP-like requirements (e.g. operational, technical, and legal requirements). Make sure you include a request for budgetary pricing and provide any significant features and functionality requirements so that the vendors have enough information to propose solutions. In addition, allow the vendors to ask questions through your single point of coordination and share answers with all of the vendors. Finally, notify the vendors that you will not be doing an RFP.
    2. Review the vendors’ proposals and evaluate their proposals against your requirements along with their notional or budgetary pricing.
    3. Have the evaluators utilize the Lean RFP Template to record their scores accordingly.
    4. After collecting the scores from the evaluators, consolidate the scores together to discuss which vendors – we recommend two or three – you want to present demos.
    5. Based on the vendors’ demos, the team selects at least two vendors to negotiate contract and pricing terms with intent of selecting the best-value vendor.
    6. The Lean RFP shortens the typical RFP process, maintains leverage for your organization, and works great with low- to medium-spend items (however your organization defines them). You’ll get clarification on vendors’ competencies and capabilities, obtain a fair market price, and meet your internal clients’ aggressive timelines while still taking steps to protect your organization.

    Download the Lean RFP Template

    Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

    4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP continued

    Input

    • List of technical, operational, business, and legal requirements
    • Budgetary pricing ask

    Output

    • A Lean RFP document that includes the primary components of an RFP
    • Lean RFP vendors response evaluation

    Materials

    • Lean RFP Template
    • RFP Evaluation Tool
    • Contracting requirements
    • Pricing

    Participants

    • IT
    • Business
    • Finance
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Case Study

    A Lean RFP saves time
    INDUSTRY: Pharmaceutical
    SOURCE: Guided Implementation
    Challenge
    • The vendor manager (VM) was experiencing pressure to shorten the expected five-month duration to perform an RFP for software that planned, coordinated, and submitted regulatory documents to the US Food and Drug Administration.
    • The VM team was not completely familiar with the qualified vendors and their solutions.
    • The organization wanted to capitalize on this opportunity to enhance its current processes with the intent of improving efficiencies in documentation submissions.
    Solution
    • Leveraging the Lean RFP process, the team reduced the 200+ RFP questionnaire into a more manageable list of 34 significant questions to evaluate vendor responses.
    • The team issued the Lean RFP and requested the vendors’ responses in three weeks instead of the five weeks planned for the RFP process.
    • The team modified the scoring process to utilize a simple weighted-scoring methodology, using a scale of 1-5.
    Results
    • The Lean RFP scaled back the complexity of a large RFP.
    • The customer received three vendor responses ranging from 19 to 43 pages and 60-80% shorter than expected if the RFP had been used. This allowed the team to reduce the evaluation period by three weeks.
    • The duration of the RFx process was reduced by more than two months – from five months to just under three months.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    4.3.1 RFP Calendar

    1 hour

    Input: List duration in days of key activities, RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool, For all vendor-inclusive meetings, include the dates on your RFP calendar and reference them in the RFP

    Output: A timeline to complete the RFP that has the support of each stakeholder involved in the process and that allows for a complete and thorough vendor response.

    Materials: RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. As a group, identify the key activities to be accomplished and the amount of time estimated to complete each task:
      1. Identify who is ultimately accountable for the completion of each task
      2. Determine the length of time required to complete each task
    2. Use the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool to build the calendar specific to your needs.
    3. Include vendor-related dates in the RFP, i.e., Pre-Proposal Conference, deadline for RFP questions as well as response.

    Download the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

    Draft your RFP

    Create and issue your RFP, which should contain at least the following:
    • The ability for the vendors to ask clarifying questions (in writing, sent to the predetermined RFP contact)
    • Pre-Proposal/Pre-Bid Conference schedule where vendors can receive the same answer to all clarifying written questions
    • A calendar of events (block the time on stakeholder calendars – see template).
    • Instructions to potential vendors on how they should construct and return their response to enable effective and timely evaluation of each offer.
    • Requirements; for example: Functional, Operational, Technical, and Legal.
    • Specification drawings as if applicable.
    • Consider adding vendor management requirements – how do you want to manage the relationship after the deal is done?
    • A pricing template for vendors to complete that facilitates comparison across multiple vendors.
    • Contract terms required by your legal team (or your standard contract for vendors to redline as part of their response and rated/ranked accordingly).
    • Create your RFP with the evaluation process and team in mind to ensure efficiency and timeliness in the process. Be clear, concise, and complete in the document.
    • Consistency and completeness is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
    • Give vendors detailed instruction on how to structure and organize their response.
    • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response.
    • Be sure to leverage Info-Tech’s proven and field-tested Short-Form, Long-Form, and Lean RFP Templates provided in this blueprint.

    Create a template for the vendors’ response

    Dictating to the vendors the format of their response will increase your evaluation efficiency
    Narrative Response:

    Create either a Word or Excel document that provides the vendor with an easy vehicle for their response. This template should include the question identifier that ties the response back to the requirement in the RFP. Instruct vendors to include the question number on any ancillary materials they wish to include.

    Pricing Response:

    Create a separate Excel template that the vendors must use to provide their financial offer. This template should include pricing for hardware, software, training, implementation, and professional services, as well as placeholders for any additional fees.

    Always be flexible in accepting alternative proposals after the vendor has responded with the information you requested in the format you require.

    Stock image of a paper checklist in front of a laptop computer's screen.

    4.3.2 Vendor Pricing Tool

    1 hour

    Input: Identify pricing components for hardware, software, training, consulting/services, support, and additional licenses (if needed)

    Output: Vendor Pricing Tool

    Materials: RFP Requirements Worksheet, Pricing template

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Using a good pricing template will prevent vendors from providing pricing offers that create a strategic advantage designed to prevent you from performing an apples-to-apples comparison.
    2. Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their pricing response, which should be submitted separate from the RFP response.
    3. Configure and tailor pricing templates that are specific to the product and/or services.
    4. Upon receipt of all the vendor’s responses, simply cut and paste their total response to your base template for an easy side-by-side pricing comparison.
    5. Do not allow vendors to submit financial proposals outside of your template.

    Download the Vendor Pricing Tool

    Three RFP Templates

    Choose the right template for the right sourcing initiative

    • Short-Form
    • Use the Short-Form RFP Template for simple, non-complex solutions that are medium to low dollar amounts that do not require numerous requirements.

    • Long-Form
    • We recommend the Long-Form RFP Template for highly technical and complex solutions that are high dollar and have long implementation duration.

    • Excel-Form
    • Leverage the Excel-Form RFP Tool for requirements that are more specific in nature to evaluate a vendor’s capability for their solution. This template is designed to be complete and inclusive of the RFP process, e.g., requirements, vendor response, and vendor response evaluation scoring.

    Like tools in a carpenters’ tool box or truck, there is no right or wrong template for any job. Take into account your organization culture, resources available, time frame, policies, and procedures to pick the right tool for the job. (Steve Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

    4.3.3 Short-Form RFP Template

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all participants agree to

    Materials: Short-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • This is a less complex RFP that has relatively basic requirements and perhaps a small window in which the vendors can respond. As with the long-form RFP, exhibits are placed at the end of the RFP, an arrangement that saves both your team and the vendors time. Of course, the short-form RFP contains less-specific instructions, guidelines, and rules for vendors’ proposal submissions.
    • We find that short-form RFPs are a good choice when you need to use something more than a request for quote (RFQ) but less than an RFP running 20 or more pages. It’s ideal, for example, when you want to send an RFP to only one vendor or to acquire items such as office supplies, contingent labor, or commodity items that don’t require significant vendor risk assessment.

    Download the Short-Form RFP Template

    4.3.4 Long-Form RFP Template

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

    Materials: Long-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • A long-form or major RFP is an excellent tool for more complex and complicated requirements. This template is for a baseline RFP.
    • It starts with best-in-class RFP terms and conditions that are essential to maintaining your control throughout the RFP process. The specific requirements for the business, functional, technical, legal, and pricing areas should be included in the exhibits at the end of the template. That makes it easier to tailor the RFP for each deal, since you and your team can quickly identify specific areas that need modification. Grouping the exhibits together also makes it convenient for both your team to review and the vendors to respond.
    • You can use this sample RFP as the basis for your template RFP, taking it all as is or picking and choosing the sections that best meet the mission and objectives of the RFP and your organization.

    Download the Long-Form RFP Template

    4.3.5 Excel-Form RFP Tool

    Several weeks

    Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

    Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

    Materials: Excel-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

    Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    • The Excel-Form RFP Tool is used as an alternative to the other RFP toolsets if you have multiple requirements and have multiple vendors to choose from.
    • Requirements are written as a “statement” and the vendor can select from five answers as to their ability to meet the requirements, with the ability to provide additional context and materials to augment their answers, as needed.
    • Requirements are listed separately in each tab, for example, Business, Legal, Technical, Security, Support, Professional Services, etc.

    Download the Excel-Form RFP Template

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Answer Vendor Questions

    Maintaining your equal and level playing field among vendors

    • Provide an adequate amount of time from the RFP issue date to the deadline for vendor questions. There may be multiple vendor staff/departments that need to read the RFP and then discuss their response approach and gather any clarifying questions, so we generally recommend three to five business days.
    • There should be one point of contact for all Q&A, which should be submitted in writing via email only. Be sure to plan for enough time to get the answers back from the RFP stakeholders.
    • After the deadline, collect all Q&A and begin the process of consolidating into one document.
    Large silver question mark.
    • Be sure to anonymize both vendor questions and your responses, so as not to reveal who asked or answered the question.
    • Send the document to all RFP respondents via your sourcing tool or BCC in an email to the point of contact, with read receipt requested. That way, you can track who has received and opened the correspondence.
    • Provide the answers a few days prior to the Pre-Proposal Conference to allow all respondents time to review the document and prepare any additional questions.
    • Begin the preparation for the Pre-Proposal Conference.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Conduct Pre-Proposal Conference

    Maintain an equal and level playing field

    • Consolidate all Q&A to be presented to all vendors during the Pre-Proposal Conference.
    • If the Pre-Proposal Conference is conducted via conference call, be sure to record the session and advise all participants at the beginning of the call.
    • Be sure to have key stakeholders present on the call to answer questions.
    • Read each question and answer, after which ask if there are any follow up questions. Be sure to capture them and then add them to the Q&A document.
    • Remind respondents that no further questions will be entertained during the remainder of the RFP response period.
    • Send the updated and completed document to all vendors (even if circumstances prevented their attending the Pre-Proposal Conference). Use the same process as when you sent out the initial answers: via email, blind copy the respondents and request read/receipt.

    “Using a Pre-Proposal Conference allows you to reinforce that there is a level playing field for all of the vendors…that each vendor has an equal chance to earn your business. This encourages and maximizes competition, and when that happens, the customer wins.” (Phil Bode, Principal Research Director, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Pre-Proposal Conference Agenda

    Modify this agenda for your specific organization’s culture
    1. Opening Remarks & Welcome – RFP Manager
      1. Agenda review
      2. Purpose of the Pre-Proposal Conference
    2. Review Agenda
      1. Introduction of your (customer) attendees
    3. Participating Vendor Introduction (company name)
    4. Executive or Sr. Leadership Comments (limit to five minutes)
      1. Importance of the RFP
      2. High-level business objective or definition of success
    5. Review Key Dates in the RFP

    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)
    1. Review of any Technical Drawings or Information
      1. Key technical requirements and constraints
      2. Key infrastructure requirements and constraints
    2. Review of any complex RFP Issues
      1. Project scope/out of scope
    3. Question &Answer
      1. Vendors’ questions in alphabetical order
    4. Review of Any Specific Instructions for the Respondents
    5. Conclusion/Closing
      1. Review how to submit additional questions
      2. Remind vendors of the single point of contact

    Allow your executive or leadership sponsor to leave the Pre-Proposal Conference after they provide their comments to allow them to continue their day while demonstrating to the vendors the importance of the project.

    Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

    Step 1

    • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

    Step 2

    • RFI or no RFI
    • Consider a Lean RFP

    Step 3

    • Create your RFP
    • Establish your RFP dates
    • Decide on RFP template
      • Short
      • Long
      • Excel
    • Create a template for vendors’ response
    • Create your Pricing Template

    Step 4

    • Receive RFP questions from vendors
    • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 5

    • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

    Step 6

    • Receive vendors’ proposals
    • Review for compliance and completion
    • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
    • Prepare TCO
    • Draft executive recommendation report

    Evaluate Responses

    Other important information

    • Consider separating the pricing component from the RFP responses before sending them to reviewers to maintain objectivity until after you have received all ratings on the proposals themselves.
    • Each reviewer should set aside focused time to carefully read each vendor’s response
    • Read the entire vendor proposal – they spent a lot time and money responding to your request, so please read everything.
    • Remind reviewers that they should route any questions to the vendor through the RFP manager.
    • Using the predetermined ranking system for each section, rate each section of the response, capturing any notes, questions, or concerns as you proceed through the document(s).
    Stock photo of a 'Rating' meter with values 'Very Bad to 'Excellent'.

    Use a proven evaluation method

    Two proven methods to reviewing vendors’ proposals are by response and by objective

    The first, by response, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response in its entirety.

    The second, reviewing by objective, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response to a single objective before moving on to the next.

    By Response

    Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

    By Objective

    Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

    • Each response is thoroughly read all the way through.
    • Response inconsistencies are easily noticed.
    • Evaluators obtain a good feel for the vendor's response.
    • Evaluators will lose interest as they move from one response to another.
    • Evaluation will be biased if the beginning of response is subpar, influencing the rest of the evaluation.
    • Deficiencies of the perceived favorite vendor are overlooked.
    • Evaluators concentrate on how each objective is addressed.
    • Evaluators better understand the responses, resulting in identifying the best response for the objective.
    • Evaluators are less susceptible to supplier bias.
    • Electronic format of the response hampers response review per objective.
    • If a hard copy is necessary, converting electronic responses to hard copy is costly and cumbersome.
    • Discipline is required to score each vendor's response as they go.

    Maintain evaluation objectivity by reducing response evaluation biases

    Evaluation teams can be naturally biased during their review of the vendors’ responses.

    You cannot eliminate bias completely – the best you can do is manage it by identifying these biases with the team and mitigating their influence in the evaluation process.

    Vendor

    The evaluator only trusts a certain vendor and is uncomfortable with any other vendor.
    • Evaluate the responses blind of vendor names, if possible.
    Centerpiece for this table, titled 'BIAS' and surrounding by iconized representations of the four types listed.

    Account Representatives

    Relationships extend beyond business, and an evaluator doesn't want to jeopardize them.
    • Craft RFP objectives that are vendor neutral.

    Technical

    A vendor is the only technical solution the evaluator is looking for, and they will not consider anything else.
    • Conduct fair and open solution demonstrations.

    Price

    As humans, we can justify anything at a good price.
    • Evaluate proposals without awareness of price.

    Additional insights when evaluating RFPs

    When your evaluation team includes a member of the C-suite or senior leadership, ensure you give them extra time to sufficiently review the vendor's responses. When your questions require a definitive “Yes”/“True” or “No”/“False” responses, we recommend giving the maximum score for “Yes”/“True” and the minimum score for “No”/“False”.
    Increase your efficiency and speed of evaluation by evaluating the mandatory requirements first. If a vendor's response doesn't meet the minimum requirements, save time by not reviewing the remainder of the response. Group your RFP questions with a high-level qualifying question, then the supporting detailed requirements. The evaluation team can save time by not evaluating a response that does not meet a high-level qualifying requirement.

    Establish your evaluation scoring scale

    Define your ranking scale to ensure consistency in ratings

    Within each section of your RFP are objectives, each of which should be given its own score. Our recommended approach is to award on a scale of 0 to 5. With such a scale, you need to define every level. Below are the recommended definitions for a 0 to 5 scoring scale.

    Score Criteria for Rating
    5 Outstanding – Complete understanding of current and future needs; solution addresses current and future needs
    4 Competent – Complete understanding and adequate solution
    3 Average – Average understanding and adequate solution
    2 Questionable – Average understanding; proposal questionable
    1 Poor – Minimal understanding
    0 Not acceptable – Lacks understanding
    Stock photo of judges holding up their ratings.

    Weigh the sections of your RFP on how important or critical they are to the RFP

    Obtain Alignment on Weighting the Scores of Each Section
    • There are many ways to score responses, ranging from extremely simple to highly complicated. The most important thing is that everyone responsible for completing scorecards is in total agreement about how the scoring system should work. Otherwise, the scorecards will lose their value, since different weighting and scoring templates were used to arrive at their scores.
    • You can start by weighting the scores by section, with all sections adding up to 100%.
    Example RFP Section Weights
    Pie chart of example RFP section weights, 'Operational, 20%', 'Service-Level Agreements, 20%', 'Financial, 20%', 'Legal/Contractual, 15%', 'Technical, 10%' 'Functional, 15%'.
    (Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)

    Protect your negotiation leverage with these best practices

    Protect your organization's reputation within the vendor community with a fair and balanced process.
    • Unless you regularly have the evaluators on your evaluation team, always assume that the team members are not familiar nor experienced with your process and procedures.
    • Do not underestimate the amount of preparations required to ensure that your evaluation team has everything they need to evaluate vendors’ responses without bias.
    • Be very specific about the expectations and time commitment required for the evaluation team to evaluate the responses.
    • Explain to the team members the importance of evaluating responses without conflicts of interest, including the fact that information contained within the responses and all discussions within the team are considered company owned and confidential.
    • Include examples of the evaluation and scoring processes to help the evaluators understand what they should be doing.
    • Finally – don’t forget to the thank the evaluation team and their managers for their time and commitment in contributing to this essential decision.
    Stock photo of a cork board with 'best practice' spelled out by tacked bits of paper, each with a letter in a different font.

    Evaluation teams must balance commercial vs. technical requirements

    Do not alter the evaluation weights after responses are submitted.
    • Evaluation teams are always challenged by weighing the importance of price, budget, and value against the technical requirements of “must-haves” and super cool “nice-to-haves.”
    • Encouraging the evaluation team not to inadvertently convert the nice-to-haves to must-haves will prevent scope creep and budget pressure. The evaluation team must concentrate on the vendors’ responses that drive the best value when balancing both commercial and technical requirements.
    Two blocks labelled 'Commercial Requirements' and 'Technical Requirements' balancing on either end of a flat sheet, which is balancing on a silver ball.

    4.6.1 Evaluation Guidebook

    1 hour

    Input: RFP responses, Weighted Scoring Matrix, Vendor Response Scorecard

    Output: One or two finalists for which negotiations will proceed

    Materials: RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Info-Tech provides an excellent resource for your evaluation team to better understand the process of evaluating vendor response. The guidebook is designed to be configured to the specifics of your RFP, with guidance and instructions to the team.
    2. Use this guidebook to provide instruction to the evaluation team as to how best to score and rate the RFP responses.
    3. Specific definitions are provided for applying the numerical scores to the RFP objectives will ensure consistency among the appropriate numerical score.

    Download the RFP Evaluation Guidebook

    4.6.2 RFP Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    1-4 hours

    Input: Each vendor’s RFP response, A copy of the RFP (less pricing), A list of the weighted criteria incorporated into a vendor response scorecard

    Output: A consolidated ranked and weighted comparison of the vendor responses with pricing

    Materials: Vendor responses, RFP Evaluation Tool

    Participants: Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Using the RFP outline as a base, develop a scorecard to evaluate and rate each section of the vendor response, based on the criteria predetermined by the team.
    2. Provide each stakeholder with the scorecard when you provide the vendor responses for them to review and provide the team with adequate time to review each response thoroughly and completely.
    3. Do not, at this stage, provide the pricing. Allow stakeholders to review the responses based on the technical, business, operational criteria without prejudice as to pricing.
    4. Evaluators should always be reminded that they are evaluating each vendor’s response against the objectives and requirements of the RFP. The evaluators should not be evaluating each vendor’s response against one another.
    5. While the team is reviewing and scoring responses, review and consolidate the vendor pricing submissions into one document for a side-by-side comparison.

    Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

    4.6.3 Total Cost of Owners (TCO)

    1-2 hours

    Input: Consolidated vendor pricing responses, Consolidated vendor RFP responses, Current spend within your organization for the product/service, if available, Budget

    Output: A completed TCO model summarizing the financial results of the RFP showing the anticipated costs over the term of the agreement, taking into consideration the impact of renewals.

    Materials: Vendor TCO Tool, Vendor pricing responses

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement

    • Use Info-Tech’s Vendor TCO Tool to normalize each vendor’s pricing proposal and account for the lifetime cost of the product.
    • Fill in pricing information (the total of all annual costs) from each vendor's returned Pricing Proposal.
    • The tool will summarize the net present value of the TCO for each vendor proposal.
    • The tool will also provide the rank of each pricing proposal.

    Download the Vendor TCO Tool

    Conduct an evaluation team results meeting

    Follow the checklist below to ensure an effective evaluation results meeting

    • Schedule the evaluation team’s review meeting well in advance to ensure there are no scheduling conflicts.
    • Collect the evaluation team’s scores in advance.
    • Collate scores and provide an initial ranking.
    • Do not reveal the pricing evaluation results until after initial discussions and review of the scoring results.
    • Examine both high and low scores to understand why the team members scored the response as they did.
    • Allow the team to discuss, debate, and arrive at consensus on the ranking.
    • After consensus, reveal the pricing to examine if or how it changes the ranking.
    • Align the team on the next steps with the applicable vendors.

    4.6.4 Consolidated RFP Response Scoring

    1-2 hours

    Input: Vendor Response Scorecard from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing, Any follow up questions or items requiring further vendor clarification.

    Output: An RFP Response Evaluation Summary that identifies the finalists based on pre-determined criteria.

    Materials: RFP Evaluation Tool from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing.

    Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

    1. Collect from the evaluation team all scorecards and any associated questions requiring further clarification from the vendor(s). Consolidate the scorecards into one for presentation to the team and key decision makers.
    2. Present the final scores to the team, with the pricing evaluation, to determine, based on your needs, two or three finalists that will move forward to the next steps of negotiations.
    3. Discuss any scores that are have large gaps, e.g., a requirement with a score of one from one evaluator and the same requirement with a score five from different evaluator.
    4. Arrive at a consensus of your top one or two potential vendors.
    5. Determine any required follow-up actions with the vendors and include them in the Evaluation Summary.

    Download the Consolidated Vender RFP Response Evaluation Summary

    4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    1-3 hours
    1. Use the Vendor Recommendation Presentation to present your finalist and obtain final approval to negotiate and execute any agreements.
    2. The Vendor Recommendation Presentation provides leadership with:
      1. An overview of the RFP, its primary goals, and key requirements
      2. A summary of the vendors invited to participate and why
      3. A summary of each component of the RFP
      4. A side-by-side comparison of key vendor responses to each of the key/primary requirements, with ranking/weighting results
      5. A summary of the vendor’s responses to key legal terms
      6. A consolidated summary of the vendors’ pricing, augmented by the TCO calculations for the finalist(s).
      7. The RFP team’s vendor recommendations based on its findings
      8. A summary of next steps with dates
      9. Request approval to proceed to next steps of negotiations with the primary and secondary vendor

    Download the Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

    Input

    • Consolidated RFP responses, with a focus on key RFP goals
    • Consolidated pricing responses
    • TCO Model completed, approved by Finance, stakeholders

    Output

    • Presentation deck summarizing the key findings of the RFP results, cost estimates and TCO and the recommendation for approval to move to contract negotiations with the finalists

    Materials

    • Consolidated RFP responses, including legal requirements
    • Consolidated pricing
    • TCO Model
    • Evaluators scoring results

    Participants

    • IT
    • Finance
    • Business stakeholders
    • Legal
    • Sourcing/Procurement

    Caution: Configure templates and tools to align with RFP objectives

    Templates and tools are invaluable assets to any RFP process

    • Leveraging templates and tools saves time and provides consistency to your vendors.
    • Maintain a common repository of your templates and tools with different versions and variations. Include a few sentences with instructions on how to use the template and tools for team members who might not be familiar with them.

    Templates/Tools

    RFP templates and tools are found in a variety of places, such as previous projects, your favorite search engine, or by asking a colleague.

    Sourcing

    Regardless of the source of these documents, you must take great care and consideration to sanitize any reference to another vendor, company, or name of the deal.

    Review

    Then you must carefully examine the components of the deal before creating your final documents.

    Popular RFP templates include:

    • RFP documents
    • Pricing templates
    • Evaluation and scoring templates
    • RFP requirements
    • Info-Tech research

    Phase 5

    Negotiate Agreement(s)

    Steps

    5.1 Perform negotiation process

    Steps in an RFP Process with the fifth step, 'Negotiate Agreement', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Procurement
    • Vendor management
    • Legal
    • IT stakeholders
    • Finance

    Outcomes of this phase

    A negotiated agreement or agreements that are a result of competitive negotiations.

    Negotiate Agreement(s)

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Negotiate Agreement

    You should evaluate your RFP responses first to see if they are complete and the vendor followed your instructions.


    Then you should:

    • Plan negotiation(s) with one or more vendors based on your questions and opportunities identified during evaluation.
    • Select finalist(s).
    • Apply selection criteria.
    • Resolve vendors’ exceptions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be certain to include any commitments made in the RFP, presentations, and proposals in the agreement – dovetails to underperforming vendor.

    Centerpiece of the table, titled 'Negotiation Process'.

    Leverage Info-Tech's negotiation process research for additional information

    Negotiate before you select your vendor:
    • Negotiating with two or more vendors will maintain your competitive leverage while decreasing the time it takes to negotiate the deal.
    • Perform legal reviews as necessary.
    • Use sound competitive negotiations principles.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Providing contract terms in an RFP can dramatically reduce time for this step by understanding the vendor’s initial contractual position for negotiation.

    Phase 6

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Steps

    6.1 Purchase Goods & Services

    Steps in an RFP Process with the sixth step, 'Purchase Goods and Services', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Procurement
    • Vendor management
    • IT stakeholders

    Outcomes of this phase

    A purchase order that completes the RFP process.

    The beginning of the vendor management process.

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Prepare to purchase goods and services

    Prepare to purchase goods and services by completing all items on your organization’s onboarding checklist.
    • Have the vendor complete applicable tax forms.
    • Set up the vendor in accounts payable for electronic payment (ACH) set-up.
    Then transact day-to-day business:
    • Provide purchasing forecasts.
    • Complete applicable purchase requisition and purchase orders. Be sure to reference the agreement in the PO.
    Stock image of a computer monitor with a full grocery cart shown on the screen.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As a customer, honoring your contractual obligations and commitments will ensure that your organization is not only well respected but considered a customer of choice.

    Phase 7

    Assess and Measure Performance

    Steps

    7.1 Assess and measure performance against the agreement

    Steps in an RFP Process with the seventh step, 'Assess and Measure Performance', highlighted.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Vendor management
    • Business stakeholders
    • Senior leadership (as needed)
    • IT stakeholders
    • Vendor representatives & senior management

    Outcomes of this phase

    A list of what went well during the period – it’s important to recognize successes

    A list of areas needing improvement that includes:

    • A timeline for each item to be completed
    • The team member(s) responsible

    Purchase Goods and Services

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

    Assess and Measure Performance

    Measure to manage: the job doesn’t end when the contract is signed.

    • Classify vendor
    • Assess vendor performance
    • Manage improvement
    • Conduct periodic vendor performance reviews or quarterly business reviews
    • Ensure contract compliance for both the vendor and your organization
    • Build knowledgebase for future
    • Re-evaluate and improve appropriately your RFP processes

    Info-Tech Insight

    To be an objective vendor manager, you should also assess and measure your company’s performance along with the vendor’s performance.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Upon completion of this blueprint, guided implementation, or workshop, your team should have a comprehensive, well-defined end-to-end approach to performing a quality sourcing event. Leverage Info-Tech’s industry-proven tools and templates to provide your organization with an effective approach to maintain your negotiation leverage, improve the ease with which you evaluate vendor proposals, and reduce your risk while obtaining the best market value for your goods and services.

    Additionally, your team will have a foundation to execute your vendor management principles. These principles will assist your organization in ensuring you receive the perceived value from the vendor as a result of your competitive negotiations.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Final Thoughts: RFP Do’s and Don’ts

    DO

    • Leverage your team’s knowledge
    • Document and explain your RFP process to stakeholders and vendors
    • Include contract terms in your RFP
    • Consider vendor management requirements up front
    • Plan to measure and manage performance after contract award leveraging RFP objectives
    • Seek feedback from the RFP team for process improvements

    DON'T

    • Reveal your budget
    • Do an RFP in a vacuum
    • Send an RFP to a vendor your team is not willing to award the business to
    • Hold separate conversations with candidate vendors during your RFP process
    • Skimp on the requirements definition to speed the process
    • Tell the vendor they are selected before negotiating

    Bibliography

    “2022 RFP Response Trends & Benchmarks.” Loopio, 2022. Web.

    Corrigan, Tony. “How Much Does it Cost to Respond to an RFP?” LinkedIn, March 2017. Accessed 10 Dec. 2019

    “Death by RFP:7 Reasons Not to Respond.” Inc. Magazine, 2013. Web.

    Jeffery, Steven, George Bordon, and Phil Bode. The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, 3rd ed. Info-Tech Research Group, 2019.

    “RFP Benchmarks: How Much Time and Staff Firms Devote to Proposals.” MarketingProfs, 2020. Web.

    “State of the RFP 2019.” Bonfire, 2019. Web.

    “What Vendors Want (in RFPs).” Vendorful, 2020. Web.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two people looking at a tablet. Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively
    • Negotiations are about allocating risk and money – how much risk is a party willing to accept at what price point?
    • Using a cross-functional/cross-insight team structure for negotiation preparation yields better results.
    • Soft skills aren’t enough and theatrical negotiation tactics aren’t effective.
    Stock photo of two people in suits shaking hands. Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively
    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.
    Stock photo of three people gathered around a computer. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service-level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    Scale Business Process Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}241|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Business process automation (BPA) adoption gained significant momentum as your business leaders saw the positive outcomes in your pilots, such as improvements in customer experience, operational efficiencies, and cost optimizations.
    • Your stakeholders are ready to increase their investments in more process automation solutions. They want to scale initial successes to other business and IT functions.
    • However, it is unclear how BPA can be successfully scaled and what benefits can be achieved from it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The shift from isolated, task-based automations in your pilot to value-oriented, scaled automations brings new challenges and barriers to your organization such as:

    • Little motivation or tolerance to change existing business operations to see the full value of BPA.
    • Overinvesting in current BPA technologies to maximize the return despite available alternatives that can do the same tasks better.
    • BPA teams are ill-equipped to meet the demands and complexities of scaled BPA implementations.

    Impact and Result

    • Ground your scaling expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    • Define your scaling journey. Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    • Prepare to scale BPA. Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Scale Business Process Automation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scale Business Process Automation Deck – A guide to learn the opportunities and values of scaling business process automation.

    This research walks you through the level setting of your scaled business process automation (BPA) expectations, factors to consider in defining your scaled BPA journey, and assessing your readiness to scale BPA.

    • Scale Business Process Automation Storyboard

    2. Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment – A tool to help you evaluate your readiness to scale business process automation.

    Use this tool to identify key gaps in the people, processes, and technologies you need to support the scaling of business process automation (BPA). It also contains a canvas to facilitate your discussions around business process automation with your stakeholders and BPA teams.

    • Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Scale Business Process Automation

    Take a value-first approach to automate the processes that matter

    Analyst Perspective

    Scaling business process automation (BPA) is an organization-wide commitment

    Business and IT must work together to ensure the right automations are implemented and BPA is grown and matured in a sustainable way. However, many organizations are not ready to make this commitment. Managing the automation demand backlog, coordinating cross-functional effort and organizational change, and measuring BPA value are some of the leading factors challenging scaling BPA.

    Pilot BPA with the intent to scale it. Pilots are safe starting points to establish your foundational governance and management practices and build the necessary relationships and collaborations for you to be successful. These factors will then allow you to explore more sophisticated, complicated, and innovative opportunities to drive new value to your team, department, and organization.

    A picture of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Business process automation (BPA) adoption gained significant momentum as your business leaders see the positive outcomes in your pilots, such as improvements in customer experience, operational efficiencies, and cost optimizations.
    • Your stakeholders are ready to increase their investments in more process automation solutions. They want to scale initial successes to other business and IT functions.
    • However, it is unclear how BPA can be successfully scaled and what benefits can be achieved from it.

    Common Obstacles

    The shift from isolated, task-based automations in your pilot to value-oriented and scaled automations brings new challenges and barriers to your organization:

    • Little motivation or tolerance to change existing business operations to see the full value of BPA.
    • Overinvesting in current BPA technologies to maximize return despite available alternatives that can do the same tasks better.
    • BPA teams are ill-equipped to meet the demands and complexities of scaled BPA implementations.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Ground your scaling expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    • Define your scaling journey. Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    • Prepare to scale BPA. Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Take a value-first approach in your scaling business process automation (BPA) journey. Low-risk, task-oriented automations are good starting points to introduce BPA but constrain the broader returns your organization wants. Business value can only scale when everything and everyone in your processes are working together to streamline the entire value stream rather than the small gains from optimizing small, isolated automations.

    Scale Business Process Automation

    Take a value-first approach to automate the processes that matter

    Pilot Your BPA Capabilities

    • Learn the foundation practices to design, deliver, and support BPA.
    • Understand the fit and value of BPA.
    • Gauge the tolerance for business operational change and system risk.

    See Info-Tech's Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint for more information.

    Build Your Scaling BPA Vision

    Apply Lessons Learned to Scale

    1. Ground Your Scaling Expectations
      Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    2. Define Your Scaling Journey
      Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    3. Prepare to Scale BPA
      Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Research deliverable

    Design and communicate your approach to scale business process automation with Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment:

    • Level set your scaled BPA goals and objectives.
    • Discuss and design your scaled BPA journey.
    • Identify the gaps and improvements needed to scale your BPA practices and implementation.

    A screenshot from Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment

    Step 1.1

    Ground Your Scaling Expectations

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define Your Scaling Objectives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    Scaling BPA objectives

    Organizations want to scale their initial BPA success

    Notable Initial Benefits

    1. Time Saved: "In the first day of live operations, the robots were saving 51 hours each day or the equivalent of six people working an eight-hour shift." – Brendan MacDonald, Director of Customer Compliance Operations, Ladbrokes (UiPath)
    2. Documentation & Knowledge Sharing: "If certain people left, knowledge of some processes would be lost and we realized that we needed a reliable process management system in place." – Peta Kinnane, Acting Audit and Risk Coordinator, Liverpool City Council (Nintex)
    3. Improved Service Delivery: "Thanks to this automation, our percentage of triaged and assigned tickets is now 100%. Nothing falls through the cracks. It has also improved the time to assignment. We assign tickets 2x faster than before." – Sebastian Goodwin, Head of Cybersecurity, Nutanix (Workato)

    Can We Gain More From Automation?

    The Solution

    As industries evolve and adopt more tools and technology, their products, services, and business operating models become more complex. Task- and desktop-based automations are often not enough. More sophisticated and scaled automations are needed to simplify and streamline the process from end-to-end of complex operations and align them with organizational goals.

    Stakeholders see automation as an opportunity to scale the business

    The value of scaling BPA is dependent on the organization's ability to scale with it. In other words, stakeholders should see an increase in business value without a substantial increase in resources and operational costs (e.g., there should be little difference if sending out 10 emails versus 1000).

    Examples of how business can be scaled with automation

    • Processes triggered by incoming documents or email: in these processes, an incoming document or email (that has semi-structured or unstructured data) is collected by a script or an RPA bot. This document is then processed with a machine learning model that validates it either by rules or ML models. The validated and enriched machine-readable data is then passed on to the next system of record.
    • The accounts payable process: this process includes receiving, processing, and paying out invoices from suppliers that provided goods or services to the company. While manual processing can be expensive, take too much time, and lead to errors, businesses can automate this process with machine learning and document extraction technologies like optical characters recognition (OCR), which converts texts containing images into characters that can be readable by computers to edit, compute, and analyze.
    • Order management: these processes include retrieving email and relevant attachments, extracting information that tells the business what its customers want, updating internal systems with newly placed orders or modifications, or taking necessary actions related to customer queries.
    • Enhance customer experience: [BPA tools] can help teams develop and distribute customer loyalty offers faster while also optimizing these offers with customer insights. Now, enterprises can more easily guarantee they are delivering the relevant solutions their clients are demanding.

    Source: Stefanini Group

    Scaling BPA has its challenges

    Perceived Lack of Opportunities

    Pilot BPA implementations often involve the processes that are straightforward to automate or are already shortlisted to optimize. However, these low-hanging fruits will run out. Discovering new BPA opportunities can be challenged for a variety of reasons, such as:

    • Lack of documentation and knowledge
    • Low user participation or drive to change
    • BPA technology limitations and constraints

    Perceived Lack of Opportunities

    BPA is not a cheap investment. A single RPA bot, for example, can cost between $5,000 to $15,000. This cost does not include the added cost for training, renewal fees, infrastructure set up and other variable and reoccurring costs that often come with RPA delivery and support (Blueprint). This reality can motivate BPA owners to favor existing technologies over other cheaper and more effective alternatives in an attempt boost their return on investment.

    Ill-Equipped Support Teams

    Good technical skills and tools, and the right mindset are critical to ensure BPA capabilities are deployed effectively. Low-code no-code (LCNC) can help but success isn't guaranteed. Lack of experience with low-code platforms is the biggest obstacle in low-code adoption according to 60% of respondents (Creatio). The learning curve has led some organizations to hire contractors to onboard BPA teams, hire new employees, or dedicate significant funding and resources to upskill internal resources.

    Shift your objectives from task-based efficiencies to value-driven capabilities

    How can I improve myself?

    How can we improve my team?

    How can we improve my organization?

    Objectives

    • Improve worker productivity
    • Improve the repeatability and predictability of the process
    • Deliver outputs of consistent quality and cadence
    • Increase process, tool, and technology confidence
    • Increase the team's throughput, commitment, and load
    • Apply more focus on cognitive and complex tasks
    • Reduce the time to complete error-prone, manual, and routine collaborations
    • Deliver insightful, personalized, and valuable outputs
    • Drive more value in existing pipelines and introduce new value streams
    • Deliver consistent digital experiences involving different technologies
    • Automatically tailor a customer's experience to individual preferences
    • Forecast and rapidly respond to customer issues and market trends

    Goals

    • Learn the fit of BPA & set the foundations
    • Improve the practices & tools and optimize the performance
    • Scale BPA capabilities throughout the organization

    Gauge the success of your scaled BPA

    BPA Practice Effectiveness

    Key Question: Are stakeholders satisfied with how the BPA practice is meeting their automation needs?

    Examples of Metrics:

    • User satisfaction
    • Automation request turnaround time
    • Throughput of BPA team

    Automation Solution Quality

    Key Question: How do your automation solutions perform and meet your quality standards?

    Examples of Metrics:

    • Licensing and operational costs
    • Service level agreement and uptime/downtime
    • Number of defects

    Business Value Delivery

    Key Question: How has automation improved the value your employees, teams, and the organization delivers?

    Examples of Metrics:
    Increase in revenue generation
    Reduction in operational costs
    Expansion of business capabilities with minimal increases in costs and risks

    1.1.1 Define your scaling objectives

    5 minutes

    1. Complete the following fields to build your scaled business process automation canvas:
      1. Problem that scaling BPA is intending to solve
      2. Your vision for scaling BPA
      3. Stakeholders
      4. Scaled BPA business and IT objectives and metrics
      5. Business capabilities, processes, and application systems involved
      6. Notable constraints, roadblocks, and challenges to your scaled BPA success
    2. Document your findings and discussions in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Output

    Scaled BPA value canvas

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Record the results in the 2. Value Canvas Tab in the Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    1.1.1 cont'd

    Scaled BPA Value Canvas Template:

    A screenshot of Scaled BPA Value Canvas Template

    Align your objectives to your application portfolio strategy

    Why is an application portfolio strategy important for BPA?

    • All business process optimizations are designed, delivered, and managed to support a consistent interpretation of the business and IT vision and goals.
    • Clear understanding of the sprawl, criticality, and risks of automation solutions and applications to business capabilities.
    • BPA initiatives are planned, prioritized, and coordinated alongside modernization, upgrades, and other changes to the application portfolio.
    • Resources, skills, and capacities are strategically allocated to meet BPA demand considering other commitments in the backlog and roadmap.
    • BPA expectations and practices uphold the persona, values, and principles of the application team.

    What is an application portfolio strategy?

    An application portfolio strategy details the direction, activities, and tactics to deliver on the promise of your application portfolio. It often includes:

    • Portfolio vision and goals
    • Application, automation, and process portfolio
    • Values and principles
    • Portfolio health
    • Risks and constraints
    • Strategic roadmap

    See our Application Portfolio Management Foundations blueprint for more information.

    Leverage your BPA champions to drive change and support scaling initiatives

    An arrow showing the steps to Leverage your BPA champions to drive change and support scaling initiatives

    Expected Outcome From Your Pilot: Your pilot would have recognized the roles that know how to effectively apply good BPA practices (e.g., process analysis and optimization) and are familiar with the BPA toolset. These individuals are prime candidates who can standardize your Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook, upskill interested teams, and build relationships among those involved in the delivery and use of BPA.

    Step 1.2

    Define Your Scaling Journey

    Activities

    1.2.1 Discuss Your BPA Opportunities
    1.2.2 Lay Out Your Scaling BPA Journey

    Scale Business Process Automation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of scaling BPA opportunities
    • Tailored scaling journey

    Maintain a healthy demand pipeline

    A successful scaled BPA practice requires a continuous demand for BPA capabilities and the delivery of minimum viable automations (MVA) held together by a broader strategic roadmap.

    An image of a healthy demand pipeline.  it flows from opportunities to trends, with inputs from internal and external sources.

    An MVA focuses on a single and small process use case, involves minimal possible effort to improve, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to maximize learning and value and inform the further scaling of the BPA technology, approach, or practice.

    See our Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint for more information.

    Investigate how BPA trends can drive more value for the organization

    • Event-Driven Automation
      Process is triggered by a schedule, system output, scenario, or user (e.g., voice-activated, time-sensitive, system condition)
    • Low- & No-Code Automation build and management are completed through an easy-to-learn scripting language and/or a GUI.
    • Intelligent Document Processing
      Transform documents for better analysis, processing and handling (e.g., optical character recognition) by a tool or system.
    • End-to-End Process Automation & Transparency
      Linking cross-functional processes to enable automation of the entire value stream with seamless handoffs or triggers.
    • Orchestration of Different BPA Technologies
      Integrating and sequencing the execution of multiple automation solutions through a single console.
    • Cognitive Automation
      AI and other intelligent technologies automate information-intensive processes, including semi and unstructured data and human thinking simulation.
    • Intelligent Internet-of-Things
      Connecting process automation technologies to physical environments with sensors and other interaction devices (e.g., computer vision).
    • Ethical Design
      Optimizing processes that align to the moral value, principles, and beliefs of the organization (e.g., respects data privacy, resists manipulative patterns).
    • User Profiling & Tailored Experiences
      Customizing process outputs and user experience with user-defined configurations or system and user activity monitoring.
    • Process Mining & Discovery
      Gleaning optimization opportunities by analyzing system activities (mining) or monitoring user interactions with applications (discovery).

    1.2.1 Discuss your BPA opportunities

    5 minutes

    1. Review the goals and objectives of your initiative and the expectations you want to gain from scaling BPA.
    2. Discuss how BPA trends can be leveraged in your organization.
    3. List high priority scaling BPA opportunities.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA opportunities

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Create your recipe for success

    Your scaling BPA recipe (approach) can involve multiple different flavors of various quantities to fit the needs and constraints of your organization and workers.

    What and how many ingredients you need is dependent on three key questions:

    1. How can we ease BPA implementation?
    2. How can we broaden the BPA scope?
    3. How can we loosen constraints?

    Personalize Scaling BPA To Your Taste

    • Extend BPA Across Business Units (Horizontal)
    • Integrate BPA Across Your Application Architecture (Vertical)
    • Embed AI/ML Into Your Automation Technologies
    • Empower Users With Business-Managed Automations
    • Combine Multiple Technologies for End-to-End Automation
    • Increase the Volume and Velocity of Automation
    • Automate Cognitive Processes and Making Variable Decisions

    Answer these questions in the definition of your scaling BPA journey

    Seeing the full value of your scaling approach is dependent on your ability to support BPA adoption across the organization

    How can we ease BPA implementation?

    • Good governance practices (e.g., role definitions, delivery and management processes, technology standards).
    • Support for innovation and experimentation.
    • Interoperable and plug-and-play architecture.
    • Dedicated technology management and support, including resources, documents, templates and shells.
    • Accessible and easy-to-understand knowledge and document repository.

    How can we broaden BPA scope?

    • Provide a unified experience across processes, fragmented technologies, and siloed business functions.
    • Improve intellectually intensive activities, challenging decision making and complex processes with more valuable insights and information using BPA.
    • Proactively react to business and technology environments and operational changes and interact with customers with unattended automation.
    • Infuse BPA technologies into your product and service to expand their functions, output quality, and reliability.

    How can we loosen constraints?

    • Processes are automated without the need for structured data and optimized processes, and there is no need to work around or avoid legacy applications.
    • Workers are empowered to develop and maintain their own automations.
    • Coaching, mentoring, training, and onboarding capabilities.
    • Accessibility and adoption of underutilized applications are improved with BPA.
    • BPA is used to overcome the limitations or the inefficiencies of other BPA technologies.

    1.2.2 Lay out your scaling BPA journey

    5 minutes

    1. Review the goals and objectives of your initiative, the expectations you want to gain from scaling BPA, and the various scaling BPA opportunities.
    2. Discuss the different scaling BPA flavors (patterns) and how each flavor is applicable to your situation. Ask yourself these key questions:
      1. How can we ease BPA implementation?
      2. How can we broaden the BPA scope?
      3. How can we loosen constraints?
    3. Design the broad steps of your scaling BPA journey. See the following slide for an example.
    4. Document your findings and discussions in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Record the results in the 3. Scaled BPA Journey Tab in the Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA journey

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    1.2.2 cont'd

    An image of the marker used to identify Continuous business process optimization and automation Continuous business process optimization and automation
    An image of the marker used to identify Scope of Info-Tech's Build Your Business Process Automation Playbook blueprintScope of Info-Tech's Build Your Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint

    Example:

    An example of the BPA journey.  Below are the links included in the journey.

    Continuously review and realign expectations

    Optimizing your scaled BPA practices and applying continuous improvements starts with monitoring the process after implementation.

    Purpose of Monitoring

    1. Diligent monitoring confirms your scaled BPA implementation is performing as desired and meeting initial expectations.
    2. Holding reviews of your BPA practice and implementations helps assess the impact of marketplace and business operations changes and allows the organization to stay on top of trends and risks.

    Metrics

    Metrics are an important aspect of monitoring and sustaining the scaled practice. The metrics will help determine success and find areas where adjustments may be needed.

    Hold retrospectives to identify any practice issues to be resolved or opportunities to undertake

    The retrospective gives your organization the opportunity to review themselves and brainstorm solutions and a plan for improvements to be actioned. This session is reoccurring, typically, after key milestones. While it is important to allow all participants the opportunity to voice their opinions, feelings, and experiences, retrospectives must be positive, productive, and time boxed.

    Step 1.3

    Prepare to Scale BPA

    Activities

    1.3.1 Assess Your Readiness to Scale BPA

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • Scale BPA readiness assessment

    Prepare to scale by learning from your pilot implementations

    "While most organizations are advised to start with automating the 'low hanging fruit' first, the truth is that it can create traps that will impede your ability to achieve RPA at scale. In fact, scaling RPA into the organizational structure is fundamentally different from implementing a conventional software product or other process automation."
    – Blueprint

    What should be the takeaways from your pilot?

    Degree of Required BPA Support

    • Practices needed to address the organization's tolerance to business process changes and automation adoption.
    • Resources, budget and skills needed to configure and orchestrate automation technologies to existing business applications and systems.

    Technology Integration & Compatibility

    • The BPA technology and application system's flexibility to be enhanced, modified, and removed.
    • Adherence to data and system quality standards (e.g., security, availability) across all tools and technologies.

    Good Practices Toolkit

    • A list of tactics, techniques, templates, and examples to assist teams assessing and optimizing business processes and applying BPA solutions in your organization's context.
    • Strategies to navigate common blockers, challenges, and risks.

    Controls & Measures

    • Defined guardrails aligned to your organization's policies and risk tolerance
    • Key metrics are gathered to gauge the value and performance of your processes and automations for enhancements and further scaling.

    Decide how to architect and govern your BPA solutions

    Centralized

    A single body and platform to coordinate, execute, and manage all automation solutions.

    An image of the Centralized approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Distributed

    Automation solutions are locally delivered and managed whether that is per business unit, type of technology, or vendor. Some collaboration and integration can occur among solutions but might be done without a holistic strategy or approach.

    An image of the Distributed approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Hybrid

    Automation solutions are locally delivered and managed and executed for isolated use cases. Broader and complex automations are centrally orchestrated and administered.

    An image of the Hybrid approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Be prepared to address the risks with scaling BPA

    "Companies tend to underestimate the complexity of their business processes – and bots will frequently malfunction without an RPA design team that knows how to anticipate and prepare for most process exceptions. Unresolved process exceptions rank among the biggest RPA challenges, prompting frustrated users to revert to manual work."
    – Eduardo Diquez, Auxis, 2020

    Scenarios

    • Handling Failures of Dependent Systems
    • Handling Data Corruption & Quality Issues
    • Alignment to Regulatory & Industry Standards
    • Addressing Changes & Regressions to Business Processes
    • "Run Away" & Hijacked Automations
    • Unauthorized Access to Sensitive Information

    Recognize the costs to support your scaled BPA environment

    Cost Factors

    Automation Operations
    How will chaining multiple BPA technologies together impact your operating budget? Is there a limit on the number of active automations you can have at a single time?

    User Licenses
    How many users require access to the designer, orchestrator, and other functions of the BPA solution? Do they also require access to dependent applications, services, and databases?

    System Enhancements
    Are application and system upgrades and modernizations needed to support BPA? Is your infrastructure, data, and security controls capable of handling BPA demand?

    Supporting Resources
    Are dedicated resources needed to support, govern, and manage BPA across business and IT functions? Are internal resources or third-party providers preferred?

    Training & Onboarding
    Are end users and supporting resources trained to deliver, support, and/or use BPA? How will training and onboarding be facilitated: internally or via third party providers?

    Create a cross-functional and supportive body to lead the scaling of BPA

    Your supportive body is a cross-functional group of individuals promoting collaboration and good BPA practices. It enables an organization to extract the full benefits from critical systems, guides the growth and evolution of strategic BPA implementations, and provides critical expertise to those that need it. A supportive body distinctly caters to optimizing and strengthening BPA governance, management, and operational practices for a single technology or business function or broadly across the entire organization encompassing all BPA capabilities.

    What a support body is not:

    • A Temporary Measure
    • Exclusive to Large Organizations
    • A Project Management Office
    • A Physical Office
    • A Quick Fix

    See our Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications With a Center of Excellence blueprint for more information.

    What are my options?

    Center of Excellence (CoE)
    AND
    Community of Practice (CoP)

    CoEs and CoPs provide critical functions

    An image of the critical functions provided by CoE and CoP.

    Shift your principles as you scale BPA

    As BPA scales, users and teams must not only think of how a BPA solution operates at a personal and technical level or what goals it is trying to achieve, but why it is worth doing and how the outcomes of the automated process will impact the organization's reputation, morality, and public perception.

    An image of the journey from Siloed BPA to Scaled BPA.

    "I think you're going to see a lot of corporations thinking about the corporate responsibility of [organizational change from automation], because studies show that consumers want and will only do business with socially responsible companies."

    – Todd Lohr

    Source: Appian, 2018.

    Assess your readiness to scale BPA

    Vision & Objectives
    Clear direction and goals of the business process automation practice.

    Governance
    Defined BPA roles and responsibilities, processes, and technology controls.

    Skills & Competencies
    The capabilities users and support roles must have to be successful with BPA.

    Business Process Management & Optimization
    The tactics to document, analyze, optimize, and monitor business processes.

    Business Process Automation Delivery
    The tactics to review the fit of automation solutions and deliver and support according to end user needs and preferences.

    Business Process Automation Platform
    The capabilities to manage BPA platforms and ensure it supports the growing needs of the business.

    1.3.1 Assess your readiness to scale BPA

    5 minutes

    1. Review your scaling BPA journey and selected patterns.
    2. Conduct a readiness assessment using the 4. Readiness Assessment tab in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.
    3. Brainstorm solutions to improve the capability or address the gaps found in this assessment.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA readiness assessment

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Record the results in the 4. Readiness Assessment tab in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Bibliography

    Alston, Roland. "With the Rise of Intelligent Automation, Ethics Matter Now More than Ever." Appian, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.
    "Challenges of Achieving RPA at Scale." Blueprint, N.d. Web.
    Dilmegani, Cem. "RPA Benefits: 20 Ways Bots Improve Businesses in 2023," AI Multiple, 9 Jan 2023. Web.
    Diquez, Eduardo. "Struggling To Scale RPA? Discover The Secret to Success." Auxis, 30 Sept. 2020. Web.
    "How much does Robotic Process Automation (RPA) Really Cost?" Blueprint, 14 Sept. 2021. Web.
    "Liverpool City Council improves document process with Nintex." Nintex, n.d. Web.
    "The State of Low-Code/No-Code." Creatio, 2021. Web.
    "Using automation to enhance security and increase IT NPS to 90+ at Nutanix." Workato, n.d. Web.
    "What Is Hyperautomation? A Complete Guide To One Of Gartner's Top Tech Trends." Stefanini Group, 26 Mar. 2021. Web.

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}214|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,039 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Your vendor contracts are unorganized and held in various cabinets and network shares. There is no consolidated list or view of all the agreements, and some are misplaced or lost as coworkers leave.
    • The contract process takes a long time to complete. Coworkers are unsure who should be reviewing and approving them.
    • You are concerned that you are not getting favorable terms with your vendors and not complying with your agreement commitments.
    • You are unsure what risks your organization could be exposed to in your IT vendor contacts. These could be financial, legal, or security risks and/or compliance requirements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. There are two phases to CLM. All stages within those phases are important, but choose to improve the phase that can be most beneficial to your organization in the short term. However, be sure to include reviewing risk and monitoring compliance.
    • Educate yourself. Understand the stages of CLM and how each step can rely on the previous one, like a stepping-stone model to success.
    • Consider the overall picture. Contract lifecycle management is the sum of many processes designed to manage contracts end to end while reducing corporate risk, improving financial savings, and managing agreement obligations. It can take time to get CLM organized and working efficiently, but then it will show its ROI and continuously improve.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    • Gain the knowledge required to implement a CLM that will be beneficial to all business units.
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings.
    • Effectively review, store, manage, comply with, and renew agreements with a collaborative process

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a contract management system will save money and time and mitigate contract risk, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Master the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand how the basic operational framework of CLM will ensure cost savings, improved collaboration, and constant CLM improvement.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of CLM
    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    • Contract Manager

    2. Understand the ten stages of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand the two phases of CLM and the ten stages that make up the entire process.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 2: Understand the Ten Stages of CLM
    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool
    • CLM RASCI Diagram
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review Your CLM Process and Learn the Basics

    The Purpose

    Identify current CLM processes.

    Learn the CLM operational framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented overview of current processes and stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of CLM.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    Outputs

    Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    2 Learn More and Plan

    The Purpose

    Dive into the two phases of CLM and the ten stages of a robust system.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A deep understanding of the required components/stages of a CLM system.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity state.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    Outputs

    CLM Maturity Assessment

    CLM RASCI Diagram

    Further reading

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Mitigate risk and drive value through robust best practices for contract lifecycle management.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • The CIO who depends on numerous key vendors for services
    • The CIO or Project Manager who wants to maximize the value delivered by vendors
    • The Director or Manager of an existing IT procurement or vendor management team
    • The Contracts Manager or Legal Counsel whose IT department holds responsibility for contracts, negotiation, and administration

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Implement and streamline the contract management process, policies, and procedures
    • Baseline and benchmark existing contract processes
    • Understand the importance and value of contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Minimize risk, save time, and maximize savings with vendor contracts

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • IT Service Managers
    • IT Procurement
    • Contract teams
    • Finance and Legal departments
    • Senior IT leadership

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Understand the required components of a CLM
    • Establish the current CLM maturity level
    • Implement a new CLM process
    • Improve on an existing or disparate process

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is a vital process for small and enterprise organizations alike. Research shows that all organizations can benefit from a contract management process, whether they have as few as 25 contracts or especially if they have contracts numbering in the hundreds.

    A CLM system will:

    • Save valuable time in the entire cycle of contract/agreement processes.
    • Save the organization money, both hard and soft dollars.
    • Mitigate risk to the organization.
    • Avoid loss of revenue.

    If you’re not managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investment with your vendors and are potentially exposing your organization to contract and monetary risk."

    - Ted Walker
    Principal Research Advisor, Vendor Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Most organizations have vendor overload and even worse, no defined process to manage the associated contracts and agreements. To manage contracts, some vendor management offices (VMOs) use a shared network drive to store the contracts and a spreadsheet to catalog and manage them. Yet other less-mature VMOs may just rely on a file cabinet in Procurement and a reminder in someone’s calendar about renewals. These disparate processes likely cost your organization time spent finding, managing, and renewing contracts, not to mention potential increases in vendor costs and risk and the inability to track contract obligations.

    Complication

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is not an IT buzzword, and it’s rarely on the top-ten list of CIO concerns in most annual surveys. Until a VMO gets to a level of maturity that can fully develop a CLM and afford the time and costs of doing so, there can be several challenges to developing even the basic processes required to store, manage, and renew IT vendor contracts. As is always an issue in IT, budget is one of the biggest obstacles in implementing a standard CLM process. Until senior leadership realizes that a CLM process can save time, money, and risk, getting mindshare and funding commitment will remain a challenge.

    Resolution

    • Understand the immediate benefits of a CLM process – even a basic CLM implementation can provide significant cost savings to the organization; reduce time spent on creating, negotiating, and renewing contracts; and help identify and mitigate risks within your vendor contracts.
    • Budgets don’t always need to be a barrier to a standard CLM process. However, a robust CLM system can provide significant savings to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • If you aren’t managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investments.
    • Even a basic CLM process with efficient procedures will provide savings and benefits.
    • Not having a CLM process may be costing your organization money, time, and exposure to unmitigated risk.

    What you can gain from this blueprint

    Why Create a CLM

    • Improved contract organization
    • Centralized and manageable storage/archives
    • Improved vendor compliance
    • Risk mitigation
    • Reduced potential loss of revenue

    Knowledge Gained

    • Understanding of the value and importance of a CLM
    • How CLM can impact many departments within the organization
    • Who should be involved in the CLM steps and processes
    • Why a CLM is important to your organization
    • How to save time and money by maximizing IT vendor contracts
    • How basic CLM policies and procedures can be implemented without costly software expenditure

    The Outcome

    • A foundation for a CLM with best-practice processes
    • Reduced exposure to potential risks within vendor contracts
    • Maximized savings with primary vendors
    • Vendor compliance and corporate governance
    • Collaboration, transparency, and integration with business units

    Contract management: A case study

    CASE STUDY
    Industry Finance and Banking
    Source Apttus

    FIS Global

    The Challenge

    FIS’ business groups were isolated across the organization and used different agreements, making contract creation a long, difficult, and manual process.

    • Customers frustrated by slow and complicated contracting process
    • Manual contract creation and approval processes
    • Sensitive contract data that lacked secure storage
    • Multiple agreements managed across divisions
    • Lack of central repository for past contracts
    • Inconsistent and inaccessible

    The Solution: Automating and Streamlining the Contract Management Process

    A robust CLM system solved FIS’ various contract management needs while also providing a solution that could expand into full quote-to cash in the future.

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Intelligent workflow approvals (IWA)
    • X-Author for Excel

    Customer Results

    • 75% cycle time reduction
    • $1M saved in admin costs per year
    • 49% increase in sales proposal volume
    • Automation on one standard platform and solution
    • 55% stronger compliance management
    • Easy maintenance for various templates
    • Ability to quickly absorb new contracts and processes via FIS’s ongoing acquisitions

    Track the impact of CLM with these metrics

    Dollars Saved

    Upfront dollars saved

    • Potential dollars saved from avoiding unfavorable terms and conditions
    • Incentives that encourage the vendor to act in the customer’s best interest
    • Secured commitments to provide specified products and services at firm prices
    • Cost savings related to audits, penalties, and back support
    • Savings from discounts found

    Time Saved

    Time saved, which can be done in several areas

    • Defined and automated approval flow process
    • Preapproved contract templates with corporate terms
    • Reduced negotiation times
    • Locate contracts in minutes

    Pitfalls Avoided

    Number of pitfalls found and avoided, such as

    • Auto-renewal
    • Inconsistencies between sections and documents
    • Security and data not being deleted upon termination
    • Improper licensing

    The numbers are compelling

    71%

    of companies can’t locate up to 10% of their contracts.

    Source: TechnologyAdvice, 2019

    9.2%

    of companies’ annual revenue is lost because of poor contract management practices.

    Source: IACCM, 2019

    60%

    still track contracts in shared drives or email folders.

    Source: “State of Contract Management,” SpringCM, 2018

    CLM blueprint objectives

    • To provide a best-practice process for managing IT vendor contract lifecycles through a framework that organizes from the core, analyzes each step in the cycle, has collaboration and governance attached to each step, and integrates with established vendor management practices within your organization.
    • CLM doesn’t have to be an expensive managed database system in the cloud with fancy dashboards. As long as you have a defined process that has the framework steps and is followed by the organization, this will provide basic CLM and save the organization time and money over a short period of time.
    • This blueprint will not delve into the many vendors or providers of CLM solutions and their methodologies. However, we will discuss briefly how to use our framework and contract stages in evaluating a potential solution that you may be considering.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process – project overview

    1. Master the Operational Framework

    2. Understand the Ten Stages of CLM

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Understand the operational framework components.

    1.2 Review your current framework.

    1.3 Create a plan to implement or enhance existing processes.

    2.1 Understand the ten stages of CLM.

    2.2 Review and document your current processes.

    2.3 Review RASCI chart and assign internal ownership.

    2.4 Create an improvement plan.

    2.5 Track changes for measurable ROI.

    Guided Implementations
    • Review existing processes.
    • Understand what CLM is and why the framework is essential.
    • Create an implementation or improvement plan.
    • Review the ten stages of CLM.
    • Complete CLM Maturity Assessment.
    • Create a plan to target improvement.
    • Track progress to measure savings.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1: Review and Learn the Basics

    • Review and capture your current processes.
    • Learn the basic operational framework of contract management.

    Module 2 Results:

    • Understand the ten stages of effective CLM.
    • Create an improvement or implementation plan.
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of your current CLM processes and where to focus your efforts for improvement or implementation.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2
    Activities

    Task – Review and Learn the Basics

    Task – Learn More and Plan

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    2.5 Discuss ROI.

    2.6 Summarize and next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Internal interviews with business units
    2. Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    1. CLM Maturity Assessment
    2. RASCI Diagram
    3. Improvement Action Plan

    PHASE 1

    Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management
    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-4 weeks

    Step 1.1: Document your Current CLM Process

    Step 1.2: Read and Understand the Operational Framework

    Step 1.3: Review Solution Options

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand what your current process(es) is for each stage
    • Do a probative review of any current processes
    • Interview stakeholders for input

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the framework as the core of your plan
    • Review the gaps in your existing process
    • Understand how to prioritize next steps towards a CLM

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Establish ownership of the framework
    • Prioritize improvement areas or map out how your new CLM will look

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document the details of your process for each stage of CLM

    With these tools & templates:

    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Phase 1 Results:

    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.

    What Is Contract Lifecycle Management?

    • Every contract has a lifecycle, from creation to time and usage to expiration. Organizations using a legacy or manual contract management process usually ask, “What is contract lifecycle management and how will it benefit my business?”
    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) creates a process that manages each contract or agreement. CLM eases the challenges of managing hundreds or even thousands of important business and IT contracts that affect the day-to-day business and could expose the organization to vendor risk.
    • Managing a few contracts is quite easy, but as the number of contracts grows, managing each step for each contract becomes increasingly difficult. Ultimately, it will get to a point where managing contracts properly becomes very difficult or seemingly impossible.

    That’s where contract lifecycle management (CLM) comes in.

    CLM can save money and improve revenue by:

    • Improving accuracy and decreasing errors through standardized contract templates and approved terms and conditions that will reduce repetitive tasks.
    • Securing contracts and processes through centralized software storage, minimizing risk of lost or misplaced contracts due to changes in physical assets like hard drives, network shares, and file cabinets.
    • Using policies and procedures that standardize, organize, track, and optimize IT contracts, eliminating time spent on creation, approvals, errors, and vendor compliance.
    • Reducing the organization’s exposure to risks and liability.
    • Having contracts renewed on time without penalties and with the most favorable terms for the business.

    The Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Four Components of the Operational Framework

    1. Organization
    2. Analysis
    3. Collaboration and Governance
    4. Integration/Vendor Management
    • By organizing at the core of the process and then analyzing each stage, you will maximize each step of the CLM process and ensure long-term contract management for the organization.
    • Collaboration and governance as overarching policies for the system will provide accountability to stakeholders and business units.
    • Integration and vendor management are encompassing features in a well-developed CLM that add visibility, additional value, and savings to the entire organization.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Putting a contract manager in place to manage the CLM project will accelerate the improvements and provide faster returns to the organizations. Reference Info-Tech’s Contract Manager Job Description template as needed.

    The operational framework is key to the success, return on investment (ROI), cost savings, and customer satisfaction of a CLM process.

    This image depicts Info-Tech's Operational Framework.  It consists of a series of five concentric circles, with each circle a different colour.  On the outer circle, is the word Integration.  The next outermost circle has the words Collaboration and Governance.  The next circle has no words, the next circle has the word Analysis, and the very centre circle has the word Organization.

    1. Organization

    • Every enterprise needs to organize its contract documents and data in a central repository so that everyone knows where to find the golden source of contractual truth.
    • This includes:
      • A repository for storing and organizing contract documents.
      • A data dictionary for describing the terms and conditions in a consistent, normalized way.
      • A database for persistent data storage.
      • An object model that tracks changes to the contract and its prevailing terms over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Paper is still alive and doing very well at slowing down the many stages of the contract process.

    2. Analysis

    Most organizations analyze their contracts in two ways:

    • First, they use reporting, search, and analytics to reveal risky and toxic terms so that appropriate operational strategies can be implemented to eliminate, mitigate, or transfer the risk.
    • Second, they use process analytics to reveal bottlenecks and points of friction as contracts are created, approved, and negotiated.

    3. Collaboration

    • Throughout the contract lifecycle, teams must collaborate on tasks both pre-execution and post-execution.
    • This includes document collaboration among several different departments across an enterprise.
    • The challenge is to make the collaboration smooth and transparent to avoid costly mistakes.
    • For some contracting tasks, especially in regulated industries, a high degree of control is required.
    • In these scenarios, the organization must implement controlled systems that restrict access to certain types of data and processes backed up with robust audit trails.

    4. Integration

    • For complete visibility into operational responsibilities, relationships, and risk, an organization must integrate its golden contract data with other systems of record.
    • An enterprise contracts platform must therefore provide a rich set of APIs and connectors so that information can be pushed into or pulled from systems for enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), supplier relationship management (SRM), document management, etc.

    This is the ultimate goal of a robust contract management system!

    Member Activity: Document Current CLM Processes

    1.1 Completion Time: 1-5 days

    Goal: Document your existing CLM processes (if any) and who owns them, who manages them, etc.

    Instructions

    Interview internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and/or Procurement to understand what’s currently in place.

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to capture and document current CLM processes.
    2. Establish what processes, procedures, policies, and workflows, if any, are in place for pre-execution (Phase 1) contract stages.
    3. Do the same for post-execution (Phase 2) stages.
    4. Use this worksheet as reference for assessments and as a benchmark for improvement review six to 12 months later.
    This image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Existing CLM Process Discovery Worksheet

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    PHASE 2

    Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-10 weeks

    Step 2.1: Assess CLM Maturity

    Step 2.2: Complete a RASCI Diagram

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the importance of assessing the maturity of your current CLM processes
    • Discuss interview process for internal stakeholders
    • Use data from the Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your maturity results
    • Identify stages that require immediate improvement
    • Prioritize improvement or implementation of process

    Then complete these activities…

    • Work through the maturity assessment process
    • Answer the questions in the assessment tool
    • Review the summary tab to learn where to focus improvement efforts

    Then complete these activities…

    • Using maturity assessment and existing process data, establish ownership for each process stage
    • Fill in the RASCI Chart based on internal review or existing processes

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM RASCI Diagram

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • A full understanding of your current CLM process and where improvement is required
    • A mapping of stakeholders for each stage of the CLM process

    The Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    There are ten key stages of contract lifecycle management.

    The steps are divided into two phases, pre-execution and post-execution.

      Pre-Execution (Phase 1)

    1. Request
    2. Create
    3. Review Risk
    4. Approve
    5. Negotiate
    6. Sign
    7. Post-Execution (Phase 2)

    8. Capture
    9. Manage
    10. Monitor Compliance
    11. Optimize

    Ten Process Stages Within the CLM Framework

    This image contains the CLM framework from earlier in the presentation, with the addition of the following ten steps: 1. Request; 2. Create Contract; 3. Review Risk; 4. Approve; 5. Negotiate; 6. Sign; 7. Capture; 8. Manage; 9. Monitor Compliance; 10. Optimize.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Contract lifecycle management begins with the contract requesting process, where one party requests for or initiates the contracting process and subsequently uses that information for drafting or authoring the contract document. This is usually the first step in CLM.

    Requests for contracts can come from various sources:

    • Business units within the organization
    • Vendors presenting their contract, including renewal agreements
    • System- or process-generated requests for renewal or extension

    At this stage, you need to validate if a non-disclosure agreement (NDA) is currently in place with the other party or is required before moving forward. At times, adequate NDA components could be included within the contract or agreement to satisfy corporate confidentiality requirements.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Stage Input

    • Information about what the contract needs to contain, such as critical dates, term length, coverage, milestones, etc.
    • Some organizations require that justification and budget approval be provided at this stage.
    • Request could come from a vendor as a pre-created contract.
    • Best practices recommend that a contract request form or template is used to standardize all required information.

    Stage Output

    • Completed request form, stored or posted with all details required to move forward to risk review and contract creation.
    • Possible audit trails.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    • At the creation or drafting stage, the document is created, generated, or provided by the vendor. The document will contain all clauses, scope, terms and conditions, and pricing as required.
    • In some cases, a vendor-presented contract that is already prepared will go through an internal review or redlining process by the business unit and/or Legal.
    • Both internal and external review and redlining are included in this stage.
    • Also at this stage, the approvers and signing authorities are identified and added to the contract. In addition, some audit trail features may be added.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For a comprehensive list of terms and conditions, see our Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool within Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    Stage Input

    • Contract request form, risk review/assessment.
    • Vendor- or contractor-provided contract/agreement, either soft copy, electronic form, or more frequently, “clickwrap” web-posted document.
    • Could also include a renewal notification from a vendor or from the CLM system or admin.

    Stage Output

    • Completed draft contract or agreement, typically in a Microsoft Word or Adobe PDF format with audit trail or comment tracking.
    • Redlined document for additional revision and or acceptance.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 1 of 2

    The importance of risk review can not be understated. The contract or agreement must be reviewed by several stakeholders who can identify risks to the organization within the contract.

    Three important definitions:

    1. Risk is the potential for a negative outcome. A risk is crossing the street while wearing headphones and selecting the next track to play on your smartphone. A negative outcome is getting hit by an oncoming person who, unremarkably, was doing something similar at the same time.
    2. Risk mitigation is about taking the steps necessary to minimize both the likelihood of a risk occurring – look around both before and while crossing the street – and its impact if it does occur – fall if you must, but save the smartphone!
    3. Contract risk is about any number of situations that can cause a contract to fail, from trivially – the supplier delivers needed goods late – to catastrophically – the supplier goes out of business without having delivered your long-delayed orders.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 2 of 2

    • Contracts must be reviewed for business terms and conditions, potential risk situations from a financial or legal perspective, business commitments or obligations, and any operational concerns.
    • Mitigating contract risk requires a good understanding of what contracts are in place, how important they are to the success of the organization, and what data they contain.

    Collectively, this is known as contract visibility.

    • Risk avoidance and mitigation are also a key component in the ROI of a CLM system and should be tracked for analysis.
    • Risk-identifying forms or templates can be used to maintain consistency with corporate standards.

    Stage 3: Review Risk

    Stage Input

    • All details of the proposed contract so that a proper risk analysis can be done as well as appropriate review with stakeholders, including:
      • Finance
      • Legal
      • Procurement
      • Security
      • Line-of-business owner
      • IT stakeholders

    Stage Output

    • A list of identified concerns that could expose the business unit or organization.
    • Recommendations to minimize or eliminate identified risks.

    Stage 4: Approve

    The approval stage can be a short process if policies and procedures are already in place. Most organizations will have defined delegation of authority or approval authority depending on risk, value of the contract, and other corporate considerations.

    • Defined approval levels should be known within the organization and can be applied to the approval workflow, expediting the approval of drafted terms, conditions, changes, and cost/spend within the contract internally.
    • Tracking and flexibility needs to considered in the approval process.
    • Gates need to be in place to ensure that a required approver has approved the contract before it moves to the next approver.
    • Flexibility is needed in some situations for ad hoc approval tasks and should include audit trail as required.
    • Approvers can include business units, Finance, Legal, Security, and C-level leaders

    Stage 4: Approve

    Stage Input

    • Complete draft contract with all terms and conditions (T&Cs) and approval trail.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage Output

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    • At this stage, there should be an approved draft of the contract that can be presented to the other party or vendor for review.
    • Typically organizations will negotiate their larger deals for terms and conditions with the goal of balancing the contractual allocation of risk with the importance of the vendor or agreement and its value to the business.
    • Several people on either side are typically involved and will discuss legal and commercial terms of the contract. Throughout the process, negotiators may leverage a variety of tools, including playbooks with preferred and fallback positions, clause libraries, document redlines and comparisons, and issue lists.
    • Audit trails or tracking of changes and acceptances is an important part of this stage. Tracking will avoid duplication and lost or missed changes and will speed up the entire process.
    • A final, clean document is created at this point and readied for execution.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    Stage Input

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage Output

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Saving the different versions of a contract during negotiations will save time, provide reassurance of agreed terms as you move through the process, and provide reference for future negotiations with the vendor.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    • At this stage in the process, all the heavy lifting in a contract’s creation is complete. Now it’s signature time.
    • To finalize the agreement, both parties need to the sign the final document. This can be done by an in-person wet ink signature or by what is becoming more prevalent, digital signature through an e-signature process.
    • Once complete, the final executed documents are exchanged or received electronically and then retained by each party.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    Stage Input

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Stage Output

    • An executed contract or amendment ready to move to the next stage of CLM, capturing in the repository.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Process flow provisions should made for potential rejection of the contract by signatories, looping the contract back to the appropriate stage for rework or revision.

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 1 of 2

    • This is one of the most important stages of a CLM process. Executed agreements need to be stored in a single manageable, searchable, reportable, and centralized repository.
    • All documents should to be captured electronically, reviewed for accuracy, and then posted to the CLM repository.
    • The repository can be in various formats depending on the maturity, robustness, and budget of the CLM program.

    Most repositories are some type of database:

    • An off-the-shelf product
    • A PaaS cloud-based solution
    • A homegrown, internally developed database
    • An add-on module to your ERP system

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 2 of 2

    Several important features of an electronic repository should be considered:

    • Consistent metadata tagging of clauses, terms, conditions, dates, etc.
    • Centralized summary view of all contracts
    • Controlled access for those who need to review and manage the contracts

    Establishing an effective repository will be key to providing measurable value to the organization and saving large amounts of time for the business unit.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Planning for future needs by investing a little more money into a better, more robust repository could pay bigger dividends to the VMO and organization while providing a higher ROI over time as advanced functionality is deployed.

    Stage 8: Manage

    • Once an agreement is captured in the repository, it needs to be managed from both an operational and a commitment perspective.
    • Through a summary view or master list, contracts need to be operationally managed for end dates and renewals, vendor performance, discounts, and rebates.
    • Managing contracts for commitment and compliance will ensure all contract requirements, rights, service-level agreements (SLAs), and terms are fulfilled. This will eliminate the high costs of missed SLAs, potential breaches, or missed renewals.
    • Managing contracts can be improved by adding metadata to the records that allow for easier search and retrieval of contracts or even proactive notification.
    • The repository management features can and should be available to business stakeholders, or reporting from a CLM admin can also alert stakeholders to renewals, pricing, SLAs, etc.
    • Also important to this stage is reporting. This can be done by an admin or via a self-serve feature for stakeholders, or it could even be automated.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 1 of 2

    • At this stage, the contracts or agreements need to be monitored for the polices within them and the purpose for which they were signed.
    • This is referred to as obligation management and is a key step to providing savings to the organization and mitigating risk.
    • Many contracts contain commitments by each party. These can include but are not limited to SLAs, service uptime targets, user counts, pricing threshold discounts and rebates, renewal notices to vendors, and training requirements.
    • All of these obligations within the contracts should be summarized and monitored to ensure that all commitments are delivered on. Managing obligations will mitigate risks, maximize savings and rebates to the organization, and minimize the potential for a breach within the contract.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 2 of 2

    • Monitoring and measuring vendor commitments and performance will also be a key factor in maximizing the benefits of the contract through vendor accountability.
    • Also included in this stage is renewal and/or disposition of the contract. If renewal is due, it should go back to the business unit for submission to the Stage 1: Request process. If the business unit is not going to renew the contract, the contract must be tagged and archived for future reference.

    Stage 10: Optimize

    • The goal of this stage is to improve the other stages of the process as well as evaluate how each stage is integrating with the core operational framework processes.
    • With more data and improved insight into contractual terms and performance, a business can optimize its portfolio for better value, greater savings, and lower-risk outcomes.
    • For high-performance contract teams, the goal is a continuous feedback loop between the contract portfolio and business performance. If, for example, the data shows that certain negotiation issues consume a large chunk of time but yield no measurable difference in risk or performance, you may tweak the playbook to remedy those issues quickly.

    Additional optimization tactics:

    • Streamlining contract renewals with auto-renew
    • Predefined risk review process or template, continuous review/improvement of negotiation playbook
    • Better automation or flow of approval process
    • Better signature delegation process if required
    • Improving repository search with metadata tagging
    • Automating renewal tracking or notice process
    • Tracking the time a contract spends in each stage

    Establish Your Current CLM Maturity Position

    • Sometimes organizations have a well-defined pre-execution process but have a poor post-signature process.
    • Identifying your current processes or lack thereof will provide you with a starting point in developing a plan for your CLM. It’s possible that most of the stages are there and just need some improvements, or maybe some are missing and need to be implemented.
    • It’s not unusual for organizations to have a manual pre-execution process and an automated backend repository with compliance and renewal notices features.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool to outline where your organization is at each stage of the process.

    Member Activity: Assess Current CLM Maturity

    2.1 Completion Time 1-2 days

    Goal: Identify and measure your existing CLM processes, if any, and provide a maturity value to each stage. The resulting scores will provide a maturity assessment of your CLM.

    Instructions

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to document current CLM processes.
    2. Using the CLM worksheet info, answer the questions in the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.
    3. Review the results and scores on Tab 3 to see where you need to focus your initial improvements.
    4. Save the initial assessment for future reference and reassess in six to 12 months to measure progress.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place in the organization

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Member Activity: Complete RASCI Chart

    2.2 Completion Time 2-6 hours

    Goal: Identify who in your organization is primarily accountable and involved in each stage of the CLM process.

    Instructions

    Engage internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and Procurement as required to validate who should be involved in each stage.

    1. Using the information collected from internal reviews, assign a level in the CLM RASCI Diagram to each team member.
    2. Use the resulting RASCI diagram to guide you through developing or improving your CLM stages.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM RASCI Diagram.

    INPUT

    • Internal interview information

    OUTPUT

    • Understanding of who is involved in each CLM stage

    Materials

    • Interview data
    • RASCI Diagram

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Applying CLM Framework and Stages to Your Organization

    • Understand what CLM process you currently do or do not have in place.
    • Review implementation options: automated, semi-automated, and manual solutions.
    • If you are improving an existing process, focus on one phase at a time, perfect it, and then move to the other phase. This can also be driven by budget and time.
    • Create a plan to start with and then move to automating or semi-automating the stages.
    • Building onto or enhancing an existing system or processes can be a cost-effective method to produce near-term measurable savings
    • Focus on one phase at a time, then move on to the other phase.
    • While reviewing implementation of or improvements to CLM stages, be sure to track or calculate the potential time and cost savings and risk mitigation. This will help in any required business case for a CLM.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 1 of 2

    • ROI can be easier to quantify and measure in larger organizations with larger CLM, but ROI metrics can be obtained regardless of the company or CLM size.
    • Organizations recognize their ROI through gains in efficiency across the entire business as well as within individual departments involved in the contracting process. They also do so by reducing the risk associated with decentralized and insecure storage of and access to their contracts, failure to comply with terms of their contracts, and missing deadlines associated with contracts.

    Just a few of the factors to consider within your own organization include:

    • The number of people inside and outside your company that touch your contracts.
    • The number of hours spent weekly, monthly, and annually managing contracts.
    • Potential efficiencies gained in better managing those contracts.
    • The total number of contracts that exist at any given time.
    • The average value and total value of those contract types.
    • The potential risk of being in breach of any of those contracts.
    • The number of places contracts are stored.
    • The level of security that exists to prevent unauthorized access.
    • The potential impact of unauthorized access to your sensitive contract data.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 2 of 2

    Decision-Maker Apprehensions

    Decision-maker concerns arise from a common misunderstanding – that is, a fundamental failure to appreciate the true source of contract management value. This misunderstanding goes back many years to the time when analysts first started to take an interest in contract management and its automation. Their limited experience (primarily in retail and manufacturing sectors) led them to think of contract management as essentially an administrative function, primarily focused on procurement of goods. In such environments, the purpose of automation is focused on internal efficiency, augmented by the possibility of savings from reduced errors (e.g. failing to spot a renewal or expiry date) or compliance (ensuring use of standard terms).

    Today’s CLM systems and processes can provide ROI in several areas in the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Research on ROI of CLM software shows significant hard cost savings to an organization. For example, a $10 million company with 300 contracts valued at $3 million could realize savings of $83,400 and avoid up to $460,000 in lost revenues. (Derived from: ACCDocket, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 1 of 2

    Who should own and/or manage the CLM process within an organization? Legal, VMO, business unit, Sales?

    This is an often-discussed question. Research suggests that there is no definitive answer, as there are several variables.

    Organizations needs to review what makes the best business sense for them based on several considerations and then decide where CLM belongs.

    • Business unit budgets and time management
    • Available Administration personnel and time
    • IT resources
    • Security and access concerns
    • Best fit based on organizational structure

    35% of law professionals feel contract management is a legal responsibility, while 45% feel it’s a business responsibility and a final 20% are unsure where it belongs. (Source: “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics,” Apttus, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 2 of 2

    What type of CLM software or platform should we use?

    This too is a difficult question to answer definitively. Again, there are several variables to consider. As well, several solutions are available, and this is not a one-size-fits-all scenario.

    As with who should own the CLM process, organizations must review the various CLM software solutions available that will meet their current and future needs and then ask, “What do we need the system to do?”

    • Do you build a “homegrown” solution?
    • Should it be an add-on module to the current ERP or CRM system?
    • Is on-premises more suitable?
    • Is an adequate off-the-shelf (OTS) solution available?
    • What about the many cloud offerings?
    • Is there a basic system to start with that can expand as you grow?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When considering what type of solution to choose, prioritize what needs to been done or improved. Sometimes solutions can be deployed in phases as an “add-on” type modules.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Documented current CLM process
    • Core operational framework to build a CLM process on
    • Understanding of best practices required for a sustainable CLM

    Processes Optimized

    • Internal RASCI process identified
    • Existing internal stage improvements
    • Internal review process for risk mitigation

    Deliverables Completed

    • Existing CLM Processes Worksheet
    • CLM Maturity Assessment
    • CLM RASCI Chart
    • CLM improvement plan

    Project Step Summary

    Client Project: CLM Assessment and Improvement Plan

    1. Set your goals – what do you want to achieve in your CLM project?
    2. Assess your organization’s current CLM position in relation to CLM best practices and stages.
    3. Map your organization’s RASCI structure for CLM.
    4. Identify opportunities for stage improvements or target all low stage assessments.
    5. Prioritize improvement processes.
    6. Track ROI metrics.
    7. Develop a CLM implementation or improvement plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project can fit your organization’s schedule:

    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    CLM Blueprint Summary and Conclusion

    • Contract management is a vital component of a responsible VMO that will benefit all business units in an organization, save time and money, and reduce risk exposure.
    • A basic well-deployed and well-managed CLM will provide ROI in the short term.
    • Setting an improvement plan with concise improvements and potential cost savings based on process improvements will help your business case for CLM get approval and leadership buy-in.
    • Educating and aligning all business units and stakeholders to any changes to CLM processes will ensure that cost savings and ROI are achieved.
    • When evaluating a CLM software solution, use the operational framework and the ten process stages in this blueprint as a reference guide for CLM vendor functionality and selection.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Master Contract Review and Negotiation

    Optimize spend with significant cost savings and negotiate from a position of strength.

    Manage Your Vendors Before They Manage You

    Maximize the value of vendor relationships.

    Bibliography

    Burla, Daniel. “The Must Know Of Transition to Dynamics 365 on Premise.” Sherweb, 14 April 2017. Web.

    Anand, Vishal, “Strategic Considerations in Implementing an End-to-End Contract Lifecycle Management Solution.” DWF Mindcrest, 20 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Alspaugh, Zach. “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics from the General Counsel’s Technology Report.” Apttus, 23 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Bishop, Randy. “Contract Management is not just a cost center.” ContractSafe, 9 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Bryce, Ian. “Contract Management KPIs - Measuring What Matters.” Gatekeeper, 2 May 2019. Web.

    Busch, Jason. “Contract Lifecycle Management 101.” Determine. 4 Jan. 2018. Web.

    “Contract Management Software Buyer's Guide.” TechnologyAdvice, 5 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Dunne, Michael. “Analysts Predict that 2019 will be a Big Year for Contract Lifecycle Management.” Apttus, 19 Nov. 2018. Web.

    “FIS Case Study.” Apttus, n.d. Web.

    Gutwein, Katie. “3 Takeaways from the 2018 State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    “IACCM 2019 Benchmark Report.” IAACM, 4 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Linsley, Rod. “How Proverbial Wisdom Can Help Improve Contract Risk Mitigation.” Gatekeeper, 2 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Mars, Scott. “Contract Management Data Extraction.” Exari, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Rodriquez, Elizabeth. “Global Contract Life-Cycle Management Market Statistics and Trends 2019.” Business Tech Hub, 17 June 2017. Web.

    “State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    Teninbaum, Gabriel, and Arthur Raguette. “Realizing ROI from Contract Management Technology.” ACCDocket.com, 29 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Wagner, Thomas. “Strategic Report on Contract Life cycle Management Software Market with Top Key Players- IBM Emptoris, Icertis, SAP, Apttus, CLM Matrix, Oracle, Infor, Newgen Software, Zycus, Symfact, Contract Logix, Coupa Software.” Market Research, 21 June 2019. Web.

    “What is Your Contract Lifecycle Management (CLM) Persona?” Spend Matters, 19 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}264|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $79,249 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Impact and Result

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your security operations program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your current state

    Assess current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Operational Requirements
    • Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Develop maturity initiatives

    Design your optimized state of operations.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Define operational interdependencies

    Identify opportunities for collaboration within your security program.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies
    • Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan
    • Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template
    • Security Operations Collaboration Plan
    • Security Operations Metrics Summary Document
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Operational Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities, operational inefficiencies, and opportunities for improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine why you need a sound security operations program.

    Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.

    Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the benefits of refining your security operations program.

    1.2 Gauge your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    Outputs

    Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2 Develop Maturity Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Begin developing and prioritizing gap initiatives in order to achieve the optimal state of operations.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Assess your current state and define a target state.

    Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.

    Define the cost, effort, alignment, and security benefits of each initiative.

    Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your current security goals, obligations, and scope.

    2.2 Design your ideal target state.

    2.3 Prioritize gap initiatives.

    Outputs

    Information Security Strategy Requirements Gathering Tool

    Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3 Define Operational Interdependencies

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    Formalize your operational process flows.

    Develop a comprehensive and actionable measurement program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the current security operations process flow.

    Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.

    Formalize an internal information-sharing and collaboration plan.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    3.2 Formalize a security operations collaboration plan.

    3.3 Define operational roles and responsibilities.

    3.4 Develop a comprehensive measurement program.

    Outputs

    Security Operations RACI & Program Plan Tool

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security Operations Cadence Schedule Template

    Security Operations Metrics Summary

    Further reading

    INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Transition from a security operations center to a threat collaboration environment.

    Info-Tech Research Group, Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.
    © 1997-2017 Info-Tech Research Group Inc.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    “A reactive security operations program is no longer an option. The increasing sophistication of threats demands a streamlined yet adaptable mitigation and remediation process. Protect your assets by preparing for the inevitable; unify your prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts and provide assurance to your stakeholders that you are making information security a top priority.”

    Phot of Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Edward Gray,
    Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group



    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Information Security Officer (CISO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Security / IT Management
    • Security Operations Director / Security Operations Center (SOC)
    • Network Operations Director / Network Operations Center (NOC)
    • Systems Administrator
    • Threat Intelligence Staff
    • Security Operations Staff
    • Security Incident Responders
    • Vulnerability Management Staff
    • Patch Management
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Enhance your security program by implementing and streamlining next-generation security operations processes.
    • Increase organizational situational awareness through active collaboration between core threat teams, enriching internal security events with external threat intelligence and enhancing security controls.
    • Develop a comprehensive threat analysis and dissemination process: align people, process, and technology to scale security to threats.
    • Identify the appropriate technological and infrastructure-based sourcing decisions.
    • Design a step-by-step security operations implementation process.
    • Pursue continuous improvement: build a measurement program that actively evaluates program effectiveness.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Board / Chief Executive Officer
    • Information Owners (Business Directors/VP)
    • Security Governance and Risk Management
    • Fraud Operations
    • Human Resources
    • Legal and Public Relations
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Aid decision making by staying abreast of cyberthreats that could impact the business.
    • Increase visibility into the organization’s threat landscape to identify likely targets or identify exposed vulnerabilities.
    • Ensure the business is compliant with regularity, legal, and/or compliance requirements.
    • Understand the value and return on investment of security operations offerings.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Current security practices are disjointed, operating independently with a wide variety of processes and tools to conduct incident response, network defense, and threat analysis. These disparate mitigations leave organizations vulnerable to the increasing number of malicious events.
    • Threat management has become resource intensive, requiring continuous monitoring, collection, and analysis of massive volumes of security event data, while juggling business, compliance, and consumer obligations.

    Complication

    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of their security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Resolution

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Horizontal bar chart of 'Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies', with the highest cost attributed to 'Health', 'Pharmaceutical', 'Financial', 'Energy', and 'Transportation'.

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $217 (in 2015); $74 is direct cost (e.g. legal fees, technology investment) and $143 is indirect cost (e.g. abnormal customer churn). (Source: Ponemon Institute, “2015 Cost of Data Breach Study: United States”)

    '% of systems impacted by a data breach', '1% No Impact', '19% 1-10% impacted', '41% 11-30% impacted', '24% 31-50% impacted', '15% more than 50% impacted
    Divider line.
    '% of customers lost from a data breach', '61% Lost <20%', '21% Lost 20-40%', '8% Lost 40-60%', '6% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    Divider line.
    '% of business opportunity lost from a data breach', '58% Lost <20%', '25% Lost 20-40%', '9% Lost, 40-60%', '5% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    (Source: The Network, “ Cisco 2017 Security Capabilities Benchmark Study”)

    Persistent issues

    • Organizational barriers separating prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
      Siloed operations limit collaboration and internal knowledge sharing.
    • Lack of knowledgeable security staff.
      Human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and must be cross-trained to wear multiple hats.
    • Failure to evaluate and improve security operations.
      The effectiveness of operations must be frequently measured and (re)assessed through an iterative system of continuous improvement.
    • Lack of standardization.
      Pre-established use cases and policies outlining tier-1 operational efforts will eliminate ad hoc remediation efforts and streamline operations.
    • Failure to acknowledge the auditor as a customer.
      Many compliance and regulatory obligations require organizations to have comprehensive documentation of their security operations practices.

    60% Of organizations say security operation teams have little understanding of each other’s requirements.

    40% Of executives report that poor coordination leads to excessive labor and IT operational costs.

    38-100% Increase in efficiency after closing operational gaps with collaboration.
    (Source: Forbes, “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap”)

    The solution

    Bar chart of the 'Benefits of Internal Collaboration' with 'Increased Operational Efficiency' and 'Increased Problem Solving' having the highest percentage.

    “Empower a few administrators with the best information to enable fast, automated responses.”
    – Ismael Valenzuela, IR/Forensics Technical Practice Manager, Foundstone® Services, Intel Security)

    Insufficient security personnel resourcing has been identified as the most prevalent challenge in security operations…

    When an emergency security incident strikes, weak collaboration and poor coordination among critical business functions will magnify inefficiencies in the incident response (IR) process, impacting the organization’s ability to minimize damage and downtime.

    The solution: optimize your SOC. Info-Tech has seen SOCs with five analysts outperform SOCs with 25 analysts through tools and process optimization.

    Sources:
    Ponemon. "2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).”
    Syngress. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center.

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.
    Venn diagram of 'Next-Gen Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operations, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook in order to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s security operations blueprint ties together various initiatives

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    Deliverables
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Threat Intelligence
    Threat intelligence addresses the collection, analysis, and dissemination of external threat data. Analysts act as liaisons to their peers, publishing actionable threat alerts, reports, and briefings. Threat intelligence proactively monitors and identifies whether threat indicators are impacting your organization.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Alert Template
    • Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule
    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. Analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Event Prioritization Tool
    • Efficiency Calculator
    • SecOps Policy Template
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • SecOps RACI Tool
    • TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Incident Response
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. IR teams coordinate root-cause analysis and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    • Incident Management Policy
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    This blueprint will…

    …better protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Phase 01

    Assess your operational requirements.

    Phase 02

    Optimize and further mature your security operations processes

    Phase 3a

    Develop the process flow and specific interaction points between functions

    Phase 3b

    Test your current capabilities with a table top exercise
    Briefly assess your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.
    Highlight operational weak spots that should be addressed before progressing.
    Develop a prioritized list of security-focused operational initiatives.
    Conduct a holistic analysis of your operational capabilities.
    Define the operational interaction points between security-focused operational departments.
    Document the results in comprehensive operational interaction agreement.
    Test your operational processes with Info-Tech’s security operations table-top exercise.

    Info-Tech integrates several best practices to create a best-of-breed security framework

    Legend for the 'Information Security Framework' identifying blue best practices as 'In Scope' and white best practices as 'Out of Scope'. Info-Tech's 'Information Security Framework' of best practices with two main categories 'Governance' and 'Management', each with subcategories such as 'Context & Leadership' and 'Prevention', each with a group of best practices color-coded to the associated legend identifying them as 'In Scope' or 'Out of Scope'.

    Benefits of a collaborative and integrated operations program

    Effective security operations management will help you do the following:

    • Improve efficacy
      Develop structured processes to automate activities and increase process consistency across the security program. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to an innovator role.
    • Improve threat protection
      Enhance network controls through the hardening of perimeter defenses, an intelligence-driven analysis process, and a streamlined incident remediation process.
    • Improve visibility and information sharing
      Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.
    • Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
      Security operations management practices will set a clear level of accountability throughout the security program and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.
    • Control security costs
      Security operations management is concerned with delivering promised services in the most efficient way possible. Good security operations management practices will provide insight into current costs across the organization and present opportunities for cost savings.
    • Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
      Increased visibility into current performance levels and the ability to accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement.

    Impact

    Short term:

    • Streamlined security operations program development process.
    • Completed comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Formalized and structured implementation process.
    • Standardized operational use cases that predefine necessary operational protocol.

    Long term:

    • Enhanced visibility into immediate threat environment.
    • Improved effectiveness of internal defensive controls.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.

    Understand the cost of not having a suitable security operations program

    A practical approach, justifying the value of security operations, is to identify the assets at risk and calculate the cost to the company should the information assets be compromised (i.e. assess the damage an attacker could do to the business).

    Cost Structure Cost Estimation ($) for SMB
    (Small and medium-sized business)
    Cost Estimation ($) for LE
    (Large enterprise)
    Security controls Technology investment: software, hardware, facility, maintenance, etc.
    Cost of process implementation: incident response, CMBD, problem management, etc.
    Cost of resource: salary, training, recruiting, etc.
    $0-300K/year $200K-2M/year
    Security incidents
    (if no security control is in place)
    Explicit cost:
    1. Incident response cost:
      • Remediation costs
      • Productivity: (number of employees impacted) × (hours out) × (burdened hourly rate)
      • Extra professional services
      • Equipment rental, travel expenses, etc.
      • Compliance fine
      • Cost of notifying clients
    2. Revenue loss: direct loss, the impact of permanent loss of data, lost future revenues
    3. Financial performance: credit rating, stock price
      Hidden cost:
      • Reputation, customer loyalty, etc.
    $15K-650K/year $270K-11M/year

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick-off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Activity: Define workshop objectives and current state of knowledge.
    • Understand the threat collaboration environment.
    • Understand the benefits of an optimized security operations.
    • Activity: Review preliminary maturity level.
    • Activity: Assess current people, processes, and technology capabilities.
    • Activity: Assess workflow capabilities.
    • Activity: Begin deep-dive into maturity assessment tool.
    • Discuss strategies to enhance the analysis process (ticketing, automation, visualization, use cases, etc.).
    • Activity: Design ideal target state.
    • Activity: Identify security gaps.
    • Build initiatives to bridge the gaps.
    • Activity: Estimate the resources needed.
    • Activity: Prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Activity: Develop dashboarding and visualization metrics.
    • Activity: Plan for a transition with the security roadmap and action plan.
    • Activity: Define and assign tier 1, 2 & 3 SOC roles and responsibilities.
    • Activity: Assign roles and responsibilities for each security operations initiative.
    • Activity: Develop a comprehensive measurement program.
    • Activity: Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Activity:Conduct attack campaign simulation.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    1. Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    1. Target State and Gap Analysis (Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool)
    1. Security Operations Role & Process Design
    2. Security Operations RACI Chart
    3. Security Operations Metrics Summary
    4. Security Operations Phishing Process Runbook
    5. Attack Campaign Simulation PowerPoint

    All Final Deliverables

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine why you need a sound security operations program.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.
    • Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined scope and motive for completing this project.
    • Insight into your current security operations capabilities.
    • A prioritized list of security operations initiatives based on maturity level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.

    Warm-up exercise: Why build a security operations program?

    Estimated time to completion: 30 minutes

    Discussion: Why are we pursuing this project?

    What are the objectives for optimizing and developing sound security operations?

    Stakeholders Required:

    • Key business executives
    • IT leaders
    • Security operations team members

    Resources Required

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Dry-erase markers
    1. Briefly define the scope of security operations
      What people, processes, and technology fall within the security operations umbrella?
    2. Brainstorm the implications of not acting
      What does the status quo have in store? What are the potential risks?
    3. Define the goals of the project
      Clarify from the outset: what exactly do you want to accomplish from this project?
    4. Prioritize all brainstormed goals
      Classify the goals based on relevant prioritization criteria, e.g. urgency, impact, cost.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.

    Decentralizing the SOC: Security as a function

    Before you begin, remember that no two security operation programs are the same. While the end goal may be similar, the threat landscape, risk tolerance, and organizational requirements will differ from any other SOC. Determine what your DNA looks like before you begin to protect it.

    Security operations must provide several fundamental functions:
    • Real-time monitoring, detecting, and triaging of data from both internal and external sources.
    • In-depth analysis of indicators and incidents, leveraging malware analysis, correlation and rule tweaking, and forensics and eDiscovery techniques.
    • Network/host scanning and vulnerability patch management.
    • Incident response, remediation, and reporting. Security operations must disseminate appropriate information/intelligence to relevant stakeholders.
    • Comprehensive logging and ticketing capabilities that document and communicate events throughout the threat collaboration environment.
    • Tuning and tweaking of technologies to ingest collected data and enhance the analysis process.
    • Enhance overall organizational situational awareness by reporting on security trends, escalating incidents, and sharing adversary tools, tactics, and procedures.
    Venn diagram of 'Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.
    At its core, a security operations program is responsible for the prevention, detection, analysis, and response of security events.

    Optimized security operations can seamlessly integrate threat and incident management processes with monitoring and compliance workflows and resources. This integration unlocks efficiency.

    Understand the levels of security operations

    Take the time to map out what you need and where you should go. Security operations has to be more than just monitoring events – there must be a structured program.

    Foundational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Operational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Strategic
    • Intrusion Detection Management
    • Active Device and Event Monitoring
    • Log Collection and Retention
    • Reporting and Escalation Management
    • Incident Management
    • Audit Compliance
    • Vendor Management
    • Ticketing Processes
    • Packet Capture and Analysis
    • SIEM
    • Firewall
    • Antivirus
    • Patch Management
    • Event Analysis and Incident Triage
    • Security Log Management
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Host Hardening
    • Static Malware Analysis
    • Identity and Access Management
    • Change Management
    • Endpoint Management
    • Business Continuity Management
    • Encryption Management
    • Cloud Security (if applicable)
    • SIEM with Defined Use Cases
    • Big Data Security Analytics
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Network Flow Analysis
    • VPN Anomaly Detection
    • Dynamic Malware Analysis
    • Use-Case Management
    • Feedback and Continuous Improvement Management
    • Visualization and Dashboarding
    • Knowledge Portal Ticket Documentation
    • Advanced Threat Hunting
    • Control and Process Automation
    • eDiscovery and Forensics
    • Risk Management
    ——Security Operations Capabilities—–›

    Understand security operations: Establish a unified threat collaboration environment

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address threats impacting the organization’s brand, operations, and technology infrastructure.
    • Managing incident escalation and response.
    • Coordinating root-cause analysis and incident gathering.
    • Facilitating post-incident lessons learned.
    • Managing system patching and risk acceptance.
    • Conducting vulnerability assessment and penetration testing.
    • Monitoring in real-time and triaging of events.
    • Escalating events to incident management team.
    • Tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds.
    • Gathering and analyzing external threat data.
    • Liaising with peers, industry, and government.
    • Publishing threat alerts, reports, and briefings.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    The threat collaboration environment is comprised of three core elements

    Info-Tech Insight

    The value of a SOC can be achieved with fewer prerequisites than you think. While it is difficult to cut back on process and technology requirements, human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and can be cross-trained to satisfy operational gaps.

    Three hexes fitting together with the words 'People', 'Process', and 'Technology'. People. Effective human capital is fundamental to establishing an efficient security operations program, and if enabled correctly, can be the driving factor behind successful process optimization. Ensure you address several critical human capital components:
    • Who is responsible for each respective threat collaboration environment function?
    • What are the required operational roles, responsibilities, and competencies for each employee?
    • Are there formalized training procedures to onboard new employees?
    • Is there an established knowledge transfer and management program?
    Processes. Formal and informal mechanisms that bridge security throughout the collaboration environment and organization at large. Ask yourself:
    • Are there defined runbooks that clearly outline critical operational procedures and guidelines?
    • Is there a defined escalation protocol to transfer knowledge and share threats internally?
    • Is there a defined reporting procedure to share intelligence externally?
    • Are there formal and accessible policies for each respective security operations function?
    • Is there a defined measurement program to report on the performance of security operations?
    • Is there a continuous improvement program in place for all security operations functions?
    • Is there a defined operational vendor management program?
    Technology. The composition of all infrastructure, systems, controls, and tools that enable processes and people to operate and collaborate more efficiently. Determine:
    • Are the appropriate controls implemented to effectively prevent, detect, analyze, and remediate threats? Is each control documented with an assigned asset owner?
    • Can a solution integrate with existing controls? If so, to what extent?
    • Is there a centralized log aggregation tool such as a SIEM?
    • What is the operational cost to effectively manage each control?
    • Is the control the most up-to-date version? Have the most recent patches and configuration changes been applied? Can it be consolidated with or replaced by another control?

    Conduct a preliminary maturity assessment before tackling this project

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment

    At a high level, assess your organization’s operational maturity in each of the threat collaboration environment functions. Determine whether the foundational processes exist in order to mature and streamline your security operations.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Assess the current maturity of your security operations program

    Prioritize the component most important to the development of your security operations program.

    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment presenting the 'Impact Sub-Weightings' of 'People', 'Process', 'Technology', and 'Policy'.
    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment assessing the 'Current State' and 'Target State' of different 'Security Capabilities'.
    Each “security capability” covers a component of the overarching “security function.” Assign a current and target maturity score to each respective security capability. (Note: The CMMI maturity scores are further explained on the following slide.) Document any/all comments for future Info-Tech analyst discussions.

    Assign each security capability a reflective and desired maturity score.

    Your current and target state maturity will be determined using the capability maturity model integration (CMMI) scale. Ensure that all participants understand the 1-5 scale.
    Two-way vertical arrow colored blue at the top and green at the bottom. Ad Hoc
    1 Arrow pointing right. Initial/Ad Hoc: Activity is not well defined and is ad hoc, e.g. no formal roles or responsibilities exist, de facto standards are followed on an individual-by-individual basis.
    2 Arrow pointing right. Developing: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution, e.g. while no formal policies have been documented, content management is occurring implicitly or on an individual-by-individual basis.
    3 Arrow pointing right. Defined: Activity is formally established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process, e.g. roles and responsibilities have been defined and documented in an accessible policy, however, metrics are not actively monitored and managed.
    4 Arrow pointing right. Managed and Measurable: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback, e.g. metrics have been established to monitor the effectiveness of tier-1 SOC analysts.
    5 Arrow pointing right. Optimized: Qualitative and quantitative feedback is used to continually improve the execution of the activity, e.g. the organization is an industry leader in the respective field; research and development efforts are allocated in order to continuously explore more efficient methods of accomplishing the task at hand.
    Optimized

    Notes: Info-Tech seldom sees a client achieve a CMMI score of 4 or 5. To achieve a state of optimization there must be a subsequent trade-off elsewhere. As such, we recommend that organizations strive for a CMMI score of 3 or 4.

    Ensure that your threat collaboration environment is of a sufficient maturity before progressing

    Example report card from the maturity assessment. Functions are color-coded green, yellow, and red. Review the report cards for each of the respective threat collaboration environment functions.
    • A green function indicates that you have exceeded the operational requirements to proceed with the security operations initiative.
    • A yellow function indicates that your maturity score is below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech advises revisiting the attached blueprint. In the instance of a one-off case, the client can proceed with this security operations initiative.
    • A red function indicates that your maturity score is well below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech strongly advises to not proceed with the security operations initiative. Revisit the recommended blueprint and further mature the specific function.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you clearly defined the rationale for refining your security operations program?
    • Have you clearly defined and prioritized the goals and outcomes of optimizing your security operations program?
    • Have you assessed your respective people, process, and technological capabilities?
    • Have you completed the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool?
    • Were all threat collaboration environment functions of a sufficient maturity level?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Assess your current state and define a target state.
    • Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit of each initiative.
    • Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized understanding of your business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • A comprehensive current and target state assessment.
    • A succinct and consolidated list of gap initiatives that will collectively achieve your target state.
    • A formally documented set of estimated priority variables (cost, effort, business alignment).
    • A fully prioritized security roadmap that is in alignment with business goals and informed by the organization’s needs and limitations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives

    Align your security operations program with corporate goals and obligations

    A common challenge for security leaders is learning to express their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives.

    Frame the importance of your security operations program to
    align with that of the decision makers’ over-arching strategy.

    Oftentimes resourcing and funding is dependent on the
    alignment of security initiatives to business objectives.

    Corporate goals and objectives can be categorized into three major buckets:
    1. BUSINESS OBLIGATIONS
      The primary goals and functions of the organization at large. Examples include customer retention, growth, innovation, customer experience, etc.
    2. CONSUMER OBLIGATIONS
      The needs and demands of internal and external stakeholders. Examples include ease of use (external), data protection (external), offsite access (internal), etc.
    3. COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS
      The requirements of the organization to comply with mandatory and/or voluntary standards. Examples include HIPAA, PIPEDA, ISO 27001, etc.
    *Do not approach the above list with a security mindset – take a business perspective and align your security efforts accordingly.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Developing a security operations strategy is a proactive activity that enables you to get in front of any upcoming business projects or industry trends rather than having to respond reactively later on. Consider as many foreseeable variables as possible!

    Determine your security operations program scope and boundaries

    It is important to define all security-related areas of responsibility. Upon completion you should clearly understand what you are trying to secure.

    Ask yourself:
    Where does the onus of responsibility stop?

    The organizational scope and boundaries and can be categorized into four major buckets:
    1. PHYSICAL SCOPE
      The physical locations that the security operations program is responsible for. Examples include office locations, remote access, clients/vendors, etc.
    2. IT SYSTEMS
      The network systems that must be protected by the security operations program. Examples include fully owned systems, IaaS, PaaS, remotely hosted SaaS, etc.
    3. ORGANIZATIONAL SCOPE
      The business units, departments, or divisions that will be affected by the security operations program. Examples include user groups, departments, subsidiaries, etc.
    4. DATA SCOPE
      The data types that the business handles and the privacy/criticality level of each. Examples include top secret, confidential, private, public, etc.

    This also includes what is not within scope. For some outsourced services or locations you may not be responsible for security. For some business departments you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset, what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

    Reference Info-Tech’s security strategy: goals, obligations, and scope activities

    Explicitly understanding how security aligns with the core business mission is critical for having a strategic plan and fulfilling the role of business enabler.

    Download and complete the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication. If previously completed, take the time to review your results.

    GOALS and OBLIGATIONS
    Proceed through each slide and brainstorm the ways that security operations supports business, customer, and compliance needs.

    Goals & Obligations
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    PROGRAM SCOPE & BOUNDARIES
    Assess your current organizational environment. Document current IT systems, critical data, physical environments, and departmental divisions.

    If a well-defined corporate strategy does not exist, these questions can help pinpoint objectives:

    • What is the message being delivered by the CEO?
    • What are the main themes of investments and projects?
    • What are the senior leaders measured on?
    Program Scope & Boundaries
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    For more information on how to complete the goals & obligations activity please reference Section 1.3 of Info-Tech’s Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint.

    Complete the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    On tab 1. Goals and Obligations:
    • Document all business, customer, and compliance obligations. Ensure that each item is reflective of the over-arching business strategy and is not security focused.
    • In the second column, identify the corresponding security initiative that supports the obligation.
    Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Columns are 'Business obligations', 'Security obligations to support the business (optional)', and 'Notes'.
    On tab 2. Scope and Boundaries:
    • Record all details for what is in and out of scope from physical, IT, organizational, and data perspectives.
    • Complete the affiliated columns for a comprehensive scope assessment.
    • As a discussion guide, refer to the considerations slides prior to this in phase 1.3.
    Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Title is 'Physical Scope', Columns are 'Environment Name', 'Highest data criticality here', 'Is this in scope of the security strategy?', 'Are we accountable for security here?', and 'Notes'.
    For the purpose of this security operations initiative please IGNORE the risk tolerance activities on tab 3.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A common challenge for security leaders is expressing their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives. This exercise helps make explicit the link between what the business cares about and what security is trying to do.

    Conduct a comprehensive security operations maturity assessment

    The following slides will walk you through the process below.

    Define your current and target state

    Self-assess your current security operations capabilities and determine your intended state.

    Create your gap initiatives

    Determine the operational processes that must be completed in order to achieve the target state.

    Prioritize your initiatives

    Define your prioritization criteria (cost, effort, alignment, security benefit) based on your organization

    Build a Gantt chart for your upcoming initiatives
    The final output will be a Gantt to action your prioritized initiatives

    Info-Tech Insight

    Progressive improvements provide the most value to IT and your organization. Leaping from pre-foundation to complete optimization is an ineffective goal. Systematic improvements to your security performance delivers value to your organization, each step along the way.

    Optimize your security operations workflow

    Info-Tech consulted various industry experts and consolidated their optimization advice.

    Dashboards: Centralized visibility, threat analytics, and orchestration enable faster threat detection with fewer resources.

    Adding more controls to a network never increases resiliency. Identify technological overlaps and eliminate unnecessary costs.

    Automation: There is shortfall in human capital in contrast to the required tools and processes. Automate the more trivial processes.

    SOCs with 900 employees are just as efficient as those with 35-40. There is an evident tipping point in marginal value.

    There are no plug-and-play technological solutions – each is accompanied by a growing pain and an affiliated human capital cost.

    Planning: Narrow the scope of operations to focus on protecting assets of value.

    Cross-train employees throughout different silos. Enable them to wear multiple hats.

    Practice: None of the processes happen in a vacuum. Make the most of tabletop exercises and other training exercises.

    Define appropriate use cases and explicitly state threat escalation protocol. Focus on automating the tier-1 analyst role.

    Self-assess your current-state capabilities and determine the appropriate target state

    1. Review:
    The heading in blue is the security domain, light blue is the subdomain and white is the specific control.
    2. Determine and Record:
    Ask participants to identify your organization’s current maturity level for each control. Next, determine a target maturity level that meets the requirements of the area (requirements should reflect the goals and obligations defined earlier).
    3.
    In small groups, have participants answer “what is required to achieve the target state?” Not all current/target state gaps will require additional description, explanation, or an associated imitative. You can generate one initiative that may apply to multiple line items.

    Screenshot of a table for assessing the current and target states of capabilities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When customizing your gap initiatives consider your organizational requirements and scope while remaining realistic. Below is an example of lofty vs. realistic initiatives:
    Lofty: Perform thorough, manual security analysis. Realistic: Leverage our SIEM platform to perform more automated security analysis through the use of log information.

    Consolidate related gap initiatives to simplify and streamline your roadmap

    Identify areas of commonality between gap initiative in order to effectively and efficiently implement your new initiatives.

    Steps:
    1. After reviewing and documenting initiatives for each security control, begin sorting controls by commonality, where resources can be shared, or similar end goals and actions. Begin by copying all initiatives from tab 2. Current State Assessment into tab 5. Initiative List of the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool and then consolidating them.
    2. Initiatives Consolidated Initiatives
      Document data classification and handling in AUP —› Document data classification and handling in AUP Keep urgent or exceptional initiatives separate so they can be addressed appropriately.
      Document removable media in AUP —› Define and document an Acceptable Use Policy Other similar or related initiatives can be consolidated into one item.
      Document BYOD and mobile devices in AUP —›
      Document company assets in Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) —›

    3. Review grouped initiatives and identify specific initiatives should be broken out and defined separately.
    4. Record your consolidated gap initiatives in the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool, tab 6. Initiative Prioritization.

    Understand your organizational maturity gap

    After inputting your current and target scores and defining your gap initiatives in tab 2, review tab 3. Current Maturity and tab 4. Maturity Gap in Info-Tech’s Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool.

    Automatically built charts and tables provide a clear visualization of your current maturity.

    Presenting these figures to stakeholders and management can help visually draw attention to high-priority areas and contextualize the gap initiatives for which you will be seeking support.

    Screenshot of tabs 3 and 4 from Info-Tech's Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. Bar charts titled 'Planning and Direction', 'Vulnerability Management', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Maturity Level Gap Analysis'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Communicate the value of future security projects to stakeholders by copying relevant charts and tables into an executive stakeholder communication presentation (ask an Info-Tech representative for further information).

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    Define low, medium, and high resource allocation, and other variables for your gap initiatives in the Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. These variables include:
    1. Define initial cost. One-time, upfront capital investments. The low cut-off would be a project that can be approved with little to no oversight. Whereas the high cut-off would be a project that requires a major approval or a formal capital investment request. Initial cost covers items such as appliance cost, installation, project based consulting fees, etc.
    2. Define ongoing cost. This includes any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs, e.g. licensing or rental costs. Do not account for FTE employee costs. Generally speaking you can take 20-25% of initial cost as ongoing cost for maintenance and service.
    3. Define initial staffing in hours. This is total time in hours required to complete a project. Note: It is not total elapsed time, but dedicated time. Consider time required to research, document, implement, review, set up, fine tune, etc. Consider all staff hours required (2 staff at 8 hours means 16 hours total).
    4. Define ongoing staffing in hours. This is the ongoing average hours per week required to support that initiative. This covers all operations, maintenance, review, and support for the initiative. Some initiatives will have a week time commitment (e.g. perform a vulnerability scan using our tool once a week) versus others that may have monthly, quarterly, or annual time commitments that need to averaged out per week (e.g. perform annual security review requiring 0.4 hours/week (20 hours total based on 50 working weeks per year).
    Table relating the four definitions on the left, 'Initial Cost', 'Ongoing Cost (annual)', 'Initial Staffing in Hours', and 'Ongoing Staffing in Hours/Week'. Each row header is a definition and has four sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Zero'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When considering these parameters, aim to use already existing resource allocations.

    For example, if there is a dollar value that would require you to seek approval for an expense, this might be the difference between a medium and a high cost category.

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    1. Define Alignment with Business. This variable is meant to capture how well the gap initiative aligns with organizational goals and objectives. For example, something with high alignment usually can be tied to a specific organization initiative and will receive senior management support. You can either:
      • Set low, medium, and high based on levels of support the organization will provide (e.g. High – senior management support, Medium – VP/business unit head support, IT support only)
      • Attribute specific corporate goals or initiatives to the gap initiative (e.g. High – directly supports a customer requirement/key contract requirement; Medium – indirectly support customer requirement/key contract OR enables remote workforce; Low – security best practice).
    2. Define Security Benefit. This variable is meant to capture the relative security benefit or risk reduction being provided by the gap initiative. This can be represented through a variety of factors, such as:
      • Reduces compliance or regulatory risk by meeting a control requirement
      • Reduces availability and operational risk
      • Implements a non-existent control
      • Secures high-criticality data
      • Secures at-risk end users
    Table relating the two definitions on the left, 'Alignment with Business', and 'Security Benefit'. Each row header is a definition and has three sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', and 'Low'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make sure you consider the value of AND/OR. For either alignment with business or security benefit, the use of AND/OR can become useful thresholds to rank similar importance but different value initiatives.

    Example: with alignment with business, an initiative can indirectly support a key compliance requirement OR meet a key corporate goal.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You cannot do everything – and you probably wouldn’t want to. Make educated decisions about which projects are most important and why.

    Apply your variable criteria to your initiatives

    Identify easy-win tasks and high-value projects worth fighting for.
    Categorize the Initiative
    Select the gap initiative type from the down list. Each category (Must, Should, Could, and Won’t) is considered to be an “execution wave.” There is also a specific order of operations within each wave. Based on dependencies and order of importance, you will execute on some “must-do” items before others.
    Assign Criteria
    For each gap initiative, evaluate it based on your previously defined parameters for each variable.
    • Cost – initial and ongoing
    • Staffing – initial and ongoing
    • Alignment with business
    • Security benefit
    Overall Cost/Effort Rating
    An automatically generated score between 0 and 12. The higher the score attached to the initiative, the more effort required. The must-do, low-scoring items are quick wins and must be prioritized first.
    Screenshot of a table from Info-Tech's Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool with all of the previous table row headers as column headers.

    A financial services organization defined its target security state and created an execution plan

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Financial Services | Source: Info-Tech Research Group
    Framework Components
    Security Domains & Accompanied Initiatives
    (A portion of completed domains and initiatives)
    CSC began by creating over 100 gap initiatives across Info-Tech’s seven security domains.
    Current-State Assessment Context & Leadership Compliance, Audit & Review Security Prevention
    Gap Initiatives Created 12
    Initiatives
    14
    Initiatives
    45
    Initiatives
    Gap Initiative Prioritization
    Planned Initiative(s)* Initial Cost Ongoing Cost Initial Staffing Ongoing Staffing
    Document Charter Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Document RACI Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Expand IR processes Medium - $5K-$50K Low - ‹$1K High - ›2w Low - ‹2 Hour
    Investigate Threat Intel Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Medium - 1-10d Low - ‹2 Hour
    CSC’s defined low, medium, and high for cost and staffing are specific to the organization.

    CSC then consolidated its initiatives to create less than 60 concise tasks.

    *Initiatives and variables have been changed or modified to maintain anonymity

    Review your prioritized security roadmap

    Review the final Gantt chart to review the expected start and end dates for your security initiatives as part of your roadmap.

    In the Gantt chart, go through each wave in sequence and determine the planned start date and planned duration for each gap initiative. As you populate the planned start dates, take into consideration the resource constraints or dependencies for each project. Go back and revise the granular execution wave to resolve any conflicts you find.

    Screenshot of a 'Gantt Chart for Initiatives', a table with planned and actual start times and durations for each initiative, and beside it a roadmap with the dates from the Gantt chart plugged in.
    Review considerations
    • Does this roadmap make sense for our organization?
    • Do we focus too much on one quarter over others?
    • Will the business be going through any significant changes during the upcoming years that will directly impact this project?
    This is a living management document
    • You can use the same process on a per-case basis to decide where this new project falls in the priority list, and then add it to your Gantt chart.
    • As you make progress, check items off of the list, and periodically use this chart to retroactively update your progress towards achieving your overall target state.

    Consult an Info-Tech Analyst

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    Onsite workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If a Guided Implementation isn’t enough, we offer low-cost onsite delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to successfully complete your project.
    Photo of TJ Minichillo, Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. TJ Minichillo
    Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Edward Gray
    Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Celine Gravelines, Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Celine Gravelines
    Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    If you are not communicating, then you are not secure.

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email workshops@infotech.com for more information.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you identified your organization’s corporate goals along with your obligations?
    • Have you defined the scope and boundaries of your security program?
    • Have you determined your organization’s risk tolerance level?
    • Have you considered threat types your organization may face?
    • Are the above answers documented in the Security Requirements Gathering Tool?
    • Have you defined your maturity for both your current and target state?
    • Do you have clearly defined initiatives that would bridge the gap between your current and target state?
    • Are each of the initiatives independent, specific, and relevant to the associated control?
    • Have you indicated any dependencies between your initiatives?
    • Have you consolidated your gap initiatives?
    • Have you defined the parameters for each of the prioritization variables (cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit)?
    • Have you applied prioritization parameters to each consolidated initiative?
    • Have you recorded your final prioritized roadmap in the Gantt chart tab?
    • Have you reviewed your final Gantt chart to ensure it aligns to your security requirements?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Define Operational Interdependencies

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current security operations process flow.
    • Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.
    • Formalize an internal information sharing and collaboration plan.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized security operations interaction agreement.
    • A security operations service and product catalog.
    • A structured operations collection plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Tie everything together with collaboration

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Define Strategic Needs and Requirements Participate in Information Sharing Communicate Clearly
    • Establish a channel to communicate management needs and requirements and define important workflow activities. Focus on operationalizing those components.
    • Establish a feedback loop to ensure your actions satisfied management’s criteria.
    • Consolidate critical security data within a centralized portal that is accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment, reducing the human capital resources required to manage that data.
    • Participate in external information sharing groups such as ISACs. Intelligence collaboration allows organizations to band together to decrease risk and protect one another from threat actors.
    • Disseminate relevant information in clear and succinct alerts, reports, or briefings.
    • Security operations analysts must be able to translate important technical security issues and provide in-depth strategic insights.
    • Define your audience before presenting information; various stakeholders will interpret information differently. You must present it in a format that appeals to their interests.
    • Be transparent in your communications. Holding back information will only serve to alienate groups and hinder critical business decisions.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Simple collaborative activities, such as a biweekly meeting, can unite prevention, detection, analysis, and response teams to help prevent siloed decision making.

    Understand the security operations process flow

    Process standardization and automation is critical to the effectiveness of security operations.

    Process flow for security operations with column headers 'Monitoring', 'Preliminary Analysis (Tier 1)', 'Triage', 'Investigation & Analysis (Tier 2)', 'Response', and 'Advanced Threat Detection (Tier 3)'. All processes begin with elements in the 'Monitoring' column and end up at 'Visualization & Dashboarding'.

    Document your security operations’ capabilities and tasks

    Table of capabilities and tasks for security operations.
    Document your security operations’ functional capabilities and operational tasks to satisfy each capability. What resources will you leverage to complete the specific task/capability? Identify your internal and external collection sources to satisfy the individual requirement. Identify the affiliated product, service, or output generated from the task/capability. Determine your escalation protocol. Who are the stakeholders you will be sharing this information with?
    Capabilities

    The major responsibilities of a specific function. These are the high-level processes that are expected to be completed by the affiliated employees and/or stakeholders.

    Tasks

    The specific and granular tasks that need to be completed in order to satisfy a portion of or the entire capability.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Convert your results into actionable process flowcharts

    Map each functional task or capability into a visual process-flow diagram.

    • The title should reflect the respective capability and product output.
    • List all involved stakeholders (inputs and threat escalation protocol) along the left side.
    • Ensure all relevant security control inputs are documented within the body of the process-flow diagram.
    • Map out the respective processes in order to achieve the desired outcome.
    • Segment each process within its own icon and tie that back to the respective input.
    Example of a process flow made with sticky notes.

    Title: Output #1 Example of a process flow diagram with columns 'Stakeholders', 'Input Processes', 'Output Processes', and 'Threat Escalation Protocol'. Processes are mapped by which stakeholder and column they fall to.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Formalize the opportunities for collaboration within your security operations program

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security operations provides a single pane of glass through which the threat collaboration environment can manage its operations.

    How to customize

    The security operations interaction agreement identifies opportunities for optimization through collaboration and cross-training. The document is composed of several components:

    • Security operations program scope and objectives
    • Operational capabilities and outputs on a per function basis
    • A needs and requirements collection plan
    • Escalation protocol and respective information-sharing guidance (i.e. a detailed cadence schedule)
    • A security operations RACI chart
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.

    Assign responsibilities for the threat management process

    Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan

    Formally documenting roles and responsibilities helps to hold those accountable and creates awareness as to everyone’s involvement in various tasks.

    How to customize
    • Customize the header fields with applicable stakeholders.
    • Identify stakeholders that are:
      • Responsible: The person(s) who does the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
      • Accountable: The person(s) who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and is often an executive or program sponsor.
      • Consulted: The person(s) who provides information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
      • Informed: The person(s) who is updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Identify security operations consumers and their respective needs and requirements

    Ensure your security operations program is constantly working toward satisfying a consumer need or requirement.

    Internal Consumers External Consumers
    • Business Executives & Management (CIO, CISO, COO):
      • Inform business decisions regarding threats and their association with future financial risk, reputational risk, and continuity of operations.
    • Human Resources:
      • Security operations must directly work with HR to enforce tight device controls, develop processes, and set expectations.
    • Legal:
      • Security operations is responsible to notify the legal department of data breaches and the appropriate course of action.
    • Audit and Compliance:
      • Work with the auditing department to define additional audits or controls that must be measured.
    • Public Relations/Marketing Employees:
      • Employees must be educated on prevalent threats and how to avoid or mitigate them.

    Note: Your organization might not be the final target, but it could be a primary path for attackers. If you exist as a third-party partner to another organization, your responsibility in your technology ecosystem extends beyond your own product or service offerings.

    • Third-Party Contractors:
      • Identify relevant threats across industries – security operations is responsible for protecting more than just itself.
    • Commercial Vendors:
      • Identify commercial vendors of control failures and opportunities for operational improvement.
    • Suppliers:
      • Provide or maintain a certain level of security delivery.
      • Meet the same level of security that is expected of business units.
    • All End Users:
      • Be notified of any data breaches and potential violations of privacy.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    “In order to support a healthy constituency, network operations and security operations should be viewed as equal partners, rather than one subordinate to the other.” (Mitre world-class CISO)

    Define the stakeholders, their respective outputs, and the underlying need

    Security Operations Program Service & Product Catalog

    Create an informal security operations program service and product catalog. Work your way backwards – map each deliverable to the respective stakeholders and functions.

    Action/Output Arrow pointing right. Frequency Arrow pointing right. Stakeholders/Function
    Document the key services and outputs produced by the security operations program. For example:
    • Real-time monitoring
    • Event analysis and incident coordination
    • Malware analysis
    • External information sharing
    • Published alerts, reports, and briefings
    • Metrics
    Define the frequency for which each deliverable or service is produced or conducted. Leverage this activity to establish a state of accountability within your threat collaboration environment. Identify the stakeholders or groups affiliated with each output. Remember to include potential MSSPs.
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Tier 1, 2, and 3 Analysts
    • Incident Response
    • MSSP
    • Network Operations
    Remember to include any target-state outputs or services identified in the maturity assessment. Use this exercise as an opportunity to organize your security operations outputs and services.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment.

    Internal information sharing helps to focus operational efforts

    Organizations must share information internally and through secure external information sharing and analysis centers (ISACs).

    Ensure information is shared in a format that relates to the particular end user. Internal consumers fall into two categories:

    • Strategic Users — Intelligence enables strategic stakeholders to better understand security trends, minimize risk, and make more educated and informed decisions. The strategic intelligence user often lacks technical security knowledge; bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers by clearly communicating the underlying value and benefits.
    • Operational Users — Operational users integrate information and indicators directly into their daily operations and as a result have more in-depth knowledge of the technical terms. Reports help to identify escalated alerts that are part of a bigger campaign, provide attribution and context to attacks, identify systems that have been compromised, block malicious URLs or malware signatures in firewalls, IDPS systems, and other gateway products, identify patches, reduce the number of incidents, etc.
    Collaboration includes the exchange of:
    • Contextualized threat indicators, threat actors, TTPs, and campaigns.
    • Attribution of the attack, motives of the attacker, victim profiles, and frequent exploits.
    • Defensive and mitigation strategies.
    • Best-practice incident response procedures.
    • Technical tools to help normalize threat intelligence formats or decode malicious network traffic.
    Collaboration can be achieved through:
    • Manual unstructured exchanges such as alerts, reports, briefings, knowledge portals, or emails.
    • Automated centralized platforms that allow users to privately upload, aggregate, and vet threat intelligence. Current players include commercial, government, and open-source information-sharing and analysis centers.
    Isolation prevents businesses from learning from each others’ mistakes and/or successes.

    Define the routine of your security operations program in a detailed cadence schedule

    Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template

    Design your meetings around your security operations program’s outputs and capabilities

    How to customize

    Don’t operate in a silo. Formalize a cadence schedule to develop a state of accountability, share information across the organization, and discuss relevant trends. A detailed cadence schedule should include the following:

    • Activity, output, or topic being discussed.
    • Participants and stakeholders involved.
    • Value and purpose of meeting.
    • Duration and frequency of each meeting.
    • Investment per participant per meeting.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Schedule regular meetings composed of key members from different working groups to discuss concerns, share goals, and communicate operational processes pertaining to their specific roles.

    Apply a strategic lens to your security operations program

    Frame the importance of optimizing the security operations program to align with that of the decision makers’ overarching strategy.

    Strategies
    1. Bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers. Communicate concisely in business-friendly terms.
    2. Quantify the ROI for the given project.
    3. Educate stakeholders – if stakeholders do not understand what a security operations program encompasses, it will be hard for them to champion the initiative.
    4. Communicate the implications, value, and benefits of a security operations program.
    5. Frame the opportunity as a competitive advantage, e.g. proactive security measures as a client acquisition strategy.
    6. Address the increasing prevalence of threat actors. Use objective data to demonstrate the impact, e.g. through case studies, recent media headlines, or statistics.

    Defensive Strategy diagram with columns 'Adversaries', 'Defenses', 'Assets', and priority level.
    (Source: iSIGHT, “ Definitive Guide to Threat Intelligence”)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Refrain from using scare tactics such as fear, uncertainty, and doubt (FUD). While this may be a short-term solution, it limits the longevity of your operations as senior management is not truly invested in the initiative.

    Example: Align your strategic needs with that of management.

    Identify assets of value, current weak security measures, and potential adversaries. Demonstrate how an optimized security operations program can mitigate those threats.

    Develop a comprehensive measurement program to evaluate the effectiveness of your security operations

    There are three types of metrics pertaining to security operations:

    1) Operations-focused

    Operations-focused metrics are typically communicated through a centralized visualization such as a dashboard. These metrics guide operational efforts, identifying operational and control weak points while ensuring the appropriate actions are taken to fix them.

    Examples include, but are not limited to:

    • Ticketing metrics (e.g. average ticket resolution rate, ticketing status, number of tickets per queue/analyst).
    • False positive percentage per control.
    • Incident response metrics (e.g. mean time to recovery).
    • CVSS scores per vulnerability.

    2) Business-focused

    The evaluation of operational success from a business perspective.

    Example metrics include:

    • Return on investment.
    • Total cost of ownership (can be segregated by function: prevent, detect, analyze, and respond).
    • Saved costs from mitigated breaches.
    • Security operations budget as a percentage of the IT budget.

    3) Initiative-focused

    The measurement of security operations project progress. These are frequently represented as time, resource, or cost-based metrics.

    Note: Remember to measure end-user feedback. Asking stakeholders about their current expectations via a formal survey is the most effective way to kick-start the continuous improvement process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Operational metrics have limited value beyond security operations – when communicating to management, focus on metrics that are actionable from a business perspective.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.

    Identify the triggers for continual improvement

    Continual Improvement

    • Audits: Check for performance requirements in order to pass major audits.
    • Assessments: Variances in efficiency or effectiveness of metrics when compared to the industry standard.
    • Process maturity: Opportunity to increase efficiency of services and processes.
    • Management reviews: Routine reviews that reveal gaps.
    • Technology advances: For example, new security architecture/controls have been released.
    • Regulations: Compliance to new or changed regulations.
    • New staff or technology: Disruptive technology or new skills that allow for improvement.

    Conduct tabletop exercises with Info-Tech’s onsite workshop

    Assess your security operations capabilities

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Security Operations Tabletop Exercise to guide simulations to validate your operational procedures.

    How to customize
    • Use the templates to document actions and actors.
    • For each new injection, spend three minutes discussing the response as a group. Then spend two minutes documenting each role’s contribution to the response. After the time limit, proceed to the following injection scenario.
    • Review the responses only after completing the entire exercise.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Tabletop Exercise.

    This tabletop exercise is available through an onsite workshop as we can help establish and design a tabletop capability for your organization.

    Are you ready to implement your security operations program?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Is there a formalized security operations collaboration plan?
    • Are all key stakeholders documented and acknowledged?
    • Have you defined your strategic needs and requirements in a formalized collection plan?
    • Is there an established channel for management to communicate needs and requirements to the security operation leaders?
    • Are all program outputs documented and communicated?
    • Is there an accessible, centralized portal or dashboard that actively aggregates and communicates key information?
    • Is there a formalized threat escalation protocol in order to facilitate both internal and external information sharing?
    • Does your organization actively participate in external information sharing through the use of ISACs?
    • Does your organization actively produce reports, alerts, products, etc. that feed into and influence the output of other functions’ operations?
    • Have you assigned program responsibilities in a detailed RACI chart?
    • Is there a structured cadence schedule for key stakeholders to actively communicate and share information?
    • Have you developed a structured measurement program on a per function basis?
    • Now that you have constructed your ideal security operations program strategy, revisit the question “Are you answering all of your objectives?”

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to implement your security operations program.

    Summary

    Insights

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives
    3. If you are not communicating, then you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Best Practices

    • Have a structured plan of attack. Define your unique threat landscape, as well as business, regulatory, and consumer obligations.
    • Foster both internal and external collaboration.
    • Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.
    • Do not bite off more than you can chew. Identify current people, processes, and technologies that satisfy immediate problems and enable future expansion.
    • Leverage threat intelligence to create a predictive and proactive security operations analysis process.
    • Formalize escalation procedures with logic and incident management flow.
    • Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.
    • Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.
    • Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment
    Protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Bibliography

    “2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).” Ponemon Institute, June 2016. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Ahmad, Shakeel et al. “10 Tips to Improve Your Security Incident Readiness and Response.” RSA, n.d. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Anderson, Brandie. “ Building, Maturing & Rocking a Security Operations Center.” Hewlett Packard, n.d. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Barnum, Sean. “Standardizing cyber threat intelligence information with the structured threat information expression.” STIX, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    Bidou, Renaud. “Security Operation Center Concepts & Implementation.” IV2-Technologies, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Bradley, Susan. “Cyber threat intelligence summit.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Building a Security Operations Center.” DEF CON Communications, Inc., 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Building a Successful Security Operations Center.” ArcSight, 2015. Web. 21 Nov. 2016.

    “Building an Intelligence-Driven Security Operations Center.” RSA, June 2014. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Caltagirone, Sergio, Andrew Pendergast, and Christopher Betz. “Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis,” Center for Cyber Threat Intelligence and Threat Research, 5 July 2013. Web. 25 Aug. 2016.

    “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report: Chief Security Officers Reveal True Cost of Breaches and the Actions Organizations Are Taking.” The Network. Cisco, 31 Jan. 2017. Web. 11 Nov. 2017.

    “CITP Training and Education.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Creating and Maintaining a SOC.” Intel Security, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Defense.” Mandiant, 2015. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Security Operations Center (CSOC).” Northrop Grumman, 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Danyliw, Roman. “Observations of Successful Cyber Security Operations.” Carnegie Mellon, 12 Dec. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    EY. “Managed SOC.” EY, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Fishbach, Nicholas. “How to Build and Run a Security Operations Center.” Securite.org, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 12 Feb. 2014. Web.

    Friedman, John, and Mark Bouchard. “Definitive Guide to Cyber Threat Intelligence.” iSIGHT, 2015. Web. 1 June 2015.

    Goldfarb, Joshua. “The Security Operations Hierarchy of Needs.” Securityweek.com, 10 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “How Collaboration Can Optimize Security Operations.” Intel, n.d. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Hslatman. “Awesome threat intelligence.” GitHub, 16 Aug. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Implementation Framework – Collection Management.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web.

    “Implementation Framework – Cyber Threat Prioritization.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Intelligent Security Operations Center.” IBM, 25 Feb. 2015. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi Follow , Abhishek. “Best Practices for Security Operations Center.” LinkedIn, 01 Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi. “Best Practices for a Security Operations Center.” Cybrary, 18 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kelley, Diana and Ron Moritz. “Best Practices for Building a Security Operations Center.” Information Security Today, 2006. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Killcrece, Georgia, Klaus-Peter Kossakowski, Robin Ruefle, and Mark Zajicek. ”Organizational Models for Computer Security Incident Response Teams (CSIRTs).” Carnegie Mellon Software Engineering Institute, Dec. 2003. Carnegie Mellon. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Kindervag , John. “SOC 2.0: Three Key Steps toward the Next-generation Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Dec. 2010. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kvochko, Elena. “Designing the Next Generation Cyber Security Operations Center.” Forbes Magazine, 14 Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Lambert, P. “ Security Operations Center: Not Just for Huge Enterprises.” TechRepublic, 31 Jan. 2013. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Lecky, M. and D. Millier. “Re-Thinking Security Operations.” SecTor Security Education Conference. Toronto, 2014.

    Lee, Michael. “Three Elements That Every Advanced Security Operations Center Needs.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 16 Nov. 2016.

    Linch, David and Jason Bergstrom. “Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement in an Age of Disruption.” Deloitte LLP, 2014.

    Lynch, Steve. “Security Operations Center.” InfoSec Institute, 14 May 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Macgregor, Rob. “Diamonds or chains – cyber security updates.” PwC, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Make Your Security Operations Center (SOC) More Efficient.” Making Your Data Center Energy Efficient (2011): 213-48. Intel Security. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Makryllos, Gordon. “The Six Pillars of Security Operations.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Marchany, R. “ Building a Security Operations Center.” Virginia Tech, 2015. Web. 8 Nov. 2016.

    Marty, Raffael. “Dashboards in the Security Operations Center (SOC).” Security Bloggers Network, 15 Jan. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Minu, Adolphus. “Discovering the Value of Knowledge Portal.” IBM, n.d. Web. 1 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, J., G. McIntyre, and N. AlFardan. “Introduction to Security Operations and the SOC.” Security Operations Center: Building, Operating, and Maintaining your SOC. Cisco Press, 29 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph and Gary McIntyre. “ Security Operations Center.” Cisco, Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph. “5 Steps to Building and Operating an Effective Security Operations Center (SOC).” Cisco, 15 Dec. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Nathans, David. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center. Syngress, 2015. Print.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-61 Revision 2: Computer Security Incident Handling Guide.” 2012. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-83 Revision 1.” 2013. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-86: Guide to Integrating Forensic Techniques into Incident Response.” 2006. Web.

    F5 Networks. “F5 Security Operations Center.” F5 Networks, 2014. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Next Generation Security Operations Center.” DTS Solution, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Optimizing Security Operations.” Intel, 2015. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Paganini, Pierluigi. “What Is a SOC ( Security Operations Center)?” Security Affairs, 24 May 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “Cyber Security Incident Response: Are we as prepared as we think?” Ponemon, 2014. Web.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “The Importance of Cyber Threat Intelligence to a Strong Security Posture.” Ponemon, Mar. 2015. Web. 17 Aug. 2016.

    Poputa-Clean, Paul. “Automated defense – using threat intelligence to augment.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, 15 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Quintagroup. “Knowledge Management Portal Solution.” Quintagroup, n.d. Web.

    Rasche, G. “Guidelines for Planning an Integrated Security Operations Center.” EPRI, Dec. 2013. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Rehman, R. “What It Really Takes to Stand up a SOC.” Rafeeq Rehman – Personal Blog, 27 Aug. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Rothke, Ben. “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” RSA Conference, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Ruks, Martyn and David Chismon. “Threat Intelligence: Collecting, Analysing, Evaluating.” MWR Infosecurity, 2015. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Sadamatsu, Takayoshi. “Practice within Fujitsu of Security Operations Center.” Fujitsu, July 2016. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Sanders, Chris. “Three Useful SOC Dashboards.” Chris Sanders, 24 Oct. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    SANS Institute. “Incident Handler's Handbook.” 2011. Web.

    Schilling, Jeff. “5 Pitfalls to Avoid When Running Your SOC.” Dark Reading, 18 Dec. 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Schinagl, Stef, Keith Schoon, and Ronald Paans. “A Framework for Designing a Security Operations Centre (SOC).” 2015 48th Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences. Computer.org, 2015. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Security – Next Gen SOC or SOF.” InfoSecAlways.com, 31 Dec. 2013. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Dashboard.” Enterprise Dashboard Digest, n.d. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Optimization Services.” AT&T, 2015. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Centers — Helping You Get Ahead of Cybercrime Contents.” EY, 2014. Web. 6 Nov. 2016.

    Sheikh, Shah. “DTS Solution - Building a SOC (Security Operations Center).” LinkedIn, 4 May 2013. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Soto, Carlos. “ Security Operations Center (SOC) 101.” Tom's IT Pro, 28 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Standardizing and Automating Security Operations.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 3 Sept. 2006. Web.

    “Strategy Considerations for Building a Security Operations Center.” IBM, Dec. 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Summary of Key Findings.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Sustainable Security Operations.” Intel, 2016. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “The Cost of Malware Containment.” Ponemon Institute, Jan. 2015. Web.

    “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap.” BMC. Forbes Magazine, Jan. 2016. Web. 10 Jan. 2017.

    Veerappa Srinivas, Babu. “Security Operations Centre (SOC) in a Utility Organization.” GIAC, 17 Sept. 2014. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    Wang, John. “Anatomy of a Security Operations Center.” NASA, 2015. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Weiss, Errol. “Statement for the Record.” House Financial Services Committee, 1 June 2012. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Wilson, Tim. “SOC 2.0: A Crystal-Ball Glimpse of the Next-Generation Security Operations Center.” Dark Reading, 22 Nov. 2010. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Zimmerman, Carson. “Ten Strategies of a World-Class Cybersecurity Operations Center.” Mitre, 2014. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}42|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}42|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,431
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    The challenge

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • You may not have sufficient security resources to handle all the challenges.
    • Security threats are prevalent. Yet many businesses struggle to embed systemic security thinking into their culture.
    • The need to move towards strategic planning of your security landscape is evident. How to get there is another matter.

    Our advice

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company. And then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will go much more straightforward.

    Impact and results 

    • We have developed a highly effective approach to creating your security strategy. We tested and refined this for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations.
    • We ensure alignment with business objectives.
    • We assess organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
    • We enable a comprehensive current state assessment.
    • And we prioritize initiatives and build out a right-sized security roadmap.

     

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized information security strategy. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Assess the security requirements

    It all starts with risk appetite, yes, but security is something you want to get right. Determine your organizations' security pressures and business goals, and then determine your security program's goals.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Requirements
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool (xls)

    Build your gap initiative

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 2: Assess Gaps
    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool (xls)

    Plan the implementation of your security strategy 

    With your design at this level, it is time to plan your roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    Let it run and continuously improve. 

    Learn to use our methodology to manage security initiatives as you go. Identify the resources you need to execute the evolving strategy successfully.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 4: Execute and Maintain
    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)